Dell Dimension 5100 620 Manuels -> Accéder au site Dell -> Accéder aux Codes Promo et Bons de réduction Dell -> Voir d'autres manuels Dell Revenir à l'accueil

ou juste avant la balise de fermeture -->

 

 

 

Dimension 5100
 
 
 
 
 
Dell Dimension 5100 Service Manual    
 
info icon Ce document est disponible en anglais uniquement
 
 
 
 
 
Manuel d'utilisation    
 
 Autres langues
 
 
 
Schéma d'installation    
 
 Autres langues
 
-> Commander sur Dell.com, Cliquez ici

 

Autres manuels :

Dell

Dell-Inspiron-1721-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1520-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1501-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-710-H2C-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Laser-Printer-5100cn-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-OptiPlex-9010-7010-Mini-tour-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1300-B120-B130-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1955-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-6400-E1505-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimante-personnelle-Tout-en-un-Dell-A920-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-M1710-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault-DL2000-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-8600-Guide-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-5160-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-XPS-Gen-2-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-300m-Guide-du-proprietaire-Manuel

Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel

Dell-Inspiron-640M-E1405-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-8500-Guide-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1000-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-M2010-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-One-2330-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel

Dell-Inspiron-3000-Series-Service-Manual

Dell-Inspiron-3500-Portable-Computer-Service-Manual

Dell-Inspiron-5423-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-poweredge-r520-technical-guide

Dell-Pave-Tactile-Sans-Fil-Dell-TP713-Manuel-d-utilisateur

Dell-PowerVault-NX3300-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel

Dell-Inspiron-2600-et-2650-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Manuel

Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Adamo-XPS

Dell-XPS-13-Manuel-du-proprietairexps-13-l321x_owner_manual_fr-fr

Dell-xps-13-l321x_setup_guide_fr-fr.pdf-Manuel

Dell-Storage-Center-5.5-Guide-de-configuration-systeme

Dell-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-DE-BUREAU-ALIENWARE

Dell-Vostro-410-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-ALIENWARE-M18x-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-PORTABLE

Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M14x-MOBILE

Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M11x-MOBILE

Dell-Configuration-de-votre-ecran-de-televiseur-LCD-Dell-W2607C-26-pouces

Dell-PERC-6-i-PERC-6-E-et-CERC-6-i-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Dimension-Serie-8300-Manuel

Dell-2145cn-Imprimante-multifonction-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-PowerEdge-C6220-Systems-Hardware-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-server-poweredge-m610-tech-guidebook

Dell-Vostro-270-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-Controleurs-RAID-Dell-PowerEdge-PERC-H310-H710-H710P-et-H810-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Laser-MFP-Dell-3333dn-et-3335dn-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-PowerVault-DL-Backup-to-Disk-Appliance-Powered-by-Symantec-Backup-Exec-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-XPS-015-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX3300-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-DE-REFERENCE

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-Network-Attached-Storage-NAS-Guide-de-depannage

Dell-Commutateur-de-consoles-2161DS-Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-d-OSCAR-et-du-materiel

Dell-PowerEdge-T420-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-PowerEdge-C8000XD-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-OptiPlex-755-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3200i-et-MD3220i-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Latitude-E5400-et-E5500-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-Set-Up-Your-Computer

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-M1730-Manuel

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M620-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel

Dell-PowerEdge-C410x-Getting-Started-With-Your-System

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-SUSE-Linux-Enterprise-Server-10-Instructions-d-installation

Dell-Utilitaires-de-gestion-du-Dell-OpenManage-Baseboard-Management-Controller-Version%204.6-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Guide-d-installation-de-la-version-7.1

Dell-Systeme-Dell-DR4000-Guide-de-l-administrateur

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge%20Red-Hat-Enterprise-Linux-6-x86_64-x86-Instructions-d-installation-et-informations-importantes

Dell-Integrated-Dell-Remote-Access-Controller-7-iDRAC7-Version-1.20.20-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Management-Plug-In-pour-VMware-vCenter-Version-1.5-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Projecteur-7700FullHD-Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Projecteur-Dell-1420X-1430X-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Solutions-Guide-de-l-administrateur

Dell-PowerEdge-Express-SSD-PCIe-Flash-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Update-Packages-DUP-Version-7.0-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-PowerEdge-R720-et-R720xd-Guide-de-mise-en-route-Manuel

Dell-PowerEdge-R320-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R510-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Precision-M4400-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-SCSI-Dell-EqualLogic-PS-Series-a-clusters-de-basculement-Microsoft-Windows-Server-Guide-d-installation-et-de-depannage-du-materie

Dell-PowerEdge-C410x-Guide-de-mise-en-route-du-systeme

Dell-Moniteur-a-ecran-plat-Dell-U2713HM-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell-P1913-P1913S-P2213

Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-du-moniteur-Dell-E1913S-E1913-E2213

Dell-Systems-Service-and-Diagnostics-Tools-Version-7.0-Guide-d-installation-rapide

Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell-S2740L-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-DE-CONFIGURATION

Dell-Dimension-Serie-8300

Dell-PowerEdge-R820-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-PowerEdge-C8000-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel-manuel

Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Version-7.1-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-PowerEdge-M1000e-M915-M910-M820-M710HD-M710-M620-M610x-M610-M520-et-M420-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Version-7.0-Guide-d-installation

Dell-Inspiron-15R-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX3200-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-Controller-PERC-S110-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Solutions-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Micrologiciel-Dell-Chassis-Management-Controller-Version-4-1-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Vostro-470-Manuel-du-proprietaire

/Dell-Systeme-Dell-PowerVault-NX3500-Guide-de-l-administrateur

Dell-Latitude-E6420-XFR-Guide-technique

Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-du-moniteur-S2240M-S2340M

Dell-Systemes-Dell-DR4000-Manuel-du-proprietaire-manuel

Dell-PowerEdge-T320-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T3600-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-DR4000-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-R420-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-PowerEdge-C8220-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel-manuel

Dell-Vostro-470-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-Projecteur-Dell-M110-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Upgrading-to-BackupExec-2012-PowerVault-DL-Backup-to-Disk-Appliance

Dell-PowerVault-NX3300-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerConnect-5500-Series-CLI-Reference-Guide

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-Series-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Inspiron-One-2020-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-14-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1900-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M620-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-R815-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-R720-and-R720xd-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-Micrologiciel-Dell-Chassis-Management-Controller-Version-4.0-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-17R-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel

Dell-Inspiron-One-2020-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C5220-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Inspiron-660s-Manuel-du-proprietaire-manuel

Dell-PowerEdge-R820-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-270-Manuel-du-proprietaire-manuel

Dell-Systeme-Dell-PowerEdge-C6220-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-14R-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Guide-de-l-Utilisateur-de-l-Ecran-Large-Dell-IN1940MW

Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell-S2440L-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Alienware-X51-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE-MANUAL

Dell-Emplacement-des-cavaliers-de-la-carte-systeme-des-systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R310-Mise-a-jour-des-informations

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-6950-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Alienware-M17x-R4-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-XPS-13-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-HBA-SAS-Dell-PowerEdge-6-Gb-s-et-Internal-Tape-Adapter-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R910-Mise-a-jour-des-informations

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T610-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

/Dell-PowerEdge-R905-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimantes-laser-Dell-2350d-et-Dell-2350dn

Dell-XPS-430-Guide-de-reference-rapide

Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-Controller-PERC-H700-et-H800-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Lifecycle-Controller-2-Version-1.00.00-User-s-Guide

Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Version-7.0-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Solutions-NAS-Dell-FluidFS-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manue

Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-V525w

Dell-XPS-13-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Adaptateurs-Brocade-Manuel-d-installation-et-de-reference

Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Solutions-NX3600-NX3610-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T410-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-ST-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel

Dell-OptiPlex-360-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-PowerEdge-R810-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Guide-d-installation-des-systemes-Dell-PowerVault-Modular-Disk-3000

Dell-Imprimante-laser-Dell-2230d-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C6105-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Imprimante-personnelle-a-jet-d-encre-Dell-J740-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-2130cn-IMPRIMANTE-LASER-COULEUR

Dell-Guide-d-utilisation-de-la-station-de-travail-Dell-Precision-T3400

Dell-1235cn-Imprimante-Multifonction-Mode-d-emploi

Dell-Vostro-1310-1510-1710-et-2510-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-Guide-d-utilisation-APC-Smart-UPS-750VA-1000VA-1500VA-100-120-230-V-CA-2U-Montage-en-baie-Onduleur

Dell-Guide-d-utilisation-Modele-TL24iSCSIxSAS%201Gb-iSCSI-a-SAS

Dell-Imprimantes-laser-Dell-1130-et-Dell-1130n

Dell-Precision-M6400-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-M770mm-Color-Monitor-Quick-Set-up

Dell-Carte-de-gestion-reseau-AP9617-AP9618-AP9619-Manuel-d-installation-et-de-demarrage-rapide

Dell-Projecteur-Dell-1410X-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Imprimante-couleur-Dell-1350cnw

Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-Dell-Inspiron-M5040-15-N5040-15-N5050-Manuel

Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Dell-Inspiron-620

Dell-3D-VISION-MANUEL-D-UTILISATION

Dell-Inspiron-600m-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R805-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R900-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-2970-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C6145-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Inspiron-660s-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-P513w-User-s-Guide-Francais-manuel

Dell-Inspiron-660-manuels

Dell-Serveur-de-sauvegarde-sur-disque-Dell-PowerVault-DL-optimise-par-CommVault-Simpana-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-P513w-User-s-Guide-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-manuel

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T1650-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-PORTABLE

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-de-Dell-PowerEdge-M905-M805-M600-et-M605

Dell-Inspiron-One-2330-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-1100-B110-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-270-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T320-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Station-de-travail-mobile-Dell-Precision-M4700-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-8500-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-1230c-Imprimante-laser-couleur-mode-d-emploi-Manuel

Dell-Client-Management-Manuel

Dell-Studio-XPS-Setup-Guide-Manue

Dell-Adaptateur-hote-Dell-PCIe-SCSI-Ultra320-monocanal-Guide-d-utilisation-Manuel

Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-SETUP-GUIDE-Manuel

Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-GUIDE-DE-CONFIGURATION-Manuel

Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-Inspiron-M4040-14-N4050-Manuel

Dell-Guide-de-l-administrateur-de-Dell-PowerVault-705N-Manuel

Dell-Vostro-420-220-220s-Guide-de-Configuration-et-de-Reference-Rapide-Manuel

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3660f-Series-Guide-de-deploiement-Manuel

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-Network-Attached-Storage-NAS-Guide-de-l-administrateur-Manuel

Dell-Latitude-D430-Guide-d-utilisation-Manuel

Dell-Studio-XPS-Guide-de-configuration-Manuel

Dell-PowerEdge-C410x-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T1650-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R300-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes%20-Dell%20PowerEdge-T110-II-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-200-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Mini-Tower

Dell-Inspiron-531-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-DE-BUREAU-Francais

Dell-PowerEdge-R520-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Projecteur-Dell-1201MP-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-PowerEdge-R910-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-C521-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T605-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Mobile-Jamz

Dell-Inspiron-530-Series-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-3460-Manuels

Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWER-CENTER-1.1-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-PowerVault-MD3660f-Storage-Arrays-Manuels

Dell™ Ekran Yöneticisi Kullanıcı Kılavuzu

Dell-PowerEdge-R620-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-PowerEdge-R520-Guide-de-mise-en-route

DELL-POWERVAULT-MD1200-et-MD1220-TECHNICAL-GUIDEBOOK

Console-de-gestion-multi-onduleurs-Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-pour-l-installation-et-la-configuration

DELL-OPTIPLEX580-TECHNICAL-GUIDEBOOK-INSIDE-THE-OPTIPLEX-580

Dell-Inspiron-1720-manuels

Dell-PowerEdge-R720-et-R720xd-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Vostro-1540-1550-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-E5430-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell™ S2240L/S2340L Monitör Kullanıcı Kılavuzu

Dell PowerEdge Sistemleri İçin Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Önemli Bilgiler Kılavuzu

Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-du-moniteur-Dell-S2240L-S2340L

Dell™ S320/S320wi Projektör Kullanım Kılavuzu

Dell-%20Vostro-270-Manuels

Dell-Vostro-3460-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Francais

Dell-Inspiron-9200-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Inspiron-2600-et-2650-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Axim-X30-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Vostro-2520-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1721-Manuel

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T710-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T5600-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Solutions-NAS-Dell-FluidFS-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C5220-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Dimension-3000-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-R210-Technical-Guide

Dell-Inspiron-Manuels

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-Vostro-1700

Dell-Clavier-sans-fil-et-souris-Dell-KM713-Manuel-de-l'utilisateur

Dell-Systeme-de-navigation-GPS-Dell-Manuel-de-l'utilisateur

Dell-Logiciel-de-gestion-de-l-onduleur-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-pour-l-installation-et-la-configuration

Dell-Demarrage-rapide-du-moniteur-couleur-M990

Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-de-la-station-de-travail-Dell-Precision-370

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-2800-Guide-d-installation-et-de-depannage

Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-du-systeme-Dell-OptiPlex-SX280

Dell-Vostro-1440-1450-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Photo-Printer-540-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Streak-7-Francais-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Venue-Pro-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Imprimante-laser-personnelle-Dell-P1500-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-C5125-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Latitude-D630-Manuels

Dell-Vostro-400-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Mini-Tower

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T100-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-OptiPlex-9010-7010-compact-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault%20NX3200-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1200-et-2200-Manuel-de%20l-utilisateur

Dell-Vostro-1540-1550-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-8600-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault-Baie-de-stockage-MD1120-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-E521-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-9100-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-3360-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T300-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-One-2710-manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-1150-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-E5530-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-660-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Acceder-au-site-Dell

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-des-Dell-Latitude-E6420-et-E6420-ATG-Francais

Dell-OptiPlex-9010-Tout-en-un-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-3560-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T110-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-server-poweredge-m710-tech-guidebook_fr

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-5420-E5420-E5420m-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Latitude-E6320-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-8200-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Francais

Dell-server-poweredge-r610-tech-guidebook_fr

Dell-server-poweredge-t710-technical-guide-book_fr

Dell-server-poweredge-m1000e-tech-guidebook_fr

Dell-server-poweredge-m610-tech-guidebook_fr

Dell-poweredge-r210-technical-guidebook-en_fr

Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M15x-MOBILE-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Beats-By-dr.dre-Manuel-et-Garantie

Dell-Dimension-3100C-Manuel-du-proprietaire

 

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T3600-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-200-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Slim-Tower

Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-DE-BUREAU

Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWER-CENTER-1-1-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Vostro-360-Proprietaire-du-manuel

Dell-Dimension-3100C-Manuel-du-proprietaire

AlienwareArea-51Area-51ALX

Dell-Ordinateurs-de-Bureau-PC-Portables-Netbooks/AlienwareAurora-R3

AlienwareAurora-R4

lienwareAuroraAuroraALXAurora-R2

Chassis-RAID-Dell-PowerVault-MD3000i-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Baie-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD1000-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Boîtier-Dell-PowerEdge-M1000e-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Clavier-Axim-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-3100-E310-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-9200-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-E520-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimante-laser-Dell-1100-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimante-laser-de-groupe-de-travail-Dell-M5200-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimante-laser-monochrome-Dell-5330dn-Mode-d-emploi

Dell-Imprimante-laser-multifonction-Dell-1600n-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-13z-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-17R-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-700m-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1100-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-1525-1526-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-5100-et-5150-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-9300-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-9400-E1705-Manuel-du-proprietaire

http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/Dell-Ordinateurs-de-Bureau-PC-Portables-Netbooks/Dell-Laser-Printer-1700-1700n-Manuel-du-proprietaire.htm

Dell-Laser-Printer-1710-1710n-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Laser-Printer-3100cn-manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-ST-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-XT3-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Liste-des-manuels-et-de-la-documentation-Dell

Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M11x-MOBILE-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M15x-MOBILE

Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE-francais

Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE

Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-Dell-Inspiron-M5040-15-N5040-15-N5050

Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-du-Dell-XPS-420

Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6220

Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6520

Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6320

Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Dell-Inspiron-N5110

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Dell-Vostro-1500

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Dell-XPS-M1330

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-des-Dell-Latitude-E6420-et-E6420-ATG

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-Inspiron-1721

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-M1730

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-One

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3260i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3660i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-944-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-964-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer%20942-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Photo-Printer-720-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-C8220-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-R620-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Guide-de-l-administrateur

Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T7600-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Streak-7-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Streak-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-4150-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-8200-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1950-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R210-II-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R410-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R710-Manuel-du-proprietaire%20-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T310-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T620-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Tout-en-un-Dell-Photo-924-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-360-Proprietaire-du-manuel

Dell-Vostro-3750-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-V131-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XP-M1530-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-630i-Manuel-du-proprietair

Dell-moniteur-D1920-Manuel-du-proprietaire

DellDimension1100Series

Imprimante-Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-922-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Imprimante-laser-de-groupe-de-travail-Dell-S2500-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Imprimante-personnelle-Dell-AIO-A960-Manuel-du-proprietaire

alienwareX51

Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6220

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-4150-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Streak-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-M1730

Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-944-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-One

Dell-Clavier-Axim-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R410-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-Dell-Inspiron-M5040-15-N5040-15-N5050

Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Dell-Inspiron-N5110

Dell-Inspiron-1100-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Imprimante-laser-de-groupe-de-travail-Dell-M5200-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Photo-Printer-720-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimante-laser-Dell-1100-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Dell-Vostro-1500

Dell-XP-M1530-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R710-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-5100-et-5150-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6520

Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE

Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6320

Dell-Laser-Printer-3100cn-manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1950-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-des-Dell-Latitude-E6420-et-E6420-ATG

Dell-Imprimante-laser-monochrome-Dell-5330dn-Mode-d-emploi

Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Guide-de-l-administrateur

Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3260i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-PowerEdge-C8220-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M11x-MOBILE-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3660i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Laser-Printer-1700-1700n-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-9400-E1705-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Tout-en-un-Dell-Photo-924-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Laser-Printer-1710-1710n-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-3100-E310-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1525-1526-Manuel-du-proprietaire

[TXT]

 Acceder-au-site-Dell..> 24-Oct-2012 06:36  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Adaptateurs-Brocade-..> 05-Nov-2012 15:05  3.6M  

[TXT]

 AlienwareArea-51Area..> 18-Oct-2012 16:42  2.7M  

[TXT]

 AlienwareAurora-R3.htm  18-Oct-2012 16:54  3.2M  

[TXT]

 AlienwareAurora-R4.htm  18-Oct-2012 16:48  2.9M  

[TXT]

 AlienwareAuroraAuror..> 18-Oct-2012 16:51  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Chassis-RAID-Dell-Po..> 18-Oct-2012 16:49  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Code-Promo-Dell.htm     04-Feb-2013 09:17  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Console-de-gestion-m..> 26-Oct-2012 14:51  3.3M  

[TXT]

 DELL-OPTIPLEX580-TEC..> 25-Oct-2012 18:32  2.9M  

[TXT]

 DELL-POWERVAULT-MD12..> 26-Oct-2012 14:50  3.3M  

[TXT]

 DELLmanuelsutilisate..> 18-Oct-2012 17:06   12M  

[TXT]

 Dellâ„¢ Logiciel-de..> 25-Oct-2012 12:03  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-3D-VISION-MANUE..> 02-Nov-2012 09:39  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-1130-Dell-1130n..> 27-Nov-2012 09:15  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-1230c-Imprimant..> 01-Nov-2012 18:37  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-1235cn-Impriman..> 02-Nov-2012 10:06  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-1250c-Color-Pri..> 05-Nov-2012 12:12  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-1815dn-Manuel ..> 27-Nov-2012 09:09  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-2130cn-IMPRIMAN..> 02-Nov-2012 10:05  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-2145cn-Impriman..> 12-Nov-2012 16:55  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-..> 01-Nov-2012 19:00  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:28  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-ALIENWARE-M18x-..> 12-Nov-2012 16:51  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUE..> 29-Oct-2012 07:39  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUE..> 19-Oct-2012 07:41  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-APC-Smart-UPS-A..> 04-Nov-2012 10:41  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Adaptateur-hote..> 01-Nov-2012 18:38  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Adaptateurs-Bro..> 02-Nov-2012 11:22  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Adaptateurs-Del..> 05-Nov-2012 07:30  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Adaptateurs-Del..> 14-Nov-2012 21:39  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 18-Nov-2012 20:44  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 18-Nov-2012 20:44  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 18-Nov-2012 20:45  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Auror..> 18-Nov-2012 20:44  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Auror..> 18-Nov-2012 20:43  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Auror..> 18-Nov-2012 20:43  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Auror..> 18-Nov-2012 20:49  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-M17x-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:30  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-X51-O..> 02-Nov-2012 16:28  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Axim-X3-Guide-d..> 14-Nov-2012 21:38  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Axim-X30-Manuel..> 25-Oct-2012 12:08  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel..> 13-Nov-2012 08:12  4.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel..> 18-Oct-2012 16:53  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-M..> 27-Nov-2012 07:18  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-M..> 24-Oct-2012 07:42  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-M..> 18-Oct-2012 16:52  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-B1160-Dell-B116..> 05-Nov-2012 18:11  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-B1260dn-Mode-d-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:11  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Baie-de-stockag..> 18-Oct-2012 16:41  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Bandotheques-De..> 05-Nov-2012 09:03  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Beats-By-dr.dre..> 24-Oct-2012 07:42  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Boîtier-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 17:07  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Boitiers-de-sto..> 05-Nov-2012 18:14  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Carte-de-Gestio..> 06-Nov-2012 18:45  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Carte-de-gestio..> 14-Nov-2012 12:05  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Cartes-controle..> 05-Nov-2012 10:08  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Cartes-d-extens..> 05-Nov-2012 09:01  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Clavier-Axim-Ma..> 18-Oct-2012 16:38  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Clavier-sans-fi..> 25-Oct-2012 12:02  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Client-Manageme..> 01-Nov-2012 18:37  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Commutateur-de-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:19  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Configuration-d..> 12-Nov-2012 16:53  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Console-de-gest..> 27-Nov-2012 07:40  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Controleurs-Del..> 05-Nov-2012 12:14  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Controleurs-RAI..> 03-Nov-2012 18:11  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-DX-Object-Stora..> 04-Nov-2012 11:04  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Demarrage-rapid..> 25-Oct-2012 12:04  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Deploiement-de-..> 05-Nov-2012 12:15  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-1000-..> 18-Nov-2012 20:57  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-1100-..> 14-Nov-2012 12:08  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-3000-..> 25-Oct-2012 18:30  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-3100-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:31  906K  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-3100C..> 24-Oct-2012 07:42  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-9150-..> 27-Nov-2012 07:07  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-9200-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:54  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-9200C..> 18-Nov-2012 21:03  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-C521-..> 29-Oct-2012 07:41  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-E520-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:50  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-E521-..> 24-Oct-2012 09:12  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-Serie..> 12-Nov-2012 16:54  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-Serie..> 03-Nov-2012 18:01  5.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-XPS-G..> 04-Nov-2012 11:03  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-XPS-M..> 14-Nov-2012 21:39  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-serie..> 12-Nov-2012 17:07  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-E-Legacy-Extend..> 14-Nov-2012 21:40  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-E1913S-E1913-E2..> 06-Nov-2012 07:29  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Ekran-Yönetici..> 26-Oct-2012 14:49  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Emplacement-des..> 02-Nov-2012 16:29  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-EqualLogic-Stor..> 03-Nov-2012 21:47  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Sol..> 03-Nov-2012 18:10  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Sol..> 03-Nov-2012 08:45  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Sol..> 02-Nov-2012 11:24  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-install..> 05-Nov-2012 14:58  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-install..> 04-Nov-2012 11:03  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 02-Nov-2012 10:06  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 02-Nov-2012 10:06  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 05-Nov-2012 12:12  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 02-Nov-2012 10:05  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 14-Nov-2012 21:03  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 14-Nov-2012 21:05  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 14-Nov-2012 21:38  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 05-Nov-2012 08:58  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 05-Nov-2012 07:29  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-config..> 05-Nov-2012 12:13  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-demarr..> 05-Nov-2012 12:13  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-Util..> 02-Nov-2012 16:27  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-admi..> 01-Nov-2012 18:39  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 01-Nov-2012 18:39  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 02-Nov-2012 11:21  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 05-Nov-2012 18:31  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 05-Nov-2012 07:31  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 05-Nov-2012 09:06  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 03-Nov-2012 11:07  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 26-Oct-2012 14:45  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 03-Nov-2012 08:27  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-soluti..> 05-Nov-2012 17:29  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-technique..> 05-Nov-2012 09:00  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide d-install..> 02-Nov-2012 09:43  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-HBA-SAS-Dell-Po..> 02-Nov-2012 16:31  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-GU..> 01-Nov-2012 18:38  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-SE..> 01-Nov-2012 18:38  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-..> 03-Nov-2012 11:09  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:16  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-INSPIRON-Setup-..> 05-Nov-2012 07:32  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-coul..> 02-Nov-2012 09:38  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 18-Oct-2012 16:41  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 05-Nov-2012 14:59  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 02-Nov-2012 09:44  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 18-Oct-2012 16:32  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 05-Nov-2012 12:11  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 18-Oct-2012 16:44  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 18-Oct-2012 16:36  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 25-Oct-2012 12:07  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-pers..> 13-Nov-2012 08:10  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-pers..> 02-Nov-2012 09:44  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimantes-las..> 02-Nov-2012 10:07  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimantes-las..> 02-Nov-2012 10:07  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-13z-Ma..> 18-Oct-2012 17:09  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-14R-M4..> 05-Nov-2012 07:32  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-14R-Ma..> 02-Nov-2012 17:20  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-14z-N4..> 06-Nov-2012 07:27  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-15R-Ma..> 03-Nov-2012 08:43  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-17R-Ma..> 02-Nov-2012 17:17  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-17R-Ma..> 18-Oct-2012 16:56  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-300m-G..> 13-Nov-2012 08:12  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-530-Se..> 29-Oct-2012 07:41  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-530s-M..> 18-Oct-2012 17:01  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-530s-M..> 18-Oct-2012 17:00  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-531-Ma..> 29-Oct-2012 07:38  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-600m-M..> 05-Nov-2012 14:57  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-600m-M..> 02-Nov-2012 09:40  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-640M-E..> 13-Nov-2012 08:13  4.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-660-Ma..> 24-Oct-2012 09:15  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-660-ma..> 01-Nov-2012 18:42  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-660s-M..> 02-Nov-2012 17:18  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-660s-M..> 02-Nov-2012 09:42  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-700m-M..> 18-Oct-2012 16:47  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1000-M..> 13-Nov-2012 08:15  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1100-M..> 18-Oct-2012 16:33  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1150-M..> 27-Nov-2012 09:07  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1150-M..> 24-Oct-2012 09:15  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1200-e..> 25-Oct-2012 09:48  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1300-B..> 13-Nov-2012 08:19  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1420-M..> 14-Nov-2012 21:01  5.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1501-M..> 14-Nov-2012 21:06  5.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1520-M..> 13-Nov-2012 08:17  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1525-1..> 18-Oct-2012 16:31  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1720-m..> 25-Oct-2012 18:32  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1721-M..> 13-Nov-2012 08:17  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1721-M..> 25-Oct-2012 12:09  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-2600-e..> 12-Nov-2012 16:59  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-2600-e..> 25-Oct-2012 12:08  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-3000-S..> 12-Nov-2012 16:56  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-3500-P..> 12-Nov-2012 16:57  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-5100-e..> 27-Nov-2012 09:09  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-5100-e..> 18-Oct-2012 17:05  4.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-5160-M..> 13-Nov-2012 08:11  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-5423-O..> 12-Nov-2012 16:57  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-6000-M..> 05-Nov-2012 07:31  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-6400-E..> 13-Nov-2012 08:20  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-8500-G..> 13-Nov-2012 08:14  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-8600-G..> 13-Nov-2012 08:11  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-8600-M..> 24-Oct-2012 09:11  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-9100-M..> 24-Oct-2012 09:13  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-9200-M..> 25-Oct-2012 12:07  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-9300-M..> 18-Oct-2012 17:12  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-9400-E..> 18-Oct-2012 16:32  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-Guide-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:08  1.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-Manuel..> 25-Oct-2012 18:31  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-One-20..> 02-Nov-2012 17:23  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 13-Nov-2012 08:16  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 14-Nov-2012 12:08  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-XPS-Ge..> 13-Nov-2012 08:11  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Integrated-Dell..> 03-Nov-2012 18:09  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Laser-MFP-Dell-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:12  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Laser-Printer-1..> 18-Oct-2012 16:32  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Laser-Printer-1..> 18-Oct-2012 16:31  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Laser-Printer-3..> 18-Oct-2012 17:02  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Laser-Printer-5..> 13-Nov-2012 08:18  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-5420-E..> 24-Oct-2012 07:38  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-D430-G..> 01-Nov-2012 18:41  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-D430-G..> 14-Nov-2012 21:36  4.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-D531-G..> 14-Nov-2012 21:36  4.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-D630-M..> 25-Oct-2012 09:46  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-D830-G..> 14-Nov-2012 20:59  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E4300-..> 03-Nov-2012 21:46  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E5400-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:02  4.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E5430-..> 26-Oct-2012 17:29  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E5530-..> 24-Oct-2012 09:15  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6320-..> 24-Oct-2012 07:38  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6420-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:27  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6500-..> 04-Nov-2012 11:02  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6520-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:13  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-ST-Kul..> 06-Nov-2012 07:29  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-ST-Man..> 02-Nov-2012 11:23  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-ST-Man..> 18-Oct-2012 16:38  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-XT2-XF..> 05-Nov-2012 14:54  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-XT3-Ma..> 18-Oct-2012 16:42  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-XT3-Ow..> 06-Nov-2012 07:28  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Lifecycle-Contr..> 02-Nov-2012 11:20  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Liste-des-manue..> 18-Oct-2012 17:01  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Logiciel-de-ges..> 27-Nov-2012 07:26  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-M770mm-Color-Mo..> 02-Nov-2012 09:37  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-M5200-Carte-de-..> 05-Nov-2012 07:58  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 18-Oct-2012 16:51  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 27-Nov-2012 07:20  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 12-Nov-2012 16:51  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 24-Oct-2012 07:41  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 18-Oct-2012 16:33  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 05-Nov-2012 14:58  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENW..> 18-Oct-2012 17:12  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENW..> 18-Oct-2012 17:03  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-DE-L-ORD..> 12-Nov-2012 16:51  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Management-Plug..> 03-Nov-2012 18:09  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manual-del-prop..> 06-Nov-2012 07:33  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manual-del-prop..> 06-Nov-2012 07:32  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 02-Nov-2012 09:38  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 18-Oct-2012 16:35  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 18-Oct-2012 17:10  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-l-Uti..> 12-Nov-2012 17:07  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-l-Uti..> 18-Oct-2012 17:04  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-l-uti..> 18-Oct-2012 17:02  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-l-uti..> 25-Oct-2012 12:04  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-l-uti..> 25-Oct-2012 12:05  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 12-Nov-2012 16:59  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 02-Nov-2012 09:39  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 14-Nov-2012 12:07  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 18-Oct-2012 16:35  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 06-Nov-2012 07:28  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 16:37  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 17:13  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 01-Nov-2012 19:14  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 24-Oct-2012 07:36  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 16:46  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 17:07  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 25-Oct-2012 18:31  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 03-Nov-2012 18:04  4.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 16:55  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 16:44  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 05-Nov-2012 09:02  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 05-Nov-2012 08:59  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 03-Nov-2012 18:02  4.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 27-Nov-2012 07:40  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 02-Nov-2012 17:22  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 18-Oct-2012 16:55  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 04-Nov-2012 11:01  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 06-Nov-2012 07:26  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 04-Nov-2012 11:01  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 03-Nov-2012 21:46  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 01-Nov-2012 18:40  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 18-Oct-2012 16:33  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 03-Nov-2012 11:05  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Media-Center-Gu..> 14-Nov-2012 22:11  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Micrologiciel-D..> 03-Nov-2012 08:46  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Micrologiciel-D..> 02-Nov-2012 16:35  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Mobile-Jamz.htm    29-Oct-2012 07:41  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Module-de-venti..> 06-Nov-2012 07:27  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Modules-optique..> 05-Nov-2012 18:13  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell..> 03-Nov-2012 11:07  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell..> 02-Nov-2012 16:27  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell..> 03-Nov-2012 11:09  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Moniteur-a-ecra..> 03-Nov-2012 11:06  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Multifunktionsp..> 27-Nov-2012 09:07  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWE..> 19-Oct-2012 07:41  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWE..> 26-Oct-2012 14:47  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Onduleur-en-Bai..> 05-Nov-2012 09:00  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OpenManage-Remo..> 14-Nov-2012 22:12  4.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 03-Nov-2012 18:07  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 14-Nov-2012 21:38  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 03-Nov-2012 08:43  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 05-Nov-2012 18:10  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 02-Nov-2012 11:20  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 03-Nov-2012 08:42  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 14-Nov-2012 22:12  5.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-360-Gu..> 02-Nov-2012 11:23  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-755-Gu..> 03-Nov-2012 21:12  5.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-9010-7..> 13-Nov-2012 08:18  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-9010-7..> 25-Oct-2012 09:48  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-9010-T..> 24-Oct-2012 07:54  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Ordinateurs-por..> 14-Nov-2012 21:02  4.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-P513w-User-s-Gu..> 01-Nov-2012 18:42  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-P513w-User-s-Gu..> 01-Nov-2012 18:46  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-P1913-P1913S-P2..> 06-Nov-2012 07:31  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PERC-6-i-PERC-6..> 05-Nov-2012 07:31  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PERC-6-i-PERC-6..> 12-Nov-2012 16:53  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Pave-Tactile-Sa..> 12-Nov-2012 16:58  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 18-Oct-2012 16:48  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 05-Nov-2012 12:10  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 18-Oct-2012 16:35  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 18-Oct-2012 16:45  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Photo-All-in-On..> 14-Nov-2012 12:06  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Photo-Printer-5..> 25-Oct-2012 12:06  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Photo-Printer-7..> 18-Oct-2012 16:46  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Point-d-acces-D..> 05-Nov-2012 18:12  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Points-d-acces-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:26  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerConnect-55..> 02-Nov-2012 17:22  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-2900-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:12  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-2950-..> 05-Nov-2012 15:01  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C410x..> 03-Nov-2012 18:05  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C410x..> 03-Nov-2012 11:06  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C410x..> 29-Oct-2012 07:36  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C5125..> 25-Oct-2012 09:46  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C6220..> 12-Nov-2012 16:55  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C8000..> 03-Nov-2012 08:30  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C8000..> 03-Nov-2012 18:23  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C8220..> 27-Nov-2012 09:07  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C8220..> 03-Nov-2012 08:29  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C8220..> 18-Oct-2012 16:50  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-Expan..> 04-Nov-2012 11:02  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-Expre..> 03-Nov-2012 18:11  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-M1000..> 03-Nov-2012 08:42  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R210-..> 25-Oct-2012 18:30  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R310-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:29  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R320-..> 03-Nov-2012 11:04  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R410-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:09  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R415-..> 05-Nov-2012 15:01  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R420-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:29  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R520-..> 26-Oct-2012 14:50  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R520-..> 29-Oct-2012 07:39  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R620-..> 26-Oct-2012 14:49  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R620-..> 18-Oct-2012 17:11  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R710-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:31  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R710-..> 05-Nov-2012 15:00  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R720-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:34  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R720-..> 03-Nov-2012 11:04  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R720-..> 25-Oct-2012 18:33  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R810-..> 02-Nov-2012 09:43  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R815-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:34  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R820-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:30  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R820-..> 02-Nov-2012 17:19  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R900-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:13  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R905-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:32  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R910-..> 29-Oct-2012 07:40  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-..> 02-Nov-2012 10:08  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-..> 05-Nov-2012 09:02  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:44  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-Siste..> 26-Oct-2012 14:44  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-Syste..> 06-Nov-2012 07:32  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T110-..> 14-Nov-2012 21:04  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T300-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:33  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T310-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:10  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T320-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:27  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T420-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:19  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T620-..> 04-Nov-2012 11:04  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerQuest-Data..> 05-Nov-2012 12:15  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-Baie..> 24-Oct-2012 09:12  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-DL-B..> 03-Nov-2012 18:12  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-DL20..> 13-Nov-2012 08:11  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-Data..> 03-Nov-2012 21:47  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-Data..> 04-Nov-2012 10:41  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-Data..> 04-Nov-2012 11:00  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-Encr..> 04-Nov-2012 10:41  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD-S..> 05-Nov-2012 15:01  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD11..> 05-Nov-2012 15:00  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 27-Nov-2012 09:08  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 27-Nov-2012 09:07  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 27-Nov-2012 09:06  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 18-Oct-2012 16:45  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 02-Nov-2012 18:07  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 18-Oct-2012 16:34  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD36..> 26-Oct-2012 14:48  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD36..> 26-Oct-2012 14:48  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-NX20..> 05-Nov-2012 15:00  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-NX40..> 18-Oct-2012 16:56  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-NX33..> 12-Nov-2012 16:58  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-NX33..> 02-Nov-2012 17:21  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault NX32..> 25-Oct-2012 09:48  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M4400..> 03-Nov-2012 11:05  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M6400..> 02-Nov-2012 09:37  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-Works..> 01-Nov-2012 18:46  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-Works..> 03-Nov-2012 08:28  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-Works..> 19-Oct-2012 07:41  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-Works..> 25-Oct-2012 12:10  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-Works..> 18-Oct-2012 17:09  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Projecteur-7700..> 03-Nov-2012 18:09  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Projecteur-Dell..> 02-Nov-2012 09:38  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Projecteur-Dell..> 03-Nov-2012 18:10  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Projecteur-Dell..> 02-Nov-2012 17:20  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-S320-S320wi-Pro..> 26-Oct-2012 14:45  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-S320-S320wi-Pro..> 05-Nov-2012 09:02  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-S2240L-S2340L-M..> 26-Oct-2012 14:44  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-S2440L-Monitor-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:31  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-SAS-RAID-Storag..> 05-Nov-2012 14:59  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Sansa-Clip-MP3-..> 27-Nov-2012 09:15  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Server-Deployme..> 05-Nov-2012 14:56  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Server-PRO-Mana..> 05-Nov-2012 15:00  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Serveur-de-sauv..> 01-Nov-2012 18:42  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Set-Up-Your-Com..> 03-Nov-2012 18:04  4.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Setting-up-Your..> 05-Nov-2012 08:59  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Setting-up-Your..> 05-Nov-2012 10:08  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Setting-up-Your..> 05-Nov-2012 10:08  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Setting-up-Your..> 05-Nov-2012 12:15  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Solutions-NAS-D..> 02-Nov-2012 11:21  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Solutions-NAS-D..> 25-Oct-2012 18:29  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Station-de-trav..> 01-Nov-2012 18:36  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Storage-Center-..> 06-Nov-2012 11:43  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Storage-Center-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:29  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Streak-7-Franca..> 25-Oct-2012 12:06  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Streak-7-Manuel..> 18-Oct-2012 17:13  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Streak-Manuel-d..> 18-Oct-2012 16:40  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-GUIDE-DE..> 14-Nov-2012 21:01  5.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-One-GUID..> 05-Nov-2012 18:14  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-XPS-1640..> 06-Nov-2012 18:40  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-XPS-8100..> 05-Nov-2012 07:38  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-XPS-GUID..> 06-Nov-2012 18:40  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-XPS-Guid..> 01-Nov-2012 18:41  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-XPS-Setu..> 01-Nov-2012 18:38  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-XPS-Setu..> 05-Nov-2012 12:09  1.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systeme-Dell-DR..> 03-Nov-2012 18:08  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systeme-Dell-Po..> 02-Nov-2012 17:20  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systeme-Dell-Po..> 02-Nov-2012 18:07  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systeme-de-navi..> 25-Oct-2012 12:02  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-D..> 03-Nov-2012 08:27  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-D..> 03-Nov-2012 08:28  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-D..> 27-Nov-2012 07:40  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-D..> 14-Nov-2012 21:05  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-I..> 18-Oct-2012 16:47  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-I..> 24-Oct-2012 07:39  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-I..> 18-Oct-2012 17:11  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 14-Nov-2012 20:59  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 05-Nov-2012 12:14  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:33  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:52  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 13-Nov-2012 08:19  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 25-Oct-2012 12:05  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 27-Nov-2012 07:42  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 05-Nov-2012 18:13  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:41  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:29  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 17:18  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:44  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:42  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:36  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 18:05  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:33  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 17:13  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 14-Nov-2012 21:00  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 29-Oct-2012 07:37  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 14-Nov-2012 12:05  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:39  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:32  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 11:04  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:58  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:40  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:41  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:31  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 18:06  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 05-Nov-2012 08:58  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 25-Oct-2012 09:47  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 05-Nov-2012 12:10  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 24-Oct-2012 07:37  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 24-Oct-2012 09:14  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 17:08  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 01-Nov-2012 19:02  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 11:45  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:38  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 29-Oct-2012 07:41  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:32  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 17:08  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 25-Oct-2012 12:10  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 18:08  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 27-Nov-2012 09:09  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 27-Nov-2012 09:06  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:43  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 08:44  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 18:15  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 14-Nov-2012 21:42  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 01-Nov-2012 18:41  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes -Dell ..> 29-Oct-2012 07:37  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systems-Service..> 03-Nov-2012 11:08  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-TSi-500-TSi-400..> 27-Nov-2012 09:15  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Tout-en-un-Dell..> 18-Oct-2012 16:31  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-U2713HM-Flat-Pa..> 06-Nov-2012 07:30  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-U2713HM-Flat-Pa..> 06-Nov-2012 07:30  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Update-Packages..> 03-Nov-2012 11:04  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Upgrading-to-Ba..> 02-Nov-2012 17:21  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Utilitaires-de-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:06  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Venue-Pro-Manue..> 25-Oct-2012 12:06  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vizioncore-vCon..> 05-Nov-2012 10:08  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vizioncore-vRan..> 05-Nov-2012 09:01  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vizioncore-vRep..> 05-Nov-2012 14:57  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-200-Manu..> 29-Oct-2012 07:38  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-200-Manu..> 19-Oct-2012 07:41  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-270-Manu..> 02-Nov-2012 17:19  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-270-Manu..> 01-Nov-2012 19:02  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell- Vostro-270-Man..> 26-Oct-2012 14:46  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-270-Owne..> 12-Nov-2012 16:56  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-360-Prop..> 19-Oct-2012 07:42  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-400-Manu..> 25-Oct-2012 09:47  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-410-Guid..> 12-Nov-2012 17:26  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-420-220-..> 01-Nov-2012 18:40  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-470-Manu..> 02-Nov-2012 18:07  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-470-Owne..> 02-Nov-2012 17:20  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-1310-151..> 05-Nov-2012 18:14  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-1310-151..> 02-Nov-2012 10:06  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-1440-145..> 25-Oct-2012 12:05  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-1540-155..> 26-Oct-2012 14:44  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-2520-Man..> 25-Oct-2012 12:09  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3360-Man..> 27-Nov-2012 09:10  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3450-Man..> 06-Nov-2012 07:27  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3460-Man..> 26-Oct-2012 14:46  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3460-Man..> 26-Oct-2012 14:47  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3560-Man..> 24-Oct-2012 07:37  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3750-Man..> 18-Oct-2012 16:58  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-V131-Man..> 18-Oct-2012 16:59  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XP-M1530-Manuel..> 18-Oct-2012 16:34  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-13-Arabe-Ma..> 05-Nov-2012 12:08  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-13-Chinois-..> 05-Nov-2012 12:08  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-13-Kullanı..> 05-Nov-2012 12:09  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-13-Manuel-d..> 02-Nov-2012 11:22  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-13-Manuel-d..> 12-Nov-2012 16:59  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-13-Owner-s-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:30  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-14-Manuel-d..> 02-Nov-2012 17:36  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-410-Anglais..> 18-Nov-2012 21:25  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-420-francai..> 18-Nov-2012 21:25  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-430-Guide-d..> 02-Nov-2012 10:08  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-430-francai..> 19-Nov-2012 06:24  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-600-Manuel-..> 05-Nov-2012 12:11  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-600-francai..> 19-Nov-2012 06:29  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-630i-Manuel..> 18-Oct-2012 16:49  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-710-H2C-Man..> 13-Nov-2012 08:18  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-8500-Manuel..> 01-Nov-2012 18:36  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-GUIDE-DE-CO..> 05-Nov-2012 07:38  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-L412z-Manue..> 05-Nov-2012 07:38  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-M1210-Owner..> 05-Nov-2012 07:32  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-M1710-Manue..> 14-Nov-2012 21:03  4.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-M1710-Manue..> 13-Nov-2012 09:56  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-M2010-Manue..> 13-Nov-2012 08:16  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-One-2710-ma..> 24-Oct-2012 09:14  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-One-GUIDE-D..> 05-Nov-2012 07:37  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS 15-Manuel-d..> 03-Nov-2012 18:15  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-moniteur-D1920-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:43  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-poweredge-r210-..> 24-Oct-2012 07:41  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-poweredge-r520-..> 12-Nov-2012 16:58  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-server-poweredg..> 12-Nov-2012 16:56  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:40  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:37  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:40  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:39  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:39  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-xps-13-l321x_se..> 12-Nov-2012 17:00  1.9M  

[TXT]

 DellDimension1100Ser..> 18-Oct-2012 16:59  3.4M  

[TXT]

 IOGEAR-Guide-d-insta..> 05-Nov-2012 14:58  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Imprimante-Dell-Phot..> 18-Oct-2012 16:39  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Imprimante-laser-de-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:53  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Imprimante-personnel..> 18-Oct-2012 16:57  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Lien-Manuels-Utilisa..> 19-Nov-2012 07:12   92K  

[TXT]

 Planification-du-dep..> 05-Nov-2012 14:57  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Projecteur-Dell-1201..> 29-Oct-2012 07:40  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Systemes-Dell-PowerE..> 25-Oct-2012 18:29  2.8M  

[TXT]

 alienwareX51.htm        18-Oct-2012 16:37  2.5M 

http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_printers_main/esuprt_printers/dell-1130n_User's%20Guide_en-us.pdf ftp://ftp.dell.com/Manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_cloud_products/poweredge-c8000_owner's%20manual3_en-us.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_printers_main/esuprt_printers/dell-2145cn_User's%20Guide_da-dk.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_powervault/powervault-md3200i_Setup%20Guide_cs-cz.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_powervault/powervault-md3200_Setup%20Guide_de-de.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_powervault/powervault-md3220i_Setup%20Guide_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_printers_main/esuprt_printers/dell-1815dn_User's%20Guide_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_powervault/powervault-dp500_owner's%20manual3_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/Manuals/Common/inspiron-5100_setup%20guide_fr-fr.pdf http://support.dell.com/support/edocs/systems/Vos3360/fr/OM/om_fr.pdf http://support.euro.dell.com/support/edocs/systems/Alw_dt_Area_51/en/sm/sm_en.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_laptop/esuprt_alienware_laptops/alienware-m11x_Reference%20Guide_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_laptop/esuprt_alienware_laptops/alienware-m18x_user's%20guide_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_rack_infrastructure/dell-line-interactive-tower-ups-500t_User's%20Guide9_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_poweredge/poweredge-2800_User's%20Guide12_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_powervault/powervault-md3220i_Owner's%20Manual_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_equallogic/dell-dx6000_Owner's%20Manual_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_rack_infrastructure/dell-line-interactive-tower-ups-500t_User's%20Guide10_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_laptop/esuprt_precision_mobile/precision-m4700_Owner's%20Manual_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_powervault/powervault-md3200_Setup%20Guide_es-mx.pdf

Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual Before You Begin Removing the Computer Cover About Your Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Computer Advanced Troubleshooting Removing and Installing Parts Replacing the Computer Cover Specifications Technical Overview System Setup Notes, Notices, and Cautions If you purchased a Dell™ n Series computer, any references in this document to Microsoft® Windows® operating systems are not applicable. Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2005 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, and Dimension are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation; Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Model DCSM October 2005     Rev. A01 NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.Back to Contents Page  About Your Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Computer  Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual Front View of the Computer Back View of the Computer Front View of the Computer 1 cover latch release Use this latch to remove the computer cover. 2 location of Service Tag Use the Service Tag to identify your computer when you access the Dell Support website or call technical support. 3 CD or DVD eject button Press to eject a disk from the CD or DVD drive. 4 CD or DVD activity light The drive light is on when the computer reads data from the CD or DVD drive. 5 FlexBay Can contain an optional floppy drive or optional Media Card Reader. For more information about the Media Card Reader, see your computer Owner's Manual. 6 microphone connector Use the microphone connector to attach a personal computer microphone for voice or musical input into a sound or telephony program. On computers with a sound card, the microphone connector is on the card. 7 headphone connector Use the headphone connector to attach headphones. 8 diagnostic lights (4) Use the lights to help you troubleshoot a computer problem based on the diagnostic code. For more information, see "Diagnostic Lights." 9 hard-drive activity light The hard drive activity light is on when the computer reads data from or writes data to the hard drive. The light might also be on when a device such as a CD player is operating. 10 power button, power light Press the power button to turn on the computer. The power light in the center of this button indicates the power state. See "Specifications" for more information. NOTICE: To avoid losing data, do not use the power button to turn off the computer. Instead, perform an operating system shutdown. 11 USB 2.0 connectors (2) Use the front USB connectors for devices that you connect occasionally, such as joysticks or cameras. It is recommended that you use the back USB connectors for devices that typically remain connected, such as printers, keyboards, and mice, or for bootable USB devices, which may not function properly if attached to the front connectors. 12 vents For adequate cooling, do not block any of the vents. NOTICE: Ensure that there is a minimum of two inches of space between all vents and any object near these vents.Back View of the Computer NOTICE: Do not lift or carry the computer by the vents to avoid damage to the computer. NOTICE: Keep the vent area clean and dust-free to ensure that the computer is adequately ventilated. Use only a dry cloth to clean the vent area to avoid water damage to the computer. 1 voltage selection switch (may not be available on all computers) See the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide for more information. 2 power connector Insert the power cable. 3 back panel connectors Plug USB, audio, and other devices into the appropriate connector. 4 card slots Access connectors for any installed PCI and PCI Express cards. 1 link integrity light l Green — A good connection exists between a 10-Mbps network and the computer. l Orange — A good connection exists between a 100-Mbps network and the computer. l Off — The computer is not detecting a physical connection to the network. 2 network adapter connector To attach your computer to a network or broadband device, connect one end of a network cable to either a network jack or your network or broadband device. Connect the other end of the network cable to the network adapter connector on the back panel of your computer. A click indicates that the network cable has been securely attached. NOTE: Do not plug a telephone cable into the network connector. On computers with a network connector card, use the connector on the card. It is recommended that you use Category 5 wiring and connectors for your network. If you must use Category 3 wiring, force the network speed to 10 Mbps to ensure reliable operation. 3 network activity light Flashes a yellow light when the computer is transmitting or receiving network data. A high volume of network traffic may make this light appear to be in a steady "on" state.Back to Contents Page 4 surround connector Use the black surround connector to attach multichannel-capable speakers. 5 line-in connector Use the blue line-in connector to attach a record/playback device such as a cassette player, CD player, or VCR. On computers with a sound card, use the connector on the card. 6 line-out connector Use the green line-out connector (available on computers with integrated sound) to attach headphones and most speakers with integrated amplifiers. On computers with a sound card, use the connector on the card. 7 micro-phone/side surround connector Use the pink and silver connector to attach a personal computer microphone for voice or musical input into a sound or telephony program. On computers with a sound card, the microphone connector is on the card. The side-surround output provides enhanced surround audio for computers with 7.1 speakers. 8 center/subwoofer connector Use the yellow connector to attach a speaker to a Low Frequency Effects (LFE) audio channel. 9 VGA video connector If your monitor has a VGA connector, plug it into the VGA connector on the computer. 10 USB 2.0 connectors (5) Use the back USB connectors for devices that typically remain connected, such as printers, keyboards, and mice, or for bootable USB devices which may not function properly if attached to the front connectors (see "System Setup" for more information on booting to a USB device) It is recommended that you use the front USB connectors for devices that you connect occasionally, such as joysticks or cameras.Back to Contents Page  About Your Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Computer  Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual Front View of the Computer Back View of the Computer Front View of the Computer 1 cover latch release Use this latch to remove the computer cover. 2 location of Service Tag Use the Service Tag to identify your computer when you access the Dell Support website or call technical support. 3 CD or DVD eject button Press to eject a disk from the CD or DVD drive. 4 CD or DVD activity light The drive light is on when the computer reads data from the CD or DVD drive. 5 FlexBay Can contain an optional floppy drive or optional Media Card Reader. For more information about the Media Card Reader, see your computer Owner's Manual. 6 microphone connector Use the microphone connector to attach a personal computer microphone for voice or musical input into a sound or telephony program. On computers with a sound card, the microphone connector is on the card. 7 headphone connector Use the headphone connector to attach headphones. 8 diagnostic lights (4) Use the lights to help you troubleshoot a computer problem based on the diagnostic code. For more information, see "Diagnostic Lights." 9 hard-drive activity light The hard drive activity light is on when the computer reads data from or writes data to the hard drive. The light might also be on when a device such as a CD player is operating. 10 power button, power light Press the power button to turn on the computer. The power light in the center of this button indicates the power state. See "Specifications" for more information. NOTICE: To avoid losing data, do not use the power button to turn off the computer. Instead, perform an operating system shutdown. 11 USB 2.0 connectors (2) Use the front USB connectors for devices that you connect occasionally, such as joysticks or cameras. It is recommended that you use the back USB connectors for devices that typically remain connected, such as printers, keyboards, and mice, or for bootable USB devices, which may not function properly if attached to the front connectors. 12 vents For adequate cooling, do not block any of the vents. NOTICE: Ensure that there is a minimum of two inches of space between all vents and any object near these vents. NOTICE: Do not lift or carry the computer by the vents to avoid damage to the computer.Back View of the Computer NOTICE: Keep the vent area clean and dust-free to ensure that the computer is adequately ventilated. Use only a dry cloth to clean the vent area to avoid water damage to the computer. 1 voltage selection switch (may not be available on all computers) See the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide for more information. 2 power connector Insert the power cable. 3 back panel connectors Plug USB, audio, and other devices into the appropriate connector. 4 card slots Access connectors for any installed PCI and PCI Express cards. 1 link integrity light l Green — A good connection exists between a 10-Mbps network and the computer. l Orange — A good connection exists between a 100-Mbps network and the computer. l Off — The computer is not detecting a physical connection to the network. 2 network adapter connector To attach your computer to a network or broadband device, connect one end of a network cable to either a network jack or your network or broadband device. Connect the other end of the network cable to the network adapter connector on the back panel of your computer. A click indicates that the network cable has been securely attached. NOTE: Do not plug a telephone cable into the network connector. On computers with a network connector card, use the connector on the card. It is recommended that you use Category 5 wiring and connectors for your network. If you must use Category 3 wiring, force the network speed to 10 Mbps to ensure reliable operation. 3 network activity light Flashes a yellow light when the computer is transmitting or receiving network data. A high volume of network traffic may make this light appear to be in a steady "on" state. 4 surround connector Use the black surround connector to attach multichannel-capable speakers. 5 line-in connector Use the blue line-in connector to attach a record/playback device such as a cassette player, CD player, or VCR. On computers with a sound card, use the connector on the card. 6 line-out connector Use the green line-out connector (available on computers with integrated sound) to attach headphones and most speakers with integrated amplifiers. On computers with a sound card, use the connector on the card. 7 micro-phone/side surround connector Use the pink and silver connector to attach a personal computer microphone for voice or musical input into a sound or telephony program. On computers with a sound card, the microphone connector is on the card.Back to Contents Page The side-surround output provides enhanced surround audio for computers with 7.1 speakers. 8 center/subwoofer connector Use the yellow connector to attach a speaker to a Low Frequency Effects (LFE) audio channel. 9 VGA video connector If your monitor has a VGA connector, plug it into the VGA connector on the computer. 10 USB 2.0 connectors (5) Use the back USB connectors for devices that typically remain connected, such as printers, keyboards, and mice, or for bootable USB devices which may not function properly if attached to the front connectors (see "System Setup" for more information on booting to a USB device) It is recommended that you use the front USB connectors for devices that you connect occasionally, such as joysticks or cameras.Back to Contents Page Before You Begin Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual Getting Started Recommended Tools Turning Off Your Computer Before Working Inside Your Computer Getting Started This section provides procedures for removing and installing the components in your computer. Unless otherwise noted, each procedure assumes that the following conditions exist: l You have performed the steps in "Turning Off Your Computer" and "Before Working Inside Your Computer." l You have read the safety information in your Dell™ Product Information Guide. l A component can be replaced by performing the removal procedure in reverse order. Recommended Tools The procedures in this document may require the following tools: l Small flat-blade screwdriver l Phillips screwdriver l Flash BIOS update program floppy disk or CD Turning Off Your Computer 1. Shut down the operating system: a. Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, click the Start button, and then click Turn Off Computer. b. In the Turn off computer window, click Turn off. The computer turns off after the operating system shutdown process finishes. 2. Ensure that the computer and any attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your operating system, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds. Before Working Inside Your Computer Use the following safety guidelines to help protect your computer from potential damage and to help ensure your own personal safety. 1. Turn off your computer. NOTICE: To avoid losing data, save and close any open files and exit any open programs before you turn off your computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: Handle components and cards with care. Do not touch the components or contacts on a card. Hold a card by its edges or by its metal mounting bracket. Hold a component such as a processor by its edges, not by its pins. NOTICE: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. NOTICE: When you disconnect a cable, pull on its connector or on its strain-relief loop, not on the cable itself. Some cables have a connector with locking tabs; if you are disconnecting this type of cable, press in on the locking tabs before you disconnect the cable. As you pull connectors apart, keep them evenly aligned to avoid bending any connector pins. Also, before you connect a cable, ensure that both connectors are correctly oriented and aligned. NOTICE: To avoid damaging the computer, perform the following steps before you begin working inside the computer. NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network port or device.2. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 3. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from their electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board. 4. Remove the computer cover. Back to Contents Page CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover. NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components.Back to Contents Page Before You Begin Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual Getting Started Recommended Tools Turning Off Your Computer Before Working Inside Your Computer Getting Started This section provides procedures for removing and installing the components in your computer. Unless otherwise noted, each procedure assumes that the following conditions exist: l You have performed the steps in "Turning Off Your Computer" and "Before Working Inside Your Computer." l You have read the safety information in your Dell™ Product Information Guide. l A component can be replaced by performing the removal procedure in reverse order. Recommended Tools The procedures in this document may require the following tools: l Small flat-blade screwdriver l Phillips screwdriver l Flash BIOS update program floppy disk or CD Turning Off Your Computer 1. Shut down the operating system: a. Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, click the Start button, and then click Turn Off Computer. b. In the Turn off computer window, click Turn off. The computer turns off after the operating system shutdown process finishes. 2. Ensure that the computer and any attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your operating system, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds. Before Working Inside Your Computer Use the following safety guidelines to help protect your computer from potential damage and to help ensure your own personal safety. 1. Turn off your computer. NOTICE: To avoid losing data, save and close any open files and exit any open programs before you turn off your computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: Handle components and cards with care. Do not touch the components or contacts on a card. Hold a card by its edges or by its metal mounting bracket. Hold a component such as a processor by its edges, not by its pins. NOTICE: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. NOTICE: When you disconnect a cable, pull on its connector or on its strain-relief loop, not on the cable itself. Some cables have a connector with locking tabs; if you are disconnecting this type of cable, press in on the locking tabs before you disconnect the cable. As you pull connectors apart, keep them evenly aligned to avoid bending any connector pins. Also, before you connect a cable, ensure that both connectors are correctly oriented and aligned. NOTICE: To avoid damaging the computer, perform the following steps before you begin working inside the computer. NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network port or device.2. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 3. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from their electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board. 4. Remove the computer cover. Back to Contents Page CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover. NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components.Back to Contents Page Replacing the Computer Cover Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual 1. Ensure that all cables are connected, and fold cables out of the way. 2. Ensure that no tools or extra parts are left inside the computer. 3. Align the bottom of the cover with the tabs located along the bottom edge of the computer. 4. Using the tabs as leverage, rotate the cover downward and press down to close it. 5. Ensure that the cover is seated correctly before moving it to the upright position. 6. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Back to Contents Page CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.Back to Contents Page Replacing the Computer Cover Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual 1. Ensure that all cables are connected, and fold cables out of the way. 2. Ensure that no tools or extra parts are left inside the computer. 3. Align the bottom of the cover with the tabs located along the bottom edge of the computer. 4. Using the tabs as leverage, rotate the cover downward and press down to close it. 5. Ensure that the cover is seated correctly before moving it to the upright position. 6. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Back to Contents Page CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.Back to Contents Page Removing the Computer Cover Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Lay your computer on its side with the computer cover facing up. 3. Pull back the cover latch release located on the top panel. Back to Contents Page CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: Ensure that sufficient space exists to support the removed cover—at least 30 cm (1 ft) of desk top space. NOTICE: Ensure that you are working on a level, protected surface to avoid scratching either the computer or the surface on which it is resting.Back to Contents Page Removing the Computer Cover Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Lay your computer on its side with the computer cover facing up. 3. Pull back the cover latch release located on the top panel. Back to Contents Page CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: Ensure that sufficient space exists to support the removed cover—at least 30 cm (1 ft) of desk top space. NOTICE: Ensure that you are working on a level, protected surface to avoid scratching either the computer or the surface on which it is resting.Back to Contents Page Removing and Installing Parts Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual Memory You can increase your computer memory by installing memory modules on the system board. Your computer supports DDR2 memory. For additional information on the type of memory supported by your computer, see your Owner's Manual. DDR2 Memory Overview DDR2 memory modules should be installed in pairs of matched memory size, speed, and technology. If the DDR2 memory modules are not installed in matched pairs, the computer will continue to operate, but with a slight reduction in performance. See the label on the module to determine the module's capacity. The recommended memory configurations are: ¡ A pair of matched memory modules installed in DIMM connectors 1 and 2 or ¡ A pair of matched memory modules installed in DIMM connectors 1 and 2 and another matched pair installed in DIMM connectors 3 and 4 l If you install mixed pairs of DDR2 400-MHz (PC2-3200) and DDR2 533-MHz (PC2-4300) memory, the modules function at the slowest speed installed. l Be sure to install a single memory module in DIMM connector 1, the connector closest to the processor, before you install modules in the other connectors. Memory CD/DVD Drive Cards Heat-Sink Assembly Drive Panel Processor Front Panel Fan Assembly Drives Front I/O Panel Hard Drive System Board Floppy Drive Power Supply Media Card Reader (Optional) NOTE: Always install DDR2 memory modules in the order indicated on the system board. NOTICE: Do not install ECC or buffered memory modules. Only unbuffered, non-ECC memory is supported. NOTE: If you install DDR2 667-MHz memory, the speed is reduced to 533 MHz. NOTE: Memory purchased from Dell is covered under your computer warranty.Addressing Memory With 4-GB Configurations Your computer supports a maximum of 4 GB of memory when you use four 1-GB DIMMs. Current operating systems, such as Microsoft® Windows® XP, can only use a maximum of 4 GB of address space; however, the amount of memory available to the operating system is less than 4 GB. Certain components within the computer require address space in the 4-GB range. Any address space reserved for these components cannot be used by computer memory. Removing Memory 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Press out the securing clip at each end of the memory module connector. 4. Grasp the module and pull up. If the module is difficult to remove, gently ease the module back and forth to remove it from the connector. Installing Memory 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Press out the securing clip at each end of the memory module connector. 4. Align the notch on the bottom of the module with the crossbar in the connector. NOTICE: If you remove your original memory modules from the computer during a memory upgrade, keep them separate from any new modules that you may have, even if you purchased the new modules from Dell. If possible, do not pair an original memory module with a new memory module. Otherwise, your computer may not start properly. You should install your original memory modules in pairs either in DIMM connectors 1 and 2 or DIMM connectors 3 and 4. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis. 1 memory connector closest to processor 2 securing clips (2) 3 memory connector5. Insert the module into the connector until the module snaps into position. If you insert the module correctly, the securing clips snap into the cutouts at each end of the module. 6. Replace the computer cover. 7. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. 8. When a message appears, stating that memory size has changed, press to continue. 9. Log on to your computer. 10. Right-click the My Computer icon on your Microsoft® Windows® desktop and click Properties. 11. Click the General tab. 12. To verify that the memory is installed correctly, check the amount of memory (RAM) listed. Cards Your Dell™ computer provides the following slots for PCI and PCI Express cards: l Two PCI card slots l One PCI Express x16 card slot l One PCI Express x1 card slot PCI Cards Your computer supports two PCI cards. 1 notch 2 memory module 3 cutouts (2) 4 crossbar NOTICE: To avoid damage to the memory module, press the module straight down into the connector while you apply equal force to each end of the module. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.If you are installing or replacing a card, follow the procedures in the next section. If you are removing but not replacing a PCI card, see "Removing a PCI Card." If you are replacing a card, remove the current driver for the card from the operating system. If you are installing or replacing a PCI Express card, see "Installing a PCI Express Card." Installing a PCI Card 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Gently push the release tab on the card retention door from the inside to pivot the door open. Because the door is captive, it will remain in the open position. 4. If you are installing a new card, remove the filler bracket to create a card-slot opening. Then continue with step 6. 5. If you are replacing a card that is already installed in the computer, remove the card. If necessary, disconnect any cables connected to the card. Grasp the card by its top corners, and ease it out of its connector. 6. Prepare the card for installation. See the documentation that came with the card for information on configuring the card, making internal connections, or otherwise customizing it for your computer. 7. Place the card in the connector and press down firmly. Ensure that the card is fully seated in the slot. 1 release tab 2 card retention door CAUTION: Some network adapters automatically start the computer when they are connected to a network. To guard against electrical shock, be sure to unplug your computer from its electrical outlet before installing any cards.8. Before you close the card retention door, ensure that: l The tops of all cards and filler brackets are flush with the alignment bar. l The notch in the top of the card or filler bracket fits around the alignment guide. 9. Close the card retention door by snapping it into place to secure the card(s). 10. Connect any cables that should be attached to the card. See the documentation for the card for information about the card's cable connections. 11. Replace the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and then turn them on. 12. If you installed a sound card: a. Enter system setup, select Audio Controller, and then change the setting to Off. b. Connect external audio devices to the sound card's connectors. Do not connect external audio devices to the microphone, speaker/headphone, or line-in connectors on the back panel. 13. If you installed an add-in network adapter and want to disable the integrated network adapter: 1 bracket within slot 4 alignment guide 2 bracket caught outside of slot 5 fully seated card 3 alignment bar 6 not fully seated card 1 alignment guide 3 release tab 2 alignment bar 4 card retention door NOTICE: Do not route card cables over or behind the cards. Cables routed over the cards can prevent the computer cover from closing properly or cause damage to the equipment. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.a. Enter system setup, select Integrated NIC, and then change the setting to Off. b. Connect the network cable to the add-in network adapter's connectors. Do not connect the network cable to the integrated connector on the back panel. 14. Install any drivers required for the card as described in the card documentation. Removing a PCI Card 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Gently push the release tab on the card retention door from the inside to pivot the door open. Because the door is captive, it will remain in the open position. 4. If you are removing the card permanently, install a filler bracket in the empty card-slot opening. If you need a filler bracket, contact Dell (see your Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). 5. Close the card retention door by snapping it into place to secure the card(s). 6. Replace the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and then turn them on. 7. Remove the card's driver from the operating system. 8. If you removed a sound card: a. Enter system setup, select Audio Controller, and then change the setting to On. b. Connect external audio devices to the audio connectors on the back panel of the computer. 9. If you removed an add-in network connector: a. Enter system setup, select Integrated NIC, and then change the setting to On. b. Connect the network cable to the integrated connector on the back panel of the computer. PCI Express Cards Your computer supports one PCI Express x16 card and one PCI Express x1 card. If you are installing or replacing a PCI Express card, follow the procedures in the next section. If you are removing but not replacing a card, see "Removing a PCI Express Card." If you are replacing a card, remove the current driver for the card from the operating system. If you are installing or replacing a PCI card, see "Installing a PCI Card." Installing a PCI Express Card 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. NOTE: Installing filler brackets over empty card-slot openings is necessary to maintain FCC certification of the computer. The brackets also keep dust and dirt out of your computer. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.3. Gently push the release tab on the card retention door from the inside to pivot the door open. Because the door is captive, it will remain in the open position. 4. If your computer includes a card retention mechanism, to secure the x16 card in place from the top: a. Pivot the mechanism upward and gently squeeze in on the sides to release the mechanism from the two tab slots holding it in place. b. Set the retention mechanism aside in a secure location. 5. If you are installing a new card, remove the filler bracket to create a card-slot opening. Then continue with step 6. 6. If you are replacing a card that is already installed in the computer, remove the card. If necessary, disconnect any cables connected to the card. If your computer includes a card retention mechanism, remove the top of the retention mechanism by pressing the tab and pulling up on the top. Gently pull the securing tab, grasp the card by its top corners, and then ease it out of its connector. 7. Prepare the card for installation. See the documentation that came with the card for information on configuring the card, making internal connections, or otherwise customizing it for your computer. 8. If you are installing the card into the x16 card connector, position the card so the securing slot is aligned with the securing tab, and gently pull the securing tab. 9. Place the card in the connector and press down firmly. Ensure that the card is fully seated in the slot. 1 card retention door 2 card retention mechanism 3 release tabs (2) 1 securing tab 4 PCI Express x16 card slot 2 PCI Express x1 card 5 PCI Express x16 card 3 PCI Express x1 card slot CAUTION: Some network adapters automatically start the computer when they are connected to a network. To guard against electrical shock, be sure to unplug your computer from its electrical outlet before installing any cards. NOTICE: Ensure that you release the securing tab to unseat the card. If the card is not removed correctly, the system board may be damaged.10. If you replaced a card that was already installed in the computer and you removed the retention mechanism, you may reinstall the retention mechanism. 11. Before replacing the card retention mechanism, ensure that: l The tops of all cards and filler brackets are flush with the alignment bar. l The notch in the top of the card or filler bracket fits around the alignment guide. 12. Snap the card retention mechanism into place, securing the x16 PCI card. 13. Replace the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and then turn them on. 14. If you installed a sound card: a. Enter system setup, select Audio Controller, and then change the setting to Off. b. Connect external audio devices to the sound card's connectors. Do not connect external audio devices to the microphone, speaker/headphone, or line-in connectors on the back panel. 15. If you installed an add-in network adapter and want to disable the integrated network adapter: a. Enter system setup, select Integrated NIC, and then change the setting to Off. b. Connect the network cable to the add-in network adapter's connectors. Do not connect the network cable to the integrated connector on the back panel. 16. Install any drivers required for the card as described in the card documentation. 1 bracket within slot 4 alignment guide 2 bracket caught outside of slot 5 fully seated card 3 alignment bar 6 not fully seated card 1 card retention door 2 card retention mechanism 3 release tabs (2) NOTICE: Do not route card cables over or behind the cards. Cables routed over the cards can prevent the computer cover from closing properly or cause damage to the equipment. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.Removing a PCI Express Card 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Gently push the release tab on the card retention door from the inside to pivot the door open. Because the door is captive, it will remain in the open position. 4. If your computer includes a card retention mechanism, to secure the x16 card in place from the top: a. Pivot the mechanism upward and gently squeeze in on the sides to release the mechanism from the two tab slots holding it in place. b. Set the retention mechanism aside in a secure location. 5. If you are removing the card permanently, install a filler bracket in the empty card-slot opening. If you need a filler bracket, contact Dell (see your Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). 6. Reseat the card retention mechanism in the tabs and pivot downward to snap it into place. 7. Close the card retention door to snap it into place, securing the card(s). 8. Replace the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and then turn them on. 9. Remove the card's driver from the operating system. 10. If you removed a sound card: a. Enter system setup, select Audio Controller, and then change the setting to On. b. Connect external audio devices to the audio connectors on the back panel of the computer. 11. If you removed an add-in network connector: a. Enter system setup, select Integrated NIC, and then change the setting to On. b. Connect the network cable to the integrated connector on the back panel of the computer. 12. Install any drivers required for the card as described in the card documentation. Drive Panel Removing the Drive Panel 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. NOTE: Installing filler brackets over empty card-slot openings is necessary to maintain FCC certification of the computer. The brackets also keep dust and dirt out of your computer. NOTE: When you install a filler bracket, ensure that the bracket is seated correctly. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover.3. Grasping the sliding plate lever, slide and hold the sliding plate until the drive panel snaps open. 4. Pivot the drive panel outward and lift away from the computer. 5. Set the drive panel aside in a secure location. Removing the Drive-Panel Insert 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the drive panel. 1. Turn the drive panel sideways and find the tip of the drive-panel insert tab that latches over a tab on the right side of the drive panel. 2. Pull the inner tip of the drive-panel insert tab away from the drive panel. 1 sliding plate lever 3 drive panel 2 sliding plate 4 front panel NOTE: The sliding plate secures and releases the drive panel and helps to secure the drives. 1 drive-panel insert tab 2 drive-panel insert 3 drive panel3. Pivot the drive-panel insert out and away from the drive panel. 4. Set the drive-panel insert aside in a secure location. Replacing the Drive-Panel Insert 1. Slide the tab on the left side of the drive-panel insert under the center-drive panel tab. 2. Rotate the drive-panel insert into place and snap the drive-panel insert tab over the corresponding tab on the drive panel. Replacing the Drive Panel 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover if you have not already done so. 3. If you are installing a replacement drive panel, remove the old drive panel. 4. Align the drive panel tabs with the side-door hinges. 5. Rotate the drive panel toward the computer until it snaps into place on the front panel. 1 drive-panel insert tab 3 center drive-panel tab 2 drive panel insert 4 drive panel 1 sliding plate lever 3 drive panel 2 sliding plate 4 front panelFront Panel Removing the Front Panel 1. Remove the computer cover. 2. Remove the drive panel. 3. Remove the hard drive and second hard drive, if applicable. 4. Remove the two front-panel screws. 5. Using a small, flat-blade screwdriver, press the four top front-panel release tabs upwards and press down on the four bottom release tabs to loosen the front panel. 6. Starting from the bottom of the front panel, pivot the panel toward the top of the computer and remove the panel. Drives Your computer supports a combination of these devices: l Up to two serial ATA hard drives l One FlexBay drive (may contain an optional floppy drive or an optional Media Card Reader) l Up to two CD or DVD drives CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: Use care when handling the front-panel release tabs to avoid damaging them. 1 top front-panel release tabs (4) 2 front-panel screws (2) 3 front panel 4 bottom front-panel release tabs (4)Connect CD/DVD drives to the connector labeled "IDE1" on the system board. Serial ATA hard drives should be connected to the connectors labeled "SATA0" or "SATA2" on the system board. IDE Drive Addressing When you connect two IDE devices to a single IDE interface cable and configure them for the cable select setting, the device attached to the last connector on the interface cable is the master or boot device (drive 0), and the device attached to the middle connector on the interface cable is the slave device (drive 1). See the drive documentation in your upgrade kit for information on configuring devices for the cable select setting. Connecting and Disconnecting Drive Interface Cables When you install a drive, you connect two cables—a DC power cable and a data cable—to the back of the drive and to the system board. When removing an IDE drive data cable, grasp the colored pull-tab and pull until the connector detaches. Most interface connectors are keyed for correct insertion; that is, a notch or a missing pin on one connector matches a tab or a filled-in hole on the other connector. Keyed connectors ensure that the pin-1 wire in the cable (indicated by the colored stripe along one edge of the IDE cable—serial ATA cables do not use a colored stripe) goes to the pin-1 end of the connector. The pin-1 end of a connector on a board or a card is usually indicated by a silk-screened "1" printed directly on the board or card. Power Cable Connector To connect a drive using the power cable, locate the power connector on the power supply. 1 CD/DVD drive(s) 2 FlexBay for optional floppy drive or optional Media Card Reader 3 hard drive(s) NOTICE: When you connect an IDE interface cable, do not place the colored stripe away from pin 1 of the connector. Reversing the cable prevents the drive from operating and could damage the controller, the drive, or both. 1 interface cable 2 interface connectorHard Drive Check the documentation for the drive to verify that it is configured for your computer. Removing a Hard Drive 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Disconnect the power and data cables from the drive. 4. Press the blue tabs on either side of the hard drive bracket toward each other and slide the drive up and out of the computer. 1 SATA power cable connector 3 power cable connector 2 power connector 4 power connector CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the drive, do not set it on a hard surface. Instead, set the drive on a surface, such as a foam pad, that will sufficiently cushion it. NOTICE: If you are replacing a hard drive that contains data you want to keep, back up your files before you begin this procedure. NOTICE: Use the pull-tab to remove the data cable from your hard drive or from the system board. 1 serial ATA data cable 2 power cableInstalling a Hard Drive 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. If you are installing a replacement hard drive, remove the old hard drive. 4. Unpack the replacement hard drive, and prepare it for installation. 5. Check the documentation for the drive to verify that it is configured for your computer. 6. Gently slide the drive into place until you feel a click or feel the drive securely installed. 7. Connect the power and hard-drive cables to the drive. 1 hard drive 2 tabs (2) NOTE: If your replacement hard drive does not have the hard drive bracket attached, remove the bracket from the old drive by unsnapping it from the drive. Snap the bracket onto the new drive. 1 drive 2 hard drive bracket 1 serial ATA data cable8. Check all connectors to be certain that they are properly cabled and firmly seated. 9. Replace the computer cover. 10. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software required for drive operation. Adding a Second Hard Drive 1. Check the documentation for the drive to verify that it is configured for your computer. 2. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 3. Remove the computer cover. 4. Press the blue release tabs on each side of the hard drive bracket toward each other and slide the drive up and out of the computer. 5. Snap the bracket onto the hard drive. 6. Gently slide the new drive (the second hard drive) into place until you feel a click or feel the drive securely installed. 7. Connect a power cable to the drive. 8. Connect the data cable to the drive and to the system board. Floppy Drive 2 power cable NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the drive, do not set it on a hard surface. Instead, set the drive on a surface, such as a foam pad, that will sufficiently cushion it. 1 release tabs (2) 3 hard drive bay 2 second hard drive in lower bay 4 primary hard drive in upper bay CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer.Removing a Floppy Drive 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the drive panel. 4. Disconnect the power and data cables from the back of the floppy drive. 5. Slide the sliding plate lever toward the bottom of the computer and, without releasing the sliding plate lever, slide the floppy drive out through the front of the computer. NOTE: If you are adding a floppy drive, see "Installing a Floppy Drive." 1 power cable 2 data cable NOTE: If you are installing a PCI Express x16 card, the card may cover the floppy-drive connectors. Remove the card before connecting the floppy-drive cables. 1 sliding plate lever 2 sliding plate 3 floppy driveInstalling a Floppy Drive 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the drive panel. 4. Slide the drive into place until you feel a click or feel the drive securely installed. 5. Attach the power and data cables to the floppy drive. 6. Connect the other end of the data cable to the connector labeled "DSKT2" on the system board and route the cable through the clip on the shroud. 7. Check all cable connections and fold cables out of the way to avoid blocking the fan and cooling vents. 8. Replace the drive panel. 9. Replace the computer cover. 10. Connect your computer and devices to their electrical outlets, and turn them on. See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software required for drive operation. NOTE: If the new floppy drive does not include shoulder screws, use the screws within the drive panel insert. 1 drive 2 screws (4) NOTE: If you are installing a new drive, you need to remove the drive-panel insert. 1 power cable 2 data cable NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable in to the network port or device and then plug it in to the computer.11. Enter system setup and select the appropriate Diskette Drive option. 12. Verify that your computer works correctly by running the Dell Diagnostics. Media Card Reader (Optional) For information about using a Media Card Reader, see your Owner's Manual. Removing a Media Card Reader 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the drive panel. 4. Disconnect the FlexBay USB cable on the back of the Media Card Reader from the Media Card Reader connector on the system board and route the cable through the cable routing clip. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis. 1 cable 2 Media Card Reader5. Slide the sliding plate toward the bottom of the computer and, without releasing the sliding plate, slide the Media Card Reader out through the front of the computer. 6. Replace the drive panel. 7. Replace the computer cover. Installing a Media Card Reader 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the drive panel. 4. Remove the Media Card Reader and bracket from its packaging and ensure that all of the screws are included. 1 sliding plate lever 2 sliding plate 3 Media Card Reader CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis. 1 Media Card Reader 2 screws (4)5. Slide the Media Card Reader into place until you feel a click or feel the drive securely installed. 6. Connect the FlexBay USB cable to the back of the Media Card Reader and to the Media Card Reader connector on the system board. 7. Route the FlexBay USB cable through the cable routing clip. 8. Replace the drive panel. 9. Replace the computer cover. CD/DVD Drive Removing a CD/DVD Drive 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the drive panel. 4. Disconnect the power and data cables from the back of the drive. NOTE: Ensure that the Media Card Reader is installed before the FlexBay cable is connected. 1 Media Card Reader 2 FlexBay USB cable CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.5. Slide the sliding plate lever toward the bottom of the computer and, without releasing the sliding plate lever, slide the CD/DVD drive out through the front of the computer. Installing a CD/DVD Drive 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the drive panel. 4. Slide the drive into place until you feel a click or feel the drive securely installed. NOTE: If you are installing a new drive, you need to remove the drive-panel insert.5. Connect the power and data cables to the drive. 6. Check all cable connections, and fold cables out of the way to avoid blocking the fan and cooling vents. 7. Replace the drive panel. 8. Replace the computer cover. 9. Connect your computer and devices to their electrical outlets, and turn them on. See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software required for drive operation. 10. Enter system setup and select the appropriate Drive option. 11. Verify that your computer works correctly by running the Dell Diagnostics. Heat-Sink Assembly Removing the Heat-Sink Assembly NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable in to the network port or device and then plug it in to the computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Loosen the two captive screws that attach the heat-sink assembly to the system board on either side of the assembly. 4. Pivot the assembly toward the back of the computer and lift to remove the assembly. 5. Lay the assembly aside on its side. Processor Removing the Processor 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the heat-sink assembly. 4. Open the processor cover: a. Push down on the release lever and slide the lever out from under the side latch on the processor socket. CAUTION: Despite having a plastic shield, the heat-sink assembly may be very hot during normal operation. Ensure that the assembly has had sufficient time to cool before you touch it. NOTE: To loosen the two captive screws on each side of the heat-sink assembly, you need a long Phillips screwdriver. NOTICE: After you remove the heat-sink assembly, lay the assembly on its side. Do not set the heat-sink assembly upright or touch the thermal interface, as this may result in damage to the thermal interface material. 1 heat-sink assembly 2 captive screws (2) NOTICE: When you install the heat-sink assembly, do not touch the thermal interface on its underside, as this may result in damage to the thermal interface material. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis. NOTICE: If you are installing a processor upgrade kit from Dell, discard the original heat-sink assembly. If you are not installing a processor upgrade kit from Dell, reuse the original heat-sink assembly when you install your new processor.b. Pull the lever back to release the processor cover. 1 processor cover 4 release lever 2 processor 5 side latch 5. Grasp the processor by the edges to remove it from the processor socket. Leave the release lever extended in the release position so that the socket is ready for the new processor. Installing the Processor 1. Unpack the new processor, being careful not to touch the underside of the processor. 2. If the release lever on the processor socket is not fully extended, move it to that position. 3. Orient the front and rear alignment notches on the processor with the front and rear alignment notches on the socket. 4. Align the pin-1 corners of the processor and socket. 3 processor socket NOTICE: When removing or replacing the processor, do not touch any of the pins inside the processor socket or allow any objects to fall onto the pins in the socket. NOTICE: Ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface on the back of the computer. NOTICE: When installing the processor, do not touch any of the pins inside the socket or allow any objects to fall onto the pins in the socket. NOTICE: You must position the processor correctly in the socket to avoid permanent damage to the processor and the computer when you turn on the computer. 1 processor cover 6 release lever5. Set the processor lightly in the socket and ensure that the processor is positioned correctly. 6. When the processor is fully seated in the socket, close the processor cover. Ensure that the tab on the processor cover is positioned underneath the release lever at the front of the socket. 7. Pivot the release lever back toward the socket and snap it into place under the side latch to secure the processor. If you installed a processor replacement kit from Dell, return the original heat-sink assembly and processor to Dell in the same package in which your replacement kit was sent. 8. Install the heat-sink assembly. 9. Replace the computer cover. 10. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Fan Assembly Removing the Fan Assembly 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the heat-sink assembly. 4. Press the release tab on the fan-cable connector on the system board to remove the connector. 2 tab 7 front alignment notch 3 processor 8 socket and processor pin-1 indicators 4 processor socket 9 rear alignment notch 5 cover latch NOTICE: To avoid damage, ensure that the processor aligns properly with the socket, and do not use excessive force when you install the processor. NOTICE: If you are not installing a processor upgrade kit from Dell, reuse the original heat-sink assembly when you replace the processor. NOTICE: When installing the heat-sink assembly, do not touch the thermal interface on its underside, as this may result in damage. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug the cable into the computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.5. Simultaneously press the fan-release tab on one side of the fan assembly and pull the fan- release tab located on the bottom of the opposite side of the assembly upwards. 6. Slide the fan assembly toward the back of the computer and lift to remove the assembly. Front I/O Panel Removing the Front I/O Panel 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the heat-sink assembly. 4. Remove the fan assembly. 1 fan release tabs (2) 2 fan assembly 3 fan cable connector 4 release tab on fan cable connector CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.5. Remove the screw that secures the front I/O panel to the front of the computer. 6. Pull the I/O panel toward the back of the computer and lift the panel to remove from the computer. 7. Disconnect any cables from the I/O panel. System Board Jumper Settings The jumper locations are shown below. 1 screw 2 front I/O panelRemoving the System Board 1. Shut down the computer through the Start menu. 2. Ensure that your computer and attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your computer, turn them off now. 3. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 4. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from their electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board. 5. Remove the computer cover. 6. Remove any components that restrict access to the system board (CD/DVD drive(s), floppy drive, hard drive, front I/O panel). 7. Remove the heat-sink assembly and processor. 8. Disconnect all cables from the system board. 9. Remove the eight system-board screws and the two mounting-bracket screws. 10. Slide the system board assembly toward the front of the computer, and then lift the board away. Jumper Setting Description PSWD (default) Password features are enabled. Password features are disabled. RTCRST (default) Real-time clock reset in normal operation. Clear CMOS settings. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover. NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components. NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network port or device. NOTE: The mounting-bracket screws also hold the system board and need to be removed for the removal of the system board.11. Place the system board assembly that you just removed next to the replacement system board to ensure that it is identical. Replacing the System Board 1. Gently align the system board in the chassis and slide the board toward the back of the computer. 2. Replace the eight system-board screws and the two mounting-bracket screws. 3. Replace any components and cables that you removed from the system board. 4. Reconnect all cables to their connectors at the back of the computer. 5. Replace the computer cover. 6. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Power Supply Removing the Power Supply 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Disconnect the DC power cables from the system board and the drives. 1 mounting-bracket screws (2) 2 system-board screws (8) NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device, and then plug the cable into the computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.4. Remove the four screws that attach the power supply to the back of the computer frame. 5. Press the release button located on the floor of the computer frame. 6. Slide the power supply toward the front of the computer approximately 1 inch. 7. Lift the power supply out of the computer. Replacing the Power Supply 1. Slide the power supply into place. 2. Replace the screws that secure the power supply to the back of the computer frame. 3. Reconnect the DC power cables. 4. Route the cables through the routing clips, and press the clips to close them over the cables. 5. Replace the computer cover. 6. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Back to Contents Page 1 release button 2 power supply 3 screws (4) 4 AC power connector NOTICE: Note the routing of the DC power cables underneath the routing clips in the computer frame as you remove them from the system board and drives. You must route these cables properly when you replace them to prevent them from being pinched or crimped. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: You must route the DC power cables properly through the routing clips when you replace the cables to prevent them from being pinched or crimped. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug the cable into the computer.Back to Contents Page Removing and Installing Parts Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual Memory You can increase your computer memory by installing memory modules on the system board. Your computer supports DDR2 memory. For additional information on the type of memory supported by your computer, see your Owner's Manual. DDR2 Memory Overview DDR2 memory modules should be installed in pairs of matched memory size, speed, and technology. If the DDR2 memory modules are not installed in matched pairs, the computer will continue to operate, but with a slight reduction in performance. See the label on the module to determine the module's capacity. The recommended memory configurations are: ¡ A pair of matched memory modules installed in DIMM connectors 1 and 2 or ¡ A pair of matched memory modules installed in DIMM connectors 1 and 2 and another matched pair installed in DIMM connectors 3 and 4 l If you install mixed pairs of DDR2 400-MHz (PC2-3200) and DDR2 533-MHz (PC2-4300) memory, the modules function at the slowest speed installed. l Be sure to install a single memory module in DIMM connector 1, the connector closest to the processor, before you install modules in the other connectors. Memory Cards Drive Panel Front Panel Drives Hard Drive Floppy Drive Media Card Reader (Optional) CD/DVD Drive Heat-Sink Assembly Processor Fan Assembly Front I/O Panel System Board Power Supply NOTE: Always install DDR2 memory modules in the order indicated on the system board. NOTICE: Do not install ECC or buffered memory modules. Only unbuffered, non-ECC memory is supported. NOTE: If you install DDR2 667-MHz memory, the speed is reduced to 533 MHz.Addressing Memory With 4-GB Configurations Your computer supports a maximum of 4 GB of memory when you use four 1-GB DIMMs. Current operating systems, such as Microsoft® Windows® XP, can only use a maximum of 4 GB of address space; however, the amount of memory available to the operating system is less than 4 GB. Certain components within the computer require address space in the 4-GB range. Any address space reserved for these components cannot be used by computer memory. Removing Memory 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Press out the securing clip at each end of the memory module connector. 4. Grasp the module and pull up. If the module is difficult to remove, gently ease the module back and forth to remove it from the connector. Installing Memory 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Press out the securing clip at each end of the memory module connector. 4. Align the notch on the bottom of the module with the crossbar in the connector. NOTE: Memory purchased from Dell is covered under your computer warranty. NOTICE: If you remove your original memory modules from the computer during a memory upgrade, keep them separate from any new modules that you may have, even if you purchased the new modules from Dell. If possible, do not pair an original memory module with a new memory module. Otherwise, your computer may not start properly. You should install your original memory modules in pairs either in DIMM connectors 1 and 2 or DIMM connectors 3 and 4. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis. 1 memory connector closest to processor 2 securing clips (2) 3 memory connector5. Insert the module into the connector until the module snaps into position. If you insert the module correctly, the securing clips snap into the cutouts at each end of the module. 6. Replace the computer cover. 7. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. 8. When a message appears, stating that memory size has changed, press to continue. 9. Log on to your computer. 10. Right-click the My Computer icon on your Microsoft® Windows® desktop and click Properties. 11. Click the General tab. 12. To verify that the memory is installed correctly, check the amount of memory (RAM) listed. Cards Your Dell™ computer provides the following slots for PCI and PCI Express cards: l Two PCI card slots l One PCI Express x16 card slot l One PCI Express x1 card slot PCI Cards Your computer supports two PCI cards. 1 notch 2 memory module 3 cutouts (2) 4 crossbar NOTICE: To avoid damage to the memory module, press the module straight down into the connector while you apply equal force to each end of the module. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.If you are installing or replacing a card, follow the procedures in the next section. If you are removing but not replacing a PCI card, see "Removing a PCI Card." If you are replacing a card, remove the current driver for the card from the operating system. If you are installing or replacing a PCI Express card, see "Installing a PCI Express Card." Installing a PCI Card 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Gently push the release tab on the card retention door from the inside to pivot the door open. Because the door is captive, it will remain in the open position. 4. If you are installing a new card, remove the filler bracket to create a card-slot opening. Then continue with step 6. 5. If you are replacing a card that is already installed in the computer, remove the card. If necessary, disconnect any cables connected to the card. Grasp the card by its top corners, and ease it out of its connector. 6. Prepare the card for installation. See the documentation that came with the card for information on configuring the card, making internal connections, or otherwise customizing it for your computer. 7. Place the card in the connector and press down firmly. Ensure that the card is fully seated in the slot. 1 release tab 2 card retention door CAUTION: Some network adapters automatically start the computer when they are connected to a network. To guard against electrical shock, be sure to unplug your computer from its electrical outlet before installing any cards.8. Before you close the card retention door, ensure that: l The tops of all cards and filler brackets are flush with the alignment bar. l The notch in the top of the card or filler bracket fits around the alignment guide. 9. Close the card retention door by snapping it into place to secure the card(s). 10. Connect any cables that should be attached to the card. See the documentation for the card for information about the card's cable connections. 11. Replace the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and then turn them on. 12. If you installed a sound card: a. Enter system setup, select Audio Controller, and then change the setting to Off. b. Connect external audio devices to the sound card's connectors. Do not connect external audio devices to the microphone, speaker/headphone, or line-in connectors on the back panel. 13. If you installed an add-in network adapter and want to disable the integrated network adapter: 1 bracket within slot 4 alignment guide 2 bracket caught outside of slot 5 fully seated card 3 alignment bar 6 not fully seated card 1 alignment guide 3 release tab 2 alignment bar 4 card retention door NOTICE: Do not route card cables over or behind the cards. Cables routed over the cards can prevent the computer cover from closing properly or cause damage to the equipment. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.a. Enter system setup, select Integrated NIC, and then change the setting to Off. b. Connect the network cable to the add-in network adapter's connectors. Do not connect the network cable to the integrated connector on the back panel. 14. Install any drivers required for the card as described in the card documentation. Removing a PCI Card 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Gently push the release tab on the card retention door from the inside to pivot the door open. Because the door is captive, it will remain in the open position. 4. If you are removing the card permanently, install a filler bracket in the empty card-slot opening. If you need a filler bracket, contact Dell (see your Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). 5. Close the card retention door by snapping it into place to secure the card(s). 6. Replace the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and then turn them on. 7. Remove the card's driver from the operating system. 8. If you removed a sound card: a. Enter system setup, select Audio Controller, and then change the setting to On. b. Connect external audio devices to the audio connectors on the back panel of the computer. 9. If you removed an add-in network connector: a. Enter system setup, select Integrated NIC, and then change the setting to On. b. Connect the network cable to the integrated connector on the back panel of the computer. PCI Express Cards Your computer supports one PCI Express x16 card and one PCI Express x1 card. If you are installing or replacing a PCI Express card, follow the procedures in the next section. If you are removing but not replacing a card, see "Removing a PCI Express Card." If you are replacing a card, remove the current driver for the card from the operating system. If you are installing or replacing a PCI card, see "Installing a PCI Card." Installing a PCI Express Card 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. NOTE: Installing filler brackets over empty card-slot openings is necessary to maintain FCC certification of the computer. The brackets also keep dust and dirt out of your computer. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.3. Gently push the release tab on the card retention door from the inside to pivot the door open. Because the door is captive, it will remain in the open position. 4. If your computer includes a card retention mechanism, to secure the x16 card in place from the top: a. Pivot the mechanism upward and gently squeeze in on the sides to release the mechanism from the two tab slots holding it in place. b. Set the retention mechanism aside in a secure location. 5. If you are installing a new card, remove the filler bracket to create a card-slot opening. Then continue with step 6. 6. If you are replacing a card that is already installed in the computer, remove the card. If necessary, disconnect any cables connected to the card. If your computer includes a card retention mechanism, remove the top of the retention mechanism by pressing the tab and pulling up on the top. Gently pull the securing tab, grasp the card by its top corners, and then ease it out of its connector. 7. Prepare the card for installation. See the documentation that came with the card for information on configuring the card, making internal connections, or otherwise customizing it for your computer. 8. If you are installing the card into the x16 card connector, position the card so the securing slot is aligned with the securing tab, and gently pull the securing tab. 9. Place the card in the connector and press down firmly. Ensure that the card is fully seated in the slot. 1 card retention door 2 card retention mechanism 3 release tabs (2) 1 securing tab 4 PCI Express x16 card slot 2 PCI Express x1 card 5 PCI Express x16 card 3 PCI Express x1 card slot CAUTION: Some network adapters automatically start the computer when they are connected to a network. To guard against electrical shock, be sure to unplug your computer from its electrical outlet before installing any cards. NOTICE: Ensure that you release the securing tab to unseat the card. If the card is not removed correctly, the system board may be damaged.10. If you replaced a card that was already installed in the computer and you removed the retention mechanism, you may reinstall the retention mechanism. 11. Before replacing the card retention mechanism, ensure that: l The tops of all cards and filler brackets are flush with the alignment bar. l The notch in the top of the card or filler bracket fits around the alignment guide. 12. Snap the card retention mechanism into place, securing the x16 PCI card. 13. Replace the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and then turn them on. 14. If you installed a sound card: a. Enter system setup, select Audio Controller, and then change the setting to Off. b. Connect external audio devices to the sound card's connectors. Do not connect external audio devices to the microphone, speaker/headphone, or line-in connectors on the back panel. 15. If you installed an add-in network adapter and want to disable the integrated network adapter: a. Enter system setup, select Integrated NIC, and then change the setting to Off. b. Connect the network cable to the add-in network adapter's connectors. Do not connect the network cable to the integrated connector on the back panel. 16. Install any drivers required for the card as described in the card documentation. 1 bracket within slot 4 alignment guide 2 bracket caught outside of slot 5 fully seated card 3 alignment bar 6 not fully seated card 1 card retention door 2 card retention mechanism 3 release tabs (2) NOTICE: Do not route card cables over or behind the cards. Cables routed over the cards can prevent the computer cover from closing properly or cause damage to the equipment. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.Removing a PCI Express Card 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Gently push the release tab on the card retention door from the inside to pivot the door open. Because the door is captive, it will remain in the open position. 4. If your computer includes a card retention mechanism, to secure the x16 card in place from the top: a. Pivot the mechanism upward and gently squeeze in on the sides to release the mechanism from the two tab slots holding it in place. b. Set the retention mechanism aside in a secure location. 5. If you are removing the card permanently, install a filler bracket in the empty card-slot opening. If you need a filler bracket, contact Dell (see your Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). 6. Reseat the card retention mechanism in the tabs and pivot downward to snap it into place. 7. Close the card retention door to snap it into place, securing the card(s). 8. Replace the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and then turn them on. 9. Remove the card's driver from the operating system. 10. If you removed a sound card: a. Enter system setup, select Audio Controller, and then change the setting to On. b. Connect external audio devices to the audio connectors on the back panel of the computer. 11. If you removed an add-in network connector: a. Enter system setup, select Integrated NIC, and then change the setting to On. b. Connect the network cable to the integrated connector on the back panel of the computer. 12. Install any drivers required for the card as described in the card documentation. Drive Panel Removing the Drive Panel 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. NOTE: Installing filler brackets over empty card-slot openings is necessary to maintain FCC certification of the computer. The brackets also keep dust and dirt out of your computer. NOTE: When you install a filler bracket, ensure that the bracket is seated correctly. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover.3. Grasping the sliding plate lever, slide and hold the sliding plate until the drive panel snaps open. 4. Pivot the drive panel outward and lift away from the computer. 5. Set the drive panel aside in a secure location. Removing the Drive-Panel Insert 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the drive panel. 1. Turn the drive panel sideways and find the tip of the drive-panel insert tab that latches over a tab on the right side of the drive panel. 2. Pull the inner tip of the drive-panel insert tab away from the drive panel. 1 sliding plate lever 3 drive panel 2 sliding plate 4 front panel NOTE: The sliding plate secures and releases the drive panel and helps to secure the drives. 1 drive-panel insert tab 2 drive-panel insert 3 drive panel3. Pivot the drive-panel insert out and away from the drive panel. 4. Set the drive-panel insert aside in a secure location. Replacing the Drive-Panel Insert 1. Slide the tab on the left side of the drive-panel insert under the center-drive panel tab. 2. Rotate the drive-panel insert into place and snap the drive-panel insert tab over the corresponding tab on the drive panel. Replacing the Drive Panel 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover if you have not already done so. 3. If you are installing a replacement drive panel, remove the old drive panel. 4. Align the drive panel tabs with the side-door hinges. 5. Rotate the drive panel toward the computer until it snaps into place on the front panel. 1 drive-panel insert tab 3 center drive-panel tab 2 drive panel insert 4 drive panel 1 sliding plate lever 3 drive panel 2 sliding plate 4 front panelFront Panel Removing the Front Panel 1. Remove the computer cover. 2. Remove the drive panel. 3. Remove the hard drive and second hard drive, if applicable. 4. Remove the two front-panel screws. 5. Using a small, flat-blade screwdriver, press the four top front-panel release tabs upwards and press down on the four bottom release tabs to loosen the front panel. 6. Starting from the bottom of the front panel, pivot the panel toward the top of the computer and remove the panel. Drives Your computer supports a combination of these devices: l Up to two serial ATA hard drives l One FlexBay drive (may contain an optional floppy drive or an optional Media Card Reader) l Up to two CD or DVD drives CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: Use care when handling the front-panel release tabs to avoid damaging them. 1 top front-panel release tabs (4) 2 front-panel screws (2) 3 front panel 4 bottom front-panel release tabs (4)Connect CD/DVD drives to the connector labeled "IDE1" on the system board. Serial ATA hard drives should be connected to the connectors labeled "SATA0" or "SATA2" on the system board. IDE Drive Addressing When you connect two IDE devices to a single IDE interface cable and configure them for the cable select setting, the device attached to the last connector on the interface cable is the master or boot device (drive 0), and the device attached to the middle connector on the interface cable is the slave device (drive 1). See the drive documentation in your upgrade kit for information on configuring devices for the cable select setting. Connecting and Disconnecting Drive Interface Cables When you install a drive, you connect two cables—a DC power cable and a data cable—to the back of the drive and to the system board. When removing an IDE drive data cable, grasp the colored pull-tab and pull until the connector detaches. Most interface connectors are keyed for correct insertion; that is, a notch or a missing pin on one connector matches a tab or a filled-in hole on the other connector. Keyed connectors ensure that the pin-1 wire in the cable (indicated by the colored stripe along one edge of the IDE cable—serial ATA cables do not use a colored stripe) goes to the pin-1 end of the connector. The pin-1 end of a connector on a board or a card is usually indicated by a silk-screened "1" printed directly on the board or card. Power Cable Connector To connect a drive using the power cable, locate the power connector on the power supply. 1 CD/DVD drive(s) 2 FlexBay for optional floppy drive or optional Media Card Reader 3 hard drive(s) NOTICE: When you connect an IDE interface cable, do not place the colored stripe away from pin 1 of the connector. Reversing the cable prevents the drive from operating and could damage the controller, the drive, or both. 1 interface cable 2 interface connectorHard Drive Check the documentation for the drive to verify that it is configured for your computer. Removing a Hard Drive 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Disconnect the power and data cables from the drive. 4. Press the blue tabs on either side of the hard drive bracket toward each other and slide the drive up and out of the computer. 1 SATA power cable connector 3 power cable connector 2 power connector 4 power connector CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the drive, do not set it on a hard surface. Instead, set the drive on a surface, such as a foam pad, that will sufficiently cushion it. NOTICE: If you are replacing a hard drive that contains data you want to keep, back up your files before you begin this procedure. NOTICE: Use the pull-tab to remove the data cable from your hard drive or from the system board. 1 serial ATA data cable 2 power cableInstalling a Hard Drive 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. If you are installing a replacement hard drive, remove the old hard drive. 4. Unpack the replacement hard drive, and prepare it for installation. 5. Check the documentation for the drive to verify that it is configured for your computer. 6. Gently slide the drive into place until you feel a click or feel the drive securely installed. 7. Connect the power and hard-drive cables to the drive. 1 hard drive 2 tabs (2) NOTE: If your replacement hard drive does not have the hard drive bracket attached, remove the bracket from the old drive by unsnapping it from the drive. Snap the bracket onto the new drive. 1 drive 2 hard drive bracket 1 serial ATA data cable8. Check all connectors to be certain that they are properly cabled and firmly seated. 9. Replace the computer cover. 10. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software required for drive operation. Adding a Second Hard Drive 1. Check the documentation for the drive to verify that it is configured for your computer. 2. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 3. Remove the computer cover. 4. Press the blue release tabs on each side of the hard drive bracket toward each other and slide the drive up and out of the computer. 5. Snap the bracket onto the hard drive. 6. Gently slide the new drive (the second hard drive) into place until you feel a click or feel the drive securely installed. 7. Connect a power cable to the drive. 8. Connect the data cable to the drive and to the system board. Floppy Drive 2 power cable NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the drive, do not set it on a hard surface. Instead, set the drive on a surface, such as a foam pad, that will sufficiently cushion it. 1 release tabs (2) 3 hard drive bay 2 second hard drive in lower bay 4 primary hard drive in upper bay CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover.Removing a Floppy Drive 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the drive panel. 4. Disconnect the power and data cables from the back of the floppy drive. 5. Slide the sliding plate lever toward the bottom of the computer and, without releasing the sliding plate lever, slide the floppy drive out through the front of the computer. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer. NOTE: If you are adding a floppy drive, see "Installing a Floppy Drive." 1 power cable 2 data cable NOTE: If you are installing a PCI Express x16 card, the card may cover the floppy-drive connectors. Remove the card before connecting the floppy-drive cables. 1 sliding plate lever 2 sliding plate 3 floppy driveInstalling a Floppy Drive 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the drive panel. 4. Slide the drive into place until you feel a click or feel the drive securely installed. 5. Attach the power and data cables to the floppy drive. 6. Connect the other end of the data cable to the connector labeled "DSKT2" on the system board and route the cable through the clip on the shroud. 7. Check all cable connections and fold cables out of the way to avoid blocking the fan and cooling vents. 8. Replace the drive panel. 9. Replace the computer cover. 10. Connect your computer and devices to their electrical outlets, and turn them on. NOTE: If the new floppy drive does not include shoulder screws, use the screws within the drive panel insert. 1 drive 2 screws (4) NOTE: If you are installing a new drive, you need to remove the drive-panel insert. 1 power cable 2 data cable NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable in to the network port or device and then plug it in to the computer.See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software required for drive operation. 11. Enter system setup and select the appropriate Diskette Drive option. 12. Verify that your computer works correctly by running the Dell Diagnostics. Media Card Reader (Optional) For information about using a Media Card Reader, see your Owner's Manual. Removing a Media Card Reader 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the drive panel. 4. Disconnect the FlexBay USB cable on the back of the Media Card Reader from the Media Card Reader connector on the system board and route the cable through the cable routing clip. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis. 1 cable 2 Media Card Reader5. Slide the sliding plate toward the bottom of the computer and, without releasing the sliding plate, slide the Media Card Reader out through the front of the computer. 6. Replace the drive panel. 7. Replace the computer cover. Installing a Media Card Reader 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the drive panel. 4. Remove the Media Card Reader and bracket from its packaging and ensure that all of the screws are included. 1 sliding plate lever 2 sliding plate 3 Media Card Reader CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis. 1 Media Card Reader 2 screws (4)5. Slide the Media Card Reader into place until you feel a click or feel the drive securely installed. 6. Connect the FlexBay USB cable to the back of the Media Card Reader and to the Media Card Reader connector on the system board. 7. Route the FlexBay USB cable through the cable routing clip. 8. Replace the drive panel. 9. Replace the computer cover. CD/DVD Drive Removing a CD/DVD Drive 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the drive panel. 4. Disconnect the power and data cables from the back of the drive. NOTE: Ensure that the Media Card Reader is installed before the FlexBay cable is connected. 1 Media Card Reader 2 FlexBay USB cable CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.5. Slide the sliding plate lever toward the bottom of the computer and, without releasing the sliding plate lever, slide the CD/DVD drive out through the front of the computer. Installing a CD/DVD Drive 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the drive panel. 4. Slide the drive into place until you feel a click or feel the drive securely installed. NOTE: If you are installing a new drive, you need to remove the drive-panel insert.5. Connect the power and data cables to the drive. 6. Check all cable connections, and fold cables out of the way to avoid blocking the fan and cooling vents. 7. Replace the drive panel. 8. Replace the computer cover. 9. Connect your computer and devices to their electrical outlets, and turn them on. See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software required for drive operation. 10. Enter system setup and select the appropriate Drive option. 11. Verify that your computer works correctly by running the Dell Diagnostics. Heat-Sink Assembly Removing the Heat-Sink Assembly NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable in to the network port or device and then plug it in to the computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Loosen the two captive screws that attach the heat-sink assembly to the system board on either side of the assembly. 4. Pivot the assembly toward the back of the computer and lift to remove the assembly. 5. Lay the assembly aside on its side. Processor Removing the Processor 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the heat-sink assembly. 4. Open the processor cover: CAUTION: Despite having a plastic shield, the heat-sink assembly may be very hot during normal operation. Ensure that the assembly has had sufficient time to cool before you touch it. NOTE: To loosen the two captive screws on each side of the heat-sink assembly, you need a long Phillips screwdriver. NOTICE: After you remove the heat-sink assembly, lay the assembly on its side. Do not set the heat-sink assembly upright or touch the thermal interface, as this may result in damage to the thermal interface material. 1 heat-sink assembly 2 captive screws (2) NOTICE: When you install the heat-sink assembly, do not touch the thermal interface on its underside, as this may result in damage to the thermal interface material. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis. NOTICE: If you are installing a processor upgrade kit from Dell, discard the original heat-sink assembly. If you are not installing a processor upgrade kit from Dell, reuse the original heat-sink assembly when you install your new processor.a. Push down on the release lever and slide the lever out from under the side latch on the processor socket. b. Pull the lever back to release the processor cover. 5. Grasp the processor by the edges to remove it from the processor socket. Leave the release lever extended in the release position so that the socket is ready for the new processor. Installing the Processor 1. Unpack the new processor, being careful not to touch the underside of the processor. 2. If the release lever on the processor socket is not fully extended, move it to that position. 3. Orient the front and rear alignment notches on the processor with the front and rear alignment notches on the socket. 4. Align the pin-1 corners of the processor and socket. 1 processor cover 4 release lever 2 processor 5 side latch 3 processor socket NOTICE: When removing or replacing the processor, do not touch any of the pins inside the processor socket or allow any objects to fall onto the pins in the socket. NOTICE: Ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface on the back of the computer. NOTICE: When installing the processor, do not touch any of the pins inside the socket or allow any objects to fall onto the pins in the socket. NOTICE: You must position the processor correctly in the socket to avoid permanent damage to the processor and the computer when you turn on the computer.5. Set the processor lightly in the socket and ensure that the processor is positioned correctly. 6. When the processor is fully seated in the socket, close the processor cover. Ensure that the tab on the processor cover is positioned underneath the release lever at the front of the socket. 7. Pivot the release lever back toward the socket and snap it into place under the side latch to secure the processor. If you installed a processor replacement kit from Dell, return the original heat-sink assembly and processor to Dell in the same package in which your replacement kit was sent. 8. Install the heat-sink assembly. 9. Replace the computer cover. 10. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Fan Assembly Removing the Fan Assembly 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the heat-sink assembly. 4. Press the release tab on the fan-cable connector on the system board to remove the connector. 1 processor cover 6 release lever 2 tab 7 front alignment notch 3 processor 8 socket and processor pin-1 indicators 4 processor socket 9 rear alignment notch 5 cover latch NOTICE: To avoid damage, ensure that the processor aligns properly with the socket, and do not use excessive force when you install the processor. NOTICE: If you are not installing a processor upgrade kit from Dell, reuse the original heat-sink assembly when you replace the processor. NOTICE: When installing the heat-sink assembly, do not touch the thermal interface on its underside, as this may result in damage. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug the cable into the computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.5. Simultaneously press the fan-release tab on one side of the fan assembly and pull the fan- release tab located on the bottom of the opposite side of the assembly upwards. 6. Slide the fan assembly toward the back of the computer and lift to remove the assembly. Front I/O Panel Removing the Front I/O Panel 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the heat-sink assembly. 4. Remove the fan assembly. 1 fan release tabs (2) 2 fan assembly 3 fan cable connector 4 release tab on fan cable connector CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.5. Remove the screw that secures the front I/O panel to the front of the computer. 6. Pull the I/O panel toward the back of the computer and lift the panel to remove from the computer. 7. Disconnect any cables from the I/O panel. System Board Jumper Settings The jumper locations are shown below. 1 screw 2 front I/O panelRemoving the System Board 1. Shut down the computer through the Start menu. 2. Ensure that your computer and attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your computer, turn them off now. 3. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 4. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from their electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board. 5. Remove the computer cover. 6. Remove any components that restrict access to the system board (CD/DVD drive(s), floppy drive, hard drive, front I/O panel). 7. Remove the heat-sink assembly and processor. 8. Disconnect all cables from the system board. 9. Remove the eight system-board screws and the two mounting-bracket screws. 10. Slide the system board assembly toward the front of the computer, and then lift the board away. Jumper Setting Description PSWD (default) Password features are enabled. Password features are disabled. RTCRST (default) Real-time clock reset in normal operation. Clear CMOS settings. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover. NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components. NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network port or device. NOTE: The mounting-bracket screws also hold the system board and need to be removed for the removal of the system board.11. Place the system board assembly that you just removed next to the replacement system board to ensure that it is identical. Replacing the System Board 1. Gently align the system board in the chassis and slide the board toward the back of the computer. 2. Replace the eight system-board screws and the two mounting-bracket screws. 3. Replace any components and cables that you removed from the system board. 4. Reconnect all cables to their connectors at the back of the computer. 5. Replace the computer cover. 6. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Power Supply Removing the Power Supply 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Disconnect the DC power cables from the system board and the drives. 1 mounting-bracket screws (2) 2 system-board screws (8) NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device, and then plug the cable into the computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.4. Remove the four screws that attach the power supply to the back of the computer frame. 5. Press the release button located on the floor of the computer frame. 6. Slide the power supply toward the front of the computer approximately 1 inch. 7. Lift the power supply out of the computer. Replacing the Power Supply 1. Slide the power supply into place. 2. Replace the screws that secure the power supply to the back of the computer frame. 3. Reconnect the DC power cables. 4. Route the cables through the routing clips, and press the clips to close them over the cables. 5. Replace the computer cover. 6. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. 1 release button 2 power supply 3 screws (4) 4 AC power connector NOTICE: Note the routing of the DC power cables underneath the routing clips in the computer frame as you remove them from the system board and drives. You must route these cables properly when you replace them to prevent them from being pinched or crimped. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: You must route the DC power cables properly through the routing clips when you replace the cables to prevent them from being pinched or crimped. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug the cable into the computer.Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page System Setup Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual Overview Entering System Setup System Setup Options Boot Sequence Clearing Forgotten Passwords Clearing CMOS Settings Overview Use system setup as follows: l To change the system configuration information after you add, change, or remove any hardware in your computer l To set or change a user-selectable option such as the user password l To read the current amount of memory or set the type of hard drive installed Before you use system setup, it is recommended that you write down the system setup screen information for future reference. Entering System Setup 1. Turn on (or restart) your computer. 2. When the blue DELL™ logo is displayed, you must watch for the F2 prompt to appear.  3. Once this F2 prompt appears, press immediately. 4. If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft® Windows® desktop. Then, shut down your computer and try again. System Setup Screens The system setup screen displays current or changeable configuration information for your computer. Information on the screen is divided into three areas: the options list, active options field, and key functions. NOTICE: Unless you are an expert computer user, do not change the settings for this program. Certain changes can make your computer work incorrectly. NOTE: The F2 prompt indicates that the keyboard has initialized. This prompt can appear very quickly, so you must watch for it to display, and then press . If you press before you are prompted, this keystroke will be lost. Options List — This field appears on the left side of the system setup window. The field is a scrollable list containing features that define the configuration of your computer, including installed hardware, power conservation, and security features. Scroll up and down the list with the up- and downarrow keys. As an option is highlighted, the Option Field displays more information about that option and the option's current and available settings. By pressing or the left and right arrow keys, you can toggle between a primary topic (collapsed) and subtopics (expanded). Option Field — This field contains information about each option. In this field you can view your current settings and make changes to your settings. Use the right and left arrow keys to highlight an option. Press to make that selection active. Key Functions — This field appears below the Option System Setup Options Field and lists keys and their functions within the active system setup field. NOTE: Depending on your computer and installed devices, the items listed in this section may not appear, or may not appear exactly as listed. System Processor Info Displays the following information for the processor installed in the system: Processor Type, Processor Clock Speed, Processor Bus Speed, Processor Cache Size, Processor ID number, whether the processor is Hyperthreading Capable or multiple-core capable, and if the processor has 64-bit Technology. Memory Info Displays the amount of Installed Memory, Memory Speed, Memory Channel Mode, and a description of the Memory Technology. This option also displays a table that describes the memory size, whether the memory module is ECC capable, single or dual rank, type, and organization. PCI Info Displays the contents of each PCI slot. Date/Time Controls the system's internal calendar and clock. Boot Sequence (Diskette drive default) Determines the order in which the system searches for boot devices during system startup. NOTE: If you insert a boot device and restart the computer, this option appears in the system setup menu. To boot from a USB memory device, select the USB device and move it so it becomes the first device in the list. Drives Diskette Drive (Internal default) Enables and disables the floppy drives and sets read permission for the internal floppy drive. Off disables all floppy drives. USB enables the USB floppy drive. Internal enables the internal floppy drive. Read Only enables the internal drive controller and allows the internal floppy drive read-only permission. NOTE: Operating systems with USB support will recognize USB floppy drives regardless of this setting. Drives 0 through 3 (On default) Enables or disables an ATA or SATA device (such as hard-drive, CD drive, or DVD drive). On enables the interface so that the device can be used. Displays the Controller type (ATA or SATA), Port number the drive is using, Drive ID number, Capacity, and whether the drive is controlled by the BIOS. SATA Operation (Normal default) Determines the integrated SATA controller's operating mode: Normal – native mode, which provides the highest drive performance and optimal flexibility. Combination – combination mode, which offers compatibility with versions of the operating system that do not support SATA drives. Onboard Devices Integrated NIC (On default) Enables or disables the integrated NIC controller. Settings are On, Off, or On w/ PXE. When the On w/ PXE setting is active (available only for setting up a future boot process), the computer prompts you to press . Pressing this key combination causes a menu to display that allows you to select a method for booting from a network server. If a boot routine is not available from the network server, the computer attempts to boot from the next device in the boot sequence list. Integrated Audio Controller Enables or disables the onboard audio controller. Front USB Ports (On default) Enables or disables the front USB ports. USB for Flexbay (On default) On enables internal USB for FlexBay. NOTE: This USB option appears only if a FlexBay device is installed. Video Primary Video (Auto default) Specifies which video controller is primary when two video controllers are present on the computer. Auto enables the add-in video controller. Onboard enables the integrated video controller. Video Configures the system memory allocation reserved for the integrated video controller. Settings Memory Size (8 MB default) are 1MB and 8MB. Performance HyperThreading (On default) Determines whether the physical processor appears as one or two logical processors. The performance of some applications improve with additional logical processors installed. On enables hyperthreading. SpeedStep (On default) Enables SpeedStep for all supported processors in the computer. Hard Drive Acoustics (Bypass default) l Bypass (default) — Your computer does not test or change the current acoustics mode setting. l Quiet — The hard drive operates at its most quiet setting. l Suggested — The hard drive operates at the level suggested by the drive manufacturer. l Performance — The hard drive operates at its maximum speed. NOTE: Switching to performance mode will cause the drive heads to move faster, causing the hard drive to be noisier. However, some drives may not see an increase in data transfer rates. NOTE: Changing the acoustics setting does not alter your hard drive image. Security Admin Password (Not Set default) Displays the current status of your System Setup program's password security feature and allows you to verify and assign a new admin password. System Password (Not Set default) Displays the current status of the system's password security feature and allows a new system password to be assigned and verified. Password Changes Determines the interaction between the System password and the Admin password. Locked prevents a user without a valid Admin password from being able to modify the System password. Unlocked allows a user with a valid Admin password to modify the system password. Execute Disable (On default) Enables or disables Execute Disable memory protection technology. Power Management AC Recovery (Off default) Determines how the system responds when AC power is re-applied after a power loss. Off commands the system to stay off when the power is re-applied. You must press the front-panel power button before the system turns on. On commands the system to turn on when the power is re-applied. Last commands the system to return to the last power state the system was in just before it was turned off. Auto Power On (Off default) Sets the computer to automatically turn on. Off disables this feature. Everyday turns the computer on every day at the time set in Auto Power Time. Weekdays turns the computer on every day from Monday through Friday at the time set in Auto Power Time. NOTE: This feature does not work if you turn off your computer using a power strip or surge protector. Auto Power Time Sets time to automatically turn on the computer. Time is kept in the standard 12-hour format (hours:minutes). Change the startup time by pressing the right- or left-arrow key to increase or decrease the numbers, or type numbers in both the date and time fields. Suspend Mode Sets the computer's suspend mode. The options are S1, a suspend state where the computer is running in a low-power mode, and S3, a standby state where the power is reduced or turned off for most components, however, system memory remains active. Maintenance Load Defaults Restores System Setup options to their factory defaults. Event Log Allows you to view the Event Log. Entries are marked R for Read and U for Unread. Mark All Boot Sequence This feature allows you to change the boot sequence for devices. Option Settings l Diskette Drive — The computer attempts to boot from the floppy drive. If the floppy disk in the drive is not bootable, if no floppy disk is in the drive, or if there is no floppy drive installed in the computer, the computer generates an error message. l Hard Drive — The computer attempts to boot from the primary hard drive. If no operating system is on the drive, the computer generates an error message. l CD Drive — The computer attempts to boot from the CD drive. If no CD is in the drive, or if the CD has no operating system, the computer generates an error message. l USB Flash Device — Insert the memory device into a USB port and restart the computer. When F12 = Boot Menu appears in the upper-right corner of the screen, press . The BIOS detects the device and adds the USB flash option to the boot menu. Changing Boot Sequence for the Current Boot You can use this feature, for example, to restart your computer to a USB device such as a floppy drive, memory key, or CD-RW drive. 1. If you are booting to a USB device, connect the USB device to a USB connector (see "Front View of the Computer" and "Back View of the Computer"). 2. Turn on (or restart) your computer. 3. When F2 = Setup, F12 = Boot Menu appears in the upper-right corner of the screen, press . If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. The Boot Device Menu appears, listing all available boot devices. Each device has a number next to it. 4. At the bottom of the menu, enter the number of the device that is to be used for the current boot only. For example, if you are booting to a USB memory key, highlight USB Flash Device and press . Changing Boot Sequence for Future Boots 1. Enter system setup. Entries Read puts an R to the left of all the entries. Clear Log clears the Event Log. POST Behavior Fastboot (On default) When enabled, this feature reduces computer startup time by bypassing some compatibility steps. Off does not skip any steps during computer startup. On starts the system more quickly. Numlock Key (On default) Determines the functionality of the numeric keys on the right side of your keyboard. Off commands the right keypad keys to function as arrows. On commands the right keypad keys to function as numbers. POST Hotkeys Determines whether the sign-on screen displays a message stating the keystroke sequence that is required to enter the Setup program or the Quickboot feature. Setup & Boot Menu displays both messages (F2=Setup and F12=Boot Menu). Setup displays the setup message only (F2=Setup). Boot Menu displays the Quickboot message only (F12=Boot Menu). None displays no message. Keyboard Errors When set to Report (enabled) and an error is detected during POST, the BIOS will display the error message and prompt you to press to continue or press to enter System Setup. When set to Do Not Report (disabled) and an error is detected during POST, the BIOS will display the error message and continue booting the system. NOTE: To boot to a USB device, the device must be bootable. To make sure that your device is bootable, check the device documentation. NOTE: If you are booting to a USB floppy drive, you must first set the floppy drive to OFF in system setup. NOTE: To boot to a USB device, the device must be bootable. To make sure your device is bootable, check the device documentation.2. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Boot Sequence menu option and press to access the menu. 3. Press the up- and down-arrow keys to move through the list of devices. 4. Press the spacebar to enable or disable a device (enabled devices have a checkmark). 5. Press plus (+) or minus (–) to move a selected device up or down the list. Clearing Forgotten Passwords 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Locate the 3-pin password jumper (PSWD) on the system board, and attach the jumper plug to pins 2 and 3 to clear the password. 3. Close the computer cover. 4. Connect your computer and monitor to electrical outlets, and turn them on. 5. After the Microsoft® Windows® desktop appears on your computer, shut down your computer. Turn off the monitor and disconnect it from the electrical outlet. 6. Disconnect the computer power cable from the electrical outlet, and press the power button to ground the system board. 7. Open the computer cover. 8. Locate the 3-pin password jumper (PSWD) on the system board and attach the jumper to pins 1 and 2 to re-enable the password feature. 9. Close the computer cover. 10. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. NOTE: Write down your current boot sequence in case you want to restore it. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTE: When you receive your computer, the jumper plug is attached to pins 1 and 2. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.Clearing CMOS Settings 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Reset the current CMOS settings: a. Locate the 3-pin CMOS jumper (RTCRST) on the system board. b. Remove the jumper plug from pins 2 and 3. c. Place the jumper plug on pins 1 and 2 and wait for approximately 5 seconds. d. Replace the jumper plug on pins 2 and 3. 3. Close the computer cover. 4. Connect your computer and devices Back to Contents Page CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.Back to Contents Page System Setup Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual Overview Entering System Setup System Setup Options Boot Sequence Clearing Forgotten Passwords Clearing CMOS Settings Overview Use system setup as follows: l To change the system configuration information after you add, change, or remove any hardware in your computer l To set or change a user-selectable option such as the user password l To read the current amount of memory or set the type of hard drive installed Before you use system setup, it is recommended that you write down the system setup screen information for future reference. Entering System Setup 1. Turn on (or restart) your computer. 2. When the blue DELL™ logo is displayed, you must watch for the F2 prompt to appear.  3. Once this F2 prompt appears, press immediately. 4. If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft® Windows® desktop. Then, shut down your computer and try again. System Setup Screens The system setup screen displays current or changeable configuration information for your computer. Information on the screen is divided into three areas: the options list, active options field, and key functions. NOTICE: Unless you are an expert computer user, do not change the settings for this program. Certain changes can make your computer work incorrectly. NOTE: The F2 prompt indicates that the keyboard has initialized. This prompt can appear very quickly, so you must watch for it to display, and then press . If you press before you are prompted, this keystroke will be lost. Options List — This field appears on the left side of the system setup window. The field is a scrollable list containing features that define the configuration of your computer, including installed hardware, power conservation, and security features. Scroll up and down the list with the up- and downarrow keys. As an option is highlighted, the Option Field displays more information about that option and the option's current and available settings. By pressing or the left and right arrow keys, you can toggle between a primary topic (collapsed) and subtopics (expanded). Option Field — This field contains information about each option. In this field you can view your current settings and make changes to your settings. Use the right and left arrow keys to highlight an option. Press to make that selection active.System Setup Options Key Functions — This field appears below the Option Field and lists keys and their functions within the active system setup field. NOTE: Depending on your computer and installed devices, the items listed in this section may not appear, or may not appear exactly as listed. System Processor Info Displays the following information for the processor installed in the system: Processor Type, Processor Clock Speed, Processor Bus Speed, Processor Cache Size, Processor ID number, whether the processor is Hyperthreading Capable or multiple-core capable, and if the processor has 64-bit Technology. Memory Info Displays the amount of Installed Memory, Memory Speed, Memory Channel Mode, and a description of the Memory Technology. This option also displays a table that describes the memory size, whether the memory module is ECC capable, single or dual rank, type, and organization. PCI Info Displays the contents of each PCI slot. Date/Time Controls the system's internal calendar and clock. Boot Sequence (Diskette drive default) Determines the order in which the system searches for boot devices during system startup. NOTE: If you insert a boot device and restart the computer, this option appears in the system setup menu. To boot from a USB memory device, select the USB device and move it so it becomes the first device in the list. Drives Diskette Drive (Internal default) Enables and disables the floppy drives and sets read permission for the internal floppy drive. Off disables all floppy drives. USB enables the USB floppy drive. Internal enables the internal floppy drive. Read Only enables the internal drive controller and allows the internal floppy drive read-only permission. NOTE: Operating systems with USB support will recognize USB floppy drives regardless of this setting. Drives 0 through 3 (On default) Enables or disables an ATA or SATA device (such as hard-drive, CD drive, or DVD drive). On enables the interface so that the device can be used. Displays the Controller type (ATA or SATA), Port number the drive is using, Drive ID number, Capacity, and whether the drive is controlled by the BIOS. SATA Operation (Normal default) Determines the integrated SATA controller's operating mode: Normal – native mode, which provides the highest drive performance and optimal flexibility. Combination – combination mode, which offers compatibility with versions of the operating system that do not support SATA drives. Onboard Devices Integrated NIC (On default) Enables or disables the integrated NIC controller. Settings are On, Off, or On w/ PXE. When the On w/ PXE setting is active (available only for setting up a future boot process), the computer prompts you to press . Pressing this key combination causes a menu to display that allows you to select a method for booting from a network server. If a boot routine is not available from the network server, the computer attempts to boot from the next device in the boot sequence list. Integrated Audio Controller Enables or disables the onboard audio controller. Front USB Ports (On default) Enables or disables the front USB ports. USB for Flexbay (On default) On enables internal USB for FlexBay. NOTE: This USB option appears only if a FlexBay device is installed. Video Primary Video (Auto Specifies which video controller is primary when two video controllers are present on the computer. Auto enables the add-in video controller. Onboard enables the integrated video controller.default) Video Memory Size (8 MB default) Configures the system memory allocation reserved for the integrated video controller. Settings are 1MB and 8MB. Performance HyperThreading (On default) Determines whether the physical processor appears as one or two logical processors. The performance of some applications improve with additional logical processors installed. On enables hyperthreading. SpeedStep (On default) Enables SpeedStep for all supported processors in the computer. Hard Drive Acoustics (Bypass default) l Bypass (default) — Your computer does not test or change the current acoustics mode setting. l Quiet — The hard drive operates at its most quiet setting. l Suggested — The hard drive operates at the level suggested by the drive manufacturer. l Performance — The hard drive operates at its maximum speed. NOTE: Switching to performance mode will cause the drive heads to move faster, causing the hard drive to be noisier. However, some drives may not see an increase in data transfer rates. NOTE: Changing the acoustics setting does not alter your hard drive image. Security Admin Password (Not Set default) Displays the current status of your System Setup program's password security feature and allows you to verify and assign a new admin password. System Password (Not Set default) Displays the current status of the system's password security feature and allows a new system password to be assigned and verified. Password Changes Determines the interaction between the System password and the Admin password. Locked prevents a user without a valid Admin password from being able to modify the System password. Unlocked allows a user with a valid Admin password to modify the system password. Execute Disable (On default) Enables or disables Execute Disable memory protection technology. Power Management AC Recovery (Off default) Determines how the system responds when AC power is re-applied after a power loss. Off commands the system to stay off when the power is re-applied. You must press the front-panel power button before the system turns on. On commands the system to turn on when the power is re-applied. Last commands the system to return to the last power state the system was in just before it was turned off. Auto Power On (Off default) Sets the computer to automatically turn on. Off disables this feature. Everyday turns the computer on every day at the time set in Auto Power Time. Weekdays turns the computer on every day from Monday through Friday at the time set in Auto Power Time. NOTE: This feature does not work if you turn off your computer using a power strip or surge protector. Auto Power Time Sets time to automatically turn on the computer. Time is kept in the standard 12-hour format (hours:minutes). Change the startup time by pressing the right- or left-arrow key to increase or decrease the numbers, or type numbers in both the date and time fields. Suspend Mode Sets the computer's suspend mode. The options are S1, a suspend state where the computer is running in a low-power mode, and S3, a standby state where the power is reduced or turned off for most components, however, system memory remains active. Maintenance Load Defaults Restores System Setup options to their factory defaults.Boot Sequence This feature allows you to change the boot sequence for devices. Option Settings l Diskette Drive — The computer attempts to boot from the floppy drive. If the floppy disk in the drive is not bootable, if no floppy disk is in the drive, or if there is no floppy drive installed in the computer, the computer generates an error message. l Hard Drive — The computer attempts to boot from the primary hard drive. If no operating system is on the drive, the computer generates an error message. l CD Drive — The computer attempts to boot from the CD drive. If no CD is in the drive, or if the CD has no operating system, the computer generates an error message. l USB Flash Device — Insert the memory device into a USB port and restart the computer. When F12 = Boot Menu appears in the upper-right corner of the screen, press . The BIOS detects the device and adds the USB flash option to the boot menu. Changing Boot Sequence for the Current Boot You can use this feature, for example, to restart your computer to a USB device such as a floppy drive, memory key, or CD-RW drive. 1. If you are booting to a USB device, connect the USB device to a USB connector (see "Front View of the Computer" and "Back View of the Computer"). 2. Turn on (or restart) your computer. 3. When F2 = Setup, F12 = Boot Menu appears in the upper-right corner of the screen, press . If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. The Boot Device Menu appears, listing all available boot devices. Each device has a number next to it. 4. At the bottom of the menu, enter the number of the device that is to be used for the current boot only. For example, if you are booting to a USB memory key, highlight USB Flash Device and press . Changing Boot Sequence for Future Boots Event Log Allows you to view the Event Log. Entries are marked R for Read and U for Unread. Mark All Entries Read puts an R to the left of all the entries. Clear Log clears the Event Log. POST Behavior Fastboot (On default) When enabled, this feature reduces computer startup time by bypassing some compatibility steps. Off does not skip any steps during computer startup. On starts the system more quickly. Numlock Key (On default) Determines the functionality of the numeric keys on the right side of your keyboard. Off commands the right keypad keys to function as arrows. On commands the right keypad keys to function as numbers. POST Hotkeys Determines whether the sign-on screen displays a message stating the keystroke sequence that is required to enter the Setup program or the Quickboot feature. Setup & Boot Menu displays both messages (F2=Setup and F12=Boot Menu). Setup displays the setup message only (F2=Setup). Boot Menu displays the Quickboot message only (F12=Boot Menu). None displays no message. Keyboard Errors When set to Report (enabled) and an error is detected during POST, the BIOS will display the error message and prompt you to press to continue or press to enter System Setup. When set to Do Not Report (disabled) and an error is detected during POST, the BIOS will display the error message and continue booting the system. NOTE: To boot to a USB device, the device must be bootable. To make sure that your device is bootable, check the device documentation. NOTE: If you are booting to a USB floppy drive, you must first set the floppy drive to OFF in system setup. NOTE: To boot to a USB device, the device must be bootable. To make sure your device is bootable, check the device documentation.1. Enter system setup. 2. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Boot Sequence menu option and press to access the menu. 3. Press the up- and down-arrow keys to move through the list of devices. 4. Press the spacebar to enable or disable a device (enabled devices have a checkmark). 5. Press plus (+) or minus (–) to move a selected device up or down the list. Clearing Forgotten Passwords 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Locate the 3-pin password jumper (PSWD) on the system board, and attach the jumper plug to pins 2 and 3 to clear the password. 3. Close the computer cover. 4. Connect your computer and monitor to electrical outlets, and turn them on. 5. After the Microsoft® Windows® desktop appears on your computer, shut down your computer. Turn off the monitor and disconnect it from the electrical outlet. 6. Disconnect the computer power cable from the electrical outlet, and press the power button to ground the system board. 7. Open the computer cover. 8. Locate the 3-pin password jumper (PSWD) on the system board and attach the jumper to pins 1 and 2 to re-enable the password feature. 9. Close the computer cover. NOTE: Write down your current boot sequence in case you want to restore it. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTE: When you receive your computer, the jumper plug is attached to pins 1 and 2. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.10. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Clearing CMOS Settings 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Reset the current CMOS settings: a. Locate the 3-pin CMOS jumper (RTCRST) on the system board. b. Remove the jumper plug from pins 2 and 3. c. Place the jumper plug on pins 1 and 2 and wait for approximately 5 seconds. d. Replace the jumper plug on pins 2 and 3. 3. Close the computer cover. 4. Connect your computer and devices Back to Contents Page CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.Back to Contents Page Specifications Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual Processor Expansion Bus Memory Connectors Computer Information Controls and Lights Video Power Audio Physical Drives Environmental Processor Processor type Intel® Pentium® 4 5XXX and 6XXX processors with Hyper-Threading technology NOTE: Not all Pentium 4 processors support HyperThreading technology. Level 1 (L1) cache 16 KB Level 2 (L2) cache 1 MB for Pentium 5XXX processors 2 MB for Pentium 6XXX processors (depending on your computer configuration) pipelined-burst, eight-way set associative, write-back SRAM Memory Type 400-MHz and 533-MHz DDR2 unbuffered SDRAM Memory connectors four Memory capacities 256 MB, 512 MB, or 1 GB non-ECC Maximum memory 4 GB NOTE: See "Addressing Memory With 4-GB Configurations" to verify the amount of memory available to the operating system. BIOS address F0000h Computer Information  Chipset Intel 945G Express DMA channels eight Interrupt levels 24 BIOS chip (NVRAM) 4 Mb NIC Integrated network interface capable of 10/100 communication System clock 800- or 1066-MHz data rate Video Type Integrated Intel Graphics Media Accelerator 950 (GMA950) Audio Type Sigmatel STAC9220 Expansion Bus  Bus type PCI 2.3 PCI Express x1 and x16 Bus speed PCI: 33 MHz PCI Express: x1 slot bidirectional speed - 500 MB/s x16 slot bidirectional speed - 8 GB/s PCI connectors twoconnector size 120 pins connector data width (maximum) 32 bits PCI Express connector one x1 connector size 36 pins connector data width (maximum) 1 PCI Express lane PCI Express connector one x16 connector size 164 pins connector data width (maximum) 16 PCI Express lanes Drives  Externally accessible: one 3.5-inch FlexBay (may contain an optional floppy drive or an optional Media Card Reader) two 5.25-inch drive bays Available devices Serial ATA drives (2), floppy drive, USB memory devices, CD drive, CD-RW drive, DVD drive, DVD-RW drive, DVD and CD-RW combo drive, and Media Card Reader Internally accessible: two bays for 1-inch high serial ATA hard drives Connectors External connectors: Video 15-hole connector Network adapter RJ-45 connector USB two front-panel and five back-panel USB 2.0- compliant connectors Audio five connectors for line-in, line-out, microphone/ sidesurround, surround, and center/subwoofer connector (LFE channel); two front-panel connectors for headphones and microphone System board connectors: Primary IDE drive one 40-pin connector Serial ATA two 7-pin connectors FlexBay Drive one USB 10-pin header for optional Media Card Reader (3.5-inch bay device) Floppy drive one 33-pin connector Fan one 5-pin connectors PCI 2.3 two 120-pin connectors PCI Express x1 one 36-pin connector PCI Express x16 one 164-pin connector Controls and Lights  Power button push button Power light green light — Blinking green in sleep state; solid green for power-on state. amber light — Blinking amber indicates a problem with the power supply inside the computer. If the system cannot boot and there is a solid amber light, this indicates a problem with the system board (see "Power Problems" in your computer Owner's Manual). Hard-drive access light green Link integrity light (on integrated network adapter) green light — A good connection exists between a 10-Mbps network and the computer. orange light — A good connection exists between a 100-Mbps network and the computer. off (no light) — The computer is not detecting a physical connection to the network. Activity light (on integrated network adapter) yellow blinking light Diagnostic lights four lights on the front panel (see "Diagnostic Lights") Standby power light AUX_PWR on the system board Power DC power supply:Back to Contents Page Wattage 305 W Heat dissipation 1039 BTU/hr Voltage (see the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide for important voltage setting information) 90 to 135 V and 180 to 265 V at 50/60 Hz Backup battery 3-V CR2032 lithium coin cell Physical Height 41.4 cm (16.3 inches) Width 18.8 cm (7.4 inches) Depth 45.7 cm (18.0 inches) Weight 12.7 kg (28 lb) Environmental  Temperature: Operating 10° to 35°C (50° to 95°F) Storage –40° to 65°C (–40° to 149°F) Relative humidity 20% to 80% (noncondensing) Maximum vibration: Operating 0.25 G at 3 to 200 Hz at 0.5 octave/min Storage 0.5 G at 3 to 200 Hz at 1 octave/min Maximum shock: Operating bottom half-sine pulse with a change in velocity of 20 inches/sec (50.8 cm/sec) Storage 27-G faired square wave with a velocity change of 200 inches/sec (508 cm/sec) Altitude: Operating –15.2 to 3048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft) Storage –15.2 to 10,668 m (–50 to 35,000 ft)Back to Contents Page Specifications Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual Processor Memory Computer Information  Video Audio Drives  Expansion Bus  Connectors Controls and Lights  Power Physical Environmental  Processor Processor type Intel® Pentium® 4 5XXX and 6XXX processors with Hyper-Threading technology NOTE: Not all Pentium 4 processors support HyperThreading technology. Level 1 (L1) cache 16 KB Level 2 (L2) cache 1 MB for Pentium 5XXX processors 2 MB for Pentium 6XXX processors (depending on your computer configuration) pipelined-burst, eight-way set associative, write-back SRAM Memory Type 400-MHz and 533-MHz DDR2 unbuffered SDRAM Memory connectors four Memory capacities 256 MB, 512 MB, or 1 GB non-ECC Maximum memory 4 GB NOTE: See "Addressing Memory With 4-GB Configurations" to verify the amount of memory available to the operating system. BIOS address F0000h Computer Information  Chipset Intel 945G Express DMA channels eight Interrupt levels 24 BIOS chip (NVRAM) 4 Mb NIC Integrated network interface capable of 10/100 communication System clock 800- or 1066-MHz data rate Video Type Integrated Intel Graphics Media Accelerator 950 (GMA950) Audio Type Sigmatel STAC9220 Expansion Bus  Bus type PCI 2.3 PCI Express x1 and x16 Bus speed PCI: 33 MHz PCI Express: x1 slot bidirectional speed - 500 MB/s x16 slot bidirectional speed - 8 GB/s PCIconnectors two connector size 120 pins connector data width (maximum) 32 bits PCI Express connector one x1 connector size 36 pins connector data width (maximum) 1 PCI Express lane PCI Express connector one x16 connector size 164 pins connector data width (maximum) 16 PCI Express lanes Drives  Externally accessible: one 3.5-inch FlexBay (may contain an optional floppy drive or an optional Media Card Reader) two 5.25-inch drive bays Available devices Serial ATA drives (2), floppy drive, USB memory devices, CD drive, CD-RW drive, DVD drive, DVD-RW drive, DVD and CD-RW combo drive, and Media Card Reader Internally accessible: two bays for 1-inch high serial ATA hard drives Connectors External connectors: Video 15-hole connector Network adapter RJ-45 connector USB two front-panel and five back-panel USB 2.0- compliant connectors Audio five connectors for line-in, line-out, microphone/ sidesurround, surround, and center/subwoofer connector (LFE channel); two front-panel connectors for headphones and microphone System board connectors: Primary IDE drive one 40-pin connector Serial ATA two 7-pin connectors FlexBay Drive one USB 10-pin header for optional Media Card Reader (3.5-inch bay device) Floppy drive one 33-pin connector Fan one 5-pin connector PCI 2.3 two 120-pin connectors PCI Express x1 one 36-pin connector PCI Express x16 one 164-pin connector Controls and Lights  Power button push button Power light green light — Blinking green in sleep state; solid green for power-on state. amber light — Blinking amber indicates a problem with the power supply inside the computer. If the system cannot boot and there is a solid amber light, this indicates a problem with the system board (see "Power Problems" in your computer Owner's Manual). Hard-drive access light green Link integrity light (on integrated network adapter) green light — A good connection exists between a 10-Mbps network and the computer. orange light — A good connection exists between a 100-Mbps network and the computer. off (no light) — The computer is not detecting a physical connection to the network. Activity light (on integrated network adapter) yellow blinking light Diagnostic lights four lights on the front panel (see "Diagnostic Lights") Standby power light AUX_PWR on the system boardBack to Contents Page Power DC power supply: Wattage 305 W Heat dissipation 1039 BTU/hr Voltage (see the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide for important voltage setting information) 90 to 135 V and 180 to 265 V at 50/60 Hz Backup battery 3-V CR2032 lithium coin cell Physical Height 41.3 cm (16.3 inches) Width 18.7 cm (7.4 inches) Depth 45.9 cm (18.0 inches) Weight 14.2 kg (32 lb) Environmental  Temperature: Operating 10° to 35°C (50° to 95°F) Storage –40° to 65°C (–40° to 149°F) Relative humidity 20% to 80% (noncondensing) Maximum vibration: Operating 0.25 G at 3 to 200 Hz at 0.5 octave/min Storage 0.5 G at 3 to 200 Hz at 1 octave/min Maximum shock: Operating bottom half-sine pulse with a change in velocity of 20 inches/sec (50.8 cm/sec) Storage 27-G faired square wave with a velocity change of 200 inches/sec (508 cm/sec) Altitude: Operating –15.2 to 3048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft) Storage –15.2 to 10,668 m (–50 to 35,000 ft)Back to Contents Page Technical Overview Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual Inside View of Your Computer System Board Components Power Supply DC Connector Pin Assignments Inside View of Your Computer Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." System Board Components CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.Power Supply DC Connector Pin Assignments DC Main Power Connector P1 DC Processor Power Connector P2 DC Peripheral Connectors P3 and P5 DC FDD Connector P7 Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire 1 +3.3 VDC* Orange 2 +3.3 VDC* Orange 3 COM Black 4 +5VDC Red 5 COM Black 6 +5 VDC Red 7 COM Black 8 POK Gray 9 +5 VFP Purple 10 +12 VBDC White 11 +12 VBDC White 12 +3.3 VDC* Orange 13 +3.3 VDC*/SE* Orange 14 –12 VDC Blue 15 COM Black 16 PS-ON Green 17 COM Black 18 COM Black 19 COM Black 20 NA NA 21 +5 VDC Red 22 +5 VDC Red 23 +5 VDC Red 24 COM Black *The orange +3.3 VDC output wires must be 16 AWG. The +3.3 VDC terminals are high current type (9 A current rating/Molex-HCS type). *The +3.3VDC/SE is a brown sense wire for +3.3VDC and is optional. Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire 1 COM Black 2 COM Black 3 +12 VADC Yellow 4 +12 VADC Yellow Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire 1 +3.3 VDC Orange 2 COM Black 3 +5 VADC Red 4 COM Black 5 +12 VBDC White Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire 1 +5 VDC Red 2 COM Black 3 COM Black 4 +12 VADC YellowDC Peripheral Connectors P8 and P9 Back to Contents Page Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire 1 +12 VBDC White 2 COM Black 3 COM Black 4 +5 VDC RedBack to Contents Page Technical Overview Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual Inside View of Your Computer System Board Components Power Supply DC Connector Pin Assignments Inside View of Your Computer System Board Components CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.Power Supply DC Connector Pin Assignments DC Main Power Connector P1 DC Processor Power Connector P2 DC Peripheral Connectors P3 and P5 DC FDD Connector P7 Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire 1 +3.3 VDC* Orange 2 +3.3 VDC* Orange 3 COM Black 4 +5VDC Red 5 COM Black 6 +5 VDC Red 7 COM Black 8 POK Gray 9 +5 VFP Purple 10 +12 VBDC White 11 +12 VBDC White 12 +3.3 VDC* Orange 13 +3.3 VDC*/SE* Orange 14 –12 VDC Blue 15 COM Black 16 PS-ON Green 17 COM Black 18 COM Black 19 COM Black 20 NA NA 21 +5 VDC Red 22 +5 VDC Red 23 +5 VDC Red 24 COM Black *The orange +3.3 VDC output wires must be 16 AWG. The +3.3 VDC terminals are high current type (9 A current rating/Molex-HCS type). *The +3.3VDC/SE is a brown sense wire for +3.3VDC and is optional. Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire 1 COM Black 2 COM Black 3 +12 VADC Yellow 4 +12 VADC Yellow Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire 1 +3.3 VDC Orange 2 COM Black 3 +5 VADC Red 4 COM Black 5 +12 VBDC White Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire 1 +5 VDC Red 2 COM Black 3 COM Black 4 +12 VADC YellowDC Peripheral Connectors P8 and P9 Back to Contents Page Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire 1 +12 VBDC White 2 COM Black 3 COM Black 4 +5 VDC RedBack to Contents Page Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual If you purchased a Dell™ n Series computer, any references in this document to Microsoft® Windows® operating systems are not applicable. Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2005 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, and Dimension are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation; Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Model DCSM September 2005     Rev. A01 Back to Contents Page NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.Back to Contents Page Advanced Troubleshooting Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual Dell Diagnostics System Lights Diagnostic Lights Beep Codes Dell Diagnostics When to Use the Dell Diagnostics If you experience a problem with your computer, perform the checks in this section and run the Dell Diagnostics before you contact Dell for technical assistance. It is recommended that you print these procedures before you begin. Enter system setup to review your computer's configuration information, and ensure that the device you want to test displays in system setup and is active. Start the Dell Diagnostics from either your hard drive or from the optional Drivers and Utilities CD (ResourceCD). Starting the Dell Diagnostics From Your Hard Drive 1. Turn on (or restart) your computer. 2. When the DELL™ logo appears, press  immediately.  If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft® Windows® desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. 3. When the boot device list appears, highlight Boot to Utility Partition and press . 4. When the Dell Diagnostics Main Menu appears, select the test you want to run. Starting the Dell Diagnostics From the Optional Drivers and Utilities CD 1. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD. 2. Shut down and restart the computer. When the DELL logo appears, press immediately. If you wait too long and the Windows logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. 3. When the boot device list appears, highlight IDE CD-ROM Device and press . 4. Select the IDE CD-ROM Device option from the CD boot menu. 5. Select the Boot from CD-ROM option from the menu that appears. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTE: The Drivers and Utilities CD (ResourceCD) is optional, and as such, may not ship with all computers. NOTICE: The Dell Diagnostics works only on Dell™ computers. NOTE: If you see a message stating that no diagnostics utility partition has been found, run the Dell Diagnostics from your (optional) Drivers and Utilities CD. NOTE: The next steps change the boot sequence for one time only. On the next start-up, the computer boots according to the devices specified in system setup.6. Type 1 to start the ResourceCD menu. 7. Type 2 to start the Dell Diagnostics. 8. Select Run the 32 Bit Dell Diagnostics from the numbered list. If multiple versions are listed, select the version appropriate for your computer. 9. When the Dell Diagnostics Main Menu appears, select the test you want to run. Dell Diagnostics Main Menu 1. After the Dell Diagnostics loads and the Main Menu screen appears, click the button for the option you want. 2. If a problem is encountered during a test, a message appears with an error code and a description of the problem. Write down the error code and problem description and follow the instructions on the screen. If you cannot resolve the error condition, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). 3. If you run a test from the Custom Test or Symptom Tree option, click the applicable tab described in the following table for more information. 4. When the tests are completed, if you are running the Dell Diagnostics from the Drivers and Utilities CD, remove the CD. 5. Close the test screen to return to the Main Menu screen. To exit the Dell Diagnostics and restart the computer, close the Main Menu screen. System Lights Your power button light and hard-drive activity light may indicate a computer problem. Option Function Express Test Performs a quick test of devices. This test typically takes 10 to 20 minutes and requires no interaction on your part. Run Express Test first to increase the possibility of tracing the problem quickly. Extended Test Performs a thorough check of devices. This test typically takes 1 hour or more and requires you to answer questions periodically. Custom Test Tests a specific device. You can customize the tests you want to run. Symptom Tree Lists the most common symptoms encountered and allows you to select a test based on the symptom of the problem you are having. NOTE: The Service Tag for your computer is located at the top of each test screen. If you contact Dell, technical support will ask for your Service Tag. Your computer's Service Tag is listed in the system information option in system setup. Tab Function Results Displays the results of the test and any error conditions encountered. Errors Displays error conditions encountered, error codes, and the problem description. Help Describes the test and may indicate requirements for running the test. Configuration Displays your hardware configuration for the selected device. The Dell Diagnostics obtains configuration information for all devices from system setup, memory, and various internal tests, and it displays the information in the device list in the left pane of the screen. The device list may not display the names of all the components installed on your computer or all devices attached to your computer. Parameters Allows you to customize the test by changing the test settings. Power Light Problem Description Suggested Resolution Solid green Power is on, and the computer is operating normally. No corrective action is required. Blinking green The computer is in the suspended state (Microsoft® Windows® 2000 and Windows XP). Press the power button, move the mouse, or press a key on the keyboard to wake the computer. Blinks green several times and then turns off A configuration error exists. Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. Solid amber The Dell Diagnostics is running a test, or a device on the system board may be faulty or incorrectly installed. If the Dell Diagnostics is running, allow the testing to complete. Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. Diagnostic Lights To help you troubleshoot a problem, your computer has four diagnostic lights labeled "1," "2," "3," and "4" on the front panel. When the computer starts normally, the lights flash. After the computer starts, all four lights display solid green. If the computer malfunctions, the color and sequence of the lights identify the problem.the patterns or codes on the lights change as the boot process completes. If the POST portion of system boot completes successfully, all four lights display solid green. If the computer malfunctions during the POST process, the pattern displayed on the lights may help identify where in the process the computer halted. If the computer does not boot, contact Dell for technical assistance (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). Blinking amber A power supply or system board failure has occurred. Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. Also, see "Power Problems" in your computer Owner's Manual. Solid green and a beep code during POST A problem was detected while the BIOS was executing. See "Beep Codes" for instructions on diagnosing the beep code. Also, check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. Solid green power light and no beep code and no video during POST The monitor or the graphics card may be faulty or incorrectly installed. Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. See "Video and Power Problems" in your computer Owner's Manual. Solid green power light and no beep code but the computer locks up during POST An integrated system board device may be faulty. Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. If the problem is not identified, contact Dell for technical assistance. See your computer Owner's Manual for information on how to contact Dell. Hard-Drive Activity Light Problem Description Suggested Resolution Solid green The hard-drive activity light is on when the computer reads data from or writes data to the hard drive. The light might also be on when a device such as a CD player is operating. No corrective action is required. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. Light Pattern  Problem Description Suggested Resolution The computer is in a normal "off" condition, has successfully booted to the operating system, or a possible pre-BIOS failure has occurred. Plug the computer into a working electrical outlet and press the power button. Also see "Power Problems" in your computer Owner's Manual. A possible processor failure has occurred. Contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). Memory modules are detected, but a memory failure has occurred. l If you have two or more memory modules installed, remove the modules, reinstall one module, and then restart the computer. If the computer starts normally, reinstall an additional module. Continue until you have identified a faulty module or reinstalled all modules without error. l If available, install properly working memory of the same type into your computer. l If the problem persists, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). A possible graphics card failure has occurred. l If the computer has a graphics card, remove the card, and then restart the computer. l If the problem still exists, install a graphics card that you know works and restart the computer. l If the problem persists or the computer has integrated graphics, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). A possible floppy or hard drive failure has occurred. Reseat all power and data cables and restart the computer. A possible USB failure has occurred. Reinstall all USB devices, check cable connections, and then restart the computer. No memory modules are detected. l If you have two or more memory modules installed, remove the modules, reinstall one module, and then restart the computer. If the computer starts normally, reinstall an additional module. Continue until you have identified a faulty module or reinstalled all modules without error. l If available, install properly working memory of the same type into your computer. l If the problem persists, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). Memory modules are detected, but a memory configuration or compatibility error exists. l Ensure that no special memory module/memory connector placement requirements exist (see "Memory"). l Verify that the memory modules that you are installing are compatible with your computer (see "Memory"). l If the problem persists, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell).Beep Codes Your computer might emit a series of beeps during start-up if the monitor cannot display errors or problems. This series of beeps, called a beep code, identifies a problem. One possible beep code (code 1-3-1) consists of one beep, a burst of three beeps, and then one beep. This beep code tells you that the computer encountered a memory problem. If your computer beeps during start-up: 1. Write down the beep code. 2. Run the Dell Diagnostics to identify a more serious cause. 3. Contact Dell for technical assistance (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). A possible expansion card failure has occurred. 1. Determine if a conflict exists by removing a card (not a graphics card) (see "Cards") and restarting the computer. 2. If the problem persists, reinstall the card that you removed, remove a different card, and then restart the computer. 3. Repeat this process for each card. If the computer starts normally, troubleshoot the last card removed from the computer for resource conflicts (see "Resolving Software and Hardware Compatibilities" in your computer Owner's Manual). 4. If the problem persists, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). Another failure has occurred. l Ensure that the cables are properly connected to the system board from the hard drive, CD drive, and DVD drive (see "System Board Components"). l If there is an error message on your screen identifying a problem with a device (such as the floppy drive or hard drive), check the device to ensure that it is functioning properly. l The operating system is attempting to boot from a device (such as the floppy drive or hard drive); check system setup to ensure that the boot sequence is correct for the devices installed on your computer. l Check the computer message that appears on your monitor screen. l If the problem persists, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). The computer is in a normal operating condition after POST. NOTE: The diagnostic lights are not lit after the system successfully boots to the operating system. None. Code Cause 1-1-2 Microprocessor register failure 1-1-3 NVRAM read/write failure 1-1-4 ROM BIOS checksum failure 1-2-1 Programmable interval timer failure 1-2-2 DMA initialization failure 1-2-3 DMA page register read/write failure 1-3 Video Memory Test failure 1-3-1 through 2-4-4 Memory not being properly identified or used 3-1-1 Slave DMA register failure 3-1-2 Master DMA register failure 3-1-3 Master interrupt mask register failure 3-1-4 Slave interrupt mask register failure 3-2-2 Interrupt vector loading failure 3-2-4 Keyboard Controller Test failure 3-3-1 NVRAM power loss 3-3-2 Invalid NVRAM configuration 3-3-4 Video Memory Test failure 3-4-1 Screen initialization failure 3-4-2 Screen retrace failure 3-4-3 Search for video ROM failure 4-2-1 No timer tick 4-2-2 Shutdown failure 4-2-3 Gate A20 failureBack to Contents Page 4-2-4 Unexpected interrupt in protected mode 4-3-1 Memory failure above address 0FFFFh 4-3-3 Timer-chip counter 2 failure 4-3-4 Time-of-day clock stopped 4-4-1 Serial or parallel port test failure 4-4-2 Failure to decompress code to shadowed memory 4-4-3 Math-coprocessor test failure 4-4-4 Cache test failureBack to Contents Page Advanced Troubleshooting Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual Dell Diagnostics System Lights Diagnostic Lights Beep Codes Dell Diagnostics When to Use the Dell Diagnostics If you experience a problem with your computer, perform the checks in this section and run the Dell Diagnostics before you contact Dell for technical assistance. Start the Dell Diagnostics from either your hard drive or from the optional Drivers and Utilities CD (ResourceCD). Starting the Dell Diagnostics From Your Hard Drive 1. Turn on (or restart) your computer. 2. When the DELL™ logo appears, press  immediately.  If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft® Windows® desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. 3. When the boot device list appears, highlight Boot to Utility Partition and press . 4. When the Dell Diagnostics Main Menu appears, select the test you want to run. Starting the Dell Diagnostics From the Optional Drivers and Utilities CD 1. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD. 2. Shut down and restart the computer. When the DELL logo appears, press immediately. If you wait too long and the Windows logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. 3. When the boot device list appears, highlight IDE CD-ROM Device and press . 4. Select the IDE CD-ROM Device option from the CD boot menu. 5. Select the Boot from CD-ROM option from the menu that appears. 6. Type 1 to start the ResourceCD menu. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTE: The Drivers and Utilities CD (ResourceCD) is optional, and as such, may not ship with all computers. NOTICE: The Dell Diagnostics works only on Dell™ computers. . NOTE: If you see a message stating that no diagnostics utility partition has been found, run the Dell Diagnostics from your (optional) Drivers and Utilities CD. NOTE: The next steps change the boot sequence for one time only. On the next start-up, the computer boots according to the devices specified in system setup.7. Type 2 to start the Dell Diagnostics. 8. Select Run the 32 Bit Dell Diagnostics from the numbered list. If multiple versions are listed, select the version appropriate for your computer. 9. When the Dell Diagnostics Main Menu appears, select the test you want to run. Dell Diagnostics Main Menu 1. After the Dell Diagnostics loads and the Main Menu screen appears, click the button for the option you want. 2. If a problem is encountered during a test, a message appears with an error code and a description of the problem. Write down the error code and problem description and follow the instructions on the screen. If you cannot resolve the error condition, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). 3. If you run a test from the Custom Test or Symptom Tree option, click the applicable tab described in the following table for more information. 4. When the tests are completed, if you are running the Dell Diagnostics from the Drivers and Utilities CD, remove the CD. 5. Close the test screen to return to the Main Menu screen. To exit the Dell Diagnostics and restart the computer, close the Main Menu screen. System Lights Your power button light and hard-drive activity light may indicate a computer problem. Option Function Express Test Performs a quick test of devices. This test typically takes 10 to 20 minutes and requires no interaction on your part. Run Express Test first to increase the possibility of tracing the problem quickly. Extended Test Performs a thorough check of devices. This test typically takes 1 hour or more and requires you to answer questions periodically. Custom Test Tests a specific device. You can customize the tests you want to run. Symptom Tree Lists the most common symptoms encountered and allows you to select a test based on the symptom of the problem you are having. NOTE: The Service Tag for your computer is located at the top of each test screen. If you contact Dell, technical support will ask for your Service Tag. Your computer's Service Tag is listed in the system information option in system setup. Tab Function Results Displays the results of the test and any error conditions encountered. Errors Displays error conditions encountered, error codes, and the problem description. Help Describes the test and may indicate requirements for running the test. Configuration Displays your hardware configuration for the selected device. The Dell Diagnostics obtains configuration information for all devices from system setup, memory, and various internal tests, and it displays the information in the device list in the left pane of the screen. The device list may not display the names of all the components installed on your computer or all devices attached to your computer. Parameters Allows you to customize the test by changing the test settings. Power Light Problem Description Suggested Resolution Solid green Power is on, and the computer is operating normally. No corrective action is required. Blinking green The computer is in the suspended state (Microsoft® Windows® 2000 and Windows XP). Press the power button, move the mouse, or press a key on the keyboard to wake the computer. Blinks green several times and then turns off A configuration error exists. Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. Solid amber The Dell Diagnostics is running a test, or a device on the system board may be faulty or incorrectly installed. If the Dell Diagnostics is running, allow the testing to complete. Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. If the computer does not boot, contact Dell for technical assistance (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell).Diagnostic Lights To help you troubleshoot a problem, your computer has four diagnostic lights labeled "1," "2," "3," and "4" on the front panel. When the computer starts normally, the lights flash. After the computer starts, all four lights display solid green. If the computer malfunctions, the color and sequence of the lights identify the problem. Blinking amber A power supply or system board failure has occurred. Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. Also, see "Power Problems" in your computer Owner's Manual. Solid green and a beep code during POST A problem was detected while the BIOS was executing. See "Beep Codes" for instructions on diagnosing the beep code. Also, check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. Solid green power light and no beep code and no video during POST The monitor or the graphics card may be faulty or incorrectly installed. Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. See "Video and Power Problems" in your computer Owner's Manual. Solid green power light and no beep code but the computer locks up during POST An integrated system board device may be faulty. Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. If the problem is not identified, contact Dell for technical assistance. See your computer Owner's Manual for information on how to contact Dell. Hard-Drive Activity Light Problem Description Suggested Resolution Solid green The hard-drive activity light is on when the computer reads data from or writes data to the hard drive. The light might also be on when a device such as a CD player is operating. No corrective action is required. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. Light Pattern  Problem Description Suggested Resolution The computer is in a normal "off" condition, has successfully booted to the operating system, or a possible pre-BIOS failure has occurred. Plug the computer into a working electrical outlet and press the power button. Also see "Power Problems" in your computer Owner's Manual. A possible processor failure has occurred. Contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). Memory modules are detected, but a memory failure has occurred. l If you have two or more memory modules installed, remove the modules, reinstall one module, and then restart the computer. If the computer starts normally, reinstall an additional module. Continue until you have identified a faulty module or reinstalled all modules without error. l If available, install properly working memory of the same type into your computer. l If the problem persists, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). A possible graphics card failure has occurred. l If the computer has a graphics card, remove the card, and then restart the computer. l If the problem still exists, install a graphics card that you know works and restart the computer. l If the problem persists or the computer has integrated graphics, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). A possible floppy or hard drive failure has occurred. Reseat all power and data cables and restart the computer. A possible USB failure has occurred. Reinstall all USB devices, check cable connections, and then restart the computer. No memory modules are detected. l If you have two or more memory modules installed, remove the modules, reinstall one module, and then restart the computer. If the computer starts normally, reinstall an additional module. Continue until you have identified a faulty module or reinstalled all modules without error. l If available, install properly working memory of the same type into your computer. l If the problem persists, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). Memory modules are detected, but a memory configuration or compatibility error exists. l Ensure that no special memory module/memory connector placement requirements exist (see "Memory"). l Verify that the memory modules that you are installing are compatible with your computer (see "Memory"). l If the problem persists, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). A possible expansion card failure has occurred. 1. Determine if a conflict exists by removing a card (not a graphics card) (see "Cards") and restarting the computer. 2. If the problem persists, reinstall the card that you removed, remove a different card, and then restart the computer. 3. Repeat this process for each card. If the computer starts normally, troubleshoot the last card removed from the computer for resource conflicts (see "Resolving Software Beep Codes Your computer might emit a series of beeps during start-up if the monitor cannot display errors or problems. This series of beeps, called a beep code, identifies a problem. One possible beep code (code 1-3-1) consists of one beep, a burst of three beeps, and then one beep. This beep code tells you that the computer encountered a memory problem. If your computer beeps during start-up: 1. Write down the beep code. 2. Run the Dell Diagnostics to identify a more serious cause. 3. Contact Dell for technical assistance (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). and Hardware Compatibilities" in your computer Owner's Manual). 4. If the problem persists, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). Another failure has occurred. l Ensure that the cables are properly connected to the system board from the hard drive, CD drive, and DVD drive (see "System Board Components"). l If there is an error message on your screen identifying a problem with a device (such as the floppy drive or hard drive), check the device to ensure that it is functioning properly. l The operating system is attempting to boot from a device (such as the floppy drive or hard drive); check system setup to ensure that the boot sequence is correct for the devices installed on your computer. l If the problem persists, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). The computer is in a normal operating condition after POST. NOTE: The diagnostic lights are not lit after the system successfully boots to the operating system. None. Code Cause 1-1-2 Microprocessor register failure 1-1-3 NVRAM read/write failure 1-1-4 ROM BIOS checksum failure 1-2-1 Programmable interval timer failure 1-2-2 DMA initialization failure 1-2-3 DMA page register read/write failure 1-3 Video Memory Test failure 1-3-1 through 2-4-4 Memory not being properly identified or used 3-1-1 Slave DMA register failure 3-1-2 Master DMA register failure 3-1-3 Master interrupt mask register failure 3-1-4 Slave interrupt mask register failure 3-2-2 Interrupt vector loading failure 3-2-4 Keyboard Controller Test failure 3-3-1 NVRAM power loss 3-3-2 Invalid NVRAM configuration 3-3-4 Video Memory Test failure 3-4-1 Screen initialization failure 3-4-2 Screen retrace failure 3-4-3 Search for video ROM failure 4-2-1 No timer tick 4-2-2 Shutdown failure 4-2-3 Gate A20 failure 4-2-4 Unexpected interrupt in protected mode 4-3-1 Memory failure above address 0FFFFh 4-3-3 Timer-chip counter 2 failure 4-3-4 Time-of-day clock stoppedBack to Contents Page 4-4-1 Serial or parallel port test failure 4-4-2 Failure to decompress code to shadowed memory 4-4-3 Math-coprocessor test failure 4-4-4 Cache test failure Quick Start Guida rapida | Démarrage rapide البدء السريع | Schnellstart Uniquely Dell support.dell.com/manuals | www.dell.com Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2011 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Trademarks used in this text: Dell™, the DELL logo, and Inspiron™ are trademarks of Dell Inc. 2011 - 02 Regulatory model: D11M Regulatory type: D03M004 Computer model: Dell Inspiron 620 Le informazioni contenute nel presente documento sono soggette a modifica senza preavviso. © 2011 Dell Inc. Tutti i diritti riservati. Marchi commerciali utilizzati nel presente documento: Dell™, il logo DELL e Inspiron™ sono marchi commerciali di Dell Inc. 2011 - 02 Modello normativo: D11M Tipo normativo: D03M004 Modello di computer: Dell Inspiron 620 Les informations de ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. © 2011 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. Marques mentionnées dans ce document : Dell™, le logo DELL et Inspiron™ sont des marques de Dell Inc. 2011 - 02 Modèle réglementaire : D11M Type réglementaire : D03M004 Modèle de l’ordinateur : Dell Inspiron 620 Die in diesem Dokument enthaltenen Informationen können ohne vorherige Ankündigung geändert werden. © 2011 Dell Inc. Alle Rechte vorbehalten. In diesem Text verwendete Marken: Dell™, das DELL Logo und Inspiron™ sind Marken von Dell Inc. 2011 - 02 Modellnummer: D11M Modelltyp: D03M004 Computermodell: Dell Inspiron 620 المعلومات الواردة بهذا المستند عرضة للتغيير دون إشعار. حقوق النشر © لعام 2011 لشركة .Dell Inc كافة الحقوق محفوظة. العالمات التجارية المستخدمة في هذا النص: ™Dell وشعار DELL و™Inspiron هي عالمات تجارية لشركة .Dell Inc 2011 - 02 الطراز التنظيمي: D11M النوع التنظيمي: D03M004 طراز الكمبيوتر: الطراز Inspiron 620 من Dell Connect the power cable Collegare il cavo di alimentazione Branchez le câble d’alimentation Schließen Sie das Netzkabel an توصيل كابل الطاقة Connect the network cable (optional) Collegare il cavo di rete (opzionale) Branchez le câble réseau (facultatif) Schließen Sie das Netzwerkkabel an (optional) توصيل كابل الشبكة )اختياري( Press the power button Premere il pulsante di accensione Appuyez sur le bouton d’alimentation Drücken Sie den Betriebsschalter اضغط على زر الطاقة Connect the keyboard and mouse Collegare la tastiera e il mouse Branchez le clavier et la souris Schließen Sie Tastatur und Maus an توصيل لوحة المفاتيح والماوس Connection Type Tipo di collegamento Type de connexion Verbindungstyp نوع التوصيل Computer Computer Ordinateur Computer الكمبيوت Cable and Adapter Cavo e adattatore Câble et adaptateur Kabelund Adapter الكابل والمهايئ Display Schermo Écran Display الشاشة VGA  VGA DVI  DVI DVI  VGA HDMI  HDMI HDMI  DVI Connect the display Collegare lo schermo Branchez l’écran Schließen Sie den Bildschirm an توصيل الشاشة Printed in PolandFeatures 1. Media Card Reader 2. Optical drive bays (2) 3. USB 2.0 connectors (2) 4. Microphone or line-in connector 5. Headphone connector 6. Power button and light 7. Hard drive activity light 8. Power supply light 9. Voltage selector switch 10. Power connector 11. Network connector and light 12. USB 2.0 connectors (6) 13. HDMI connector 14. VGA connector 15. Microphone connector 16. Expansion card slots (4) 17. Security cable slot 18. Padlock slot 19. Service tag and express service code 20. Front L/R line-out connector 21. Line-in connector الميزات 1. قارئ بطاقات وسائط 2. فتحات إضافة محركات أقراص ضوئية )فتحتان( )موصالن( USB 2.0 موصالت .3 4. ميكروفون أو موصل دخل خط 5. موصل سماعة رأس 6. زر ومصباح الطاقة 7. مصباح نشاط محرك األقراص الثابتة 8. مصباح مصدر الطاقة 9. مفتاح تحديد الجهد الكهربائي 10. موصل التيار 11. موصل ومصباح الشبكة )موصالت ستة( USB 2.0 موصالت .12 HDMI موصل .13 VGA موصل .14 15. موصل ميكروفون 16. فتحات بطاقات التوسعة )4 فتحات( 17. فتحة كابل األمان 18. فتحة قفل 19. رقم الصيانة ورمز الخدمة السريعة 20. موصل خرج خط أمامي أيمن/أيسر 21. موصل دخل خط Fonctionnalités 1. Lecteur de carte multimédia 2. Baies de lecteur optique (2) 3. Connecteurs USB 2.0 (2) 4. Microphone ou connecteur d’entrée 5. Prise casque 6. Bouton et voyant d’alimentation 7. Voyant d’activité du disque dur 8. Voyant d’alimentation 9. Sélecteur de tension 10. Connecteur d’alimentation 11. Connecteur et voyant réseau 12. Connecteurs USB 2.0 (6) 13. Connecteur HDMI 14. Connecteur VGA 15. Connecteur de microphone 16. Logements de carte d’extension (4) 17. Logement pour câble de sécurité 18. Logement pour cadenas 19. Numéro de service et code de service express 20. Connecteur de sortie droite/gauche avant 21. Connecteur d’entrée Caratteristiche 1. Lettore di schede multimediali 2. Alloggiamenti delle unità ottiche (2) 3. Connettori USB 2.0 (2) 4. Microfono o connettore linea di ingresso 5. Connettore della cuffia 6. indicatore e pulsante di accensione 7. Indicatore di attività del disco rigido 8. indicatore dell’alimentatore 9. Selettore di tensione 10. Connettore di alimentazione 11. Connettore e indicatore di rete 12. Connettori USB 2.0 (6) 13. Connettore HDMI 14. Connettore VGA 15. Connettore del microfono 16. Alloggiamento per schede di espansione (4) 17. Alloggiamento cavo di sicurezza 18. Alloggiamento per lucchetto 19. Numero di servizio e codice del servizio espresso 20. Connettore della linea in uscita L/R anteriore 21. Connettore linea di ingresso Merkmale 1. Medienkartenlesegerät 2. Schächte für optisches Laufwerk (2) 3. USB 2.0-Anschlüsse (2) 4. Mikrofonanschluss/Line-In-Anschluss 5. Kopfhöreranschluss 6. Betriebsschalter und -anzeige 7. Aktivitätsanzeige für die Festplatte 8. Anzeige des Netzteils 9. Spannungswahlschalter 10. Netzanschluss 11. Netzwerkanschluss und -anzeige 12. USB 2.0-Anschlüsse (6) 13. HDMI-Anschluss 14. VGA-Anschluss 15. Mikrofonanschluss 16. Erweiterungskartensteckplätze (4) 17. Sicherheitskabelsteckplatz 18. Einschub für Vorhängeschloss 19. Service-Tag-Nummer und ExpressServicecode 20. L/R Line-Out-Anschluss (vorn) 21. Line-In-Anschluss More Information • To learn about the features and advanced options available on your desktop, click Start→ All Programs→ Dell Help Documentation or go to support.dell.com/manuals. • To contact Dell for sales, tech support, or customer service issues, go to dell.com/ContactDell. Customers in the United States, can call 800-WWW-DELL (800-999-3355). Ulteriori informazioni • Per informazioni sulle funzionalità e le opzioni avanzate disponibili sul computer desktop, fare clic su Start→ Tutti i programmi→ Dell Help Documentation oppure visitare il sito support.dell.com/manuals. • Per rivolgersi a Dell per problematiche relative alla vendita, al supporto tecnico o all’assistenza clienti, visitare il sito dell.com/ContactDell. Per i clienti negli Stati Uniti, chiamare il numero 800-WWW-DELL (800-999-3355). En savoir plus • Pour en savoir plus sur les fonctionnalités et les options avancées de votre poste de travail, cliquez sur Démarrer→ Tous les programmes→ Documentation de l’aide Dell ou visitez la page support.dell.com/manuals. • Pour contacter Dell en cas de problèmes concernant les ventes, le support technique ou le service client, consultez la page dell.com/ContactDell. Aux États-Unis, appelez le 800-WWW-DELL (800-999-3355). Weitere Informationen • Weitere Informationen zu den Merkmalen und erweiterten Optionen Ihres Desktops finden Sie unter Start→ Programme→ Dell Hilfedokumentation oder unter http://support.euro.dell.com. • Antworten auf alle Fragen zum Verkauf sowie unseren technischen Support und unseren Kundenservice finden Sie ebenfalls unter http://support.euro.dell.com. Kunden in den USA erreichen uns unter der Nummer 800-WWW-DELL (800-999-3355). مزيد من المعلومات • للتعرف على الميزات والخيارات المتقدمة المتوفرة في الكمبيوتر المكتبي الذي بحوزتك، انقر فوق Start )ابدأ(← Dell Help ←)البرامج كافة( All Programs Documentation )وثائق تعليمات Dell( أو انتقل إلى .support.dell.com/manuals • لالتصال بشركة Dell لالستفسار عن مسائل تتعلق بالمبيعات أو الدعم الفني أو خدمة العمالء، انتقل إلى dell.com/ContactDell. بالنسبة للعمالء في الواليات المتحدة، يُرجى االتصال على 800-WWW-DELL .)800-999-3355( Información para NOM o Norma Oficial Mexicana (sólo para México) La información que se proporciona a continuación aparecerá en el dispositivo que se describe en este documento, en conformidad con los requisitos de la Norma Oficial Mexicana (NOM): Importador: Dell México S.A. de C.V. Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - Piso 11° Col. Lomas Altas 11950 México, D.F. Número de modelo reglamentario: D11M Voltaje de entrada: 115/230 V CA Frecuencia de entrada: 50/60 Hz Corriente nominal de salida: 6 A/7 A Para obtener información detallada, lea la información sobre seguridad incluida con su equipo. Para obtener información adicional sobre prácticas recomendadas de seguridad, visite dell.com/regulatory_compliance. 8 9 10 14 15 13 12 11 16 19 17 18 20 21 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 Views Viste | Vues | Ansichten | المناظر GUIDE DE RÉFÉRENCE INSPIRON™GUIDE DE RÉFÉRENCE Modèle réglementaire : D11M Type réglementaire : D11M001 INSPIRON™Remarques, précautions et avertissements REMARQUE : une REMARQUE fournit des informations importantes qui vous aident à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : une PRÉCAUTION vous avertit d'un risque d'endommagement du matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème. AVERTISSEMENT : un AVERTISSEMENT signale un risque d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. __________________ Les informations de ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. © 2011 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction de ce document, de quelque manière que ce soit, sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques mentionnées dans ce document : Dell™, le logo DELL, Inspiron™, Solution Station™, et DellConnect™ sont des marques de Dell Inc. ; Intel® ,Celeron® et Pentium® sont des marques déposées et Core™ est une marque d'Intel Corporation aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays ; Microsoft®, Windows® et le logo du bouton Démarrer Windows sont soit des marques commerciales soit des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux Etats-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays ; Blu-ray Disc™ est une marque de Blu-ray Disc Association ; Bluetooth® est une marque déposée de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. utilisée par Dell sous licence. Les autres marques et appellations commerciales utilisées dans ce document font référence aux entités propriétaires des marques ou des noms de produit. Dell Inc. ne revendique aucun droit de propriété sur les marques et les appellations commerciales ne lui appartenant pas. 2011 - 03 Rév. A003 Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron......................... 5 Considérations préalables à l'installation .......................5 Branchement de l'écran...............6 Branchement du clavier et de la souris...8 Branchement du câble réseau (en option) .........................9 Branchement du câble d'alimentation ...10 Appui sur le bouton d'alimentation.....10 Installation du système d'exploitation... 11 Création d'un support de récupération système (recommandé) ..............12 Installation du tuner TV (facultatif) .....13 Connexion à Internet (facultatif).......13 Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron........................ 16 Fonctionnalités du panneau avant . . . . .16 Fonctionnalités du panneau arrière . . . 20 Connecteurs du panneau arrière ......22 Fonctionnalités logicielles ............24 Dell DataSafe Online Backup..........25 Dell Stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Résolution des problèmes ........ 28 Codes sonores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Problèmes liés au réseau.............29 Problèmes d'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Problèmes de mémoire .............32 Blocages et problèmes logiciels ......33 Table des matières4 Table des matières Utilisation des outils de support technique ...................... 35 Centre de support Dell ..............35 Mes Téléchargements Dell............36 Messages système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Utilitaire de résolution de problèmes matériels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Dell Diagnostics ................... 40 Restauration du système d'exploitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Restauration du système . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Dell DataSafe Local Backup.......... 44 Support de récupération système......47 Dell Factory Image Restore .......... 48 Accès à l'aide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Support technique et service clientèle...51 DellConnect .......................52 Services en ligne....................52 Service d'état des commandes automatisé ........................53 Informations sur les produits..........54 Retour d'articles pour réparation dans le cadre de la garantie ou pour avoir . . . . .54 Avant d'appeler.....................56 Contacter Dell .....................57 Recherche d'informations et de ressources supplémentaires . . . . . . 58 Caractéristiques ................ 60 Annexe ........................ 65 Informations sur la norme NOM ou Norme Officielle Mexicaine (pour le Mexique uniquement) ...............65 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665 Cette section indique comment installer l'ordinateur de bureau Dell Inspiron 620. AVERTISSEMENT : avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les informations de sécurité fournies avec votre ordinateur. Pour plus d'informations sur les meilleures pratiques en matière de sécurité, consultez la page d'accueil Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à l'adresse suivante : www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Considérations préalables à l'installation Lorsque vous installez votre ordinateur, assurez-vous que la source d'alimentation électrique est facilement accessible, que la ventilation est adaptée et que la surface est plane. Une mauvaise ventilation peut provoquer une surchauffe de l'ordinateur. Pour éviter cela, assurez-vous de laisser au moins 10,2 cm (4 pouces) à l'arrière de l'ordinateur et au moins 5,1 cm (2 pouces) sur chacun des autres côtés. Ne placez jamais votre ordinateur dans un espace clos, tel qu'un placard ou un tiroir, lorsque l'appareil est sous tension. Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron INSPIRON6 Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron Branchement de l'écran Si vous avez acheté la carte graphique séparée disponible en option, connectez l'écran à l'aide du connecteur qui se trouve sur cette carte. Sinon, connectez-le au connecteur VGA ou HDMI intégré. REMARQUE : les connecteurs VGA et HDMI intégrés seront désactivés et protégés par un couvercle si votre ordinateur possède une carte graphique séparée. Utilisez le câble approprié en fonction des connecteurs disponibles sur l'ordinateur et l'écran. Il se peut que vous deviez utiliser un adaptateur approprié (DVI à VGA ou HDMI à DVI) pour connecter votre écran à la carte graphique séparée, si le connecteur de votre écran et celui de la carte graphique diffèrent. Vous pouvez acheter les adaptateurs DVI à VGA, HDMI à DVI ainsi que des câbles HDMI ou DVI supplémentaires à l'adresse www.dell.com. REMARQUE : lors du branchement d'un seul écran, reliez l'écran à UN SEUL connecteur de l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : votre ordinateur prend en charge la fonction d'écrans multiples Intel (désactivée par défaut). Cette fonction vous permet de connecter votre ordinateur à plusieurs écrans simultanément. Pour activer cette fonction, accédez à l'utilitaire de configuration du système (BIOS) et définissez le paramètre Intel Multiple Monitor Feature (Fonction d'écrans multiples Intel) sur Auto (Automatique) dans la section Advanced Graphic Configuration (Configuration graphique avancée).7 Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron Consultez le tableau suivant afin d'identifier les connecteurs disponibles sur l'ordinateur et l'écran. Type de connexion Ordinateur Câble Écran VGA à VGA (câble VGA) DVI à DVI (câble DVI) DVI à VGA (adaptateur DVI à VGA + câble VGA) HDMI à HDMI (câble HDMI) HDMI à DVI (adaptateur HDMI à DVI + câble DVI)8 Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron Branchement du clavier et de la souris Branchez le clavier et la souris USB aux connecteurs USB du panneau arrière de l'ordinateur.9 Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron Branchement du câble réseau (en option) Une connexion réseau n'est pas requise pour terminer l'installation de l'ordinateur. Cependant, si vous avez une connexion réseau ou Internet utilisant une connexion câblée (p. ex. un périphérique haut débit ou une prise Ethernet), vous pouvez effectuer son branchement maintenant. REMARQUE : utilisez uniquement un câble Ethernet (connecteur RJ45) pour brancher votre connecteur réseau. Ne branchez pas de câble téléphonique (connecteur RJ11) au connecteur réseau. Pour relier l'ordinateur à un périphérique réseau ou haut débit, branchez l'une des extrémités du câble réseau sur un port réseau ou sur un périphérique haut débit. Branchez l'autre extrémité du câble réseau au connecteur réseau (connecteur RJ45) situé sur le panneau arrière de votre ordinateur. Un déclic indique que le câble réseau est correctement inséré.10 Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron Branchement du câble d'alimentation Appui sur le bouton d'alimentation11 Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron Installation du système d'exploitation Votre ordinateur Dell est préconfiguré avec le système d'exploitation Microsoft Windows. Pour procéder à la première installation de Windows, suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. Ces étapes sont obligatoires et peuvent prendre un certain temps. Les écrans d'installation de Windows vous guident à travers plusieurs procédures qui vous permettent notamment d'accepter des contrats de licence, de définir des préférences et de configurer une connexion Internet. PRÉCAUTION : veillez à ne pas interrompre le processus d'installation du système d'exploitation. Vous risqueriez de rendre votre ordinateur inutilisable et de devoir réinstaller le système d'exploitation. REMARQUE : pour optimiser le fonctionnement de l'ordinateur, nous vous recommandons de télécharger et d'installer les derniers BIOS et pilotes pour votre ordinateur, disponibles à l'adresse support.dell.com. REMARQUE : pour plus d'informations sur le système d'exploitation et ses fonctionnalités, reportez-vous à l'adresse support.dell.com/MyNewDell.12 Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron Création d'un support de récupération système (recommandé) REMARQUE : nous vous recommandons de créer un support de récupération système, immédiatement après l'installation de Microsoft Windows. Le support de récupération système vous permet de restaurer votre ordinateur à son état d'exploitation lorsque vous l'avez acheté, tout en préservant les fichiers de données (sans recourir au disque du système d'exploitation). Vous pouvez utiliser le support de récupération système si les modifications apportées au matériel, aux logiciels, aux pilotes et aux autres paramètres du système empêchent l'ordinateur de fonctionner correctement. La création d'un support de restauration du système requiert les éléments suivants : • Dell DataSafe Local Backup • Une clé USB avec une capacité minimum de 8 Go ou un DVD-R/DVD+R/Blu-ray Disc REMARQUE : Dell DataSafe Local Backup ne prend pas en charge les disques réinscriptibles. Pour créer un support de récupération système : 1. Insérez le disque ou la clé USB dans l'ordinateur. 2. Cliquez sur Démarrer → Tous les programmes→ Dell DataSafe Local Backup. 3. Cliquez sur Créer un support de récupération. 4. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent. REMARQUE : pour en savoir plus sur la restauration de votre système d'exploitation à l'aide du support de récupération système, reportez-vous à la rubrique « Support de récupération système », page 47.13 Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron Installation du tuner TV (facultatif) REMARQUE : la disponibilité du tuner TV peut varier d'une région à l'autre. Pour installer le tuner TV : 1. Branchez le câble d'antenne numérique/ TV ou le câble de l'adaptateur au connecteur d'entrée d'antenne de votre ordinateur. 2. Allumez l'ordinateur. 3. Cliquez sur Démarrer → Tous les programmes→ Windows Media Center→ Tâches→ Paramètres→ TV. 4. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent. Connexion à Internet (facultatif) Pour vous connecter à Internet, vous devez disposer d'un modem externe ou d'une connexion réseau et d'un fournisseur d'accès Internet (FAI). Si vous n'avez pas commandé de modem USB externe ou d'adaptateur réseau sans fil à l'achat, vous pouvez vous en procurer à l'adresse www.dell.com. Configuration d'une connexion filaire • Si vous utilisez une ligne téléphonique commutée, branchez le cordon téléphonique sur le modem USB externe en option et sur la prise téléphonique murale avant de configurer la connexion Internet. 14 Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron • Si vous utilisez une connexion ADSL ou modem câble/satellite, contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet ou votre prestataire de services mobiles pour obtenir les instructions relatives à la configuration. Pour terminer la configuration de votre connexion Internet filaire, suivez les instructions fournies dans la section « Configuration d'une connexion Internet » à la page 15. Configuration d'une connexion sans fil REMARQUE : pour configurer votre routeur sans fil, reportez-vous à la documentation fournie avec le routeur. Vous devez vous connecter à votre routeur sans fil pour pouvoir utiliser une connexion Internet sans fil. Pour configurer une connexion à un routeur sans fil : 1. Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers, puis quittez tous les programmes. 2. Cliquez sur Démarrer → Panneau de configuration. 3. Dans la zone de recherche, saisissez réseau, puis cliquez sur Centre Réseau et partage→ Connexion à un réseau. 4. Pour procéder à la configuration, suivez les instructions qui s'affichent. 15 Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron Configuration d'une connexion Internet Les fournisseurs d'accès Internet (FAI) et leurs offres varient selon les pays. Contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet pour prendre connaissance des offres disponibles dans votre pays. Si vous n'arrivez plus à vous connecter à Internet, il est possible que le fournisseur d'accès Internet subisse une interruption de service. Contactez-le pour vérifier l'état du service ou essayez de vous connecter ultérieurement. Munissez-vous des informations communiquées par votre fournisseur d'accès Internet. Si vous ne disposez d'aucun fournisseur, l'Assistant Connexion à Internet peut vous aider à en trouver un. Pour configurer la connexion Internet : 1. Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers, puis quittez tous les programmes. 2. Cliquez sur Démarrer → Panneau de configuration. 3. Dans la zone de recherche, saisissez réseau, puis cliquez sur Centre Réseau et partage→ Configurer une nouvelle connexion ou un nouveau réseau→ Se connecter à Internet. La fenêtre Se connecter à Internet apparaît. REMARQUE : si vous ne savez pas quel type de connexion choisir, cliquez sur Comment choisir ou contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet. 4. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent et terminez la configuration à l'aide des informations de configuration remises par votre fournisseur.16 Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron Cette section fournit des informations sur les fonctionnalités disponibles sur votre ordinateur de bureau Inspiron. Fonctionnalités du panneau avant 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 INSPIRON17 Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron 1 Lecteur optique (2) : permet de lire ou de graver des CD, DVD et disques Bluray (en option). 2 Connecteurs USB 2.0 (2) : permettent de connecter un périphérique USB, comme une souris, un clavier, une imprimante, un lecteur externe ou un lecteur MP3. 3 Microphone ou connecteur d'entrée audio : permet de connecter un microphone ou recevoir un signal audio à traiter avec des logiciels audio. 4 Connecteur pour casque : permet de connecter un casque. REMARQUE : pour le branchement à un haut-parleur ou à un périphérique audio sous tension, utilisez le connecteur de sortie ligne situé à l'arrière de votre ordinateur. 5 Bouton et voyant d'alimentation : pour allumer ou éteindre l'ordinateur. Le voyant central indique l'état de l'alimentation : • Eteint: l'ordinateur est éteint, en mode veille prolongée ou n'est pas connecté à une source d'alimentation. • Blanc fixe : l'ordinateur est allumé. • Orange fixe : l'ordinateur est en mode Veille/Sommeil ou un problème s'est produit au niveau de la carte système ou de l'alimentation. Pour obtenir de l'aide, contactez Dell (voir la section « Contacter Dell », page 57). • Orange clignotant: signale un problème au niveau de la carte système ou de l'alimentation. Pour obtenir de l'aide, contactez Dell (voir la section « Contacter Dell », page 57). • REMARQUE: pour en savoir plus sur les problèmes d'alimentation, reportez-vous à la rubrique « Problèmes d'alimentation », page 30.18 Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron 6 Voyant d'activité du disque dur: s'allume lorsque l'ordinateur lit ou écrit des données. Il clignote lorsqu'une activité est en cours d'exécution sur le disque dur. PRÉCAUTION : pour éviter toute perte de données, n'éteignez jamais l'ordinateur lorsque le voyant d'activité du disque dur clignote. 7 Lecteur de carte multimédia : permet de consulter et de partager rapidement et facilement des photos numériques, de la musique et des vidéos enregistrées sur une carte multimédia. 8 Bouton d'éjection du lecteur optique (2) : permet d'ouvrir le lecteur optique.19 Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron 20 Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron Fonctionnalités du panneau arrière 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 821 Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron 1 Voyant du bloc d'alimentation : indique l'énergie disponible pour le bloc d'alimentation. REMARQUE : le voyant du bloc d'alimentation n'est pas disponible sur tous les ordinateurs. 2 Sélecteur de tension : permet de sélectionner la tension correspondant à votre région 3 Connecteur d'alimentation : permet de brancher le câble d'alimentation. L'aspect de ce connecteur peut varier. 4 Connecteurs du panneau arrière : permettent de brancher des périphériques USB, audio, vidéo et autres à leur emplacement réservé. 5 Logements pour cartes d'extension : permettent d'accéder aux connecteurs des cartes PCI Express installées. 6 Numéro de série et code de service express : permettent d'identifier votre ordinateur lorsque vous accédez au site Web, ou que vous appelez, le support technique de Dell. 7 Emplacement du cadenas : permet d’attacher un cadenas standard pour éviter tout accès non autorisé à l’intérieur de votre ordinateur. 8 Emplacement pour câble de sécurité : permet de rattacher à l'ordinateur un câble de sécurité vendu dans le commerce. REMARQUE : avant d'acheter un câble de sécurité, vérifiez qu'il est adapté à l'emplacement pour câble de sécurité de votre ordinateur.22 Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron Connecteurs du panneau arrière 1 2 3 4 5 6 723 Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron 1 Connecteurs USB 2.0 (6) : permettent de connecter des périphériques USB, comme les souris, les claviers, les imprimantes, les lecteurs externes ou les lecteurs MP3. 2 Connecteur HDMI : se connecte au connecteur HDMI de votre écran ou téléviseur. 3 Connecteur VGA : permet de connecter un moniteur ou un projecteur. 4 Connecteur de microphone : pour brancher un microphone ou un câble pour entrer des données audio. 5 Connecteur de sortie gauche/ droite avant: permet de brancher des haut-parleurs gauche/droite avant. 6 Connecteur d'entrée : permet de connecter des périphériques d'enregistrement ou de lecture (microphone, magnétophones, lecteurs de CD ou magnétoscopes). 7 Connecteur réseau et voyant: permet de connecter votre ordinateur à un périphérique réseau ou large bande si vous utilisez un réseau filaire. Les deux voyants près du connecteur signalent l'état et l'activité sur une connexion réseau filaire.24 Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron Fonctionnalités logicielles Productivité et communication Vous pouvez utiliser votre ordinateur pour créer des présentations, des brochures, des cartes de vœux, des prospectus et des feuilles de calcul. Vous pouvez également retoucher et visualiser des photographies et des images numériques. Reportez-vous à votre bon de commande pour connaître les logiciels installés sur votre ordinateur. Une fois connecté à Internet, vous pouvez consulter des sites Web, configurer un compte de messagerie et envoyer et télécharger des fichiers. Divertissement et multimédia Vous pouvez utiliser votre ordinateur pour regarder des vidéos, jouer, créer vos propres CD, DVD, disques Blu-Ray (en option), écouter de la musique et des stations de radio. Votre lecteur optique peut prendre en charge plusieurs formats de disque comme les CD, les DVD et les disques Blu-ray (en option). Vous pouvez télécharger ou copier des images et des vidéos à partir de périphériques portables, comme un appareil photo numérique ou un téléphone portable. D'autres logiciels en option vous permettent d'organiser et de créer des fichiers de musique et de vidéo, qui peuvent être gravés sur un disque, copiés sur des appareils portables (lecteur MP3 ou lecteur multimédia portable, par exemple) ou lus et affichés directement sur un téléviseur, un projecteur et une installation home cinema.25 Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron Dell DataSafe Online Backup REMARQUE : il se peut que Dell DataSafe Online Backup ne soit pas disponible dans votre région. REMARQUE : une connexion haut débit est recommandée pour des vitesses de chargement/téléchargement rapides. Dell DataSafe Online est un service de sauvegarde et de récupération automatisé qui vous aide à protéger vos données et vos fichiers importants des accidents comme un vol, un incendie ou une catastrophe naturelle. Vous pouvez accéder au service sur votre ordinateur à l'aide d'un compte -protégé par un mot de passe. Pour plus d'informations, consultez le site DellDataSafe.com. Pour planifier des sauvegardes : 1. Cliquez deux fois sur l'icône Dell DataSafe Online dans la zone de notification de votre bureau. 2. Suivez les instructions à l'écran. Dell Stage Le logiciel Dell Stage fournit un accès à vos contenus multimédias et applications MultiTouch préférés. Pour lancer Dell Stage, cliquez sur Démarrer → Tous les programmes→ Dell Stage→ Dell Stage. REMARQUE: vous pouvez également lancer directement certaines applications de Dell Stage via le menu Tous les programmes. Vous pouvez personnaliser Dell Stage de la façon suivante : • Réorganiser un raccourci d'application : cliquez sur le raccourci de l'application et maintenez le bouton de la souris enfoncé jusqu'à ce qu'il clignote, puis faites-le glisser vers l'emplacement souhaité sur Dell Stage. • Réduire : faites glisser la fenêtre Dell Stage vers le bas de l'écran. • Personnaliser : sélectionnez l'icône des paramètres, puis choisissez l'option souhaitée.26 Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron Les applications disponibles sur Dell Stage sont les suivantes : REMARQUE : il se peut que certaines applications ne soient pas disponibles en fonction des sélections effectuées lors de l'achat de votre ordinateur. •MUSIC: écoutez de la musique ou parcourez vos fichiers musicaux par album, artiste ou titre de chanson. Vous pouvez également écouter des stations de radio Internet du monde entier. L'application Napster en option vous permet de télécharger des chansons lorsque vous êtes connecté à Internet. •DOCUMENTS : accédez rapidement au dossier Documents de votre ordinateur. •PHOTO : affichez, organisez ou retouchez vos photos. Vous pouvez également créer des diaporamas et des ensembles de photos, puis les télécharger sur Facebook ou Flickr une fois connecté à Internet. •DELL WEB : obtenez un aperçu d'un maximum de quatre pages Web de votre choix. Cliquez ou appuyez sur l'aperçu de la page Web pour l'ouvrir dans le navigateur. •VIDEO : visionnez des vidéos. L'application CinemaNow disponible en option vous permet d'acheter ou de louer des films et des émissions télévisées une fois connecté à Internet. •SHORTCUTS : accédez rapidement aux programmes fréquemment utilisés. • Web Tile : obtenez un aperçu d'un maximum de quatre pages Web de votre choix. Cette application vous permet d'ajouter, de modifier ou de supprimer un aperçu de page Web. Cliquez sur l'aperçu de la page Web pour l'ouvrir dans le navigateur. Vous pouvez également créer plusieurs icônes Web via la galerie des applications.27 Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron 28 Cette section contient des informations de dépannage de votre ordinateur. Si vous n'arrivez pas à résoudre un problème en suivant les consignes ci-dessous, consultez la section « Utilisation des outils de support technique » à la page 35 ou « Contacter Dell » à la page 57. AVERTISSEMENT : seul un technicien qualifié est autorisé à retirer le capot de l'ordinateur. Consultez le Manuel de maintenance à l'adresse support.dell.com/manuals pour des instructions techniques plus poussées. Codes sonores Votre ordinateur peut émettre une série de signaux sonores au démarrage s'il rencontre une erreur ou un problème. Cette série de signaux, appelée « code sonore », permet d'identifier les problèmes de fonctionnement de l'ordinateur. Si cela se produit, notez le code sonore et contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell », page 57) pour obtenir de l'aide. REMARQUE : pour remplacer des pièces, veuillez vous reporter au Manuel de maintenance disponible à l'adresse support.dell.com/manuals. Résolution des problèmes INSPIRON29 Résolution des problèmes Code sonore Problème éventuel Un seul Défaillance possible de la carte système : échec de la somme de contrôle du BIOS en mémoire ROM. Deux Aucune RAM détectée REMARQUE : si vous avez installé ou remplacé vous-même le module de mémoire, assurezvous qu'il est correctement inséré. Trois Défaillance possible de la carte système : erreur liée aux puces Quatre Défaillance de lecture/écriture en mémoire vive Cinq Défaillance de l'horloge temps réel Six Défaillance de la carte ou de la puce vidéo Sept Défaillance du processeur Problèmes liés au réseau Connexions sans fil Si vous avez perdu la connexion réseau : le routeur sans fil est hors ligne ou la fonction sans fil a été désactivée sur l'ordinateur. • Vérifiez votre routeur sans fil pour vous assurer qu'il est sous tension et connecté à votre source de données (modem câble ou concentrateur réseau). • Rétablissez la connexion à votre routeur sans fil (consultez la section « Configuration d'une connexion sans fil », page 14). • Il se peut que des interférences perturbent ou interrompent la connexion sans fil. Essayez de rapprocher l'ordinateur du routeur sans fil.30 Résolution des problèmes Connexions filaires Si la connexion réseau est coupée — Le câble réseau est mal branché ou est endommagé. • Vérifiez le câble réseau pour vous assurer qu'il est correctement branché et ne présente aucun dommage. • Le voyant d'intégrité de liaison figurant sur le connecteur réseau intégré vous permet de vérifier que votre connexion fonctionne et vous renseigne sur son état : – Vert (gauche) : une bonne connexion est établie entre un réseau 10/100 Mbits/s et l'ordinateur. – Orange (gauche) : une connexion de bonne qualité est établie entre un réseau à 1000 Mb/s et l'ordinateur. – Éteint : l'ordinateur ne détecte aucune connexion physique au réseau. REMARQUE : le voyant d'intégrité de liaison du connecteur réseau ne sert que pour les connexions filaires. Le voyant d'intégrité de liaison n'indique pas l'état des connexions sans fil. Problèmes d'alimentation Si le voyant d'alimentation est éteint: l'ordinateur est en veille prolongée, hors tension ou n'est pas alimenté. • Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation. L'ordinateur redémarre normalement s'il est éteint ou en état de veille prolongée. • Rebranchez le câble d'alimentation sur le connecteur d'alimentation situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur et sur la prise électrique. • Si l'ordinateur est branché sur une barrette d'alimentation, vérifiez que celle-ci est branchée sur une prise électrique et qu'elle est allumée. • Contournez également les périphériques de protection contre les surtensions électriques, les barrettes d'alimentation et les rallonges d'alimentation pour vérifier que l'ordinateur est correctement sous tension. • Vérifiez que la prise électrique fonctionne en la testant avec un autre appareil, comme une lampe.31 Résolution des problèmes • Vérifiez que le voyant du bloc d'alimentation à l'arrière de l'ordinateur est allumé. S'il est éteint, il s'agit peut-être d'une défaillance de l'alimentation ou du câble d'alimentation. • Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell (voir la section « Contacter Dell », page 57). Voyant d'alimentation blanc fixe et aucune réponse de l'ordinateur: l'écran n'est peut- être pas branché ou alimenté en énergie. • Vérifiez que l'écran est branché correctement, puis éteignez-le et rallumez-le. • Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell (voir la section « Contacter Dell », page 57). Si le voyant d'alimentation est orange fixe : L'ordinateur est en mode Veille/Sommeil ou un problème s'est produit au niveau de la carte système ou de l'alimentation. • Appuyez sur une touche du clavier, déplacez la souris ou appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour revenir au fonctionnement normal. • Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell (voir la section « Contacter Dell », page 57). Si le voyant d'alimentation est orange clignotant: l'ordinateur a détecté une erreur lors de l'autotest de la mise sous tension (POST). Il se peut qu'un problème soit survenu au niveau de la carte système ou de l'alimentation. Pour obtenir de l'aide, contactez Dell (voir la section « Contacter Dell », page 57). Si vous rencontrez des interférences qui gênent la réception sur votre ordinateur: un signal parasite crée des interférences qui interrompent ou perturbent les autres signaux. Les interférences peuvent être dues à divers facteurs : • Rallonges utilisées pour le clavier, la souris et l'alimentation. • Trop de périphériques raccordés à une même multiprise. • Plusieurs multiprises raccordées à la même prise électrique.32 Résolution des problèmes Problèmes de mémoire Si un message indiquant une mémoire insuffisante s'affiche : • Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts, puis quittez tous les programmes que vous n'utilisez pas pour vérifier si cela permet de résoudre le problème. • Reportez-vous à la documentation du logiciel pour connaître la mémoire minimale requise pour son exécution. Le cas échéant, installez davantage de mémoire (reportez-vous au Guide de maintenance disponible sur support.dell.com/manuals). • Réinstallez les modules de mémoire (reportez-vous au Guide de maintenance sur le site support.dell.com/manuals) pour vérifier que votre ordinateur communique bien avec la mémoire. • Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell (voir la section « Contacter Dell », page 57). Si d'autres problèmes de mémoire se produisent: • Veillez à suivre les consignes d'installation de la mémoire (reportez-vous au Guide maintenance sur le site support.dell.com/manuals). • Vérifiez si la barrette de mémoire est compatible avec votre ordinateur. Votre ordinateur prend en charge la mémoire de type DDR3. Pour plus d'informations sur le type de mémoire pris en charge par votre ordinateur, voir « Spécifications de base », page 60. • Exécutez Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics », page 40). • Réinstallez les modules de mémoire (reportez-vous au Guide de maintenance sur le site support.dell.com/manuals) pour vérifier que votre ordinateur communique bien avec la mémoire. • Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell (voir la section « Contacter Dell », page 57).33 Résolution des problèmes Blocages et problèmes logiciels Si l'ordinateur ne démarre pas : vérifiez que le câble d'alimentation est bien branché sur l'ordinateur et sur la prise secteur. Si un programme ne répond plus : terminez le programme : 1. Appuyez simultanément sur <Échap>. 2. Cliquez sur Applications. 3. Cliquez sur le programme qui ne répond plus. 4. Cliquez sur End Task (Fin de tâche). Si un programme se bloque fréquemment: consultez la documentation du logiciel. Le cas échéant, désinstallez puis réinstallez le programme. REMARQUE : les logiciels sont généralement fournis avec une documentation ou un CD comprenant les instructions d'installation. Si l'ordinateur ne répond plus ou si un écran bleu uni s'affiche : PRÉCAUTION : vous risquez de perdre des données si vous ne parvenez pas à arrêter le système d'exploitation. Si vous n'obtenez aucune réponse lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche du clavier ou lorsque vous déplacez la souris, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant au moins 8 à 10 secondes (jusqu'à ce que l'ordinateur s'éteigne), puis redémarrez votre ordinateur. Si le programme est conçu pour un système d'exploitation Microsoft Windows antérieur, exécutez l'Assistant Compatibilité des programmes. L'Assistant Compatibilité des programmes configure un programme afin qu'il fonctionne dans un environnement similaire au système d'exploitation Microsoft Windows antérieur.34 Résolution des problèmes Pour exécuter l'Assistant Compatibilité des programmes : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer → Panneau de configuration→ Programmes→ Exécuter des programmes plus anciens avec cette version de Windows. 2. Dans l'écran d'accueil, cliquez sur Suivant. 3. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent. Si d'autres problèmes logiciels surviennent: • Sauvegardez vos fichiers immédiatement. • Utilisez un logiciel antivirus pour analyser le disque dur ou les CD. • Enregistrez et fermez les fichiers ouverts et quittez tous les programmes, puis arrêtez l'ordinateur à l'aide du menu Démarrer . • Consultez la documentation fournie avec le logiciel ou contactez son éditeur pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur le dépannage : – Vérifiez que le programme est compatible avec le système d'exploitation installé sur l'ordinateur. – Vérifiez que le matériel du système répond à la configuration matérielle minimale requise pour l'exécution du logiciel. Consultez la documentation du logiciel pour de plus amples informations. – Vérifiez que le programme est correctement installé et configuré. – Vérifiez que les pilotes de périphériques n'entrent pas en conflit avec le programme. – Le cas échéant, désinstallez puis réinstallez le programme. – Notez le message d'erreur affiché pour le communiquer au support technique Dell et obtenir de l'aide.35 Centre de support Dell Toute l'assistance dont vous avez besoin – un seul emplacement. Le Centre d'assistance Dell Support Center fournit des notifications à propos des systèmes, des solutions pour améliorer les performances, des informations sur les systèmes et des liens vers d'autres outils et services de diagnostic Dell. Pour démarrer l'application, cliquez sur Démarrer → Tous les programmes→ Dell→ Dell Support Center (Centre d'assistance Dell)→ Launch Dell Support Center (Démarrer le Centre d'assistance Dell). La page d'accueil du Centre d'assistance Dell affiche le numéro de modèle de votre ordinateur, le numéro de service, le code de service express, le statut de la garantie et des notifications indiquant comment améliorer les performances de votre ordinateur. La page d'accueil fournit également des liens vers : Vérification de l'ordinateur: exécutez des diagnostics matériels, découvrez quel programme occupe le plus de mémoire sur votre disque dur et suivez les modifications apportées chaque jour à votre ordinateur. Utilitaires de vérification de l'ordinateur • Gestionnaire d'espace disque : gérez votre disque dur grâce à une représentation visuelle de l'espace occupé par chaque type de fichier. • Historique des performances et de la configuration : surveillez les événements système et les modifications au fil du temps. Cet utilitaire affiche toutes les analyses, tous les tests, toutes les modifications du système, tous les événements critiques et tous les points de restauration avec l'indication du jour. Utilisation des outils de support technique INSPIRON36 Utilisation des outils de support technique Informations détaillées sur le système : affichez des informations détaillées sur les configurations du matériel et du système d'exploitation ; accédez à des copies de vos contrats de service, informations de garantie et options de renouvellement de garantie. Obtenir de l'aide : affichez les options du Support technique Dell, Support client, Visites guidées et formations, Outils en ligne, Modes d'emploi, Informations de garantie, FAQ, etc. Sauvegarde et restauration : créez un support de récupération, lancez l'outil de récupération et sauvegardez les fichiers en ligne. Solutions pour améliorer les performances du système : procurez-vous des solutions logicielles et matérielles qui vous aideront à améliorer les performances de votre système. Pour plus d'informations sur le Centre d'assistance Dell Support Center et le téléchargement et l'installation des outils de support disponibles, accédez à la page DellSupportCenter.com. Mes Téléchargements Dell REMARQUE : il se peut que Mes Téléchargements Dell ne soit pas disponible dans votre région. Certains logiciels préinstallés sur votre nouvel ordinateur Dell ne disposent pas de CD ou DVD de récupération. Ces logiciels sont disponibles en ligne sur la page Mes Téléchargements Dell. Vous pouvez à partir de ce site Web télécharger tous les logiciels disponibles pour les réinstaller ou créer votre propre support de sauvegarde. Pour vous enregistrer et utiliser Mes Téléchargements Dell : 1. Rendez-vous sur DownloadStore.dell.com/media. 2. Suivez les instructions à l'écran pour vous enregistrer et télécharger le logiciel. 3. Réinstallez le logiciel ou créez un support de sauvegarde à utiliser ultérieurement.37 Utilisation des outils de support technique Messages système Si votre ordinateur rencontre un problème ou une erreur, il peut afficher un message système qui vous permettra d'en identifier la cause et vous renseignera sur les mesures à prendre pour résoudre le problème. REMARQUE : si le message affiché par l'ordinateur ne figure pas parmi les exemples suivants, reportez-vous à la documentation du système d'exploitation ou du programme qui était en cours d'exécution au moment où le message est apparu contactez Dell (consultez la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 57) pour obtenir de l'aide. Alert! Previous attempts at booting this system have failed at checkpoint [nnnn] (Alerte ! Les précédentes tentatives d'amorçage de ce système ont échoué au point de reprise [nnnn]). For help in resolving this problem, please note this checkpoint and contact Dell Technical Support (Pour obtenir de l'aide afin de résoudre ce problème, veuillez noter le point de reprise et contacter le Support technique Dell) : l'ordinateur n'a pas réussi à exécuter la procédure d'amorçage après trois tentatives consécutives à cause de la même erreur. Pour obtenir de l'aide, contactez Dell (voir la section « Contacter Dell », page 57). CMOS checksum error or RTC is reset, BIOS Setup default has been loaded (Erreur somme de contrôle CMOS ou réinitialisation RTC, la configuration par défaut du BIOS a été chargée) : défaillance possible de la carte système ou pile de l'horloge en temps réel déchargée. Remplacez la pile (reportez-vous à la Notice d'entretien à l'adresse support.dell.com/manuals) ou contactez Dell (consultez la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 57) pour obtenir de l'aide. CPU fan failure : Défaillance du ventilateur du processeur. Le ventilateur du processeur doit être remplacé. Consultez le Guide de maintenance à l'adresse support.dell.com/manuals38 Utilisation des outils de support technique Hard-disk drive failure (défaillance du lecteur de disque dur) : défaillance possible du lecteur de disque dur lors de l'auto-test de démarrage (POST). Pour obtenir de l'aide, contactez Dell (voir la section « Contacter Dell », page 57). Hard-disk drive read failure (défaillance de lecture du lecteur de disque dur) : défaillance possible du lecteur de disque dur lors du test de démarrage du disque dur. Pour obtenir de l'aide, contactez Dell (voir la section « Contacter Dell », page 57). Keyboard failure (défaillance du clavier) : remplacez le clavier ou vérifiez s'il est branché correctement. No boot device available (aucun périphérique d'amorçage disponible) : absence de partition d'amorçage sur le disque dur, le câble du disque dur est mal branché ou aucun périphérique d'amorçage n'existe. • Si le disque dur est le périphérique d'amorçage, assurez-vous que les câbles sont connectés et que le disque est correctement installé et partitionné en tant que périphérique d'amorçage. • Accédez au programme de configuration du système et vérifiez que les informations de séquence d'amorçage sont correctes (voir le Guide de maintenance sur le site support.dell.com/manuals). No timer tick interrupt (absence d'interruption de cadence de l'horloge) : puce sur la carte système peut-être défectueuse ou défaillance de la carte système (voir le Guide de maintenance sur le site support.dell.com/manuals) ou contactez Dell (voir la section « Contacter Dell » page 57) pour obtenir de l'aide.39 Utilisation des outils de support technique USB over current error (erreur de surintensité USB) : déconnectez le périphérique USB. Votre périphériqueUSB a besoin d'une alimentation en électricité plus importante pour fonctionner correctement. Utilisez une source d'alimentation externe pour connecter le périphériqueUSB ou, si votre périphérique possède deux câblesUSB, connectez-les tous les deux. CAUTION - Hard Drive SELF MONITORING SYSTEM has reported that a parameter has exceeded its normal operating range. Dell recommends that you back up your data regularly. A parameter out of range may or may not indicate a potential hard drive problem (PRECAUTION : le système d'autosurveillance de disque dur indique qu'un paramètre se situe en dehors de la plage de fonctionnement normal. Dell vous recommande de sauvegarder régulièrement vos données. Un paramètre en dehors de la plage de fonctionnement normal peut indiquer un éventuel problème de disque dur): erreur SMART, défaillance possible du disque dur. Pour obtenir de l'aide, contactez Dell (voir la section « Contacter Dell », page 57). Utilitaire de résolution de problèmes matériels Si un périphérique n'est pas détecté pendant la configuration du système d'exploitation ou s'il est détecté mais n'est pas configuré correctement, servez-vous de l'Utilitaire de résolution des problèmes matériels pour résoudre ce problème d'incompatibilité. Pour lancer l'utilitaire de résolution des problèmes matériels : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer → Aide et support. 2. Saisissez utilitaire de résolution des problèmes matériels dans le champ de recherche, puis appuyez sur pour lancer la recherche. 3. Dans les résultats de la recherche, sélectionnez l'option décrivant le mieux le problème et effectuez les étapes suivantes de dépannage.40 Utilisation des outils de support technique Dell Diagnostics Si vous rencontrez un problème avec votre ordinateur, procédez aux vérifications décrites dans la section « Blocages et problèmes logiciels », page 33 et exécutez Dell Diagnostics avant de contacter Dell pour obtenir une assistance technique. REMARQUE : le programme Dell Diagnostics fonctionne uniquement sur les ordinateurs Dell. Vérifiez que le périphérique que vous souhaitez tester s'affiche dans l'utilitaire de configuration du système et qu'il est activé. Pour accéder à l'utilitaire de configuration système (BIOS), mettez l'ordinateur sous tension (ou redémarrez-le) et appuyez sur lorsque le logo DELL apparaît. Démarrage de Dell ePSA Diagnostics ePSA (Enhanced Pre-boot System Assessment) teste des périphriques tels que la carte système, le clavier, l'écran, la mémoire, le disque dur, etc. 1. Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension (ou redémarrez-le). 2. Lorsque le logo Dell apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . REMARQUE : si vous tardez trop et que le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît, patientez jusqu'à ce que le Bureau de Microsoft Windows s'affiche, puis éteignez votre ordinateur et réessayez. 3. Sélectionnez Diagnostics dans le menu d'amorçage et appuyez sur . 4. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent.41 Utilisation des outils de support technique Si un périphérique ne passe pas le test, celui-ci s'arrête et l'ordinateur émet un signal sonore. Notez le(s) code(s) d'erreur qui s'affichent à l'écran, puis contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 57) pour obtenir de l'aide. • Pour arrêter ePSA et redémarrer votre ordinateur, appuyez sur . • Pour passer au test suivant, appuyez sur . • Pour réexécuter un test ayant échoué, appuyez sur . Si ePSA réussit, le message suivant s'affiche « Do you want to run the remaining memory tests ? This will take about 30 minutes or more. Do you want to continue ? (Recommended) » (Voulezvous exécuter les tests de mémoire restants ? Cette opération dure au moins 30 minutes. Voulez-vous continuer ? (recommandé).) Si vous rencontrez des problèmes avec la mémoire, appuyez sur , sinon appuyez sur . Le message suivant apparaît : « Enhanced Pre-boot System Assessment Complete. (Évaluation du système de préamorçage terminée.) » 5. Cliquez sur Quitter pour redémarrer l'ordinateur. Démarrage de Dell PC Checkup Dell PC Checkup analyse et teste le matériel de votre ordinateur. Il propose des solutions automatisées pour les problèmes de configuration les plus courants. 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer → Tous les programmes→ Dell→ Centre de support Dell→ Lancer PC Checkup. 2. Sélectionnez le test à exécuter et suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. REMARQUE : si une erreur est signalée à la fin des tests, notez le(s) périphérique(s) et le(s) (s) ayant échoué. Pour obtenir de l'aide, contactez Dell (voir la section « Contacter Dell », page 57). 3. Fermez la fenêtre pour quitter PC Checkup.42 Vous pouvez restaurer le système d'exploitation de votre ordinateur à l'aide des options suivantes : PRÉCAUTION : si vous utilisez Dell Factory Image Restore ou le disque du système d'exploitation, vous perdrez tous les fichiers de données de votre ordinateur. Si possible, sauvegardez toutes les données avant de lancer ces options. Option Utilisation Restauration du système en tant que première solution Dell DataSafe Local Backup si la restauration du système ne permet pas de résoudre votre problème. Support de récupération système si une défaillance du système d'exploitation vous empêche d'utiliser la Restauration du système ou DataSafe Local Backup. lors de l'installation des logiciels installés en usine par Dell sur un disque dur nouvellement installé. Dell Factory Image Restore pour restaurer votre ordinateur à son état d'exploitation initial, lorsqu'il vous a été livré. Disque Operating System (Système d'exploitation) pour installer uniquement le système d'exploitation sur votre ordinateur. REMARQUE : le disque Operating System (Système d'exploitation) est en option et n'est pas fourni avec tous les ordinateurs. Restauration du système d'exploitation INSPIRON43 Restauration du système d'exploitation Restauration du système Les systèmes d'exploitation Microsoft Windows proposent une option de restauration du système qui vous permet de restaurer l'ordinateur à un état antérieur (sans affecter les fichiers de données) si les modifications apportées au matériel, aux logiciels ou à d'autres paramètres du système empêchent l'ordinateur de fonctionner correctement. Toute modification apportée à votre ordinateur par la restauration du système est totalement réversible. PRÉCAUTION : Effectuez des sauvegardes régulières de vos fichiers de données. La fonction Restauration du système n'assure ni la surveillance ni la restauration de vos données personnelles. Démarrage de la restauration du système 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer . 2. Dans la zone Rechercher, saisissez Restauration du système, puis appuyez sur . REMARQUE : la fenêtre Contrôle de compte d'utilisateur peut apparaître. Si vous êtes administrateur de l'ordinateur, cliquez sur Continuer. Sinon, prenez contact avec votre administrateur pour pouvoir poursuivre. 3. Cliquez sur Suivant et suivez les instructions qui s'affichent. Si la fonction Restauration du système n'a pas résolu le problème, vous pouvez annuler la dernière restauration du système.44 Restauration du système d'exploitation Annulation de la dernière restauration du système REMARQUE : avant de procéder à l'annulation de la dernière restauration du système, sauvegardez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts, et quittez tous les programmes. Vous ne devez en aucun cas modifier, ouvrir ni supprimer des fichiers ou des programmes tant que la restauration du système n'est pas terminée. 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer . 2. Dans la zone Rechercher, saisissez Restauration du système, puis appuyez sur . 3. Cliquez sur Annuler ma dernière restauration, puis sur Suivant. DellDataSafe Local Backup PRÉCAUTION : l'utilisation de Dell DataSafe Local Backup pour restaurer votre système d'exploitation supprime définitivement tous les programmes ou les pilotes installés sur votre ordinateur après l'avoir reçu. Créez une sauvegarde des applications que vous devez installer sur votre ordinateur avant d'utiliser Dell DataSafe Local Backup. N'utilisez Dell DataSafe Local Backup que si la fonction Restauration du système n'a pas résolu votre problème de système d'exploitation. PRÉCAUTION : Bien que la fonction Dell DataSafe Local Backup soit conçue pour préserver les fichiers de données de votre ordinateur, nous vous recommandons de sauvegarder ces fichiers avant de l'utiliser. REMARQUE : il se peut que Dell DataSafe Local Backup ne soit pas disponible dans votre pays.45 Restauration du système d'exploitation REMARQUE : si Dell DataSafe Local Backup n'est pas disponible sur votre ordinateur, utilisez Dell Factory Image Restore (Restauration de l'image d'usine Dell), (reportez vous à « Dell Factory Image Restore », page 48) pour restaurer votre système d'exploitation. Vous pouvez utiliser Dell DataSafe Local Backup pour restaurer le disque dur à l'état dans lequel il se trouvait lorsque vous avez acheté l'ordinateur tout en préservant les fichiers de données. Dell DataSafe Local Backup vous permet de : • Sauvegarder et restaurer votre ordinateur à son état d'exploitation antérieur • Créer un support de récupération système (voir « Création d'un support de récupération système (recommandé) » page 12) Dell DataSafe Local Backup Basic Pour restaurer le système d'exploitation et les logiciels installés en usine par Dell tout en conservant les fichiers de données : 1. Éteignez l'ordinateur. 2. Déconnectez tous les périphériques (lecteur USB, imprimante, etc.) reliés à votre ordinateur et retirez tout matériel interne que vous avez ajouté récemment. 3. Allumez l'ordinateur. 4. Lorsque le logo DELL apparaît, appuyez plusieurs fois sur afin d'accéder à la fenêtre Options de démarrage avancées. REMARQUE : si vous tardez trop et que le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît, patientez jusqu'à ce que le Bureau de Microsoft Windows s'affiche, puis éteignez votre ordinateur et réessayez. 5. Sélectionnez Repair Your Computer (Réparer l'ordinateur).46 Restauration du système d'exploitation 6. Sélectionnez Dell DataSafe Restore and Emergency Backup dans le menu System Recovery Options (Options de récupération système) et suivez les instructions qui apparaissent. REMARQUE : le processus de restauration peut prendre une heure voire plus selon le volume des données à restaurer. REMARQUE : pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la base de connaissances, article nº 353560, disponible sur le site support.dell.com. Mise à niveau vers Dell DataSafe Local Backup Professional REMARQUE : il est possible que Dell DataSafe Local Backup Professional soit installé sur votre ordinateur, si vous l'avez commandé lors de votre achat. Dell DataSafe Local Backup Professional fournit des fonctionnalités supplémentaires vous permettant de : • Sauvegarder et restaurer votre ordinateur sur la base des types de fichiers. • Sauvegarder les fichiers sur un périphérique de stockage local • Planifier des sauvegardes automatiques Pour effectuer une mise à niveau vers Dell DataSafe Local Backup Professional : 1. Cliquez deux fois sur l'icône Dell DataSafe Local Backup Online dans la zone de notification de votre Bureau. 2. Cliquez sur UPGRADE NOW ! (METTRE à NIVEAU MAINTENANT !) 3. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent.47 Restauration du système d'exploitation Support de récupération système PRÉCAUTION : bien que le support de récupération système soit conçu pour préserver les fichiers de données de votre ordinateur, nous vous recommandons de sauvegarder ces fichiers avant de l'utiliser. Vous pouvez utiliser le support de récupération système, créé à l'aide de Dell DataSafe Local Backup, pour restaurer le disque dur à l'état dans lequel il se trouvait lorsque vous avez acheté l'ordinateur tout en préservant les fichiers de données. Utilisez le support de récupération système dans les cas où : • Une défaillance du système d'exploitation vous empêche d'utiliser les options de récupération installées sur votre ordinateur. • Une défaillance du disque dur empêche la récupération des données. Pour restaurer le système d'exploitation et les logiciels installés en usine par Dell sur votre ordinateur à l'aide du support de récupération système : 1. Insérez le disque ou la clé USB de récupération système et redémarrez votre ordinateur. 2. Lorsque le logo DELL apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . REMARQUE : si vous tardez trop et que le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît, patientez jusqu'à ce que le Bureau de Microsoft Windows s'affiche, puis éteignez votre ordinateur et réessayez. 3. Sélectionnez le périphérique d'amorçage approprié dans la liste et appuyez sur . 4. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent.48 Restauration du système d'exploitation Dell Factory Image Restore PRÉCAUTION: l'utilisation de Dell Factory Image Restore pour restaurer votre système d'exploitation supprime définitivement toutes les données qui figurent sur le disque dur ainsi que tous les programmes et tous les pilotes installés après que vous avez reçu votre ordinateur. Dans la mesure du possible, sauvegardez toutes vos données avant d'utiliser cette option. Utilisez Dell Factory Image Restore uniquement si la fonction Restauration du système n'a pas résolu votre problème de système d'exploitation. REMARQUE : Dell Factory Image Restore peut ne pas être disponible dans certains pays ou sur certains ordinateurs. REMARQUE : si Dell Factory Image Restore n'est pas disponible sur votre ordinateur, utilisez Dell DataSafe Local Backup (reportez vous à « Dell DataSafe Local Backup », page 44) pour restaurer votre système d'exploitation. Utilisez Dell Factory Image Restore pour restaurer le système d'exploitation uniqiuement en dernier recours. Cette option restaure le disque dur à l'état de fonctionnement dans lequel il se trouvait lorsque vous avez acheté l'ordinateur. Tous les programmes ou fichiers ajoutés depuis que vous avez reçu votre ordinateur, notamment les fichiers de données, sont définitivement supprimés du disque dur. Les fichiers de données incluent les documents, feuilles de calcul, messages électroniques, photos numériques, fichiers audio, etc. Si possible, sauvegardez toutes les données avant de lancer Dell Factory Image Restore. Démarrage de Dell Factory Image Restore 1. Allumez l'ordinateur. 2. Lorsque le logo DELL apparaît, appuyez plusieurs fois sur afin d'accéder à la fenêtre Options de démarrage avancées.49 Restauration du système d'exploitation REMARQUE : si vous tardez trop et que le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît, patientez jusqu'à ce que le Bureau de Microsoft Windows s'affiche, puis éteignez votre ordinateur et réessayez. 3. Sélectionnez Repair Your Computer (Réparer votre ordinateur). La fenêtre System Recovery Options (Options de récupération système) apparaît. 4. Sélectionnez une disposition de clavier, puis cliquez sur Next (Suivant). 5. Pour accéder aux options de réparation, ouvrez une session en tant qu'utilisateur local. Pour accéder à l'invite de commande, saisissez administrateur dans le champ Nom d'utilisateur puis cliquez sur OK. 6. Cliquez sur Dell Factory Image Restore. L'écran de bienvenue Dell Factory Image Restore apparaît. REMARQUE: selon la configuration de votre ordinateur, vous devrez peut-être sélectionner Dell Factory Tools (Outils d'usine Dell), puis Dell Factory Image Restore (Restauration d'image d'usine Dell). 7. Cliquez sur Next (Suivant). L'écran Confirm Data Deletion (Confirmer la suppression des données) apparaît. REMARQUE : si vous ne souhaitez pas effectuer la restauration d'image d'usine, cliquez sur Cancel (Annuler). 8. Cochez la case pour confirmer le reformatage du disque dur et la restauration des logiciels du système à l'état d'origine, puis cliquez sur Next (Suivant). Le processus de restauration commence ; il peut prendre au moins cinq minutes. Un message apparaît lorsque le système d'exploitation et les applications pré- installées en usine ont été restaurés à leur état de sortie d'usine. 9. Cliquez sur Finish (Terminer) pour redémarrer votre ordinateur.50 Si vous rencontrez un problème lié à l'ordinateur, effectuez les étapes suivantes pour diagnostiquer et résoudre ce problème : 1. Reportez-vous à la section « Résolution des problèmes » à la page 28 pour obtenir des informations et connaître les procédures de résolution relatives au problème rencontré par votre ordinateur. 2. Reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 40 pour connaître les procédures d'exécution de Dell Diagnostics. 3. Remplissez la « Liste de vérification de diagnostics », page 56. 4. Utilisez la gamme complète de services en ligne de Dell disponibles sur le site Web de support technique (support.dell.com) pour obtenir de l'aide concernant les procédures d'installation et de dépannage. Reportez-vous à la section « Services en ligne » à la page 52 pour obtenir la liste exhaustive des services de support technique Dell en ligne. 5. Si les étapes précédentes ne vous ont pas permis de résoudre le problème, reportezvous à la section « Avant d'appeler », page 56. REMARQUE : appelez le support technique de Dell depuis un téléphone proche de l'ordinateur afin qu'un technicien puisse vous guider dans la procédure de dépannage. REMARQUE : il se peut que le système de code du service express de Dell ne soit pas disponible dans votre pays. Accès à l'aide INSPIRON51 Accès à l'aide Lorsque le système téléphonique automatisé de Dell vous y invite, saisissez votre code de service express pour acheminer votre appel vers l'équipe de support technique appropriée. Si vous ne disposez pas d'un code de service express, ouvrez le dossier Dell Accessories (Accessoires Dell), doublecliquez sur l'icône Express Service Code (Code de service express) et suivez les instructions qui s'affichent. REMARQUE : certains services ne sont pas toujours disponibles en dehors des États-Unis. Contactez votre représentant Dell local pour en savoir plus. Support technique et service clientèle Le service de support technique de Dell est à votre disposition pour répondre à toutes les questions relatives au matériel Dell. Notre équipe de support technique utilise des tests de diagnostic informatisés pour répondre plus rapidement et plus efficacement à vos questions. Pour contacter le service de support technique Dell, reportez-vous à la section « Avant d'appeler » à la page 56, puis recherchez les informations de contact qui s'appliquent à votre pays ou rendez-vous sur le site support.dell.com.52 Accès à l'aide DellConnect DellConnect, outil d'accès en ligne simple, permet à un technicien de support technique de Dell d'accéder à votre ordinateur, par une connexion haut débit, afin de diagnostiquer les problèmes et de les résoudre sous votre supervision. Pour plus d'informations, rendezvous sur le site www.dell.com/DellConnect. Services en ligne Pour en savoir plus sur les produits et services Dell, consultez les sites suivants : • www.dell.com • www.dell.com/ap (pays d'Asie et du Pacifique uniquement) • www.dell.com/jp (Japon uniquement) • www.euro.dell.com (Europe uniquement) • www.dell.com/la (pays d'Amérique latine et des Caraïbes) • www.dell.ca (Canada uniquement) Vous pouvez accéder au support technique de Dell par l'intermédiaire des sites et adresses e-mail suivants : Sites Web de support technique Dell • support.dell.com • support.jp.dell.com (Japon uniquement) • support.euro.dell.com (Europe uniquement) • supportapj.dell.com (Asie/Pacifique uniquement)53 Accès à l'aide Adresses e-mail du support technique Dell : • mobile_support@us.dell.com • support@us.dell.com • la-techsupport@dell.com (pays d'Amérique latine et des Caraïbes uniquement) • apsupport@dell.com (pays d'Asie et du Pacifique uniquement) Adresses e-mail des services Marketing et Ventes de Dell • apmarketing@dell.com (pays d'Asie et du Pacifique uniquement) • sales_canada@dell.com (Canada uniquement) FTP (File Transfert Protocol [protocole de transfert de fichiers]) anonyme • ftp.dell.com Connectez-vous en tant qu'utilisateur : anonyme et utilisez votre adresse e-mail comme mot de passe. Service d'état des commandes automatisé Pour vérifier l'état de vos commandes de produits Dell, rendez-vous sur le site Web support.dell.com ou appelez le service automatisé d'état des commandes. Un enregistrement vous demande les informations nécessaires pour repérer votre commande et en faire un rapport. Si vous avez rencontré un problème lié à votre commande, tel que des pièces manquantes ou non adaptées, ou une facturation erronée, contactez le Service clientèle de Dell. Gardez votre facture ou votre bordereau d'expédition à portée de main lorsque vous appelez. Pour obtenir le numéro de téléphone à appeler depuis votre pays, consultez la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 57.54 Accès à l'aide Informations sur les produits Pour obtenir des informations sur les autres produits disponibles auprès de Dell ou si vous souhaitez passer commande, rendez-vous sur le site Web www.dell.com. Pour obtenir le numéro de téléphone à appeler à partir de votre pays ou pour parler à un représentant du service des ventes, consultez la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 57. Retour d'articles pour réparation dans le cadre de la garantie ou pour avoir Préparez tous les articles à retourner, pour réparation ou avoir, comme indiqué ci-après : REMARQUE : avant de retourner le produit à Dell, assurez-vous d'avoir sauvegardé toutes les données du ou des disques dur ou de tout autre périphérique de stockage du produit. Supprimez toutes les informations personnelles, privées et confidentielles, et retirez tous les supports amovibles, tels que CD et cartes PC. Nous déclinons toute responsabilité en ce qui concerne vos informations confidentielles, propriétaires ou personnelles, et en cas de perte ou d'endommagement des données ou des supports amovibles qui seraient renvoyés avec le produit.55 Accès à l'aide 1. Appelez Dell pour obtenir un numéro d'autorisation de retour du matériel et inscrivez-le lisiblement et bien en vue sur l'emballage. Pour obtenir le numéro de téléphone à appeler depuis votre pays, consultez la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 57. 2. Joignez une copie de la facture et une lettre décrivant le motif du retour. 3. Joignez une copie de la liste de vérification des diagnostics (voir « Liste de vérification des diagnostics », page 56), indiquant les tests effectués et tous les messages d'erreur mentionnés par Dell Diagnostics (voir « Dell Diagnostics », page 40). 4. Joignez tous les accessoires qui accompagnent le/les article(s) renvoyé(s) (câble de l'adaptateur secteur, logiciels, guides, etc.) s'il s'agit d'un retour pour avoir. 5. Empaquetez l'équipement à renvoyer dans son emballage d'origine (ou équivalent). REMARQUE : les frais d'expédition sont à votre charge. Vous devez également assurer les produits retournés et assumer les risques de perte en cours d'expédition. Les envois en contre remboursement ne sont pas acceptés. REMARQUE : en cas de manquement à l'une des conditions précitées, Dell refusera le retour à la réception et vous renverra les éléments.56 Accès à l'aide Avant d'appeler REMARQUE : munissez-vous de votre code de service express lorsque vous appelez. Ce code permet au système d'assistance téléphonique automatisé de Dell de diriger votre appel plus efficacement. Le système peut également demander le numéro de série (situé à l'arrière de votre ordinateur). Localisation de votre numéro de série et du code de service express Le numéro de série et le code de service express de votre ordinateur se trouvent sur une étiquette située à l'arrière de l'ordinateur(voir « Fonctionnalités du panneau arrière » page 20). N'oubliez pas de remplir la liste de vérification des diagnostics ci-dessous. Si possible, allumez votre ordinateur avant de contacter Dell pour obtenir de l'aide et appelez d'un téléphone qui se trouve à proximité de votre ordinateur. Vous serez peut-être invité à saisir certaines commandes au clavier, à fournir des informations détaillées sur le fonctionnement de l'ordinateur ou à essayer d'autres méthodes de dépannage uniquement possibles sur ce dernier. Assurez-vous que la documentation de l'ordinateur est disponible. Liste de vérification des diagnostics • Nom : • Date : • Adresse : • Numéro de téléphone : • Numéro de série et code de service express (situés sur une étiquette placée à l'arrière de l'ordinateur) :57 Accès à l'aide • Numéro d'autorisation de retour du matériel (s'il vous a été fourni par le support technique Dell) : • Système d'exploitation et version : • Périphériques : • Cartes d'extension : • Êtes-vous connecté à un réseau ? Oui/Non • Réseau, version et carte réseau : • Programmes et versions : Consultez la documentation de votre système d'exploitation pour déterminer le contenu des fichiers de démarrage de l'ordinateur. Si l'ordinateur est connecté à une imprimante, imprimez chaque fichier. Le cas échéant, notez le contenu de chaque fichier avant d'appeler Dell. • Message d'erreur, code sonore ou code de diagnostic : • Description du problème et procédures de dépannage effectuées : Contacter Dell Depuis les États-Unis, appelez le 800-WWW-DELL (800-999-3355). REMARQUE : si vous n'avez pas de connexion Internet, vous trouverez nos coordonnées sur votre confirmation de commande, bordereau d'expédition, facture ou dans le catalogue de produits Dell. Dell fournit plusieurs options de service et de support technique en ligne et par téléphone. Leur disponibilité variant d'un pays à l'autre, il est possible que certains services ne soient pas proposés dans votre pays. Pour prendre contact avec Dell pour des questions commerciales, de support technique ou de service clientèle : 1. Visitez le site www.dell.com/ContactDell. 2. Sélectionnez votre pays ou région. 3. Sélectionnez le lien correspondant au service ou au support technique dont vous avez besoin. 4. Choisissez la méthode de contact qui vous convient.58 Recherche d'informations et de ressources supplémentaires Si vous voulez : Consultez : réinstaller le système d'exploitation « Support de récupération système », page 47 exécuter un programme de diagnostics pour votre ordinateur « Dell Diagnostics », page 40 réinstaller le logiciel système « Mes Téléchargements Dell », page 36 trouver plus d'informations à propos du système d'exploitation Microsoft Windows et de ses fonctionnalités support.dell.com mettre à niveau votre ordinateur en remplaçant ou en ajoutant des composants, comme par exemple un nouveau disque dur Réinstaller ou remplacer une pièce usée ou défectueuse le Manuel de maintenance sur le site support.dell.com/manuals REMARQUE: dans certains pays, l'ouverture de l'ordinateur et le remplacement de pièces peuvent annuler la garantie. Consultez votre garantie et les politiques de retour avant toute intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. INSPIRON59 Recherche d'informations et de ressources supplémentaires Si vous voulez : Consultez : trouver des informations sur les meilleures pratiques en matière de sécurité pour votre ordinateur consulter les informations sur la garantie, les conditions d'utilisation (États-Unis uniquement), les consignes de sécurité, les informations sur les réglementations, l'ergonomie et le contrat de licence utilisateur final. les documents de sécurité et de garantie fournis avec votre ordinateur ; reportez-vous également à la page Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation), à l'adresse www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance accéder au numéro de série/code de service express de votre ordinateur: vous devez fournir un numéro de série pour identifier votre ordinateur sur le site support.dell.com ou pour contacter le support technique. l'arrière de votre ordinateur. « Centre d'assistance Dell Support Center », page 35 accéder aux pilotes et aux téléchargements ; fichiers lisez-moi. bénéficier du support technique et d'une aide relative aux produits vérifier l'état de vos commandes trouver des solutions et des réponses à des questions courantes trouver des informations sur des mises à jour de dernière minute concernant des modifications techniques apportées à votre ordinateur ou des documents de référence destinés aux techniciens ou aux utilisateurs expérimentés support.dell.com60 Cette section fournit des informations qui peuvent vous être utiles lors de la configuration de votre ordinateur, de sa mise à niveau ou de la mise à jour de ses pilotes. REMARQUE : les offres peuvent varier d'un pays à l'autre. Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration de votre ordinateur, consultez la section Informations détaillées sur le système dans le Centre d'assistance Dell Support Center. Pour démarrer le Centre d'assistance Dell Support Center, cliquez sur Démarrer → Tous les programmes→ Dell→ Dell Support Center (Centre d'assistance Dell Support Center)→ Launch Dell Support Center (Démarrer le Centre d'assistance Dell Support Center). Caractéristiques Modèle de l'ordinateur Dell Inspiron 620 Processeur Type Intel Core i3 Intel Core i5 Intel Celeron Intel Pentium double cœur Jeu de puces du système Type Intel H61 Lecteurs et disques Accessibles de l'intérieur deux baies de lecteur de 3,5 pouces pour les disques durs SATA INSPIRON61 Caractéristiques Lecteurs et disques Accessibles de l'extérieur deux baies de lecteur de 5,25 pouces pour un lecteur combiné SATA DVD+/-RW/ Blu-ray Disc (en option)/ Blu-ray Disc réinscriptible (en option) Mémoire Connecteurs pour module de mémoire deux connecteurs accessibles à l'utilisateur Capacité des barrettes de mémoire 1 Go, 2 Go et 4 Go Type de mémoire mémoire non ECC uniquement DDR3 1333 MHz Mémoire minimale 1 Go Mémoire Mémoire maximale 8 Go Configurations possibles de la mémoire 2 Go, 3 Go, 4 Go, 6 Go et 8 Go REMARQUE : pour obtenir des instructions sur la mise à niveau de la mémoire, consultez le Manuel de maintenance à l'adresse support.dell.com/manuals. Audio Contrôleur audio Son haute définition, canal 5.1 intégré62 Caractéristiques Vidéo UMA Contrôleur vidéo Intel HD Graphics Séparée Contrôleur vidéo AMD Radeon HD 6450 AMD Radeon HD 6670 NVIDIA Geforce G420 Connecteurs internes PCI Express x1 trois connecteurs à 36 broches PCI Express x16 un connecteur à 164 broches SATA quatre connecteurs à 7 broches Connecteurs externes Audio : Panneau avant : un connecteur de casque/de hautparleurs stéréo et un connecteur de microphone (entrée) Panneau arrière trois connecteurs pour la prise en charge 5.1 Carte réseau un connecteur RJ45 USB deux connecteurs frontaux et six connecteurs arrière USB 2.0 VGA un connecteur 15 broches femelle HDMI un connecteur à 19 broches Lecteur de carte multimédia lecteur de carte 8 en 163 Caractéristiques Batterie Type 3 V CR-2032 pile bouton au lithium Alimentation Bloc d'alimentation secteur Consommation en watts 300 W Tension d'entrée 100-127 VCA/ 200-240 VCA Fréquence d'entrée 50/60 Hz Courant d'entrée 9 A (8 A)/4,5 A Communication Carte réseau LAN Ethernet 10/100/1000 sur la carte système Sans fil (en option) Wi-Fi Caractéristiques physiques Hauteur 368,20 mm (14,5 po) Largeur 182,80 mm (7,20 po) Profondeur 448,80 mm (17,67 po) Poids 8,94 kg (19,71 livres)64 Caractéristiques Environnement informatique Plage de températures : Fonctionnement 10°C à 35°C (50°F à 95°F) Stockage –40°C à 65°C (–40°F à 149°F) Humidité relative (maximale) 20 à 80 % (sans condensation) Choc maximal (en fonctionnement, mesuré avec Dell Diagnostics exécuté sur une impulsion demi-sinusoïdale de 2 ms ; également mesuré en position de repos des têtes du disque dur et impulsion demisinusoïdale de 2 ms pour le stockage) : Fonctionnement 40 G pour 2 ms avec un changement de vitesse de 51 cm/s (20 pouces/s) Environnement informatique à l'arrêt 50 G pour 26 ms avec un changement de vitesse de 813 cm/s (320 pouces/s) Vibration maximale (avec un spectre de vibration aléatoire simulant l'environnement utilisateur) : Fonctionnement 0,25 GRMS à l'arrêt 2,20 GRMS Altitude (maximale) : Fonctionnement –15,2 à 3 048 m (–50 à 10 000 pieds) Stockage –15,2 à 10 668 m (–50 à 35 000 pieds) Niveau de contaminants atmosphériques G2 ou inférieur, tel que défini par la norme ISA-S71.04-198565 Annexe Informations sur la norme NOM ou Norme Officielle Mexicaine (pour le Mexique uniquement) Les informations suivantes sont fournies sur le(s) appareil(s) décrit(s) dans ce document conformément aux dispositions de la Norme Officielle Mexicaine (NOM) : Importateur: Dell Mexico S.A. de C.V. Paseo de la Reforma 2620 – Piso 11° Col. Lomas Altas 11950 Mexico, D.F. Numéro de modèle réglementaire Type règlementaire Tension d'entrée Fréquence d'entrée Courant d'entrée nominal D11M D11M001 115 V/230 VCA 50/60 Hz 7 A/4 A ou 6 A/2,1 A Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous aux consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre ordinateur. Pour plus d'informations sur les meilleures pratiques en matière de sécurité, reportez-vous au site www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance. INSPIRON66 A adresses électroniques support technique 53 adresses électroniques de support technique 53 aide obtention d’aide et d’assistance 50 appeler Dell 56 C caractéristiques 60 CD, lecture et création 24 connecteur HDMI 23 connecteur réseau emplacement 23 connecteurs à l’avant 16 connexion câble réseau en option 9 écran 6 Internet 13 connexion à Internet 13 connexion FTP, anonyme 53 connexion réseau dépannage 30 connexion réseau sans fil 29 contacter Dell en ligne 57 D DataSafe Local Backup 44 DellConnect 52 Dell Diagnostics 40 Dell Factory Image Restore 48 Index INSPIRON67 Index Dell Stage 25 DVD, lecture et création 24 E emplacement pour câble de sécurité 21 expédition de produits retour ou réparation 55 F FAI fournisseur d’accès Internet 13 fonctionnalités logicielles 24 fonctions de l’ordinateur 24 L liste de vérification des diagnostics 56 M Messages système 37 N numéro de série 56 O options de réinstallation du système 42 P pilotes et téléchargements 59 problèmes de mémoire résolution 32 problèmes logiciels 33 problèmes matériels diagnostic 39 problèmes, résolution 28 produits informations et achat 5468 Index R recherche d’informations supplémentaires 58 résolution des problèmes 28 ressources, recherche supplémentaire 58 restauration d’une image d’usine 48 Restauration du système 43 retours dans le cadre de la garantie 54 S service clientèle 51 sites d’assistance dans le monde entier 52 support de restauration du système 47 T tuner TV 13 U USB 2.0 connecteurs à l’arrière 23 Utilitaire de résolution de problèmes matériels 39 V voyant d’activité du disque dur 18 W Windows Assistant Compatibilité des programmes 33 Safety information About this user’s guide Features of your new product Introduction Getting started Network setup (Dell 1130n only) Basic setup Media and tray Printing Management tools Maintenance Troubleshooting Supplies Specifications Appendix Glossary www.dell.com | www.support.dell.com Dell 1130 Dell 1130nadjusting tray size booklet printing booklets change percentage of your document cleaning inside outside cleaning a machine control panel convention duplex printing (manual) printer driver Embedded Web Service general information favorites settings, for printing features features machine features power saving feature print media feature printer driver supplied software font setting front view glossary jam clearing paper tips for avoiding paper jams Linux common Linux problems driver installation for network connected driver installation for USB cable connected printer properties printing supplied softwares system requirements unifled driver configurator loading paper in manual tray paper in the tray1 special media Macintosh common Macintosh problems driver installation for network connected adjusting tray size booklet printing booklets change percentage of your document cleaning inside outside cleaning a machine control panel convention duplex printing (manual) printer driver Embedded Web Service general information favorites settings, for printing features features machine features power saving feature print media feature printer driver supplied software font setting front view glossary jam clearing paper tips for avoiding paper jams Linux common Linux problems driver installation for network connected driver installation for USB cable connected printer properties printing supplied softwares system requirements unifled driver configurator loading paper in manual tray paper in the tray1 special mediaCopyright Information in this document is subject to change without notice. ©2010 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, and Dell Toner Management System are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, and Windows Server are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Adobe and Acrobat Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to the entities claiming the marks and names of their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Refer to the 'LICENSE.txt' file in the provided CD-ROM for the open source license information. REV. 1.00Safety information These warnings and precautions are included in order to prevent injury to you and others, as well as preventing any potential damage to your machine. Be sure to read and understand all of these instructions before using the machine. Use common sense for operating any electrical appliance and whenever using your machine. Also, follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine and in the accompanying literature. After reading this section, keep it in a safe place for future reference. Important safety symbols This section explains the meanings of all icons and signs in the user's guide. These safety symbols are in order, according to the degree of danger. Explanation of all icons and signs used in the user’s guide: Warning Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death. Caution Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage. Do not attempt. Do not disassemble. Do not touch. Unplug the power cord from the wall socket. Make sure the machine is grounded to prevent electric shock. Call the service center for help. Follow directions explicitly. Operating environment Warning Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the electrical outlet is not grounded. This could result in electric shock or fire. Do not bend, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Stepping on or allowing the power cord to be crushed by a heavy object could result in electric shock or fire. Do not place anything on top of the machine (water, small metal or heavy objects, candles, lit cigarettes, etc.). This could result in electric shock or fire. Do not remove the plug by pulling on the cord; do not handle the plug with wet hands. This could result in electric shock or fire. If the machine gets overheated, it releases smoke, makes strange noises, or generates an odd odor, immediately turn off the power switch and unplug the machine. This could result in electric shock or fire. Caution During an electrical storm or for a period of non-operation, remove the power plug from the electrical outlet. This could result in electric shock or fire. If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet, do not attempt to force it in. Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet, or this could result in electric shock. Be careful, the paper output area is hot. Burns could occur. Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC interface cords.This could result in electric shock or fire and/or injury to your pet. If the machine has been dropped, or if the cabinet appears damaged, unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel. Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. If the machine does not operate properly after these instructions have been followed, unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel. Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. If the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in performance, unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel. Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. Operating method Caution Do not forcefully pull the paper out during printing. It can cause damage to the machine. When printing large quantities, the bottom part of the paper output area may get hot. Do not allow children to touch. Children may be burned. Be careful not to put your hand between the machine and paper tray. You may get injured. When removing jammed paper, do not use tweezers or sharp metal objects. It can cause damage to the machine. Do not block or push objects into the ventilation opening. This could result in elevated component temperatures which can cause damage or fire. Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output tray. It could cause damage to the machine. Use care to avoid paper cuts when replacing paper or removing jammed paper. You may get hurt. This machine's power interception device is the power cord. To switch off the power supply, remove the power cord from the electrical outlet. Installation / Moving Warning Do not place the machine in an area with dust, humidity or water leaks. This could result in electric shock or fire. Caution When moving the machine, turn the power off and disconnect all cords; then lift the machine with at least two people. The machine could fall, causing human injury or machine damage. Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight location, such as a closet. If the machine is not well-ventilated, this could result in fire. Do not place the machine on an unstable surface. The machine could fall, causing human injury or machine damage. Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical outlet. Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. The machine should be connected to the power level which is specified on the label. If you are unsure and want to check the power level you are using, contact the electrical utility company. Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords. This can diminish performance, and could result in electric shock or fire. Use only No.26 AWG [a] or larger, telephone line cord, if necessary. Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters (79”) with a 140V machine, then the gauge should be 16 AWG or larger.Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine. Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine, and could result in electric shock or fire. [a] AWG: American Wire Gauge Maintenance / Checking Caution Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning the inside of the machine. Do not clean the machine with benzene, paint thinner or alcohol; do not spray water directly into the machine. This could result in electric shock or fire. Keep cleaning supplies away from children. Children may get hurt. When you are working inside the machine replacing supplies or cleaning the inside, do not operate the machine. You may get injured. Do not disassemble, repair or rebuild the machine by yourself. It can cause damage to the machine. Call a certified technician when the machine needs repair. Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean from dust or water. This could result in electric shock or fire. To clean and operate the machine, strictly follow the user's guide provided with the machine. Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine. Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with screws. The machine should only be repaired by Dell service technician. Supply usage Caution Do not disassemble the toner cartridge. Toner dust can be dangerous to humans. When storing supplies such as toner cartridges, keep them away from children. Toner dust can be dangerous to humans. Do not burn any of the supplies such as toner cartridge or fuser unit. It can cause an explosion or fire. Using recycled supplies, such as toner, can cause damage to the machine. In case of damage due to the use of recycled supplies, a service fee will be charged. When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper, be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes. Toner dust can be dangerous to humans.About this user’s guide This user’s guide provides information about basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed explanation on each step during actual usage. Read the safety information before using the machine. If you have a problem using the machine, refer to the troubleshooting chapter. (See Troubleshooting.) Terms used in this user’s guide are explained in the glossary chapter. (See Glossary.) All illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. The procedures in this user’s guide are mainly based on Windows XP. Convention Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below: Document is synonymous with original. Paper is synonymous with media, or print media. Machine refers to printer or MFP. The following table offers the conventions of this guide: Convention Description Example Bold For texts on the display or button names on the machine. Cancel Note Provides additional information or detailed specification of the machine function and feature. The date format may differ from country to country. Caution Gives users information to protect the machine from possible mechanical damage or malfunction. Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge. Footnote Provides additional more detailed information on certain words or a phrase. a. pages per minute (“Crossreference”) Guides users to a reference page for the additional detailed information. (See Finding more information.) Finding more information You can find information for setting up and using your machine from the following resources, either as a print-out or on screen. Material name Description Quick Install Guide This guide provides information on setting up your machine and this requires that you follow the instructions in the guide to prepare the machine. User’s Guide This guide provides you with step-by-step instructions for using your machine’s full features, and contains information for maintaining your machine, troubleshooting and replacing supplies. Printer Driver Help This help provides you with help information on printer driver and instructions for setting up the options for printing. (See Using help.) Dell website If you have Internet access, you can get help, support, printer drivers, manuals, and order information from the Dell websites www.dell.com or support.dell.com.Features of your new product Your new machine is equipped with a number of special features that improve the quality of the documents you print. Special Features Print with excellent quality and speed You can print with a resolution of up to 1,200 x 600 dpi (Dell 1130) and up to 1,200 x 1,200 dpi (Dell 1130n) effective output. Dell 1130 prints up to 18 ppm, A4-sized paper or up to 19 ppm, letter sized paper. Dell 1130n prints up to 24 ppm, A4-sized paper and letter-sized paper. Handle many different types of printable material Manual tray supports plain paper in various sizes, letterhead, envelopes, labels, custom-sized media, postcards, and heavy paper. The 250-sheet tray supports plain paper. Create professional documents Print Watermarks. You can customize your documents with words, such as “Confidential”. (See Using watermarks.) Print Posters. The text and pictures of each page of your document are magnified and printed across the sheet of paper and can then be taped together to form a poster. (See Printing posters.) You can use preprinted forms and letterhead with plain paper. (See Using overlay.) Save time and money To save paper, you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper. (See Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper.) This machine automatically conserves electricity by substantially reducing power consumption when not in use. To save paper, you can print on both sides of the paper (Manual). (See Printing on both sides of paper (Manual).) Print in various environments You can print with Windows as well as Linux and Macintosh systems. Your machine is equipped with a USB interface. The Dell 1130n comes with a built-in Network interface, 10/100 BaseTX. IPv6 This machine supports IPv6 (Dell 1130n only).Features by Models The machine is designed to support all of your document needs from printing to more advanced networking solutions for your business. Features by models include: FEATURES Dell 1130 Dell 1130n Hi-Speed USB 2.0 ● [a] ● Network Interface Ethernet 10/100 BaseTX wired LAN ● Duplex (2-sided) printing (Manual) ● ● [a] USB 1.1 ( ●: Included, Blank: Not available)Introduction This chapter gives you an overview of your machine: This chapter includes: Machine overview Control panel overview Understanding the control panel Machine overview Front view This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model. 1 Document output tray 6 Manual feeder 2 Control panel 7 Manual feeder guide 3 Front cover handle 8 Output support 4 Front cover 9 Toner cartridge 5 Tray 1 Rear viewThis illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model. 1 Rear cover 3 USB port 2 Network Port [a] 4 Power receptacle [a] Dell 1130n only. Control panel overview This control panel may differ from your machine depending on its model. 1 Jam Shows the status of jam occurrence of your machine. (See LEDs.) 2 Online/Error Shows the status of your machine. (See LEDs.) 3 Cancel Stops an operation at any time. Also there are more functions. (See Understanding the control panel.) 4 Power Turns power on or off. (See Understanding the control panel.) Understanding the control panel LEDs The color of the LEDs indicates the machine's current status. LED Status Description Jam ( ) Orange On A paper jam has occurred. (See Clearing paper jams.) Online/Error ( ) Off The machine is off-line.Green On The machine is in power saver mode. The machine is on-line and can receive data from the computer. Blinking When the LED blinks slowly, the machine is receiving data from the computer. When the LED blinks rapidly , the machine is printing data. Red On The cover is open. Close the cover. There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the tray. The machine has stopped due to a major error. Your system has some problems. If this problem occurs, contact your service representative. The toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life [a] . It is recommended to replace the toner cartridge. (See Replacing the toner cartridge.) Blinking A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be cleared. When the problem is cleared, the machine resumes. Toner is low. Replace the cartridge. The estimated cartridge life [a] of toner is close. Prepare a new cartridge for replacement. You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner. (See Redistributing toner.) [a] Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life, which indicates the average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19752. The number of pages may be affected by operating environment, printing interval, media type, and media size. Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when red LED turned on and the printer stops printing. Dell does not recommend using non-genuine Dell toner cartridge such as refilled or re-manufactured. Dell cannot guarantee non-genuine Dell toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair required as a result of using nongenuine Dell toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty. All printing errors will be appear in the Printer Status Monitor program window. If the problem persists, call for service. Buttons (Cancel button) By pressing the (cancel button), you can: Function Description Printing demo page [a] In Ready mode, press and hold this button for about 2 seconds until the status LED blinks slowly, and release. (See Printing a demo page.) Printing configuration sheet [b] In Ready mode, press and hold this button for about 5 seconds until the status LED blinks fast, and release. (See Printing a machine report.) Printing a cleaning sheet [b] In Ready mode, press and hold this button for about 10 seconds until the status LED blinks slowly, and release. (See Cleaning the inside.) Cancel print job Press (cancel button) during printing. The red LED blinks while the print job is cleared from both the machine and the computer and then the machine returns to ready mode. This may take some time depending on the size of the print job. Manual print Press (cancel button) each time you load a sheet of paper in the manual tray when you select Manual Feeder for Source from your software application. [a] When you print the demo page for Dell 1130, configuration sheet is printed as well. [b] Dell 1130n only (Power button) This button must be used to turn the machine on/off. Turning on the machine 1. Plug in the power cord. 2. Press (power) on the control panel.If you want to turn the power off, press and hold this button for 1 second.Getting started This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the USB connected machine and software. This chapter includes: Setting up the hardware Printing a demo page Supplied software System requirements Installing USB connected machine’s driver Sharing your machine locally Setting up the hardware This section shows the steps to set up the hardware, as is explained in the Quick Install Guide. Make sure you read the Quick Install Guide first and follow the steps below: Location 1. Select a stable location. Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation. Allow extra space to open covers and trays. The area should be well ventilated and away from direct sunlight or sources of heat, cold, and humidity. Do not set the machine close to the edge of your desk or table. Printing is suitable for altitudes under 1,000 m (3,281 ft). Refer to the altitude setting to optimize your printing. (See Altitude adjustment.) Place the machine on a flat, stable surface so that there is no incline greater than 2 mm (0.08 inch). Otherwise, printing quality may be affected. 2. Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items.3. Remove tape holding the machine. 4. Install the toner cartridge. 5. Load paper. (See Loading paper in the tray.) 6. Make sure that all cables are connected to the machine. 7. Turn the machine on. (See Turning on the machine.) This equipment will be inoperable when mains power fails. Printing a demo page Print a demo page to make sure that the machine is operating correctly. To print a demo page: In ready mode, press and hold the (cancel button) for about 2 seconds. Supplied software After you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer, you must install the printer software using the supplied CD. The software CD provides you with the following software. OS Contents Windows Printer driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of your machine’s features. Printer Status Monitor: This program allows you to monitor the machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing. Printer Settings Utility (Dell 1130n only): This program allows you to set up printer’s other options from your computer desktop. Dell Toner Management System™: Displays the status of the printer and the name of the job when send a job to print. The Dell Toner Management System™window also displays the level of toner remaining and allows you to order replacement toner cartridge. Firmware Update Utility: This program helps you to update printer’s firmware. SetIP (Dell 1130n only): Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP addresses. Macintosh Printer Driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of your machine’s features. Linux Unified Linux Driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of your machine’s features. System requirements Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the following requirements: Microsoft® Windows® Your machine supports the following Windows operating systems. OPERATING SYSTEM Requirement (recommended) CPU RAM free HDD space Windows 2000 Intel® Pentium® II 400 MHz (Pentium III 933 MHz) 64 MB (128 MB) 600 MB Windows XP Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 MB (256 MB) 1.5 GB Windows Server® 2003 Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 MB (512 MB) 1.25 GB to 2 GB Windows Server 2008 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (Pentium IV 2 GHz) 512 MB (2048 MB) 10 GB Windows Vista® Intel® Pentium® IV 3 GHz 512 MB (1024 MB) 15 GB Windows 7 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz 32-bit or 64-bit processor or higher 1 GB (2 GB) 16 GB Support for DirectX® 9 graphics with 128 MB memory (to enable the Aero theme). DVD-R/W Drive Windows Server Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (x86) or 1.4 GHz (x64) processors 512 MB (2048 10 GB2008 R2 (2 GHz or faster) MB) Internet Explorer® 5.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems. Administrator rights are required to install the software. Windows Terminal Services is compatible with this machine. Macintosh OPERATING SYSTEM Requirements (recommended) CPU RAM free HDD space Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.4 Intel Processors PowerPC G4/ G5 128 MB for a PowerPC based Mac (512 MB) 512 MB for a Intel-based Mac (1 GB) 1 GB Mac OS X 10.5 Intel Processors 867 MHz or faster Power PC G4/ G5 512 MB (1 GB) 1 GB Mac OS X 10.6 Intel Processors 1 GB (2 GB) 1 GB Linux Item Requirement (recommended) Operating system RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64 bit) Fedora Core 2~10 (32/64 bit) SuSE Linux 9.1 (32 bit) OpenSuSE 9.2, 9.3, 10.0, 10.1, 10.2, 10.3, 11.0, 11.1 (32/64 bit) Mandrake 10.0, 10.1 (32/64 bit) Mandriva 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 (32/64 bit) Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04, 8.10 (32/64 bit) SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9, 10 (32/64 bit) Debian 3.1, 4.0, 5.0 (32/64 bit) CPU Pentium IV 2.4 GHz (Intel Core™2) RAM 512 MB (1024 MB) Free HDD space 1 GB (2 GB) Installing USB connected machine’s driver A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer using the USB cable. If your machine is attached to a network, skip the following steps below and go on to installing network connected machine’s driver. (See Installing network connected machine’s driver.) Only use an USB cable shorter than 3 m (118 in. ). Windows You can install the machine software using the typical or custom method. The following steps below are recommended for most users who use a machine directly connected to your computer. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed. 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to the computer and powered on. If the “Found New Hardware Wizard” window appears during the installation procedure, click Cancel in close the window. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive. The software CD should automatically run and an installation window should appear. If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your CD/DVD drive. Click OK. If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run. Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents your CD/DVD drive and click OK.If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue or Yes in the User Account Control windows. 3. Click Next. If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list. 4. Select Typical installation for a local printer. Then, click Next. The Custom allows you to select the machine’s connection and choose individual component to install. Follow the on-screen instructions. If your machine is not connected to the computer, the following window will appear.After connecting the machine, click Next. If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click Next, and No on the following screen. The installation starts and a test page will not print at the end of the installation. The installation window in this user guide may differ depending on the machine and interface in use. 5. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test page, select the checkbox and click Next. Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 7. 6. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes. If not, click No to reprint it. 7. Click Finish. If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to repair or reinstall the driver. 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your machine and powered on. 2. From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer driver name > Maintenance. 3. Select the option as you wish, follow the instruction on the window. Macintosh The software CD that came with your machine provides you with the PPD file that allows you to use the CUPS driver or Apple LaserWriter driver (only available when you use a machine which supports the PostScript driver) for printing on a Macintosh computer. 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive. 3. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. 4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder. 5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon. 6. Enter the password and click OK. 7. The Dell Installer window opens. Click Continue. 8. Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is recommended for most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed. If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual components to install. 9. When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears, click Continue. 10. After the installation is finished, click Quit. 11. Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility. For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax. 12. Click Add on the Printer List. For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click the “+” icon; a display window will pop up. 13. For Mac OS X 10.3, select the USB tab. For Mac OS X10.4, click Default Browser and find the USB connection. For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click Default and find the USB connection.14. For Mac OS X 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Dell in Printer Model and your machine name in Model Name. For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Dell in Print Using and your machine name in Model. For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Select a driver to use... and your machine name in Print Using. Your machine appears on the Printer List, and is set as the default machine. 15. Click Add. If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it. Follow steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh. 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive. 3. Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. 4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder. 5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon. 6. Enter the password and click OK. 7. The Dell Installer window opens. Click Continue. 8. Select Uninstall and click Uninstall. 9. When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears, Click Continue. 10. When the uninstall is done, click Quit. Linux Follow the steps below to install the driver for Linux. While installing the driver, the Unified Linux Driver package will automatically be installed as well. The supplied software CD provides you with the Unified Linux Driver package for using your machine with a Linux computer easily in UI based management tool. (See Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator.) 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2. When the Administrator Login window appears, type in root in the Login field and enter the system password. You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine software. If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator. 3. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive. The software CD will run automatically. If the software CD does not run automatically, click the icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal screen appears, type in the following: If the software CD is secondary master and the location to mount is /mnt/cdrom, [root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/cdrom [root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux [root@localhost Linux]#./install.sh If you still failed to run the software CD type the followings in sequence: [root@localhost root]#umount /dev/hdc [root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/cdrom The installation program runs automatically if you have an autorun software package installed and configured. 4. When the welcome screen appears, click Next.5. When the installation is complete, click Finish. The installation program has added the Unified Driver Configurator desktop icon and the Unified Driver group to the system menu for your convenience. If you have any difficulties, consult the on screen help that is available through your system menu or can otherwise be called from the driver package Windows applications, such as Unified Driver Configurator or Image Manager. Installing the driver in the text mode: If you do not use the graphical interface or have been unable to install the driver, you have to use the driver in the text mode. Follow the steps 1 to 3, then type [root@localhost Linux]# ./install.sh. Follow the instructions on the terminal screen. The installation is completed. When you want to uninstall the driver, follow the installation instructions above, but type [root@localhost Linux]# ./uninstall.sh on the terminal screen. If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it. Follow the steps below steps to uninstall the driver for Linux. 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2. When the Administrator Login window appears, type in “root” in the Login field and enter the system password. You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the printer driver. If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator. 3. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive. The software CD will run automatically. If the software CD does not run automatically, click the icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal screen appears, type in: If the software CD is secondary master and the location to mount is /mnt/cdrom, [root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/cdrom [root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux [root@localhost Linux]#./uninstall.sh The installation program runs automatically if you have an autorun software package installed and configured. 4. Click Uninstall. 5. Click Next. 6. Click Finish. Sharing your machine locally Follow the steps below to set up the computers to share your machine locally. If the Host computer is directly connected to the machine with USB cable and is also connected to the local network environment, the client computer connected to the local network can use the shared machine through the host computer to print.1 Host computer A computer which is directly connected to the machine by USB cable. 2 Client computers Computers which use the machine shared through the host computer. Windows Setting up a host computer 1. Install your printer driver. (See Installing USB connected machine’s driver, Installing network connected machine’s driver.) 2. Click the Windows Start menu. 3. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes. For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 4. Right click your printer icon. 5. For Windows XP/Server 2003/ Server 2008/Vista, press Properties. For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select the Printer properties. If Printer properties item has ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer. 6. Select the Sharing tab. 7. Check the Change Sharing Options. 8. Check the Share this printer. 9. Fill in the Share Name field. Click OK. Setting up a client computer 1. Install your printer driver. (See Installing USB connected machine’s driver, Installing network connected machine’s driver.) 2. Click the Windows Start menu. 3. Select All programs > Accessories > Windows Explorer. 4. Enter the IP address of the host computer in the address bar and press Enter in your keyboard. In case host computer requires User name and Password, fill in User ID and password of the host computer account. 5. Right click the printer icon you want to share and select Connect. 6. If a set up complete message appears, click OK. 7. Open the file you want to print and start printing. Macintosh The following steps are for Mac OS X 10.5~10.6. Refer to Mac Help for other OS versions. Setting up a host computer 1. Install your printer driver. (See Macintosh.) 2. Open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax. 3. Select the printer to share in the Printers list. 4. Select Share this printer. Setting up a client computer1. Install your printer driver. (See Macintosh.) 2. Open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax. 3. Click the “+” icon. A display window showing the name of your shared printer appears. 4. Select your machine and click Add.Network setup (Dell 1130n only) This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the network connected machine and software. This chapter includes: Network environment Introducing useful network programs Using a wired network Installing network connected machine’s driver IPv6 Configuration Network environment You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network machine. The following table shows the network environments supported by the machine: Item Requirements Network interface Ethernet 10/100 Base-TX Network operating system Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista/7/2008 Server R2 Various Linux OS Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.6 Network protocols TCP/IPv4 DHCP, BOOTP DNS, WINS, Bonjour, SLP, UPnP Standard TCP/IP Printing (RAW), LPR, IPP SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec TCP/IPv6 (DHCP, DNS, RAW, LPR, SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec (See IPv6 Configuration.) Introducing useful network programs There are several programs available to setup the network settings in network environment. Before using the programs below, set the IP address first. Embedded Web Service Web server embedded on your network machine, which allows you to: Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to various network environments. Customize machine settings. (See Using Embedded Web Service (Dell 1130n only).) SetIP This utility program allows you to select a network interface and manually configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP protocol. (See IP setting using SetIP Program) TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program. Using a wired network You must set up the network protocols on your machine to use it on your network. This chapter will show you how this is accomplished. You can use network after connecting network cable to a corresponding port on your machine.Printing network configuration report You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine's control panel that will show the current machine’s network settings. This will help you to set up a network and troubleshooting problems. To print the report: In ready mode, press and hold the (cancel button) for about 5 seconds. You can find your machine’s MAC address and IP address. For example: MAC Address : 00:15:99:41:A2:78 IP Address : 192.0.0.192 Setting IP address Firstly, you have to set up an IP address for network printing and managements. In most cases a new IP address will be automatically assigned by a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server located on the network. In a few situations the IP address must be set manually. This is called a static IP and is often required in corporate Intranets for security reasons. DHCP IP assignment: Connect your machine to the network, and wait a few minutes for the DHCP server to assign an IP address to the machine. Then, print the Network Configuration Report as explained above. If the report shows that the IP address has changed, the assignment was successful. You will see the new IP address in the report. Static IP assignment: Use SetIP program to change the IP address from your computer. In an office environment, we recommend that you contact a network administrator to set this address for you. IP setting using SetIP Program This program is for manually setting the network IP address of your machine using its MAC address to communicate with the machine. A MAC address is the hardware serial number of the network interface and can be found in the Network Configuration Report. For using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing by performing the following: 1. Open Start > All programs > Control Panel. 2. Double click Security Center. 3. Click Windows Firewall. 4. Disable the firewall. Installing the program 1. Insert the supplied software CD provided with your machine. When the driver CD runs automatically, close that window. 2. Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive. (X represents your CD/DVD drive.) 3. Double-click Application > SetIP. 4. Double-click Setup.exe to install this program. 5. Click OK. If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list. 6. Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation. Starting the program 1. Connect your machine to the network with a network cable. 2. Turned on the machine. 3. From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Dell Printers > SetIP > SetIP. 4. Click on the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/IP configuration window. 5. Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window as follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding.MAC Address : Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8. IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your printer. For example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.150, enter 192.168.1.X. (X is number between 1 and 254 other than the computer’s address.) Subnet Mask: Enter a Subnet Mask. Default Gateway: Enter a Default Gateway. 6. Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are correct. 7. Click Exit to close the SetIP program. 8. If necessary, restart the computer’s firewall. Network parameter setting You can also set up the various network settings through the network administration programs such as Embedded Web Service. Restoring factory default settings You may need to reset the machine to the factory default settings when machine that you are using is connected to new network environment. Restoring factory default settings using Embedded Web Service 1. Start a web browser and enter your machine’s new IP address in the browser window. For example, 2. When the Embedded Web Service window opens, click Network Settings. 3. Click Reset. Then, click Clear for network. 4. Turn off and restart machine to apply settings. Installing network connected machine’s driver Windows You can set up the machine driver, follow the steps below. This is recommended for most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed. 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered on. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive. The software CD should automatically run and an installation window appear. If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your drive. Click OK. If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run.Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents your drive and click OK. If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue or Yes in the User Account Control windows. 3. Click Next. If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list. 4. Select Typical installation for a network printer. Then, click Next. The Custom Installation allows you to select the machine’s connection and choose individual component to install. Follow the guide on the window. 5. The list of printers available on the network appears. Select the printer you want to install from the list and then click Next.If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your printer to the network. To add the printer to the network, enter the port name and the IP address for the printer. To verify your printer’s IP address, print a Network Configuration page. (By pressing the (cancel button) for about 5 seconds, then release. (Example IP Address is 13.121.52.104) To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select Shared Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button. If you cannot find your machine in network, please turn off the firewall and click Update. For Windows operating system, Start > Control Panel and start windows firewall, and deactivate this option. For other operating system, refer to its on-line guide. 6. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test page, select the checkbox and click Next. Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 8. 7. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes. If not, click No to reprint it. 8. Click Finish. After the driver setup, you may enable firewall. If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to repair or reinstall the driver. 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your machine and powered on. 2. From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer driver name > Maintenance. 3. Select the option as you wish, follow the instruction on the window. Macintosh 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive. 3. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. 4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder. 5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon. 6. Enter the password and click OK. 7. The Dell Installer window opens. Click Continue. 8. Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is recommended for most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed. If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual components to install. 9. The message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears. Click Continue. 10. After the installation is finished, click Quit. 11. Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility. For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax.12. Click Add on the Printer List. For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click the “+” icon; a display window will pop up. 13. For Mac OS X 10.3, select the IP Printing tab. For Mac OS X10.4, click IP Printer. For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click IP. 14. Select Socket/HP Jet Direct in Printer Type. When printing a document containing many pages, printing performance may be enhanced by choosing Socket for Printer Type option. 15. Enter the machine’s IP address in the Printer Address field. 16. Enter the queue name in the Queue Name field. If you cannot determine the queue name for your machine server, try using the default queue first. 17. For Mac OS X 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Dell in Printer Model and your machine name in Model Name. For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Dell in Print Using and your machine name in Model. For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Select a driver to use... and your machine name in Print Using. Your machine appears on the Printer List, and is set as the default machine. 18. Click Add. If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it. Follow steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh. 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive. 3. Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. 4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder. 5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon. 6. Enter the password and click OK. 7. The Dell Installer window opens. Click Continue. 8. Select Uninstall and click Uninstall. 9. When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears, Click Continue. 10. When the uninstall is done, click Quit. Linux Install Linux Driver 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive. 3. Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Linux desktop. 4. Double-click the Linux folder. 5. Double-click the install.sh icon. 6. The Dell Installer window opens. Click Continue. 7. The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next. 8. Select Network printer and click Search button. 9. The Printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field. 10. Select your machine and click Next. Add network Printer 1. Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator. 2. Click Add Printer… 3. The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next. 4. Select Network printer and click the Search button. 5. The printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field. 6. Select your machine and click Next. Input the printer description and Next7. 8. When the add printer is done, click Finish. IPv6 Configuration TCP/IPv6 is supported properly only in Windows Vista or higher. If the IPv6 network seems not working, set all the network setting to the factory defaults and try again. (See Restoring factory default settings.) To use the IPv6 network environment, follow the next procedure to use the IPv6 address: The machine is provided with IPv6 feature on. 1. Connect your machine to the network with a network cable. 2. Turned on the machine. 3. Print a Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control panel that will check IPv6 addresses. 4. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers > Add Printer. 5. Click Add a local printer on the Add Printer windows. 6. Follow the instruction on the window. If the machine does not work in the network environment, activate IPv6. Refer to the next section followed by. Printing network configuration report You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine's control panel that will show the current machine’s network settings. This will help you to set up a network and troubleshooting problems. To print the report: In ready mode, press and hold the (cancel button) for about 5 seconds. You can find your machine’s MAC address and IP address. For example: MAC Address : 00:15:99:41:A2:78 IP Address : 192.0.0.192 Setting IPv6 addresses Machine supports following IPv6 addresses for network printing and managements. Link-local Address: Self-configured local IPv6 address. (Address starts with FE80.) Stateless Address: Automatically configured IPv6 address by a network router. Stateful Address: IPv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server. Manual Address: Manually configured IPv6 address by a user. Manual address configuration 1. Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv6 addressing as a URL. (See Using Embedded Web Service (Dell 1130n only).) For IPv4, enter the IPv4 address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go. 2. When the Embedded Web Service window opens, click Network Settings. 3. Click TCP/IP. 4. Enable the Manual Address In the TCP/IPv6 section. 5. Select the Router Prefix and click the Add button, then the router prefix will automatically be entered into the address field. Enter the rest of address. (ex: 3FFE:10:88:194::AAAA. “A” is the hexadecimal 0 through 9, A through F.) 6. Click the Apply button. Installing printer driver Driver installation for network printer in IPv6 network environment is same as TCP/IPv4. (See Installing network connected machine’s driver.) Select TCP/IP Port and when the list of machines is displayed, simply select your machine's IPv6 address. Using Embedded Web Service 1. Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv6 addressing as a URL . 2. Select one of the IPv6 addresses (Link-local Address, Stateless Address, Stateful Address, Manual Address) from Network Configuration Report.3. Enter the IPv6 addresses. (ex: http://[FE80::215:99FF:FE66:7701]) Address must be enclosed in '[]' brackets.Basic setup After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine’s default settings. Refer to the next section if you would like to set or change values. This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the machine. This chapter includes: Altitude adjustment Setting the default tray and paper Changing font setting (Dell 1130n only) Altitude adjustment The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined by the height of the machine above sea level. The following information will guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best quality of print.Before you set the altitude value, find the altitude where you are using the machine. 1. High 1 2. High 2 3. High 3 4. Normal For Dell 1130 1. Install the driver. (See Installing USB connected machine’s driver or Installing network connected machine’s driver.) 2. Click the Windows Start menu. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes. For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 3. Select the your machine’s driver and right-click to open Properties. 4. In printer driver properties, select Device Options. 5. Select necessary options in the Altitude Adjustment drop-down list. 6. Click OK. For Dell 1130n You can altitude adjustment in Printer Settings Utility. 1. You can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer driver name > Printer Settings Utility. 2. Select necessary options in the Altitude Adjustment drop-down list. 3. Click the Apply button. This can also be adjusted via Embedded Web Service. Setting the default tray and paper You can select the tray and paper you would like to keep using for printing job.In the computer Windows 1. Click the Windows Start menu. 2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes. For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 3. Right-click your machine. 4. For Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, press Printing Preferences. For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select the Printing Preferences. If Printing Preferences item has ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer. 5. Click Paper tab. 6. Select tray and its options, such as paper size and type. 7. Press OK. Macintosh Macintosh does not support this function. Macintosh users need to change the default setting manually each time they want to print using other settings. 1. Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want to print. 2. Open the File menu and click Print. 3. Go to Paper Feed pane. 4. Open the File menu and click Print. 5. Go to Paper Feed. 6. Set appropriate tray from which you want to print. 7. Go to Paper pane. 8. Set paper type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which you want to print. 9. Click Print to print. Using power saving feature When you are not using the machine for a while, use this feature to save power. For Dell 1130 1. Install the driver. (See Installing USB connected machine’s driver or Installing network connected machine’s driver.) 2. Click the Windows Start menu. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes. For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 3. Select the your machine’s driver and right-click to open Properties. 4. In printer driver properties, select Device Options. 5. Select the time you want, in the Power Save drop-down list. 6. Click OK. For Dell 1130n You change power save in Printer Settings Utility. 1. You can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer driver name > Printer Settings Utility. 2. Click Power Save. Select the appropriate value from the dropdown list, and then click Apply. Changing font setting (Dell 1130n only)Your machine has preset font setting depending on your region or country. If you want to change the font or set the font for special condition, such as the DOS environment, you can change the font setting as follows: 1. Ensure that you have installed the printer driver with the provided software CD. 2. If you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer driver name > Printer Settings Utility. 3. Click Emulation Type. 4. Select your preferred font. 5. Click Apply. Following information shows the proper font list for corresponding languages. Russian: CP866, ISO 8859/5 Latin Cyrillic Hebrew: Hebrew 15Q, Hebrew-8, Hebrew-7 (Israel only) Greek: ISO 8859/7 Latin Greek, PC-8 Latin/Greek Arabic & Farsi: HP Arabic-8, Windows Arabic, Code Page 864, Farsi, ISO 8859/6 Latin Arabic OCR: OCR-A, OCR-BMedia and tray This chapter provides information on how to load print media into your machine. This chapter includes: Selecting print media Changing the tray size Loading paper in the tray Printing on special media Using the output support Selecting print media You can print on a variety of print media, such as plain paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies. Always use print media that meet the guidelines for use with your machine. Guidelines to select the print media Print media that does not meet the guidelines outlined in this user’s guide may cause the following problems: Poor print quality Increased paper jams Premature wear on the machine. Properties, such as weight, composition, grain, and moisture content, are important factors that affect the machine’s performance and the output quality. When you choose print materials, consider the following: The type, size and weight of the print media for your machine are described in print media specifications. (See Print media specifications.) Desired outcome: The print media you choose should be appropriate for your project. Brightness: Some print media are whiter than others and produce sharper, more vibrant images. Surface smoothness: The smoothness of the print media affects how crisp the printing looks on the paper. Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section and still not produce satisfactory results. This may be the result of improper handling, unacceptable temperature and humidity levels, or other variables over which cannot be controlled. Before purchasing large quantities of print media, ensure that it meets the requirements specified in this user’s guide. Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause problems, requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered by the warranty or service agreements. The amount of paper put into the tray may differ according to media type used. (See Print media specifications.) Media sizes supported in each mode Mode Size Type Source Simplex printing For details about paper size, see Print media specifications. For details about paper type, see Print media specifications. tray 1 manual tray Duplex printing (Manual) [a] Letter, A4, Legal, US Folio, Oficio Plain, Color, Preprinted, Recycled, Bond, Archive tray 1 [a] 75 to 90 g/m2 (20~24 lb bond) only Changing the tray size The tray is preset to Letter or A4 size, depending on your country. To change the size, you need to adjust the paper guides.1. Support guide 2. Paper length guide 3. Guide lock 4. Paper width guide 1. With one hand press and hold the guide lock, and with the other hand, hold the paper length guide and support guide together. Slide the paper length guide and support guide to locate them in the correct paper size slot. 2. Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading papers. Insert the paper into the tray. 3. After inserting paper into the tray, adjust the support guide so that it lightly touches the paper stack. 4. Squeeze the paper width guides and slide them to the desired paper size marked at the bottom of the tray. Do not push the paper width guide too far causing the media to warp. If you do not adjust the paper width guide, it may cause paper jams.Do not use a paper with more than 6 mm curl. Loading paper in the tray Tray 1 1. Pull out the paper tray . And adjust the tray size to the media size you are loading. (See Changing the tray size.) 2. Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading papers. 3. And place paper with the side you want to print facing down. 4. Set the paper type and size for the tray 1. (See Setting the default tray and paper.) If you experience problems with paper feeding, check whether the paper meets the media specification. (See Print media specifications.) Manual tray The manual tray can hold special sizes and types of print material, such as postcards, note cards, and envelopes. It is useful for single page printing on letterhead or colored paper. Tips on using the manual tray If you select Manual Feeder for Source from your software application, you need to press (cancel button) each time you print a page and load only one type, size and weight of print media at a time in the manual tray. To prevent paper jams, do not add paper while printing. This also applies to other types of print media. Print media should be loaded face up with the top edge going into the manual tray first and be placed in the center of the tray. Always load the specified print media only to avoid paper jams and print quality problems. (See Print media specifications.) Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading them into the manual tray. 1. Load the paper in the manual tray.Do not force the paper beyond the surface with mark when loading. When printing the special media, you must follow the loading guideline. (See Printing on special media.) When papers overlap when printing using manual tray, open tray 1 and remove overlapping papers then try printing again. When paper does not feed well while printing, push the paper in manually until it starts feeding automatically. 2. Squeeze the manual tray paper guides and adjust them to the width of the paper. Do not force them too much, or the paper will bent resulting in a paper jam or skew. 3. To print in application, open an application and start the print menu. 4. Open Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 5. Press the Paper tab in Printing Preferences, and select an appropriate paper type. For example, if you want to use a label, set the paper type to Label. 6. Select Manual Feeder in paper source, then press OK. 7. Start printing in application. If you are printing multiple pages, load the next sheet after the first page prints out, and press the (cancel button). Repeat this step for every page to be printed. Printing on special media The table below shows the available special media for each tray. When using special media, we recommend you feed one paper at a time. Check the maximum input number of media for each tray. (See Print media specifications.) Types Tray 1 Manual tray Plain ● ● Thick ● ● Thin ● ● Bond ● Color ● CardStock ● Labels ● Transparency ● Envelope ● Preprinted ● Cotton ● Recycled ● ● Archive ● ● ( ●: supported, Blank: Not supported) The media types are shown in the Printing Preferences. This paper type option allows you to set the type of paper to be loaded in the tray. This setting appears in the list, so that you can select it. This will let you get the best quality printout. If not, the desired print quality may not be achieved. 2Plain: 60 to 120 g/m (16 to 32 lb) Normal plain paper. Thick: 90 (24 lb) thick paper. Thin: 60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19 lb) thin paper. Bond: 105 to 120 g/m2 (28 to 32 lb) bond. Color: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) color-backgrounded paper. CardStock: 105 to 163 g/m2 (24 to 43 lb) cardstock. Labels: 120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lb) labels. Transparency: 138 to 146 g/m2 (37 to 39 lb) transparency paper. Envelope: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) envelope. Preprinted: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) preprinted/letterhead paper. Cotton: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) cotton paper. Recycled: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) recycled paper. When you use recycled paper, printouts might be wrinkled. Archive: 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lb) If you need to keep the print-out for a long period time, such as archives, select this option. Envelope Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes. To print an envelope, the stamp area is on the left side and the end of the envelope with the stamp area enters the printer first and center of the manual tray. If envelopes are printed out with wrinkles, crease or black bold lines, open the rear cover and pull down the pressure lever and try printing again. Keep the rear cover opened during printing. 1. Pressure lever When selecting envelopes, consider the following factors: Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 90 g/m2 otherwise, jam may occur. Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less than 6 mm curl, and should not contain air. Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled, nicked, nor damaged. Temperature: Use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and pressure of the machine during operation. Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp-and well-creased folds. Do not use stamped envelopes. Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated lining, self-adhesive seals, or other synthetic materials.Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes. Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the corner of the envelope. 1. Acceptable 2. Unacceptable Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machine’s fusing temperature about 170°C (338 °F) for 0.1 second. The extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams, and may even damage the fuser. For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm from the edges of the envelope. Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s seams meet. Transparency To avoid damaging the machine, only use transparencies designed for use in laser printers. Transparencies used in the machine must be able to withstand machine’s fusing temperature. Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the machine. Do not leave unused transparencies in the paper tray for long periods of time. Dust and dirt may accumulate on them, resulting in spotty printing. To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints, handle them carefully. To avoid fading, do not expose printed transparencies to prolonged sunlight. Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled, curled, or have any torn edges. Do not use transparencies that separates from the backing sheet. To prevent transparencies from sticking to each other, do not let the printed sheets stack up as they are begin printed out. Labels To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels designed for use in laser machines. When selecting labels, consider the following factors: Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at your machine’s fusing temperature about 170°C (338 °F). Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between them. Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels, causing serious jams. Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm of curl in any direction. Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other indications of separation. Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels. Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing, which can cause paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine components. Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once. The adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine.Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise damaged. Card stock/Custom-sized paper Postcards, cards and other custom-sized materials can be printed with this machine. Do not print on media smaller than 76 mm (3.00 inches) wide or 127 mm (5.00 inches) long. In the software application, set margins at least 6.4 mm (0.25 inches) away from the edges of the material. If media weight is over 160 g/m2 (43 lb), try printing in the rear cover (face up). Letterhead/Preprinted paper Single-sided Double-sided Tray1 Face down Face up Manual tray Face up Face down Letterhead/ Preprinted paper must be printed with heat-resistant ink that will not melt, vaporize, or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the machine’s fusing temperature about 170°C (338 °F) for 0.1 second. Letterhead/ Preprinted paper ink must be non-flammable and should not adversely affect machine rollers. Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a moisture-proof wrapping to prevent changes during storage. Before you load letterhead/preprinted paper, verify that the ink on the paper is dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come off preprinted paper, reducing print quality. Photo Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine. It could cause damage to the machine. Glossy Load one paper to the manual tray at a time, glossy side facing up. Recommended media: Glossy paper (Letter) for this machine by HP Brochure Paper (Product: Q6611A) only. Recommended media: Glossy paper (A4) for this machine by HP Superior Paper 160 glossy (Product: Q6616A). Using the output support The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large number of pages at once. Make sure that you do not touch the surface, and do not allow children near it. The printed pages stack on the output support, and the output support will help the printed pages to align. The printer sends output to the output tray by default. To use the output tray, make sure that the rear cover is closed.If you are using A5 paper, fold the output tray. Otherwise, printed pages might be mis-aligned or jammed.Printing This chapter explains common printing tasks. This chapter includes: Printer driver features Basic printing Opening printing preferences Using help Using special print features Changing the default print settings Setting your machine as a default machine Printing to a file (PRN) Macintosh printing Linux printing The procedures in this chapter are mainly based on Windows XP. Printer driver features Your printer drivers support the following standard features: Paper orientation, size, source, and media type selection Number of copies In addition, you can use various special printing features. The following table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer drivers: Some models or operating system may not support the certain feature(s) in the following table. Printer driver Feature Windows Machine quality option ● Poster printing ● Multiple pages per sheet ● Booklet printing (manual) ● Fit to page printing ● Reduce and enlarge printing ● Different source for first page ● Watermark ● Overlay ● Double-sided printing (manual) ● ( ●: supported, Blank: Not supported) Basic printing Your machine allows you to print from various Windows, Macintosh, or Linux applications. The exact steps for printing a document may vary depending on the application you use. Your Printing Preferences window that appears in this user’s guide may differ depending on the machine in use. However, the composition of the Printing Preferences window is similar. Check the operating system(s) that are compatible with your machine. Refer to the OS compatibility section of Printer Specifications. (See System requirements.) When you select an option in Printing Preferences, you may see a warning mark, , or . An exclamationmark ( ) means you can select that certain option but it is not recommended, and ( ) mark means you cannot select that option due to the machine’s setting or environment. The following procedure describes the general steps required for printing from various Windows applications. Macintosh basic printing. (See Macintosh printing.) Linux basic printing. (See Linux printing.) The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows XP. Your Printing Preferences window may differ, depending on your operating system or the application you are using. 1. Open the document you want to print. 2. Select Print from the File menu. The Print window appears. 3. Select your machine from the Select Printer list. The basic print settings including the number of copies and print range are selected within the Print window. To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver, click Properties or Preferences in the application’s Print window to change the print setting. (See Opening printing preferences.) 4. To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window. Canceling a print job If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as follows: 1. Click the Windows Start menu. 2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes. For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 3. For Windows 2000, XP, Server 2003 and Vista, double-click your machine. For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, right click your printer icon > context menus > See what’s printing. If See what’s printing item has ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer. 4. From the Document menu, select Cancel. You can also access this window by simply double-clicking the machine icon ( ) in the Windows task bar. You can also cancel the current job by pressing on the control panel. Opening printing preferencesYou can preview the settings you selected on the upper right of the Printing Preferences. 1. Open the document you want to print. 2. Select Print from the file menu. The Print window appears. 3. Select your machine from the Select Printer. 4. Click Properties or Preferences. Using a favorite setting The Presets option, which is visible on each preferences tab except for Dell tab, allows you to save the current preferences settings for future use. To save a Presets item: 1. Change the settings as needed on each tab. 2. Enter a name for the item in the Presets input box. 3. Click Add. When you save Presets, all current driver settings are saved. If you click Add, the Add button changes to Update button. Select more options and click Update, settings will be added to the Presets you made. To use a saved setting, select it from the Presets drop down list. The machine is now set to print according to the setting you selected. To delete saved setting, select it from the Presets drop down list and click Delete. You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by selecting Default Preset from the Presets drop down list.Using help Click the question mark from the upper-right corner of the window and click on any option you want to know about. Then a pop up window appears with information about that option's feature which is provided from the driver. If you want to search information via a keyword, click the Dell tab in the Printing Preferences window, and enter a keyword in the input line of the Help option. To get information about supplies, driver update or registration and so on, click appropriate buttons. Using special print features Special print features include: Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper. Printing posters. Printing booklets (Manual). Printing on both sides of paper (Manual). Change percentage of your document. Fitting your document to a selected paper size. Using watermarks. Using overlay. Advanced Options. Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify. You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. Click the Basic tab, select Multiple Pages Per Side in the Type drop-down list. 3. Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet (2, 4, 6, 9, or 16) in the Pages per Side drop-down list. 4. Select the page order from the Page Order drop-down list, if necessary. 5. Check Print Page Border to print a border around each page on the sheet. 6. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type. 7. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Printing posters This feature allows you to print a single-page document onto 4, 9, or 16 sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one poster-size document. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. Click the Basic tab, select Poster Printing in the Type drop-down list. 3. Select the page layout you want. Specification of the page layout: Poster 2x2: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 4 pages. Poster 3x3: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 9 pages. Poster 4x4: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 16 pages. 4. Select the Poster Overlap value. Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters or inches by selecting the radio button on the upper right of Basic tab to make it easier to paste the sheets together.5. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type. 6. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. 7. You can complete the poster by pasting the sheets together. Printing booklets (Manual) This feature prints your document on both sides of a paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet. If you want to make a booklet, you need to print on Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio, or Oficio sized print media. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access the Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. Click the Basic tab, select Booklet Printing from the Type drop-down list. 3. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type. The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes. In order to find out the available paper size for this feature, select the available paper size in the Size option on the Paper tab. If you select an unavailable paper size, this option can be automatically canceled. Select only available paper. (paper without or mark). 4. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. 5. After printing, fold and staple the pages. Printing on both sides of paper (Manual) You can print on both sides of a paper; duplex. Before printing, decide how you want your document oriented. You can use this feature with Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio, or Oficio sized paper. (See Print media specifications.) We recommend not to print on both sides of the special media, such as labels, envelopes, or thick paper to print on both sides of paper. It may cause a paper jam or damage the machine. The Double-Sided Printing (Manual) feature is available only for the tray 1. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. Click the Advanced tab. 3. From the Double-Sided Printing (Manual) section, select the binding option you want. None Long Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in bookbinding. Short Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in calendars. 4. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type. 5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. If your machine does not have a duplex unit, you should complete the printing job manually. The machine prints every other page of the document first. After that, a message appears on your computer. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the printing job. Change percentage of your document You can change the size of a document to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by typing in a percentage you want. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. Click the Paper tab. 3. Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box. You can also click the up/down arrows to select the scaling rate. 4. Select the Size, Source, and Type in Paper Options. 5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Fitting your document to a selected paper size This printer feature allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size regardless of the document size. This can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small document. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. Click the Paper tab. 3. Select the paper size you want from the Fit to Page. 4. Select the Size, Source, and Type in Paper Options. 5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Using watermarks The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document. For example, you use it when you want to have large gray letters reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document. There are several predefined watermarks that come with the machine. They can be modified, or you can add new ones to the list. Using an existing watermark 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. Click the Advanced tab, and select the desired watermark from the Watermark drop-down list. You will see the selected watermark in the preview image. 3. Click OK or Print until you exit the print window. Creating a watermark 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. From the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears. 3. Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box. You can enter up to 256 characters. The message displays in the preview window.When the First Page Only box is checked, the watermark prints on the first page only. 4. Select watermark options. You can select the font name, style, size, and shade from the Font Attributes section, as well as set the angle of the watermark from the Message Angle section. 5. Click Add to add a new watermark to the Current Watermarks list. 6. When you have finished editing, click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. To stop printing the watermark, select None from the Watermark drop-down list. Editing a watermark 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears. 3. Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list and change the watermark message and options. 4. Click Update to save the changes. 5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Deleting a watermark 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears. 3. Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermarks list and click Delete. 4. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Using overlay An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard disk drive (HDD) as a special file format that can be printed on any document. Overlays are often used to take the place of letterhead paper. Rather than using preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing exactly the same information that is currently on your letterhead. To print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you do not need to load preprinted letterhead paper in the machine just print the letterhead overlay on your document. Creating a new page overlay To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay containing your logo or image. 1. Create or open a document containing text or an image for use in a new page overlay. Position the items exactly as you wish them to appear when printed as an overlay. 2. To save the document as an overlay, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 3. Click the Advanced tab, and select Edit from the Text drop-down list. Edit Overlay window appears. 4. In the Edit Overlay window, click Create. 5. In the Save As window, type a name of up to eight characters in the File name box. Select the destination path, if necessary. (The default is C:\Formover.) 6. Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List. 7. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. 8. The file is not printed. Instead, it is stored on your computer hard disk drive. The overlay document size must be the same as the document you print with the overlay. Do not create an overlay with a watermark. Using a page overlay After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with your document. To print an overlay with a document: 1. Create or open the document you want to print. 2. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Openingprinting preferences.) 3. Click the Advanced tab. 4. Select the desired overlay from the Text drop-down list. 5. If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Text drop-down list, select Edit from the list and click Load. Select the overlay file you want to use. If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source, you can also load the file when you access the Open window. After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the Overlay List box and is available for printing. Select the overlay from the Overlay List box. 6. If necessary, check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box. If this box is checked, a message window appears each time you submit a document for printing, asking you to confirm your wish to print an overlay on your document. If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected, the overlay automatically prints with your document. 7. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. The selected overlay prints on your document. The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that of the document you will print with the overlay. Deleting a page overlay You can delete page overlays that you no longer use. 1. In the Printing Preferences window, click the Advanced tab. 2. Select Edit in the Overlay drop down list. 3. Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box. 4. Click Delete. 5. When a confirming message window appears, click Yes. 6. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Advanced Options Use the following Graphics options to adjust the print quality for your specific printing needs. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. Click the Graphics tab. This options you can select may vary depending on your printer model. Refer to the online help for each option’s information provided from the Printing Preferences. Font/ Text: Select Darken Text to print texts darker than on a normal document. Use All Text Black to prints solid black, regardless of the color it appears on the screen. Advanced (Dell 1130n only): You can set advanced settings by clicking the Advanced button. True Type Options: This option determines what the driver tells the printer about how to image the text in your document. Select the appropriate setting according to the status of your document. Download as Outline: When this option is selected, the driver will download any TrueType fonts that are used in your document not already stored (resident) on your printer. If, after printing a document, you find that the fonts did not print correctly, choose Download as bit image and resubmit your print job. The Download as bit image setting is often useful when printing Adobe®. Download as Bit Image: When this option is selected, the driver will download the font data as bitmap images. Documents with complicated fonts, such as Korean or Chinese, or various other fonts, will print faster in this setting. Print as Graphics: When this option is selected, the driver will download any fonts as graphics. When printing documents with high graphic content and relatively few TrueType fonts, printing performance (speed) may be enhanced in this setting. Use Printer Fonts: When Use Printer Fonts is checked, the printer uses the fonts that are stored in its memory (resident fonts) to print your document, rather than downloading the fonts used in your document. Because downloading fonts takes time, selecting this option can speed up your printing time. When using Printer fonts, the printer will try to match the fonts used in your document to those stored in its memory. If, however, you use fonts in your document that are very different from those resident in the printer, your printed output will appear very different from what it looks like on the screen. Graphic Controller: Fine Edge allows user to emphasize edges of texts and fine lines for improving readability. Toner Save: Selecting this option extends the life of your toner cartridge and reduces your cost per pagewithout a significant reduction in print quality. Printer Setting: If you select this option, this feature is determined by the setting you’ve made from the machine. On: Select this option to allow the printer to use less toner on each page. Off: If you do not need to save toner when printing a document, select this option. Darkness: The option adjusts the toner density on print outputs. The values are Normal, Light, and Dark. For Dell 1130n, you change darknesss in the Printer Settings Utility. 3. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Changing the default print settings Most Windows applications will override settings you specify in the printer driver. Change all print settings available in the software application first, and change any remaining settings using the printer driver. 1. Click the Windows Start menu. 2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes. For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 3. Right-click your machine. 4. For Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, press Printing Preferences. For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select the Printing preferences. If Printing preferences item has ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer. 5. Change the settings on each tab. 6. Click OK. If you want to change the settings for each print job, change it in Printing Preferences. Setting your machine as a default machine 1. Click the Windows Start menu. 2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes. For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 3. Select your machine. 4. Right-click your machine and select Set as Default Printer. For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 If Set as default printer item has ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer. Printing to a file (PRN) You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file. To create a file: 1. Check the Print to file box at the Print window.2. Click Print. 3. Type in the destination path and the file name, and then click OK. For example c:\Temp\file name. If you type in only the file name, the file is automatically saved in My Documents. The saved folder may differ, depending on your operating system. Macintosh printing This chapter explains how to print using Macintosh. You need to set the print environment before printing. USB connected (See Macintosh.) Network connected (See Macintosh.) Printing a document When you print with a Macintosh, you need to check the printer driver setting in each application you use. Follow the steps below to print from a Macintosh: 1. Open an application and select the file you want to print. 2. Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document Setup in some applications). 3. Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, other options, and make sure that your machine is selected. Click OK.4. Open the File menu and click Print. 5. Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which pages you want to print. 6. Click Print. Changing printer settings You can use advanced printing features when using your machine. Open an application and select Print from the File menu. The machine name, which appears in the printer properties window may differ depending on the machine in use. Except for the name, the composition of the printer properties window is similar to the following. The setting options may differ depending on printers and Macintosh OS version. Layout The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document appears on the printed page. You can print multiple pages on one sheet of paper. Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation to access the following features. Pages per Sheet: This option determines how many pages to be printed on one page. (See Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper.) Layout Direction: This option allows you to select the printing direction on a page similar to the examples on UI. Border: This option allows you to print a border around each page on the sheet. Reverse Page Orientation: This option allows you to rotate paper 180 degrees. Graphics The Graphics tab provides options for selecting Resolution. Select Graphics from the drop-down list under Orientation to access the graphic features. Resolution (Quality): This option allows you to select the printing resolution. The higher the setting, thesharper the clarity of printed characters and graphics. The higher setting also may increase the time it takes to print a document. Darkness: This option allows you to enhance printouts. The available options are Normal, Light, and Dark. Paper Set Paper Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which you want to print. This will let you get the best quality printout. If you load a different type of print material, select the corresponding paper type. Printer Settings Printer Settings tab provides Toner Save Mode, Reprint When Jammed, and Power Save options. Select Printer Settings from the drop-down list under Orientation to access the following features: Toner Save Mode: Selecting this option extends the life of your toner cartridge and reduces your cost per page without a significant reduction in print quality. Printer Setting: If you select this option, this feature is determined by the setting you’ve made from the machine. On: Select this option to allow the printer to use less toner on each page. Off: If you do not need to save toner when printing a document, select this option. Reprint When Jammed: When this option is checked, the machine retains the image of a printed page until the machine signals that the page has successfully exited the machine. If a paper jam occurs, the printer will reprint the last page sent from the computer after you have cleared the jam. (Dell 1130 only) Power Save: When this option is checked, the machine turns to the power save mode after the selected time. Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature provides a cost-effective way to print draft pages. 1. Open an application, and select Print from the File menu. 2. Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation. In the Pages per Sheet drop-down list, select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper.3. Select the other options you want to use. 4. Click Print, then the machine prints the selected the number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper. Linux printing Printing from applications There are a lot of Linux applications that allow you to print using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS). You can print on your machine from any such application. 1. Open an application, and select Print from the File menu. 2. Select Print directly using lpr. 3. In the LPR GUI window, select the model name of your machine from the printer list and click Properties. 4. Change the print job properties using the following four tabs displayed at the top of the window.General: This option allows you to change the paper size, the paper type, and the orientation of the documents. It enables the duplex feature, adds start and end banners, and changes the number of pages per sheet. Text: This option allows you to specify the page margins and set the text options, such as spacing or columns. Graphics: This option allows you to set image options that are used when printing images/files, such as color options, image size, or image position. Advanced: This option allows you to set the print resolution, paper source and special print features. If an option is grayed out, it means that the grayed out option is not supported. 5. Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties window. 6. Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing. 7. The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the status of your print job. To abort the current job, click Cancel. Printing files You can print many different types of files on your machine using the standard CUPS way, directly from the command line interface. The CUPS lpr utility allows you to do that. But the drivers package replaces the standard lpr tool by a much more user-friendly LPR GUI program. To print any document file: 1. Type lpr from the Linux shell command line and press Enter. The LPR GUI window appears. When you type only lpr and press Enter, the Select file(s) to print window appears first. Just select any files you want to print and click Open. 2. In the LPR GUI window, select your machine from the list, and change the print job properties. 3. Click OK to start printing. Configuring printer properties Using the Printer Properties window provided by the Printers configuration, you can change the various properties for your machine as a printer. 1. Open the Unified Driver Configurator. If necessary, switch to Printers configuration. 2. Select your machine on the available printers list and click Properties. 3. The Printer Properties window opens.The following five tabs display at the top of the window: General: This option allows you to change the printer location and name. The name entered in this tab displays on the printer list in Printers configuration. Connection: This option allows you to view or select another port. If you change the machine port from USB to parallel or vice versa while in use, you must re-configure the machine port in this tab. Driver: Allows you to view or select another printer driver. By clicking Options, you can set the default device options. Jobs: This option shows the list of print jobs. Click Cancel job to cancel the selected job and select the Show completed jobs check box to see previous jobs on the job list. Classes: This option shows the class that your machine is in. Click Add to Class to add your machine to a specific class or click Remove from Class to remove the machine from the selected class. 4. Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer Properties window.Management tools This chapter introduces management tools provided to help you make full use of your machine. This chapter includes: Introducing useful management tools Using Embedded Web Service (Dell 1130n only) Using the Printer Status Monitor Introducing useful management tools Using the printer settings utility Firmware update utility Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator Introducing useful management tools The programs below help you to use your machine conveniently. Using Embedded Web Service (Dell 1130n only). Using the Printer Status Monitor. Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator. Using Embedded Web Service (Dell 1130n only) Your Embedded Web Service window that appears in this user’s guide may differ depending on the machine in use. If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP/IP network parameters correctly, you can manage the machine via Embedded Web Service, an embedded web server. Use Embedded Web Service to: View the machine’s device information and check its current status. Change TCP/IP parameters and set up other network parameters. Change printer preference. Set the email notifications advising of the machine’s status. Get support for using the machine. To access Embedded Web Service: 1. Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows. Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go. 2. Your machine’s embedded website opens. Embedded Web Service overview Information tab: This tab gives you general information about your machine. You can check things, such as the machine’s IP address, remaining amount of toner, ethernet information, firmware version, and so on. You can also print reports such as an error report and so on. Machine Settings tab: This tab allows you to set options provided by your machine. Network Settings tab: This tab allows you to view and change the network environment. You can set things, such as TCP/IP, enabling EtherTalk and so on. Maintenance tab: This tab allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware and setting security information. Support tab: This tab allows you to set contact information for sending email. You can also connect to Dell website or download drivers by selecting Link. E-mail notification setup You can receive emails about your machine’s status by setting this option. By setting information such as IP address, host name, e-mail address and SMTP server information, the machine status (toner cartridge shortage or machine error) will be sent to the specified e-mail address automatically. This option may be used more frequently by a machine administrator.1. Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows. Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go. 2. Your machine’s embedded website opens. 3. From the Machine Settings, select E-mail Notification Setup. 4. Set required settings. Set SMTP server information and other settings to use E-mail notification function. After setting the network environment, select the recipient list. And just by clicking a radio button, you can select in what case you want to receive an alert. 5. Click Apply. Setting the contact information Set the machine administrator information and this setting is necessary to use E-mail notification option. 1. Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows. Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go. 2. Your machine’s embedded website opens. 3. Select Support. 4. Enter the name of machine administrator, phone number, location or E-mail address. 5. Click Apply. If the firewall is activated, the E-mail may not be sent successfully. In that case, contact the a network administrator. Using the Printer Status Monitor The Printer Status Monitor program can only be used in the Windows system. Printer Status Monitor is a program that monitors and informs you of the machine status. Printer Status Monitor is installed automatically when you install the machine software. To use this program, you need the following system requirements: Windows. Check for windows operating system(s) compatible with your machine. (See System requirements.) Understanding Printer Status Monitor If an error occurs while printing, you can check the error from the Printer Status Monitor. You can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer driver name > Printer Status Monitor. The Printer Status Monitor program displays the current status of the machine, the estimated level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge(s), and various other types of information. 1 Printing Status The Printer Status Monitor displays the current status of the printer. 2 Toner Level View the level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge(s). 3 Order Supplies Order replacement toner cartridge(s) online. 4 Help me When error occurs, Help me button appears. You can directly open troubleshooting section in the user’s guide. Opening the Troubleshooting Guide Find solutions for problems by using the Troubleshooting Guide.Right-click the Printer Status Monitor icon and select Troubleshooting Guide. Changing the Printer Status Monitor Program Settings Right-click the Printer Status Monitor icon and select Options. Select the settings you want from the Options window. Using the Dell Toner Management System™ The printer status monitor displays the status of the printer (printer ready, printer offline, and error-check printer) and the toner level (100%, 50%, Toner Low) for your printer. . Using the printer settings utility When you install the Dell software, the Printer Settings Utility is automatically installed. To open the Printer Settings Utility. If you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer driver name > Printer Settings Utility. The Printer Settings Utility window provides several features. For more information, click the help icon button. Firmware update utility Firmware Update Utility allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware. If you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer driver name > Firmware Update Utility. Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator The supplied software CD provides you with the Unified Linux Driver package for using your machine with a Linux computer. Unified Linux Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring machine devices. After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the Unified Linux Driver Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop. Opening the Unified Driver Configurator 1. Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop. You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select Dell Unified Driver > Unified Driver Configurator. 2. Click each button on the left to switch to the corresponding configuration window. 1. Printers Configuration 2. Ports ConfigurationTo use the on screen help, click Help. 3. After changing the configurations, click Exit to close the Unified Driver Configurator. Printers configuration Printers configuration has the two tabs: Printers and Classes. Printer tab View the current system’s printer configuration by clicking on the machine icon button on the left side of the Unified Driver Configurator window.1 Switches to Printers configuration. 2 Shows all of the installed machine. 3 Shows the status, model name and URI of your machine. The printer control buttons are, as follows: Refresh: Renews the available machines list. Add Printer: Allows you to add a new machines. Remove Printer: Removes the selected machine. Set as Default: Sets the current selected machine as a default machine. Stop/Start: Stops/starts the machine. Test: Allows you to print a test page to ensure the machine is working properly. Properties: Allows you to view and change the printer properties. Classes tab The Classes tab shows a list of available machine classes.1 Shows all of the machine classes. 2 Shows the status of the class and the number of machines in the class. Refresh: Renews the classes list. Add Class: Allows you to add a new machine class. Remove Class: Removes the selected machine class. Port configuration In this window, you can view the list of available ports, check the status of each port and release a port that is stalled in a busy state when its owner has terminated the job for any reason.1 Switches to Ports configuration. 2 Shows all of the available ports. 3 Shows the port type, device connected to the port, and status. Refresh: Renews the available ports list. Release port: Releases the selected port.Maintenance This chapter provides information for maintaining your machine and the toner cartridge. This chapter includes: Printing a machine report Using toner low alert (Dell 1130n only) Cleaning a machine Storing the toner cartridge Tips for moving & storing your machine Printing a machine report You can print a configuration page to view current printer settings, or to help troubleshoot printer problems. In ready mode, press and hold the (cancel button) for about 5 seconds. A configuration page prints out. For Dell 1130 this information is provided on the demo page. Using toner low alert (Dell 1130n only) If the amount of toner in the cartridge is low, the LED blinks red. You can set the option for this LED to blink or not. 1. Install the driver. (See Installing USB connected machine’s driver or Installing network connected machine’s driver.) 2. You can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer driver name > Printer Settings Utility. 3. Click Toner Low Alert. Select the appropriate setting and then click Apply. Cleaning a machine If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a dusty environment, you need to clean your machine regularly to keep the best printing condition and use your machine longer. Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials containing large amounts of alcohol, solvent, or other strong substances can discolor or distort the cabinet. If your machine or the surrounding area is contaminated with toner, we recommend you use cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it. If you use a vacuum cleaner, toner blows in the air and might be harmful to you. Cleaning the outside Clean the machine cabinet with a soft, lint-free cloth. Dampen the cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the machine. Printing a cleaning sheet (Dell 1130n only) If you are experiencing blurred or smeared printouts, you can clear the problem by printing a cleaning sheet, provided by your machine. To print the cleaning sheet: In ready mode, press and hold the (cancel button) for about 10 seconds. OPC cleaning sheet: Cleans the OPC drum of the toner cartridge. This process will produce a page with toner debris, which should be discarded. Your machine automatically picks up a sheet of paper from the tray and prints out a cleaning sheet with dust or toner particles on it. Cleaning the inside During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the machine. This buildup can cause print quality problems, such as toner specks or smearing. Cleaning the inside of the machine clears and reduces these problems.1. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to cool down. 2. Open the front cover and pull the toner cartridge out. Set it on a clean flat surface To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if necessary. Do not touch the green surface underside of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area. 3. With a dry, lint-free cloth, wipe away any dust and spilled toner from the toner cartridge area. While cleaning the inside of the machine, be careful not to damage the transfer roller or any other inside parts. Do not use solvents such as benzene or thinner to clean. Printing quality problems can occur and cause damage to the machine. 4. Locate the long strip of glass (LSU) inside the machine and gently swab the glass to see if dirt turns the white cotton black. 5. Reinsert the toner cartridge and close the front cover. 6. Plug in the power cord and turn the machine on. Storing the toner cartridge Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light, temperature, and humidity. Dell suggests users follow the recommendations to ensure the optimum performance, highest quality, and longest life from your new Dell toner cartridge.Store this cartridge in the same environment as the printer it will be used in; this should be in controlled office temperature and humidity conditions. The toner cartridge should remain in its original, unopened package until installation – If original packaging is not available, cover the top opening of the cartridge with paper and store in a dark cabinet. Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful shelf and operating life. Do not store on the floor. If the toner cartridge is removed from the printer, always store the cartridge: Inside the protective bag from the original package. Store lying flat (not standing on end) with the same side facing up as if they were installed in the machine. Do not store consumables in; Temperature greater than 40°C (104°F). Humidity range less than 20% nor not greater than 80%. An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature. Direct sunlight or room light. Dusty places. A car for a long period of time. An environment where corrosive gases are present. An environment with salty air. Handling instructions Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum in the cartridge. Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock. Never manually rotate the drum, especially in the reverse direction; this can cause internal damage and toner spillage. Use of non-Dell and refilled toner cartridge Dell does not recommend or approve the use of non-Dell brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic, store brand, refilled, or remanufactured toner cartridges. Dell’s printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine caused by the use of a refilled, remanufactured, or non-Dell brand toner cartridge. Estimated cartridge life Estimated cartridge life (the life of the toner cartridge yield) depends on the amount of toner that print jobs require. The actual print-out number may vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on, operating environment, printing interval, media type, and/or media size. For example, if you print a lot of graphics, the consumption of the toner is high and you may need to change the cartridge more often. Tips for moving & storing your machine When moving the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down. Otherwise, the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner, which can cause damage to the machine or bad print quality. When moving the machine, make sure at least two people are holding the machine securely.Troubleshooting This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error. This chapter includes: Redistributing toner Tips for avoiding paper curls Tips for avoiding paper jams Clearing paper jams Solving other problems Redistributing toner When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life: White streaks or light printing occurs. The LED blinks red. If this happens, you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge. In some cases, white streaks or light printing will still occur even after you have redistributed the toner. 1. Open the front cover. 2. Pull the toner cartridge out. 3. Thoroughly roll the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge. If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric. Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area. 4. Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into the opening in the machine. Tabs on the sides of the cartridge and corresponding grooves within the machine will guide the cartridge into the correct position until it locks into place completely.5. Close the front cover. Ensure that the cover is securely closed. Tips for avoiding paper curls 1. Open the rear cover. 2. Pull down the pressure lever on each side. 1. Pressure lever Keep the rear cover opened during printing. Only use when the printout has more than 20 mm curl. Tips for avoiding paper jams By selecting the correct media types, most paper jams can be avoided. When a paper jam occurs, refer to the next guidelines. Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly. (See Loading paper in the tray.) Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the paper capacity mark on the inside of the tray. Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing. Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading. Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper. Do not mix paper types in a tray. Use only recommended print media. Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing down in the tray, or facing up in the manual tray. Clearing paper jams If a paper jam occurs, the LED on the control panel lights orange. Find and remove the jammed paper. To resume printing after clearing paper jams, you must open and close the front cover. To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly and gently. Follow the instructions in the following sections to clear the jam.In tray Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. 1. Open and close the front cover. The jammed paper is automatically ejected from the machine. If the paper does not exit, go to the next step. 2. Pull out tray. 3. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out. If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the paper in this area, check the fuser area around the toner cartridge. (See Inside the machine.) 4. Insert tray back into the machine until it snaps into place. Printing automatically resumes. In the manual tray Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. 1. If the paper is not feeding properly, pull the paper out of the machine. 2. Open and close the front cover to resume printing.Inside the machine Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine. 1. Open the front cover and pull the toner cartridge out, lightly pushing it down. 2. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out. 3. Replace the toner cartridge and close the front cover. Printing automatically resumes. In exit area Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. 1. Open and close the front cover. The jammed paper is automatically ejected from the machine. If you do not see the jammed paper, go to next step. 2. Gently pull the paper out of the output tray. If you do not see the jammed paper or if there is any resistance when you pull, stop and go to the next step. 3. Open the rear cover. 4. Pull the pressure levers down and remove the paper. Return the pressure levers to their original position.1. Pressure lever If you do not see the jammed paper, go to next step. 5. Pull the fuser cover levers down and remove the paper. Return the fuser cover levers to their original position. The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine. 6. Close the rear cover. 7. Open and close front cover, printing automatically resumes. Solving other problems The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the recommended solutions. Follow the suggested solutions until the problem is corrected. If the problem persists, call for service. Power problems Click this link to open an animation about power problems. Condition Suggested solutions The machine is not receiving power, or the connection cable between the computer and the machine is not connected properly. Plug in the power cord and press (power) on the control panel. Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it. For Local PrintingFor Network Printing (Dell 1130n only) Paper feeding problems Condition Suggested solutions Paper jams during printing. Clear the paper jam. (See Clearing paper jams.) Paper sticks together. Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray. (See Print media specifications.) Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper. (See Print media specifications.) Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper. Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together. Multiple sheets of paper do not feed. Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray. Load paper of only one type, size, and weight. Paper does not feed into the machine. Remove any obstructions from inside the machine. Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove paper from the tray and reload it correctly. There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray. The paper is too thick. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine. (See Print media specifications.) The paper keeps jamming. There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray. If you are printing on special materials, use the manual tray. An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine. (See Print media specifications.) There may be debris inside the machine. Open the front cover and remove any debris. Transparencies stick together in the paper exit. Use only transparencies specifically designed for laser printers. Remove each transparency as it exits from the machine. Envelopes skew or fail to feed correctly. Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the envelopes. Printing problems Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions The machine does not print. The machine is not receiving power. Check the power cord connections. The machine is not selected as the default machine. Select your machine as your default machine in your Windows. Check the machine for the following: The front cover is not closed. Close the front cover.Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam. (See Clearing paper jams.) No paper is loaded. Load paper. (See Loading paper in the tray.) The toner cartridge is not installed. Install the toner cartridge. If a system error occurs, contact your service representative. The connection cable between the computer and the machine is not connected properly. Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it. The connection cable between the computer and the machine is defective. If possible, attach the cable to another computer that is working properly and print a job. You can also try using a different machine cable. The port setting is incorrect. Check the Windows printer setting to make sure that the print job is sent to the correct port. If the computer has more than one port, make sure that the machine is attached to the correct one. The machine may be configured incorrectly. Check the Printing Preferences to ensure that all of the print settings are correct. (See Opening printing preferences.) The printer driver may be incorrectly installed. Repair the machine software. (See Installing USB connected machine’s driver, Installing network connected machine’s driver.) The machine is malfunctioning. Check the LEDs on the control panel to see if the machine is indicating a system error. Contact a service representative. Checking an error message is also possible from the Printer Status Monitor on your computer. The machine does not print. The document size is so big that the hard disk space of the computer is insufficient to access the print job. Get more hard disk space and print the document again. The output tray is full. It can hold up to 80 sheets of plain paper. Once the paper is removed from the output tray, the machine resumes printing. The machine selects print materials from the wrong paper source. The paper option that was selected in the Printing Preferences may be incorrect. For many software applications, the paper source selection is found under the Paper tab within the Printing Preferences. Select the correct paper source. See the printer driver help screen. (See Opening printing preferences.) A print job is extremely slow. The job may be very complex. Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the print quality settings. Half the page is blank. The page orientation setting may be incorrect. Change the page orientation in your application. See the printer driver help screen. The paper size and the paper size settings do not match. Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper in the tray.Or, ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection in the software application settings you use. The machine prints, but the text is wrong, garbled, or incomplete. The machine cable is loose or defective. Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect. Try a print job that you have already printed successfully. If possible, attach the cable and the machine to another computer that you know works and try a print job. Finally, try a new machine cable. The wrong printer driver was selected. Check the application’s printer selection menu to ensure that your machine is selected. The software application is malfunctioning. Try printing a job from another application. The operating system is malfunctioning. Exit Windows and reboot the computer. Turn the machine off and back on again. If you are in a DOS environment, the font setting for your machine may be set incorrectly. See Changing font setting (Dell 1130n only).Pages print, but they are blank. The toner cartridge is defective or out of toner. Redistribute the toner, if necessary. If necessary, replace the toner cartridge. The file may have blank pages. Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages. Some parts, such as the controller or the board, may be defective. Contact a service representative. The machine does not print PDF file correctly. Some parts of graphics, text, or illustrations are missing. Incompatibility between the PDF file and the Acrobat products. Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options. It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image. The print quality of photos is not good. Images are not clear. The resolution of the photo is very low. Reduce the photo size. If you increase the photo size in the software application, the resolution will be reduced. Before printing, the machine emits vapor near the output tray. Using damp paper can cause vapor during printing. This is not a problem. Just keep printing. The machine does not print special- sized paper, such as billing paper. Paper size and paper size setting do not match. Set the correct paper size in the Edit... in the Paper tab in the Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) Printing quality problems If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly, there might be a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear the problem. Condition Suggested Solutions Light or faded print If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page, the toner supply is low. You may be able to temporarily extend the toner cartridge life. (See Redistributing toner.) If this does not improve the print quality, install a new toner cart The paper may not meet paper specifications; for example, the paper may be too moist or rough. (See Print media specifications.) If the entire page is light, the print resolution setting is too low or the toner save mode is on. Adjust the print resolution and turn the toner save mode off. See the help screen of the printer driver. A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs cleaning. (See Cleaning the inside.) The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. (See Cleaning the inside.) Toner specks The paper may not meet specifications; for example, the paper may be too moist or rough. (See Print media specifications.) The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine. Contact a service representative. The paper path may need cleaning. Contact a service representative. Dropouts If faded areas, generally rounded, occur randomly on the page: A single sheet of paper may be defective. Try reprinting the job. The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist spots on its surface. Try a different brand of paper. (See Print media specifications.) The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner. Try a different kind or brand of paper. Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click Paper tab, and set type to Thick. (See Opening printing preferences.) If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative. White Spots If white spots appear on the page: The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from a paper falls to the inner devices within the machine, so the transfer roller may be dirty. Clean theinside of your machine. (See Cleaning the inside.) The paper path may need cleaning. (See Cleaning the inside.) Vertical lines If black vertical streaks appear on the page: The surface (drum part) of the toner cartridge inside the machine has probably been scratched. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one. (See Replacing the toner cartridge.) If white vertical streaks appear on the page: The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. (See Cleaning the inside.) Black background If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable: Change to a lighter weight paper. (See Print media specifications.) Check the environmental conditions: very dry conditions or a high level of humidity (higher than 80% RH) can increase the amount of background shading. Remove the old toner cartridge and, install a new one. (See Replacing the toner cartridge.) Toner smear If toner smears on the page: Clean the inside of the machine. (See Cleaning the inside.) Check the paper type and quality. (See Print media specifications.) Remove the toner cartridge and then, install a new one. (See Replacing the toner cartridge.) Vertical repetitive defects If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals: The toner cartridge may be damaged. If you still have the same problem, remove the toner cartridge and, install a new one. (See Replacing the toner cartridge.) Parts of the machine may have toner on them. If the defects occur on the back of the page, the problem will likely correct itself after a few more pages. The fusing assembly may be damaged. Contact a service representative. Background scatter Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the printed page. The paper may be too damp. Try printing with a different batch of paper. Do not open packages of paper until necessary so that the paper does not absorb too much moisture. If background scatter occurs on an envelope, change the printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have overlapping seams on the reverse side. Printing on seams can cause problems. If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page, adjust the print resolution through your software application or in Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) Misformed characters If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow images, the paper stock may be too slick. Try different paper. (See Print media specifications.) Page skew Ensure that the paper is loaded properly. Check the paper type and quality. (See Print media specifications.) Ensure that the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack. Curl or wave Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.Check the paper type and quality. Both high temperature and humidity can cause paper curl. (See Print media specifications.) Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray. Wrinkles or creases Ensure that the paper is loaded properly. Check the paper type and quality. (See Print media specifications.) Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray. Back of printouts are dirty Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the machine. (See Cleaning the inside.) Solid Color or Black pages The toner cartridge may not be installed properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it. The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one. (See Replacing the toner cartridge.) The machine may require repair. Contact a service representative. Loose toner Clean the inside of the machine. (See Cleaning the inside.) Check the paper type and quality. (See Print media specifications.) Remove the toner cartridge and then, install a new one. (See Replacing the toner cartridge.) If the problem persists, the machine may require repair. Contact a service representative. Character Voids Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid black: If you are using transparencies, try another type of transparency. Because of the composition of transparencies, some character voids are normal. You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper. Remove the paper and turn it around. The paper may not meet paper specifications. (See Print media specifications.) Horizontal stripes If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear: The toner cartridge may be installed improperly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it. The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one. (See Replacing the toner cartridge.) If the problem persists, the machine may require repair. Contact a service representative. Curl If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the machine: Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray. Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click Paper tab, and set type to Thin. (See Opening printing preferences.) An unknown image repetitively appears on a few sheets or loose toner, light print, or contamination occurs. Your machine is probably being used at an altitude of 1,000 m (3,281 ft) or above.The high altitude may affect the print quality, such as loose toner or light imaging. Change the correct altitude setting to your machine. (See Altitude adjustment.) Common Windows problemsCondition Suggested solutions “File in Use” message appears during installation. Exit all software applications. Remove all software from the startup group, then restart Windows. Reinstall the printer driver. “General Protection Fault”, “Exception OE”, “Spool 32”, or “Illegal Operation” messages appear. Close all other applications, reboot Windows and try printing again. “Fail To Print”, “A printer timeout error occurred” messages appear. These messages may appear during printing. Just keep waiting until the machine finishes printing. If the message appears in ready mode or after printing has been completed, check the connection and/or whether an error has occurred. Refer to Microsoft Windows User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Windows error messages. Common Linux problems condition Suggested solutions The machine does not print. Check if the printer driver is installed in your system. Open Unified Driver Configurator and switch to the Printers tab in Printers configuration window to look at the list of available machines. Make sure that your machine is displayed on the list. If not, open Add new printer wizard to set up your device. Check if the machine is started. Open Printers configuration and select your machine on the printers list. Look at the description in the Selected printer pane. If its status contains Stopped string, press the Start button. After that normal operation of the machine should be restored. The “stopped” status might be activated when some problems in printing occurred. Check if your application has special print option such as “-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified in the command line parameter, then remove it to print properly. For Gimp front-end, select “print” - > “Setup printer” and edit command line parameter in the command item. The machine does not print whole pages, and output is printed on half the page. It is a known problem that occurs when a color machine is used on version 8.51 or earlier of Ghostscript, 64-bit Linux OS, and has been reported to bugs.ghostscript.com as Ghostscript Bug 688252. The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v. 8.52 or above. Download the latest version of AFPL Ghostscript from http://sourceforge.net/projects/ghostscript/ and install it to solve this problem. I encounter error “Cannot open port device file” when printing a document. Avoid changing print job parameters (via LPR GUI, for example) while a print job is in progress. Known versions of CUPS server break the print job whenever print options are changed and then try to restart the job from the beginning. Since Unified Linux Driver locks the port while printing, the abrupt termination of the driver keeps the port locked and unavailable for subsequent print jobs. If this situation occurs, try to release the port by selecting Release port in Port configuration window. Refer to Linux User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Linux error messages. Common Macintosh problems condition Suggested solutions The machine does not print PDF files correctly. Some parts of graphics, text, or illustrations are missing. Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options. It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image. The document has printed, but the print job has not disappeared from the spooler in Mac OS X 10.3.2. Update your Mac OS to OS Mac OS X 10.3.3. or higher. Some letters are not displayed normally during the Cover page printing. Mac OS cannot create the font during the Cover page printing. The English alphabet and numbers are displayed normally on the Cover page. When printing a document in Macintosh with Acrobat Reader 6.0 or higher, colors print incorrectly. Make sure that the resolution setting in your machine driver matches the one in Acrobat® Reader®. Refer to Macintosh User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Macintosh error messages.Supplies This chapter provides information on purchasing supplies and maintenance parts available for your machine. This chapter includes: How to purchase Available supplies Replacing the toner cartridge Available accessories may differ from country to country. Contact your sales representatives to obtain the list of available accessories. How to purchase To order Dell-authorized supplies and accessories visit www.dell.com/supplies, or contact your local Dell dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine. You can also visit www.dell.com or support.dell.com, select your country/region, and obtain information on calling for service. Available supplies When supplies reach their lifespan, you can order the following types of supplies for your machine: Type Average yield [a] Part name Standard capacity toner cartridge Approx. 1,500 pages 3J11D High capacity toner cartridge Approx. 2,500 pages 2MMJP [a] Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752. To replace a toner cartridge see Replacing the toner cartridge. Depending on the options and job mode used, the toner cartridge’s lifespan may differ. You must purchase supplies, including toner cartridges, in the same country where you purchased your machine. Otherwise, supplies will be incompatible with your machine since the system configuration of these vary from country to country. Dell does not recommend using non-genuine Dell toner cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured. Dell cannot guarantee non-genuine Dell toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair required as a result of using non-genuine Dell toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty. Replacing the toner cartridge Click this link to open an animation about replacing a toner cartridge. When the toner cartridge reaches its estimated cartridge life: The Printer Status Monitor program window appears on the computer telling you the toner cartridge needs to be replaced. The machine stops printing. At this stage, the toner cartridge needs to be replaced. Check the type of the toner cartridge for your machine. (See Available supplies.) 1. Open the front cover. 2. Pull the toner cartridge out.3. Take a new toner cartridge out of its package. 4. Remove the paper protecting the toner cartridge by pulling the packing tape. 5. Locate the sealing tape at the end of the toner cartridge. Carefully pull the tape completely out of the cartridge and discard it. The sealing tape should be longer than 60 cm when correctly removed. Holding the toner cartridge, pull the sealing tape straight to remove it from the cartridge. Be careful not to cut the tape. If this happens, you cannot use the toner cartridge. Refer to the helpful pictures on the cartridge wrapping paper. 6. Slowly shake the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge. It will assure maximum copies per cartridge. If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric. Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area. 7. Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into the opening in the machine. Tabs on the sides of the cartridge and corresponding grooves within the machine will guide the cartridge into the correct position until it locks into place completely.8. Close the front cover. Make sure that the cover is securely closed.Specifications This chapter guides you about this machine’s specifications. This chapter includes: Hardware specifications Environmental specifications Electrical specifications Print media specifications The specification values here are based on preliminary data. See www.dell.com or support.dell.com for current information. Hardware specifications Item Description Dimension Height 197 mm (7.76 inches) Depth 389 mm (15.31 inches) Width 360 mm (14.17 inches) Weight Machine with consumables Dell 1130: 7.25 Kg (15.98 lbs) Dell 1130n: 7.30 Kg (16.09 lbs) Package weight Paper 1.23 Kg (2.70 lbs) Plastic 0.19 Kg (0.42 lbs) Environmental specifications Item Description Noise Level [a] Ready mode 26 dB(A) Printing mode Dell 1130: 49 dB(A) Dell 1130n: 50 dB(A) Temperature Operation 10 to 32 °C (50 to 90 °F) Storage (unpacked) 0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F) Humidity Operation 20 to 80% RH Storage (unpacked) 10 to 80% RH [a] Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779. Configuration tested: machine basic installation, A4 paper, simplex printing. Electrical specifications Power requirements are based on the country/region where the device is sold. Do not convert operating voltages. Doing so might damage the device and void the product warranty. Item Description Power rating [a] 110 volt models AC 110 - 127 V 220 volt models AC 220 - 240 V Power consumption Average operating mode Less than 360 W Ready mode Dell 1130: Less than 45 W Dell 1130n: Less than 60 W Power save mode Dell 1130: Less than 4.5 WDell 1130n: Less than 6.5 W Power off mode Less than 0.8 W [a] See the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage, frequency (hertz) and type of current for your machine. Print media specifications Type Size Dimensions Print media weight [a] /Capacity [b] Tray1 Manual tray Plain paper Letter 216 x 279 mm (8.50 x 11.00 inches) 60 to 120 g/m2 (16 to 32 lb bond) 250 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb bond) 60 to 220 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb bond) 1 sheet stacking Legal 216 x 356 mm (8.50 x 14.00 inches) US Folio 216 x 330 mm (8.50 x 13.00 inches) A4 210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.69 inches) Oficio 216 x 343 mm (8.50 x 13.50 inches) JIS B5 182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 inches) 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb bond) 150 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb bond) ISO B5 176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches) Executive 184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 0 inches) A5 148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 inches) A6 105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 inches) Envelope Envelope Monarch 98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.50 inches) Not available in tray1. 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb bond) 1 sheet stacking Envelope No. 10 105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.50 inches) Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches) Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm (6.38 x 9.02 inches) Envelope C6 114 x 162 mm (4.49 x 6.38 inches) Thick paper Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond) 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond) 1 sheet stacking Thin paper Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section 60 to 70 g/m2 (16 60 to 70 g/m2 (16to 19 lb bond) to 19 lb bond) 1 sheet stacking Transparency Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section Not available in tray1. 138 to 146 g/m2 (36.81 to 38.91 lb bond) 1 sheet stacking Labels [c] Letter, Legal, US Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5, Statement Refer to the Plain paper section Not available in tray1. 120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lb bond) 1 sheet stacking Card stock Letter, Legal, US Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5, Statement, PostCard 4x6 Refer to the Plain paper section Not available in tray1. 105 to 163 g/m2 ( 28 to 43 lb bond) 1 sheet stacking Minimum size (custom) 76 x 127 mm (3.00 x 5.00 inches) 60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb bond) Maximum size (custom) 216 x 356 mm (8.50 x 14.02 inches) [a] If media weight is over 120 g/m2 (32 lb), load a paper into the tray one by one. [b] Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness and environmental conditions. [c] Smoothness: 100 to 250 (sheffield).Appendix Dell technical support policy Technician-assisted technical support requires the cooperation and participation of the customer in the troubleshooting process and provides for restoration of the Operating System, application software, and hardware drivers to the original default configuration as shipped from Dell, as well as the verification of appropriate functionality of the printer and all Dell-installed hardware. In addition to this technician assisted technical support, online technical support is available at Dell Support website at support.dell.com. Additional technical support options may be available for purchase. Dell provides limited technical support for the printer and any Dell-installed software and peripherals. Support for thirdparty software and peripherals is provided by the original manufacturer, including those purchased and/or installed through Software & Peripherals (DellWare), ReadyWare, and Custom Factory Integration (CFI/DellPlus). Contacting Dell For customers in the United States, call 800-WWW-DELL (800-999-3355). If you do not have an active Internet connection, you can find contact information on your purchase invoice, packing slip, bill, or Dell product catalog. Dell provides several online and telephone-based support and service options. Availability varies by country and product, and some services may not be available in your area. To contact Dell for sales, technical support, or customer service issues: 1. Visit support.dell.com, and verify your country or region in the Choose A Country/Region drop-down menu at the bottom of the page. 2. Click Contact Us on the left side of the page, and select the appropriate service or support link based on your need. Warranty and return policy Dell Inc. (“Dell”) manufactures its hardware products from parts and components that are new or equivalent to new in accordance with industry-standard practices. For information about the Dell warranty for your printer, refer to the Product Information Guide.Glossary The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as mentioned in this user’s guide. 802.11 802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN) communication, developed by the IEEE LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE 802). 802.11b/g 802.11b/g can share same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps; 802.11g up to 54 Mbps. 802.11b/g devices may occasionally suffer interference from microwave ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices. Access point Access Point or Wireless Access Point (AP or WAP) is a device that connects wireless communication devices together on wireless local area networks (WLAN), and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of WLAN radio signals. ADF An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a mechanism that will automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the paper at once. AppleTalk AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking. BIT Depth A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number of bits increases, the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for a color map. 1-bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and white. BMP A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple graphics file format on that platform. BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically. This is usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them. The BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables 'diskless workstation' computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system. CCD Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan job. CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when you move the machine. Collation Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is selected, the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies. Control Panel A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or monitoring instruments are displayed. They are typically found in front of the machine.Coverage It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5% image or text on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner usage will be as much as the coverage. CSV Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to exchange data between disparate applications. The file format, as it is used in Microsoft Excel, has become a pseudo standard throughout the industry, even among non-Microsoft platforms. DADF A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a mechanism that will automatically feed and flip over an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan on both sides of the paper. Default The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state, reset, or initialized. DHCP A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information required by the client host to participate on an IP network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts. DIMM Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds memory. DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data, received fax data. DNS The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks, such as the Internet. Dot Matrix Printer A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact, striking an ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter. DPI Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size. DRPD Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers. Duplex A mechanism that will automatically flip over a sheet of paper so that the machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer equipped with a Duplex can print double-sided of paper. Duty Cycle Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month. Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month assuming 20 working days, a printer limits 2,400 pages a day. ECM Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1 fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephoneline noise. Emulation Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another. An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system, so that the second system behaves like the first system. Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior, which is in contrast to simulation, which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering its internal state. Ethernet Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control (MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present. EtherTalk A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking. FDI Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader. Those devices allow the pay-for-print service on your machine. FTP A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol (such as the Internet or an intranet). Fuser Unit The part of a laser printer that melts the toner onto the print media. It consists of a hot roller and a back-up roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper permanently, which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer. Gateway A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or a network that allows access to another computer or network. Grayscale A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image when color images are converted to grayscale; colors are represented by various shades of gray. Halftone An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots. Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots. HDD Hard Disk Drive (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk, is a non-volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces. IEEE The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international non-profit, professional organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity. IEEE 1284 The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral (for example, a printer). IntranetA private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an organization's information or operations with its employees. Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service, the internal website. IP address An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard. IPM The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer can complete within one minute. IPP The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing as well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and so forth. IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers, and also supports access control, authentication, and encryption, making it a much more capable and secure printing solution than older ones. IPX/SPX IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange. It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP, and SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol for this purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN). ISO The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international standard-setting body composed of representatives from national standards bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and commercial standards. ITU-T The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization established to standardize and regulate international radio and telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization, allocation of the radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection arrangements between different countries to allow international phone calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates telecommunication. ITU-T No. 1 chart Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile transmissions. JBIG Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used on other images. JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used standard method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web. LDAP The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over TCP/IP. LED A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates the status of a machine. MAC address Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g., 00-00-0c-34-11- 4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by its manufacturer, and used as anaid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks. MFP Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the following functionality in one physical body, so as to have a printer, a copier, a fax, a scanner and etc. MH Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a codebook-based run-length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space. As most faxes consist mostly of white space, this minimizes the transmission time of most faxes. MMR Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.6. Modem A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information. MR Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.4. MR encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is compared to the first, the differences determined, and then the differences are encoded and transmitted. NetWare A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack. Today NetWare supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX. OPC Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is usually green or gray colored and a cylinder shaped. An exposing unit of a drum is slowly worn away by its usage of the printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets scratches from grits of a paper. Originals The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text, etc, which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce others, but which is not itself copied or derived from something else. OSI Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) for communications. OSI offers a standard, modular approach to network design that divides the required set of complex functions into manageable, self-contained, functional layers. The layers are, from top to bottom, Application, Presentation, Session, Transport, Network, Data Link and Physical. PABX A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone switching system within a private enterprise. PCL Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard. Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has been released in varying levels for thermal, matrix printer, and page printers. PDF Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device independent and resolution independent format.PostScript PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas. - that is run in an interpreter to generate an image. Printer Driver A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer. Print Media The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used on a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier. PPM Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one minute. PRN file An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the device driver using standard input/output system calls, which simplifies many tasks. Protocol A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection, communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints. PS See PostScript. PSTN The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the world's public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on industrial premises, is usually routed through the switchboard. RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) is a protocol for remote user authentication and accounting. RADIUS enables centralized management of authentication data such as usernames and passwords using an AAA (authentication, authorization, and accounting) concept to manage network access. Resolution The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the dpi, the greater the resolution. SMB Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files, printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated Inter-process communication mechanism. SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail transmissions across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple, text-based protocol, where one or more recipients of a message are specified, and then the message text is transferred. It is a client-server protocol, where the client transmits an email message to the server. SSID Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name of a wireless local area network (WLAN). All wireless devices in a WLAN use the same SSID in order to communicate with each other. The SSIDs are case-sensitive and have a maximum length of 32 characters. Subnet Mask The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the address is thenetwork address and which part is the host address. TCP/IP The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP); the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run. TCR Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each transmission such as job status, transmission result and number of pages sent. This report can be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions. TIFF Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped image format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners. TIFF images make use of tags, keywords defining the characteristics of the image that is included in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have been made by various image processing applications. Toner Cartridge A kind of bottle within a machine like printer which contains toner. Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers, which forms the text and images on the printed paper. Toner can be melted by the heat of the fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper. TWAIN An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN-compliant scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be initiated from within the program.; an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems. UNC Path Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The format of a UNC path is: \\\\ URL Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates what protocol to use, the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the resource is located. USB Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals. Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB port to multiple peripherals. Watermark A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282; they have been used by papermakers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps, currency, and other government documents to discourage counterfeiting. WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol specified in IEEE 802.11 to provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN. WEP provides security by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as it is transmitted from one end point to another. WIA Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant scanner. WPA Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a class of systems to secure wireless (Wi-Fi) computer networks, which was created to improve upon the security features of WEP.WPA-PSK WPA-PSK (WPA Pre-Shared Key) is special mode of WPA for small business or home users. A shared key, or password, is configured in the wireless access point (WAP) and any wireless laptop or desktop devices. WPA-PSK generates a unique key for each session between a wireless client and the associated WAP for more advanced security. w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Dell™ Inspiron™ 1150 Manual del propietario Modelo PP08LNotas, Avisos y Precauciones NOTA: Una NOTA proporciona información importante que le ayuda a utilizar su equipo de la mejor manera posible. AVISO: Un AVISO indica la posibilidad de daños en el hardware o pérdida de datos, y le explica cómo evitar el problema. PRECAUCIÓN: Una PRECAUCIÓN indica un posible daño material, lesión corporal o muerte. Abreviaturas y siglas Para obtener una lista completa de las abreviaturas y siglas, consulte el archivo Dell™ Inspiron™ Help (Ayuda de Dell™ Inspiron™). Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. Si ha adquirido un equipo Dell™ Serie n, todas las referencias que aparecen en este documento relativas a los sistemas operativos de Microsoft® Windows® no son aplicables. ____________________ La información contenida en este documento puede modificarse sin aviso previo. © 2004 Dell Inc. Todos los derechos reservados. Queda estrictamente prohibido realizar cualquier tipo de reproducción sin el consentimiento por escrito de Dell Inc. Marcas comerciales utilizadas en este texto: Dell, el logotipo de DELL, AccessDirect, Inspiron, Dell Precision, Dimension, OptiPlex, Latitude, PowerApp, PowerEdge, PowerConnect, PowerVault, Axim, TrueMobile y DellNet son marcas comerciales de Dell Inc.; Intel, Pentium, y Celeron son marcas comerciales registradas de Intel Corporation; Microsoft y Windows son marcas comerciales registradas de Microsoft Corporation; EMC es una marca comercial registrada de EMC Corporation; Bluetooth es una marca comercial propiedad de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. que Dell Inc. utiliza bajo licencia. Este documento puede incluir otras marcas y nombres comerciales para referirse a las entidades que son propietarias de los mismos o a sus productos. Dell Inc. renuncia a cualquier interés sobre la propiedad de marcas y nombres comerciales que no sean los suyos. Modelo PP08L Noviembre de 2004 N/P F7577 Rev. A01Contenido 3 Contenido Localización de información . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 1 Descripción del equipo Vista anterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Vista lateral izquierda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Vista lateral derecha. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Vista posterior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Vista inferior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 2 Configuración de su equipo Conexión a Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Configuración de la conexión a Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Problemas con el módem y con la conexión a Internet . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Problemas con el correo electrónico . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Instalación de una impresora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Cable de la impresora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Conexión de una impresora USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Problemas con la impresora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Dispositivos para protección de la alimentación . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Supresores de sobrevoltaje . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Acondicionadores de línea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Cómo apagar el equipo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 3 Uso de la batería Rendimiento de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Comprobación de la carga de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Contenido w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Medidor de energía . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Advertencia de bajo nivel de carga de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Carga de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Extracción de una batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Instalación de una batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Almacenamiento de una batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Problemas de alimentación eléctrica y de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Si la batería no se carga. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Si la batería dura poco . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 4 Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil Botón Dell™ AccessDirect™. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Reprogramación del botón. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Teclado numérico . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Métodos abreviados del teclado . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Funciones del sistema. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Bandeja de CD o de DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Funciones de la pantalla. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Administración de energía. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Funciones de la tecla con el logotipo de Microsoft ® Windows ® . . . . . 35 Superficie táctil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Personalización de la superficie táctil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Problemas con la superficie táctil o el ratón . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Problemas con el teclado externo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Caracteres inesperados . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 5 Uso de CD, DVD y otros dispositivos multimedia Cómo utilizar los CD y DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Problemas con los CD o DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Si no puede reproducir un CD, CD-RW o DVD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Si no puede expulsar la bandeja de la unidad de CD, CD-RW o DVD . . . 39Contenido 5 Si oye un sonido de roce o chirrido inusual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Si la unidad de CD-RW deja de grabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Problemas con el sonido y los altavoces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Si tiene problemas con los altavoces integrados . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Si tiene problemas con los altavoces externos . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Cómo copiar CD y DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Cómo copiar un CD o DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Cómo utilizar CD-R y CD-RW vacíos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Consejos prácticos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 6 Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina Conexión de un adaptador de red. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Asistente para configuración de redes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Problemas con la red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Conexión a una red de área local inalámbrica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Establecimiento del tipo de red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Conexión a una red inalámbrica en Microsoft ® Windows ® XP . . . . . 45 7 Solución de problemas Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Cuándo utilizar los Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Mensajes de error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Problemas con el vídeo y la pantalla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Si la pantalla aparece en blanco . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Si resulta difícil leer la pantalla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Si sólo se puede leer parte de la pantalla. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Problemas con el escáner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Problemas con las unidades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Si no puede guardar un archivo en una unidad de disco flexible . . . . . 55 Si tiene problemas con una unidad de disco duro . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Problemas con la tarjeta PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Problemas generales del programa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566 Contenido w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Un programa se bloquea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Un programa no responde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Aparecen mensajes de error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Solución de otros problemas técnicos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Si el equipo se moja . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Si el equipo se cae o se daña . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Controladores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 ¿Qué es un controlador?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Identificación de controladores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Volver a instalar los controladores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Reinstalación manual de controladores para Windows XP . . . . . . . 60 Cómo resolver incompatibilidades de software y hardware . . . . . . . . . 61 Restauración de su sistema operativo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Cómo utilizar la función Restaurar sistema de MicrosoftWindows XP . . 61 Cómo utilizar la función Restaurar PC de Dell por Symantec . . . . . . . 62 8 Adición y sustitución de piezas Antes de empezar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Herramientas recomendadas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Apagar el equipo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Unidad de disco duro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Devolución de una unidad de disco duro a Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Memoria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Módem y minitarjeta PCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Cómo cambiar el módem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Cómo agregar una minitarjeta PCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Unidad de CD o DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Teclado . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 9 Apéndice Especificaciones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Contenido 7 Utilización del programa Configuración del sistema. . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Visión general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Visualización de las pantallas de configuración del sistema . . . . . . . 87 Pantallas de configuración del sistema. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Opciones más utilizadas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Optimización del rendimiento de la batería y el sistema . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Información general sobre el rendimiento del sistema . . . . . . . . . 88 Optimización del consumo de energía y del tiempo de carga de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Velocidad variable del ventilador. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Política de soporte técnico de Dell (sólo EE.UU.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Definición de software y dispositivos periféricos “instalados por Dell” . . 90 Definición de software y dispositivos periféricos “de terceros” . . . . . 90 Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Índice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098 Contenido w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o mLocalización de información 9 Localización de información NOTA: Es posible que algunas funciones no estén disponibles para su equipo o en determinados países. NOTA: Su equipo puede incluir información adicional. ¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontrará • Información sobre la garantía • Términos y condiciones (sólo en EE.UU.) • Instrucciones de seguridad • Información reglamentaria • Información ergonómica • End User License Agreement (Contrato de licencia de usuario final) Guía de información del producto Dell™ • Cómo instalar mi equipo Diagrama de instalación10 Localización de información w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m • Consejos sobre la utilización de Microsoft® Windows® • Cómo reproducir CD y DVD • Cómo utilizar el modo de espera y el modo de hibernación • Cómo cambiar la resolución de la pantalla • Cómo limpiar el equipo Archivo de ayuda 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Ayuda y soporte técnico. 2 Haga clic en Guías del usuario y del sistema y en Guías del usuario. 3 Haga clic en Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron). • Etiqueta de servicio y código de servicio rápido • Etiqueta de licencia de Microsoft Windows Etiqueta de servicio y licencia de Microsoft Windows Estas etiquetas están situadas en el panel inferior de su equipo. • Utilice la etiqueta de servicio para identificar el equipo cuando utilice support.dell.com o póngase en contacto con el servicio de asistencia técnica. • Escriba el código de servicio urgente para dirigir su llamada cuando se ponga en contacto con el servicio de asistencia técnica. ¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontraráLocalización de información 11 • Soluciones — Consejos y sugerencias para la solución de problemas, artículos de técnicos, cursos en línea y preguntas más frecuentes • Comunidad — debates en línea con otros clientes de Dell • Actualizaciones — Información de actualización para componentes como, por ejemplo, la memoria, la unidad de disco duro y el sistema operativo • Atención al cliente — Información de contacto, llamada de servicio y estado de los pedidos, garantía e información de reparación • Servicio y asistencia — Historial de asistencia y estado de las llamadas de servicio, contrato de servicio, debates en línea con el personal de asistencia técnica • Referencia — Documentación del equipo, detalles en la configuración de mi equipo, especificaciones del producto y documentación técnica • Descargas — Controladores certificados, revisiones y actualizaciones de software • —Si vuelve a instalar el sistema operativo del equipo, también debe volver a instalar la utilidad NSS. NSS proporciona actualizaciones importantes del sistema operativo y asistencia para las unidades de disquete de 3,5 pulgadas de Dell™, procesadores Intel® Pentium® M, unidades ópticas y dispositivos USB. La utilidad NSS es necesaria para el correcto funcionamiento de su equipo Dell. El software detecta automáticamente su equipo y sistema operativo e instala las actualizaciones apropiadas a su configuración. Sitio web Dell Support — support.dell.com NOTA: Seleccione su región para ver el sitio web de asistencia adecuado. NOTA: Los clientes de empresas, instituciones gubernamentales y educativas también pueden utilizar el sitio web personalizado Dell Premier Support de premier.support.dell.com. Es posible que este sitio web no esté disponible en todas las regiones. • Cómo utilizar Windows XP • Documentación de mi equipo • Documentación para los dispositivos (como, por ejemplo, un módem) Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Ayuda y soporte técnico. 2 Escriba una palabra o frase que describa el problema y, a continuación, haga clic en el icono de flecha. 3 Haga clic en el tema que describa el problema. 4 Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en pantalla. ¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontrará12 Localización de información w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o mDescripción del equipo 13 Descripción del equipo Vista anterior SE G U R O D E L A P A N T A L L A — Mantiene la pantalla cerrada. PA N T A L L A — Para obtener más información sobre la pantalla, consulte la sección relativa al uso de la pantalla en el archivo de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. Seguro de la pantalla Pantalla Altavoces (2) Indicadores de estado del teclado Teclado Indicadores de estado del dispositivo Superficie táctil Botones de la superficie táctil Botón de alimentación Botón Dell AccessDirect14 Descripción del equipo w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m INDICADORES DE ESTADO DEL TECLADO Los indicadores luminosos verdes situados sobre el teclado indican lo siguiente: TE C L A D O — El teclado incluye tanto un teclado numérico como la tecla con el logotipo de Microsoft® Windows® . Para obtener información sobre los métodos abreviados de teclado, consulte la página 34. AL T A V O C E S — Para ajustar el volumen de los altavoces integrados, pulse los métodos abreviados de teclado de control del volumen. Para obtener más información, consulte la página 34. Se ilumina cuando el teclado numérico está activado. Se enciende cuando Bloq Mayús está activado. Se ilumina cuando el bloqueo de desplazamiento está activado. 9 ADescripción del equipo 15 INDICADORES DE ESTADO DEL DISPOSITIVO Si el equipo está conectado a una toma de alimentación eléctrica, el indicador funciona de la siguiente manera: – Luz verde continua: la batería se está cargando. Si el equipo utiliza alimentación de la batería, el indicador funciona de la siguiente manera: – Apagado: la batería está cargada de forma correcta (o el equipo está apagado). – Luz naranja parpadeante: la carga de la batería está baja. – Luz naranja continua: la carga de la batería está demasiado baja. BO T O N E S D E L A S U P E R F I C I E T Á C T I L — Los botones de la superficie táctil ofrecen las mismas funciones que un mouse. Consulte la página 36 para obtener más información. SU P E R F I C I E T Á C T I L — La superficie táctil y sus botones ofrecen las mismas funciones que un ratón. Consulte la página 36 para obtener más información. Se enciende al encender el equipo. Parpadea o se apaga en modo de administración de energía. Se ilumina cuando el equipo lee o escribe datos. AVISO: Para evitar que se produzcan pérdidas de datos, no apague nunca el equipo si el indicador parpadea. Parpadea para indicar el estado de carga de la batería.16 Descripción del equipo w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m BO T Ó N D E A L I M E N T A C I Ó N — Pulse el botón de alimentación para encender el equipo o para activar o desactivar un modo de administración de energía. Para obtener más información, consulte la sección relativa a la administración de energía en el archivo de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. AVISO: Para evitar la pérdida de datos, guarde y cierre todos los archivos abiertos y salga de todos los programas abiertos antes de cerrar el equipo (consulte la página 28). Si el equipo deja de responder, mantenga pulsado el botón de alimentación hasta que el equipo se apague totalmente (esto puede tardar unos segundos). BO T Ó N DE L L™ AC C E S SDI R E C T™ — Pulse este botón para iniciar un programa que se utiliza con frecuencia, como herramientas educativas y de soporte. Si lo desea, puede reprogramar el botón para que inicie el programa que prefiera. Para obtener más información, consulte la página 33). Vista lateral izquierda RA N U R A P A R A T A R J E T A PC — Admite una PC Card, como un módem o un adaptador de red. Para obtener más información, consulte la sección relativa al uso de tarjetas PC en el archivo de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. Ranura para la PC Card Conectores de audio (2) Unidad CD o DVDDescripción del equipo 17 CONECTORES DE AUDIO UN I D A D D E CD O DVD — Admite una unidad de CD, una unidad de DVD, una unidad de CD-RW o una unidad combinada CD-RW/DVD. Vista lateral derecha BA T E R Í A/C O M P A R T I M E N T O D E L A B A T E R Í A — Si tiene instalada una batería, puede utilizar el equipo sin conectarlo a una toma de corriente. Consulte la página 29. Conecte los auriculares o los altavoces al conector Conecte un micrófono al conector Batería/ compartimento de la batería Conector para módem Rejillas de ventilación Ranura para cable de seguridad18 Descripción del equipo w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m CONECTOR DEL MÓDEM RE J I L L A S D E V E N T I L A C I Ó N — El equipo utiliza un ventilador interno para permitir que el aire circule a través de las rejillas y evitar así un sobrecalentamiento. NOTA: El ventilador puede funcionar continuamente y su velocidad puede variar según cómo se use. El ruido de los ventiladores es normal y no indica ningún problema del equipo o de los ventiladores. PRECAUCIÓN: No introduzca objetos ni permita que el polvo se acumule en las rejillas de ventilación ni las bloquee. No almacene el equipo en un entorno con poca ventilación, como un maletín cerrado, mientras esté en funcionamiento. La circulación restringida de aire podría dañar el equipo o provocar un incendio. RA N U R A P A R A C A B L E D E S E G U R I D A D — Sirve para conectar al equipo un dispositivo antirrobo disponible en el mercado. Para obtener más información, consulte las instrucciones incluidas con el dispositivo. AVISO: Antes de comprar un dispositivo antirrobo, asegúrese de que encajará en la ranura del cable de seguridad del equipo. Conecte la línea telefónica al conector de módem. Para obtener más información sobre el uso del módem, consulte la documentación en línea del mismo incluida con el equipo.Descripción del equipo 19 Vista posterior RE J I L L A S D E V E N T I L A C I Ó N — El equipo utiliza un ventilador interno para permitir que el aire circule a través de las rejillas y evitar así un sobrecalentamiento. NOTA: El ventilador puede funcionar continuamente y su velocidad puede variar según cómo se use. El ruido de los ventiladores es normal y no indica ningún problema del equipo o de los ventiladores. PRECAUCIÓN: No introduzca objetos ni permita que el polvo se acumule en las rejillas de ventilación ni las bloquee. No almacene el equipo en un entorno con poca ventilación, como un maletín cerrado, mientras esté en funcionamiento. La circulación restringida de aire podría dañar el equipo o provocar un incendio. CO N E C T O R P A R A E L A D A P T A D O R D E CA — Conecte un adaptador de CA al equipo. NOTA: Utilice sólo el adaptador de CA proporcionado con el equipo. El adaptador de CA convierte la corriente alterna en la corriente continua que necesita el equipo. Puede conectar el adaptador de CA al equipo independientemente de que esté encendido o apagado. Conectores USB (2) Conector de red Conector de vídeo Conector del adaptador de CA Rejillas de ventilación Conector del adaptador de CA Adaptador de CA20 Descripción del equipo w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m PRECAUCIÓN: El adaptador de CA funciona con tomas de alimentación eléctrica de todo el mundo. No obstante, los conectores de alimentación y los enchufes múltiples varían de un país a otro. El uso de un cable incompatible o la conexión incorrecta del cable al enchufe múltiple o a la toma eléctrica puede dañar el equipo o provocar un incendio. PRECAUCIÓN: Cuando utilice el adaptador de CA para suministrar alimentación al equipo o para cargar la batería, sitúelo en un área ventilada, como un escritorio o en el suelo. No cubra el adaptador de CA con papeles u otros objetos que reduzcan la ventilación; no utilice el adaptador de CA dentro de un maletín. AVISO: Cuando desconecte el cable del adaptador de CA del equipo, sujete el conector (no el cable) y tire de él firmemente pero con cuidado, procurando no dañar el cable. CONECTORES USB CONECTOR DE VÍDEO CONECTOR DE RED AVISO: El conector de red es ligeramente más grande que el conector de módem. Para evitar dañar el equipo, no conecte una línea telefónica al conector de red. Conecta dispositivos USB, como un ratón, un teclado o una impresora. Conecta un monitor externo. Para obtener más información, consulte la sección relativa al uso de la pantalla en el archivo de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. Conecta el equipo a una red. Los indicadores luminosos del conector indican la actividad de las comunicaciones de red con cable e inalámbricas. Para obtener información sobre el uso del adaptador de red, consulte la documentación en línea del mismo incluida con el equipo.Descripción del equipo 21 Vista inferior CU B I E R T A D E L A M I N I T A R J E T A PCI/M Ó D E M — Cubre el compartimento que contiene el módem y la minitarjeta PCI. Consulte la página 71. BA T E R Í A/C O M P A R T I M E N T O D E L A B A T E R Í A — Si tiene instalada una batería, puede utilizar el equipo sin conectarlo a una toma de corriente. Consulte la página 29. RE J I L L A S D E V E N T I L A C I Ó N — El equipo utiliza un ventilador interno para permitir que el aire circule a través de las rejillas y evitar así un sobrecalentamiento. NOTA: El ventilador puede funcionar continuamente y su velocidad puede variar según cómo se use. El ruido de los ventiladores es normal y no indica ningún problema del equipo o de los ventiladores. PRECAUCIÓN: No introduzca objetos ni permita que el polvo se acumule en las rejillas de ventilación ni las bloquee. No almacene el equipo en un entorno con poca ventilación, como un maletín cerrado, mientras esté en funcionamiento. La circulación restringida de aire podría dañar el equipo o provocar un incendio. SE G U R O D E L I B E R A C I Ó N D E L A B A T E R Í A — Libera la batería. Consulte la página 31 para obtener instrucciones. CU B I E R T A D E L M Ó D U L O D E M E M O R I A — Cubre el compartimiento que contiene los módulos de memoria y el pasador de liberación de la unidad de CD o DVD. Consulte la página 68. UN I D A D D E D I S C O D U R O — Almacena software y datos. Cubierta del módulo de memoria Seguro de liberación de la batería Cubierta del módem/minitarjeta PCI Batería/ compartimento de la batería Unidad de disco duro Rejilla de ventilación22 Descripción del equipo w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o mConfiguración de su equipo 23 Configuración de su equipo Conexión a Internet NOTA: Los ISP y sus ofertas varían según el país. Para conectarse a Internet, se necesita un módem o una conexión de red y un proveedor de servicios de Internet (ISP), como por ejemplo, AOL o MSN. El ISP ofrecerá una o varias de las siguientes opciones de conexión a Internet: • Conexiones telefónicas que proporcionan acceso a Internet a través de una línea telefónica. Las conexiones telefónicas son considerablemente más lentas que las conexiones ADSL y de módem por cable. • Conexiones ADSL que proporcionan acceso a Internet de alta velocidad a través de la línea telefónica existente. Con una conexión ADSL, se puede acceder a Internet y utilizar el teléfono en una sola línea simultáneamente. • Conexiones de módem por cable que proporcionan acceso a Internet de alta velocidad a través de la línea de TV por cable local. Si utiliza una conexión telefónica, enchufe una línea telefónica al conector de módem del equipo y a la toma de teléfono de la pared antes de configurar la conexión a Internet. Si utiliza una conexión ADSL o de módem por cable, póngase en contacto con su ISP para obtener instrucciones de configuración. Configuración de la conexión a Internet Para configurar una conexión para AOL o MSN: 1 Guarde y cierre los archivos que tenga abiertos y salga de todos los programas. 2 Haga doble clic en el icono MSN Explorer o AOL del escritorio de Microsoft® Windows® . 3 Siga las instrucciones de la pantalla para realizar la configuración. Si el escritorio no contiene ningún icono MSN Explorer o AOL, o si desea configurar una conexión a Internet con un ISP diferente: 1 Guarde y cierre los archivos que tenga abiertos y salga de todos los programas. 2 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Internet Explorer. Aparece la ventana Asistente para conexión nueva 3 Haga clic en Conectarse a Internet.24 Configuración de su equipo w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 4 En la siguiente ventana, haga clic en la opción correspondiente: • Si no dispone de un ISP y desea seleccionar uno, haga clic en Elegir de una lista de proveedores de servicios Internet [ISP]. • Si el ISP ya le ha proporcionado la información de configuración, pero no ha recibido el CD de instalación, haga clic en Establecer mi conexión manualmente. • Si dispone de un CD, haga clic en Usar el CD que tengo de un proveedor de servicios Internet [ISP]. 5 Haga clic en Siguiente. Si ha seleccionado Establecer mi conexión manualmente, siga con el step 6. De lo contrario, siga las instrucciones de la pantalla para realizar la configuración. NOTA: Si no sabe qué tipo de conexión seleccionar, póngase en contacto con su ISP. 6 Haga clic en la opción adecuada dentro de ¿Cómo desea conectar a Internet? y, a continuación, haga clic en Siguiente. 7 Utilice la información de configuración proporcionada por el ISP para realizar la configuración. Si conectarse a la internet le está dando problemas, consulte el apartado “Problemas con el módem y con la conexión a Internet”. Si no puede conectarse a internet pero lo ha podido hacer anteriormente, puede ser que el ISP esté sufriendo una interrupción de servicio. Póngase en contacto con su ISP para comprobar el estado de servicio o intente conectarse más tarde. Problemas con el módem y con la conexión a Internet AVISO: Conecte el módem únicamente a una toma de teléfono de pared analógica. Si conecta el módem a una red de telefonía digital, se dañará. AVISO: Los conectores de módem y de red tienen un aspecto similar. No conecte una línea telefónica al conector de red. NOTA: Si se puede conectar con el proveedor de servicios de Internet (ISP), esto quiere decir que el módem funciona correctamente. Si está seguro de que el módem funciona correctamente y, aun así, tiene problemas, póngase en contacto con su ISP. CO M P R U E B E L A T O M A D E T E L É F O N O D E L A P A R E D — Desconecte la línea telefónica del módem y conéctela a un teléfono. Espere el tono de marcado. Asegúrese de que tiene un servicio telefónico por tonos. Intente conectar el módem a otra clavija de teléfono. Las velocidades de conexión lentas pueden deberse a ruido telefónico, así como a las condiciones de la línea telefónica o de la red. Póngase en contacto con su compañía telefónica o su administrador de red para obtener más información.Configuración de su equipo 25 CO N E C T E E L M Ó D E M D I R E C T A M E N T E A L A T O M A D E T E L É F O N O D E L A P A R E D — Si dispone de otros dispositivos telefónicos que comparten la línea, por ejemplo, un contestador automático, una máquina de fax, un supresor de sobrevoltaje o un divisor de línea, omítalos y utilice la línea telefónica para conectar el módem directamente a la toma de teléfono de la pared. CO M P R U E B E L A C O N E X I Ó N — Verifique que la línea telefónica está conectada al módem. CO M P R U E B E L A L Í N E A T E L E F Ó N I C A — Pruebe a utilizar otra línea telefónica. Si utiliza una línea con una longitud de 3 metros (10 pies) o más, pruebe con una más corta. TO N O D E M A R C A D O I R R E G U L A R — Si tiene servicio de buzón de voz, es posible que oiga un tono de marcado irregular cuando tenga mensajes. Póngase en contacto con la compañía telefónica para obtener instrucciones sobre la restauración del tono de marcado. DE S A C T I V E L A L L A M A D A E N E S P E R A (T E L É F O N O D E R E T E N C I Ó N D E L L A M A D A) — Consulte en la documentación de la compañía telefónica las instrucciones sobre cómo desactivar esta función. A continuación, ajuste las propiedades de la conexión de acceso telefónico a redes. 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Panel de control. 2 Haga clic en Impresoras y otro hardware, en Opciones de teléfono y módem, seleccione la ficha Reglas de marcado y, a continuación, haga clic en Editar.... 3 En la ventana Editar ubicación, asegúrese de que la opción Deshabilitar llamada en espera al marcar: está activada y, a continuación, seleccione el código adecuado según aparece en la guía telefónica. 4 Haga clic en Aplicar y en Aceptar. 5 Cierre la ventana Opciones de teléfono y módem. 6 Cierre la ventana Panel de control. CO M P R U E B E Q U E E L M Ó D E M S E C O M U N I C A C O N WI N D O W S — 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Panel de control. 2 Haga clic en Impresoras y otro hardware y, a continuación, en Opciones de teléfono y módem. 3 Haga clic en la pestaña Módems. 4 Haga clic en el puerto COM para el módem. 5 Haga clic en Propiedades, en la pestaña Diagnósticos y en Consultar módem para comprobar que el módem se comunica con Windows. Si todos los comandos reciben respuestas, significa que el módem funciona correctamente. Problemas con el correo electrónico CO M P R U E B E Q U E E S T Á C O N E C T A D O A IN T E R N E T — Con el programa de correo electrónico Outlook Express abierto, haga clic en Archivo. Si la opción Trabajar sin conexión está activada, desactívela y conéctese a Internet. Instalación de una impresora AVISO: Complete la configuración del sistema operativo antes de conectar una impresora al equipo. Consulte la información de configuración en la documentación proporcionada con la impresora, en la que se describe cómo realizar las siguientes operaciones: • Obtener e instalar controladores actualizados • Conectar la impresora al equipo26 Configuración de su equipo w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m • Cargar el papel e instalar el cartucho de tóner o de tinta • Ponerse en contacto con el fabricante para obtener asistencia técnica Cable de la impresora Es posible que la impresora se entregue sin ningún cable, por lo que si adquiere uno por separado, asegúrese de que sea compatible con la impresora. Si ha adquirido un cable de la impresora al mismo tiempo que el equipo, es posible que el cable se incluya en la caja del equipo. Conexión de una impresora USB NOTA: Puede conectar dispositivos USB con el equipo encendido. 1 Finalice la configuración del sistema operativo, en el caso de que todavía no lo haya hecho. 2 Instale el controlador de la impresora, si es necesario. Consulte la documentación incluida con la impresora. 3 Conecte el cable de la impresora USB a los conectores USB del equipo y de la impresora. Los conectores USB admiten sólo una posición de encaje. Problemas con la impresora CO M P R U E B E L A S C O N E X I O N E S D E L O S C A B L E S D E L A I M P R E S O R A — Asegúrese de que el cable de la impresora está conectado correctamente al equipo (consulte la página 26). PR U E B E L A T O M A D E C O R R I E N T E E L É C T R I C A — Asegúrese de que la toma de corriente eléctrica funciona; para ello, pruébela con otro dispositivo, por ejemplo, una lámpara. Cable de la impresora USB Conector USB del equipo Conector USB de la impresoraConfiguración de su equipo 27 CO M P R U E B E Q U E L A I M P R E S O R A E S T Á E N C E N D I D A — Consulte la documentación que se proporciona con la impresora. CO M P R U E B E Q U E WI N D O W S ® R E C O N O C E L A I M P R E S O R A — 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio. 2 Haga clic en Panel de control. 3 Haga clic en Impresoras y otro hardware. 4 Haga clic en Ver impresoras o impresoras de fax instaladas. Si aparece el modelo de la impresora, haga clic con el botón derecho del ratón en el icono de la impresora. 5 Pulse Propiedades y, a continuación, pulse la ficha Puertos. Asegúrese de que la opción Imprimir en los siguientes puertos es USB 001 (Puerto de la impresora). VU E L V A A I N S T A L A R E L C O N T R O L A D O R D E L A I M P R E S O R A — Consulte la página 59. Dispositivos para protección de la alimentación Existen varios dispositivos que protegen contra las interrupciones y las fluctuaciones de la alimentación eléctrica: • Supresores de sobrevoltaje • Acondicionadores de línea • Sistemas de alimentación ininterrumpida (SAI) Supresores de sobrevoltaje Los supresores de sobrevoltaje y los enchufes múltiples equipados con protección contra sobrevoltajes ayudan a evitar los daños derivados de los picos de voltaje, que pueden producirse durante las tormentas con aparato eléctrico o inmediatamente después de las interrupciones en la alimentación eléctrica. El nivel de protección suele ser proporcional al precio del supresor de sobrevoltaje. Algunos fabricantes de supresores de sobrevoltaje proporcionan cobertura de garantía para cierto tipo de daños. Lea con atención la garantía del dispositivo al elegir un supresor de sobrevoltaje. Un dispositivo con una clasificación en julios más alta ofrece más protección. Compare las clasificaciones en julios para determinar la efectividad relativa de los diferentes dispositivos. AVISO: La mayoría de los supresores de sobrevoltaje no protegen contra las fluctuaciones e interrupciones de la alimentación eléctrica causadas por rayos. Cuando se produzca una tormenta con aparato eléctrico, desconecte la línea telefónica de la toma de teléfono de pared y desenchufe el equipo de la toma de corriente. Muchos supresores de sobrevoltaje disponen de una toma de teléfono para proteger el módem. Consulte la documentación del supresor de sobrevoltaje para obtener instrucciones sobre la conexión del módem. AVISO: No todos los supresores de sobrevoltaje ofrecen protección para el adaptador de red. Desconecte el cable de red de la toma de red de pared durante una tormenta con aparato eléctrico.28 Configuración de su equipo w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Acondicionadores de línea AVISO: Los acondicionadores de línea no protegen contra las interrupciones de la alimentación eléctrica. Los acondicionadores de línea están diseñados para mantener el voltaje de CA a un nivel bastante constante. Sistemas de alimentación ininterrumpida AVISO: La interrupción de la alimentación eléctrica mientras se están guardando datos en la unidad de disco duro puede provocar que se pierdan datos o que el archivo resulte dañado. NOTA: Para prolongar al máximo el tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería, conecte únicamente el equipo al SAI. Los demás dispositivos, como la impresora, puede conectarlos a un enchufe múltiple independiente que proporcione protección contra sobrevoltajes. Un SAI protege contra las fluctuaciones y las interrupciones de la alimentación eléctrica. Los dispositivos SAI contienen una batería que proporciona alimentación eléctrica temporal a los dispositivos conectados cuando se interrumpe la alimentación eléctrica. La batería se carga siempre que haya alimentación de CA disponible. Consulte la documentación del fabricante del SAI para obtener información sobre el tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería y asegurarse de que el dispositivo está aprobado por Underwriters Laboratories (UL). Cómo apagar el equipo AVISO: Para evitar la pérdida de datos, guarde y cierre todos los archivos abiertos y salga de todos los programas abiertos antes de cerrar el equipo. NOTA: Si lo prefiere, en vez de apagar el equipo, puede configurarlo para que entre en el modo de suspensión o de hibernación. Para obtener más información, consulte el archivo Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron). Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. 1 Guarde y cierre los archivos abiertos, salga de todos los programas, haga clic en el botón Inicio y luego en Apagar equipo. 2 En la ventana Apagar equipo, haga clic en Apagar. El equipo se apaga cuando concluye el proceso de cierre del sistema.Uso de la batería 29 Uso de la batería Rendimiento de la batería NOTA: Las baterías de los equipos portátiles sólo están cubiertas durante el primer año de validez de la garantía limitada del equipo. Para obtener más información sobre la garantía de Dell de su equipo, consulte la Guía de información del producto. Utilice una batería para suministrar energía al equipo cuando no esté conectado a una toma de alimentación eléctrica. Se proporciona una batería en su compartimento correspondiente como equipamiento estándar. NOTA: El tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería (el tiempo que la batería puede mantener una carga) disminuye con el tiempo. En función de la frecuencia y las condiciones de uso de la batería, es posible que deba comprar una nueva batería durante la vida útil del equipo. El tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería varía en función de las condiciones de funcionamiento. La autonomía de la batería puede reducirse significativamente cuando se realizan, entre otras, las siguientes operaciones: NOTA: Se recomienda conectar el equipo a una toma de corriente eléctrica mientras se graba en un CD. • Uso de unidades ópticas, especialmente unidades de DVD y CD-RW. • Uso de dispositivos de comunicaciones inalámbricas, tarjeta PC o dispositivos USB. • Uso de configuraciones de pantalla de mucho brillo. • Uso de protectores de pantalla 3D u otros programas que utilizan mucha energía, como juegos 3D y programas de ingeniería. • Ejecución del equipo en modo de rendimiento máximo. Para obtener más información, consulte la sección relativa a la administración de energía en el archivo de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 10. Puede establecer las opciones de administración de energía para que se le avise cuando la carga de la batería esté baja. PRECAUCIÓN: El uso de baterías incompatibles puede aumentar el riesgo de incendio o explosión. Sustituya la batería únicamente por baterías de Dell. La batería de iones de litio está diseñada para funcionar con equipos Dell™. No utilice la batería de otros equipos en su equipo. PRECAUCIÓN: No deseche las baterías en la basura doméstica. Cuando la batería ya no pueda cargarse, solicite información a una empresa local de gestión de residuos o al departamento responsable en materia de medio ambiente sobre el modo de desechar las baterías de iones de litio. Consulte las instrucciones para desechar las baterías en la Guía de información del producto. PRECAUCIÓN: El uso incorrecto de la batería puede aumentar el riesgo de incendio o quemadura química. No perfore, incinere, desmonte o exponga la batería a temperaturas superiores a 65°C (149 °F). Mantenga la batería fuera del alcance de los niños. Tenga mucho cuidado con las baterías dañadas o que goteen. Las baterías dañadas pueden gotear y causar lesiones personales o daños en el equipo. 30 Uso de la batería w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Comprobación de la carga de la batería La ventana y el icono del medidor de energía de Microsoft® Windows® , y la advertencia de batería baja proporcionan información sobre la carga de la batería. Medidor de energía El medidor de energía de Windows indica la carga que le queda a la batería. Para consultar el medidor de energía, pulse dos veces en el icono de la barra de tareas. Para obtener más información sobre la ficha Medidor de energía, consulte la sección relativa a la administración de energía en el archivo de Ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 10. Si el equipo está conectado a una toma de corriente, aparece un icono . Advertencia de bajo nivel de carga de la batería AVISO: Para evitar la pérdida de datos o que éstos resulten dañados, tras una advertencia de batería baja guarde inmediatamente el trabajo. A continuación, conecte el equipo a una toma de corriente eléctrica. Si la carga de la batería se agota por completo, el modo de hibernación se activa automáticamente. Cuando se ha agotado aproximadamente un 90 % de la carga, una ventana emergente se lo advierte. Para obtener más información sobre alarmas de bajo nivel de carga de batería, consulte la sección relativa a la administración de energía en el archivo de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 10. Carga de la batería NOTA: el adaptador de CA tarda 3 horas aproximadamente en cargar una batería totalmente descargada con el equipo apagado. El tiempo de carga es significativamente superior si el equipo está encendido y funciona a una alta velocidad de procesador y niveles elevados de actividad del sistema. Si se utiliza el equipo con niveles elevados de actividad durante un periodo prolongado de tiempo, puede ser que la batería no se cargue. Cuando se conecta el equipo a un enchufe de alimentación eléctrica o se instala una batería mientras el equipo está conectado a una toma de corriente, éste comprueba la carga y la temperatura de la batería. Si es necesario, el adaptador de CA cargará la batería y mantendrá la carga. Si la batería está caliente porque se ha estado usando en el equipo o porque ha permanecido en un ambiente donde la temperatura es elevada, puede ser que no se cargue cuando se conecte el equipo a una toma de alimentación eléctrica. Si el indicador parpadea alternando entre el verde y el naranja, la batería está demasiado caliente para iniciar la carga. Desconecte el equipo de la toma de corriente y espere a que tanto éste como la batería se enfríen hasta alcanzar la temperatura ambiente. A continuación, conecte el equipo a una toma de corriente y continúe cargando la batería. NOTA: Puede dejar la batería en el equipo todo el tiempo que desee. Los circuitos internos de la batería impiden que se sobrecargue.Uso de la batería 31 Para obtener más información sobre la resolución de problemas de la batería, consulte la sección relativa a la administración de energía en el archivo de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 10. Extracción de una batería PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de realizar estos procedimientos, desconecte el módem del enchufe telefónico de pared. 1 Compruebe que el equipo está apagado o conectado a una toma de corriente eléctrica. 2 Deslice y sostenga el pasador de la batería. 3 Extraiga la batería. Instalación de una batería Inserte la batería en el compartimento de la batería hasta que el pasador haga un “clic”. Almacenamiento de una batería Extraiga la batería cuando vaya a guardar el equipo durante un período largo. Las baterías se descargan durante los almacenamientos prolongados. Tras un periodo prolongado de almacenamiento, deberá cargar la batería completamente antes de utilizarla. Problemas de alimentación eléctrica y de la batería NOTA: Consulte el archivo Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron) para obtener información sobre el modo de espera. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 10. Seguro de la batería Batería32 Uso de la batería w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m CO M P R U E B E E L I N D I C A D O R D E A L I M E N T A C I Ó N — Si el indicador de alimentación está encendido o parpadea, significa que el equipo recibe alimentación. Si el indicador de alimentación parpadea, el equipo está en modo de espera; pulse el botón de alimentación para salir del modo de espera. Si el indicador está apagado, pulse el botón de alimentación para encender el equipo o para activar o desactivar un modo de administración de energía. Si el equipo no se enciende, pulse y mantenga pulsado el botón de alimentación durante unos segundos. CA R G U E L A B A T E R Í A — Puede que la carga de batería se haya agotado. 1 Vuelva a instalar la batería. 2 Utilice el adaptador de CA para conectar el equipo a una toma de corriente. 3 Encienda el equipo. CO M P R U E B E E L I N D I C A D O R D E E S T A D O D E L A B A T E R Í A — Si el indicador parpadea en color naranja o muestra un color naranja continuo, significa que la carga de la batería está baja o agotada. Conecte el equipo a un enchufe eléctrico. Si el indicador parpadea en colores verde y naranja, significa que la batería está demasiado caliente para cargarla. Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28), desconéctelo de la toma de corriente y, a continuación, espere a que tanto éste como la batería se enfríen hasta alcanzar la temperatura ambiente. Si el indicador de estado de la batería parpadea rápidamente en color naranja, puede que la batería esté defectuosa. Póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte la página 90). PR U E B E L A T O M A D E C O R R I E N T E E L É C T R I C A — Asegúrese de que la toma de corriente eléctrica funciona; para ello, pruébela con otro dispositivo, por ejemplo, una lámpara. CO M P R U E B E E L A D A P T A D O R D E CA — Compruebe las conexiones de cable del adaptador de CA. Si el adaptador de CA tiene una luz, asegúrese de que esté encendida. CO N E C T E E L E Q U I P O D I R E C T A M E N T E A U N A T O M A D E C O R R I E N T E E L É C T R I C A — Omita los dispositivos protectores de la alimentación, regletas de enchufes y alargadores para comprobar que el equipo se enciende. EL I M I N E L A S P O S I B L E S I N T E R F E R E N C I A S — Apague los ventiladores, luces fluorescentes, lámparas halógenas u otros aparatos cercanos. AJ U S T E L A S P R O P I E D A D E S D E L A A L I M E N T A C I Ó N — Consulte el archivo Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron) o busque la palabra clave en espera en el Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico. Para acceder a la ayuda, consulte la página 10. VU E L V A A C O L O C A R L O S M Ó D U L O S D E M E M O R I A — Si el indicador de alimentación del equipo se enciende pero en la pantalla no se ve nada, vuelva a colocar los módulos de memoria (consulte la página 68). Si la batería no se carga AP A G U E E L E Q U I P O — El tiempo de carga es significativamente superior si el equipo está encendido y funciona a una alta velocidad de procesador y niveles elevados de actividad del sistema. Si se utiliza el equipo con niveles elevados de actividad durante un periodo prolongado de tiempo, puede ser que la batería no se cargue. Si la batería dura poco CO N S U L T E E L A P A R T A D O “RE N D I M I E N T O D E L A B A T E R Í A” E N L A P Á G I N A 29 — El tiempo de funcionamiento puede reducirse significativamente bajo determinadas condiciones. OP T I M I Z A C I Ó N D E L R E N D I M I E N T O D E L P R O C E S A D O R Y C O N S U M O D E E N E R G Í A — Consulte la página 88.Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil 33 Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil Botón Dell™ AccessDirect™ Presione este botón para iniciar un programa que se utiliza con frecuencia, como las herramientas de soporte técnico y de formación o el explorador de Internet predeterminado. Reprogramación del botón Para cambiar la configuración del botón reprogramable o buscar información sobre el uso del botón: 1 Pulse el botón Inicio → Panel de control → Impresoras y otro hardware → Teclado. 2 Pulse la ficha AccessDirect. 3 Pulse el botón Ayuda y siga las instrucciones que aparecen en la pantalla. Teclado numérico El teclado numérico funciona como el teclado numérico de un teclado externo. Cada tecla del teclado numérico tiene varias funciones. Los números y símbolos del teclado numérico están marcados en azul en la parte derecha de las teclas. Teclado numérico34 Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Para activar el teclado, pulse . El indicador indica que el teclado numérico está activo. Para utilizar la función numérica cuando el teclado numérico esté activado, pulse y la tecla que desee. Para desactivar el teclado numérico, pulse de nuevo. Métodos abreviados del teclado Funciones del sistema Bandeja de CD o de DVD Funciones de la pantalla Administración de energía Abre la ventana Administrador de tareas de Windows Activa y desactiva el teclado numérico Activa y desactiva el bloqueo de desplazamiento Expulsa la bandeja fuera de la unidad. Cambia la imagen de vídeo a la siguiente opción de pantalla. Entre las opciones están la pantalla integrada, un monitor externo y las dos pantallas a la vez. Si está reproduciendo un DVD o viendo un vídeo, está desactivado. y tecla de flecha hacia arriba Aumenta el brillo únicamente en la pantalla integrada (no en un monitor externo) y tecla de fecha hacia abajo Reduce el brillo únicamente en la pantalla integrada (no en un monitor externo) Activa un modo de administración de energía. Puede reprogramar este método abreviado de teclado para activar otro modo de administración de energía utilizando la ficha Opciones avanzadas de la ventana Propiedades de Opciones de energía. Para obtener más información, consulte la sección relativa a la administración de energía en el archivo de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. 9Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil 35 Funciones de los altavoces Funciones de la tecla con el logotipo de Microsoft® Windows® Para ajustar el funcionamiento del teclado, como la velocidad de repetición de los caracteres, pulse el botón Inicio → Panel de control → Impresoras y otro hardware → Teclado. Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en pantalla. Aumenta el volumen de los altavoces integrados y de los altavoces externos (si los hay) Disminuye el volumen de los altavoces integrados y de los altavoces externos (si los hay) Activa y desactiva los altavoces integrados y los altavoces externos (si los hay) Tecla del logotipo de Windows y Minimiza todas las ventanas abiertas Tecla del logotipo de Windows y Maximiza todas las ventanas Tecla del logotipo de Windows y Ejecuta el Explorador de Windows Tecla del logotipo de Windows y Abre el cuadro de diálogo Ejecutar Tecla del logotipo de Windows y Abre el cuadro de diálogo Resultados de la búsqueda Tecla del logotipo de Windows y Abre el cuadro de diálogo Resultados de búsquedaPC si el equipo está conectado a una red Tecla del logotipo de Windows y Abre el cuadro de diálogo Propiedades del sistema36 Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Superficie táctil La superficie táctil detecta la presión y el movimiento del dedo para permitir desplazar el cursor por la pantalla. Utilice la superficie táctil y sus botones del mismo modo que un mouse. • Para mover el cursor, deslice ligeramente el dedo por la superficie táctil. • Para seleccionar un objeto, toque suavemente la superficie táctil o utilice el pulgar para presionar el botón izquierdo de la misma. • Para seleccionar y mover (o arrastrar) un objeto, sitúe el cursor sobre él y toque abajo-arribaabajo en la superficie táctil. En el segundo toque abajo, deje el dedo sobre la superficie táctil y deslícelo por la superficie para mover el objeto seleccionado. • Para hacer doble clic en un objeto, sitúe el cursor en él y, a continuación, toque dos veces la superficie táctil o pulse el botón izquierdo de la misma dos veces. Personalización de la superficie táctil Puede desactivar la superficie táctil o ajustar su configuración utilizando la ventana Propiedades del ratón. 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, en Panel de control y en Impresoras y otro hardware. 2 Haga clic en Ratón 3 En la ventana Propiedades del ratón, pulse la ficha Configuración de dispositivo. Para desactivar la superficie táctil o el mouse, resalte el dispositivo y pulse Deshabilitar. Superficie táctil Botones de la superficie táctilUso del teclado y de la superficie táctil 37 Para cambiar la configuración de la superficie táctil o el mouse, resalte el dispositivo, pulse Configuración, seleccione la configuración que desee y, a continuación, pulse Aplicar. 4 Pulse Aceptar para guardar la configuración y cerrar la ventana y, a continuación, pulse de nuevo Aceptar para salir de la ventana Propiedades del ratón. Problemas con la superficie táctil o el ratón CO M P R U E B E L A C O N F I G U R A C I Ó N D E L A S U P E R F I C I E T Á C T I L — 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, en Panel de control y en Impresoras y otro hardware. 2 Haga clic en Ratón 3 Ajuste la configuración. CO M P R U E B E E L C A B L E D E L M O U S E — Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28). Desconecte el cable del ratón y examínelo para ver si está dañado. Vuelva a conectar el cable firmemente. Si utiliza un cable alargador para el mouse, desconéctelo y conéctelo directamente al equipo. PA R A C O M P R O B A R Q U E S E T R A T A D E U N P R O B L E M A C O N E L M O U S E , E X A M I N E L A S U P E R F I C I E T Á C T I L — 1 Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28). 2 Desconecte el mouse. 3 Encienda el equipo. 4 En el escritorio de Windows, use la superficie táctil para mover el cursor, seleccione un icono y ábralo. Si la superficie táctil funciona correctamente, esto quiere decir que el mouse debe estar defectuoso. RE I N S T A L E E L C O N T R O L A D O R D E L A S U P E R F I C I E T Á C T I L — Consulte la página 59. Problemas con el teclado externo NOTA: Cuando conecta un teclado externo, el teclado integrado sigue conservando toda su funcionalidad. CO M P R U E B E E L C A B L E D E L T E C L A D O — Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28). Desconecte el cable del teclado y examínelo para ver si está dañado. Vuelva a conectar correctamente el cable. Si utiliza un cable alargador para el teclado, desconéctelo y conecte el teclado directamente al equipo. CO M P R U E B E E L T E C L A D O E X T E R N O — 1 Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28), espere 1 minuto y vuelva a encenderlo. 2 Compruebe que los indicadores de números, mayúsculas y bloqueo de desplazamiento del teclado parpadean durante la rutina de arranque. 3 En el escritorio de Windows® , pulse el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas, seleccione Accesorios y pulse Bloc de notas. 4 Escriba algunos caracteres con el teclado externo y compruebe que aparecen en pantalla. Si no puede seguir estos pasos, puede que tenga un teclado externo defectuoso. 38 Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m PA R A C O M P R O B A R Q U E S E T R A T A D E U N P R O B L E M A C O N E L T E C L A D O E X T E R N O, E X A M I N E E L T E C L A D O I N T E G R A D O — 1 Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28). 2 Desconecte el teclado externo. 3 Encienda el equipo. 4 En el escritorio de Windows, pulse el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas , Accesorios y Bloc de notas. 5 Escriba algunos caracteres con el teclado externo y compruebe que aparecen en pantalla. Si los caracteres aparecen ahora, pero no con el teclado externo, puede que tenga un teclado externo defectuoso. Póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte la página 90). Caracteres inesperados DE S A C T I V E E L T E C L A D O N U M É R I C O — Pulse para desactivar el teclado numérico si se muestran números en lugar de letras. Compruebe que el indicador luminoso del bloqueo numérico no esté encendido.Uso de CD, DVD y otros dispositivos multimedia 39 Uso de CD, DVD y otros dispositivos multimedia Cómo utilizar los CD y DVD Para obtener información sobre cómo utilizar CD y DVD en el equipo, consulte el archivo Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron). Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. Problemas con los CD o DVD Si no puede reproducir un CD, CD-RW o DVD NOTA: Debido a los diferentes tipos de archivo que se utilizan en todo el mundo, no todos los DVD funcionan en todas las unidades de DVD. La vibración de las unidades de CD de alta velocidad es normal y puede ocasionar ruido. Dicho ruido no indica ningún defecto en la unidad o el CD. AS E G Ú R E S E D E Q U E WI N D O W S ® R E C O N O Z C A L A U N I D A D — Haga clic en el botón Inicio y, a continuación, en Mi PC. Si no aparece la unidad, haga una búsqueda completa con el software antivirus para comprobar si hay virus y eliminarlos. A veces los virus pueden impedir que Windows reconozca la unidad. Inserte un disco de inicio y reinicie el equipo. Compruebe si el indicador de la unidad parpadea, lo cual indica que el funcionamiento es correcto. UT I L I C E O T R O D I S C O — Inserte otro disco para descartar la posibilidad de que el disco original sea defectuoso. ASEGÚRESE DE QUE EL CD ESTÉ BIEN ENCAJADO EN EL EJE DE LA BANDEJA DE LA UNIDAD DE CD AJ U S T E E L C O N T R O L D E V O L U M E N D E WI N D O W S — Haga doble clic en el icono de altavoz que se encuentra en la esquina inferior derecha de la pantalla. Asegúrese de que ha subido el volumen y no ha silenciado el sonido. LI M P I E L A U N I D A D O E L D I S C O — Consulte la sección relativa a la limpieza del equipo en el archivo Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron) para obtener instrucciones. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. Si no puede expulsar la bandeja de la unidad de CD, CD-RW o DVD 1 Compruebe que el equipo está apagado (consulte la página 28). 2 Enderece un clip sujetapapeles e introduzca un extremo en el orificio de expulsión situado en la parte frontal de la unidad; empuje firmemente hasta que se expulse parcialmente la bandeja. 3 Tire de la bandeja hacia afuera suavemente hasta que se detenga.40 Uso de CD, DVD y otros dispositivos multimedia w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Si oye un sonido de roce o chirrido inusual • Asegúrese de que el sonido no se debe al programa que se está ejecutando. • Asegúrese de que el disco esté insertado correctamente. Si la unidad de CD-RW deja de grabar DE S A C T I V E E L M O D O D E S U S P E N S I Ó N E N WI N D O W S A N T E S D E G R A B A R E N U N CD-RW — Busque la palabra clave en espera en el centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows. Para acceder a la ayuda, consulte la página 9. CA M B I E L A V E L O C I D A D D E G R A B A C I Ó N A U N A V E L O C I D A D I N F E R I O R — Consulte los archivos de ayuda relativos al software de creación de CD. SA L G A D E L R E S T O D E P R O G R A M A S A B I E R T O S — Para mitigar el problema, salga del resto de programas abiertos antes de grabar en el CD-RW. Problemas con el sonido y los altavoces Si tiene problemas con los altavoces integrados AJ U S T E E L C O N T R O L D E L V O L U M E N D E WI N D O W S ® — Haga doble clic en el icono de altavoz que se encuentra en la esquina inferior derecha de la pantalla. Asegúrese de que ha subido el volumen y no ha silenciado el sonido. Ajuste los controles de volumen para eliminar la distorsión. AJ U S T E E L V O L U M E N U T I L I Z A N D O M É T O D O S A B R E V I A D O S D E T E C L A D O — Pulse para desactivar (quitar el sonido) o volver a activar los altavoces integrados. VU E L V A A I N S T A L A R E L C O N T R O L A D O R D E S O N I D O (A U D I O) — Consulte la página 59. Si tiene problemas con los altavoces externos NOTA: El control de volumen de algunos reproductores de MP3 anula la configuración de volumen de Windows. Si ha estado escuchando canciones MP3, asegúrese de que el control de volumen no está puesto al mínimo ni se ha desactivado. CO M P R U E B E L A S C O N E X I O N E S D E L O S C A B L E S D E L O S A L T A V O C E S — Consulte el diagrama de instalación proporcionado con los altavoces. PR U E B E L A T O M A D E C O R R I E N T E E L É C T R I C A — Asegúrese de que la toma de corriente eléctrica funciona; para ello, pruébela con otro dispositivo, por ejemplo, una lámpara. CO M P R U E B E Q U E L O S A L T A V O C E S E S T Á N E N C E N D I D O S — Consulte el diagrama de instalación proporcionado con los altavoces. AJ U S T E E L C O N T R O L D E V O L U M E N D E WI N D O W S — Haga doble clic en el icono de altavoz que se encuentra en la esquina inferior derecha de la pantalla. Asegúrese de que ha subido el volumen y no ha silenciado el sonido. Ajuste los controles de volumen para eliminar la distorsión. PR U E B E L O S A L T A V O C E S — Conecte el cable de audio del altavoz al conector de salida de línea del equipo. Asegúrese de que el control de volumen de los auriculares esté activado. Reproduzca un CD de música. EJ E C U T E L A A U T O P R U E B A D E L O S A L T A V O C E S — En algunos sistemas de altavoces, el altavoz para bajas Uso de CD, DVD y otros dispositivos multimedia 41 frecuencias incluye un botón de autoprueba. Consulte la documentación incluida con los altavoces con el fin de obtener las instrucciones para realizar autoprueba. EL I M I N E L A S P O S I B L E S I N T E R F E R E N C I A S — Apague las luces fluorescentes, lámparas halógenas o ventiladores cercanos para comprobar si se producen interferencias. VU E L V A A I N S T A L A R E L C O N T R O L A D O R D E S O N I D O (A U D I O) — Consulte la página 59. Cómo copiar CD y DVD NOTA: Asegúrese de no incumplir la legislación sobre copyright al crear un CD. Esta sección se aplica sólo a equipos que disponen de una unidad de CD-R, CD-RW, DVD+RW, DVD+R o una unidad combinada de DVD/CD-RW. Las siguientes instrucciones indican cómo realizar una copia exacta de un CD o DVD. También puede utilizar Sonic RecordNow con otros fines, como la creación de CD de archivos de audio en el equipo y la creación de CD de archivos MP3. Si desea obtener instrucciones, consulte la documentación de Sonic RecordNow incluida en su equipo. Abra Sonic RecordNow, haga clic en el icono de signo de interrogación de la parte superior derecha de la ventana y, a continuación, haga clic en RecordNow Help (Ayuda de RecordNow) o RecordNow Tutorial (Guía de aprendizaje de RecordNow). Cómo copiar un CD o DVD NOTA: Si dispone de una unidad combinada de DVD/CD-RW y tiene problemas de grabación, compruebe si hay revisiones de software disponibles en el sitio web de soporte de Sonic: support.sonic.com. NOTA: La mayoría de los DVD comerciales están protegidos por las leyes de copyright y no se pueden copiar con Sonic RecordNow. 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas→ Sonic→ RecordNow!→ RecordNow! 2 Haga clic en la ficha de datos o de audio, según el tipo de CD que desee copiar. 3 Haga clic en Exact Copy (Copia exacta). 4 Para copiar el CD o DVD: • Si tiene una unidad de CD o DVD, asegúrese de que la configuración sea correcta y haga clic en Copy (Copiar). El equipo lee el CD o DVD de origen y lo copia en una carpeta temporal de la unidad de disco duro del equipo. Cuando se le solicite, inserte un CD o DVD vacío en la unidad de CD o DVD y haga clic en OK (Aceptar). • Si dispone de dos unidades de CD o DVD, seleccione la unidad en la que ha insertado el CD o DVD de origen y haga clic en Copy (Copiar). El equipo copia los datos del CD o DVD en el CD o DVD vacío.42 Uso de CD, DVD y otros dispositivos multimedia w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Después de finalizar la copia del CD o DVD de origen, se expulsa automáticamente el CD o DVD que ha creado. Cómo utilizar CD-R y CD-RW vacíos La unidad de CD-RW puede grabar dos tipos distintos de medios de grabación: discos CD-R y CD-RW. Utilice CD-R vacíos para grabar música o almacenar permanentemente archivos de datos. Después de crear un CD-R, no puede grabar en ese CD-R de nuevo sin cambiar el método de grabación (consulte la documentación de Sonic para obtener más información). Utilice discos CDRW vacíos para grabar en CD, borrar, regrabar o actualizar datos en los CD. Consejos prácticos • Utilice el Explorador de Microsoft® Windows® para arrastrar y soltar archivos en un CD-R o CD-RW sólo después de haber iniciado Sonic RecordNow y haber abierto un proyecto de RecordNow. • Utilice discos CD-R para grabar los CD de música que desee reproducir en equipos estéreo normales. Los discos CD-RW no se reproducen en la mayoría de los equipos estéreo domésticos o para automóvil. • No se pueden crear DVD de audio con Sonic RecordNow. • Los archivos MP3 de música sólo se pueden reproducir en reproductores de MP3 o en equipos en que se haya instalado software de BMP3. • No ocupe toda la capacidad de un CD-R o CD-RW vacío al grabar; por ejemplo, no copie un archivo de 650 MB en un CD vacío de 650 MB. La unidad de CD-RW necesita 1 ó 2 MB del CD vacío para finalizar la grabación. • Utilice un CD-RW vacío para practicar la grabación en CD hasta que se familiarice con las técnicas de grabación en CD. Si comete un error, puede borrar los datos del CD-RW e intentarlo de nuevo. También puede utilizar discos CD-RW vacíos para probar un proyecto de archivos de música antes de grabarlos de forma permanente en un CD-R vacío. • Consulte el sitio web de asistencia técnica de Sonic en support.sonic.com para obtener más información.Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina 43 Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina Conexión de un adaptador de red Antes de conectar el equipo a una red, es preciso instalar un adaptador de red y conectar un cable de red. Para conectar el cable de red: 1 Conecte el cable de red al conector del adaptador de red del equipo. NOTA: Inserte el cable hasta que encaje en su posición y, a continuación, tire de él suavemente para asegurarse de que está bien encajado. 2 Conecte el otro extremo del cable de red a un dispositivo de conexión de red, como una toma de red de pared. NOTA: No utilice un cable de red en una toma telefónica de la pared. Asistente para configuración de redes El sistema operativo Microsoft® Windows® XP proporciona un asistente para la configuración de la red que le guiará en el proceso de compartición de archivos, impresoras o una conexión de Internet entre equipos en un entorno doméstico o de pequeña oficina. 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas→ Accesorios→ Comunicaciones y, a continuación, haga clic en Asistente para configuración de redes. 2 En la pantalla de bienvenida, haga clic en Siguiente. 3 Haga clic en Lista de comprobación para crear una red.44 Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m NOTA: Al seleccionar el método de conexión Este equipo está conectado directamente a Internet, se activará el servidor de seguridad integrado que incluye Windows XP. 4 Complete la lista de comprobación y los preparativos necesarios, y vuelva a la pantalla del Asistente para configuración de red. 5 Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en pantalla. Problemas con la red NOTA: Un indicador de conexión verde o parpadeante también podría indicar la presencia de un enlace de red inalámbrica en el área. CO M P R U E B E E L C O N E C T O R D E L C A B L E D E R E D — Asegúrese de que el conector del cable de red está bien conectado al conector del equipo y al enchufe de red de la pared. CO M P R U E B E L O S I N D I C A D O R E S D E R E D D E L C O N E C T O R D E R E D — El color verde indica que la conexión de red está activa. Si el indicador de estado no está en verde, pruebe a reemplazar el cable de red. El color ámbar indica que el controlador del adaptador de red está cargado y que el adaptador detecta actividad. CA M B I E E L C A B L E D E R E D — Pruebe a utilizar otro cable. Si hay más de un conector de red disponible, intente enchufar el cable en un conector diferente. RE I N I C I E E L E Q U I P O — Vuelva a intentar conectarse a la red. PÓ N G A S E E N C O N T A C T O C O N E L A D M I N I S T R A D O R D E L A R E D — Compruebe que la configuración de la red es correcta y que la red está en funcionamiento. Conexión a una red de área local inalámbrica NOTA: Estas instrucciones sobre la red no se aplican a los productos Bluetooth™ ni celulares. Establecimiento del tipo de red NOTA: La mayoría de las redes inalámbricas son redes de infraestructura. Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina 45 Las redes inalámbricas se clasifican en dos categorías: redes de infraestructura y redes ad-hoc. Las redes de infraestructura usan enrutadores o puntos de acceso para conectar varios equipos. Las redes ad-hoc no usan enrutadores o puntos de acceso y se componen de equipos que difunden de uno a otro. Conexión a una red inalámbrica en Microsoft ® Windows® XP La tarjeta inalámbrica requiere el software y los controladores adecuados para conectarse a una red. El software ya está instalado. Si el software se extrae o se daña, siga las instrucciones que se incluyen en la guía del usuario de su tarjeta de red inalámbrica. La guía del usuario también está disponible en el sitio web Dell Support en support.dell.com. Cuando encienda el equipo, aparecerá un mensaje emergente del icono de red en el área de notificación siempre que se detecte una red en la zona para la que su equipo no esté configurado. 1 Haga clic en el mensaje emergente o en el icono de la red con el fin de configurar el equipo para una de las redes inalámbricas disponibles. La ventana Conexiones de red inalámbricas muestra las redes inalámbricas disponibles en la zona. Red de infraestructura Red ad-hoc46 Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 2 Haga clic en la red que desee configurar y, a continuación, haga clic en Conectar o haga doble clic en el nombre de red de la lista. Si selecciona una red segura (identificada por un icono ), debe especificar una clave WEP o WPA cuando se le pida. NOTA: La configuración de seguridad de la red es exclusiva de su red. Dell no puede proporcionar esta información. La red se configura automáticamente. NOTA: Es posible que el equipo tarde hasta un minuto en conectarse a la red. Después de configurar el equipo para la red inalámbrica que ha seleccionado, otro mensaje emergente le notificará que el equipo está conectado a la red seleccionada. Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina 47 Por lo tanto, cada vez que se conecte al equipo en el área de la red inalámbrica, el mismo mensaje emergente le notificará la conexión a la red inalámbrica. 48 Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o mSolución de problemas 49 Solución de problemas Dell Diagnostics PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad que se encuentran en la Guía de información del producto. Cuándo utilizar los Dell Diagnostics Si tiene problemas con el equipo, realice las comprobaciones de la sección “Solución de problemas” y ejecute los Dell Diagnostics antes de ponerse en contacto con Dell para solicitar asistencia técnica. AVISO: Los Dell Diagnostics sólo funcionan en los equipos Dell™. Los Dell Diagnostics están situados en una partición oculta para la utilidad de diagnóstico (Diagnostic) de la unidad de disco duro. NOTA: Si el equipo no muestra ninguna imagen en la pantalla, póngase en contacto con Dell. 1 Apague el equipo. 2 Si el equipo está conectado (acoplado) a un dispositivo de acoplamiento, desacóplelo. Si desea instrucciones, consulte la documentación incluida con el dispositivo de acoplamiento. 3 Conecte el equipo a un enchufe eléctrico. 4 Encienda el equipo. Cuando aparezca el logotipo de DELL™, pulse inmediatamente. NOTA: Si no aparece nada en la pantalla, mantenga pulsado y pulse el botón de encendido del equipo para iniciar Dell Diagnostics. El equipo ejecutará automáticamente la evaluación del sistema previa al inicio. Si espera demasiado y aparece el logotipo de Microsoft® Windows® , siga esperando hasta que aparezca el escritorio de Windows. A continuación, apague el equipo mediante el menú Inicio y vuelva a intentarlo. 5 Cuando aparezca la lista de dispositivos de inicio, resalte Diagnostics (Diagnósticos)y pulse . El equipo ejecutará la evaluación del sistema previa al inicio, una serie de pruebas iniciales de la tarjeta del sistema, el teclado, la unidad de disco duro y la pantalla. • Durante la evaluación, responda a las preguntas que puedan formularse. • Si se detecta un fallo, el equipo se detiene y emite pitidos. Para detener la evaluación y reiniciar el equipo, pulse ; para continuar con la siguiente prueba, pulse ; para volver a probar el componente que falló, pulse . 50 Solución de problemas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m • Si se detectaron fallos durante la evaluación del sistema previa al inicio, anote el código o códigos de error y póngase en contacto con Dell antes de continuar con los Dell Diagnostics. Si la evaluación del sistema previa al inicio se realiza correctamente, recibirá el mensaje Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition. Press any key to continue (Iniciando la partición de la utilidad Dell Diagnostic. Pulse cualquier tecla para continuar). 6 Presione cualquier tecla para iniciar los Dell Diagnostics desde la partición para la utilidad de diagnóstico del disco duro. 7 Cuando aparezca el Main Menu (Menú principal) de Dell Diagnostics, seleccione la prueba que desea ejecutar. Menú principal de los Dell Diagnostics 1 Una vez se hayan cargado los Dell Diagnostics y aparezca la pantalla Main Menu (Menú principal), haga clic en el botón de la opción que desea. 2 Si se produce un problema durante una prueba, aparecerá un mensaje con un código de error y una descripción del problema. Anote el código de error y la descripción del problema, y siga las instrucciones de la pantalla. Si no puede resolver la condición del error, póngase en contacto con Dell. NOTA: La etiqueta de servicio para su equipo está situada en la parte superior de cada pantalla de prueba. Si se pone en contacto con Dell, el servicio de asistencia técnica le pedirá su etiqueta de servicio. Opción Función Express Test (Prueba rápida) Realiza una prueba rápida de los dispositivos. Esta prueba suele tardar de 10 a 20 minutos y no requiere ninguna acción por parte del usuario. Ejecute primero Express Test (Prueba rápida) para incrementar la posibilidad de rastrear el problema rápidamente. Extended Test (Prueba extendida) Realiza una prueba completa de los dispositivos. Esta prueba suele tardar una o varias horas y requiere que usted responda de manera periódica a una serie de preguntas. Custom Test (Prueba personalizada) Prueba un dispositivo específico. Puede personalizar las pruebas que desee ejecutar. Symptom Tree (Árbol de síntomas) Hace una lista de los síntomas más habituales que se pueden encontrar y le permite seleccionar una prueba basándose en el síntoma del problema que usted tiene.Solución de problemas 51 3 Si ejecuta una prueba desde la opción Custom Test (Prueba personalizada) o Symptom Tree (Árbol de síntomas), haga clic en la pestaña correspondiente que se describe en la tabla siguiente para obtener más información. 4 Cuando las pruebas hayan finalizado, cierre la pantalla de prueba para volver a la pantalla Main Menu (Menú principal). Para salir de los Dell Diagnostics y reiniciar el equipo, cierre la pantalla Main Menu (Menú principal). Mensajes de error Si el mensaje no aparece en la lista, consulte la documentación del sistema operativo o el programa que se estaba ejecutando en el momento en que apareció el mensaje. Ficha Función Results (Resultado) Muestra el resultado de la prueba y las condiciones de error encontradas. Errors (Errores) Muestra las condiciones de error encontradas, los códigos de error y la descripción del problema. Help (Ayuda) Describe la prueba y puede indicar los requisitos para ejecutarla. Configuration (Configuración) Muestra la configuración de hardware del dispositivo seleccionado. Dell Diagnostics obtiene la información de configuración de todos los dispositivos a partir de la configuración del sistema, la memoria y varias pruebas internas, y la muestra en la lista de dispositivos del panel izquierdo de la pantalla. La lista de dispositivos puede que no muestre los nombres de todos los componentes instalados en el equipo o de todos los dispositivos conectados al equipo. Parameters (Parámetros) Permite personalizar la prueba cambiando su configuración. TH E F I L E B E I N G C O P I E D I S T O O L A R G E F O R T H E D E S T I N A T I O N D R I V E (EL A R C H I V O Q U E S E E S T Á C O P I A N D O E S D E M A S I A D O G R A N D E P A R A L A U N I D A D D E D E S T I N O) — El archivo que está intentando copiar es demasiado grande y no cabe en el disco, o el disco está lleno. Pruebe a copiar el archivo en otro disco o en un disco con mayor capacidad. A F I L E N A M E C A N N O T C O N T A I N A N Y O F T H E F O L L O W I N G C H A R A C T E R S: \ / : * ? “ < > | (UN N O M B R E D E A R C H I V O N O P U E D E C O N T E N E R N I N G U N O D E L O S C A R A C T E R E S S I G U I E N T E S: \ / : * ? “ < > |) — No utilice estos caracteres en los nombres de archivo.52 Solución de problemas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Problemas con el vídeo y la pantalla Si la pantalla aparece en blanco NOTA: Si utiliza un programa que requiere una resolución superior a la que admite el equipo, se recomienda conectar un monitor externo. IN S E R T B O O T A B L E M E D I A (IN S E R T E U N M E D I O D E A R R A N Q U E) — El sistema operativo está intentando arrancar desde un disquete o CD que no es de arranque. Inserte un disco o un CD de inicio. IN V A L I D C O N F I G U R A T I O N I N F O R M A T I O N-P L E A S E R U N SYS T E M SE T U P PR O G R A M (IN F O R M A C I Ó N D E C O N F I G U R A C I Ó N N O V Á L I D A; E J E C U T E E L P R O G R A M A D E C O N F I G U R A C I Ó N D E L S I S T E M A) — La información de configuración del sistema no coincide con la configuración de hardware. Este mensaje es más probable tras instalar un módulo de memoria. Corrija las opciones apropiadas del programa de configuración del sistema. Consulte el apartado “Utilización del programa Configuración del sistema” en la página 86. KE Y B O A R D C L O C K L I N E F A I L U R E (FA L L A D E L A L Í N E A D E R E L O J D E L T E C L A D O) — Para teclados externos, compruebe la conexión del cable. Ejecute la prueba Keyboard Controller (Controladora de teclado) tal como se describe en “Dell Diagnostics” (consulte la página 49). KE Y B O A R D C O N T R O L L E R F A I L U R E (FA L L A D E L C O N T R O L A D O R D E L T E C L A D O) — Para teclados externos, compruebe la conexión del cable. Reinicie el equipo y evite tocar el teclado o el mouse durante la rutina de inicio. Ejecute la prueba Keyboard Controller tal como se describe en “Dell Diagnostics” (consulte la página 49). KE Y B O A R D D A T A L I N E F A I L U R E (FA L L A D E L A L Í N E A D E D A T O S D E L T E C L A D O) — Para teclados externos, compruebe la conexión del cable. Ejecute la prueba Keyboard Controller tal como se describe en “Dell Diagnostics” (consulte la página 49). KE Y B O A R D S T U C K K E Y F A I L U R E (FA L L A D E T E C L A B L O Q U E A D A D E L T E C L A D O) — Para teclados externos, compruebe la conexión del cable. Reinicie el equipo y evite tocar el teclado o las teclas durante la rutina de inicio. Ejecute la prueba Stuck Key (Tecla bloqueada ) tal como se describe en “Dell Diagnostics” (consulte la página 49).Solución de problemas 53 Si resulta difícil leer la pantalla CO M P R U E B E E L I N D I C A D O R — Si el indicador parpadea significa que el equipo recibe alimentación. • Si el indicador parpadea, el equipo está en modo de espera. Pulse el botón de alimentación para salir del modo de espera. • Si el indicador está apagado, pulse el botón de alimentación. • Si el indicador está encendido, puede que la configuración de administración de energía haya hecho que se apague la pantalla. Pulse cualquier tecla o mueva el cursor para salir del modo de suspensión. CO M P R U E B E L A B A T E R Í A — Si utiliza una batería para la alimentación del equipo, puede que se haya agotado. Conecte el equipo a un enchufe eléctrico con el adaptador de CA y enciéndalo. PR U E B E L A T O M A D E C O R R I E N T E E L É C T R I C A — Asegúrese de que la toma de corriente eléctrica funciona; para ello, pruébela con otro dispositivo, por ejemplo, una lámpara. CO M P R U E B E E L A D A P T A D O R D E CA — Compruebe las conexiones de cable del adaptador de CA. Si el adaptador de CA tiene un indicador, asegúrese de que está encendido. CO N E C T E E L E Q U I P O D I R E C T A M E N T E A U N A T O M A D E C O R R I E N T E E L É C T R I C A — Omita los dispositivos protectores de la alimentación, regletas de enchufes y alargadores para comprobar que el equipo se enciende. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. AJ U S T E L A S P R O P I E D A D E S D E L A A L I M E N T A C I Ó N — Busque la palabra clave en esperaen el Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. CA M B I E L A I M A G E N D E V Í D E O — Si su equipo está conectado a un monitor externo, oprima para cambiar la imagen de vídeo a la pantalla. NOTE: Si está reproduciendo un DVD o viendo un vídeo, está desactivado. AJ U S T E E L B R I L L O — Consulte el archivo Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron) para obtener instrucciones sobre el ajuste del brillo. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. AL E J E D E L M O N I T O R O D E L E Q U I P O E L A L T A V O Z D E B A J A S F R E C U E N C I A S — Si el sistema de altavoces externos incluye un altavoz para bajas frecuencias, asegúrese de que dicho altavoz se encuentra como mínimo a 60 cm del monitor.54 Solución de problemas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Si sólo se puede leer parte de la pantalla Problemas con el escáner EL I M I N E L A S P O S I B L E S I N T E R F E R E N C I A S — Apague los ventiladores, luces fluorescentes, lámparas halógenas u otros aparatos cercanos. OR I E N T E E L E Q U I P O H A C I A O T R A D I R E C C I Ó N — Evite los reflejos de la luz solar, que pueden causar una calidad baja de la imagen. AJ U S T E L A C O N F I G U R A C I Ó N D E P A N T A L L A D E WI N D O W S — 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y, a continuación, en Panel de control. 2 Haga clic en Apariencia y temas. 3 Haga clic sobre la zona que desea cambiar o en el icono Pantalla. 4 Pruebe valores diferentes en Calidad del color y Resolución de pantalla. CO N S U L T E “ME N S A J E S D E E R R O R” — Si aparece un mensaje de error, consulte la página 51. CO N E C T E U N M O N I T O R E X T E R N O — 1 Apague el equipo y conéctele un monitor externo. 2 Encienda el equipo y el monitor, y ajuste los controles de brillo y contraste del monitor. Si el monitor externo funciona, es posible que el controlador de vídeo o la pantalla del equipo estén defectuosos. Póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte la página 90). CO M P R U E B E L A C O N E X I Ó N D E L C A B L E D E A L I M E N T A C I Ó N — Asegúrese de que el cable de alimentación del escáner está debidamente conectado a una fuente de alimentación eléctrica en funcionamiento y que el escáner está encendido. CO M P R U E B E L A C O N E X I Ó N D E L C A B L E D E L E S C Á N E R — Asegúrese de que el cable del escáner está debidamente conectado al equipo y al escáner. DE S B L O Q U E E E L E S C Á N E R — Asegúrese de que el escáner no está bloqueado si éste dispone de una lengüeta o un botón de bloqueo. VU E L V A A I N S T A L A R E L C O N T R O L A D O R D E L E S C Á N E R — Consulte la documentación incluida con el escáner para obtener instrucciones.Solución de problemas 55 Problemas con las unidades NOTA: Para obtener información sobre cómo guardar archivos en un disquete, consulte el archivo Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron). Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. Si no puede guardar un archivo en una unidad de disco flexible AS E G Ú R E S E D E Q U E WI N D O W S ® R E C O N O C E L A U N I D A D — Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Mi PC. Si no aparece la unidad, haga una búsqueda completa con el software antivirus para comprobar si hay virus y eliminarlos. A veces los virus pueden impedir que Windows reconozca la unidad. Inserte un disco de inicio y reinicie el equipo. Compruebe si el indicador de la unidad parpadea, lo cual indica que el funcionamiento es correcto. AS E G Ú R E S E D E Q U E E L D I S C O N O E S T Á P R O T E G I D O C O N T R A E S C R I T U R A — No se pueden guardar datos en un disco protegido contra escritura. Consulte la siguiente figura. UT I L I C E O T R O D I S Q U E T E — Inserte otro disco para descartar la posibilidad de que el disco original sea defectuoso. VU E L V A A C O N E C T A R L A U N I D A D — 1 Guarde y cierre los archivos que estén abiertos, salga de todas las aplicaciones y apague el equipo. 2 Desconecte y vuelva a conectar la unidad. 3 Encienda el equipo. LI M P I E L A U N I D A D — Consulte la sección relativa a la limpieza del equipo en el archivo Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron) para obtener instrucciones. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. Protegido contra escritura No protegido contra escritura Dorso del disquete56 Solución de problemas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Si tiene problemas con una unidad de disco duro Problemas con la tarjeta PC Problemas generales del programa NOTA: Normalmente el software incluye instrucciones de instalación en su documentación o en un disquete o CD. Un programa se bloquea DE J E Q U E E L E Q U I P O S E E N F R Í E A N T E S D E E N C E N D E R L O — Una unidad de disco duro recalentada puede impedir que se inicie el sistema operativo. Deje que el equipo vuelva a adoptar la temperatura ambiente antes de encenderlo. CO M P R U E B E L A U N I D A D P A R A V E R S I T I E N E E R R O R E S — 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Mi PC. 2 Haga clic con el botón derecho del ratón en la letra de la unidad (disco local) que desea examinar para comprobar que no tiene errores y, a continuación, haga clic en Propiedades. 3 Haga clic en la ficha Herramientas. 4 En el grupo de opciones de Comprobación de errores, haga clic en Comprobar ahora. 5 Haga clic en Inicio. CO M P R U E B E L A T A R J E T A PC — Asegúrese de que la tarjeta PC está insertada correctamente en el conector. AS E G Ú R E S E D E Q U E WI N D O W S ® R E C O N O C E L A T A R J E T A — Haga doble clic en el icono Safely Remove Hardware (Quitar hardware con seguridad) de la barra de tareas de Windows. Asegúrese de que aparece la tarjeta. SI T I E N E P R O B L E M A S C O N U N A T A R J E T A PC P R O P O R C I O N A D A P O R DE L L — Póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte la página 90). SI T I E N E P R O B L E M A S C O N U N A T A R J E T A PC N O P R O P O R C I O N A D A P O R DE L L — Póngase en contacto con el fabricante de la tarjeta PC. CO N S U L T E L A D O C U M E N T A C I Ó N D E L S O F T W A R E — Muchos fabricantes de software ofrecen sitios Web con información que puede ayudarle a solucionar el problema. Asegúrese de que ha instalado y configurado correctamente el programa. Vuelva a instalar el programa si fuera necesario.Solución de problemas 57 Un programa no responde Aparecen mensajes de error Solución de otros problemas técnicos Si el equipo se moja PRECAUCIÓN: Sólo debe realizar este procedimiento si tiene la certeza de que es seguro hacerlo. Si el equipo está conectado a una toma de corriente, se recomienda apagar la alimentación de CA del interruptor automático antes de desconectar los cables de la toma de corriente. Proceda con la máxima precaución cuando retire cables mojados de una toma de corriente. 1 Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28), desconecte el adaptador de corriente alterna del equipo y, a continuación, desconecte el adaptador de corriente alterna de la toma de corriente. FI N A L I C E E L P R O G R A M A — 1 Pulse simultáneamente . 2 Haga clic en la ficha Aplicaciones y seleccione el programa que no responde. 3 Haga clic en Finalizar tarea. RE V I S E “ME N S A J E S D E E R R O R” E N L A P Á G I N A 51 — Localice el mensaje y lleve a cabo la acción adecuada. Consulte la documentación del software. VA Y A A L S I T I O W E B DE L L SU P P O R T — Vaya a support.dell.com para obtener ayuda sobre cuestiones generales de uso, instalación y solución de problemas. Consulte el apartado “Política de soporte técnico de Dell (sólo EE.UU.)” en la página 89 para obtener una descripción de la asistencia para el hardware y el software proporcionada por Dell. EN V Í E U N M E N S A J E D E C O R R E O E L E C T R Ó N I C O A DE L L — Vaya a support.dell.com y haga clic en Dell E-Mail en la lista Comunicar. Envíe un mensaje de correo electrónico a Dell sobre el problema; en unas horas recibirá una respuesta de Dell a través del correo electrónico. Consulte el apartado “Política de soporte técnico de Dell (sólo EE.UU.)” en la página 89 para obtener una descripción de la asistencia para el hardware y el software proporcionada por Dell. PÓ N G A S E E N C O N T A C T O C O N DE L L — Si no puede solucionar el problema con la ayuda del sitio web Dell™ Support ni con el servicio por correo electrónico, llame a Dell para solicitar asistencia técnica (consulte la página 90). Consulte el apartado “Política de soporte técnico de Dell (sólo EE.UU.)” en la página 89 para obtener una descripción de la asistencia para el hardware y el software proporcionada por Dell.58 Solución de problemas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 2 Apague los dispositivos externos que estén conectados y desconéctelos de sus fuentes de alimentación y del equipo. 3 Descargue la electricidad estática de su cuerpo. Para ello, toque uno de los conectores metálicos de la parte posterior del equipo. 4 Extraiga las tarjetas PC que estén instaladas y colóquelas en un lugar seguro para que se sequen. 5 Extraiga la batería. 6 Pase un paño por la batería y colóquela en un lugar seguro para que se seque. 7 Pase un paño por el monitor. 8 Extraiga la unidad de disco duro (consulte la página 66). 9 Extraiga el módulo o módulos de memoria (consulte la página 68). 10 Abra la pantalla y coloque el equipo con su lado derecho hacia arriba sobre dos libros u objetos similares para permitir que el aire circule a su alrededor. Déjelo secar como mínimo durante 24 horas en un lugar seco a temperatura ambiente. AVISO: No utilice medios artificiales, como un secador de pelo o un ventilador, para acelerar el secado. PRECAUCIÓN: Para evitar recibir una descarga eléctrica, compruebe si el equipo está totalmente seco antes de continuar con el procedimiento. 11 Descargue la electricidad estática de su cuerpo. Para ello, toque uno de los conectores metálicos de la parte posterior del equipo. 12 Vuelva a colocar los módulos de memoria, la cubierta y los tornillos. 13 Vuelva a colocar la unidad de disco duro. 14 Reemplace las tarjetas PC que ha extraído. 15 Vuelva a colocar la batería. 16 Encienda el equipo y compruebe que funciona correctamente. NOTA: Para obtener información sobre la cobertura de la garantía, consulte la Guía de información del producto o el documento de la garantia por separado que se envío con su equipo. Si el equipo no se enciende o no identifica los componentes dañados, póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte la página 90). Si el equipo se cae o se daña 1 Guarde y cierre los archivos que estén abiertos, salga de todas las aplicaciones y apague el equipo (consulte la página 28). 2 Desconecte el adaptador de CA de la toma de corriente y del equipo. 3 Apague los dispositivos externos que estén conectados y desconéctelos de sus fuentes de alimentación y del equipo. 4 Extraiga la batería y vuelva a colocarla. 5 Encienda el equipo.Solución de problemas 59 NOTA: Consulte la Guía de información del producto o el documento de la garantía que incluía su equipo para obtener información sobre la garantía. Si el equipo no se enciende o no puede identificar los componentes dañados, póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte la página 90). Controladores ¿Qué es un controlador? Un controlador es un programa que controla un dispositivo, como por ejemplo una impresora, un mouse o un teclado. Todos los dispositivos necesitan un controlador. Un controlador funciona como traductor entre el dispositivo y los programas que lo utilizan. Cada dispositivo posee un conjunto propio de comandos especializados que sólo su controlador puede reconocer. Muchos controladores como, por ejemplo, el controlador de la impresora, se suministran con el sistema operativo Microsoft® Windows® . Deberá instalar los controladores si: • Actualiza el sistema operativo. • Reinstala el sistema operativo. • Conecta o instala un nuevo dispositivo. Si experimenta problemas con algún dispositivo, realice los pasos descritos en las secciones siguientes para determinar si el origen del problema es el controlador y, en caso necesario, actualizarlo. Identificación de controladores 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y seleccione Panel de control. 2 En la ventana Panel de control, pulse Rendimiento y mantenimiento en Elija una categoría. 3 En la ventana Rendimiento y mantenimiento, pulse Sistema. 4 En la pantalla Propiedades del sistema, haga clic en la ficha Hardware. 5 Haga clic en Administrador de dispositivos. 6 En la ventana Administrador de dispositivos, desplácese hacia el final de la lista para ver si algún dispositivo tiene un signo de exclamación (un círculo amarillo con un [!]) en el icono del dispositivo. Si aparece un signo de exclamación junto al nombre del dispositivo, deberá volver a instalar el controlador o instalar uno nuevo. Volver a instalar los controladores AVISO: El sitio web Dell Support proporciona los controladores adecuados para los equipos Dell™. Si instala controladores obtenidos de otras fuentes, puede que el equipo no funcione correctamente.60 Solución de problemas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Cómo usar la desinstalación del controlador de dispositivo de Windows XP Si se produce un problema en el equipo después de instalar o actualizar un controlador, utilice la función Desintalación del controlador de dispositivo de Windows XP para restaurar la versión previamente instalada del controlador. Para usar la función Volver al controlador anterior de dispositivos: 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y seleccione Panel de control. 2 En la ventana Panel de control, pulse Rendimiento y mantenimiento en Elija una categoría. 3 En la ventana Rendimiento y mantenimiento, pulse Sistema. 4 En la pantalla Propiedades del sistema, haga clic en la ficha Hardware. 5 Haga clic en Administrador de dispositivos. 6 En la ventana Administrador de dispositivos, haga clic con el botón derecho en el dispositivo para el que se instaló el nuevo controlador y, a continuación, haga clic en Propiedades. 7 Haga clic en la ficha Controladores. 8 Haga clic en Desinstalar controlador. Si con esto no se soluciona el problema, utilice la función Restaurar sistema (consulte la página 61) para que el sistema operativo vuelva al estado anterior a la instalación del nuevo controlador. Reinstalación manual de controladores para Windows XP El sitio web Dell Support proporciona los controladores adecuados para los equipos Dell™. Si instala controladores obtenidos de otras fuentes, puede que el equipo no funcione correctamente. 1 Después de copiar los archivos de controlador en su unidad de disco duro, haga clic en el botón Inicio y haga clic con el botón derecho del ratón en Mi PC. 2 Haga clic en Propiedades. 3 Haga clic en la ficha Hardware y en Administrador de dispositivos. 4 Haga doble clic en el tipo de dispositivo para el que va a instalar el controlador (por ejemplo, Módems o Dispositivos de infrarrojos). 5 Haga doble clic en el nombre del dispositivo para el que está instalando el controlador. 6 Haga clic en la ficha Controlador y, a continuación, haga clic en Actualizar controlador. 7 Haga clic en Instalar desde una lista o ubicación específica (avanzado) y, a continuación, haga clic en Siguiente. 8 Haga clic en Examinar y examine la ubicación en la que extrajo anteriormente los archivos del controlador. 9 Cuando aparezca el nombre del controlador adecuado, haga clic en Siguiente. 10 Haga clic en Finalizar y reinicie el equipo.Solución de problemas 61 Cómo resolver incompatibilidades de software y hardware Cómo usar el Solucionador de problemas de hardware de Windows XP: 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y, a continuación, haga clic en Ayuda y soporte técnico. 2 Escriba solucionador de problemas de hardware en el campo Buscar y haga clic en la flecha para iniciar la búsqueda. 3 Haga clic en Solucionador de problemas de hardware en la lista Resultados de la búsqueda. 4 En la lista Solucionador de problemas de hardware, haga clic en Necesito resolver un conflicto de hardware de mi equipo y haga clic en Siguiente. Restauración de su sistema operativo Puede restaurar su sistema operativo de la siguiente manera: • La función Restaurar sistema de Microsoft Windows XP devuelve su equipo a un estado operativo anterior sin que esto afecte a archivos de datos. • La función Dell PC Restore by Symantec (Restaurar PC de Dell por Symantec) restaura su unidad de disco duro al estado operativo que estaba cuando compró el equipo. La función PC Restore (Restaurar PC) de Dell borra permanentemente todos los datos de la unidad de disco duro y quita cualquier aplicación que se instaló después de haber recibido el equipo. Cómo utilizar la función Restaurar sistema de MicrosoftWindows XP El sistema operativo Microsoft WindowsXP dispone de la función Restaurar sistema que permite regresar a un estado operativo anterior del equipo (sin que esto afecte a los archivos de datos) si los cambios efectuados en el hardware, software u otros parámetros del sistema han dejado el equipo en un estado operativo no deseado. Consulte el Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows para obtener información sobre el uso de la función Restaurar sistema. Para acceder a la ayuda, consulte la página 9. AVISO: Realice copias de seguridad periódicas de los archivos de datos. La función Restaurar sistema no supervisa ni recupera los archivos de datos. NOTA: Los procedimientos de este documento se han escrito para la vista predeterminada de Windows, por lo que podrían no funcionar si cambia el equipo Dell™ a la vista clásica de Windows. Creación de un punto de restauración 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y seleccione Ayuda y soporte técnico. 2 Haga clic en Restaurar sistema. 3 Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en pantalla. Restauración del equipo a un estado operativo anterior Si se producen problemas después de instalar el controlador de un dispositivo, utilice la Desinstalación del controlador de dispositivo (consulte la página 60) para resolver el problema. Si esto no funciona, utilice Restaurar sistema.62 Solución de problemas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m AVISO: Antes de restaurar el equipo a un estado operativo anterior, guarde y cierre los archivos abiertos y salga de los programas activos. No cambie, abra ni elimine ningún archivo o programa hasta que haya restaurado totalmente el sistema. 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas→ Accesorios→ Herramientas del sistema y, a continuación, haga clic en Restaurar sistema. 2 Asegúrese de que ha seleccionado Restaurar mi equipo a un estado anterior y haga clic en Siguiente. 3 En el calendario, haga clic en la fecha a la que desea restaurar el equipo. La pantalla Selección de un punto de restauración proporciona un calendario que permite ver y seleccionar puntos de restauración. Todas las fechas con puntos de restauración disponibles aparecen en negrita. 4 Seleccione un punto de restauración y, a continuación, haga clic en Siguiente. Si una fecha del calendario sólo tiene un punto de restauración, se seleccionará automáticamente dicho punto. Si hay dos o más puntos de restauración disponibles, haga clic en el punto de restauración que prefiera. 5 Haga clic en Siguiente. La pantalla de Restauración finalizada aparece cuando la función Restaurar sistema ha finalizado de recoger los datos y a continuación se reinicia el equipo. 6 Cuando el equipo se reinicie, haga clic en Aceptar. Para cambiar el punto de restauración, puede repetir estos pasos usando un punto de restauración distinto o bien puede deshacer la restauración. Cómo deshacer la última operación de Restaurar sistema AVISO: Antes de deshacer la última restauración del sistema, guarde y cierre todos los archivos abiertos y cierre todos los programas. No cambie, abra ni elimine ningún archivo o programa hasta que haya restaurado totalmente el sistema. 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas→ Accesorios→ Herramientas del sistema y, a continuación, haga clic en Restaurar sistema. 2 Seleccione Deshacer la última restauración y haga clic en Siguiente. Cómo utilizar la función Restaurar PC de Dell por Symantec Utilice la función Dell PC Restore by Symantec (Restaurar PC de Dell por Symantec) solamente como último recurso para restaurar su sistema operativo. La función PC Restore (Restaurar PC) restaura su unidad de disco duro al estado operativo que estaba cuando compró el equipo. Cualquier programa o archivo que se haya agregado desde que recibió su equipo— incluidos los archivos de datos—se borrarán permanentemente de la unidad de disco duro. Los archivos de datos Solución de problemas 63 incluyen: documentos, hojas de cálculo, mensajes de correo electrónico, fotos digitales, archivos de música, etc. Si es posible, cree una copia de seguridad de todos los datos antes de utilizar la función Restaurar PC. AVISO: Al utilizar la función Restaurar PC se borrarán permanentemente todos los datos de la unidad de disco duro y se quitarán las aplicaciones que se instalaron después de haber recibido el equipo. Si es posible, cree una copia de seguridad de los datos antes de utilizar la función Restaurar PC. Para utilizar la función Restaurar PC: 1 Encienda el equipo. Durante el proceso de inicio, aparecerá una barra azul con www.dell.com en la parte superior de la pantalla. 2 Pulse en el momento exacto que vea la barra azul. Si no pulsa a tiempo, deje que el equipo termine el reinicio y vuelva a reiniciarlo de nuevo. AVISO: Si no desea continuar con la función Restaurar PC, haga clic en Reiniciar en el siguiente paso. 3 En la pantalla siguiente que aparezca, haga clic en Restaurar. 4 En la pantalla siguiente, haga clic en Confirmar. El proceso de restauración tardará de 6 a 10 minutos aproximadamente para finalizar. 5 Cuando se le indique, haga clic en Terminar para reiniciar el equipo. NOTA: No apague el equipo manualmente. Haga clic en Terminar y deje que el equipo se reinicie completamente. 6 Cuando se le indique, haga clic en Sí. El equipo se reinicia. Puesto que el equipo se restaura a su estado operativo original, las pantallas que aparecen, como, por ejemplo, la pantalla Contrato de licencia del usuario final, son las mismas que aparecen cuando se enciede el equipo por primera vez. 7 Haga clic en Siguiente. Aparece la pantalla Restaurar sistema y, a continuación, el equipo se reinicia. 8 Cuando el equipo se reinicie, haga clic en Aceptar. Activación de la función Restaurar sistema Si vuelve a instalar Windows XP con menos de 200 MB de espacio libre disponible en el disco duro, se desactivará automáticamente la función Restaurar sistema. Para ver si la función Restaurar sistema está activada: 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Panel de control . 2 Haga clic en Rendimiento y administración. 3 Haga clic en Sistema.64 Solución de problemas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 4 Haga clic en la ficha Restaurar sistema. 5 Compruebe que no está activada la opción Desactivar Restaurar sistema. Eliminación de la función PC Restore AVISO: La función PC Restore (Restaurar PC) le permite restaurar el sistema operativo de su equipo al estado que estaba cuando compró el equipo. Se recomienda que no elimine la función PC Restore de su equipo, incluso si es para obtener espacio adicional en el disco duro. Si elimina la función PC Restore de la unidad de disco duro, nunca podrá volver a recuperarla ni tampoco utilizarla para volver el sistema operativo de su equipo al estado original. 1 Inicie el equipo como administrador local. 2 En el Explorador de Windows, vaya a c:\dell\utilities\DSR. 3 Haga doble clic en el nombre de archivo DSRIRRemv2.exe. NOTA: Si no inicia el equipo como administrador local, aparecerá un mensaje indicándole que debe hacerlo. Haga clic en Salir e inicie el equipo como administrador local. Si no existe la partición para la función PC Restore, aparecerá un mensaje indicando que no se ha encontrado la partición. Haga clic en Salir; no hay partición que borrar. 4 Haga clic en Aceptar para eliminar la partición. 5 Haga clic en Sí cuando aparezca un mensaje de confirmación. Se borra la partición y la partición c:\ se expande para incluir el nuevo espacio de disco disponible. Para comprobar el espacio disponible, haga clic con el botón derecho del ratón en la unidad c:\ en el Explorador de Windows y seleccione Propiedades. 6 Haga clic en Terminar para cerrar la ventana PC Restore Removal (Eliminación de la función PC Restore). 7 Reinicie el equipo.Adición y sustitución de piezas 65 Adición y sustitución de piezas Antes de empezar Este apartado proporciona procedimientos para quitar e instalar los componentes de su equipo. A menos que se señale lo contrario, cada procedimiento asume que existen las siguientes condiciones: • Ha realizado los pasos de la sección “Apagar el equipo.” • Ha leído la información de seguridad de la Guía de información del producto. Herramientas recomendadas Los procedimientos de este documento podrían requerir el uso de las siguientes herramientas: • Un destornillador pequeño de paletas planas • Un destornillador Phillips • Una punta trazadora de plástico pequeña • CD o disquete de actualización del programa BIOS flash Apagar el equipo Utilice las siguientes directrices de seguridad para proteger su equipo de posibles daños y para garantizar su propia seguridad personal. PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad que se encuentran en la Guía de información del producto. AVISO: Sólo un técnico certificado debe realizar reparaciones en el equipo. La garantía no cubre los daños por reparaciones no autorizadas por Dell. PRECAUCIÓN: Manipule los componentes y las tarjetas con precaución. No toque los componentes o contactos ubicados en una tarjeta. Sostenga las tarjetas por sus bordes o por su soporte metálico de montaje. Sujete un componente, como un procesador, por sus bordes y no por sus patas. AVISO: Cuando desconecte un cable, tire de su conector o de su lazo liberador de tensión, y no del cable mismo. Algunos cables cuentan con un conector que tiene lengüetas de sujeción; si está desconectando un cable de este tipo, pulse las lengüetas de sujeción antes de desconectar el cable. Cuando separe conectores, manténgalos alineados para evitar doblar las patas del conector. Además, antes de conectar un cable, asegúrese de que los dos conectores estén orientados y alineados correctamente. 66 Adición y sustitución de piezas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m AVISO: Para evitar daños en el equipo, realice los pasos siguientes antes de empezar a trabajar dentro del mismo. 1 Asegúrese de que la superficie de trabajo sea llana y esté limpia para evitar que la cubierta del equipo se raye. 2 Apague el equipo. 3 Asegúrese de que el equipo y los dispositivos conectados estén apagados. Si el equipo o los dispositivos conectados no se apagaron automáticamente cuando desactivó el equipo, pulse y mantenga pulsado el botón de alimentación durante 4 segundos. 4 Si el equipo está conectado (acoplado) a un dispositivo de acoplamiento, desacóplelo. Si desea instrucciones, consulte la documentación incluida con el dispositivo de acoplamiento. AVISO: Para desconectar un cable de red, desconecte primero el cable del equipo y, a continuación, del enchufe de red de la pared. 5 Desconecte del equipo todas las líneas telefónicas o de telecomunicaciones. 6 Desconecte el equipo y todos los dispositivos conectados de sus salidas eléctricas y, a continuación, pulse el botón de alimentación para conectar a tierra la placa base. AVISO: Para conectar un cable de red, primero conecte el cable a la toma de red de la pared y, después, al equipo. 7 Retire las PC Card instaladas de la ranura para PC Card. 8 Cierre la pantalla y coloque el equipo hacia abajo en una superficie plana. AVISO: Para evitar que se dañe la placa base, debe retirar la batería principal cuando abra el equipo. 9 Deslice y sostenga el pasador de liberación del compartimento de la batería y, a continuación, extraiga la batería del compartimento. 10 Extraiga los módulos instalados. 11 Extraiga la unidad de disco duro. Unidad de disco duro PRECAUCIÓN: Si extrae la unidad de disco duro del equipo cuando la unidad está caliente, no toque la caja metálica de dicha unidad. AVISO: Para evitar la pérdida de datos, apague el equipo (consulte la página 28) antes de extraer la unidad de disco duro. No extraiga la unidad de disco duro mientras el equipo se encuentre encendido, en modo de suspensión o en modo de hibernación. AVISO: Las unidades de disco duro son muy frágiles; basta un ligero golpe para dañarlas. NOTA: Dell no garantiza la compatibilidad para las unidades de disco duro de otros fabricantes ni proporciona asistencia técnica si sufren algún problema.Adición y sustitución de piezas 67 Para sustituir la unidad de disco duro en el compartimento correspondiente: 1 Siga las instrucciones que encontrará en el apartado “Antes de empezar” en la página 65. 2 Dé la vuelta al equipo y retire los tornillos de la unidad de disco duro. AVISO: Cuando la unidad de disco duro no esté en el equipo, guárdela en un embalaje protector antiestático. Consulte las instrucciones para desechar las baterías en la Guía de información del producto. 3 Tire de la unidad de disco duro para extraerla del equipo. 4 Extraiga la nueva unidad de su embalaje. Conserve el embalaje original para almacenar o transportar la unidad de disco duro. AVISO: Ejerza una presión firme y constante para deslizar la unidad hasta que encaje en su sitio. Si ejerce una fuerza excesiva, puede dañar el conector. 5 Inserte la unidad en el compartimento y empújela hasta que encaje totalmente en el compartimento. 6 Vuelva a colocar los tornillos y apriételos. 7 Instale el sistema operativo para su equipo. 8 Instale los controladores y utilidades para su equipo. Tornillos (2) Unidad de disco duro68 Adición y sustitución de piezas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Devolución de una unidad de disco duro a Dell Cuando devuelva la unidad de disco duro a Dell, utilice el embalaje de espuma original o un embalaje similar. De lo contrario, la unidad de disco duro puede resultar dañada durante el transporte. Memoria Puede aumentar la memoria del sistema mediante la instalación de módulos de memoria en la placa base. Consulte la página 80 para obtener información sobre la memoria admitida por el equipo. Instale únicamente módulos de memoria adecuados para su equipo. 1 Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en la sección “Antes de comenzar” de la página 65. 2 Dé la vuelta al equipo, afloje el tornillo cautivo de la cubierta del módulo de memoria y levante la cubierta. Unidad de disco duro Embalaje de espumaAdición y sustitución de piezas 69 NOTA: Los módulos de memoria adquiridos a Dell están incluidos en la garantía del equipo. 3 Si va a cambiar un módulo de memoria, debe retirar el módulo existente. a Separe cuidadosamente con las puntas de los dedos los ganchos de fijación que se encuentran en los extremos del conector del módulo de memoria hasta que el módulo salga de su sitio. b Extraiga el módulo del conector. Tornillo cautivo Cubierta del módulo de memoria Ganchos de fijación Módulo de memoria70 Adición y sustitución de piezas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 4 Descargue la electricidad estática de su cuerpo e instale el nuevo módulo de memoria: NOTA: Si el módulo de memoria no está instalado correctamente, es posible que el equipo no arranque. Este fallo no se indicará mediante un mensaje de error. a Alinee la muesca del conector del extremo del módulo con la lengüeta de la ranura del conector. b Deslice el módulo firmemente en la ranura formando un ángulo de 45 grados y gírelo hasta que encaje en su sitio con un chasquido. Si no lo nota, retire el módulo y vuelva a instalarlo. 5 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta. AVISO: Si resulta difícil cerrar la cubierta del módulo de memoria, extraiga el módulo y vuelva a instalarlo. Si fuerza la cubierta para cerrarla, puede dañar el equipo. 6 Inserte la batería en el compartimento correspondiente o conecte el adaptador de CA al equipo y a una toma de corriente. 7 Encienda el equipo. Al reiniciarse el equipo, éste detecta la memoria adicional y actualiza automáticamente la información de configuración del sistema. Para confirmar la cantidad de memoria que hay instalada en el equipo, haga clic en el botón Inicio, seleccione Ayuda y soporte técnico y, a continuación, haga clic en Información del equipo.Adición y sustitución de piezas 71 Módem y minitarjeta PCI 1 Siga las instrucciones que encontrará en el apartado “Antes de empezar” en la página 65. 2 Dé la vuelta al equipo, afloje el tornillo cautivo de la cubierta del módem/minitarjeta PCI y levante la cubierta. 3 Continúe con las instrucciones que correspondan de las secciones: • Para agregar un módem, consulte la siguiente sección: “Cómo agregar un módem”. • Para agregar una minitarjeta PCI, consulte la página 72. Cómo cambiar el módem 1 Retire el módem actual: a Extraiga los tornillos que fijan el módem en la placa base y guárdelos aparte. b Tire de la lengüeta para sacar el módem de su conector de la placa base y desconecte el cable del módem. Tornillo cautivo Cubierta del módem/minitarjeta PCI72 Adición y sustitución de piezas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 2 Conecte el cable del módem al módem. AVISO: Los conectores de cable tienen la forma adecuada para una correcta inserción; no fuerce las conexiones. 3 Alinee el módem con los orificios para los tornillos e insértelo en el conector de la placa base. 4 Coloque los tornillos para fijar el módem a la placa base. 5 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta. Cómo agregar una minitarjeta PCI PRECAUCIÓN: La normativa FCC prohibe terminantemente a los usuarios instalar minitarjetas PCI LAN inalámbricas de 5 GHz (802.11a, 802.11a/b, 802.11a/b/g). Bajo ninguna circunstancia debe el usuario instalar ningún dispositivo de dicho tipo. Sólo el personal de servicio técnico formado por Dell tiene autorización para instalar una minitarjeta PCI LAN inalámbrica de 5 GHz. Si extrae o instala una minitarjeta PCI de 2,4 GHz (802.11b, 802.11b/g), siga las instrucciones que se indican a continuación. Sólo se pueden instalar los productos aprobados para su utilización en el equipo portátil. Las minitarjetas PCI aprobadas sólo se pueden comprar a Dell. NOTA: El usuario puede extraer e instalar las tarjetas PC LAN inalámbricas de 2,4 GHz. Conector del cable del módem Cable del módem Lengüeta de tiro Tornillos (2)Adición y sustitución de piezas 73 Si pidió una minitarjeta PCI con el equipo, ya estará instalada. 1 Si no hay ninguna minitarjeta PCI instalada, vaya al paso 2. Si está sustituyendo una minitarjeta PCI, retire la tarjeta existente. a Desconecte la minitarjeta PCI de los cables conectados. b Libere la minitarjeta PCI; para ello, separe las lengüetas metálicas de fijación hasta que la tarjeta se levante ligeramente. c Extraiga la minitarjeta PCI de su conector. AVISO: Para evitar dañar la minitarjeta PCI, no coloque nunca cables encima o debajo de la tarjeta. AVISO: Los conectores tienen la forma adecuada para garantizar que la inserción es correcta. Si nota resistencia, compruebe los conectores y vuelva a alinear la tarjeta. Minitarjeta PCI Conector de minitarjeta PCI Cables de antena (2) Lengüetas metálicas de fijación (2)74 Adición y sustitución de piezas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 2 Alinee la minitarjeta PCI con el conector hasta formar un ángulo de 45 grados y, a continuación, presiónela para insertarla en el conector. 3 Conecte los cables de antena a la minitarjeta PCI. 4 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta. Unidad de CD o DVD 1 Siga las instrucciones que encontrará en el apartado “Antes de empezar” en la página 65. 2 Dé la vuelta al equipo, afloje el tornillo cautivo de la cubierta del módulo de memoria y levante la cubierta. Minitarjeta PCI Conector de minitarjeta PCI Cables de antena (2)Adición y sustitución de piezas 75 3 Extraiga el tornillo “O” que se encuentra junto a la cubierta del módulo de memoria. 4 Apriete la palanca que se encuentra junto a los conectores del módulo de memoria en la dirección a la flecha indicada en la palanca (es decir, hacia la unidad) para liberar la unidad. 5 Extraiga la unidad del compartimento. Tornillo cautivo Cubierta del módulo de memoria Tornillo Palanca Unidad CD o DVD76 Adición y sustitución de piezas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 6 Inserte la nueva unidad en el compartimento hasta que quede totalmente encajada. 7 Vuelva a colocar el tornillo extraído en el paso 3. 8 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta del módulo de memoria y el tornillo. Teclado 1 Siga las instrucciones que encontrará en el apartado “Antes de empezar” en la página 65. 2 Use un destornillador plano pequeño o una punta de plástico para levantar el extremo derecho con muesca de la cubierta embellecedora y haga palanca en ella para extraerla. 3 Levante la cubierta y extráigala de las bisagras y del estuche inferior. 4 Extraiga los cuatro tornillos del teclado. AVISO: Las teclas del teclado son frágiles, se desencajan fácilmente y resulta muy entretenido volver a colocarlas. Tenga cuidado cuando extraiga y manipule el teclado. 5 Levante el teclado y apóyelo en las bisagras de la pantalla de modo que el conector del teclado quede visible. 6 Tire del conector del teclado para desconectarlo del conector de interfaz de la placa base. Cubierta con bisagrasAdición y sustitución de piezas 77 7 Extraiga el teclado. AVISO: para evitar dañar las patas de los conectores, inserte firmemente el conector del teclado en el conector de interfaz de la placa base y no invierta el conector del teclado. 8 Conecte el conector de teclado del otro teclado en el conector de interfaz de la placa base. Conector de interfaz Conector para teclado Tornillos para teclado (4) Teclado78 Adición y sustitución de piezas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 9 Inserte las cuatro pestañas de fijación del teclado en las ranuras correspondientes del apoyamanos y vuelva a colocar el teclado. Antes de intentar encajar completamente el teclado, asegúrese de que las cuatro pestañas de fijación están encajadas. 10 Vuelva a colocar los cuatro tornillos del teclado. 11 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta. Conector de interfaz Conector para teclado Tornillos para teclado (4) Teclado Pestañas de fijación (4)Apéndice 79 Apéndice Especificaciones NOTA: Las funciones de administración de energía limitan la velocidad del procesador cuando el equipo funciona con batería, para mantener los requisitos de ventilación del sistema o para mantener los requisitos de alimentación del sistema. Microprocesador Microprocesador Procesador Mobile Intel® Pentium® 4 o Intel Celeron® Caché L1 8 KB (interna) Caché L2 512 KB (Intel Pentium 4); 128 KB (Intel Celeron) Frecuencia de bus externa 400/533 MHz Información del sistema Conjunto de chips del sistema Intel 852GMV Amplitud del bus de datos 64 bits Amplitud del bus de DRAM 64 bits Amplitud del bus de direcciones del microprocesador 32 bits Tarjeta PC Controlador CardBus TI PCI1510 Conector de tarjetas PC admite una tarjeta del Tipo I o Tipo II Tarjetas admitidas de 3,3 V y 5 V Tamaño del conector de tarjetas PC de 68 patas Amplitud de datos (máxima) PCMCIA de 16 bits CardBus de 32 bits80 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Memoria Conector del módulo de memoria 2 zócalos SODIMM a los que puede acceder el usuario Capacidades del módulo de memoria 64, 128, 256 y 512 MB Tipo de memoria SODIMM de 2,5 V Memoria estándar 128 MB Memoria máxima 1 GB Tiempo de acceso a memoria: velocidad del reloj 266 MHz Puertos y conectores Vídeo conector de 15 orificios Audio Conector de micrófono, conector de auriculares o altavoces estéreo USB (2) Conector de 4 patas compatible con USB 2.0 Módem Conector RJ-11 LAN Ethernet Conector RJ-45 (opcional en algunos países) Comunicaciones Módem: Tipo v.92 56K MDC Controlador softmodem Interfaz Bus interno AC ’97 Adaptador de red tarjeta de sistema LAN Ethernet 10/100Apéndice 81 Vídeo Tipo de vídeo Gráficos directos integrados AGP Interfaz host AGP directo integrado Controlador de vídeo Intel UMA integrada Memoria de vídeo 1 MB con Intel DVMT hasta 32 MB (con 128 MB de memoria del sistema) o 64 MB (con 256 MB o más de memoria del sistema) Interfaz LCD SPWG-B Audio Tipo de audio AC’97 (soft audio) Controlador de audio Sigmatel 9750 Conversión estereofónica 18 bits (de analógica a digital) y 20 bits (de digital a analógica) Interfaces: Interna Bus PCI /AC’97 Externa Conector de entrada de micrófono, conector de auriculares o altavoces estéreo Altavoz Dos altavocesde 8 ohmios Amplificador de altavoz interno Canal de 1,0 W en 8 ohmios Controles de volumen Métodos abreviados de teclado, menús de programa82 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Pantalla Tipo (TFT matriz activa) XGA Dimensiones: 14,1 ó 15 pulgadas Altura: 14.1 pulgada 15 pulgada 214,3 mm (8,4 pulgadas) 228,1 mm (8,99 pulgadas) Anchura: 14.1 pulgada 15 pulgada 285,7 mm (11,2 pulgadas) 304,1 mm (11,97 pulgadas) Diagonal: 14.1 pulgada 15 pulgada 359.16 mm (14.1 pulgadas) 382.4 mm (15.1 pulgadas) Resoluciones máximas 1024 x 768 a 16,8 millones de colores Tiempo de respuesta (típico) 20 ms de subida (máximo) 30 ms de bajada (máximo) Frecuencia de actualización 60 Hz Ángulo de funcionamiento 0° (cerrado) a 180° Ángulos de vista: Horizontal ±40° Vertical +10°/–30° Separación entre píxeles 0,28 x 0,28 mm Consumo eléctrico: Panel con luz de fondo (normal) 5.2 W Controles el brillo puede controlarse mediante métodos abreviados del tecladoApéndice 83 Teclado Número de teclas 85 (EE.UU. y Canadá); 86 (Europa); 90 (Japón) Recorrido de tecla 2,7 mm ± 0,3 mm (0,11 pulgadas ± 0,016 pulgadas) Espacio entre teclas 19,05 mm ± 0,3 mm (0,75 pulgadas ± 0,012 pulgadas) Diseño QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji Superficie táctil Resolución de posición X/Y (modo de tabla de gráficos) 240 cpp Tamaño: Anchura 64,88 mm (2,55 pulgadas) área activa mediante sensor Altura Rectángulo de 48,88 mm (1,92 pulgadas) Batería (8 celdas) Tipo Ión de litio "inteligente" de 8 celdas (65 WHr) Dimensiones: Profundidad 122,5 mm (4,8 pulgadas) Altura 19,2 mm (0,76 pulgadas) Anchura 147,5 mm (5,8 pulgadas) Peso 0,470 kg (1,03 lb) Voltaje 14,8 VDC Capacidad 4300 mAH Vida útil Puede reducirse significativamente bajo condiciones de mucho consumo. Consulte la página 29 para obtener más información acerca de la duración de la batería. Duración (aproximada) 300 ciclos de carga/descarga 0 Intervalo de temperatura: Carga/Descarga 0° a 35°C (32° a 95°F) En almacenamiento –40° a 65°C (–40° a 149°F)84 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Batería (12 celdas) Tipo Ión de litio "inteligente" de 12 celdas (96 Whr) Dimensiones: Profundidad 122,5 mm (4,8 pulgadas) Altura 19,2 mm (0,76 pulgadas) Anchura 147,5 mm (5,8 pulgadas) Peso 0,615 kg (1,35 lb) Voltaje 14,8 VDC Capacidad 6450 mAH Vida útil Puede reducirse significativamente bajo condiciones de mucho consumo. Consulte la página 29 para obtener más información acerca de la duración de la batería. Duración (aproximada) 300 ciclos de carga/descarga 0 Intervalo de temperatura: Carga/Descarga 0° a 35°C (32° a 95°F) En almacenamiento –40° a 65°C (–40° a 149°F) Adaptador de CA Voltaje de entrada De 100 a 240 V CA Intensidad de entrada (máxima) 1,5 A Frecuencia de entrada De 50 a 60 Hz Intensidad de salida 5,62 A (máximo en pulso de 4 segundos); 4,62 A (continuo) Potencia de salida 90 W estándar Voltaje nominal de salida 19.5 V de CC Dimensiones: Altura 34,2 mm (1,35 pulgadas) Anchura 60,9 mm (2,4 pulgadas) Profundidad 153,4 mm (6,04 pulgadas) Peso (con cables) 0,46 kg (1,0 lb)Apéndice 85 Intervalo de temperatura: En funcionamiento 0° a 35°C (32° a 95°F) En almacenamiento –40° a 65°C (–40° a 149°F) Aspectos físicos Altura Pantalla de 14,1 pulgadas 44,5–47,95 mm (1,75 pulgadas–1,89 pulgadas) Pantalla de 15 pulgadas 46,5–48,3 mm (1,83 pulgadas–1,90 pulgadas) Anchura Pantalla de 14,1 pulgadas 329 mm (12,9 pulgadas) Pantalla de 15 pulgadas 335 mm (13,1 pulgadas) Profundidad Pantalla de 14,1 pulgadas 275 mm (10,8 pulgadas) Pantalla de 15 pulgadas 275 mm (10,8 pulgadas) Peso: Con unidad de CD, batería de 8 celdas y pantalla de 14,1 pulgadas 3,3 kg (7,17 lb) Con unidad de CD, batería de 12 celdas y pantalla de 14,1 pulgadas 3,4 kg (7,57 lb) Con unidad de CD, batería de 8 celdas y pantalla de 15 pulgadas 3,5 kg (7,66 lb) Con unidad de CD, batería de 12 celdas y pantalla de 15 pulgadas 3,7 kg (8,07 lb) Aspectos ambientales Intervalo de temperatura: En funcionamiento 0° a 35°C (32° a 95°F) En almacenamiento –40° a 65°C (–40° a 149°F) Humedad relativa (máxima): En funcionamiento del 10% al 90% (sin condensación) En almacenamiento del 5% al 95% (sin condensación) Adaptador de CA (continuación)86 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Utilización del programa Configuración del sistema Visión general NOTA: El sistema operativo puede configurar automáticamente la mayoría de las opciones disponibles en el programa de configuración del sistema, anulando así las opciones establecidas por el usuario a través del programa de configuración del sistema. Para obtener más información acerca de la configuración de funciones del sistema operativo, consulte el centro de ayuda y soporte técnico. Para acceder a la ayuda, consulte la página 9. Las pantallas de configuración del sistema muestran la información y las selecciones de la configuración actual del equipo, como: • Configuración del sistema • Secuencia de arranque • Configuración de arranque (inicialización) y ajustes de configuración del dispositivo de acoplamiento • Selecciones de configuración básica de dispositivos • Ajustes de seguridad del sistema y de la contraseña de la unidad de disco duro AVISO: A menos que sea un usuario experto en informática o que el servicio de asistencia técnica de Dell le pida que lo haga, no cambie la configuración de este programa. Determinados cambios pueden hacer que el equipo no funcione correctamente. Vibración máxima: En funcionamiento 0,6 GRMS En almacenamiento 1.3 GRMS Impacto máximo (medido con la unidad de disco duro en posición de reposo y pulso de media onda de 2 ms): En funcionamiento 122 G En almacenamiento 163 G Altitud (máxima): En funcionamiento De –15.2 a 3048 m (de –50 a 10,000 pies) En almacenamiento De –15.2 a 10,668 m (de –50 a 35,000 pies) Aspectos ambientales (continuación)Apéndice 87 Visualización de las pantallas de configuración del sistema 1 Encienda (o reinicie) el equipo. 2 Cuando aparezca el logotipo de DELL™, pulse inmediatamente. Si tarda demasiado y aparece el logotipo de Windows, espere hasta que se muestre el escritorio de Windows. A continuación, apague el equipo (consulte la página 28) y vuelva a intentarlo. Pantallas de configuración del sistema NOTA: Para obtener información sobre un elemento específico de la pantalla de configuración del sistema, resalte el elemento y consulte el área de Ayuda de la pantalla. Se lista, en cada pantalla, a la izquierda las opciones de configuración del sistema. A la derecha de cada opción se encuentra la selección o el valor de dicha opción. Puede cambiar las selecciones que aparecen en blanco en la pantalla. Las opciones o valores que no se pueden cambiar (porque los determina o calcula el equipo) aparecen con menos brillo. En el cuadro que aparece en la esquina superior derecha de la pantalla se muestra información de ayuda sobre la opción resaltada actualmente; en el que aparece en la esquina inferior derecha se muestra información acerca del equipo. Las funciones clave del programa de configuración del sistema aparecen en la parte inferior de la pantalla. Opciones más utilizadas Ciertas opciones requieren que reinicie el equipo para que la nueva configuración sea efectiva. Cambio de la secuencia de arranque La secuencia de arranque indica al equipo dónde debe buscar para localizar el software necesario para iniciar el sistema operativo. Puede controlar la secuencia de inicio y activar o desactivar los dispositivos mediante la página Boot Order (Orden de inicio) del programa de configuración del sistema. NOTA: Para cambiar la secuencia de arranque para una sola vez, consulte página 88. La página Boot Order (Orden de inicio) muestra una lista general de los dispositivos de inicio que se pueden instalar en el equipo, que incluyen, entre otros, los siguientes: • Unidad de discos flexibles • Unidad de disco duro de compartimento para módulos • Unidad de disco duro interna • Unidad de CD/DVD/CD-RW Durante la rutina de inicio, el equipo comienza por la parte superior de la lista y examina los archivos de inicio del sistema operativo. Cuando el equipo encuentra los archivos, deja de buscar e inicia el sistema operativo. Para controlar los dispositivos de inicio, seleccione (resalte) un dispositivo presionando la tecla de flecha hacia arriba o hacia abajo y, a continuación, active o desactive el dispositivo o cambie su orden en la lista.88 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m • Para activar o desactivar un dispositivo, resalte el elemento Los elementos activados aparecen de color blanco y con un signo de exclamación a la izquierda; los elementos desactivados aparecen de color azul o atenuados y sin triángulo. • Pulse la tecla de flecha hacia la izquierda o hacia la derecha para cambiar la opción. • Para cambiar la posición de un dispositivo en la lista, resáltelo y, a continuación, pulse o (no se distingue entre mayúsculas y minúsculas) para desplazar hacia arriba o hacia abajo el dispositivo resaltado. Los cambios de la secuencia de inicio tendrán efecto tan pronto como los guarde y salga del programa de configuración del sistema. Arranque para una sola vez Puede configurar una secuencia de inicio para una sola vez sin tener que entrar en el programa de configuración del sistema. (También puede utilizar este procedimiento para iniciar desde los Diagnósticos de Dell en la partición de la utilidad de diagnóstico de la unidad de disco duro). 1 Apague el equipo. 2 Si el equipo está conectado (acoplado) a un dispositivo de acoplamiento, desacóplelo. Si desea instrucciones, consulte la documentación incluida con el dispositivo de acoplamiento. 3 Conecte el equipo a un enchufe eléctrico. 4 Encienda el equipo. Cuando aparezca el logotipo DELL, oprima inmediatamente . Si tarda demasiado y aparece el logotipo de Windows, espere hasta que se muestre el escritorio de Windows. A continuación, apague el equipo y vuelva a intentarlo. 5 Cuando aparezca el dispositivo de arranque, resalte el dispositivo desde el que desea arrancar y pulse . El equipo se iniciará desde el dispositivo seleccionado. La próxima vez que reinicie el equipo, se restaurará el orden de inicio normal. Optimización del rendimiento de la batería y el sistema Información general sobre el rendimiento del sistema El rendimiento del sistema puede verse reducido en determinadas condiciones para evitar que se realice un apagado automático y se pierdan datos. Entre las condiciones en las que se reduce el rendimiento se encuentran las siguientes: CA L EN T AMI EN T O D E L P R O C E S A D O R — El rendimiento se reduce cuando la temperatura del sistema sobrepasa los parámetros establecidos. Esta reducción del rendimiento ayuda a regular las temperaturas del sistema y de la superficie, lo cual evita que el equipo se apague debido a la temperatura excesiva del procesador. REN DIMI EN T O D E L A D A P T A D O R D E CA — El rendimiento se reduce cuando el equipo funciona con alimentación de CA y el consumo de energía sobrepasa los parámetros establecidos del adaptador de CA. Esta reducción del rendimiento garantiza que el sistema no intenta consumir más de lo que el adaptador Apéndice 89 de CA puede suministrar. CA P A CI D A D D E LA B A T E RÍ A — El rendimiento se reduce cuando el equipo funciona con batería y el consumo de energía sobrepasa la capacidad nominal de la batería, sobrepasa los niveles de descarga segura permitidos o cuando la temperatura de la superficie de la batería sobrepasa los 60 °C. Optimización del consumo de energía y del tiempo de carga de la batería El adaptador de CA tarda 3 horas aproximadamente en cargar una batería totalmente descargada con el equipo apagado. El tiempo de carga es significativamente superior si el equipo está encendido y funciona a una alta velocidad de procesador y niveles elevados de actividad del sistema. Si el equipo funciona a elevados niveles de actividad del sistema durante periodos prolongados de tiempo y la batería no se carga, intente operar con el equipo en modo de administración de energía mínima. Este modo puede mejorar el tiempo de carga y la duración de la batería. Según los niveles de actividad del sistema, el rendimiento del sistema puede verse reducido. Para establecer el modo de administración de energía mínima: NOTA: También puede pulsar el icono de medidor de energía de la barra de tareas. 1 Pulse el botón Inicio→ Panel de control→ Rendimiento y mantenimiento→ Opciones de energía. 2 Seleccione la ficha Combinaciones de energía. 3 En el menú desplegable Combinaciones de energía, pulse Modo de bajo consumo. Para obtener más información sobre la administración de energía, consulte el archivo de Ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la .página 9 Velocidad variable del ventilador El equipo utiliza una velocidad variable del ventilador a fin de evitar que el equipo se sobrecaliente. El ventilador funciona continuamente y la velocidad de éste puede variar según el uso. El ruido de los ventiladores es normal y no indica ningún problema del equipo o de los ventiladores. Política de soporte técnico de Dell (sólo EE.UU.) El soporte técnico asistido por personal técnico requiere la cooperación y la participación del cliente en el proceso de solución de problemas y permite restaurar el sistema operativo, los programas de software y los controladores de hardware a la configuración predeterminada original de Dell, así como verificar el funcionamiento correcto del equipo y del hardware instalado por Dell. Además de este soporte con intervención de un técnico, puede encontrar el mismo en línea en support.dell.com. Puede que haya opciones de soporte técnico adicionales con cargo. Dell proporciona asistencia técnica limitada para el equipo y el software y los periféricos instalados por Dell 1 . La asistencia para software y periféricos de terceros corresponde al fabricante original e incluye aquellos artículos comprados o instalados a través de Dell Software and Peripherals, Readyware y Custom Factory Integration 2 . 1 Se ofrecen servicios de reparación conforme a los términos y condiciones de la garantía limitada y el servicio 90 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m de asistencia opcional contratado al comprar el equipo. 2 Todos los componentes estándar de Dell incluidos en un proyecto Custom Factory Integration (CFI) están cubiertos por la garantía limitada estándar de Dell de su equipo. No obstante, Dell también amplía el programa de sustitución de piezas para incluir todos los componentes de hardware no estándar de terceros integrados a través de CFI durante todo el período de vigencia del contrato de asistencia para el equipo. Definición de software y dispositivos periféricos “instalados por Dell” El software instalado por Dell incluye el sistema operativo y parte de los programas de software instalados en el equipo durante el proceso de fabricación (Microsoft® Office, Norton Antivirus, etc.) Los dispositivos periféricos instalados por Dell incluyen las tarjetas internas de expansión, los compartimentos para módulos Dell y los accesorios de la tarjeta PC. Además, se incluyen todos los monitores, teclados, ratones, altavoces, micrófonos para módems telefónicos, estaciones de acoplamiento/replicadores de puerto, productos de red y todos los cables correspondientes de la marca Dell. Definición de software y dispositivos periféricos “de terceros” El software y los periféricos de terceros incluyen los periféricos, accesorios y programas de software vendidos por Dell pero que no son de la marca Dell (impresoras, escáneres, cámaras, juegos, etc.). El soporte para el software y los dispositivos periféricos de terceros lo proporciona el fabricante original del producto. Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell Para ponerse en contacto con Dell de forma electrónica, puede acceder a los siguientes sitios web: • www.dell.com • support.dell.com (soporte técnico) • premiersupport.dell.com (soporte técnico para clientes de instituciones educativas, gubernamentales, sanitarias y de grandes y medianas empresas, incluidos los clientes Premier, Platinum y Gold) Para obtener las direcciones web de su país, busque la sección correspondiente en la siguiente tabla. NOTA: Los números de teléfono gratuitos son para uso dentro del país para el que aparecen. Cuando necesite ponerse en contacto con Dell, utilice las direcciones electrónicas, los números de teléfono y los códigos que se incluyen en la siguiente tabla. Si necesita ayuda para averiguar los códigos que debe utilizar, póngase en contacto con un operador de telefonía local o internacional.Apéndice 91 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitos Alemania (Langen) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 49 Código de ciudad: 6103 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: tech_support_central_europe@dell.com Asistencia técnica 06103 766-7200 Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas empresas 0180-5-224400 Atención al cliente para cuentas globales 06103 766-9570 Atención al cliente para cuentas preferentes 06103 766-9420 Atención al cliente para grandes cuentas 06103 766-9560 Atención al cliente para cuentas públicas 06103 766-9555 Centralita 06103 766-7000 Anguilla Asistencia general gratuito: 800-335-0031 Antigua y Barbuda Asistencia general 1-800-805-5924 Antillas Neerlandesas Asistencia general 001-800-882-1519 Argentina (Buenos Aires) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 54 Código de ciudad: 11 Sitio web: www.dell.com.ar Correo electrónico: us_latin_services@dell.com Correo electrónico para equipos portátiles y de sobremesa: la-techsupport@dell.com Correco electrónico para servidores y productos de almacenamiento EMC® : la_enterprise@dell.com Atención al cliente gratuito: 0-800-444-0730 Asistencia técnica gratuito: 0-800-444-0733 Servicios de asistencia técnica gratuito: 0-800-444-0724 Ventas 0-810-444-3355 Aruba Asistencia general gratuito: 800-157892 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Australia (Sydney) Código de acceso internacional: 0011 Código de país: 61 Código de ciudad: 2 Correo electrónico (Australia): au_tech_support@dell.com Correo electrónico (Nueva Zelanda): nz_tech_support@dell.com Particulares y pequeñas empresas 1-300-655-533 Gobierno y empresas gratuito: 1-800-633-559 División de cuentas preferentes (PAD) gratuito: 1-800-060-889 Atención al cliente gratuito: 1-800-819-339 Asistencia técnica (para equipos portátiles y de escritorio) gratuito: 1-300-655-533 Asistencia técnica (servidores y estaciones de trabajo) gratuito: 1-800-733-314 Ventas corporativas gratuito: 1-800-808-385 Ventas de transacciones gratuito: 1-800-808-312 Fax gratuito: 1-800-818-341 Austria (Viena) Código de acceso internacional: 900 Código de país: 43 Código de ciudad: 1 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: tech_support_central_europe@dell.com Ventas a particulares y pequeñas empresas 0820 240 530 00 Fax para particulares y pequeñas empresas 0820 240 530 49 Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas empresas 0820 240 530 14 Atención al cliente para cuentas preferentes y corporaciones 0820 240 530 16 Asistencia técnica a particulares y pequeñas empresas 0820 240 530 14 Asistencia técnica a cuentas preferentes y corporaciones 0660 8779 Centralita 0820 240 530 00 Bahamas Asistencia general gratuito: 1-866-278-6818 Barbados Asistencia general 1-800-534-3066 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 93 Bélgica (Bruselas) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 32 Código de ciudad: 2 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico para clientes francófonos: support.euro.dell.com/be/fr/emaildell/ Asistencia técnica 02 481 92 88 Fax de asistencia técnica 02 481 92 95 Atención al cliente 02 713 15 .65 Ventas corporativas 02 481 91 00 Fax 02 481 92 99 Centralita 02 481 91 00 Bermuda Asistencia general 1-800-342-0671 Bolivia Asistencia general gratuito: 800-10-0238 Brasil Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 55 Código de ciudad: 51 Sitio web: www.dell.com/br Atención al cliente, asistencia técnica 0800 90 3355 Fax de asistencia técnica 51 481 5470 Fax de atención al cliente 51 481 5480 Ventas 0800 90 3390 Brunei Código de país: 673 Asistencia técnica al cliente (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4966 Atención al cliente (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4949 Ventas de transacciones (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4955 Canadá (North York, Ontario) Código de acceso internacional: 011 Estado de pedidos en línea: www.dell.ca/ostatus AutoTech (asistencia técnica automatizada) gratuito: 1-800-247-9362 Atención al cliente (ventas a particulares y pequeñas empresas) gratuito: 1-800-847-4096 Atención al cliente para empresas medianas y grandes, y del gobierno gratuito: 1-800-326-9463 Asistencia técnica (ventas a particulares y pequeñas empresas) gratuito: 1-800-847-4096 Asistencia técnica para empresas medianas y grandes, y del gobierno gratuito: 1-800-387-5757 Ventas (particulares y pequeñas empresas) gratuito: 1-800-387-5752 Ventas (pequeñas y medianas empresas, instituciones gubernamentales) gratuito: 1-800-387-5755 Ventas de repuestos y por extensión de servicio 1866 440 3355 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitos94 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Chile (Santiago) Código de país: 56 Código de ciudad: 2 Atención al cliente, asistencia técnica y ventas gratuito: 1230-020-4823 China (Xiamén) Código de país: 86 Código de ciudad: 592 Sitio web de asistencia técnica: support.dell.com.cn Correo electrónico de asistencia técnica: cn_support@dell.com Correo electrónico de atención al cliente: customer_cn@dell.com Fax de asistencia técnica 592 818 1350 Asistencia técnica (Dell™ Dimension™ e Inspiron™) gratuito: 800 858 2969 Asistencia técnica (OptiPlex™, Latitude™ y Dell Precision™) gratuito: 800858 0950 Asistencia técnica (servidores y almacenamiento) gratuito: 800858 0960 Asistencia técnica (proyectores, PDA, conmutadores, enrutadores y otros) gratuito: 800 858 2920 Soporte técnico (impresoras) gratuito: 800 858 2311 Atención al cliente gratuito: 800 858 2060 Fax de atención al cliente 592 818 1308 Particulares y pequeñas empresas gratuito: 800 858 2222 División de cuentas preferentes gratuito: 800 858 2557 Grandes cuentas corporativas GPC gratuito: 800 858 2055 Grandes cuentas corporativas y cuentas principales gratuito: 800 858 2628 Grandes cuentas corporativas del norte gratuito: 800 858 2999 Grandes cuentas corporativas del norte y del ámbito educativo gratuito: 800 858 2955 Grandes cuentas corporativas del este gratuito: 800 858 2020 Grandes cuentas corporativas del este y del ámbito educativo gratuito: 800 858 2669 Grandes cuentas corporativas del grupo de cola gratuito: 800 858 2572 Grandes cuentas corporativas del sur gratuito: 800 858 2355 Grandes cuentas corporativas del oeste gratuito: 800 858 2811 Grandes cuentas corporativas de diferentes partes gratuito: 800 858 2621 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 95 Colombia Asistencia general 980-9-15-3978 Corea (Seúl) Código de acceso internacional: 001 Código de país: 82 Código de ciudad: 2 Asistencia técnica gratuito: 080-200-3800 Ventas gratuito: 080-200-3600 Atención al cliente (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4949 Fax 2194-6202 Centralita 2194-6000 Asistencia técnica (electrónica y accesorios) gratuito: 080-200-3801 Costa Rica Asistencia general 0800-012-0435 Dinamarca (Copenhague) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 45 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: support.euro.dell.com/dk/da/emaildell/ Asistencia técnica 7023 0182 Atención al cliente (relacional) 7023 0184 Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas empresas 3287 5505 Centralita (relacional) 3287 1200 Fax de la centralita (relacional) 3287 1201 Centralita (particulares y pequeñas empresas) 3287 5000 Fax de la centralita (particulares y pequeñas empresas) 3287 5001 Dominica Asistencia general gratuito: 1-866-278-6821 Ecuador Asistencia general gratuito: 999-119 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitos96 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m EE.UU. (Austin, Texas) Código de acceso internacional: 011 Código de país: 1 Servicio automatizado para averiguar el estado de un pedido gratuito: 1-800-433-9014 AutoTech (para equipos portátiles y de escritorio) gratuito: 1-800-247-9362 Consumidor (Particular y oficina doméstica) Asistencia técnica gratuito: 1-800-624-9896 Atención al cliente gratuito: 1-800-624-9897 Servicio y asistencia DellNet™ gratuito: 1-877-Dellnet (1-877-335-5638) Clientes del programa de compra para empleados (EPP [Employee Purchase Program]) gratuito: 1-800-695-8133 Sitio web de servicios financieros: www.dellfinancialservices.com Servicios financieros (alquiler y préstamos) gratuito: 1-877-577-3355 Servicios financieros (cuentas preferentes de Dell [DPA, Dell Preferred Accounts]) gratuito: 1-800-283-2210 Empresa Atención al cliente y asistencia técnica gratuito: 1-800-822-8965 Clientes del programa de compra para empleados (EPP [Employee Purchase Program]) gratuito: 1-800-695-8133 Asistencia técnica para impresoras y proyectores gratuito: 1-877-459-7298 Público (gobierno, educación y sanidad) Atención al cliente y asistencia técnica gratuito: 1-800-456-3355 Clientes del programa de compra para empleados (EPP [Employee Purchase Program]) gratuito: 1-800-234-1490 Ventas de Dell gratuito: 1-800-289-3355 o gratuito: 1-800-879-3355 Dell Outlet Store (equipos Dell restaurados) gratuito: 1-888-798-7561 Venta de software y periféricos gratuito: 1-800-671-3355 Venta de piezas de repuesto gratuito: 1-800-357-3355 Venta de servicios y garantías ampliados gratuito: 1-800-247-4618 Fax gratuito: 1-800-727-8320 Servicios de Dell para personas sordas, con discapacidades auditivas o del habla gratuito: 1-877-DELLTTY (1-877-335-5889) País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 97 El Salvador Asistencia general 01-899-753-0777 Eslovaquia (Praga) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 421 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: czech_dell@dell.com Asistencia técnica 02 5441 5727 Atención al cliente 420 22537 2707 Fax 02 5441 8328 Fax de asistencia técnica 02 5441 8328 Centralita (ventas) 02 5441 7585 España (Madrid) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 34 Código de ciudad: 91 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: support.euro.dell.com/es/es/emaildell/ Residencias y empresas pequeñas Asistencia técnica 902 100 130 Atención al cliente 902 118 540 Ventas 902 118 541 Centralita 902 118 541 Fax 902 118 539 Corporativa Asistencia técnica 902 100 130 Atención al cliente 902 115 236 Centralita 91 722 92 00 Fax 91 722 95 83 Finlandia (Helsinki) Código de acceso internacional: 990 Código de país: 358 Código de ciudad: 9 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: support.euro.dell.com/fi/fi/emaildell/ Asistencia técnica 09 253 313 60 Atención al cliente 09 253 313 38 Fax 09 253 313 99 Centralita 09 253 313 00 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitos98 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Francia (París) (Montpellier) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 33 Códigos de ciudad: (1) (4) Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: support.euro.dell.com/fr/fr/emaildell/ Residencias y empresas pequeñas Asistencia técnica 0825 387 270 Atención al cliente 0825 823 833 Centralita 0825 004 700 Centralita (llamadas desde fuera de Francia) 04 99 75 40 00 Ventas 0825 004 700 Fax 0825 004 701 Fax (llamadas desde fuera de Francia) 0499754001 Corporativa Asistencia técnica 0825 004 719 Atención al cliente 0825 338 339 Centralita 01 55 94 71 00 Ventas 01 55 94 71 00 Fax 01 55 94 71 01 Grecia Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 30 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: support.euro.dell.com/gr/en/emaildell/ Asistencia técnica 00800-44 14 95 18 Asistencia técnica Gold Service 00800-44 14 00 83 Centralita 2108129810 Centralita para Gold Service 2108129811 Ventas 2108129800 Fax 2108129812 Granada Asistencia general gratuito: 1-866-540-3355 Guatemala Asistencia general 1-800-999-0136 Guayana Asistencia general gratuito: 1-877-270-4609 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 99 Hong Kong Código de acceso internacional: 001 Código de país: 852 Sitio web: support.ap.dell.com Correo electrónico de asistencia técnica: apsupport@dell.com Asistencia técnica (Dimension e Inspiron) 2969 3188 Asistencia técnica (OptiPlex, Latitude y Dell Precision) 2969 3191 Asistencia técnica (PowerApp™, PowerEdge™, PowerConnect™ y PowerVault™) 2969 3196 Atención al cliente 3416 0910 Cuentas corporativas grandes 3416 0907 Programas globales para clientes 3416 0908 División de la mediana empresa 3416 0912 División de la pequeña empresa y la particular 2969 3105 India Asistencia técnica 1600 33 8045 Ventas (grandes cuentas corporativas) 1600 33 8044 Ventas (particulares y pequeñas empresas) 1600 33 8046 Irlanda (Cherrywood) Código de acceso internacional: 16 Código de país: 353 Código de ciudad: 1 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: dell_direct_support@dell.com Asistencia técnica 1850 543 543 Asistencia técnica en el Reino Unido (sólo para llamadas dentro del Reino Unido) 0870 908 0800 Atención al cliente (particulares) 01 204 4014 Atención al cliente para pequeñas empresas 01 204 4014 Atención al cliente en el Reino Unido (sólo para llamadas dentro del Reino Unido) 0870 906 0010 Atención al cliente para corporaciones 1850 200 982 Atención al cliente en el Reino Unido (sólo para llamadas dentro del Reino Unido) 0870 907 4499 Ventas para Irlanda 01 204 4444 Ventas en el Reino Unido (sólo para llamadas dentro del Reino Unido) 0870 907 4000 Fax/Fax de ventas 01 204 0103 Centralita 01 204 4444 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitos100 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Islas Caimán Asistencia general 1-800-805-7541 Islas Turks y Caicos Asistencia general gratuito: 1-866-540-3355 Islas Vírgenes Americanas Asistencia general 1-877-673-3355 Islas Vírgenes Británicas Asistencia general gratuito: 1-866-278-6820 Italia (Milán) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 39 Código de ciudad: 02 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: support.euro.dell.com/it/it/emaildell/ Residencias y empresas pequeñas Asistencia técnica 02 577 826 90 Atención al cliente 02 696 821 14 Fax 02 696 821 13 Centralita 02 696 821 12 Corporativa Asistencia técnica 02 577 826 90 Atención al cliente 02 577 825 55 Fax 02 575 035 30 Centralita 02 577 821 Jamaica Asistencia general (sólo para dentro de Jamaica) 1-800-682-3639 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 101 Japón (Kawasaki) Código de acceso internacional: 001 Código de país: 81 Código de ciudad: 44 Sitio web: support.jp.dell.com Asistencia técnica (servidores) gratuito: 0120-198-498 Asistencia técnica fuera de Japón (servidores) 81-44-556-4162 Asistencia técnica (Dimension e Inspiron) gratuito: 0120-198-226 Asistencia técnica fuera de Japón (Dimension e Inspiron) 81-44-520-1435 Asistencia técnica (Dell Precision, OptiPlex y Latitude) gratuito: 0120-198-433 Asistencia técnica fuera de Japón (Dell Precision, OptiPlex y Latitude) 81-44-556-3894 Asistencia técnica (PDA, proyectores, impresoras, enrutadores) gratuito: 0120-981-690 Asistencia técnica fuera de Japón (PDA, proyectores, impresoras, enrutadores) 81-44-556-3468 Servicio Faxbox 044-556-3490 Servicio de pedidos automatizado las 24 horas del día 044-556-3801 Atención al cliente 044-556-4240 División de ventas corporativas (hasta 400 empleados) 044-556-1465 Ventas de la división de cuentas preferentes (más de 400 empleados) 044-556-3433 Ventas de grandes cuentas corporativas (más de 3.500 empleados) 044-556-3430 Ventas al sector público (agencias del Estado, instituciones educativas y médicas) 044-556-1469 Cuentas globales de Japón 044-556-3469 Usuario individual 044-556-1760 Centralita 044-556-4300 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitos102 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Latinoamérica Asistencia técnica al cliente (Austin, Texas, EE.UU.) 512 728-4093 Atención al cliente (Austin, Texas, EE.UU.) 512 728-3619 Fax (Asistencia técnica y Servicio al cliente) (Austin, Texas, EE.UU.) 512 728-3883 Ventas (Austin, Texas, EE.UU.) 512 728-4397 Fax de ventas (Austin, Texas, EE.UU.) 512 728-4600 ó 512 728-3772 Luxemburgo Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 352 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: tech_be@dell.com Asistencia técnica (Bruselas, Bélgica) 3420808075 Ventas a particulares y pequeñas empresas (Bruselas, Bélgica) gratuito: 080016884 Ventas a corporaciones (Bruselas, Bélgica) 02 481 91 00 Atención al cliente (Bruselas, Bélgica) 02 481 91 19 Fax (Bruselas, Bélgica) 02 481 92 99 Centralita (Bruselas, Bélgica) 02 481 91 00 Macao Código de país: 853 Asistencia técnica gratuito: 0800 105 Servicio al cliente (Xiamen, China) 34 160 910 Ventas de transacción (Xiamen, China) 29115693 Malasia (Penang) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 60 Código de ciudad: 4 Sitio web: support.ap.dell.com Asistencia técnica (Dell Precision, OptiPlex y Latitude) gratuito: 1 800 88 0193 Asistencia técnica (Dimension, Inspiron, y electrónica y accesorios) gratuito: 1 800 88 1306 Asistencia técnica (PowerApp, PowerEdge, PowerConnect y PowerVault) gratuito: 1 800 88 1386 Atención al cliente (Penang, Malasia) 04 633 4949 Ventas de transacciones gratuito: 1 800 888 202 Ventas corporativas gratuito: 1 800 888 213 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 103 México Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 52 Asistencia técnica al cliente 001-877-384-8979 ó 001-877-269-3383 Ventas 50-81-8800 ó 01-800-888-3355 Atención al cliente 001-877-384-8979 ó 001-877-269-3383 Principal 50-81-8800 ó 01-800-888-3355 Montserrat Asistencia general gratuito: 1-866-278-6822 Nicaragua Asistencia general 001-800-220-1006 Noruega (Lysaker) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 47 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: support.euro.dell.com/no/no/emaildell/ Asistencia técnica 671 16882 Atención relacional al cliente 671 17575 Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas empresas 23162298 Centralita 671 16800 Centralita de fax 671 16865 Nueva Zelanda Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 64 Correo electrónico (Nueva Zelanda): nz_tech_support@dell.com Correo electrónico (Australia): au_tech_support@dell.com Asistencia técnica (para equipos portátiles y de sobremesa) gratuito: 0800 446 255 Asistencia técnica (para servidores y estaciones de trabajo) gratuito:0800 443 563 Particulares y pequeñas empresas 0800 446 255 Gobierno y empresas 0800 444 617 Ventas 0800 441 567 Fax 0800 441 566 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitos104 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Países bajos (Amsterdam) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 31 Código de ciudad: 20 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Asistencia técnica 020 674 45 00 Fax de asistencia técnica 020 674 47 66 Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas empresas 020 674 42 00 Atención relacional al cliente 020 674 4325 Ventas a particulares y pequeñas empresas 020 674 55 00 Ventas relacionales 020 674 50 00 Ventas por fax a particulares y pequeñas empresas 020 674 47 75 Fax para ventas relacionales 020 674 47 50 Centralita 020 674 50 00 Fax de la centralita 020 674 47 50 Países del sureste asiático y del Pacífico Asistencia técnica, atención al cliente y ventas (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4810 Panamá Asistencia general 001-800-507-0962 Perú Asistencia general 0800-50-669 Polonia (Varsovia) Código de acceso internacional: 011 Código de país: 48 Código de ciudad: 22 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: pl_support_tech@dell.com Teléfono de atención al cliente 57 95 700 Atención al cliente 57 95 999 Ventas 57 95 999 Fax de atención al cliente 57 95 806 Fax de la recepción 57 95 998 Centralita 57 95 999 Portugal Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 351 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: support.euro.dell.com/pt/en/emaildell/ Asistencia técnica 707200149 Atención al cliente 800 300413 Ventas 800 300 410, 800 300 411, 800 300 412 o 21 422 07 10 Fax 21 424 01 12 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 105 Puerto Rico Asistencia general 1-800-805-7545 Reino Unido (Bracknell) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 44 Código de ciudad: 1344 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Sitio web de atención al cliente: support.euro.dell.com/uk/en/ECare/Form/Home.asp Correo electrónico: dell_direct_support@dell.com Asistencia técnica (cuentas preferentes, corporativas o PAD, para más de 1000 empleados) 0870 908 0500 Asistencia técnica (directa y general) 0870 908 0800 Atención al cliente para cuentas globales 01344 373 186 Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas empresas 0870 906 0010 Atención al cliente para corporaciones 01344 373 185 Atención a clientes con cuentas preferentes (500–5.000 empleados) 0870 906 0010 Atención al cliente para el gobierno central 01344 373 193 Atención al cliente para el gobierno local y la educación 01344 373 199 Atención al cliente para temas de salud 01344 373 194 Ventas a particulares y pequeñas empresas 0870 907 4000 Ventas corporativas y al sector público 01344 860 456 Fax para particulares y pequeñas empresas 0870 907 4006 República checa (Praga) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 420 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: czech_dell@dell.com Asistencia técnica 22537 2727 Atención al cliente 22537 2707 Fax 22537 2714 Fax de asistencia técnica 22537 2728 Centralita 22537 2711 República Dominicana Asistencia general 1-800-148-0530 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitos106 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Singapur (Singapur) Código de acceso internacional: 005 Código de país: 65 Sitio web: support.ap.dell.com Asistencia técnica (Dimension, Inspiron, y electrónica y accesorios) gratuito: 1800 394 7430 Asistencia técnica (OptiPlex, Latitude y Dell Precision) gratuito: 1800 394 7488 Asistencia técnica (PowerApp, PowerEdge, PowerConnect y PowerVault) gratuito: 1800 394 7478 Atención al cliente (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4949 Ventas de transacciones gratuito: 1 800 394 7412 Ventas corporativas gratuito: 1 800 394 7419 St. Kitts y Nevis Asistencia general gratuito: 1-877-441-4731 St. Lucia Asistencia general 1-800-882-1521 St. Vicente y las Granadinas Asistencia general gratuito: 1-877-270-4609 Sudáfrica (Johannesburgo) Código de acceso internacional: 09/091 Código de país: 27 Código de ciudad: 11 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: dell_za_support@dell.com Gold Queue 011 709 7713 Asistencia técnica 011 709 7710 Atención al cliente 011 709 7707 Ventas 011 709 7700 Fax 011 706 0495 Centralita 011 709 7700 Suecia (Upplands Vasby) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 46 Código de ciudad: 8 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: support.euro.dell.com/se/sv/emaildell/ Asistencia técnica 08 590 05 199 Atención relacional al cliente 08 590 05 642 Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas empresas 08 587 70 527 Soporte para el programa de compra para empleados (EPP [Employee Purchase Program]) 20 140 14 44 Fax de asistencia técnica 08 590 05 594 Ventas 08 590 05 185 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 107 Suiza (Ginebra) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 41 Código de ciudad: 22 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: Tech_support_central_Europe@dell.com Correo electrónico para clientes HSB y corporativos francófonos: support.euro.dell.com/ch/fr/emaildell/ Asistencia técnica (particulares y pequeñas empresas) 0844 811 411 Asistencia técnica (corporaciones) 0844 822 844 Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas empresas 0848 802 202 Atención al cliente para corporaciones 0848 821 721 Fax 022 799 01 90 Centralita 022 799 01 01 Tailandia Código de acceso internacional: 001 Código de país: 66 Sitio web: support.ap.dell.com Asistencia técnica (OptiPlex, Latitude y Dell Precision) gratuito: 1800 0060 07 Asistencia técnica (PowerApp, PowerEdge, PowerConnect y PowerVault) gratuito: 1800 0600 09 Atención al cliente (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4949 Ventas corporativas gratuito: 1800 006 009 Ventas de transacciones gratuito: 1800 006 006 Taiwán Código de acceso internacional: 002 Código de país: 886 Sitio web: support.ap.dell.com Correo electrónico: ap_support@dell.com Asistencia técnica (OptiPlex, Latitude, Inspiron, Dimension, y electrónica y accesorios) gratuito: 00801 86 1011 Asistencia técnica (PowerApp, PowerEdge, PowerConnect y PowerVault) gratuito: 00801 60 1256 Ventas de transacciones gratuito: 00801 65 1228 Ventas corporativas gratuito: 00801 651 227 Trinidad y Tobago Asistencia general 1-800-805-8035 Uruguay Asistencia general gratuito: 000-413-598-2521 Venezuela Asistencia general 8001-3605 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitos108 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o mÍndice 109 Índice A acondicionadores de línea, 28 alimentación apagar el equipo, 28 dispositivos de protección, 27 solucionar problemas, 31 altavoces descripción, 14 vista del sistema, 14 apagar el equipo, 28 archivo de ayuda, 10 asistencia cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell, 90 B batería advertencia de bajo nivel de carga de la batería, 30 almacenar, 31 cargar, 30 comprobar la carga, 30 descripción, 17, 21 extraer, 31 instalar, 31 medidor de energía, 30 rendimiento, 29 vista del sistema, 17, 21 bloqueos, 56 botón AccessDirect descripción, 16 vista del sistema, 16 botón de alimentación descripción, 16 vista del sistema, 16 botones de la superficie táctil descripción, 15 vista del sistema, 15 C caracteres inesperados, 38 CD copiar, 41 Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico, 11 cerrar el equipo, 28 conector de red descripción, 20 vista del sistema, 20 conector de vídeo descripción, 20 vista del sistema, 20 conector del módem descripción, 18 vista del sistema, 18 conector USB descripción, 20 vista del sistema, 20 conectores de audio descripción, 17 vista del sistema, 17 conexión a Internet acerca de, 23 configurar, 23 opciones, 23 conflictos resolver incompatibilidades de software y hardware, 61 controladores volver a instalar, 59 copiar CD y DVD cómo, 41 consejos prácticos, 42 información general, 41 correo electrónico solucionar problemas, 25 cubierta de la minitarjeta PCI/módem descripción, 21 vista del sistema, 21 cubierta del módulo de memoria descripción, 21 vista del sistema, 21110 Índice 110 Índice D Dell ponerse en contacto, 90 sitio de asistencia, 11 Dell Diagnostics, 49 diagnósticos Dell, 49 Diagrama de instalación, 9 documentación archivo de ayuda, 10 Diagrama de instalación, 9 en línea, 11 Guía de información del sistema, 9 DVD copiar, 41 E equipo bloqueos, 56 especificaciones, 79 restaurar a estado anterior, 61 equipo dañado probar, 58 equipo mojado, 57 escáner solución de problemas, 54 especificaciones, 79 etiqueta de Microsoft Windows, 10 etiqueta de servicio, 10 etiquetas etiqueta de servicio, 10 Microsoft Windows, 10 G garantía, 9 H hardware Dell Diagnostics, 49 I impresora cable, 26 conexión, 25 instalación, 25 USB, 26 indicadores de estado del dispositivo descripción, 15 indicadores de estado del teclado descripción, 14 vista del sistema, 14 instalar piezas antes de empezar, 65 apagar el equipo, 65 herramientas recomendadas, 65 instrucciones de seguridad, 9 M memoria extraer, 69 módem agregar, 71 P pantalla descripción, 13 vista del sistema, 13 problemas Dell Diagnostics, 49 restaurar a estado anterior, 61 programa Configuración del sistema opciones más utilizadas, 87 pantallas, 87 propósito, 86 visualizar, 87 programa de configuración del sistema pantallas, 87 programas bloqueos, 56 no responde, 57 R ranura para cable de seguridad descripción, 18 vista del sistema, 18 ranura para tarjeta PC descripción, 16 vista del sistema, 16Índice 111 red solucionar problemas, 44 red inalámbrica tipo, 44 rejillas de ventilación descripción, 18-19, 21 vista del sistema, 18-19, 21 Restaurar sistema, 61 S SAI, 28 seguro de la pantalla descripción, 13 vista del sistema, 13 seguro de liberación de la batería descripción, 21 vista del sistema, 21 sistema operativo volver a instalar, 61 volver a instalar Windows XP, 61 sistemas de alimentación ininterrumpida Consulte SAI sitio web Dell Premier Support, 9, 11 software solucionar problemas, 56 volver a instalar software, 59 solución de problemas bloqueo de programas, 56 caracteres inesperados, 38 Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico, 11 conflictos, 61 Dell Diagnostics, 49 equipo mojado, 57 equipo que se ha caído o dañado, 58 escáner, 54 no puede guardar en un disco flexible, 55 no se puede guardar en el disquete, 55 problemas con el correo electrónico, 25 problemas con la red, 44 problemas con la tarjeta PC, 56 problemas de alimentación eléctrica, 31 restaurar a estado anterior, 61 Solucionador de problemas de hardware, 61 un programa no responde, 57 Solucionador de problemas de hardware, 61 superficie táctil descripción, 15 personalizar, 36 vista del sistema, 15 supresores de sobrevoltaje, 27 T Tarjeta PC solucionar problemas, 56 teclado caracteres inesperados, 38 descripción, 14 métodos abreviados, 34 numérico, 33 solucionar problemas, 38 sustituir, 76 vista del sistema, 14 U unidad de CD o DVD descripción, 17 sustituir, 74 vista del sistema, 17 unidad de disco duro descripción, 21 devolución a Dell, 68 sustituir, 66 vista del sistema, 21 unidad de disco flexible solución de problemas, 55 solucionar problemas, 55 unidad de DVD Consulte unidad de CD o DVD unidades Consulte unidad de disco duro solucionar problemas, 55 V vistas del sistema anterior, 13 inferior, 19, 21 lateral derecha, 17 lateral izquierda, 16 posterior, 19 volver a inst, 61112 Índice 112 Índice volver a instalar controladores, 59 Windows XP, 61 W Windows XP Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico, 11 Desinstalación del controlador de dispositivo, 60 impresora, 27 Restaurar sistema, 61 Solucionador de problemas de hardware, 61 volver a instalar, 61 Dell PowerEdge C8220 Hardware Owner’s Manual Regulatory Model: B05B Regulatory Type: B05B001Notes, Cautions, and Warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates potential damage to hardware or loss of data if instructions are not followed. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. ____________________ Information in this publication is subject to change without notice. © 2012 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell™, the DELL logo, and PowerEdge™ are trademarks of Dell Inc. Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this publication to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Regulatory Model B05B Regulatory Type: B05B001 2012 - 08 P/N XXXXX Rev. A00Contents 3 Contents 1 About Your System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Accessing System Features During Startup. . . . . . . 11 Front-Panel Features and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . 12 NIC Indicator Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Power and System Board Indicator Codes . . . . . . . 16 BMC Heartbeat Indicator Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Service Tag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 POST Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Collecting System Event Log for Investigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 System Event Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Processor Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Memory Ecc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 PCIe Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 IOH Core Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 SB Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 POST Start Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 POST End Event. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 POST Error Code Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 BIOS Recovery Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 ME Fail Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 SEL Generator ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Contents BMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Other Information You May Need . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 2 Using the System Setup Program . . . . . 45 System Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 System Setup Options at Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Using the System Setup Program Navigation Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 General Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Console Redirection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Enabling and Configuring Console Redirection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Serial Port Connection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Advanced Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 CPU Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Memory Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 SATA Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 PCI Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 USB Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Security Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Server Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 View System Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Contents 5 Boot Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Exit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Command Line Interfaces for System Setup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 IPMI Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Power Management Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 3 Installing System Components . . . . . . . 125 Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Recommended Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Inside the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Sled Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Sled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Removing a Sled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Installing a Sled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Sled Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Removing a Sled Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Installing a Sled Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 SD Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Removing a SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Installing a SD Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Sled Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Removing the Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Installing the Front Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Removing the Back Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Installing the Back Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1356 Contents Cooling Shroud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Removing the Cooling Shroud . . . . . . . . . . 135 Installing the Cooling Shroud . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Heat Sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Removing a Heat Sink. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Installing a Heat Sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Removing a Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Installing a Processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 System Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Memory Module Installation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Supported DIMM Configuration . . . . . . . . . 144 Removing Memory Modules . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Installing Memory Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Expansion Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Removing the Expansion Card . . . . . . . . . . 148 Installing the Expansion Card. . . . . . . . . . . 149 Expansion Card Riser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Removing the Expansion Card Riser . . . . . . . 150 Installing the Expansion Card Riser. . . . . . . . 151 Mezzanine Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Removing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Installing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Removing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card . . . . . . 155 Installing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card . . . . . . 157Contents 7 SD Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Removing the SD Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Installing the SD Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Removing the SD Card Reader Support Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Installing the SD Card Reader Support Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Internal Hard-Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Removing a Hard-Drive Carrier. . . . . . . . . . . 162 Installing a Hard-Drive Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Removing a Hard-Drive From the Hard-Drive Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Installing a Hard-Drive Into a Hard-Drive Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Removing the Hard-Drive Tray . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Installing the Hard-Drive Tray . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Interposer Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Removing the Interposer Extender . . . . . . . . . 167 Installing the Interposer Extender . . . . . . . . . 168 Node Power Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Removing the Node Power Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Installing the Node Power Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 System Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Removing the System Battery . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Installing the System Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . 172 System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Removing the System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Installing the System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . 1758 Contents 4 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Safety First—For You and Your System . . . . . . . . 177 Installation Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Troubleshooting System Startup Failure. . . . . . . . 178 Troubleshooting External Connections . . . . . . . . 178 Troubleshooting the Video Subsystem. . . . . . . . . 178 Troubleshooting a USB Device . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Troubleshooting a Serial I/O Device. . . . . . . . . . 179 Troubleshooting a NIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Troubleshooting a Wet Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Troubleshooting a Damaged Enclosure . . . . . . . . 182 Troubleshooting the Enclosure Fan Modules . . . . . 183 Troubleshooting the Power Sled . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Troubleshooting System Memory . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Troubleshooting a Hard-Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Troubleshooting a Storage Controller . . . . . . . . . 188 Troubleshooting Expansion Cards . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Troubleshooting Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Troubleshooting the System Board . . . . . . . . . . 191 Troubleshooting the System Battery . . . . . . . . . . 192 IRQ Assignment Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Contents 9 5 Jumpers and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . 195 System Board Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 System Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Interposer Extender Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 SD Card Reader Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Node Power Distribution Board Connectors . . . . . . 201 6 Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Contacting Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20510 ContentsAbout Your System 11 1 About Your System Accessing System Features During Startup The following keystrokes provide access to system features during startup. The SAS/SATA card or PXE hotkey support are available only in the BIOS boot mode. Hotkey function is not available in the Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) boot mode. Keystroke Description Enters the System Setup program. See "System Setup Menu" on page 45. Enters the BIOS Boot Manager or the Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) Boot Manager, depending on the system's boot configuration. See "System Setup Options at Boot" on page 46. Starts Preboot eXecution Environment (PXE) boot. Enters the LSI 2008 SAS Mezzanine Card Configuration Utility. For more information, see the SAS adapter documentation. Enters the LSI 2008 SAS Mezzanine Card Configuration Utility. For more information, see the documentation for your SAS RAID card. Enters the utility to configure onboard NIC settings for PXE boot. For more information, see the documentation for your integrated NIC. Enters the onboard SAS and SATA controller’s configuration utility. 12 About Your System Front-Panel Features and Indicators Figure 1-1. Front-Panel Features and Indicators Item Indicator, Button, or Connector Icon Description 1 USB connectors Connects USB devices to the system. The ports are USB 2.0 compliant. 2 Mezzanine card expansion slot Installs an I/O module mezzanine card. 3 Low profile PCIe expansion slot Installs a low profile PCI Express x16 card. 4 Release latch Press to release the sled from the enclosure. 1 2 3 5 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12About Your System 13 5 Power-on indicator/ power button The power-on indicator lights when the sled power is on. The power-on indicator lights amber when the system critical event occurs. The power button turns the compute sled on. NOTE: When powering on the sled, the video monitor can take from several seconds to over 2 minutes to display an image, depending on the amount of memory installed in the system. NOTE: On ACPI-compliant operating systems, turning off the sled using the power button causes the sled to perform a graceful shutdown before power to the sled is turned off. NOTE: To force an ungraceful shutdown, press and hold the power button for five seconds. 6 VGA connector Connects a VGA display to the system. 7 Serial connector Connects a serial device to the system. 8 BMC management port Dedicated management port. 9 Ethernet connector 2 Embedded 10/100/1000 Mbit NIC connector. 10 Ethernet connector 1 Embedded 10/100/1000 Mbit NIC connector. 11 Sled identification indicator Lights blue to identify a particular system and system board. 12 Handle Hold to pull the sled from the enclosure. Item Indicator, Button, or Connector Icon Description 2 114 About Your System NIC Indicator Codes Figure 1-2. NIC Indicators 1 link indicator 2 activity indicator Indicator Status Indicator Code Link indicator Solid amber Linking at 100 Mbps port speed Solid green Linking at 1 Gbps port speed (maximum) Blinking green Linking at 1 Gbps port speed Network activity is present • Pre OS POST • OS without driver • OS with driver Blinks at speed relative to packet density Off Linking at 10 Mbps port speed Activity indicator Solid green No activity Blinking green Transmit or receive activity Off IdleAbout Your System 15 Figure 1-3. NIC Indicators (BMC management port) 1 link indicator 2 activity indicator Indicator Status Indicator Code Link indicator Blinking amber Linking at 10 Mbps port speed Blinking green Linking at 100 Mbps port speed (maximum) Activity indicator Solid green No activity Blinking green Transmit or receive activity Off Idle16 About Your System Power and System Board Indicator Codes The indicators on the front of the sled display status codes during system startup. For location of the indicators on the front panel, see Figure 1-1. Table 1-1. Power and System Board Indicator Codes Indicator Color Status Indicator Code Power-on indicator Green Solid Sled power is on (S0) Amber Off Green Solid BMC critical condition event in power off mode (S4/S5) Amber Blinking Green Blinking BMC critical condition event in power on mode (S0) Amber Blinking System identification indicator Blue Solid The IPMI via Chassis Identify Command On or ID Button Press ID On is generated. Blue Blinking Only the IPMI via Chassis Identify Command Blink On is generated. Off The IPMI via Chassis Identify Command Off or ID Button Press ID Off is generated.About Your System 17 BMC Heartbeat Indicator Codes The system board includes a BMC heartbeat indicator (LED17) for debugging the Baseboard Management Controller (BMC). The BMC heartbeat indicator lights green when power is supplied to the sled and blinks green when the BMC firmware is ready. Figure 1-4. BMC Heartbeat Indicator 1 system board 2 BMC heartbeat indicator18 About Your System Service Tag The following illustration provides location of the Service Tag number on the C8220 single-wide compute sled. Figure 1-5. Service Tag Location for C8220 Single-Wide Compute SledAbout Your System 19 POST Error Code Collecting System Event Log for Investigation Whenever possible, the system BIOS will output the current boot progress codes on the video screen. Progress codes are 32-bit quantities plus optional data. The 32-bit numbers include class, subclass, and operation information. The class and subclass fields point to the type of hardware that is being initialized. The operation field represents the specific initialization activity. Based on the data bit availability to display progress codes, a progress code can be customized to fit the data width. The higher the data bit, the higher the granularity of information that can be sent on the progress port. The progress codes may be reported by the system BIOS or option ROMs. The Response section in the following table may be divided into 3 types: • Warning or Not an error – The message is displayed on the screen. An error record is logged to the SEL. The system will continue booting with a degraded state. The user may want to replace the erroneous unit. • Pause – The message is displayed on the screen, an error is logged to the SEL, and user input is required to continue. The user can take immediate corrective action or choose to continue booting. • Halt – The message is displayed on the screen, an error is logged to the SEL, and the system cannot boot unless the error is resolved. The user needs to replace the faulty part and restart the system. Error Code Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective Actions 0010h Local Console Resource Conflict Pause Video device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting the Video Subsystem" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0011h Local Console Controller Error Pause Video device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting the Video Subsystem" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203.20 About Your System 0012h Local Console Output Error Pause Video device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting the Video Subsystem" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0013h ISA IO Controller Error Pause ISA device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting Expansion Cards" on page 189. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0014h ISA IO Resource Conflict Pause ISA device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting Expansion Cards" on page 189. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0015h ISA IO Controller Error Pause ISA device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting Expansion Cards" on page 189. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0016h ISA Floppy Controller Error Pause Floppy device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a USB Device" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0017h ISA Floppy Input Error Pause Floppy device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a USB Device" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0018h ISA Floppy Output Error Pause Floppy device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a USB Device" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Error Code Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective ActionsAbout Your System 21 0019h USB Read Error Pause USB port initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a USB Device" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 001Ah USB Write Error Pause USB port initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a USB Device" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 001Bh USB Interface Error Pause USB port initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a USB Device" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 001Ch Mouse Interface Error Pause Mouse device initialization failed To enable USB device, see "USB Configuration" on page 77. See "Troubleshooting a USB Device" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 001Eh Keyboard Not Detected Pause No keyboard detected To enable USB device, see "USB Configuration" on page 77. See "Troubleshooting a USB Device" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 001Fh Keyboard Controller Error Pause Keyboard controller initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a USB Device" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Error Code Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective Actions22 About Your System 0020h Keyboard Stuck Key Error Pause Keyboard key stuck Disconnect and reconnect the the keyboard to the compute sled. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0021h Keyboard Locked Error Pause Keyboard locked Disconnect and reconnect the the keyboard to the compute sled. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0023h Memory Correctable Error Pause Memory correctable error detected Remove AC power to the system for 10 seconds and restart the system. See "Troubleshooting System Memory" on page 185. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0024h Memory Uncorrectable Error Pause Memory uncorrectable error detected See "Troubleshooting System Memory" on page 185. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0025h Memory NonSpecific Error Pause Memory nonspecific error detected See "Troubleshooting System Memory" on page 185. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0026h MP Service Self Test Error Pause MP service self test error detected See "Troubleshooting Processors" on page 190. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Error Code Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective ActionsAbout Your System 23 0027h PCI IO Controller Error Pause PCI device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting Expansion Cards" on page 189. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0028h PCI IO Read Error Pause PCI device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting Expansion Cards" on page 189. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0029h PCI IO Write Error Pause PCI device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting Expansion Cards" on page 189. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 002Ah Serial Port Not Detected Pause Serial device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a Serial I/O Device" on page 179. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 002Bh Serial Port Controller Error Pause Serial device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a Serial I/O Device" on page 179. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 002Ch Serial Port Input Error Pause Serial device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a Serial I/O Device" on page 179. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 002Dh Serial Port Output Error Pause Serial device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a Serial I/O Device" on page 179. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Error Code Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective Actions24 About Your System 002Eh Microcode Update Error Pause Processor microcode update error Check microcode. A BIOS update is required. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 002Fh No Microcode Be Updated Pause Processor microcode load failed Ensure that your processors match and conform to the type described in the processor technical specifications outlined in your system’s Getting Started Guide. 8012h SATA 0 Device Not Found Pause SATA 0 device not found Check if the SATA port 0 is enabled. See "SATA Configuration" on page 67. Install a SATA device to SATA port 0. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 8013h SATA 1 Device Not Found Pause SATA 1 device not found Check if the SATA port1 is enabled. See "SATA Configuration" on page 67. Install a SATA device to SATA port 1. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 8014h SATA 2 Device Not Found Pause SATA 2 device not found Check if the SATA port 2 is enabled. See "SATA Configuration" on page 67. Install a SATA device to SATA port 2. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Error Code Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective ActionsAbout Your System 25 8015h SATA 3 Device Not Found Pause SATA 3 device not found Check if the SATA port 3 is enabled. See "SATA Configuration" on page 67. Install a SATA device to SATA port 3. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 8016h SATA 4 Device Not Found Pause SATA 4 device not found Check if the SATA port 4 is enabled. See "SATA Configuration" on page 67. Install a SATA device to SATA port 4. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 8017h SATA 5 Device Not Found Pause SATA 5 device not found Check if the SATA port 5 is enabled. See "SATA Configuration" on page 67. Install a SATA device to SATA port 5. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 8018h Sparing Mode is not be Configured!!, Please check Memory Configuration!! Pause Memory Sparing Mode Failed Check if the memory configuration is set to Sparing mode. See "Memory Configuration" on page 65. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 8019h Mirror Mode is not be Configured!!, Please check Memory Configuration!! Pause Memory Mirror Mode Failed Check if the memory configuration is set to Sparing mode. See "Memory Configuration" on page 65. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Error Code Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective Actions26 About Your System 8020h Supervisor and User Passwords have been cleared Pause Supervisor and User Passwords have been cleared Reset password. See "System Board Jumper Settings" on page 195. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 8020h CMOS Battery Error Pause No CMOS battery See "Troubleshooting the System Battery" on page 192. Error Code Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective ActionsAbout Your System 27 System Event Log Processor Error Message: “Processor Sensor, IERR error, Processor 1” Table 1-2. Processor Error Byte Field Value Description 1 NetFunLun 10h 2 Platform Event Command 02h 3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS 4 Event Message Format Version 04h Event Message Format Revision. 04h for this specification 5 Sensor Type 07h Processor 6 Sensor Number 04h Processor Sensor Number (depends on platform) 7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code 8 Event Data1 AXh 00h: IERR 01h: Thermal Trip 02h: FRB1/BIST Failure 03h: FRB2/Hang in POST Failure 04h: FBR3/Processer Startup/Initialization Failure 0Ah: Processor Automatically Throttled 9 Event Data2 XXh 00h: Processor1 01h: Processor2 02h: Processor3 04h: Processor4 10 Event Data3 FFh FFh: Not Present28 About Your System Memory Ecc Message: “Memory Sensor, Correctable ECC error, SBE warning threshold, CPU1 DIMM_A1” Table 1-3. Memory ECC Byte Field Value Description 1 NetFunLun 10h 2 Platform Event Command 02h 3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS 4 Event Message Format Version 04h Event Message Format Revision. 04h for this specification 5 Sensor Type 0Ch Memory 6 Sensor Number 60h Memory Sensor Number (depend on platform) 7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code 8 Event Data1 AXh 00h: Correctable ECC Error 01h: Uncorrectable ECC Error 03h: Memory Scrub Failed 04h: Memory Device Disabled 08h: SpareAbout Your System 29 9 Event Data2 XXh Bit 7:4 0x00: SBE warning threshold 0x01: SBE critical threshold 0x0F: Unspecified Bit 3:0 0x00: CPU1 DIMM A1-8 slots (1~8) 0x01: CPU2 DIMM B1-8 slots (9~16) 0x02: CPU3 DIMM C1-8 slots (17~24) 0x03: CPU4 DIMM D1-8 slots (25~32) And so on… 10 Event Data3 XXh DIMM bit-map locatation of bits Bit 0=1: DIMM1 error event Bit 1=1: DIMM2 error event … Bit7=1: DIMM8 error event Table 1-3. Memory ECC Byte Field Value Description30 About Your System PCIe Error Message: “Critical Interrupt Sensor, PCI PERR, Device#, Function#, Bus# ” Table 1-4. PCIe Error Byte Field Value Description 1 NetFunLun 10h 2 Platform Event Command 02h 3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS 4 Event Message Format Version 04h Event Message Format Revision. 04h for this specification 5 Sensor Type 13h Critical Interrupt 6 Sensor Number 73h PCI Sensor ID (depend on platform) 7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code 8 Event Data1 AXh 04h: PCI PERR 05h: PCI SERR 07h: Bus Correctable Error 08h: Bus Uncorrectable Error 0Ah: Bus Fatal Error 9 Event Data2 XXh Bit 7:3Device Number Bit 2:0Function Number 10 Event Data3 XXh Bit 7:0 Bus NumberAbout Your System 31 IOH Core Error Message: “Critical Interrupt Sensor, Fatal Error, xxxx bit, QPI[0] Error ” Table 1-5. IOH Core Error Byte Field Value Description 1 NetFunLun 10h 2 Platform Event Command 02h 3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS 4 Event Message Format Version 04h Event Message Format Revision. 04h for this specification 5 Sensor Type C0h OEM Defined Interrupt 6 Sensor Number XXh 71h: QPI Sensor ID (depend on platform) 72h: INT Sensor ID (depend on platform) 7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code 8 Event Data1 AXh 07h: Core 08h: Non-Fatal 0Ah: Fatal 9 Event Data2 XXh Local Error Bit 10 Event Data3 XXh 00h: QPI[0] Error 01h: QPI[1] Error 02h: QPI[2] Error 03h: QPI[3] Error 04h: QPI[0] Protocol Error 05h: QPI[1] Protocol Error 06h: QPI[2] Protocol Error 07h: QPI[3] Protocol Error 23h: Miscellaneous Error 24h: IOH Core Error32 About Your System SB Error Message: “Critical Interrupt Sensor, Correctable, MCU Parity Error ” Table 1-6. SB Error Byte Field Value Description 1 NetFunLun 10h 2 Platform Event Command 02h 3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS 4 Event Message Format Version 04h Event Message Format Revision. 04h for this specification 5 Sensor Type 13h Critical Interrupt 6 Sensor Number 77h SB Sensor ID (depend on platform) 7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code 8 Event Data1 AXh 07h: Correctable 08h: Uncorrectable 9 Event Data2 XXh Bit 7:5Reserved Local error bit number (4 ~ 0) 00000b: HT Periodic CRC Error 00001b: HT Protocol Error 00010b: HT Flow-Control Buffer Overflow 00011b: HT Response Error 00100b: HT Per-Packet CRC Error 00101b: HT Retry Counter Error 00111b: MCU Parity Error 10 Event Data3 FFh FFh: Not PresentAbout Your System 33 POST Start Event Message: “System Event, POST starts with BIOS xx.xx.xx” Table 1-7. POST Start Event Byte Field Value Description 1 NetFunLun 10h 2 Platform Event Command 02h 3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS 4 Event Message Format Version 04h Event Message Format Revision. 04h for this specification 5 Sensor Type 12h System Event 6 Sensor Number 81h POST Start (depend on platform) 7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code 8 Event Data1 AXh 01h: OEM System Boot Event 9 Event Data2 XXh 7~4: BIOS 1st Field Version (0~15) 3~0: BIOS 2nd Field Version higher 4bits (0~63) 10 Event Data3 XXh 7~6: BIOS 2nd Field Version lower 2bits (0~63) 5~0: BIOS 3rd Field Version (0~63)34 About Your System POST End Event Table 1-8. POST End Event Byte Field Value Description 1 NetFunLun 10h 2 Platform Event Command 02h 3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS 4 Event Message Format Version 04h Event Message Format Revision. 04h for this specification 5 Sensor Type 12h System Event 6 Sensor Number 85h POST End (depend on platform) 7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code 8 Event Data1 AXh 01h: OEM System Boot Event 9 Event Data2 XXh Bit 7 = Boot Type 0b: PC Compatible Boot (Legacy) 1b: uEFI Boot Bit 3:0 = Boot Device 0001b: Force PXE Boot 0010b: NIC PXE Boot 0011b: Hard Disk Boot 0100b: RAID HDD Boot 0101b: USB Storage Boot 0111b: CD/DVD ROM Boot 1000b: iSCSI Boot 1001b: uEFI Shell 1010b: ePSA Diagnostic Boot 10 Event Data3 FFh FFh: Not PresentAbout Your System 35 POST Error Code Event Message: “System Firmware Progress, POST error code: UBLBh.” Table 1-9. POST Error Code Event Byte Field Value Description 1 NetFunLun 10h 2 Platform Event Command 02h 3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS 4 Event Message Format Version 04h Event Message Format Revision. 04h for this specification 5 Sensor Type 0Fh System Firmware Progress 6 Sensor Number 86h POST Error (depend on platform) 7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code 8 Event Data1 AXh 00: System Firmware Error (POST Error) 9 Event Data2 XXh Upper Byte 10 Event Data3 XXh Lower Byte36 About Your System BIOS Recovery Event Table 1-10. BIOS Recovery Event Byte Field Value Description 1 NetFunLun 10h 2 Platform Event Command 02h 3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS 4 Event Message Format Version 04h Event Message Format Revision. 04h for this specification 5 Sensor Type 12h System Event 6 Sensor Number 89h BIOS Recovery fail (depend on platform) 7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code 8 Event Data1 AXh 01h: OEM BIOS recovery Event 9 Event Data2 XXh 01h:Start Recovery 02h:Recovery Success 03h:Load Image Fail 04h:Signed Fail 10 Event Data3 FFh FFh: Not PresentAbout Your System 37 ME Fail Event SEL Generator ID Table 1-11. BIOS Recovery Event Byte Field Value Description 1 NetFunLun 10h 2 Platform Event Command 02h 3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS 4 Event Message Format Version 04h Event Message Format Revision. 04h for this specification 5 Sensor Type 12h System Event 6 Sensor Number 8Ah ME fail (depend on platform) 7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code 8 Event Data1 AXh 01h: OEM ME fail Event 9 Event Data2 XXh 01h:ME fail 10 Event Data3 FFh FFh: Not Present Table 1-12. SEL Generator ID Generator ID BIOS 0x0001 BMC 0x0020 ME 0x002C Windows 2008 0x013738 About Your System BMC The following table includes an overview of the system sensors. In the Offset column: • SI = Sensor Initialization • SC = Sensor Capabilities • AM = Assertion Mask • DM = Deassertion Mask • RM = Reading Mask • TM = Settable/Readable Threshold Mask Table 1-13. Sensor Summary Sensor Number Sensor Name Sensor Type Event/Reading Type Offset 01h SEL Fullness Event Logging Disabled (10h) Sensor-specific (6Fh) SI: 67h SC: 40h AM: 0035h DM: 0000h RM: 0035h 02h P1 Thermal Trip Processor (07h) Sensor-specific (6Fh) SI: 01h SC: 40h AM: 0002h DM: 0000h RM: 0002h 03h P2 Thermal Trip Processor (07h) Sensor-specific (6Fh) SI: 01h SC: 40h AM: 0002h DM: 0000h RM: 0002hAbout Your System 39 Table 1-14. Sensor Summary (continued) Sensor Number Sensor Name Sensor Type Event/Reading Type Offset 04h CPU ERR2 Processor (07h) Sensor-specific (6Fh) SI: 01h SC: 40h AM: 0001h DM: 0000h RM: 0001h 05h 12V Standby Voltage (02h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 59h AM: 7A95h DM: 7A95h TM: 3F3Fh 06h 5V Voltage (02h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 59h AM: 7A95h DM: 7A95h TM: 3F3Fh 07h 5V Standby Voltage (02h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 59h AM: 7A95h DM: 7A95h TM: 3F3Fh 08h 3.3V Voltage (02h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 59h AM: 7A95h DM: 7A95h TM: 3F3Fh40 About Your System Table 1-15. Sensor Summary (continued) Sensor Number Sensor Name Sensor Type Event/Reading Type Offset 09h 3.3V Standby Voltage (02h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 59h AM: 7A95h DM: 7A95h TM: 3F3Fh 0Ah Battery low Battery (29h) Sensor-specific (6Fh) SI: 67h SC: 40h AM: 0001h DM: 0000h RM: 0001h 41h MEZZ1 TEMP Temperature (01h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 68h AM: 0A80h DM: 0A80h TM: 3838h 41h CPU1 Temp Temperature (01h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 68h AM: 0A80h DM: 0A80h TM: 3838h 42h CPU2 Temp Temperature (01h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 68h AM: 0A80h DM: 0A80h TM: 3838hAbout Your System 41 Table 1-16. Sensor Summary (continued) Sensor Number Sensor Name Sensor Type Event/Reading Type Offset 43h DIMM ZONE 1 Temp Temperature (01h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 68h AM: 0A80h DM: 0A80h TM: 3838h 44h DIMM ZONE 1 Temp Temperature (01h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 68h AM: 0A80h DM: 0A80h TM: 3838h 45h PCH Temp Temperature (01h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 68h AM: 0A80h DM: 0A80h TM: 3838h 60h Memory Memory (0Ch) Sensor-specific (6Fh) SI: 01h SC: 40h AM: 0023h DM: 0000h RM: 0023h A0h Watchdog Watchdog 2 (23h) Sensor-specific (6Fh) SI: 67h SC: 40h AM: 000Fh DM: 0000h RM: 000Fh42 About Your System Table 1-17. Sensor Summary (continued) Sensor Number Sensor Name Sensor Type Event/Reading Type Offset A1h Soft Reset System Boot/ Restart Initiated (1Dh) Sensor-specific (6Fh) SI: 01h SC: 40h AM: 0004h DM: 0000h RM: 0004h A2h AC lost Power Unit (09h) Sensor-specific (6Fh) SI: 01h SC: 40h AM: 0010h DM: 0000h RM: 0010h A3h Power off Power Unit (09h) Sensor-specific (6Fh) SI: 01h SC: 40h AM: 0002h DM: 0000h RM: 0002hAbout Your System 43 Other Information You May Need WARNING: See the safety and regulatory information that shipped with your system. Warranty information may be included within this document or as a separate document. • The Getting Started Guide provides an overview of rack installation, system features, setting up your system, and technical specifications. • The PowerEdge C8000 Hardware Owner’s Manual for information about the server enclosure features, troubleshooting, and component replacement.. This document is available at support.dell.com/manuals. • The Baseboard Management Controller Guide provides information about installing and using the systems management utility. See Using the Baseboard Management Controller Guide at support.dell.com/manuals. NOTE: Always check for updates on support.dell.com/manuals and read the updates first because they often supersede information in other documents. 44 About Your SystemUsing the System Setup Program 45 2 Using the System Setup Program The System Setup program is the BIOS program that enables you to manage your system hardware and specify BIOS-level options. From the System Setup program, you can: • Change the NVRAM settings after you add or remove hardware • View the system hardware configuration • Enable or disable integrated devices • Set performance and power management thresholds • Manage system security System Setup Menu The system employs the latest Insyde® BIOS, which is stored in Flash memory. The Flash memory supports the Plug and Play specification, and contains a System Setup program, the Power On Self Test (POST) routine, and the PCI auto-configuration utility. This system supports system BIOS shadowing which enables the BIOS to execute from 64-bit onboard write-protected DRAM. You can configure items such as: • Hard-drives, diskette drives, and peripherals • Password protection • Power management features The Setup utility should be executed under the following conditions: • When changing the system configuration • When a configuration error is detected by the system and you are prompted to make changes to the Setup utility • When redefining the communication ports to prevent any conflicts46 Using the System Setup Program • When changing the password or making other changes to the security setup NOTE: Only items in brackets [ ] can be modified, Items that are not in brackets are display only. System Setup Options at Boot You can initiate Setup by pressing the respective key during the POST: Using the System Setup Program Navigation Keys The following table lists the keys found in the legend bar with their corresponding alternates and functions: Keystroke Description Enter the System Setup Load customized defaults Load optimal defaults in Setup menu Save and exit Setup Keys Function F1 General Help or  Select Screen or  Select Item  Change Option/Field Tab Select Field Esc Exit Enter Go to Sub Screen Home Go to Top of Screen End Go to Bottom of ScreenUsing the System Setup Program 47 General Help In addition to the Item Specific Help window, the Setup Utility also provides a General Help screen. This screen can be called up from any menu by pressing . The General Help screen lists the legend keys with their corresponding alternates and functions. To exit the help window, press or . Console Redirection The console redirection allows a remote user to diagnose and fix problems on a server, which has not successfully booted the operating system (OS). The centerpiece of the console redirection is the BIOS Console. The BIOS Console is a Flash ROM-resident utility that redirects input and output over a serial or modem connection. The BIOS supports console redirection to a serial port. If serial port based headless server support is provided by the system, the system must provide support for redirection of all BIOS driven console I/O to the serial port. The driver for the serial console must be capable of supporting the functionality documented in the ANSI Terminal Definition. The console redirection behavior shows a change of string displays that reduce the data transfer rate in the serial port and cause the absence or an incomplete POST screen. If you see an abnormal POST screen after you connect to the console, it is recommended to press to reflash the screen. Enabling and Configuring Console Redirection Console redirection is configured through the System Setup program. There are three options available to establish console redirection on the system. • External serial port • Internal serial connector as Serial Over LAN (SOL) • BMC SOL48 Using the System Setup Program Enabling and Configuring Console Redirection Via COM1 To activate console redirection via COM1, you must configure the following settings: 1 Connect the serial cable to the serial port and host system. See Figure 1-1 for the location of the serial port on the sled. 2 Press immediately after a power-on or reboot to enter System Setup. 3 In the System Setup screen, select the Server menu and press . 4 In the Server screen, select Remote Access Configuration and press . 5 In the Remote Access Configuration screen, verify the following settings: • Remote Access: Enabled • Serial port number: COM1 • Serial Port Mode: 115200 8,n,1 • Flow Control: None • Redirection After BIOS POST: Always • Terminal Type: ANSI See "Remote Access Configuration" on page 83 for details. Make sure the last four options syncs with the host and client. 6 Press to return to the System Setup screen. Press again, and a message prompts you to save the changes. Enabling and Configuring Console Redirection Via COM2 SOL To activate console redirection via COM2 SOL, you must configure the following settings: 1 Connect the serial cable to the serial port and host system. See Figure 1-1 for the location of the serial port on the sled. 2 Press immediately after a power-on or reboot to enter System Setup. 3 In the System Setup screen, select the Server menu and press . 4 In the Server screen, select Remote Access Configuration and press .Using the System Setup Program 49 5 In the Remote Access Configuration screen, verify the following settings: • Remote Access: Enabled • Serial port number: COM2 as SOL • Serial Port Mode: 115200 8,n,1 • Flow Control: None • Redirection After BIOS POST: Always • Terminal Type: ANSI See "Remote Access Configuration" on page 83 for details. Make sure the host and client are on the same network. 6 Press to return to the System Setup screen. Press again, and a message prompts you to save the changes. Enabling and Configuring Console Redirection Via BMC SOL When using the BMC management port, you have two options for connecting and managing servers: Dedicated-NIC mode and Shared-NIC mode. The following procedures show the setup option of the BMC management port through a Dedicated-NIC or Shared-NIC. To activate console redirection via a dedicated BMC management port, you must configure the following settings: 1 Connect the network cable to the BMC management port. See Figure 1-1 for the location of the BMC management port on the sled. 2 Press immediately after a power-on or reboot to enter System Setup. 3 In the System Setup screen, select the Server menu and press . 4 In the Server screen, select Remote Access Configuration and press . 5 In the Remote Access Configuration screen, verify the following settings: • Remote Access: Enabled • Serial port number: COM2 as SOL • Serial Port Mode: 115200 8,n,1 • Flow Control: None • Redirection After BIOS POST: Always50 Using the System Setup Program • Terminal Type: ANSI See "Remote Access Configuration" on page 83 for details. Make sure the last four options syncs with the host and client. 6 In the Server screen, select BMC LAN Configuration and press . 7 In the BMC LAN Configuration screen, verify the following settings: • BMC LAN Port Configuration: Dedicated-NIC • BMC NIC IP Source: DHCP or Static (Use DHCP if your network servers are using automatic assignment of IP addresses) • IP Address: 192.168.001.003 • Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.000 • Gateway Address: 000.000.000.000 See "Set BMC LAN Configuration" on page 82 for details. Make sure the host and client are on the same network 8 Press to return to the System Setup screen. Press again, and a message prompts you to save the changes. To activate console redirection via a shared BMC management port, you must configure the following settings: 1 Connect the network cable to the Ethernet connector 1. See Figure 1-1 for the location of the Ethernet connector 1 on the sled. 2 Press immediately after a power-on or reboot to enter System Setup. 3 In the System Setup screen, select the Server menu and press . 4 In the Server screen, select Remote Access Configuration and press . 5 In the Remote Access Configuration screen, verify the following settings: • Remote Access: Enabled • Serial port number: COM2 • Serial Port Mode: 115200 8,n,1 • Flow Control: None • Redirection After BIOS POST: Always • Terminal Type: ANSIUsing the System Setup Program 51 See "Remote Access Configuration" on page 83 for details. Make sure the last four options syncs with the host and client. 6 In the Server screen, select BMC LAN Configuration and press . 7 In the BMC LAN Configuration screen, verify the following settings: • BMC LAN Port Configuration: Shared-NIC • BMC NIC IP Source: DHCP or Static (Use DHCP if your network servers are using automatic assignment of IP addresses) • IP Address: 192.168.001.003 • Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.000 • Gateway Address: 000.000.000.000 See "Set BMC LAN Configuration" on page 82 for details. Make sure the host and client are on the same network 8 Press to return to the System Setup screen. Press again, and a message prompts you to save the changes. Serial Port Connection List Signal Type Setup Option OS Setting Output Remote Access Serial Port Number Serial Port Address Serial Console Redirection Enabled COM1 3F8h/2F8h ttyS0 Serial Port Enabled COM1 2F8h/3F8h ttyS1 BMC Serial Over LAN Enabled COM2 as SOL 3F8h/2F8h ttyS1 Management Port Enabled COM2 as SOL 2F8h/3F8h ttyS052 Using the System Setup Program Main Menu The main menu displays information about your system boards and BIOS. Main Screen NOTE: Press to enter the BIOS debug mode and reset the BIOS to default settings. NOTE: The options for the System Setup program change based on the system configuration. NOTE: The System Setup program defaults are listed under their respective options in the following sections, where applicable. Using the System Setup Program 53 System Settings Option Description System Date Scroll to this item to adjust the date. Use , or to select a field. Use [+] or [-] to configure system date. System Time Scroll to this item to adjust the time. Use , or to select a field. Use [+] or [-] to configure system time. Product Name Displays the system product name. BIOS Version Displays the BIOS version. NOTE: Check this version number when updating BIOS from the manufacturer. BIOS Build Date Displays the date the BIOS was created. Service Tag Displays the system service tag number. The service tag field should match what is physically on the service tag of the system. Asset Tag Displays the system asset tag number. MRC Version Displays the Memory Reference Code (MRC) firmware version. ME Version Displays the Manageability Engine (ME) firmware version. BMC Version Displays the Baseboard Management Controller (BMC) firmware version. ePPID Displays the information from Electronic Piece Part Identification (ePPID) label. NIC1 MAC Address Displays the Media Access Control (MAC) address for the NIC1 connector. NIC2 MAC Address Displays the MAC address for the NIC2 connector. BMC NIC MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the BMC management port. Processor Type Displays the processor type. Processor Speed Displays the maximum speed of the processor. Processor Core Displays the processor core. System Memory Size Displays total memory size installed on the system board.54 Using the System Setup Program System Memory Speed Displays the maximum speed of your system memory. System Memory Voltage Displays the maximum voltage of your system memory. Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 55 Advanced Menu The advanced menu displays a table of items that defines advanced information about your system. Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. CAUTION: Making incorrect settings to items on these pages may cause the system to malfunction. Unless you have experience adjusting these items, it is recommended that you leave these settings at the default values. If making settings to items on these pages causes your system to malfunction or prevents the system from booting, open BIOS and choose "Load Optimal Defaults" in the Exit menu to boot up normally.56 Using the System Setup Program Power Management Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Power Management Option Description Power Management (OS Control default) Select a system power management mode. • Maximum Performance: Sets the system power management to maximum performance. • OS Control: Allows the operating system to control the power management. • Node Manager: Enables Node Manager to moderate power consumption and performance of the processors in the compute sled. Node manager delivers power reporting and power capping functionality for individual compute sleds. Using the System Setup Program 57 CPU Power Capping (P-State 0 default) Select a processor performance state (P-state). Options are [P-State 0], [P-State 1], [P-State 2], [P-State 3] and [P-state 4]. NOTE: This option is enabled when Power Management is set to OS Control mode. Chassis Power Management Press to set the different power management options that must be provided to support throttling and capping. Energy Efficient Policy (Max Performance default) Select a power policy option. • Max Performance: Sets the processors at the highest performance state at all times. • Balanced: Offers full performance and saves power by reducing system power consumption during periods of inactivity. • Low Power: Use different processor power saving modes (C-states) to reduce system power consumption. NOTE: This option works when the OS does not support power management control of processor. Option Description58 Using the System Setup Program Chassis Power Management Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Chassis Power Management Option Description Chassis PSU Configuration Press to configure the chassis power supply. This option provides management and monitoring of the PSUs and allows you to set the minimum PSU requirements for the server. Power Capping Press to set PSU power and server loading limited in selected watts. Emergency Throttling Press to set sled level policy when emergency throttling event is triggered. Using the System Setup Program 59 Chassis PSU Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Chassis PSU Configuration Option Description Required Power Supplies (1 default) Select the number of power supplies to provide load-shared power to run the sleds in the enclosure. Options are [1], [2], [3], and [4]. Redundant Power Supplies (1 default) Select the number of power supplies to provide power redundancy to the enclosure. Options are [0], [1], and [2].60 Using the System Setup Program Power Capping Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Power Capping Option Description Chassis Level Capping (Disabled default) Enables or disables chassis level capping. Sled Power Capping (0 default) Specify the maximum amount of power to be consumed by the sled. Settings range from 0 or 100 to 1000 W. Using the System Setup Program 61 Emergency Throttling Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Emergency Throttling Option Description Sled Level Policy (Chassis Level default) Select a sled level policy when an emergency throttle event is triggered. • Chassis Level: Overrides the chassis level policy for a specific server. • Throttling: Allows compute sled throttling when an emergency throttle event is triggered. • Power Off: Turns off the compute sled when an emergency throttle event is triggered. • Do Nothing: The compute sled will do nothing when an emergency throttle event is triggered. 62 Using the System Setup Program CPU Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. CPU Configuration Chassis Level Policy (Throttling default) Select a chassis level policy when an emergency throttle event is triggered. This option can be configured when the Sled Level Policy is set as Chassis Level. • Throttling: Allows chassis sled throttling when an emergency throttle event is triggered. • Power Off: The server power turns off when an emergency throttle event is triggered. Option Description Active Processor Cores (All Cores default) Allows you to control the number of enabled core in each processor. Options are [1], [2], [4], and [All Cores]. Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 63 Frequency Ratio (Auto default) Sets the frequency multipliers as maximum level. Max CPUID Value Limit (Disabled default) Some OS, which is (NT4), fails if the value returned in EAX is >3 when CPUID instruction is executed with EAX=0. When enabled, this setting limits CPUID function to 3. When disabled, this setting disables the 3 or less. Virtualization Technology (Disabled default) Allows you to set the Virtualization Technology in applicable CPUs. Enabled (applicable CPUs)/Disabled (unusable in any OS). QPI Frequency (Auto default) Select the link speed. Options are [6.4GTs], [7.2GTs], and [8.0GTs]. Turbo Mode (Enabled default) Enables or disables processor Turbo mode (Requires enabling the EMTTM.). C-States (Enabled default) When enabled, the processor(s) can operate in all available power C states. When disabled, the user power C states are not available for the processor. C1E State (Enabled default) Enables or disables the Enhanced Halt (C1E) state. NOTE: Disable this option at your own risk. When you disable this option, pop up message appears on the screen and warning appears in the System Setup Help. C6 State (Enabled default) Enables or disables the processor C6 state. NOTE: Disable this option at your own risk. When you disable this option, pop up message appears on the screen and warning appears in the System Setup Help. C7 State (Enabled default) Enables or disables the processor C7 state. NOTE: Disable this option at your own risk. When you disable this option, pop up message appears on the screen and warning appears in the System Setup Help. XD Bit Capability (Enabled default) Enables or disables the processor’s Execute Disable (XD) Memory Protection Technology feature. Option Description64 Using the System Setup Program Prefetch Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Prefetch Configuration Direct Cache Access (Enabled default) Enables or disables the direct cache access. Hyper-Threading Technology (Enabled default) Enables or disables the Hyper-Threading technology. Prefetch Configuration Press to configure the prefetch settings. Option Description Adjacent Cache Line Prefetch (Enabled default) Enables or disables system optimization for sequential memory access. Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 65 Memory Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Memory Configuration Hardware Prefetcher (Enabled default) Enables or disables the speculative unit within the processor(s). DCU Streamer Prefetcher (Enabled default) Enables or disables Data Cache Unit (DCU) streamer prefetcher. DCU IP Prefetcher (Enabled default) Enables or disables DCU IP Prefetcher. Option Description Memory Frequency (Auto default) Select an operating memory frequency. Options are [Auto], [800], [1066], [1333], and [1600]. Option Description66 Using the System Setup Program Memory Turbo Mode (Disabled default) Enables or disables the memory turbo mode. Memory Throttling Mode (Enabled default) Enables or disables the memory to run in closed-loop thermal throttling mode. Memory Operating Mode (Optimizer Mode default) Select the type of memory operation if a valid memory configuration is installed. • Optimizer Mode: The two memory controllers run in parallel 64-bit mode for improved memory performance. • Spare Mode: Enables memory sparing • Mirror Mode: Enables memory mirroring • Advanced ECC Mode: Controllers are joined in 128-bit mode running multi-bit advanced ECC. Demand Scrubbing (Enabled default) Enables or disables DRAM scrubbing. DRAM scrubbing is the ability to write corrected data back to the memory once a correctable error is detected on read transaction. Patrol Scrubbing (Enabled default) Enables or disables patrol scrubbing. Patrol scrubbing proactively searches the system memory, repairing correctable errors. Memory Operating Voltage (Auto default) If set to Auto, the system sets the voltage to an optimal value based on the capacity of the installed memory modules. You can also set the voltage of the memory module to a higher value (1.5 V) provided that the modules support multiple voltages. Options are [Auto], [1.5 volts], and [1.35 volts]. NOTE: BIOS will auto restrict selection if DIMM is not supporting low voltage. NUMA Support (Enabled default) Enables or disables Non-Uniform Memory Access (NUMA) support to improve processor performance. NOTE: This option is available for NUMA systems that allow memory interleaving across all processor nodes. Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 67 SATA Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.68 Using the System Setup Program SATA Configuration Option Description Embedded SATA Controller (AHCI default) Select an operation mode for the onboard SATA controller. • Off: Disables the SATA controller. This token applies to the first onboard SATA controller. • IDE: Enables the SATA controller to run in IDE mode. Sets the device class code as IDE and uses PCI IRQ (referred as Native mode). This token applies to the first onboard SATA controller. • AHCI: Enables the SATA controller to run in AHCI mode. Sets the device class code as SATA and sets up the AHCI BARs and registers. This token applies to the first onboard SATA controller. • RAID: Enables the SATA controller to run in RAID mode. Sets the device class code as RAID and executes the RAID Option ROM. This token applies to the first onboard SATA controller. This provides access to the RAID setup utility during system bootup. Embedded SATA Link Rate (Auto default) Select a SATA link speed. • Auto: Sets the SATA link speed at maximum 6.0 Gbps. • 1.5 Gbps: Sets the SATA link speed to 1.5 Gbps. For power consumption. • 3.0 Gbps: Sets the SATA link speed to 3.0 Gbps. SATA Port 0 (Auto default) When set to off, turns off the 1st Serial ATA drive controller. When set to auto, enables BIOS support for the 1st Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error if not present). SATA Port 1 (Auto default) When set to off, turns off the 2nd Serial ATA drive controller. When set to auto, enables BIOS support for the 2nd Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error if not present).Using the System Setup Program 69 SATA Port 2 (Auto default) When set to off, turns off the 3rd Serial ATA drive controller. When set to auto, enables BIOS support for the 3rd Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error if not present). SATA Port 3 (Auto default) When set to off, turns off the 4th Serial ATA drive controller. When set to auto, enables BIOS support for the 4th Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error if not present). SATA Port 4 (Auto default) When set to off, turns off the 5th Serial ATA drive controller. When set to auto, enables BIOS support for the 5th Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error if not present). SATA Port 5 (Auto default) When set to off, turns off the 6th Serial ATA drive controller. When set to auto, enables BIOS support for the 5th Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error if not present). Power Saving Features (Auto default) Enables or disables the feature that allows SATA harddrives to initiate link power management transitions. HDD Security Erase (Disabled default) Enables or disables the hard-drive security freeze lock feature. Option Description70 Using the System Setup Program PCI Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. PCI Configuration Option Description Embedded Network Devices Press to configure available network drives. NIC Enumeration (Onboard default) Select a LAN boot ROM option. • Onboard: Uses the PXE boot on NICs to boot the system. • Add-in: Use the PXE boot on add-in network adapters to boot the system. Active State Power Management Configuration Press to configure power management for PCI Express devices. Using the System Setup Program 71 PCI Slot Configuration Press to configure PCI Express devices. NOTE: When you install a MIC GPGPU card in the C8220X sled, BIOS automatically enables the PCI memory 64-bit decode option. PCIe Generation (Gen3 default) Select a PCI signaling rate. • Gen1: 2.5 GT/s • Gen2: 5 GT/s • Gen3: 8 GT/s VT for Direct I/O (Disabled default) Enables or disables Intel hardware virtualization support. SR-IOV Global Enable (Disabled default) Enables or disables BIOS configuration of Single Root I/O Virtualization (SR-IOV) devices. I/OAT DMA Engine (Disabled default) If set to Enabled, the I/O Acceleration Technology (I/OAT) feature is enabled for network controllers that support this technology. Maximum Payload Size (Auto default) Sets the maximum payload size of the PCI Express controller. Options are Auto, 128 bytes, and 256 bytes. Embedded Video Controller (Enabled default) Enables or disables the onboard video controller. NOTE: This option should always be set to Enabled. The remote KVM function cannot function if set to disabled. Video Enumeration (Onboard default) Select video controller enumeration type. • Onboard - The onboard video controller is used for boot-time messages. • Add-in - The first add-in video controller is used for boot-time messages. Depending on the BIOS search order and system slot layout. WHEA Support (Disabled default) Enables or disables the Windows Hardware Error Architecture (WHEA) feature. Reboot on WOL (ROW) (Disabled default) Enables or disables reboot on wake-on-LAN feature. Reboot On WOL targets network controllers when the network controller receives a magic packet. This option displays when the network chip supports Reboot on WOL feature. Option Description72 Using the System Setup Program Embedded Network Devices Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.Using the System Setup Program 73 Embedded Network Devices iSCSI Remote Boot Option Description Embedded NIC1 (Enabled with PXE default) Enables or disables the onboard NIC1 controller. • Enabled with PXE: Allows you to enable the system’s primary embedded NIC (full function), including its PXE boot-ROM. • Enabled without PXE: Allows you to enable the system’s primary embedded NIC only. The NIC associated PXE or RPL boot-ROM are disabled in this option. • iSCSI Remote Boot: Allows you to configure the iSCSI target and initiator variables to support iSCSI Remote Boot. Changes take effect after the system reboots. • Disabled: Allows you to disable the system’s primary embedded NIC. Embedded NIC2 (Enabled without PXE default) Enables or disables the onboard NIC2 controller. • Enabled with PXE: Allows you to enable the system’s secondary embedded NIC (full function), including its PXE boot-ROM. • Enabled without PXE: Allows you to enable the system’s secondary embedded NIC only. The NIC associated PXE or RPL boot-ROM are disabled in this option. • iSCSI Remote Boot: Allows you to configure the iSCSI target and initiator variables to support iSCSI Remote Boot. Changes take effect after the system reboots. • Disabled: Allows you to disable the system’s primary embedded NIC. Option Description iSCSI Initiator Name Displays the worldwide unique name of the initiator. Only iqn format is accepted. Enable DHCP (Disabled default) Enables or disables the DHCP network settings. Initiator IP Address Sets the initiator’s static IP address. Initiator Subnet Mask Sets the subnet mask for the static IP address.74 Using the System Setup Program Gateway Sets the IP gateway for the static IP address. Target IP Sets the name for the target IP. Target IP Address Sets the target’s IP address. Target Port Sets the target port. Boot LUN Sets the hexadecimal representation of LU number. CHAP Type (None default) Select CHAP type. Options are [None], [One Way CHAP], and [Mutual CHAP]. Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 75 Active State Power Management Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Active State Power Management Configuration Option Description PCIe Slot ASPM (Disabled default) Select an active state power management (ASPM) protocol for the PCI Express slot. Options are [Disabled], [L0], [L1], [L0 & L1], [L0s Downstream], and [L0s Downstream + L1]. Onboard LAN ASPM (Disabled default) Select an ASPM protocol for the onboard network controller. Options are [Disabled], [L0], [L1], [L0 & L1], [L0s Downstream], and [L0s Downstream + L1]. Mezzanine Slot ASPM (Disabled default) Select an ASPM protocol for the mezzanine slot. NB-SB Link ASPM (Disabled default) Select an ASPM protocol for the northbridge and southbridge chipsets. 76 Using the System Setup Program PCI Slot Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. PCI Slot Configuration Option Description PCIe Slot1 (Enabled default) Enables or disables the PCIe slot1. Options are [Disabled], [Enabled], [Enabled without OPROM]. NOTE: When you install a MIC GPGPU card in the C8220X sled, BIOS automatically enables the PCI memory 64-bit decode option. You can set the GPGPU information using IPMI commands. See Table 2-18 for more information.Using the System Setup Program 77 USB Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. USB Configuration Option Description Embedded USB Controller (Enabled default) Enables or disables the onboard USB controller at system startup. USB Port with BMC (Enabled default) Enables or disables internal USB port with BMC support. External USB Port1 (Enabled default) Enables or disables the external USB port1. External USB Port2 (Enabled default) Enables or disables the external USB port2. Internal USB Connector (Disabled default) Enables or disables the internal USB port. 78 Using the System Setup Program Security Menu The security menu enables you to set the security parameters. Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Security Settings Option Description Supervisor Password Indicates whether a supervisor password has been set. If the password has been installed, Installed displays. If not, Not Installed displays. User Password Indicates whether a supervisor password has been set. If the password has been installed, Installed displays. If not, Not Installed displays.Using the System Setup Program 79 Change Supervisor You can install a Supervisor password, and if you install a supervisor password, you can then install a user password. A user password does not provide access to many of the features in the Setup utility. Note, the Change User Password option only appears after a Supervisor password has been set. Select this option and press to access the sub menu, a dialog box appears which lets you enter a password. You can enter no more than six letters or numbers. Press after you have typed in the password. A second dialog box asks you to retype the password for confirmation. Press after you have retyped it correctly. If the password confirmation is incorrect, an error message appears. The password is stored in NVRAM after ezPORT completes. The password is required at boot time, or when the user enters the Setup utility. Change User Password Installs or changes the User password. Option Description80 Using the System Setup Program Server Menu The server menu enables you to configure compute sled parameters. Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Server Settings Option Description Status of BMC Displays BMC status. IPMI Specification Version Displays the Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) firmware version number. BMC Firmware Version Displays the BMC firmware version number. NIC1 MAC Address Displays the MAC address for the NIC1 connector. NIC2 MAC Address Displays the MAC address for the NIC2 connector.Using the System Setup Program 81 ACPI SPMI Table (Enabled default) When enabled, BIOS enables Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) Service Processor Management Interface (SPMI) table for IPMI driver installation. When disabled, BIOS disables the ACPI SPMI table for BMC ROM update. Set BMC LAN Configuration Press to set the BMC network. Remote Access Configuration Press to configure serial port settings related to console redirection. Restore on AC Power Loss (Power On default) Select the power state when the AC power is back. • Power Off: System remains off until the power button is pressed. • Last State: System reverts to the last power state before power loss. • Power On: System switches back on after the AC power loss. Power Staggering AC Recovery (Immediate default) Set the time period for the system to turn back on from an AC power loss once power is resumed. • Immediate: Power On (No Delay) • Random: Auto • User Defined: User defined delay time. Power Button (Enabled default) When enabled, the power button can turn the system's power off. When disabled, the power button can only turn on system power. View System Event Log Press to view the BMC system event log. Event Logging (Enabled default) Enables or disables BIOS to log system events. NMI on Error (Enabled default) Enables or disables BIOS to generate an Non-masked Interrupt (NMI) when an uncorrectable PCI Express error occurs. Option Description82 Using the System Setup Program Set BMC LAN Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Set BMC LAN Configuration Option Description Channel Number Displays the channel number used for BMC LAN. Channel Number Status Displays the BMC channel number status. BMC LAN Port Configuration (Shared-NIC default) Set the BMC management port to dedicated or shared NIC port. Options are [Dedicated NIC] and [Shared NIC]. BMC NIC IP Source (DHCP default) Set BMC to obtain its IP address using DHCP or establish a static IP address. IP Address Sets the static IP address. Subnet Mask Sets the subnet mask for the static IP address. Using the System Setup Program 83 Remote Access Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Remote Access Configuration Gateway Address Sets the IP gateway for the static IP address. IPv6 Mode (Disabled default) Enables or disables the IPv6 internet protocol support. If set to enabled, configure the IPv6 prefix, IP and gateway addresses. Option Description Remote Access (Enabled default) Enables or disables serial console redirection. Option Description84 Using the System Setup Program Serial port number (COM1 default) Select a serial port for console redirection. • COM1: Enables console redirection via COM1. See token D7h. • COM2 as SOL: Enables console redirection via COM2. Serial Port Address (3F8h/2F8h default) Specifies the base I/O port address of the serial port. • 3F8h/2F8h: Sets the front serial port address as 0x3F8 and internal serial port address as 0x2F8. • COM2 as SOL: Sets the front serial port address as 0x2F8 and internal serial port address as 0x3F8. Serial Port Mode (115200 8,n,1 as default) Select a baud rate for the serial port. Options are [115200 8,n,1], [57600 8,n,1], [38400 8,n,1], [192008,n,1], and [9600 8,n,1]. Flow Control (None default) Select a flow control for console redirection. Options are [None] and [Software]. Redirection After BIOS POST (Always default) If set to Always, the console redirection is always active. When Disabled, console redirection is turned off after POST. Terminal Type (ANSI default) Select a target terminal type for console redirection. Options are [ANSI], [VT100], and [VT-UTF8]. VT-UTF8 Combo Key Support (Enabled default) Enables or disables the VT-UTF8 Combination Key support for ANSI/VT100 terminals. Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 85 View System Log Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. View System Log Option Description View BMC SEL Event Log View all events in the BMC system event log. Clear BMC SEL Event Log Deletes all records in the BMC system event log. 86 Using the System Setup Program Boot Menu The boot menu enables you to set POST boot parameters. Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Boot Settings Option Description Quiet Boot (Enabled default) Enable this item to display the splash or summary screen, rather than the detail of the POST flow. When disabled, normal POST messages appear. Pause on Errors (Disabled default) Enables or disables BIOS to prompt you to press or keys on errors during POST. Force PXE Boot only (Disabled default) Enables or disables PXE to be the only boot device.Using the System Setup Program 87 Boot Mode (BIOS default) Select a system boot mode. • BIOS: The standard BIOS-level boot interface • UEFI: An enhanced 64-bit boot interface based on Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) specifications that overlays the system BIOS. Boot Type Order Press to set the preferred boot sequence from the available devices. Legacy Boot Device Press to set the preferred boot sequence from the available legacy USB devices. Option Description88 Using the System Setup Program Exit Menu Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Exit Options Option Description Save Changes and Exit Highlight this item and press to save any changes that you have made in the Setup utility and exit the Setup utility. When the Save Changes and Exit dialog box appears, press to save the changes and exit, or press to return to the setup main menu. Discard Changes and Exit Highlight this item and press to discard any changes that you have made in the Setup utility and exit the Setup utility. When the Discard Changes and Exit dialog box appears, press to discard changes and exit, or press to return to the setup main menu.Using the System Setup Program 89 Save Changes Select this item and press to save changes you have made without leaving the setup utility. Discard Changes Select this item and press to discard any changes you have made without leaving the setup utility. Load Optimal Defaults If you highlight this item and press , a dialog box asks if you want to install optimal settings for all the items in the Setup utility. Press the key to indicate Yes, and then press to install the optimal settings. The optimal settings default values are quite demanding and your system might not function properly if you are using slower memory chips or other kinds of low-performance components. Load Customized Defaults Load 2nd default values from NVRAM for all the setup parameters. Save Customized Defaults Save all the setup parameters to NVRAM as 2nd default values. Option Description90 Using the System Setup Program Command Line Interfaces for System Setup Options The options in the System Setup menu allows you to control the System Configuration Utility (syscfg). This utility is included in the Dell OpenManage Deployment Toolkit (DTK). See the Deployment Toolkit Version 1.3 User's Guide for additional information about installing and using the DTK utilities, and the Deployment Toolkit Version 1.3 Command Line Interface Reference Guide for a complete list of all valid options, suboptions, and arguments for using the BMCCFG.EXE to configure and manage your BMC. You can use the system configuration utility for the following conditions: • To change the System Setup option by D4 token: ./syscfg –t=D4_token_id (Example: ./syscfg -t=0x002D to enable NIC1 Option ROM) • To check token activity status: ./syscfg --istokenactive=D4_token_id (Example: ./syscfg --istokenactive=0x002D to check the token active status of NIC1 Option ROM) • To directly change the System Setup option through BMC memory: ./ipmitool raw (Example: ./ipmitool raw 0xc 1 1 3 10 106 42 120 to set IP address of BMC management port as 10.106.42.120) Table 2-1. D4 Token Table Token Setup Option Description 002D Embedded NIC1 Enables the onboard NIC1 controller (full-function), including its PXE boot-ROM. 002E Embedded NIC1 Disables the onboard NIC1 controller. 0051 N/A For the next system boot, set the IPL priority to: USB storage, hard disk, CD/DVD-ROM, RAID, Network (if the devices are available).Using the System Setup Program 91 0052 N/A For the next system boot, set the IPL priority to: hard disk then option ROMs (if the devices are available). 0053 N/A For the next system boot, set the IPL priority to: Network, hard disk, RAID,USB storage, CD/DVDROM (if the devices are available). 0054 N/A For the next system boot, set the IPL priority to: CD/DVD-ROM, USB Storage, hard disk, RAID, Network (if the devices are available). 005C N/A Enables BIOS remote update on the next reboot, to search for an operating-system initiated BIOS update image. 005D N/A Disables BIOS remote update on the next reboot, to search for an operating-system initiated BIOS update image. 006E Embedded NIC1 Enables the onboard NIC1 controller, but disables the NIC associated PXE or RPL boot-ROM. 0087 Video Enumeration Allows BIOS to use the onboard video controller for boot-time messages. 0088 Video Enumeration Allows BIOS to use the first add-in video controller for boot-time messages. Depending on the BIOS search order and system slot layout. 008C Embedded USB Controller Allows BIOS to enable the built-in USB controller at system startup. 008D Embedded USB Controller Allows BIOS to enable the built-in USB controller at system startup. 00A1 Restore on AC Power Loss System remains off until the power button is pressed. 00A2 Restore on AC Power Loss System reverts to the last power state before power loss. 00A3 Restore on AC Power Loss System switches back on after the AC power loss. 00BA Embedded NIC2 Disables the onboard NIC2 controller. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description92 Using the System Setup Program 00BB Embedded NIC2 Enables the onboard NIC2 controller, but disables the NIC associated PXE or RPL boot-ROM. 00BC Embedded NIC2 Enables the onboard NIC2 controller (full-function), including its PXE boot-ROM. 00BF Remote Access Disables serial console redirection. 00C0 Serial port number Enables console redirection via COM1. See token D7h. 00C1 Power Button Enables the power button to turn off the system power. (default) 00C2 Power Button Disables the power button to turn off the system power. 00D1 Hyper-Threading Technology Enables Hyper-Threading Technology. 00D2 Hyper-Threading Technology Disables Hyper-Threading Technology. 00D7 Serial port number Enables console redirection via COM2. 00D8 Load Optimal Defaults Install optimal default settings for all the items in the Setup utility on the next boot. 00FE Legacy USB Support Disables the system to provide legacy USB support for the operating system. 00FF Legacy USB Support Enables the system to provide legacy USB support for the operating system. 0117 SATA Port0 Turns off the 1st Serial ATA drive controller. 0118 SATA Port0 Enables BIOS support for the 1st Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error appears if not present). 0119 SATA Port1 Turns off the 2nd Serial ATA drive controller. 011A SATA Port1 Enables BIOS support for the 2nd Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error appears if not present). Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 93 011B SATA Port2 Turns off the 3rd Serial ATA drive controller. 011C SATA Port2 Enables BIOS support for the 3rd Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error appears if not present). 011D SATA Port3 Turns off the 4th Serial ATA drive controller. 011E SATA Port3 Enables BIOS support for the 4th Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error appears if not present). 011F SATA Port4 Turns off the 5th Serial ATA drive controller. 0120 SATA Port4 Enables BIOS support for the 5th Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error appears if not present). 0121 SATA Port5 Turns off the 6th Serial ATA drive controller. 0122 SATA Port5 Enables BIOS support for the 6th Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error appears if not present). 0135 Embedded SATA Controller Disables the SATA controller. This token applies to the first onboard SATA controller. 0137 Embedded SATA Controller Enables the SATA controller to run in IDE mode. Sets the device class code as IDE and uses PCI IRQ (referred as Native mode). This token applies to the first onboard SATA controller. 0138 Embedded SATA Controller Enables the SATA controller. Sets the device class code as SATA and sets up the AHCI BARs and registers. This token applies to the first onboard SATA controller. 0139 Embedded SATA Controller Enables the SATA controller. Sets the device class code as RAID and executes the RAID Option ROM. This token applies to the first onboard SATA controller. 013E Memory Remapping (3GB~4GB) When disabled, memory remapping relocates memory space behind PCI hole to the space above 4 GB. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description94 Using the System Setup Program 013F Memory Remapping (3GB~4GB) When enabled, memory remapping relocates memory space (3GB - 4 GB) to the space above 4 GB. 0140 Execute-Disable (XD) Bit Capability When disabled, the Intel processors supporting the XD feature reports the support to the operating system. 0141 Execute-Disable (XD) Bit Capability When enabled, the Intel processors supporting the XD feature reports the support to the operating system. If the operating system supports this extended paging mechanism, it will provide some protection against software viruses that exploit buffer overflows. 014A Virtualization Technology Allows you to disable the VT technology in applicable processors. If disabled, the VT feature is unusable in any OS. 014B Virtualization Technology Allows you to enable the VT technology in applicable processors. 014E External USB PORT1 Allows you to electrically disable the external USB connector 1. 014F External USB PORT1 Allow you to electrically enable the external USB connector 1. 0168 Max CPUID Value Limit Some OS, which is (NT4), fails if the value returned in EAX is >3 when CPUID instruction is executed with EAX=0. This setting disables the 3 or less. 0169 Max CPUID Value Limit Some OS, which is (NT4), fails if the value returned in EAX is >3 when CPUID instruction is executed with EAX=0. This setting limits CPUID function to 3. 0171 Adjacent Cache Line Prefetch Disables system optimization for sequential memory access. The processor fetches the cache line that contains the data it currently requires. 0172 Adjacent Cache Line Prefetch Enables system optimization for sequential memory access. The processor fetches the adjacent cache line in the other half of the sector. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 95 0173 Hardware Prefetcher Disables the processor’s HW prefetcher.. 0174 Hardware Prefetcher Enables the processor’s HW prefetcher.. 0178 Remote Access Enables serial console redirection. 0189 External USB PORT2 Allows you to electrically disable the external USB connector 2. 018A External USB PORT2 Allow you to electrically enable the external USB connector 2. 0199 Power Saving Features Disables the feature that allows SATA hard-drives to initiate link power management transitions. 019A Power Saving Features Enables the feature that allows SATA hard-drives to initiate link power management transitions. 01C4 NUMA Support Disables the NUMA support to improve processor performance. This option is available for NUMA systems that allow memory interleaving across all processor nodes. 01C5 NUMA Support Enables the NUMA support to improve processor performance. This option is available for NUMA systems that allow memory interleaving across all processor nodes. 01C4 Node Interleave Disables the node interleave option. This option is available for NUMA systems that allow memory interleaving across all processor nodes. 01C5 Node Interleave Enable the node interleave option. This option is available for NUMA systems that allow memory interleaving across all processor nodes. 01CF I/OAT DMA Engine Enables the I/O Acceleration Technology (I/OAT) DMA Engine feature. Set to enabled only if the hardware and software support I/OAT. 01D0 I/OAT DMA Engine Disables the I/OAT DMA Engine feature. This option should be disabled only if the hardware and software support I/OAT. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description96 Using the System Setup Program 01DA Embedded NIC1 Enables NIC1 with iSCSI Remote Boot. 01DB Embedded NIC2 Enables NIC2 with iSCSI Remote Boot. 01EA Turbo Mode Disables memory turbo mode. It disables the processor core to increase its frequency. 01EB Turbo Mode Enables memory turbo mode. It allows the processor core to increase its frequency. 01F0 Embedded NIC3 Enables the onboard NIC3 controller. 01F1 Embedded NIC3 Enables the onboard NIC3 controller, but disables the NIC associated PXE or RPL boot-ROM. 01F2 Embedded NIC3 Enables the onboard NIC3 controller (full-function), including its PXE boot-ROM. 01F3 Embedded NIC3 Enables NIC3 with iSCSI Remote Boot. 0204 VT for Direct I/O Disables Intel Virtualization Technology for Direct I/O (VT-d) that enhances I/O support (DMA) when running a Virtual Machine Monitor. 0205 VT for Direct I/O Enables Intel Virtualization Technology for Direct I/O (VT-d) that enhances I/O support (DMA) when running a Virtual Machine Monitor. 0211 Internal USB PORT Disables the internal USB connector. 0212 Internal USB PORT Enables the internal USB connector. 021F Maximum Performance Sets the system power management to maximum performance. 0221 OS Control Allows the OS to change the P-state. 0224 Embedded Video Controller Enables the onboard video controller as the primary video device. 0225 Embedded Video Controller Disables the onboard video controller. 022D Boot Mode Enables booting to Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) capable operating systems. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 97 022E Boot Mode Enables booting to legacy mode, ensures compatibility with operating systems that do not support UEFI. 0231 Active Processor Cores Four cores of the processor are enabled This applies to Quad-core processors only. 0232 Active Processor Cores Two cores of the processor are enabled. This applies to Quad-core and Dual-core processors. 0233 Active Processor Cores Single core of the processor is enabled. This applies to Quad-core and Dual-Core processors. 024B C States When enabled, the processor can operate in all available Power C States. (default) 024C C States When disabled, there are no C states available for the processor. 024D Pause on Errors Enables the BIOS from prompting for F1/F2 on error. BIOS pauses at F1/F2 prompt. 024E Pause on Errors Disables the BIOS from prompting for F1/F2 on error. BIOS pauses at F1/F2 prompt. 024F Quiet Boot Enables the display of the splash or summary screen, rather than the detail of the POST flow. 0250 Quiet Boot Disables the display of the splash or summary screen. The user is able to see the detail of the POST messages. 0251 N/A The NIC1 is used for PXE boot, followed by NIC2. 0252 N/A The NIC2 is used for PXE boot, followed by NIC1. 0254 3F8h/2F8h Sets the back serial port address to 0x3F8 and internal serial port address to 0x2F8 0257 2F8h/3F8h Set back serial port address to 0x2F8 and internal serial port address to 0x3F8. 025D Optimizer Mode Selects optimizer mode as the memory operating mode. 025E Spare Mode Selects spare mode as the memory operating mode. 025F Mirror Mode Selects mirror mode as the memory operating mode. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description98 Using the System Setup Program 0260 Advanced ECC Mode Selects Advanced ECC (i.e. Lockstep, Chipkill) as the memory operating mode. 026A Coherent HT Link Speed Sets to support HyperTransport 1 specification. 026B Coherent HT Link Speed Sets to support HyperTransport 3 specification. 026E Active Processor Cores This field controls the number of enabled all of cores in each processor. By default, the maximum number of cores per processor will be enabled. 026F Active Processor Cores This field controls the number of enabled 6 cores in each processor. By default, the maximum number of cores per processor will be enabled. 0270 Active Processor Cores This field controls the number of enabled 8 cores in each processor. By default, the maximum number of cores per processor will be enabled. 0271 Active Processor Cores This field controls the number of enabled 10 cores in each processor. By default, the maximum number of cores per processor will be enabled. 0272 Active Processor Cores This field controls the number of enabled 12 cores in each processor. By default, the maximum number of cores per processor will be enabled. 027B HT Assist Disables the Probe Filter chipset option in the System setup. There are some applications that may lower chipset performance when this is enabled. 027C HT Assist Enables the Probe Filter chipset option in the System setup. There are some applications that may lower chipset performance when this is disabled. 02A1 C1E State Enables the processor Enhanced Halt (C1E) state. (default) 02A2 C1E State Disables the processor C1-E state. Do at your own risk. When you disable this option, a warning appears in the BIOS Setup help text and a pop up message appears when this option is changing. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 99 02A9 DRAM Prefetcher Disables DRAM references from triggering DRAM prefetch requests. 02AA DRAM Prefetcher Turns on the DRAM prefetch unit in the Northbridge. 02AB HW Prefetch Training on SW Disables hardware prefetcher from considering software prefetches when detecting strides for prefetch requests. 02AC HW Prefetch Training on SW Enables Hardware prefetcher considers software prefetches when detecting strides for prefetch requests. (default) 02AD SR-IOV Global Enable Enables BIOS support for SRIOV devices. 02AE SR-IOV Global Enable Disables BIOS support for SRIOV devices. 02B6 Memory Operating Voltage Indicates all DIMMs in the system are operating at 1.5 volts. 02B7 Memory Operating Voltage Indicates all DIMMs in the system are operating at 1.35 volts. 02B8 Memory Operating Voltage This setting indicates the memory operating voltage will be set automatically by the Memory initialization code and depending upon the installed DIMM's capability and the memory configuration of the system. This is the default setting and will set the Memory Operating voltage to the POR voltage. 02C5 DCU Streamer Prefetcher Enables the DCU Streamer Prefetcher. (default) 02C6 DCU Streamer Prefetcher Disables the DCU Streamer Prefetcher. 02C7 Data Reuse Optimization Sets to enable for HPC applications. (default) 02C8 Data Reuse Optimization Sets to disable for energy efficiency. 02C9 QPI Bandwidth Priority Sets to compute for computation-intensive applications. (default) Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description100 Using the System Setup Program 02CA QPI Bandwidth Priority Sets to I/O for I/O-intensive applications. 02CE DCU IP Prefetcher Enables the DCU IP Prefetcher. (default) 02CF DCU IP Prefetcher Disables the DCU IP Prefetcher. 401A Terminal Type The BIOS console redirection, if enabled, operates in VT100 emulation model. See tokens BFh, C0h, and D7h. 401B Terminal Type The BIOS console redirection, if enabled, operates in ANSI emulation model. See also tokens BFh, C0h, and D7h. 401C Redirection After BIOS POST The BIOS console redirection, if enabled, continues to operate after the OS boot hand-off. 401D Redirection After BIOS POST The BIOS console redirection, if enabled, operates during the BIOS boot only and is disabled prior to OS boot hand-off. See also tokens BFh, C0h, D7h, 401Ah and 401Bh. 4022 1st Boot Device Whenever the BIOS boots the system, the first PXEcapable device is inserted as the first device in the boot sequence. Enabling this feature causes the BIOS operation to occur on the next and all subsequent boots and causes a change in the system's defined boot sequence. The BIOS chooses the first PXEcapable device as the system's onboard network controller, if present and enabled, or the first bootable network device found in the system's standard PCI search order. 4026 Manufacturing Mode Enables the manufacturing mode to bypass POST tasks/memory tests and F1/F2 prompts on specific error messages. Used by manufacturers only and is not for general use. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 101 4027 Manufacturing Mode Disables the manufacturing mode to bypass POST tasks/memory tests and F1/F2 prompts on specific error messages. Used by manufacturers only and is not for general use. 4033 Serial Port Mode Console Redirection baud rate is set to 115,200 bits per second. 4034 Serial Port Mode Console Redirection baud rate is set to 57,600 bits per second 4035 Serial Port Mode Console Redirection baud rate is set to 19,200 bits per second. 4036 Serial Port Mode Console Redirection baud rate is set to 9,600 bits per second. 403F Clear SMBIOS System Event Log Deletes all records in the BMC system event log on the next boot. 4800 Node Manager Enables the Node Manager mode for Intel processors. 4801 APML Enable the Advanced Platform Management Link mode for AMD processors. 4802 CPU Power Capping To decide the highest processor performance state in the OS. (P0-state). 4803 CPU Power Capping To decide the highest processor performance state in the OS. (P1-state). 4804 CPU Power Capping To decide the highest processor performance state in the OS. (P2-state). 4805 CPU Power Capping To decide the highest processor performance state in the OS. (P3-state). 4806 CPU Power Capping To decide the highest processor performance state in the OS. (P4-state). 480A C6 State Disables the processor C6 state. Do at your own risk. When you disable this option, a warning appears in the BIOS Setup help text and a pop up message appears when this option is changing. 480B C6 State Enables the processor C6 state. (default) Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description102 Using the System Setup Program 480C L3 Cache Power Control Disable the clock stop for an idle subcache. 480D L3 Cache Power Control Enable the clock stop for an idle subcache. 480E C7 State Disables the processor C7 state. Do at your own risk. When you disable this option, a warning appears in the BIOS Setup help text and a pop up message appears when this option is changing. 480F C7 State Enables the processor C7 state. (default) 4810 Non Coherent HT Link Width Sets the HT link to 8 bit width. 4811 Non Coherent HT Link Width Sets the HT link to 16 bit width. 4812 Non Coherent HT Link Speed Sets the HT link speed to 800MHz. 4813 Non Coherent HT Link Speed Sets the HT link speed to 1000MHz. 4814 Non Coherent HT Link Speed Sets the HT link speed to 1200MHz. 4815 Non Coherent HT Link Speed Sets the HT link speed to 1600MHz. 4816 Non Coherent HT Link Speed Sets the HT link speed to 2000MHz. 4817 Non Coherent HT Link Speed Sets the HT link speed to 2600MHz. 4820 Memory Turbo Mode Disables memory turbo mode. 4821 Memory Turbo Mode Enables memory turbo mode. 4822 NUMA Support Enables the node interleave option for SLES11. This applies to NUMA systems that allow memory interleaving across all processor nodes. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 103 4823 Memory Frequency Detects the memory running speed from H/W designed (SPD, memory population). 4824 Memory Frequency Sets memory running speed up to 800MHz. 4825 Memory Frequency Sets memory running speed up to 1066MHz. 4826 Memory Frequency Sets memory running speed up to 1333MHz. 4827 Memory Frequency Sets memory running speed up to 1600MHz. 4828 Memory Throttling Mode Sets memory running as Open Loop Throughput Throttling (OLTT). (default) 4829 Memory Throttling Mode Sets memory running as Closed Loop Thermal Throttling (CLTT). 482A DRAM Scrubbing Disables DRAM scrubbing to write corrected data back to the memory once a correctable error is detected on a read transaction. 482B DRAM Scrubbing Enables Dram scrubbing to write corrected data back to the memory once a correctable error is detected on a read transaction. 482C Demand Scrubbing Disables Demand scrubbing to write corrected data back to the memory once a correctable error is detected on a read transaction. 482D Demand Scrubbing Enables Demand scrubbing to write corrected data back to the memory once a correctable error is detected on a read transaction. 482E Patrol Scrubbing Disables Patrol scrubbing to proactively search the system memory, repairing correctable errors. 482F Patrol Scrubbing Enables Patrol scrubbing to proactively search the system memory, repairing correctable errors. 4830 HDD Security Erase Sets security freeze lock to all hard-drives. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description104 Using the System Setup Program 4831 HDD Security Erase Unlocks the security freeze lock on all hard-drives. 4832 AHCI-AMD Supports AMD inbox AHCI driver. 4833 AHCI-MS Supports Microsoft inbox AHCI driver. 4834 Embedded SATA Link Rate Sets the SATA link rate at maximum rate speed of 6.0 Gbps. 4835 Embedded SATA Link Rate Sets the SATA link rate at minimum rate speed of 1.5 Gbps. For power consumption. 4836 Embedded SATA Link Rate Sets the SATA link rate at minimum rate speed of 3.0 Gbps. 4840 PCIe Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the PCI Express Link of port. All entry disabled. 4841 PCIe Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the given PCI Express Link of port. L0s entry enabled. 4842 PCIe Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the given PCI Express Link of port. L1 entry enabled. 4843 PCIe Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the given PCI Express Link of port. L0s and L1 entry enabled. 4844 PCIe Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the given PCI Express Link of port. L0s entry downstream enabled. 4845 PCIe Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the given PCI Express Link of port. L0s entry downstream and L1 enabled 4846 Onboard LAN ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported to onboard LAN. All entry disabled. 4847 Onboard LAN ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported to onboard LAN. L0s entry enabled. 4848 Onboard LAN ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported to onboard LAN. L1 entry enabled. 4849 Onboard LAN ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported to onboard LAN. L0s and L1 entry enabled. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 105 484A Onboard LAN ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported to onboard LAN. L0s entry downstream enabled. 484B Onboard LAN ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported to onboard LAN. L0s entry downstream and L1 enabled. 484C Mezzanine Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on Mezzanine Slot. All entry disabled. 484D Mezzanine Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on Mezzanine Slot. L0s entry enabled. 484E Mezzanine Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on Mezzanine Slot. L1 entry enabled. 484F Mezzanine Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on Mezzanine Slot. L0s and L1 entry enabled. 4850 Mezzanine Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on Mezzanine Slot. L0s entry downstream enabled. 4851 Mezzanine Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on Mezzanine Slot. L0s entry downstream and L1 enabled. 4852 NB-SB Link ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the NB-SB. All entry disabled. 4853 NB-SB Link ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the NB-SB. L1 entry enabled. 4854 Maximum Payload Size Auto detects the PCIe maximum payload size. 4855 Maximum Payload Size Sets the PCIe maximum payload size to 128 Bytes. 4856 Maximum Payload Size Sets the PCIe maximum payload size to 256 Bytes. 4857 WHEA Support Disables Windows Hardware Error Architecture. 4858 WHEA Support Enables Windows Hardware Error Architecture. 4859 NIC Enumeration Sets PXE boot from onboard NIC to Add-on NIC adapter. (default) Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description106 Using the System Setup Program 485A NIC Enumeration Sets PXE boot from Add-on NIC adapter to onboard NIC. 485B PCIe Generation Sets the PCI signaling rate at Gen3 8.0 Gigabits bandwidth. 485C PCIe Generation Sets the PCI signaling rate at Gen2 5.0 Gigabits bandwidth. 485D PCIe Generation Sets the PCI signaling rate at Gen1 2.5 Gigabits bandwidth. 485E Reboot on WOL (ROW) Disables ROW. (default) The ROW repurposes the Wake on LAN (WOL) signal to reboot the system board when the system is in S0/S3 state. 485F Reboot on WOL (ROW) Enables ROW. ROW repurposes the WOL signal to reboot the system board when the system is in S0/S3 state. When a WOL packet is received by the NIC, the wake up signal generated by the NIC shall cause a hardware reboot of the system board. 4860 USB PORT with BMC Allows you to electrically disable the internal USB port which contacts to BMC. 4861 USB PORT with BMC Allow the users to electrically enable the internal USB port which contacts to BMC. 4870 Force PXE Boot only Disables PXE to be the boot device only. 4871 Force PXE Boot only Enables PXE to be the boot device only. The system retrying to boot from PXE device. 4873 Active Processor Cores This field controls the number of enabled 16 cores in each processor. By default, the maximum number of cores per processor will be enabled. 4877 PCIe Slot1 Allows you to electrically disable PCIe Slot1. 4878 PCIe Slot1 Allows you to electrically enable PCIe Slot1. 4879 PCIe Slot2 Allows you to electrically disable PCIe Slot2. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 107 487A PCIe Slot2 Allows you to electrically enable PCIe Slot2. 487B PCIe Slot3 Allows you to electrically disable PCIe Slot3. 487C PCIe Slot3 Allows you to electrically enable PCIe Slot3. 487D PCIe Slot4 Allows you to electrically disable PCIe Slot4. 487E PCIe Slot4 Allows you to electrically enable PCIe Slot4. 487F Mezzanine Slot Allows you to electrically disable Mezzanine Slot. 4880 Mezzanine Slot Allows you to electrically enable Mezzanine Slot. 4881 1st Boot Device Sets the hard-drive as the first boot device. 4882 1st Boot Device Sets RAID as the first boot device. 4883 1st Boot Device Sets a USB storage device as the first boot device. 4884 1st Boot Device Sets a CD/DVD ROM as the first boot device. 4885 2nd Boot Device Sets a network device as the 2nd boot device. 4886 2nd Boot Device Sets the hard-drive as the 2nd boot device. 4887 2nd Boot Device Sets RAID as the 2nd boot device. 4888 2nd Boot Device Sets a USB storage device as the 2nd boot device. 4889 2nd Boot Device Sets the CD/DVD ROM as the 2nd boot device. 488A 3rd Boot Device Sets the network device as the 3rd boot device. 488B 3rd Boot Device Sets the hard-drive as the 3rd boot device. 488C 3rd Boot Device Sets RAID as the 3rd boot device. 488D 3rd Boot Device Sets a USB storage device as the 3rd boot device. 488E 3rd Boot Device Sets the CD/DVD ROM as the 3rd boot device. 488F 4th Boot Device Sets the network device as the 4th boot device. 4890 4th Boot Device Sets the hard-drive as the 4th boot device. 4891 4th Boot Device Sets RAID as the 4th boot device. 4892 4th Boot Device Sets a USB storage device as the 4th boot device. 4893 4th Boot Device Sets the CD/DVD ROM as the 4th boot device. 4894 5th Boot Device Sets the network device as the 5th boot device. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description108 Using the System Setup Program 4895 5th Boot Device Sets the hard-drive as the 5th boot device. 4896 5th Boot Device Sets RAID as the 5th boot device. 4897 5th Boot Device Sets a USB storage device as the 5th boot device. 4898 5th Boot Device Sets the CD/DVD ROM as thes 5th boot device. 48A0 ACPI SPMI Table Disables the ACPI SPMI Table for BMC ROM update. 48A1 ACPI SPMI Table Enables the ACPI SPMI Table for IPMI driver installation. 48A2 BMC LAN Port Configuration Sets BMC LAN Port to Dedicated-NIC. 48A3 BMC LAN Port Configuration Sets BMC LAN Port to Shared-NIC. 48A4 BMC NIC IP Source Sets BMC LAN to get LAN IP from Static mode. 48A5 BMC NIC IP Source Sets BMC LAN to get LAN IP from DHCP mode. 48A6 IPv6 Mode Disables IPv6 internet protocol support. 48A7 IPv6 Mode Enables IPv6 internet protocol support. 48A8 IPv6 AutoConfig Disables IPv6 auto configuration. 48A9 IPv6 AutoConfig Enables IPv6 auto configuration. 48AA Serial Port Mode Sets the console redirection baud rate to 3,8400 bits per second. 48AB Flow Control Selects none as the flow control for console redirection. 48AC Flow Control Selects hardware as the flow control for console redirection. 48AD Flow Control Selects software as the flow control for console redirection. 48AE Terminal Type The BIOS console redirection, if enabled, operates in VTUTF8 emulation model. See also tokens BFh, C0h, and D7h. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 109 48AF VT-UTF8 Combo Key Support Disables VT-UTF8 Combination Key Support for ANSI/VT100 terminals. 48B0 VT-UTF8 Combo Key Support Enables VT-UTF8 Combination Key Support for ANSI/VT100 terminals. 48B1 Event logging Disables BIOS to log system events to BMC, errors include ECC/PCI/PCIe/HT…etc. 48B2 Event logging Enables BIOS to log system events to BMC, errors include ECC/PCI/PCIe/HT…etc. 48B3 NMI on Error Disables BIOS to generate NMI when PCIe uncorrectable errors occur. 48B4 NMI on Error Enables BIOS to generate NMI when PCIe uncorrectable errors occur. 48B5 Memory Operating Voltage Indicates all DIMMs in the system are operating at 1.25 volts. 48C0 Frequency Ratio Sets frequency multiplier as maximum level. 48C1 Frequency Ratio Downgrades frequency multiplier one level. 48C2 Frequency Ratio Downgrades frequency multiplier two levels. 48C3 Frequency Ratio Downgrades frequency multiplier three levels. 48C8 QPI Frequency Sets the QPI frequency runs at maximum speed. 48C9 QPI Frequency Sets the QPI frequency runs at 4.800GT. 48CA QPI Frequency Sets the QPI frequency runs at 5.866GT. 48CB QPI Frequency Sets the QPI frequency runs at 6.400GT. 48CC QPI Frequency Sets the QPI frequency runs at 7.200GT. 48CD QPI Frequency Sets the QPI frequency runs at 8.000GT. 48D0 Energy Efficient Policy Controls the energy efficient policy as performance profile to configure all necessary settings. 48D1 Energy Efficient Policy Controls the energy efficient policy as balance profile to configure all necessary settings. (default) 48D2 Energy Efficient Policy Controls the energy efficient policy as low power profile to configure all necessary settings. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description110 Using the System Setup Program 48D3 Direct Cache Access Disables the Direct Cache Access. 48D4 Direct Cache Access Enables the Direct Cache Access. 48D8 Load Customized Defaults Requests a customized default of SETUP values on the next boot. 48DA Save Customized Defaults Saves current settings to customized defaults of SETUP on next boot. 48DB N/A Requests maximum performance settings of SETUP values on the next boot. 48DC N/A Requests a energy efficiency settings of SETUP values on the next boot. 48DD N/A Requests HPCC efficiency settings of SETUP values on the next boot. Dell will provide the settings before A-can BIOS. 48DE Shell Requests the uEFI Shell as first boot device on the next boot. 48E0 N/A Use NIC3 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot followed by NIC1. 48E1 N/A Use NIC4 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot followed by NIC1. 48E2 N/A Use NIC5 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot followed by NIC1. 48E3 N/A Use NIC6 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot followed by NIC1. 48E4 N/A Use NIC7 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot followed by NIC1. 48E5 N/A Use NIC8 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot followed by NIC1. 48E6 N/A Use HDD1 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 111 48E7 N/A Use HDD2 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48E8 N/A Use HDD3 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48E9 N/A Use HDD4 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48EA N/A Use HDD5 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48EB N/A Use HDD6 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48EC N/A Use RAID HDD1as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48ED N/A Use RAID HDD2 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48EE N/A Use RAID HDD3 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48EF N/A Use RAID HDD4 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48F0 N/A Use RAID HDD5 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48F1 N/A Use RAID HDD6 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48F2 N/A Use RAID HDD7 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48F3 N/A Use RAID HDD8 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48F4 N/A Use RAID HDD9 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48F5 N/A Use RAID HDD10 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48F6 N/A Use RAID HDD11 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description112 Using the System Setup Program 48F7 N/A Use RAID HDD12 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48F8 N/A Use RAID HDD13 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48F9 N/A Use RAID HDD14 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48FA N/A Use RAID HDD15 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48FB N/A Use RAID HDD16 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 113 IPMI Command List The following tables include all commands defined in the IPMI v2.0 specifications. All mandatory commands and some optional functions are supported. Special functions beyond the scope of IPMI v2.0 are implemented as original equipment manufacturer (OEM) commands. In the O/M column: • M = Mandatory in the IPMI spec and is implemented. • O = Optional command supported in this implementation. • N = Not supported in this implementation. See the Deployment Toolkit Version 1.3 User's Guide for additional information about installing and using the DTK utilities, and the Deployment Toolkit Version 1.3 Command Line Interface Reference Guide for a complete list of all valid options, suboptions, and arguments for using the BMCCFG.EXE to configure and manage your BMC. NOTE: For more information about the standard IPMI tool commands, see ipmitool.sourceforge.net/manpage.html. Table 2-2. IPMI Device Global Commands (NetFn: 0x06H) Command NetFn Code IPMI 2.0 BMC Get Device ID App 0x01h M Yes Broadcast Get Device ID App 0x02h M Yes Cold Reset App 0x03h O Yes Warm Reset App 0x04h O No Get Self Test Results App 0x05h M Yes Manufacture Test On App 0x06h O Yes Get ACPI Power State App 0x07h O Yes Get Device GUID App 0x08h O Yes Get NetFn Support App 0x09h O Yes Get Command Support App 0x0Ah O Yes Get Command Sub-function Support App 0x0Bh O Yes114 Using the System Setup Program Table 2-2. IPMI Device Global Commands (NetFn: 0x06H) (continued) Command NetFn Code IPMI 2.0 BMC Get Configurable Commands App 0x0C O Yes Get Configurable Command Sub-functions App 0x0Dh O Yes Set Command Enables App 0x60h O Yes Get Command Enables App 0x61h O Yes Set Command Sub-function Enables App 0x62h O Yes Get Command Sub-function Enables App 0x63h O Yes Get OEM NetFn IANA Support App 0x64h O Yes Table 2-3. BMC Watchdog Timer Commands (NetFn: 0x06H) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Reset Watchdog Timer App 0x22h M Yes Set Watchdog Timer App 0x24h M Yes Get Watchdog Timer App 0x25h M Yes Table 2-4. BMC Device and Messaging Commands (NetFn: 0x06H) Command NetFn Code IPMI 2.0 BMC Set BMC Global Enables App 0x2Eh M Yes Get BMC Global Enables App 0x2Fh M Yes Clear Message Buffer Flags App 0x30h M Yes Get Message Buffer Flags App 0x31h M Yes Enable Message Channel Receive App 0x32h O Yes Get Message App 0x33h M Yes Send Message App 0x34h M Yes Read Event Message Buffer App 0x35h O YesUsing the System Setup Program 115 Table 2-5. BMC Device and Messaging Commands (NetFn: 0x 06H) (continued) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Get BT Interface Capabilities App 0x36h M No Get System GUID App 0x37h M Yes Set System Info Parameters App 0x58h O Yes Get System Info Parameters App 0x59h O Yes Get Channel Authentication Capabilities App 0x38h O Yes Get Session Challenge App 0x39h O Yes Activate Session Command App 0x3Ah O Yes Set Session Privilege Level Command App 0x3Bh O Yes Close Session App 0x3Ch O Yes Get Session Information App 0x3Dh O Yes Get Authentication Code Command App 0x3Fh O Yes Set Channel Access Commands App 0x40h O Yes Get Channel Access Commands App 0x41h O Yes Get Channel Info Command App 0x42h O Yes Set User Access Commands App 0x43h O Yes Get User Access Commands App 0x44h O Yes Set User Name Commands App 0x45h O Yes Get User Name Commands App 0x46h O Yes Set User Password Commands App 0x47h O Yes Active Payload Command App 0x48h O Yes Deactivate Payload Command App 0x49h O Yes Get Payload Activation Status App 0x4Ah O Yes Get Payload Instance Info Command App 0x4Bh O Yes Set User Payload Access App 0x4Ch O Yes Get User Payload Access App 0x4Dh O Yes Get Channel Payload Support App 0x4Eh O Yes116 Using the System Setup Program Table 2-5. BMC Device and Messaging Commands (NetFn: 0x 06H) (continued) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Get Channel Payload Version App 0x4Fh O Yes Get Channel OEM Payload Info App 0x50h O Yes Master Write-Read I2C App 0x52h M Yes Get Channel Cipher Suites App 0x54h O Yes Suspend/Resume Payload Encryption App 0x55h O Yes Set Channel Security Keys App 0x56h O Yes Get System Interface Capabilities App 0x57h O No Table 2-6. Chassis Device Commands (NetFn: 0x00H) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Get Chassis Capabilities Chassis 0x00h M Yes Get Chassis Status Chassis 0x01h M Yes Chassis Control Chassis 0x02h M Yes Chassis Reset Chassis 0x03h O No Chassis Identify Chassis 0x04h O Yes Set Chassis Capabilities Chassis 0x05h O Yes Set Power Restore Policy Chassis 0x06h O Yes Get System Restart Cause Chassis 0x07h O Yes Set System Boot Options Chassis 0x08h O Yes Get System Boot Options Chassis 0x09h O Yes Set Front Panel Button Enable Chassis 0x0Ah O No Set Power Cycle Interval Chassis 0x0Bh O Yes Get POH Counter Chassis 0x0Fh O NoUsing the System Setup Program 117 Table 2-7. Event Commands (NetFn: 0x04H) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Set Event Receiver S/E 0x00h M Yes Get Event Receiver S/E 0x01h M Yes Platform Event S/E 0x02h M Yes Table 2-8. PEF/PET Alerting Commands (NetFn: 0x04H) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Get PEF Capabilities S/E 0x10h M Yes Arm PEF Postpone Timer S/E 0x11h M Yes Set PEF Configuration Parameters S/E 0x12h M Yes Get PEF Configuration Parameters S/E 0x13h M Yes Set Last Processed Event ID S/E 0x14h M Yes Get Last Processed Event ID S/E 0x15h M Yes Alert Immediate S/E 0x16h O Yes PET Acknowledge S/E 0x17h O Yes Table 2-9. Sensory Device Commands (NetFn: 0x04H) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Get Device SDR Info S/E 0x20h O No Get Device SDR S/E 0x21h O No Reserve Device SDR Repository S/E 0x22h O No Get Sensor Reading Factors S/E 0x23h O Yes Set Sensor Hysteresis S/E 0x24h O Yes Get Sensor Hysteresis S/E 0x25h O Yes Set Sensor Threshold S/E 0x26h O Yes Get Sensor Threshold S/E 0x27h O Yes Set Sensor Event Enable S/E 0x28h O Yes118 Using the System Setup Program Table 2-10. Sensory Device Commands (NetFn: 0x04H) (continued) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Get Sensor Event Enable S/E 0x29h O Yes Set Sensor Reading and Event Status S/E 0x30h O Yes Re-arm Sensor Events S/E 0x2Ah O Yes Get Sensor Event Status S/E 0x2Bh O Yes Get Sensor Reading S/E 0x2Dh M Yes Set Sensor Type S/E 0x2Eh O No Get Sensor Type S/E 0x2Fh O No Table 2-11. FRU Inventory Device Commands (NetFn: 0x0AH) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Get FRU Inventory Area Info Storage 0x10h M Yes Read FRU Inventory Data Storage 0x11h M Yes Write FRU Inventory Data Storage 0x12h M Yes Table 2-12. SDR Repository Commands (NetFn: 0x0AH) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Get SDR Repository Info Storage 0x20h M Yes Get SDR Repository Allocation Info Storage 0x21h O No Reserve SDR Repository Storage 0x22h M Yes Get SDR Storage 0x23h M Yes Add SDR Storage 0x24h M No Partial ADD SDR Storage 0x25h O Yes Delete SDR Storage 0x26h O No Clear SDR Repository Storage 0x27h M Yes Get SDR Repository Time Storage 0x28h O YesUsing the System Setup Program 119 * Support for Partial Add SEL is not required when Add SEL is supported. Table 2-12. SDR Repository Commands (NetFn: 0x0AH) (continued) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Set SDR Repository Time Storage 0x29h O Yes Enter SDR Repository Update Mode Storage 0x2Ah O No Exit SDR Repository Update Mode Storage 0x2Bh O No Run Initialization Agent Storage 0x2Ch O Yes Table 2-13. SEL Commands (NetFn: 0x40H) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Get SEL Info Storage 0x40h M Yes Get SEL Allocation Info Storage 0x41h O No Reserve SEL Storage 0x42h O Yes Get SEL Entry Storage 0x43h M Yes Add SEL Entry Storage 0x44h M Yes Partial Add SEL Entry Storage 0x45h M No * Delete SEL Entry Storage 0x46h O No Clear SEL Storage 0x47h M Yes Get SEL Time Storage 0x48h M Yes Set SEL Time Storage 0x49h M Yes Get Auxiliary Log Status Storage 0x5Ah O No Set Auxiliary Log Status Storage 0x5Bh O No Get SEL Time UTC Offset Storage 0x5Ch O No Set SEL Time UTC Offset Storage 0x5D O No120 Using the System Setup Program Table 2-14. LAN Device Commands (NetFn: 0x0CH) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Set LAN Configuration Parameters (Note: Parameter 9 and 25 are not supported.) Transport 0x01h M Yes Get LAN Configuration Parameters (Note: Parameter 9 and 25 are not supported.) Transport 0x02h M Yes Suspend BMC ARP Transport 0x03h O No Get IP/UDP/RMCP Statistics Transport 0x04h O No Table 2-15. Serial/Modem Device Commands (NetFn: 0x 0CH) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Set Serial/Modem Configuration Transport 0x10h M Yes Get Serial/Modem Configuration Transport 0x11h M Yes Set Serial/Modem Mux Transport 0x12h O Yes Get TAP Response Codes Transport 0x13h O No Set PPP UDP Proxy Transmit Data Transport 0x14h O No Get PPP UDP Proxy Transmit Data Transport 0x15h O No Send PPP UDP Proxy Packet Transport 0x16h O No Get PPP UDP Proxy Receive Data Transport 0x17h O No Serial/Modem Connection Active Transport 0x18h M Yes Callback Transport 0x20h O No SOL Activating Transport 0x19h O No Set SOL Configuration Transport 0x20h O No Get SOL Configuration Transport 0x21h O No Set User Callback Options Transport 0x1Ah O No Get User Callback Options Transport 0x1Bh O No Set Serial Routing Mux Transport 0x1Ch O YesUsing the System Setup Program 121 Table 2-16. Command Forwarding Commands (NetFn: 0x0CH) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Forwarded Command Transport 0x30h O Yes Set Forwarded Commands Transport 0x31h O Yes Get Forwarded Commands Transport 0x32h O Yes Enable Forwarded Commands Transport 0x33h O Yes Table 2-17. Firmware Update Commands (NetFn: 0x08H) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Firmware Update Phase 1 Firmware 0x10h O Yes Firmware Update Phase 2 Firmware 0x11h O Yes Get Firmware Update Status Firmware 0x12h O Yes Get Firmware Version Firmware 0x13h O Yes Set Firmware Update Status Firmware 0x16h O Yes Firmware Update Phase 3 Firmware 0x21h O Yes Table 2-18. GPGPU Setting Commands (NetFn: 0x30H) Command NetFn LUN CMD Privelege Set GPGPU ID 0x30h 0h 32h Admin Get GPGPU ID 0x30h 0h 33h Admin122 Using the System Setup Program Power Management Settings The system BIOS provides various options for power settings to help you save energy, maximize system performance. The following table provides a guide for power management settings. Table 2-19. Power Management Settings System Setup Maximum Performance (48DB) Energy Efficiency (48DC) Setup Page Setting Option D4 Token Option D4 Token Power Management Power Management Max. Performance 021F Node Manager 4800 Energy Efficiency Policy Performance 48D0 Low Power 48D2 CPU Configuration Active Processor Cores All 026E 1/2 0233/ 0232 Frequency Ratio Auto 48C0 3 48C3 QPI Frequency Auto 48C8 4.80GT/s 48C9 Turbo Mode Enabled 01E8 Disabled 01EA C State Disabled 024C Enabled 024B C1E State Disabled 02A2 Enabled 02A1 C6 State Disabled 480A Enabled 480B C7 State Disabled 480E Enabled 480F Direct Cache Access Enabled 48D4 Disabled 48D3 Hyper-Threading Technology Enabled 00D1 Disabled 00D2 Adjacent Cache Line Prefetch Enabled 0172 Disabled 0171 Hardware Prefetcher Enabled 0174 Disabled 0173 DCU Streamer Prefetcher Enabled 02C5 Disabled 02C6 DCU IP Prefetcher Enabled 02CE Disabled 02CFUsing the System Setup Program 123 Memory Configuration Memory Frequency Auto 4823 800 MHz 4824 Memory Turbo Mode Enabled 4821 Disabled 4820 Memory Throttling Mode Disabled 4828 Enabled 4829 Memory Operating Voltage 1.5 V 02B6 1.35V/ 1.25V 02B7/ 48B5 SATA Configuration Embedded SATA Link State Auto 4834 1.5 Gbps Power Saving Features Disabled 0199 Enabled 019A PCI Configuration PCIe Slot ASPM Disabled 4840 L0s & L1 4843 Onboard LAN ASPM Disabled 4846 L0s & L1 4849 Mezzing Slot ASPM Disabled 484C L0s & L1 484F Table 2-19. Power Management Settings (continued) System Setup Maximum Performance (48DB) Energy Efficiency (48DC) Setup Page Setting Option D4 Token Option D4 Token124 Using the System Setup ProgramInstalling System Components 125 3 Installing System Components Safety Instructions WARNING: Working on systems that are still connected to a power supply can be extremely dangerous. CAUTION: System components and electronic circuit boards can be damaged by discharge of static electricity. CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. To avoid injury to yourself or damage to your system, follow these guidelines: • Always disconnect the system from the power outlet whenever you are working inside the system. • If possible, wear a grounded wrist strap when you are working inside the system. Alternatively, discharge any static electricity by touching the bare metal chassis of the system case, or the bare metal body of any other grounded appliance. • Hold electronic circuit boards by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the board unless it is necessary to do so. Do not flex or stress the circuit board. • Leave all components inside the static-proof packaging until you are ready to use the component for the installation.126 Installing System Components • Some cables have a connector with locking tabs; if you are disconnecting this type of cable, press in on the locking tabs before you disconnect the cable. As you pull connectors apart, keep them evenly aligned to avoid bending any connector pins. Also, before you connect a cable, ensure that both connectors are correctly oriented and aligned. Recommended Tools • #1 Phillips screwdriver • #2 Phillips screwdriver • Torx drivers • Set of jeweler screwdriversInstalling System Components 127 Inside the System CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. CAUTION: This system must be operated with the sled or a sled blank installed to make sure of proper cooling. Figure 3-1. Inside the Sled 1 system board 2 heat sinks/processors (2) 3 memory (16) 4 cooling shroud 5 interposer extender 6 internal 2.5-inch hard-drives (2)128 Installing System Components Sled Configuration The following illustrations show a 10-Sled and 8-Sled configuration. A mixture of differing sled types is also supported in the PowerEdge C8000 server enclosure. For more information, refer to the PowerEdge C8000 Hardware Owner’s Manual. Figure 3-2. PowerEdge C8220 10-Sled SKU Figure 3-3. PowerEdge C8220 8-Sled SKU with 2 Power SledsInstalling System Components 129 Sled Removing a Sled CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. CAUTION: To ensure proper airflow in the system, if a module is removed it should be immediately replaced with another sled or sled blank. CAUTION: Operating the system for extended periods of time without a sled blank installed can cause the PowerEdge C8000 server enclosure to overheat. See "Installing a Sled Blank" on page 131. 1 Power down the sled using OS commands or the Baseboard Management Controller, and ensure that the sled's power is off. When a sled is powered off, its front-panel power indicator is off. 2 Press the release latch and using the handle, slide the sled out of the enclosure. See Figure 3-4. Figure 3-4. Removing and Installing a Sled 1 handle 2 release latch130 Installing System Components Installing a Sled CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Orient the sled so that the release latch is in the bottom of the sled. See Figure 3-4. 2 Slide the new sled into the enclosure until the sled is fully seated and the release latch snaps into place. See Figure 3-4. Sled Blank CAUTION: To ensure proper airflow in the system, if a module is removed it should be immediately replaced with another sled or sled blank. Removing a Sled Blank Press the release latches and slide the blank out of the enclosure. See Figure 3-5. Figure 3-5. Removing and Installing a Sled Blank 1 release latches (2) 2 sled blankInstalling System Components 131 Installing a Sled Blank Hold the blank with the guide rail facing forward. Slide the blank into the enclosure until it is fully seated and the release latches snap into place. See Figure 3-5. SD Card Removing a SD Card 1 Power down the sled using OS commands or the Baseboard Management Controller, and ensure that the sled's power is off. When a sled is powered off, its front-panel power-on indicator is off. See Figure 1-1. 2 Press the release latch and using the handle, slide the sled out slightly until you have access to the SD card slot. 3 Press the SD card in to release it from the slot and remove the card. See Figure 3-6. Figure 3-6. Removing and Installing a SD Card 1 SD card 2 SD card slot132 Installing System Components Installing a SD Card Media memory cards are generally marked with a symbol (such as a triangle or an arrow) or a label to indicate which end to insert into the slot. The cards are keyed to prevent incorrect insertion. If card orientation is not clear, see the documentation that came with the card. NOTE: To use an SD card with your sled, ensure that the SD card slot is enabled in the System Setup program. See "Using the System Setup Program" on page 45. 1 Hold the SD card with the label side facing to the right. See Figure 3-6. 2 Press the card into the slot to lock into place. See Figure 3-6. If you encounter too much resistance, do not force the card. Check the card orientation and try again. 3 Slide the sled into the chassis until the sled is fully seated and the release lever snaps into place. Sled Covers Removing the Front Cover CAUTION: The sled must be operated with the sled covers installed to ensure proper cooling. CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. NOTE: It is recommended that you always use a static mat and static strap while working on components in the interior of the system. 1 Remove the four screws securing the front cover. See Figure 3-7. 2 Lift the front cover from the sled tray. See Figure 3-7. 3 If installed, disconnect all cables from the expansion card. Installing System Components 133 Figure 3-7. Removing and Installing the Front Cover Installing the Front Cover NOTE: It is recommended that you always use a static mat and static strap while working on components in the interior of the system. 1 Check that all cable connections are secure. 2 Place the front cover on top of the sled tray, aligning the notches in the front cover with the corresponding tabs in the sled tray. See Figure 3-7. 3 If an expansion card is installed, make sure the expansion card riser is firmly seated. 4 Replace the four screws securing the front cover to the sled tray. See Figure 3-7. 1 screws (4) 2 front cover 1 2134 Installing System Components Removing the Back Cover CAUTION: The sled must be operated with the sled covers installed to ensure proper cooling. CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. NOTE: It is recommended that you always use a static mat and static strap while working on components in the interior of the system. 1 Remove the two screws securing the back cover. See Figure 3-8. 2 Slide the cover forward to free it from the metal guides on the sled tray. 3 Lift the cover from the sled tray. See Figure 3-8. Figure 3-8. Removing and Installing the Back Cover 1 back cover 2 screws (2)Installing System Components 135 Installing the Back Cover NOTE: It is recommended that you always use a static mat and static strap while working on components in the interior of the system. 1 Place the cover on the sled tray and slide it towards the front of the sled tray so that the screw holes on the back cover align with the sled tray. See Figure 3-8. 2 Replace the two screws securing the back cover to the sled tray. See Figure 3-8. Cooling Shroud Removing the Cooling Shroud CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. CAUTION: Never operate your system with the cooling shroud removed. The system may get overheated quickly, resulting in shutdown of the system and loss of data. 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Remove the two screws securing the cooling shroud to the sled tray. See Figure 3-9. 3 Press the shroud release lever toward the right of the sled. 4 Lift the shroud up to disengage the anchor tab from the heat sink. See Figure 3-9.136 Installing System Components Figure 3-9. Removing and Installing the Cooling Shroud Installing the Cooling Shroud CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. CAUTION: Never operate your system with the cooling shroud removed. The system may get overheated quickly, resulting in shutdown of the system and loss of data. 1 Align and gently press the cooling shroud down on the system board until the anchor tabs snap securely into place. See Figure 3-9. 2 Replace the two screws securing the cooling shroud to the sled tray. See Figure 3-9. 3 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. 1 screws (2) 2 cooling shroudInstalling System Components 137 Heat Sink Removing a Heat Sink CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on page 135. WARNING: The heat sink may be hot to touch for some time after the system has been powered down. Allow the heat sink to cool before removing it. CAUTION: Never remove the heat sink from a processor unless you intend to remove the processor. The heat sink is necessary to maintain proper thermal conditions. 3 Using a Phillips screwdriver, loosen one pair of diagonal retention screws that secure the heat sink to the system board. See screw sequence indicated on Figure 3-10. 4 Loosen the other pair of retention screws. See Figure 3-10.138 Installing System Components Figure 3-10. Heat Sink Screw Loosening Sequence 5 Gently lift the heat sink off the processor and set the heat sink aside with thermal grease side facing up. See Figure 3-11. Figure 3-11. Removing and Installing the Heat SinkInstalling System Components 139 Installing a Heat Sink CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. NOTE: When installing the heat sink, be sure to orient the heat sink so that the KEY icon on the heat sink label is facing the neighboring heat sink. 1 Using a clean lint-free cloth, remove the thermal grease from the heat sink. 2 Apply new thermal grease evenly to the center of the top of the new processor. 3 Orient the heat sink so that the KEY icon on the heat sink is facing the neighboring heat sink’s KEY icon. See Figure 3-11. 4 Using a Phillips screwdriver, tighten the four heat sink retention screws in a diagonal sequence. See Figure 3-10. 5 Replace the cooling shroud. See "Installing the Cooling Shroud" on page 136. 6 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. 1 screws (4) 2 heat sink 3 heat sink KEY icon 4 heat sink 5 heat sink KEY icon140 Installing System Components Processors Your sled supports the following processors: Use the following procedure when: • Installing an additional processor • Replacing a processor Removing a Processor CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on page 135. Table 3-1. Processors Model Number Cores/Threads Frequency TDP E5-2690 8/16 2.9 GHz 135 W E5-2680 8/16 2.7 GHz 130 W E5-2670 8/16 2.6 GHz 115 W E5-2660 8/16 2.2 GHz 95 W E5-2665 8/16 2.4 GHz 115 W E5-2650 8/16 2.0 GHz 95 W E5-2640 6/12 2.5 GHz 95 W E5-2630 6/12 2.3 GHz 95 W E5-2620 6/12 2.0 GHz 95 W E5-2650L 8/16 1.8 GHz 70 W E5-2630L 6/12 2.0 GHz 60 WInstalling System Components 141 3 Remove the heat sink. See "Removing a Heat Sink" on page 137. CAUTION: The processor is held in its socket under strong pressure. Be aware that the release lever can spring up suddenly if not firmly grasped. 4 Position your thumb firmly over the processor hook-shaped socket-release lever and release the lever from the locked position. Do not force the lever up to the fully open position. See Figure 3-12. 5 Position your thumb firmly over the bent load lever and release the lever from the locked position. Rotate the lever 90 degrees upward to lift the processor shield. See Figure 3-12. 6 Rotate the processor shield upward and out of the way. See Figure 3-12. 7 Lift the processor out of the socket and leave the socket-release lever and load lever up so that the socket is ready for the new processor. See Figure 3-12. CAUTION: The processor is held in its socket under strong pressure. Be aware that the release and load levers can spring up suddenly if not firmly grasped. Figure 3-12. Removing and Installing a Processor142 Installing System Components Installing a Processor CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. NOTE: When installing only one processor, the processor must be installed in the processor 1 socket. See "System Board Connectors" on page 197 for the location of the processor 1 socket. NOTE: If you are upgrading your processors, prior to upgrading your system, download and install the latest system BIOS version from support.dell.com. Follow the instructions included in the file download to install the update on your system. 1 Unpack the processor if it has not been used previously. 2 If the processor has already been used, remove any thermal grease from the top of the processor using a lint-free cloth. 3 Align the processor with the socket keys on the processor socket. See Figure 3-12. CAUTION: Positioning the processor incorrectly can permanently damage the system board or the processor. Be careful not to bend the pins in the processor socket. 4 With the hook-shaped release and bent load levers on the processor socket in the open position, match the processor with the alignment mark indicator and the socket keys and set the processor lightly in the socket. See Figure 3-12. CAUTION: Do not use force to seat the processor. When the processor is positioned correctly, it engages easily into the socket. 5 Close the processor shield. 1 processor alignment mark (triangle) 2 processor 3 processor shield 4 hook-shaped socket-release lever 5 processor socket 6 socket key (4) 7 bent load lever 8 alignment notchInstalling System Components 143 6 Rotate the bent load lever down until it snaps into place. 7 Rotate the hook-shaped socket-release lever down until it snaps into place. See Figure 3-12. 8 Replace the heat sink. See "Installing a Heat Sink" on page 139. 9 Replace the cooling shroud. See "Installing the Cooling Shroud" on page 136. 10 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. 11 Press to enter the System Setup and check that the processor information matches the new system configuration. System Memory Each system board has 16 memory module sockets for the installation of DDR3 unbuffered ECC DIMMs (ECC UDIMMs), registered DIMMs (RDIMMs), and load reduced DIMMs (LRDIMMs) to support processor 1 and processor 2. See "System Board Connectors" on page 197 for the location of the memory modules. Memory Module Installation Guidelines Follow these guidelines when installing memory modules on the sled system board. • Use only Dell approved R/LR/UDIMM DDR3 memory modules in 2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, and 32 GB capacities. DIMM types (R/LR/UDIMM) cannot be mixed. • DIMM slots are numbered 1 to 8 and designated by two channels. The number of channels used and the allowable configuration depend on the memory mode selected in the System Setup program. • DIMMs must be installed in each channel starting with the DIMM socket farthest from the processor, per Table 3-2. • Memory optimized mode is supported on the sled system board.144 Installing System Components • Memory sparing and memory mirroring are supported on the sled system board. Memory sparing requires that all the DIMMs are identically populated in all 4 channels. One channel will be the spare and not accessible as system memory until brought online to replace a failing channel. For memory mirroring, two channels operate as mirrors for each other, identical DIMMs must be installed in the same slots across both channels. Supported DIMM Configuration For the sequence of the 16 DIMM sockets, see Figure 3-13. When you insert the DIMM(s), always start with DIMM_A1. For single processor configurations, the optimized memory module installation sequence is A1/A2/A3/A4/A5/A6/A7/A8. See Table 3-2 for dual processor configurations. Figure 3-13. Memory Slot Locations 1 DIMM_A3 2 DIMM_A7 3 DIMM_A4 4 DIMM_A8 5 DIMM_B1 6 DIMM_B5 7 DIMM_B2 8 DIMM_B6 9 DIMM_B8 10 DIMM_B4 11 DIMM_B7 12 DIMM_B3 13 DIMM_A6 14 DIMM_ A2 15 DIMM_A5 16 DIMM_A1Installing System Components 145 NOTE: An empty DIMM socket is marked as "  ". For best performance, all the memory modules installed must be of the same speed, capacity, and from the same manufacturer. Table 3-2. Memory Module Configuration—Single Processor DIMM QTY Processor 1 Channel A Channel B Channel C Channel D DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM A1 A5 A2 A6 A3 A7 A4 A8 1         2         3         4         6         8         Table 3-3. Memory Module Configuration—Dual Processors DIMM QTY Processor 1 Processor 2 Channel A Channel B Channel C Channel D Channel A Channel B Channel C Channel D DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM A1 A5 A2 A6 A3 A7 A4 A8 B1 B5 B2 B6 B3 B7 B4 B8 2                 6                 8                 12                 16                146 Installing System Components Removing Memory Modules CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. WARNING: The memory modules are hot to the touch for some time after the system has been powered down. Allow time for the memory modules to cool before handling them. Handle the memory modules by the card edges and avoid touching the components on the memory module. 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on page 135. 3 Locate the memory module sockets. See Figure 3-14. CAUTION: Handle each memory module only on either card edge, making sure not to touch the middle of the memory module. To avoid damaging components on the memory module, remove only one memory module at a time. 4 Simultaneously press down and out on the ejectors at both ends of the memory module socket until the module is released from the socket. See Figure 3-14. 5 Lift the module out of the socket. See Figure 3-14. Figure 3-14. Removing a Memory Module 1 memory module 2 memory module socket ejectors (2)Installing System Components 147 Installing Memory Modules 1 Press down and out on the ejectors on each end of the memory module socket. See Figure 3-15. 2 Align the memory module correctly with the alignment key of the memory module socket. See Figure 3-15. 3 Press down firmly on the memory module with your thumbs until the module snaps into place. See Figure 3-15. CAUTION: Even pressure during insertion must be applied at both ends of the module simultaneously to prevent damage to the socket. No pressure should be applied to the center of the module. Complete the latching of the module into the socket by applying inward pressure to the socket ejectors to assure that the ejectors are in a locked position. When the memory module is properly seated in the socket, the ejectors on the memory module socket align with the ejectors on other identical sockets that have memory modules installed. Figure 3-15. Installing a Memory Module 1 memory module 2 memory module socket ejectors (2) 3 alignment key148 Installing System Components 4 Replace the cooling shroud. See "Installing the Cooling Shroud" on page 136. 5 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. Expansion Card CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. The sled supports a low-profile PCIe x16 expansion card installed in the expansion card riser. To locate the expansion card riser, see Figure 3-17. Removing the Expansion Card 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Remove the front cover. See "Removing the Front Cover" on page 132. 3 Once the front cover is detached, turn it over to expose the expansion card side. See Figure 3-16. 4 Remove the screw securing the expansion card. See Figure 3-16. 5 Grasp the expansion card by its edges and carefully remove it from the expansion card riser. See Figure 3-16. 6 If you are removing the card permanently, install a metal filler bracket over the empty expansion slot opening, and secure with the screw. NOTE: You must install a filler bracket over an empty expansion slot to maintain Federal Communications Commission (FCC) certification of the system. The brackets also keep dust and dirt out of the system and aid in proper cooling and airflow inside the sled.Installing System Components 149 Figure 3-16. Removing and Installing the Expansion Card Installing the Expansion Card CAUTION: Expansion cards can only be installed in the slots on the expansion card riser. Do not attempt to install expansion cards directly into the riser connector on the system board. 1 Unpack the expansion card and prepare it for installation. For instructions, see the documentation accompanying the card. 2 Hold the card by its edges, position the card so that the card edge connector aligns with the expansion card riser connector on the front cover. See Figure 3-16. 3 Insert the card edge connector firmly into the riser connector until the card is fully seated. 4 Replace the screw securing the expansion card. See Figure 3-16. 5 Replace the front cover. See "Installing the Front Cover" on page 133. 6 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. 1 expansion card 2 screw150 Installing System Components Expansion Card Riser CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. Removing the Expansion Card Riser 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Remove the front cover. See "Removing the Front Cover" on page 132. 3 Remove the expansion card. See "Removing the Expansion Card" on page 148. 4 Remove the two screws securing the expansion card riser to the front cover. See Figure 3-17. 5 Pull the expansion card riser away from the front cover. See Figure 3-17. Figure 3-17. Removing and Installing the Expansion Card Riser 1 screws (2) 2 expansion card riserInstalling System Components 151 Installing the Expansion Card Riser 1 Place the expansion card riser into the front cover. See Figure 3-17. 2 Replace the two screws securing the expansion card riser. See Figure 3-17. 3 Replace the expansion card. See "Installing the Expansion Card" on page 149. 4 Replace the front cover. See "Installing the Front Cover" on page 133. 5 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. Mezzanine Cards The sled supports a variety of optional mezzanine cards. • Mellanox QDR ConnectX-2 Infiniband mezzanine card • Mellanox FDR ConnectX-3 Infiniband mezzanine card • Intel 82599 dual-port 10 GbE mezzanine card Removing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. The installation and removal procedures of the dual-port and single port Infiniband mezzanine cards are similar. Following is an example showing the replacement procedure of a dual-port Infiniband mezzanine card. 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Remove the front cover. See "Removing the Front Cover" on page 132. 3 Remove the two screws securing the Infiniband mezzanine card assembly to the sled tray. See Figure 3-18. 4 Lift the Infiniband mezzanine card assembly out of the sled tray. See Figure 3-18.152 Installing System Components Figure 3-18. Removing and Installing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card Assembly 5 Remove the screw securing the mezzanine card bridge board to the bracket. See Figure 3-19. 6 Pull the mezzanine card bridge board away from the mezzanine slot. See Figure 3-19. 1 screws (2) 2 Infiniband mezzanine card assemblyInstalling System Components 153 Figure 3-19. Removing and Installing the Mezzanine Card Bridge Board 7 Remove the three screws securing the Infiniband mezzanine card to the bracket. See Figure 3-20. 8 Remove the Infiniband mezzanine card from the bracket. See Figure 3-20. 1 screw 2 mezzanine card bridge board 3 bracket 1 2 3154 Installing System Components Figure 3-20. Removing and Installing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card Installing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Align the Infiniband mezzanine card with the screw holes on the bracket. See Figure 3-20. 2 Replace the three screws securing the Infiniband mezzanine card to the bracket. See Figure 3-20. 3 Install the mezzanine card bridge board into the mezzanine slot on the Infiniband mezzanine card. See Figure 3-19. 4 Replace the screw securing the mezzanine card bridge board to the bracket. See Figure 3-19. 5 Lower the Infiniband mezzanine card assembly to the sled tray. 1 Infiniband mezzanine card 2 screws (3) 2 1Installing System Components 155 6 Replace the two screws securing the Infiniband mezzanine card assembly to the sled tray. See Figure 3-18. 7 Replace the front cover. See "Installing the Front Cover" on page 133. 8 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. Removing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Remove the front cover. See "Removing the Front Cover" on page 132. 3 Remove the two screws securing the 10 GbE mezzanine card assembly to the sled tray. See Figure 3-21. 4 Lift the 10 GbE mezzanine card assembly out of the sled tray. See Figure 3-21. Figure 3-21. Removing and Installing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card Assembly 156 Installing System Components 5 Remove the screw securing the mezzanine card bridge board to the bracket. See Figure 3-22. 6 Pull the mezzanine card bridge board away from the mezzanine slot. See Figure 3-22. Figure 3-22. Removing and Installing the Mezzanine Card Bridge Board 7 Remove the three screws securing the 10 GbE mezzanine card to the bracket. See Figure 3-23. 8 Remove the 10 GbE mezzanine card from the bracket. See Figure 3-23. 1 screws (2) 2 10 GbE mezzanine card assembly 1 screw 2 mezzanine card bridge board 3 10 GbE mezzanine card 1 2 3Installing System Components 157 Figure 3-23. Removing and Installing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card Installing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Align the 10 GbE mezzanine card with the screw holes on the bracket. See Figure 3-23. 2 Replace the three screws securing the 10 GbE mezzanine card to the bracket. See Figure 3-23. 3 Install the mezzanine card bridge board into the mezzanine slot on the 10 GbE mezzanine card. See Figure 3-22. 1 10 GbE mezzanine card 2 screw (3) 3 mezzanine card bridge board connector 4 SFP + port 1 5 SFP + port 0 2 1 4 3 5158 Installing System Components 4 Replace the screw securing the mezzanine card bridge board to the bracket. See Figure 3-22. 5 Lower the 10 GbE mezzanine card assembly to the sled tray. See Figure 3-21. 6 Replace the two screws securing the 10 GbE mezzanine card assembly to the sled tray. See Figure 3-21. 7 Replace the front cover. See "Installing the Front Cover" on page 133. 8 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. SD Card Reader Removing the SD Card Reader CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Remove the front cover. See "Removing the Front Cover" on page 132. 3 Remove the mezzanine card. See "Removing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card" on page 151 or "Removing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card" on page 155. 4 If installed, remove the SD card. Locate the SD card slot in the SD card reader and press inward on the card to release it from the slot and remove the card. See Figure 3-24.Installing System Components 159 Figure 3-24. Removing and Installing the SD Card 5 Disconnect the SD card reader cable from the SD card reader. See Figure 3-25. 6 Remove the two screws securing the SD card reader. See Figure 3-25. 7 Lift the SD card reader from the SD card reader support bracket. See Figure 3-25. 1 SD card 2 SD card slot 1 2160 Installing System Components Figure 3-25. Removing and Installing the SD Card Reader Installing the SD Card Reader CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Place the SD card reader on the SD card reader support bracket. See Figure 3-25. 2 Replace the two screws securing the SD card reader. See Figure 3-25. 3 Connect the SD card reader cable to the SD card reader. See Figure 3-25. 4 If applicable, install the SD card. Hold the SD card with the label side facing to the right and press the card into the slot to lock into place. See Figure 3-24. 1 SD card reader cable 2 screws (2) 3 SD card slot 4 SD card reader 5 SD card reader connectorInstalling System Components 161 5 Replace the mezzanine card. See "Installing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card" on page 154 or "Installing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card" on page 157. 6 Replace the front cover. See "Installing the Front Cover" on page 133. 7 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. Removing the SD Card Reader Support Bracket 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Remove the front cover. See "Removing the Front Cover" on page 132. 3 Remove the mezzanine card. See "Removing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card" on page 155 or "Removing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card" on page 151. 4 Remove the SD card reader. See "Removing the SD Card Reader" on page 158. 5 Remove the two screws securing the SD card reader support bracket. See Figure 3-26. 6 Lift the support bracket out of the sled tray. See Figure 3-26. Figure 3-26. Removing and Installing the SD Card Reader Support Bracket 1 screws (2) 2 SD card reader support bracket162 Installing System Components Installing the SD Card Reader Support Bracket 1 Align the SD card reader support bracket with the screw holes on the sled tray. See Figure 3-26. 2 Replace the two screws securing the SD card reader support bracket. See Figure 3-26. 3 Replace the SD card reader. See "Installing the SD Card Reader" on page 160. 4 Replace the mezzanine card. See "Installing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card" on page 154 or "Installing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card" on page 157. 5 Replace the front cover. See "Installing the Front Cover" on page 133. 6 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. Internal Hard-Drives The sled supports up to two 2.5-inch hard-drives attached internally to the sled tray. Removing a Hard-Drive Carrier CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. CAUTION: Combining SATA and SAS hard-drives in the same sled configuration is not supported. 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Remove the back cover. See "Removing the Back Cover" on page 134. 3 Loosen the thumbscrew securing the hard-drive carrier to the hard-drive bracket. See Figure 3-27. 4 Slide and lift the hard-drive carrier out of the sled tray. See Figure 3-27.Installing System Components 163 Figure 3-27. Removing and Installing a Hard-Drive Carrier Installing a Hard-Drive Carrier CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. CAUTION: Combining SATA and SAS hard-drives in the same sled configuration is not supported. 1 Place the hard-drive carrier into the sled tray and slide into place. See Figure 3-27. 2 Tighten the thumbscrew to secure the hard-drive carrier in place. See Figure 3-27. 3 Replace the back cover. See "Installing the Back Cover" on page 135. 4 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. 1 thumbscrew 2 hard-drive carrier164 Installing System Components Removing a Hard-Drive From the Hard-Drive Carrier CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Remove the four screws securing the hard-drive. See Figure 3-28. 2 Lift the hard-drive out of the hard-drive carrier. See Figure 3-28. Figure 3-28. Removing and Installing a Hard-Drive from the Hard-Drive Carrier 1 hard-drive 2 hard-drive carrier 3 screws (4)Installing System Components 165 Installing a Hard-Drive Into a Hard-Drive Carrier CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Align the hard-drive carrier with the new hard-drive screw holes. See Figure 3-28. 2 Replace the four screws securing the hard-drive. See Figure 3-28. Removing the Hard-Drive Tray CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Remove the back cover. See "Removing the Back Cover" on page 134. 3 Remove the internal hard-drives. See "Removing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on page 162. 4 Remove the three screws securing the hard-drive tray. See Figure 3-29. 5 Lift the hard-drive tray at an angle and slide the standoff holes on the hard-drive tray out of the sled tray standoffs. See Figure 3-29.166 Installing System Components Figure 3-29. Removing and Installing the Hard-Drive Tray Installing the Hard-Drive Tray CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Insert the sled tray’s standoff holes into the sled tray standoffs. See Figure 3-29. 2 Replace the two screws securing the hard-drive tray. See Figure 3-29. 3 Replace the internal hard-drives. See "Installing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on page 163. 4 Replace the back cover. See "Installing the Back Cover" on page 135. 5 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. 1 screws (3) 2 hard-drive tray 3 hard-drive tray standoff holes (2)Installing System Components 167 Interposer Extender Removing the Interposer Extender CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Remove the back cover. See "Removing the Back Cover" on page 134. 3 Remove the internal hard-drives. See "Removing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on page 162. 4 Remove the hard-drive tray. See "Removing the Hard-Drive Tray" on page 165. 5 Press down the cable-locking tab and disconnect the power cable from the interposer extender. See Figure 3-30. 6 Remove the two screws securing the interposer extender to the sled tray. See Figure 3-30. 7 Grasp the interposer extender by its edges and carefully remove it from the system board connector. 8 Lift the interposer extender out of the sled tray. See Figure 3-30.168 Installing System Components Figure 3-30. Removing and Installing the Interposer Extender Installing the Interposer Extender CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Hold the card by its edges, position the interposer extender so that the edge connector aligns with the system board connector. See Figure 3-30. 2 Insert the card edge connector firmly into the system board connector until the card is fully seated. 3 Replace the two screws securing the interposer extender to the sled tray. See Figure 3-30. 4 Connect the power cable to the interposer extender. Press down on the locking tab to secure the power cable. See Figure 3-30. 1 screws (2) 2 interposer extender 3 power cableInstalling System Components 169 5 Replace the hard-drive tray. See "Installing the Hard-Drive Tray" on page 166. 6 Replace the internal hard-drives. See "Installing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on page 163. 7 Replace the back cover. See "Installing the Back Cover" on page 135. 8 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. Node Power Distribution Board Removing the Node Power Distribution Board CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Remove the back cover. See "Removing the Back Cover" on page 134. 3 Remove the internal hard-drives. See "Removing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on page 162. 4 Remove the hard-drive tray. See "Removing the Hard-Drive Tray" on page 165. 5 Remove the interposer extender. See "Removing the Interposer Extender" on page 167. 6 Disconnect all cables from the node power distribution board (NPDB). See Figure 3-31. When you disconnect the power cable, press down the cable-locking tab and disconnect the power cable from the NPDB. Note the routing of the cable on the sled as you remove them from the sled tray. You must route these cables properly when you replace them to prevent the cables from being pinched or crimped. 7 Remove the four screws securing the NPDB to the sled tray. See Figure 3-31. 8 Lift the NPDB out of the sled tray. See Figure 3-31.170 Installing System Components Figure 3-31. Removing and Installing the Node Power Distribution Board Installing the Node Power Distribution Board CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Insert the new power distribution board into the right retaining clip at a 45-degree angle, and then press the other end of the board down into the left retaining clip to secure the board in place. Make sure to align the new power distribution board with the screw holes on the bracket. See Figure 3-31. 2 Replace the four screws securing the NPDB. See Figure 3-31. 3 Connect all cables to the NPDB. See Figure 3-31. 1 power cable 2 front panel cable 3 screws (4) 4 management cable 5 node power distribution boardInstalling System Components 171 4 You must route the cables properly on the sled tray to prevent them from being pinched or crimped. 5 Replace the interposer extender. See "Installing the Interposer Extender" on page 168. 6 Replace the hard-drive tray. See "Installing the Hard-Drive Tray" on page 166. 7 Replace the internal hard-drives. See "Installing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on page 163. 8 Replace the back cover. See "Installing the Back Cover" on page 135. 9 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. System Battery Removing the System Battery WARNING: There is a danger of a new battery exploding if it is incorrectly installed. Replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. See your safety information for additional information. CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Remove the front cover. See "Removing the Front Cover" on page 132. 3 Locate the battery socket on the system board. See "System Board Connectors" on page 197. CAUTION: To avoid damage to the battery connector, you must firmly support the connector while installing or removing a battery. 4 Press the "-" side of the battery outward to allow the battery to pop out from the socket. 5 Lift the battery out of the connector. See Figure 3-32.172 Installing System Components Figure 3-32. Removing and Installing the System Battery Installing the System Battery WARNING: There is a danger of a new battery exploding if it is incorrectly installed. Replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. See your safety information for additional information. CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Hold the new battery with the "+" facing the retention clip on the battery connector. See Figure 3-32. 2 Insert the "-" side of the battery then push the positive side 3 Gently pull the retention clip towards the positive side of the connector and slide the battery into the connector until the retention clip snaps into place. See Figure 3-32. 4 Replace the front cover. See "Installing the Front Cover" on page 133. 5 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. 6 Reconnect the system to the electrical outlet and turn the system on, including any attached peripherals. 1 system battery 2 connectorInstalling System Components 173 7 Enter the System Setup program to confirm that the battery is operating properly. See "Using the System Setup Program" on page 45. 8 Enter the correct time and date in the System Setup program's Time and Date fields. 9 Exit the System Setup program. System Board Removing the System Board CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Remove the front cover. See "Removing the Front Cover" on page 132. 3 Remove the back cover. See "Removing the Back Cover" on page 134. 4 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on page 135. 5 Remove the heat sink. See "Removing a Heat Sink" on page 137. 6 Remove the processor. See "Removing a Processor" on page 140. 7 Remove the memory modules. See "Removing Memory Modules" on page 146. 8 If installed, remove the SAS mezzanine card, Infiniband mezzanine card, or 10 GbE mezzanine card. See "Removing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card" on page 151 or "Removing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card" on page 155. 9 Remove the SD card reader. See "Removing the SD Card Reader" on page 158. 10 Remove the SD card reader support bracket. See "Removing the SD Card Reader Support Bracket" on page 161. 11 Remove the internal hard-drives. See "Removing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on page 162.174 Installing System Components 12 Remove the hard-drive tray. See "Removing the Hard-Drive Tray" on page 165. 13 Remove the interposer extender. See "Removing the Interposer Extender" on page 167. 14 Remove the node power distribution board. See "Removing the Node Power Distribution Board" on page 169. 15 Disconnect all cables from the system board. See Figure 3-33. When you disconnect the power cable, press down the cable-locking tab and disconnect the power cable from the NPDB. See Figure 3-33. Note the routing of the cables as you remove it from the sled tray. You must route these cables properly when you replace them to prevent the cables from being pinched or crimped. Figure 3-33. Removing and Installing the Cables 16 Remove the six screws securing the system board. See Figure 3-34. 1 management cable 2 power cable 3 front panel cableInstalling System Components 175 17 Grasp the system board by the edges and lift the system board out of the sled tray. See Figure 3-34. Figure 3-34. Removing the System Board Installing the System Board CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Unpack the new system board. 2 Holding the system board by the edges, slide the system board into the sled tray. See Figure 3-34. 3 Replace the six screws securing the system board to the sled tray. See Figure 3-34. 4 Connect all cables to the system board. See Figure 3-33. 1 screws (6) 2 system board 1 2176 Installing System Components 5 You must route the cables properly on the sled tray to prevent them from being pinched or crimped. 6 Install the node power distribution board. See "Installing the Node Power Distribution Board" on page 170. 7 Install the interposer extender to the new board. See "Installing the Interposer Extender" on page 168. 8 Install the hard-drive tray. See "Installing the Hard-Drive Tray" on page 166. 9 Install the hard-drives. See "Installing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on page 163. 10 Install the SD card reader support bracket. See "Installing the SD Card Reader Support Bracket" on page 162. 11 Install the SD card reader. See "Installing the SD Card Reader" on page 160. 12 Transfer the processors to the new system board. See "Removing a Processor" on page 140 and "Installing a Processor" on page 142. 13 Remove the memory modules and transfer them to the same locations on the new board. See "Removing Memory Modules" on page 146 and "Installing Memory Modules" on page 147. 14 Replace the cooling shroud. See "Installing the Cooling Shroud" on page 136. 15 If applicable, install the mezzanine card. See "Installing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card" on page 154 or "Installing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card" on page 157. 16 Install the expansion card. See "Installing the Expansion Card" on page 149. 17 Replace the front cover. See "Installing the Front Cover" on page 133. 18 Replace the back cover. See "Installing the Back Cover" on page 135. 19 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.Troubleshooting 177 4 Troubleshooting Safety First—For You and Your System WARNING: Whenever you need to lift the system, get others to assist you. To avoid injury, do not attempt to lift the system by yourself. WARNING: Before removing the system cover, disconnect all power, then unplug the AC power cord, and then disconnect all peripherals, and all LAN lines. CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. Installation Problems Perform the following checks if you are troubleshooting an installation problem: • Check all cable and power connections (including all rack cable connections). • Unplug the power cord and wait for one minute. Then reconnect the power cord and try again. • If the network is reporting an error, verify that the system has enough memory and disk space. • Remove all added peripherals, one at a time, and try to turn on the system. If after removing a peripheral the system works, it may be a problem with the peripheral or a configuration problem between the peripheral and the system. Contact the peripheral vendor for assistance.178 Troubleshooting • If the system does not power on, check the LED display. If the power LED is not on, you may not be receiving AC power. Check the AC power cord to make sure that it is securely connected. Troubleshooting System Startup Failure If your system halts during startup, especially after installing an operating system or reconfiguring your system’s hardware, check for invalid memory configurations. These could cause the system to halt at startup without any video output. For all other startup issues, note any system messages that appear onscreen. See "Using the System Setup Program" on page 45 for more information. Troubleshooting External Connections Ensure that all external cables are securely attached to the external connectors on your sled before troubleshooting any external devices. See Figure 1-1 for the front-panel connectors on the sled. Troubleshooting the Video Subsystem 1 Check the sled and power connections to the monitor. 2 Check the video interface cabling from the sled to the monitor. Troubleshooting a USB Device Use the following steps to troubleshoot a USB keyboard and/or mouse. For other USB devices, go to step 5. 1 Ensure that the sled is turned on. 2 Disconnect the keyboard and mouse cables from the sled briefly and reconnect them. 3 If the problem is resolved, restart the sled, enter the System Setup program, and check if the nonfunctioning USB ports are enabled. 4 Swap the keyboard/mouse with a known-working keyboard/mouse. 5 If another sled is installed, connect the USB device to the sled. If the USB device works with a different sled, the first sled may be faulty. Troubleshooting 179 If the problem is resolved, replace the faulty keyboard/mouse. If the problem is not resolved, proceed to the next step to begin troubleshooting the other USB devices attached to the system. a Power down all attached USB devices and disconnect them from the sled. b Restart the sled and, if your keyboard is functioning, enter the System Setup program. Verify that all USB ports are enabled. See "USB Configuration" on page 77. c If your keyboard is not functioning, you can also use remote access. If the system is not accessible, see "System Board Jumper Settings" on page 195 for instructions on setting the NVRAM Clear jumper inside your system and restoring the BIOS to the default settings. d Reconnect and turn on each USB device one at a time. 6 If a device causes the same problem, power down the device, replace the USB cable, and power up the device. If the problem persists, replace the device. If all troubleshooting fails, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Troubleshooting a Serial I/O Device 1 Turn off the sled and any peripheral devices connected to the serial port. 2 Swap the serial interface cable with another working cable, and turn on the sled and the serial device. If the problem is resolved, replace the interface cable. 3 Turn off the sled and the serial device, and swap the device with a comparable device. 4 Turn on the sled and the serial device. If the problem is resolved, replace the serial device. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203.180 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting a NIC 1 Restart the sled and check for any system messages pertaining to the NIC controller. 2 Check the appropriate indicator on the NIC connector. See "NIC Indicator Codes" on page 14. • If the link indicator does not light, check all cable connections. • If the activity indicator does not light, the network driver files might be damaged or missing. • Remove and reinstall the drivers if applicable. See the NIC's documentation. • Change the auto-negotiation setting, if possible. • Use another connector on the switch or hub. If you are using a NIC card instead of an integrated NIC, see the documentation for the NIC card. 3 Ensure that the appropriate drivers are installed and the protocols are bound. See the NIC's documentation. 4 Enter the System Setup program and confirm that the NIC ports are enabled. See "Using the System Setup Program" on page 45. 5 Ensure that the NICs, hubs, and switches on the network are all set to the same data transmission speed. See the documentation for each network device. 6 Ensure that all network cables are of the proper type and do not exceed the maximum length. If all troubleshooting fails, see "Getting Help" on page 203.Troubleshooting 181 Troubleshooting a Wet Enclosure CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Turn off the sleds and attached peripherals 2 Disconnect the enclosure from the electrical outlet or the PDU. CAUTION: Wait until all of the indicators on the power supplies turn off before proceeding. 3 Remove all sleds from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 4 Open the sled. See "Sled Covers" on page 132. 5 Disassemble components from the sled. See "Installing System Components" on page 125. • Hard-drives • Cooling shroud • Processors and heat sinks • Memory modules • Expansion card • Mezzanine card • Interposer extender • Node power distribution board • SD card reader 6 Remove all server enclosure components. See the PowerEdge C8000 Systems Hardware Owner’s Manual for more information. 7 Let the sled dry thoroughly for at least 24 hours. 8 Reinstall all server enclosure components. See the PowerEdge C8000 Systems Hardware Owner’s Manual for more information. 9 Reinstall all sled components you removed in step 5. 10 Close the sled. See "Sled Covers" on page 132.182 Troubleshooting 11 Reinstall the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. 12 Reconnect the server enclosure to the electrical outlet or the PDU. 13 Turn on the sleds and attached peripherals. 14 If the system fails to start, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Troubleshooting a Damaged Enclosure CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Turn off the sleds and attached peripherals. 2 Disconnect the enclosure from the electrical outlet or the PDU. 3 Ensure that the following components are properly installed in the enclosure: • Power sleds • Fan modules • Sleds 4 Ensure that the following components are properly installed in the sled: • SD card reader • Node power distribution board • Interposer extender • Mezzanine card • Expansion card • Memory modules • Processors and heat sinks • Cooling shroud • Hard-drives 5 Ensure that all cables are properly connected. 6 Ensure that all components are properly installed and free of damage. Troubleshooting 183 7 If the system fails to start, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Troubleshooting the Enclosure Fan Modules CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. NOTE: The fan modules are hot-swappable. Remove and replace only one fan module at a time in the server enclosure that is turned on. Operating the system without all three fan modules for extended periods of time can cause the system to overheat. Review the following table before you begin to replace the fan modules. Table 4-1. Fan Module Thermal Behavior Per Sled Fan Module Status BMC (Processor/Memory)/Server Enclosure Temperature Status OK/OK OK/Fail Fail/OK Fail/Fail Fan module normal/OK PID, Chassis ambient curve A, Exhaust temperature control curve A PID, 80% PWM Chassis ambient curve B, Exhaust temperature control curve A 100% PWM One fan module fails PID, Chassis ambient curve C, Exhaust temperature control curve B 100% PWM 100% PWM Exhaust temperature control curve B 100% PWM System throttling184 Troubleshooting 1 Locate the faulty fan in the back of the enclosure. Each fan module has indicators that identify a faulty fan. 2 Remove the enclosure fan module. See the PowerEdge C8000 Systems Hardware Owner’s Manual for more information. 3 Examine the blades for debris. If debris is present, carefully remove it. 4 Reseat the faulty fan. See the PowerEdge C8000 Hardware’s Owner Manual for more information. 5 If none of the fan indicators show a fault LED and the blades do not power on, log into the BMC web interface and check for status messages. 6 If the problem is not resolved, install a new fan. 7 If the new fan does not operate, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Two fan modules fail After 10 minutes of system throttling system will be forced to shut down After 10 minutes of system throttling system will be forced to shut down After 10 minutes of system throttling system will be forced to shut down After 10 minutes of system throttling system will be forced to shut down Three fan modules fail System force shutdown System force shutdown System force shutdown System force shutdown Table 4-1. Fan Module Thermal Behavior Per Sled Fan Module Status BMC (Processor/Memory)/Server Enclosure Temperature Status OK/OK OK/Fail Fail/OK Fail/FailTroubleshooting 185 Troubleshooting the Power Sled CAUTION: Remove and replace one PSU module at a time. Leave a failed PSU module installed in the power sled until you are ready to replace it. Operating the system with a power sled removed for extended periods of time can cause the system to overheat. NOTE: The 1400 W power supply module in the power sled require a 200-240 V power source to operate. 1 Locate the power sled to be removed or the power sled that contains the failed PSU module. The PSU module’s status indicator will either light up green or amber. If the PSU module is faulty the status indicator lights up amber. 2 Replace the faulty PSU module in the power sled. See the PowerEdge C8000 Systems Hardware Owner’s Manual for more information. NOTE: After installing a power sled with a new PSU module, allow several seconds for the system to recognize the power supply and to determine if it is working properly. The status indicator turns green to signify that the module is functioning properly. If none of the PSU modules show a fault LED and the sleds do not power on, log into the BMC web interface and check for status messages. See Using the Baseboard Management Controller Guide for more information. If all troubleshooting fails, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Troubleshooting System Memory CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. NOTE: Invalid memory configurations can cause your system to halt at startup without video output. See "System Memory" on page 143 and verify that your memory configuration complies with all applicable guidelines. 1 If the system is not operational, turn off the sled and attached peripherals. 186 Troubleshooting 2 After 10 seconds, turn on the sled and attached peripherals and note the messages on the screen. Go to step 13 if an error message appears indicating a fault with a specific memory module. 3 Enter the System Setup program and check the system memory settings. See "Main Menu" on page 52. Make any changes to the memory settings, if needed. If the memory settings match the installed memory but a problem is still indicated, go to step 13. 4 Turn off the sled and attached peripherals. 5 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 6 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on page 135. 7 Check the memory channels and ensure that they are populated correctly. See "Supported DIMM Configuration" on page 144. 8 Reseat the memory modules in their sockets. See "Removing Memory Modules" on page 146 and "Installing Memory Modules" on page 147. 9 Replace the cooling shroud. See "Installing the Cooling Shroud" on page 136. 10 Reinstall the sled into the enclosure. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. 11 Turn on the sled and attached peripherals. 12 Enter the System Setup program and check the system memory settings. See "Main Menu" on page 52. If the problem is not resolved, proceed with the next step. 13 Turn off the sled and attached peripherals. 14 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 15 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on page 135. 16 If a diagnostic test or error message indicates a specific memory module as faulty, swap or replace the module.Troubleshooting 187 17 To troubleshoot an unspecified faulty memory module, replace the memory module in the first DIMM socket with a module of the same type and capacity. See "Installing Memory Modules" on page 147. 18 Replace the cooling shroud. See "Installing the Cooling Shroud" on page 136. 19 Reinstall the sled into the enclosure. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. 20 Turn on the sled and attached peripherals. 21 As the system boots, observe any error message that appears and the diagnostic indicators on the front of the system. 22 If the memory problem is still indicated, repeat step 13 through step 21 for each memory module installed. 23 If the problem persists after all memory modules have been checked, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Troubleshooting a Hard-Drive CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. CAUTION: This troubleshooting procedure can destroy data stored on the hard-drive. Before you proceed, back up all files on the hard-drive. 1 If your sled has a RAID controller and your hard-drives are configured in a RAID array, perform the following steps: a Restart the sled and enter the host adapter configuration utility program by pressing for a RAID controller or for a SAS mezzanine card. See the documentation supplied with the host adapter for information about the configuration utility. b Ensure that the hard-drive(s) have been configured correctly for the RAID array. c Take the hard-drive offline and reseat the drive. See "Removing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on page 162.188 Troubleshooting d Exit the configuration utility and allow the system to boot to the operating system. 2 Ensure that the required device drivers for your controller card are installed and are configured correctly. See the operating system documentation for more information. 3 Restart the sled, enter the System Setup program, and verify that the controller is enabled and the drives appear in the System Setup program. See "Using the System Setup Program" on page 45. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Troubleshooting a Storage Controller NOTE: When troubleshooting a SAS RAID controller, also see the documentation for your operating system and the controller. 1 Enter the System Setup program and ensure that the SAS controller is enabled. See "Using the System Setup Program" on page 45. 2 Restart the sled and press the applicable key sequence to enter the configuration utility program. • for a LSI SAS 2008 mezzanine card • for a LSI 9265-8i SAS RAID Card See the controller’s documentation for information about configuration settings. 3 Check the configuration settings, make any necessary corrections, and restart the system. CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 4 Turn off the sled and attached peripherals. 5 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 6 Open the sled. See "Sled Covers" on page 132.Troubleshooting 189 7 Ensure that the controller card is firmly seated into the system board connector. See "Installing the Expansion Card" on page 149. 8 If you have a battery-cached SAS RAID controller, ensure that the RAID battery is properly connected and, if applicable, the memory module on the RAID card is properly seated. 9 Ensure that the cables are firmly connected to the storage controller. 10 Close the sled. See "Sled Covers" on page 132. 11 Reinstall the sled into the enclosure. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. 12 Turn on the sled and attached peripherals. 13 If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Troubleshooting Expansion Cards NOTE: When troubleshooting an expansion card, see the documentation for your operating system and the expansion card. CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Turn off the sled and attached peripherals. 2 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 3 Open the sled. See "Sled Covers" on page 132. 4 Ensure that each expansion card is firmly seated in its connector. See "Installing the Expansion Card" on page 149. 5 Close the sled. See "Sled Covers" on page 132. 6 Reinstall the sled into the enclosure. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. 7 Turn on the sled and attached peripherals. 8 If the problem is not resolved, see "Getting Help" on page 203.190 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Processors CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Turn off the sled and attached peripherals. 2 Remove the sled from the server enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 3 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on page 135. 4 Ensure that each heat sink is properly installed. See "Installing a Heat Sink" on page 139. 5 Ensure that each processor is properly installed. See "Installing a Processor" on page 142. 6 Replace the cooling shroud. See "Installing the Cooling Shroud" on page 136. 7 Reinstall the sled into the enclosure. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. 8 Turn on the sled and attached peripherals. 9 If the problem persists, turn off the sled and attached peripherals. 10 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 11 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on page 135. 12 Remove processor 2. See "Removing a Processor" on page 140. 13 Replace the cooling shroud. See "Installing the Cooling Shroud" on page 136. 14 Reinstall the sled into the enclosure. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. 15 Turn on the sled and attached peripherals. If the problem persists, the processor is faulty. See "Getting Help" on page 203. 16 Turn off the sled and attached peripherals.Troubleshooting 191 17 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 18 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on page 135. 19 Replace processor 1 with processor 2. See "Installing a Processor" on page 142. 20 Repeat step 13 through step 16. If you have tested both the processors and the problem persists, the system board is faulty. See "Getting Help" on page 203. Troubleshooting the System Board CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129. 2 Open the sled. See "Sled Covers" on page 132. 3 Locate the NVRAM clear jumper on the system board. 4 Clear the NVRAM. 5 Close the sled. See "Sled Covers" on page 132. 6 If there is still a problem with the compute sled, remove and reinstall the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203.192 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting the System Battery NOTE: If the system is turned off for long periods of time (for weeks or months), the NVRAM may lose its system configuration information. This situation is caused by a defective battery. 1 Re-enter the time and date through the System Setup program. See "System Setup Options at Boot" on page 46. 2 Turn off the sled and remove it from the enclosure for at least one hour. 3 Reconnect the sled to the server enclosure and turn on the sled. 4 Enter the System Setup program. If the date and time are not correct in the System Setup program, replace the battery. See "Removing the System Battery" on page 171. CAUTION: You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. If the problem is not resolved by replacing the battery, see "Getting Help" on page 203. NOTE: Some software may cause the system time to speed up or slow down. If the system seems to operate normally except for the time kept in the System Setup program, the problem may be caused by software rather than by a defective battery.Troubleshooting 193 IRQ Assignment Conflicts Most PCI devices can share an IRQ with another device, but they cannot use an IRQ simultaneously. To avoid this type of conflict, see the documentation for each PCI device for specific IRQ requirements. PCI IRQ pool definition is the BIOS code assigned at run time. IRQ Line Assignment IRQ Line Assignment IRQ0 8254 timer IRQ8 Real-time clock IRQ1 Keyboard controller IRQ9 PCI IRQ pool definition IRQ2 Cascade for IRQ9 IRQ10 PCI IRQ pool definition IRQ3 Default for COM2 IRQ11 PCI IRQ pool definition IRQ4 Default for COM1 IRQ12 Mouse controller IRQ5 PCI IRQ pool definition IRQ13 Processor IRQ6 PCI IRQ pool definition IRQ14 Primary IDE controller IRQ7 PCI IRQ pool definition IRQ15 Secondary IDE controller194 TroubleshootingJumpers and Connectors 195 5 Jumpers and Connectors This section provides specific information about the system jumpers. It also provides some basic information on jumpers and switches and describes the connectors on the various boards in the system. System Board Jumper Settings Figure 5-1. System Board Jumper Settings Table 5-1. System Board Jumper Settings Item Jumper Setting Description 1 Service mode (default) The flash security setting is enabled. The flash security and NVRAM clear signal is disabled.196 Jumpers and Connectors 2 NVRAM clear (default) The configuration settings are retained at system boot. The configuration settings are cleared at the next system boot. 3 ME firmware recovery (default) The ME firmware recovery jumper is disabled. The ME firmware recovery jumper enables ME firmware recovery mode. 4 BIOS recovery (default) The BIOS recovery jumper is disabled. The BIOS recovery jumper enables the BIOS flash memory special recovery mode. 5 Password enable (default) The password feature is enabled. The password feature is disabled. 6 Power button pass (default) The BMC triggers a power button signal. The power button passthrough signal is triggered. Table 5-1. System Board Jumper Settings Item Jumper Setting DescriptionJumpers and Connectors 197 System Board Connectors Figure 5-2. System Board Connectors 1 USB connectors (2) 2 PCIe x8 mezzanine slot 3 SD card reader (internal USB) connector 4 internal SAS mezzanine slot 5 mini-SAS connector 0 6 onboard SATA connector 4 7 onboard SATA connector 5 8 system battery 9 DIMM sockets for processor 1 DIMMA3 socket DIMMA4 socket DIMMA7 socket DIMMA8 socket 10 processor 1 11 DIMM sockets for processor 2 DIMMB1 socket DIMMB2 socket DIMMB5 socket DIMMB6 socket 12 main power connector 13 internal hard-drive interposer 14 SGPIO connector 2 15 internal serial connector 16 front panel connector 1 17 PCIe x16 back GPGPU 18 processor 2198 Jumpers and Connectors 19 DIMM sockets for processor 2 DIMMB3 socket DIMMB4 socket DIMMB7 socket DIMMB3 socket 20 DIMM sockets for processor 1 DIMMA1 socket DIMMA2 socket DIMMA5 socket DIMMA6 socket 21 LAN LED connector 22 PCIe x16 slot 1 23 PCIe x16 slot 2 24 SGPIO connector 1 25 power button/power-on indicator 26 VGA connector 27 serial connector 28 internal BMC serial console connector 29 BMC management port 30 consolidated BMC cable connector 31 NIC2 connector (RJ45) 32 NIC1 connector (RJ45) 33 system identification indicatorJumpers and Connectors 199 Interposer Extender Connectors Figure 5-3. Interposer Extender Connectors 1 SATA connector 4 2 2-pin power connector 3 SATA connector 5 4 IPMB connector 5 SGPIO connector 6 SATA connector 0 7 SATA connector 1 8 SATA connector 2 9 SATA connector 3200 Jumpers and Connectors SD Card Reader Connectors Figure 5-4. SD Card Reader Connectors 1 SD card reader cable connector 2 SD card connectorJumpers and Connectors 201 Node Power Distribution Board Connectors Figure 5-5. Node Power Distribution Board Connectors 1 power/throttle connector 2 I2C connector 3 12V S2 power connector 4 HDD1 power connector 5 power connector 6 HDD3 power connector 7 HDD2 power connector 8 system board power connector 9 12 V S1 power connector 10 remote sensor connector 11 hard-drive LED indicator connector 12 system board control connector 13 LAN pass-through connector 202 Jumpers and ConnectorsGetting Help 203 6 Getting Help Contacting Dell For customers in the United States, call 800-WWW-DELL (800-999-3355). NOTE: If you do not have an active Internet connection, you can find contact information on your purchase invoice, packing slip, bill, or Dell product catalog. Dell provides several online and telephone-based support and service options. Availability varies by country and product, and some services may not be available in your area. To contact Dell for sales, technical support, or customer service issues: 1 Visit support.dell.com. 2 Click your country/region at the bottom of the page. For a full listing of country/region, click All. 3 Click All Support from Support menu. 4 Select the appropriate service or support link based on your need. 5 Choose the method of contacting Dell that is convenient for you.204 Getting HelpFILE LOCATION: D:\Projects\User Guide\Server\Dell\Zeus\HOM\SWC Sled\for Dell\C8220\C8220_HOM_bk0IX.fm Index 205 Index A about your system, 11 B back cover installing, 135 removing, 134 C command line interfaces, 90 connectors system board, 197 console redirection configuring, 47 cooling shroud installing, 136 removing, 135 D Dell contacting, 203 E Ethernet mezzanine card installing, 157 removing, 155-157 expansion card installing, 149 removing, 148 expansion card riser installing, 151 removing, 150 F features front panel, 12 front cover installing, 133 removing, 132 H hard-drive installing, 165 removing, 164 hard-drive carrier installing, 163 removing, 162FILE LOCATION: D:\Projects\User Guide\Server\Dell\Zeus\HOM\SWC Sled\for Dell\C8220\C8220_HOM_bk0IX.fm 206 Index hard-drive tray installing, 166 removing, 165 heat sink installing, 139 removing, 137 I indicator front panel, 12 NIC, 14 power, 13 system identity, 13 indicator codes power and system board, 16 Infiniband mezzanine card installing, 154 removing, 151-154 installing back cover, 135 cooling shroud, 136 Ethernet mezzanine card, 157 expansion card, 149 expansion card riser, 151 front cover, 133 hard-drive, 165 hard-drive carrier, 163 hard-drive tray, 166 heat sink, 139 Infiniband mezzanine card, 154 interposer extender, 168 memory modules, 147 NPDB, 170 processor, 142-143 SD card, 132 SD card reader, 160-161 SD card reader bracket, 162 sled, 130 sled blank, 131 system battery, 172 system board, 175 interposer extender installing, 168 removing, 167 IPMI command list, 113 M memory modules (DIMMs) configuration, 144-145 installation guidelines, 143 installing, 147 removing, 146 N NPDB installing, 170 removing, 169FILE LOCATION: D:\Projects\User Guide\Server\Dell\Zeus\HOM\SWC Sled\for Dell\C8220\C8220_HOM_bk0IX.fm Index 207 P POST error codes, 19 power management settings, 122 processor installing, 142-143 removing, 140-141 R removing back cover, 134 cooling shroud, 135 Ethernet mezzanine card, 155-157 expansion card, 148 expansion card riser, 150 front cover, 132 hard- drive carrier, 162 hard-drive, 164 hard-drive tray, 165 heat sink, 137 Infiniband mezzanine card, 151-154 interposer extender, 167 memory modules, 146 NPDB, 169 processor, 140-141 SD card, 131 SD card reader, 158-160 SD card reader bracket, 161 sled, 129 sled blank, 130 system battery, 171 system board, 173 S safety, 177 SD card installing, 132 removing, 131 SD card reader installing, 160-161 removing, 158, 160 SD card reader bracket installing, 162 removing, 161 service tag, 18 sled front features, 12 installing, 130 removing, 129 sled blank installing, 131 removing, 130 sled front features, 12 system battery installing, 172 removing, 171 system board connectors, 197 installing, 175 jumper settings, 195 removing, 173 system features accessing, 11 System log See system setup screenFILE LOCATION: D:\Projects\User Guide\Server\Dell\Zeus\HOM\SWC Sled\for Dell\C8220\C8220_HOM_bk0IX.fm Index 208 system sensor overview, 38 system setup active state power management configuration, 75 BMC LAN configuration, 82 chassis power management, 58 chassis PSU configuration, 59 CPU configuration, 62 embedded network devices, 72 emergency throttling, 61 memory configuration, 65 PCI configuration, 70 PCI slot configuration, 76 power capping, 60 power management, 56 prefetch configuration, 64 remote access configuration, 83 SATA configuration, 67 security settings, 78 USB configuration, 77 system setup program entering, 46 general help, 47 system setup menu, 45 system setup screen advanced, 55 boot, 86 exit, 88 main, 52 security, 78 server, 80 T troubleshooting damaged enclosure, 182 enclosure fan modules, 183 expansion cards, 189 external connections, 178 hard-drive, 187 power sled, 185 processors, 190 RTC battery, 192 serial device, 179 storage controller, 188 system board, 191 system memory, 185 USB device, 178 video, 178 wet enclosure, 181 Dell 2145cn Multifunktionsprinter Brugerhåndbog www.dell.com | support.dell.com2 | Funktioner i dit nye laserprodukt funktioner i dit nye laserprodukt Din nye maskine er udstyret med et antal specielle funktioner, der forbedrer kvaliteten af de dokumenter, du udskriver. Med denne maskine kan du: Udskrive i enestående kvalitet og med høj hastighed • Du kan udskrive i et fuldt farveområde med cyan, magenta, gul og sort. • Du kan skrive ud med en opløsning på op til 2.400 x 600 dpi. Se Softwareafsnit. • Maskinen kan udskrive på papir i A4-format med en hastighed på op til 20 sider pr. minut og på papir i Letterformat med en hastighed på op til 21 sider pr. minut. Håndtere mange forskellige typer printbart materiale • Universalbakken understøtter brevhoved, konvolutter, etiketter, medier i brugerdefinerede størrelser, postkort og kraftigt papir. Universalbakken kan rumme op til 100 ark almindeligt papir. • Bakke 1 til 250 ark og den ekstra bakke til 500 ark understøtter almindeligt papir i forskellige størrelser. Udarbejde professionelle dokumenter • Udskriv vandmærker. Du kan tilpasse dine dokumenter med ord, som f.eks. ”Fortroligt”. Se Softwareafsnit. • Udskrive plakater. Teksten og billederne på hver side i dokumentet forstørres og udskrives på tværs af arkene, som derefter kan limes sammen til en plakat. Se Softwareafsnit. • Du kan udskrive fortrykte formularer og brevpapir på almindeligt papir. Se Softwareafsnit. Spare tid og penge • Du kan udskrive flere sider på et enkelt ark og derved spare papir. • Maskinen sparer strøm, fordi strømforbruget nedsættes automatisk, når den ikke er i brug. • Du kan spare papir ved at udskrive på begge sider af papiret (dobbeltsidet udskrivning). Se Softwareafsnit. Udvide maskinens kapacitet • Maskinen har et ekstra hukommelsesstik til udvidelse af hukommelsen (se ”Ekstraudstyr” på side 85). • Zoran IPS Emulation* kompatibel med PostScript 3 (PS) aktiverer PS-udskrivning. . Udskrive i forskellige miljøer • Du kan udskrive fra Windows 2000 og Windows XP/2003/ 2008/Vista samt fra Linux- og Macintosh-systemer. • Maskinen er udstyret med et USB-interface og et netværks interface. Kopiere originaler i flere formater • Maskinen kan udskrive flere kopier af et billede fra en original på en enkelt side. • Der er specielle funktioner til at slette katalog- og avisbaggrund. • Udskriftskvaliteten og billedstørrelsen kan justeres og forbedres samtidigt. Scanne originalerne og sende dem med det samme • Scanne i farver og bruge den præcise komprimering i form af JPEG-, TIFF- og PDF-formaterne. • Scanne og hurtigt sende filer til flere destinationer ved brug af netværksscanning. Angive et bestemt tidspunkt for overførsel af en fax (ekstraudstyr) • Du kan angive et bestemt tidspunkt at sende en fax og du kan også sende faxen til flere gemte destinationer. • Efter overførslen kan maskinen udskrive faxrapporter i henhold til indstillingen. * Zoran IPS Emulation kompatibel med PostScript 3 © Copyright 1995-2005, Zoran Corporation. Alle rettigheder forbeholdes. Zoran, Zoran-logoet, IPS/PS3 og OneImage er varemærker, der tilhører Zoran Corporation. * 136 PS3-skrifttyper Omfatter UFST og MicroType fra Monotype Imaging Inc. SPECIALFUNKTIONERFunktioner i dit nye laserprodukt | 3 FUNKTIONER PR. MODEL Maskinen er udviklet til at understøtte alle dine dokumentbehov – fra udskrivning og kopiering til mere avancerede netværksløsninger til din virksomhed. Basisfunktionerne i denne maskine omfatter følgende: ( : inkluderet, O: ekstraudstyr) OM DENNE BRUGERVEJLEDNING Denne brugervejledning indeholder oplysninger om maskinens grundlæggende funktionalitet samt en detaljeret forklaring på hvert trin under anvendelsen. Både nye og øvede brugere kan bruge denne vejledning til installation og brug af maskinen. Nogle udtryk i denne vejledning bruges som synonymer, som beskrevet herunder: • Dokument betyder det samme som original. • Papir er synonymt med medie eller udskriftsmedie. Følgende tabel beskriver de konventioner, der anvendes i denne vejledning: FUNKTIONER Dell 2145cn USB 2.0 USB-hukommelsesgrænseflade DADF (Duplex Automatic Document Feeder) Harddisk (ekstraudstyr) O Kabelbaseret 10/100 Base TX lokalnetværk Duplex (2 sidet) udskrivning FAX KONVENTION BESKRIVELSE EKSEMPEL Fed Bruges til tekst på skærmen eller udtryk, der er trykt på maskinen. Start Bemærk Bruges til at angive yderligere oplysninger eller detaljerede specifikationer om maskinens funktionalitet og egenskaber. Datoformatet kan variere fra land til land. Forsigtig Bruges til at give brugerne oplysninger for at beskytte maskinen mod mulige mekaniske beskadigelser eller fejlfunktion. Berør ikke tonerpatronens grønne underside. Fodnote Bruges til at angive yderligere detaljerede oplysninger om bestemte ord eller udtryk. a. sider pr. minut (Se side 1 for at få yderligere oplysninger) Bruges til at føre brugere til referencesiden for yderligere oplysninger. (Se side 1 for at få yderligere oplysninger)4 | Funktioner i dit nye laserprodukt FLERE OPLYSNINGER Du kan finde oplysninger om klargøring og brug af maskinen i de vejledninger og på det websted, der er angivet nedenfor. Du kan vælge at udskrive vejledningerne eller få dem vist på skærmen. Vejledning til hurtig installation Giver oplysninger om opsætning af maskinen, og dette kræver, at du følger instruktionerne i vejledningen for at forberede maskinen. Onlinebrugervejledning Indeholder trinvise beskrivelser af, hvordan du bruger alle maskinens funktioner. Desuden kan du se, hvordan maskinen skal vedligeholdes, og hvordan du løser problemer og installerer tilbehør. Denne brugervejledning indeholder også Softwareafsnit for at give dig oplysninger om, hvordan du udskriver dokumenter med maskinen på forskellige operativsystemer, samt hvordan du bruger den medfølgende software. Du kan få adgang til brugervejledningen på andre sprog i mappen Manual på cd’en med printersoftware. Hjælp til printerdriveren Indeholder hjælp til printerdriverens egenskaber og vejledning om indstilling af udskrivningsegenskaber. Du åbner skærmbilledet med hjælp til printerdriveren ved at klikke på Hjælp i dialogboksen med Printeregenskaber. Dells websted Hvis du har adgang til internettet, kan du få hjælp og support, finde printerdrivere og vejledninger og få andre oplysninger på Dells websted: www.dell.com eller support.dell.com.Sikkerhedsoplysninger | 5 sikkerhedsoplysninger VIGTIGE FORSKRIFTER OG SIKKERHEDSOPLYSNINGER Betydningen af ikoner og skilte i denne brugerhåndbog: Disse advarselsskilte er anbragt for at forhindre, at du og andre kommer til skade. Følg dem udtrykkeligt. Når du har læst dette afsnit, skal du opbevare det et sikkert sted til fremtidig reference. ADVARSEL Farer eller usikre rutiner kan medføre risiko for alvorlig personskade eller dødsfald. FORSIGTIG Farer eller usikre rutiner kan medføre risiko for mindre personskade eller beskadigelse af genstande. FORSIGTIG Følg disse grundlæggende sikkerhedsforanstaltninger for at reducere risikoen for ild, eksplosion, elektrisk stød eller personskade. Forsøg IKKE at. Adskil IKKE. Berør IKKE. Følg udtrykkeligt retningslinjerne. Træk stikket ud af stikkontakten. Kontroller, at maskinen er jordet for at forhindre elektrisk stød. Ring til servicecentret for at få hjælp. 1. Sørg for at gennemlæse og forstå alle instruktioner. 2. Brug sund fornuft ved betjening af elektrisk udstyr. 3. Følg alle advarsler og instruktioner på maskinen og i den medfølgende dokumentation. 4. Hvis en betjeningsinstruktion ser ud til at være i strid med sikkerhedsoplysningerne, skal du rette dig efter sikkerhedsoplysningerne. Du kan have misforstået instruktionen. Hvis du ikke kan finde en løsning på problemet, kan du rådføre dig med en salgs- eller servicerepræsentant. 5. Træk stikket ud af stikkontakten og/eller telefonstikket, inden maskinen rengøres. Undgå brug af flydende rengøringsmidler eller midler på sprayflaske. Brug kun en fugtig klud til rengøring. 6. Maskinen må ikke placeres på en ustabil vogn, et ustabilt stativ eller bord. Den kan falde ned og forårsage alvorlig beskadigelse. 7. Maskinen må aldrig placeres på, i nærheden af eller over en radiator, et varmeapparat, airconditionanlæg eller en ventilationsåbning. 8. Placer ikke noget på strømledningen. Placer ikke maskinen, så ledningerne udsættes for unødigt slid ved, at andre træder på dem. 9. Stikkontakter og forlængerledninger må ikke overbelastes. Dette kan medføre reduceret ydelse og kan føre til fare for brand eller elektrisk stød. 10. Pas på, at kæledyr ikke tygger på strømledningen eller ledningerne til telefon eller pc. 11. Skub aldrig genstande ind i maskinen gennem kabinettet eller åbninger i kabinettet. De kan komme i kontakt med farlige, strømførende steder, og der kan opstå fare for brand eller elektrisk stød. Pas på ikke at spilde væske på eller ind i maskinen. 12. Reducer risikoen for elektrisk stød ved aldrig at skille maskinen ad. Bring maskinen til en kvalificeret servicetekniker, hvis reparation er påkrævet. Hvis dæksler åbnes eller fjernes, kan dette medføre fare for elektrisk stød eller andre farlige situationer. Ukorrekt samling af maskinen kan medføre elektrisk stød, når maskinen efterfølgende anvendes. 6 | Sikkerhedsoplysninger 13. Tag stikket fra maskinen ud af telefonstikket, pc’en og vægstikket, og overlad serviceopgaver til kvalificerede teknikere i følgende situationer: • Hvis nogen del af strømledningen, stikket eller tilslutningskablet beskadiges eller bliver slidt. • Hvis der er spildt væske i maskinen. • Hvis maskinen har været udsat for regn eller anden form for vand. • Hvis maskinen ikke fungerer korrekt, når instruktionerne er blevet fulgt. • Hvis maskinen er blevet tabt, eller kabinettet ser ud til at være beskadiget. • Hvis maskinens ydelse pludselig ændres mærkbart. 14. Juster kun indstillinger, som beskrives i brugervejledningen. Ukorrekt justering af andre indstillinger kan føre til beskadigelser, og det kan kræve omfattende reparation af kvalificerede serviceteknikere at få maskinen til at fungere normalt igen. 15. Undgå at anvende maskinen under tordenvejr. Der er en lille risiko for at få elektrisk stød fra lynnedslag. Træk om muligt stikkene til både lysnet og telefon ud, indtil tordenvejret er overstået. 16. Den strømledning, der følger med maskinen, bør anvendes, for at maskinen kan bruges på sikker vis. Hvis du bruger en ledning, der er længere end 2 m med en 110 V maskine, skal den være på 16 AWG a eller større. 17. Brug kun en telefonledning af typen 26 AWG eller større. 18. GEM DISSE INSTRUKTIONER. 19. Denne maskine kan kun benyttes i det land, hvor du har købt den (pga. forskellig spænding, frekvens, telekommunikationskonfiguration, etc.). a.AWG: American Wire GuageIndhold | 7 2 Funktioner i dit nye laserprodukt 5 Sikkerhedsoplysninger INTRODUKTION 12 12 Oversigt over printeren 12 Set forfra 12 Set bagfra 13 Oversigt over kontrolpanelet 14 Status Indikatorernes betydning 14 Godkender status for tonerpatronen 15 Menuoversigt 16 Medfølgende software 16 Printerdriverfunktioner 16 Printerdriver 16 PostScript-driver SÅDAN KOMMER DU I GANG 17 17 Opsætning af hardwaren 17 Udskrivning af testside 17 Konfiguration af netværket 17 Supported network environments 18 Konfiguration af netværksprotokol via maskinen 18 Brug af programmet SetIP 18 Systemkrav 18 Microsoft® Windows® 18 Macintosh 19 Linux 19 Installation af softwaren 20 Maskinens grundlæggende indstillinger 20 Højdejustering 20 Ændring af sprog i displayet 21 Indstilling af dato og klokkeslæt 21 Ændring af tidsformatet 21 Ændring af standardfunktionen 21 Indstilling af lyde 21 Indtastning af tegn ved hjælp af taltastaturet 22 Sådan bruger du sparetilstandene 22 Indstilling af timeout for udskriftsjob 22 Auto fortsæt 23 Ændring af skrifttypeindstillinger ILÆGNING AF ORIGINALER OG UDSKRIFTSMEDIER 24 24 Ilægning af originaler 24 På scannerglaspladen 24 I DADF’en 25 Valg af udskriftsmedier 26 Specifikationer for udskriftsmedie 27 Mediestørrelser, der understøttes i de forskellige tilstande 27 Retningslinjer for specielle udskriftsmedier 28 Ændring af papirstørrelsen i papirbakken 29 Placering af papir 29 Placering af papir i bakke 1 eller den valgfri bakke 29 Ilægning af papir i universalbakken 30 Justering af outputsupporten 30 Ved papir i Letter-størrelse 30 Ved papir i A4- eller Legal-størrelse 31 Indstilling af papirstørrelse og type indhold8 | Indhold indhold KOPIERING 32 32 Valg af papirbakke 32 Kopiering 32 Ændring af indstillingerne for hver kopi 32 Mørkhed 32 Originaltype 32 Formindsket eller forstørret kopi 33 Ændring af scanningsstørrelsesindstillingerne 33 Ændring af standardindstillingerne for kopiering 33 Kopiering af ID-kort 33 Brug af de specielle kopifunktioner 33 Sortering 34 2- eller 4-op-kopiering 34 Plakatkopiering 34 Klonkopiering 34 Sletning af baggrundsbilleder 34 Bogkopiering 35 Margenskift 35 Slet kant 35 Justering af gråtone ved kopiering 35 Udskrivning på begge sider af papiret 36 Indstilling af timeout for kopiering SCANNING 37 37 Grundlæggende om scanning 37 Scanning fra kontrolpanelet 37 Angivelse af scanningsoplysninger i Dell Scan Manager. 37 Scanning til programmer 38 Scanning ved hjælp af en netværksforbindelse 38 Klargøring til netværksscanning 39 Scanning til e-mail 40 Scanning til en FTP-server 40 Scanning til en SMB-server 40 Ændring af indstillingerne for hvert scanningsjob 40 Ændring af standardscanningsindstillinger 40 Automatisk udskrivning af scanningsbekræftelse 41 Konfiguration af adressekartoteket 41 Registrering af hurtignumre til e-mail-adresser 41 Konfiguration af gruppenumre til e-mail-adresser 41 Hentning af globale e-mail-adresser fra LDAP-serveren 41 Brug af poster fra adressekartoteket 41 Søgning efter en adresse i adressekartoteket 42 Udskrivning af adressekartoteket 42 Scanning af begge sider af papiret GRUNDLÆGGENDE UDSKRIVNING 43 43 Sådan udskriver du et dokument 43 Annullering af et udskriftsjob FAX 44 44 Afsendelse af en fax 44 Indstilling af faxhovedet 44 Justering af dokumentindstillinger 45 Automatisk afsendelse af en fax 45 Manuel afsendelse af en fax 45 Bekræftelse af en transmission 45 Automatisk genkaldIndhold | 9 indhold 45 Genopkald til det senest kaldte nummer 45 Sender faxer på begge sider af papiret 45 Modtagelse af en fax 45 Valg af papirbakke 45 Ændring af modtagetilstand 46 Automatisk modtagelse i tilstanden Fax 46 Manuel modtagelse i tilstanden Tel 46 Manuel modtagelse med en ekstern telefon 46 Automatisk modtagelse i tilstanden Ans/Fax 46 Modtagelse af faxer i tilstanden DRPD 47 Modtagelse i sikker modtagetilstand 47 Aktivering af sikker modtagetilstand 47 Modtagelse af faxer i hukommelsen 47 Andre måder at faxe på 47 Afsendelse af en fax til flere destinationer 47 Afsendelse af en udskudt fax 48 Afsendelse af en prioriteret fax 48 Videresendelse af faxer 49 Faxopsætning 49 Ændring af faxindstillingerne 50 Ændring af standarddokumentindstillingerne 50 Automatisk udskrivning af en rapport over afsendte faxer 50 Oprettelse af et adressekartotek BRUG AF USB-FLASH-HUKOMMELSE 53 53 Om USB-hukommelse 53 Tilslutning af en USB-hukommelsesenhed 53 Scanning til en USB-hukommelsesenhed 53 Scanning 54 Tilpasning af scanning til USB 54 Udskrivning fra en USB-hukommelsesenhed 54 Sådan udskrives et dokument fra en USB-hukommelsesenhed 54 Sikkerhedskopiering af data 54 Sikkerhedskopiering af data 54 Gendannelse af data 55 Håndtering af USB-hukommelse 55 Sletning af en billedfil 55 Formatering af en USB-hukommelsesenhed 55 Visning af USB-hukommelsesstatus VEDLIGEHOLDELSE 56 56 Udskrivning af rapporter 56 Udskrivning af en rapport 56 Justering af farvekontrasten 57 Brug af Advarsel om lav toner 57 Sådan slettes hukommelsen 57 Rengøring af maskinen 57 Rengøring af maskinen udvendigt 57 Indvendig rengøring af maskinen 59 Rengøring af scannerenheden 59 Vedligeholdelse af patronen 59 Opbevaring af tonerpatroner 59 Forventet patronlevetid 59 Fordeling af toner 60 Udskiftning af tonerpatronen 61 Sletter meddelelsen om Ikke mere toner 61 Udskiftning af papiroverførselsbæltet 62 Vedligeholdelsesdele10 | Indhold indhold 62 Kontrol af udskiftelige dele 63 Udskiftning af DADF gummipuden 63 Styring af maskinen fra webstedet 63 Sådan får du adgang til Embedded Web Service 63 Kontrol af maskinens serienummer FEJLFINDING 64 64 Tip til at undgå papirstop 64 Afhjælpning af dokumentstop 64 Indføringsfejl ved dokumentindlæsning 65 Fejl ved papirudføring 65 Indføringsfejl ved valsen 65 Udbedring af papirstop 65 I papirindføringsområdet 66 I universalbakken 68 I fikseringsenheden 69 I papirudføringsområdet 70 I den valgfri bakke 71 Displaymeddelelsernes betydning 75 Løsning af andre problemer 75 Papirindføring 75 Udskrivningsproblemer 76 Problemer med udskriftskvaliteten 79 Kopieringsproblemer 80 Scanningsproblemer 80 Faxproblemer 81 Almindelige PostScript-problemer 81 Almindelige Windows-problemer 82 Almindelige Linux-problemer 84 Almindelige Macintosh-problemer BESTILLING AF FORBRUGSSTOFFER OG EKSTRAUDSTYR 85 85 Forbrugsstoffer 85 Ekstraudstyr 85 Sådan køber du INSTALLATION AF TILBEHØR 86 86 Der skal tages visse forholdsregler, når der installeres tilbehør 86 Aktivering af det tilføjede tilbehør i printeregenskaber 86 Opgradering af et hukommelsesmodul 86 Installation af et hukommelsesmodul 87 Brug af harddisken 87 Installation af harddisken 88 Udskrivning med harddisken (ekstraudstyr) 89 Filpolitik 90 Sletter resterende billeddata SPECIFIKATIONER 91 91 Generelle specifikationer 91 Printerspecifikationer 92 Specifikationer for scanner 92 Specifikationer for kopimaskine 93 Specifikationer for faxIndhold | 11 indhold PENDIKS 94 94 Dells politik for teknisk support 94 Kontakt til Dell 94 Garanti- og returpolitik ORDLISTE 95 INDEKS12 | Introduktion introduktion Maskinens hovedkomponenter er: Kapitlet omfatter: • Oversigt over printeren • Oversigt over kontrolpanelet • Status Indikatorernes betydning • Godkender status for tonerpatronen • Menuoversigt • Medfølgende software • Printerdriverfunktioner OVERSIGT OVER PRINTEREN Set forfra Set bagfra 1 Styr til indstilling af dokumentbredde 12 USB-hukommelsesport 2 DADF 13 Indikator for papirniveau 3 Kontrolpanel 14 Ekstra bakke 2 4 Outputsupport 15 Styr til indstilling af papirbredde på universalbakke 5 Frontdæksel 16 Tonerpatron 6 Håndtag til frontdæksel 17 Papiroverførselsbælte 7 Håndtag til universalbakke 18 Scannerlåg 8 Universalbakke 19 Scannerlåsekontakten 9 Bakke 1 20 Scannerglasplade 10 Dokumentindføringsbakke 21 Scannerenhed 11 Dokumentudbakke 1 USB-port 7 Tænd/sluk-kontakt 2 Netværksport 8 Strømindgang 3 15-bens valgfri bakkeforbindelse 9 Dæksel til kontrolkort 4 Telefonstik 10 Bagdæksel 5 Telefonstik til ekstern telefon (EXT) 11 Kabelstyring 6 HåndtagIntroduktion | 13 OVERSIGT OVER KONTROLPANELET 1 Genvejstaster Giver dig mulighed for at gemme hyppigt kaldte faxnumre og ringe til dem blot ved at trykke på nogle få knapper. 2 Shift Giver dig mulighed for at vælge hurtigopkaldstast 16 - 30. 3 Adressekartotek ( ) Du kan gemme faxnumre, du ofte bruger, i hukommelsen eller søge efter gemte faxnumre og email-adresser. 4 Opløsning ( ) Justerer opløsningen for det dokument, der skal faxes. 5 Genopkald/Pause ( ) Hvis maskinen er i klar-tilstand, ringes der op til det senest kaldte nummer. Hvis den er i redigeringstilstand, indsættes der en pause i et faxnummer. 6 Fax ( ) Aktiverer faxtilstand. 7 Kopiering ( ) Aktiverer kopitilstand. 8 Scan/Email ( ) Aktiverer scanningstilstand. 9 Display Der vises aktuel status og meddelelser i displayet, når maskinen er i brug. 10 Toner colors De tonerfarver, der vises under LCD-displayet fungerer sammen med meddelelserne på displayet. Se Statusindikatorer med tonerpatronmeddelelser på side 14. 11 Menu ( ) Aktiverer menutilstanden og skifter mellem de tilgængelige menuer. 12 Venstre og højre pil Bruges til at skifte mellem de tilgængelige indstillinger i den valgte menu og til at øge eller formindske værdier. 13 OK ( ) Bekræfter det, der er valgt på skærmen. 14 Tilbage ( ) Vender tilbage til menuens øverste niveau. 15 Status ( ) Viser maskinstatus. Se ”Status Indikatorernes betydning” på side 14. 16 Mørkhed ( ) Justerer lysstyrken for det dokument, der skal kopieres. Se ”Mørkhed” på side 32. 17 Originaltype ( ) Bruges til at vælge dokumenttype for det aktuelle kopieringsjob. Se ”Originaltype” på side 32. 18 Id-kopi ( ) Du kan kopiere begge sider af ID-kortet, f.eks. et kørekort på et enkelt ark papir. Se ”Kopiering af ID-kort” på side 33. 19 Formindsk/Forstør ( ) Gør en kopi mindre eller større end originalen. 20 Duplex ( ) Gør det muligt at udskrive på begge sider af papiret. 21 USB-udskrivning ( ) Filer, der er gemt på en USB-enhed, kan udskrives direkte, hvis du sætter USB-enheden i USB-porten foran på maskinen. Se ”Om USB-hukommelse” på side 53. 22 Taltastatur Bruges til at ringe til et nummer eller indtaste alfanumeriske tegn. Se ”Bogstaver og tal på taltastaturet” på side 22. 23 Håndfrit kald ( ) Opretter forbindelse med telefonlinjen. 24 Stop/Slet ( ) Stopper en igangværende handling med det samme. Sletter/annullerer kopieringsindstillingerne, f.eks. mørkhed, dokumenttype, kopistørrelse og kopiantal i klar-tilstand. 25 Color Start ( ) Starter et job i farvetilstand. 26 Black Start ( ) Starter et job i sort/hvid-tilstand. • Alle illustrationer i denne brugervejledning kan være anderledes end på din maskine, afhængigt af maskinens tilbehør eller model. • Udbakkens overflade kan blive meget varm, hvis du udskriver et stort antal sider på én gang. Pas på, at du ikke berører overfladen, og sørg for, at børn ikke kommer i nærheden af den. h X Y14 | Introduktion STATUS INDIKATORERNES BETYDNING Farven på Status ( )-lampen angiver maskinens aktuelle status. GODKENDER STATUS FOR TONERPATRONEN Statussen på tonerpatroner vises med Status ( )-indikatoren og LCDdisplayet. Hvis tonerpatronen er næsten tom, eller den skal udskiftes, lyser Status ( )-indikatoren rødt, og displayet viser meddelelsen. Pilemærket viser, hvilken farve toner der skaber problemer eller kan installeres med en ny patron. Eksempel: Ovenstående eksempel viser tonerpatronens status for den farve, som pilen peger på. Kontroller meddelelsen for at finde ud af, hvad problemet er, samt hvordan det afhjælpes. Se side 71 for at få yderligere oplysninger om fejlmeddelelser. STATUS BESKRIVELSE Fra • Maskinen er offlinetilstand. • Maskinen er i strømbesparelsestilstand. Der skiftes automatisk til online, når der modtages data, eller når der trykkes på en vilkårlig tast. Grøn Blinker • Når den grønne indikator blinker langsomt, modtager printeren data fra computeren. • Når den grønne indikator blinker hurtigt, udskriver printeren data. Lyser • Maskinen er tændt og kan benyttes. Rød Blinker • Der er opstået en mindre fejl, og maskinen venter på, at fejlen bliver rettet. Se meddelelsen i displayet, og løs problemet ved at se under ”Displaymeddelelsernes betydning” på side 71. • Tonerpatronen er ved at være tom. Bestil en ny tonerpatron se ”Bestilling af forbrugsstoffer og ekstraudstyr” på side 85. Du kan midlertidigt forbedre udskriftskvaliteten ved at fordele den resterende toner. Se ”Udskiftning af tonerpatronen” på side 60. Lyser • Der er opstået et problem, f.eks. papirstop, et åbnet dæksel, eller der er intet papir i bakken, så maskinen kan ikke fortsætte jobbet. Kontroller meddelelsen på displayet, og se ”Displaymeddelelsernes betydning” på side 71 for at løse problemet. • Tonerpatronen er tom, eller den skal udskiftes. Se ”Displaymeddelelsernes betydning” på side 71. Kontroller altid meddelelsen på displayet for at afhjælpe problemet. Instruktionen i afsnittet Fejlfinding hjælper dig med at betjene maskinen korrekt. Se ”Displaymeddelelsernes betydning” på side 71 for flere oplysninger.Introduktion | 15 MENUOVERSIGT Fra kontrolpanelet kan du få adgang til menuer, så du kan klargøre maskinen eller bruge funktionerne i den. Du kan få adgang til menuerne ved at trykke på Menu ( ). Se følgende diagram. Nogle menuer vises muligvis ikke på kontrolpanelet afhængigt af instillinger eller modeller. Hvis det er tilfældet, kan de ikke anvendes på denne maskine. . Fax Feature Darkness Multi Send Delay Send Priority Send Forward Secure Receive Add Page Cancel Job Fax Setup Sending Redial Times Redial Term Prefix Dial ECM Mode Send Report Image TCR Dial Mode Receiving Receive Mode Ring To Answer Fax Setup (fortsat) Stamp RCV Name RCV Start Code Auto Reduction Discard Size Junk Fax Setup DRPD Mode Duplex Print Change Default Resolution Darkness Auto Report Copy Feature Copy Collation 2-Up 4-Up Poster Copy Clone Copy Adjust Bkgd. Book Copy. Margin Shift Edge Erase Gray Enhance Copy Setup Scan Size Change Default Copies Reduce/Enlarge Darkness Original Type Scan Feature USB Memory Scan Size Original Type Resolution Scan Color Scan Format E-mail Scan Size Original Type Resolution Scan Color Scan Feature (fortsat) FTP Scan Size Original Type Resolution Scan Color SMB Scan Size Original Type Resolution Scan Color System Setup Machine Setup Machine ID Machine Fax No Date & Time Clock Mode Form Menu Select Form Language Default Mode Power Save Scan PWR Save Timeout Job Timeout Altitude Adj. Auto Continue Import Setting Export Setting Paper Setup Paper Size Paper Type Paper Source Wide A4 Sound/Volume Key Sound Alarm Sound Speaker Ringer System Setup (fortsat) Report All Report Configuration Supplies Info Address Book Send Report Sent Report Fax RCV Report Schedule Jobs JunkFax Report Network Info. NetScan Report User Auth List PCL Font List PS3 Font List Stored Job Udført job Net Auth Log Maintenance Supplies Life Color Serial Number Toner Low Alert System Setup (fortsat) Clear Setting All Settings Fax Setup Copy Setup Scan Setup System Setup Network Address Book Sent Report Fax RCV Report NetScan Report Job Manage Active Job Store Job File Policy ImageOverwrite Immediate On Demand Network TCP/IP Ethernet Speed Clear Setting Network Info Scan Setup Change Default USB Memory E-mail FTP SMB Send Report16 | Introduktion MEDFØLGENDE SOFTWARE Når du har konfigureret printeren og sluttet den til computeren, skal du bruge den medfølgende cd og installere programmerne til printeren og scanneren. Cd’en giver dig adgang til følgende software: PRINTERDRIVERFUNKTIONER Printerdriverne understøtter følgende standardfunktioner: • Valg af papirretning, papirstørrelse, papirkilde og medietype • Antal kopier Du kan desuden bruge forskellige specielle udskrivningsfunktioner. Tabellen nedenfor indeholder en generel oversigt over funktioner, der understøttes af dine printerdrivere: Printerdriver PostScript-driver Cd INDHOLD Cd med printerso ftware Windows • Printerdriver: Benyt denne driver til at få optimalt udbytte af printeren. • PPD-fil (PostScript Printer Description): Brug PostScript-driveren, når du skal udskrive dokumenter med komplekse skrifttyper og grafik i PS-sproget. • Scannerdriver: TWAIN og WIA-driverne (Windows Image Acquisition) kan bruges til scanning af dokumenter på maskinen. • Scan Manager: Du kan finde programoplysninger om Scan Manager og om status på den installerede scannerdriver. • Dell Toner Management SystemTM : Viser printerstatus og navnet på jobbet, når du sender et job til udskrivning. Vinduet Dell Toner Management SystemTM viser også tonerniveauet og giver dig mulighed for at bestille nye tonerpatroner. • Status Moniter: Med dette program kan du overvåge maskinens status, og du bliver advaret, hvis der sker fejl under udskrivningen. • SmarThru Office a : Dette er det Windowsbaserede program, som følger med multifunktionsmaskinen. • Printer Setting Utility: Med dette program kan du konfigurere printerens andre indstillinger fra computerens skrivebord. • Firmware Update Utility: Dette program kan hjælpe dig med at opdatere maskinens firmware. • SetIP: Brug dette program til at definere maskinens TCP/IP-adresser. a. Giver dig mulighed for at redigere et scannet billede på mange måder ved at bruge et effektivt billedredigeringsprogram og sende billedet pr. e-mail. Du kan også åbne et andet billedredigeringsprogram, f.eks. Adobe Photoshop, fra SmarThru. Yderligere oplysninger finder du i den skærmhjælp, der findes i SmarThru-programmet. Linux • PPD-fil (PostScript Printer Description): Brug denne fil til at køre maskinen fra en Linuxcomputer og udskrive dokumenter. • SANE: Brug denne driver, når du skal scanne dokumenter. • Printer Setting Utility: Med dette program kan du konfigurere printerens andre indstillinger fra computerens skrivebord. Macintosh • Printerdriver: Benyt denne driver til at få optimalt udbytte af printeren. • PPD-fil (PostScript Printer Description): Brug denne fil til at køre maskinen fra en Macintoshcomputer og udskrive dokumenter. • Scannerdriver: Du kan bruge TWAIN-driveren til at scanne dokumenter på maskinen. • Printer Setting Utility: Med dette program kan du konfigurere printerens andre indstillinger fra computerens skrivebord. FUNKTION WINDOWS LINUX MACINTOSH Farvetilstand O O O Indstilling af udskriftskvalitet O O O Posterudskrivning O X X Flere sider pr. ark (N-op) O O (2, 4) O Tilpas til side O X O a a.Denne funktion understøttes kun af MAC OS X 10.4~10.5. Skaleret udskrift O X O Anden papirkilde til første side O X O Vandmærke O X X Overlay O X X Duplex O X O FUNKTION WINDOWS LINUX MACINTOSH Farvetilstand O O O Indstilling af udskriftskvalitet O O O Posterudskrivning X X X Flere sider pr. ark (N-op) O O (2, 4) O Tilpas til side O X O a a.Denne funktion understøttes kun af MAC OS X 10.4~10.5. Skaleret udskrift O X O Anden papirkilde til første side X X O Vandmærke X X X Overlay X X X Duplex O X OSådan kommer du i gang_ 17 sådan kommer du i gang Dette kapitel indeholder trinvise instruktioner til, hvordan du opsætter maskinen. Kapitlet omfatter: • Opsætning af hardwaren • Udskrivning af testside • Konfiguration af netværket • Systemkrav • Installation af softwaren • Maskinens grundlæggende indstillinger OPSÆTNING AF HARDWAREN Dette afsnit viser de trin, der skal udføres for at opsætte hardwaren og er forklaret i Lyninstallationsvejledning. Sørg for at læse Lyninstallationsvejledning og udføre følgende trin. 1. Vælg en stabil placering. Vælg et plant, stabilt sted med tilstrækkelig plads til luftcirkulation. Sørg for, at der er tilstrækkelig plads til at åbne dæksler og bakker. Stedet skal være godt udluftet og ikke udsat for direkte sollys, andre varmekilder, kulde eller fugt. Anbring ikke maskinen tæt på kanten af et bord eller et skrivebord. Der kan udskrives i højder under 1.000 m. Brug højdeindstillingen til at optimere udskrivningen. Se ”Højdejustering” på side 20 for at få yderligere oplysninger. Placer maskinen på et fladt og stabilt underlag, så den ikke hælder mere end 2 mm. Ellers kan det påvirke udskriftskvaliteten. 2. Pak maskinen ud, og kontroller alle medfølgende komponenter. 3. Fjern tapen, idet du holder fast i maskinen. 4. Installer tonerpatronen. 5. Ilæg papir (se ”Placering af papir” på side 29). 6. Sørg for, at alle kabler er tilsluttet maskinen. 7. Tænd for maskinen. UDSKRIVNING AF TESTSIDE Udskriv en demoside for at kontrollere, at maskinen fungerer korrekt. Sådan udskriver du en demoside: Tryk på, og hold knappen OK nede i cirka 2 sekunder, i tilstanden Klar. KONFIGURATION AF NETVÆRKET Du skal konfigurere maskinens netværksprotokoller, før den kan bruges som netværksprinter. Du kan konfigurere de grundlæggende netværksindstillinger ved hjælp af maskinens kontrolpanel. Supported network environments Følgende tabel viser de netværksmiljøer, som maskinen understøtter: Når du flytter maskinen, må du ikke vippe den eller vende den på hovedet. Ellers kan toneren forurene maskinens indre, hvilket kan føre til ødelæggelse af maskinen eller dårlig udskriftskvalitet. PUNKT KRAV Netværksinterface • Ethernet 10/100 Base-TX Netværksoperativsystem • Windows 2000/XP/2003/2008/Vista • Forskellige Linux-operativsystemer • Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.5 Netværksprotokoller • TCP/IP i Windows • IPP • SNMP • DHCP • BOOTP Du kan konfigurere en DHCP-netværksprotokol ved at gå til webstedet http://developer.apple.com/networking/bonjour/download/, vælge det Bonjour-program til Windows, der er relevant for det operativsystem, du kører, og derefter installere programmet. Med dette program får du adgang til at foretage en automatisk rettelse af netværksparameteren. Følg de anvisninger, der vises i installationsvinduet. Dette program understøtter ikke Linux.18 | Sådan kommer du i gang Konfiguration af netværksprotokol via maskinen Du kan konfigurere TCP/IP-netværksparametre ved at følge nedenstående fremgangsmåde. 1. Sørg for, at maskinen er tilsluttet netværket med et RJ-45 Ethernet-kabel. 2. Sørg for, at maskinen er tændt. 3. Tryk på Menu ( ) på kontrolpanelet, indtil Network vises i nederste linje i displayet. 4. Tryk på OK for at få adgang til menuen. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil TCP/IP vises. 6. Tryk på OK. 7. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Static vises. 8. Tryk på OK. 9. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil IP Address vises. 10. Tryk på OK. Angiv en byte-værdi på mellem 0 og 255 ved hjælp af taltastaturet. Du kan flytte mellem byte-værdierne ved at trykke på left/right arrow. Gentag dette for at udfylde adressen fra 1. til 4. byte. 11. Tryk på OK, når du er færdig. Gentag trin 9 og 10 for at konfigurere de andre TCP/IP-parametre: undernetmaske og gateway-adresse. Brug af programmet SetIP Dette program er beregnet til konfiguration af netværkets IP-adresse på baggrund af den MAC-adresse, der er angivet som hardwareserienummer på netværkets printerkort eller interface. Programmet giver netværksadministratoren adgang til at indstille flere netværks-IP-adresser på samme tid. Indstilling af netværksværdier 1. Udskriv en rapport over printerens netværkskonfiguration for at finde printerens MAC-adresse. Se ”Printing reports” på side 55 2. Vælg Alle programmer → Dell → Dell Printers → Dell 2145cn Color Laser MFP → Dell 2145cn Color Laser MFP → Set IP i Windows Start-menuen. 3. Klik for at åbne TCP/IP-konfigurationsvinduet. 4. Indtast MAC-adresse, IP-adresse, undernetmaske og standardgateway for netværkskortet, og klik derefter på Apply. 5. Klik på OK. Printeren udskriver netværksoplysningerne. Kontroller, at indstillingerne er korrekte. 6. Klik på Exit. SYSTEMKRAV Før du begynder, skal du sikre dig, at dit system opfylder følgende minimumkrav: Microsoft ® Windows ® Maskinen understøtter følgende Windows-operativsystemer. Macintosh Kontakt netværksadministratoren, hvis du ikke er sikker på, hvordan du konfigurerer. Du kan også konfigurere netværksindstillingerne via netværksadministrationsprogrammerne. • Embedded Web Service: Webserver, der er integreret i netværksprinterserveren, og som giver dig mulighed for at: - Konfigurere de netværksparametre, som maskinen skal bruge til at oprette forbindelse til forskellige netværksmiljøer. - Tilpasse maskinindstillinger. • SetIP: Hjælpeprogram, der giver dig mulighed for at vælge et netværksinterface og manuelt konfigurere adresser, der skal bruges sammen med TCP/IP-protokollen. • Du kan kun bruge programmet SetIP, når printeren er sluttet til et netværk. • Den følgende procedure er baseret på Windows XP. Når du indtaster MAC-adressen. IP-adresse, undernetmaske, standardgateway, og klik derefter på Apply. OPERATIVS YSTEM KRAV (ANBEFALES) PROCESSOR RAM LEDIG PLADS PÅ HARDDISK Windows 2000 Intel ® Pentinum® II 400 MHz (Pentium III 933 MHz) 64 MB (128 MB) 600 MB Windows XP Pentium III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 MB (256 MB) 1,5 GB Windows Server 2003 Pentium III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 MB (512 MB) 1,25 GB til 2 GB Windows Server 2008 Pentium IV 1 GHz (Pentium IV 2 GHz) 512 MB (2.048 MB) 10 GB Windows Vista Pentium IV 3 GHz 512 MB (1.024 MB) 15 GB • Til alle Windows-operativsystemer kræves som minimum Internet Explorer 5.0 eller nyere. • Sådanne reparationer er ikke dækket af Dells garanti eller serviceaftaler. • Windows Terminal Services er kompatibelt med denne maskine. OPERATIVS YSTEM KRAV (ANBEFALES) PROCESSOR RAM LEDIG PLADS PÅ HARDDISK Mac OS X 10.4 eller lavere • PowerPC G4/G5 • Intel-processor • 128 MB til en PowerPCbaseret Mac (512 MB) • 512 MB til en Intel-baseret Mac (1 GB) 1 GB Mac OS X 10.5 • G4/G5 PowerPC med en processor på 867 MHz eller hurtigere • Intel-processor • 512 MB (1 GB) 1 GBSådan kommer du i gang | 19 Linux INSTALLATION AF SOFTWAREN Du skal installere maskinsoftwaren til udskrivning. Softwaren omfatter drivere, programmer og andre brugervenlige programmer. 1. Connect the network cable to your machine. 2. Sørg for, at netværkskonfigurationen for maskinen er fuldført. (Se ”Konfiguration af netværket” på side 17). Alle programmer på din pc bør være afsluttet, før du begynder installationen. 3. Indsæt cd-rom’en med printersoftware i cd-rom-drevet. Cd-rom’en skulle starte automatisk, og der vises et installationsvindue. Hvis installationsvinduet ikke vises, skal du klikke på Start → Kør. Skriv X:\Setup.exe, idet du erstatter ”X” med det bogstav, der repræsenterer dit drev, og klik på OK. Hvis du bruger Windows Vista, skal du klikke på Start → Alle programmer → Tilbehør → Kør og skrive X:\Setup.exe. 4. Klik på Next. • Vinduet ovenfor kan være lidt anderledes, hvis du geninstallerer driveren. 5. Vælg Typical installation for a network printer, og klik derefter på Next. 6. Listen over maskiner, der er tilgængelige på netværket, vises. Vælg den printer, du ønsker at installere, på listen, og klik derefter på Next. • Hvis maskinen ikke vises på listen, skal du klikke på Update for at opdatere listen eller vælge Add TCP/IP Port for at tilføje maskinen på netværket. Hvis du vil tilføje maskinen på netværket, skal du indtaste maskinens portnavn og IP-adresse. PUNKT KRAV Operativ-system RedHat 8.0, 9.0 (32 bit) RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64 bit) Fedora Core 1~7 (32/64 bit) Mandrake 9.2 (32 bit), 10.0, 10.1 (32/64 bit) Mandriva 2005, 2006, 2007 (32/64 bit) SuSE Linux 8.2, 9.0, 9.1 (32 bit) SuSE Linux 9.2, 9.3, 10.0, 10.1, 10.2 (32/64 bit) SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9, 10 (32/64 bit) Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04 (32/64 bit) Debian 3.1, 4.0 (32/64 bit) Processor Pentium IV 2.4 GHz (IntelCore2) RAM 512 MB (1024 MB) Ledig plads på harddisk 1 GB (1 GB) Softwaren Linux Kernel 2.4 eller nyere Glibc 2.2 eller nyere CUPS • Til arbejdet med store scannede billeder er det nødvendigt at anvende en swap-partition på 300 MB eller mere. • Linux-scannerdriveren understøtter den optiske opløsning på maksimum. • Følgende procedure er til brug af maskinen som en netværksmaskine. Hvis du vil tilslutte en maskine via et USB-kabel, skal du se i Softwareafsnit. • Følgende procedure er baseret på Windows XP-operativsystemet. Proceduren og det popup-vindue, der vises under installationen, kan variere afhængigt af operativsystemet, printerfunktionen eller det anvendte interface.20 | Sådan kommer du i gang Du kontrollerer maskinens IP-adresse eller MAC-adresse ved at udskrive en netværkskonfigurationsside (se ”Udskrivning af rapporter” på side 56). • Hvis du vil finde en fælles netværksprinter (UNC-stien), skal du vælge Shared Printer [UNC] og angive delingsnavnet manuelt eller finde en delt printer ved at klikke på knappen Browse. 7. Klik på Finish. MASKINENS GRUNDLÆGGENDE INDSTILLINGER Når installationen er fuldført, ønsker du måske at angive maskinens standardindstillinger. Se næste afsnit, hvis du vil angive eller ændre værdier. Højdejustering Udskriftskvaliteten påvirkes af det atmosfæriske tryk, hvor det atmosfæriske tryk bestemmes af maskinens højde over havoverfladen. Følgende oplysninger beskriver, hvordan du indstiller maskinen, så du får den bedste udskriftskvalitet. Før du angiver højdeindstillingen, skal du finde den højde, du bruger maskinen i. 1. Kontroller, at du har installeret printerdriveren med den medfølgende cd med printersoftware. 2. Klik på Start → Alle programmer → DELL → DELL Printers → Dell 2145cn Color Laser MFP → Printer Setting Utility. Du kan også klikke på Printer Setting Utility på statuslinjen i Mac OS X (eller meddelelsesområdet i Linux). 3. Klik på Settings → Atitude adjustment. Vælg den korrekte værdi på rullelisten, og klik derefter på Apply. Ændring af sprog i displayet Hvis du vil ændre det sprog, der vises i kontrolpanelet, skal du gøre følgende: 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Language vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på pileknapperne, indtil det ønskede sprog vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Hvis du ikke ved, hvad IP-adressen er, skal du kontakte netværksadministratoren eller udskrive netværksoplysningerne (se ”Udskrivning af rapporter” på side 56). • Hvis maskinen ikke fungerer korrekt efter installationen, skal du geninstallerer printerdriveren. Se Softwareafsnit. • I forbindelse med installationen af printerdriveren registrerer installationsprogrammet automatisk landestandarden for operativsystemet, og standardpapirstørrelsen for maskinen indstilles, så den passer til denne standard. Hvis du bruger en anden landestandard på Windows-operativsystemet, skal du ændre papirstørrelsen på maskinen, så den svarer til den papirstørrelse, du oftest bruger. Når installationen er fuldført, kan du ændre papirstørrelsen under printeregenskaberne. 1 Normal 2 High 1 3 High 2 4 High 3 Hvis din maskine er sluttet til et netværk, vises skærmbilledet Embedded Web Service automatisk. Klik på Machine Settings → Setup (eller Machine Setup) → Altitude adj.. Vælg den ønskede højdeværdi, og klik på Apply. 0Sådan kommer du i gang | 21 Indstilling af dato og klokkeslæt Dato og klokkeslæt vises i displayet, når maskinen er tændt og klar til at blive betjent. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Date & Time vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Indtast dato og klokkeslæt ved hjælp af taltastaturet. Måned = 01 til 12 Dag = 01 til 31 År = kræver fire cifre Time = 01 til 12 (12-timers tilstand) 00 til 23 (24-timers tilstand) Minut = 00 til 59 Du kan også bruge venstre/højre pil til at flytte markøren til det tal, du vil ændre, og indtaste et nyt tal. 5. Hvis du vil vælge AM eller PM til 12-timers format, skal du trykke på knappen * eller # en hvilken som helst taltast. Hvis markøren ikke er placeret under indikatoren for AM eller PM, flyttes den med det samme derhen, når du trykker på knappen * eller #. Du kan ændre tidsformatet til 24 timer (dvs. at 01:00 PM angives som 13:00). Du kan finde yderligere oplysninger i næste afsnit. 6. Tryk på OK for at gemme klokkeslættet og datoen. Hvis du indtaster et forkert tal, vises der Out of Range, og maskinen forsætter ikke til næste trin. Hvis det sker, skal du blot indtaste det rigtige tal. 7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Ændring af tidsformatet Du kan indstille maskinen til at vise tiden i enten 12-timers eller 24-timers format. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Clock Mode vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge det andet format, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Ændring af standardfunktionen Maskinen er på forhånd indstillet til faxtilstand. Du kan ændre denne standardindstilling, så den enten er tilstanden Fax eller Kopi. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Default Mode vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede standardtilstand vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Indstilling af lyde Du kan indstille følgende lyde: • Key Sound: Slår tastelyden til eller fra. Når denne indstilling er angivet til On, høres der en lyd, hver gang der trykkes på en tast. • Alarm Sound: Slår alarmen til eller fra. Når denne indstilling er indstillet til On, høres der en alarmlyd, når der opstår en fejl, eller når en faxkommunikation afsluttes. • Speaker: Slår lydene fra telefonlinjen via højttaleren til eller fra, f.eks. en klartone eller en faxtone. Når denne indstilling er Comm., hvilket vil sige ”fælles”, er højttaleren slået til, indtil den eksterne maskine svarer. • Ringer: Justerer lydstyrken af ringesignalet. Til lydstyrken af ringesignalet kan du vælge mellem Off, Low, Mid og High. Højtaler, ringesignal, tastelyd, og alarmlyd 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Sound/Volume vises, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede lydindstilling vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede status eller lydstyrke for den valgte lyd vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Gentag trin 3 til og med 5, hvis det er nødvendigt, for at definere andre lyde. 6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Højttalerstyrke 1. Tryk på Håndfrit kald ( ). Der lyder en klartone fra højttaleren. 2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil du hører den ønskede lydstyrke. 3. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at gemme ændringen og vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Indtastning af tegn ved hjælp af taltastaturet Når du udfører forskellige opgaver, skal du muligvis skrive navne og numre. Når du f.eks. sætter maskinen op, skal du angive dit eget eller firmaets navn og faxnummeret. Når du gemmer faxnumre eller e-mail-adresser i hukommelsen, kan du evt. også angive de tilsvarende navne. Indtastning af alfanumeriske tegn 1. Når du bliver bedt om at indtaste et tegn, skal du først finde knappen med det tegn, du vil indtaste. Tryk på knappen, indtil det rigtige bogstav vises på displayet. Hvis du f.eks. vil skrive bogstavet O, skal du trykke på 6, der er mærket med MNO. Hver gang du trykker på 6, viser displayet et nyt bogstav M, N, O, m, n, o og til sidst 6. Du kan også indtaste specialtegn, f.eks. mellemrum, plustegn osv. Du kan finde flere oplysninger i næste afsnit. 2. Gentag trin 1, hvis du vil indtaste flere bogstaver. Hvis det næste bogstav findes på samme knap, flytter du markøren ved hjælp af højre venstre/højre-pileknap og trykker derefter på knappen med det ønskede bogstav. Markøren flyttes til højre, og det næste tal vises på displayet. Du kan indsætte et mellemrum ved at trykke på 1 to gange. 3. Tryk på OK, når du har indtastet de bogstaver, du ønsker. Datoformatet kan variere fra land til land. Du kan justere indstillingen af lydstyrken ved hjælp af Håndfrit kald ( ). Du kan kun justere lydstyrken i højttaleren, når der er forbindelse med telefonlinjen.22 | Sådan kommer du i gang Bogstaver og tal på taltastaturet Rettelse af tal eller navne Hvis du taster forkert, når du indtaster et nummer eller navn, skal du trykke på venstre venstre/højre pileknap for at slette det sidst indtastede tal eller tegn. Indtast derefter det korrekte tal eller bogstav. Indsættelse af en pause I nogle telefonsystemer skal du først ringe et forvalgsnummer (fx 9) og vente på endnu en klartone. Hvis du benytter et af disse systemer, skal du indsætte en pause i telefonnummeret. Du kan indsætte en pause, når du definerer genvejstaster eller hurtigopkaldsnumre. Når du vil indsætte en pause, skal du trykke på Genopkald/Pause ( ), når du kommer til det relevante sted i telefonnummeret. På displayet vises der en ”-” på det pågældende sted i nummeret. Sådan bruger du sparetilstandene Strømsparetilstand Tilstanden Strømbesparelse gør det muligt for maskinen at reducere strømforbruget, når den ikke er i brug. Du kan aktivere denne tilstand og vælge et bestemt tidsrum, som maskinen venter efter et afsluttet job, før den skifter til en mindre strømkrævende tilstand. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Power Save vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede tidsindstilling vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Strømsparetilstand ved scanning Når du bruger strømsparetilstand ved scanning, kan du spare strøm ved at slukke for scannerlampen. Scannerlampen under scannerglaspladen slukkes automatisk, når den ikke er i brug, for at reducere strømforbruget og forlænge lampens levetid. Lampen tændes automatisk efter en kort opvarmningstid, når du starter scanningen. Du kan indstille det tidsrum, som lampen venter efter en afsluttet scanning, før den skifter til strømsparetilstand. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Scan PWR Save vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede tidsindstilling vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Indstilling af timeout for udskriftsjob Du kan definere, hvor lang tid et enkelt udskriftsjob er aktivt, før det skal udskrives. Maskinen håndterer indgående data som et enkelt job, hvis det ligger inden for den angivne tid. Når der opstår fejl under behandling af data fra computeren, og datastrømmen standser, venter maskinen den angivne tid og annullerer derefter udskrivningen, hvis datastrømmen ikke genoptages. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Job Timeout vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede tidsindstilling vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Auto fortsæt Dette er den indstilling, der bruges til at indstille maskinen til enten at fortsætte udskrivning eller stoppe udskrivning i tilfælde af at den papirstørrelse, du har angivet, og papiret i bakken ikke stemmer overens. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Auto Continue vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises. • On: udskriver automatisk, når den angivne tid er gået, når papirstørrelsen, du har angivet, og papiret i bakken ikke stemmer overens. • Off: venter, indtil du trykker på Black Start ( ) eller Color Start ( ) på kontrolpanelet, når papirstørrelsen, du har angivet, og papiret i bakken ikke stemmer overens. 5. Tryk på OK for at gemme dit valg. 6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. TAST TILDELTE TAL, BOGSTAVER OG TEGN 1 1 Mellemrum 2 A B C a b c 2 3 D E F d e f 3 4 G H I g h i 4 5 J K L j k l 5 6 M N O m n o 6 7 P Q R S p q r s 7 8 T U V t u v 8 9 W X Y Z w x y z 9 0 + - , . ‘ / * # & @ 0Sådan kommer du i gang | 23 Ændring af skrifttypeindstillinger Din maskine har forudindstillet skrifttypen for dit område eller land. Hvis du vil ændre den foretrukne skrifttype eller angive, hvilken skrifttype der skal anvendes under bestemte betingelser, f.eks. i DOS-miljøet, kan du ændre skrifttypen på følgende måde: 1. Kontroller, at du har installeret printerdriveren med den medfølgende cd med software. 2. Klik på Start → Alle programmer → DELL → DELL Printers → Dell 2145cn Color Laser MFP → Printer Setting Utility. Du kan også klikke på Printer Setting Utility på statuslinjen i Mac OS X (eller meddelelsesområdet i Linux). 3. Klik på Emulation. 4. Bekræft, hvis PCL er valgt i Emulation Setting. 5. Klik på Setting. 6. Vælg Symbol set som din foretrukne skrifttype. 7. Klik på Apply. Det følgende er en oversigt over sprog og deres korrekte skrifttyper. • Russisk: CP866, ISO 8859/5 Latin Cyrillic • Hebraisk: Hebrew 15Q, Hebrew-8, Hebrew-7 (gælder kun Israel) • Græsk: ISO 8859/7 Latin Greek, PC-8 Latin/Greek • Arabisk og Farsi: HP Arabic-8, Windows Arabic, Code Page 864, Farsi, ISO 8859/6 Latin Arabic • OCR: OCR-A, OCR-B24 | Ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier I dette kapitel beskrives det, hvordan du lægger originaler og udskriftsmedier i maskinen. Kapitlet omfatter: • Ilægning af originaler • Valg af udskriftsmedier • Ændring af papirstørrelsen i papirbakken • Placering af papir • Justering af outputsupporten • Indstilling af papirstørrelse og type ILÆGNING AF ORIGINALER Du kan lægge en original på scannerglaspladen eller i DADF’en, så du kan kopiere eller scanne den eller sende den som fax. På scannerglaspladen Sørg for, at der ikke er originaler i DADF’en. Hvis maskinen registrerer en original i DADF’en, får den højere prioritet end originalen på scannerglaspladen. Det giver den bedste scanningskvalitet, specielt for farvebilleder eller gråtoner, hvis du lægger originalen på scannerglaspladen. 1. Løft, og åbn scannerlåget. 2. Læg originalen med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen, og ret den ind efter registreringsstyret i glaspladens øverste, venstre hjørne. 3. Luk scannerlåget. I DADF’en Ved brug af DADF’en kan du ilægge op til 50 ark 75 g/m2 papir til et job. Når du bruger DADF’en, må du ikke: • Ilæg ikke papir, der er mindre end 148 x 148 mm eller større end 216 x 356 mm. • Undgå følgende papirtyper: - karbonpapir eller karbonbelagt papir - bestrøget papir - gennemsigtigt eller tyndt papir - krøllet eller foldet papir - krøllet eller rullet papir - iturevet papir. • Fjern alle hæfteklammer og papirclips, før du lægger papiret i. • Sørg for, at lim, blæk eller retteblæk på papiret er tørt, før du lægger det i. • Læg ikke papir i forskellige størrelser eller med forskellig vægt i. • Læg ikke hæfter, pamfletter, transparenter eller dokumenter med andre usædvanlige egenskaber i DADF’en. Dell 2145cn har DADF-funktionen, så du kan scanne begge sider af originalen på samme tid. Se ”Scanning af begge sider af papiret” på side 42. • Det kan påvirke kopikvaliteten og tonerforbruget, hvis scannerlåget står åbent, mens du kopierer. • Støv på scannerglaspladen kan give sorte pletter på udskriften. Hold den altid ren. • Hvis du kopierer en side fra en bog eller et blad, skal du løfte op i scannerlåget, indtil hængslerne fanges af stopanordningen, og derefter lukke låget. Hvis bogen eller bladet er tykkere end 30 mm, skal du begynde at kopiere med låget åbent.25 | Ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier 1. Bøj papirstakken frem og tilbage for at adskille siderne, før de lægges i bakken. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med tryksiden opad. Sørg for, at bunden af originalstakken passer til den papirstørrelse, der er markeret i dokumentindføringsbakken. 3. Juster styrene til indstilling af dokumentbredden, så de passer til papirets størrelse. VALG AF UDSKRIFTSMEDIER Du kan udskrive på en række forskellige materialer, f.eks. almindeligt papir, konvolutter, etiketter og transparenter. Men du skal altid vælge udskriftsmedier, der overholder de retningslinjer, der er for maskinen. Udskriftsmedier, der ikke overholder de retningslinjer, der er beskrevet i denne brugerhåndbog, kan forårsage følgende problemer: • Dårlig udskriftskvalitet • Flere papirstop • Tidlig nedslidning af maskinen Egenskaber som vægt, sammensætning, fiber- og fugtighedsindhold er vigtige faktorer, der påvirker maskinens ydelse og udskriftskvalitet. Vær opmærksom på følgende, når du vælger udskriftsmateriale: • Typen, størrelsen og vægten på udskriftsmediet til din maskine beskrives senere i dette afsnit. • Ønsket resultat: Vælg udskriftsmedier, der passer til projektet. • Hvidhed: Nogle udskriftsmedier er mere hvide end andre og giver et mere skarpt og levende billede. • Overfladeglathed: Jo mere glat et udskriftsmedie er, jo mere skarpt forekommer det udskrevne billede på papiret. Støv på DADF-glasset kan forårsage sorte streger på udskriften. Hold den altid ren. • Der kan forekomme tilfælde, hvor udskriftsmediet overholder alle retningslinjer i dette afsnit, og alligevel ikke giver tilfredsstillende resultater. Dette kan skyldes forkert håndtering, temperaturer og fugtighedsniveauer over det anbefalede eller andre faktorer, som Dell ikke har indflydelse på. • Inden du køber større mængder af et bestemt udskriftsmedie, skal du sikre dig, at det opfylder de krav, der er angivet i denne brugerhåndbog. Anvendelse af udskriftsmedier, der ikke overholder disse specifikationer, kan medføre problemer, der nødvendiggør reparation. Reparationer af denne type er ikke omfattet af Dell garanti eller serviceaftaler.26 | Ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier Specifikationer for udskriftsmedie TYPE STØRRELSE MÅL VÆGT a KAPACITET b Almindeligt papir Letter 216 x 279 mm • 60 til 105 g/m2 i bakken • 60 til 163 g/m2 i universalbakken • 250 ark 75 g/m2 kontraktpapir i papirbakken • 100 ark 75 g/m2 i universalbakken • 500 ark 75 g/m2 kontraktpapir i valgfribakke Legal 216 x 356 mm US Folio 216 x 330 mm A4 210 x 297 mm Oficio 216 x 343 mm JIS B5 182 x 257 mm ISO B5 176 x 250 mm Executive 184 x 267 mm A5 148 x 210 mm • 60 til 105 g/m2 i bakken • 60 til 163 g/m2 i universalbakken • 150 ark 75 g/m2 kontraktpapir i papirbakken • 100 ark 75 g/m2 i universalbakken Statement 140 x 216 mm A6 105 x 148 mm Konvolut Monarch-konvolut 98 x 191 mm 75 to 105 g/m2 kontraktpapir 10 ark 75 g/m2 i universalbakken Konvolut 6 3/4 92 x 165 mm Konvolut nr. 10 105 x 241 mm Konvolut nr. 9 98 x 225 mm DL-konvolut 110 x 220 mm C5-konvolut 162 x 229 mm C6-konvolut 114 x 162 mm Etiketter Letter, Legal, Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5, Statement Se afsnittet om almindeligt papir 120 til 150 g/m2 10 ark 75 g/m2 papir i universalbakken Karton Letter, Legal, Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5, Statement Se afsnittet om almindeligt papir 90 til 163 g/m2 10 ark 75 g/m2 papir i universalbakken Minimumstørrelse (brugerdefineret) 76 x 127 mm 60 til 163 g/m2 Maksimumstørrelse (brugerdefineret) 216 x 356 mm a. Hvis papirets vægt er over 105 g/m2 , skal du bruge universalbakken. b. Den maksimale kapacitet kan variere alt afhængigt af materialets vægt, tykkelse og af de omgivende forhold.Ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier | 27 Mediestørrelser, der understøttes i de forskellige tilstande Retningslinjer for specielle udskriftsmedier TILSTAND STØRRELSE KILDE Kopieringstilstand Letter, A4, Legal, Oficio, Folio, Executive, JIS B5, A5, A6 • bakke 1 • ekstra bakke 2 • universalbakke Udskrivningstilstand Alle størrelser understøttes af maskinen • bakke 1 • ekstra bakke 2 • universalbakke Faxtilstand Letter, A4, Legal • bakke 1 • ekstra bakke 2 Duplexudskrivning a a. Kun 75 til 105 g/m2 . Letter, A4, Legal, Folio, Oficio • bakke 1 • ekstra bakke 2 • universalbakke MEDIETYPE RETNINGSLINJER Konvolutter • Vellykket udskrivning på konvolutter er afhængig af konvolutternes kvalitet. Ved valg af konvolutter skal du tage følgende faktorer i betragtning: - Vægt: Konvolutpapiret bør ikke veje mere end 90 g/m2 , da der ellers kan opstå papirstop. - Udformning: Inden udskrivningen skal konvolutterne ligge fladt med mindre end 6 mm rulning, og de må ikke indeholde luft. - Tilstand: Konvolutter bør ikke være krøllede, revet i stykker eller på anden måde beskadiget. - Temperatur: Brug altid konvolutter, der kan klare den varme og det tryk, der opstår i maskinen. • Brug kun kvalitetskonvolutter med skarpe og helt pressede kanter. • Brug ikke konvolutter med frimærker. • Brug ikke konvolutter med lukkeanordninger, ruder, belægninger, selvklæbende lukning eller andre syntetiske materialer. • Brug ikke beskadigede konvolutter eller konvolutter af dårlig kvalitet. • Kontroller, at sammenføjningerne i begge konvoluttens ender når helt ud til konvoluttens hjørner. 1 Acceptabelt 2 Uacceptabelt Konvolutter (fortsat) • Hvis du bruger konvolutter med en selvklæbende strimmel, eller hvor mere end én flap skal foldes over for at lukke konvolutten, skal du sikre dig, at det selvklæbende middel kan tåle maskinens fikseringstemperatur i 0,1 sekund. Kontroller maskinens specifikationer for at se fikseringstemperaturen på side 91. Ekstra flapper og strimler kan betyde, at konvolutten krøller eller bukker, at der opstår papirstop, og i værste fald kan det beskadige fikseringsenheden. • Det giver det bedste resultat, hvis margenerne ikke placeres tættere end 15 mm på konvoluttens kanter. • Undgå at udskrive i det område, hvor konvoluttens sammenføjninger mødes. Etiketter • Brug kun etiketter, der er beregnet til lasermaskiner, så maskinen ikke beskadiges. Ved valg af etiketter skal du tage følgende faktorer i betragtning: - Klæbemiddel: Klæbemidlet skal være stabilt ved maskinens fikseringstemperatur. Kontroller maskinens specifikationer for at se fikseringstemperaturen på side 91. - Placering på arket: Brug kun etiketark, hvor arket ikke er synligt mellem de enkelte etiketter. Etiketter kan løsne sig fra ark, hvis der er afstand mellem dem, hvilket kan medføre alvorlige papirstop. - Krøl: Inden udskrivningen skal etiketarket ligge fladt uden mere end 13 mm krøl i nogen retning. - Tilstand: Brug ikke etiketter med rynker, bobler eller andre tegn på manglende klæbeevne. • Sørg for, at der ikke sidder noget udækket klæbemateriale mellem etiketterne. Synlige områder på arket kan medføre, at etiketterne løsnes under udskriften, hvilket kan forårsage papirstop. Synligt klæbemateriale kan også beskadige maskindele. • Kør aldrig et etiketark gennem maskinen mere end én gang. Den selvklæbende bagside er kun beregnet til at skulle igennem maskinen én gang. • Brug ikke etiketter, der har løsnet sig fra arket, er krøllede, har bobler eller på anden måde er beskadiget. Karton eller materialer i brugerdefinere de størrelser • Udskriv aldrig på medier med en bredde på mindre end 76 mm eller en længde på mere end 356 mm. • Indstil margenen i programmet, så den er mindst 6,4 mm fra materialets kant. MEDIETYPE RETNINGSLINJER28 | Ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier ÆNDRING AF PAPIRSTØRRELSEN I PAPIRBAKKEN Hvis du vil anvende længere papir, f.eks. papir i Legal-størrelse, skal du justere papirstyrene for at forlænge papirbakken. 1. Juster papirlængdestyret i henhold til den ønskede papirlængde. Den er forudindstillet til Letter- eller A4-størrelse, afhængigt af hvilket land den bruges i. 2. Når der er lagt papir i bakken, skal du, mens du klemmer papirbreddestyret sammen som vist, flytte det mod stakken af papir, indtil det berører siden af stakken let. Klem ikke papirstyret for tæt imod papirkanten, da det kan bøje papiret. Hvis du bruger papir i formatet legal, skal du udvide bakkens længde. 3. Tryk på det grønne greb på bagsiden af bakken, og hold det nede. Mens du holder grebet nede, skal du udvide bakken til den tilsvarende position. 4. Læg papir i papirbakken. 5. Sæt bakken ind i maskinen. 6. Indstil papirstørrelsen fra din computer. Fortrykt papir • Brevpapir skal være trykt med varmebestandigt blæk, der ikke smelter, fordamper eller afgiver giftige gasser, når det udsættes for printerens fikseringstemperatur i 0,1 sekund. Kontroller maskinens specifikationer for at se fikseringstemperaturen på side 91. • Blækket på brevpapiret skal være ikke-brændbart og må ikke have nogen form for negativ virkning på printerens ruller. • Formularer og brevpapir bør opbevares i forseglet og fugtsikker emballage for at forhindre forandringer under opbevaring. • Kontroller, at blækket på papiret er tørt, før du lægger fortrykt papir som f.eks. formularer eller brevpapir i printeren. Under fikseringsprocessen kan fugtigt blæk løsnes fra fortrykt papir og forringe udskriftskvaliteten. 1 Bakkeudvidelsesgreb 2 Papirlængdestyr 3 Papirbreddestyr MEDIETYPE RETNINGSLINJER • Du må ikke skubbe styrene til indstilling af papirbredden så tæt ind mod stakken, at den begynder at bøje. • Det kan medføre papirstop, hvis du ikke indstiller styrene til papirbredden.Ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier | 29 PLACERING AF PAPIR Placering af papir i bakke 1 eller den valgfri bakke Læg det udskriftsmedie, du oftest bruger, i bakke 1. Bakke 1 kan maksimalt indeholde 250 ark 75 g/m2 almindeligt papir. Du kan købe en ekstra bakke og sætte den i maskinen under standardbakken. Den rummer 500 ark papir ekstra (se ”Ekstraudstyr” på side 85). 1. Træk bakken ud. Juster bakkens størrelse til det medie, du lægger i. 2. Læg papiret med den side, der skal udskrives på, opad. 3. Når du udskriver et dokument, vælger du papirkilde og type i programmet. Se Software section, hvis du vil have oplysninger om pcudskrivning. Ilægning af papir i universalbakken Universalbakken kan indeholde specielle størrelser og typer af udskriftsmateriale, f.eks. postkort, notekort og konvolutter. Det er nyttigt ved udskrivning af en enkelt side på brevpapir eller farvet papir. Tips om brug af universalbakken • Læg kun udskriftsmedier i ét format i universalbakken ad gangen. • Læg ikke mere papir i universalbakken, så længe der er papir i den, da der ellers kan opstå papirstop. Det gælder også andre typer udskriftsmedier. • Udskriftsmedier skal lægges midt i universalbakken med forsiden nedad, så den øverste kant føres ind i universalbakken først. • Brug altid kun de angivne udskriftsmedier, så du undgår papirstop og problemer med udskriftskvaliteten (se ”Valg af udskriftsmedier” på side 25). • Sørg for at glatte evt. krøller på postkort, konvolutter og etiketter ud, før du lægger dem i universalbakken. 1. Hold i håndtaget på universalbakken, og træk nedad for at åbne den. 2. Læg papiret i. Brug af fotopapir eller coated papir kan skabe problemer, der kræver reparation. Sådanne reparationer er ikke dækket af Dells garanti eller serviceaftaler. 1 Fuld 2 Tom • Hvis papirindføringen giver problemer, skal du lægge ét ark ad gangen i universalbakken. • Du kan ilægge papir, der allerede er skrevet på. Den trykte side skal vende opad med en ukrøllet kant forrest. Hvis du støder på problemer med papirindføringen, så prøv at vende papiret om. Bemærk, at udskriftskvaliteten ikke kan garanteres. • Hvis du vil bruge allerede anvendt papir, skal du placere papiret med den trykte side nedad. • Hvis du benytter papir, så bøj papirstakken frem og tilbage for at adskille sammenhængende ark, før de lægges i bakken.30 | Ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier 3. Klem styrene til indstilling af papirbredden i universalbakken ind mod papiret. Pres dem ikke for langt ind, da det kan få papiret til at bøje. Det kan medføre papirstop, eller at papiret føres skævt ind. 4. Når du har lagt papir i bakken, skal du angive papirtype og -størrelse til universalbakken. Se Software section, hvis du vil have oplysninger om pc-udskrivning. 5. Luk universalbakken, når udskrivningen er færdig. JUSTERING AF OUTPUTSUPPORTEN Den udskrevne stak på ud bakken og outputsupporten medvirker til at justere de udskrevne sider. Træk outputsupporten ud i henhold til papiret størrelse, så den kan justere siderne korrekt. Ved papir i Letter-størrelse Træk outputsupporten ud til stedet markeret med LTR som vist, og fold forlængeren ud. Ved papir i A4- eller Legal-størrelse Træk outputsupporten ud til stedet markeret med A4, LGL som vist, og fold forlængeren ud. Afhængigt af hvilken medietype du bruger, skal du følge disse retningslinjer, når du lægger papir i maskinen: • Konvolutter: Vend siden med flappen nedad. Frimærkesiden skal vende opad, med frimærkeenden mod venstre. • Etiketter: Vend udskriftssiden opad, og vend arket, så det føres ind i maskinen på den korte led med toppen af arket først. • Fortrykt papir: Vend designsiden opad, og vend papiret, så det føres ind i maskinen på den korte led. • Karton: Vend udskriftssiden opad, og vend arket, så det føres ind i maskinen på den korte led. • Papir, der tidligere er udskrevet på: Vend siden med den eksisterende udskrift nedad, og vend det, så det føres ind i maskinen på den korte led. Den kant, der føres ind først, må hverken være krøllet eller foldet. De indstillinger, der foretages fra printerdriveren, tilsidesætter indstillingerne på kontrolpanelet. 1 Outputsupport 2 Forlængeren • Hvis outputsupporten ikke er korrekt anbragt, justeres siderne forkert eller falder ud. • Hvis der udskrives mange sider lige efter hinanden, kan udbakken blive varm. Pas på ikke at berøre overfladen, og sørg især for, at børn ikke kommer inden for rækkevidde.Ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier | 31 INDSTILLING AF PAPIRSTØRRELSE OG TYPE Når du har lagt papir i papirbakken, skal du bruge tasterne på kontrolpanelet og indstille papirstørrelse og -type. De valgte indstillinger gælder for kopierings- og faxtilstand. Ved udskrivning fra pc skal du vælge papirstørrelse og -type i det program, du bruger på pc’en. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Paper Setup vises, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Paper Size 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede papirbakke vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den papirstørrelse, du bruger, vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Tryk på Tilbage ( ) for at vende tilbage til det øverste niveau. 7. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Paper Type vises, og tryk på OK. 8. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den papirtype, du bruger, vises, og tryk på OK. 9. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.32 | Kopiering : kopiering Dette kapitel indeholder trinvise instruktioner til kopiering af dokumenter. Kapitlet omfatter: • Valg af papirbakke • Kopiering • Ændring af indstillingerne for hver kopi • Ændring af scanningsstørrelsesindstillingerne • Ændring af standardindstillingerne for kopiering • Kopiering af ID-kort • Brug af de specielle kopifunktioner • Udskrivning på begge sider af papiret • Indstilling af timeout for kopiering VALG AF PAPIRBAKKE Når du har lagt udskriftsmedier til kopier i, skal du vælge den papirbakke, du vil bruge til kopijob. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Paper Setup vises, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Paper Source vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Copy Tray. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede papirbakke vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. KOPIERING 1. Tryk på Kopiering. Der vises Ready to Copy på den øverste linje af displayet. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Brug taltasterne, og indtast kopiantallet, hvis du vil tage flere kopier. 4. Du kan tilpasse kopiindstillingerne, bl.a. kopistørrelse, lysstyrke og originaltype, ved at bruge tasterne på kontrolpanelet. Se ”Ændring af indstillingerne for hver kopi” på side 32. Hvis det er nødvendigt, kan du bruge specielle kopieringsfunktioner som posterkopiering eller 2- eller 4 op-kopiering. Se ”Kopiering af ID-kort” på side 33. 5. Tryk på Color Start ( ) for at starte farvekopieringen. Eller tryk på Black Start ( ) for at begynde sort/hvid kopiering. ÆNDRING AF INDSTILLINGERNE FOR HVER KOPI Det er hurtigt og nemt at kopiere med maskinens standardindstillinger. Men du kan også bruge funktionstasterne til kopiering på kontrolpanelet og ændre indstillingerne for hver ny kopi. Mørkhed Hvis du har en original, der indeholder svage markeringer og mørke billeder, kan du justere lysstyrken, så kopien bliver lettere at læse. Hvis du vil justere lysstyrken for kopier, skal du trykke på Mørkhed ( ). Hver gang du trykker på denne tast, kan du vælge mellem følgende indstillinger: • Lightest: Velegnet til mørkere tryk. • Light: Velegnet til mørkt trykt. • Normal: Velegnet til almindelige maskinskrevne eller udskrevne originaler. • Dark: Velegnet til lysere tryk. • Darkest: Velegnet til lysere tryk og til svage blyantsmarkeringer. Originaltype Indstillingen Originaltype bruges til at forbedre kopikvaliteten ved at angive dokumenttype for det aktuelle kopijob. Tryk på Originaltype ( ) for at vælge dokumenttype. Hver gang du trykker på denne tast, kan du vælge mellem følgende indstillinger: • Text: Bruges til originaler, der hovedsageligt indeholder tekst. • Text/Photo: Bruges til originaler med en blanding af tekst og fotografier. • Photo: Bruges, hvis originalerne er fotografier. • Magazine: Bruges, hvis originalerne er magasiner. Formindsket eller forstørret kopi Hvis du trykker på tasten Formindsk/Forstør ( ), kan du forstørre eller formindske det kopierede billede fra 25 % til 400 %, når du kopierer originaldokumenter fra scannerglaspladen, eller fra 25 % til 100 % fra DADF’en. Sådan vælger du blandt de foruddefinerede kopistørrelser: 1. Tryk på Formindsk/Forstør ( ). 2. Tryk på Formindsk/Forstør ( ) eller venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede tidsindstilling vises, og tryk på OK. Du kan skalere kopien ved at indtaste skaleringsforholdet direkte: 1. Tryk på Formindsk/Forstør ( ). 2. Tryk på Formindsk/Forstør ( ) eller venstre/højre pil, indtil Custom vises, og tryk på OK. 3. Angiv skaleringsforholdet, og tryk på OK for at gemme dit valg. Du kan annullere kopijobbet, mens maskinen er i gang. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ), så stopper kopieringen. Hvis du trykker på Stop/Slet ( ), mens du angiver kopieringsindstillingerne, nulstilles alle de indstillinger, du har angivet for det aktuelle kopijob, og vender tilbage til deres standardværdier. Ellers indstilles de automatisk til deres standardværdier igen, når maskinen har afsluttet kopieringen. Når du formindsker en kopi, kan der forekomme sorte streger nederst på kopien. hKopiering | 33 ÆNDRING AF SCANNINGSSTØRRELSESINDSTILLINGERNE Du kan justere scanningsstørrelsen for originalpapiret. Hvis du for eksempel scanner en original i A4-størrelse og indstiller scanningsstørrelsen til A5, scanner maskinen kun A5-området (148 x 210 mm). Vi anbefaler, at du skifter til den rigtige scanningsstørrelse for originalpapiret. 1. Tryk på Kopiering. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Scan Size. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede indstilling vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. ÆNDRING AF STANDARDINDSTILLINGERNE FOR KOPIERING Kopieringsindstillingerne, herunder mørkhed, originaltype og antal kopier, kan indstilles til de værdier, som bruges hyppigst. Når du kopierer et dokument, bruges standardindstillingerne, medmindre de ændres ved hjælp af de tilsvarende knapper på kontrolpanelet. 1. Tryk på Kopiering. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Change Default. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede konfigurationsindstilling vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede indstilling vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Gentag trin 4 til 5 efter behov. 7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. KOPIERING AF ID-KORT Maskinen kan udskrive 2-sidede originaler på ét ark papir i A4-, Letter-, Legal-, Folio-, Oficio-, Executive-, B5-, A5- eller A6-størrelse. Når du kopierer med denne funktion, udskriver maskinen den ene side af originalen på den øverste halvdel af papiret og den anden side på den nederste halvdel uden at formindske originalens størrelse. Denne funktion er velegnet til kopiering af små originaler, f.eks. navneskilte. Denne kopifunktion kan kun vælges, hvis du lægger originalen på scannerglaspladen. 1. Tryk på Id-kopi ( ). 2. Læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Place Front Side and Press[Start], vises på displayet. 4. Tryk på Color Start ( ) eller Black Start ( ). Maskinen begynder at scanne forsiden, og der vises Place Back Side and Press[Start] på displayet. 5. Åbn scannerlåget, og vend originalen om. 6. Tryk på Color Start ( ) for at starte farvekopieringen. Eller tryk på Black Start ( ) for at begynde sort/hvid kopiering. BRUG AF DE SPECIELLE KOPIFUNKTIONER Du kan bruge følgende kopifunktioner: Sortering Du kan indstille maskinen, så kopieringsjob sorteres. Hvis du f.eks. opretter 2 kopier af en original på 3 sider, udskrives der et komplet dokument på 3 sider efterfulgt af endnu et komplet dokument. 1. Tryk på Kopiering. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Indtast det ønskede antal kopier på taltastaturet. 4. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på OK, når der vises Copy Collation. 6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge den ønskede farvetilstand. Der er to muligheder: • Yes-Color: Farvekopi • Yes-Mono: Sort/hvid kopiering 7. Tryk på OK for at starte kopieringen. Der udskrives et komplet dokument efterfulgt af det næste komplette dokument. Når du har brugt denne valgmulighed, vender maskinen automatisk tilbage til standardindstillingen. Hvis du trykker på Stop/Slet ( ), mens du angiver kopieringsindstillinger, annulleres de valgte indstillinger, og standardindstillingerne gendannes. Hvis du trykker på Stop/Slet ( ), eller hvis du ikke trykker på andre knapper i ca. 30 sekunder, annullerer maskinen kopijobbet og vender tilbage til klar-tilstand. Hvis originalen er større end det område, der kan udskrives på, er det ikke sikkert, at alle dele af originalen kan kopieres. Hvis du trykker på Stop/Slet ( ), eller hvis du ikke trykker på andre knapper i ca. 30 sekunder, annullerer maskinen kopijobbet og vender tilbage til klar-tilstand.34 | Kopiering 2- eller 4-op-kopiering Maskinen kan udskrive 2 eller 4 originalbilleder formindsket, så de kan være på ét enkelt ark papir. 1. Tryk på Kopiering. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil indtil 2-Up eller 4-Up vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge den ønskede farvetilstand. Der er to muligheder: • Yes-Color: Farvekopi • Yes-Mono: Sort/hvid kopiering 6. Tryk på OK for at starte kopieringen. Plakatkopiering Maskinen kan udskrive et billede på op til 9 ark papir (3 x 3). Du kan derefter føje de kopierede sider sammen til ét dokument i plakatstørrelse. Denne kopifunktion kan kun vælges, hvis du lægger originalen på scannerglaspladen. 1. Tryk på Kopiering. 2. Læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Poster Copy vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge den ønskede farvetilstand. Der er to muligheder: • Yes-Color: Farvekopi • Yes-Mono: Sort/hvid kopiering 6. Tryk på OK for at starte kopieringen. Originalen deles op i 9 dele. Hver af disse dele scannes og kopieres en efter en i følgende rækkefølge: Klonkopiering Maskinen kan udskrive flere kopier af et billede fra en original på en enkelt side. Antallet af kopier på siden bestemmes automatisk af originalen og papirstørrelsen. Denne kopifunktion kan kun vælges, hvis du lægger originalen på scannerglaspladen. 1. Tryk på Kopiering. 2. Læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Clone Copy vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge den ønskede farvetilstand. Der er to muligheder: • Yes-Color: Farvekopi • Yes-Mono: Sort/hvid kopiering 6. Tryk på OK for at starte kopieringen. Sletning af baggrundsbilleder Du kan indstille maskinen til at udskrive et billede uden den tilhørende baggrund. Denne kopifunktion fjerner baggrundsfarven og kan være praktisk, når du f.eks. kopierer en avis eller et katalog med farve i baggrunden. 1. Tryk på Kopiering. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Adjust Bkgd. vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises. • Off: Bruger ikke denne funktion. • Auto: Optimerer baggrunden. • Enhance 1~2: Jo højere værdien er, jo mere naturtro er baggrunden. • Erase 1~4: Jo højere tallet er, desto lysere er baggrunden. 6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Bogkopiering Funktionen Book Copy giver dig mulighed for at kopiere en hel bog. Hvis bogen er for tyk, skal du løfte dækslet, indtil det bremses af hængslerne, og derefter lukke dækslet. Hvis bogen eller magasinet er tykkere end 3 cm, er du nødt til at kopiere med låget åbent. 1. Tryk på Kopiering. 2. Læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Book Copy. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises. • Off: Bruger ikke denne funktion. • Left Page: Brug denne indstilling til at udskrive venstre side af bogen. • Right Page: Brug denne indstilling til at udskrive højre side af bogen. • Both Page: Brug denne indstilling til at udskrive begge sider af bogen. Du kan ikke justere kopistørrelsen med knappen Formindsk/Forstør ( ), når du bruger 2- eller 4-op-kopiering. 1 2 1 2 3 4 Du kan ikke justere kopistørrelsen ved hjælp af knappen Formindsk/ Forstør ( ), mens du opretter en klonkopi.Kopiering | 35 6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge den ønskede farvetilstand. Der er to muligheder: • Yes-Color: Farvekopi • Yes-Mono: Sort/hvid kopiering 7. Tryk på OK for at starte kopieringen. Margenskift Funktionen Margin Shift giver dig mulighed for at oprette en indbindingskant for et dokument. Billedet kan justeres op eller ned på siden og/eller forskydes mod højre eller venstre. 1. Tryk på Kopiering. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Margin Shift. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises. • Off: Denne funktion er deaktiveret. • Auto Center: Kopierer automatisk midt på papiret. • Custom Margin: Indtast venstre, højre, top- eller bundmargen fra taltastaturet. 6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge Yes. 7. Tryk på OK for at starte kopieringen. 8. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Slet kant Med Slet kant kan du slette mærker, borehuller, foldemærker og mærker efter hæfteklammer langs alle fire sider af et dokument. 1. Tryk på Kopiering. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Edge Erase. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises. • Off: Angiver ikke indbindingsindstillingen. • Small Original: Sletter kanten af originalen, hvis den er lille. • Hole Punch: Sletter mærkerne efter bogbindingshuller. • Book Center: Sletter den midterste del af papiret, der er sort og vandret, når du kopierer en bog. • Border Erase: Sletter en bestemt mængde af kanten af udskriften. 6. Tryk på OK for at starte kopieringen. 7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Justering af gråtone ved kopiering Når du kopierer en original i sort/hvid, kan du justere gråtoneskalaen og optimere kvaliteten af kopien ved hjælp af denne funktion. Funktionen er udelukkende tilgængelig i forbindelse med gråtonekopier. 1. Tryk på Kopiering. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Gray Enhance. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge Yes. 6. Tryk på OK for at starte kopieringen. 7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. UDSKRIVNING PÅ BEGGE SIDER AF PAPIRET Hvis du trykker på tasten Duplex ( ) på maskinen, kan du få adgang til at udskrive dokumenter på begge sider af papiret. 1. Tryk på Kopiering. 2. Tryk på Duplex ( ). 3. Hold knappen left/right arrow inde, indtil den ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises. • Off: Kopierer i normal tilstand. • 1->2Side Short: Kopierer siderne, så de skal læses, ligesom når man vipper siderne op på en notesblok. • 1->2Side Long: Kopierer siderne, så de skal læses som i en bog. • 2 ->1Side: Kopierer begge sider af originalerne og udskriver hver side på et separat ark. • 2 ->2Side: Kopierer begge sider af originalerne og udskriver siderne på begge sider af papiret. Med denne funktion udskrives kopierne Funktionen Margin Shift kan bruges enten sammen med scannerglaspladen eller DADF'en, afhængigt at den enkelte konfiguration. - Auto Center: Scannerglasplade - Custom Margin: Scannerglasplade, DADF Funktionen Edge Erase kan bruges enten sammen med scannerglaspladen eller DADF'en, afhængigt at den enkelte konfiguration. - Small Original: Scannerglasplade - Hole Punch: Scannerglasplade, DADF - Book Center: Scannerglasplade - Border Erase: Scannerglasplade, DADF X Y X Y36 | Kopiering som en nøjagtig gengivelse af originalerne. • 2 ->1Side ROT2: Kopierer begge sider af originalerne og udskriver hver side på et separat ark, mens oplysningerne på bagsiden af udskriften roteres 180°. 4. Tryk på OK for at gemme dit valg. Hvis tilstanden er aktiveret, er tasten Duplex ( ) baggrundsbelyst. INDSTILLING AF TIMEOUT FOR KOPIERING Du kan indstille det tidsrum, maskinen venter, før den genopretter standardkopieringsindstillingerne, hvis du ikke begynder at kopiere efter at have ændret indstillingerne på kontrolpanelet. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Timeout vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede tidsindstilling vises. Hvis du vælger Off, betyder det, at maskinen ikke gendanner standardindstillingerne, før du trykker på Black Start eller Color Start ( ) for at starte kopieringen, eller Stop/Slet ( ) for at annullere. 5. Tryk på OK for at gemme dit valg. 6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. X YScanning | 37 scanning Du kan scanne billeder og tekst på maskinen, så de kan gemmes som digitale filer på computeren. Kapitlet omfatter: • Grundlæggende om scanning • Scanning fra kontrolpanelet • Scanning ved hjælp af en netværksforbindelse • Ændring af indstillingerne for hvert scanningsjob • Automatisk udskrivning af scanningsbekræftelse • Konfiguration af adressekartoteket GRUNDLÆGGENDE OM SCANNING Du kan scanne originalerne på maskinen via et USB-kabel eller netværket. • Dell Scan Manager: Du skal blot gå hen til maskinen, scanne originalerne fra kontrolpanelet, hvorefter de scannede data gemmes i mappen Dokumenter på den computer, der er sluttet til maskinen. Når installationen er fuldført, er Dell Scan Manager installeret på computeren. Funktionen kan bruges sammen med en lokal forbindelse eller netværksforbindelse. Se næste afsnit. • TWAIN: TWAIN er et af de foruddefinerede programmer til billedbehandling. Når du scanner et billede, startes det valgte program, så du selv kan styre scanningsprocessen. Se afsnittet Software. Funktionen kan bruges sammen med en lokal forbindelse eller netværksforbindelse. Se Software section. • Dell SmarThru Office: Denne funktion udgør den software, der følger med maskinen. Programmet kan bruges til scanning af billeder eller dokumenter, og funktionen kan bruges via en lokal forbindelse eller netværksforbindelse. Se Software section. • WIA: WIA er en forkortelse for Windows Images Acquisition. Hvis du vil have adgang til at bruge denne funktion, skal computeren være sluttet direkte til maskinen via et USB-kabel. Se Software section. • E-mail: Du kan sende det scannede billede som en fil vedhæftet en email. Se side 39. • FTP: Du kan scanne et billede og overføre det til en FTP-server. Se side 40. • SMB: Du kan scanne et billede og sende det til en delt mappe på en SMB-server. Se side 40. SCANNING FRA KONTROLPANELET Maskinen giver dig nem adgang til at scanne fra kontrolpanelet og sende det scannede dokument til mappen Dokumenter på den tilsluttede computer. Hvis du vil have adgang til at bruge denne funktion, skal maskinen være sluttet til computeren via et USB-kabel, eller de to enheder skal være forbundet via netværket. Med det medfølgende program Dell Scan Manager får du endvidere adgang til at åbne scannede dokumenter med det program, du tidligere har konfigureret. Microsoft Paint, Email, SmarThru Office, OCR kan eksempelvis føjes til programmet. Se ”Angivelse af scanningsoplysninger i Dell Scan Manager.” på side 37. Det er muligt at gemme scannede billeder som BMP-, JEPG-, TIFF- eller PDF-filer. Angivelse af scanningsoplysninger i Dell Scan Manager. Du kan finde oplysninger om programmet Dell Scan Manager og om status for den installerede scannerdriver. Du kan også ændre scanningsindstillinger samt tilføje og slette de mapper, hvor de dokumenter der scannes og sendes til computeren, gemmes, i programmet Dell Scan Manager. 1. Tryk på Start → Kontrolpanel → Dell Scan Manager. Dell Scan Manager Administration vises. 2. Vælg den relevante maskine under Dell Scan Manager. 3. Tryk på Scan Property. 4. Set Scan Button giver dig adgang til at ændre scanningsindstillinger og det sted, hvor filerne gemmes, samt til at tilføje eller slette programmet og formatere filer. Du kan foretage ændringer på scannerenheden ved hjælp af Change Port. Lokal forbindelse eller netværk. Tryk på OK, når indstillingen er fuldført. Scanning til programmer 1. Kontroller, at maskinen og computeren er tændt og korrekt forbundet med hinanden. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du kan finde flere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 37. 3. Tryk på Scan/Email. Ready to Scan vises på den øverste linje i displayet. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Scan to PC vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indstilling vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Der vises forskellige meddelelser, afhængigt af portforbindelsen. Kontroller, hvilken af følgende meddelelser der vises, og gå videre til det angivne trin. • Scan Destination: Tilsluttet via USB. Gå videre til trin 7. • Id: Forbindelsen er blevet oprettet via netværket, og brugeren er blevet registreret. Gå videre til trin 8. • W Local PC X: Vælg USB eller netværk til scanning. Hvis du opretter tilslutning via USB, skal du gå til trin 7. Hvis du opretter tilslutning via netværk, skal du gå til trin 8. • Not Available: Er ikke hverken tilsluttet via USB eller forbundet via netværket. Kontroller portforbindelsen. 7. Hold left/right arrow inde, indtil den ønskede port vises i displayet. Den maksimale opløsning, der kan opnås, afhænger af forskellige faktorer, herunder computerhastighed, tilgængelig diskplads, hukommelse, størrelsen af det scannede billede og indstillinger for bitdybde. Alt afhængigt af systemet og af, hvad du scanner, kan du muligvis ikke scanne ved bestemte opløsninger, især ikke, hvis du bruger forbedret opløsning. Programmet Dell Scan Manager kan udelukkende bruges sammen med Windows.38 | Scanning 8. Indtast det registrerede bruger-id og PIN-koden, og klik på OK. 9. Under Scan Destination skal du trykke på left/right arrow, indtil programmet vises. Tryk derefter på OK. Standardindstillingen er Dokumenter. 10. Du kan scanne fra standardindstillingen ved at trykke på Color Start ( ) eller Black Start ( ). Tryk på venstre/højre piletast, indtil den ønskede indstilling vises, og tryk derefter på OK. 11. Scanning påbegyndes. SCANNING VED HJÆLP AF EN NETVÆRKSFORBINDELSE Hvis din maskine er tilsluttet et netværk, og du har valgt de rigtige netværksparametre, kan du scanne og sende billeder over netværket. Klargøring til netværksscanning Inden du begynder at bruge maskinens netværksscanningsfunktioner, skal du konfigurere følgende indstillinger afhængigt af scanningsdestinationen: • Der skal oprettes autoriserede brugere, så der kan scannes til e-mail, FTP og SMB. • Der skal oprettes en SMTP-server, så der kan scannes til e-mail. • Der skal oprettes FTP-servere, så der kan scannes til FTP. • Der skal oprettes SMB-servere, så der kan scannes til SMB. Brugergodkendelse til netværksscanning Du skal registrere lokale brugere eller godkendte netværksbrugere ved hjælp af Embedded Web Service for at kunne sende en e-mail, til FTP eller SMB. • Hvis brugergodkendelsen er aktiveret, er det kun godkendte brugere på lokale databaser eller serverdatabaser (SMB, LDAP, Kerberos), der kan sende scannede data til netværket (e-mail, FTP, SMB) ved hjælp af maskinen. • Du skal registrere godkendelseskonfigurationen til netværket eller den lokale godkendelse ved hjælp af Embedded Web Service for at kunne bruge brugergodkendelse til netværksscanning. • Der findes 3 typer brugergodkendelser: ingen godkendelse (standard), netværksgodkendelse og lokal godkendelse. Registrering af lokale autoriserede brugere 1. Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser, og klik på Go for at få adgang til maskinens websted. 2. Klik på Machine Settings. 3. Vælg Local Authentication på General Setup på User Authentication-websiden. 4. Klik på Add. 5. Vælg det indeksnummer, hvor den tilsvarende indtastning skal gemmes, fra 1 til 50. 6. Indtast dit navn, dit godkendelses-id, din adgangskode, din e-mail-adresse og dit telefonnr. Du skal indtaste det registrerede bruger-id og adgangskoden, når du begynder at scanne til e-mail fra kontrolpanelet. 7. Klik på Apply. Registrering af godkendte netværksbrugere 1. Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser, og klik på Go for at få adgang til maskinens websted. 2. Klik på Machine Settings. 3. Vælg Network Authentication på General Setup på User Authentication-websiden. 4. Klik på Apply og OK. 5. Vælg den Authentication Type, du ønsker. 6. Konfigurer en korrekt værdi for hver tjeneste, på følgende måde: 7. Klik på Apply. Netværksbrugere, der er godkendt af Kerberos 1. Indtast den ressource, der bruges til Kerberos-login. 2. Vælg IP Address eller Host Name. 3. Indtast IP-adressen som decimaler adskilt af punktummer eller som et værtsnavn. 4. Indtast serverens portnummer, fra 1 til 65535. Som standard er portnummeret 88. 5. Du kan tilføje et backupdomæne som i tidligere trin. 6. Klik på Apply. Netværksbrugere, der er godkendt af SMB 1. Indtast det domæne, der bruges til SMB-login. 2. Vælg IP Address eller Host Name. 3. Indtast IP-adressen som decimaler adskilt af punktummer eller som et værtsnavn. 4. Indtast serverens portnummer, fra 1 til 65535. Standardportnummeret er 139. 5. Brugeren kan tilføje et backupdomæne som i tidligere trin. 6. Klik på Apply. Netværksbruger, der er godkendt af LDAP 1. Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser, og klik på Go for at få adgang til maskinens websted. 2. Klik på Machine Settings og LDAP Server Setup. 3. Vælg IP Address eller Host Name. 4. Indtast IP-adressen som decimaler adskilt af punktummer eller som et værtsnavn. 5. Indtast serverens portnummer, fra 1 til 65535. Som standard er portnummeret 389. 6. Indtast Search Root Directory. Det øverste søgeniveau i LDAPbibliotekstræet. 7. Vælg Authentication method. Metode til login på LDAP-server. Anonymous: Den bruges til binde med NULL-adgangskode og login-id (adgangskode og login-id er nedtonet i Embedded Web Service). Simple: Den bruges til at binde med login-id og adgangskode i Embedded Web Service. 8. Marker afkrydsningsfeltet for Append Root to Base DN. • Id'et er det samme som det id, der er registreret for Dell Scan Manager. • PIN-koden er det firecifrede tal, der er registreret for Dell Scan Manager. Du kan tilføje eller slette den mappe, hvor den scannede fil gemmes, ved at tilføje eller slette programmet i Dell Scan Manager → Set Scan Button. • De scannede billeder gemmes i mappen Dokumenter → My Pictures → Dell på computeren. • Du kan foretage en hurtig scanning i programmet Dell Scan Manager ved hjælp af Twain-driveren. • Du kan også foretage scanningen ved at trykke på Start → Kontrolpanel → Dell Scan Manager → Hurtig scanning i Windows. Brugeren kan tilføje op til 6 alternative domæner.Scanning | 39 9. Vælg Match User’s Login ID to the following LDAP attribute mellem CN, UID eller UserPrincipalName. 10. Indtast loginnavnet, adgangskoden, det maksimale antal søgeresultater og søgningens timeout-værdi. 11. Vælg den Serach Name Order, du ønsker. 12. Marker afkrydsningsfeltet for "From:" Field Security Options. 13. Klik på Apply. Konfiguration af en e-mail-konto Hvis du vil scanne og sende et billede som en fil vedhæftet en e-mail, skal du bruge Embedded Web Service og angive netværksparametre. 1. Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser, og klik på Go for at få adgang til maskinens websted. 2. Klik på Machine Settings og E-mail Setup. 3. Vælg IP Address eller Host Name. 4. Indtast IP-adressen som decimaler adskilt af punktummer eller som et værtsnavn. 5. Indtast serverens portnummer, fra 1 til 65535. Som standard er portnummeret 25. 6. Marker afkrydsningsfeltet SMTP Requires Authentication, så der kræves godkendelse. 7. Indtast logonnavn og adgangskode til SMTP-serveren. 8. Klik på Apply. Oprettelse af en FTP-server Hvis du vil bruge en FTP-server, skal du bruge Embedded Web Service og angive parametre, så du kan få adgang til FTP-servere. 1. Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser, og klik på Go for at få adgang til maskinens websted. 2. Klik på Machine Settings og FTP Setup. 3. Klik på Server List. 4. Klik på Add. 5. Vælg indeksnummeret, fra 1 til 20. 6. Indtast et navn i Alias for the Setup til den tilsvarende angivelse på serverlisten. Dette navn vises på maskinen. 7. Vælg IP Address eller Host Name. 8. Indtast serveradressen som decimaler adskilt af punktummer eller som et værtsnavn. 9. Indtast serverens portnummer, fra 1 til 65535. Som standard er portnummeret 21. 10. Marker afkrydsningsfeltet Anonymous, hvis uautoriserede personer skal kunne få adgang til FTP-serveren. Dette felt er ikke markeret som standard. 11. Indtast logonnavnet og adgangskoden. 12. Indtast Scan File Folder under FTP-mappen til lagring af det scannede billede. 13. Klik på Apply. Oprettelse af en SMB-server Hvis du vil bruge en SMB-server, skal du bruge Embedded Web Service og angive parametre, så du kan få adgang til FTP-servere. 1. Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser, og klik på Go for at få adgang til maskinens websted. 2. Klik på Machine Settings og SMB Setup. 3. Klik på Server List. 4. Klik på Add. 5. Vælg indeksnummeret, fra 1 til 20. 6. Indtast et navn i Alias for the Setup til den tilsvarende angivelse på serverlisten. Dette navn vises på maskinen. 7. Vælg IP Address eller Host Name. 8. Indtast serveradressen som decimaler adskilt af punktummer eller som et værtsnavn. 9. Indtast serverens portnummer, fra 1 til 65535. Standardportnummeret er 139. 10. Indtast Share name for serveren. 11. Marker afkrydsningsfeltet Anonymous, hvis uautoriserede personer skal kunne få adgang til SMB-serveren. Dette felt er ikke markeret som standard. 12. Indtast logonnavnet og adgangskoden. 13. Indtast SMB-serverens domænenavn. 14. Indtast Scan File Folder under delt mappe til lagring af det scannede billede. 15. Klik på Apply. Scanning til e-mail Du kan scanne et billede og sende det som en fil vedhæftet en e-mail. Men først skal du oprette din e-mail-konto i Embedded Web Service. Se ”Konfiguration af en e-mail-konto” på side 39. Inden du begynder at scanne, kan du angive scanningsindstillingerne for scanningsjobbet. Se ”Ændring af indstillingerne for hvert scanningsjob” på side 40. 1. Maskinen skal være tilsluttet et netværk. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Tryk på Scan/Email. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil der vises Scan to Email på nederste linje i displayet, og tryk derefter på OK. 5. Indtast modtagerens e-mail-adresse, og tryk på OK. Hvis du har oprettet et adressekartotek, kan du hente en adresse fra hukommelsen ved at trykke på en genvejstast, hurtigopkaldstast eller gruppeopkaldstast. Se ”Konfiguration af adressekartoteket” på side 41. 6. Hvis du vil indtaste flere adresser, skal du trykke på OK, når Yes vises og derefter gentage trin 5. Hvis du vil fortsætte til næste trin, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil for at vælge No og derefter trykke på OK. 7. Hvis der vises en meddelelse i displayet, hvor du bliver spurgt, om du vil sende en e-mail til din konto, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil for at vælge Yes eller No og derefter trykke på OK. 8. Indtast et emne til e-mailen, og tryk på OK. LDAP Referral: LDAP-klienten søger på henvisningsserveren, hvis LDAP-serveren ikke indeholder data, der kan besvare forespørgslen, og LDAP-serveren har en henvisningsserver. Denne indstilling vises kun, når du har valgt indstillingen Netværksgodkendelse i indstillingen for brugergodkendelse. Hvis du vil søge efter oplysninger i en standard-e-mailadressegruppe, skal du markere denne indstilling. Hvis godkendelsesmetoden for SMTP-serveren er POP3beforeSMTP, skal du markere afkrydsningsfeltet for SMTP Requires POP3 Before SMTP Authentication. a. Indtast IP-adressen som decimaler adskilt af punktummer eller som et værtsnavn. b. Indtast serverens portnummer, fra 1 til 65535. Som standard er portnummeret 25. Denne prompt vises ikke, hvis du har aktiveret indstillingen Send til selv i opsætningen af e-mail-kontoen.40 | Scanning 9. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede filformat vises, og tryk derefter på OK eller Start. Maskinen begynder at scanne og sender derefter e-mailen. 10. Hvis der vises en meddelelse i displayet, hvor du bliver spurgt, om du vil logge af din konto, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil for at vælge Yes eller No og derefter trykke på OK. 11. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Scanning til en FTP-server Du kan scanne et billede og derefter overføre det til en FTP-server. Du skal angive parametre fra Embedded Web Service, så du kan få adgang til FTPservere. Se ”Oprettelse af en FTP-server” på side 39. Inden du begynder at scanne, kan du angive scanningsindstillingerne for scanningsjobbet. Se ”Ændring af indstillingerne for hvert scanningsjob” på side 40. 1. Maskinen skal være tilsluttet et netværk. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Tryk på Scan/Email. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil der vises Scan to FTP på nederste linje i displayet, og tryk derefter på OK. 5. Indtast bruger-id’et, og tryk på OK. 6. Indtast adgangskoden, og tryk på OK. 7. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede FTP-server vises, og tryk derefter på OK eller Start. 8. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede filtype vises, og tryk derefter på OK eller Start. Maskinen begynder at scanne og sender derefter filen til den angivne server. Scanning til en SMB-server Du kan scanne et billede og derefter sende det til en SMB-server. Du skal angive parametre fra Embedded Web Service, så du kan få adgang til SMBservere. Se ”Oprettelse af en SMB-server” på side 39. Inden du begynder at scanne, kan du angive scanningsindstillingerne for scanningsjobbet. Se ”Ændring af indstillingerne for hvert scanningsjob” på side 40. 1. Maskinen skal være tilsluttet et netværk. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Tryk på Scan/Email. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil der vises Scan to SMB på nederste linje i displayet, og tryk derefter på OK. 5. Indtast bruger-id’et, og tryk på OK. 6. Indtast adgangskoden, og tryk på OK. 7. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede SMB-server vises, og tryk derefter på OK eller Start. 8. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede filformat vises, og tryk derefter på OK eller Start. Maskinen begynder at scanne og sender derefter filen til den angivne server. ÆNDRING AF INDSTILLINGERNE FOR HVERT SCANNINGSJOB Du kan tilpasse scanningsjob ved at bruge følgende indstillinger på maskinen. • Scan Size: Angiver billedstørrelsen. • Original Type: Angiver originaldokumentets type. • Resolution: Angiver billedopløsningen. • Scan Color: Angiver farvetilstanden. • Scan Format: Angiver det filformat, som billedet skal gemmes i. Hvis du vælger TIFF eller PDF, kan du vælge at scanne flere sider. Den valgte scanningstype bestemmer, om denne indstilling vises eller ej. Sådan tilpasser du indstillingerne, før du begynder at scanne: 1. Tryk på Scan/Email. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Scan Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede scanningstype vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede scanningsindstilling vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede status vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Gentag trin 4 og 5, hvis du vil angive andre indstillinger. 7. Når du er færdig, skal du trykke på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. ÆNDRING AF STANDARDSCANNINGSINDSTILLINGER Du kan undgå at skulle ændre indstillingerne, hver gang du scanner. I stedet kan du angive standardscanningsindstillinger, der for hver scanningstype. 1. Tryk på Scan/Email. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Scan Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Change Default. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede scanningstype vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede scanningsindstilling vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede status vises, og tryk på OK. 7. Gentag trin 5 og 6, hvis du vil ændre andre indstillinger. 8. Hvis du vil ændre standardindstillingerne for andre scanningstyper, skal du trykke på Tilbage ( ) og gentage vejledningen fra trin 4. 9. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. AUTOMATISK UDSKRIVNING AF SCANNINGSBEKRÆFTELSE Du kan indstille maskinen, så den udskriver en bekræftelsesrapport, der viser, om en transmission lykkedes, hvor mange sider der blev sendt m.m. Rapporten viser scanningsjobbet, og sender det via SMB og FTP. 1. Tryk på Scan/Email. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Scan Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Send Report. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede scanningstype vises, og tryk på OK. • On-Error: Maskinen udskriver kun rapporten, hvis der opstår en fejl. • On: Rapporten udskrives, uanset om et job fuldføres eller mislykkes. • Off: Der udskrives ingen rapport efter fuldførelse af et job. 5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.Scanning | 41 KONFIGURATION AF ADRESSEKARTOTEKET Du kan oprette et adressekartotek med de e-mail-adresser, du oftest bruger, via Embedded Web Service og derefter angive en e-mail-adresse hurtigt og nemt ved at indtaste det nummer, den har fået tildelt i adressekartoteket. Registrering af hurtignumre til e-mail-adresser 1. Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser, og klik på Go for at få adgang til maskinens websted. 2. Klik på Machine Settings og E-mail Setup. 3. Klik på Individual Address Book og Add. 4. Vælg et nummer i adressekartoteket, og indtast det brugernavn og den e-mail-adresse, du vil gemme. 5. Klik på Apply. Konfiguration af gruppenumre til e-mail-adresser Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser, og klik på Go for at få adgang til maskinens websted. 1. Klik på Machine Settings og E-mail Setup. 2. Klik på Group Address Book og Add. 3. Vælg et gruppenummer, og indtast det ønskede gruppenavn. 4. Vælg de hurtignumre til e-mail-adresser, der skal indgå i gruppen. 5. Klik på Apply. Hentning af globale e-mail-adresser fra LDAPserveren Du kan ikke blot bruge lokale adresser, der er gemt i maskinens hukommelse, men også adresser på LDAP-serveren. Hvis du vil kunne bruge globale adresser, skal du først konfigurere LDAP-serveren via Embedded Web Service: 1. Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser, og klik på Go for at få adgang til maskinens websted. 2. Klik på Machine Settings, LDAP Server Setup. 3. Vælg IP Address eller Host Name. 4. Indtast IP-adressen som decimaler adskilt af punktummer eller som et værtsnavn. 5. Indtast serverens portnummer, fra 1 til 65535. Som standard er portnummeret 389. 6. Indtast Search Root Directory. Det øverste søgeniveau i LDAPbibliotekstræet 7. Vælg Authentication method. Metode til login på LDAP-server. Anonymous: Den bruges til binde med NULL-adgangskode og login-id (adgangskode og login-id er nedtonet i Embedded Web Service). Simple: Den bruges til at binde med login-id og adgangskode i Embedded Web Service. 8. Marker afkrydsningsfeltet for Append Root to Base DN. 9. Indtast loginnavnet, adgangskoden, det maksimale antal søgeresultater og søgningens timeout-værdi. 10. Vælg den Serach Name Order, du ønsker. 11. Marker afkrydsningsfeltet for "From:" Field Security Options. 12. Klik på Add. Brug af poster fra adressekartoteket Du kan hente en e-mail-adresse fra adressekartoteket på flere måder: Hurtignumre til e-mail-adresser Når du bliver bedt om at indtaste en destinationsadresse, når du skal sende en e-mail, kan du indtaste det hurtignummer, hvor du har gemt den pågældende e-mail-adresse. • Hvis e-mail-adressen er gemt i et hurtignummer på ét ciffer, skal du trykke på den tilsvarende taltast på taltastaturet og holde den nede. • Hvis e-mail-adressen er gemt i et hurtignummer på to eller tre cifre, skal du trykke på den eller de første taltaster og derefter holde den sidste taltast nede. Du kan også søge efter en post i hukommelsen ved at trykke på Adressekartotek ( ). Se ”Søgning efter en adresse i adressekartoteket” på side 41. Gruppenumre til e-mail-adresser Hvis du vil bruge en e-mail-adresse, der er gemt i et gruppenummer, skal du søge efter den i hukommelsen og vælge den derfra. Når du bliver bedt om at indtaste en destinationsadresse, når du skal sende en e-mail, skal du trykke på Adressekartotek ( ). Se ”Søgning efter en adresse i adressekartoteket” på side 41. Globale e-mail-adresser Hvis du vil bruge en global e-mail-adresse, der er gemt på LDAPserveren, skal du søge efter den i hukommelsen og vælge den derfra. Når du bliver bedt om at indtaste en destinationsadresse, når du skal sende en e-mail, skal du trykke på Adressekartotek ( ). Se ”Søgning efter en adresse i adressekartoteket” på side 41. Søgning efter en adresse i adressekartoteket Du kan søge efter en adresse i hukommelsen på to måder. Du kan enten søge systematisk i alfabetisk orden eller søge ved at indtaste de første bogstaver i det navn, der hører til adressen. Systematisk søgning i hukommelsen 1. Tryk om nødvendigt på Scan/Email. 2. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises Search & Send på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede nummerkategori vises, og tryk derefter på OK. 4. Tryk på OK, når der vises All. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede navn og den ønskede adresse vises. Du kan søge opad og nedad gennem hele hukommelsen i alfabetisk orden. Søgning efter de første bogstaver i et navn 1. Tryk om nødvendigt på Scan/Email. 2. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises Search & Send på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede nummerkategori vises, og tryk derefter på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil ID vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Indtast de første par bogstaver i det navn, du søger efter, og tryk derefter på OK. 6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede navn vises, og tryk på OK. Du kan også klikke på Importer og hente adressekartoteket fra computeren. LDAP Referral: LDAP-klienten søger på henvisningsserveren, hvis LDAP-serveren ikke indeholder data, der kan besvare forespørgslen, og LDAP-serveren har en henvisningsserver.42 | Scanning Udskrivning af adressekartoteket Du kan kontrollere indstillingerne for adressekartoteket ved at udskrive en liste. 1. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises Print på nederste linje af displayet. 2. Tryk på OK. Der udskrives en liste over dine genvejstastindstillinger og hurtig/ gruppenumre til e-mail-adresser. SCANNING AF BEGGE SIDER AF PAPIRET Hvis du trykker på tasten Duplex ( ) på maskinen, kan du indstille den til at scanne begge sider af papiret. 1. Tryk om nødvendigt på Scan/Email. 2. Tryk på Duplex ( ). 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises. • Off: Udskriver i normal tilstand. • 2 Side: Scanner begge sider af originalen og udskriver siderne på begge sider af arket. Med denne funktion er udskriften en nøjagtig gengivelse af originalen. • 2 ->1Side ROT2: Scanner begge sider af originalerne og udskriver hver side på et separat ark, mens oplysningerne på bagsiden af udskriften roteres 180°. 4. Tryk på OK for at gemme dit valg. Hvis tilstanden er aktiveret, er tasten Duplex ( ) baggrundsbelyst. X Y X Y X YGrundlæggende udskrivning | 43 grundlæggende udskrivning Dette kapitel forklarer almindelige udskrivningsopgaver. Kapitlet omfatter: • Sådan udskriver du et dokument • Annullering af et udskriftsjob SÅDAN UDSKRIVER DU ET DOKUMENT Du kan bruge maskinen til at udskrive fra forskellige Windows-, Macintosh- eller Linux-baserede programmer. De præcise trin, du skal følge, når du udskriver et dokument, kan være forskellige, afhængigt af hvilket program du benytter. Detaljerede oplysninger om udskrivning finder du i Softwareafsnit. ANNULLERING AF ET UDSKRIFTSJOB Hvis udskriftsjobbet venter i en printerkø eller en printspooler, f.eks. gruppen Printere i Windows, skal du slette jobbet på følgende måde: 1. Klik på menuen Start i Windows. 2. I Windows 2000 skal du vælge Indstillinger og derefter Printere. I Windows XP/2003 skal du vælge Printere og faxenheder. I Windows Vista/2008 skal du vælge Kontrolpanel → Hardware og lyd → Printere. 3. Dobbeltklik på ikonet Dell 2145cn Color Laser MFP. 4. Vælg Annuller i menuen Dokument. Du kan også annullere det aktuelle job ved at trykke på Stop/Slet ( ) på kontrolpanelet. Du får adgang til dette vindue ved at dobbeltklikke på printerikonet i nederste højre hjørne af skrivebordet i Windows.44 | Fax fax I dette kapitel får du oplysninger om, hvordan du benytter maskinen som faxmaskine. Kapitlet omfatter: • Afsendelse af en fax • Modtagelse af en fax • Andre måder at faxe på • Faxopsætning AFSENDELSE AF EN FAX Indstilling af faxhovedet I nogle lande er det lovpligtigt at angive afsenderens faxnummer på alle faxer, der sendes. Maskinens ID, som indeholder telefonnummer og navn eller firmanavn, bliver udskrevet øverst på hver side, som afsendes fra maskinen. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup. 3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine ID. 4. Indtast navn eller firmanavn ved hjælp af taltastaturet. Du kan indtaste alfanumeriske tegn ved hjælp af taltastaturet og indsætte forskellige tegn ved at trykke på knappen 0. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om indtastning af alfanumeriske tegn på side 21. 5. Tryk på OK for at gemme id’et. 6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Machine Fax No vises, og tryk på OK. 7. Indtast dit faxnummer ved hjælp af taltastaturet, og tryk på OK. 8. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Justering af dokumentindstillinger Inden du begynder at faxe, skal du ændre følgende indstillinger, så de passer til originalens status. På den måde opnår du den bedste kvalitet. Opløsning Standardindstillingerne for dokumenter giver et godt resultat, når der anvendes almindelige tekstbaserede originaler. Men hvis du sender originaler, som er i dårlig kvalitet eller indeholder billeder, kan du opnå en bedre faxkvalitet ved at justere opløsningen. 1. Tryk på Opløsning ( ). 2. Tryk på Opløsning ( ) eller på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises. 3. Tryk på OK for at gemme dit valg. De anbefalede opløsningsindstillinger for forskellige typer originaler er beskrevet i tabellen nedenfor: Mørkhed Du kan vælge standardkontrasten og på den måde gøre dine faxer lysere eller mørkere. 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), og tryk derefter på OK, når Fax Feature vises på nederste linje i displayet. 3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Darkness. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indstilling vises, og tryk på OK. Vi anbefaler brug af de traditionelle, analoge telefontjenester (PSTN: offentlige telefonnetværk), når der skal sluttes en fax til telefonlinjen. Hvis du bruger andre internettjenester (DSL, ISDN, VolP), kan du forbedre forbindelseskvaliteten ved hjælp af et mikrofilter. Mikrofilteret eliminerer unødvendige støjsignaler og forbedrer forbindelses- eller internetkvaliteten. Eftersom DSL-mikrofilteret ikke leveres sammen med maskinen, skal du kontakte din internetudbyder for at få flere oplysninger om brug af DSL-mikrofilteret. 1 Linjeport 2 Mikrofilter 3 DSL-modem / telefonlinje TILSTAND ANBEFALES TIL: Standard Originaler med tegn i normal størrelse. Fine Originaler med små tegn eller tynde linjer, eller originaler der er udskrevet på en matrixprinter. Super Fine Originaler med mange fine detaljer. Tilstanden Super fin kan kun aktiveres, hvis den maskine, der kommunikeres med, også understøtter denne tilstand. • Ved hukommelsestransmission er tilstanden Super Fine ikke tilgængelig. Opløsningsindstillingen ændres automatisk til Fine. • Når maskinen er indstillet til opløsningen Super Fine, og den faxmaskine, der kommunikeres med, ikke understøtter opløsningen Super Fine, afsender maskinen faxen med den højeste opløsningsgrad, der understøttes af den modtagende faxmaskine. Photo Fax Originaler med gråtoner eller fotografier. Indstillingen for opløsning anvendes på det igangværende faxjob. På side 50 kan du se, hvordan du ændrer standardindstillingen.Fax | 45 5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Automatisk afsendelse af en fax 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24.Der vises Ready to Fax på den øverste linje af displayet. 3. Juster indstillingerne for opløsning og mørkhed, så de passer til den fax, du skal sende. 4. Indtast nummeret på modtagerens faxmaskine. Du kan bruge genvejstaster, hurtigopkaldstaster eller gruppeopkaldstaster. På side 50 kan du finde yderligere oplysninger om, hvordan du gemmer og søger efter numre. 5. Tryk på Color Start ( ) eller Black Start ( ). 6. Hvis der ligger en original på scannerglaspladen, skal du vælge Yes for at lægge endnu en side i maskinen. Læg endnu en original i, og tryk på OK. 7. Når du er færdig, skal du vælge No efter prompten Another Page?. Når der er ringet op til nummeret, begynder maskinen at sende faxen, når modtagerens maskine svarer. Manuel afsendelse af en fax 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Juster indstillingerne for opløsning og mørkhed, så de passer til den fax, du skal sende. Se ”Justering af dokumentindstillinger” på side 44 4. Tryk på Håndfrit kald ( ). Du kan høre en klartone. 5. Indtast nummeret på modtagerens faxmaskine. Du kan bruge genvejstaster, hurtigopkaldstaster eller gruppeopkaldstaster. På side 50 kan du finde yderligere oplysninger om, hvordan du gemmer og søger efter numre. 6. Tryk på Color Start ( ) eller Black Start ( ), når du hører en skinger faxtone fra den anden maskine. Bekræftelse af en transmission Når den sidste side i originalen er afsendt korrekt, bipper maskinen og vender tilbage til klar-tilstand. Hvis noget går galt under afsendelsen, vises der en fejlmeddelelse i displayet. Du kan finde en liste over fejlmeddelelser og deres betydning på side 71. Hvis der vises en fejlmeddelelse, skal du trykke på Stop/Slet ( )for at slette meddelelsen og prøve at sende faxen igen. Maskinen kan indstilles til at udskrive en bekræftelsesrapport, hver gang den har afsluttet afsendelsen af en fax. Du kan finde yderligere oplysninger på side 49. Automatisk genkald Når det nummer, du har ringet op, er optaget, eller der ikke svares, når du sender en fax, foretager maskinen automatisk et genkald hvert tredje minut op til syv gange (i henhold til producentens standardindstillingerne). Når der vises Retry Redial? i displayet, skal du trykke på OK for at kalde op til nummeret igen med det samme. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ), hvis du vil afbryde det automatiske genkald. Ændring af tidsintervallet mellem genkald og antallet af genkaldsforsøg. Se ”Receiving-indstillinger” på side 49 Genopkald til det senest kaldte nummer Sådan ringer du op igen til det nummer, du senest har kaldt: 1. Tryk på Genopkald/Pause ( ). 2. Når originalen er lagt i DADF’en, begynder maskinen automatisk at sende. Hvis der ligger en original på scannerglaspladen, skal du vælge Yes for at lægge endnu en side i maskinen. Læg endnu en original i, og tryk på OK. Når du er færdig, skal du vælge No efter prompten Another Page?. Sender faxer på begge sider af papiret Du kan indstille maskinen til at udskrive modtagne faxer på begge sider af papiret . 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Tryk på Duplex ( ). 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises. • Off: Sender faxer i normal tilstand. • 2 Side: Sender faxer på begge sider af originalen. • 2 ->1Side ROT2: Sender faxer begge sider af originalerne og udskriver hver af dem på separate ark, men oplysningerne på bagsiden af udskriften roteres 180°. 4. Tryk på OK for at gemme dit valg. Hvis tilstanden er aktiveret, er tasten Duplex ( ) baggrundsbelyst. MODTAGELSE AF EN FAX Valg af papirbakke Når du har lagt de udskriftsmedier, du vil bruge til modtagelse af faxer, i maskinen, skal du vælge den papirbakke, du vil bruge til faxmodtagelse. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Paper Setup vises, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Paper Source vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Fax Tray vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede papirbakke vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Ændring af modtagetilstand 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Receiving vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Receive Mode. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede tilstand for faxmodtagelse vises. • I tilstanden Fax besvarer maskinen et indgående opkald og skifter øjeblikkeligt til fax-modtagetilstand. Indstillingen for mørkhed anvendes til det igangværende faxjob. På side 50 kan du se, hvordan du ændrer standardindstillingen. Hvis du ønsker at annullere et faxjob, skal du trykke på Stop/Slet ( ) på et vilkårligt tidspunkt under afsendelsen. Hvis du ønsker at annullere et faxjob, skal du trykke på Stop/Slet ( ) på et vilkårligt tidspunkt under afsendelsen. X Y X Y46 | Fax • I tilstanden Tel kan du modtage en fax ved at trykke på Håndfrit kald ( ) og derefter på Color Start ( ) eller Black Start ( ). Du kan også løfte røret på den eksterne telefon og derefter indtaste koden til ekstern modtagelse. Se ”Manuel modtagelse med en ekstern telefon” på side 46 • I tilstanden Ans/Fax besvarer en telefonsvarer, der er tilsluttet maskinen, et indgående opkald, så den, der ringer op, kan indtale en besked. Hvis faxmaskinen registrerer en faxtone på linjen, skifter maskinen automatisk til Faxtilstand for at modtage faxen. Se ”Automatisk modtagelse i tilstanden Ans/Fax” på side 46 • I tilstanden DRPD kan du modtage et opkald ved hjælp af funktionen DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection). DRPD-funktionen registrerer bestemte ringetonesekvenser og er en tjeneste, der leveres af telefonselskaberne. Den gør det muligt for en bruger at besvare opkald til flere forskellige telefonnumre fra én enkelt telefonlinje. Du kan finde yderligere oplysninger på side 46. 6. Tryk på OK for at gemme dit valg. 7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Automatisk modtagelse i tilstanden Fax Maskinen er forudindstillet til tilstanden Fax fra producenten. Når du modtager en fax, besvarer maskinen opkaldet efter et bestemt antal ring og modtager automatisk faxen. For at ændre antallet af ring, se side 50. Manuel modtagelse i tilstanden Tel Du kan modtage et faxopkald ved at trykke på Håndfrit kald ( ) og derefter trykke på Black Start ( ) eller Color Start ( ), når du hører en faxtone fra afsendermaskinen. Maskinen begynder at modtage en fax og vender tilbage til klar-tilstand, når modtagelsen er afsluttet. Manuel modtagelse med en ekstern telefon Denne funktion fungerer bedst, når du anvender en ekstern telefon, der er tilsluttet EXT-stikket på maskinens bagside. Du kan modtage en fax fra en person, du taler med på den eksterne telefon, uden at skulle gå hen til faxmaskinen. Når du modtager et opkald på den eksterne telefon, og du kan høre faxtonen, skal du trykke på knapperne *9* på den eksterne telefon. Så begynder maskinen at modtage faxen. Tryk langsomt på tasterne i den angivne rækkefølge. Prøv at trykke *9* en gang til, hvis du stadig hører faxtonen fra den eksterne maskine. *9* er den eksterne modtagekode, maskinen leveres med fra fabrikken. Den første og sidste stjerne er faste, men du kan ændre det midterste tal. På side 50 kan du finde yderligere oplysninger om, hvordan du ændrer koden. Automatisk modtagelse i tilstanden Ans/Fax Hvis du vil bruge denne tilstand, skal der sættes en telefonsvarer i EXT-stikket bag på maskinen. Hvis den, der ringer, efterlader en besked, gemmer telefonsvareren beskeden som normalt. Hvis maskinen registrerer en faxtone på linjen, begynder den automatisk at modtage faxen. Modtagelse af faxer i tilstanden DRPD DRPD-funktionen registrerer bestemte ringetonesekvenser og er en tjeneste, der leveres af telefonselskaberne. Den gør det muligt for en bruger at besvare opkald til flere forskellige telefonnumre fra én enkelt telefonlinje. Det nummer, som en person ringer til dig fra, identificeres med forskellige ringemønstre, der består af forskellige kombinationer af lange og korte ringelyde. Denne funktion bruges ofte af svartjenester, der besvarer telefoner for mange forskellige klienter, og som derfor har behov for at vide, hvilket nummer en given person ringer ind fra, for at kunne besvare opkaldet korrekt. Hvis du bruger DRPD-funktionen (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection), kan faxmaskinen lære at genkende den ringetonesekvens, som du angiver, at faxmaskinen skal besvare. Medmindre du ændrer den, vil denne ringetonesekvens fortsat registreres og besvares som et faxopkald, mens alle andre ringetonesekvenser dirigeres videre til den eksterne telefon eller den telefonsvarer, der er sat i EXT-stikket. Du kan når som helst slå DRPDfunktionen fra eller ændre den. Du kan først bruge DRPD-funktionen, når tjenesten er oprettet på din telefonlinje af telefonselskabet. Hvis du vil opsætte DRPD, skal du have en anden telefonlinje på stedet eller få en person til at ringe til dit faxnummer udefra. Sådan opsættes tilstanden DRPD: 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Receiving vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil DRPD Mode vises, og tryk på OK. Waiting Ring, vises på displayet. 5. Ring til dit faxnummer fra en anden telefon. Det er ikke nødvendigt at foretage opkaldet fra en faxmaskine. 6. Når maskinen begynder at ringe, skal du ikke besvare opkaldet. Maskinen skal registrere adskillige ring for at lære mønstret. Når maskinen kan genkende sekvensen, vises der Completed DRPD Setup i displayet. Hvis opsætningen af DRPD mislykkes, vises der Error DRPD Ring. Tryk på OK, når DRPD Mode vises, og begynd forfra fra trin 4. 7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. • Når der ikke er mere plads i hukommelsen, kan printeren ikke mere modtage indgående faxer. Sørg for, at der er ledig hukommelse ved at fjerne data, der er lagret i hukommelsen, for at kunne genoptage funktionen. • Hvis du vil bruge tilstanden Ans/Fax, skal du sætte en telefonsvarer i EXT-stikket bag på maskinen. • Hvis du vil undgå, at andre skal kunne se de dokumenter, du modtager, kan du bruge tilstanden til sikker modtagelse. I denne tilstand gemmes alle modtagne faxer i hukommelsen. Du kan finde yderligere oplysninger på side 47. • Hvis du har indstillet maskinen til tilstanden Ans/Fax, og telefonsvareren er slået fra, eller der ikke er sat en telefonsvarer i EXT-stikket, skifter maskinen automatisk til tilstanden Fax efter et foruddefineret antal ring. • Hvis din telefonsvarer har en brugerindstillet ringetæller, skal du indstille maskinen til at besvare indgående opkald efter 1 ring. • Hvis du har valgt tilstanden Tel (manuel modtagelse), og telefonsvareren er tilsluttet maskinen, skal du slå telefonsvareren fra. Ellers griber meddelelsen fra telefonsvareren forstyrrende ind i telefonsamtalen.Fax | 47 Modtagelse i sikker modtagetilstand Du kan få brug for at forhindre, at uvedkommende personer har adgang til de faxer, du modtager. Du kan skifte til sikker modtagetilstand, så udskriften af modtagne faxer begrænses, når maskinen ikke er overvåget. I sikker modtagetilstand gemmes alle indgående faxer i hukommelsen. Når tilstanden er deaktiveret, udskrives eventuelle gemte faxer. Aktivering af sikker modtagetilstand 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), og tryk derefter på OK, når Fax Feature vises på nederste linje i displayet. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Secure Receive vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil On vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Indtast en adgangskode på fire cifre, som du vil bruge, og tryk på OK. 6. Indtast adgangskoden igen for at bekræfte den, og tryk på OK. 7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Når en fax modtages i sikker modtagetilstand, gemmes den i hukommelsen og meddelelsen Secure Receive vises, så du ved, at der er modtaget en fax. Udskrivning af modtagne faxer 1. Åbn menuen Secure Receive ved at følge vejledningen i trin 1 til og med 3 i ”Aktivering af sikker modtagetilstand”. 2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Print vises, og tryk på OK. 3. Indtast den firecifrede adgangskode, og tryk på OK. Maskinen udskriver alle faxer, der er gemt i hukommelsen. Deaktivering af sikker modtagetilstand 1. Åbn menuen Secure Receive ved at følge vejledningen i trin 1 til og med 3 i ”Aktivering af sikker modtagetilstand”. 2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Off vises, og tryk på OK. 3. Indtast den firecifrede adgangskode, og tryk på OK. Tilstanden deaktiveres, og maskinen udskriver alle faxer, der er gemt i hukommelsen. 4. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Modtagelse af faxer i hukommelsen Da maskinen er en multitaskingenhed, kan den modtage faxer samtidig med, at den kopierer eller udskriver. Hvis du modtager en fax, mens du kopierer eller udskriver, gemmer maskinen indgående faxer i hukommelsen. Så snart kopieringen eller udskrivningen er afsluttet, udskriver maskinen automatisk faxerne. Maskinen modtager også fax og lagrer dem i hukommelsen, når der ikke er papir i bakken, eller der ikke er toner i tonerpatronen. ANDRE MÅDER AT FAXE PÅ Afsendelse af en fax til flere destinationer Du kan bruge funktionen til afsendelse af fax til flere destinationer. Originalerne gemmes automatisk i hukommelsen og sendes til en ekstern maskine. Efter transmissionen slettes originalerne automatisk fra hukommelsen. Du kan ikke sende en farvefax ved brug af denne funktion. 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Juster indstillingerne for opløsning og mørkhed for dokumentet, så du får det bedst mulige faxresultat. Se ”Justering af dokumentindstillinger” på side 44 4. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Multi Send vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Indtast nummeret på den første modtagerfaxmaskine, og tryk på OK. Du kan bruge genvejstaster eller hurtigopkaldsnumre. Du kan indtaste gruppeopkaldsnumre ved hjælp af knappen Adressekartotek ( ). Se side 50, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger. 7. Indtast det næste faxnummer, og tryk på OK. Du bliver i displayet bedt om at indtaste endnu et faxnummer for at afsende dokumentet. 8. Hvis du vil indtaste flere faxnumre, skal du trykke på OK, når Yes vises, og gentage trin 6 og 7. Du kan tilføje op til 10 destinationer. 9. Når du har indtastet alle faxnumre, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil for at vælge No efter prompten Another No.? og derefter trykke på OK. Originalen scannes ind i hukommelsen, før den sendes. Displayet viser hukommelsens kapacitet og det antal sider, der gemmes i hukommelsen. 10. Hvis der ligger en original på scannerglaspladen, skal du vælge Yes for at lægge endnu en side i maskinen. Læg endnu en original i, og tryk på OK. Når du er færdig, skal du vælge No efter prompten Another Page?. Maskinen begynder at sende faxen til de numre, du har indtastet, i den rækkefølge, du har indtastet dem. Afsendelse af en udskudt fax Du kan indstille maskinen, så den sender en fax på et senere tidspunkt, hvor du ikke selv er til stede. Du kan ikke sende en farvefax ved brug af denne funktion. 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Juster indstillingerne for opløsning og mørkhed for dokumentet, så du får det bedst mulige faxresultat. Se ”Justering af dokumentindstillinger” på side 44 4. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Delay Send vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Indtast nummeret på den modtagende maskine ved hjælp af taltastaturet. Du kan bruge genvejstaster eller hurtigopkaldsnumre. Du kan indtaste • DRPD-funktionen skal konfigureres igen, hvis du tildeler faxnummeret igen eller slutter maskinen til en anden telefonlinje. • Når DRPD-funktionen er oprettet, skal du ringe dit faxnummer op igen for at bekræfte, at maskinen svarer med en faxtone. Derefter skal du sørge for, at der ringes op til et andet nummer, som er registreret på samme linje, så du er sikker på, at opkaldet dirigeres videre til den eksterne telefon eller telefonsvarer, der er sat i EXT-stikket. Du kan aktivere sikker modtagetilstand uden at angive en adgangskode, men så kan du ikke beskytte dine faxer. Når først du har indtastet et gruppeopkaldsnummer, kan du ikke senere indtaste et andet gruppeopkaldsnummer.48 | Fax gruppeopkaldsnumre ved hjælp af knappen Adressekartotek ( ). Se ”Oprettelse af et adressekartotek” på side 50, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger. 7. Tryk på OK for at bekræfte det valgte nummer. Du bliver i displayet bedt om at indtaste endnu et faxnummer for at afsende dokumentet. 8. Hvis du vil indtaste flere faxnumre, skal du trykke på OK, når Yes vises, og gentage trin 6 og 7. Du kan tilføje op til 10 destinationer. 9. Når du har indtastet alle faxnumre, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil for at vælge No efter prompten Another No.? og derefter trykke på OK. 10. Indtast det ønskede jobnavn, og tryk på OK. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om indtastning af alfanumeriske tegn på side 21. Hvis du ikke ønsker at indtaste et navn, skal du blot springe dette trin over. 11. Brug taltasterne, og indtast klokkeslættet. Tryk derefter på OK eller Black Start. Originalen scannes ind i hukommelsen, før den sendes. Displayet viser hukommelsens kapacitet og det antal sider, der gemmes i hukommelsen. 12. Hvis der ligger en original på scannerglaspladen, skal du vælge Yes for at lægge endnu en side i maskinen. Læg endnu en original i, og tryk på OK. Når du er færdig, skal du vælge No efter prompten Another Page?. Maskinen vender tilbage til klar-tilstand. Displayet minder dig om, at maskinen befinder sig i klar-tilstand, og at den er indstillet til at sende en udskudt fax. Tilføjelse af sider til en udskudt fax Du kan føje flere sider til de faxer, der er gemt i maskinens hukommelse som udskudte faxer. 1. Læg de originaler, der skal tilføjes, i maskinen, og juster dokumentindstillingerne. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Add Page. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede faxjob vises, og tryk derefter på OK. Maskinen scanner originalen ind i hukommelsen og viser både det samlede antal sider og det tilføjede antal sider. Annullering af en udskudt fax 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Cancel Job vises, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede faxjob vises, og tryk derefter på OK. 4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes. Den valgte fax slettes fra hukommelsen. Afsendelse af en prioriteret fax Du kan bruge denne funktion, hvis du vil sende en fax med høj prioritet før andre reserverede handlinger. Originalen scannes ind i hukommelsen og sendes med det samme, når den igangværende handling er afsluttet. Afsendelse af en prioriteret fax afbryder også afsendelse til flere destinationer midt mellem afsendelserne (dvs. når afsendelsen til maskine A er afsluttet, og før afsendelsen til maskine B starter) eller mellem opkaldsforsøg. 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Juster indstillingerne for opløsning og mørkhed for dokumentet, så du får det bedst mulige faxresultat. Se ”Justering af dokumentindstillinger” på side 44. 4. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Priority Send vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Indtast nummeret på modtagerens faxmaskine. Du kan bruge genvejstaster, hurtigopkaldstaster eller gruppeopkaldstaster. Se side 50, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger. 7. Tryk på OK for at bekræfte det valgte nummer. 8. Indtast det ønskede jobnavn, og tryk på OK. Originalen scannes ind i hukommelsen, før den sendes. Displayet viser hukommelsens kapacitet og det antal sider, der gemmes i hukommelsen. 9. Hvis der ligger en original på scannerglaspladen, skal du vælge Yes for at lægge endnu en side i maskinen. Læg endnu en original i, og tryk på OK. Når du er færdig, skal du vælge No efter prompten Another Page?. Maskinen viser det nummer, der ringes op til, og begynder at sende faxen. Videresendelse af faxer Du kan videresende indkommende og udgående faxer til en anden fax eller email-adresse. Videresendelse af afsendte faxer til en anden fax Du kan indstille maskinen til at sende kopier af alle udgående faxer til en nærmere angivet destination ud over de faxnumre, du har indtastet. 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Forward vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Fax. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Send Forward vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge On, og tryk på OK. 7. Indtast nummeret på den faxmaskine, faxerne skal videresendes til, og tryk derefter på OK. 8. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Senere afsendte faxer videresendes til den angivne faxmaskine. Videresendelse af faxer til e-mail-adresser Du kan indstille maskinen til at sende kopier af alle udgående faxer til en angivet destination ud over de e-mail-adresser, du har indtastet. 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Forward vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil E-mail vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Send Forward vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge On, og tryk på OK. 7. Indtast din e-mail-adresse, og tryk på OK. 8. Indtast email-adressen, som faxerne skal sendes til, og tryk på OK. 9. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Senere afsendte faxer videresendes til den angivne e-mail-adresse. Når først du har indtastet et gruppeopkaldsnummer, kan du ikke senere indtaste et andet gruppeopkaldsnummer. Hvis du angiver et klokkeslæt, der ligger før det nuværende tidspunkt, sendes faxen på dette tidspunkt dagen efter. Fax | 49 Videresendelse af modtagne faxer til en anden fax Du kan indstille maskinen til at videresende modtagne faxer til et andet faxnummer inden for et givet tidsrum. Når maskinen modtager en fax, gemmes den i hukommelsen. Derefter ringer maskinen til det nummer, du har angivet, og sender faxen. 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Forward vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Fax. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Rcv. Forward vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Forward vises, og tryk på OK. Hvis maskinen skal indstilles til at udskrive en fax, når videresendelse af faxer er fuldført, skal du vælge Forward&Print 7. Indtast nummeret på den faxmaskine, faxerne skal videresendes til, og tryk derefter på OK. 8. Indtast starttidspunktet, og tryk på OK. 9. Indtast sluttidspunktet, og tryk på OK. 10. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Senere modtagne faxer videresendes til den angivne faxmaskine. Videresendelse af modtagne faxer til e-mail-adresser Du kan indstille din maskine til at videresende indgående faxer til den indtastede e-mail-adresse. 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Forward vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil E-mail vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Rcv. Forward vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Forward vises, og tryk på OK. Hvis maskinen skal indstilles til at udskrive en fax, når videresendelse af faxer er fuldført, skal du vælge Forward&Print 7. Indtast din e-mail-adresse, og tryk på OK. 8. Indtast email-adressen, som faxerne skal sendes til, og tryk på OK. 9. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Senere afsendte faxer videresendes til den angivne e-mail-adresse. FAXOPSÆTNING Ændring af faxindstillingerne Maskinen er udstyret med forskellige indstillinger, som kan vælges af brugeren som et led i opsætningen af faxsystemet. Du kan ændre standardindstillingerne, så de passer til det, du har brug for. Sådan ændres indstillingerne for faxopsætning: 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge Sending eller Receiving, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede menupunkt vises, og tryk derefter på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede status vises, eller indtast værdien for den indstilling, du har valgt, og tryk på OK. 6. Gentag om nødvendigt trin 4 til og med 5. 7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Sending-indstillinger Receiving-indstillinger INDSTILLING BESKRIVELSE Redial Times Du kan angive, hvor mange gange maskinen skal forsøge at kalde op til et nummer igen. Hvis du indtaster 0, ringer maskinen ikke op igen. Redial Term Maskinen kan automatisk foretage genkald til en anden fax, hvis den var optaget første gang. Du kan angive et interval mellem forsøgene. Prefix Dial Du kan angive et præfiks på op til fem cifre. Maskinen vil så ringe dette opkaldspræfiks først, hver gang den ringer et automatisk opkaldsnummer. Dette er nyttigt, hvis du skal have adgang til en PABX-omstilling. ECM Mode Denne tilstand er en hjælp, hvis forbindelsen er dårlig. Den sørger for, at alle faxer, du sender, sendes uden problemer til en anden fax, der også er udstyret med ECM-funktion. Det kan tage længere tid at sende en fax med ECM-funktion. Send Report Du kan indstille maskinen, så den udskriver en bekræftelsesrapport, der viser, om en transmission lykkedes, hvor mange sider der blev sendt m.m. De tilgængelige indstillinger er On, Off og OnError, der kun udskriver en rapport, når transmissionen ikke lykkes. Image TCR Denne funktion underretter brugere om, hvilke faxmeddelelser der er blevet sendt, ved at vise sendte meddelelser i transmissionsrapporten. Første side i meddelelsen omdannes til en billedfil, der printes på transmissionsrapporten, så brugeren kan se, hvilke meddelelser der er blevet sendt. Du kan ikke bruge denne funktion uden at gemme data i hukommelsen. Dial Mode Alt afhængigt af dit land er det ikke sikkert, at denne indstilling er tilgængelig. Hvis du ikke kan få adgang til denne indstilling, understøtter maskinen ikke denne funktion. Du kan indstille opkaldstilstanden for maskinen til toneopkald eller impulsopkald. Hvis du har et offentligt telefonsystem eller et privat omstillingssystem (PBX), skal du muligvis vælge Pulse. Kontakt telefonselskabet, hvis du ikke er sikker på, hvilken opkaldstilstand du skal bruge. Hvis du vælger Pulse, vil nogle af telefonsystemets funktioner måske ikke være tilgængelige. Det kan også tage længere tid at kalde op til et fax- eller et telefonnummer. INDSTILLING BESKRIVELSE Receive Mode Du kan vælge faxens standardmodtagetilstand. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om modtagelse af faxer i de forskellige tilstande på side 45.50 | Fax Ændring af standarddokumentindstillingerne Faxindstillingerne, bl.a. opløsning og mørkhed, kan indstilles til de oftest brugte tilstande. Når du sender en fax, bruges standardindstillingerne, hvis du ikke har ændret dem ved at bruge den tilsvarende tast og menu. 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Change Default vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Resolution. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede opløsning vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Darkness vises, og tryk på OK. 7. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede mørkhed vises, og tryk på OK. 8. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Automatisk udskrivning af en rapport over afsendte faxer Du kan indstille maskinen, så der udskrives en rapport med detaljerede oplysninger om de foregående 50 transmissioner, bl.a. klokkeslæt og dato. 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Auto Report vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil On vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Oprettelse af et adressekartotek Du kan opsætte et adressekartotek med de faxnumre, du bruger oftest. Du kan bruge følgende funktioner, når du opsætter et adressekartotek: • Genvejstaster • Hurtig/gruppeopkaldsnumre Genvejstaster Du kan gemme faxnumre, du ofte bruger, i de 15 genvejstaster på kontrolpanelet. Derefter kan du indtaste et faxnummer ved bare at trykke på en tast. Med tasten Shift kan du gemme op til 30 numre i genvejstasterne. Du kan gemme numre i genvejstasterne på to måder. Se fremgangsmåderne nedenfor, og brug derefter den metode, der passer dig bedst: Registrering, efter at du har trykket på en genvejstast 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Tryk på en af genvejstasterne. 3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes. 4. Indtast det ønskede navn, og tryk på OK. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om indtastning af alfanumeriske Ring To Answer Du kan angive, hvor mange gange maskinen skal ringe, før den besvarer et indgående opkald. Stamp RCV Name Denne indstilling bevirker, at der automatisk udskrives sidetal samt dato og klokkeslæt for modtagelsen nederst på hver side af en modtaget fax. Rcv Start Code Denne kode giver dig mulighed for at starte faxmodtagelsen fra en ekstern telefon, der er sat i EXT-stikket bag på maskinen. Hvis du tager den eksterne telefon og kan høre faxtoner, skal du indtaste koden. Fabriksindstillingen er *9*. Auto Reduction Når du modtager en fax, der indeholder sider, der er lige så lange som det papir, der ligger i papirbakken, eller længere, kan maskinen formindske originalstørrelsen, så den passer til det papir, der ligger i maskinen. Slå denne funktion til, hvis en indgående side skal formindskes automatisk. Hvis denne funktion er indstillet til Off, kan maskinen ikke formindske originalen, så den kan være på en enkelt side. Originalen opdeles og udskrives i den faktiske størrelse på to eller flere sider. Discard Size Når du modtager en fax, der indeholder sider, der er lige så lange som det papir, der ligger i maskinen, eller længere, kan du indstille maskinen, så der ses bort fra en bestemt længde fra slutningen af den modtagne fax. Maskinen udskriver den modtagne fax på et eller flere ark papir, minus de data, der ellers ville være udskrevet i det segment, der nu ses bort fra. Når den modtagne fax indeholder sider, der er større end papiret i maskinen, og Auto Reduction er aktiveret, formindsker maskinen faxen, så den passer til papiret, uden at der ses bort fra visse segmenter. Junk Fax Setup Alt afhængigt af dit land er det ikke sikkert, at denne indstilling er tilgængelig. Når denne funktion er aktiveret, vil systemet ikke modtage faxer, der er sendt fra eksterne faxer med faxnumre, der er gemt i hukommelsen som uønskede faxnumre. Denne funktion er nyttig, hvis du vil blokere uønskede faxer. Når du aktiverer denne funktion, kan du få adgang til følgende indstillinger og angive uønskede faxnumre. • Add: Giver dig mulighed for at angive op til 10 faxnumre. • Delete: Giver dig mulighed for at slette et uønsket faxnummer. • Delete All: Giver dig mulighed for at slette alle uønskede faxnumre. DRPD Mode Denne tilstand sætter en bruger i stand til at besvare opkald til flere forskellige telefonnumre via en enkelt telefonlinje. I denne menu kan du indstille maskinen, så den registrerer hvilke ringemønstre, den skal besvare. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om denne funktion på side 46. INDSTILLING BESKRIVELSE Duplex Print • Long Edge: Udskriver siderne, så de skal læses som i en bog. • Short Edge: Udskriver siderne, så de skal læses, ligesom når man vipper siderne op på en notesblok. • Off: Udskriver den modtagne fax på en side af papiret. Inden du begynder at gemme faxnumre, skal du kontrollere, at maskinen er i faxtilstand. INDSTILLING BESKRIVELSEFax | 51 tegn på side 21. 5. Indtast det faxnummer, du vil gemme, og tryk på OK. Registrering, efter at du først har indtastet et nummer 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Indtast det faxnummer, du vil gemme. 3. Tryk på en af genvejstasterne. 4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes. 5. Indtast det ønskede navn, og tryk på OK. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om indtastning af alfanumeriske tegn på side 21. 6. Tryk på OK for at bekræfte det valgte nummer. Brug af genvejstaster Når du bliver bedt om at indtaste et faxnummer, mens du er ved at sende en fax: • Hvis du vil hente et nummer fra genvejstast 1 til 15, skal du trykke på den tilsvarende genvejstast og trykke på OK. • Hvis du vil hente et nummer fra genvejstast 16 til 30, skal du trykke på Shift og derefter på den tilsvarende genvejstast. Tryk derefter på OK. Hurtigopkaldstaster Du kan gemme op til 240 faxnumre, som du ofte bruger, som hurtigopkaldstaster. Registrering af et hurtigopkaldsnummer 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises New & Edit på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Speed Dial. 4. Indtast et hurtigopkaldsnummer mellem 0 og 239, og tryk på OK. Hvis det hurtigopkaldsnummer, du vælger, allerede er i brug, vises navnet på displayet, så du kan ændre det. Hvis du vil begynde forfra med et andet hurtigopkaldsnummer, skal du trykke på Tilbage ( ). 5. Indtast det ønskede navn, og tryk på OK. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om indtastning af alfanumeriske tegn på side 21. 6. Indtast det ønskede faxnummer, og tryk på OK. 7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Redigering af hurtigopkaldsnumre 1. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises New & Edit på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Speed Dial. 3. Indtast det hurtigopkaldsnummer, du vil redigere, og tryk på OK. 4. Ret navnet, og tryk på OK. 5. Ret faxnummeret, og tryk på OK. 6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Brug af hurtigopkaldsnumre Når du bliver bedt om at indtaste et destinationsnummer, mens du er ved at sende en fax, skal du indtaste det hurtigopkaldsnummer, som du gemte det ønskede faxnummer under. • Hvis hurtigopkaldsnummeret er på ét ciffer (0-9), skal du trykke på den tilsvarende taltast på taltastaturet og holde den nede. • Hvis hurtigopkaldsnummeret er på to eller tre cifre, skal du trykke på tasten eller tasterne med det eller de første cifre og derefter holde tasten med det sidste ciffer nede. Du kan også søge efter en post i hukommelsen ved at trykke på Adressekartotek ( ). Se ”Søgning efter en adresse i adressekartoteket” på side 51. Gruppeopkaldsnumre Hvis du ofte skal sende det samme dokument til flere destinationer, kan du gruppere disse destinationer og angive dem under et gruppeopkaldsnummer. Du kan derefter bruge gruppeopkaldsnummeret og sende dokumentet til alle destinationerne i gruppen. Du kan angive op til 200 (0 til og med 199) gruppeopkaldsnumre ved at bruge destinationens eksisterende hurtigopkaldsnumre. Registrering af et gruppeopkaldsnummer 1. Tryk på Fax. 2. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises New & Edit på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Group Dial vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Indtast et gruppeopkaldsnummer mellem 0 og 199, og tryk på OK. 5. Indtast et hurtigopkaldsnummer, og tryk på OK. 6. Tryk på OK, når hurtigopkaldsoplysningerne vises korrekt. 7. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes. 8. Gentag trin 5 og 6, hvis du vil indsætte flere hurtigopkaldsnumre i gruppen. 9. Når du har indtastet alle faxnumre, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil for at vælge No efter prompten Another No.? og derefter trykke på OK. 10. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Redigering af et gruppeopkaldsnummer Du kan slette et bestemt nummer fra en gruppe eller indsætte et nyt nummer i den valgte gruppe. 1. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises New & Edit på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Group Dial vises, og tryk på OK. 3. Indtast det gruppeopkaldsnummer, du vil redigere, og tryk derefter på OK. 4. Indtast det hurtigopkaldsnummer, du vil tilføje eller slette, og tryk på OK. Hvis du har indtastet et nyt hurtigopkaldsnummer, vises Add?. Hvis du indtaster et hurtigopkaldsnummer, der er gemt i en gruppe, vises der Delete?. 5. Tryk på OK for at tilføje eller slette nummeret. 6. Tryk på OK, når Yes vises, hvis du vil tilføje eller slette flere numre, og gentag derefter fremgangsmåden fra trin 4 og 5. 7. Når du har indtastet alle faxnumre, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil for at vælge No efter prompten Another No.? og derefter trykke på OK. 8. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Brug af gruppeopkaldsnumre Hvis du vil bruge et gruppeopkaldsnummer, skal du søge efter det og vælge det i hukommelsen. Når du bliver bedt om at indtaste et faxnummer, mens du er ved at sende en fax, skal du trykke på Adressekartotek ( ). Se nedenfor. Søgning efter en adresse i adressekartoteket Du kan søge efter et nummer i hukommelsen på to måder. Du kan enten søge systematisk i alfabetisk rækkefølge, eller du kan søge ved at indtaste de første bogstaver i det navn, der hører til nummeret. Hvis du trykker på en genvejstast, hvor der allerede er gemt et nummer, vises en meddelelse på displayet, hvor du bliver spurgt, om du vil overskrive det gemte nummer. Tryk på OK for at bekræfte Yes og fortsætte. Hvis du vil starte forfra med en anden genvejstast, skal du vælge No.52 | Fax Sekventiel søgning i hukommelsen 1. Tryk om nødvendigt på Fax. 2. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises Search & Dial på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede nummerkategori vises, og tryk derefter på OK. 4. Tryk på OK, når der vises All. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede navn og nummer vises. Du kan søge opad og nedad gennem hele hukommelsen i alfabetisk orden. Søgning efter de første bogstaver i et navn 1. Tryk om nødvendigt på Fax. 2. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises Search & Dial på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede nummerkategori vises, og tryk derefter på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil ID vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Indtast de første par bogstaver i det navn, du søger efter, og tryk derefter på OK. 6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede navn vises, og tryk på OK. Sletning af en post i adressekartoteket Du kan slette numre i adressekartoteket ét ad gangen. 1. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises Delete på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede nummerkategori vises, og tryk derefter på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede søgemetode vises, og tryk derefter på OK. Vælg Search All, hvis du vil søge efter et nummer ved at blade gennem alle poster i adressekartoteket. Vælg Search ID, hvis du vil søge efter et nummer ved at indtaste de første par bogstaver i navnet. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede navn vises, og tryk på OK. Eller indtast de første bogstaver, og tryk på OK. Tryk på venstre/ højre pil, indtil det ønskede navn vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på OK. 6. Tryk på OK, når Yes vises for at bekræfte sletningen. 7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Udskrivning af adressekartoteket 1. Du kan kontrollere indstillingerne for adressekartoteket ved at udskrive en liste. 2. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises Print på nederste linje af displayet. 3. Tryk på OK. Der udskrives en oversigt over dine genvejstastindstillinger og gemte hurtig- og gruppeopkaldsnumre.Brug af USB-flash-hukommelse | 53 brug af USB-flash-hukommelse I dette kapitel beskrives det, hvordan du bruger en USB-hukommelsesenhed sammen med maskinen. Kapitlet omfatter: • Om USB-hukommelse • Tilslutning af en USB-hukommelsesenhed • Scanning til en USB-hukommelsesenhed • Udskrivning fra en USB-hukommelsesenhed • Sikkerhedskopiering af data • Håndtering af USB-hukommelse OM USB-HUKOMMELSE USB-hukommelsesenheder fås i flere forskellige størrelser, så du får tilstrækkelig plads til lagring af dokumenter og præsentationer og download af musik og hele videoer, fotografier med høj opløsning og et utal af andre filer, som du vil gemme eller overføre. Du kan bruge en USB-hukommelsesenhed til flere forskellige ting på denne maskine. Du kan f.eks.: • Scanne dokumenter og gemme dem på USB-enheden. • Udskrive data, der er gemt på USB-enheden. • Sikkerhedskopier Adressekartotek /Phone Book-poster og maskinens systemindstillinger. • Gendanne sikkerhedskopifiler i maskinens hukommelse. • Formatere USB-enheden. • Kontrollere, hvor meget hukommelse der er til rådighed. TILSLUTNING AF EN USB-HUKOMMELSESENHED USB-porten foran på maskinen er beregnet til en hukommelsesenhed af typen USB V1.1 og USB V2.0. Maskinen understøtter USB-hukommelsesenheder med FAT16/FAT32 og en sektorstørrelse på 512 byte. Kontroller USB-hukommelsesenhedens filsystem hos en forhandler. Du må kun bruge en godkendt USB-enhed med et tilslutningsstik af type A. Brug kun en USB-hukommelsesenhed af metal eller med afskærmning. Sæt USB-enheden i USB-porten foran på maskinen. SCANNING TIL EN USB-HUKOMMELSESENHED Du kan scanne et dokument og gemme det på en USB-hukommelsesenhed. Der er to måder at gøre dette på: Du kan scanne til enheden ved hjælp af standardindstillingerne, eller du kan vælge dine egne scanningsindstillinger. Scanning 1. Sæt USB-enheden i USB-porten på maskinen. 2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24. 3. Tryk på Scan/Email. 4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Scan to USB på nederste linje i displayet. 5. Tryk på OK, Color Start ( ) eller Black Start ( ), når der vises USB. Uanset hvilken knap, du trykker på, vælges farvetilstanden ud fra det, den er tilpasset til. Se ”Tilpasning af scanning til USB” på side 54. Maskinen begynder at scanne originalen, og du bliver derefter spurgt, om du vil scanne en side til. 6. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes, hvis du vil scanne flere sider. Læg en original i maskinen, og tryk på Color Start ( ) eller Black Start ( ). • Du må ikke fjerne USB-enheden, mens maskinen er i gang, eller mens der skrives til eller læses fra USB-hukommelsen. Maskinens garanti dækker ikke skader forårsaget af brugerens forkerte brug. • Hvis USB-enheden har visse funktioner, f.eks. sikkerhedsindstillinger og adgangskodeindstillinger, er det ikke sikkert, at den kan registreres automatisk af maskinen. Du kan finde flere oplysninger om disse funktioner i brugerhåndbogen til enheden.54 | Brug af USB-flash-hukommelse Uanset hvilken knap, du trykker på, vælges farvetilstanden ud fra det, den er tilpasset til. Se ”Tilpasning af scanning til USB” på side 54. Ellers skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil for at vælge No og trykke på OK. Når scanningen er udført, kan du fjerne USB-enheden fra maskinen. Tilpasning af scanning til USB Du kan angive billedstørrelse, filformat og farvetilstand, hver gang du scanner til en USB-enhed. 1. Tryk på Scan/Email. 2. Tryk på ( ), indtil der vises Scan Feature på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på OK, når der vises USB Memory 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indstilling vises, og tryk på OK. Du kan angive følgende indstillinger: • Scan Size: Angiver billedstørrelsen. • Original Type: Angiver originaldokumentets type. • Resolution: Angiver billedopløsningen. • Scan Color: Angiver farvetilstanden. Hvis du vælger Mono her, kan du ikke vælge JPEG i Scan Format. • Scan Format: Angiver det filformat, som billedet skal gemmes i. Hvis du vælger TIFF eller PDF, kan du vælge at scanne flere sider. Hvis du vælger JPEG her, kan du ikke vælge Mono Scan Color. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede status vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Gentag trin 4 og 5, hvis du vil angive andre indstillinger. 7. Når du er færdig, skal du trykke på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Du kan ændre standardindstillingerne for scanning. Se side 40, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger. UDSKRIVNING FRA EN USBHUKOMMELSESENHED Du kan udskrive filer, der er gemt på en USB-hukommelsesenhed, direkte. Du kan udskrive TIFF-, BMP-, JPEG-, PDF- og PRN-filer. Følgende filtyper understøttes af funktionen til direkte udskrivning: • PRN: Dell PCL 6-kompatible. • Du kan oprette PRN-filer ved at markere afkrydsningsfeltet Udskriv til fil, når du udskriver et dokument. Dokumentet gemmes som en PRN-fil i stedet for at blive udskrevet på papir. Kun PRN-filer, der oprettes på denne måde, kan udskrives direkte fra USB-hukommelsen. Læs i Softwareafsnittet, hvordan du opretter en PRN-fil. • BMP: BMP, ukomprimeret • TIFF: TIFF 6.0-baseline • JPEG: JPEG-baseline • PDF: PDF 1.4 og tidligere versioner Sådan udskrives et dokument fra en USBhukommelsesenhed 1. Sæt USB-enheden i USB-porten på maskinen. Hvis enheden allerede sidder i porten, skal du trykke på USB-udskrivning ( ). Maskinen registrerer automatisk enheden og læser de data, der er gemt på den. 2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede mappe eller fil vises, og tryk derefter på OK. Hvis der vises et D foran et mappenavn, er der en eller flere filer eller mapper i den markerede mappe. 3. Hvis du vælger en fil, skal du gå videre til næste trin. Hvis du vælger en mappe, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede fil vises. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge det antal kopier, der skal udskrives, eller indtast antallet. 5. Tryk på OK, Color Start ( ) eller Black Start ( ) for at starte udskrivning af den valgte fil. Der er to muligheder: • OK eller Color Start ( ): Farveudskrift • Black Start ( ): Sort/hvid udskrift Når filen er udskrevet, bliver du i displayet spurgt, om du vil udskrive et andet job. 6. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes, hvis du vil udskrive et andet job, og gentag vejledningen fra trin 2. Ellers skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil for at vælge No og trykke på OK. 7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. SIKKERHEDSKOPIERING AF DATA Data i maskinens hukommelse kan slettes ved en fejltagelse i forbindelse med et strømsvigt eller lagerfejl. Sikkerhedskopier hjælper dig med at beskytte posteringerne i adressekartotek og systemindstillingerne ved at lagre dem som sikkerhedskopifiler på en USB-hukommelsesenhed. Sikkerhedskopiering af data 1. Sæt USB-enheden i USB-porten på maskinen. 2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Export Setting vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indstilling vises. • Adressekartotek: Sikkerhedskopierer alle posteringer i adressekartotek. • Setup Data: Sikkerhedskopierer alle systemindstillinger. 6. Tryk på OK for at begynde at sikkerhedskopiere. Dataene sikkerhedskopieres til USB-hukommelsen. 7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Gendannelse af data 1. Sæt den USB-hukommelsesenhed, som de sikkerhedskopierede data er gemt på, i USB-porten. 2. Tryk på Menu( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Import Setting vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede datatype vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den fil, der indeholder de data, du vil gendanne, vises, og tryk derefter på OK. 7. Tryk på OK, når Yes vises for at gendanne de sikkerhedskopierede data på maskinen. 8. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Can choose paper size and tray when printing. Se ”Indstilling af papirstørrelse og type” på side 31.Brug af USB-flash-hukommelse | 55 HÅNDTERING AF USB-HUKOMMELSE Du kan slette billedfiler, der er gemt på en USB-hukommelsesenhed, en ad gangen eller alle på én gang ved at omformatere enheden. Sletning af en billedfil 1. Sæt USB-enheden i USB-porten på maskinen. 2. Tryk på Scan/Email. 3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Scan to USB på nederste linje i displayet. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil File Manage vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på OK, når der vises Delete. 6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede mappe eller fil vises, og tryk derefter på OK. Hvis du har valgt en fil, vises filstørrelsen i displayet i ca. 2 sekunder. Gå videre til næste trin. Hvis du har valgt en mappe, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil, indtil den fil, du vil slette, vises. Tryk derefter på OK. 7. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes for at bekræfte dit valg. 8. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Formatering af en USB-hukommelsesenhed 1. Sæt USB-enheden i USB-porten på maskinen. 2. Tryk på Scan/Email. 3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Scan to USB på nederste linje i displayet. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil File Manage vises, og tryk på OK. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Format vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes for at bekræfte dit valg. 7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. Visning af USB-hukommelsesstatus Du kan kontrollere mængden af hukommelse, der er tilgængelig til scanning og lagring af dokumenter. 1. Sæt USB-enheden i USB-porten på maskinen. 2. Tryk på Scan/Email. 3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Scan to USB på den nederste linje i displayet. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Check Space vises, og tryk på OK. Den ledige hukommelse vises i displayet. 5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstanden. Når du har slettet filer eller omformateret en USBhukommelsesenhed, kan filerne ikke længere gendannes. Inden du sletter filerne, skal du derfor være helt sikker på, at du ikke længere har brug for filerne. Hvis der vises et D foran et mappenavn, er der en eller flere filer eller mapper i den markerede mappe.56 | Vedligeholdelse vedligeholdelse Dette kapitel indeholder oplysninger om, hvordan du vedligeholder maskinen og tonerpatronen. Kapitlet omfatter: • Udskrivning af rapporter • Justering af farvekontrasten • Brug af Advarsel om lav toner • Sådan slettes hukommelsen • Rengøring af maskinen • Vedligeholdelse af patronen • Udskiftning af tonerpatronen • Udskiftning af papiroverførselsbæltet • Vedligeholdelsesdele • Styring af maskinen fra webstedet • Kontrol af maskinens serienummer UDSKRIVNING AF RAPPORTER Du kan få vist forskellige rapporter med nyttige oplysninger, som du har brug for. Der findes følgende rapporter: Udskrivning af en rapport 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Report vises, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil du får vist den rapport eller liste, du vil udskrive, og tryk på OK. Hvis du vil udskrive alle rapporter og lister, skal du vælge All Report. 4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes for at bekræfte udskrivningen. De valgte oplysninger udskrives. JUSTERING AF FARVEKONTRASTEN Farvemenuen giver dig mulighed for at justere farveindstillingerne. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Maintenance. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Color vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede farvemenu vises, og tryk derefter på OK. • Custom Color: Giver dig mulighed for at indstille kontrasten farve for farve. Default optimerer farver automatisk. Manual Adjust giver dig mulighed for manuelt at justere farvekontrasten for hver patron. Nogle rapporter vises muligvis ikke på kontrolpanelet afhængigt af instillinger eller modeller. Hvis det er tilfældet, kan de ikke anvendes på denne maskine. RAPPORT/LISTE BESKRIVELSE Configuration Denne liste viser status for de brugerdefinerbare indstillinger. Hvis du har foretaget ændringer, kan du udskrive denne liste for at få bekræftet ændringerne. Supplies Info På listen kan du se den aktuelle status for maskinens forbrugsstoffer. Address Book På listen kan du se alle de faxnumre og e-mailadresser, der aktuelt er gemt i maskinens hukommelse. Send Report Denne rapport viser faxnummeret, antallet af sider, hvor lang tid jobbet tog, den benyttede kommunikationstilstand og kommunikationens resultater for et bestemt job. Du kan indstille din maskine til automatisk at udskrive en rapport, der bekræfter transmissionen, efter hvert faxjob. Se ”Sending-indstillinger” på side 49. Sent Report Denne rapport indeholder oplysninger om nyligt afsendte faxer og e-mails. Du kan indstille maskinen, så rapporten automatisk udskrives, hver gang der har været 50 kommunikationer. Se ”Sending-indstillinger” på side 49. Fax RCV Report Denne rapport indeholder oplysninger om nyligt afsendte faxer. Schedule Jobs Denne liste viser de dokumenter, der aktuelt er gemt til udskudt faxtransmission, sammen med starttidspunktet og handlingstypen. Junk Fax Report Denne liste viser de faxnumre, der er angivet som uønskede faxnumre (junk). Hvis du vil føje numre til eller slette numre fra listen, skal du åbne menuen Junk Fax Setup Se ”Receiving-indstillinger” på side 49. Network Info. Denne liste viser oplysninger om maskinens netværksforbindelse og konfiguration. NetScan Report Denne rapport viser oplysninger vedrørende Netværksscanningsposter, inklusive IP-adresse, tidspunkt og dato, antal sider, der er scannet, og resultater. Rapporten udskrives automatisk, når der har været 50 netværksscanningsjob. User Auth List Denne liste viser de godkendte brugere, der har tilladelse til at bruge e-mail-funktionen. PCL Font List Du kan udskrive PCL-skrifttypelisten. PS3 Font List Du kan udskrive PS3-skrifttypelisten. Stored Job På listen kan du se den aktuelle status for gemte job på harddisken. Completed Job Siden Gennemført job indeholder en liste over fuldførte udskriftsjob. Listen indeholder op til 50 filer fra de seneste udskriftsjob. Net Auth Log Denne liste viser de brugere, der er logget på domænet, og deres id’er. RAPPORT/LISTE BESKRIVELSEVedligeholdelse | 57 Default indstillingen er anbefalet for at få den bedste farvekvalitet. • Auto Color Reg.: Giver dig mulighed for at indstille placeringen af farvetekster eller grafik, så de svarer til den originale fil på skærmen. 5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. BRUG AF ADVARSEL OM LAV TONER Hvis toneren i patronen er brugt op, vises der en meddelelse til brugeren om, at tonerpatronen skal skiftes. Du kan angive, hvorvidt denne meddelelse skal vises eller ej. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Maintenance. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Toner Low Alert vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge Off. 5. Tryk på OK. 6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. SÅDAN SLETTES HUKOMMELSEN Du kan slette selektivt blandt de oplysninger, der er gemt i maskinens hukommelse. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Clear Setting vises, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det element, du vil slette, vises. 4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes. 5. Tryk på OK igen for at bekræfte sletningen. 6. Gentag trin 3 til og med 5 for at slette endnu et element. 7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. RENGØRING AF MASKINEN Hvis du vil bevare udskrifts- og scanningskvaliteten, skal du følge nedenstående procedurer, hver gang tonerpatronen udskiftes, eller hvis der opstår problemer med udskrifts- og scanningskvaliteten. Rengøring af maskinen udvendigt Gør maskinens kabinet rent med en blød fnugfri klud. Du kan fugte kluden med lidt vand, men pas på, at vandet ikke drypper på eller ind i maskinen. Indvendig rengøring af maskinen Under udskrivningen kan der samle sig papir-, toner- og støvpartikler inde i maskinen. Denne ophobning kan give problemer med udskriftskvaliteten, så som tonerpletter eller udtværet skrift. Rengøring af maskinen indvendigt udbedrer eller formindsker disse problemer. 1. Sluk for maskinen, og træk netledningen ud. Vent, til maskinen er kølet ned. 2. Fjern frontdækslet helt ved hjælp af håndtaget. Hvis du har flyttet maskinen, anbefales det kraftigt at betjene menuen manuelt. Før du rydder hukommelsen, skal du kontrollere, at alle faxjob er udført. Ellers går disse job tabt. Nogle menuer vises muligvis ikke på kontrolpanelet afhængigt af instillinger eller modeller. Hvis det er tilfældet, kan de ikke anvendes på denne maskine. INDSTILLINGER BESKRIVELSE All Settings Rydder alle data, der er gemt i hukommelsen, og nulstiller alle indstillinger til fabriksindstillingerne. Fax Setup Gendanner alle faxindstillinger til fabriksindstillingerne. Copy Setup Gendanner alle kopieringsindstillinger til fabriksindstillingerne. Scan Setup Gendanner alle scanningsindstillinger til fabriksindstillingerne. System Setup Gendanner alle systemindstillinger til fabriksindstillingerne. Network Gendanner alle netværksindstillinger til fabriksindstillingerne. Address Book Sletter alle faxnumre og email-adresser i hukommelsen. Sent Report Sletter alle fortegnelser over afsendte faxer og e-mails. Fax RCV Report Sletter alle poster over modtagne faxer. NetScan Report Sletter oplysninger om netværkscanningssessioner i hukommelsen. • Rengøring af maskinens kabinet med rengøringsmidler, der indeholder store mængder alkohol, opløsningsmidler eller andre stærke kemikalier, kan medføre misfarvning eller anden skade på kabinettet. • Hvis maskinen eller dens omgivelser er tilsmudset med toner, anbefaler vi, at du bruger en klud fugtet med vand til at rense den. Hvis du bruger en støvsuger, bliver toneren hvirvlet op i luften og kan være skadelig for dig. • Undlad at berøre den grønne overflade, OPC-tromlen eller forsiden af tonerpatronen med hænderne eller med andre materialer. Brug håndtaget på patronen, så du undgår at berøre dette område. • Vær opmærksom på ikke at ridse overfladen på papiroverførselsbæltet. • Hvis du lader frontdækslet stå åbent i mere end et par minutter, kan OPC-tromlen blive udsat for lys. Dette vil beskadige OPC-tromlen. Luk frontdækslet, hvis monteringen skal afbrydes af nogen årsag. INDSTILLINGER BESKRIVELSE58 | Vedligeholdelse 3. Tag fat i håndtagene på tonerpatronen, og træk patronen ud af maskinen. 4. Tryk på det grønne frigørelseshåndtag for at frigøre papiroverførselsbæltet. Hold på håndtaget til papiroverførselsbæltet, og løft bæltet ud af maskinen 5. Fjern støv og spildt toner fra området omkring tonerpatroner og deres hulrum med en tør og fnugfri klud. 6. Find det lange stykke glas (LSU) i den øverste del af sektionen til tonerpatronen, og tør forsigtigt glasset af for at se, om den hvide bomuldsklud bliver sort af snavs. 7. Placer de forskellige enheder i maskinen igen, og luk frontlågen. 8. Sæt netledningen i, og tænd for maskinen. Skal du passe på ikke at røre kontrolpanelets underside (den nederste del af fikseringsenheden). Fikseringsenhedens temperatur kan blive høj og kan beskadige huden. Når du åbner frontlågen og arbejder inde i maskinen, anbefales det kraftigt, at du først fjerner papiroverførselsbæltet. Det arbejde, du udfører, kan forurene papiroverførselsbæltet. Hvis du får toner på tøjet, skal du børste det af med en tør klud og vaske det i koldt vand. Varmt vand opløser toneren i tøjet. Maskinen fungerer ikke, hvis frontdækslet ikke er helt lukket.Vedligeholdelse | 59 Rengøring af scannerenheden Regelmæssig rengøring af scannerenheden er med til at sikre de bedst mulige kopier. Vi foreslår, at du rengør scannerenheden hver morgen samt i løbet af dagen efter behov. 1. Fugt en blød fnugfri klud eller et stykke køkkenrulle med lidt vand. 2. Åbn scannerlåget. 3. Tør overfladen af scannerglaspladen og DADF glaspladen af, indtil den er ren og tør. 4. Tør undersiden af scannerlåget og den hvide flade af, indtil de er rene og tørre. 5. Luk scannerlåget. VEDLIGEHOLDELSE AF PATRONEN Opbevaring af tonerpatroner Hvis du vil have mest muligt ud af tonerpatronen, skal du være opmærksom på følgende: • Tag ikke tonerpatronen ud af emballagen, før den skal bruges. • Undlad at genopfylde tonerpatronen. Maskinens garanti dækker ikke skader forårsaget af en genopfyldt tonerpatron. • Opbevar tonerpatroner i de samme omgivelser som maskinen. • For at undgå beskadigelse af tonerpatronen må den ikke udsættes for lyspåvirkning i mere end et par minutter. Forventet patronlevetid Tonerpatronens levetid afhænger af, hvor meget toner udskriftsjobbene kræver. Det reelle tal kan også variere afhængigt af den udskriftstæthed, der bruges, ligesom antallet af sider kan være påvirket af driftsmiljø, udskrivningsinterval, medietype og mediestørrelse. Hvis du udskriver meget grafik, kan det være nødvendigt at udskifte patronen oftere. Fordeling af toner Når toneren er ved at være opbrugt, kan der optræde svage eller lyse områder. Farvebilleder kan blive udskrevet med forkerte farver på grund af forkert blanding af tonerfarver, når en af tonerpatronerne er ved at være tom. Du kan midlertidigt forbedre udskriftskvaliteten ved at fordele den resterende toner. • Tonermeddelelsen om, at der er meget lidt toner tilbage, vises muligvis på displayet. 1. Fjern frontdækslet helt ved hjælp af håndtaget. 2. Tag fat i håndtagene på tonerpatronen, og træk patronen ud af maskinen. 1 Scannerlåg 2 Scannerglasplade 3 Hvid flade 4 ADF-glas • Undlad at berøre den grønne overflade, OPC-tromlen eller forsiden af tonerpatronen med hænderne eller med andre materialer. Brug håndtaget på patronen, så du undgår at berøre dette område. • Vær opmærksom på ikke at ridse overfladen på papiroverførselsbæltet. • Hvis du lader frontdækslet stå åbent i mere end et par minutter, kan OPC-tromlen blive udsat for lys. Dette vil beskadige OPCtromlen. Luk frontdækslet, hvis monteringen skal afbrydes af nogen årsag. Skal du passe på ikke at røre kontrolpanelets underside (den nederste del af fikseringsenheden). Fikseringsenhedens temperatur kan blive høj og kan beskadige huden. Når du åbner frontlågen og arbejder inde i maskinen, anbefales det kraftigt, at du først fjerner papiroverførselsbæltet. Det arbejde, du udfører, kan forurene papiroverførselsbæltet.60 | Vedligeholdelse 3. Hold fast i begge håndtag på tonerpatronen, og ryst den fra side til side for at fordele toneren ligeligt. 4. Skub tonerpatronen ind i maskinen igen. 5. Luk frontlågen. Kontroller, at lågen er ordentligt lukket. UDSKIFTNING AF TONERPATRONEN Maskinen benytter fire farver og har en tonerpatron til hver farve: gul (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C) og sort (K). • Statuslampen og den tonerrelaterede meddelelse på displayet angiver, hvornår hver enkelt tonerpatron skal udskiftes. • Indgående faxer gemmes i hukommelsen. Så er det nødvendigt at udskifte tonerpatronen. Kontroller, hvilken type tonerpatron der bruges til maskinen. Se ”Ekstraudstyr” på side 85. 1. Sluk for maskinen, og vent et par minutter, til den er kølet af. 2. Fjern frontdækslet helt ved hjælp af håndtaget. 3. Tag fat i håndtagene på tonerpatronen, og træk patronen ud af maskinen. Hvis du får toner på tøjet, skal du børste det af med en tør klud og vaske det i koldt vand. Varmt vand opløser toneren i tøjet. Maskinen fungerer ikke, hvis frontdækslet ikke er helt lukket. • Undlad at berøre den grønne overflade, OPC-tromlen eller forsiden af de enkelte tonerpatroner med hænderne eller med andre materialer. Brug håndtaget på patronen, så du undgår at berøre dette område. • Vær opmærksom på ikke at ridse overfladen på papiroverførselsbæltet. • Hvis du lader frontdækslet stå åbent i mere end et par minutter, kan OPC-tromlen blive udsat for lys. Dette vil beskadige OPCtromlen. Luk frontdækslet, hvis monteringen skal afbrydes af nogen årsag. Skal du passe på ikke at røre kontrolpanelets underside (den nederste del af fikseringsenheden). Fikseringsenhedens temperatur kan blive høj og kan beskadige huden. Når du åbner frontlågen og arbejder inde i maskinen, anbefales det kraftigt, at du først fjerner papiroverførselsbæltet. Det arbejde, du udfører, kan forurene papiroverførselsbæltet.Vedligeholdelse | 61 4. Tag en ny tonerpatron ud af emballagen. 5. Hold fast i begge håndtag på tonerpatronen, og ryst den fra side til side for at fordele toneren ligeligt. 6. Placer tonerpatronerne på en vandret overflade som vist, og fjern det papir, der dækker patronerne, ved at fjerne tapen. 7. Sørg for, at farven på tonerpatronen stemmer overens med farven på slotten, og tag derefter fat i håndtagene på tonerpatronen. Indsæt patronen, indtil den låses på plads med et klik. 8. Luk frontlågen. Sørg for, at dækslet sidder godt fast, og tænd for maskinen. Sletter meddelelsen om Ikke mere toner Når meddelelsen Ikke mere toner vises, kan du angive, at denne meddelelse ikke skal vises igen, så den ikke forstyrrer dig. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil System Setup vises på nederste linje i displayet, og tryk derefter på OK. 2. Tryk på rulleknapperne, indtil Maintenance vises, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på rulleknapperne, indtil CLR Empty Msg. vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede farvemenu vises, og tryk derefter på OK. 5. Vælg On, og tryk på OK. 6. Nu vises meddelelsen Toner Empty ikke, men meddelelsen Replace Toner forbliver vist for at erindre dig om, at den nye patron bør installeres af hensyn til kvaliteten. UDSKIFTNING AF PAPIROVERFØRSELSBÆLTET Papiroverførselsbæltets levetid er ca. 50.000 sider sorte- og farvesider. Når papiroverførselsbæltets levetid er udløbet, skal du udskifte det. • Meddelelsen om overførselsbæltet vises på displayet for at fortælle, at det skal udskiftes. 1. Sluk for maskinen, og vent et par minutter, til den er kølet af. 2. Fjern frontdækslet helt ved hjælp af håndtaget. 3. Tryk på det grønne frigørelseshåndtag for at frigøre papiroverførselsbæltet. Hold på håndtaget til papiroverførselsbæltet, og løft bæltet ud af maskinen. • Benyt ikke skarpe instrumenter som knive eller sakse til at åbne tonerpatronens emballage. Du kan beskadige overfladen på tonerpatronerne. • Udsæt ikke tonerpatronen for lyspåvirkning i mere end nogle få minutter, da dette kan beskadige indholdet. Dæk den med et stykke papir for at beskytte den om nødvendigt. Hvis du får toner på tøjet, skal du børste det af med en tør klud og vaske det i koldt vand. Varmt vand opløser toneren i tøjet. Maskinen fungerer ikke, hvis frontdækslet ikke er helt lukket. • Så snart, du har valgt On, skrives denne indstilling permanent til hukommelsen for tonerpatronen, og denne menu forsvinder fra menuen Maintenance. • Du kan fortsætte med at udskrive, men kvaliteten kan ikke garanteres, og der ydes ikke længere produktsupport. Papiroverførselsbæltets levetid kan blive påvirket af driftsmiljøet, udskrivningsintervallet, medietypen og mediestørrelsen.62 | Vedligeholdelse 4. Tag det nye papiroverførselsbælte ud af emballagen. 5. Hold fast i håndtaget på det nye papiroverførselsbælte, og juster det med hullerne på indersiden af frontdækslet. 6. Sænk papiroverførselsbæltet, til det ligger parallelt med frontdækslet og sidder korrekt. 7. Luk frontdækslet. 8. Tænd for maskinen. VEDLIGEHOLDELSESDELE Hvis du vil undgå problemer med udskriftskvaliteten og papirindføring på grund af slidte komponenter og vil sørge for, at din maskine altid er i god stand, skal følgende elementer udskiftes efter det angivne sidetal, eller når det enkelte elements levetid er udløbet. Vi anbefaler på det kraftigste, at denne vedligeholdelse udføres af en autoriseret serviceudbyder, en forhandler eller af den detailbutik, hvor du har købt maskinen. Garantien omfatter ikke erstatning af vedligeholdelsesdele efter deres levetid er udløbet. Kontrol af udskiftelige dele Hvis der ofte forekommer papirstop eller problemer med udskrivningen, skal du kontrollere, hvor mange sider maskinen har udskrevet eller scannet. Udskift de tilsvarende dele, hvis det er nødvendigt. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Maintenance vises, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Supplies Life vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede element vises, og tryk på OK. • Supplies Info: Udskriver en side med oplysninger om forbrugsstoffer. • Total: Viser, hvor mange sider der i alt er udskrevet. • ADF Scan: Viser, hvor mange sider der er scannet via ADF’en. • Platen Scan: Viser, hvor mange sider der er scannet via scannerglaspladen. • Transfer Belt, Fuser, Tray1 Roller, Tray2 Roller, MP Tray Roller: Viser, hvor mange sider der er udskrevet af hver slags. 5. Hvis du har valgt at udskrive en side med oplysninger om forbrugsstoffer, skal du trykke på OK for at bekræfte valget. 6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. • Benyt ikke skarpe instrumenter som knive eller sakse til at åbne tonerpatronens emballage. Du risikerer at beskadige overfladen på papiroverførselsbæltet. • Vær opmærksom på ikke at ridse overfladen på papiroverførselsbæltet. ELEMENTER YDELSE (GENNEMSNIT) Fikseringsenhed Ca. 100.000 sider DADF friktionspudesæt Ca. 20.000 sider DADF opsamlingsrulle Ca. 80.000 sider Opsamlingsrulle (Universalbakke, FCF a , Valgfri bakke 2) a. Første kassettearkføder (Bakke 1). Ca. 70.000 sider Friktionspudesæt (Universalbakke, FCF, Valgfri bakke 2) Ca. 70.000 siderVedligeholdelse | 63 Udskiftning af DADF gummipuden Når der ser ud til at være vedvarende problemer med papiropsamlingen, eller når den angivne ydelse er nået, skal du udskifte DADF gummipuden. 1. Åbn DADF-dækslet. 2. Fjern DADF-gummipuden fra DADF som vist. 3. Indsæt en ny DADF-gummipude i stedet. 4. Luk DADF-dækslet. STYRING AF MASKINEN FRA WEBSTEDET Hvis maskinen er tilsluttet et netværk, og TCP/IP-netværksparametrene er defineret korrekt, kan du styre maskinen via Dells Embedded Web Service, der er en integreret webserver. Brug Embedded Web Service til at: • Få vist enhedsoplysninger om maskinen og kontrollere dens aktuelle status. • Ændre TCP/IP-parametrene og definere andre netværksparametre. • Ændre printerens egenskaber. • Indstille maskinen til at sende besked via e-mail, så du kender maskinens status. • Få hjælp til brug af maskinen. Sådan får du adgang til Embedded Web Service 1. Start en webbrowser, f.eks. Internet Explorer, i Windows. 2. Skriv maskinens IP-adresse (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) i adressefeltet, og tryk derefter på tasten Enter, eller klik på Gå. Maskinens websted åbnes. KONTROL AF MASKINENS SERIENUMMER Når du tilkalder service eller lader dig registrere som bruger på Dellwebstedet, skal du muligvis angive maskinens serienummer. Du kan kontrollere serienummeret på følgende måde: 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Maintenance vises, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Serial Number vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Kontroller maskinens serienummer. 5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand. 1 DADFgummipude64 | Fejlfinding fejlfinding Dette kapitel indeholder nyttige oplysninger om, hvad du gør, hvis der opstår en fejl. Kapitlet omfatter: • Tip til at undgå papirstop • Afhjælpning af dokumentstop • Udbedring af papirstop • Displaymeddelelsernes betydning • Løsning af andre problemer TIP TIL AT UNDGÅ PAPIRSTOP De fleste former for papirstop kan undgås, hvis du vælger den rigtige papirtype. Når der opstår et papirstop, kan du følge trinene, der er beskrevet på side 64. • Følg fremgangsmåderne på side 29. Sørg for, at de justerbare styr er korrekt placeret. • Overfyld ikke papirbakken. Sørg for, at papirniveauet er under papirkapacitetsmærket på bakken inderside. • Fjern ikke papir fra bakken, mens maskinen udskriver. • Bøj, luft og ret papiret ud, inden det lægges i bakken. • Brug ikke foldet, fugtigt eller meget krøllet papir. • Bland ikke forskellige papirtyper i en bakke. • Brug kun anbefalede udskriftsmedier (se ”Indstilling af papirstørrelse og type” på side 31). • Kontroller, at udskriftsmediet har den anbefalede side opad i bakken eller nedad i universalbakken. AFHJÆLPNING AF DOKUMENTSTOP Hvis en original sidder fast, mens den føres gennem DADF’en, vises Document Jam i displayet. Indføringsfejl ved dokumentindlæsning 1. Fjern eventuelle resterende sider fra DADF’en. 2. Åbn DADP’ens topdæksel. 3. Træk forsigtigt det fastklemte papir ud af DADF’en. 4. Luk DADP’ens topdæksel. Placer derefter evt. fjernede ark papir i DADF’en igen. . 1 DADP’ens topdæksel. Denne illustration afviger muligvis fra din maskine afhængigt af dens model. Du kan undgå dokumentstop, hvis du bruger scannerglaspladen til originaler, der er tykke, tynde eller blandede papirtyper.Fejlfinding | 65 Fejl ved papirudføring 1. Fjern eventuelle resterende sider fra DADF’en. 2. Tag fat i det forkert indførte papir, og tag papiret ud af udbakken ved forsigtigt at trække det mod højre med begge hænder. 3. Placer evt. fjernede sider i DADF’en igen. Indføringsfejl ved valsen 1. Åbn scannerlåget. 2. Tag fat i det forkert indførte papir, og tag papiret ud af indføringsområdet ved forsigtigt at trække det mod højre med begge hænder. 3. Luk scannerlåget. Placer derefter evt. fjernede sider i DADF’en igen. UDBEDRING AF PAPIRSTOP Når der opstår papirstop, vises der en advarsel på displayet. Brug tabellen nedenfor til at finde og udbedre papirstoppet. I papirindføringsområdet Hvis papiret sidder fast i papirfremføringsområdet, skal du følge nedenstående fremgangsmåde for at fjerne det fastklemte papir. MEDDELELSE PAPIRSTOPPETS PLACERING GÅ TIL MP Tray Paper Jam 0 I universalbakken Se ”I universalbakken” på side 66. Tray 2 Paper jam 0 I den valgfri bakke Se ”I den valgfri bakke” på side 70. Paper Jam 0 Open/Close Door I papirfremføringsområdet og inde i maskinen Se ”I papirindføringsområde t” på side 65, se ”I fikseringsenheden” på side 68. Paper Jam 1 Open/Close Door Inde i maskinen Se ”I universalbakken” på side 66, se ”I fikseringsenheden” på side 68. Paper Jam 2 Check Inside Inde i maskinen og i fikseringsområdet Se ”I universalbakken” på side 66, se ”I fikseringsenheden” på side 68. Reverse Jam 0 Check Inside I fikseringsområdet og omkring dækslet til området med duplex-enheden. Se ”I universalbakken” på side 66, se ”I fikseringsenheden” på side 68. Reverse Jam 1 Check Inside I det bagerste dæksel og i dækslet på reverseringsenheden Se ”I universalbakken” på side 66, se ”I papirudføringsområdet ” på side 69. Remove Paper in Rear Cover Invendigt bagdæksel Se ”I universalbakken” på side 66, se ”I papirudføringsområdet ” på side 69. Duplex Jam 0 Check Inside Inde i maskinen Se ”I universalbakken” på side 66. Duplex Jam 1 Open/Close Door I papirfremføringsområdet og inde i maskinen Se ”I universalbakken” på side 66, se ”I fikseringsenheden” på side 68. Nogle meddelelser vises muligvis ikke på kontrolpanelet afhængigt af instillinger eller modeller. Træk fastklemt papir ud langsomt og forsigtigt, så det ikke rives i stykker. Følg instruktionerne i de følgende afsnit for at afhjælpe papirstoppet. 66 | Fejlfinding 1. Fjern frontdækslet helt ved hjælp af håndtaget. 2. Fjern forsigtigt papiret ved at trække det i den viste retning. Gå til trin 7. Hvis du ikke kan finde det fastklemte papir, eller hvis du føler modstand, når du trækker i papiret, skal du holde op med at trække i det og gå til trin 3. 3. Luk frontlågen. 4. Træk bakken ud. 5. Fjern det blokerede papir ved forsigtigt at trække det lige ud som vist nedenfor. 6. For at sætte bakken i igen skal du sænke bagkanten, justere den med åbningen og skubbe den ind i maskinen. 7. Åbn frontdækslet, og luk det igen. Maskinen genoptager udskrivningen. I universalbakken Når du skriver ud fra universalbakken, og maskinen opdager, at der ikke er noget papir, eller at papiret er lagt forkert i, skal du følge denne fremgangsmåde for at fjerne det fastklemte papir. • Undlad at berøre den grønne overflade, OPC-tromlen eller forsiden af de enkelte tonerpatroner med hænderne eller med andre materialer. Brug håndtaget på patronen, så du undgår at berøre dette område. • Vær opmærksom på ikke at ridse overfladen på papiroverførselsbæltet. • Hvis du lader frontdækslet stå åbent i mere end et par minutter, kan OPC-tromlen blive udsat for lys. Dette vil beskadige OPCtromlen. Luk frontdækslet, hvis monteringen skal afbrydes af nogen årsag.Fejlfinding | 67 1. Kontroller, om papiret sidder fast i fremføringsområdet. Hvis det er tilfældet, skal du trække det forsigtigt og langsomt ud. Hvis du ikke kan finde det fastklemte papir, eller hvis du føler modstand, når du trækker i papiret, skal du stoppe med at trække i det og gå videre til trin 2. 2. Luk universalbakken. 3. Træk bakken ud. 4. Åbn det indre dæksel, mens du skubber på håndtaget med to hænder. 5. Træk forsigtigt papiret ud. 6. Udskift bakken. Hvis du ikke kan finde det fastklemte papir, eller hvis du føler modstand, når du trækker i papiret, skal du stoppe med at trække i det, og gå videre til trin 8. 7. Fjern frontdækslet helt ved hjælp af håndtaget. 8. Fjern det fastklemte papir ved at trække det i den viste retning. Træk papiret stille og roligt ud for at undgå, at det rives over. 9. Luk frontdækslet. Maskinen genoptager udskrivningen. • Undlad at berøre den grønne overflade, OPC-tromlen eller forsiden af de enkelte tonerpatroner med hænderne eller med andre materialer. Brug håndtaget på patronen, så du undgår at berøre dette område. • Vær opmærksom på ikke at ridse overfladen på papiroverførselsbæltet. • Hvis du lader frontdækslet stå åbent i mere end et par minutter, kan OPC-tromlen blive udsat for lys. Dette vil beskadige OPCtromlen. Luk frontdækslet, hvis monteringen skal afbrydes af nogen årsag. Maskinen fungerer ikke, hvis frontdækslet ikke er helt lukket.68 | Fejlfinding I fikseringsenheden Hvis papiret sidder fast i fikseringsenheden, skal du benytte denne fremgangsmåde for at fjerne det fastklemte papir. 1. Åbn scannerenheden. 2. Åbn den inderste låge ved hjælp af håndtaget. 3. Åbn det inderste dæksel med håndtaget, og tag forsigtigt det fastklemte papir ud af maskinen. 4. Træk papirstophåndtaget op for at løsne fikseringsdelen, og tag forsigtigt det fastklemte papir ud af maskinen. 5. Tryk ned på papirstophåndtaget for at fastgøre fikseringsdelen. 6. Luk det indre dæksel. 7. Sænk scannerenheden forsigtigt og langsomt , indtil den er helt lukket. Kontroller, at den er lukket sikkert. Pas på ikke at klemme fingrene! Undlad at berøre fikseringsenheden inden for det inderste dæksel. Den er varm og give forbrændinger! Fikseringsenhedens driftstemperatur er 180 °C. Vær forsigtig, når du fjerner papir fra maskinen. Maskinen fungerer ikke, hvis scannerenheden ikke er helt lukket.Fejlfinding | 69 I papirudføringsområdet Hvis papiret er fastklemt i udføringsområdet, skal du følge de næste trin for at frigøre det fastklemte papir. 1. Hvis en stor del af papiret er synligt, så træk det ud. Åbn og luk frontdækslet. Maskinen genoptager udskrivningen. Hvis du ikke kan finde det fastklemte papir, eller hvis du føler modstand, når du trækker i papiret, skal du stoppe med at trække i det og gå videre til trin 2. 2. Åbn scannerenheden. 3. Åbn det dækslet på reverseringsenheden med håndtaget på den, og tag forsigtigt det fastklemte papir ud af maskinen. Hvis du mærker modstand, når du forsøger at fjerne papiret, eller hvis du har svært ved at fjerne papir, der sidder i klemme, skal du undlade at trække i papiret og i stedet dreje på udløserknappen i den angivne retning for at fjerne det fastklemte papir. 4. Luk dækslet på reverseringsenheden. 5. Sænk scannerenheden forsigtigt og langsomt , indtil den er helt lukket. Kontroller, at den er lukket sikkert. Pas på ikke at klemme fingrene! Hvis du ikke kan finde det fastklemte papir, eller hvis du føler modstand, når du trækker i papiret, skal du stoppe med at trække i det, og gå videre til trin 6. 6. Åbn bagdækslet, og tag forsigtigt det fastklemte papir ud af maskinen. 7. Luk bagdækslet. Maskinen fungerer ikke, hvis scannerenheden ikke er helt lukket.70 | Fejlfinding I den valgfri bakke Hvis papir sidder fast i den valgfri bakke, skal du benytte denne fremgangsmåde for at fjerne det fastklemte papir. 1. Træk den valgfri bakke op. Når du har trukket den helt ud, skal du løfte den forreste del af bakken en smule for at frigøre bakken fra maskinen. 2. Hvis du kan se det fastklemte papir, skal du fjerne papiret fra maskinen ved forsigtigt at trække det lige ud som vist nedenfor. 3. Skub bakken tilbage i maskinen, og luk de to dæksler. 4. Åbn frontlågen. 5. Træk det fastsiddende papir i den viste retning. Træk papiret stille og roligt ud for at undgå, at det rives over. 6. Luk frontdækslet. Maskinen genoptager udskrivningen. Maskinen fungerer ikke, hvis frontdækslet ikke er helt lukket.Fejlfinding | 71 DISPLAYMEDDELELSERNES BETYDNING På displayet på kontrolpanelet vises en række meddelelser, der angiver maskinens status eller fejl. I tabellerne herunder kan du se meddelelsernes betydning, så du afhjælpe problemet, hvis det er nødvendigt. Meddelelserne og deres betydning er anført i alfabetisk rækkefølge. • Hvis meddelelsen ikke vises i tabellen, skal du slukke og tænde for strømmen og prøve at udskrive jobbet igen. Ring efter service, hvis problemet fortsætter. • Nogle meddelelser vises muligvis ikke på kontrolpanelet afhængigt af instillinger eller modeller. Hvis det er tilfældet, kan de ikke anvendes på denne maskine. • xxx angiver medietypen. • yyy angiver bakketypen. MEDDELELSE BETYDNING FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER [Incompatible] Maskinen har modtaget en fax, der er registreret som et junkfaxnummer. De modtagne faxdata vil blive slettet. Bekræft junkfaxindstillingen igen. Se ”Receivingindstillinger” på side 49. [No Answer] Den modtagende faxmaskine har ikke svaret efter adskillige genkaldsforsøg. Prøv igen. Kontroller, at den modtagende maskine virker. [COMM. Error] Maskinen har et kommunikationsproblem. Bed afsenderen om at forsøge igen. [Line Error] Maskinen kan ikke oprette forbindelse med den modtagende faxmaskine eller har mistet kontakten pga. et problem med telefonlinjen. Prøv igen. Hvis problemet fortsætter, skal du vente en times tid på, at linjen går i orden, og forsøge igen. Eller aktiver ECMtilstanden. Se ”Sendingindstillinger” på side 49. [Stop Pressed] Stop/Slet ( ) er blevet trykket under en operation. Prøv igen. [yyy] Paper Empty Der er ikke noget papir i bakken. Læg papir i bakken. [yyy] Cassette Out Bakkekassetten er ikke korrekt lukket. For at lukke bakken skal du sænke bagkanten, justere den med åbningen og skubbe den ind i printeren. [yyy] Paper Mismatch Den papirstørrelse, der er angivet under printeregenskaber, svarer ikke til det papir, du indfører. Læg det korrekte papir i bakken. Tray 2 Paper jam 0 Papiret sidder fast i papirindføringsområdet. Afhjælp papirstoppet. Se ”I papirindføringsområdet” på side 65. Data Read Fail Check USB Mem. Tiden udløb under læsning af data. Prøv igen. Data Write Fail Check USB Mem. Lagring i USBhukommelsen mislykkedes. Kontroller, hvor meget USB-hukommelse, der er til rådighed. Duplex Jam 0 Check Inside Papiret har sat sig fast under duplexudskrivning. Dette gælder kun for maskiner med denne funktion. Afhjælp papirstoppet. Se ”Udbedring af papirstop” på side 65. Duplex Jam 1 Open/Close Door Papiret har sat sig fast under duplexudskrivning. Dette gælder kun for maskiner med denne funktion. Afhjælp papirstoppet. Se ”Udbedring af papirstop” på side 65. One Page is Too Large Enkeltsidedata overstiger den konfigurerede mailstørrelse. Reducer opløsningen, og prøv igen. Fuser Fan Locked Der er opstået et problem i maskinens blæser. Åbn frontdækslet, og luk det derefter igen. File Access Denied Login på netværket lykkedes. Der blev dog ikke givet adgang til filen på netværksserveren. Rediger serverindstillingerne. File Format Not Supported Det valgte filformat understøttes ikke. Brug det korrekte filformat. File Name Exist Det indtastede filnavn eksisterer allerede. Indtast en andet filnavn. File Name Over Limit Du kan benytte filnavne fra doc001 til doc999. Men alle filnavne er i brug. Slet unødvendige filer. Connection Failed Den angivne protokol understøttes ikke eller serverporten er forkert. Kontroller protokollen eller serverporten. Connection Error Forbindelse til SMTPserveren mislykkedes. Kontroller serverindstillingerne og netværkskablet. Retry Redial? Maskinen venter et foruddefineret tidsrum, før den foretager genkald til en tidligere optaget modtager. Du kan trykke på OK for at foretage genkaldet med det samme eller på Stop/Slet ( ) for at annullere genkaldet. MEDDELELSE BETYDNING FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER72 | Fejlfinding Global Address Not Found Hvis enheden ikke kan finde den angivne adresse på den globale server. Kontroller søge-id’et. Global Query Size Exceeded Dette er er en fejlmeddelelse, som vises, når den globale forespørgsels størrelse er blevet overskredet. Der er for mange søgeresultater. Du kan forbedre søgningen med at indtaste flere bogstaver. Kontakt en LDAPserveradministrator. Global Server Query Timeout NIC (Network Information Center) fik ikke det korrekte svar fra LDAP-serveren inden for det angivne tidsrum. Kontroller LDAPserverens indstilling. LDAP-serverens indstilling er forkert. Global Server Auth Failed Denne meddelelse vises, hvis der opstår en godkendelsesfejl under forsøg på at oprette forbindelse til den globale server. Kontroller godkendelseskonto og adgangskode. Global Server Not Found Hvis enheden ikke kan finde den globale server. Kontroller LDAPserverens adresse. LDAP-serverens adresse er forkert, eller der er opstået en fejl på serveren. Global Server Not Configured Denne meddelelse vises, hvis der ikke er konfigureret en global server. Kontroller LDAPserverens konfigurationsindstillinger. Global Server Comm Error Denne fejlmeddelelse vises, hvis der opstår en kommunikationsfejl mellem den globale server og enheden. Prøv igen. Kontakt en LDAPserveradministrator. Authentication Failure Det indtastede ID eller password er forkert. Indtast korrekt ID eller password. Group Not Available Du har forsøgt at vælge et gruppeplaceringsnr., hvor der kun kan benyttes et enkelt placeringsnr., som når der tilføjes placeringer til afsendelse til flere. Brug et hurtigkaldsnummer, eller indtast et nummer manuelt på taltastaturet. Operation Not Assigned Du har valgt Add Page/Cancel Job, men der er ingen gemte job. Se på displayet, om der er nogen planlagte job. Main Motor Locked Der er opstået et problem i hovedmotoren. Åbn frontdækslet, og luk det derefter igen. MEDDELELSE BETYDNING FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER Memory Full Der er ikke mere plads i hukommelsen. Slet unødvendige faxjob, og send dem igen, når der er mere hukommelse tilgængelig. Alternativt kan du opdele transmissionen i mere end en handling. Not Assigned Genvejstasten eller hurtigopkaldsnummeret, du forsøgte at bruge, er ikke tildelt noget nummer. Angiv nummeret manuelt ved hjælp af taltastaturet, eller gem nummeret eller adressen. Enter Again Du har indtastet et ikke-tilgængeligt punkt. Indtast det korrekte punkt igen. Install [xxx] Den tilhørende del af maskinen er ikke installeret. Installer delen på maskinen. IP Conflict Den netværks-IPadresse, du har angivet, benyttes af en anden enhed. Kontroller IP-adressen, og ret den om nødvendigt. Se ”Konfiguration af netværket” på side 17. Adjusting... Registration Maskinen justerer farveregistreringen. Vent nogle få minutter. Door Open Frontdækslet eller bagdækslet er ikke lukket korrekt. Luk dækslet, indtil det klikker på plads. Low Power Maskinen er i en tidligere tilstand til strømbesparelse. Når printeren modtager data, skifter den automatisk til online. Line Busy Den modtagende faxmaskine svarer ikke, eller linjen er allerede optaget. Prøv igen om et par minutter. Network Error Der er opstået et problem med netværket. Kontakt netværksadministratoren. Reverse Jam 0 Check Inside Der er opstået et papirstop i fikseringsområdet og omkring dækslet til området med duplexenheden. Afhjælp papirstoppet. Se ”I papirudføringsområdet” på side 69. Reverse Jam 1 Check Inside Der er opstået papirstop i dækslet på reverseringsenheden eller i bagdækslet. Afhjælp papirstoppet. Se ”I fikseringsenheden” på side 68. Document Jam Den ilagte original sidder fast i DADF’en. Afhjælp papirstoppet. Se ”Afhjælpning af dokumentstop” på side 64. MEDDELELSE BETYDNING FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGERFejlfinding | 73 Paper Jam 0 Open/Close Door Der er opstået papirstop i papirbakkens indføringsområde. Afhjælp papirstoppet. Se ”I papirindføringsområdet” på side 65. Paper Jam 1 Open/Close Door Der er papirstop inde i maskinen. Afhjælp papirstoppet. Se ”I fikseringsenheden” på side 68. Paper Jam 2 Check Inside Et specielt udskriftsmedie sidder fast i papirudgangsområdet. Afhjælp papirstoppet. Se ”I papirudføringsområdet” på side 69. Mail Exceeds Server Support Mailstørrelsen er større end den størrelse, der understøttes af SMTPserveren. Del mailen eller reducer opløsningen. NonDELL Toner T Farvetonerpatronen, som pilen angiver, er ikke en ægte Delltonerpatron. Tryk på OK for at skifte fejlmeddelelsen mellem Stop eller Continue. W Stop X Du kan vælge enten Stop eller Continue med venstre/højre pil. Hvis du vælger Stop ved at trykke på OK på kontrolpanelet, vi maskinen stoppe udskrivningen. Hvis du vælger Continue, vil maskinen fortsætte udskrivningen, men kvaliteten kan være forringet. Hvis du ikke vælger noget, fungerer maskinen, som om du har valgt Stop. Udskift den pågældende tonerpatron med en ægte Dell-tonerpatron. Se ”Udskiftning af tonerpatronen” på side 60. Refilled Toner T Den tonerpatron, du har installeret, er ikke original, eller den er genopfyldt. Udskriftskvaliteten kan blive dårlig, hvis der installeres en genopfyldt tonerpatron, da en sådan patrons egenskaber kan afvige betydeligt fra den original patrons egenskaber. Vi anbefaler, at der bruges originale Dellfarvetonerpatroner. Not Available Try Again Later Kan ikke udføre opgaven med det samme, fordi der udføres for mange aktive opgaver på én gang. Prøv igen, når den pågældende opgave er udført. MEDDELELSE BETYDNING FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER Updating Data Please Wait... Dit bericht wordt weergegeven wanneer u een systeeminstelling wijzigt of een back-up maakt van gegevens. Schakel het apparaat niet uit wanneer dit bericht wordt weergegeven. Anders kunnen er wijzigingen en gegevens verloren gaan. Toner Empty T Farvetonerpatronen er løbet tør. Maskinen stopper med at udskrive. Tryk på OK for at skifte mellem Stop, Continue eller Black Only for meddelelsen. W Stop X Hvis den sorte tonerpatron er tom, vises meddelelsen Black Only ikke. Du kan vælge enten Stop eller Continue med venstre/højre pil. Hvis du vælger Stop ved at trykke på OK på kontrolpanelet, vil maskinen stoppe udskrivningen. Hvis du vælger Continue, vil maskinen fortsætte udskrivningen, men kvaliteten kan være forringet. Hvis du vælger Black Only, udskriver maskinen farvedata i sort. Hvis du ikke vælger noget, fungerer maskinen, som om du har valgt Stop. Udskift farvetonerpatronen med en ny. Se ”Udskiftning af tonerpatronen” på side 60. Install Toner T Farvetonerpatronen er ikke installeret. Installer farvetonerpatronen. Toner Low T Den tilsvarende farvetonerpatron er næsten tom. Hvis du ikke ønsker, at denne meddelelse skal vises, kan du finde flere oplysninger i "Brug af Advarsel om lav toner" på side 57. Tag tonerpatronen ud, og ryst den omhyggeligt. Ved at gøre dette kan du midlertidigt genoptage udskrivningen. Toner Exhausted T Farvetonerpatronen, der er angivet med pilen, er udtjent. Denne meddelelse vises, når tonerpatronen er helt tom, og din maskiner stopper udskrivningen. Udskift den pågældende tonerpatron med en ægte Dell-tonerpatron. Se ”Udskiftning af tonerpatronen” på side 60. Invalid Toner T Den installerede farvetonerpatron er ikke beregnet til din maskine. Installer en original Dell farvetonerpatron, der er designet til maskinen. MEDDELELSE BETYDNING FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER74 | Fejlfinding Scanner locked Scannermodulet er låst. Lås op for scanneren, og tryk på Stop/Slet ( ). Self Diagnostics Temperature Maskinens motor kontrollerer problemer, der er fundet. Vent nogle få minutter. Self Diagnostics LSU LSU-enheden (Laser Scanning Unit) på maskinen kontrollerer problemer, der er fundet. Vent nogle få minutter. Send Error (AUTH) Der er et problem i SMTP-godkendelsen. Konfigurer godkendelsesindstillingerne. Send Error (DNS) Der er et problem i DNS. Konfigurer DNSindstillingerne. Send Error (Wrong Config) Der er et problem på netværkskortet. Konfigurer netværkskortet korrekt. Send Error (POP3) Der er et problem i POP3-godkendelsen. Konfigurer POP3- indstillingen. Send Error (SMTP) Der er et problem i SMTP. Skift til den tilgængelige server. Power Failure Der er slukket og derefter tændt for strømmen igen, og maskinens hukommelse er ikke sikkerhedskopieret. Det job, du forsøgte at udføre før strømsvigtet, skal udføres forfra. Cancel? W Yes X Maskinens hukommelse blev fyldt op under forsøg på at gemme en original i hukommelsen. Hvis du vil annullere faxjobbet, skal du trykke på tasten OK for at acceptere Yes. Hvis du vil sende de sider, der er gemt korrekt, skal du trykke på tasten OK for at acceptere No. Du kan sende de resterende sider senere, når der er tilgængelig hukommelse. Out-Bin Full Maskinens udbakke er fuld af papir. Fjern papiret. Replace [xxx] Soon Delens levetid udløber snart. Se ”Kontrol af udskiftelige dele” på side 62, og ring efter service. Replace [xxx] Delens levetid er helt udløbet. Udskift delen med en ny. Ring efter service. Invalid Server Address Den indtastede serveradresse er ugyldig. Indtast den korrekte serveradresse. MEDDELELSE BETYDNING FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER Invalid [xxx] Maskinens farvedel er ikke for din maskine. Installer en original Dell del, der er designet til maskinen. MP Tray Paper Jam 0 Der er opstået papirstop i universalbakkens indføringsområde. Afhjælp papirstoppet. Se ”I papirindføringsområdet” på side 65. Load Manually Press Start Key Universalbakken er tom i tilstanden manuel indføring. Læg papir i universalbakken. Remove Paper in Rear Cover Der er opstået papirstop ved det bagerste dæksel. Afhjælp papirstoppet. DADF Cover Open Error DADF-dækslet er ikke lukket korrekt. Luk DADF-dækslet, indtil det låses på plads. MEDDELELSE BETYDNING FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGERFejlfinding | 75 LØSNING AF ANDRE PROBLEMER Den følgende tabel viser nogle af de situationer, der kan opstå, og de anbefalede løsninger. Følg de anbefalede retningslinjer, indtil problemet er afhjulpet. Ring efter service, hvis problemet fortsætter. Papirindføring Udskrivningsproblemer TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER Der er opstået papirstop under udskrivning. Afhjælp papirstoppet. Se ”Tip til at undgå papirstop” på side 64. Papirarkene hænger sammen. • Sørg for, at der ikke er for meget papir i bakken. Bakken kan indeholde op til 250 ark papir afhængig af papirets tykkelse. • Kontroller, at du benytter en korrekt papirtype. Se ”Indstilling af papirstørrelse og type” på side 31. • Fjern papiret fra bakken, og bøj og luft papiret. • Fugtige omgivelser kan medføre, at papirarkene hænger sammen. Der kan ikke indføres flere sider i maskinen på én gang. • Der er muligvis forskellige typer papir i bakken. Ilæg kun papir af samme type, størrelse og vægt. • Hvis flere sider har forårsaget papirstop, skal det udbedres. Se ”Tip til at undgå papirstop” på side 64. Papiret indføres ikke i maskinen. • Fjern eventuelle forhindringer fra maskinens indre. • Papiret er ikke lagt korrekt i maskinen. Fjern papiret fra bakken, og ilæg det korrekt. • Der er for meget papir i bakken. Fjern det overskydende papir fra bakken. • Papiret er for tykt. Brug kun papir, der overholder de angivne specifikationer for denne maskine. Se ”Valg af udskriftsmedier” på side 25. • Hvis en original ikke indføres i maskinen, kan det være nødvendigt at udskifte DADF gummipuden. Se ”Udskiftning af DADF gummipuden” på side 63. Der opstår hele tiden papirstop. • Der er for meget papir i bakken. Fjern det overskydende papir fra bakken. Hvis du udskriver på specialmaterialer, skal du bruge universalbakken. • Der bruges en forkert type papir. Brug kun papir, der overholder de angivne specifikationer for denne maskine. Se ”Valg af udskriftsmedier” på side 25. • Der kan være papirrester inde i maskinen. Åbn frontlågen, og fjern resterne. • Hvis en original ikke indføres i maskinen, kan det være nødvendigt at udskifte DADF gummipuden. Se ”Udskiftning af DADF gummipuden” på side 63. Konvolutter vrides eller indføres forkert i maskinen. Sørg for, at papirstyrene støder helt op til begge sider af konvolutterne. TILSTAND MULIG ÅRSAG FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER Maskinen udskriver ikke. Maskinen får ingen strøm. Kontroller strøm forbindelsen. Kontroller afbryderen og stikkontakten. Maskinen er ikke valgt som standardprinter. Vælg Dell 2145cn Color Laser MFP som din standardprinter i Windows. Undersøg maskinen for følgende: • Frontdækslet er ikke lukket. Luk dækslet. • Der er papirstop. Afhjælp papirstoppet. Se ”Udbedring af papirstop” på side 65. • Der er intet papir i printeren. Ilæg papir. Se ”Placering af papir” på side 29. • Tonerpatronen er ikke installeret. Installer tonerpatronen. • Hvis der opstår en systemfejl, skal du kontakte en servicerepræsentant. Kablet mellem computeren og maskinen er ikke tilsluttet korrekt. Tag printerkablet ud, og sæt det i igen. Kablet mellem computeren og maskinen er beskadiget. Tilslut kablet til en anden computer, der fungerer korrekt, hvis det er muligt, og udskriv et job. Du kan også forsøge med et andet printerkabel. Portindstillingen er forkert. Kontroller printerindstillingerne under Windows for at sikre, at udskriftsjobbet sendes til den korrekte port. Hvis computeren har mere end én port, skal du kontrollere, at maskinen er tilsluttet den korrekte port. Maskinen kan være forkert konfigureret. Kontroller printeregenskaberne for at sikre dig, at udskriftsindstillingerne er korrekte. Printerdriveren kan være forkert installeret. Reparer printersoftwaren. Se Software section. Der er opstået en funktionsfejl i maskinen. Se på kontrolpanelets display, om der er opstået en systemfejl. Dokumentet er så stort, at der ikke er tilstrækkelig plads på computerens harddisk til at åbne udskriftsjobbet. Skaf mere plads på harddisken, og udskriv dokumentet igen.76 | Fejlfinding Problemer med udskriftskvaliteten Hvis den indvendige del af maskinen er snavset, eller hvis der er indført papir forkert, kan du opleve en forringet udskriftskvalitet. Se i tabellen nedenfor, hvordan du kan løse problemet. Maskinen vælger papir fra den forkerte papirkilde. Valget af papirkilde i printerens egenskaber kan være forkert. I mange programmer findes indstillingen til valg af papirkilde på fanen Paper under printeregenskaber. Vælg den korrekte papirkilde. Se printerdriverens hjælpeskærm. Et udskriftsjob behandles meget langsomt. Jobbet kan være meget komplekst. Gør siden mindre kompleks, eller juster indstillingerne for udskriftskvaliteten. Halvdelen af siden er blank. Indstillingen for papirretningen kan være forkert. Skift papirretning i programmet. Se printerdriverens hjælpeskærm. Papirstørrelsen og indstillingerne for papirstørrelse stemmer ikke overens. Sørg for, at indstillingen for papirstørrelse i printerdriveren stemmer overens med papiret i bakken. Eller sørg for, at indstillingen for papirstørrelse i printerdriveren stemmer overens med indstillingen for papirstørrelse i det program, du bruger. Maskinen udskriver, men teksten er forkert, forvansket eller ufuldstændig. Printerkablet sidder løst eller er defekt. Tag printerkablet ud, og tilslut det igen. Prøv at udskrive et job, du allerede har udskrevet tidligere. Hvis du har mulighed for det, kan du tilslutte kablet og maskinen til en anden computer og udskrive et job, du ved virker. Endelig kan du prøve med et nyt printerkabel. Der er valgt en forkert printerdriver. Kontroller programmets menu for printervalg for at sikre, at din maskine er valgt. Der er funktionsfejl i programmet. Prøv at udskrive et job fra et andet program. Der er funktionsfejl i operativsystemet. Afslut Windows, og genstart computeren. Sluk maskinen, og start den igen. Der udskrives sider, men de er blanke. Tonerpatronen er defekt eller tom. Fordel toneren i patronen, hvis det er påkrævet. Se side 59. Udskift tonerpatronen, hvis det er nødvendigt. Filen kan indeholde blanke sider. Kontroller, at filen ikke indeholder blanke sider. Nogle dele, f.eks. controlleren eller kortet, kan være defekte. Kontakt en servicetekniker. TILSTAND MULIG ÅRSAG FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER Printeren udskriver ikke PDF-filen korrekt. Visse dele af grafik, tekst eller illustrationer mangler. Inkompatibilitet mellem PDF-filen og Acrobatprodukterne. Du kan muligvis løse dette problem ved at udskrive PDF-filen som et billede. Vælg Udskriv som billede fra Acrobatudskrivningsmuligheder. Det tager længere tid at udskrive, når du udskriver en PDF-fil som et billede. Udskriftskvalitet en for fotografier er ikke god. Billederne er ikke klare. Opløsningen for fotografiet er meget lav. Reducer fotografiets størrelse. Hvis du gør fotografiet større i programmet, bliver opløsningen reduceret. Maskinen udskriver, men teksten er forkert, forvansket eller ufuldstændig. Hvis du er i DOSmiljøet, kan din maskines skrifttypeindstilling være angivet forkert. Forslag til mulige løsninger: Skift skrifttypeindstillingen. Se ”Ændring af skrifttypeindstillinger” på side 23. Før udskriving udskiller maskinen dunste nær udbakken. Brug af fugtigt papir kan forårsage dampe under udskrivning. Dette skaber ikke problemer. Fortsæt med udskrivningen. TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER Lys eller falmet udskrift Hvis der vises en hvid stribe eller et falmet område på siden: • Der er kun lidt toner tilbage. Du kan måske midlertidigt forlænge tonerpatronens levetid. Se side 60. Hvis dette ikke forbedrer udskriftskvaliteten, skal du isætte en ny tonerpatron. • Papiret overholder muligvis ikke de angivne specifikationer. Det kan f.eks. være for fugtigt eller for groft. Se ”Valg af udskriftsmedier” på side 25. • Hvis hele siden er lys, er indstillingen for udskriftsopløsningen sat for lavt. Juster udskriftsopløsningen. Se hjælpeskærmen til printerdriveren. • En kombination af falmede og udtværede udskriftsfejl kan betyde, at tonerpatronen trænger til rengøring. • LSU-enhedens overflade inde i maskinen kan være snavset. Rengør LSU, og kontakt en servicetekniker. TILSTAND MULIG ÅRSAG FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGERFejlfinding | 77 Tonerpletter • Papiret overholder muligvis ikke de angivne specifikationer. Det kan f.eks. være for fugtigt eller for groft. Se ”Valg af udskriftsmedier” på side 25. • Papirgangen trænger muligvis til rengøring. Se ”Indvendig rengøring af maskinen” på side 57. Udfald Hvis der opstår falmede, oftest runde, områder tilfældigt rundt om på siden: • Et enkelt ark papir kan være defekt. Prøv at udskrive jobbet igen. • Papirets fugtighed kan være ujævn, eller der kan være fugtige områder på overfladen. Prøv et andet papirmærke. Se ”Valg af udskriftsmedier” på side 25. • Hele papirstakken er af dårlig kvalitet. Fremstillingsprocessen kan gøre nogle områder uimodtagelige for toner. Prøv en anden papirtype eller et andet papirfabrikat. • Skift printerindstilling, og forsøg igen. Gå til printeregenskaber, klik på fanen Paper, og angiv typen til Tykt papir. Yderligere oplysninger finder du i Software section. Hvis disse trin ikke løser problemet, skal du kontakte en servicetekniker. Hvide pletter Der vises hvide pletter på siden: • Papiret er for groft og en hel del snavs fra papiret falder ned i maskinen, så overførselsbæltet kan være snavset. Rengør det indvendige af maskinen. Kontakt en servicetekniker. • Papirgangen trænger muligvis til rengøring. Kontakt en servicetekniker. Lodrette streger Hvis der forekommer sorte, lodrette striber på siden: • Tromlen inde i tonerpatronen er sandsynligvis blevet ridset. Tag tonerpatronen ud, og sæt en ny i. Se ”Udskiftning af tonerpatronen” på side 60. Hvis der er lodrette hvide striber på siden: • LSU-enhedens overflade inde i maskinen kan være snavset. Rengør LSU, og kontakt en servicetekniker. Hvis der forekommer lodrette striber på siden: • Scannerglaspladen og den hvide overflade kan være snavsede. Rens disse enheder. Se ”Rengøring af scannerenheden” på side 59. Kontakt en servicerepræsentant, hvis problemet fortsætter. TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc Farvet eller sort baggrund Hvis baggrundsskyggen bliver uacceptabel: • Skift til en lettere type papir. Se ”Valg af udskriftsmedier” på side 25. • Kontroller maskinens omgivelser: meget tørre omgivelser (lav luftfugtighed) eller høj luftfugtighed (højere end 80 % RF) kan øge mængden af baggrundsskygge. • Fjern den gamle tonerpatron, og installer en ny. Se ”Udskiftning af tonerpatronen” på side 60. Udtværing af toner • Rengør printeren indvendigt. Se ”Indvendig rengøring af maskinen” på side 57. • Kontroller papirtypen og papirkvaliteten. Se ”Valg af udskriftsmedier” på side 25. • Tag tonerpatronen ud, og sæt en ny i. Se ”Udskiftning af tonerpatronen” på side 60. Gentagne lodrette defekter Hvis der gentagne gange forekommer mærker på den beskrevne side af papiret med regelmæssige intervaller: • Tonerpatronen kan være beskadiget. Hvis det samme mærke forekommer flere steder på siden, skal du først køre et renseark gennem maskinen flere gange for at rense patronen. Hvis du stadig har de samme problemer efter udskrivningen, skal du fjerne tonerpatronen og installere en ny. Se ”Udskiftning af tonerpatronen” på side 60. • Der kan være kommet toner på dele af maskinen. Hvis defekterne forekommer på papirets bagside, løses problemet sandsynligvis af sig selv efter nogle få yderligere sider. • Fikseringsenheden kan være beskadiget. Kontakt en servicetekniker. Spredte baggrundspletter Spredt baggrundsmisfarvning er resultatet af små mængder toner, der spredes tilfældigt ud på udskriften. • Papiret kan være for fugtigt. Prøv at udskrive på papir fra et andet parti. Åbn ikke pakker med papir, før det er nødvendigt, så papiret ikke absorberer for meget fugtighed. • Hvis der forekommer spredt baggrundsmisfarvning på en konvolut, kan du ændre udskriftslayoutet, så du ikke udskriver i områder af konvolutten, hvor der er overliggende sammenføjninger på bagsiden. Udskrivning hen over sammenføjninger kan give problemer. • Hvis den spredte baggrundsmisfarvning dækker hele overfladen på en side, må du ændre udskriftsopløsningen i programmet eller i egenskaberne for printeren. TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER A78 | Fejlfinding Misdannede tegn • Hvis tegnene er misdannede og giver hule billeder, kan papirtypen være for glat. Prøv noget andet papir. Se ”Valg af udskriftsmedier” på side 25. • Hvis tegnene er misdannede og forekommer bølgede, har scannerenheden muligvis brug for eftersyn. Kontakt en servicemedarbejder, hvis dette er tilfældet. Skrå skrift • Kontroller, at papiret ligger korrekt. • Kontroller papirtypen og papirkvaliteten. Se ”Valg af udskriftsmedier” på side 25. • Sørg for, at papiret eller andet materiale er lagt rigtigt i, og at styrene ikke er for stramme eller for løse omkring papirstakken. Krøller eller bølger • Kontroller, at papiret ligger korrekt. • Kontroller papirtypen og papirkvaliteten. Både høj temperatur og fugt kan få papir til at krølle. Se ”Valg af udskriftsmedier” på side 25. • Vend papirstakken i bakken. Prøv også at vende papiret 180° i bakken. Folder eller bukninger • Kontroller, at papiret ligger korrekt. • Kontroller papirtypen og papirkvaliteten. Se ”Valg af udskriftsmedier” på side 25. • Vend papirstakken i bakken. Prøv også at vende papiret 180° i bakken. Bagsiden af udskrifterne er snavset Kontroller, at tonerpatronen ikke lækker. Rengør printeren indvendigt. Se ”Indvendig rengøring af maskinen” på side 57. TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER Helt farvede eller helt sorte sider • Tonerpatronen er muligvis ikke installeret korrekt. Tag patronen ud, og sæt den i igen. • Tonerpatronen er muligvis defekt og skal udskiftes. Tag tonerpatronen ud, og sæt en ny i. Se ”Udskiftning af tonerpatronen” på side 60. • Maskinen skal muligvis repareres. Kontakt en servicetekniker. Løs toner • Rengør printeren indvendigt. Se ”Indvendig rengøring af maskinen” på side 57. • Kontroller papirtypen og papirkvaliteten. Se ”Valg af udskriftsmedier” på side 25. • Tag tonerpatronen ud, og sæt en ny i. Se ”Udskiftning af tonerpatronen” på side 60. • Hvis problemet fortsætter, skal maskinen muligvis repareres. Kontakt en servicetekniker. Tegnhuller Blanke områder i tegnene er utrykte områder inde i dele af tegn, der burde være helt sorte: • Hvis du bruger transparenter, kan du forsøge med en anden type transparent. På grund af transparentens sammensætning, er det normalt med nogle blanke områder i tegnene. • Måske udskriver du på den forkerte side af arket. Tag papiret ud, og vend det om. • Papiret overholder muligvis ikke papirspecifikationerne. Se ”Valg af udskriftsmedier” på side 25. Vandrette striber Hvis der opstår vandrette parallelle striber eller udtværinger: • Tonerpatronen kan være installeret forkert. Tag patronen ud, og sæt den i igen. • Tonerpatronen kan være defekt. Tag tonerpatronen ud, og sæt en ny i. Se ”Udskiftning af tonerpatronen” på side 60. • Hvis problemet fortsætter, skal maskinen muligvis repareres. Kontakt en servicetekniker. Krøl Hvis det udskrevne papir er krøllet, eller papiret ikke indføres i maskinen: • Vend papirstakken i bakken. Prøv også at vende papiret 180° i bakken. • Skift printerindstilling, og forsøg igen. Gå til printeregenskaber, klik på fanen Paper, og angiv typen til Tyndt papir. Yderligere oplysninger finder du i Software section. TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER A A AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCcFejlfinding | 79 Kopieringsproblemer Et ukendt billede vises gentagne gange på de næste par ark, eller der forekommer løs toner, lys udskrift eller forurening. Din printer anvendes sandsynligvis ved en højde på 1.000 m eller derover. Den store højde kan påvirke udskriftkvaliteten, f.eks. i form af løs toner eller lyse udskrifter. Du kan vælge denne indstilling via Start → Programs → DELL → DELL Printers → navnet på din printerdriver → Printer Settings Utility. Se ”Højdejustering” på side 20. TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER Kopierne er for lyse eller for mørke. Brug Mørkhed ( ) til at gøre baggrunden på kopierne mørkere eller lysere. Der forekommer udtværinger, striber, mærker eller pletter på kopierne. • Hvis der er fejl på originalen, skal du trykke på Mørkhed ( ) for at gøre baggrunden på kopierne lysere. • Hvis der ikke er nogen fejl på originalen, skal du rengøre scannerenheden. Se ”Rengøring af scannerenheden” på side 59. Kopiens indhold er skævt. • Sørg for, at originalen vender tryksiden nedad på scannerglaspladen eller tryksiden opad i DADF’en. • Kontroller, at kopipapiret er lagt korrekt i papirbakken. Der udskrives blanke sider. Sørg for, at originalen vender tryksiden nedad på scannerglaspladen eller tryksiden opad i DADF’en. Trykket tværes nemt af kopien. • Udskift papiret i papirbakken med papir fra en ny pakke. • I områder med høj luftfugtighed bør papiret ikke efterlades i maskinen i længere perioder. Der opstår hyppige papirstop. • Luft papirstakken, og vend den i bakken. Udskift papiret i bakken med en frisk forsyning. Juster papirstyrene, hvis det er nødvendigt. • Kontroller, at papiret har den rigtige vægt. Det anbefalede er 75 g/m2 kontraktpapir. • Undersøg maskinen for kopipapir eller papirstykker, efter du har afhjulpet et papirstop. Tonerpatronen udskriver færre kopier end forventet, før den løber tør for toner. • Originalerne indeholder muligvis billeder, farvede felter eller tykke streger. Originalerne kan f.eks. være formularer, nyhedsbreve, bøger eller andre dokumenter, der bruger mere toner. • Maskinen tændes og slukkes muligvis ofte. • Scannerlåget er muligvis åbent, mens der kopieres.80 | Fejlfinding Scanningsproblemer Faxproblemer TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER Scanneren fungerer ikke. • Sørg for at anbringe den original, du vil scanne, med tryksiden nedad på scannerglaspladen eller med tryksiden opad i DADF. • Der er muligvis ikke tilstrækkelig hukommelse til at behandle det dokument, du vil scanne. Prøv forscanningsfunktionen for at se, om den virker. Prøv at reducere scanningens opløsningsgrad. • Kontroller, at USB-kablet er tilsluttet korrekt. • Kontroller, at USB-kablet ikke er defekt. Udskift kablet med et, du ved er i orden. Udskift kablet, hvis det er nødvendigt. • Kontroller, at scanneren er konfigureret korrekt. Kontroller scanningsindstillingen i SmarThru-konfigurationen eller det program, du vil bruge, for at sikre dig, at scannerjobbet sendes til den rigtige port. Enheden scanner meget langsomt. • Kontroller, om maskinen udskriver de data, den modtager. Hvis dette er tilfældet, kan du scanne dokumentet, når de modtagne data er udskrevet. • Grafik scannes langsommere end tekst. • Kommunikationshastigheden bliver langsommere, når maskinen scanner, pga. den store mængde hukommelse, der er nødvendig for at analysere og gengive et scannet billede eller en scannet tekst. Indstil computeren til ECP-printertilstand ved hjælp af BIOS-indstillingerne. Det vil hjælpe med til at øge hastigheden. Hvis du ønsker oplysninger om, hvordan du indstiller BIOS, kan du se i brugerhåndbogen til computeren. Følgende meddelelse vises på computerskærmen: • ”Enheden kan ikke indstilles til den hardwaretilstand, som du ønsker.” • ”Port bruges af et andet program.” • ”Port deaktiveret.” • ”Scanner modtager eller udskriver data. Prøv igen efter det aktuelle job.” • ”Ugyldig handle.” • ”Scanning mislykkedes.” • Der kan være et kopieringsjob eller udskriftsjob i gang. Forsøg jobbet igen, når det igangværende job er færdigt. • Den valgte port anvendes i øjeblikket. Genstart computeren, og prøv igen. • Printerkablet er muligvis ikke tilsluttet korrekt, eller strømtilførslen kan være afbrudt. • Scannerdriveren er ikke installeret, eller driftsmiljøet er ikke konfigureret korrekt. • Kontroller, at maskinen er korrekt tilsluttet, og at der er tændt for strømmen, og genstart derefter computeren. • USB-kablet er muligvis ikke tilsluttet korrekt, eller strømtilførslen kan være afbrudt. TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER Maskinen virker ikke, displayet lyser ikke, og knapperne fungerer ikke. • Træk netledningen ud og sæt den i igen. • Find ud af, om der er strøm i stikkontakten. Der høres ingen ringetone. • Kontroller, at telefonledningen er tilsluttet korrekt. • Kontroller, at telefonstikket i væggen fungerer, ved at tilslutte en anden telefon. De tal, der er lagret i hukommelsen, ringer ikke til det korrekte nummer. Sørg for, at tallene i er gemt korrekt i hukommelsen. Udskriv en liste for Telefonbogen. Se ”Udskrivning af adressekartoteket” på side 52. Originalen bliver ikke ført ind i maskinen. • Kontroller, at papiret ikke er krøllet, og at det er korrekt ilagt. Kontroller, om originalen har den rigtige størrelse og ikke er for tyk eller for tynd. • Sørg for, at DADF’en er lukket helt. • DADF-gummipuden skal evt. udskiftes. Se ”Udskiftning af DADF gummipuden” på side 63. Faxer modtages ikke automatisk. • Modtagetilstanden skal indstilles til Fax. • Der skal være papir i papirbakken. • Kontroller, om der vises fejlmeddelelser i displayet. Hvis der er nogen, skal du afhjælpe problemet. Maskinen sender ikke. • Kontroller, at der er en original i DADF’en eller på scannerglasset. • Sending bør blive vist i displayet. • Kontroller, om den faxmaskine, du sender til, kan modtage din fax. Indgående faxer har blanke områder eller kvaliteten er dårlig. • Den maskine, der sender faxen, kan være defekt. • Støj på telefonlinjen kan medføre linjefejl. • Kontroller maskinen ved at tage en kopi. • Tonerpatronen kan være tom. Udskift tonerpatronen. Se ”Udskiftning af tonerpatronen” på side 60. Nogle af ordene på en modtaget fax er strukket ud. Den maskine, der sendte faxen, havde et midlertidigt dokumentstop. Der er striber på de originaler, du sender. Undersøg scannerenheden for pletter, og gør den ren. Se ”Rengøring af scannerenheden” på side 59. Maskinen ringer op til et nummer, men det lykkes ikke at oprette forbindelse med den anden faxmaskine. Den anden faxmaskine kan være slukket, mangle papir eller være ude af stand til at besvare de opkald, den modtager. Tal med den person, der betjener den anden maskine, og bed vedkommende om at afhjælpe problemet.Fejlfinding | 81 Almindelige PostScript-problemer De følgende situationer er PS-sprogspecifikke og kan forekomme, når der anvendes flere forskellige printersprog. Almindelige Windows-problemer Faxer gemmes ikke i hukommelsen. Der er muligvis ikke tilstrækkelig hukommelse til at gemme faxen. Hvis der vises en Memory Full-meddelelse i displayet, skal du slette de faxer, som du ikke længere har brug for, fra hukommelsen og derefter prøve at gemme faxen igen. Der opstår blanke områder i bunden af hver side, eller på andre sider, med en smal stribe tekst foroven. Du har muligvis valgt den forkerte papirindstilling i opsætningen af brugerindstillingerne. Se side 25, hvis du ønsker oplysninger om papirindstillinger. Hvis du vil have udskrevet en meddelelse eller have den vist på skærmen, når der opstår PostScript-fejl, skal du åbne vinduet Udskriftsindstillinger og klikke på den ønskede indstilling ud for området med PostScript-fejl. PROBLEM MULIG ÅRSAG LØSNING PostScript-filen kan ikke udskrives. PostScriptdriveren er muligvis ikke installeret korrekt. • Installer PostScript-driveren. Se Software section. • Udskriv en konfigurationsside, og kontroller, at PSversionen er tilgængelig til udskrivning. • Kontakt en servicerepræsentant, hvis problemet fortsætter. Meddelelsen ”Grænsekontrolf ejl” vises. Udskriftsjobbet er for komplekst. Du er muligvis nødt til at reducere sidens kompleksitet eller installere mere hukommelse. Der udskrives en PostScriptfejlside. Udskriftsjobbet er muligvis ikke PostScript. Kontroller, at udskriftsjobbet er et PostScript-job. Kontroller, om programmet forventede, at der blev sendt en installationsfil eller en PostScript-headerfil til maskinen. Den valgfri bakke er ikke valgt i driveren. Printerdriveren er ikke konfigureret til at genkende den valgfri bakke. Åben PostScriptdriveregenskaberne, vælg fanen Device Settings, og angiv indstillingen Tray i afsnittet Installable Options til Installed. TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER Når du udskriver et dokument i Macintosh med Acrobat Reader 6.0 eller nyere, udskrives farverne ikke korrekt. Printerdriverens indstilling for opløsning stemmer muligvis ikke overens med indstillingen i Acrobat Reader. Sørg for, at opløsningsindstillingen i printerdriveren stemmer overens med indstillingen i Acrobat Reader. TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER Meddelelsen ”Filen er i brug” vises under installationen. Afslut alle programmer. Fjern alle programmer i startgruppen, og genstart Windows. Geninstaller printerdriveren. Meddelelserne ”Generel beskyttelsesfejl”, ”Undtagelse OE”, ”Spool32” eller ”Ugyldig handling” vises. Luk alle andre programmer, og genstart Windows. Meddelelserne ”Kan ikke udskrive”, ”Der er opstået en printertimeout-fejl” vises. Disse meddelelser kan blive vist under udskrivningen. Vent, indtil maskinen er færdig med at udskrive. Hvis denne meddelelse vises i klar-tilstanden, når udskrivningen er færdig, skal du kontrollere forbindelsen, og/eller om der er opstået en fejl. Du finder oplysninger om fejlmeddelelser i Windows i den dokumentation til Microsoft Windows, der fulgte med din pc. PROBLEM MULIG ÅRSAG LØSNING82 | Fejlfinding Almindelige Linux-problemer TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER Maskinen udskriver ikke. • Kontroller, om printerdriveren er installeret på systemet. Åbn Unified Driver configurator og skift til fanen Printers i vinduet Printers configuration for at få vist listen over tilgængelige printere. Kontroller, at maskinen vises på listen. Hvis den ikke gør, skal du starte guiden Add new printer for at konfigurere enheden. • Kontroller, om printeren er startet. Åbn Printers configuration, og marker maskinen på listen over printere. Læs beskrivelsen i ruden Selected printer. Hvis status indeholder strengen ”(stopped)”, skal du trykke på knappen Start. Herefter burde printeren fungere som normalt. Statusangivelsen ”stopped” kan blive aktiveret, når der opstår visse problemer med udskrivningen. Dette kan f.eks. være et forsøg på at udskrive et dokument, mens porten bruges af et scannerprogram. • Kontroller, at porten ikke er optaget. Da funktionelle komponenter i MFP (printer og scanner) deler den samme I/Ogrænseflade (MFP-port), er det muligt, at der opstår en situation, hvor forskellige ”bruger”- programmer samtidigt forsøger at få adgang til den samme port. Hvis du vil undgå konflikter, skal de kun have tilladelse til at få kontrol over enheden en ad gangen. Den anden ”bruger” vil få meddelelsen ”device busy”. Du bør åbne Ports Configuration og markere den port, der er tildelt printeren. I ruden Selected port kan du se, om porten er optaget af et andet program. Hvis det er tilfældet, skal du vente til det aktuelle job er afsluttet, eller du skal klikke på knappen Release port, hvis du er sikker på, at den aktuelle ports ejer ikke fungerer korrekt. • Kontroller, om programmet har en specialindstilling for udskrivning som f.eks. ”-oraw”. Hvis der står ”-oraw” i kommandolinjeparameteren, skal du fjerne den, før der kan udskrives korrekt. For Gimp Front-end skal du vælge ”print” -> ”Setup printer” og redigere kommandolinjeparameteren på kommandolinjen. • Den CUPS-version (Common Unix Printing System), der distribueres med SuSE Linux 9.2 (cups-1.1.21), har et problem med IPP-udskrivning (Internet Printing Protocol). Brug socketudskrivning i stedet for IPP, eller installer en nyere version af CUPS (cups-1.1.22 eller nyere). Visse farver udskrives helt sorte. Dette er en kendt fejl i Ghostscript (indtil GNU Ghostscript version 7.05), hvor grundfarverummet i dokumentet er et indekseret farverum, der konverteres via CIEfarverum. Da PostScript benytter CIE-farverum som farvematchningssystem, bør du opdatere Ghostscript på dit system til mindst GNU Ghostscript version 7.06 eller nyere. Du kan finde de seneste versioner af Ghostscript på www.ghostscript.com. Nogle farvebilleder udskrives i uventede farver. Dette er en kendt fejl i Ghostscript (indtil GNU Ghostscript version 7.xx), hvor grundfarverummet i dokumentet er et indekseret RGB-farverum, der konverteres via CIE-farverum. Da PostScript benytter CIEfarverum som farvematchningssystem, bør du opdatere Ghostscript på dit system til mindst GNU Ghostscript version 8.xx eller nyere. Du kan finde de seneste versioner af Ghostscript på www.ghostscript.com. Maskinen udskriver ikke hele sider. Det er et kendt problem, der opstår, når der bruges en farveprinter til version 8.51 eller ældre af Ghostscript, 64-bit Linux OS, og det rapporteres til bugs.ghostscript.com som Ghostscript Bug 688252. Problemet er løst i AFPL Ghostscript v. 8.52 eller nyere. Hent den nyeste version af AFPL Ghostscript fra http://sourceforge.net/projects/ ghostscript/, og installer den, så problemet bliver løst. Jeg kan ikke scanne via Gimp Front-end. Kontroller, om Gimp Front-end har ”Xsane: Device dialog” i menuen ”Acquire”. Hvis det ikke er tilfældet, skal du installere plug-in’en Xsane til Gimp på computeren. Du kan finde plug-in-pakken Xsane til Gimp på Linux distributions-cd’en eller på Gimps hjemmeside. Hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger, henvises du til distributions-cd’en med Hjælp til Linux eller programmet Gimp Front-end. Hvis du ønsker at bruge en anden type scannerprogram, henvises du til Hjælp i programmet. Jeg får fejlen ”Cannot open port device file”, når jeg udskriver et dokument. Undgå at ændre parametre for udskriftsjobbet (f.eks. via LPR-brugergrænsefladen) under et igangværende udskriftsjob. Kendte versioner af CUPS-server afbryder udskriftsjobbet, hver gang udskriftsindstillingerne ændres, og forsøger derefter at starte jobbet igen fra starten. Da Unified Linux Driver låser porten under udskrivning, vil den bratte afslutning af driveren medføre, at porten forbliver låst og dermed utilgængelig for efterfølgende udskriftsjob. Hvis denne situation opstod, skal du prøve at frigøre porten. TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGERFejlfinding | 83 Maskinen vises ikke på scannerlisten. • Kontroller, om maskinen er tilsluttet computeren. Sørg for, at den er tilsluttet korrekt via USB-porten, og at den er tændt. • Kontroller, om scannerdriveren til maskinen er installeret i systemet. Åbn Unified Driver configurator, skift til Scanners configuration, og tryk derefter på Drivers. Kontroller, at der vises en driver med et navn, der svarer til maskinen navn, i vinduet. Kontroller, at porten ikke er optaget. Da funktionelle komponenter i MFP (printer og scanner) deler den samme I/O-grænseflade (MFP-port), er det muligt, at der opstår en situation, hvor forskellige ”bruger”-programmer samtidigt forsøger at få adgang til den samme port. Hvis du vil undgå konflikter, skal de kun have tilladelse til at få kontrol over enheden en ad gangen. Den anden ”bruger” vil få meddelelsen ”device busy”. Dette kan normalt ske under starten af en scanningsprocedure. Der vises en relevant meddelelsesboks. • Hvis du vil finde årsagen til problemet, skal du åbne portkonfigurationen og vælge den port, der er tildelt din scanner. port symbol / dev/mfp0 svarer til den LP:0 -betegnelse, der vises i scannerens indstillinger, /dev/mfp1 relaterer til LP:1 og så videre. USB-porte starter ved /dev/mfp4, så en scanner på USB:0 svarer til /dev/mfp4 osv. I ruden Selected port kan du se, om porten er optaget af et andet program. Hvis det er tilfældet, skal du vente, til det aktuelle job er afsluttet, eller du skal trykke på knappen Release port, hvis du er sikker på, at den aktuelle ports ejer ikke fungerer korrekt. TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER Maskinen scanner ikke. • Kontroller, at der er lagt et dokument i maskinen. • Kontroller, om maskinen er tilsluttet computeren. Sørg for, at den er tilsluttet korrekt, hvis der rapporteres om I/O-fejl under scanningen. • Kontroller, at porten ikke er optaget. Da funktionelle komponenter i MFP (printer og scanner) deler den samme I/O-grænseflade (MFP-port), er det muligt, at der opstår en situation, hvor forskellige ”bruger”- programmer samtidigt forsøger at få adgang til den samme port. Hvis du vil undgå konflikter, skal de kun have tilladelse til at få kontrol over enheden en ad gangen. Den anden ”bruger” vil få meddelelsen ”device busy”. Dette kan normalt ske under starten af en scanningsprocedure. Der vises en relevant meddelelsesboks. Hvis du vil identificere kilden til problemet, skal du åbne MFP Ports Configuration og markere den port, der er tildelt scanneren. Portsymbolet /dev/mfp0 svarer til den LP:0- betegnelse, der vises i scannerens indstillinger, /dev/mfp1 svarer til LP:1 osv. USB-porte starter ved /dev/mfp4, så en scanner på USB:0 svarer til /dev/mfp4 osv. I ruden Selected port kan du se, om porten er optaget af et andet program. Hvis det er tilfældet, skal du vente, til det aktuelle job er afsluttet, eller du skal trykke på knappen Release port, hvis du er sikker på, at den aktuelle ports ejer ikke fungerer korrekt. Du finder oplysninger om fejlmeddelelser i Linux i den brugerhåndbog til Linux, der fulgte med din pc. TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER84 | Fejlfinding Almindelige Macintosh-problemer TILSTAND FORSLAG TIL MULIGE LØSNINGER Printeren udskriver ikke PDF-filen korrekt. Visse dele af grafik, tekst eller illustrationer mangler. Inkompatibilitet mellem PDF-filen og Acrobat-produktern: Du kan muligvis løse dette problem ved at udskrive PDF-filen som et billede. Vælg Udskriv som billede fra Acrobatudskrivningsmuligheder. Det tager længere tid at udskrive, når du udskriver en PDF-fil som et billede. Dokumentet er blevet udskrevet, men udskriftsjobbet er ikke forsvundet fra printerspooleren i Mac OS 10.3.2. Opdater Mac OS til OS 10.3.3 eller nyere. Nogle bogstaver vises ikke som normalt under udskrivning af forsiden. Dette problem skyldes, at Mac OS ikke kan oprette skrifttypen under udskrivning af forsiden. Det engelske alfabet og engelske tal vises som normalt på forsiden. Du finder oplysninger om Mac OS-fejlmeddelelser i den brugerhåndbog til Mac OS, der fulgte med din pc.Bestilling af forbrugsstoffer og ekstraudstyr | 85 bestilling af forbrugsstoffer og ekstraudstyr Kapitlet indeholder oplysninger om køb af patroner og ekstraudstyr til maskinen. Kapitlet omfatter: • Forbrugsstoffer • Ekstraudstyr • Sådan køber du FORBRUGSSTOFFER Når toneren er tom, kan du bestille følgende typer tonerpatroner til maskinen: EKSTRAUDSTYR Du kan købe og installere tilbehør, så maskinens ydeevne og kapacitet forbedres. SÅDAN KØBER DU Når du vil bestille Dell-godkendte forbrugsstoffer eller ekstraudstyr, skal du kontakte din lokale Dell-forhandler eller den forhandler, hvor du har købt maskinen. Du kan også besøge vores websted www.dell.com eller support.dell.com og vælge land/område for at få oplysninger om kontakt til teknisk support. Ekstraudstyr og -funktioner varierer fra land til land. Du kan forhøre dig hos din sælger vedr. tilgængeligheden af den pågældende del i dit land. TYPE GENNEMSNITSYDELSE a a. Erklæret ydelsesværdi i henhold til ISO/IEC 19798. ARTIKELNUMMER Tonerpatron med standardydelse • Gennemsnitlig ydelse ved kontinuert brug for sort tonerpatron: 2.500 standardsider (sort) • Gennemsnitlig ydelse ved kontinuert brug for farvetonerpatron: 2.000 standardsider (gul/ magenta/cyan) T272J (Black) P586K (Cyan) K756K (Magenta) M802K (Yellow) Høj ydelse tonerpatron • Gennemsnitlig ydelse ved kontinuert brug for sort tonerpatron: 5.500 standardsider (sort) • Gennemsnitlig ydelse ved kontinuert brug for farvetonerpatron: 5.000 standardsider (gul/ magenta/cyan) R717J (Black) P587K (Cyan) K757K (Magenta) M803K (Yellow) Papiroverførsel sbælte Ca. 50.000 Når overførselsbæltet er slidt ned, skal det udskiftes. Du vil muligvis få besked, når det er tid, via den bælterelaterede meddelelse på displayet. U265J Når du køber en ny tonerpatron eller forbrugsstoffer, skal du købe dem i det samme land, hvor du har købt maskinen. Ellers vil tonerpatronen eller forbrugsstofferne ikke være kompatible med maskinen, da konfigurationen for tonerpatronen eller forbrugsstofferne varierer alt afhængigt af landet. EKSTRAUDSTYR BESKRIVELSE ARTIKELNUMMER Hukommelsesmodul Udvider maskinens hukommelseskapacitet. KR039: 256 MB Ekstra bakke 2 Hvis du ofte har problemer med papirtilførslen, kan du bruge en ekstra bakke til 500 ark. Du kan udskrive dokumenter i forskellige størrelser og på forskellige udskriftsmaterialer. P955J Harddisk Gør det muligt at forbedre maskinens funktioner og udskrive på forskellige måder. N573K Maskinen har muligvis to hukommelsesstik med et forudinstalleret hukommelsesmodul i det ene stik. Når du udvider hukommelseskapaciteten, kan du tilføje et hukommelsesmodul i det ledige stik i overensstemmelse med tabellen ovenfor. Det anbefales kraftigt, at du kun indsætter et hukommelsesmodul i det ledige hukommelsesstik uden at fjerne det forudinstallerede hukommelsesmodul. Hvis maskinen har en hukommelseskapacitet på 128 MB, og du tilføjer 256 MB, bliver hukommelseskapaciteten forøget til 384 MB.86 | Installation af tilbehør installation af tilbehør Maskinen er en komplet model, der er optimeret til at klare de fleste udskrivningsopgaver. Men i anerkendelse af, at kravene varierer meget fra bruger til bruger, fremstiller Dell en række forskelligt tilbehør, der giver maskinen endnu større kapacitet. Kapitlet omfatter: • Der skal tages visse forholdsregler, når der installeres tilbehør • Aktivering af det tilføjede tilbehør i printeregenskaber • Opgradering af et hukommelsesmodul • Brug af harddisken DER SKAL TAGES VISSE FORHOLDSREGLER, NÅR DER INSTALLERES TILBEHØR • Tag netledningen ud Fjern aldrig kontrolkortdækslet, når strømmen er tilsluttet. Tag altid strømkablet ud, inden du installerer eller fjerner NOGET ekstraudstyr og tilbehør, uanset om det skal installeres uden på eller inden i maskinen. Så undgår du at få stød. • Aflad statisk elektricitet Kontrolkortet og internt tilbehør (netværkskort eller hukommelsesmodul) er følsomme over for statisk elektricitet. Inden du installerer eller fjerner internt tilbehør, skal du derfor sørge for, at du ikke selv giver stød. Du kan aflade statisk elektricitet ved at røre ved metal, f.eks. metalbagpladen på en enhed, der er sat i en stikkontakt med jordforbindelse. Hvis du går rundt, før du afslutter installationen, skal du gentage denne procedure for at aflade eventuel statisk elektricitet igen. • Efter installation af tilbehør som f.eks. en ekstra bakke skal brugere af PS-driveren indstille bakken til brug. Gå til PS-printeregenskaberne, og aktiver det tilføjede tilbehør. AKTIVERING AF DET TILFØJEDE TILBEHØR I PRINTEREGENSKABER Når du har installeret tilbehør, skal du vælge det i printeregenskaberne i printerdriveren, før du kan bruge det. 1. Installer driveren (se ”Installation af softwaren” på side 19). 2. Klik på menuen Start i Windows. • I Windows 2000 kan du vælge Indstillinger → Printere. • I Windows XP/2003 skal du vælge Printere og faxenheder. • I Windows Vista/2008 skal du vælge Kontrolpanel → Hardware og lyd → Printere. 3. Vælg maskinens driver, og højreklik for at åbne Egenskaber. • Til PS-driveren skal du vælge PS-driver og højreklikke for at åbne Egenskaber. 4. Vælg Enhedsindstillinger i egenskaberne for printerdriveren. • Vælg Enhedsindstillinger for PS-driveren. 5. Angiv de nødvendige indstillinger i egenskaberne for printerdriveren. • Vælg afsnittet Installerbare komponenter for PS-driver, og angiv de nødvendige indstillinger. 6. Klik på OK. OPGRADERING AF ET HUKOMMELSESMODUL Maskinen har et ekstra stik til et DIMM-hukommelsesmodul (dual in-line memory module). Du kan bruge dette modulstik til at installere ekstra hukommelse. Maskinen har to hukommelsesstik med et hukommelsesmodul, der er præinstalleret fra fabrikken, i det ene stik. Når du udvider hukommelseskapaciteten, kan du tilføje et hukommelsesmodul til det ledige hukommelsesstik. Det anbefales kraftigt, at du kun udvider med et hukommelsesmodul i det ledige hukommelsesstik uden at fjerne det præinstallerede hukommelsesmodul. Hvis maskinen har en hukommelseskapacitet på 128 MB, og du tilføjer 256 MB, bliver hukommelseskapaciteten forøget til 384 MB. Der findes oplysninger til bestilling af ekstra hukommelsesmoduler (se ”Bestilling af forbrugsstoffer og ekstraudstyr” på side 85). Installation af et hukommelsesmodul 1. Sluk for maskinen, og træk alle kabler ud. 2. Løsn skruen, og fjern bagdækslet. Batteriet inden i maskinen, er en servicekomponent. Forsøg ikke at udskifte det selv. Der er risiko for eksplosion, hvis batteriet udskiftes med en ukorrekt type batteri. Kasser brugte batterier i henhold til instruktionerne.Installation af tilbehør | 87 3. Løsn skruen, og løft dækslet en smule opad, og træk dækslet mod højre. 4. Tag det nye hukommelseskort ud af plastikemballagen. 5. Tag fat om hukommelseskortet i kanterne, og ret det ind imod hukommelsesstikket med en vinkel på ca. 30 grader. Kontroller, at hakkerne på modulet passer til stikkets riller. 6. Skub hukommelseskortet ind i stikket, indtil du hører et ”klik”. 7. Sæt dækslet til kontrolkort på igen, og fastgør dækslet med skruen. 8. Udskift bagdækslet, og fastgør dækslet med skruen. 9. Sæt netledningen og printerkablet i maskinen igen, og tænd for den. 10. Hvis du bruger the PS-driveren, skal du aktivere den ekstra hukommelse i egenskaberne for PS-driveren. Se ”Aktivering af det tilføjede tilbehør i printeregenskaber” på side 86. BRUG AF HARDDISKEN Installation af harddisken gør det muligt at sende data fra din computer til udskrivningskøen på printerens harddisk. Dette nedsætter computerens arbejdsbyrde. Du kan også benytte forskellige funktioner som f.eks. at gemme et job på harddisken, køre stavekontrol på et job og udskrive private dokumenter. Installation af harddisken Bestillingsoplysninger, se ”Ekstraudstyr” på side 85 Gennemse forholdsreglerne på side 86. 1. Sluk for maskinen, og træk alle kabler ud. 2. Løsn skruen, og fjern bagdækslet. 1 Dæksel til kontrolkort Hvis du vil fjerne et eksisterende hukommelsesmodul, skal du skubbe de to klammer i enderne af modulet udad. De indhak og riller, der er vist ovenfor, svarer muligvis ikke nøjagtigt til dem på modulet og på maskinen. Brug ikke vold, når du håndterer hukommelsesmodulet, da det i så fald kan tage skade. Hvis hukommelsesmodulet ikke lader til at passe til stikket, skal du forsigtigt gentage forrige procedure. Hvis du vil frigøre hukommelsesmodulet, skal du trække de to tapper på siderne udad, hvorefter modulet skubbes ud. 88 | Installation af tilbehør 3. Åben kontrolkortdækslet. Løsn skruen, og løft dækslet en smule opad, og træk dækslet mod højre. 4. Hold forbindelsesstikket på harddisken, så det flugter med stikket på kontrolkortet. Skub harddisken ind, indtil den klikker på plads. . 5. Stram de skruer, som blev leveret sammen med den nye harddisk. 6. Sæt dækslet til kontrolkort på igen, og fastgør dækslet med skruen. 7. Udskift bagdækslet, og fastgør dækslet med skruen. 8. Sæt netledningen og printerkablet i maskinen igen, og tænd for den. 9. Udskriv en konfigurationsside fra kontrolpanelet for at kontrollere, om harddisken er korrekt installeret. Se ”Udskrivning af rapporter” på side 56. 10. Hvis du bruger PS-driveren, skal du aktivere den tilføjede harddisk i egenskaberne for PS-driveren. Se ”Aktivering af det tilføjede tilbehør i printeregenskaber” på side 86. Udskrivning med harddisken (ekstraudstyr) Når du har installeret den valgfrie harddisk, kan du benytte avancerede udskrivningsfunktioner som f.eks. at gemme eller spoole et udskriftsjob, læse korrektur på et job og udskrive et privat job i vinduet for printeregenskaber. Når du har gemt filer på harddisken, kan du let udskrive de gemte filer igen eller slette dem ved hjælp af printerens kontrolpanel. Lagring af et job Du kan gemme job på den installerede harddisk. 1. Åbn den fil, du vil gemme. 2. Vælg Print i menuen File. Vinduet Udskriv vises. 3. Klik på Properties. Hvis du ser Setup, Print eller Options, skal du klikke på knappen i stedte for. 4. Klik på fanen Other Options, og klik derefter på Job type. 5. Vælg den ønskede udskrivningstilstand i rullemenuen. • Normal: Udskriver i normaltilstand. • Proof: Udskriver den første fil, og efter en pause udskrives næste fil. • Confidentical: Gemmer filerne og sikrer dem med en adgangskode. • Store: Gemmer filen på harddisken. • Spool: Spooler filen på harddisken og udskriver den fra harddiskkøen. • Delay: Udskriver filen på et angivet tidspunkt. 6. Indtast brugernavn og filnavn. 7. Klik på OK, indtil vinduet Udskriv vises. 8. Klik på OK eller Print for at starte udskrivningen. Udskrivning af et gemt job Du kan udskrive job, der i øjeblikket er gemt på harddisken. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Job Manage. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Store Job vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede brugernavn og filnavn vises, og tryk derefter på OK. 5. Hvis den valgte fil er et fortroligt udskriftsjob, skal du indtaste den angivne firecifrede adgangskode. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at indtaste det første ciffer, og tryk derefter på OK. Markøren flytter automatisk til pladsen for næste ciffer. Indtast andet, tredje og fjerde ciffer på samme måde. 6. Når Print vises, skal du trykke på OK. Hvis du indtaster en forkert adgangskode, vises Invalid Password. Indtast den korrekte adgangskode. 7. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede antal kopier vises, og tryk derefter på OK. 8. Tryk på OK. Udskrivningen starter. Sletning af et lagret job Du kan slette job, der i øjeblikket er gemt på harddisken. 1 Dæksel til kontrolkortInstallation af tilbehør | 89 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Job Manage. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Store Job vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede brugernavn og filnavn vises, og tryk derefter på OK. 5. Hvis den valgte fil er et fortroligt udskriftsjob, skal du indtaste den angivne firecifrede adgangskode. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at indtaste det første ciffer, og tryk derefter på OK. Markøren flytter automatisk til pladsen for næste ciffer. Indtast andet, tredje og fjerde ciffer på samme måde. 6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Delete vises, og tryk på OK. Hvis du indtaster en forkert adgangskode, vises Invalid Password. Indtast den korrekte adgangskode. 7. Når Yes vises, skal du trykke på OK. Styring af køen over aktive job Alle udskrivningsjob, der venter på at blive udskrevet, optræder på listen Aktiv jobkø, i den rækkefølge som du har sendt dem til printeren. Du kan slette et job fra køen, før det udskrives, eller rykke et job op, så det udskrives tidligere. Sådan slettes en fil fra jobkøen: 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Job Manage. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Active Job vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede brugernavn og filnavn vises, og tryk derefter på OK. 5. Hvis den valgte fil er et fortroligt udskriftsjob, skal du indtaste den angivne firecifrede adgangskode. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at indtaste det første ciffer, og tryk derefter på OK. Markøren flytter automatisk til pladsen for næste ciffer. Indtast andet, tredje og fjerde ciffer på samme måde. 6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Cancel vises, og tryk på OK. Hvis du indtaster en forkert adgangskode, vises Invalid Password. Indtast den korrekte adgangskode. 7. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Yes vises, og tryk på OK. Sådan rykkes en fil op i jobkøen: Du kan vælge et job, der venter i køen over aktive job, og ændre dets udskrivningsrækkefølge, så det udskrives tidligere. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Job Manage. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Active Job vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede brugernavn og filnavn vises, og tryk derefter på OK. 5. Hvis den valgte fil er et fortroligt udskriftsjob, skal du indtaste den angivne firecifrede adgangskode. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at indtaste det første ciffer, og tryk derefter på OK. Markøren flytter automatisk til pladsen for næste ciffer. Indtast andet, tredje og fjerde ciffer på samme måde. 6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Promote vises, og tryk på OK. Hvis du indtaster en forkert adgangskode, vises Invalid Password. Indtast den korrekte adgangskode. Sådan udskrives en fil med det samme: Du kan udskrive et job, som er planlagt til at blive udskrevet på et bestemt tidspunkt, med det samme. Det aktuelle udskrivningsjob bliver stoppet, og det valgte job bliver udskrevet. Denne funktion er tilgængelig, hvis jobbet er planlagt til at blive udskrevet senere. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Job Manage. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Active Job vises, og tryk på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede brugernavn og filnavn vises, og tryk derefter på OK. 5. Hvis den valgte fil er et fortroligt udskriftsjob, skal du indtaste den angivne firecifrede adgangskode. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at indtaste det første ciffer, og tryk derefter på OK. Markøren flytter automatisk til pladsen for næste ciffer. Indtast andet, tredje og fjerde ciffer på samme måde. 6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Release vises, og tryk på OK. Denne valgmulighed vises kun, hvis du vælger et Delayudskrivningsjob. Se side 88. Hvis du indtaster en forkert adgangskode, vises Invalid Password. Indtast den korrekte adgangskode. Udskrivning ved brug af formularfilerne Du kan gemme op til 10 formularfiler på harddisken og udskrive dem sammen med et dokument. Du skal først oprette en formularfil ved hjælp af printerdriveren. Se Software section. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK. 2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Form Menu vises, og tryk på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede formular vises, og tryk på OK. • Off: Udskriver i normaltilstand. • Single Form: Udskriver alle sider ved hjælp af den første formular. • Double Form: Udskriver forsiden ved hjælp af den første formular og udskriver bagsiden hjælp af den anden formular. 4. Tryk på Tilbage ( ) for at vende tilbage til det øverste niveau i menuen. 5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Select Form vises, og tryk på OK. 6. Tryk på OK, når 1st Form vises. 7. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede formularfil vises, og tryk på OK. Hvis du vælger Double Form, skal du fortsætte til næste trin. 8. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil 2nd Form vises, og tryk på OK. 9. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil formularfilen for den anden formular vises, og tryk på OK. Filpolitik Du kan vælge en politik for generering af filnavne, inden du fortsætter med jobbet via harddisken. Hvis hukommelsen på harddisken allerede har det samme navn, kan du omdøbe eller overskrive den, når du indtaster et nyt filnavn. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil System Setup vises på nederste linje på skærmen, og tryk derefter på OK. 2. Tryk på venstre/højre piletast, indtil Job Manage vises, og tryk derefter på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre piletast, indtil File Policy vises, og tryk derefter på OK. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre piletast, indtil den ønskede jobindstilling vises, og tryk derefter på OK. • Rename: Hvis hukommelsen på harddisken allerede har det samme navn, når du indtaster et nyt filnavn, gemmes filen med et 90 | Installation af tilbehør andet navn, som programmeres automatisk. • Overwrite: Du kan indstille maskinen til at slette de forrige joboplysninger på harddisken, når du gemmer nye joboplysninger. 5. Tryk på OK. Sletter resterende billeddata ImageOverwrite er en sikkerhedsfunktion for kunder, der er bekymrede over uautoriseret adgang og kopiering af fortrolige eller private dokumenter. 1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil System Setup vises på nederste linje på skærmen, og tryk derefter på OK. 2. Tryk på venstre/højre piletast, indtil ImageOverwrite vises, og tryk derefter på OK. 3. Tryk på venstre/højre piletast, indtil den ønskede jobindstilling vises, og tryk derefter på OK. • Immediate: Alle resterende billeddata fra maskinen slettes med det samme, når et job er blevet behandlet. • On Demand: Denne funktion gør det muligt for en systemadministrator at slette alle ægte billeddata på harddisken efter behov, når funktionen er aktiveret. Alle eksisterende jobs slettes uanset deres status, og det vil ikke være muligt at sende flere jobs, mens overskrivningen foregår. 4. Tryk på venstre/højre piletast for at flytte til On eller Off for Immediate. Tryk på venstre/højre piletast for at flytte til Enable eller Disable for On Demand. 5. Tryk på OK. Hvis du har aktiveret On Demand, bekræfter maskinen, når overskrivningen begynder. Tryk på venstre/højre piletast for at vælge Yes eller No. Hvis du vælger Yes, On Demand begynder overskrivningen, så snart du vælger Yes. Hvis du vælger No, er denne funktion aktiveret.Specifikationer | 91 specifikationer Dette kapitel giver dig oplysninger om maskinens specifikationer, f.eks. forskellige funktioner. Kapitlet omfatter: • Generelle specifikationer • Printerspecifikationer • Specifikationer for scanner • Specifikationer for kopimaskine • Specifikationer for fax GENERELLE SPECIFIKATIONER PRINTERSPECIFIKATIONER Symbolet * angiver en valgfri funktion afhængigt af maskinen. PUNKT BESKRIVELSE DADF’ens kapacitet Op til 50 ark (75 g/m2 kontraktpapir) Dokumentstørrelse for DADF Bredde: 148 til 216 mm Længde: 148 til 356 mm Kapacitet for papirbakke • Bakke: 250 sider almindeligt papir (75 g/m2 kontraktpapir) • Universalbakke: 100 sider almindeligt papir (75 g/m2 kontraktpapir) • Valgfri bakke: 500 sider almindeligt papir (75 g/m2 kontraktpapir) Hvis du vil have yderligere oplysninger om papirkapaciteten, kan du se side 26. Udskriftskapacitet Udskriftsside nedad: 170 arks 75 g/m2 kontraktpapir Nominel effekt 110 - 127 V vekselstrøm eller 220 - 240 V vekselstrøm. Se etiketten på maskinen for at få oplysninger om den korrekte spænding, frekvens (hertz) og strømtype. Strømforbrug • Gennemsnitlig betjeningstilstand: Mindre end 580 W • Klar-tilstand: Mindre end 82 W • Strømsparetilstand: Mindre end 18 W • Slukket-tilstand: 0 W Støjniveau a • Klar-tilstand: Mindre end 32 dBA • Udskrivningstilstand: Mindre end 53 dBA • Kopieringstilstand: Mindre end 54 dBA Standardtidsrum fra strømsparetilstand til klartilstand 20 minutter Opstarttijd • Mindre end 49 sekunder De opstarttijd zal langer zijn naarmate er meer gegevens op de harde schijf staan Driftsmiljø Temperatur: 15 til 32,5 °C Fugtighed: 20 til 80 % relativ luftfugtighed Display 16 tegn x 2 linjer Levetid for tonerpatron b Sort Gennemsnitlig ydelse ved kontinuert brug for sort tonerpatron: 5.500 standardsider (Leveres med en 2.500 siders starttonerpatron). Farve (Gul/magenta/ cyan) Gennemsnitlig ydelse ved kontinuert brug for farve tonerpatron: 5.000 standardsider (Leveres med en 2.000 siders starttonerpatron). Papiroverførselsbælte Ca. 50.000 sider (A4, Letter) Hukommelse (kan udvides)* 128 MB (maks. 384 MB) Eksterne mål (B x D x H) 468 x 498 x 651 mm uden valgfri bakke Vægt (inklusive forbrugsstoffer) 36 kg Emballagens vægt Papir: 5,8 kg Plastik: 1,8 kg Driftscyklus Op til 65.000 sider Fikseringstemperatur 180 °C a. Lydtryksniveau, ISO 7779. b. Deklareret ydelse i henhold til ISO/IEC 19798. Antallet af sider kan påvirkes af driftsmiljø, udskrivningsinterval, medietype og -størrelse. PUNKT BESKRIVELSE Udskrivningsmetode Udskrivning med farvelaserstråle Udskrivningshastighed a Op til 20 sider pr. minut (A4), 21 sider pr. minut (Letter) Hastighed ved duplexudskrivning Op til 7 tryk pr. minut (A4, Letter) PUNKT BESKRIVELSE92 | Specifikationer SPECIFIKATIONER FOR SCANNER SPECIFIKATIONER FOR KOPIMASKINE Tid for første udskrift Sort-hvid Fra Klar: Mindre end 25 sekunder Fra koldstart: Mindre end 75 sekunder Farve Fra Klar: Mindre end 25 sekunder Fra koldstart: Mindre end 75 sekunder Udskriftsopløsning Højst 2.400 x 600 dpi effektivt output Printersprog SPL, PostScript 3, PCL5ce, PCL6 Kompatibilitet med operativsystemer b • Windows: 2000/XP/2003/2008/Vista • Linux: RedHat 8.0 ~ 9.0, Mandrake 9.2 ~ 10.1, SuSE 8.2 ~ 9.2 og Fedora Core 1 ~ 4 • Macintosh: Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.5 og Universal Mac Interface USB 2.0 med høj hastighed Ethernet 10/100 Base TX (integreret type) a. Denne afhænger af det anvendte operativsystem, computerens ydeevne, program, tilslutningsmetode, medietype, mediestørrelse og jobkompleksitet. b. Besøg www.dell.com, hvor du kan hente de seneste programversioner. PUNKT BESKRIVELSE Kompatibilitet TWAIN-standard/WIA-standard Scanningsmetode Farve CCD Opløsning a a. På grund af scanningsprogrammerne kan den maksimale opløsning variere. TWAINstandard/WIAstandard • Optisk: 600 x 1.200 dpi • Forbedret: 4.800 x 4.800 dpi Scan til USB 100, 200, 300 dpi Scan til e-mail 100, 200, 300 dpi Scan til PC 75, 150, 200, 300, 600 dpi Netværksscannin gsfilformat PDF, TIFF, JPEG b , BMP b.JPEG er ikke tilgængelig, når du vælger mono-tilstand for scanningsfarve. Effektiv scanningslængde • Scannerglasplade: 289 mm • DADF: 348 mm Effektiv scanningsbredde Maks. 208 mm Farvebitdybde • Internt: 36 bit • Eksternt: 24 bit Monobitdybde • 1 bit i sort/hvid-tilstand • 8 bit i gråtoneskala PUNKT BESKRIVELSE PUNKT BESKRIVELSE Kopieringshastighed a a. Kopieringshastigheden er baseret på ét dokument flere kopier. Op til 20 kopier pr. minut i A4, 21 kopier pr. minut i Letter Kopieringsopløsning Tekst • DADF: Op til 600 x 600 dpi • Scannerglasplade: Op til 600 x 600 dpi Tekst/Foto Op til 600 x 600 dpi Magasin Op til 600 x 600 dpi Foto • DADF: Op til 600 x 600 dpi • Scannerglasplade: Op til 1.200 x 1.200 dpi Zoomområde • DADP: 25 til 100 % • Scannerglasplade: 25 til 400 %Specifikationer | 93 SPECIFIKATIONER FOR FAX PUNKT BESKRIVELSE Kompatibilitet ITU-T G3 Anvendelig linje PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network) eller bag PABX Datakodning MH/MR/MMR/JBIG/JPEG Modemhastighed 33,6 Kbps Overførselshastighed Op til 3 sekunder/side a a. Standardopløsning, MMR (JBIG), maksimal modemhastighed, fase ”C” med ITU-T nr.1-diagram, overførsel fra hukommelse, ECM. Maksimal dokumentlængde 356 mm Opløsning Farve 200 x 200 dpi Sort • Standard: 203 x 98 dpi • Fin: 203 x 196 dpi • Superfin: 300 x 300 dpi (kun modtagelse) Hukommelse 4 MB (Ca. 200 sider) Halvtone 256 niveauer94 | pendiks Pendiks DELLS POLITIK FOR TEKNISK SUPPORT Teknisk support med teknikerassistance forudsætter kundens samarbejde og deltagelse i fejlfindingsprocessen og omfatter gendannelse af operativsystemet samt programmer og hardwaredrivere til den oprindelige standardkonfiguration, der blev leveret af Dell, samt verificering af, at printeren og al hardware, som er installeret af Dell, fungerer korrekt. Ud over denne tekniske support med teknikerassistance er der mulighed for teknisk onlinesupport fra Dell Support. Der kan muligvis købes yderligere tekniske supportløsninger. Dell yder begrænset teknisk support til printeren samt eventuelle programmer og eksterne enheder, der er installeret af Dell. Support til programmer og eksterne enheder fra tredjepart ydes af producenten, herunder programmer og eksterne enheder købt og/eller installeret via Software & Peripherals (DellWare), ReadyWare og Custom Factory Integration (CFI/DellPlus). KONTAKT TIL DELL Du kan få adgang til Dell Support på support.dell.com. Vælg din region på siden WELCOME TO DELL SUPPORT, og angiv de ønskede oplysninger for at åbne hjælpeværktøjer og oplysninger. Du kan kontakte Dell elektronisk på følgende adresser: • Internettet www.dell.com/ www.dell.com/ap/ (kun lande i Asien/Stillehavsområdet) www.dell.com/jp/ (kun Japan) www.euro.dell.com (kun Europa) www.dell.com/la/ (Latinamerika og Caribien) www.dell.ca (kun Canada) • Anonym FTP (File Transfer Protocol) ftp.dell.com Log på som bruger: anonym, og brug din e-mail-adresse som adgangskode. • Elektronisk supportservice mobile_support@us.dell.com support@us.dell.com la-techsupport@dell.com (kun Latinamerika og Caribien) apsupport@dell.com (kun lande i Asien/Stillehavsområdet) support.jp.dell.com (kun Japan) support.euro.dell.com (kun Europa) • Elektronisk tilbudsservice apmarketing@dell.com (kun lande i Asien/Stillehavsområdet) sale_canada@dell.com (kun Canada) GARANTI- OG RETURPOLITIK Dell Inc. (”Dell”) fremstiller hardwareprodukter af dele og komponenter, som er nye eller svarende til nye i overensstemmelse med den praksis, som er standard inden for branchen. Se Produktinformationsguiden, hvis du vil have oplysninger om Dells garanti for din printer.Ordliste | 95 ordliste ADF En automatisk dokumentføder (ADF) er en mekanisme, der automatisk indfører en papiroriginal, så maskinen kan scanne noget af papiret med det samme. AppleTalk AppleTalk er en samling varemærkebeskyttede protokoller, der er udviklet af Apple, Inc til computernetværk. Den var medtaget i den oprindelige Macintosh (1984) og er nu forladt af Apple til fordel for TCP/IP-netværk. Bitdybde En betegnelse i forbindelse med computergrafik der beskriver antallet af bit, der bruges til at repræsentere farven af en enkelt pixel i et bitmapbillede. En større farvedybde giver et større spektrum af klare farver. Når antallet af bit forøges, bliver antallet af mulige farver upraktisk stort til et farveskema. 1-bits farve kaldes normalt monokromt eller sort-hvid. BMP Et bitmapgrafikformat, der bruges internt af Microsoft Windowsgrafikundersystemet (GDI), og som normalt bruges som et filformat til enkle grafikfiler på denne platform. BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol. En netværksprotokol, som en netværksklient benytter til at hente en IP-adresse automatisk. Dette foregår normalt i bootstrapprocessen for en computer eller det operativsystem, der kører på den. BOOTP-serverne tildeler IP-adressen til hver klient fra en pulje med adresser. BOOTP gør det muligt for arbejdsstationscomputere uden harddisk at hente en IP-adresse, inden der indlæses et avanceret operativsystem. CCD CCD (Charge Coupled Device) er en hardwareenhed, der gør det muligt at foretage en scanning. CCD-låsemekanismen bruges også til at fastholde CCD-modulet for at forhindre beskadigelse, når du flytter maskinen. CSV CSV (Comma Separated Value) er en type filformat. CSV bruges til at udveksle data mellem uensartede programmer. Filformatet, som det bruges i Microsoft Excel, er blevet en slags pseudostandard i hele branchen, selv på ikke-Microsoft-platforme. DADF En automatisk duplex-dokumentføder (DADF) er en mekanisme, der automatisk indfører og vender en papiroriginal, så maskinen kan scanne begge sider af papiret. Dækning Det er et udskrivningsbegreb, der bruges i forbindelse med målingen af tonerforbrug ved udskrivning. F.eks. betyder 5 % dækning, at der på et stykke A4-papir er ca. 5 % billeder eller tekst. Hvis papiret eller originalen indeholder komplicerede billeder eller en mængde tekst, er dækningen derfor højere, og samtidig er tonerforbruget det samme som dækningen. DHCP En DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) er en client-servernetværksprotokol. En DHCP-server leverer konfigurationsparametre specifikt til den anmodende DHCP-klientvært, generelt oplysninger, som klientværten behøver for til deltage på et IP-netværk. DHCP indeholder også en mekanisme til allokering af IP-adresser for klientværter. DIMM DIMM (Dual Inline Memory Module) er et lille trykt kredsløb, der indeholder hukommelse. DIMM gemmer alle data i maskinen, f.eks. udskriftsdata og modtagne faxdata. DNS DNS (Domain Name Server) er et system, der gemmer oplysninger i forbindelse med domænenavne i en distribueret database på netværk, f.eks. internettet. DPI DPI (Dots Per Inch) er et mål for opløsning, der bruges i forbindelse med scanning og udskrivning. Generelt resulterer et højere DPI-tal i en højere opløsning, flere synlige detaljer i billedet og større filer. Driftscyklus Driftscyklus er det antal sider pr. måned, der ikke påvirker printerens ydeevne. Generelt har printeren en levetidsbegrænsning, f.eks. antal sider pr. år. Levetiden betyder den gennemsnitlige udskriftskapacitet, normalt inden for garantiperioden. Hvis driftscyklussen f.eks. er 48.000 sider pr. måned, idet der regnes med 20 arbejdsdage, har en printer en grænse på 2.400 sider om dagen. DRPD DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection). ”Distinctive Ring” er en tjeneste, der giver brugeren mulighed for at bruge en enkelt telefonlinje til at besvare flere forskellige telefonnumre. Duplex En mekanisme, der automatisk vender et ark papir, så maskinen kan skrive (eller scanne) begge sider af papiret. En printer med Duplex kan udskrive dobbeltsidet. ECM ECM (Error Correction Mode) er en valgfri transmissionstilstand, der er indbygget i Class 1-faxmaskiner eller faxmodemmer. Det registrerer og korrigerer automatisk de fejl i faxtransmissionsprocessen, der nogen gange skyldes støj på telefonlinjen. Emulering Emulering er en teknik, hvor én maskine opnår de samme resultater som en anden. En emulator duplikerer funktionerne i et system til et andet system, så det andet system fungerer som det første system. Emulering fokuserer på nøjagtig reproduktion af ekstern funktion i modsætning til simulering, der handler om at en abstrakt model af systemet simuleres, ofte under hensyn til systemets interne tilstand. Ethernet Ethernet er en rammebaseret computernetværksteknologi til LAN-netværk (Local Area Network). Den fastlægger ledningsføring og signaler på det fysiske lag samt rammeformater og protokoller på MAC-laget (Media Access Control Layer) og dataforbindelseslaget (Data Link Layer) i OSImodellen. Ethernet er for det meste standardiseret som IEEE 802.3. Det er blevet den mest udbredte LAN-teknologi siden 1990’erne og til i dag. EtherTalk En samling af protokoller, der er udviklet af Apple Computer til computernetværk. Den var medtaget i den oprindelige Macintosh (1984) og er nu forladt af Apple til fordel for TCP/IP-netværk. Nedenstående ordliste hjælper dig til at få kendskab til produktet ved at give dig en forståelse af den terminologi, der bruges sammen med udskrivning, og som anvendes i denne brugervejledning.96 | Ordliste FDI FDI (Foreign Device Interface) er et kort, der er installeret inden i maskinen, så det er muligt at anvende enheder fra tredjepart, f.eks. en møntbetjent enhed eller en kortlæser. Med disse enheder kan maskinen bruges som udskriftstjeneste mod betaling. Fikseringsenhed Den del af en laserprinter, der smelter toneren på udskriftsmediet. Den består af en varm rulle og en backup-rulle. Når toneren er overført til papiret, bruger fikseringsenheden varme og tryk til at sikre, at toneren bliver på papiret permanent. Det er årsagen til, at papiret er varmt, når det kommer ud af en laserprinter. FTP FTP (File Transfer Protocol) er en almindelig brugt protokol til udveksling af filer over alle netværk, der understøtter TCP/IP-protokollen (f.eks. internettet eller et intranet). Gateway En forbindelse mellem computernetværk eller mellem et computernetværk og en telefonlinje. Den er særdeles populær, eftersom det er en computer eller et netværk, der giver adgang til andre computere eller netværk. Gråtoner Toner af gråt, der repræsenterer lyse og mørke dele af et billede, når farvebilleder konverteres til gråtoner. Farverne repræsenteres af de forskellige toner af gråt. Halvtone En billedtype, der simulerer gråtoner ved at variere antallet af punkter. Områder med megen farve består af et stort antal punkter, mens lysere områder består af et mindre antal punkter. Harddisk Harddisk, der normalt kaldes et diskdrev eller en harddisk, er en permanent lagerenhed, der lagrer digitalt kodede data på hurtigt roterende plader med magnetiske overflader. IEEE IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) er en international nonprofit, faglig organisation til udbredelse af teknologi med forbindelse til elektricitet. IEEE 1284 Standarden for 1284-parallelporten blev udviklet af IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers). Betegnelsen ”1284-B” refererer til en specifik konnektortype i enden af det parallelkabel, der sluttes til ydre enheder (f.eks. en printer). Intranet Et privat netværk, der benytter internetprotokollerne, netværksforbindelser og muligvis det offentlige telekommunikationssystem til sikkert at dele en del af en organisations oplysninger eller drift med medarbejderne. Begrebet henviser undertiden kun til den mest synlige tjeneste, som er det interne websted. IP-adresse En IP-adresse (Internet Protocol-adresse) er et entydigt tal, som enheder benytter til at identificere og kommunikere med hinanden på et netværk ved hjælp af IP-standarden (Internet Protocol). IPM IPM (Images Per Minute) er en metode til måling af en printers hastighed. En IPM-hastighed viser, hvor mange enkeltsidede ark en printer kan producere i løbet af et minut. IPP IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) definerer en standardprotokol for udskrivning samt styring af udskriftsjob, mediestørrelser, opløsning osv. IPP kan bruges lokalt eller over internettet til hundredvis af printere og understøtter også adgangskontrol, godkendelse og kryptering, hvilket gør det til en meget mere omfattende og sikker udskrivningsløsning eller ældre løsninger. IPX/SPX IPX/SPX står for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange. Det er en netværksprotokol, der bruger af Novell NetWareoperativsystemerne. IPX og SPX sørger begge for forbindelsestjenester, der svarer til TCP/IP, hvor IPX-protokollen ligner IP, og SPX ligner TCP. IPX/SPX blev primært udviklet til lokale netværk (LAN), og det er en meget effektiv protokol til dette formål (typisk har den en bedre ydeevne end TCP/IP på et LAN). ISO International Organization for Standardization (ISO) er en international organisation for fastlæggelse af standarder, der er sammensat af repræsentanter fra de nationale standardiseringsorganisationer. Den udarbejder globale industrielle og kommercielle standarder. ITU-T ITU (International Telecommunication Union) er en international organisation, der er etableret for at standardisere og regulere den internationale radio- og telekommunikation. Dens hovedopgaver omfatter standardisering, allokering af radiospektrum og organisering af forbindelsesaftaler mellem forskellige lande for at tillade internationale telefonopkald. Et -T uden for ITU-T betyder telekommunikation. ITU-T No. 1-ark Et standardiseret testark, der er udgivet af ITU-T til faxtransmissioner af dokumenter. JBIG JBIG (Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group) er en standard for billedkomprimering uden tab af nøjagtighed eller kvalitet, der er beregnet til komprimering af binære billeder, specielt til faxe, men den kan også bruges til andre billeder. JPEG JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group) er den mest almindelig brugte standardmetode til komprimering af fotografiske billeder med tab af kvalitet. Det er det format, der bruges til lagring og transmission af fotografier på internettet. Kontrolpanel Et kontrolpanel er et fladt, typisk lodret område, hvor der er placeret knapper eller overvågningsinstrumenter. De findes typisk foran på maskinen. LDAP LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) er en netværksprotokol til forespørgsel på og redigering af katalogtjenester, der kører via TCP/IP. LED En lysdiode (LED) er en halvlederenhed, der viser maskinens status. MAC-adresse MAC (Media Access Control)-adressen er et entydigt id, der er knyttet til et netværkskort. MAC-adressen er et entydigt 48-bit id, der normalt skrives som 12 hexadecimale tegn, der er grupperet i par (f.eks. 00-00-0c-34-11-4e). Denne adresse er normalt hardcoded i et netværkskort (NIC) af fabrikanten, og den bruges som en hjælp for routere, der prøver at lokalisere lokale maskiner i store netværk.Ordliste | 97 Matrixprinter En matrixprinter refererer til en type computerprinter med et printhoved, der kører frem og tilbage på siden og skriver med anslag ved at slå et tekstilfarvebånd mod papiret, meget lig en skrivemaskine. MFP MFP (Multi Function Peripheral) er en kontormaskine, der omfatter følgende funktionalitet i én fysisk ramme, f.eks. en printer, en kopimaskine, en fax, en scanner osv. MH MH (Modified Huffman) er en kompressionsmetode til nedsættelse af mængden af data, der skal transmitteres mellem faxmaskiner for at overføre det billede, der anbefales i ITU-T T.4. MH er et kodebogsbaseret RLE-skema, der er optimeret til en effektiv komprimering af blanke områder. Da de fleste faxer mest består af blanke områder, minimerer dette transmissionstiden for de fleste faxer. MMR MMR (Modified Modified READ) er en komprimeringsmetode, der er anbefalet i ITU-T T.6. Modem En enhed, der modulerer et bærebølgesignal til at kode digitale oplysninger, og som også demodulerer bærebølgesignalet for at afkode de transmitterede oplysninger. MR MR (Modified Read) er en kompressionsmetode, der anbefales i ITU-T T.4. MR koder den første scannede linje ved hjælp af MH. Den næste linje sammenlignes med den første, forskellene bestemmes, og derefter kodes forskellene og sendes. NetWare Et netværksoperativsystem, der er udviklet af Novell, Inc. Det brugte oprindeligt kooperativ multitasking til at køre forskellige tjenester på en pc, og netværksprotokollerne var baseret på den oprindelige Xerox XNS-stak. I dag understøtter NetWare TCP/IP og IPX/SPX. OPC OPC (Organic Photo Conductor) er en mekanisme, der fremstiller et virtuelt billede til udskrivning ved hjælp af en laserstråle fra en laserprinter. Den er normalt grønlig eller grålig og cylinderformet. Fremkaldelsesdelen af en tromle slides langsomt væk, når printeren bruges, og den skal udskiftes med passende mellemrum, da den ridses af støvet i papiret. Opløsning Et billedes skarphed målt i punkter pr. tommer (DPI). Jo højere dpi-tal, jo højere opløsning. Originaler Det første eksemplar af noget, f.eks. et dokument, et fotografi eller en tekst osv., der kopieres, reproduceres eller oversættes for at producere andre eksemplarer, men som ikke selv er kopieret eller uddraget fra noget andet. OSI OSI (Open Systems Interconnection) er en model, der er udviklet af ISO (International Organization for Standardization) til kommunikation. OSI giver en standardiseret, modulær indgang til netværksdesign, der opdeler det nødvendige sæt af komplekse funktioner i håndterbare, selvstændige funktionelle lag. Lagene er fra top til bund: program, præsentation, session, transport, netværk, dataforbindelse og fysisk lag. PABX En privat automatisk omstilling (PABX) er et automatisk telefonomstillingsanlæg i en privat virksomhed. PCL PCL (Printer Command Language) er et PDL (Page Description Language - sidebeskrivelsessprog), der er udviklet af HP som en printerprotokol og er blevet en branchestandard. PCL blev oprindeligt udviklet til de tidlige inkjet-printere og er siden udgivet i forskellige udgaver til termo-, matrix- og sideprintere. PDF PDF (Portable Document Format) er et varemærkebeskyttet filformat, der er udviklet af Adobe Systems, til repræsentation af todimensionelle dokumenter i et format, som er uafhængigt af enheder og opløsning. PostScript PostScript (PS) er et sidebeskrivelsessprog og programmeringssprog, der hovedsageligt benyttes inden for elektronik og DTP, og som udføres i en fortolker for at producere et billede. Printerdriver Et program, der bruges til at sende kommandoer og overføre data fra computeren til printeren. PPM PPM (Pages Per Minute - sider pr. minut) er en målemetode til bestemmelse af, hvor hurtigt en printer arbejder, dvs. hvor mange sider den kan producere pr. minut. PRN-fil En grænseflade til en enhedsdriver, der tillader softwaren at kommunikere med enhedsdriveren ved hjælp af standardsystemkald til input/output, hvilket forenkler mange opgaver. Protokol En konvention eller standard, der kontrollerer eller muliggør forbindelse, kommunikation og dataoverførsel mellem to computere. PS Se PostScript. PSTN PSTN (Public-Switched Telephone Network - det offentlige analoge koblede telefonnet) er det netværk, der består af verdens offentlige analoge telefonnetværk, der normalt ledes gennem en omstilling i virksomheder. Sortering Sortering er en proces, hvor et kopijob med flere kopier udskrives i sæt. Når sortering er valgt, udskriver enheden et helt sæt, før der udskrives yderligere kopier. SMB SMB (Server Message Block (SMB) er en netværksprotokol, der især anvendes til at dele filer, printere, serielle porte og forskellige former for kommunikation mellem noder i et netværk. Den indeholder også en mekanisme til godkendelse af kommunikation mellem processer. SMTP SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) er standarden for transmissionen af e-mails over internettet. SMTP er en relativ enkel tekstbaseret protokol, hvor en eller flere modtagere af meddelelser er angivet, hvorefter meddelelsesteksten overføres. Det er en client-serverprotokol, hvor klienten overfører en e-mail-meddelelse til serveren. Standard Den værdi eller indstilling, der er i kraft, når en printer pakkes ud, nulstilles eller initialiseres. TCP/IP TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) og IP (Internet Protocol) er det sæt kommunikationsprotokoller, der implementerer den protokolstak, som internettet og de fleste kommercielle netværk kører på.98 | Ordliste TCR TCR (Transmission Confirmation Report) indeholder oplysninger om hver transmission, f.eks. jobstatus, transmissionsresultat og antal sendte sider. Rapporten kan indstilles til at blive udskrevet efter hvert job eller kun efter mislykkede transmissioner. TIFF TIFF (Tagged Image File Format) er et bitmapbilledformat med variabel opløsning. TIFF beskriver billeddata, der typisk kommer fra scannere. TIFF-billeder bruger mærker, nøgleord, der definerer egenskaberne for det billede, der er inkluderet i filen. Dette fleksible og platformuafhængige format kan bruges til billeder, der er fremstillet i forskellige programmer til billedbehandling. Tonerpatron En slags flaske inde i en maskine, f.eks. en printer, som indeholder toner. Toner er et pulver, der bruges i laserprintere og fotokopieringsmaskiner, og som danner teksten og billederne på den udskrevne papir. Toneren smeltes af varmen fra fikseringsenheden, så den klæber til papirets fibre. TWAIN En branchestandard for scannere og software. Hvis der bruges en TWAIN-kompatibel scanner sammen med et TWAIN-kompatibelt program, kan en scanning startes fra programmet ved hjælp af en API, der kan hente billeder, til operativsystemerne Microsoft Windows og Apple Macintosh. Udskriftsmedie De medier som papir, kuverter, etiketter og transparenter, der kan bruges i en printer, en scanner, en fax eller en kopimaskine. UNC-sti UNC (Uniform Naming Convention) er en standardiseret adgangsmåde til netværksshares i Windows NT og andre Microsoft-produkter. Formatet for en UNC-sti er: \\\\ Undernetmaske Undernetmasken bruges i forbindelse med netværksadressen til at bestemme, hvilken del af adressen der er netværksadressen, og hvilken del af adressen der er værtsadressen. URL URL (Uniform Resource Locator) er den globale adresse på dokumenter og ressourcer på internettet. Den første del af adressen angiver, hvilken protokol der skal bruges, og den anden del angiver den IP-adresse eller det domænenavn, hvor ressourcen er placeret. USB USB (Universal Serial Bus) er en standard for tilslutning af ydre enheder til computere, der blev udviklet af USB Implementers Forum, Inc. I modsætning til den parallelle port er USB udviklet til samtidig tilslutning af flere ydre enheder til en enkelt USB-port på computeren. Vandmærke Et vandmærke er et genkendeligt billede eller mønster i papiret, der virker lysere, når det holdes op imod lyset. Vandmærker blev første gang introduceret i Bologna, Italien i 1282. De er blevet brugt af papirfabrikanterne til at identificere deres produkter, ligesom de også bruges i frimærker, pengesedler og andre officielle dokumenter for at forhindre forfalskninger. WIA WIA (Windows Imaging Architecture) er en billedbehandlingsarkitektur, der oprindelig blev introduceret i Windows Me og Windows XP. En scanning kan startes fra disse operativsystemer ved brug af en WIAkompatibel scanner.Indeks | 99 indeks A adressekartotek genvejstaster 50 gruppeopkaldsnumre 51 hurtigopkaldsnumre 51 adressekartotek, bruge 41 alarmlyd 21 B baggrundsbillede, slette 34 bakke justere bredde og længde 28 brug af SetIP 18 D DADF 12 DADF, placere i 24 DADF-gummipude, udskifte 63 dato og tid, indstille 21 displaysprog, ændre 20 driver installation 19 DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection) 46 E ekstraudstyr installere harddisk 87 F faxe faxopsætning 49 flere destinationer, sende faxer til 47 modtage faxer 45 prioritetsfaxer 48 sende faxer 45 standardindstillinger, ændre 50 udskudte faxer 47 videresende faxer 48 faxhoved, indstille 44 faxnummer, indstille 44 Faxtilstand, modtagetilstand 46 forbrugsstoffer forventet levetid for tonerpatron 59 kontrollere levetid 62 G genkald automatisk 45 manuelt 45 genvejstaster, indstille 50 gruppeopkaldsnumre, indstille 51 H harddisk bruge 88 installere 87 højttalerlyd 21 højttalerstyrke 21 hukommelse, rydde 57 hukommelsesmodul bestille 85 installere 86 hurtigopkaldsnumre, indstille 51 I ID Copy 13 ID-kort, speciel kopi 33 ilægge originaler ADF 24 scannerglasplade 24 indikator status 14 indstille skrifttype 23 installere ekstraudstyr harddisk 87 J jobtimeout, indstille 22 justering højde 20 K kontrolpanel 13 kopiere 2-op, 4-op 34 bog 34 ID-kort-kopi 33 klone 34 margenskift 35 mørkhed 32 original type 32 plakat 34 slet kant 35 slette baggrund 34 sortering 33 standardindstilling, ændre 33 timeout, indstille 36 L Linux-problemer 82 lyde, indstille 21 lydstyrke, justere højttaler 21 ringer 21 M margenskift, speciel kopifunktion 35 maskine-ID, indstille 44 modtage en fax i Ans/Fax-tilstand 46 i Faxtilstand 46 i hukommelsen 42 i Tel-tilstand 46 i tilstanden Sikker modtagelse 47 modtage en fax i DRPD-tilstand 46 modtagetilstande 45100 | Indeks N netværk opsætning 17 O originaler ilægge 24 stop, afhjælpe 64 P papir ændre størrelsen 28 afhjælpe papirstop 65 lægge i bakke 1 29 lægge i den valgfri bakke 29 lægge i universalbakken 29 papirbakke, angive kopiere 32 papirbakke, indstille fax 45 papirstop afhjælpe i bakke 1 65 tip til at undgå papirstop 64 papirstop, afhjælpe dokument 64 papirtype indstilling 31 PostScript problemer 81 prioriteret fax 48 problem, løse faxe 80 kopiering 79 Linux 82 papirindføring 75 scanning 80 udskriftskvalitet 76 Windows 81 R rapporter, udskrive 56 rengøre indvendig 57 scannerenhed 59 udvendig 57 ringesignal 21 S scanne standardindstilling, ændre 40 USB-flashhukommelse 53 scannerglasplade ilægge dokumenter 24 rengøre 59 scanning til e-mail 39 scanning til FTP-server 40 scanning til SMB-server 40 sende en fax automatisk 45 sende faxer til flere destinationer 47 sikker modtagetilstand 47 slet kant, speciel kopifunktion 35 slette baggrund, speciel kopi 34 sortering, speciel kopifunktion 33 specielle kopifunktioner 33 standardindstilling, ændring af 21 strømsparetilstand 22 strømsparetilstand ved scanning 22 Sv/fax-tilstand, modtagetilstand 46 T tastelyd 21 tegn, indtaste 21 testside, udskrive 17 tidsformat 21 Tlf-tilstand, modtagetilstand 46 tonerpatron udskifte 61 U udskifte DADF-gummipude 63 udskifte komponenter tonerpatron 60 udskifte, tonerpatron 61 udskriftskvalitetsproblemer, løse 76 udskrive rapporter 56 testside 17 USB-flashhukommelse 54 udskudt fax 47 USB-flashhukommelse administrere 55 scanne 53 sikkerhedskopiere data 54 udskrive 54 V valgfri bakke 62, 85 vedligeholdelse tonerpatron 59 vedligeholdelsesdele 62 vidersendelse af faxer 48 W Windows-problemer 81© 2009 Dell Inc. Alle rettigheder forbeholdes. Denne brugervejledning leveres kun med til oplysningsformål. Alle oplysninger indeholdt heri kan til enhver tid ændres uden forudgående varsel. Dell er ikke ansvarlig for skader, direkte eller indirekte, der opstår som følge af brugen af denne brugerhåndbog. • Dell og Dell-logoet er varemærker tilhørende Dell Inc. • PCL og PCL 6 er varemærker tilhørende Hewlett-Packard Company. • Microsoft, Windows og Windows Vista er enten registrerede varemærker eller varemærker, der tilhører Microsoft Corporation. • PostScript 3 er et varemærke, der tilhører Adobe System, Inc. • UFST® og MicroType™ er registrerede varemærker, der tilhører Monotype Imaging Inc. • TrueType, LaserWriter og Macintosh er varemærker, der tilhører Apple Computer, Inc. • Alle andre navne på mærker eller produkter er varemærker tilhørende de respektive virksomheder og organisationer.Softwareafsnit1 SOFTWAREAFSNIT INDHOLDSFORTEGNELSE Kapitel 1: INSTALLATION AF PRINTERSOFTWARE UNDER WINDOWS Installation af printersoftware ............................................................................................................................................. 4 Installation af software til lokal udskrivning ................................................................................................................. 4 Installation af software til netværksudskrivning ........................................................................................................... 6 Geninstallation af printersoftware ....................................................................................................................................... 9 Fjernelse af printersoftware ................................................................................................................................................ 9 Kapitel 2: GRUNDLÆGGENDE UDSKRIVNING Udskrivning af et dokument .............................................................................................................................................. 10 Udskrivning til en fil (PRN) ............................................................................................................................................... 10 Printerindstillinger ............................................................................................................................................................. 11 Fanen Layout ............................................................................................................................................................ 11 Fanen Papir .............................................................................................................................................................. 12 Fanen Grafik ............................................................................................................................................................. 13 Fanen Ekstra ............................................................................................................................................................ 14 Fanen Om ................................................................................................................................................................. 14 Fanen Printer ............................................................................................................................................................ 14 Brug af en foretrukken indstilling ............................................................................................................................... 14 Brug af Hjælp ............................................................................................................................................................ 15 Kapitel 3: AVANCERET UDSKRIVNING Udskrivning af flere sider på ét ark papir (N-op-udskrivning) ........................................................................................... 16 Udskrivning af poster ........................................................................................................................................................ 17 Udskrivning af brochurer ................................................................................................................................................. 17 Udskrivning på begge sider af papiret .............................................................................................................................. 18 Udskrivning af et formindsket eller forstørret dokument ................................................................................................... 18 Tilpasning af dokumentet til en valgt papirstørrelse ......................................................................................................... 182 Brug af vandmærker ......................................................................................................................................................... 19 Brug af et eksisterende vandmærke ......................................................................................................................... 19 Oprettelse af et vandmærke ..................................................................................................................................... 19 Redigering af et vandmærke ..................................................................................................................................... 19 Sletning af et vandmærke ......................................................................................................................................... 19 Brug af overlays ................................................................................................................................................................ 20 Hvad er et overlay? ................................................................................................................................................... 20 Oprettelse af et nyt sideoverlay ................................................................................................................................ 20 Anvendelse af sideoverlay ........................................................................................................................................ 20 Sletning af et sideoverlay .......................................................................................................................................... 20 Kapitel 4: BRUG AF WINDOWS' POSTSCRIPT-DRIVER Printerindstillinger ............................................................................................................................................................. 21 Avanceret .................................................................................................................................................................. 21 Brug af Hjælp ............................................................................................................................................................ 21 Kapitel 5: DELING AF PRINTEREN LOKALT Konfiguration af en værtscomputer .................................................................................................................................. 22 Konfiguration af en klientcomputer ................................................................................................................................... 22 Kapitel 6: SCANNING SmarThru Office ............................................................................................................................................................... 23 Sådan starter du SmarThru Office ............................................................................................................................ 23 Quick Start Guide ...................................................................................................................................................... 23 Brug af SmarThru Office ........................................................................................................................................... 23 Scanning med TWAIN-kompatible programmer ............................................................................................................... 24 Scanning ved brug af WIA-driveren .................................................................................................................................. 25 Windows XP .............................................................................................................................................................. 25 Windows Vista .......................................................................................................................................................... 25 Kapitel 7: BRUG AF ANDRE PROGRAMMER Overvågning af printerstatus ............................................................................................................................................ 26 Printerindstillingsværktøj .................................................................................................................................................. 263 Dell-program til genbestilling af toner ............................................................................................................................... 27 Firmware Update Utility .................................................................................................................................................... 27 Kapitel 8: BRUG AF PRINTEREN UNDER LINUX Introduktion ....................................................................................................................................................................... 28 Installation af Unified Linux Driver .................................................................................................................................... 28 Installation af Unified Linux Driver ............................................................................................................................ 28 Afinstallation af Unified Linux Driver ......................................................................................................................... 29 Brug af Unified Driver Configurator .................................................................................................................................. 30 Åbning af Unified Driver Configurator ....................................................................................................................... 30 Printers Configuration ............................................................................................................................................... 31 Scanners Configuration ............................................................................................................................................ 31 Ports Configuration ................................................................................................................................................... 32 Konfiguration af printeregenskaber .................................................................................................................................. 32 Udskrivning af et dokument .............................................................................................................................................. 33 Udskrivning fra programmer ..................................................................................................................................... 33 Udskrivning af filer .................................................................................................................................................... 33 Scanning af et dokument .................................................................................................................................................. 34 Brug af Image Editor ................................................................................................................................................. 35 Kapitel 10: BRUG AF DIN PRINTER MED EN MACINTOSH Installation af software til Macintosh ................................................................................................................................. 36 Afinstallation af printerdriveren ......................................................................................................................................... 36 Konfiguration af printeren ................................................................................................................................................. 37 Netværkstilsluttet ...................................................................................................................................................... 37 USB-tilsluttet Macintosh ............................................................................................................................................ 37 Udskrivning ....................................................................................................................................................................... 38 Udskrivning af et dokument ...................................................................................................................................... 38 Ændring af printerindstillinger ................................................................................................................................... 38 Udskrivning af flere sider på ét ark papir .................................................................................................................. 39 Scanning ........................................................................................................................................................................... 40 Scanning via USB ..................................................................................................................................................... 40Installation af printersoftware under Windows 4 1 Installation af printersoftware under Windows Dette kapitel omfatter: • Installation af printersoftware • Geninstallation af printersoftware • Fjernelse af printersoftware Installation af printersoftware Du kan installere printersoftwaren til lokal udskrivning eller netværksudskrivning. Når du vil installere printersoftwaren på computeren, skal du foretage den rette installationsprocedure afhængig af den anvendte printer. En printerdriver er software, der gør det muligt for computeren at kommunikere med printeren. Den procedure, du skal bruge til at installere drivere, kan variere afhængig af det anvendte operativsystem. Alle programmer på pc'en bør være lukket, før du begynder installationen. Installation af software til lokal udskrivning En lokal printer er en printer, der er sluttet direkte til computeren ved brug af det printerkabel, der blev leveret med printeren, f.eks. et USB-kabel eller et parallelkabel. Hvis printeren er sluttet til et netværk, skal du ignorere dette trin og gå til ”Installation af software til netværksudskrivning” på side 6. Du kan installere printersoftwaren ved brug af standard- eller specialmetoden. BEMÆRK! Hvis vinduet ”Guiden Ny hardware fundet” vises under installationsproceduren, skal du klikke på i øverste højre hjørne af vinduet for at lukke det. Ellers skal du klikke på Annuller. Standardinstallation Dette anbefales til de fleste brugere. Alle komponenter, der er nødvendige af hensyn til printerens drift, installeres. 1 Sørg for, at printeren er tilsluttet computeren, og at den er tændt. 2 Indsæt den medfølgende cd-rom i cd-rom-drevet. Cd-rom'en skulle starte automatisk, og der vises et installationsvindue. Hvis installationsvinduet ikke vises, skal du klikke på Start og derefter på Kør. Skriv X:\Setup.exe, idet du erstatter ”X” med det bogstav, der repræsenterer dit drev, og klik på OK. Klik på Start → Alle programmer → Tilbehør → Kør, og skriv X:\Setup.exe, hvis du bruger Windows Vista ® . Hvis vinduet AutoPlay vises i Windows Vista ® , skal du klikke på Kør Setup.exe i feltet Installer eller kør program og klikke på Fortsæt i vinduet Brugerkontokontrol. 3 Klik på Next. • Hvis det er nødvendigt, skal du vælge et sprog på rullelisten. 4 Vælg Typical installation for a local printer. Klik på Next.Installation af printersoftware under Windows 5 BEMÆRK! Hvis printeren ikke allerede er tilsluttet computeren, vises følgende vindue. • Klik på Next, når printeren er tilsluttet. • Hvis du ikke ønsker at tilslutte printeren lige nu, skal du klikke på Next og No på følgende skærmbillede. Derefter startes installationen, og der udskrives ikke nogen testside, når installationen er færdig. • Installationsvinduet, der vises i denne brugerhåndbog, kan være forskelligt på den printer og den brugerflade, som du anvender. 5 Når installationen er afsluttet, vises der et vindue, hvor du bliver bedt om at udskrive en testside. Hvis du vælger at udskrive en testside, skal du markere afkrydsningsfeltet og klikke på Next. Ellers skal du blot klikke på Next og fortsætte til trin 7. 6 Klik på Yes, hvis testsiden udskrives korrekt. Hvis ikke skal du klikke på No for at udskrive den igen. 7 Klik på Finish. BEMÆRK! Hvis printerdriveren ikke fungerer korrekt, når installationen er fuldført, skal du geninstallere printerdriveren. Se ”Geninstallation af printersoftware” på side 9. Specialinstallation Du kan vælge individuelle komponenter, der skal installeres. 1 Sørg for, at printeren er tilsluttet computeren, og at den er tændt. 2 Indsæt den medfølgende cd-rom i cd-rom-drevet. Cd-rom'en skulle starte automatisk, og der vises et installationsvindue. Hvis installationsvinduet ikke vises, skal du klikke på Start og derefter på Kør. Skriv X:\Setup.exe, idet du erstatter ”X” med det bogstav, der repræsenterer dit drev, og klik på OK. Klik på Start → Alle programmer → Tilbehør → Kør, og skriv X:\Setup.exe, hvis du bruger Windows Vista ® . Hvis vinduet AutoPlay vises i Windows Vista ® , skal du klikke på Kør Setup.exe i feltet Installer eller kør program og klikke på Fortsæt i vinduet Brugerkontokontrol. 3 Klik på Next. • Hvis det er nødvendigt, skal du vælge et sprog på rullelisten. 4 Vælg Custom installation. Klik på Next. 5 Vælg printeren, og klik på Next.Installation af printersoftware under Windows 6 BEMÆRK! Hvis printeren ikke allerede er tilsluttet computeren, vises følgende vindue. • Klik på Next, når printeren er tilsluttet. • Hvis du ikke ønsker at tilslutte printeren lige nu, skal du klikke på Next og No på følgende skærmbillede. Derefter startes installationen, og der udskrives ikke nogen testside, når installationen er færdig. • Installationsvinduet, der vises i denne brugerhåndbog, kan være forskelligt på den printer og den brugerflade, som du anvender. 6 Vælg de komponenter, der skal installeres, og klik på Next. BEMÆRK! Du kan ændre installationsmappen ved at klikke på [Browse]. 7 Når installationen er afsluttet, vises der et vindue, hvor du bliver bedt om at udskrive en testside. Hvis du vælger at udskrive en testside, skal du markere afkrydsningsfeltet og klikke på Next. Ellers skal du blot klikke på Next og fortsætte til trin 9. 8 Klik på Yes, hvis testsiden udskrives korrekt. Hvis ikke skal du klikke på No for at udskrive den igen. 9 Klik på Finish. Installation af software til netværksudskrivning Hvis du slutter printeren til et netværk, skal du først konfigurere TCP/IP-indstillingerne for printeren. Når du har tildelt og bekræftet TCP/IP-indstillingerne, er du klar til at installere softwaren på hver computer på netværket. Du kan installere printersoftwaren ved brug af standard- eller specialmetoden. Standardinstallation Dette anbefales til de fleste brugere. Alle komponenter, der er nødvendige af hensyn til printerens drift, installeres. 1 Sørg for, at printeren er tilsluttet netværket, og at den er tændt. Yderligere oplysninger om tilslutning til netværket finder du i den brugerhåndbog der følger med printeren. 2 Indsæt den medfølgende cd-rom i cd-rom-drevet. Cd-rom'en skulle starte automatisk, og der vises et installationsvindue. Hvis installationsvinduet ikke vises, skal du klikke på Start og derefter på Kør. Skriv X:\Setup.exe, idet du erstatter ”X” med det bogstav, der repræsenterer dit drev, og klik på OK. Klik på Start → Alle programmer → Tilbehør → Kør, og skriv X:\Setup.exe, hvis du bruger Windows Vista ® . Hvis vinduet AutoPlay vises i Windows Vista ® , skal du klikke på Kør Setup.exe i feltet Installer eller kør program og klikke på Fortsæt i vinduet Brugerkontokontrol. 3 Klik på Next. • Hvis det er nødvendigt, skal du vælge et sprog på rullelisten.Installation af printersoftware under Windows 7 4 Vælg Typical installation for a network printer. Klik på Next. 5 Listen over de printere, der er tilgængelige på netværket, vises. Vælg den printer, du ønsker at installere, på listen, og klik derefter på Next. • Hvis printeren ikke vises på listen, kan du klikke på Update for at opdatere listen, eller vælge Add TCP/IP Port for at tilføje printeren til netværket. Hvis du vil tilføje printeren på netværket, skal du angive portens navn og printerens IP- adresse. Kontroller printerens IP-adresse eller MAC-adresse ved at udskrive en netværkskonfigurationsside. • Hvis du vil finde en fælles netværksprinter (UNC-stien), skal du vælge Shared Printer [UNC] og angive delingsnavnet manuelt eller finde en delt printer ved at klikke på knappen Browse. BEMÆRK! Hvis du ikke kan finde din maskine på netværket, skal du deaktivere firewallen og klikke på Update. Hvis du har et Windows-operativsystem, skal du klikke på Start → Kontrolpanel, starte Windows Firewall og angive denne indstilling som uaktiveret. Hvis du bruger et andet operativsystem, skal du se dets onlineguide. 6 Klik på Finish. BEMÆRK! Hvis printerdriveren ikke fungerer korrekt, når installationen er fuldført, skal du geninstallere printerdriveren. Se ”Geninstallation af printersoftware” på side 9. Specialinstallation Du kan vælge, hvilke komponenter du vil installere og angive en bestemt IP-adresse. 1 Sørg for, at printeren er tilsluttet netværket, og at den er tændt. Yderligere oplysninger om tilslutning til netværket finder du i den brugerhåndbog der følger med printeren. 2 Indsæt den medfølgende cd-rom i cd-rom-drevet. Cd-rom'en skulle starte automatisk, og der vises et installationsvindue. Hvis installationsvinduet ikke vises, skal du klikke på Start og derefter på Kør. Skriv X:\Setup.exe, idet du erstatter ”X” med det bogstav, der repræsenterer dit drev, og klik på OK. Klik på Start → Alle programmer → Tilbehør → Kør, og skriv X:\Setup.exe, hvis du bruger Windows Vista ® . Hvis vinduet AutoPlay vises i Windows Vista ® , skal du klikke på Kør Setup.exe i feltet Installer eller kør program og klikke på Fortsæt i vinduet Brugerkontokontrol. 3 Klik på Next. • Hvis det er nødvendigt, skal du vælge et sprog på rullelisten.Installation af printersoftware under Windows 8 4 Vælg Custom installation. Klik på Next. 5 Listen over de printere, der er tilgængelige på netværket, vises. Vælg den printer, du ønsker at installere, på listen, og klik derefter på Next. • Hvis printeren ikke vises på listen, kan du klikke på Update for at opdatere listen, eller vælge Add TCP/IP Port for at tilføje printeren til netværket. Hvis du vil tilføje printeren på netværket, skal du angive portens navn og printerens IP- adresse. Kontroller printerens IP-adresse eller MAC-adresse ved at udskrive en netværkskonfigurationsside. • Hvis du vil finde en fælles netværksprinter (UNC-stien), skal du vælge Shared Printer [UNC] og angive delingsnavnet manuelt eller finde en delt printer ved at klikke på knappen Browse. BEMÆRK! Hvis du ikke kan finde din maskine på netværket, skal du deaktivere firewallen og klikke på Update. Hvis du har et Windows-operativsystem, skal du klikke på Start → Kontrolpanel, starte Windows Firewall og angive denne indstilling som uaktiveret. Hvis du bruger et andet operativsystem, skal du se dets onlineguide. TIP! Hvis du ønsker at angive en specifik IP-adresse på en specifik netværksprinter, skal du klikke på knappen Set IP Address. Vinduet Indstil IP-adresse vises. Gør følgende: a. Vælg den printer, der skal indstilles med en specifik IP-adresse, på listen. b. Konfigurer en IP-adresse, undernetmaske og gateway for printeren manuelt, og klik på Configure for at angive den specifikke IP-adresse for netværksprinteren. c. Klik på Next. 6 Vælg de komponenter, der skal installeres. Når du har valgt komponenterne, vises følgende vindue. Du kan også ændre printernavnet, angive den printer, der skal deles på netværket, angive printeren som standardprinter og skifte portnavn for hver printer. Klik på Next. Hvis du vil installere denne software på en server, skal du markere afkrydsningsfeltet Setting up this printer on a server. 7 Klik på Finish. BEMÆRK! Hvis printerdriveren ikke fungerer korrekt, når installationen er fuldført, skal du geninstallere printerdriveren. Se ”Geninstallation af printersoftware” på side 9.Installation af printersoftware under Windows 9 Geninstallation af printersoftware Du kan geninstallere softwaren, hvis installationen mislykkes. 1 Start Windows. 2 Vælg Start og derefter Programs eller All Programs → navnet på printerdriveren → Maintenance. 3 Vælg Repair, og klik på Next. 4 Listen over de printere, der er tilgængelige på netværket, vises. Vælg den printer, du ønsker at installere, på listen, og klik derefter på Next. • Hvis printeren ikke vises på listen, kan du klikke på Update for at opdatere listen, eller vælge Add TCP/IP Port for at tilføje printeren til netværket. Hvis du vil tilføje printeren på netværket, skal du angive portens navn og printerens IP- adresse. • Hvis du vil finde en fælles netværksprinter (UNC-stien), skal du vælge Shared Printer [UNC] og angive delingsnavnet manuelt eller finde en delt printer ved at klikke på knappen Browse. Der vises en liste over komponenter, så du kan geninstallere elementerne individuelt. BEMÆRK! Hvis printeren ikke allerede er tilsluttet computeren, vises følgende vindue. • Klik på Next, når printeren er tilsluttet. • Hvis du ikke ønsker at tilslutte printeren lige nu, skal du klikke på Next og No på følgende skærmbillede. Derefter startes installationen, og der udskrives ikke en testside, når installationen er færdig. • Geninstallationsvinduet, der vises i denne brugerhåndbog, kan være anderledes på den printer og den brugerflade, som du anvender. 5 Marker de komponenter, du vil geninstallere, og klik på Next. Hvis du installerede printersoftwaren til lokal udskrivning, og du vælger printerdrivernavnet, vises der et vindue, hvor du bliver spurgt, om du ønsker at udskrive en testside. Gør følgende: a. Hvis du vil udskrive en testside, skal du markere afkrydsningsfeltet og klikke på Next. b. Hvis testsiden udskrives korrekt, skal du klikke på Yes. Hvis den ikke gør, skal du klikke på No for at udskrive den igen. 6 Klik på Finish, når geninstallationen er udført. Fjernelse af printersoftware 1 Start Windows. 2 Vælg Start og derefter Programs eller All Programs → navnet på printerdriveren → Maintenance. 3 Vælg Remove, og klik på Next. Der vises en liste over komponenter, så du kan fjerne elementerne individuelt. 4 Marker de komponenter, du vil fjerne, og klik derefter på Next. 5 Klik på Yes, når du bliver bedt om at bekræfte markeringerne. Den markerede driver og alle dens komponenter fjernes fra computeren. 6 Klik på Finish, når softwaren er fjernet.Grundlæggende udskrivning 10 2 Grundlæggende udskrivning I dette kapitel forklares printerens funktioner og almindelige udskrivningsfunktioner i Windows. Dette kapitel omfatter: • Udskrivning af et dokument • Udskrivning til en fil (PRN) • Printerindstillinger - Fanen Layout - Fanen Papir - Fanen Grafik - Fanen Ekstra - Fanen Om - Fanen Printer - Brug af en foretrukken indstilling - Brug af Hjælp Udskrivning af et dokument BEMÆRK: • Printerdrivervinduet Egenskaber, der vises i denne brugerhåndbog, kan være anderledes på den printer, som du anvender. Men sammensætningen af vinduet med printeregenskaber er ens. • Kontroller, at operativsystemet/-systemerne er kompatible med printeren. Se i afsnittet Operativsystem - Kompatibilitet i printerspecifikationerne i brugerhåndbogen til printeren. • Hvis du har brug for at kende det nøjagtige navn på printeren, kan du se på den medfølgende cd-rom. • Når du vælger en indstilling under printerindstillinger, vises der muligvis et udråbstegn eller et mærke af typen . Et udråbstegn angiver, at du har adgang til at vælge den pågældende indstilling, men at dette frarådes, mens et mærke af typen angiver, at det ikke er muligt at vælge den pågældende indstilling på grund af maskinens konfiguration eller driftsmiljø. Den følgende procedure demonstrerer den generelle fremgangsmåde, du skal benytte, når du vil udskrive fra forskellige Windows-programmer. De præcise trin, du skal følge, når du udskriver et dokument, kan afhænge af, hvilket program du benytter. Se i brugerhåndbogen til softwaren for at finde den nøjagtige udskrivningsprocedure. 1 Åbn det dokument, du vil udskrive. 2 Vælg Udskriv i menuen Filer. Vinduet Udskriv vises. Udseendet kan variere en smule afhængig af programmet. De grundlæggende indstillinger for udskrivning vælges i dialogboksen Udskriv. Disse indstillinger omfatter antallet af kopier og udskriftsområde. 3 Marker din printerdriver på rullelisten Navn. 4 Hvis du vil udnytte udskriftsfunktionerne i printerdriveren, skal du klikke på Egenskaber eller Indstillinger i programvinduet Udskriv. Se ”Printerindstillinger” på side 11, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger. Hvis der i stedet for vises Konfiguration, Printer eller Indstillinger i vinduet Udskriv, skal du klikke på det. Klik derefter på Egenskaber på det næste skærmbillede. 5 Klik på OK for at lukke vinduet med printeregenskaber. 6 Begynd udskriftsjobbet ved at klikke på OK eller Udskriv i vinduet Udskriv. Udskrivning til en fil (PRN) Undertiden vil du have brug for at gemme udskriftsdata som en fil til et bestemt formål. Sådan opretter du en fil: 1 Marker feltet Skriv til fil i vinduet Udskriv. 2 Klik på Udskriv. 3 Indtast mappenavnet, giv filen et navn, og klik derefter på OK. Kontroller, at din printer er markeret.Grundlæggende udskrivning 11 Printerindstillinger Du kan bruge vinduet med printeregenskaber til at få adgang til alle de oplysninger, du har brug for vedrørende din printer. Når printeregenskaberne vises, kan du gennemse og redigere de viste indstillinger, så de svarer til dine aktuelle behov. Dit printeregenskabsvindue kan være anderledes, afhængig af dit operativsystem. Denne brugerhåndbog til software viser vinduet Egenskaber, som det ser ud i Windows XP. Printerdrivervinduet Egenskaber, der vises i denne brugerhåndbog, kan være anderledes på den printer, som du anvender. Hvis du får adgang til printergenskaberne via mappen Printere, kan du få vist yderligere Windows-baserede faner (se i brugerhåndbogen til Windows) og fanen Printer (se ”Fanen Printer” på side 14). BEMÆRKNINGER: • De fleste Windows-programmer overskriver de indstillinger, du angiver i printerdriveren. Rediger alle de tilgængelige printerindstillinger i programmet først, og rediger derefter de resterende indstillinger i printerdriveren. • De ændringer, du foretager, forbliver kun aktive, mens du bruger det aktuelle program. Hvis du vil gøre disse ændringer permanente, skal du foretage dem i mappen Printere. • Følgende procedure gælder for Windows XP. Hvis du bruger andre Windows-operativsystemer, henvises du til den tilhørende Windowsbrugerhåndbog eller online Hjælp. 1. Klik på knappen Start i Windows. 2. Vælg Printere og faxenheder. 3. Marker printerdriverikonet. 4. Højreklik på printerdriverikonet, og vælg Udskriftsindstillinger. 5. Rediger indstillingerne på hver fane, og klik på OK. Fanen Layout Fanen Layout indeholder indstillinger, hvor du kan justere, hvordan dokumentet skal se ud på den udskrevne side. Layout Options omfatter Multiple Pages per Side og Poster Printing. Se ”Udskrivning af et dokument” på side 10, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger om, hvordan du får adgang til printeregenskaberne. Paper Orientation Paper Orientation bestemmer, i hvilken retning oplysningerne udskrives på en side. • Portrait udskriver på tværs af sidebredden som i et brev. • Landscape udskriver på tværs af sidelængden som på et regneark. • Rotate giver dig mulighed for at rotere siden det valgte antal grader. Layout Options Layout Options giver dig mulighed for at vælge avancerede udskriftsindstillinger. Du kan vælge Multiple Pages per Side og Poster Printing. • Se ”Udskrivning af flere sider på ét ark papir (N-op-udskrivning)” på side 16, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger. • Se ”Udskrivning af poster” på side 17, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger. • Se ”Udskrivning af brochurer” på side 17, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger. Double-sided Printing Double-sided Printing giver dig mulighed for at udskrive på begge sider af papiret. Hvis denne indstilling ikke vises, har din printer ikke denne funktion. • Se ”Udskrivning på begge sider af papiret” på side 18, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger. Stående LiggendeGrundlæggende udskrivning 12 Fanen Papir Brug følgende indstillinger til at angive de grundlæggende papirhåndteringsspecifikationer, når du har åbnet vinduet med printeregenskaber. Se ”Udskrivning af et dokument” på side 10, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger om, hvordan du får adgang til printeregenskaberne. Klik på fanen Paper for at få adgang til forskellige papiregenskaber. Copies Copies giver dig mulighed for at vælge det antal kopier, der skal udskrives. Du kan angive fra 1 til 999 kopier. Paper Options Size Size giver dig mulighed for at angive størrelsen på det papir, du har lagt i bakken. Hvis den pågældende størrelse ikke findes på listen Size, kan du klikke på Custom. Når vinduet Custom Paper Setting vises, kan du angive papirstørrelsen og klikke på OK. Indstillingen vises nu på listen, så du kan vælge den. Source Sørg for, at Source er angivet til den tilsvarende papirbakke. Brug Multi-Purpose Tray, når du udskriver på specielle materialer som konvolutter og transparenter. Du skal lægge et ark i den manuelle bakke eller flerfunktionsbakken ad gangen. Hvis papirkilden er indstillet til Auto Selection, henter printeren automatisk udskriftsmateriale i følgende rækkefølge: Den manuelle bakke eller flerfunktionsbakken, bakke 1, ekstrabakke 2. Type Indstil Type, så det svarer til papiret i bakken, hvorfra du vil udskrive. På den måde får du den bedste udskrift. Hvis ikke, svarer udskriftskvaliteten muligvis ikke til det, der ønskes. Thin Paper: 90~105 g/m2 tykt papir. Thick Paper: 60~70 g/m2 tyndt papir. Bond Paper: Vælg denne indstilling, når du bruger kontraktpapir. Cotton Paper: 75~90 g/m2 bomuldspapir, f.eks. Gilbert 25 % og Gilbert 100 %. Archive Paper: Vælg denne indstilling, hvis du har brug for at opbevare udskrifter i en længere periode, f.eks. i et arkiv.. Plain Paper: Normalt almindeligt papir. Vælg denne type, hvis printeren er monokrom og udskriver på 60 g/m2 bomuldspapir. Recycled Paper: 75~90 g/m2 genbrugspapir. Color Paper: 75~90 g/m2 papir med farvet baggrund. First Page Denne egenskab giver dig mulighed for at udskrive den første side på en anden type papir end resten af dokumentet. Du kan vælge papirkilden for den første side. Ilæg f.eks. tykt karton til den første side i flerfunktionsbakken og almindeligt papir i bakke1. Vælg derefter Tray1 under Source og Multi-Purpose Tray under First Page. Hvis denne indstilling ikke vises, har din printer ikke denne funktion. Scaling Printing Scaling Printing giver dig mulighed for automatisk eller manuelt at skalere udskriftsjobbet på en side. Du kan vælge mellem None, Reduce/ Enlarge og Fit to Page. • Se ”Udskrivning af et formindsket eller forstørret dokument” på side 18, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger. • Se, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger ”Tilpasning af dokumentet til en valgt papirstørrelse” på side 18.Grundlæggende udskrivning 13 Fanen Grafik Du kan benytte de følgende indstillinger for grafik til at justere udskriftskvaliteten, så den passer til dine specifikke behov. Se ”Udskrivning af et dokument” på side 10, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger om, hvordan du får adgang til printeregenskaberne. Klik på fanen Graphic for at få vist de egenskaber, der vises herunder. Quality Hvilke opløsningsindstillinger, du kan vælge, kan variere afhængig af printermodellen. Jo højere indstilling, desto skarpere bliver de udskrevne tegn og den udskrevne grafik. En højere indstilling kan forlænge den tid, det tager at udskrive et dokument. Color Mode Du kan vælge farveindstillinger. Indstillingen Color giver typisk den bedste udskriftskvalitet til farvedokumenter. Vælg Grayscale, hvis du vil udskrive et farvedokument i gråtoner. Hvis du vil justere farveindstillingerne manuelt, skal du vælge Manual og klikke på knappen Color Adjust Color Matching. • Copies Setting : In order to use this option, first you need to set total number of copies from Paper tab. Hvis du udskriver flere kopier, og nogle af kopierne skal udskrives i farve, mens andre skal udskrives i gråtoner, skal du bruge denne indstilling og vælge antallet af kopier i gråtoner. • Color Adjust: Du kan justere udseendet af billederne ved at ændre indstillingerne under indstillingen Levels. • Color Matching: Du kan få printerens udskriftsfarver til at stemme overens med farverne på skærmen med indstillingen Settings. Advanced Options Du kan angive avancerede indstillinger ved at klikke på knappen Advanced Options. • Raster Compression: Denne indstilling fastsætter komprimeringsniveauet for billeder ved overførsel af data fra en computer til en printer. Hvis du sætter denne indstilling til Maksimum, øges udskrivningshastigheden, men udskriftskvaliteten vil være lav. Denne indstilling er kun tilgængelig, når du bruger PCL 6- printerdriveren. • TrueType Options: Denne indstilling bestemmer, hvad driveren fortæller printeren om, hvordan teksten i dokumentet skal afbildes. Vælg den indstilling, der svarer til dokumentets status. Denne indstilling er kun tilgængelig, når du bruger PCL 6-printerdriveren. - Download as Outline: Når denne indstilling er valgt, henter printeren alle TrueType-skrifttyper, der bruges i dokumentet, og som ikke allerede er gemt (resident) i printeren. Hvis skrifttyperne efter udskrivning af et dokument ikke er udskrevet korrekt, skal du vælge Hent som bitmap-billede og udskive dokumentet igen. Indstillingen Hent som bitmap-billede bruges ofte ved udskrivning fra Adobeprogrammer. Denne indstilling er kun tilgængelig, når du bruger PCL 6-printerdriveren. - Download as Bitmap: Når denne indstilling er valgt, henter driveren skrifttypedata som bitmapbilleder. Dokumenter med komplicerede skrifttyper, f.eks. koreansk eller kinesisk eller visse andre skrifttyper udskrives hurtigere med denne indstilling. Denne indstilling er kun tilgængelig, når du bruger PCL 6-printerdriveren. - Print as Graphics: Når denne indstilling er valgt henter driveren alle TrueType-skrifttyper som grafik. Når du udskriver dokumenter med stort indhold af grafik og relativt få TrueType-skrifttyper, kan udskrivningshastigheden forøges, hvis denne indstilling er valgt. Denne indstilling er kun tilgængelig, når du bruger PCL 6- printerdriveren. • Print all text in black: Når afkrydsningsfeltet Print all text in black er markeret, udskrives alt tekst i dokumentet med sort, uanset hvilken farve det vises i på skærmen. • Print All Text To Darken: Når afkrydsningsfeltet Print All Text To Darken er markeret, bliver al tekst i dokumentet udskrevet mørkere end i et normalt dokument. • Grayscale Enhancement: Tryk på fanen Smart Color. Den giver brugerne mulighed for at bevare detaljerne i naturfotos og forbedre kontrasten og læsbarheden af gråtonefarver i forbindelse med udskrivning af farvedokumenter i gråtoner. • Fine Edge: Tryk på fanen Smart Color. Den giver brugerne mulighed for at fremhæve tekstkanter og tynde linjer for at forbedre læsbarheden og for at ligestille hver enkelt farvekanalregistrering, når der printes i farver. Denne indstilling er kun tilgængelig, når du bruger SPL-printerdriveren. Grundlæggende udskrivning 14 Fanen Ekstra Du kan vælge outputindstillinger for dokumentet. Se ”Udskrivning af et dokument” på side 10, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger om, hvordan du får adgang til printeregenskaberne. Klik på fanen Other Options for at få adgang til følgende funktion: Watermark Du kan oprette et baggrundstekstbillede, der skal udskrives på hver side af dokumentet. Se ”Brug af vandmærker” på side 19, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger. Overlay Overlays benyttes hyppigt i stedet for fortrykte formularer og brevpapir. Se ”Brug af overlays” på side 20, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger. Output Options • Print Subset: Du kan angive den rækkefølge, som siderne skal udskrives i. Vælg udskrivningsrækkefølgen på rullelisten. - Normal (1,2,3): Printeren udskriver alle sider fra den første til den sidste. - Reverse All Pages (3,2,1): Printeren udskriver alle sider fra den sidste til den første. - Print Odd Pages: Printeren udskriver kun sider med ulige sidenumre. - Print Even Pages: Printeren udskriver kun sider med lige sidenumre. • Use Printer Fonts: Når Benyt skrifttyper i printeren er markeret, bruger printeren de skrifttyper, der er gemt i dens hukommelse (residente skrifttyper) til at udskrive dokumentet i stedet for at hente de skrifttyper, der bruges i dokumentet. Da overførsel af skrifttyper er tidskrævende, kan valg af denne indstilling øge udskrivningshastigheden. Hvis der bruges printerskrifttyper, forsøger printeren at afstemme de skrifttyper, der bruges i dokumentet, med de skrifttyper, der er gemt i dens hukommelse. Hvis du imidlertid bruger skrifttyper i dokumentet, der er meget forskellige fra de skrifttyper, der er residente i printeren, kan udskriften forekomme meget forskellig fra, hvordan den ser ud på skærmen. Denne indstilling er kun tilgængelig, når du bruger PCL 6-printerdriveren. • Save as Form for Overlay: Vælg Gem som formular til overlay for at gemme dokumentet som en formularfil (C:\FORMOVER\*.FOM). Så snart denne indstilling er valgt, kræver printerdriveren filnavnet og destinationsstien, hver gang du udskriver. Hvis du ønsker at forudindstille filnavnet og angive stien, skal du klikke på knappen i udskriftsområdet og skrive filnavnet og angive stien. Denne indstilling er kun tilgængelig, når du bruger PCL 6-printerdriveren. Job type Dialogboksen Udskriv og gem giver dig mulighed for at vælge, hvordan du udskriver og gemmer udskriftsfilen ved brug af harddisken (ekstraudstyr). Nogle printere understøtter ikke denne funktion. Brug af online hjælpefilen • Hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger om Job type, skal du klikke på i øverste højre hjørne af vinduet. Vinduet Hjælp til Job type åbnes og giver dig mulighed for at få vist skærmhjælp til Job type. Fanen Om Brug fanen About til at få vist meddelelsen om ophavsret og driverens versionsnummer. Hvis du har en internetbrowser, kan du oprette forbindelse til internettet ved at klikke på ikonet for webstedet. Se ”Udskrivning af et dokument” på side 10, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger om, hvordan du får adgang til printeregenskaberne. Fanen Printer Hvis du får adgang til printeregenskaberne via mappen Printers, kan du se fanen Printer. Du kan angive printerkonfigurationen. Følgende procedure gælder for Windows XP. Hvis du bruger andre Windows-operativsystemer, henvises du til den tilhørende Windowsbrugerhåndbog eller online Hjælp. 1 Klik på menuen Start i Windows. 2 Vælg Printere og faxenheder. 3 Marker printerdriverikonet. 4 Højreklik på printerdriverikonet, og vælg Egenskaber. 5 Klik på fanen Printer, og angiv indstillingerne. Brug af en foretrukken indstilling Indstillingen Favorites, som vises på hver af egenskabsfanerne, giver dig mulighed for at gemme de aktuelle egenskabsindstillinger til fremtidig brug. Sådan gemmer du en indstilling for Favorites: 1 Rediger indstillingerne på hver fane efter behov. Grundlæggende udskrivning 15 2 Indtast et navn for indstillingen i feltet Favorites. 3 Klik på Save. Når du gemmer Favorites, gemmes alle aktuelle driverindstillinger. Hvis du vil bruge en gemt indstilling, skal du markere den på rullelisten Favorites. Printeren er nu indstillet til at udskrive i overensstemmelse med den foretrukne indstilling, du har valgt. Hvis du vil slette en indstilling for Foretrukne, skal du markere den på listen og klikke på Delete. Du kan også gendanne printerdriverens standardindstillinger ved at markere Printer Default på listen. Brug af Hjælp Printeren har en hjælpeskærm, der kan aktiveres ved at klikke på knappen Help i vinduet med printeregenskaber. Disse hjælpeskærme giver detaljerede oplysninger om de funktioner, som printerdriveren giver adgang til. Du kan også klikke på i øverste højre hjørne og derefter på enhver af egenskaberne. Avanceret udskrivning 16 3 Avanceret udskrivning I dette kapitel forklares printerens udskriftsindstillinger og avancerede udskriftsfunktioner. BEMÆRK: • Printerdrivervinduet Egenskaber, der vises i denne brugerhåndbog, kan være anderledes på den printer, som du anvender. Men sammensætningen af vinduet med printeregenskaber er ens. • Hvis du har brug for at kende det nøjagtige navn på printeren, kan du se på den medfølgende cd-rom. Dette kapitel omfatter: • Udskrivning af flere sider på ét ark papir (N-op-udskrivning) • Udskrivning af poster • Udskrivning af brochurer • Udskrivning på begge sider af papiret • Udskrivning af et formindsket eller forstørret dokument • Tilpasning af dokumentet til en valgt papirstørrelse • Brug af vandmærker • Brug af overlays Udskrivning af flere sider på ét ark papir (N-op-udskrivning) Du kan vælge det antal sider du vil udskrive på et enkelt ark papir. Hvis du vil udskrive mere end en side pr. ark, reduceres sidernes størrelse, og de arrangeres i den rækkefølge, du angiver. Du kan udskrive op til 16 sider på et ark. 1 Hvis du vil ændre indstillingerne for udskrivning fra programmet, skal du åbne egenskaberne for printeren. Se ”Udskrivning af et dokument” på side 10. 2 Vælg fanen Layout, og vælg Multiple Pages per Side på rullelisten Layout Type. 3 Vælg det antal sider, du vil udskrive pr. ark (1, 2, 4, 6, 9 eller 16) på rullelisten Pages per Side. 4 Vælg siderækkefølgen på rullelisten Page Order, efter behov. Marker Print Page Border for at udskrive en kant omkring hver side på arket. 5 Klik på fanen Paper, og vælg papirkilde, -størrelse og -type. 6 Klik på OK, og udskriv dokumentet. 1 2 3 4Avanceret udskrivning 17 Udskrivning af poster Med denne funktion kan du udskrive et enkeltsidet dokument på 4, 9 eller 16 ark papir, så de bagefter kan sættes sammen til et dokument i posterstørrelse. 1 Hvis du vil ændre indstillingerne for udskrivning fra programmet, skal du åbne egenskaberne for printeren. Se ”Udskrivning af et dokument” på side 10. 2 Klik på fanen Layout, og vælg Poster Printing på rullelisten Layout Type. 3 Konfigurer posterindstillingen: Du kan vælge et sidelayout på Poster<2x2>, Poster<3x3>, Poster<4x4> eller Custom. Hvis du vælger Poster<2x2>, vil udskriften automatisk blive fordelt på 4 fysiske sider. Hvis indstillingen Brugerdefineret er valgt, kan du forstørre originalen med 150 % til 400 %. Alt afhængigt af forstørrelsesgraden justeres sidelayoutet automatisk til Poster<2x2>, Poster<3x3>, Poster<4x4>. Angiv en overlapning i millimeter eller tommer for at gøre det lettere at sætte arkene sammen. 4 Klik på fanen Paper, og vælg papirkilde, -størrelse og -type. 5 Klik på OK, og udskriv dokumentet. Du kan færdiggøre posteren ved at sætte arkene sammen. 0,15 tommer 0,15 tommer Udskrivning af brochurer Med funktionen Brochureudskrivning kan du udskrive på begge sider af papiret og arrangere siderne, så papiret efter udskrivningen kan foldes på midten og danne en brochure. 1 Hvis du vil ændre indstillingerne for udskrivning fra programmet, skal du ind i printeregenskaberne. Se ”Udskrivning af et dokument” på side 10. 2 Vælg fanen Layout, og vælg Booklet Printing på rullelisten Layout Type. BEMÆRK: Indstillingen Booklet Printing er ikke tilgængelig for alle papirstørrelser. Hvis du vil finde den tilgængelige papirstørrelse for denne funktion, skal du vælge papirstørrelsen i indstillingen Size på fanen Paper og derefter kontrollere, at Booklet Printing er aktiveret på rullelisten Layout Type på fanen Layout. 3 Klik på fanen Paper , og vælg papirkilde, -format og -type. 4 Klik på OK, og udskriv dokumentet. 5 Fold siderne, og hæft dem sammen, når de er udskrevet. 8 9 8 9Avanceret udskrivning 18 Udskrivning på begge sider af papiret Du kan udskrive på begge sider af et ark papir. Før du udskriver, skal du angive udskriftsretningen. Følgende indstillinger er tilgængelige: • Printer Setting – hvis du vælger denne indstilling, bestemmes denne egenskab af den indstilling, du har valgt på printerens kontrolpanel. Hvis denne indstilling ikke vises, har din printer ikke denne funktion. • None • Long Edge, som er det konventionelle layout, der anvendes i bogbinding. • Short Edge, som er den indbindingstype, der oftest bruges i kalendere. • Omvendt duplexudskrivning – giver dig mulighed for at vælge den generelle udskrivningsrækkefølge i modsætning til duplexudskrivningsrækkefølge. Hvis denne indstilling ikke vises, har din printer ikke denne funktion. BEMÆRK! Skriv ikke på begge sider af etiketter, transparenter, konvolutter eller tykt papir. Dette kan resultere i papirstop og beskadigelse af printeren. 1 Hvis du vil ændre indstillingerne for udskrivning fra programmet, skal du åbne egenskaberne for printeren. ”Udskrivning af et dokument” på side 10. 2 Vælg papirretning på fanen Layout. 3 Vælg den ønskede indstilling for duplexindbinding i afsnittet Double-sided Printing. 4 Klik på fanen Paper, og vælg papirkilde, -format og -type. 5 Klik på OK, og udskriv dokumentet. BEMÆRK! Hvis printeren ikke har en duplexenhed, skal du fuldføre udskriftsjobbet manuelt. Printeren udskriver hver anden side af dokumentet først. Efter udskrivning af den første side af jobbet, vises vinduet Udskrivningstip. Følg vejledningen på skærmen for at fuldføre udskriftsjobbet. ▲ Lang kant ▲ Kort kant 2 5 3 2 5 3 2 5 3 2 5 3 Udskrivning af et formindsket eller forstørret dokument Du kan ændre størrelsen på en sides indhold, så det vises større eller mindre på den udskrevne side. 1 Hvis du vil ændre indstillingerne for udskrivning fra programmet, skal du åbne egenskaberne for printeren. Se ”Udskrivning af et dokument” på side 10. 2 Vælg fanen Paper, og vælg Reduce/Enlarge på rullelisten Output size. 3 Angive skaleringsgraden i feltet Percentage. Du kan også klikke på knappen eller . 4 Vælg papirkilde, -størrelse og -type under Paper Options. 5 Klik på OK, og udskriv dokumentet. Tilpasning af dokumentet til en valgt papirstørrelse Med denne printerfunktion kan du skalere udskriftsjobbet til enhver papirstørrelse, uanset den digitale størrelse på dokumentet. Dette kan være nyttigt, hvis du vil undersøge små detaljer på et lille dokument. 1 Hvis du vil ændre indstillingerne for udskrivning fra programmet, skal du åbne egenskaberne for printeren. Se ”Udskrivning af et dokument” på side 10. 2 Vælg fanen Paper, og vælg Fit to Page på rullelisten Output size. 3 Vælg den korrekte størrelse på rullelisten Unskriftsstørrelse . 4 Vælg papirkilde, -størrelse og -type under Paper Options. 5 Klik på OK, og udskriv dokumentet. AAvanceret udskrivning 19 Brug af vandmærker Indstillingen Vandmærke giver dig mulighed for at udskrive tekst hen over et eksisterende dokument. Du kunne f.eks. ønske ordene ”KLADDE” eller ”FORTROLIGT” skrevet med store grå bogstaver diagonalt hen over den første eller alle siderne i et dokument. Der findes allerede adskillige foruddefinerede vandmærker i printeren. Disse kan redigeres, eller der kan tilføjes nye på listen. Brug af et eksisterende vandmærke 1 Hvis du vil ændre indstillingerne for udskrivning fra programmet, skal du åbne egenskaberne for printeren. Se ”Udskrivning af et dokument” på side 10. 2 Klik på fanen Other Options, og marker det ønskede vandmærke på rullelisten Watermark. Du vil kunne se det valgte vandmærke på eksempelbilledet. 3 Klik på OK, og start udskrivningen. BEMÆRK: Eksempelbilledet viser, hvordan siden vil se ud, når den er udskrevet. Oprettelse af et vandmærke 1 Hvis du vil ændre indstillingerne for udskrivning fra programmet, skal du åbne egenskaberne for printeren. Se ”Udskrivning af et dokument” på side 10. 2 Klik på fanen Other Options, og klik på knappen Edit i sektionen Watermark. Vinduet Edit Watermark vises. 3 Skriv vandmærketeksten i tekstfeltet Watermark Message. Du kan indtaste op til 40 tegn. Teksten vises i eksempelvinduet. Når afkrydsningsfeltet First Page Only er markeret, udskrives vandmærket kun på den første side. 4 Vælg indstillinger for vandmærket. Du kan vælge skrifttypenavn, typografi, størrelse eller gråskalaniveau i sektionen Font Attributes og angive vinklen på vandmærket i sektionen Message Angle. 5 Klik på Add for at tilføje et nyt vandmærke på listen. 6 Når du er færdig med redigeringen, skal du klikke på OK og starte udskrivningen. Hvis du vil stoppe udskrivning af vandmærket, skal du markere (No Watermark) på rullelisten Watermark. Redigering af et vandmærke 1 Hvis du vil ændre indstillingerne for udskrivning fra programmet, skal du åbne egenskaberne for printeren. Se ”Udskrivning af et dokument” på side 10. 2 Klik på fanen Other Options, og klik på knappen Edit i sektionen Watermark. Vinduet Edit Watermark vises. 3 Vælg det vandmærke, du vil redigere, på listen Current Watermarks. Nu kan du ændre vandmærkets tekst og øvrige indstillinger. 4 Klik på Update for at gemme ændringerne. 5 Klik på OK, indtil vinduet Udskriv afsluttes. Sletning af et vandmærke 1 Hvis du vil ændre indstillingerne for udskrivning fra programmet, skal du åbne egenskaberne for printeren. Se ”Udskrivning af et dokument” på side 10. 2 Vælg fanen Other Options, og klik på knappen Edit i sektionen Vandmærke. Vinduet Edit Watermark vises. 3 Marker det vandmærke, du vil slette, på listen Current Watermarks, og klik på Delete. 4 Klik på OK, indtil vinduet Udskriv afsluttes.Avanceret udskrivning 20 Brug af overlays Hvad er et overlay? Et overlay er tekst og/eller grafik, der er gemt på computerens harddisk i et specielt filformat, og som kan udskrives på alle dokumenter. Overlays benyttes hyppigt i stedet for fortrykte formularer og brevpapir. I stedet for at benytte fortrykt brevpapir kan du oprette et overlay, der indeholder præcis samme oplysninger som på dit brevpapir. Hvis du vil udskrive et brev på firmaets brevpapir, behøver du ikke at lægge fortrykt papir i printeren. Du behøver blot at indstille printeren til at udskrive brevhovedet som overlay på dokumentet. Oprettelse af et nyt sideoverlay For at kunne benytte et sideoverlay skal du oprette et nyt sideoverlay med dit logo eller billede. 1 Opret, eller åbn et dokument med den tekst og/eller grafik, der skal bruges i det nye sideoverlay. Placer elementerne, præcis som du ønsker dem udskrevet, på det nye overlay. 2 Hvis du vil gemme dokumentet som et overlay, skal du åbne egenskaberne for printeren. Se ”Udskrivning af et dokument” på side 10. 3 Klik på fanen Other Options, og klik på knappen Edit i sektionen Overlay. 4 Klik på Create Overlay i vinduet Rediger overlay. 5 Skriv et navn på op til otte tegn i feltet File name i vinduet Opret overlay. Vælg destinationsstien, efter behov. (Standard er C:\Formover.) 6 Klik på Save. Navnet vises i feltet Overlay List. 7 Klik på OK eller Yes for at afslutte oprettelsen. Filen udskrives ikke. Den gemmes i stedet på computerens harddisk. BEMÆRK: Overlayet skal have den samme størrelse som de dokumenter, du vil udskrive det på. Opret ikke et overlay med et vandmærke. WORLD BEST Dear ABC Regards WORLD BEST Anvendelse af sideoverlay Når du har oprettet et overlay, er det klar til at blive udskrevet sammen med et dokument. Sådan udskriver du et overlay sammen med et dokument: 1 Opret, eller åbn det dokument, du vil udskrive. 2 Hvis du vil ændre indstillingerne for udskrivning fra programmet, skal du åbne egenskaberne for printeren. Se ”Udskrivning af et dokument” på side 10. 3 Klik på fanen Other Options. 4 Marker det ønskede overlay på rullelisten Overlay. 5 Hvis den ønskede overlayfil ikke vises på listen Overlay, skal du klikke på knappen Edit og Load Overlay og markere overlayfilen. Hvis du har gemt den overlayfil, du vil bruge, i en ekstern kilde, kan du også indlæse filen fra vinduet Load Overlay. Klik på Open, når du har markeret filen. Filen vises i feltet Overlay List og er tilgængelig for udskrivning. Marker overlayet i feltet Overlay List. 6 Klik om nødvendigt på Confirm Page Overlay When Printing. Hvis dette afkrydsningsfelt er markeret, vises der en meddelelsesboks, hver gang du sender et dokument til udskrivning, hvor du bliver bedt om at bekræfte, at du ønsker at udskrive et overlay sammen med dokumentet. Hvis afkrydsningsfeltet ikke er markeret, og der er markeret et overlay, udskrives overlayet automatisk sammen med dokumentet. 7 Klik på OK eller Yes, indtil udskrivningen begynder. Det markerede overlay hentes sammen med udskriftsjobbet og udskrives med dokumentet. BEMÆRK: Overlayets opløsningsgrad skal være den samme som opløsningsgraden for det dokument, du vil udskrive overlayet sammen med. Sletning af et sideoverlay Du kan slette sideoverlay, du ikke længere bruger. 1 Klik på fanen Other Options i vinduet med printeregenskaber. 2 Klik på knappen Edit i sektionen Overlay. 3 Marker det overlay, du vil udskrive, i feltet Overlay List. 4 Klik på Delete Overlay. 5 Klik på Yes, når der vises en bekæftelsesmeddelelse. 6 Klik på OK, indtil vinduet Udskriv afsluttes.Brug af Windows' PostScript-driver 21 4 Brug af Windows' PostScript-driver Hvis du ønsker at bruge den PostScript-driver, der findes på systemcd'en, til at udskrive et dokument. PPD'er giver i kombination med PostScript-driveren adgang til printerfunktionerne og gør det muligt for computeren at kommunikere med printeren. Der findes et installationsprogram til PPD'erne på den medfølgende software-cd. Dette kapitel omfatter: Printerindstillinger Du kan bruge vinduet med printeregenskaber til at få adgang til alle de oplysninger, du har brug for vedrørende din printer. Når printeregenskaberne vises, kan du gennemse og redigere de viste indstillinger, så de svarer til dine aktuelle behov. Dit printeregenskabsvindue kan være anderledes, afhængig af dit operativsystem. Denne softwarebrugerhåndbog viser vinduet Egenskaber, som det ser ud i Windows XP. Printerdrivervinduet Egenskaber, der vises i denne brugerhåndbog, kan være anderledes på den printer, som du anvender. BEMÆRK! • De fleste Windows-programmer overskriver de indstillinger, du angiver i printerdriveren. Rediger alle de tilgængelige printerindstillinger i programmet først, og rediger derefter de resterende indstillinger i printerdriveren. • De indstillinger, du ændrer, påvirker kun det aktuelle program. Hvis du vil gøre disse ændringer permanente, skal du foretage dem i mappen Printere. • Følgende procedure gælder for Windows XP. Hvis du bruger andre Windows-operativsystemer, henvises du til den tilhørende Windowsbrugerhåndbog eller online Hjælp. 1. Klik på knappen Start i Windows. 2. Vælg Printere og faxenheder. 3. Marker printerdriverikonet. 4. Højreklik på printerdriverikonet, og vælg Udskriftsindstillinger. 5. Rediger indstillingerne på hver fane, og klik på OK. Avanceret Du kan bruge avancerede indstillinger ved at klikke på knappen Avanceret. • Paper/Output – denne indstilling giver dig mulighed for at vælge størrelsen på det papir, der er i bakken. • Graphic – denne indstilling giver dig mulighed for at justere udskriftskvaliteten, så den passer til dine udskrivningsbehov. • Document Options – disse indstillinger giver dig mulighed for at angive PostScript-indstillinger eller printerfunktioner. Brug af Hjælp Du kan klikke på i øverste højre hjørne i vinduet og derefter på enhver af indstillingerne. Deling af printeren lokalt 22 5 Deling af printeren lokalt Printeren kan tilsluttes direkte til en valgt computer på netværket, som kaldes ”værtscomputer”. Følgende procedure gælder for Windows XP. Til andre Windowsoperativsystemer henvises du til den tilhørende Windows-brugerhåndbog eller online Hjælp. BEMÆRKNINGER! • Kontroller, hvilke operativsystemer der er kompatible med printeren. Se i afsnittet om operativsystemkompatibilitet i printerspecifikationerne i brugerhåndbogen til printeren. • Hvis du har bruge for at kende det nøjagtige navn på printeren, kan du se på den medfølgende cd-rom. Konfiguration af en værtscomputer 1 Start Windows. 2 Vælg Printere og faxenheder i menuen Start. 3 Dobbeltklik på printerdriverikonet. 4 Vælg Printer og derefter Deling. 5 Marker feltet Del denne printer. 6 Udfyld feltet Sharenavn, og klik derefter på OK. Konfiguration af en klientcomputer 1 Højreklik på knappen Start i Windows, og vælg Stifinder. 2 Vælg Netværkssteder,, og højreklik derefter på Søg efter computere. 3 Skriv IP-adressen på værtscomputeren i feltet Computernavn, og klik derefter på Søg. (Hvis værtscomputeren kræver Brugernavn og Adgangskode, skal du skrive bruger-id’et og adgangskoden til værtscomputerens konto.) 4 Dobbeltklik på Printere og faxenheder. 5 Højreklik på ikonet til printerdriveren, og vælg Opret forbindelse. 6 Klik på Ja, hvis installationsbekræftelsen vises.Scanning 23 6 Scanning Med scanning kan du konvertere billeder og tekst til digitale filer på computeren. Derefter kan du faxe eller sende filerne med e-mail, få dem vist på dit websted eller bruge dem til at oprette projekter, som du kan udskrive ved brug af SmarThru-software eller WIA-driveren. Dette kapitel indeholder: • SmarThru Office • Scanning med TWAIN-kompatible programmer • Scanning ved brug af WIA-driveren BEMÆRKNINGER: • Kontroller, hvilke operativsystemer, der er kompatible med printeren. Se i afsnittet om operativsystemkompatibilitet i printerspecifikationerne i brugerhåndbogen til printeren. • Du kan kontrollere printernavnet på den medfølgende Drivers and Utilities-cd-rom. • Den maksimale opløsning, der kan opnås, afhænger af forskellige faktorer, herunder computerhastighed, tilgængelig diskplads, hukommelse, størrelsen af det scannede billede og indstillinger for bitdybde. Afhængig af systemet og det du scanner, er det ikke sikkert, at du kan scanne ved bestemte opløsninger, især ikke hvis du bruger forbedret dpi. SmarThru Office Den medfølgende Drivers and Utilities-cd-rom indeholder SmarThru Office. SmarThru Office indeholder praktiske funktioner, som du kan bruge til maskinen. Sådan starter du SmarThru Office SmarThru Office findes på den medfølgende software-cd. SmarThru Office indeholder praktiske funktioner, som du kan bruge til maskinen. 1 Kontroller, at maskinen og computeren er tændt og korrekt forbundet med hinanden. 2 Når du har installeret SmarThru Office, vises ikonet SmarThru Office på skrivebordet. 3 Dobbeltklik på ikonet SmarThru Office. 4 SmarThru Office vises. Yderligere oplysninger finder du i Help → SmarThru Office Help. Quick Start Guide Denne menu viser hurtigknapper til en række funktioner. Hurtigknapperne omfatter: Categories, Binder, Life Cycle, Scan and OCR, Fix and Enhance og Dell Website. Du kan deaktivere denne menu ved at klikke på ”Do not show this diaglog again”. Brug af SmarThru Office Scanning 1 Klik på scanningsikonet. BEMÆRKNINGER: • I operativsystemet Microsoft ® Windows ® XP kan du bruge startprogrammet til SmarThru Office yderst til højre på proceslinjen til at åbne vinduet Scan Setting. • I andre operativsystemer end Microsoft ® Windows ® XP skal du klikke på SmarThru-ikonet på proceslinjen i Windows for at aktivere startprogrammet til SmarThru Office.Scanning 24 2 Vinduet Scan Setting åbnes. BEMÆRK! Klik på knappen Advanced for at angive flere scanningsindstillinger. 3 Vælg scanningsindstillinger, og klik på Scan. Yderligere oplysninger finder du ved at klikke på Help → SmarThru Office Help. Send to E-mail Du kan sende e-mail, mens du arbejder med SmarThru Office. BEMÆRK! Der kræves et e-mail-klientprogram, f.eks. Outlook Express, for at sende e-mail i SmarThru Office. Proceduren for at sende e-mail kan variere afhængigt af, hvilket e-mail-klientprogram du bruger. 1 Vælg File → Send to → Send By E-mail. 1 Select Scanner Gør det muligt at vælge mellem en lokal scanner eller netværksscanner. 2 Select Profile Gør det muligt at gemme indstillinger regelmæssigt til senere brug. Klik på New Profile for at gemme indstillingen. 3 Scan Settings Gør det muligt at tilpasse indstillingerne til Scan Size og Paper Source. 4 Scan To Gør det muligt at tilpasse indstillingerne til File Name og den placering, scannede data sendes til. 2 Der åbnes en e-mail-klient. 3 Indtast de nødvendige oplysninger, og send din e-mail. Fax Du kan sende e-mails, mens du arbejder med SmarThru Office. 1 Vælg File → Send to → Send By Fax. 2 Vinduet Send Fax åbnes. 3 Skriv de nødvendige oplysninger, og klik på Send Fax. BEMÆRK! Du kan få flere oplysninger om SmarThru Office, hvis du klikker på Help → SmarThru Office Help. Vinduet SmarThru Office Help vises. Du kan få vist skærmhjælpen, der fulgte med programmet SmarThru. Følg trinene nedenfor for at afinstallere SmarThru Office. Før du påbegynder afinstallationen, skal du sikre dig, at alle programmer på computeren er lukkede. a I menuen Start skal du vælge Programmer eller Alle Programmer. b Vælg SmarThru Office, og vælg derefter Uninstall SmarThru Office. c Når computeren beder dig om at bekræfte dit valg, skal du læse erklæringen og klikke på OK. d Klik på Finish. Scanning med TWAIN-kompatible programmer Hvis du vil scanne dokumenter med andre programmer, skal du bruge TWAIN-kompatible programmer, f.eks. Adobe Photoshop. Adobe ® Photoshop ® . Første gang du bruger maskinen til scanning, skal du vælge den som din TWAIN-kilde i det anvendte program. Den grundlæggende scanningsproces omfatter en række forskellige trin: 1 Kontroller, at maskinen og computeren er tændt og korrekt forbundet med hinanden. 2 Anbring et enkelt dokument på glaspladen med tryksiden nedad. Du kan også lægge dokumentet/dokumenterne i r DADF'en med tryksiden opad. 3 Åbn et program, f.eks. Photoshop. 4 Åbn vinduet TWAIN, og angiv de forskellige indstillinger til scanning. 5 Scan og gem det scannede dokument.Scanning 25 BEMÆRK! Følg programmets anvisninger for, hvordan du indlæser et billede. Se i brugerhåndbogen til programmet. Scanning ved brug af WIA-driveren Maskinen understøtter også WIA-driveren (Windows Image Acquisition) til scanning af billeder. WIA er en af de standardkomponenter, der leveres af Microsoft Windows XP, og som fungerer med digitale kameraer og scannere. I modsætning til TWAIN-driveren, giver WIA-driveren dig mulighed for at scanne og nemt manipulere med billeder uden brug af yderligere software. BEMÆRK! WIA-driveren fungerer kun på Windows XP/Vista med USB-port. Windows XP 1 Anbring et enkelt dokument på glaspladen med tryksiden nedad. Du kan også lægge dokumentet/dokumenterne i DADF'en med tryksiden opad. 2 Vælg menuen Start på skrivebordet, vælg Indstillinger, Kontrolpanel og derefter Scannere og kameraer. 3 Dobbeltklik på printerdriverikonet. Guiden Scanner og kamera startes. 4 Vælg dine scanningsindstillinger, og klik på Eksempel for at se, hvordan indstillingerne påvirker billedet. 5 Klik på Næste. 6 Indtast et billednavn, og vælg et filformat og en destination til lagring af billedet. 7 Følg vejledningen på skærmen for at redigere billedet, efter det er kopieret til computeren. Windows Vista 1 Anbring et enkelt dokument på glaspladen med tryksiden nedad. Du kan også lægge dokumentet/dokumenterne i DADF'en med tryksiden opad. 2 Klik på Start → Kontrolpanel → Hardware og lyd → Scannere og kameraer. 3 Klik på Scan et dokument eller billede. Programmet Windows Fax og scanning åbnes automatisk. BEMÆRK! Scannerne vises, hvis brugeren klikker på Vis scannere og kameraer. 4 Klik på Scan, så scannerdriveren åbnes. 5 Vælg dine scanningsindstillinger, og klik på Eksempel for at se, hvordan indstillingerne påvirker billedet. 6 Klik på Scan. BEMÆRK! Hvis du ønsker at afbryde scanningsjobbet, skal du trykke på knappen Annuller i guiden Scanner og kamera.Brug af andre programmer 26 7 Brug af andre programmer Kapitlet omfatter: • Overvågning af printerstatus • Printerindstillingsværktøj • Dell-program til genbestilling af toner • Firmware Update Utility Overvågning af printerstatus Skærmbilledet til overvågning af printerstatus åbnes, når du sender et udskriftsjob til printeren. Vinduet vises kun på computerskærmen. Det afhænger af det resterende tonerniveau, hvordan den åbnede statusovervågningsskærm ser ud. Hvis du er Windows-bruger, skal du fra menuen Start vælge Programmer eller Alle Programmer → Dell → Dell Printers → Dell 2145cn Color Laser MFP → Printer Status Monitor. Programmet Printer Status Monitor viser printerens aktuelle status, hvor meget toner der er tilbage i tonerpatronerne, og forskellige andre oplysninger. Du kan også ændre indstillingerne. • Printing Status: Programmet Printer Status Monitor viser printerens aktuelle status. • Toner Level: Du kan få vist, hvor meget toner der er tilbage i tonerpatronerne. • Order Supplies: Klik for at bestille en ny tonerpatron online. • Br'ugerhåndbog: Giver dig mulighed for at få vist Dell 2145cn Color Laser MFP-brugerhåndbogen. Printerindstillingsværktøj Når du installerer Dell-softwaren, installeres Printer Settings Utility automatisk. Sådan åbnes Printer Settings Utility. 1 Klik på Start → Programmer eller Alle Programmer → Dell → Dell Printers → Dell 2145cn Color Laser MFP → Printer Settings Utility. Vinduet Printer Settings Utility åbnes. 2 Vinduet Printer Settings Utility indeholder flere funktioner. Yderligere oplysninger fås ved at klikke på knappen . Hvis du vil bruge standardindstillingerne, skal du klikke på knappen Printer Default og derefter klikke på Apply. Hvis du vil afslutte, skl du klikke på knappen Exit nederst i vinduet.Brug af andre programmer 27 Dell-program til genbestilling af toner Hvis du vil bestille nye tonerpatroner eller forsyninger fra Dell: 1 Dobbeltklik på ikonet for Dell Toner Reorder Program på skrivebordet. eller Klik på Start → Programmer eller Alle Programmer → Dell → Dell Printers → Dell 2145cn Color Laser MFP → Dell 2145cn MFP Toner Reorder. 2 Vinduet Dell 2145cn MFP Toner Reorder åbnes. Firmware Update Utility Du kan opdatere printerens firmware med Firmware Update Utility. 1 Klik på Start → Programmer eller Alle Programmer → Dell → Dell Printers → Dell 2145cn Color Laser MFP → Firmware Update Utility. Vinduet Firmware Update Utility åbnes. Følg vejledningen på skærmen for at fuldføre firmwareopdateringen.Brug af printeren under Linux 28 8 Brug af printeren under Linux Du kan bruge printeren i et Linux-miljø. Dette kapitel omfatter: • Introduktion • Installation af Unified Linux Driver • Brug af Unified Driver Configurator • Konfiguration af printeregenskaber • Udskrivning af et dokument • Scanning af et dokument Introduktion På den medfølgende cd-rom finder du Dell Unified Linux Driverpakke til brug af maskinen med en Linux-computer. Dell Unified Linux Driver-pakke indeholder printer- og scannerdrivere, som giver dig mulighed for at udskrive dokumenter og scanne billeder. Pakken indeholder også nyttige programmer til konfigurering af maskinen og yderligere behandling af de scannede dokumenter. Når driveren er installeret på Linux-systemet, giver driverpakken dig mulighed for at overvåge en række maskinenheder via hurtige parallelle ECP-porte og USB samtidigt. De hentede dokumenter kan derefter redigeres, udskrives på de samme lokale enheder eller på netværksenheder, sendes med e-mail, overføres til et FTP-sted eller overføres til et eksternt OCR-system. Unified Linux Driver-pakken leveres med et smart og fleksibelt installationsprogram. Du behøver ikke søge efter yderligere komponenter, der kan være nødvendige for Unified Linux Driver-softwaren: Alle krævede pakker overføres til dit system og installeres automatisk - dette er muligt på en lang række af de mest populære Linux-kloner. Installation af Unified Linux Driver Installation af Unified Linux Driver 1 Sørg for, at du slutter maskinen til computeren. Tænd både computeren og maskinen. 2 Når vinduet Administrator Login vises, skal du skrive root i feltet Login og angive systemets adgangskode. BEMÆRK: Du skal logge ind som superbruger (root) for at installere printerprogrammerne. Hvis du ikke er superbruger, skal du spørge systemadministratoren. 3 Læg cd-rom'en med printersoftwaren i cd-rom-drevet. Cd-rom'en kører automatisk. Hvis cd-rom'en ikke kører automatisk, skal du klikke på ikonet nederst på skrivebordet. Nå vinduet Terminal vises, skal du skrive: Hvis cd-rom'en er sekundær master og placeringen, der skal tilsluttes, er /mnt/cdrom, [root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/ cdrom [root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux [root@localhost root]#./install.sh Hvis det stadig ikke er muligt at køre cd-rom’en, skal du indtaste følgende i den viste rækkefølge: [root@localhost root]#umount /dev/hdc [root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/ cdrom BEMÆRK: Installationsprogrammet køres automatisk, hvis du ikke har en softwarepakke installeret og konfigureret til automatisk kørsel. 4 Klik på Next, når velkomstskærmen vises.Brug af printeren under Linux 29 5 Klik på Finish, når installationen er afsluttet. Installationsprogrammet har tilføjet skrivebordsikonet Unified Driver Configurator og gruppen Dell Unified Driver til systemmenuen. Hvis du får problemer, kan du se i den skærmhjælp, der er tilgængelig gennem systemmenuen, eller som kan kaldes på anden måde fra driverpakkens vinduesprogrammer, f.eks. Unified Driver Configurator eller Image Manager. BEMÆRK: Installation af driveren i teksttilstand: Hvis du ikke bruger den grafiske brugergrænseflade, eller hvis driverinstallationen er mislykkedes, er det nødvendigt at bruge driveren i teksttilstand. Følg trin 1 til 3, indtast [root@localhost Linux]# ./ install.sh, og følg herefter instruktionerne på skærmen. Installationen er nu gennemført. Hvis du vil afinstallere driveren, skal du følge ovenstående instruktioner, men i stedet indtaste [root@localhost Linux]# ./uninstall.sh på skærmen. Afinstallation af Unified Linux Driver 1 Når vinduet Administrator Login vises, skal du skrive root i feltet Login og angive systemets adgangskode. BEMÆRK: Det er nødvendigt at logge på som superbruger (root) for at afinstallere printersoftwaren. Hvis du ikke er superbruger, skal du spørge systemadministratoren. 2 Læg cd-rom'en med printersoftwaren i cd-rom-drevet. Cd-rom'en kører automatisk. Hvis cd-rom'en ikke kører automatisk, skal du klikke på ikonet nederst på skrivebordet. Nå vinduet Terminal vises, skal du skrive: Hvis cd-rom'en er sekundær master og placeringen, der skal tilsluttes, er /mnt/cdrom, [root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/ cdrom [root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux [root@localhost root]#./uninstall.sh BEMÆRK: Installationsprogrammet køres automatisk, hvis du ikke har en softwarepakke installeret og konfigureret til automatisk kørsel. 3 Klik på Uninstall. 4 Klik på Next. 5 Klik på Finish.Brug af printeren under Linux 30 Brug af Unified Driver Configurator Unified Linux Driver Configurator er et værktøj, der primært er beregnet til konfiguration af printer- eller MFP-enheder. Da en MFP-enhed kombinerer en printer og en scanner, indeholder Unified Linux Driver Configurator indstillinger, der er logisk grupperet efter printer- og scannerfunktioner. Der er også en speciel MFP-portindstilling, der er ansvarlig for reguleringen af adgangen til en MFP-printer og -scanner via en enkelt I/O-kanal. Når du har installeret Unified Linux driver, oprettes ikonet Unified Linux Driver Configurator på skivebordet. Åbning af Unified Driver Configurator 1 Dobbeltklik på Unified Driver Configurator på skrivebordet. Du kan også klikke på menuikonet Startup og vælge Dell Unified Driver og derefter Unified Driver Configurator. 2 Klik på hver af knapperne i ruden Modules for at skifte til det tilsvarende konfigurationsvindue. Knappen Printers Configuration Knappen Scanners Configuration Knappen Ports Configuration Du kan bruge skærmhjælpen ved at klikke på Help. 3 Når du har ændret konfigurationerne, skal du klikke på Exit for at lukke Unified Driver Configurator. Knappen Printers Configuration Knappen Ports ConfigurationBrug af printeren under Linux 31 Printers Configuration Vinduet Printers Configuration indeholder to faner: Printers og Classes. Fanen Printers Du kan få vist det aktuelle systems printerkonfiguration ved at klikke på printerikonet i venstre side af vinduet Unified Driver Configurator. Du kan bruge følgende printerstyringsknapper: • Refresh: opdaterer listen over tilgængelige printere. • Add Printer: giver dig mulighed for at tilføje en ny printer. • Remove Printer: fjerner den markerede printer. • Set as Default: angiver den aktuelle printer som standardprinter. • Stop/Start: stopper/starter printeren. • Test: giver dig mulighed for at udskrive en testside, hvis du vil kontrollere, om maskinen fungerer korrekt. • Properties: giver dig mulighed for at få vist og ændre printeregenskaber. Yderligere oplysninger finder du på side 32. Viser alle installerede printere. Skifter til Printers Configuration. Viser status, modelnavn og URI på printeren. Fanen Classes Fanen Classes viser en liste over tilgængelige printerklasser. • Refresh: Opdaterer listen over klasser. • Add Class...: Giver dig mulighed for at tilføje en ny printerklasse. • Remove Class: Fjerner den valgte printerklasse. Scanners Configuration I dette vindue kan du overvåge aktiviteten af scannerenheder, få vist listen over installerede Dell MFP-enheder, ændre enhedens egenskaber og scanne billeder. • Properties...: Giver dig mulighed for at ændre scanningsegenskaber og scanne et dokument. Se side 34. Viser status på klassen og antallet af printere i klassen. Viser alle printerklasserne. Skifter til Scanners Configuration. Viser alle installerede scannere. Viser leverandøren, modelnavn og typen på scanneren. Brug af printeren under Linux 32 Ports Configuration I dette vindue kan du få vist listen over tilgængelige porte, kontrollere status for hver port og frigive en port, der er stoppet i optaget-tilstand, når dens ejer af en eller anden grund er afsluttet. • Refresh: Opdaterer listen over tilgængelige porte. • Release port: Frigiver den markerede port. Deling af porte mellem printere og scannere Maskinen kan være tilsluttet en værtscomputer via den parallelle port eller USB-porten. Da MFP-enheden indeholder mere end en enhed (printer og scanner), er det nødvendigt at arrangere den rette adgang til ”bruger”-programmer til disse enheder via den enkelte I/O-port. Dell Unified Linux Driver-pakken indeholder den rette portdelingsfunktion, der bruges af Dell printer- og scannerdrivere. Driverne adresserer deres enheder via såkaldte MFP-porte. Den aktuelle status for enhver MFP-port kan blive vist via vinduet Ports configuration. Portdeling forhindrer dig i at få adgang til en funktionel blok af MFP-enheden, mens en anden blok er i brug. Når du installerer en ny MFP-printer på systemet, anbefales det kraftigt, at du gør dette med hjælp af Unified Driver Configurator. I denne situation vil du blive bedt om at vælge I/ O-port til den nye enhed. Dette valg vil give den mest egnede konfiguration af MFP's funktioner. Scannerdrivere vælger automatisk I/O-porte til MFP-scannere, så de rette indstillinger anvendes som standard. Skifter til Ports Configuration. Viser porttypen, enhed, der er tilsluttet porten, samt status. Viser alle tilgængelige porte. Konfiguration af printeregenskaber Ved at bruge egenskabsvinduet, der vises, når du vælger Printers Configuration, kan du ændre de forskellige printeregenskaber for din maskine. 1 Åbn Unified Driver Configurator. Skift om nødvendigt til vinduet Printers Configuration. 2 Marker din maskine på listen over tilgængelige printere, og klik på Properties. 3 Vinduet Printer Properties åbnes. Følgende fem faner vises øverst i vinduet: •General: giver dig mulighed for at ændre printerplacering og navn. Det navn, der angives under denne fane, vises på printerlisten i Printers Configuration. •Connection: giver dig mulighed for at få vist eller vælge en anden port. Hvis du ændrer printerport fra USB til parallel eller omvendt, skal du omkonfigurere printerporten under denne fane. •Driver: giver dig mulighed for at få vist eller vælge en anden driver. Hvis du klikker på Options, kan du angive standardindstillinger for enheden. •Jobs: viser listen over udskriftsjob. Klik på Cancel job for at annullere det valgte job, og marker afkrydsningsfeltet Show completed jobs for at få vist tidligere job på listen. •Classes: viser den klasse, som printeren er i. Klik på Add to Class for at tilføje printeren i en bestemt klasse, eller klik på Remove from Class for at fjerne printeren fra den valgte klasse. 4 Klik på OK for at anvende ændringerne og lukke vinduet Printer Properties.Brug af printeren under Linux 33 Udskrivning af et dokument Udskrivning fra programmer Der er en lang række Linux-programmer, som du kan udskrive fra ved brug af CUPS (Common UNIX Printing System). Du kan udskrive på maskinen fra ethvert af disse programmer. 1 Vælg Print i menuen File i det program, du er ved at bruge. 2 Vælg Print direkte ved brug af lpr. 3 Vælg maskinens modelnavn på printerlisten, og klik på Properties i vinduet LPR GUI. 4 Skift printer og egenskaber for udskriftsjob. Klik her. Følgende fire faner vises øverst i vinduet. •General - giver dig mulighed for at skifte papirformat, papirtype og udskriftsretning for dokumenterne, aktivere duplexudskrivning, tilføje begyndelses- og slutseparationssider samt redigere antallet af sider pr. ark. •Text - giver dig mulighed for at angive sidemargener og angive tekstindstillinger, f.eks. afstand eller kolonner. •Graphics - giver dig mulighed for at angive billedindstillinger, der skal bruges, når der udskrives billeder/filer, f.eks. farveindstillinger, billedstørrelse eller billedposition. •Device - giver dig mulighed for at angive udskriftsopløsning, papirkilde og destination. 5 Klik på Apply for at anvende ændringerne og lukke vinduet Properties. 6 Klik på OK i vinduet LPR GUI for at starte udskrivningen. 7 Vinduet Printing vises, hvor du kan overvåge status for udskriftsjobbet. Hvis du vil afbryde det aktuelle job, skal du klikke på Cancel. Udskrivning af filer Du kan udskrive mange forskellige typer filer på Dell-enheden ved hjælp af CUPS-standardmetoden - direkte fra kommandolinjen. CUPS lpr-hjælpeprogrammet giver dig mulighed for at gøre dette. Men driverpakken erstatter lprstandardværktøjet med et meget mere brugervenligt LPR GUI program. Sådan udskriver du en dokumentfil: 1 Skriv lpr fra Linux shell-kommandolinjen, og tryk på Enter. Vinduet LPR GUI vises. Hvis du kun skriver lpr og trykker på Enter, vises udskriftsvinduet Select file(s) to print først. Marker blot enhver fil, du ønsker at udskrive, og klik på Open. 2 Marker printeren på listen, og skift egenskaber for printer og udskriftsjob i vinduet LPR GUI. Se side 33, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger om egenskabsvinduet. 3 Klik på OK for at starte udskrivningen.Brug af printeren under Linux 34 Scanning af et dokument Du kan scanne et dokument ved hjælp af vinduet Unified Driver Configurator. 1 Dobbeltklik på Unified Driver Configurator på skrivebordet. 2 Klik på knappen for at skifte til Scanners Configuration. 3 Marker scanneren på listen. Hvis du kun har en MFP-enhed, og den er tilsluttet computeren og tændt, vises scanneren på listen og markeres automatisk. Hvis du har to eller flere scannere tilsluttet computeren, kan du når som helst vælge den scanner, du vil bruge. Mens scanningen er i gang på den første scanner, kan du vælge den anden scanner, angive enhedsindstillinger og starte billedscanningen samtidigt. 4 Klik på Properties. 5 Læg det dokument, der skal scannes, i ADF'en (automatisk dokumentføder) med tryksiden opad eller med tryksiden nedad på glaspladen. 6 Klik på Preview i vinduet Scanner Properties. Klik på scanneren. Dokumentet scannes, og eksempelbilledet vises i ruden Preview. 7 Rediger scanningsindstillingerne i afsnittene Image Quality og Scan Area. •Image Quality: giver dig mulighed for at vælge farvekomposition og scanningsopløsning for billedet. •Scan Area: giver dig mulighed for at vælge sidestørrelsen. Med knappen Advanced kan du angive sidestørrelsen manuelt. Hvis du ønsker at bruge en af de foruddefinerede scanningsindstillinger, skal du markere den på rullelisten Job Type. Se side 35, hvis du ønsker oplysninger om de foruddefinerede indstillinger for Job Type. Du kan gendanne standardindstillingen for scanningsindstillingerne ved at klikke på Default. 8 Klik på Scan for at starte scanning, når du er færdig. Statuslinjen vises nederst til venstre i vinduet for at vise dig status på scanningen. Tryk på Cancel for at afbryde scanningen. 9 Det scannede billede vises i den nye Image Editor-fane. Hvis du vil redigere det scannede billede, skal du bruge værktøjslinjen. Se side 35, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger om redigering af et billede. Træk markøren for at angive det billedområde, der skal scannes.Brug af printeren under Linux 35 10 Klik på Save på værktøjslinjen, når du er færdig. 11 Vælg det filbibliotek, hvor du vil gemme billedet, og indtast filnavnet. 12 Klik på Save. Tilføjelse af indstillinger for Job Type Du kan gemme dine scanningsindstillinger, så du kan hente dem til en senere scanning. Sådan gemmer du en ny indstilling for Job Type: 1 Rediger indstillingerne i vinduet Scanner Properties. 2 Klik på Save As. 3 Indtast navnet på indstillingen. 4 Klik på OK. Indstillingen tilføjes på rullelisten Saved Settings. Sådan gemmer du en indstilling for Job Type for det næste scanningsjob: 1 Marker den indstilling, du vil bruge, på rullelisten Job Type. 2 Næste gang du åbner vinduet Scanner Properties, vælges den gemte indstilling automatisk til scanningsjobbet. Sådan slettes en indstilling for Job Type: 1 Marker den indstilling, du vil slette, på rullelisten Job Type. 2 Klik på Delete. Indstillingen slettes fra listen. Brug af Image Editor Vinduet Image Manager indeholder menukommandoer og værktøjer til at redigere det scannede billede. Brug disse værktøjer til at redigere billedet. Du kan bruge følgende værktøjer til at redigere billedet: Hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger om programmet Image Manager, kan du se i skærmhjælpen. Værktøjer Funktion Gemmer billedet. Annullerer den seneste handling. Gendanner den handling, du annullerede. Giver dig mulighed for at flytte gennem billedet. Beskærer det markerede billedområde. Zoomer ud på billedet. Zoomer ind på billedet. Giver dig mulighed for at skalere billedstørrelsen. Du kan indtaste størrelsen manuelt eller angive den grad, der skal skaleres med proportionalt, lodret eller vandret. Giver dig mulighed for at rotere billedet. Du kan vælge antallet af grader på rullelisten. Giver dig mulighed for at vende billedet lodret eller vandret. Giver dig mulighed for at justere lysstyrken eller kontrasten på billedet eller for at invertere billedet. Viser billedets egenskaber.Brug af din printer med en Macintosh 36 10 Brug af din printer med en Macintosh Maskinen understøtter Macintosh-systemer med en indbygget USBgrænseflade eller et 10/100 Base-TX-netværkskort. Når du udskriver en fil fra en Macintosh-computer, kan du bruge PostScript-driveren ved at installere PPD-filen. BEMÆRK! Nogle printere kan ikke bruges som netværksprintere. Kontroller, at printeren understøtter netværksgrænsefladen ved at se i printerspecifikationerne i brugerhåndbogen til printeren. Dette kapitel omfatter: • Installation af software til Macintosh • Afinstallation af printerdriveren • Konfiguration af printeren • Udskrivning • Scanning Installation af software til Macintosh Den cd-rom, der blev leveret sammen med din printer, indeholder en PPD-fil, der giver dig mulighed for at bruge CUPS-driveren eller Apple LaserWriter-driveren (kun tilgængelig, når du bruger en printer, der understøtter PostScript-driveren) til udskrivning på en Macintoshcomputer. Du får også Twain-driveren til scanning på en Macintosh-computer. 1 Sørg for, at slutter printeren til computeren. Tænd for computer og printer. 2 Læg den cd-rom, der blev leveret med printeren i cd-rom-drevet. 3 Dobbeltklik på CD-ROM-ikonet, som vises på Macintoshcomputerens skrivebord. 4 Dobbeltklik på mappen MAC_Installer. 5 Dobbeltklik på ikonet Installer. 6 Indtast adgangskoden, og klik på OK. 7 Vinduet Dell Installer åbnes. Klik på Continue. 8 Vælg Easy Install, og klik på Install. Easy Install anbefales til de fleste brugere. Alle komponenter, der er nødvendige af hensyn til printerens drift, installeres. Hvis du vælger Custom Install, kan du installere individuelle komponenter. 9 Der vises en meddelelse med advarsel om, at alle programmer lukkes. Klik på Continue. 10 Vælg Typical installation for a local printer, og klik derefter på OK. 11 Klik på Quit, når installationen er fuldført. BEMÆRK!: • Hvis du har installeret scannerdriver, skal du trykke på Restart. • Se "Konfiguration af printeren" på side 37, når installationen er fuldført. Afinstallation af printerdriveren Det er nødvendigt at afinstallere, hvis du vil opgradere programmerne, eller hvis installationen mislykkes. 1 Sørg for, at slutter printeren til computeren. Tænd for computer og printer. 2 Læg den cd-rom, der blev leveret med printeren, i cd-romdrevet. 3 Dobbeltklik på CD-ROM-ikonet, som vises på Macintoshcomputerens skrivebord. 4 Dobbeltklik på mappen MAC_Installer. 5 Dobbeltklik på ikonet Installer. 6 Indtast adgangskoden, og klik på OK. 7 Vinduet Dell Installer åbnes. Klik på Continue. 8 Vælg Uninstall, og klik derefter på Uninstall. 9 Der vises en meddelelse med advarsel om, at alle programmer lukkes. Klik på Continue. 10 Klik på Quit, når afinstallationen er gennemført.Brug af din printer med en Macintosh 37 Konfiguration af printeren Konfigurer printeren i henhold til, hvilket kabel du bruger til at slutte printeren til computeren – netværkskablet eller USB-kablet. Netværkstilsluttet BEMÆRK! Nogle printere kan ikke bruges som netværksprintere. Før du tilslutter printeren, skal du kontrollere, at printeren understøtter netværksgrænsefladen, ved at se i printerspecifikationerne i brugerhåndbogen til printeren. 1 Følg instruktionerne i ”Installation af software til Macintosh” på side 36, når du vil installere PPD-filen på din computer. 2 Åbn mappen Applications → Utilities, og Print Setup Utility. • I MAC OS 10.5 skal du åbne System Preferences fra mappen Applications og klikke på Printer & Fax. 3 Klik på Add på Printer List. • I MAC OS 10.5 skal du klikke på ikonet ”+”, hvorefter der vises et vindue. 4 I MAC OS 10.3 skal du vælge fanen Rendezvous. • I MAC OS 10.4 skal du klikke på Default browser og finde Bonjour. • I MAC OS 10.5 skal du klikke på Default og finde Bonjour. Navnet på maskinen vises på listen. Vælg DELL000xxxxxxxxx i printerboksen, hvor xxxxxxxxx er forskellig for hver af maskinerne. 5 Hvis Vælg automatisk ikke fungerer korrekt, skal du vælge Dell i Printer model og your printer name i Model til MAC OS 10.3. • Hvis Vælg automatisk ikke fungerer korrekt, skal du vælge Dell i Printer model og your printer name i Model til MAC OS 10.4. • Hvis Automatisk valg ikke fungerer korrekt, skal du klikke på Select a driver to use... og navnet på din printer i Print Using til MAC OS 10.5. Maskinen vises på printerlisten og angives som standardprinter. 6 Klik på Add. USB-tilsluttet Macintosh 1 Følg instruktionerne i ”Installation af software til Macintosh” på side 36, når du vil installere PPD-filen på din computer. 2 Åbn mappen Applications → Utilities, og Print Setup Utility. • I MAC OS 10.5 skal du åbne System Preferences fra mappen Applications og klikke på Printer & Fax. 3 Klik på Add på Printer List. • I MAC OS 10.5 skal du klikke på ikonet ”+”, hvorefter der vises et vindue. 4 I MAC OS 10.3 skal du vælge fanen USB. • I MAC OS 10.4 skal du klikke på Default Browser og finde USB-forbindelsen. • I MAC OS 10.5 skal du klikke på Default og finde USBforbindelsen. 5 Vælg your printer name. 6 Hvis Vælg automatisk ikke fungerer korrekt, skal du vælge Dell i Printer model og your printer name i Model til MAC OS 10.3. • Hvis Vælg automatisk ikke fungerer korrekt, skal du vælge Dell i Printer model og your printer name i Model til MAC OS 10.4. • Hvis Automatisk valg ikke fungerer korrekt, skal du klikke på Select a driver to use... og navnet på din printer i Print Using til MAC OS 10.5. Maskinen vises på printerlisten og angives som standardprinter. 7 Klik på Add. Brug af printeren med en Macintosh 38 Udskrivning BEMÆRK! • Det Macintosh-egenskabsvindue, der vises i denne brugerhåndbog, kan være anderledes på den printer, som du anvender. Men sammensætningen af vinduet med printeregenskaber er ens. • Du kan kontrollere printernavnet på den medfølgende cd-rom. Udskrivning af et dokument Når du udskriver fra en Macintosh, skal du kontrollere indstillingerne for printeren i alle programmer, du benytter. Følg disse trin for at udskrive fra Macintosh: 1 Åbn et Macintosh-program, og vælg den fil, du vil udskrive. 2 Åbn menuen File, og klik på Page Setup (Document Setup i nogle programmer). 3 Vælg papirformat, papirretning, skalering og andre indstillinger, og klik på OK. 4 Åbn menuen File, og klik på Print. 5 Vælg det ønskede antal kopier, og angiv, hvilke sider du vil udskrive. 6 Klik på Print, når du er færdig med at angive indstillingerne. Kontroller, at din printer er markeret. ▲ Mac OS 10.5 Ændring af printerindstillinger Du kan bruge avancerede udskrivningsfunktioner, når du bruger printeren. Vælg Print i menuen File i dit Macintosh-program. Det printernavn, der vises i vinduet med printeregenskaber, kan være anderledes, afhængigt af hvilken printer du bruger. Bortset fra navnet, ligner printeregenskabsvinduerne hinanden. BEMÆRK! De opties kunnen verschillen afhankelijk van de printer en de versie van het Macintosh-besturingssysteem. Layout Fanen Layout indeholder indstillinger, som du kan bruge til at justere, hvordan dokumentet skal se ud på den udskrevne side. Du kan udskrive flere sider på ét ark papir. Vælg Layout på rullelisten Presets for at få adgang til de følgende funktioner. • Pages per Sheet: Denne funktion fastsætter, hvor mange sider der udskrives på én side. Du kan finde flere oplysninger under "Udskrivning af flere sider på ét ark papir" i den næste kolonne. • Layout Direction: Du kan vælge udskrivningsretningen på en side som i eksemplerne i brugergrænsefladen. ▲ Mac OS 10.5Brug af printeren med en Macintosh 39 Graphics Fanen Graphics indeholder indstillinger til valg af Quality og Color Mode. Vælg Graphics på rullelisten Presets for at få adgang til grafikfunktionerne. • Quality: Du kan vælge udskriftsopløsningen. Jo højere indstilling, desto skarpere bliver de udskrevne tegn og den udskrevne grafik. En højere indstilling kan dog forlænge den tid, det tager at udskrive et dokument. • Color Mode: Du kan angive farveindstillinger. Indstillingen Color giver normalt den bedste udskriftskvalitet for farvedokumenter. Vælg Grayscale, hvis du vil udskrive et farvedokument i gråtoner. Paper Vælg en indstilling for Paper Type, som svarer til det papir, der er lagt i den bakke, som du vil udskrive fra. På den måde får du den bedste udskrift. Hvis du bruger en anden type udskriftsmateriale, skal du vælge den tilsvarende papirtype. ▲ Mac OS 10.5 ▲ Mac OS 10.5 Udskrivning af flere sider på ét ark papir Du kan udskrive mere end en side på et enkelt ark papir. Denne funktion giver dig mulighed for at udskrive kladder på en omkostningseffektiv måde. 1 Vælg Print i menuen File i dit Macintosh-program. 2 Vælg Layout. 3 Vælg det antal sider, du vil udskrive på et ark papir, på rullelisten Pages per Sheet. 4 Vælg siderækkefølgen under Layout Direction. Hvis du vil udskrive en ramme om hver side på arket, skal du vælge den ønskede indstilling på rullelisten Border. 5 Klik på Print. Printeren udskriver nu det angivne antal sider på den ene side af hvert ark. ▲ Mac OS 10.5Brug af printeren med en Macintosh 40 Scanning Du kan scanne dokumenter med Image Capture. Macintosh OS leveres med programmet Image Capture. Scanning via USB 1 Kontroller, at maskinen og computeren er tændt og korrekt forbundet med hinanden. 2 Anbring et enkelt dokument på glaspladen med tryksiden nedad. Du kan også lægge dokumentet/dokumenterne i ADF’en (eller DADF'en) med tryksiden opad. 3 Start Applications og klik på Image Capture. BEMÆRK! Hvis meddelelsen No Image Capture device connected vises, skal du tage USB-stikket ud og sætte det i igen. Hvis problemet ikke forsvinder, så se i Image Capture hjælp. 4 Angiv scanner-indstillingerne på dette program. 5 Scan og gem det scannede billede. BEMÆRK! • Yderligere oplysninger om Image Capture finder du i Image Capture hjælp. • Hvis du vil scanne via DADF, skal du bruge TWAIN-kompatibel software. • Du kan også scanne med TWAIN-kompatibel software, f.eks. Adobe ® Photoshop ® . • Scanningsprocessen afhænger af TWAIN-softwaren. Se i brugerhåndbogen til programmet. • Opdater til den nyeste version af Mac OS, hvis scanningen ikke fungerer i Image Capture. Image Capture fungerer korrekt under Mac OS 10.3.9 eller nyere og Mac OS 10.4.7 eller nyere.41 SOFTWAREAFSNIT INDEKS A afinstaller, software Macintosh 36 afinstallere MFP-driver Linux 29 annullere scanning 25 avanceret udskrivning, bruge 16 B brochureudskrivning 17 D dobbeltsidet udskrivning 18 dokument, udskrive Macintosh 38 Windows 10 E ekstra egenskaber, indstille 14 F fjerne installation, software Windows 9 foretrukne indstillinger, bruge 14 G grafikegenskaber, indstille 13 H hjælp, anvende 21 hjælp, bruge 15 I indstilling billedtilstand 13 foretrukne 14 mørkhed 13 opløsning Windows 13 tonerbesparelse 13 true-type-indstilling 13 installere Linux-software 28 printerdriver Macintosh 36 Windows 4 L layoutegenskaber, angive Macintosh 38 layoutegenskaber, indstille Windows 11 Linux driver, installere 28 printeregenskaber 32 scanne 34 udskrive 33 M Macintosh driver afinstallere 36 installere 36 konfigurere printeren 37 scanne 40 udskrivning 38 MFP-driver, installere Linux 28 N n op-udskrivning Macintosh 39 n-op udskrive Windows 16 O opløsning udskrivning 33 overlay oprette 20 slette 20 udskrive 20 P papiregenskaber, indstille 12 papirformat, indstille udskrive 33 papirkilde, indstille 33 Windows 12 papirretning, udskrive 33 papirstørrelse, indstille 12 papirtype, indstille udskrive 33 plakat, udskrive 17 PostScript-driver installere 21 printerdriver, installere Linux 28 printeregenskaber Linux 33 printeregenskaber, angive Macintosh 38 printeregenskaber, indstille Windows 11, 21 printeropløsning, indstille Windows 13 printerprogram afinstallere Macintosh 36 printersoftware fjerne installation Windows 9 installere Macintosh 36 Windows 4 R retning, udskrive Windows 1142 S scanne Linux 34 scanne fra Macintosh 40 scanning SmarThru 23 TWAIN 24 WIA-driver 25 software afinstallere Macintosh 36 fjerne installation Windows 9 geninstallere Windows 9 installere Macintosh 36 Windows 4 systemkrav Macintosh 36 statusovervågning, bruge 26 T tonerbesparelse, indstille 13 TWAIN, scanne 24 U udskriftsopløsning 33 udskrive dokument 10 fra Linux 33 fra Macintosh 38 fra Windows 10 N op Macintosh 39 n-op Windows 16 overlay 20 plakat 19 skalere 18 tilpas til side 18 vandmærke 19 udskrivning brochurer 17 dobbeltsidet 18 V vandmærke oprette 19 print 19 redigere 19 slette 19 W WIA, scan 25 Dell PowerVault MD3200 and MD3220 Storage Arrays Getting Started With Your System Začínáme se systémem Mise en route Handbuch zum Einstieg Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας Rozpoczęcie pracy z systemem Начало работы с системой Introducción al sistema Sisteminizi Kullanmaya BaşlarkenDell PowerVault MD3200 and MD3220 Storage Arrays Getting Started With Your System Regulatory Model Series E03J and E04JNotes, Cautions, and Warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates potential damage to hardware or loss of data if instructions are not followed. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. ____________________ Information in this publication is subject to change without notice. © 2011 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell™, the DELL logo, and PowerVault™ are trademarks of Dell Inc. Microsoft ® and Windows Server ® are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Red Hat ® and Red Hat Enterprise Linux ® are registered trademarks of Red Hat, Inc. in the United States and other countries. SUSE ® is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc. in the United States and other countries. VMware ® is a registered trademark of VMware, Inc. in the United States and/or other jurisdictions. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this publication to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Regulatory Model Series E03J and E04J 2011 - 08 P/N D76VD Rev. A02Getting Started With Your System 3 Before You Begin NOTE: Throughout the document, Dell PowerVault MD3200 series storage array refers to both Dell PowerVault MD3200 and Dell PowerVault MD3220. Dell PowerVault MD1200 series expansion enclosure refers to both Dell PowerVault MD1200 and Dell PowerVault MD1220. Before setting up your Dell PowerVault MD3200 series storage array, you must consider certain best practices to ensure that your storage array operates at maximum efficiency and offers full redundancy (if required). • Throughout the network, always use a Category 5e (or higher) Ethernet cable. • Before connecting any cables between the host server and storage array, physically label each port and connector. • Always follow proper power-up and power-down procedures when cycling power across the network. You must also ensure that critical network components are on separate power circuits. Other Documentation and Media You May Need WARNING: See the safety and regulatory information that shipped with your system. Warranty information may be included within this document or as a separate document. NOTE: All PowerVault MD3200 series documents are available at support.dell.com/manuals. • The rack documentation included with your rack solution describes how to install your system into a rack. • The Owner’s Manual provides information about system features and describes how to troubleshoot the system and install or replace system components. • The Deployment Guide provides information about installing and configuring the software and hardware. • The CLI Guide provides information about using the command line interface (CLI) to configure and manage your storage array.4 Getting Started With Your System • The SMI-S Programmer’s Guide provides information about using the SMI-S provider and SMI-S programming. • Any media that ships with your system that provides documentation and tools for configuring and managing your system, including those pertaining to the operating system, system management software, system updates, and system components that you purchased with your system. NOTE: Always check for updates on support.dell.com/manuals and read the updates first because they often supersede information in other documents. Supported Operating Systems • Microsoft Windows Server • Red Hat Enterprise Linux • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server • VMware NOTE: For the latest information on all the supported operating system versions, see the Support Matrix at support.dell.com/manuals.Getting Started With Your System 5 Common Configurations Cabling Your Direct-Attached Hosts Server 1 Server 2 Corporate, public, or private network Server 3 Server 4 PowerVault MD3200 series storage array6 Getting Started With Your System Installation and Configuration WARNING: Before performing the following procedure, review the safety instructions that came with the system. Unpacking the System Unpack your system and identify each item with the packing list that shipped with your system. Installing the Rails and System in a Rack Assemble the rails and install the system in the rack following the safety instructions and the rack installation instructions provided with your system. NOTE: To balance the weight load, it is recommended that you install the PowerVault MD3200 series storage array at the bottom of the rack and the PowerVault MD1200 series expansion enclosures above it.Getting Started With Your System 7 Connecting the Power Cable(s) Ensure that the power switch is in the OFF position before connecting the power cables. Connect the system’s power cable(s) to the system. Securing the Power Cable(s) Secure the cable(s) firmly to the bracket using the provided strap. Plug the other end of the power cables into a grounded electrical outlet or a separate power source such as an uninterrupted power supply (UPS) or a power distribution unit (PDU). Each power supply must be connected to a separate power circuit.8 Getting Started With Your System Cabling Your Expansion Enclosure Turning On the Enclosure Turn on the components in the following order: 1 PowerVault MD1200 series expansion enclosures (if used) NOTE: Before turning on the storage array, ensure that the expansion enclosure status LED is blue. PowerVault MD3200 series storage array PowerVault MD1200 series expansion enclosure 1 (optional) PowerVault MD1200 series expansion enclosure 2 (optional)Getting Started With Your System 9 2 PowerVault MD3200 series storage array NOTE: Before turning on the host server(s), ensure that the storage array status LED is blue. 3 Host server(s) Installing the Bezel Install the bezel (optional). Installing the MD Storage Software NOTE: For detailed instructions about installing the MD storage software, setting up the enclosure, and the post-installation tasks, see the Deployment Guide. The MD Storage Manager application configures, manages, and monitors the storage array. To install the MD storage software: 1 Insert the MD series resource media. Depending on your operating system, the installer may launch automatically. If the installer does not launch automatically, navigate to the root directory of the installation media (or downloaded installer image) and run the md_launcher.exe file. For Linux-based systems, navigate to the root of the resource media and run the autorun file. NOTE: By default, the Red Hat Enterprise Linux operating system mounts the resource media with the -noexec mount option which does not allow you to run executable files. To change this setting, see the Readme file in the root directory of the installation media.10 Getting Started With Your System 2 Select Install MD Storage Software. 3 Read and accept the license agreement. 4 Select one of the following installation options from the Install Set drop-down menu: • Full (recommended)—Installs the MD Storage Manager (client) software, host-based storage agent, multipath driver, and hardware providers. • Host Only—Installs the host-based storage agent and multipath drivers. • Management—Installs the management software and hardware providers. • Custom—Allows you to select specific components. 5 Select the MD storage array model(s) you are setting up to serve as data storage for this host server. 6 Choose whether to start the event monitor service automatically when the host server reboots or manually NOTE: This option is applicable only to Windows client software installation. 7 Confirm the installation location and click Install. 8 If prompted, reboot the host server once the installation completes. 9 Start the MD Storage Manager and discover the array(s). 10 If applicable, activate any premium features purchased with your storage array. If you purchased premium features, see the printed activation card shipped with your storage array. NOTE: The MD Storage Manager installer automatically installs the required drivers, firmware, and operating system patches/hotfixes to operate your storage array. These drivers and firmware are also available at support.dell.com. In addition, see the Support Matrix at support.dell.com/manuals for any additional settings and/or software required for your specific storage array.Getting Started With Your System 11 Locating Your Service Tag Your system is identified by a unique Express Service Code and Service Tag number. The Express Service Code and Service Tag are found on the front of the system and at the back of the system next to the RAID controller modules. This information is used by Dell to route support calls to the appropriate personnel. NOM Information (Mexico Only) The following information is provided on the device described in this document in compliance with the requirements of the official Mexican standards (NOM): Importer: Model number: E03J and E04J Supply voltage: 100–240 V CA Frequency: 50/60 Hz Current consumption: 8.6 A12 Getting Started With Your System Technical Specifications Drives PowerVault MD3200 Up to twelve 3.5-inch SAS hot-swappable hard drives (3.0 Gbps and 6.0 Gbps) PowerVault MD3220 Up to twenty four 2.5-inch SAS hot-swappable hard drives (3.0 Gbps and 6.0 Gbps) RAID Controller Modules RAID controller modules • One or two hot-swappable modules with temperature sensors • 2 GB of cache per controller Back-Panel Connectors (Per RAID Controller Module) SAS connectors • Four SAS IN ports to connect hosts • One SAS OUT port for expansion to an additional PowerVault MD1200 series enclosure NOTE: SAS connectors are SFF-8088 compliant. Serial connector One 6-pin mini-DIN connector NOTE: For technical support use only. Management Ethernet connector One 100/1000 Base-T port Ethernet for out-of-band management of the enclosure NOTE: The default management port IP addresses for the primary and secondary RAID controller modules are 192.168.128.101 and 192.168.128.102, respectively. By default, the management ports are set to Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). If the controller is unable to get an IP address configuration from a DHCP server within a specified time out period (approximately 3 minutes), it defaults back to static IP addressing. For more information, see the Deployment Guide.Getting Started With Your System 13 Expansion PowerVault MD1200 series Supports a maximum of 192 hard drives with any combination of PowerVault MD1200 or PowerVault MD1220 expansion enclosures. Support for 192 hard drives is a Premium Feature and requires activation. The maximum number of hard drives supported without using the Premium Feature is 120. Redundant path connectivity provides redundant data paths to each hard drive. Backplane Board Connectors • 12 or 24 SAS hard-drive connectors • Two power supply/cooling fan module connectors • Two sets of RAID controller module connectors • One control panel connector for front LEDs and system identification button Sensors Two temperature sensors LED Indicators Front panel • One two-color LED indicator for system status • Two single-color LED indicators for power and enclosure mode NOTE: The enclosure mode LED is not applicable to the PowerVault MD3200 series storage array. Hard-drive carrier • One single-color activity LED • One two-color LED status indicator per drive Power supply/cooling fan Three LED status indicators for power supply status, power supply/fan fault, and AC status14 Getting Started With Your System RAID controller module Six single-color LEDs: • One battery fault • One cache active • One controller fault • One controller power • One system identification • One management Ethernet activity Six two-color LEDs: • Four SAS IN link or fault • One SAS OUT link or fault • One management Ethernet link speed Switch System identification button Located on the front control panel. This button is used to locate a system within a rack. Enclosure mode switch Located on the front of the system. This switch is not applicable to the PowerVault MD3200 series storage array. Password reset switch Located on the back-panel of the RAID controller module. This switch is used to reset the storage array password. Power Supplies AC power supply (per power supply) Wattage 600 W Voltage 100–240 VAC (8.6 A–4.3 A) Heat dissipation 100 W Maximum inrush current Under typical line conditions and over the entire system ambient operating range, the inrush current may reach a maximum of 55 A per power supply for 10 ms or less. LED Indicators (continued)Getting Started With Your System 15 Available Hard Drive Power (Per Slot) PowerVault MD3200 25 W PowerVault MD3220 12 W RAID Controller Module Power (Per Slot) Maximum power consumption 100 W Physical PowerVault MD3200 Height 8.68 cm (3.41 inches) Width 44.63 cm (17.57 inches) Depth 60.20 cm (23.70 inches) Weight (maximum configuration) 29.30 kg (64.6 lb) Weight (empty) 8.84 kg (19.5 lb) PowerVault MD3220 Height 8.68 cm (3.41 inches) Width 44.63 cm (17.57 inches) Depth 54.90 cm (21.61 inches) Weight (maximum configuration) 24.22 kg (53.4 lb) Weight (empty) 8.61 kg (19 lb)16 Getting Started With Your System Environmental NOTE: For additional information about environmental measurements for specific system configurations, see www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets. Temperature Operating 10 °C to 35 °C (50 °F to 95 °F) with a maximum temperature gradation of 10 °C per hour NOTE: For altitudes above 2950 feet, the maximum operating temperature is derated 1ºF/550 ft. Storage –40 °C to 65 °C (–40 °F to 149 °F) with a maximum temperature gradation of 20°C per hour. Relative humidity Operating 20% to 80% (noncondensing) with a maximum humidity gradation of 10% per hour Storage 5% to 95% (noncondensing) Maximum vibration Operating 0.25 G at 3–200 Hz for 15 min Storage 0.5 G at 3–200 Hz for 15 min Maximum shock Operating One shock pulse in the positive z axis (one pulse on each side of the system) of 31 G for 2.6 ms in the operational orientation Storage Six consecutively executed shock pulses in the positive and negative x, y, and z axes (one pulse on each side of the system) of 71 G for up to 2 ms Altitude Operating –16 to 3048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft) NOTE: For altitudes above 2950 feet, the maximum operating temperature is derated 1ºF/550 ft. Storage –16 to 10,600 m (–50 to 35,000 ft) Airborne Contaminant Level Class G1 as defined by ISA-S71.04-1985Disková pole Dell PowerVault MD3200 a MD3220 Začínáme se systémem Číslo modelu série: E03J a E04JPoznámky a upozornění POZNÁMKA: POZNÁMKA označuje důležité informace, které pomáhají lepšímu využití počítače. UPOZORNĚNÍ: UPOZORNĚNÍ poukazuje na možnost poškození hardwaru nebo ztráty dat v případě nedodržení pokynů. VAROVÁNÍ: VAROVÁNÍ upozorňuje na potenciální nebezpečí poškození majetku, úrazu nebo smrti. ____________________ Informace v této publikaci se mohou bez předchozího upozornění změnit. © 2011 Dell Inc. Všechna práva vyhrazena. Jakákoli reprodukce těchto materiálů bez písemného povolení společnosti Dell Inc. je přísně zakázána. Ochranné známky použité v tomto textu: Dell™, logo DELL a PowerVault™ jsou ochranné známky společnosti Dell Inc. Microsoft ® a Windows Server ® jsou buď ochranné známky nebo registrované ochranné známky společnosti Microsoft Corporation ve Spojených státech anebo v jiných zemích. Red Hat ® a Red Hat Enterprise Linux ® jsou registrované ochranné známky společnosti Red Hat, Inc. v USA a v dalších zemích. SUSE ® je registrovaná ochranná známka společnosti Novell, Inc. v USA a dalších zemích. VMware ® je registrovaná ochranná známka společnosti VMware, Inc. v USA anebo v dalších zemích. Ostatní ochranné známky a obchodní názvy mohou být v této publikaci použity v souvislosti s právními subjekty, které si na tyto ochranné známky a názvy svých produktů činí nárok. Společnost Dell Inc. se zříká všech vlastnických nároků na ochranné známky a obchodní názvy jiné než vlastní. Číslo modelu série: E03J a E04J 2011 - 08 Č. dílu D76VD Rev. A02Začínáme se systémem 19 Než začnete POZNÁMKA: V tomto dokumentu označuje název diskové pole série Dell PowerVault MD3200 jak Dell PowerVault MD3200, tak i Dell PowerVault MD3220. Název rozšiřující skříň série Dell PowerVault MD1200 se vztahuje jak k Dell PowerVault MD1200, tak k Dell PowerVault MD1220. Než začnete s instalací diskového pole série Dell PowerVault MD3200, vezměte v úvahu osvědčené metody, s jejichž pomocí zajistíte, aby diskové pole pracovalo s maximální účinností a nabízelo plnou redundanci (pokud je třeba). • V celé síti používejte Ethernetový kabel kategorie 5e (nebo vyšší). • Než mezi hostitelským serverem a diskovým polem připojíte jakékoli kabely, označte každý port a konektor. • Pokud jsou sesít’ované systémy pod napětím, vždy dodržujte správné postupy při zapínání a vypínání systémů. Musíte též zajistit, aby důležité sít’ové komponenty měly oddělené hlavní obvody. Další dokumenty a média, které můžete potřebovat VAROVÁNÍ: Prostudujte si informace o bezpečnosti a předpisech, které byly dodány se systémem. Informace o záruce jsou součástí tohoto dokumentu nebo jsou přiloženy samostatně. POZNÁMKA: Veškeré dokumenty pro sérii PowerVault MD3200 lze získat na adrese support.dell.com/manuals. • Pokyny k instalaci do stojanu dodané se stojanovým řešením popisují instalaci systému do stojanu. • Příručka majitele hardwaru obsahuje informace o funkcích systému a popisuje řešení problémů se systémem a instalaci nebo výměnu komponent. • Instalační příručka obsahuje informace o instalaci a konfiguraci softwaru a hardwaru. • Příručka CLI obsahuje informace o tom, jak ke konfiguraci a správě diskového pole používat rozhraní CLI. • Příručka programátora SMI-S obsahuje informace o tom, jak používat poskytovatele SMI-A, a o programování SMI-S.20 Začínáme se systémem • Média dodaná se systémem obsahují dokumentaci a nástroje pro konfiguraci a správu systému. Mohou být dodána například média týkající se operačního systému, softwaru pro správu systému, aktualizací systému a komponent zakoupených se systémem. POZNÁMKA: Vždy nejprve zkontrolujte a pročtěte aktualizace uvedené na adrese support.dell.com/manuals, protože tyto aktualizace často nahrazují informace v ostatních dokumentech. Podporované operační systémy • Microsoft Windows Server • Red Hat Enterprise Linux • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server • VMware POZNÁMKA: Nejnovější informace o verzích všech podporovaných operačních systémů naleznete v matici odborné pomoci na adrese support.dell.com/manuals.Začínáme se systémem 21 Obvyklé konfigurace Připojení hostitelských systémů v DAS Server 1 Server 2 Firemní, veřejná nebo soukromá sít’ Server 3 Server 4 Diskové pole série PowerVault MD320022 Začínáme se systémem Instalace a konfigurace VAROVÁNÍ: Před provedením následujícího postupu si prostudujte bezpečnostní pokyny dodané se systémem. Rozbalení systému Rozbalte systém a zkontrolujte každou položku dle seznamu, který jste obdrželi společně se systémem. Instalace kolejniček a systému do stojanu Sestavte kolejničky a nainstalujte systém do stojanu podle bezpečnostních pokynů a pokynů k instalaci do stojanu dodaných se systémem. POZNÁMKA: Chcete-li správně vyvážit stojan, doporučujeme namontovat diskové pole série PowerVault MD3200 do spodní části stojanu a rozšiřující skříně PowerVault MD1200 nad ně.Začínáme se systémem 23 Připojení napájecích kabelů Předtím, než připojíte napájecí kabely, se prosím ujistěte, že se vypínač nachází v poloze VYPNUTÝ. Připojte napájecí kabely k systému. Zajištění napájecích kabelů Pomocí řemínku pevně připevněte kabely k držáku. Poté zasuňte druhé konce napájecích kabelů do uzemněné elektrické zásuvky nebo je připojte k samostatnému zdroji napájení, například ke zdroji nepřerušitelného napájení (UPS) nebo k jednotce rozvaděče (PDU). Každý zdroj energie musí být připojen k vlastnímu hlavnímu obvodu.24 Začínáme se systémem Připojení rozšiřující skříně Zapnutí rozšiřující skříně Zapněte komponenty v následujícím pořadí: 1 Rozšiřující skříně série PowerVault MD1200 (pokud se používají). POZNÁMKA: Než zapnete diskové pole, ujistěte se, že LED na rozšiřující skříni svítí modře. Disková pole série PowerVault MD3200 Rozšiřující skříň PowerVault MD1200 1 (volitelné) Rozšiřující skříň PowerVault MD1200 2 (volitelné)Začínáme se systémem 25 2 Disková pole série PowerVault MD3200. POZNÁMKA: Než zapnete hostitelské servery, ujistěte se, že LED na diskovém poli svítí modře. 3 Hostitelské servery. Instalace čelního krytu Nainstalujte čelní kryt (volitelný). Instalace softwaru pro úložiště MD Storage POZNÁMKA: Podrobné pokyny k instalaci softwaru pro úložiště MD Storage, nastavení skříně a k úkolům, které je třeba vykonat po instalaci, viz Instalační příručka. Aplikace MD Storage Manager slouží ke konfiguraci, správě a sledování diskového pole. Chcete-li nainstalovat software pro úložiště MD Storage: 1 Vložte zdrojové médium série MD. V závislosti na vašem operačním systému se může automaticky spustit instalační program. Pokud se instalační program automaticky nespustí, přejděte do kořenového adresáře instalačního média (nebo staženého obrazu instalačního programu) a spust’te soubor md_launcher.exe. U systémů Linux přejděte do kořenového adresáře zdrojového média a spust’te soubor autorun.26 Začínáme se systémem POZNÁMKA: Operační systém Red Hat Enterprise Linux standardně připojí zdrojové médium za použití možnosti –noexec, která vám neumožňuje spouštět spustitelné soubory. Chcete-li toto nastavení změnit, nahlédněte do souboru Readme v kořenovém adresáři instalačního média. 2 Zvolte možnost Install MD Storage Software (Instalovat software pro úložiště MD). 3 Přečtěte si licenční smlouvu a přijměte ji. 4 V nabídce Install Set (Instalační balík) vyberte jednu z následujících možností instalace: • Full (Kompletní - doporučené) - umožňuje instalaci programu MD Storage Manager (klient), hostitelského agenta, ovladačů vícecestných disků a poskytovatele hardwaru. • Host Only (Lokální) - umožňuje instalaci hostitelského agenta a ovladačů vícecestných disků. • Management (Správa) - umožňuje instalaci softwaru pro správu a poskytovatele hardwaru. • Custom (Vlastní) - umožňuje vybrat konkrétní komponenty. 5 Vyberte modely diskových polí MD, které mají sloužit jako datová úložiště tohoto hostitelského serveru. 6 Vyberte, zda se má po restartu hostitelského serveru spustit služba sledování událostí automaticky nebo manuálně. POZNÁMKA: Tato možnost je platná pouze pro instalace klientského softwaru systému Windows. 7 Potvrd’te umístění instalace a klepněte na Install (Instalace). 8 Jakmile o to budete po dokončení instalace požádáni, restartujte hostitelský server. 9 Spust’te správce MD Storage Manager a vyhledejte disková pole. 10 Pokud je třeba, aktivujte veškeré dodatečné funkce zakoupené s diskovým polem. Pokud jste si zakoupili dodatečné funkce, použijte tištěnou aktivační kartu dodanou s diskovým polem. POZNÁMKA: Instalátor programu MD Storage Manager automaticky nainstaluje ovladače, firmware a opravy/hotfixy operačního systému potřebné pro práci s diskovým polem. Tyto ovladače a firmware lze též získat na adrese support.dell.com. Další informace o nastavení anebo softwaru potřebném pro konkrétní diskové pole naleznete v matici odborné pomoci na adrese support.dell.com/manuals.Začínáme se systémem 27 Vyhledání servisního označení Váš systém je identifikován jedinečným kódem expresní služby a číslem servisního označení. Kód expresní služby a servisní označení lze nalézt na přední straně systému a na zadní straně systému vedle modulů řadičů RAID. Tyto informace používá společnost Dell k nasměrování žádostí o odbornou pomoc příslušným zaměstnancům. Informace NOM (jen pro Mexiko) K zařízení popsanému v tomto dokumentu se vztahují v souladu s požadavky oficiální mexické normy NOM následující informace: Dovozce: Dell Inc. de México, S.A. de C.V. Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - 11° Piso Col. Lomas Altas 11950 México, D.F. Číslo modelu: E03J a E04J Napájecí napětí: 100–240 V stř. Frekvence: 50/60 Hz Spotřeba proudu: 8,6 A28 Začínáme se systémem Technické specifikace Jednotky PowerVault MD3200 Až dvanáct 3,5palcových pevných disků SAS, které lze vyměňovat za chodu (3,0 Gb/s a 6,0 Gb/s) PowerVault MD3220 Až dvacet čtyři 2,5palcových pevných disků SAS, které lze vyměňovat za chodu (3,0 Gb/s a 6,0 Gb/s) Moduly řadičů RAID Moduly řadičů RAID • Jeden nebo dva moduly s tepelnými čidly, které lze vyměňovat za chodu • 2 GB vyrovnávací paměti na řadič Konektory na zadním panelu (na jeden modul řadiče RAID) Konektory SAS • Čtyři vstupní porty SAS IN k připojení hostitelů • Jeden výstupní port SAS OUT k rozšíření o další skříň série PowerVault MD1200 POZNÁMKA: Konektory SAS vyhovují SFF-8088. Konektor sériového rozhraní Jeden 6kolíkový konektor mini-DIN POZNÁMKA: Pouze pro zaměstnance odborné pomoci. Konektor Ethernetu pro řízení Jeden port pro Ethernet typu 100/1000 Base-T pro vzdálenou správu skříně POZNÁMKA: Výchozí IP adresy řídicích portů primárního a sekundárního modulu řadiče RAID jsou 192.168.128.101 a 192.168.128.102. Řídicí porty jsou standardně nastaveny na práci s protokolem DHCP. Pokud řadič není schopen získat od serveru DHCP konfiguraci IP adresy ve stanoveném časovém limitu (přibližně 3 minuty), standardně se přepne na používání statické IP adresy. Další informace viz Instalační příručka.Začínáme se systémem 29 Rozšíření Série PowerVault MD1200 Podporuje maximálně 192 pevných disků s jakoukoli kombinací rozšiřujících skříní PowerVault MD1200 či PowerVault MD1220. Podpora 192 pevných disků je dodatečná funkce a vyžaduje aktivaci. Maximální počet podporovaných pevných disků bez použití této dodatečné funkce je 120. Redundantní konektivita cest poskytuje redundantní datové cesty pro každý pevný disk. Zadní deska Konektory • 12 nebo 24 konektorů pro pevné disky SAS • Dva konektory pro napájecí zdroje/moduly s chladicími ventilátory • Dvě sady konektorů pro moduly řadičů RAID • Jeden konektor pro ovládací panel předních LED a tlačítko identifikace systému Senzory Dva senzory teploty Indikátory LED Čelní panel • Jeden dvoubarevný indikátor LED pro stav systému • Dva jednobarevné indikátory LED pro napájení a režim pro použití ve skříni POZNÁMKA: Indikátor LED pro režim ve skříni se nenachází na diskových polích série PowerVault MD3200. Nosič pevných disků • Jeden jednobarevný indikátor LED pro aktivitu • Jeden dvoubarevný indikátor LED pro stav každého disku Napájecí zdroj/chladicí ventilátor Tři indikátory LED pro stav napájecího zdroje, selhání napájecího zdroje nebo ventilátoru a stav napájení střídavým proudem30 Začínáme se systémem Modul řadiče RAID Šest jednobarevných indikátorů LED: • Jeden pro závadu baterie • Jeden pro aktivní vyrovnávací pamět’ • Jeden pro závadu řadiče • Jeden pro napájení řadiče • Jeden pro identifikaci systému • Jeden pro aktivitu Ethernetu pro řízení Šest dvoubarevných indikátorů LED: • Čtyři pro připojení nebo závady SAS IN • Jeden pro připojení nebo závady SAS OUT • Jeden pro rychlost připojení Ethernetu pro řízení Přepínač Tlačítko pro identifikaci systému Umístěno na předním řídícím panelu. Toto tlačítko slouží k nalezení systému uvnitř stojanu. Přepínač režimu pro použití ve skříni Umístěný na přední straně systému. Tento přepínač se nenachází v diskovém poli PowerVault MD3200. Tlačítko pro vymazání hesla Umístěno na zadní straně modulu řadiče RAID. Toto tlačítko se používá k resetování hesla diskových polí. Dodávky energie Střídavý proud (na jeden napájecí zdroj) Výkon 600 W Napětí 100 – 240 V stř. (8,6 A – 4,3 A) Odvod tepla 100 W Maximální nárazový proud V typických podmínkách napájení a v celém provozním rozsahu systému může nárazový proud dosáhnout 55 A na jeden napájecí zdroj po dobu 10 ms nebo méně. Indikátory LED (pokračování)Začínáme se systémem 31 Dostupné napájení pevných disků (na zdířku) PowerVault MD3200 25 W PowerVault MD3220 12 W Napájení modulu řadiče RAID (na zdířku) Maximální spotřeba energie 100 W Rozměry PowerVault MD3200 Výška 8,68 cm (3,41 palců) Šířka 44,63 cm (17,57 palců) Hloubka 60,20 cm (23,70 palců) Hmotnost (maximální konfigurace) 29,30 kg (64,6 lb) Hmotnost (prázdné) 8,84 kg (19,5 lb) PowerVault MD3220 Výška 8,68 cm (3,41 palců) Šířka 44,63 cm (17,57 palců) Hloubka 54,90 cm (21,61 palců) Hmotnost (maximální konfigurace) 24,22 kg (53,4 lb) Hmotnost (prázdné) 8,61 kg (19 lb)32 Začínáme se systémem Prostředí POZNÁMKA: Další informace o měřených údajích prostředí najdete pro jednotlivé systémové konfigurace na adrese www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets. Teplota Provozní 10 až 35 °C s maximálním nárůstem teploty o 10 °C za hodinu POZNÁMKA: V nadmořských výškách nad 900 metrů je maximální provozní teplota snížena o 1 °C na každých 300 metrů. Skladovací -40 až 65 °C s maximálním nárůstem teploty o 20 °C za hodinu Relativní vlhkost Provozní 20 až 80 % (bez kondenzace) s maximálním nárůstem vlhkosti o 10 % za hodinu Skladovací 5 až 95 % (bez kondenzace) Maximální vibrace Provozní 0,25 G při 3–200 Hz po dobu 15 minut Skladovací 0,5 G při 3–200 Hz po dobu 15 minut Maximální ráz Provozní Jeden rázový impuls v kladné ose z (jeden impuls na každé straně systému) o síle 31 G v délce do 2,6 ms v provozní orientaci Skladovací Šest po sobě jdoucích rázových impulsů v kladné i záporné ose x, y a z (jeden impuls na každé straně systému) o síle 71 G v délce do 2 ms Nadmořská výška Provozní -16 až 3 048 m POZNÁMKA: V nadmořských výškách nad 900 metrů je maximální provozní teplota snížena o 1 °C na každých 300 metrů. Skladovací -16 až 10 600 m Úroveň znečištění vzduchu Třída G1 dle normy ISA-S71.04-1985Matrices de stockage Dell PowerVault MD3200 et MD3220 Guide de mise en route Séries de modèle réglementaire E03J et E04JRemarques, précautions et avertissements REMARQUE : une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent vous aider à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : une PRÉCAUTION vous avertit d'un risque d'endommagement du matériel ou de perte de données en cas de non-respect des instructions. AVERTISSEMENT : un AVERTISSEMENT indique un risque d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. ____________________ Les informations que contient ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. © 2011 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction de ce document, de quelque manière que ce soit, sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell™, le logo DELL et PowerVault™ sont des marques de Dell Inc. Microsoft ® et Windows Server ® sont des marques ou des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Red Hat ® et Red Hat Enterprise Linux ® sont des marques déposées de Red Hat, Inc. aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. SUSE ® est une marque déposée de Novell, Inc. aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. VMware ® est une marque déposée de VMware, Inc. aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres juridictions. D'autres marques et noms commerciaux peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence aux entités revendiquant la propriété de ces marques ou de ces noms de produits. Dell Inc. rejette tout intérêt exclusif dans les marques et les noms commerciaux autres que les siens. Séries de modèle réglementaire E03J et E04J 2011 - 08 N/P D76VD Rév. A02Guide de mise en route 35 Avant de commencer REMARQUE : dans ce document, les références à la matrice de stockage Dell PowerVault série MD3200 concernent les matrices de stockage Dell PowerVault MD3200 et Dell PowerVault MD3220. Le boîtier d'extension Dell PowerVault MD1200 désigne les boîtiers Dell PowerVault MD1200 et Dell PowerVault MD1220. Avant d'installer votre matrice de stockage Dell PowerVault série MD3200, vous devez considérer certaines pratiques d'excellence pour assurer le fonctionnement le plus efficace possible de votre matrice de stockage et une redondance complète (si nécessaire). • Utilisez toujours un câble Ethernet de catégorie 5e (ou plus) à travers le réseau. • Avant de connecter tout câble entre le serveur hôte et la matrice de stockage, étiquetez physiquement chaque port et chaque connecteur. • Suivez toujours les procédures de mise sous et hors tension lors des cycles d'alimentation du réseau. Vous devez également vous assurer que les composants essentiels du réseau se trouvent sur différents circuits d'alimentation. Autre documentation et support dont vous pourriez avoir besoin AVERTISSEMENT : reportez-vous aux informations sur la sécurité et les réglementations qui accompagnent votre système. Les informations sur la garantie se trouvent dans ce document ou dans un document distinct. REMARQUE : tous les documents PowerVault série MD3200 sont disponibles sur le site support.dell.com/manuals. • La documentation fournie avec le rack indique comment installer le système dans un rack. • Le Manuel du propriétaire du matériel contient des informations sur les caractéristiques du système, ainsi que des instructions relatives au dépannage et à l'installation ou au remplacement de composants. • Le Guide de déploiement fournit des informations sur l'installation et la configuration du logiciel et du matériel. • Le Guide CLI fournit des informations sur l'utilisation de l'interface de ligne de commande (CLI) pour configurer et gérer votre matrice de stockage.36 Guide de mise en route • Le document SMI-S Programmer’s Guide (Guide de programmeur SMI-S) contient des informations sur l'utilisation de l'opérateur SMI-S et la programmation de SMI-S. • Tous les supports fournis avec le système contiennent de la documentation et des outils de configuration et de gestion de votre système d'exploitation, notamment du système même et du logiciel de gestion, des mises à jour et des composants système que vous avez achetés avec le système. REMARQUE : vérifiez toujours si des mises à jour sont disponibles sur le site support.dell.com/manuals et lisez-les en premier, car elles remplacent souvent les informations que contiennent les autres documents. Systèmes d'exploitation pris en charge • Microsoft Windows Server • Red Hat Enterprise Linux • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server • VMware REMARQUE : pour obtenir les informations les plus récentes sur toutes les versions de système d'exploitation prises en charge, reportez-vous à la Matrice de support à l'adresse support.dell.com/manuals.Guide de mise en route 37 Configurations courantes Câblage des hôtes reliés directement Serveur 1 Serveur 2 Réseau d'entreprise, public ou privé Serveur 3 Serveur 4 Matrice de stockage PowerVault série MD3200 38 Guide de mise en route Installation et configuration AVERTISSEMENT : avant d'exécuter la procédure ci-dessous, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec le système. Déballage du système Déballez votre système et identifiez chaque élément en consultant la liste de composants livrée avec votre système. Installation des rails et du système dans un rack Assemblez les rails et installez le système dans le rack en suivant les consignes de sécurité et les instructions d'installation du rack fournies avec votre système. REMARQUE : pour équilibrer la charge, nous vous recommandons d'installer la matrice de stockage PowerVault série MD3200 en bas du rack et les boîtiers d'extension PowerVault série MD1200 au-dessus.Guide de mise en route 39 Branchement du ou des câbles d'alimentation Avant de connecter les câbles d'alimentation, assurez-vous que le commutateur d'alimentation est en position OFF (ÉTEINT). Branchez le ou les câbles d'alimentation sur le système. Fixation du ou des câbles d'alimentation Fixez fermement les câbles au support de fixation à l'aide de la lanière fournie. Branchez ensuite l'autre extrémité des câbles d'alimentation sur une prise de courant mise à la masse ou sur une source d'alimentation autonome (onduleur [UPS] ou unité de distribution de l'alimentation [PDU]...). Chaque bloc d'alimentation doit être connecté à un circuit d'alimentation séparé.40 Guide de mise en route Câblage de votre boîtier d'extension Mise sous tension du boîtier Mettez les composants sous tension dans l'ordre suivant : 1 Boîtiers d'extension PowerVault série MD1200 (si utilisés) REMARQUE : avant d'allumer la matrice de stockage, assurez-vous que le voyant d'état du boîtier d'extension est bleu. Matrice de stockage PowerVault série MD3200 Boîtier d'extension PowerVault série MD1200 1 (en option) Boîtier d'extension PowerVault série MD1200 2 (en option)Guide de mise en route 41 2 Matrice de stockage PowerVault série MD3200 REMARQUE : avant d'allumer le(s) serveur(s) hôte, assurez-vous que le voyant d'état de la matrice de stockage est bleu. 3 Serveur(s) hôte Installation du cadre Installez le cadre (en option). Installation du logiciel MD Storage REMARQUE : pour des instructions détaillées sur l'installation du logiciel MD Storage, la configuration du boîtier et les tâches de post-installation, voir le Guide de déploiement. L'application MD Storage Manager configure, gère et contrôle la matrice de stockage. Pour installer le logiciel MD Storage Manager : 1 Insérez le support Ressource série MD. En fonction de votre système d'exploitation, l'installateur se lancera peut- être automatiquement. Si l'installateur ne se lance pas automatiquement, naviguez dans le répertoire racine du support d'installation (ou téléchargez l'image d'installateur) et exécutez le fichier md_launcher.exe. Pour les systèmes exécutant Linux, naviguez vers la racine du support Ressource et exécutez le fichier autorun (Exécution auto).42 Guide de mise en route REMARQUE : par défaut, Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL) monte le support Ressource à l'aide de l'option de montage –noexec mount, qui ne vous permet pas d'exécuter les fichiers exécutables. Pour modifier ce paramètre, consultez le fichier Lisez-moi dans le répertoire racine du support d'installation. 2 Sélectionnez Install MD Storage Software (Installer le logiciel de stockage MD). 3 Lisez le contrat de licence et acceptez-le. 4 Sélectionnez l'une des options d'installation suivantes dans le menu déroulant Install Set (Configuration d'installation) : • Full (recommended) (Complète - recommandée) : installe le logiciel (client) MD Storage Manager, l'agent de stockage hôte, le pilote multivoies et les fournisseurs de matériel. • Host Only (Hôte uniquement) : installe l'agent de stockage hôte et les pilotes multivoies. • Management (Gestion) : installe le logiciel de gestion et les fournisseurs de matériel. • Custom (Personnalisée) : permet de sélectionner des composants spécifiques. 5 Sélectionnez le(s) modèle(s) de matrice de stockage MD que vous souhaitez définir comme stockage de données pour ce serveur hôte. 6 Choisissez de démarrer le service de moniteur des événements automatiquement lors du redémarrage du serveur hôte ou manuellement. REMARQUE : cette option ne s'applique qu'à l'installation du logiciel client Windows. 7 Confirmez l'emplacement de l'installation et cliquez sur Install (Installer). 8 En réponse à l'invitation (le cas échéant), redémarrez le serveur hôte une fois l'installation terminée. 9 Démarrez MD Storage Manager et lancez la détection des matrices. 10 Le cas échéant, activez les fonctions premium achetées avec votre matrice de stockage. Si vous avez acheté des fonctions premium, consultez la carte d'activation livrée avec votre matrice de stockage.Guide de mise en route 43 REMARQUE : l'installateur MD Storage Manager installe automatiquement les pilotes, micrologiciel, et correctifs de système d'exploitation nécessaires pour le fonctionnement de votre matrice de stockage. Ces pilotes et micrologiciels sont également disponibles à l'adresse support.dell.com. Consultez également la Matrice de prise en charge à l'adresse support.dell.com/manuals pour des paramètres et/ou logiciels supplémentaires requis pour votre matrice de stockage spécifique. Identification du numéro de service Votre système est identifié par un code de service express et un numéro de service uniques. Le code de service express et le numéro de service se situent à l'avant et à l'arrière du système à côté des modules de contrôleur RAID. Dell utilise ces informations pour acheminer les appels de support au technicien qui convient.44 Guide de mise en route Informations NOM (Mexique uniquement) Les informations suivantes sur l'appareil décrit dans ce document sont fournies conformément aux exigences de la Norme Officielle Mexicaine (NOM) : Caractéristiques techniques Importateur : Numéro de modèle : E03J et E04J Tension d'alimentation : 100 à 240 V CA Fréquence : 50/60 Hz Consommation électrique : 8,6 A Lecteurs PowerVault MD3200 Jusqu'à douze disques durs SAS 3,5 pouces remplaçables à chaud (3,0 Gb/s et 6,0 Gb/s) PowerVault MD3220 Jusqu'à vingt-quatre disques durs SAS 2,5 pouces remplaçables à chaud (3,0 Gb/s et 6,0 Gb/s) Modules de contrôleur RAID Les modules de contrôleur RAID • Un ou deux modules remplaçables à chaud avec capteurs de température • 2 Go de mémoire cache par contrôleurGuide de mise en route 45 Connecteurs du panneau arrière (par module de contrôleur RAID) Connecteurs SAS • Quatre ports d'entrée SAS pour connecter des hôtes • Un port de sortie SAS pour l'extension à un boîtier PowerVault MD1200 supplémentaire REMARQUE : les connecteurs SAS sont conformes SFF-8088. Connecteur série Un connecteur mini-DIN à 6 broches REMARQUE : cette option est réservée au personnel de maintenance. Connecteur Ethernet de gestion Un port Ethernet 100/1000 Base-T pour une gestion hors bande du boîtier REMARQUE : les adresses IP de port de gestion par défaut des modules de contrôleur RAID principal et secondaire sont respectivement192.168.128.101 et 192.168.128.102. Par défaut, les ports de gestion sont définis sur le protocole DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration). Si le contrôleur ne parvient pas à obtenir une configuration d'adresse IP depuis un serveur DHCP au cours d'une durée d'attente spécifiée (environ 3 minutes), il revient à l'adressage IP statique par défaut. Pour plus d'informations, voir le Guide de déploiement. Extension PowerVault Série MD1200 Prend en charge jusqu'à 192 disques durs avec n'importe quelle combinaison de boîtiers d'extension PowerVault MD1200 ou PowerVault MD1220. La prise en charge de 192 disques durs est une fonction premium qui doit être activée. Le nombre maximum de disques durs pris en charge sans recours à la fonction premium est 120. La connectivité à chemin redondant fournit des chemins de données redondants à chaque disque dur. 46 Guide de mise en route Carte de fond de panier Connecteurs • 12 ou 24 connecteurs de disque dur SAS • Deux connecteurs pour les modules de ventilation/alimentation • Deux ensembles de connecteurs de module de contrôleur RAID • Un connecteur de panneau de configuration pour les voyants avant et le bouton d'identification de système Capteurs Deux capteurs de température Voyants Panneau avant • Un voyant bichrome indiquant l'état du système • Deux voyants monochromes (alimentation et mode boîtier) REMARQUE : le voyant du mode boîtier ne s'applique pas à la matrice de stockage PowerVault série MD3200. Support de disque dur • Un voyant d'activité monochrome • Un voyant d'état bichrome par lecteur Bloc d'alimentation/ventilateur de refroidissement Trois voyants d'état (état du bloc d'alimentation, panne du bloc d'alimentation/Ventilateur et état de l'alimentation) Module de contrôleur RAID Six voyants monochromes : • Un voyant de panne de batterie • Un voyant d'activité de la mémoire cache • Un voyant de panne du contrôleur • Un voyant d'état de l'alimentation du contrôleur • Un voyant système • Un voyant d'activité de gestion Ethernet Six voyants bichromes : • Quatre voyants de liaison d'entrée SAS ou d'erreur • Un voyant de panne ou de lien de sortie SAS • Un voyant de vitesse de lien Ethernet de gestionGuide de mise en route 47 Commutateur Bouton d'identification du système Situé sur le panneau de commande avant. Ce bouton sert à localiser un système au sein d'un rack. Sélecteur de mode du boîtier Situé sur le devant du système. Ce sélecteur ne s'applique pas à la matrice de stockage PowerVault MD3200. Sélecteur de réinitialisation du mot de passe Situé sur le panneau arrière du module de contrôleur RAID. Ce sélecteur permet de réinitialiser le mot de passe de la matrice de stockage. Blocs d'alimentation Alimentation secteur (par bloc d'alimentation) Puissance 600 W Tension 100–240 VCA (8,6 A–4,3 A) Dissipation thermique 100 W Courant d'appel maximal Dans des conditions de ligne typiques et dans toute la gamme ambiante de fonctionnement du système, l'appel de courant peut atteindre 55 A par bloc d'alimentation pendant un maximum de 10 ms. Alimentation disponible pour les disques durs (par logement) PowerVault MD3200 25 W PowerVault MD3220 12 W Alimentation du module de contrôleur RAID (par emplacement) Consommation de courant maximale 100 W48 Guide de mise en route Caractéristiques physiques PowerVault MD3200 Hauteur 8,68 cm (3,41 pouces) Largeur 44,63 cm (17,57 pouces) Profondeur 60,20 cm (23,70 pouces) Poids (configuration maximale) 29,30 kg (64,6 livres) Poids (vide) 8,84 kg (19,5 livres) PowerVault MD3220 Hauteur 8,68 cm (3,41 pouces) Largeur 44,63 cm (17,57 pouces) Profondeur 54,90 cm (21,61 pouces) Poids (configuration maximale) 24,22 kg (53,4 livres) Poids (vide) 8,61 kg (19 livres) Environnement REMARQUE : pour des informations supplémentaires sur les mesures environnementales liées aux différentes configurations du système, voir www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets. Température En fonctionnement De 10 à 35 °C (50 à 95 °F) avec un gradient thermique maximal de 10 °C par heure REMARQUE : à des altitudes supérieures à 900 mètres (2 950 pieds), la température maximale de fonctionnement est réduite de 0,55 °C (1 °F) tous les 168 mètres (550 pieds). Entreposage De -40 à 65 °C (-40 à 149 °F) avec un gradient thermique maximal de 20 °C par heure Humidité relative En fonctionnement De 20 à 80 % (sans condensation) avec un gradient d'humidité maximal de 10 % par heureGuide de mise en route 49 Entreposage De 5 à 95 % (sans condensation) Tolérance maximale aux vibrations En fonctionnement 0,25 G avec un balayage de 3 à 200 Hz pendant 15 minutes Entreposage 0,5 G avec un balayage de 3 à 200 Hz pendant 15 minutes Choc maximal En fonctionnement Une impulsion de choc de 31 G pendant un maximum de 2,6 ms sur l'axe z positif (une impulsion de chaque côté du système) Entreposage Six chocs consécutifs de 71 G pendant un maximum de 2 ms en positif et négatif sur les axes x, y et z (une impulsion de chaque côté du système) Altitude En fonctionnement De -16 à 3 048 m (-50 à 10 000 pieds) REMARQUE : À des altitudes supérieures à 900 mètres (2 950 pieds), la température maximale de fonctionnement est réduite de 0,55 °C (1 °F) tous les 168 mètres (550 pieds). Entreposage De -16 à 10 600 m (-50 à 35 000 pieds) Contaminants en suspension dans l'air Classe G1 selon la norme ISA-S71.04-1985 Environnement (suite)50 Guide de mise en routeDell PowerVault Speicher-Arrays der Reihen MD3200 und MD3220 Handbuch zum Einstieg mit dem System Vorschriftenmodell Serie E03J und E04JAnmerkungen, Vorsichtshinweise und Warnhinweise ANMERKUNG: Eine ANMERKUNG macht auf wichtige Informationen aufmerksam, mit denen Sie das System besser einsetzen können. VORSICHTSHINWEIS: Ein VORSICHTSHINWEIS macht darauf aufmerksam, dass bei Nichtbefolgung von Anweisungen eine mögliche Beschädigung der Hardware oder ein Verlust von Daten droht. WARNUNG: Durch eine WARNUNG werden Sie auf Gefahrenquellen hingewiesen, die materielle Schäden, Verletzungen oder sogar den Tod von Personen zur Folge haben können. ____________________ Irrtümer und technische Änderungen vorbehalten. © 2011 Dell Inc. Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Die Vervielfältigung oder Wiedergabe dieser Materialien in jeglicher Weise ohne vorherige schriftliche Genehmigung von Dell Inc. ist strengstens untersagt. In diesem Text verwendete Marken: Dell™, das DELL Logo und PowerVault™ sind Marken von Dell Inc. Microsoft ® und Windows Server ® sind Marken oder eingetragene Marken der Microsoft Corporation in den USA und/oder anderen Ländern. Red Hat ® und Red Hat Enterprise Linux ® sind eingetragene Marken von Red Hat, Inc. in den USA und anderen Ländern. SUSE ® ist eine eingetragene Marke von Novell, Inc. in den USA und anderen Ländern. VMware ® ist eine eingetragene Marke von VMware, Inc. in den USA und/oder anderen Gerichtsbarkeiten. Alle anderen in dieser Publikation möglicherweise verwendeten Marken und Handelsbezeichnungen beziehen sich entweder auf die entsprechenden Hersteller und Firmen oder auf deren Produkte. Dell Inc. erhebt keinen Anspruch auf Markenzeichen und Handelsbezeichnungen mit Ausnahme der eigenen. Vorschriftenmodell Serie E03J und E04J 2011 - 08 Teilenr. D76VD Rev. A02Handbuch zum Einstieg mit dem System 53 Bevor Sie beginnen ANMERKUNG: In der vorliegenden Dokumentation bezieht sich der Ausdruck „Dell PowerVault Speicher-Array der Reihe MD3200“ auf sowohl Dell PowerVault MD3200 als auch auf Dell PowerVault MD3220. Das Erweiterungsgehäuse für Dell PowerVault der Reihe MD1200 bezieht sich sowohl auf Dell PowerVault MD1200 als auch auf Dell PowerVault MD1220. Bevor Sie Ihr Dell PowerVault Speicher-Array der Reihe MD3200 einrichten, sollten Sie einige bewährte Verfahren beachten, um sicherzustellen, dass Ihr Speicher-Gehäuse bei maximaler Effizienz arbeitet und, soweit zutreffend, eine vollständige Redundanz bietet. • Verwenden Sie für das gesamte Netzwerk Ethernet-Kabel der Kategorie 5 e (oder höher). • Bevor Sie Kabel zwischen dem Host-Server und dem Speicher-Array anschließen, sollten Sie alle Ports und Stecker physikalisch kennzeichnen. • Beachten Sie stets die Vorschriften für das ordnungsgemäße Ein- und Ausschalten, wenn Sie das Netzwerk mit Strom versorgen. Stellen Sie außerdem sicher, dass kritische Netzwerkkomponenten an separate Stromkreise angeschlossen sind. Sonstige hilfreiche Dokumentationen und Medien WARNUNG: Beachten Sie die Sicherheits- und Betriebsbestimmungen, die mit dem Computer geliefert wurden. Garantiebestimmungen können möglicherweise als separates Dokument beigelegt sein. ANMERKUNG: Sämtliche PowerVault MD3200-Dokumente sind unter support.dell.com/manuals verfügbar. • In der zusammen mit der Rack-Lösung gelieferten Rack-Dokumentation ist beschrieben, wie das System in einem Rack installiert wird. • Im Hardware-Benutzerhandbuch erhalten Sie Informationen über Systemfunktionen, zur Fehlerbehebung am System und zum Installieren oder Austauschen von Systemkomponenten. • Im Bereitstellungshandbuch erhalten Sie Informationen zum Installieren und Konfigurieren der Software und Hardware. • Im CLI-Handbuch erhalten Sie Informationen zum Verwalten und Konfigurieren Ihres Speicher-Arrays über die Befehlszeilenschnittstelle (CLI).54 Handbuch zum Einstieg mit dem System • Im SMI-S-Handbuch für Programmierer erhalten Sie Informationen zum Verwenden des SMI-S-Anbieters und zur SMI-S-Programmierung. • Alle im Lieferumfang des Systems enthaltenen Medien mit Dokumentation und Hilfsmitteln zur Konfiguration und Verwaltung des Systems, insbesondere in Bezug auf Betriebssystem, Systemverwaltungssoftware, System-Updates und mit dem System erworbene Komponenten. ANMERKUNG: Wenn auf der Website support.dell.com/manuals aktualisierte Dokumente vorliegen, lesen Sie diese immer zuerst, denn frühere Informationen werden damit gegebenenfalls ungültig. Unterstützte Betriebssysteme • Microsoft Windows Server • Red Hat Enterprise Linux • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server • VMware ANMERKUNG: Aktuelle Informationen zu den unterstützten Betriebssystemversionen finden Sie in der Matrix der unterstützten Systeme unter support.dell.com/manuals.Handbuch zum Einstieg mit dem System 55 Allgemeine Konfigurationen Verkabeln der direkt angeschlossenen Hosts Server 1 Server 2 Firmen-, öffentliches oder privates Netzwerk Server 3 Server 4 PowerVault SpeicherArray der Reihe MD3200 56 Handbuch zum Einstieg mit dem System Installation und Konfiguration WARNUNG: Lesen Sie vor dem Ausführen der folgenden Schritte die Sicherheitshinweise für das System. Auspacken des Systems Nehmen Sie das System aus der Verpackung heraus, und vergleichen Sie die einzelnen Teile mit der mitgelieferten Packliste. Installation der Schienen und des Systems in einem Rack Lesen Sie vor der Montage der Schienen und dem Einbau des Systems im Rack zunächst die mit dem System gelieferten Sicherheitshinweise und die Installationsanleitung für das Rack. ANMERKUNG: Aus Gründen der Stabilität wird empfohlen, das PowerVault Speicher-Array der Reihe MD3200 unten im Rack zu installieren und die Erweiterungsgehäuse für den PowerVault der Reihe MD1200 darüber.Handbuch zum Einstieg mit dem System 57 Anschließen des/der Netzstromkabel(s) Stellen Sie sicher, dass der Netzschalter auf der OFF (AUS)-Einstellung ist, bevor Sie die Stromversorgungskabel verbinden. Verbinden Sie das bzw. die Stromversorgungskabel mit dem System. Befestigen des/der Netzstromkabel(s) Befestigen Sie die Kabel fest mit der Halterung, und verwenden Sie dazu das mitgelieferte Band. Stecken Sie jedes Stromversorgungskabel in eine geerdete Steckdose oder an eine separate Spannungsquelle, etwa eine unterbrechungsfreien Stromversorgung (USV) oder einem Stromverteiler (PDU). Jedes Netzteil muss an einen separaten Stromkreis angeschlossen werden.58 Handbuch zum Einstieg mit dem System Verkabeln des Erweiterungsgehäuses Einschalten des Gehäuses Schalten Sie die Komponenten in der folgenden Reihenfolge ein: 1 Erweiterungsgehäuse für PowerVault der Reihe MD1200 (falls verwendet) ANMERKUNG: Stellen Sie vor dem Einschalten des Speicher-Arrays sicher, dass die Status-LED des Erweiterungsgehäuses blau leuchtet. PowerVault Speicher-Array der Reihe MD3200 PowerVault Erweiterungsgehäuse 1 der Reihe MD1200 (optional) PowerVault Erweiterungsgehäuse 2 der Reihe MD1200 (optional)Handbuch zum Einstieg mit dem System 59 2 PowerVault Speicher-Array der Reihe MD3200 ANMERKUNG: Stellen Sie vor dem Einschalten der Host-Server sicher, dass die Status-LED des Speicher-Arrays blau leuchtet. 3 Host-Server Befestigen der Blende Befestigen Sie die Frontblende (optional). Installieren der MD-Storage-Software ANMERKUNG: Ausführliche Anweisungen zum Installieren der MD-StorageSoftware, zum Einrichten des Gehäuses und zum Durchführen von Schritten im Anschluss an die Installation finden Sie im Bereitstellungshandbuch. Die MD-Storage-Manager-Anwendung konfiguriert, verwaltet und überwacht das Speicher-Array. So installieren Sie die MD Storage-Software: 1 Legen Sie das Resource-Medium der MD-Reihe ein. Je nach Betriebssystem startet das Installationsprogramm möglicherweise automatisch. Wenn das Installationsprogramm nicht automatisch startet, navigieren Sie zum Root-Verzeichnis des Installationsmediums (oder zum heruntergeladenen Image für das Installationsprogramm), und führen Sie die Datei md_launcher.exe aus. Rufen Sie bei Linux-basierten Systemen das Stammverzeichnis des Ressourcen-Datenträgers auf und führen Sie die Datei autorun aus. ANMERKUNG: Standardmäßig wird durch Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL) das Resource-Medium mit der Option –noexec mount bereitgestellt, die das Ausführen der selbstextrahierenden Programmdatei nicht zulässt. Wenn Sie diese Einstellung ändern möchten, lesen Sie die entsprechenden Informationen in der Info-Datei, die Sie im Root-Verzeichnis des Installationsmediums finden.60 Handbuch zum Einstieg mit dem System 2 Wählen Sie die Option MD-Storage-Software installieren. 3 Lesen Sie den Lizenzvertrag, und stimmen Sie dem Vertrag zu. 4 Wählen Sie eine der folgenden Installationsoptionen aus dem DropDown-Menü Installationsart aus: • Vollständig (empfohlen) – Mit dieser Option werden die MD-StorageManager-Software (Client), der hostbasierte Speicher-Agent, der Multipath-Treiber und die Hardwarekomponenten installiert. • Nur Host – Mit dieser Option werden nur der hostbasierte SpeicherAgent und die Multipath-Treiber installiert. • Verwaltung – Mit dieser Option werden die Verwaltungssoftware und die Hardwarekomponenten installiert. • Benutzerdefiniert – Mit dieser Option können Sie bestimmte Komponenten auswählen. 5 Wählen Sie die MD-Speicher-Array-Modelle aus, die Sie einrichten möchten, damit sie als Datenspeicher für diesen Hostserver verwendet werden können. 6 Legen Sie fest, ob die Ereignisüberwachung automatisch gestartet werden soll, wenn der Hostserver neu gestartet wird, oder ob Sie sie manuell starten möchten. ANMERKUNG: Diese Option ist nur im Rahmen der Installation der Windows-Client-Software verfügbar. 7 Bestätigen Sie den Installationsort, und klicken Sie auf Installieren. 8 Starten Sie den Hostserver nach erfolgreicher Installation nach Aufforderung neu. 9 Starten Sie den MD Storage Manager, und ermitteln Sie das/die Array(s). 10 Aktivieren Sie, falls zutreffend, alle Erweiterungsfunktionen, die im Lieferumfang Ihres Speicher-Arrays enthalten sind. Wenn Sie Erweiterungsfunktionen erworben haben, finden Sie weitere Informationen auf der gedruckten Aktivierungskarte, die im Lieferumfang Ihres Speicher-Arrays enthalten ist. ANMERKUNG: Das Installationsprogramm für den MD Storage Manager installiert die für den Betrieb Ihres Speicher-Arrays erforderlichen Treiber, die Firmware und die Betriebssystem-Patches/-Hotfixes automatisch. Sie können diese Treiber und die Firmware auch von der Website support.dell.com herunterladen. Weitere für Ihren speziellen Speicher-Array verfügbare Einstellungen und/oder Software finden Sie außerdem in der Support-Matrix unter support.dell.com/manuals.Handbuch zum Einstieg mit dem System 61 Ausfindig machen der Service-Tag-Nummer Ihr System wird durch einen eindeutigen Express-Servicecode und eine eindeutige Service-Tag-Nummer identifiziert. Der Express-Servicecode und die Service-Tag-Nummer befinden sich an der Rückseite des Systems, neben den RAID-Controller-Modulen. Mithilfe dieser Informationen kann Dell Support-Anrufe an den richtigen Mitarbeiter weiterleiten. NOM-Informationen (nur Mexiko) Die folgenden Informationen beziehen sich auf die in diesem Dokument beschriebenen Geräte und gründen auf der mexikanischen Norm NOM: Importeur: Modellnummer: E03J und E04J Netzspannung: 100-240 V Wechselspannung Frequenz: 50/60 Hz Stromaufnahme: 8,6 A62 Handbuch zum Einstieg mit dem System Technische Daten Laufwerke PowerVault MD3200 Bis zu 12 Hot-Swap-fähige 3,5-Zoll-SAS-Festplatten (3,0 Gbit/s und 6,0 Gbit/s) PowerVault MD3220 Bis zu 24 Hot-Swap-fähige 2,5-Zoll-SAS-Festplatten (3,0 Gbit/s und 6,0 Gbit/s) RAID-Controller-Module RAID-Controller-Module • Ein oder zwei Hot-Swap-fähige Module mit Temperatursensoren • 2-GB-Cache pro Controller Rückseitige Anschlüsse (pro RAID-Controller-Modul) SAS-Anschlüsse • Vier SAS-IN Anschlüsse für den Anschluss von Hosts • Ein SAS-OUT-Port für den Anschluss eines zusätzlichen PowerVault Gehäuses der Reihe MD1200. ANMERKUNG: Die SAS-Anschlüsse sind SFF-8088-kompatibel. Serieller Anschluss Ein 6-poliger Mini-DIN-Anschluss ANMERKUNG: Nur für den Technischen Support. Ethernet-Verwaltungsanschluss Ein 100/1000-Base-T-Port-Ethernet-Anschluss für die bandexterne Verwaltung des Gehäuses ANMERKUNG: Die IP-Adressen für die standardmäßige Verwaltungsschnittstelle der primären und sekundären RAID-Controller-Module lauten 192.168.128.101 und 192.168.128.102. Die Verwaltungsschnittstellen sind standardmäßig auf Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) eingestellt. Wenn der Controller nicht in der Lage ist, die IP-Adresskonfiguration innerhalb eines festgelegten Zeitraums (etwa drei Minuten) von einem DHCP-Server abzurufen, greift er standardmäßig auf die statische IP-Adressierung zurück. Weitere Informationen finden Sie im Bereitstellungshandbuch.Handbuch zum Einstieg mit dem System 63 Erweiterung PowerVault der Reihe MD1200 Unterstützt bis zu 192 Festplatten mit einer beliebigen Kombination aus PowerVault MD1200- und PowerVault MD1220-Erweiterungsgehäusen. Die Unterstützung von 192 Festplatten ist eine Erweiterungsfunktion und muss daher aktiviert werden. Ohne Erweiterungsfunktion werden maximal 120 Festplatten unterstützt. Redundante Pfadkonnektiviät liefert redundante Datenpfade zu jedem Festplattenlaufwerk. Rückwandplatine Anschlüsse • Zwölf oder 24 SAS-Festplattenanschlüsse • Zwei Anschlüsse für Netzteil-/Lüftermodule • Zwei Sätze RAID-Controller-Modul-Anschlüsse • Ein Anschluss für das Front-Bedienfeld mit LEDs und Systemidentifizierungstaste Sensoren Zwei Temperaturfühler LED-Anzeigen Frontblende • Eine zweifarbige LED-Anzeige für den Systemstatus • Zwei einfarbige LED-Anzeigen für Stromversorgung und Split-Betrieb ANMERKUNG: Die Gehäusemodus-LED gilt nicht für das PowerVault Speicher-Array der Reihe MD3200. Festplattenträger • Eine einfarbige Aktivitäts-LED • Eine zweifarbige LED-Statusanzeige je Laufwerk Netzteil/Lüfter Drei LED-Statusanzeigen für Netzteilstatus, Netzteil-/Lüfterfehler und Wechselstromstatus64 Handbuch zum Einstieg mit dem System RAID-Controller-Modul Sechs einfarbige LEDs: • Eine Akkufehler-LED • Eine Cache-Aktivitäts-LED • Eine Controller-Fehler-LED • Eine Controller-Stromversorgungs-LED • Eine Systemidentifizierungs-LED • Eine Ethernet-Verwaltungsaktivitäts-LED Sechs zweifarbige LEDs: • Vier SAS-IN-Verbindungs- oder Fehler-LED • Eine SAS-OUT-Verbindungs- oder Fehler-LED • Eine Ethernet-Verwaltungs-Verbindungsgeschwindigkeits-LED Schalter Systemidentifikationstaste Befindet sich auf dem Bedienfeld an der Vorderseite. Dieser Schalter wird verwendet, um ein System innerhalb eines Racks zu identifizieren. Schalter für Gehäusebetriebsart Befindet sich an der Vorderseite des Systems. Dieser Schalter gilt nicht für das PowerVault Speicher-Array der Reihe MD3200. Schalter zum Zurücksetzen des Kennworts Befindet sich an der Rückseite des RAID-ControllerModuls. Mithilfe dieses Schalters können Sie das Speicher-Array-Kennwort zurücksetzen. Netzteile Wechselstromversorgung (je Netzteil) Leistung 600 W Spannung 100–240 V Wechselstrom (4,3-8,6 A) Wärmeabgabe 100 W Maximaler Einschaltstrom Unter typischen Leitungsbedingungen und über den gesamten Umgebungsbetriebsbereich des Systems kann der Einschaltstrom 55 A pro Netzteil über einen Zeitraum von 10 ms oder kürzer erreichen. LED-Anzeigen (fortgesetzt)Handbuch zum Einstieg mit dem System 65 Verfügbare Leistung für Festplatten (pro Schacht) PowerVault MD3200 25 W PowerVault MD3220 12 W Stromverbrauch RAID-Controller-Modul (pro Steckplatz) Maximaler Stromverbrauch 100 W Abmessungen und Gewicht PowerVault MD3200 Höhe 8,68 cm Breite 44,63 cm Tiefe 60,20 cm Gewicht (maximale Konfiguration) 29,30 kg Gewicht (leer) 8,84 kg PowerVault MD3220 Höhe 8,68 cm Breite 44,63 cm Tiefe 54,90 cm Gewicht (maximale Konfiguration) 24,22 kg Gewicht (leer) 8,61 kg 66 Handbuch zum Einstieg mit dem System Umgebungsbedingungen ANMERKUNG: Weitere Informationen zu Umgebungsbedingungen bei verschiedenen Systemkonfigurationen finden Sie unter www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets. Temperatur Betrieb 10 °C bis 35 °C mit einem maximalen Temperaturanstieg von 10 °C pro Stunde ANMERKUNG: Bei Höhen über 900 Meter verringert sich die maximale Betriebstemperatur um 1 ºC/300 m. Lagerung -40 °C bis 65 °C bei einem maximalen Temperaturverlauf von 20 °C pro Stunde Relative Luftfeuchtigkeit Betrieb 20% bis 80% (nicht-kondensierend) mit einem maximalen Luftfeuchtegradienten von 10% pro Stunde Lagerung 5 % bis 95 % (nicht kondensierend) Zulässige Erschütterung Betrieb 0,25 G bei 3-200 Hz, 15 Min. lang Lagerung 0,5 G bei 3-200 Hz, 15 Min. lang Zulässige Stoßeinwirkung Betrieb Ein Stoß von 31 G in der positiven Z-Achse (ein Stoß auf jeder Seite des Systems) über einen Zeitraum von 2,6 ms in der Betriebsrichtung. Lagerung Sechs nacheinander ausgeführte Stöße mit 71 G von bis zu 2 ms Dauer in positiver und negativer X-, Y- und Z-Richtung (ein Stoß auf jeder Seite des Systems) Höhe über NN Betrieb -16 bis 3 048 m ANMERKUNG: Bei Höhen über 900 Meter verringert sich die maximale Betriebstemperatur um 1 °C/300 m. Lagerung -16 bis 10 600 m Luftverschmutzungsklasse Klasse G1 gemäß ISA-S71.04-1985Συστοιχίες αποθήκευσης Dell PowerVault MD3200 και MD3220 Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας Μοντέλο κατά τους κανονισμούς: Σειρά E03J και E04JΣημειώσεις, ειδοποιήσεις και προσοχές ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Η ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ αφορά σημαντικές πληροφορίες που σας βοηθούν να χρησιμοποιείτε καλύτερα τον υπολογιστή σας. ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ: Η ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ υποδηλώνει δυνητική υλική ζημιά ή απώλεια δεδομένων, αν δεν ακολουθούνται οι οδηγίες. ΠΡΟΕΙ∆ΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ: Η ΠΡΟΕΙ∆ΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ υποδηλώνει δυνητική υλική ζημιά, σωματική βλάβη ή θάνατο. ____________________ Οι πληροφορίες αυτής της δημοσίευσης υπόκεινται σε αλλαγές χωρίς ειδοποίηση. © 2011 Dell Inc. Με επιφύλαξη κάθε νόμιμου δικαιώματος. Απαγορεύεται αυστηρά η αναπαραγωγή αυτών των υλικών με οποιονδήποτε τρόποχωρίς την έγγραφη άδεια της Dell Inc. Εμπορικά σήματα που χρησιμοποιούνται στο παρόν κείμενο: Η ονομασία Dell™, το λογότυπο DELL και η ονομασία PowerVault™ είναι εμπορικά σήματα της Dell Inc. Οι ονομασίες Microsoft ® και Windows Server® είναι είτε εμπορικά σήματα είτε σήματα κατατεθέντα της Microsoft Corporation στις Ηνωμένες Πολιτείες ή/και σε άλλες χώρες. Οι ονομασίες Red Hat ® και Red Hat Enterprise Linux ® είναι σήματα κατατεθέντα της Red Hat, Inc. στις Ηνωμένες Πολιτείες και σε άλλες χώρες. Η ονομασία SUSE ® είναι σήμα κατατεθέν της Novell, Inc. στιςΗνωμένεςΠολιτείες και σε άλλες χώρες. Ηονομασία VMware ® είναι σήμα κατατεθέν της VMware, Inc. στις Ηνωμένες Πολιτείες ή/και σε άλλες περιοχές. Άλλα εμπορικά σήματα και εμπορικές ονομασίες μπορεί να χρησιμοποιούνται στην παρούσα έκδοση αναφερόμενα είτε στους κατόχους των σημάτων και των ονομάτων είτε στα προϊόντα τους. Η Dell Inc. παραιτείται από κάθε δικαίωμα σε εμπορικά σήματα και εμπορικές ονομασίες τρίτων. Μοντέλο κατά τους κανονισμούς: Σειρά E03J και E04J 2011 - 08 P/N D76VD Αναθ. A02Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας 69 Πριν ξεκινήσετε ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Στο έγγραφο αυτό, η συστοιχία αποθήκευσης Dell PowerVault σειρά MD3200 αναφέρεται τόσο στο Dell PowerVault MD3200 όσο και στο Dell PowerVault MD3220. Το κουτί επέκτασης Dell PowerVault σειρά MD1200 αναφέρεται στόσο στο Dell PowerVault MD1200 όσο και στο Dell PowerVault MD1220. Πριν ρυθμίσετε τη συστοιχία αποθήκευσης Dell PowerVault σειρά MD3200 θα πρέπει να λάβετε υπόψη σας διάφορες βέλτιστες πρακτικές, για να διασφαλίσετε ότι η συστοιχία αποθήκευσης θα λειτουργεί με τη μέγιστη δυνατή αποδοτικότητα και θα προσφέρει πλήρη δυνατότητα πλεονασμού (εάν απαιτείται). • Στο δίκτυο, χρησιμοποιείτε πάντα καλώδιο Ethernet κατηγορίας 5e (ή ανώτερο). • Πριν συνδέσετε τυχόν καλώδια μεταξύ του διακομιστή κεντρικού υπολογιστή και της συστοιχίας αποθήκευσης, ονομάστε κάθε θύρα και κάθε υποδοχή. • Ακολουθείτε πάντα τις σωστές διαδικασίες έναρξης και τερματισμού λειτουργίας στο δίκτυο. Θα πρέπει επίσης να διασφαλίσετε ότι σημαντικά στοιχεία του δικτύου βρίσκονται σε διαφορετικά ηλεκτρικά κυκλώματα. Λοιπή τεκμηρίωση και μέσα που μπορεί να χρειαστείτε ΕΙ∆ΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ: Ανατρέξτε στις πληροφορίες σχετικά με την ασφάλεια και τους κανονισμούς που έχουν αποσταλεί με το σύστημά σας. Οι πληροφορίες για την εγγύηση ενδέχεται να συμπεριλαμβάνονται σε αυτό το έγγραφο ή να αποτελούν ξεχωριστό έγγραφο. ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Όλα τα έγγραφα για το PowerVault MD3200 είναι διαθέσιμα στην τοποθεσία support.dell.com/manuals. • Η αντίστοιχη τεκμηρίωση που συνοδεύει τη δική σας λύση για τοποθέτηση σε rack περιγράφει τον τρόπο τοποθέτησης του συστήματός σας σε rack. • Το Εγχειρίδιο κατόχου παρέχει πληροφορίες σχετικά με τα χαρακτηριστικά του συστήματος και περιγράφει την αντιμετώπιση προβλημάτων του συστήματός σας και την εγκατάσταση ή την επανατοποθέτηση εξαρτημάτων του συστήματος. • Ο Οδηγός ανάπτυξης παρέχει πληροφορίες σχετικά με την εγκατάσταση και τη ρύθμιση του λογισμικού και του υλικού. 70 Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας • Ο Οδηγός CLI παρέχει πληροφορίες σχετικά με τη χρήση της γραμμής εντολών (CLI) για τη ρύθμιση και τη διαχείριση της συστοιχίας αποθήκευσης. • Ο Οδηγός προγραμματιστή SMI-S παρέχει πληροφορίες σχετικά με τη χρήση του παρόχου SMI-S και του προγραμματισμού SMI-S. • Τυχόν δίσκοι CD/DVD που συνοδεύουν το σύστημά σας και παρέχουν τεκμηρίωση και εργαλεία για τη ρύθμιση και τη διαχείριση του συστήματός σας, όπου συμπεριλαμβάνονται η τεκμηρίωση και τα εργαλεία για το λειτουργικό σύστημα, το λογισμικό διαχείρισης συστήματος, οι ενημερώσεις συστήματος και τα εξαρτήματα που αγοράσατε μαζί με το σύστημά σας. ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Ελέγχετε πάντοτε για ενημερωμένες εκδόσεις στην τοποθεσία support.dell.com/manuals και να διαβάζετε πρώτα τις ενημερωμένες εκδόσεις επειδή πολύ συχνά αντικαθιστούν τις πληροφορίες άλλων εγγράφων. Λειτουργικά συστήματα που υποστηρίζονται • Microsoft Windows Server • Red Hat Enterprise Linux • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server • VMware ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Για τις πιο πρόσφατες πληροφορίες σχετικά με όλες τις υποστηριζόμενες εκδόσεις λειτουργικού συστήματος, ανατρέξτε στην ενότητα Support Matrix στην τοποθεσία support.dell.com/manuals.Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας 71 Συνηθισμένες διαμορφώσεις Καλωδίωση των άμεσα συνδεδεμένων διακομιστών ∆ιακομιστής 1 ∆ιακομιστής 2 Εταιρικό, δημόσιο ή ιδιωτικό δίκτυο ∆ιακομιστής 3 ∆ιακομιστής 4 Συστοιχία αποθήκευσης PowerVault σειρά MD320072 Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας Εγκατάσταση και διαμόρφωση ΕΙ∆ΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ: Προτού εκτελέσετε την παρακάτω διαδικασία, συμβουλευθείτε τις οδηγίες ασφάλειας που συνοδεύουν το σύστημά σας. Άνοιγμα της συσκευασίας του συστήματος Ανοίξτε τη συσκευασία του συστήματος σας και αναγνωρίστε κάθε στοιχείο βάσει της λίστας περιεχομένων που στάλθηκε μαζί με το σύστημά σας. Τοποθέτηση των ραγών και του συστήματος σε rack Συναρμολογήστε τις ράγες και εγκαταστήστε το σύστημα σε rack σύμφωνα με τις οδηγίες ασφάλειας και τις οδηγίες εγκατάστασης σε rack που παρέχονται με το σύστημά σας. ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Προκειμένου να εξισορροπηθεί το φορτίο βάρους, συνιστάται να εγκαταστήσετε τη συστοιχία αποθήκευσης PowerVault σειρά MD3200 στο κάτω μέρος του rack και τα κουτιά επέκτασης του PowerVault MD1200 πάνω από αυτό.Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας 73 Σύνδεση των καλωδίων τροφοδοσίας Βεβαιωθείτε ότι ο διακόπτης τροφοδοσίας είναι στη θέση OFF πριν συνδέσετε τα καλώδια τροφοδοσίας ρεύματος. Συνδέστε τα καλώδια τροφοδοσίας στο σύστημα. Ασφάλιση των καλωδίων τροφοδοσίας Ασφαλίστε τα καλώδια τροφοδοσίας σταθερά στο στήριγμα χρησιμοποιώντας την παρεχόμενη ταινία. Βάλτε το φις των καλωδίων ρεύματος σε γειωμένη πρίζα ή ξεχωριστή πηγή ρεύματος όπως π.χ. συσκευή αδιάλειπτης παροχής ρεύματος (UPS) ή μονάδα διανομής ρεύματος (PDU). Κάθε τροφοδοτικό θα πρέπει να συνδέεται σε ξεχωριστό ηλεκτρικό κύκλωμα.74 Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας Καλωδίωση του κουτιού επέκτασης Ενεργοποίηση του κουτιού Ενεργοποιήστε τα εξαρτήματα με την εξής σειρά: 1 Κουτιά επέκτασης PowerVault σειρά MD1200 (αν χρησιμοποιούνται). ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Πριν την ενεργοποίηση της συστοιχίας αποθήκευσης, βεβαιωθείτε ότι η λυχνία LED κατάστασης του κουτιού επέκτασης είναι μπλε. 2 Συστοιχία αποθήκευσης PowerVault σειρά MD3200. Συστοιχία αποθήκευσης PowerVault σειρά MD3200 Κουτί επέκτασης 1 PowerVault σειρά MD1200 (προαιρετικό) Κουτί επέκτασης 2 PowerVault σειρά MD1200 (προαιρετικό)Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας 75 ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Πριν ενεργοποιήσετε τον διακομιστή κεντρικού υπολογιστή, βεβαιωθείτε ότι η λυχνία LED κατάστασης της συστοιχίας αποθήκευσης είναι μπλε. 3 Διακομιστής(ές) κεντρικού υπολογιστή. Εγκατάσταση του πλαισίου Τοποθετήστε το πλαίσιο (προαιρετικά). Εγκατάσταση του λογισμικού αποθήκευσης MD ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Για λεπτομερείς οδηγίες σχετικά με την εγκατάσταση λογισμικού αποθήκευσης MD, τη ρύθμιση του κουτιού και τις εργασίες μετά την εγκατάσταση, ανατρέξτε στον Οδηγό ανάπτυξης. Η εφαρμογή MD Storage Manager ρυθμίζει, διαχειρίζεται και παρακολουθεί τη συστοιχία αποθήκευσης. Για να εγκαταστήσετε το λογισμικό αποθήκευσης MD: 1 Τοποθετήστε το μέσο πόρων της σειράς MD. Ανάλογα με το λειτουργικό σας σύστημα, το πρόγραμμα εγκατάστασης μπορεί να ξεκινήσει αυτόματα. Αν το πρόγραμμα εγκατάστασης δεν ξεκινήσει αυτόματα, πλοηγηθείτε στο ριζικό κατάλογο του μέσου εγκατάστασης (ή κατεβάστε ένα αντίγραφο του προγράμματος εγκατάστασης) και εκτελέστε το αρχείο md_launcher.exe. Σε συστήματα με Linux, περιηγηθείτε στον γονικό κατάλογο του μέσου πόρων και εκτελέστε το αρχείο autorun.76 Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Από προεπιλογή, το Red Hat Enterprise Linux μοντάρει το μέσο πόρων με την επιλογή μονταρίσματος -noexec η οποία δεν επιτρέπει την εκτέλεση εκτελέσιμων αρχείων. Για να αλλάξετε αυτή τη ρύθμιση, ανατρέξτε στο αρχείο Readme στο ριζικό κατάλογο του μέσου εγκατάστασης. 2 Επιλέξτε Install MD Storage Software (Εγκατάσταση λογισμικού αποθήκευσης MD). 3 Διαβάστε και αποδεχτείτε την άδεια χρήσης. 4 Επιλέξτε μία από τις παρακάτω επιλογές εγκατάστασης από το αναπτυσσόμενο μενού Install Set (Σύνολο εγκατάστασης): • Full (recommended)—Εγκαθιστά το λογισμικό MD Storage Manager (πρόγραμμα-πελάτης), τον παράγοντα αποθήκευσης host-based, πρόγραμμα οδήγησης πολλαπλών διαδρομών και παροχείς υλικού. • Host Only—Εγκαθιστά μόνο τον παράγοντα αποθήκευσης host-based και προγράμματα οδήγησης πολλαπλών διαδρομών. • Management—Εγκαθιστά το λογισμικό διαχείρισης και τους παροχείς υλικού. • Custom—Σας επιτρέπει να επιλέχετε συγκεκριμένα στοιχεία. 5 Επιλέξτε το μοντέλο ή τα μοντέλα συστοιχίας αποθήκευσης MD που ρυθμίζετε για να λειτουργήσουν ως μέσα αποθήκευσης δεδομένων για τον συγκεκριμένο διακομιστή κεντρικού υπολογιστή. 6 Επιλέξτε αν η υπηρεσία παρακολούθησης συμβάντων θα ξεκινάει αυτόματα με την εκκίνηση του διακομιστή κεντρικού υπολογιστή ή μη αυτόματα ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Η επιλογή αυτή ισχύει μόνο για εγκατάσταση λογισμικού πελάτη Windows. 7 Επιβεβαιώστε τη θέση της εγκατάστασης και κάντε κλικ στο Install (Εγκατάσταση). 8 Εάν σας ζητηθεί, επανεκκινήστε το διακομιστή κεντρικού υπολογιστή μόλις ολοκληρωθεί η εγκατάσταση. 9 Ξεκινήστε το MD Storage Manager και βρείτε τη συστοιχία(ες). 10 Εάν χρειάζεται, ενεργοποιήστε τυχόν premium δυνατότητες που αγοράσατε μαζί με τη συστοιχία αποθήκευσης. Εάν αγοράσατε premium δυνατότητες, ανατρέξτε στην έντυπη κάρτα ενεργοποίησης που αποστάλθηκε μαζί με τη συστοιχία αποθήκευσής σας.Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας 77 ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Το πρόγραμμα εγκατάστασης του MD Storage Manager εγκαθιστά αυτόματα τα απαιτούμενα προγράμματα οδήγησης, υλικολογισμικό και ενημερώσεις κώδικα/άμεσες επιδιορθώσεις λειτουργικού συστήματος για τη λειτουργία της συστοιχίας αποθήκευσής σας. Αυτά τα προγράμματα οδήγησης και το υλικολογισμικό είναι επίσης διαθέσιμα στη διεύθυνση support.dell.com. Επιπλέον, ανατρέξτε στο Support Matrix στη διεύθυνση support.dell.com/manuals για πρόσθετες ρυθμίσεις ή/και λογσιμικό που απαιτείται για τη συγκεκριμένη συστοιχία αποθήκευσης. Εύρεση της ετικέτας εξυπηρέτησης Το σύστημά σας αναγνωρίζεται από έναν μοναδικό κωδικό ταχεία εξυπηρέτησης και έναν αριθμό ετικέτας εξυπηρέτησης. Ο κωδικός ταχείας εξυπηρέτησης και η ετικέτα εξυπηρέτησης βρίσκονται στην μπροστινή αλλά και στην πίσω πλευρά του συστήματος δίπλα στις μονάδες ελεγκτή RAID. Οι πληροφορίες αυτές χρησιμοποιούνται από την Dell για την προώθηση κλήσεων υποστήριξης στο κατάλληλο προσωπικό.78 Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας Πληροφορίες NOM (Μόνο για Μεξικό) Οι παρακάτω πληροφορίες παρέχονται για τη συσκευή που περιγράφεται στο παρόν έγγραφο, σύμφωνα με τις προδιαγραφές των επίσημων προτύπων του Μεξικού (NOM): Τεχνικές προδιαγραφές Εισαγωγέας: Dell Inc. de México, S.A. de C.V. Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - 11° Piso Col. Lomas Altas 11950 Mιxico, D.F. Αριθμός μοντέλου: E03J και E04J Τάση παροχής: 100–240 V CA Συχνότητα: 50/60 Hz Κατανάλωση ρεύματος: 8,6 Α Μονάδες δίσκων PowerVault MD3200 Έως και δώδεκα σκληροί δίσκοι άμεσης σύνδεσης SAS 3,5'' (3,0 Gbps και 6,0 Gbps) PowerVault MD3220 Έως και είκοσι τέσσερις δίσκοι άμεσης σύνδεσης SAS 2,5'' (3,0 Gbps και 6,0 Gbps) Μονάδες ελεγκτή RAID Μονάδες ελεγκτή RAID • Μία ή δύο μονάδες με δυνατότητα άμεσης σύνδεσης με αισθητήρες θερμοκρασίας • 2 GB μνήμης cache ανά ελεγκτή Πίσω θύρες (ανά μονάδα ελεγκτή RAID) Θύρες SAS • Τέσσερις θύρες SAS IN για τη σύνδεση κεντρικών υπολογιστών • Μία θύρα SAS OUT για επέκταση σε πρόσθετο κουτί PowerVault MD1200 ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Οι θύρες SAS είναι συμβατές με το SFF-8088.Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας 79 Σειριακή θύρα Μία θύρα 6 ακίδων mini-DIN ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Μόνο για χρήση κατά την τεχνική υποστήριξη. Θύρα διαχείρισης Ethernet Μία θύρα Ethernet 100/1000 Base-T για εξερχόμενη διαχείριση του κουτιού ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Οι προεπιλεγμένες διεύθυνσεις IP διαχείρισης θύρας για την κύρια και τη δευτερεύουσα μονάδα ελεγκτή RAID είναι 192.168.128.101 και 192.168.128.102, αντίστοιχα. Από προεπιλογή, οι θύρες διαχείρισης είναι ρυθμισμένες σε Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). Αν ο ελεγκτής δεν μπορέσει να λάβει διαμόρφωση διεύθυνσης IP από ένα διακομιστή DHCP εντός ενός καθορισμένου χρονικού διαστήματος (περίπου 3 λεπτά), επιστρέφει στη χρήση στατικής διεύθυνσης IP. Για περισσότερες πληροφορίες, ανατρέξτε στον Οδηγό ανάπτυξης. Επέκταση PowerVault σειρά MD1200 Υποστηρίζει το πολύ 192 σκληρούς δίσκους με οποιοδήποτε συνδυασμό κουτιών επέκτασης PowerVault MD1200 ή PowerVault MD1220. Η υποστήριξη για 192 σκληρούς δίσκους είναι premium δυνατότητα και απαιτεί ενεργοποίηση. Ο μέγιστος αριθμός σκληρών δίσκων που υποστηρίζεται χωρίς τη χρήση της premium δυνατότητας είναι 120. Η συνδεσιμότητα εφεδρικής διαδρομής παρέχει εφεδρικές διαδρομές δεδομένων σε κάθε μονάδα σκληρού δίσκου. Πίσω πλευρά Θύρες • 12 ή 24 θύρες SAS σκληρού δίσκου • Δύο θύρες τροφοδοτικών/ανεμιστήρα ψύξης • Δύο σετ θυρών μονάδας ελεγκτή RAID • Μία θύρα πίνακα ελέγχου για τις μπροστινές λυχνίες LED και το κουμπί αναγνώρισης συστήματος Αισθητήρες Δύο αισθητήρες θερμοκρασίας Πίσω θύρες (ανά μονάδα ελεγκτή RAID) (συνέχεια)80 Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας Λυχνίες LED Μπροστινό μέρος • Μία δίχρωμη λυχνία LED για την κατάσταση του συστήματος • Δύο μονόχρωμες λυχνίες LED για την τροφοδοσία και τη λειτουργία κουτιού ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Η λυχνία LED λειτουργίας κουτιού δεν ισχύει για τη συστοιχία αποθήκευσης PowerVault σειρά MD3200. Θήκη μονάδας σκληρού δίσκου • Μία μονόχρωμη λυχνία LED για τη δραστηριότητα • Μία δίχρωμη λυχνία LED για την κατάσταση ανά μονάδα δίσκου. Τροφοδοτικό/ανεμιστήρας ψύξης Τρεις λυχνίες LED για την κατάσταση της παροχής τροφοδοσίας, για σφάλμα στην παροχή τροφοδοσίας/ανεμιστήρα και για την κατάσταση AC Μονάδα ελεγκτή RAID Έξι μονόχρωμες λυχνίες LED: • Μία για σφάλμα μπαταρίας • Μία για ενεργή μνήμη cache • Μία για σφάλμα ελεγκτή • Μία για τροφοδοσία ελεγκτή • Μία για αναγνώριση συστήματος • Μία για δραστηριότητα διαχείρισης Ethernet Έξι δίχρωμες λυχνίες LED: • Σύνδεση ή σφάλμα τεσσάρων SAS IN • Μία για σύνδεση ή σφάλμα SAS OUT • Μία για ταχύτητα σύνδεσης διαχείρισης Ethernet ∆ιακόπτης Κουμπί αναγνώρισης συστήματος Βρίσκεται στον εμπρόσθιο πίνακα ελέγχου. Αυτό το κουμπί χρησιμοποιείται για να εντοπίσει ένα σύστημα σε ένα rack. Διακόπτης λειτουργίας κουτιού Στην μπροστινή πλευρά του συστήματος. Ο διακόπτης αυτός δεν υπάρχει στη συστοιχία αποθήκευσης PowerVault σειρά MD3200.Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας 81 Διακόπτης επαναφοράς κωδικού πρόσβασης Στην πίσω πλευρά της μονάδας ελεγκτή RAID. Ο διακόπτης αυτός χρησιμοποιείται για την επαναφορά του κωδικού πρόσβασης της συστοιχίας αποθήκευσης. Τροφοδοτικά Τροφοδοσία AC (ανά παροχή τροφοδοσίας) Ισχύς σε watt 600 W Τάση 100–240 VAC (8,6 A–4,3 A) Έκλυση θερμότητας 100 W Μέγιστο ρεύμα εισροής Κάτω από τυπικές συνθήκες γραμμής και πάνω από την περιοχή λειτουργίας περιβάλλοντος ολόκληρου του συστήματος, το ρεύμα εισροής μπορεί να αγγίξει το πολύ τα 55 A ανά παροχή τροφοδοσίας για 10 ms ή λιγότερο. ∆ιαθέσιμη τροφοδοσία σκληρού δίσκου (ανά υποδοχή) PowerVault MD3200 25 W PowerVault MD3220 12 W Ισχύς μονάδας ελεγκτή RAID (ανά υποδοχή) Μέγιστη κατανάλωση ισχύος 100 W Φυσικά χαρακτηριστικά PowerVault MD3200 Ύψος 8,68 mm Πλάτος 44,63 mm Βάθος 60,20 cm Βάρος (μέγιστη διαμόρφωση) 29,30 kg Βάρος (κενό) 8,84 kg PowerVault MD3220 Ύψος 8,68 mm ∆ιακόπτης (συνέχεια)82 Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας Πλάτος 44,63 mm Βάθος 54,90 mm Βάρος (μέγιστη διαμόρφωση) 24,22 kg Βάρος (κενό) 8,61 kg Χαρακτηριστικά περιβάλλοντος ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Για επιπλέον πληροφορίες σχετικά με τις περιβαλλοντικές μετρήσεις για συγκεκριμένες διαμορφώσεις συστήματος, επισκεφτείτε τη διεύθυνση www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets. Θερμοκρασία Κατά τη λειτουργία 10 °C έως 35 °C, με μέγιστο ρυθμό μεταβολής της θερμοκρασίας τους 10 °C ανά ώρα ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Για υψόμετρο άνω των 900 μέτρων, η μέγιστη θερμοκρασία λειτουργίας ελαττώνεται ονομαστικά κατά 7°C ανά 168 μέτρα. Κατά την αποθήκευση –40 °C έως 65 °C, με μέγιστο ρυθμό μεταβολής της θερμοκρασίας τους 20 °C ανά ώρα Σχετική υγρασία Κατά τη λειτουργία 20% έως 80% (χωρίς συμπύκνωση) με μέγιστο ρυθμό μεταβολής της υγρασίας 10% ανά ώρα Κατά την αποθήκευση 5% έως 95% (χωρίς συμπύκνωση) Μέγιστη ταλάντευση Κατά τη λειτουργία 0,25 G στα 3–200 Hz για 15 λεπτά Κατά την αποθήκευση 0,5 G στα 3–200 Hz για 15 λεπτά Μέγιστη δόνηση Κατά τη λειτουργία Ένας παλμός δόνησης στο θετικό τμήμα του άξονα z (ένας παλμός σε κάθε πλευρά του συστήματος) των 31 G για έως και 2,6 ms προς τις κατευθύνσεις λειτουργίας Φυσικά χαρακτηριστικά (συνέχεια)Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σας 83 Κατά την αποθήκευση Έξι διαδοχικά εκτελεσμένοι παλμοί δόνησης στο θετικό και αρνητικό τμήμα των αξόνων x, y και z (ένας παλμός σε κάθε πλευρά του συστήματος) των 71 G για έως και 2 ms Υψόμετρο Κατά τη λειτουργία από –16 έως 3.048 μέτρα ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Για υψόμετρο άνω των 900 μέτρων, η μέγιστη θερμοκρασία λειτουργίας ελαττώνεται ονομαστικά κατά 7°C ανά 168 μέτρα. Κατά την αποθήκευση από -16 έως 10.600 μέτρα Επίπεδα ρύπων στην ατμόσφαιρα Κατηγορία G1, όπως ορίζεται από το ISA-S71.04-1985 Χαρακτηριστικά περιβάλλοντος (συνέχεια)84 Τα πρώτα βήματα με το σύστημά σαςMacierze pamięci masowej Dell PowerVault MD3200 i MD3220 Rozpoczęcie pracy z systemem Dotyczy modeli E03J i E04JUwagi, przestrogi i ostrzeżenia UWAGA: Napis UWAGA oznacza ważną wiadomość, która pomoże lepiej wykorzystać komputer. PRZESTROGA: Napis PRZESTROGA wskazuje na ryzyko uszkodzenia sprzętu lub utraty danych w razie nieprzestrzegania instrukcji. OSTRZEŻENIE: Napis OSTRZEŻENIE informuje o sytuacjach, w których występuje ryzyko uszkodzenia mienia, odniesienia obrażeń ciała lub śmierci. ____________________ Informacje zawarte w tym dokumencie mogą zostać zmienione bez uprzedzenia. © 2011 Dell Inc. Wszelkie prawa zastrzeżone. Powielanie tych materiałów w jakiejkolwiek formie bez pisemnej zgody firmy Dell Inc. jest surowo zabronione. Znaki towarowe użyte w tym tekście: Dell™, logo DELL i PowerVault™ są znakami towarowymi firmy Dell Inc. Microsoft® oraz Windows Server® są znakami towarowymi lub zarejestrowanymi znakami towarowymi firmy Microsoft Corporation w Stanach Zjednoczonych i/lub innych krajach. Red Hat ® oraz Red Hat Enterprise Linux® są zarejestrowanymi znakami towarowymi firmy Red Hat, Inc. w Stanach Zjednoczonych i innych krajach. SUSE® jest zarejestrowanym znakiem towarowym firmy Novell, Inc. w Stanach Zjednoczonych i innych krajach. VMware® jest zarejestrowanym znakiem towarowym firmy VMware, Inc. w Stanach Zjednoczonych i/lub innych jurysdykcjach. W niniejszym dokumencie mogą zostać także użyte inne znaki towarowe i nazwy handlowe w odniesieniu do podmiotów posiadających prawa do znaków i nazw lub do ich produktów. Firma Dell Inc. nie rości sobie żadnych praw do znaków towarowych i nazw handlowych innych niż jej własne. Dotyczy modeli E03J i E04J 2011 - 08 Nr ref. D76VD Wersja. A02Rozpoczęcie pracy z systemem 87 Zanim zaczniesz UWAGA: Termin macierz pamięci masowej Dell PowerVault MD3200, używany w niniejszej dokumentacji, odnosi się zarówno do modelu Dell PowerVault MD3200, jak i Dell PowerVault MD3220. Podobnie termin Dell PowerVault MD1200 odnosi się zarówno do modelu Dell PowerVault MD1200, jak i Dell PowerVault MD1220. Przed konfiguracją macierzy pamięci masowej Dell PowerVault MD3200 należy wziąć pod uwagę najlepsze praktyki, aby zapewnić maksymalną wydajność i pełną nadmiarowość macierzy pamięci masowej (w razie potrzeby). • Zaleca się stosowanie kabla kategorii 5e (lub wyższej) w całej sieci Ethernet. • Przed podłączeniem kabli między serwerem głównym i macierzą pamięci masowej należy sprawdzić etykiety poszczególnych portów i złączy. • Zawsze należy przestrzegać odpowiednich procedur włączania i wyłączania zasilania w całej sieci. Najważniejsze elementy sieci należy podłączać do różnych obwodów zasilania. Pozostała dokumentacja i wymagane nośniki OSTRZEŻENIE: Zobacz uwagi dotyczące bezpieczeństwa i przepisów prawnych w dokumencie dostarczonym wraz z systemem. Informacje dotyczące gwarancji mogą zostać zamieszczone w tym dokumencie lub dostarczone jako oddzielny dokument. UWAGA: Dokumentację dotyczącą macierzy pamięci masowej PowerVault MD3200 można znaleźć na stronie support.dell.com/manuals. • Dokumentacja dołączona do stojaka przedstawia sposób montowania w nim systemu. • Podręcznik użytkownika zawiera informacje o funkcjach systemu i opis sposobów rozwiązywania problemów zaistniałych podczas użytkowania systemu, a także instrukcje dotyczące instalacji lub wymiany elementów systemu. • Podręcznik wdrożeniowy zawiera informacje o instalacji oraz konfiguracji oprogramowania i sprzętu. • Podręcznik CLI zawiera informacje o korzystaniu z interfejsu wiersza poleceń (CLI - Command Line Interface) do konfiguracji i zarządzania macierzą pamięci masowej. • Podręcznik programisty SMI-S zawiera informacje o korzystaniu z usługi SMI-S i programowaniu SMI-S.88 Rozpoczęcie pracy z systemem • Wszystkie nośniki dostarczone z systemem zawierające dokumentację i narzędzia do konfiguracji systemu oraz zarządzania nim, wliczając te, które dotyczą systemu operacyjnego, oprogramowania do zarządzania systemem, aktualizacji systemu oraz elementów nabytych wraz z systemem. UWAGA: Należy zawsze sprawdzać, czy na stronie support.dell.com/manuals pojawiły się aktualizacje, i zapoznawać się z nimi w pierwszej kolejności, ponieważ informacje w nich zawarte zastępują informacje z innych dokumentów. Obsługiwane systemy operacyjne • Microsoft Windows Server • Red Hat Enterprise Linux • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server • VMware UWAGA: Więcej informacji o obsługiwanych wersjach systemów operacyjnych można znaleźć w tabeli Support Matrix (Obsługiwane systemy operacyjne) na stronie support.dell.com/manuals.Rozpoczęcie pracy z systemem 89 Typowe konfiguracje Podłączanie hostów dołączanych bezpośrednio Serwer 1 Serwer 2 Sieć firmowa, publiczna lub prywatna Serwer 3 Serwer 4 Macierz pamięci masowej PowerVault MD320090 Rozpoczęcie pracy z systemem Instalacja i konfiguracja OSTRZEŻENIE: Przed rozpoczęciem wykonywania poniższej procedury należy zapoznać się z instrukcjami dotyczącymi bezpieczeństwa dołączonymi do systemu. Rozpakowanie systemu Rozpakuj system i zidentyfikuj poszczególne elementy z listy dostarczonej wraz z systemem. Instalowanie prowadnic i systemu w stojaku Zamontuj prowadnice i zainstaluj system w stojaku zgodnie z instrukcjami dotyczącymi bezpieczeństwa oraz instrukcjami dotyczącymi montowania systemów w stojaku dostarczonymi wraz z systemem. UWAGA: Aby zrównoważyć obciążenie stojaka, zaleca się instalowanie macierzy pamięci masowej PowerVault MD3200 w dolnej części stojaka, a obudowy rozszerzenia PowerVault MD1200 w górnej części.Rozpoczęcie pracy z systemem 91 Podłączanie kabli zasilania Upewnij się, że przycisk zasilania znajduje się w położeniu wyłączony przed przystąpieniem do podłączania kabli zasilania. Podłącz kable zasilania do systemu. Mocowanie kabli zasilania Zamocuj kable na wsporniku, używając załączonej opaski. Następnie podłącz drugą końcówkę kabli zasilania do uziemionego gniazdka elektrycznego lub oddzielnego źródła zasilania, np. do zasilania bezprzerwowego (UPS) lub do jednostki rozdziału zasilania (PDU). Każdy zasilacz należy podłączyć do oddzielnego obwodu zasilania.92 Rozpoczęcie pracy z systemem Podłączanie obudowy rozszerzenia Włączanie obudowy Elementy należy włączać w następującej kolejności: 1 Obudowy rozszerzenia PowerVault MD1200 (jeśli są używane). UWAGA: Przed włączeniem macierzy pamięci masowej, upewnij się, że wskaźnik LED obudowy rozszerzenia świeci na niebiesko. 2 Macierz pamięci masowej PowerVault MD3200. Macierz pamięci masowej PowerVault MD3200 Obudowa rozszerzenia PowerVault MD1200 1 (opcjonalna) Obudowa rozszerzenia PowerVault MD1200 2 (opcjonalna)Rozpoczęcie pracy z systemem 93 UWAGA: Przed włączeniem serwerów głównych, upewnij się, że wskaźnik LED macierzy pamięci masowej świeci na niebiesko. 3 Serwery główne. Instalowanie osłony Zamontuj osłonę (opcjonalną). Instalowanie oprogramowania MD Storage UWAGA: Więcej informacji o instalacji oprogramowania MD Storage, konfiguracji obudowy i czynnościach wykonywanych po instalacji można znaleźć w podręczniku Podręcznik wdrożeniowy. Aplikacja MD Storage Manager pozwala na konfigurację, zarządzanie i monitorowanie macierzy pamięci masowej. Aby zainstalować oprogramowanie MD Storage: 1 Włóż nośnik instalacyjny oprogramowania MD Storage do napędu. Program instalacyjny może zostać uruchomiony automatycznie, zależnie od posiadanego systemu. Jeśli program instalacyjny nie zostanie uruchomiony automatycznie, przejdź do katalogu głównego nośnika instalacyjnego (lub pobranego obrazu programu instalacyjnego) i uruchom plik md_launcher.exe. W przypadku systemów Linux przejdź do katalogu głównego nośnika instalacyjnego i uruchom plik autorun.94 Rozpoczęcie pracy z systemem UWAGA: Domyślnie system operacyjny Red Hat Enterprise Linux montuje nośnik instalacyjny z opcją –noexec, która nie umożliwia uruchamiania plików wykonywalnych. Aby zmienić to ustawienie, należy zapoznać się z plikiem Readme znajdującym się w katalogu głównym nośnika instalacyjnego. 2 Wybierz opcję Install MD Storage Software (Zainstaluj oprogramowanie MD Storage). 3 Zapoznaj się z umową licencyjną i wyraź zgodę na jej warunki. 4 Wybierz jedną z poniższych opcji z listy rozwijanej Install Set (Zestaw instalacyjny): • Full (recommended) (Pełna (zalecana)) — opcja obejmuje instalację oprogramowania MD Storage Manager (klient), agenta pamięci masowej, sterownika wielościeżkowego i usług sprzętowych. • Host Only (Tylko host) — opcja obejmuje instalację agenta pamięci masowej i sterownika wielościeżkowego. • Management (Zarządzanie) — opcja obejmuje instalację oprogramowania do zarządzania i usług sprzętowych. • Custom (Niestandardowa) — opcja umożliwia wybór poszczególnych składników. 5 Wybierz modele macierzy pamięci masowej MD, które będą konfigurowane jako pamięć masowa dla tego serwera głównego. 6 Ustaw, czy usługa monitorowania zdarzeń ma być uruchamiana automatycznie po ponownym uruchomieniu serwera głównego. UWAGA: Ta opcja dotyczy tylko instalacji oprogramowania klienta w systemie Windows. 7 Potwierdź katalog instalacji i kliknij przycisk Install (Instaluj). 8 Po zakończeniu instalacji i wyświetleniu monitu ponownie uruchom serwer główny. 9 Uruchom oprogramowanie MD Storage Manager i przeprowadź operację wykrywania macierzy. 10 Jeśli dotyczy, aktywuj dodatkowe funkcje zamówione z macierzą pamięci masowej. Aby dowiedzieć się więcej o funkcjach Premium, zapoznaj się z drukowaną kartą aktywacji dostarczoną w zestawie.Rozpoczęcie pracy z systemem 95 UWAGA: Program instalacyjny oprogramowania MD Storage Manager powoduje automatyczną instalację sterowników, oprogramowania układowego oraz poprawek i łatek systemu operacyjnego wymaganych do obsługi macierzy pamięci masowej. Sterowniki i oprogramowanie układowe są również dostępne na stronie support.dell.com. Więcej informacji o dodatkowych ustawieniach i oprogramowaniu wymaganym do prawidłowej pracy macierzy pamięci masowej można znaleźć w tabeli Support Matrix na stronie support.dell.com/manuals. Znajdowanie kodu Service Tag Każdy system jest oznaczony unikatowym kodem Express Service Code i Service Tag. Kody Express Service Code i Service Tag znajdują się na panelu przednim systemu oraz obok modułów kontrolera RAID z tyłu systemu. Informacje są używane przez firmę Dell do kierowania rozmowy telefonicznej bezpośrednio do właściwego działu pomocy technicznej.96 Rozpoczęcie pracy z systemem Informacja NOM (tylko Meksyk) Informacje przedstawione poniżej dotyczą urządzenia opisanego w niniejszym dokumencie i są zgodne z wymogami standardowych norm obowiązujących w Meksyku (NOM): Dane techniczne Importer: Dell Inc. de México, S.A. de C.V. Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - 11° Piso Col. Lomas Altas 11950 México, D.F. Numer modelu: E03J i E04J Napięcie zasilania: 100–240 V prądu zmiennego Częstotliwość: 50/60 Hz Pobór prądu: 8,6 A Napędy PowerVault MD3200 Obsługa do dwunastu 3,5-calowych, wymienianych podczas pracy dysków twardych SAS (3,0 Gb/s i 6,0 Gb/s) PowerVault MD3220 Obsługa do dwudziestu czterech 2,5-calowych, wymienianych podczas pracy dysków twardych SAS (3,0 Gb/s i 6,0 Gb/s) Moduły kontrolera RAID Moduły kontrolera RAID • Jeden lub dwa wymieniane podczas pracy moduły z czujnikami temperatury • 2 GB pamięci podręcznej na każdy kontrolerRozpoczęcie pracy z systemem 97 Złącza na panelu tylnym (dla każdego modułu kontrolera RAID) Złącza SAS • Cztery porty wejściowe SAS do podłączenia hostów • Jeden port wyjściowy SAS do podłączenia dodatkowej obudowy rozszerzenia PowerVault MD1200 UWAGA: Złącza SAS są zgodne ze standardem SFF-8088. Złącze szeregowe Jedno 6-stykowe złącze mini-DIN UWAGA: Wyłącznie do obsługi serwisowej. Złącza sieci Ethernet do zarządzania Jeden port 100/1000 Base-T sieci Ethernet do pozapasmowego zarządzania obudową UWAGA: Adresy IP portów do zarządzania dla podstawowego i pomocniczego modułu kontrolera RAID są domyślnie ustawione na odpowiednio 192.168.128.101 i 192.168.128.102. Domyślnie adresy IP portów do zarządzania są jednak konfigurowane automatycznie za pośrednictwem protokołu Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). Jeśli sterownik nie będzie mógł uzyskać adresu IP z serwera DHCP w określonym czasie (w przybliżeniu 3 minuty) przywrócone zostaną domyślne, statyczne adresy IP. Więcej informacji można znaleźć w Podręczniku wdrożeniowym. Obudowa rozszerzenia PowerVault MD1200 Obsługa maksymalnie do 192 dysków twardych w dowolnej konfiguracji obudów rozszerzenia PowerVault MD1200 lub PowerVault MD1220. Obsługa 192 dysków twardych jest funkcją Premium i wymaga dodatkowej aktywacji. Maksymalna liczba obsługiwanych dysków twardych bez funkcji Premium wynosi 120. Łączność przy użyciu nadmiarowych ścieżek danych zapewnia nadmiarowe ścieżki danych dla każdego dysku twardego. 98 Rozpoczęcie pracy z systemem Tablica połączeń Złącza • Złącza dla 12 lub 24 dysków twardych SAS • Dwa złącza dla zasilacza i modułu wentylatora • Dwa zestawy złączy dla modułu kontrolera RAID • Jedno złącze panelu sterowania dla wskaźników LED na panelu przednim i przycisk identyfikacji systemu Czujniki Dwa czujniki temperatury Wskaźniki LED Panel przedni • Jeden dwukolorowy wskaźnik LED informujący o stanie systemu • Dwa jednokolorowe wskaźniki LED informujące o zasilaniu i trybie pracy obudowy UWAGA: Wskaźnik LED trybu pracy obudowy nie jest używany w macierzy pamięci masowej PowerVault MD3200. Nośnik dysku twardego • Jeden jednokolorowy wskaźnik LED informujący o pracy dysku • Jeden dwukolorowy wskaźnik LED informujący o stanie każdego dysku Zasilacz/wentylator Trzy wskaźniki LED informujące o stanie zasilacza, awarii zasilacza/wentylatora i stanie zasilania prądem zmiennymRozpoczęcie pracy z systemem 99 Moduł kontrolera RAID Sześć jednokolorowych wskaźników LED: • Jeden informujący o uszkodzeniu baterii • Jeden informujący o aktywności pamięci podręcznej • Jeden informujący o awarii kontrolera • Jeden informujący o zasilaniu kontrolera • Jeden informujący o identyfikacji systemu • Jeden informujący o aktywności portu Ethernet do zarządzania Sześć dwukolorowych wskaźników LED: • Cztery informujące o stanie lub awarii portu wejściowego SAS • Jeden informujący o stanie lub awarii portu wyjściowego SAS • Jeden informujący o szybkości łącza Ethernet do zarządzania Przełącznik Przycisk identyfikacji systemu Umieszczony na przednim panelu sterowania. Ten przycisk jest używany do lokalizacji systemu w stojaku. Przycisk trybu pracy obudowy Umieszczony na panelu przednim systemu. Przełącznika nie można stosować w macierzy pamięci masowej PowerVault MD3200. Przycisk resetowania hasła Umieszczony na panelu tylnym modułu kontrolera RAID. Ten przycisk jest używany do resetowania hasła macierzy pamięci masowej. Zasilanie Zasilacz prądu zmiennego (na zasilacz) Moc 600 W Napięcie 100 – 240 V prądu zmiennego (8,6 A – 4,3 A) Emisja ciepła 100 W Wskaźniki LED (ciąg dalszy)100 Rozpoczęcie pracy z systemem Maks. natężenie prądu przy włączeniu Przy typowym zasilaniu i w całym dozwolonym zakresie warunków pracy systemu natężenie prądu przy włączeniu może osiągnąć maksymalnie 55 A na zasilacz przez 10 ms lub krócej. Dostępne zasilanie dysku twardego (dla każdego gniazda) PowerVault MD3200 25 W PowerVault MD3220 12 W Dostępne zasilanie modułu kontrolera RAID (dla każdego gniazda) Maksymalne zużycie energii 100 W Cechy fizyczne PowerVault MD3200 Wysokość 8,68 cm (3,41 cala) Szerokość 44,63 cm (17,57 cala) Głębokość 60,20 cm (23,70 cala) Waga (przy maksymalnej konfiguracji) 29,30 kg (64,6 funta) Waga (bez wyposażenia) 8,84 kg (19,5 funta) PowerVault MD3220 Wysokość 8,68 cm (3,41 cala) Szerokość 44,63 cm (17,57 cala) Głębokość 54,90 cm (21,61 cala) Waga (przy maksymalnej konfiguracji) 24,22 kg (53,4 funta) Waga (bez wyposażenia) 8,61 kg (19 funtów) Zasilanie (ciąg dalszy)Rozpoczęcie pracy z systemem 101 Warunki otoczenia UWAGA: Dodatkowe informacje o warunkach otoczenia przewidzianych dla poszczególnych konfiguracji systemu można znaleźć na stronie www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets. Temperatura: W trakcie pracy Od 10°C do 35°C (od 50°F do 95°F) przy maksymalnym gradiencie temperaturowym 10°C na godzinę UWAGA: W przypadku wysokości powyżej 2950 stóp (ok. 900 m) maksymalna temperatura, w jakiej urządzenie może pracować, obniża się o 1°F (ok. 0,6°C) na każde 550 stóp (ok. 167 m). Przechowywanie Od –40°C do 65°C (od –40°F do 149°F) przy maksymalnym gradiencie temperaturowym wynoszącym 20°C na godzinę Wilgotność względna W trakcie pracy Od 20 do 80% (bez kondensacji) przy maksymalnym gradiencie wilgotności 10% na godzinę Przechowywanie Od 5% do 95% (bez kondensacji) Maksymalne drgania W trakcie pracy 0,25 G przy częstotliwości 3 – 200 Hz przez 15 min Przechowywanie 0,5 G przy częstotliwości 3 - 200 Hz przez 15 min Maksymalny wstrząs W trakcie pracy Jeden impuls wstrząsowy na dodatniej osi Z (jeden wstrząs po każdej stronie systemu) o sile 31 G, trwający przez 2,6 ms w kierunkach działania Przechowywanie Sześć kolejnych impulsów wstrząsowych na dodatniej i ujemnej stronie osi X, Y, Z (jeden wstrząs po każdej stronie systemu) o sile 71 G, trwających do 2 ms102 Rozpoczęcie pracy z systemem Wysokość n.p.m. W trakcie pracy Od -16 do 3048 m (od -50 do 10 000 stóp) UWAGA: W przypadku wysokości powyżej 2950 stóp (ok. 900 m) maksymalna temperatura, w jakiej urządzenie może pracować, obniża się o 1°F (ok. 0,6°C) na każde 550 stóp (ok. 167 m). Przechowywanie Od -16 do 10 600 m (od –50 do 35 000 stóp) Poziom zanieczyszczeń w powietrzu Klasa G1 wg definicji w ISA-S71.04-1985 Warunki otoczenia (ciąg dalszy)Массивы хранения данных PowerVault MD3200 и MD3220 Начало работы с системой Нормативная модель серии E03J и E04JПримечания, предупреждения и предостережения ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ указывает на важную информацию, которая поможет использовать компьютер более эффективно. ВНИМАНИЕ: ВНИМАНИЕ указывает на риск повреждения оборудования или потери данных в случае несоблюдения инструкций. ОСТОРОЖНО: ОСТОРОЖНО указывает на потенциальную опасность повреждения оборудования, получения легких травм или угрозу для жизни. ____________________ Информация, содержащаяся в данной публикации, может быть изменена без уведомления. © 2011 Dell Inc. Все права защищены. Воспроизведениематериалов данного руководства в любойформе безписьменного разрешения корпорации Dell Inc. строго запрещается. Используемые в данном тексте товарные знаки: Dell™, логотип DELL и PowerVault™ являются товарными знаками корпорации Dell Inc. Microsoft ® и Windows Server ® являются товарными знаками или зарегистрированными товарными знаками корпорации Microsoft в Соединенных Штатах Америки и/или других странах. Red Hat ® и Red Hat Enterprise Linux ® являются зарегистрированными товарными знаками корпорации Red Hat, Inc. в США и других странах. SUSE ® является зарегистрированным товарным знаком корпорации Novell, Inc. в США и другихстранах. VMware ® является зарегистрированнымтоварнымзнакомкорпорации VMware в США и/или других юрисдикциях. Прочие товарные знаки и названия продуктов могут использоваться в данной публикации для обозначения компаний, заявляющих права на эти товарные знаки и названия, или продуктов этих компаний. Dell Inc. не претендует на права собственности в отношении каких-либо товарных знаков и торговых наименований, кроме своих собственных. Нормативная модель серии E03J и E04J 2011  08 P/N D76VD Ред. A02Начало работы с системой 105 Предварительные замечания ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: В этом документе под массивом хранения данных Dell PowerVault серии MD3200 подразумевается, как модель Dell PowerVault MD3200, так и Dell PowerVault MD3220. Корпус расширения Dell PowerVault MD1200 означает, как Dell PowerVault MD1200, так и Dell PowerVault MD1220. Перед установкой массива хранения данных Dell PowerVault MD3200 необходимо ознакомиться с рекомендациями по его эксплуатации - это позволит обеспечить работу массива с максимальной эффективностью и полной избыточностью (при необходимости). • Во всей сети должен использоваться кабель Ethernet категории 5e (или выше). • Перед соединением хост-сервера и массива хранения данных кабелями промаркируйте все порты и разъемы. • Соблюдайте правила эксплуатации сетевого оборудования при включении и выключении питания. Критически важные компоненты сети должны питаться от раздельных силовых цепей. Другая необходимая документация и носители данных ОСТОРОЖНО: Ознакомьтесь с правилами техники безопасности, включенными в комплект поставки системы. Условия гарантийного обязательства приведены в соответствующем разделе данного документа или в отдельном документе. ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Полная документация по массиву PowerVault MD3200 доступна по адресу support.dell.com/manuals. • В документации на стойку, поставляемой в комплекте со стойкой, содержатся инструкции по установке системы в эту стойку. • В Руководстве по эксплуатации оборудования представлена информация о характеристиках системы, описан порядок устранения неисправностей системы, установки или замены ее компонентов. • В Руководстве по развертыванию представлена информация об установке и настройке программного обеспечения и оборудования. • В Инструкциях к интерфейсу СLI (CLI Guide) представлена информация об использовании интерфейса командной строки (CLI) для настройки и администрирования массива хранения данных.106 Начало работы с системой • В документе SMI-S Programmer’s Guide (Руководство программиста SMI-S) представлена информация об использовании поставщика SMI-S и программировании SMI-S. • Любой носитель, поставляемый в комплекте с системой, содержащий документацию и программные средства для настройки системы и управления ею, включая компоненты, относящиеся к операционной системе, ПО для управления системой и обновления системы, а также компоненты, приобретенные вместе с системой. ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Обязательно проверяйте страницу support.dell.com/manuals на наличие обновлений. Обновленные документы часто заменяют собой другие материалы – читайте их в первую очередь. Поддерживаемые операционные системы • Microsoft Windows Server • Red Hat Enterprise Linux • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server • VMware ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Последняя информация обо всех поддерживаемых версиях операционных систем приведена в разделе Support Matrix (Таблица поддержки) по адресу support.dell.com/manuals.Начало работы с системой 107 Стандартные конфигурации Монтаж кабельной проводки хостов прямого подключения Сервер 1 Сервер 2 Корпоративная, открытая или частная сеть Сервер 3 Сервер 4 Массив хранения данных серии MD3200108 Начало работы с системой Установка и конфигурирование ОСТОРОЖНО: Перед тем, как приступить к выполнению следующей процедуры, изучите инструкции по технике безопасности, прилагаемые к системе. Распаковка системы Распакуйте систему, найдите каждый элемент с помощью упаковочной описи, поставляемой вместе с системой. Установка направляющих и системы в стойку Смонтируйте направляющие кронштейны и установите систему в стойку согласно прилагаемым инструкциям по технике безопасности и инструкциям по установке стойки. ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Для балансировки весовой нагрузки рекомендуется установить массив хранения данных PowerVault MD3200 на дно стойки, а корпуса расширения PowerVault MD1200 – расположить сверху.Начало работы с системой 109 Подключение кабеля(ей) питания Перед подключением кабелей питания убедитесь, что переключатель питания находится в положении ВЫКЛ. Подсоедините кабель(и) питания к системе. Фиксация кабелей питания Надежно прикрепите кабель(и) к скобке с помощью ремешка, входящего в комплект поставки. Подключите другой конец кабеля(ей) питания к заземленной розетке или отдельному источнику питания, например источнику бесперебойного питания (ИБП) или блоку распределения питания (БРП). Каждый источник питания должен быть подключен к отдельной цепи питания.110 Начало работы с системой Монтаж кабельной проводки корпуса расширения Включение корпуса Включите компоненты в следующем порядке: 1 Корпуса расширения PowerVault серии MD1200 (при наличии) ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Перед включением массива хранения данных убедитесь, что индикатор состояния корпуса расширения синего цвета. Массив хранения данных серии MD3200 Корпус расширения 1 серии PowerVault MD1200 (опция) Корпус расширения 2 серии PowerVault MD1200 (опция)Начало работы с системой 111 2 Массив хранения данных серии MD3200 ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Перед включением хост8сервера (8ов) убедитесь, что индикатор состояния корпуса для массива хранения данных синего цвета. 3 Хост-сервер(ы) Установка лицевой панели Установите лицевую панель (опция). Установка программного обеспечения MD Storage ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Подробные инструкции по установке программного обеспечения MD Storage, установке корпуса и для задач, выполняемых после установки, приведены в документе Deployment Guide (Руководство по развертыванию). Приложение MD Storage Manager осуществляет настройку, администрирование и мониторинг массива хранения данных. Чтобы установить программное обеспечение MD Storage Manager: 1 Вставьте носитель с ресурсами для серии MD. В зависимости от вашей операционной системы программа установки может запуститься автоматически. Если программа установки не запускается автоматически, перейдите в корневой каталог установочного носителя (или загруженного образа программы установки) и запустите файл md_launcher.exe. В системах Linux - перейдите в корневой каталог внешнего носителя и запустите файл autorun.112 Начало работы с системой ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Операционная система Red Hat Enterprise Linux по умолчанию присваивает внешним носителям атрибут -noexec mount, который запрещает запуск файлов с расширением .exe. Чтобы изменить этот атрибут обратитесь к файлу Readme, расположенном в корневом каталоге установочного носителя. 2 Выберите Install MD Storage Software (Установка программного обеспечения MD). 3 Прочтите и примите лицензионное соглашение. 4 Выберите одну из следующих опций установки из раскрывающегося меню Install Set (Опции установки): • Full (recommended)/Полная (рекомендуется) — Устанавливает программное обеспечение MD Storage Manager (клиент), хостовый агент системы хранения, многоканальный драйвер и провайдеры оборудования. • Host Only (Только хост) — Устанавливает хостовый агент системы хранения и многоканальные драйвера. • Management (Администрирование) — Устанавливает только администрирующее программное обеспечение и провайдеры оборудования. • Custom (Настраиваемая) —Позволяет вам выбрать соответствующие компоненты. 5 Выберите модель массива хранения данных, которые вы собираетесь настроить для обслуживания хранилищ данных данного хост-сервера. 6 Выберите, запускать ли сервис мониторинга событий автоматически при перезагрузке хост-сервера или вручную. ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Данная опция доступна только для установки клиентского программного обеспечения под Windows. 7 Подтвердите выбор места для установки и нажмите Install (Установить). 8 При появлении запроса перезагрузите хост-сервер после завершения установки. 9 Запустите MD Storage Manager и найдите массив(ы).Начало работы с системой 113 10 Активируйте, при их наличии, любые дополнительные функции, приобретенные вместе с массивом хранения данных. Если вы приобрели дополнительные функции, см. бумажную карту активации, поставляемую вместе с вашим массивом хранения данных. ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Установочная программа MD Storage Manager автоматически устанавливает требуемые драйвера, прошивку и дополнения/исправления для операционной системы, необходимые для использования вашего массива хранения данных. Данные драйвера и прошивка доступны по адресу support.dell.com. Для получения дополнительной информации по любым настройкам и/или программному обеспечению, требуемому для вашего конкретного массива для хранения данных см. раздел Support Matrix (Таблица совместимости) по адресу support.dell.com/manuals. Как найти метку обслуживания Система идентифицируется по уникальному коду экспресс-обслуживания и номеру метки обслуживания. Код экспресс-обслуживания и метка обслуживания расположены спереди и сзади системы, рядом с модулями контроллеров RAID. Эта информация необходима для того чтобы ваши звонки могли быть соответствующим образом перенаправлены сотрудникам службы технического обслуживания корпорации Dell.114 Начало работы с системой Информация NOM (только для Мексики) В соответствии с требованиями официальных стандартов Мексики (NOM) на устройстве, описанном в данном документе, указывается следующая информация. Технические характеристики Импортер: Номер модели: E03J и E04J Напряжение в сети: 100–240 В переменного тока Частота: 50/60 Гц Потребляемый ток: 8,6 A Накопители PowerVault MD3200 До двенадцати жестких дисков SAS 3,5 дюйма с возможностью горячей замены (3,0 Гбит/с и 6,0 Гбит/с) PowerVault MD3220 До двадцати четырех жестких дисков SAS 2,5 дюйма с возможностью горячей замены (3,0 Гбит/с и 6,0 Гбит/с) Модули RAID-котроллеров Модули RAID-котроллеров • Один из двух модулей с возможностью горячей замены с температурными датчиками • Кэш - по 2 ГБ на контроллерНачало работы с системой 115 Разъемы задней панели (на модуль RAID-контроллера) Разъемы SAS • Четыре порта входа SAS для подключения хостов • Один порт выхода SAS для расширения на дополнительный корпус PowerVault серии MD1200 ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Разъемы SAS совместимы с SFF88088. Разъем последовательного порта Один 6-контактный разъем mini-DIN ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Только для специалистов службы технической поддержки. Разъем управления Ethernet Один порт 100/1000 Base-T Ethernet для управления корпусом вне диапазона. ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: По умолчанию IP8адресами управляющего порта для первичного и вторичного модулей RAID8контроллера являются 192.168.128.101 и 192.168.128.102 соответственно. По умолчанию управляющие порты настроены на использование протокола DHCP. Если контроллер не может получить конфигурацию IP8адреса от DHCP8сервера в течение заданного промежутка времени (приблизительно 3 минуты), он по умолчанию возвращается к использованию статической IP8адресации. Для получения более подробной информации см. Руководство по развертыванию.116 Начало работы с системой Расширение Серия PowerVault MD1200 Поддержка максимум 192 жестких дисков с любой комбинацией корпусов расширения PowerVault MD1200 или PowerVault MD1220. Поддержка до 192 жестких дисков является дополнительной функцией и требует активации. Максимальное количество жестких дисков, поддерживаемое без использования дополнительных функций, равняется 120. Возможность резервного подключения обеспечивает резервирование каналов данных для каждого жесткого диска. Объединительная плата Разъемы • 12 или 24 разъема для жестких дисков SAS • Два разъема для модулей источника питания и охлаждающих вентиляторов • Два набора разъемов модулей RAID-контроллера • Один разъем панели управления для передних индикаторов и кнопка идентификации системы Датчики Два датчика температуры Светодиодные индикаторы Передняя панель • Один двухцветный светодиодный индикатор состояния системы • Два одноцветных светодиодных индикатора питания и режима корпуса ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Светодиод режима корпуса не применим к массиву хранения данных PowerVault MD3600f. Салазки для жесткого диска • Один одноцветный светодиодный индикатор активности • Один двухцветный светодиодный индикатор состояния для каждого дискаНачало работы с системой 117 Источник питания и охлаждающий вентилятор 3 светодиодных индикатора состояния для индикации состояния источника питания, неисправности источника питания или вентилятора и состояния подачи переменного тока Модуль RAID-контроллера Шесть одноцветных индикаторов: • Один для индикации отказа аккумулятора • Один для индикации активного состояния кэша • Один для индикации отказа контроллера • Один для индикации питания контроллера • Один для идентификации системы • Один для индикации активности управления через Ethernet Шесть двуцветных индикаторов: • Четыре канала входа SAS или отказ • Один для индикации канала выхода SAS или отказа • Один для индикации скорости управления через Ethernet Переключатель Кнопка идентификации системы Находится на передней панели управления. Данная кнопка используется для определения местонахождения системы в стойке. Переключатель режима корпуса Расположен спереди системы. Этот переключатель не применим к массиву хранения данных PowerVault серии MD3200. Переключатель сброса пароля Расположен на задней панели модуля RAID- контроллера. Этот переключатель используется для сброса пароля массива хранения данных. Светодиодные индикаторы (продолжение)118 Начало работы с системой Источники питания Источник питания переменного тока (для каждого источника питания) Мощность 600 Вт Напряжение 100 — 240 В пер. тока (8,6 A — 4,3 A) Теплоотдача 100 Вт Максимальный бросок тока При стандартных параметрах питающей сети и во всем рабочем диапазоне внешних параметров системы бросок тока может достигать максимума 55 А для каждого источника питания в течение не более 10 мс. Доступное питание жестких дисков (для каждого слота) PowerVault MD3200 25 Вт PowerVault MD3220 12 Вт Модуль питания RAID-контроллера (на слот) Максимальная потребляемая мощность 100 Вт Физические характеристики PowerVault MD3200 Высота 8,68 см (3,41 дюйма) Ширина 44,63 см (17,57 дюйма) Длина 60,20 см (23,70 дюйма) Масса (макс. конфигурация) 29,30 кг (64,6 фунта) Масса (пустой) 8,84 кг (19,5 фунта) PowerVault MD3220 Высота 8,68 см (3,41 дюйма) Ширина 44,63 см (17,57 дюйма) Длина 54,90 см (21,61 дюйма) Масса (макс. конфигурация) 24,22 кг (53,4 фунта) Масса (пустой) 8,61 кг (19 фунта)Начало работы с системой 119 Условия эксплуатации и хранения ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Дополнительную информацию о параметрах окружающей среды для установки определенной конфигурации системы см. на веб8странице www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets. Температура В процессе работы От 10 до 35 °C с максимальной скоростью изменения температуры 10 °C в час ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Если высота над уровнем моря превышает 900 м (2950 футов), максимальная рабочая температура снижается на 1°F/168 м (550 футов). Хранение От –40 до 65 °C (от –40 °F до 149 °F) с максимальной скоростью изменения температуры 20 °C в час Относительная влажность В процессе работы От 20% до 80% (без конденсации) с максимальными колебаниями влажности 10% в час Хранение От 5 % до 95 % (без конденсации) Максимальная вибрация В процессе работы 0,25 G при частоте от 3 до 200 Гц в течение 15 минут Хранение 0,5 G при частоте от 3 до 200 Гц в течение 15 минут Максимальная ударная нагрузка В процессе работы Один импульс ударной нагрузки с ускорением 31 G длительностью не более 2,6 мс в положительном направлении по оси z (по одному импульсу с каждой стороны системы) при рабочей ориентации Хранение Шесть последовательных ударных импульсов 71 G длительностью не более 2 мс в положительном и отрицательном направлениях по осям x, y и z (по одному импульсу с каждой стороны системы)120 Начало работы с системой Высота над уровнем моря В процессе работы От –16 до 3048 м (от –50 до 10 000 футов) ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: Если высота над уровнем моря превышает 900 м (2950 футов), максимальная рабочая температура снижается на 1 °F (1°F=приблиз. 0,555°C)/168 м (550 футов). Хранение От –16 до 10 600 м (от –50 до 35 000 футов) Уровень загрязняющих веществ в атмосфере Класс G1 согласно классификации ISA-S71.04-1985 Условия эксплуатации и хранения (продолжение)Matrices de almacenamiento Dell PowerVault MD3200 y MD3220 Introducción al sistema Modelo reglamentario, series E03J y E04JNotas, precauciones y avisos NOTA: una NOTA proporciona información importante que le ayudará a utilizar mejor el ordenador. PRECAUCIÓN: un mensaje de PRECAUCIÓN indica la posibilidad de que se produzcan daños en el hardware o haya pérdida de datos si no se siguen las instrucciones. AVISO: un mensaje de AVISO indica la posibilidad de que se produzcan daños materiales, lesiones personales e incluso la muerte. ____________________ La información contenida en esta publicación puede modificarse sin previo aviso. © 2011 Dell Inc. Todos los derechos reservados. Queda estrictamente prohibida la reproducción de estos materiales en cualquier forma sin la autorización por escrito de Dell Inc. Marcas comerciales utilizadas en este texto: Dell™, el logotipo de DELL y PowerVault™ son marcas comerciales de Dell Inc. Microsoft ® y Windows Server ® son marcas comerciales o marcas comerciales registradas de Microsoft Corporation en Estados Unidos y/o en otros países. Red Hat ® y Red Hat Enterprise Linux ® son marcas comerciales registradas de Red Hat, Inc. en los Estados Unidos y en otros países. SUSE ® es una marca comercial registrada de Novell, Inc. en los Estados Unidos y en otros países. VMware ® es una marca comercial registrada de VMware, Inc. en los Estados Unidos y/o en otras jurisdicciones. Otras marcas y otros nombres comerciales pueden utilizarse en esta publicación para hacer referencia a las entidades que los poseen o a sus productos. Dell Inc. renuncia a cualquier interés sobre la propiedad de marcas y nombres comerciales que no sean los suyos. Modelo reglamentario, series E03J y E04J 08/2011 P/N D76VD Rev. A02Introducción al sistema 123 Antes de comenzar NOTA: a lo largo del documento, la matriz de almacenamiento de la serie Dell PowerVault MD3200 hace referencia a Dell PowerVault MD3200 y Dell PowerVault MD3220. El gabinete de expansión de la serie Dell PowerVault MD1200 hace referencia a Dell PowerVault MD1200 y Dell PowerVault MD1220. Antes de configurar la matriz de almacenamiento de la serie Dell PowerVault MD3200, debe tener en cuenta una serie de prácticas recomendadas para garantizar que la matriz de almacenamiento funcione a un rendimiento máximo y ofrezca completa redundancia (si es necesario). • Utilice en toda la red un cable Ethernet de categoría 5e (o superior). • Antes de conectar cables entre el servidor host y la matriz de almacenamiento, etiquete todos los puertos y conectores. • Durante los ciclos de encendido de la red, siga siempre los procedimientos adecuados de encendido y apagado. Asegúrese también de que los componentes de red críticos se encuentren en circuitos de alimentación diferentes. Documentación y soportes adicionales útiles AVISO: consulte la información sobre normativas y seguridad suministrada con el sistema. La información sobre la garantía puede estar incluida en este documento o en un documento aparte. NOTA: todos los documentos de la serie PowerVault MD3200 están disponibles en la dirección support.dell.com/manuals. • En la documentación del bastidor incluida con la solución de bastidor se describe cómo instalar el sistema en un bastidor. • En el Manual del propietario se proporciona información acerca de las funciones del sistema y se describe cómo solucionar problemas del sistema e instalar o sustituir componentes. • En la Guía de implementación se proporciona información acerca de la instalación y configuración del software y hardware. • En la Guía CLI se proporciona información acerca de cómo utilizar la interfaz de línea de comandos (CLI) para configurar y administrar la matriz de almacenamiento.124 Introducción al sistema • La SMI-S Programmer’s Guide (Guía de los programadores de SMI-S) proporciona información acerca del uso del proveedor de SMI-S y la programación de SMI-S. • En los soportes suministrados con el sistema se incluyen documentación y herramientas para configurar y administrar el sistema, incluidas las del sistema operativo, el software de administración del sistema, las actualizaciones del sistema y los componentes del sistema que haya adquirido con el sistema. NOTA: compruebe si hay actualizaciones en support.dell.com/manuals y, si las hay, léalas antes de proceder a la instalación, puesto que a menudo sustituyen la información contenida en otros documentos. Sistemas operativos admitidos • Microsoft Windows Server • Red Hat Enterprise Linux • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server • VMware NOTA: para obtener la información más actual acerca de todas las versiones de sistemas operativos compatibles, consulte la Matriz de soporte en la dirección support.dell.com/manuals.Introducción al sistema 125 Configuraciones comunes Cableado de los hosts de conexión directa Servidor 1 Servidor 2 Red corporativa, pública o privada Servidor 3 Servidor 4 Matriz de almacenamiento de la serie Dell 126 Introducción al sistema Instalación y configuración AVISO: antes de realizar el procedimiento siguiente, revise las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas con el sistema. Desembalaje del sistema Desembale el sistema e identifique cada elemento de la lista de embalaje que se envió con el sistema. Instalación de los rieles y del sistema en un bastidor Monte los rieles e instale el sistema en el bastidor siguiendo las instrucciones de seguridad y de instalación del bastidor incluidas con el sistema. NOTA: para equilibrar la carga del peso, se recomienda instalar la matriz de almacenamiento de la serie PowerVault MD3200 en la parte inferior del bastidor y los gabinetes de expansión de la serie PowerVault MD1200 encima de este.Introducción al sistema 127 Conexión de los cables de alimentación Asegúrese de que el conmutador de alimentación esté en la posición de APAGADO antes de conectar los cables de alimentación. Conecte los cables de alimentación al sistema. Fijación de los cables de alimentación Fije los cables al soporte con firmeza con la cinta proporcionada.128 Introducción al sistema Conecte el otro extremo de los cables de alimentación a una toma eléctrica con conexión a tierra o a otra fuente de alimentación, como por ejemplo un Sistema de alimentación ininterrumpida (SAI) o una Unidad de distribución de alimentación (PDU). Cada suministro de energía debe estar conectado a un circuito de alimentación diferente. Cableado del gabinete de expansión Encendido del gabinete Matriz de almacenamiento de la serie Dell PowerVault MD3200 Gabinete 1 de expansión de la serie PowerVault MD1200 (opcional) Gabinete 2 de expansión de la serie PowerVault MD1200 (opcional)Introducción al sistema 129 Encienda los componentes en el orden siguiente : 1 Los gabinetes de expansión de la serie PowerVault MD1200 (si es necesario) NOTA: antes de encender la matriz de almacenamiento, asegúrese de que el LED de estado del gabinete de expansión está iluminado en azul. 2 Matriz de almacenamiento de la serie Dell PowerVault MD3200 NOTA: antes de encender los servidores host, asegúrese de que el LED de estado de la matriz de almacenamiento está iluminado en azul. 3 Servidores host Instalación del bisel Instale el bisel (opcional). Instalación del software MD Storage NOTA: para obtener instrucciones detalladas sobre la instalación del software MD Storage, la configuración del gabinete y las tareas posteriores a la instalación, consulte la Guía de implementación. La aplicación MD Storage Manager configura, administra y supervisa la matriz de almacenamiento. Instalación del software MD Storage: 1 Inserte el soporte de recursos de la serie MD.130 Introducción al sistema Dependiendo del sistema operativo, el instalador se puede iniciar automáticamente. Si el instalador no se inicia automáticamente, vaya al directorio raíz del soporte de instalación (o imagen del instalador descargado) y ejecute el archivo md_launcher.exe. Para sistemas basados en Linux, vaya a la raíz del soporte de recursos y ejecute el archivo autorun. NOTA: de manera predeterminada, el sistema operativo Red Hat Enterprise Linux monta el soporte de recursos con la opción noexec mount la cual no permite ejecutar archivos ejecutables. Para cambiar esta configuración, consulte el archivo Readme (Léame) en el directorio raíz del soporte de instalación. 2 Seleccione Install MD Storage Software (Instalar el software MD Storage). 3 Lea y acepte el contrato de licencia. 4 Seleccione una de las siguientes opciones de instalación del menú desplegable Install Set (Conjunto de instalación): • Full (recommended) (Total [recomendado]): instala el software MD Storage Manager (cliente), el agente de almacenamiento basado en host, el controlador multirruta y los proveedores de hardware. • Host Only (Solamente host): instala el agente de almacenamiento basado en host y los controladores multirruta. • Management (Administración): instala el software de administración y los proveedores de hardware. • Custom (Personalizado): permite seleccionar componentes específicos. 5 Seleccione los modelos de matrices de almacenamientos MD que está configurando para que sirvan como almacenamiento de datos para este servidor host. 6 Elija si desea iniciar el servicio de monitor de eventos automática o manualmente al reiniciar el servidor host NOTA: esta opción se aplica solo para la instalación del software cliente de Windows. 7 Confirme la ubicación de la instalación y haga clic en Install (Instalar). 8 Si se le solicita, reinicie el servidor host tras completar la instalación. 9 Inicie MD Storage Manager y detecte las matrices.Introducción al sistema 131 10 Si se aplica, active cualquiera de las funciones premium adquiridas con la matriz de almacenamiento. Si ha adquirido una función premium, consulte la tarjeta de activación impresa enviada con la matriz de almacenamiento. NOTA: el instalador de MD Storage Manager instala automáticamente los controladores, el firmware y las revisiones/correcciones del sistema operativo necesarios para que funcione la matriz de almacenamiento. Estos controladores y el firmware se encuentran disponibles en support.dell.com. Además, consulte la Support Matrix (Matriz de compatibilidad) en support.dell.com/manuals para obtener configuraciones adicionales o software necesarios para la matriz de almacenamiento específica Localización de la etiqueta de servicio El sistema se identifica mediante un Código de servicio rápido y un número de Etiqueta de servicio únicos. El código de servicio rápido y la etiqueta de servicio se encuentran en la parte anterior del sistema y también en la parte posterior, junto a los módulos de la controladora RAID. Dell utiliza esta información para dirigir las llamadas de asistencia al personal correspondiente.132 Introducción al sistema Información de la NOM (sólo para México) La información que se proporciona a continuación aparece en el dispositivo descrito en este documento en cumplimiento con los requisitos de la Norma Oficial Mexicana (NOM): Especificaciones técnicas Importador: Número de modelo: E03J y E04J Voltaje de alimentación: 100-240 VCA Frecuencia: 50 Hz/60 Hz Consumo eléctrico: 8,6 A Unidades PowerVault MD3200 Hasta doce unidades de disco duro de intercambio directo SAS de 3,5 pulgadas (3,0 Gbps y 6,0 Gbps) PowerVault MD3220 Hasta veinticuatro unidades de disco duro de intercambio directo SAS de 2,5 pulgadas (3,0 Gbps y 6,0 Gbps) Módulos de la controladora RAID Módulos de la controladora RAID • Uno o dos módulos de intercambio directo con sensores de temperatura • 2 GB de caché por controladora Conectores del panel posterior (por módulo de controladora RAID) Conectores SAS • Cuatro puertos de entrada SAS para conectar hosts • Un puerto de salida SAS para añadir un gabinete de la serie PowerVault MD1200 adicional NOTA: los conectores SAS son compatibles con SFF-8088.Introducción al sistema 133 Conector serie Un conector miniDIN de 6 patas NOTA: sólo para asistencia técnica. Conector Ethernet de administración Un puerto Ethernet 100/1000 Base-T para la administración fuera de banda del gabinete NOTA: las direcciones IP de puerto de administración predeterminadas para los módulos de la controladora RAID primarios y secundarios son 192.168.128.101 y 192.168.128.102, respectivamente. De manera predeterminada, los puertos de administración se configuran en el Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). Si la controladora no es capaz de obtener una configuración de dirección IP de un servidor DHCP en un tiempo de espera determinado (aproximadamente 3 minutos), vuelve de manera predeterminada al direccionamiento IP estático. Para obtener más información, consulte la Guía de implementación. Expansión PowerVault serie MD1200 Admite un máximo de 192 unidades de disco duro con cualquier combinación de gabinetes de expansión PowerVault MD1200 o PowerVault MD1220. El soporte para 192 unidades de disco duro es una función Premium y requiere activación. La cantidad máxima de discos duros admitidos sin utilizar la función Premium es 120. La conectividad de la ruta de acceso redundante proporciona rutas de acceso redundantes a cada unidad de disco duro. Placa de plano posterior Conectores • 12 ó 24 conectores de unidad de disco duro SAS • Dos conectores para módulos de suministro de energía/ventilador de enfriamiento • Dos conjuntos de conectores del módulo de controladora RAID • Un conector del panel de control para LED anteriores y un botón de identificación del sistema Sensores Dos sensores de temperatura Conectores del panel posterior (por módulo de controladora RAID) (continuación)134 Introducción al sistema Indicadores LED Panel anterior • Un indicador LED de dos colores para el estado del sistema • Dos indicadores LED de un solo color para la alimentación y el modo gabinete NOTA: el LED del modo gabinete no es aplicable a la matriz de almacenamiento de la serie PowerVault MD3200. Portaunidades de disco duro • Un indicador LED de un solo color de actividad • Un indicador LED de dos colores de estado por disco Suministro de energía/ventilador de enfriamiento Tres indicadores LED de estado para el estado del suministro de energía, los fallos del suministro de energía/ventilador y el estado de CA Módulo de la controladora RAID Seis LED de un solo color: • Uno de batería defectuosa • Uno de caché activa • Uno de controladora defectuosa • Uno de alimentación de controladora • Uno de identificación del sistema • Uno de actividad Ethernet de administración Seis LED de dos colores: • Cuatro de fallo o enlace de entrada SAS • Uno de fallo o enlace de salida de SAS • Uno de velocidad del enlace Ethernet de administraciónIntroducción al sistema 135 Conmutador Botón de identificación del sistema Ubicado en el panel de control anterior. Este botón se usa para ubicar un sistema en un bastidor. Conmutador de modo de alojamiento Situado en la parte anterior del sistema. Este conmutador no se aplica a la matriz de almacenamiento de la serie PowerVault MD3200. Conmutador de restablecimiento de contraseña Situado en el panel posterior del módulo de controladora RAID. Este conmutador se utiliza para restablecer la contraseña de la matriz de almacenamiento. Suministros de energía Fuente de alimentación de CA (por fuente de alimentación) Potencia 600 W Voltaje 100–240 VCA (8,6 A–4,3 A) Disipación de calor 100 W Corriente de conexión máxima En condiciones normales de línea y en todo el rango operativo ambiente del sistema, la irrupción de corriente puede alcanzar un máximo de 55 A por cada suministro de energía durante 10 ms o menos. Alimentación de la unidad de disco duro disponible (por ranura) PowerVault MD3200 25 W PowerVault MD3220 12 W Alimentación del módulo de controladora RAID (por ranura) Consumo de energía máximo 100 W Características físicas PowerVault MD3200 Altura 8,68 cm (3,41 pulgadas) Anchura 44,63 cm (17,57 pulgadas) Profundidad 60,20 cm (23,70 pulgadas)136 Introducción al sistema Peso (configuración máxima) 29,30 kg (64,6 libras) Peso (vacío) 8,84 kg (19,5 libras) PowerVault MD3220 Altura 8,68 cm (3,41 pulgadas) Anchura 44,63 cm (17,57 pulgadas) Profundidad 54,90 cm (21,61 pulgadas) Peso (configuración máxima) 24,22 kg (53,4 lbs) Peso (vacío) 8,61 kg (19 lbs) Especificaciones medioambientales NOTA: para obtener información adicional acerca de medidas ambientales relativas a configuraciones del sistema específicas, vaya a www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets. Temperatura En funcionamiento De 10 °C a 35 °C (de 50 °F a 95 °F) con una gradación de temperatura máxima de 10 °C por hora NOTA: para altitudes superiores a 900 m, la temperatura máxima de funcionamiento se reduce 1 °C cada 334 m (1 °F/550 pies). Almacenamiento De -40 °C a 65 °C (de -40 °F a 149 °F) con una gradación de temperatura máxima de 20 °C por hora. Humedad relativa En funcionamiento Del 20% al 80% (sin condensación) con una gradación de humedad máxima del 10% por hora Almacenamiento Del 5% al 95% (sin condensación) Vibración máxima En funcionamiento De 0,25 G a 3-200 Hz durante 15 minutos Almacenamiento De 0.5 G a 3-200 Hz durante 15 minutos Impacto máximo Características físicas (continuación)Introducción al sistema 137 En funcionamiento Un impulso de descarga en el sentido positivo del eje z (un impulso en cada lado del sistema) de 31 G durante 2,6 ms en la orientación de funcionamiento Almacenamiento Seis impulsos de descarga ejecutados consecutivamente en los ejes positivos y negativos x, y y z (un impulso en cada lado del sistema) de 71 G durante un máximo de 2 ms Altitud En funcionamiento De –16 m a 3.048 m (de –50 pies a 10.000 pies) NOTA: para altitudes superiores a 900 m (2950 pies), la temperatura de funcionamiento máxima se reduce 1 °C cada 334 m (1 °F/550 pies). Almacenamiento De –16 m a 10.600 m (de –50 pies a 35.000 pies) Nivel de contaminación atmosférica Clase G1 de acuerdo con ISA-S71.04-1985 Especificaciones medioambientales (continuación)138 Introducción al sistemaDell PowerVault MD3200 ve MD3220 Depolama Dizileri Sisteminizi Kullanmaya Başlarken Resmi Model Serisi E03J ve E04JNotlar, Dikkat Edilecek Noktalar ve Uyarılar NOT: NOT, bilgisayarınızdan daha iyi şekilde yararlanmanıza yardımcı olacak önemli bilgiler verir. DİKKAT: DİKKAT, yönergelere uyulmadığında donanımın zarar görebileceğini veya veri kaybı olabileceğini belirtir. UYARI: UYARI, meydana gelebilecek olası maddi hasar, kişisel yaralanma veya ölüm tehlikesi anlamına gelir. ____________________ Bu belgedeki bilgiler önceden bildirilmeksizin değiştirilebilir. © 2011 Dell Inc. Tüm hakları saklıdır. Dell Inc.'in yazılı izni olmadan bu belgelerin herhangi bir şekilde çoğaltılması kesinlikle yasaktır. Bu metinde kullanılan ticari markalar: Dell™, DELL logosu ve PowerVault™ Dell Inc. kuruluşunun ticari markalarıdır. Microsoft ® ve Windows Server ® , Microsoft Corporation kuruluşunun ABD ve/ veya diğer ülkelerdeki ticari markaları ya da tescilli ticari markalarıdır. Red Hat ® ve Red Hat Enterprise Linux ® Red Hat, Inc. şirketinin ABD ve diğer ülkelerdeki tescilli ticari markalarıdır. SUSE ® Novell, Inc. şirketinin ABD ve diğer ülkelerdeki tescilli ticari markasıdır. VMware ® VMware, Inc. şirketinin ABD ve/veya diğer hükümetlerdeki tescilli ticari markasıdır. Bu belgede, marka ve adların sahiplerine ya da ürünlerine atıfta bulunmak için başka ticari marka ve ticari adlar kullanılabilir. Dell Inc. kendine ait olanların dışındaki ticari markalar ve ticari isimlerle ilgili hiçbir mülkiyet hakkı olmadığını beyan eder. Resmi Model Serisi E03J ve E04J 2011 - 08 P/N D76VD Rev. A02Sisteminizi Kullanmaya Başlarken 141 Başlamadan Önce NOT: Bu belgenin tamamında Dell PowerVault MD3200 serisi depolama dizisi, hem Dell PowerVault MD3200 hem de Dell PowerVault MD3220 ürününü ifade etmektedir. Dell PowerVault MD1200 serisi genişletme kasaları hem Dell PowerVault MD1200 hem de Dell PowerVault MD1220 ürününü ifade etmektedir. Dell PowerVault MD3200 depolama dizinizi kurmadan önce, depolama dizinizin maksimum verimlilikte çalışması ve tam yedeklilik sunması için (gerekliyse), belirli en iyi uygulamaları göz önünde bulundurun. • Ağ boyunca, Kategori 5e (veya üstü) Ethernet kablosu kullanın. • Ana sunucu ve depolama dizisi arasına herhangi bir kablo bağlamadan önce, her bir bağlantı noktasını ve konektörü fiziksel olarak etiketleyin. • Ağ boyunca güç dolaşımı sağlarken, her zaman güç açma ve güç kapama yordamlarını uygulayın. Ayrıca, kritik ağ bileşenlerinin farklı güç devrelerinde olduğundan da emin olmalısınız. İhtiyaç Duyabileceğiniz Diğer Belge ve Ortamlar UYARI: Sisteminizle birlikte verilen güvenlik bilgilerine ve düzenleyici bilgilere bakın. Garanti bilgileri bu belgeye dahil edilmiş veya ayrı bir belge olarak eklenmiş olabilir. NOT: Tüm PowerVault MD3200 serisi belgelerini support.dell.com/manuals adresinde bulabilirsiniz. • Raf çözümünüze dahil edilmiş olan raf belgeleri sisteminizi bir rafa nasıl kuracağınızı açıklar. • Kullanıcı El Kitabı, sistem özellikleri üzerine bilgiler içermekte ve sistemde sorun giderme, sistem bileşenlerinin yüklenmesi veya değiştirilmesi işlemlerinin nasıl yapılacağını anlatmaktadır. • Uygulama Kılavuzu, yazılım ve donanımın kurulması ve yapılandırılması hakkında bilgiler sunar. • CLI Kılavuzu, depolama dizinizi yapılandırmak ve yönetmek için komut hattı arabiriminin (CLI) kullanılması hakkında bilgiler sunar. • SMI-S Programlayıcı Kılavuzu, SMI-S sağlayıcının kullanılması ve SMI-S programlama hakkında bilgiler sunar.142 Sisteminizi Kullanmaya Başlarken • Sisteminizle birlikte satın aldığınız işletim sistemi, sistem yönetimi yazılımı, sistem güncellemeleri ve sistem bileşenleri ile ilgili olanlar dahil, sisteminizle birlikte gönderilen ve sisteminizin yapılandırılması ve yönetilmesi için belgeler ve araçlar sunan her türlü ortam. NOT: Her zaman support.dell.com/manuals adresindeki güncellemeleri kontrol edin ve genellikle diğer belgelerdekinden daha güncel bilgiler içerdiği için ilk önce güncellemeleri okuyun. Desteklenen İşletim Sistemleri • Microsoft Windows Server • Red Hat Enterprise Linux • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server • VMware NOT: Tüm desteklenen işletim sistemi sürümleri hakkında en yeni bilgiler için, bkz. support.dell.com/manuals adresindeki Destek Matrisi bölümü. Genel Yapılandırmalar Doğrudan Bağlanan Ana Sunucularınızı Kablolama Sunucu 1 Sunucu 2 Kurumsal, kamu veya özel ağ Sunucu 3 Sunucu 4 PowerVault MD3200 serisi depolama dizisiSisteminizi Kullanmaya Başlarken 143 Kurulum ve Yapılandırma UYARI: Bir sonraki yordamı uygulamadan önce, sistemle birlikte gelen güvenlik yönergelerini inceleyin. Sistemi Paketinden Çıkarma Sisteminizi paketinden çıkarın ve ambalaj listesindeki tüm öğelerin sisteminizde bulunup bulunmadığını kontrol edin. Rayları ve Sistemi Rafa Monte Etme Rayların ve sistemin rafa montajını sistemle birlikte sağlanan güvenlik yönergelerini ve raf montaj yönergelerini izleyerek gerçekleştirin. NOT: Ağırlık yükünü dengelemek için, PowerVault MD3200 serisi depolama dizisini rafın alt kısmına ve PowerVault MD1200 genişletme kasalarını bunun üzerine monte etmeniz önerilir.144 Sisteminizi Kullanmaya Başlarken Güç Kablolarının Bağlanması Güç kablolarını bağlamadan önce güç anahtarının KAPALI konumda olduğundan emin olun. Sistemin güç kablolarını sisteme bağlayın. Güç Kablolarının Sabitlenmesi Sağlanan şeridi kullanarak kabloları desteğe sıkıca sabitleyin. Güç kablolarının diğer uçlarını topraklı bir elektrik prizine ya da kesintisiz güç kaynağı (UPS) veya güç dağıtım birimi (PDU) gibi ayrı bir güç kaynağına takın. Her bir güç kaynağı ayrı bir güç devresine bağlanmalıdır.Sisteminizi Kullanmaya Başlarken 145 Genişletme Kasanızı Kablolama Kasayı Açma Bileşenleri aşağıdaki sırayla açın: 1 PowerVault MD1200 serisi genişletme kasaları (kullanılıyorsa). NOT: Depolama dizisini açmadan önce, genişletme kasası durum LED'inin mavi yandığından emin olun. PowerVault MD3200 serisi depolama dizisi PowerVault MD1200 serisi genişletme kasası 1 (isteğe bağlı) PowerVault MD1200 serisi genişletme kasası 2 (isteğe bağlı)146 Sisteminizi Kullanmaya Başlarken 2 PowerVault MD3200 serisi depolama dizisi. NOT: Ana sunucuları açmadan önce, depolama dizisi durum LED'inin mavi yandığından emin olun. 3 Ana sunucular. Çerçevenin Takılması Çerçeveyi takın (isteğe bağlı). MD Depolama Yazılımını Kurma NOT: MD depolama yazılımını kurma, kasayı kurma ve kurulum sonrası görevlerle ilgili ayrıntılı yönergeler için, bkz. Uygulama Kılavuzu. MD Depolama Yöneticisi uygulaması, depolama dizisini yapılandırır, yönetir ve izler. MD depolama yazılımını kurmak için: 1 MD serisi kaynak ortamını takın. İşletim sisteminize bağlı olarak yükleyici otomatik olarak başlamalıdır. Yükleyici otomatik olarak çalışmazsa, kurulum ortamının kök dizinine gidin (veya yükleyici görüntüsünü indirin) ve md_launcher.exe dosyasını çalıştırın. Linux tabanlı sistemlerde, kaynak ortamın köküne gidin ve autorun dosyasını çalıştırın. NOT: Red Hat Enterprise Linux işletim sistemi, varsayılan olarak, kaynak ortamı yürütülebilir dosyaları çalıştırmanıza olanak tanımayan –noexec montaj seçeneğiyle monte eder. Bu ayarı değiştirmek için kurulum ortamının kök dizinindeki Benioku dosyasına bakın.Sisteminizi Kullanmaya Başlarken 147 2 MD Depolama Yazılımını Kur seçeneğini belirleyin. 3 Lisans sözleşmesini okuyun ve kabul edin. 4 Kurulum Grubu açılır menüsünden aşağıdaki kurulum seçeneklerinden birini seçin: • Tam (önerilen)—MD Depolama Yöneticisi (istemci) yazılımını, ana sunucu tabanlı depolama aracısını, çok yollu sürücüyü ve donanım sağlayıcıları yükler. • Sadece Ana Makine—Ana sunucu tabanlı depolama aracısını ve çok yollu sürücüleri yükler. • Yönetim—Yönetim yazılımını ve donanım sağlayıcıları yükler. • Özel—Belirli bileşenleri seçmenize olanak tanır. 5 Bu ana sunucu için veri depolamaya yönelik ayarladığınız MD depolama dizisi modellerini seçin. 6 Ana sunucu yeniden başlatıldığında olay izleyicisi hizmetinin manuel ya da otomatik olarak başlatılacağını seçin. NOT: Bu seçenek sadece Windows istemci yazılımı kurulumu için geçerlidir. 7 Yükleme konumunu onaylayın ve Yükle öğesini tıklatın. 8 İstenirse kurulum tamamlandığında ana sunucuyu yeniden başlatın. 9 MD Depolama Yöneticisi'ni başlatın ve dizileri algılamasını sağlayın. 10 Mevcutsa, depolama diziniz ile birlikte satın aldığınız premium özellikleri etkinleştirin. Premium özellikler satın aldıysanız depolama diziniz ile birlikte gönderilen baskılı etkinleştirme kartınıza bakın. NOT: MD Depolama Yöneticisi yükleyicisi depolama dizinizi çalıştırmak için gerekli sürücüleri, ürün yazılımını ve işletim sistemi yamalarını/düzeltmelerini otomatik olarak yükler. Bu sürücüleri ve ürün yazılımlarını support.dell.com adresinden de edinebilirsiniz. Ayrıca, depolama dizinize yönelik ek ayarlar ve/veya yazılımlar için support.dell.com/manuals adresindeki Support Matrix (Destek Matrisi) bölümüne bakın.148 Sisteminizi Kullanmaya Başlarken Servis Etiketinizin Yerini Bulma Sisteminiz benzersiz bir Hızlı Hizmet Kodu ve Hizmet Etiketi numarası aracılığıyla tanınır. Hızlı Hizmet Kodu ve Hizmet Etiketi sistemin ön tarafında ve arka tarafında RAID denetleyici modüllerinin yanında bulunur. Bu bilgiler, Dell tarafından destek aramalarının uygun personele yönlendirilmesinde kullanılır. NOM Bilgisi (Yalnızca Meksika İçin) Aşağıdaki bilgiler, resmi Meksika standartlarının (NOM) gerekliliklerine uygun olarak bu belgede açıklanan aygıt üzerinde bulunmaktadır: İthalatçı: Dell Inc. de México, S.A. de C.V. Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - 11° Piso Col. Lomas Altas 11950 México, D.F. Model numarası: E03J ve E04J Besleme gerilimi: 100–240 V CA Frekans: 50/60 Hz Akım tüketimi: 8,6 ASisteminizi Kullanmaya Başlarken 149 Teknik Özellikler Sürücüler PowerVault MD3200 Maksimum on iki adet 3,5 inç SAS çalışırken takılabilir sabit sürücü (3.0 Gbps ve 6.0 Gbps) PowerVault MD3220 Maksimum yirmi dört adet 2,5 inç SAS çalışırken takılabilir sabit sürücü (3.0 Gbps ve 6.0 Gbps) RAID Denetleyici Modülleri RAID denetleyici modülleri • Bir veya iki adet çalışırken takılabilir, sıcaklık sensörlü modül • Denetleyici başına 2 GB önbellek Arka Panel Konektörleri (RAID Denetleyici Modülü Başına) SAS konektörleri • Ana sunuculara bağlantı için dört adet SAS GİRİŞ bağlantı noktası • Genişletme kasası ve ek PowerVault MD1200 serisi kasa için bir adet SAS Çıkış konektörü NOT: SAS konektörleri, SFF-8088 uyumludur. Seri konektör Bir adet 6 pimli mini DIN konektörü NOT: Sadece teknik destek amaçlı kullanım için. Yönetim Ethernet konektörü Kasanın bant dışı yönetimi için bir adet 100/1000 Base-T port Ethernet NOT: Birincil ve ikincil RAID denetleyici modülleri için varsayılan yönetim bağlantı noktası IP adresleri sırasıyla: 192.168.128.101 ve 192.168.128.102 Varsayılan olarak yönetim bağlantı noktaları Dinamik Ana Makine Yapılandırma Protokolü'ne (DHCP) ayarlıdır. Denetleyici belirli bir zaman aşımı süresi (yaklaşık 3 dakika) içinde DHCP sunucusundan IP adresi yapılandırması alamazsa varsayılan statik IP adresi ayarına geri döner. Daha fazla bilgi için bkz. Uygulama Kılavuzu.150 Sisteminizi Kullanmaya Başlarken Genişletme PowerVault MD1200 serisi PowerVault MD1200 veya PowerVault MD1220 genişletme kasalarının tüm kombinasyonlarıyla maksimum 192 adet sabit sürücüyü destekler. 192 sabit sürücü desteği Premium Özelliktir ve etkinleştirme gerektirir. Premium Özellik kullanılmadan desteklenen maksimum sabit sürücü sayısı 120'dir. Yedek yol bağlantısı, her sabit sürücüye yedek veri yolları sağlar. Arka Panel Kartı Konektörler • 12 veya 24 adet SAS sabit sürücü konektörü • İki güç kaynağı/soğutma fanı modülü konektörü • İki set RAID denetleyici modülü konektörü • Ön LED'ler ve sistem tanımlama düğmesi için bir kontrol paneli konektörü Sensörler İki adet sıcaklık sensörü LED Göstergeleri Ön panel • Sistem durumu için bir adet iki renkli LED göstergesi • Güç ve kasa modu için iki adet tek renkli LED göstergesi NOT: PowerVault MD3200 serisi depolama dizisinde, kasa modu LED'i bulunmamaktadır. Sabit sürücü taşıyıcısı • Bir adet tek renkli etkinlik LED'i • Sürücü başına bir adet iki renkli LED durum göstergesi Güç kaynağı/soğutma fanı Güç kaynağı durumu, güç kaynağı/fan arızası ve AC durumu için üç adet LED durumu göstergesiSisteminizi Kullanmaya Başlarken 151 RAID denetleyici modülü Altı adet tek renkli LED: • Bir adet pil hatası • Bir adet önbellek etkinliği • Bir adet denetleyici hatası • Bir adet denetleyici gücü • Bir adet sistem tanımlama • Bir adet yönetim Ethernet etkinliği Altı adet iki renkli LED: • Dört adet SAS Giriş bağlantısı veya hata • Bir adet SAS ÇIKIŞI bağlantısı veya hatası • Bir adet yönetim Ethernet bağlantı hızı Anahtar Sistem tanımlama düğmesi Ön kontrol panelinde yer alır. Bu düğme raf içindeki bir sistemi bulmak için kullanılır. Kasa modu anahtarı Sistemin ön kısmında yer alır. Bu anahtar, PowerVault MD3200 serisi depolama dizisinde bulunmamaktadır. Parola sıfırlama anahtarı RAID denetleyici modülünün arka panelinde yer alır. Bu anahtar depolama dizisi parolasını sıfırlamak için kullanılır. Güç Kaynakları AC güç kaynağı (güç kaynağı başına) Vat Değeri 600 V Gerilim 100–240 VAC (8,6 A–4,3 A) Isı dağıtımı 100 V Maksimum ani akım Normal hat koşulları altında ve sistemin ortam çalışma aralığının tamamı boyunca, ani akım 10 ms veya daha kısa bir süre için güç kaynağı başına maksimum 55 A'ya ulaşabilir. LED Göstergeleri (devamı)152 Sisteminizi Kullanmaya Başlarken Kullanılabilir Sabit Sürücü Gücü (Yuva Başına) PowerVault MD3200 25 V PowerVault MD3220 12 V RAID Denetleyici Modülü Gücü (Yuva Başına) Maksimum güç tüketimi 100 V Fiziksel PowerVault MD3200 Yükseklik 8,68 cm (3,41 inç) Genişlik 44,63 cm (17,57 inç) Derinlik 60,20 cm (23,70 inç) Ağırlık (maksimum yapılandırma) 29,30 kg (64,6 lb) Ağırlık (boş durumda) 8,84 kg (19,5 lb) PowerVault MD3220 Yükseklik 8,68 cm (3,41 inç) Genişlik 44,63 cm (17,57 inç) Derinlik 54,90 cm (21,61 inç) Ağırlık (maksimum yapılandırma) 24,22 kg (53,4 lb) Ağırlık (boş durumda) 8,61 kg (19 lb) Çevre Özellikleri NOT: Belirli sistem yapılandırmalarına ilişkin çevresel ölçümlerle ilgili ek bilgi için bkz. www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets. Sıcaklık Çalışma Saatte maksimum 10°C'lik sıcaklık değişimli 10° - 35°C (50° - 95°F) NOT: 2950 fitten fazla yükseklikler için, maksimum çalışma sıcaklığı 1ºF/550 ft. düşer.Sisteminizi Kullanmaya Başlarken 153 Depolama Saatte maksimum 20°C'lik sıcaklık değişimli -40° - 65°C (-40° - 149°F). Bağıl nem Çalışma Saatte maksimum %10'luk nem değişimli %20 - %80 (yoğuşmasız) Depolama %5 - %95 (yoğuşmasız) Maksimum titreşim Çalışma 15 dk. için 3–200 Hz'de 0,25 G Depolama 15 dk. için 3–200 Hz'de 0,5 G Maksimum sarsıntı Çalışma Çalışma yönünde 2,6 ms için 31 G'lik pozitif z ekseninde (sistemin her tarafında tek darbe) tek sarsıntı darbesi Depolama Pozitif ve negatif x, y ve z eksenlerinde 2 ms'ye kadar 71 G değerinde gerçekleşen birbiri ardına altı sarsıntı darbesi (sistemin her tarafında tek darbe) Yükseklik Çalışma -16 - 3048 m (-50 - 10.000 ft) NOT: 2950 fitin üzerindeki yükseklikler için, maksimum çalışma sıcaklığı 1ºF/550 ft düşer. Depolama -16 - 10.600 m (-50 - 35.000 ft) Havadan Geçen Madde Düzeyi Sınıf ISA-S71.04-1985 ile tanımlanan biçimde G1 Çevre Özellikleri (devamı)154 Sisteminizi Kullanmaya Başlarken170 תחילת עבודה עם המערכת סביבתי הערה: לקבלת מידע נוסף אודות מדידות סביבתיות עבור תצורות מערכת .www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets ראה ,מסוימות טמפרטורה הפעלה °10 עד °35 צלזיוס )°50 עד °95 פרנהייט( עם שינוי הדרגתי מרבי בטמפרטורה של °10 צלזיוס בשעה הערה: בגבהים שמעל 900 מטר, טמפרטורת ההפעלה המרבית יורדת ב- 0.5 מעלות צלזיוס בקירוב לכל 165 מ'. אחסון °40– עד °35 צלזיוס )°40– עד °149 פרנהייט( עם שינוי הדרגתי מרבי בטמפרטורה של °20 צלזיוס בשעה. לחות יחסית הפעלה %20 עד %80 )ללא התעבות( עם שינוי הדרגתי מרבי בלחות של %10 בשעה אחסון %5 עד %95 )ללא התעבות( מידת תנודה מרבית דקות 15 במשך הרץ 3-200 -ב 0.25 G הפעלה דקות 15 במשך הרץ 3-200 -ב 0.5 G אחסון מידת זעזועים מרבית הפעלה פעימת זעזוע אחת של 31 G בציר Z החיובי )פעימה אחת בכל צד של המערכת( למשך 2.6 מילי-שניות בכיוון ההפעלה אחסון שש פעימות זעזוע של 71 G המופעלות בזו אחר זו בצירי Y ,X ו- Z החיוביים והשליליים )פעימה אחת בכל צד של המערכת( למשך עד 2 אלפיות השנייה גובה הפעלה 16– עד 3048 מטר )50– עד 10,000 רגל( הערה: בגבהים שמעל 900 מטר, טמפרטורת ההפעלה המרבית יורדת ב- 0.5 מעלות צלזיוס בקירוב לכל 165 מטר. )רגל 35,000 עד –50( מטר 10,600 עד –16 אחסון רמת זיהום אווירי ISA-S71.04-1985 -ב כמוגדר G1 סיווגתחילת עבודה עם המערכת 169 אספקת חשמל זמינה לכונן קשיח )לחריץ( וואט 25 PowerVault MD3200 וואט 12 PowerVault MD3220 אספקת חשמל למודול בקר RAID )לחריץ( צריכת זרם מרבית 100 וואט פיזי PowerVault MD3200 גובה 8.68 ס"מ רוחב 44.63 ס"מ עומק 60.20 ס"מ משקל )תצורה מרבית( 29.30 ק"ג משקל )ריק( 8.84 ק"ג PowerVault MD3220 גובה 8.68 ס"מ רוחב 44.63 ס"מ עומק 54.90 ס"מ משקל )תצורה מרבית( 24.22 ק"ג משקל )ריק( 8.61 ק"ג168 תחילת עבודה עם המערכת נוריות חיווי )המשך( מודול בקר RAID שש נוריות בצבע אחד: אחת לתקלה בסוללה אחת למטמון פעיל אחת לתקלה בבקר אחת לאספקת חשמל לבקר אחת לזיהוי מערכת אחת לניהול פעילות Ethernet שש נוריות בשני צבעים: ארבע לקישור או תקלה של SAS IN אחת לקישור או תקלה של SAS OUT אחת לניהול מהירות קישור Ethernet מתג לחצן זיהוי מערכת ממוקם בלוח הבקרה הקדמי. לחצן זה משמש לאיתור מערכת בתוך מעמד. מתג מצב זיווד ממוקם בחזית המערכת. מתג זה אינו ישים למערך האחסון .PowerVault MD3200 Series מתג איפוס סיסמה נמצא בלוח האחורי של מודול בקר ה- RAID. מתג זה משמש לאיפוס סיסמת מערך האחסון. ספקי זרם זרם חילופין )לכל ספק זרם( הספק 600 וואט )אמפר 8.6–4.3( ח"ז וולט 100–240 מתח פיזור חום 100 וואט זרם נהירה מרבי בתנאי קו טיפוסיים ובטווח הפעולה של סביבת המערכת כולה, זרם הנהירה )inrush( עשוי להגיע ל- 55 אמפר לכל היותר לכל ספק זרם למשך 10 מ"ש או פחות.תחילת עבודה עם המערכת 167 הרחבה PowerVault MD1200 Series תמיכה ב- 192 כוננים קשיחים לכל היותר, עם כל צירוף של זיוודי הרחבה PowerVault MD1200 או PowerVault MD1220. תמיכה ב- 192 כוננים קשיחים היא תכונת פרמיום ומחייבת הפעלה. המספר המרבי של כוננים קשיחים שנתמך ללא שימוש בתכונת פרמיום הוא 120. קישוריות נתיבים יתירים מספקת נתיבי נתונים יתירים לכל כונן קשיח. לוח אם מחברים 12 או 24 מחברי כונן קשיח SAS שני מחברי מודול ספק זרם/מאוורר קירור שתי ערכות של מחברי מודול בקר RAID מחבר לוח בקרה אחד עבור נוריות קדמיות ולחצן זיהוי מערכת חיישנים שני חיישני טמפרטורה נוריות חיווי לוח קדמי נורית חיווי אחת בעלת שני צבעים לציון מצב המערכת שתי נוריות חיווי בעלות צבע אחד למצב אספקת חשמל וזיווד הערה: נורית מצב זיווד אינה ישימה למערך .PowerVault MD3200 Series האחסון מפרץ כונן קשיח נורית פעילות אחת בעלת צבע אחד נורית חיווי מצב אחת בעלת שני צבעים לכל כונן ספק זרם/מאוורר קירור שלוש נוריות חיווי מצב לציון מצב ספק הזרם, כשל בספק זרם/מאוורר ומצב זרם חילופין166 תחילת עבודה עם המערכת מפרט טכני כוננים PowerVault MD3200 עד שניים עשר כוננים קשיחים מסוג SAS בגודל 3.5 אינץ' עם אפשרות להחלפה חמה )3.0 Gbps ו- )6.0 Gbps PowerVault MD3220 עד עשרים וארבעה כוננים קשיחים מסוג SAS בגודל 2.5 אינץ' עם אפשרות להחלפה חמה )3.0 Gbps ו- )6.0 Gbps מודולי בקר RAID מודולי בקר RAID מודול אחד או שניים, עם אפשרות להחלפה חמה, עם חיישני טמפרטורה מטמון של 2 GB לכל בקר מחברי לוח אחורי )לכל מודול בקר RAID( מחברי SAS ארבע יציאות SAS IN לחיבור מארחים יציאת SAS OUT אחת להרחבה של זיווד נוסף PowerVault MD1200 Series הערה: מחברי SAS תואמים ל- SFF-8088. מחבר טורי מחבר 6 פינים אחד מסוג מיני-DIN הערה: לשימוש תמיכה טכנית בלבד. ניהול עבור אחד 100/1000 Base-T port Ethernet Ethernet ניהול מחבר הזיווד של out-of-band הערה: כתובות ה- IP של יציאות הניהול עבור מודולי בקר ה- RAID הראשי והמשני הן ,192.168.128.102 -ו 192.168.128.101 בהתאמה. כברירת מחדל, יציאות הניהול מוגדרות Dynamic Host Configuration לפרוטוקול DHCP( Protocol(. אם הבקר אינו מצליח לקבל תצורת כתובת IP משרת ה- DHCP תוך זמן מוגדר )3 דקות לערך(, הוא חוזר חזרה לברירת המחדל של מיעון IP סטטי. לקבלת מידע נוסף, עיין במדריך הפריסה.תחילת עבודה עם המערכת 165 איתור תג השירות המערכת מזוהה באמצעות קוד שירות מהיר ומספר תג שירות ייחודיים. קוד השירות המהיר ותג השירות נמצאים בחזית המערכת ובגב המערכת, ליד מודולי בקר ה- RAID. מידע זה משמש את Dell לניתוב שיחות תמיכה לעובדים המתאימים. מידע NOM )מקסיקו בלבד( המידע הבא ניתן עבור ההתקן המתואר במסמך זה, בהתאם לדרישות התקנים המקסיקניים הרשמיים )NOM(: יבואן: מספר דגם: E03J ו- E04J מתח חשמלי: 240–100 וולט CA תדר: 50/60 הרץ צריכת זרם: 8.6 אמפר164 תחילת עבודה עם המערכת .Install MD Storage Software באפשרות בחר 2 3 קרא את הסכם הרשיון וקבל אותו. 4 בחר את אפשרויות ההתקנה הבאות מתוך התפריט הנפתח Install Set: (Full (recommended )מלא )מומלץ(( — התקנת תוכנת MD Storage Manager )לקוח(, סוכן אחסון מבוסס מארח, מנהלי התקנים לריבוי נתיבים וספקי חומרה. Host Only )מארח בלבד( — התקנת סוכן האחסון מבוסס המארח ומנהלי התקנים לריבוי נתיבים. Management )ניהול( — התקנת תוכנת הניהול וספקי החומרה. Custom )מותאמת אישית( — אפשרות לבחור רכיבים מסוימים. 5 בחר את דגמי מערך האחסון MD שאתה מגדיר לשימוש כאחסון נתונים עבור שרת מארח זה. 6 בחר אם להפעיל שירות ניטור אירועים בצורה אוטומטית או ידנית, בעת אתחול מחדש של השרת המארח. הערה: אפשרות זו ישימה רק להתקנת תוכנת לקוח ל- Windows. 7 אשר את מיקום ההתקנה ולאחר מכן לחץ על Install )התקנה(. 8 אם תתבקש, אתחל את השרת המארח עם השלמת ההתקנה. 9 הפעל את MD Storage Manager ואתר את המערך או המערכים. 10 אם מתאים, הפעל תכונות פרמיום שרכשת עם מערך האחסון. אם רכשת תכונות פרמיום, עיין בכרטיס ההפעלה המודפס המצורף למערך האחסון. הערה: תוכנית ההתקנה של MD Storage Manager מתקינה אוטומטית את מנהלי ההתקנים הדרושים, קושחה וטלאים/תיקונים חמים של מערכת ההפעלה שמיועדים להפעלת מערך האחסון. מנהלי התקנים וקושחה אלו זמינים גם באתר support.dell.com. נוסף על כך, עיין ב- Support Matrix )מטריצת תמיכה( באתר support.dell.com/manuals לקבלת הגדרות ו/או תוכנות נוספות הדרושות למערך האחסון שברשותך.תחילת עבודה עם המערכת 163 .PowerVault MD3200 Series אחסון מערך 2 הערה: לפני הפעלת השרתים המארחים, ודא שנורית המצב של מערך האחסון מאירה בכחול. 3 שרתים מארחים. התקנת הלוח הקדמי התקן את הלוח הקדמי )אופציונלי(. התקנת תוכנת האחסון MD הערה: לקבלת הוראות מפורטות לגבי ההתקנה של תוכנת האחסון MD, הגדרת הזיווד והמשימות שלאחר ההתקנה, עיין במדריך הפריסה. היישום MD Storage Manager קובע את התצורה, מנהל ומבצע ניטור של מערך האחסון. כדי להתקין את תוכנת האחסון MD: 1 הכנס את מדיית המשאבים של MD Series. בהתאם למערכת ההפעלה, ייתכן שתוכנית ההתקנה תופעל אוטומטית. אם תוכנית ההתקנה אינה מופעלת אוטומטית, נווט לספריית השורש במדיית ההתקנה )או תמונת תוכנית ההתקנה שהורדת( והפעל את הקובץ md_launcher.exe. במערכות מבוססות Linux, נווט אל השורש של מדיית המשאב והפעל את הקובץ autorun. הערה: כברירת מחדל, מערכת ההפעלה Red Hat Enterprise Linux מרכיבה את מדיית המשאב באמצעות האפשרות noexec mount-, אשר אינה מאפשרת להפעיל קובצי הפעלה. כדי לשנות הגדרה זו, עיין בקובץ Readme שבספריית השורש של מדיית ההתקנה.162 תחילת עבודה עם המערכת חיווט זיווד ההרחבה מערך אחסון PowerVault MD3200 Series זיווד הרחבה PowerVault MD1200 )אופציונלי( 2 Series זיווד הרחבה PowerVault MD1200 )אופציונלי( 1 Series הפעלת הזיווד הפעל את הרכיבים בסדר הבא: 1 זיווד הרחבה PowerVault MD1200 Series )אם בשימוש(. הערה: לפני הפעלת מערך האחסון, ודא שנורית המצב של זיווד ההרחבה מאירה בכחול.תחילת עבודה עם המערכת 161 חיבור כבלי החשמל ודא שמתג ההפעלה נמצא במצב כבוי )OFF(, לפני שתחבר את כבלי החשמל. חבר אל המערכת את כבל)י( החשמל של המערכת. אבטחת כבלי החשמל אבטח את הכבלים היטב לכן באמצעות הרצועה המצורפת. חבר את הקצה השני של כבלי החשמל לשקע חשמל מוארק או למקור חשמל נפרד, כגון אל-פסק )UPS( או ליחידת חלוקת חשמל )PDU(. כל ספק זרם צריך להיות מחובר למעגל חשמלי נפרד.160 תחילת עבודה עם המערכת התקנה וקביעת תצורה אזהרה: לפני ביצוע ההליך הבא, עיין בהוראות הבטיחות המצורפות למערכת. הוצאת המערכת מהאריזה הוצא את המערכת מהאריזה וזהה כל פריט, לפי רשימת האריזה שמצורפת למערכת. התקנת המסילות והמערכת במעמד הרכב את המסילות והתקן את המערכת במעמד, תוך ביצוע הוראות הבטיחות והוראות התקנת המעמד המצורפות למערכת. הערה: כדי לאזן את עומס המשקל, מומלץ להתקין את מערך האחסון PowerVault MD3200 Series בחלק התחתון של המעמד ואת זיוודי .מעליו PowerVault MD1200 Series ההרחבהתחילת עבודה עם המערכת 159 תצורות נפוצות חיווט המארחים המחוברים ישירות רשת ארגונית, ציבורית או פרטית שרת 4 שרת 3 שרת 2 שרת 1 מערך אחסון PowerVault MD3200 Series158 תחילת עבודה עם המערכת המדריך למתכנת SMI-S מספק מידע על השימוש בספק ה- SMI-S .SMI-S ובתכנות כל מדיה המצורפת למערכת המספקת תיעוד וכלים לקביעת תצורה וניהול של המערכת, כולל אלה השייכים למערכת ההפעלה, תוכנת ניהול המערכת, עדכוני מערכת ורכיבי מערכת שרכשת עם המערכת. הערה: בדוק תמיד עדכונים באתר support.dell.com/manuals וקרא את העדכונים תחילה, מכיוון שפעמים רבות הם מחליפים מידע במסמכים אחרים. מערכות הפעלה נתמכות Microsoft Windows Server Red Hat Enterprise Linux SUSE Linux Enterprise Server VMware הערה: לקבלת המידע העדכני ביותר על כל הגרסאות של מערכות ההפעלה הנתמכות, ראה Support Matrix )מטריצת תמיכה( באתר .support.dell.com/manualsתחילת עבודה עם המערכת 157 לפני שתתחיל הערה: לאורך המסמך, מערך האחסון Dell PowerVault MD3200 Series .Dell PowerVault MD3220 -ל והן Dell PowerVault MD3200 -ל הן מתייחס זיווד ההרחבה Dell PowerVault MD1200 Series מתייחס הן ל- .Dell PowerVault MD1220 -ל והן Dell PowerVault MD1200 לפני הגדרת מערך האחסון Dell PowerVault MD3200 Series, עליך לקחת בחשבון נהלי עבודה מיטביים מסוימים כדי להבטיח שמערך האחסון יפעל ביעילות מרבית ויציע יתירות מלאה )אם נדרש(. בכל הרשת, השתמש תמיד בכבל Ethernet מקטגוריה 5e )או גבוהה יותר(. לפני חיבור כבלים כלשהם בין השרת המארח ומערך האחסון, סמן פיזית כל יציאה ומחבר. בצע תמיד הליכי הפעלה וכיבוי מתאימים, בעת ביצוע מחזור הפעלה ברשת. כמו כן, עליך להקפיד לחבר רכיבי רשת קריטיים למעגלים חשמליים נפרדים. תיעוד ומדיה נוספים שעשויים להידרש לך אזהרה: עיין במידע הבטיחות והתקינה המצורף למערכת שברשותך. מידע בנוגע לאחריות עשוי להיות כלול במסמך זה או כמסמך נפרד. הערה: כל מסמכי PowerVault MD3200 Series זמינים בכתובת .support.dell.com/manuals תיעוד המעמד המצורף לפתרון המעמד שברשותך מתאר את אופן התקנת המערכת במעמד. המדריך למשתמש מספק מידע אודות תכונות מערכת ומתאר כיצד לפתור בעיות במערכת וכן כיצד להתקין או להחליף רכיבי מערכת. מדריך הפריסה מספק מידע על התקנה וקביעת תצורה של תוכנה וחומרה. מדריך ה- CLI מספק מידע על שימוש בממשק שורת הפקודה )CLI( לקביעת התצורה ולניהול מערך האחסון.הערות, התראות ואזהרות הערה: "הערה" מציינת מידע חשוב המסייע להשתמש במחשב ביתר יעילות. התראה: "התראה" מציינת נזק אפשרי לחומרה או אובדן נתונים, במקרה של אי ציות להוראות. אזהרה: "אזהרה" מציינת אפשרות של נזק לרכוש, פגיעה גופנית או מוות. ____________________ המידע בפרסום זה עשוי להשתנות ללא הודעה. 2011 Dell Inc ©. כל הזכויות שמורות. חל איסור מוחלט על העתקה מכל סוג של חומרים אלה ללא הרשאה בכתב מ- Dell Inc. סימנים מסחריים שבשימוש בטקסט זה: ™Dell, הלוגו DELL ו- ™PowerVault הם סימנים מסחריים ®Windows Server הם סימנים מסחריים או סימנים מסחריים רשומים של ®Microsoft ו- Dell Inc. של Red Hat Enterprise -ו Red Hat® Microsoft Corporation בארצות הברית ו/או במדינות אחרות. ®SUSE הוא ®Linux הם סימנים מסחריים רשומים של .Red Hat, Inc בארצות הברית ובמדינות אחרות. ®VMware הוא סימן מסחרי רשום סימן מסחרי רשום של .Novell, Inc בארצות הברית ובמדינות אחרות. של .VMware, Inc בארצות הברית ו/או בתחומי שיפוט אחרים. ייתכן שייעשה שימוש בסימנים מסחריים ובשמות מסחריים אחרים בפרסום זה כדי להתייחס לישויות הטוענות לבעלות על הסימנים והשמות, או למוצרים שלהן. .Dell Inc מוותרת על כל חלק קנייני בסימנים מסחריים ושמות מסחריים פרט לאלה שבבעלותה. סדרת דגם תקינה E03J ו- E04J A02 מהדורה D76VD חלק מספר 2011 - 08סדרת דגם תקינה E03J ו- E04J מערכי אחסון Dell PowerVault MD3220 -ו MD3200 תחילת עבודה עם המערכתwww.dell.com | support.dell.com Printed in Poland Vytištěno v Polsku. Imprimé en Pologne. Gedruckt in Polen. Εκτύπωση στην Πολωνία. Wydrukowano w Polsce. Напечатано в Польше. Impreso en Polonia. Polonya’da basılmıştır. Dell PowerVault MD3200i and MD3220i Storage Arrays Getting Started With Your System Guide de mise en route Introdução ao uso do sistema Introducción al sistemaDell PowerVault MD3200i and MD3220i Storage Arrays Getting Started With Your System Regulatory Model Series E03J and E04JNotes, Cautions, and Warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates potential damage to hardware or loss of data if instructions are not followed. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. ____________________ Information in this publication is subject to change without notice. © 2011 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell™, the DELL logo, and PowerVault™ are trademarks of Dell Inc. Microsoft ® and Windows Server ® are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Red Hat ® and Red Hat Enterprise Linux ® are registered trademarks of Red Hat, Inc. in the United States and other countries. SUSE ® is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc. in the United States and other countries. VMware ® is a registered trademark of VMware, Inc. in the United States and/or other jurisdictions. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this publication to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Regulatory Model Series E03J and E04J 2011 - 08 P/N TFKD1 Rev. A02Getting Started With Your System 3 Before You Begin NOTE: Throughout the document, Dell PowerVault MD3200i series storage array refers to both Dell PowerVault MD3200i and Dell PowerVault MD3220i. Dell PowerVault MD1200 series expansion enclosure refers to both Dell PowerVault MD1200 and Dell PowerVault MD1220. Before setting up your Dell PowerVault MD3200i series storage array, you must consider certain best practices to ensure that your storage array operates at maximum efficiency and offers full redundancy (if required). • It is recommended that you use a dedicated IP SAN for iSCSI data transmission. Management traffic can be isolated on a separate management network. • Complete the iSCSI configuration worksheet before configuring iSCSI. See "Completing the iSCSI Worksheet" on page 4. This worksheet gathers physical network information in a single source. • After completing the iSCSI worksheet, draw the configuration before setting up the solution. • Always configure redundant iSCSI data paths to provide alternate paths to and from the host server should one of the data paths become disabled. • If multiple NICs are installed on a host, it is recommeded that you use different subnets for management and iSCSI data links. • Throughout the network, always use a Category 5e (or higher) Ethernet cable. • Before connecting any cables between the host server and storage array, physically label each port and connector. • Always follow proper power-up and power-down procedures when cycling power across the network. You must also ensure that critical network components are on separate power circuits. NOTE: The illustrations in this document show cabling for only one PowerVault MD3200i series storage array in a SAN environment. The illustrations also show only the default IP addresses for the PowerVault MD3200i series storage array. To cable more than one PowerVault MD3200i series storage array in a SAN environment, see the Deployment Guide.4 Getting Started With Your System Completing the iSCSI Worksheet IPv4 Settings Mutual CHAP Secret Target CHAP Secret A B host server PowerVault MD3200i series storage array 192.168.130.101 (In 0 default) 192.168.131.101 (In 1 default) 192.168.132.101 (In 2 default) 192.168.133.101 (In 3 default) 192.168.128.101 (management network port) 192.168.130.102 (In 0 default) 192.168.131.102 (In 1 default) 192.168.132.102 (In 2 default) 192.168.133.102 (In 3 default) 192.168.128.102 (management network port) If you need additional space for more than one host server, use an additional sheet. iSCSI port 1 iSCSI port 2 iSCSI port 3 iSCSI port 4 Management port A Static IP address (host server) Subnet mask Default gateway ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ NOTE: The host server can support up to four NICs.Getting Started With Your System 5 NOTE: For information about the IPv6 worksheet, see the Deployment Guide. Other Documentation and Media You May Need WARNING: See the safety and regulatory information that shipped with your system. Warranty information may be included within this document or as a separate document. NOTE: All PowerVault MD3200i series storage array documents are available at support.dell.com/manuals. • The rack documentation included with your rack solution describes how to install your system into a rack. • The Owner’s Manual provides information about system features and describes how to troubleshoot the system and install or replace system components. • The Deployment Guide provides information about installing and configuring the software and hardware. • The CLI Guide provides information about using the command line interface (CLI) to configure and manage your storage array. B Static IP address (storage array) Subnet mask Default gateway ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ iSCSI controller 0, In 0 iSCSI controller 0, In 1 iSCSI controller 0, In 2 iSCSI controller 0, In 3 Management port cntrl 0 iSCSI controller 1, In 0 iSCSI controller 1, In 1 iSCSI controller 1, In 2 iSCSI controller 1, In 3 Management port cntrl 1 ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___6 Getting Started With Your System • The SMI-S Programmer’s Guide provides information about using the SMI-S provider and SMI-S programming. • Any media that ships with your system that provides documentation and tools for configuring and managing your system, including those pertaining to the operating system, system management software, system updates, and system components that you purchased with your system. NOTE: Always check for updates on support.dell.com/manuals and read the updates first because they often supersede information in other documents. Preparing the Host Server Supported Operating Systems • Microsoft Windows Server • Red Hat Enterprise Linux • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server • VMware NOTE: For the latest information on all supported operating system versions, see the Support Matrix at support.dell.com/manuals. Additional NICs for iSCSI When installing additional NICs, it is recommended that: • You use dedicated redundant storage networks for iSCSI traffic. If a dedicated network is not feasible, isolate the iSCSI traffic from general network traffic using virtual local area networks (VLAN). • You use additional NICs dedicated for iSCSI traffic. • The NICs must be added in pairs for redundancy (up to four NICs). NOTE: A single NIC is also supported. NIC Configuration In a SAN environment, depending on the number of switches, it is recommended that you use two or four unique subnets for iSCSI traffic. For direct-attached storage environments, each NIC directly connected to the PowerVault MD3200i series storage array must be on a separate subnet.Getting Started With Your System 7 Common Configurations Cabling Your Direct-Attached Hosts Server 1 Server 2 Storage array Server 3 Server 4 Corporate, public, or private network8 Getting Started With Your System Cabling Your SAN-Attached Hosts Storage array Corporate, public, or private network Switch 1 Switch 2 ServerGetting Started With Your System 9 Up to 32 hosts Server 1 Server 2 Storage array Corporate, public, or private network Switch 1 Switch 210 Getting Started With Your System Installation and Configuration WARNING: Before performing the following procedure, review the safety instructions that came with the system. Unpacking the System Unpack your system and identify each item with the packing list that shipped with your system. Installing the Rails and System in a Rack Assemble the rails and install the system in the rack following the safety instructions and the rack installation instructions provided with your system. NOTE: To balance the weight load, it is recommended that you install the PowerVault MD3200i series storage array at the bottom of the rack and the PowerVault MD1200 series expansion enclosures above it.Getting Started With Your System 11 Connecting the Power Cable(s) Ensure that the power switch is in the OFF position before connecting the power cables. Connect the system’s power cable(s) to the system. Securing the Power Cable(s) Secure the cable(s) firmly to the bracket using the provided strap. Plug the other end of the power cables into a grounded electrical outlet or a separate power source such as an uninterrupted power supply (UPS) or a power distribution unit (PDU). Each power supply must be connected to a separate power circuit.12 Getting Started With Your System Cabling Your Expansion Enclosure Turning On the Enclosure PowerVault MD3200i series storage array PowerVault MD1200 series expansion enclosure 1 (optional) PowerVault MD1200 series expansion enclosure 2 (optional)Getting Started With Your System 13 Turn on components in the following order 1 Ethernet switches (if used) 2 PowerVault MD1200 series expansion enclosures (if used) NOTE: Before turning on the storage array, ensure that the expansion enclosure status LED is blue. 3 PowerVault MD3200i series storage array NOTE: Before turning on the host server(s), ensure that the storage array status LED is blue. 4 Host server(s) Installing the Bezel Install the bezel (optional). Installing the MD Storage Software NOTE: For detailed instructions about installing the MD storage software, setting up the enclosure, and the post-installation tasks, see the Deployment Guide. The MD Storage Manager software configures, manages and monitors the storage array. The MD Configuration Utility (MDCU) is an optional utility that provides a consolidated approach for configuring the management and 14 Getting Started With Your System iSCSI host ports, and creating sessions for the iSCSI modular disk storage arrays. It is recommended that you use MDCU to configure iSCSI on each host server connected to the storage array. To install the MD storage software: 1 Insert the MD series resource media. Depending on your operating system, the installer may launch automatically. If the installer does not launch automatically, navigate to the root directory of the installation media (or downloaded installer image) and run the md_launcher.exe file. For Linux-based systems, navigate to the root of the resource media and run the autorun file. NOTE: By default, the Red Hat Enterprise Linux operating system mounts the resource media with the -noexec mount option which does not allow you to run executable files. To change this setting, see the Readme file in the root directory of the installation media. 2 Select Install MD Storage Software. 3 Read and accept the license agreement. 4 Select one of the following installation options from the Install Set dropdown menu: • Full (recommended)— Installs the MD Storage Manager (client) software, host-based storage agent, multipath driver, and hardware providers. • Host Only—Installs the host-based storage agent and multipath drivers. • Management—Installs the management software and hardware providers. • Custom—Allows you to select specific components. 5 Select the MD storage array model(s) you are setting up to serve as data storage for this host server. 6 Choose whether to start the event monitor service automatically when the host server reboots or manually NOTE: This option is applicable only to Windows client software installation. 7 Confirm the installation location and click Install. 8 If prompted, reboot the host server after the installation completes.Getting Started With Your System 15 9 When the reboot is complete, the MDCU may launch automatically. If the MDCU does not launch automatically, launch it manually. • In a Windows-based operating system, click Start→ Dell→ Modular Disk Configuration Utility. • In a Linux-based operating system, double-click the Modular Disk Configuration Utility icon on the desktop. NOTE: If MDCU is not installed, see the Deployment Guide at support.dell.com/manuals. 10 Start the MD Storage Manager and discover the array(s). 11 If applicable, activate any premium features purchased with your storage array. If you purchased premium features, see the printed activation card shipped with your storage array. NOTE: The MD Storage Manager installer automatically installs the required drivers, firmware, and operating system patches/hotfixes to operate your storage array. These drivers and firmware are also available at support.dell.com. In addition, see the Support Matrix at support.dell.com/manuals for any additional settings and/or software required for your specific storage array. Locating Your Service Tag Your system is identified by a unique Express Service Code and Service Tag number. The Express Service Code and Service Tag are found on the front of the system and at the back of the system next to the RAID controller modules. This information is used by Dell to route support calls to the appropriate personnel.16 Getting Started With Your System NOM Information (Mexico Only) The following information is provided on the device described in this document in compliance with the requirements of the official Mexican standards (NOM): Technical Specifications Importer: Model number: E03J and E04J Supply voltage: 100–240 V CA Frequency: 50/60 Hz Current consumption: 8.6 A Drives PowerVault MD3200i Up to twelve 3.5-inch SAS hot-swappable hard drives (3.0 Gbps and 6.0 Gbps) PowerVault MD3220i Up to twenty four 2.5-inch SAS hot-swappable hard drives (3.0 Gbps and 6.0 Gbps) RAID Controller Modules RAID controller modules • One or two hot-swappable modules with temperature sensors • 2 GB of cache per controller Back-Panel Connectors (Per RAID Controller Module) iSCSI connectors Four 1 GB iSCSI IN connectors to connect hosts SAS expansion connector One SAS OUT port for expansion to an additional PowerVault MD1200 series enclosure. NOTE: SAS connectors are SFF-8088 compliant. Serial connector One 6-pin mini-DIN connector NOTE: For technical support use only.Getting Started With Your System 17 Management Ethernet connector One 100/1000 Base-T port Ethernet for out-of-band management of the enclosure NOTE: The default management port IP addresses for the primary and secondary RAID controller modules are 192.168.128.101 and 192.168.128.102, respectively. By default, the management ports are set to Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). If the controller is unable to get an IP address configuration from a DHCP server within a specified time out period (approximately 3 minutes), it defaults back to static IP addressing. For more information, see the Deployment Guide. Expansion PowerVault MD1200 series Supports a maximum of 192 hard drives with any combination of PowerVault MD1200 or PowerVault MD1220 expansion enclosures. Support for 192 hard drives is a Premium Feature and requires activation. The maximum number of hard drives supported without using the Premium Feature is 120. Redundant path connectivity provides redundant data paths to each hard drive. Backplane Board Connectors • 12 or 24 SAS hard-drive connectors • Two power supply/cooling fan module connectors • Two sets of RAID controller module connectors • One control panel connector for front LEDs and enclosure mode switch Sensors Two temperature sensors Back-Panel Connectors (Per RAID Controller Module) (continued)18 Getting Started With Your System LED Indicators Front panel • One two-color LED indicator for system status • Two single-color LED indicators for power and enclosure mode NOTE: The enclosure mode LED is not applicable to the PowerVault MD3200i series storage array. Hard-drive carrier • One single-color activity LED • One two-color LED status indicator per drive Power supply/cooling fan Three LED status indicators for power supply status, power supply/fan fault, and AC status RAID controller module Ten single-color LEDs: • One battery fault • One cache active • One controller fault • One controller power • One system identification • One management Ethernet activity • Four iSCSI IN port activity Six two-color LEDs: • Four iSCSI IN link speed • One SAS OUT link or fault • One management Ethernet link speed Switch System identification button Located on the front control panel. This button is used to locate a system within a rack. Enclosure mode switch Located on the front of the system. This switch is not applicable to the PowerVault MD3200i series storage array. Password reset switch Located on the back panel of the RAID controller module. This switch is used to reset the storage array password.Getting Started With Your System 19 Power Supplies AC power supply (per power supply) Wattage 600 W Voltage 100–240 VAC (8.6 A–4.3 A) Heat dissipation 100 W Maximum inrush current Under typical line conditions and over the entire system ambient operating range, the inrush current may reach a maximum of 55 A per power supply for 10 ms or less. Available Hard-Drive Power (Per Slot) PowerVault MD3200i 25 W PowerVault MD3220i 12 W RAID Controller Module Power (Per Slot) Maximum power consumption 100 W Physical PowerVault MD3200i Height 8.68 cm (3.41 inches) Width 44.63 cm (17.57 inches) Depth 60.20 cm (23.70 inches) Weight (maximum configuration) 29.30 kg (64.6 lb) Weight (empty) 8.84 kg (19.5 lb) PowerVault MD3220i Height 8.68 cm (3.41 inches) Width 44.63 cm (17.57 inches) Depth 54.90 cm (21.61 inches) Weight (maximum configuration) 24.22 kg (53.4 lb) Weight (empty) 8.61 kg (19lb)20 Getting Started With Your System Environmental NOTE: For additional information about environmental measurements for specific system configurations, see www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets. Temperature Operating 10 °C to 35 °C (50 °F to 95 °F) with a maximum temperature gradation of 10 °C per hour NOTE: For altitudes above 2950 feet, the maximum operating temperature is derated 1ºF/550 ft. Storage –40° to 65°C (–40° to 149°F) with a maximum temperature gradation of 20°C per hour Relative humidity Operating 20% to 80% (noncondensing) with a maximum humidity gradation of 10% per hour Storage 5% to 95% (noncondensing) Maximum vibration Operating 0.25 G at 3–200 Hz for 15 min Storage 0.5 G at 3–200 Hz for 15 min Maximum shock Operating One shock pulse in the positive z axis (one pulse on each side of the system) of 31 G for 2.6 ms in the operational orientation Storage Six consecutively executed shock pulses in the positive and negative x, y, and z axes (one pulse on each side of the system) of 71 G for up to 2 ms Altitude Operating –16 to 3048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft) NOTE: For altitudes above 2950 feet, the maximum operating temperature is derated 1ºF/550 ft. Storage –16 to 10,600 m (–50 to 35,000 ft) Airborne Contaminant Level Class G1 as defined by ISA-S71.04-1985Matrices de stockage Dell PowerVault MD3200i et MD3220i Guide de mise en route Séries E03J et E04J de modèle réglementaireRemarques, précautions et avertissements REMARQUE : une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent vous aider à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : une PRÉCAUTION vous avertit d'un risque d'endommagement du matériel ou de perte de données en cas de non-respect des instructions. AVERTISSEMENT : un AVERTISSEMENT indique un risque d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. ____________________ Les informations que contient ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. © 2011 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction de ce document, de quelque manière que ce soit, sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell™, le logo DELL et PowerVault™ sont des marques de Dell Inc. Microsoft ® et Windows Server ® sont des marques ou des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Red Hat ® et Red Hat Enterprise Linux ® sont des marques déposées de Red Hat, Inc. aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. SUSE ® est une marque déposée de Novell, Inc. aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. VMware ® est une marque déposée de VMware, Inc. aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres juridictions. D'autres marques et noms commerciaux peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence aux entités revendiquant la propriété de ces marques ou de ces noms de produits. Dell Inc. rejette tout intérêt exclusif dans les marques et les noms commerciaux autres que les siens. Séries E03J et E04J de modèle réglementaire 2011 - 08 N/P TFKD1 Rév. A02Guide de mise en route 23 Avant de commencer REMARQUE : Dans ce document, les références à la matrice de stockage Dell PowerVault série MD3200i concernent les matrices de stockage Dell PowerVault MD3200i et Dell PowerVault MD3220i. Le boîtier d'extension Dell PowerVault MD1200 désigne les boîtiers Dell PowerVault MD1200 et Dell PowerVault MD1220. Avant d'installer votre matrice de stockage Dell PowerVault série MD3200i, vous devez considérer certaines des meilleures pratiques pour assurer le fonctionnement le plus efficace possible de votre matrice de stockage et une redondance complète (si nécessaire). • Il vous est recommandé d'utiliser un IP SAN dédié pour la transmission des données iSCSI. La gestion de trafic peut être isolée sur un réseau de gestion distinct. • Renseignez la liste de vérification de la configuration de l'interface iSCSI avant de configurer iSCSI. Voir « Compléter la liste de vérification de l'interface iSCSI. », à la page 24. Cette liste permet de regrouper les informations de réseaux physiques en un seul endroit. • Esquissez la configuration après avoir complété la liste de vérification iSCSI et avant de définir la solution. • Configurez toujours des chemins d'accès aux données redondants de manière à fournir différents chemins d'accès allant au serveur hôte et en sortant, dans l'éventualité d'une défaillance de l'un d'eux. • Si plusieurs cartes réseau sont installées sur un hôte, il vous est recommandé d'utiliser plusieurs sous-réseaux pour la gestion et les liaisons de données iSCSI. • Utilisez toujours un câble Ethernet de catégorie 5e (ou plus) à travers le réseau. • Avant de connecter tout câble entre le serveur hôte et la matrice de stockage, étiquetez physiquement chaque port et chaque connecteur. • Suivez toujours les procédures de mise sous et hors tension lors des cycles d'alimentation du réseau. Vous devez également vous assurer que les composants essentiels du réseau se trouvent sur différents circuits d'alimentation. REMARQUE : les illustrations qui figurent dans ce document montrent aussi le câblage d'une seule matrice de stockage PowerVault série MD3200i dans un environnement de réseau SAN. Elles ne montrent également que les adresses IP par défaut de la matrice de stockage PowerVault série MD3200i. Pour câbler plus d'une matrice de stockage PowerVault série MD3200i dans un environnement de réseau SAN, voir le Guide de déploiement.24 Guide de mise en route Compléter la liste de vérification de l'interface iSCSI. Paramètres IPv4 Clé secrète CHAP mutuelle Clé secrète CHAP cible A B serveur hôte Matrice de stockage PowerVault série MD3200i 192.168.130.101 (entrée 0 par défaut) 192.168.131.101 (ent. 1 par défaut) 192.168.132.101 (entrée 2 par défaut) 192.168.133.101 (ent. 3 par défaut) 192.168.128.101 (port du réseau de gestion) 192.168.130.102 (ent. 0 par défaut) 192.168.131.102 (entrée 1 par défaut) 192.168.132.102 (ent. 2 par défaut) 192.168.133.102 (entrée 3 par défaut) 192.168.128.102 (port réseau de gestion) Au besoin, utilisez une feuille supplémentaire (si vous disposez de plusieurs serveurs hôtes, par exemple). Port iSCSI 1 Port iSCSI 2 Port iSCSI 3 Port iSCSI 4 Port de gestion Adresse IP statique (serveur hôte) Masque de sous-réseau A Passerelle par défaut ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ REMARQUE : le serveur hôte peut prendre en charge jusqu'à quatre cartes réseauGuide de mise en route 25 REMARQUE : pour plus d'informations sur la liste de vérification IPv6, voir le Guide de déploiement. Autre documentation et support dont vous pourriez avoir besoin AVERTISSEMENT : reportez-vous aux informations sur la sécurité et les réglementations qui accompagnent votre système. Les informations sur la garantie se trouvent dans ce document ou dans un document distinct. REMARQUE : tous les documents PowerVault série MD3200i sont disponibles sur le site support.dell.com/manuals. • La documentation fournie avec le rack indique comment installer le système dans un rack. • Le Manuel du propriétaire du matériel contient des informations sur les caractéristiques du système, ainsi que des instructions relatives au dépannage et à l'installation ou au remplacement de composants. • Le Guide de déploiement fournit des informations sur l'installation et la configuration du logiciel et du matériel. • Le Guide CLI fournit des informations sur l'utilisation de l'interface de ligne de commande (CLI) pour configurer et gérer votre matrice de stockage. Adresse IP statique (m. de stockage) Masque de sous-réseau Passerelle par défaut B ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ Contrôleur iSCSI 0, Ent. 0 Contrôleur iSCSI 0, Ent. 1 Contrôleur iSCSI 0, Ent. 2 Contrôleur iSCSI 0, Ent. 3 Port de gestion cntrl 0 Contrôleur iSCSI 1, Ent. 0 Contrôleur iSCSI 1, Ent. 1 Contrôleur iSCSI 1, Ent. 2 Contrôleur iSCSI 1, Ent. 3 Port de gestion cntrl 1 ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___26 Guide de mise en route • Le Guide de programmation SMI-S fournit des informations sur l'utilisation du fournisseur MI-S et la programmation SMI-S. • Tous les supports fournis avec le système contiennent de la documentation et des outils de configuration et de gestion du système, notamment du système d'exploitation même et du logiciel de gestion du système ; les supports contiennent également des mises à jour et les composants système que vous avez achetés avec le système. REMARQUE : vérifiez toujours si des mises à jour sont disponibles sur le site support.dell.com/manuals et lisez-les en premier, car elles remplacent souvent les informations que contiennent les autres documents. Préparation du serveur hôte Systèmes d'exploitation pris en charge • Microsoft Windows Server • Red Hat Enterprise Linux • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server • VMware REMARQUE : pour les informations les plus récentes sur toutes les versions de système d'exploitation prises en charge, reportez-vous à la Matrice de support sur support.dell.com/manuals. Cartes réseau supplémentaires pour l'interface iSCSI Lors de l'installation de cartes réseau supplémentaires, il vous est recommandé de : • Utiliser des réseaux de stockage redondants dédiés pour le trafic iSCSI. Isoler le trafic iSCSI du trafic de réseau général à l'aide du réseau local virtuel (VLAN) si un réseau dédié n'est pas disponible. • Utiliser des cartes réseau dédiées supplémentaires pour le trafic iSCSI. • Les cartes réseau doivent être ajoutées en paires (jusqu'à quatre cartes réseau). REMARQUE : une carte réseau seule est également prise en charge. Configuration de carte réseau Dans un environnement de réseau SAN, selon le nombre de commutateurs, il vous est recommandé d'utiliser deux ou quatre sous-réseaux uniques pour le trafic iSCSI. Dans les environnements de stockage reliés directement, chaque carte réseau en connexion directe avec la matrice de stockage série MD3200i doit se trouver sur un sous-réseau différent.Guide de mise en route 27 Configurations courantes Câblage des hôtes reliés directement Serveur 1 Serveur 2 Matrice de stockage Serveur 3 Serveur 4 Réseau d'entreprise, public ou privé28 Guide de mise en route Câblage des hôtes reliés au réseau SAN Matrice de stockage Réseau d'entreprise, public ou privé Commutateur 1 Commutateur 2 ServeurGuide de mise en route 29 Jusqu'à 32 hôtes Serveur 1 Serveur 2 Matrice de stockage Réseau d'entreprise, public ou privé Commutateur 1 Commutateur 230 Guide de mise en route Installation et configuration AVERTISSEMENT : avant d'exécuter la procédure ci-dessous, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec le système. Déballage du système Déballez votre système et identifiez chaque élément en consultant la liste de composants livrée avec votre système. Installation des rails et du système dans un rack Assemblez les rails et installez le système dans le rack en suivant les consignes de sécurité et les instructions d'installation du rack fournies avec votre système. REMARQUE : pour équilibrer la charge, nous vous recommandons d'installer la matrice de stockage PowerVault série MD3200i en bas du rack et les boîtiers d'extension PowerVault série MD1200 au-dessus.Guide de mise en route 31 Branchement du ou des câbles d'alimentation Avant de connecter les câbles d'alimentation, assurez-vous que le commutateur d'alimentation est en position OFF (ÉTEINT). Branchez le ou les câbles d'alimentation sur le système. Fixation du ou des câbles d'alimentation Fixez fermement les câbles au support de fixation à l'aide de la lanière fournie. Branchez ensuite l'autre extrémité des câbles d'alimentation sur une prise de courant mise à la masse ou sur une source d'alimentation autonome (onduleur [UPS] ou unité de distribution de l'alimentation [PDU]...). Chaque bloc d'alimentation doit être connecté à un circuit d'alimentation différent.32 Guide de mise en route Câblage de votre boîtier d'extension Mise sous tension du boîtier Matrice de stockage PowerVault série MD3200i Boîtier d'extension PowerVault série MD1200 1 (en option) Boîtier d'extension PowerVault série MD1200 2 (en option)Guide de mise en route 33 Mettez les composants sous tension dans l'ordre suivant 1 Commutateurs Ethernet (si utilisés). 2 Boîtiers d'extension PowerVault série MD1200 (si utilisés). REMARQUE : avant d'allumer la matrice de stockage, assurez-vous que le voyant d'état du boîtier d'extension est bleu. 3 Matrice de stockage PowerVault série MD3200i. REMARQUE : avant d'allumer le(s) serveur(s) hôte, assurez-vous que le voyant d'état de la matrice de stockage est bleu. 4 Serveur(s) hôte. Installation du cadre Installez le cadre (en option). Installation du logiciel MD Storage REMARQUE : pour des instructions détaillées concernant l'installation du logiciel de stockage MD, la configuration du boîtier et les tâches après installation, voir le Guide de déploiement.34 Guide de mise en route L'application MD Storage Manager configure, gère, et contrôle la matrice de stockage. L'utilitaire de configuration MD (MDCU) est un utilitaire optionnel qui permet une approche consolidée de la configuration des ports de gestion, des ports hôtes iSCSI et de la création de sessions pour les matrices de stockage sur disques modulaires iSCSI. Il vous est recommandé d'utiliser l'utilitaire MDCU pour configurer iSCSI sur chaque hôte connecté à la matrice de stockage. Pour installer le logiciel MD Storage Manager : 1 Insérez le support Ressource série MD. En fonction de votre système d'exploitation, l'installateur se lancera peut- être automatiquement. Si l'installateur ne se lance pas automatiquement, naviguez dans le répertoire racine du support d'installation (ou téléchargez l'image d'installateur) et exécutez le fichier md_launcher.exe. Pour les systèmes exécutant Linux, naviguez vers la racine du support Ressource et exécutez le fichier autorun (Exécution auto). REMARQUE : par défaut, le système d'exploitation Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL) monte le support Ressource à l'aide de l'option de montage –noexec mount, qui ne vous permet pas d'exécuter les fichiers exécutables. Pour modifier ce paramètre, consultez le fichier Lisez-moi dans le répertoire racine du support d'installation. 2 Sélectionnez Install MD Storage Software (Installer le logiciel de stockage MD). 3 Lisez le contrat de licence et acceptez-le. 4 Sélectionnez l'une des options d'installation suivantes dans le menu déroulant Install Set (Configuration d'installation) : • Full (recommended) (Complète - recommandée) : installe le logiciel (client) MD Storage Manager, l'agent de stockage hôte, le pilote multivoies, et les fournisseurs de matériel. • Host Only (Hôte uniquement) : installe l'agent de stockage hôte et les pilotes multivoies. • Management (Gestion) : installe le logiciel de gestion et les fournisseurs de matériel. • Custom (Personnalisée) : permet de sélectionner des composants spécifiques. 5 Sélectionnez le(s) modèle(s) de matrice de stockage MD que vous souhaitez définir comme stockage de données pour ce serveur hôte. 6 Choisissez de démarrer le service de moniteur des événements automatiquement lors du redémarrage du serveur hôte ou manuellement Guide de mise en route 35 REMARQUE : cette option ne s'applique qu'à l'installation du logiciel client Windows. 7 Confirmez l'emplacement de l'installation et cliquez sur Install (Installer). 8 À l'invitation (le cas échéant), redémarrez le serveur hôte après la fin de l'installation. 9 Lorsque le redémarrage est terminé, l'utilitaire MDCU peut se lancer automatiquement. S'il ne se lance pas automatiquement, lancez-le manuellement. • Dans un système d'exploitation Windows, cliquez sur Démarrer→ Dell→ Modular Disk Configuration Utility (Utilitaire de configuration de disques modulaires). • Dans un système d'exploitation Linux, double-cliquez sur l'icône Modular Disk Configuration Utility (Utilitaire de configuration de disques modulaires) sur le bureau. REMARQUE : si l'utilitaire MDCU n'est pas installé, voir le Guide de déploiement à l'adresse support.dell.com/manuals. 10 Démarrez MD Storage Manager et lancez la détection des matrices. 11 Le cas échéant, activez les fonctions premium achetées avec votre matrice de stockage. Si vous avez acheté des fonctions premium, consultez la carte d'activation livrée avec votre matrice de stockage. REMARQUE : l'installateur MD Storage Manager installe automatiquement les pilotes, micrologiciel, et correctifs de système d'exploitation nécessaires au fonctionnement de votre matrice de stockage. Ces pilotes et micrologiciels sont également disponibles à l'adresse support.dell.com. Consultez également la Matrice de prise en charge à l'adresse support.dell.com/manuals pour connaître les paramètres et/ou logiciels supplémentaires requis pour votre matrice de stockage particulière.36 Guide de mise en route Identification du numéro de service Votre système est identifié par un code de service express et un numéro de service uniques. Le code de service express et le numéro de service se trouvent sur le devant et l'arrière du système à côté des modules de contrôleur RAID. Dell utilise ces informations pour acheminer les appels de support au technicien qui convient. Informations NOM (Mexique uniquement) Les informations suivantes sur l'appareil décrit dans ce document sont fournies conformément aux exigences de la Norme Officielle Mexicaine (NOM) : Importateur : Dell Inc. de México, S.A. de C.V. Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - 11° Piso Col. Lomas Altas 11950 México, D.F. Numéro de modèle : E03J et E04J Tension d'alimentation : 100 à 240 V CA Fréquence : 50/60 Hz Consommation électrique : 8,6 AGuide de mise en route 37 Caractéristiques techniques Lecteurs PowerVault MD3200i Jusqu'à 12 disques durs SAS remplaçables à chaud 3,5 pouces (3,0 Gb/s et 6,0 Gb/s) PowerVault MD3220i Jusqu'à 24 disques durs SAS remplaçables à chaud 2,5 pouces (3,0 Gb/s et 6,0 Gb/s) Modules de contrôleur RAID Modules de contrôleur RAID • Un ou deux modules remplaçables à chaud avec capteurs de température. • 2 Go de mémoire cache par contrôleur Connecteurs du panneau arrière (par module de contrôleur RAID) Connecteurs iSCSI Quatre connecteurs d'entrée iSCSI de 1 Go pour connecter les hôtes Connecteur d'extension SAS Un port de sortie SAS pour l'extension à un boîtier PowerVault série MD1200 supplémentaire. REMARQUE : les connecteurs SAS sont conformes SFF-8088 Connecteur série Un connecteur mini-DIN à 6 broches REMARQUE : cette option est réservée au personnel de maintenance. Connecteur Ethernet de gestion Un port Ethernet 100/1000 Base-T pour une gestion hors bande du boîtier REMARQUE : les adresses IP de port de gestion par défaut des modules de contrôleur RAID primaire et secondaire sont respectivement192.168.128.101 et 192.168.128.102. Par défaut, les ports de gestion sont définis sur le protocole DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration). Si le contrôleur ne parvient pas à obtenir une configuration d'adresse IP d'un serveur DHCP au cours d'une période de temps donnée (environ 3 minutes), par défaut il utilise l'adressage IP statique. Pour plus d'informations, voir le Guide de déploiement.38 Guide de mise en route Extension PowerVault Série MD1200 Prend en charge jusqu'à 192 disques durs avec n'importe quelle combinaison de boîtiers d'extension PowerVault MD1200 ou PowerVault MD1220. La prise en charge de 192 disques durs est une fonction premium et doit être activée. Le nombre maximum de disques durs pris en charge sans utiliser la fonction premium est 120. La connectivité à chemin redondant fournit des chemins de données redondants à chaque disque dur. Carte de fond de panier Connecteurs • 12 ou 24 connecteurs de disque dur SAS • Deux connecteurs pour les modules de ventilation/alimentation • Deux ensembles de connecteurs de module de contrôleur RAID • Un connecteur de panneau de commande pour les voyants frontaux et le commutateur de mode boîtier Capteurs Deux capteurs de température Voyants Panneau avant • Un voyant bicolore indiquant l'état du système • Deux voyants monochromes (alimentation et mode boîtier) REMARQUE : le voyant du mode boîtier ne s'applique pas à la matrice de stockage PowerVault série MD3200i. Support de disque dur • Un voyant d'activité monochrome • Un voyant d'état bichrome par lecteur Bloc d'alimentation/ventilateur de refroidissement Trois voyants d'état (état du bloc d'alimentation, panne du bloc d'alimentation/ventilateur et état de l'alimentation)Guide de mise en route 39 Module de contrôleur RAID Dix voyants monochromes : • Un voyant de panne de batterie • Un voyant d'activité de la mémoire cache • Un voyant de panne du contrôleur • Un voyant d'état de l'alimentation de contrôleur • Un voyant système • Un voyant d'activité de gestion Ethernet • Quatre voyants d'activité de port d'entrée iSCSI Six voyants bichromes : • Quatre voyants de vitesse de lien d'entrée iSCSI • Un voyant de panne ou de lien de sortie SAS • Un voyant de vitesse de lien Ethernet de gestion Commutateur Bouton d'identification du système Situé sur le panneau de commande avant. Ce bouton sert à localiser un système au sein d'un rack. Sélecteur de mode Boîtier Situé sur le devant du système. Ce sélecteur ne s'applique pas à la matrice de stockage PowerVault série MD3200i. Sélecteur de réinitialisation du mot de passe Situé sur le panneau arrière du module de contrôleur RAID. Ce sélecteur permet de réinitialiser le mot de passe de la matrice de stockage. Blocs d'alimentation Alimentation secteur (par bloc d'alimentation) Puissance 600 W Tension 100–240 VCA (8,6 A–4,3 A) Dissipation thermique 100 W Courant d'appel maximal Dans des conditions de ligne typiques et dans toute la gamme ambiante de fonctionnement du système, l'appel de courant peut atteindre 55 A par bloc d'alimentation pendant un maximum de 10 ms. Voyants (suite)40 Guide de mise en route Alimentation disponible pour les disques durs (par logement) PowerVault MD3200i 25 W PowerVault MD3220i 12 W Alimentation du module de contrôleur RAID (par emplacement) Consommation de courant maximale 100 W Caractéristiques physiques PowerVault MD3200i Hauteur 8,68 cm (3,41 pouces) Largeur 44,63 cm (17,57 pouces) Profondeur 60,20 cm (23,70 pouces) Poids (configuration maximale) 29,30 kg (64,6 livres) Poids (vide) 8,84 kg (19,5 livres) PowerVault MD3220i Hauteur 8,68 cm (3,41 pouces) Largeur 44,63 cm (17,57 pouces) Profondeur 54,90 cm (21,61 pouces) Poids (configuration maximale) 24,22 kg (53,4 livres) Poids (vide) 8,61 kg (19 livres) Environnement REMARQUE : pour des informations supplémentaires sur les mesures environnementales liées aux différentes configurations du système, voir www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets. Température En fonctionnement De 10 à 35 °C (50 à 95 °F) avec un gradient thermique maximal de 10 °C par heure REMARQUE : pour les altitudes supérieures à 900 mètres (2 950 pieds), la température maximale de fonctionnement est réduite de 0,55 °C (1 °F) tous les 168 mètres (550 pieds). Entreposage De -40 à 65 °C (-40 à 149 °F) avec un gradient thermique maximal de 20 °C par heureGuide de mise en route 41 Humidité relative En fonctionnement De 20 à 80 % (sans condensation) avec un gradient d'humidité maximal de 10 % par heure Entreposage De 5 à 95 % (sans condensation) Tolérance maximale aux vibrations En fonctionnement 0,25 G avec un balayage de 3 à 200 Hz pendant 15 minutes Entreposage 0,5 G avec un balayage de 3 à 200 Hz pendant 15 minutes Choc maximal En fonctionnement Une impulsion de choc de 31 G pendant un maximum de 2,6 ms sur l'axe z positif (une impulsion de chaque côté du système) Entreposage Six chocs consécutifs de 71 G pendant un maximum de 2 ms en positif et négatif sur les axes x, y et z (une impulsion de chaque côté du système) Altitude En fonctionnement De -16 à 3 048 m (-50 à 10 000 pieds) REMARQUE : Pour les altitudes supérieures à 900 mètres (2 950 pieds), la température maximale de fonctionnement est réduite de 0,55 °C (1 °F) tous les 168 mètres (550 pieds). Entreposage De -16 à 10 600 m (-50 à 35 000 pieds) Contaminants en suspension dans l'air Classe G1 selon la norme ISA-S71.04-1985 Environnement (suite)42 Guide de mise en routeMatrizes de armazenamento Dell PowerVault MD3200i e MD3220i Introdução ao uso do sistema Modelo de normalização séries E03J e E04JNotas, Avisos e Advertências NOTA: uma NOTA fornece informações importantes para ajudar você a aproveitar melhor os recursos do computador. AVISO: um AVISO indica um potencial de danos ao hardware ou a perda de dados se as instruções não forem seguidas. ADVERTÊNCIA: uma ADVERTÊNCIA indica um potencial de danos à propriedade, risco de lesões corporais ou mesmo de risco de vida. ____________________ As informações contidas nesta publicação estão sujeitas a alterações sem aviso prévio. © 2011 Dell Inc. Todos os direitos reservados. Qualquer forma de reprodução deste material sem a permissão por escrito da Dell Inc. é expressamente proibida. Marcas comerciais usadas neste texto: Dell™, o logotipo DELL e PowerVault™ são marcas comerciais da Dell Inc.; Microsoft ® e Windows Server ® são marcas comerciais ou marcas registradas da Microsoft Corporation nos Estados Unidos e em outros países. Red Hat ® e Red Hat Enterprise Linux ® são marcas registradas da Red Hat, Inc. nos Estados Unidos e em outros países. SUSE ® é marca registrada da Novell, Inc. nos Estados Unidos e em outros países. VMware ® é marca registrada da VMware, Inc. nos Estados Unidos e/ou em outras jurisdições. Outras marcas e nomes comerciais podem ser usados nesta publicação como referência às entidades que reivindicam essas marcas e nomes ou a seus produtos. A Dell Inc. declara que não tem interesse de propriedade sobre marcas comerciais e nomes de terceiros. Modelo de normalização séries E03J e E04J Agosto de 2011 N/P TFKD1 Rev. A02Introdução ao Uso do Sistema 45 Antes de começar NOTA: Neste documento, a matriz de armazenamento Dell PowerVault série MD3200i se refere tanto à matriz Dell PowerVault MD3200i quanto à matriz Dell PowerVault MD3220i. O gabinete de expansão Dell PowerVault série MD1200 se refere tanto ao Dell PowerVault MD1200 quanto ao Dell PowerVault MD1220. Antes de configurar a matriz de armazenamento Dell PowerVault série MD3200i, você precisa considerar certas práticas recomendadas que garantem que a sua matriz de armazenamento funcione com a máxima eficiência e ofereça redundância total (se necessário). • É recomendável que você use uma SAN de IP dedicado para a transmissão de dados iSCSI. O gerenciamento de tráfego pode ser isolado em uma rede de gerenciamento separada. • Preencha a planilha de configuração iSCSI antes de configurar o iSCSI. Consulte “Preencher a planilha iSCSI” na página 46. Esta planilha reúne informações da rede física em uma única fonte. • Depois de preencher a planilha iSCSI, faça um desenho da configuração antes de configurar a solução. • Configure sempre caminhos redundantes de dados iSCSI para fornecer caminhos alternativos de e para o servidor host, na eventualidade de um destes caminhos se tornar indisponível. • Se houver múltiplas placas de rede instaladas em um host, recomenda-se que você use diferentes sub-redes para gerenciamento e para links de dados iSCSI. • Use sempre cabos de rede Ethernet Categoria 5e (ou melhores) em toda a rede. • Antes de conectar quaisquer cabos entre o servidor host e a matriz de armazenamento, coloque uma etiqueta em cada porta e em cada conector. • Siga sempre os procedimentos adequados para fazer o “power cycle” (desligar e religar em seguida) de dispositivos da rede. Você precisa garantir também que os componentes críticos da rede estejam em circuitos de alimentação separados. NOTA: As ilustrações deste documento mostram o cabeamento de apenas uma matriz de armazenamento PowerVault série MD3200i em um ambiente SAN. As ilustrações mostram também apenas os endereços IP padrão da matriz de armazenamento PowerVault série MD3200i. Para fazer o cabeamento de mais de uma matriz de armazenamento PowerVault série MD3200i em um ambiente SAN, consulte o guia de implementação.46 Introdução ao Uso do Sistema Preencher a planilha iSCSI Configurações de IPv4 Segredo CHAP do destino Segredo CHAP mútuo A B servidor host Matriz de armazenamento PowerVault série MD3200i 192.168.130.101 (em 0 por padrão) 192.168.131.101 (em 1 por padrão) 192.168.132.101 (em 2 por padrão) 192.168.133.101 (em 3 por padrão) 192.168.128.101 (porta da rede de gerenciamento) 192.168.130.102 (em 0 por padrão) 192.168.131.102 (em 1 por padrão) 192.168.132.102 (em 2 por padrão) 192.168.133.102 (em 3 por padrão) 192.168.128.102 (porta da rede de gerenciamento) Se você precisar de espaço adicional para mais de um servidor host, use uma folha adicional. Porta iSCSI 1 Porta iSCSI 2 Porta iSCSI 3 Porta iSCSI 4 Porta de gerenciamento A Endereço IP estático (servidor host) Máscara de sub-rede Gateway padrão ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ NOTA: O servidor host pode suportar até quatro placas de rede.Introdução ao Uso do Sistema 47 NOTA: Para obter informações sobre a planilha de IPv6, consulte o guia de implementação. Outros documentos e mídias dos quais você pode precisar ADVERTÊNCIA: Consulte as informações de normalização e segurança fornecidas com o sistema. As informações de garantia podem estar neste documento ou podem ser fornecidas como um documento separado. NOTA: Todos os documentos da matriz de armazenamento PowerVault série MD3200i estão disponíveis em support.dell.com/manuals. • A documentação fornecida com o rack contém o procedimento de instalação do sistema no rack. • O Manual do proprietário fornece informações sobre os recursos do sistema e descreve como solucionar problemas do sistema e como instalar ou trocar componentes. • O Guia de implementação fornece informações sobre a instalação e a configuração do software e do hardware. • O Guia da Interface de Linha de Comando (CLI) fornece informações sobre o uso da interface de linha de comando para configurar e gerenciar a matriz de armazenamento. Endereço IP estático (matriz de armazenamento) B Máscara de sub-rede Gateway padrão ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ controlador iSCSI 0, em 0 controlador iSCSI 0, em 1 controlador iSCSI 0, em 2 controlador iSCSI 0, em 3 controlador da porta de gerenciamento 0 controlador iSCSI 1, em 0 controlador iSCSI 1, em 1 controlador iSCSI 1, em 2 controlador iSCSI 1, em 3 controlador da porta de gerenciamento 1 ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___48 Introdução ao Uso do Sistema • O Guia do programador de SMI-S fornece informações sobre o uso do provedor de SMI-S e sobre a programação de SMI-S. • As mídias fornecidas com o sistema que contêm documentação e ferramentas para a configuração e o gerenciamento do sistema, incluindo aquelas relacionadas ao sistema operacional, ao software de gerenciamento do sistema, a atualizações do sistema e a componentes adquiridos com o sistema. NOTA: Verifique sempre se há atualizações disponíveis no site support.dell.com/manuals (em inglês) e leia primeiro as atualizações, pois estas geralmente substituem informações contidas em outros documentos. Preparar o servidor host Sistemas operacionais suportados • Microsoft Windows Server • Red Hat Enterprise Linux • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server • VMware NOTA: Para obter as informações mais recentes sobre todas as versões de sistemas operacionais suportadas, consulte Support Matrix (Matriz de suporte) no site support.dell.com/manuals. Placas de rede adicionais para iSCSI Quando for instalar placas de rede adicionais, é recomendável que: • Você use redes de armazenamento redundante dedicadas para tráfego iSCSI. Se não for possível ter uma rede dedicada, isole o tráfego iSCSI do tráfego da rede geral usando redes locais virtuais (VLANs - virtual local area networks). • Você use placas de rede adicionais dedicadas para o tráfego iSCSI. • As placas de rede precisam ser adicionadas em pares para se obter redundância (até quatro placas de rede). NOTA: A configuração com uma única placa de rede é também suportada. Configuração da placa de rede Em um ambiente de SAN, dependendo do número de comutadores, é recomendável que você use duas ou quatro sub-redes exclusivas para o tráfego iSCSI. Em ambientes nos quais os dispositivos de armazenamento são diretamente conectados, cada placa de rede diretamente conectada à matriz de armazenamento PowerVault série MD3200i precisa estar em uma sub-rede separada.Introdução ao Uso do Sistema 49 Configurações comuns Cabeamento de hosts conectados diretamente Servidor 1 Servidor 2 Matriz de armazenamento Servidor 3 Servidor 4 Rede corporativa, pública ou privada50 Introdução ao Uso do Sistema Cabeamento de hosts conectados à SAN Matriz de armazenamento Rede corporativa, pública ou privada Comutador 1 Comutador 2 ServidorIntrodução ao Uso do Sistema 51 Até 32 hosts Servidor 1 Servidor 2 Matriz de armazenamento Rede corporativa, pública ou privada Comutador 1 Comutador 252 Introdução ao Uso do Sistema Instalação e configuração ADVERTÊNCIA: Antes de executar o procedimento abaixo, siga as instruções de segurança fornecidas com o sistema. Remover o sistema da embalagem Desembale o sistema e identifique cada item de acordo com a lista fornecida. Instalar os trilhos e o sistema no rack Monte os trilhos e instale o sistema no rack, seguindo as instruções de segurança e as instruções de instalação fornecidas com o sistema. NOTA: Para contrabalançar o peso, é recomendável que você instale a matriz de armazenamento PowerVault série MD3200i na parte inferior do rack e os gabinetes de expansão PowerVault série MD1200 acima dela.Introdução ao Uso do Sistema 53 Conectar o(s) cabo(s) de alimentação Verifique se a chave está na posição “desligada” (OFF), antes de conectar os cabos de alimentação. Conecte o(s) cabos de alimentação ao sistema. Prender o(s) cabo(s) de alimentação Prenda firmemente os cabos ao gancho usando a tira fornecida. Conecte a outra extremidade do(s) cabo(s) de alimentação a uma tomada elétrica aterrada ou a uma fonte de alimentação separada, por exemplo, uma UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply [fonte de alimentação ininterrupta]) ou uma PDU (Power Distribution Unit [unidade de distribuição de energia]). Cada fonte de alimentação precisa ser conectada a um circuito de alimentação separado.54 Introdução ao Uso do Sistema Cabeamento do gabinete de expansão Ligar o gabinete Matriz de armazenamento PowerVault série MD3200i Gabinete de expansão PowerVault série MD1200 1 (opcional) Gabinete de expansão PowerVault série MD1200 2 (opcional)Introdução ao Uso do Sistema 55 Ligue os componentes na seguinte ordem: 1 Comutadores Ethernet (se forem usados). 2 Gabinetes de expansão PowerVault série MD1200 (se estiverem sendo usados). NOTA: Antes de ligar a matriz de armazenamento, verifique se o LED de status do gabinete de expansão está azul. 3 Matriz de armazenamento PowerVault série MD3200i. NOTA: Antes de ligar o(s) servidor(es) host, verifique se o LED de status da matriz de armazenamento está azul. 4 Servidor(es) host. Instalar o bezel Instale o bezel (opcional). Instalar o software de armazenamento MD NOTA: Para obter instruções detalhadas sobre a instalação do software de armazenamento de discos modulares, a configuração do gabinete e as tarefas de pós-instalação, consulte o guia de implementação.56 Introdução ao Uso do Sistema O software MD Storage Manager (gerenciamento de armazenamento em discos modulares) configura, gerencia e monitora a matriz de armazenamento. O utilitário de configuração de MD (MDCU - MD Configuration Utility) é um utilitário opcional que faz abordagem consolidada para a configuração de portas de gerenciamento, portas de host iSCSI e para a criação de sessões das matrizes modulares de armazenamento em disco iSCSI. É recomendável que você use o MDCU para configurar o iSCSI em cada servidor host conectado à matriz de armazenamento. Para instalar o software de armazenamento MD: 1 Insira a mídia de recursos da série MD. Dependendo do seu sistema operacional, o instalador pode ser aberto automaticamente. Se o instalador não abrir automaticamente, vá até o diretório raiz da mídia de instalação (ou da imagem baixada do instalador) e execute o arquivo md_launcher.exe. Nos sistemas Linux, navegue até a raiz da mídia de recursos e execute o arquivo autorun. NOTA: Por padrão, o sistema operacional Red Hat Enterprise Linux monta a mídia de recursos com a opção – noexec mount, a qual não permite rodar arquivos executáveis. Para mudar esta configuração, consulte o arquivo Readme que está no diretório raiz da mídia de instalação. 2 Selecione Install MD Storage Software (Instalar o software de armazenamento em discos modulares). 3 Leia e aceite o contrato de licença. 4 Selecione uma das seguintes opções de instalação no menu suspenso Install Set (Conjunto de instalação): • Full (recommended) — (Completa (recomendável)) - Instala o software cliente do gerenciador de armazenamento MD (MD Storage Manager (client)), o agente de armazenamento baseado em host, o driver de multi-caminhos e os provedores de hardware. • Host Only — (Apenas host) - Instala o agente de armazenamento baseado em host e os drivers de multi-caminhos. • Management — (Gerenciamento) - Instala o software de gerenciamento e os provedores de hardware. • Custom — (Personalizada) - Permite que você selecione componentes específicos. 5 Selecione o(s) modelo(s) de matriz de armazenamento MD que você está configurando como armazenamento de dados para este servidor host. 6 Indique se você quer começar a monitoração de eventos automaticamente quando o servidor é reinicializado ou manualmente. Introdução ao Uso do Sistema 57 NOTA: Esta opção só se aplica à instalação de software de cliente Windows. 7 Confirme o local de instalação e clique em Install. 8 Se for solicitado, reinicialize o servidor quando a instalação terminar. 9 Quando a reinicialização terminar, o MDCU será aberto automaticamente. Se o MDCU não for aberto automaticamente, abra-o manualmente. • Em sistemas operacionais baseados no Windows,clique em Iniciar→ Dell→ Modular Disk Configuration Utility. • Em sistemas operacionais baseados no Linux, clique duas vezes no ícone do Modular Disk Configuration Utility (utilitário de configuração de discos modulares) na área de trabalho. NOTA: Se o MDCU não for instalado, consulte o Deployment Guide (guia de implementação) em support.dell.com/manuals. 10 Abra o aplicativo MD Storage Manager (gerenciador de armazenamento MD) e faça a descoberta da(s) matriz(es). 11 Se for o caso, ative todos os recursos Premium comprados com a sua matriz de armazenamento. Se for o caso, consulte o cartão impresso de ativação que é fornecido com a sua matriz de armazenamento. NOTA: O instalador do MD Storage Manager (gerenciador de armazenamento MD) instala automaticamente os drivers, o firmware e os patches do sistema operacional necessários para operar a matriz de armazenamento. Estes drivers e firmware estão também disponíveis em support.dell.com. Além disso, consulte Support Matrix (Matriz de suporte) em support.dell.com/manuals para obter configurações e/ou software adicionais necessários para a sua matriz de armazenamento específica. Localizar a etiqueta de serviço O seu sistema é identificado por um número exclusivo de código de serviço expresso e de etiqueta de serviço. O código de serviço expresso (Express Service Code) e a etiqueta de serviço (Service Tag) estão localizados na parte frontal e na parte traseira do sistema, próximos aos módulos do controlador de RAID. Estas informações são usadas pela Dell para dirigir as chamadas que são feitas ao serviço de suporte para o pessoal adequado.58 Introdução ao Uso do Sistema Informações da norma NOM (apenas para o México) As informações a seguir são fornecidas sobre o dispositivo descrito neste documento em conformidade com os requisitos das normas oficiais mexicanas (NOM): Especificações técnicas Importador: Número do modelo: E03J e E04J Tensão de alimentação: 100 a 240 VCA Frequência: 50/60 Hz Consumo de corrente: 8,6 A Unidades PowerVault MD3200i Até 12 discos rígidos SAS de 3,5 polegadas (3,0 Gbps e 6,0 Gbps) com troca a quente (“hot swappable”) PowerVault MD3220i Até 24 discos rígidos SAS de 2,5 polegadas (3,0 Gbps e 6,0 Gbps) com troca a quente (“hot swappable”)Introdução ao Uso do Sistema 59 Módulos controladores de RAID Módulos controladores de RAID • Um ou dois módulos de troca a quente (“hot swappable”) com sensores de temperatura • 2 GB de cache por controlador Conectores do painel traseiro (por módulo controlador de RAID) Conectores iSCSI Quatro conectores de entrada iSCSI de 1 GB para a conexão de hosts Conector de expansão SAS Uma porta de saída SAS (SAS OUT) para expansão com um gabinete PowerVault série MD1200 adicional. NOTA: Os conectores SAS são compatíveis com SFF-8088. Conector serial Um conector mini-DIN de 6 pinos NOTA: Para uso exclusivo pelo suporte técnico. Conector Ethernet de gerenciamento Uma porta Ethernet 100/1000 Base-T para gerenciamento fora da banda do gabinete NOTA: Os endereços IP padrão das portas de gerenciamento dos módulos controladores de RAID primário e secundário são 192.168.128.101 e 192.168.128.102, respectivamente. Por padrão, as portas de gerenciamento são configuradas para DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). Se o controlador não conseguir obter um endereço IP a partir de um servidor DHCP dentro de um tempo especificado (cerca de 3 minutos), ele volta a usar o padrão, isto é, endereçamento IP estático. Para obter mais informações, consulte o guia de implementação.60 Introdução ao Uso do Sistema Expansão PowerVault série MD1200 Suporta um máximo de 192 discos rígidos com qualquer combinação de gabinetes de expansão PowerVault MD1200 ou PowerVault MD1220. O suporte para 192 discos rígidos é um recurso Premium e precisa ser ativado. O número máximo de discos rígidos suportados sem o uso de recursos Premium é 120. A conectividade de caminho redundante fornece caminhos redundantes de dados para cada disco rígido. Placa backplane Conectores • 12 ou 24 conectores para discos rígidos SAS • Dois conectores para módulos de fonte de alimentação ou ventiladores de resfriamento • Dois conjuntos de conectores para módulo de controlador de RAID • Um conector no painel de controle para os LEDs frontais e para a chave de modo do gabinete Sensores Dois sensores de temperatura LEDs indicadores Painel frontal • Um LED de duas cores para indicação do status do sistema • Dois LEDs de cor única para indicação de alimentação e de modo do gabinete. NOTA: O LED de modo do gabinete não é aplicável à matriz de armazenamento PowerVault série MD3200i. Apoio do disco rígido • Um LED de cor única para atividade. • Um LED de duas cores para indicação de status, por unidade. Fonte de alimentação ou ventilador de resfriamento Três LEDs para indicar o status da fonte de alimentação, o status de falha da fonte alimentação ou do ventilador e o status da alimentação CA Introdução ao Uso do Sistema 61 Módulo controlador de RAID Dez LEDs de cor única: • Um para falha da bateria • Um para atividade de cache • Um para falha do controlador • Um para alimentação do controlador • Um para identificação do sistema • Um para atividade da Ethernet de gerenciamento • Quatro para atividade das portas de entrada iSCSI Seis LEDs de duas cores: • Quatro para velocidade do link de entrada iSCSI • Um para falha ou link de saída SAS • Um para velocidade do link Ethernet de gerenciamento Chave Botão de identificação do sistema Localizado no painel de controle frontal. Este botão é usado para localizar um sistema dentro de um rack. Chave de modo do gabinete Localizada na parte frontal do sistema. Esta chave não é aplicável à matriz de armazenamento PowerVault série MD3200i. Chave de redefinição da senha Localizada no painel traseiro do módulo controlador de RAID. Esta chave é usada para redefinir a senha da matriz de armazenamento. Fontes de alimentação Fonte de alimentação CA (por fonte de alimentação) Potência 600 W Tensão 100 a 240 VAC (8,6 A a 4,3 A) Dissipação de calor 100 W Pico de corrente inicial máximo Sob condições de linha típicas e na faixa inteira de temperatura ambiente de funcionamento do sistema, o pico de corrente inicial (“inrush”) pode atingir um máximo de 55 A por fonte de alimentação por 10 ms ou menos. LEDs indicadores (continuação)62 Introdução ao Uso do Sistema Potência disponível para discos rígidos (por slot) PowerVault MD3200i 25 W PowerVault MD3220i 12 W Potência do módulo controlador de RAID (por slot) Consumo máximo de potência 100 W Características físicas PowerVault MD3200i Altura 8,68 cm Largura 44,63 cm Profundidade 60,20 cm Peso (com a configuração máxima) 29,30 kg Peso (em vazio) 8,84 kg PowerVault MD3220i Altura 8,68 cm Largura 44,63 cm Profundidade 54,90 cm Peso (com a configuração máxima) 24,22 kg Peso (em vazio) 8,61 kg Requisitos ambientais NOTA: Para obter informações adicionais sobre os requisitos ambientais para configurações específicas do sistema, visite o site www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets (em inglês). Temperatura De operação 10°C a 35°C com variação máxima de 10°C por hora NOTA: Para altitudes acima de 900 metros, a temperatura máxima de operação diminui à razão de 1°C / 300 metros. Introdução ao Uso do Sistema 63 De armazenamento -40°C a 65°C com variação máxima de temperatura de 20°C por hora Umidade relativa De operação 20% a 80% (sem condensação) com variação de umidade máxima de 10% por hora De armazenamento 5% a 95% (sem condensação) Vibração máxima De operação 0,25 g em 3 a 200 Hz por 15 minutos De armazenamento 0,5 g em 3 a 200 Hz por 15 minutos Choque máximo De operação Um pulso de choque no eixo z positivo (um pulso em cada lado do sistema) de 31 g por 2,6 ms na orientação operacional De armazenamento Seis pulsos de choque aplicados consecutivamente nos eixos x, y e z positivos e negativos (um pulso de cada lado do sistema) de 71 g por até 2 ms Altitude De operação -16 m a 3.048 m NOTA: Para altitudes acima de 900 m, a temperatura máxima de operação diminui à razão de 1°C / 300 m De armazenamento -16 m a 10.600 m Nível de poluentes transportados pelo ar Classe G1 conforme definido pela norma ISA-S71.04-1985 Requisitos ambientais (continuação)64 Introdução ao Uso do SistemaMatrices de almacenamiento Dell PowerVault MD3200i y MD3220i Introducción al sistema Modelo reglamentario, series E03J y E04JNotas, precauciones y avisos NOTA: una NOTA proporciona información importante que le ayudará a utilizar mejor el ordenador. PRECAUCIÓN: un mensaje de PRECAUCIÓN indica la posibilidad de que se produzcan daños en el hardware o haya pérdida de datos si no se siguen las instrucciones. AVISO: un mensaje de AVISO indica la posibilidad de que se produzcan daños materiales, lesiones personales e incluso la muerte. ____________________ La información contenida en esta publicación puede modificarse sin previo aviso. © 2011 Dell Inc. Todos los derechos reservados. Queda estrictamente prohibida la reproducción de estos materiales en cualquier forma sin la autorización por escrito de Dell Inc. Marcas comerciales utilizadas en este texto: Dell™, el logotipo de DELL y PowerVault™ son marcas comerciales de Dell Inc. Microsoft ® y Windows Server ® son marcas comerciales o marcas comerciales registradas de Microsoft Corporation en Estados Unidos y/o en otros países. Red Hat ® y Red Hat Enterprise Linux ® son marcas comerciales registradas de Red Hat, Inc. en los Estados Unidos y en otros países. SUSE ® es una marca comercial registrada de Novell, Inc. en los Estados Unidos y en otros países. VMware ® es una marca comercial registrada de VMware, Inc. en los Estados Unidos y/ o en otras jurisdicciones. Otras marcas y otros nombres comerciales pueden utilizarse en esta publicación para hacer referencia a las entidades que los poseen o a sus productos. Dell Inc. renuncia a cualquier interés sobre la propiedad de marcas y nombres comerciales que no sean los suyos. Modelo reglamentario, series E03J y E04J 08/2011 N/P TFKD1 Rev. A02Introducción al sistema 67 Antes de comenzar NOTA: a lo largo del documento, la matriz de almacenamiento de la serie Dell PowerVault MD3200i hace referencia a Dell PowerVault MD3200i y Dell PowerVault MD3220i. El gabinete de expansión de la serie Dell PowerVault MD1200 hace referencia a Dell PowerVault MD1200 y Dell PowerVault MD1220. Antes de configurar la matriz de almacenamiento de la serie Dell PowerVault MD3200i, debe tener en cuenta una serie de prácticas recomendadas para garantizar que la matriz de almacenamiento funcione a un rendimiento máximo y ofrezca redundancia total (si es necesario). • Se recomienda utilizar una SAN IP dedicada para la transmisión de datos iSCSI. El tráfico de administración se puede aislar en una red de administración independiente. • Complete la hoja de trabajo de configuración de iSCSI antes de configurar iSCSI. Ver “Cómo completar la hoja de trabajo de iSCSI” en la página 68. Esta hoja de trabajo reúne la información de la red física de forma centralizada. • Una vez que haya completado la hoja de trabajo de iSCSI, dibuje la configuración antes de configurar la solución. • Configure siempre las rutas de datos iSCSI redundantes para disponer de rutas alternativas al servidor host y desde el servidor host en caso de que se deshabilite una de las rutas de datos. • Si se instalan varias NICs en un host, es recomendable utilizar subredes diferentes para la administración y los enlaces de datos iSCSI. • Utilice siempre en toda la red un cable Ethernet de categoría 5e (o superior). • Antes de conectar cables entre el servidor host y la matriz de almacenamiento, etiquete todos los puertos y conectores. • Durante los ciclos de encendido de la red, siga siempre los procedimientos adecuados de encendido y apagado. Asegúrese también de que los componentes de red críticos se encuentren en circuitos de alimentación diferentes. NOTA: en las ilustraciones de este documento se muestra el cableado de solamente una matriz de almacenamiento de la serie PowerVault MD3200i en un entorno SAN. Asimismo, las ilustraciones solo muestran las direcciones IP predeterminadas para la matriz de almacenamiento de la serie PowerVault MD3200i. Para cablear varias matrices de almacenamiento de la serie PowerVault MD3200i en un entorno SAN, ver la Guía de implementación.68 Introducción al sistema Cómo completar la hoja de trabajo de iSCSI Configuración de IPv4 Puerto 1 iSCSI Puerto 2 iSCSI Puerto 3 iSCSI Puerto 4 iSCSI Puerto de administración Dir. IP estática (servidor host) Máscara de subred Puerta de enlace A predeterminada ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ Secreto CHAP mutuo Secreto CHAP de destino A B Servidor host Matriz de almacenamiento de la serie PowerVault MD3200i 192.168.130.101 (predet.: entrada 0) 192.168.131.101 (predet.: entrada 1) 192.168.132.101 (predet.: entrada 2) 192.168.133.101 (predet.: entrada 3) 192.168.128.101 (puerto de red de admin.) 192.168.130.102 (predet.: entrada 0) 192.168.131.102 (predet.: entrada 1) 192.168.132.102 (predet.: entrada 2) 192.168.133.102 (predet.: entrada 3) 192.168.128.102 (puerto de red de admin.) Si necesita espacio adicional para más de un servidor host, utilice otra hoja. NOTA: el servidor host admite un máximo de cuatro NICs.Introducción al sistema 69 NOTA: para obtener más información sobre la hoja de trabajo de IPv6, consulte la Guía de implementación. Documentación y soportes adicionales útiles AVISO: consulte la información reglamentaria y de seguridad suministrada con el sistema. La información sobre la garantía puede estar incluida en este documento o en un documento aparte. NOTA: todos los documentos de la matriz de almacenamiento de la serie PowerVault MD3200i están disponibles en support.dell.com/manuals. • En la documentación del bastidor incluida con la solución de bastidor se describe cómo instalar el sistema en un bastidor. • En el Manual del propietario se proporciona información acerca de las funciones del sistema y se describe cómo solucionar problemas del sistema e instalar o sustituir componentes del sistema. • En la Guía de implementación se proporciona información acerca de la instalación y configuración del software y hardware. • En la Guía de CLI se proporciona información acerca de cómo utilizar la Interfaz de línea de comandos (CLI) para configurar y administrar la matriz de almacenamiento. Dir. IP estática (matriz almacen.) Máscara de subred Puerta de enlace predeterminada B ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ Contrl. iSCSI 0, entrada 0 Contrl. iSCSI 1, entrada 0 Contrl. iSCSI 2, entrada 0 Contrl. iSCSI 3, entrada 0 Puerto admin., contrl. 0 Contrl. iSCSI 1, entrada 0 Contrl. iSCSI 1, entrada 1 Contrl. iSCSI 2, entrada 1 Contrl. iSCSI 3, entrada 1 Puerto admin., contrl. 1 ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___ ___ . ___ . ___ . ___70 Introducción al sistema • En la SMI-S Programmer’s Guide (Guía de los programadores de SMI-S) se proporciona información acerca de cómo utilizar el proveedor y la programación de SMI-S. • En los soportes suministrados con el sistema se incluyen documentación y herramientas para configurar y administrar el sistema, incluidas las del sistema operativo, el software de administración del sistema, las actualizaciones del sistema y los componentes del sistema que haya adquirido con el sistema. NOTA: compruebe si hay actualizaciones en support.dell.com/manuals y, si las hay, léalas antes de proceder a la instalación, puesto que a menudo sustituyen la información contenida en otros documentos. Preparación del servidor host Sistemas operativos admitidos • Microsoft Windows Server • Red Hat Enterprise Linux • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server • VMware NOTA: si desea consultar la información más reciente acerca de todas las versiones compatibles de sistemas operativos, consulte la Support Matrix (Matriz de compatibilidad) en support.dell.com/manuals. NICs adicionales para iSCSI Recomendaciones para la instalación de NICs adicionales: • Utilice redes de almacenamiento redundante dedicadas para el tráfico iSCSI. Si no es factible disponer de una red dedicada, separe el tráfico iSCSI del tráfico de red general mediante redes de área local virtuales (VLAN). • Utilice NICs adicionales dedicadas para el tráfico iSCSI. • Las NICs deben añadirse en pares para obtener redundancia (máximo de cuatro NICs). NOTA: también se admite una sola NIC. Configuración de la NIC En un entorno SAN, se recomienda utilizar dos o cuatro subredes únicas para el tráfico iSCSI, en función del número de conmutadores. En los entornos de almacenamiento de conexión directa, cada NIC conectada directamente a la matriz de almacenamiento de la serie PowerVault MD3200i debe estar en una subred diferente.Introducción al sistema 71 Configuraciones comunes Cableado de los hosts de conexión directa Servidor 1 Servidor 2 Matriz de almacenamiento Servidor 3 Servidor 4 Red corporativa, pública o privada72 Introducción al sistema Cableado de los hosts de conexión SAN Matriz de almacenamiento Red corporativa, pública o privada Conmutador 1 Conmutador 2 ServidorIntroducción al sistema 73 Máximo de 32 hosts Servidor 1 Servidor Matriz de almacenamiento Red corporativa, pública o privada Conmutador 1 Conmutador 274 Introducción al sistema Instalación y configuración AVISO: antes de realizar el procedimiento siguiente, revise las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas con el sistema. Desembalaje del sistema Desembale el sistema e identifique cada parte de la lista de embalaje que se envió con el sistema. Instalación de los rieles y del sistema en un bastidor Ensamble los rieles e instale el sistema en el bastidor siguiendo las instrucciones de seguridad y de instalación del bastidor incluidas con el sistema. NOTA: para equilibrar la carga del peso, se recomienda instalar la matriz de almacenamiento de la serie PowerVault MD3200i en la parte inferior del bastidor y los gabinetes de expansión de la serie PowerVault MD1200 encima de este.Introducción al sistema 75 Conexión de los cables de alimentación Asegúrese de que el conmutador de alimentación esté en la posición de APAGADO antes de conectar los cables de alimentación. Conecte los cables de alimentación del sistema al sistema. Fijación de los cables de alimentación Fije los cables al soporte con firmeza con la cinta proporcionada. Conecte el otro extremo de los cables de alimentación a una toma eléctrica con conexión a tierra o a otra fuente de alimentación, como por ejemplo un Sistema de alimentación ininterrumpida (SAI) o una Unidad de distribución de alimentación (PDU). Cada suministro de energía debe conectarse a un circuito de alimentación diferente.76 Introducción al sistema Cableado del gabinete de expansión Encendido del gabinete Matriz de almacenamiento de la serie PowerVault MD3200i Gabinete 1 de expansión de la serie PowerVault MD1200 (opcional) Gabinete 2 de expansión de la serie PowerVault MD1200 (opcional)Introducción al sistema 77 Encienda los componentes en el orden siguiente: 1 Conmutadores Ethernet (si se utilizan). 2 Gabinetes de expansión de la serie PowerVault MD1200 (si se utilizan). NOTA: antes de encender la matriz de almacenamiento, asegúrese de que el LED de estado del gabinete de expansión está iluminado en azul. 3 Matriz de almacenamiento de la serie PowerVault MD3200i. NOTA: antes de encender los servidores host, asegúrese de que el LED de estado de la matriz de almacenamiento está iluminado en azul. 4 Servidores host. Instalación del bisel Instale el bisel (opcional). Instalación del software MD Storage NOTA: para obtener instrucciones detalladas acerca de la instalación del software MD Storage, la configuración del gabinete y las tareas posteriores a la instalación, consulte la Guía de implementación.78 Introducción al sistema El software MD Storage Manager configura, administra y supervisa la matriz de almacenamiento. La MD Configuration Utility (MDCU) es una utilidad opcional que proporciona un enfoque consolidado para la configuración de puertos de administración y de host iSCSI, y de la creación de sesiones para las matrices de almacenamiento en disco modular iSCSI. Se recomienda utilizar MDCU para configurar iSCSI en cada uno de los servidores hosts conectados a la matriz de almacenamiento. Instalación del software MD Storage: 1 Inserte el soporte de recurso de la serie MD. Dependiendo del sistema operativo que tenga, el instalador puede iniciarse automáticamente. Si el instalador no se inicia automáticamente, vaya al directorio raíz del soporte de instalación (o imagen del instalador descargado) y ejecute el archivo md_launcher.exe. Para sistemas basados en Linux, vaya a la raíz del soporte de recursos y ejecute el archivo autorun. NOTA: de manera predeterminada, el sistema operativo Red Hat Enterprise Linux monta el soporte de recursos con la opción –noexec mount, la cual no permite ejecutar archivos ejecutables. Para cambiar esta configuración, consulte el archivo Léame en el directorio raíz del soporte de instalación. 2 Seleccione Install MD Storage Software (Instalar el software MD Storage). 3 Lea y acepte el contrato de licencia. 4 Seleccione una de las siguientes opciones de instalación del menú desplegable Install Set (Conjunto de instalación): • Full (recommended) (Total [recomendado]): instala el software MD Storage Manager (cliente), el agente de almacenamiento basado en host, el controlador multirruta y proveedores de hardware. • Host Only (Solamente host): instala el agente de almacenamiento basado en host y los controladores multirrutas • Management (Administración): instala el software de administración y los proveedores de hardware. • Custom (Personalizado): permite seleccionar componentes específicos. 5 Seleccione los modelos de matrices MD Storage que está configurando para que sirvan como almacenamiento de datos para este servidor host. 6 Elija si desea iniciar el servicio de monitor de eventos automática o manualmente al reiniciar el servidor host Introducción al sistema 79 NOTA: esta opción se aplica solo para la instalación del software cliente de Windows. 7 Confirme la ubicación de la instalación y haga clic en Install (Instalar). 8 Si se le solicita, reinicie el servidor host después de completar la instalación. 9 Una vez terminado el reinicio, la MDCU puede iniciarse automáticamente. Si la MDCU no se inicia automáticamente, iníciela manualmente. • En un sistema operativo basado en Windows, haga clic en Inicio→ Dell→ Modular Disk Configuration Utility. • En un sistema operativo basado en Linux, haga doble clic en el icono del escritorio Modular Disk Configuration Utility. NOTA: si no está instalada la MDCU, consulte la Guía de implementación en support.dell.com/manuals. 10 Inicie MD Storage Manager y detecte las matrices. 11 Si se aplica, active cualquiera de las funciones premium adquiridas con la matriz de almacenamiento. Si ha adquirido una función premium, consulte la tarjeta de activación impresa enviada con la matriz de almacenamiento. NOTA: el instalador de MD Storage Manager instala automáticamente los controladores, el firmware y las revisiones/correcciones urgentes del sistema operativo necesarios para que funcione la matriz de almacenamiento. Estos controladores y el firmware se encuentran disponibles en support.dell.com. Además, consulte la Support Matrix (Matriz de compatibilidad) en support.dell.com/manuals para obtener configuraciones adicionales o software necesarios para la matriz de almacenamiento específica. Localización de la etiqueta de servicio El sistema se identifica mediante un Código de servicio rápido y un número de Etiqueta de servicio únicos. El Código de servicio rápido y la Etiqueta de servicio se encuentran en la parte anterior del sistema y también en la parte posterior, junto a los módulos de la controladora RAID. Dell utiliza esta información para dirigir las llamadas de asistencia al personal correspondiente.80 Introducción al sistema Información de la NOM (sólo para México) La información que se proporciona a continuación aparece en el dispositivo descrito en este documento en cumplimiento con los requisitos de la Norma Oficial Mexicana (NOM): Especificaciones técnicas Importador: Número de modelo: E03J y E04J Voltaje de alimentación: 100-240 VCA Frecuencia: 50 Hz/60 Hz Consumo eléctrico: 8,6 A Unidades PowerVault MD3200i Hasta doce unidades de disco duro de intercambio directo SAS de 3,5 pulgadas (3,0 Gbps y 6,0 Gbps) PowerVault MD3220i Hasta doce unidades de disco duro de intercambio directo SAS de 2,5 pulgadas (3,0 Gbps y 6,0 Gbps)Introducción al sistema 81 Módulos de la controladora RAID Módulos de la controladora RAID • Uno o dos módulos de intercambio directo con sensores de temperatura • 2 GB de caché por controladora Conectores del panel posterior (por módulo de controladora RAID) Conectores iSCSI Cuatro conectores de entrada iSCSI de 1 GB para conectar hosts Conector de expansión SAS Un puerto de salida SAS para la expansión a un gabinete de la serie PowerVault MD1200 adicional NOTA: los conectores SAS son compatibles con SFF-8088. Conector serie Un conector miniDIN de 6 patas NOTA: sólo para asistencia técnica. Conector Ethernet de administración Un puerto Ethernet 100/1000 Base-T para la administración fuera de banda del gabinete NOTA: las direcciones IP de puerto de administración predeterminadas para los módulos de la controladora RAID primarios y secundarios son 192.168.128.101 y 192.168.128.102, respectivamente. De manera predeterminada, los puertos de administración están definidos para el Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). Si la controladora no puede encontrar una configuración de la dirección IP de un servidor DHCP en un período de tiempo especificado (aproximadamente 3 minutos), vuelve de manera predeterminada al direccionamiento IP estático. Para obtener más información, consulte la Guía de implementación. Expansión Serie PowerVault MD1200 Admite un máximo de 192 unidades de disco duro con cualquier combinación de gabinetes de expansión PowerVault MD1200 o PowerVault MD1220. El soporte para 192 unidades de disco duro es una función Premium y requiere activación. La cantidad máxima de discos duros admitidos sin utilizar la función Premium es 120 La conectividad de la ruta de acceso redundante proporciona rutas de acceso redundantes a cada unidad de disco duro82 Introducción al sistema Placa de plano posterior Conectores • 12 ó 24 conectores de unidad de disco duro SAS • Dos conectores para módulos de suministro de energía/ventilador de enfriamiento • Dos conjuntos de conectores del módulo de controladora RAID • Un conector del panel de control para LED anteriores y un conmutador de modo de alojamiento Sensores Dos sensores de temperatura Indicadores LED Panel anterior • Un indicador LED de dos colores para el estado del sistema • Dos indicadores LED de un solo color para la alimentación y el modo gabinete NOTA: el LED del modo gabinete no es aplicable a la matriz de almacenamiento de la serie PowerVault MD3200i. Portaunidades de disco duro • Un indicador LED de un solo color de actividad • Un indicador LED de dos colores de estado por disco Suministro de energía/ventilador de enfriamiento Tres indicadores LED de estado para el estado del suministro de energía, los fallos del suministro de energía/ventilador y el estado de CAIntroducción al sistema 83 Módulo de la controladora RAID Diez LEDs de un solo color: • Uno de batería defectuosa • Uno de caché activa • Uno de controladora defectuosa • Uno de alimentación de controladora • Uno de identificación del sistema • Uno de actividad Ethernet de administración • Cuatro de actividad del puerto de entrada iSCSI Seis LEDs de dos colores: • Cuatro de velocidad del enlace de entrada iSCSI • Uno de fallo o enlace de salida de SAS • Uno de velocidad del enlace Ethernet de administración Conmutador Botón de identificación del sistema Ubicado en el panel de control anterior. Este botón se usa para ubicar un sistema en un bastidor. Conmutador de modo de alojamiento Situado en la parte anterior del sistema. Este conmutador no se aplica a la matriz de almacenamiento de la serie PowerVault MD3200i Conmutador de restablecimiento de contraseña Situado en el panel posterior del módulo de controladora RAID. Este conmutador se utiliza para restablecer la contraseña de la matriz de almacenamiento Indicadores LED (continuación)84 Introducción al sistema Suministros de energía Suministro de energía de CA (por suministro de energía) Potencia 600 W Voltaje 100–240 VCA (8,6 A–4,3 A) Disipación de calor 100 W Corriente de conexión máxima En condiciones normales de línea y en todo el rango operativo ambiente del sistema, la irrupción de corriente puede alcanzar un máximo de 55 A por cada suministro de energía durante 10 ms o menos Alimentación de la unidad de disco duro disponible (por ranura) PowerVault MD3200i 25 W PowerVault MD3220i 12 W Alimentación del módulo de controladora RAID (por ranura) Consumo de energía máximo 100 W Características físicas PowerVault MD3200i Altura 8,68 cm (3,41 pulgadas) Anchura 44,63 cm (17,57 pulgadas) Profundidad 60,20 cm (23,70 pulgadas) Peso (configuración máxima) 29,30 kg (64,6 libras) Peso (vacío) 8,84 kg (19,5 libras) PowerVault MD3220i Altura 8,68 cm (3,41 pulgadas) Anchura 44,63 cm (17,57 pulgadas) Profundidad 54,90 cm (21,61 pulgadas) Peso (configuración máxima) 24,22 kg (53,4 libras) Peso (vacío) 8,61 kg (19 libras)Introducción al sistema 85 Especificaciones medioambientales NOTA: para obtener información adicional acerca de medidas ambientales relativas a configuraciones del sistema específicas, vaya a www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets. Temperatura En funcionamiento De 10 °C a 35 °C (de 50 °F a 95 °F) con una gradación de temperatura máxima de 10 °C por hora NOTA: para altitudes superiores a 900 m, la temperatura máxima de funcionamiento se reduce 1 °C cada 334 m (1 °F/550 pies) Almacenamiento De –40 °C a 65 °C (de –40 °F a 149 °F) con una gradación de temperatura máxima de 20 °C por hora Humedad relativa En funcionamiento Del 20 al 80% (sin condensación) con una gradación de humedad máxima del 10% por hora Almacenamiento Del 5 al 95% (sin condensación) Vibración máxima En funcionamiento De 0,25 G a 3-200 Hz durante 15 minutos Almacenamiento De 0,5 G a 3-200 Hz durante 15 minutos Impacto máximo En funcionamiento Un choque en el sentido positivo del eje z (un choque en cada lado del sistema) de 31 G durante 2,6 ms en la orientación de funcionamiento Almacenamiento Seis impulsos de choque ejecutados consecutivamente en los ejes x, y y z positivo y negativo (un impulso en cada lado del sistema) de 71 G durante un máximo de 2 ms Altitud En funcionamiento De –16 m a 3.048 m (de –50 pies a 10.000 pies) NOTA: para altitudes superiores a 900 m (2.950 pies), la temperatura máxima de funcionamiento se reduce 1 °C cada 334 m (1 °F/550 pies) Almacenamiento De –16 m a 10,600 m (de –50 pies a 35.000 pies) Nivel de contaminación atmosférica Clase G1 de acuerdo con ISA-S71.04-198586 Introducción al sistemawww.dell.com | support.dell.com Printed in the U.S.A. Imprimé aux U.S.A. Impresso nos EUA. Impreso en los EE.UU.www.dell.com | support.dell.com Printed in Brazil. Imprimé au Brésil. Impresso no Brasil. Impreso en Brasil. Dell PowerVault MD3200 and MD3220 Storage Arrays Getting Started With Your System Guide de mise en route Introdução ao uso do sistema Introducción al sistemaDell PowerVault MD3200 and MD3220 Storage Arrays Getting Started With Your System Regulatory Model Series E03J and E04JNotes, Cautions, and Warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates potential damage to hardware or loss of data if instructions are not followed. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. ____________________ Information in this publication is subject to change without notice. © 2011 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell™, the DELL logo, and PowerVault™ are trademarks of Dell Inc. Microsoft ® and Windows Server ® are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Red Hat ® and Red Hat Enterprise Linux ® are registered trademarks of Red Hat, Inc. in the United States and other countries. SUSE ® is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc. in the United States and other countries. VMware ® is a registered trademark of VMware, Inc. in the United States and/or other jurisdictions. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this publication to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Regulatory Model Series E03J and E04J 2011 - 08 P/N VC9TD Rev. A02Getting Started With Your System 3 Before You Begin NOTE: Throughout the document, Dell PowerVault MD3200 series storage array refers to both Dell PowerVault MD3200 and Dell PowerVault MD3220. Dell PowerVault MD1200 series expansion enclosure refers to both Dell PowerVault MD1200 and Dell PowerVault MD1220. Before setting up your Dell PowerVault MD3200 series storage array, you must consider certain best practices to ensure that your storage array operates at maximum efficiency and offers full redundancy (if required). • Throughout the network, always use a Category 5e (or higher) Ethernet cable. • Before connecting any cables between the host server and storage array, physically label each port and connector. • Always follow proper power-up and power-down procedures when cycling power across the network. You must also ensure that critical network components are on separate power circuits. Other Documentation and Media You May Need WARNING: See the safety and regulatory information that shipped with your system. Warranty information may be included within this document or as a separate document. NOTE: All PowerVault MD3200 series documents are available at support.dell.com/manuals. • The rack documentation included with your rack solution describes how to install your system into a rack. • The Owner’s Manual provides information about system features and describes how to troubleshoot the system and install or replace system components. • The Deployment Guide provides information about installing and configuring the software and hardware. • The CLI Guide provides information about using the command line interface (CLI) to configure and manage your storage array.4 Getting Started With Your System • The SMI-S Programmer’s Guide provides information about using the SMI-S provider and SMI-S programming. • Any media that ships with your system that provides documentation and tools for configuring and managing your system, including those pertaining to the operating system, system management software, system updates, and system components that you purchased with your system. NOTE: Always check for updates on support.dell.com/manuals and read the updates first because they often supersede information in other documents. Supported Operating Systems • Microsoft Windows Server • Red Hat Enterprise Linux • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server • VMware NOTE: For the latest information on all the supported operating system versions, see the Support Matrix at support.dell.com/manuals.Getting Started With Your System 5 Common Configurations Cabling Your Direct-Attached Hosts Server 1 Server 2 Corporate, public, or private network Server 3 Server 4 PowerVault MD3200 series storage array6 Getting Started With Your System Installation and Configuration WARNING: Before performing the following procedure, review the safety instructions that came with the system. Unpacking the System Unpack your system and identify each item with the packing list that shipped with your system. Installing the Rails and System in a Rack Assemble the rails and install the system in the rack following the safety instructions and the rack installation instructions provided with your system. NOTE: To balance the weight load, it is recommended that you install the PowerVault MD3200 series storage array at the bottom of the rack and the PowerVault MD1200 series expansion enclosures above it.Getting Started With Your System 7 Connecting the Power Cable(s) Ensure that the power switch is in the OFF position before connecting the power cables. Connect the system’s power cable(s) to the system. Securing the Power Cable(s) Secure the cable(s) firmly to the bracket using the provided strap. Plug the other end of the power cables into a grounded electrical outlet or a separate power source such as an uninterrupted power supply (UPS) or a power distribution unit (PDU). Each power supply must be connected to a separate power circuit.8 Getting Started With Your System Cabling Your Expansion Enclosure Turning On the Enclosure Turn on the components in the following order: 1 PowerVault MD1200 series expansion enclosures (if used) NOTE: Before turning on the storage array, ensure that the expansion enclosure status LED is blue. PowerVault MD3200 series storage array PowerVault MD1200 series expansion enclosure 1 (optional) PowerVault MD1200 series expansion enclosure 2 (optional)Getting Started With Your System 9 2 PowerVault MD3200 series storage array NOTE: Before turning on the host server(s), ensure that the storage array status LED is blue. 3 Host server(s) Installing the Bezel Install the bezel (optional). Installing the MD Storage Software NOTE: For detailed instructions about installing the MD storage software, setting up the enclosure, and the post-installation tasks, see the Deployment Guide. The MD Storage Manager application configures, manages, and monitors the storage array. To install the MD storage software: 1 Insert the MD series resource media. Depending on your operating system, the installer may launch automatically. If the installer does not launch automatically, navigate to the root directory of the installation media (or downloaded installer image) and run the md_launcher.exe file. For Linux-based systems, navigate to the root of the resource media and run the autorun file. NOTE: By default, the Red Hat Enterprise Linux operating system mounts the resource media with the -noexec mount option which does not allow you to run executable files. To change this setting, see the Readme file in the root directory of the installation media.10 Getting Started With Your System 2 Select Install MD Storage Software. 3 Read and accept the license agreement. 4 Select one of the following installation options from the Install Set drop-down menu: • Full (recommended)—Installs the MD Storage Manager (client) software, host-based storage agent, multipath driver, and hardware providers. • Host Only—Installs the host-based storage agent and multipath drivers. • Management—Installs the management software and hardware providers. • Custom—Allows you to select specific components. 5 Select the MD storage array model(s) you are setting up to serve as data storage for this host server. 6 Choose whether to start the event monitor service automatically when the host server reboots or manually NOTE: This option is applicable only to Windows client software installation. 7 Confirm the installation location and click Install. 8 If prompted, reboot the host server once the installation completes. 9 Start the MD Storage Manager and discover the array(s). 10 If applicable, activate any premium features purchased with your storage array. If you purchased premium features, see the printed activation card shipped with your storage array. NOTE: The MD Storage Manager installer automatically installs the required drivers, firmware, and operating system patches/hotfixes to operate your storage array. These drivers and firmware are also available at support.dell.com. In addition, see the Support Matrix at support.dell.com/manuals for any additional settings and/or software required for your specific storage array.Getting Started With Your System 11 Locating Your Service Tag Your system is identified by a unique Express Service Code and Service Tag number. The Express Service Code and Service Tag are found on the front of the system and at the back of the system next to the RAID controller modules. This information is used by Dell to route support calls to the appropriate personnel. NOM Information (Mexico Only) The following information is provided on the device described in this document in compliance with the requirements of the official Mexican standards (NOM): Importer: Model number: E03J and E04J Supply voltage: 100–240 V CA Frequency: 50/60 Hz Current consumption: 8.6 A12 Getting Started With Your System Technical Specifications Drives PowerVault MD3200 Up to twelve 3.5-inch SAS hot-swappable hard drives (3.0 Gbps and 6.0 Gbps) PowerVault MD3220 Up to twenty four 2.5-inch SAS hot-swappable hard drives (3.0 Gbps and 6.0 Gbps) RAID Controller Modules RAID controller modules • One or two hot-swappable modules with temperature sensors • 2 GB of cache per controller Back-Panel Connectors (Per RAID Controller Module) SAS connectors • Four SAS IN ports to connect hosts • One SAS OUT port for expansion to an additional PowerVault MD1200 series enclosure NOTE: SAS connectors are SFF-8088 compliant. Serial connector One 6-pin mini-DIN connector NOTE: For technical support use only. Management Ethernet connector One 100/1000 Base-T port Ethernet for out-of-band management of the enclosure NOTE: The default management port IP addresses for the primary and secondary RAID controller modules are 192.168.128.101 and 192.168.128.102, respectively. By default, the management ports are set to Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). If the controller is unable to get an IP address configuration from a DHCP server within a specified time out period (approximately 3 minutes), it defaults back to static IP addressing. For more information, see the Deployment Guide.Getting Started With Your System 13 Expansion PowerVault MD1200 series Supports a maximum of 192 hard drives with any combination of PowerVault MD1200 or PowerVault MD1220 expansion enclosures. Support for 192 hard drives is a Premium Feature and requires activation. The maximum number of hard drives supported without using the Premium Feature is 120. Redundant path connectivity provides redundant data paths to each hard drive. Backplane Board Connectors • 12 or 24 SAS hard-drive connectors • Two power supply/cooling fan module connectors • Two sets of RAID controller module connectors • One control panel connector for front LEDs and system identification button Sensors Two temperature sensors LED Indicators Front panel • One two-color LED indicator for system status • Two single-color LED indicators for power and enclosure mode NOTE: The enclosure mode LED is not applicable to the PowerVault MD3200 series storage array. Hard-drive carrier • One single-color activity LED • One two-color LED status indicator per drive Power supply/cooling fan Three LED status indicators for power supply status, power supply/fan fault, and AC status14 Getting Started With Your System RAID controller module Six single-color LEDs: • One battery fault • One cache active • One controller fault • One controller power • One system identification • One management Ethernet activity Six two-color LEDs: • Four SAS IN link or fault • One SAS OUT link or fault • One management Ethernet link speed Switch System identification button Located on the front control panel. This button is used to locate a system within a rack. Enclosure mode switch Located on the front of the system. This switch is not applicable to the PowerVault MD3200 series storage array. Password reset switch Located on the back-panel of the RAID controller module. This switch is used to reset the storage array password. Power Supplies AC power supply (per power supply) Wattage 600 W Voltage 100–240 VAC (8.6 A–4.3 A) Heat dissipation 100 W Maximum inrush current Under typical line conditions and over the entire system ambient operating range, the inrush current may reach a maximum of 55 A per power supply for 10 ms or less. LED Indicators (continued)Getting Started With Your System 15 Available Hard Drive Power (Per Slot) PowerVault MD3200 25 W PowerVault MD3220 12 W RAID Controller Module Power (Per Slot) Maximum power consumption 100 W Physical PowerVault MD3200 Height 8.68 cm (3.41 inches) Width 44.63 cm (17.57 inches) Depth 60.20 cm (23.70 inches) Weight (maximum configuration) 29.30 kg (64.6 lb) Weight (empty) 8.84 kg (19.5 lb) PowerVault MD3220 Height 8.68 cm (3.41 inches) Width 44.63 cm (17.57 inches) Depth 54.90 cm (21.61 inches) Weight (maximum configuration) 24.22 kg (53.4 lb) Weight (empty) 8.61 kg (19 lb)16 Getting Started With Your System Environmental NOTE: For additional information about environmental measurements for specific system configurations, see www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets. Temperature Operating 10 °C to 35 °C (50 °F to 95 °F) with a maximum temperature gradation of 10 °C per hour NOTE: For altitudes above 2950 feet, the maximum operating temperature is derated 1ºF/550 ft. Storage –40 °C to 65 °C (–40 °F to 149 °F) with a maximum temperature gradation of 20°C per hour. Relative humidity Operating 20% to 80% (noncondensing) with a maximum humidity gradation of 10% per hour Storage 5% to 95% (noncondensing) Maximum vibration Operating 0.25 G at 3–200 Hz for 15 min Storage 0.5 G at 3–200 Hz for 15 min Maximum shock Operating One shock pulse in the positive z axis (one pulse on each side of the system) of 31 G for 2.6 ms in the operational orientation Storage Six consecutively executed shock pulses in the positive and negative x, y, and z axes (one pulse on each side of the system) of 71 G for up to 2 ms Altitude Operating –16 to 3048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft) NOTE: For altitudes above 2950 feet, the maximum operating temperature is derated 1ºF/550 ft. Storage –16 to 10,600 m (–50 to 35,000 ft) Airborne Contaminant Level Class G1 as defined by ISA-S71.04-1985Matrices de stockage Dell PowerVault MD3200 et MD3220 Guide de mise en route Séries de modèle réglementaire E03J et E04JRemarques, précautions et avertissements REMARQUE : une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent vous aider à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : une PRÉCAUTION vous avertit d'un risque d'endommagement du matériel ou de perte de données en cas de non-respect des instructions. AVERTISSEMENT : un AVERTISSEMENT indique un risque d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. ____________________ Les informations que contient ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. © 2011 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction de ce document, de quelque manière que ce soit, sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell™, le logo DELL et PowerVault™ sont des marques de Dell Inc. Microsoft ® et Windows Server ® sont des marques ou des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Red Hat ® et Red Hat Enterprise Linux ® sont des marques déposées de Red Hat, Inc. aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. SUSE ® est une marque déposée de Novell, Inc. aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. VMware ® est une marque déposée de VMware, Inc. aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres juridictions. D'autres marques et noms commerciaux peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence aux entités revendiquant la propriété de ces marques ou de ces noms de produits. Dell Inc. rejette tout intérêt exclusif dans les marques et les noms commerciaux autres que les siens. Séries de modèle réglementaire E03J et E04J 2011 - 08 N/P VC9TD Rév. A02Guide de mise en route 19 Avant de commencer REMARQUE : dans ce document, les références à la matrice de stockage Dell PowerVault série MD3200 concernent les matrices de stockage Dell PowerVault MD3200 et Dell PowerVault MD3220. Le boîtier d'extension Dell PowerVault MD1200 désigne les boîtiers Dell PowerVault MD1200 et Dell PowerVault MD1220. Avant d'installer votre matrice de stockage Dell PowerVault série MD3200, vous devez considérer certaines pratiques d'excellence pour assurer le fonctionnement le plus efficace possible de votre matrice de stockage et une redondance complète (si nécessaire). • Utilisez toujours un câble Ethernet de catégorie 5e (ou plus) à travers le réseau. • Avant de connecter tout câble entre le serveur hôte et la matrice de stockage, étiquetez physiquement chaque port et chaque connecteur. • Suivez toujours les procédures de mise sous et hors tension lors des cycles d'alimentation du réseau. Vous devez également vous assurer que les composants essentiels du réseau se trouvent sur différents circuits d'alimentation. Autre documentation et support dont vous pourriez avoir besoin AVERTISSEMENT : reportez-vous aux informations sur la sécurité et les réglementations qui accompagnent votre système. Les informations sur la garantie se trouvent dans ce document ou dans un document distinct. REMARQUE : tous les documents PowerVault série MD3200 sont disponibles sur le site support.dell.com/manuals. • La documentation fournie avec le rack indique comment installer le système dans un rack. • Le Manuel du propriétaire du matériel contient des informations sur les caractéristiques du système, ainsi que des instructions relatives au dépannage et à l'installation ou au remplacement de composants. • Le Guide de déploiement fournit des informations sur l'installation et la configuration du logiciel et du matériel. • Le Guide CLI fournit des informations sur l'utilisation de l'interface de ligne de commande (CLI) pour configurer et gérer votre matrice de stockage.20 Guide de mise en route • Le document SMI-S Programmer’s Guide (Guide de programmeur SMI-S) contient des informations sur l'utilisation de l'opérateur SMI-S et la programmation de SMI-S. • Tous les supports fournis avec le système contiennent de la documentation et des outils de configuration et de gestion de votre système d'exploitation, notamment du système même et du logiciel de gestion, des mises à jour et des composants système que vous avez achetés avec le système. REMARQUE : vérifiez toujours si des mises à jour sont disponibles sur le site support.dell.com/manuals et lisez-les en premier, car elles remplacent souvent les informations que contiennent les autres documents. Systèmes d'exploitation pris en charge • Microsoft Windows Server • Red Hat Enterprise Linux • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server • VMware REMARQUE : pour obtenir les informations les plus récentes sur toutes les versions de système d'exploitation prises en charge, reportez-vous à la Matrice de support à l'adresse support.dell.com/manuals.Guide de mise en route 21 Configurations courantes Câblage des hôtes reliés directement Serveur 1 Serveur 2 Réseau d'entreprise, public ou privé Serveur 3 Serveur 4 Matrice de stockage PowerVault série MD3200 22 Guide de mise en route Installation et configuration AVERTISSEMENT : avant d'exécuter la procédure ci-dessous, lisez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec le système. Déballage du système Déballez votre système et identifiez chaque élément en consultant la liste de composants livrée avec votre système. Installation des rails et du système dans un rack Assemblez les rails et installez le système dans le rack en suivant les consignes de sécurité et les instructions d'installation du rack fournies avec votre système. REMARQUE : pour équilibrer la charge, nous vous recommandons d'installer la matrice de stockage PowerVault série MD3200 en bas du rack et les boîtiers d'extension PowerVault série MD1200 au-dessus.Guide de mise en route 23 Branchement du ou des câbles d'alimentation Avant de connecter les câbles d'alimentation, assurez-vous que le commutateur d'alimentation est en position OFF (ÉTEINT). Branchez le ou les câbles d'alimentation sur le système. Fixation du ou des câbles d'alimentation Fixez fermement les câbles au support de fixation à l'aide de la lanière fournie. Branchez ensuite l'autre extrémité des câbles d'alimentation sur une prise de courant mise à la masse ou sur une source d'alimentation autonome (onduleur [UPS] ou unité de distribution de l'alimentation [PDU]...). Chaque bloc d'alimentation doit être connecté à un circuit d'alimentation séparé.24 Guide de mise en route Câblage de votre boîtier d'extension Mise sous tension du boîtier Mettez les composants sous tension dans l'ordre suivant : 1 Boîtiers d'extension PowerVault série MD1200 (si utilisés) REMARQUE : avant d'allumer la matrice de stockage, assurez-vous que le voyant d'état du boîtier d'extension est bleu. Matrice de stockage PowerVault série MD3200 Boîtier d'extension PowerVault série MD1200 1 (en option) Boîtier d'extension PowerVault série MD1200 2 (en option)Guide de mise en route 25 2 Matrice de stockage PowerVault série MD3200 REMARQUE : avant d'allumer le(s) serveur(s) hôte, assurez-vous que le voyant d'état de la matrice de stockage est bleu. 3 Serveur(s) hôte Installation du cadre Installez le cadre (en option). Installation du logiciel MD Storage REMARQUE : pour des instructions détaillées sur l'installation du logiciel MD Storage, la configuration du boîtier et les tâches de post-installation, voir le Guide de déploiement. L'application MD Storage Manager configure, gère et contrôle la matrice de stockage. Pour installer le logiciel MD Storage Manager : 1 Insérez le support Ressource série MD. En fonction de votre système d'exploitation, l'installateur se lancera peut- être automatiquement. Si l'installateur ne se lance pas automatiquement, naviguez dans le répertoire racine du support d'installation (ou téléchargez l'image d'installateur) et exécutez le fichier md_launcher.exe. Pour les systèmes exécutant Linux, naviguez vers la racine du support Ressource et exécutez le fichier autorun (Exécution auto).26 Guide de mise en route REMARQUE : par défaut, Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL) monte le support Ressource à l'aide de l'option de montage –noexec mount, qui ne vous permet pas d'exécuter les fichiers exécutables. Pour modifier ce paramètre, consultez le fichier Lisez-moi dans le répertoire racine du support d'installation. 2 Sélectionnez Install MD Storage Software (Installer le logiciel de stockage MD). 3 Lisez le contrat de licence et acceptez-le. 4 Sélectionnez l'une des options d'installation suivantes dans le menu déroulant Install Set (Configuration d'installation) : • Full (recommended) (Complète - recommandée) : installe le logiciel (client) MD Storage Manager, l'agent de stockage hôte, le pilote multivoies et les fournisseurs de matériel. • Host Only (Hôte uniquement) : installe l'agent de stockage hôte et les pilotes multivoies. • Management (Gestion) : installe le logiciel de gestion et les fournisseurs de matériel. • Custom (Personnalisée) : permet de sélectionner des composants spécifiques. 5 Sélectionnez le(s) modèle(s) de matrice de stockage MD que vous souhaitez définir comme stockage de données pour ce serveur hôte. 6 Choisissez de démarrer le service de moniteur des événements automatiquement lors du redémarrage du serveur hôte ou manuellement. REMARQUE : cette option ne s'applique qu'à l'installation du logiciel client Windows. 7 Confirmez l'emplacement de l'installation et cliquez sur Install (Installer). 8 En réponse à l'invitation (le cas échéant), redémarrez le serveur hôte une fois l'installation terminée. 9 Démarrez MD Storage Manager et lancez la détection des matrices. 10 Le cas échéant, activez les fonctions premium achetées avec votre matrice de stockage. Si vous avez acheté des fonctions premium, consultez la carte d'activation livrée avec votre matrice de stockage. REMARQUE : l'installateur MD Storage Manager installe automatiquement les pilotes, micrologiciel, et correctifs de système d'exploitation nécessaires pour le fonctionnement de votre matrice de stockage. Ces pilotes et micrologiciels sont également disponibles à l'adresse support.dell.com. Consultez également la Matrice de prise en charge à l'adresse support.dell.com/manuals pour des paramètres et/ou logiciels supplémentaires requis pour votre matrice de stockage spécifique.Guide de mise en route 27 Identification du numéro de service Votre système est identifié par un code de service express et un numéro de service uniques. Le code de service express et le numéro de service se situent à l'avant et à l'arrière du système à côté des modules de contrôleur RAID. Dell utilise ces informations pour acheminer les appels de support au technicien qui convient. Informations NOM (Mexique uniquement) Les informations suivantes sur l'appareil décrit dans ce document sont fournies conformément aux exigences de la Norme Officielle Mexicaine (NOM) : Importateur : Numéro de modèle : E03J et E04J Tension d'alimentation : 100 à 240 V CA Fréquence : 50/60 Hz Consommation électrique : 8,6 A28 Guide de mise en route Caractéristiques techniques Lecteurs PowerVault MD3200 Jusqu'à douze disques durs SAS 3,5 pouces remplaçables à chaud (3,0 Gb/s et 6,0 Gb/s) PowerVault MD3220 Jusqu'à vingt-quatre disques durs SAS 2,5 pouces remplaçables à chaud (3,0 Gb/s et 6,0 Gb/s) Modules de contrôleur RAID Les modules de contrôleur RAID • Un ou deux modules remplaçables à chaud avec capteurs de température • 2 Go de mémoire cache par contrôleur Connecteurs du panneau arrière (par module de contrôleur RAID) Connecteurs SAS • Quatre ports d'entrée SAS pour connecter des hôtes • Un port de sortie SAS pour l'extension à un boîtier PowerVault MD1200 supplémentaire REMARQUE : les connecteurs SAS sont conformes SFF-8088. Connecteur série Un connecteur mini-DIN à 6 broches REMARQUE : cette option est réservée au personnel de maintenance. Connecteur Ethernet de gestion Un port Ethernet 100/1000 Base-T pour une gestion hors bande du boîtier REMARQUE : les adresses IP de port de gestion par défaut des modules de contrôleur RAID principal et secondaire sont respectivement192.168.128.101 et 192.168.128.102. Par défaut, les ports de gestion sont définis sur le protocole DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration). Si le contrôleur ne parvient pas à obtenir une configuration d'adresse IP depuis un serveur DHCP au cours d'une durée d'attente spécifiée (environ 3 minutes), il revient à l'adressage IP statique par défaut. Pour plus d'informations, voir le Guide de déploiement.Guide de mise en route 29 Extension PowerVault Série MD1200 Prend en charge jusqu'à 192 disques durs avec n'importe quelle combinaison de boîtiers d'extension PowerVault MD1200 ou PowerVault MD1220. La prise en charge de 192 disques durs est une fonction premium qui doit être activée. Le nombre maximum de disques durs pris en charge sans recours à la fonction premium est 120. La connectivité à chemin redondant fournit des chemins de données redondants à chaque disque dur. Carte de fond de panier Connecteurs • 12 ou 24 connecteurs de disque dur SAS • Deux connecteurs pour les modules de ventilation/alimentation • Deux ensembles de connecteurs de module de contrôleur RAID • Un connecteur de panneau de configuration pour les voyants avant et le bouton d'identification de système Capteurs Deux capteurs de température Voyants Panneau avant • Un voyant bichrome indiquant l'état du système • Deux voyants monochromes (alimentation et mode boîtier) REMARQUE : le voyant du mode boîtier ne s'applique pas à la matrice de stockage PowerVault série MD3200. Support de disque dur • Un voyant d'activité monochrome • Un voyant d'état bichrome par lecteur Bloc d'alimentation/ventilateur de refroidissement Trois voyants d'état (état du bloc d'alimentation, panne du bloc d'alimentation/Ventilateur et état de l'alimentation)30 Guide de mise en route Module de contrôleur RAID Six voyants monochromes : • Un voyant de panne de batterie • Un voyant d'activité de la mémoire cache • Un voyant de panne du contrôleur • Un voyant d'état de l'alimentation du contrôleur • Un voyant système • Un voyant d'activité de gestion Ethernet Six voyants bichromes : • Quatre voyants de liaison d'entrée SAS ou d'erreur • Un voyant de panne ou de lien de sortie SAS • Un voyant de vitesse de lien Ethernet de gestion Commutateur Bouton d'identification du système Situé sur le panneau de commande avant. Ce bouton sert à localiser un système au sein d'un rack. Sélecteur de mode du boîtier Situé sur le devant du système. Ce sélecteur ne s'applique pas à la matrice de stockage PowerVault MD3200. Sélecteur de réinitialisation du mot de passe Situé sur le panneau arrière du module de contrôleur RAID. Ce sélecteur permet de réinitialiser le mot de passe de la matrice de stockage. Blocs d'alimentation Alimentation secteur (par bloc d'alimentation) Puissance 600 W Tension 100–240 VCA (8,6 A–4,3 A) Dissipation thermique 100 W Courant d'appel maximal Dans des conditions de ligne typiques et dans toute la gamme ambiante de fonctionnement du système, l'appel de courant peut atteindre 55 A par bloc d'alimentation pendant un maximum de 10 ms. Alimentation disponible pour les disques durs (par logement) PowerVault MD3200 25 W PowerVault MD3220 12 W Voyants (suite)Guide de mise en route 31 Alimentation du module de contrôleur RAID (par emplacement) Consommation de courant maximale 100 W Caractéristiques physiques PowerVault MD3200 Hauteur 8,68 cm (3,41 pouces) Largeur 44,63 cm (17,57 pouces) Profondeur 60,20 cm (23,70 pouces) Poids (configuration maximale) 29,30 kg (64,6 livres) Poids (vide) 8,84 kg (19,5 livres) PowerVault MD3220 Hauteur 8,68 cm (3,41 pouces) Largeur 44,63 cm (17,57 pouces) Profondeur 54,90 cm (21,61 pouces) Poids (configuration maximale) 24,22 kg (53,4 livres) Poids (vide) 8,61 kg (19 livres) Environnement REMARQUE : pour des informations supplémentaires sur les mesures environnementales liées aux différentes configurations du système, voir www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets. Température En fonctionnement De 10 à 35 °C (50 à 95 °F) avec un gradient thermique maximal de 10 °C par heure REMARQUE : à des altitudes supérieures à 900 mètres (2 950 pieds), la température maximale de fonctionnement est réduite de 0,55 °C (1 °F) tous les 168 mètres (550 pieds). Entreposage De -40 à 65 °C (-40 à 149 °F) avec un gradient thermique maximal de 20 °C par heure32 Guide de mise en route Humidité relative En fonctionnement De 20 à 80 % (sans condensation) avec un gradient d'humidité maximal de 10 % par heure Entreposage De 5 à 95 % (sans condensation) Tolérance maximale aux vibrations En fonctionnement 0,25 G avec un balayage de 3 à 200 Hz pendant 15 minutes Entreposage 0,5 G avec un balayage de 3 à 200 Hz pendant 15 minutes Choc maximal En fonctionnement Une impulsion de choc de 31 G pendant un maximum de 2,6 ms sur l'axe z positif (une impulsion de chaque côté du système) Entreposage Six chocs consécutifs de 71 G pendant un maximum de 2 ms en positif et négatif sur les axes x, y et z (une impulsion de chaque côté du système) Altitude En fonctionnement De -16 à 3 048 m (-50 à 10 000 pieds) REMARQUE : À des altitudes supérieures à 900 mètres (2 950 pieds), la température maximale de fonctionnement est réduite de 0,55 °C (1 °F) tous les 168 mètres (550 pieds). Entreposage De -16 à 10 600 m (-50 à 35 000 pieds) Contaminants en suspension dans l'air Classe G1 selon la norme ISA-S71.04-1985 Environnement (suite)Guide de mise en route 3334 Guide de mise en routeMatrizes de armazenamento Dell PowerVault MD3200 e MD3220 Introdução ao uso do sistema Modelo normativo séries E03J e E04JNotas, Avisos e Advertências NOTA: uma NOTA fornece informações importantes para ajudar você a aproveitar melhor os recursos do seu computador. AVISO: um AVISO indica um potencial de danos ao hardware ou a perda de dados se as instruções não forem seguidas. ADVERTÊNCIA: uma ADVERTÊNCIA indica um potencial de danos à propriedade, risco de lesões corporais ou mesmo de risco de vida. ____________________ As informações contidas nesta publicação estão sujeitas a alterações sem aviso prévio. © 2011 Dell Inc. Todos os direitos reservados. Qualquer forma de reprodução deste material sem a permissão por escrito da Dell Inc. é expressamente proibida. Marcas comerciais usadas neste texto: Dell™, o logotipo DELL e PowerVault™ são marcas comerciais da Dell Inc.; Microsoft ® e Windows Server ® são marcas comerciais ou marcas registradas da Microsoft Corporation nos Estados Unidos e em outros países. Red Hat ® e Red Hat Enterprise Linux ® são marcas registradas da Red Hat, Inc. nos Estados Unidos e em outros países. SUSE ® é marca registrada da Novell, Inc. nos Estados Unidos e em outros países. VMware ® é marca registrada da VMware, Inc. nos Estados Unidos e/ou em outras jurisdições. Outras marcas e nomes comerciais podem ser usados nesta publicação como referência às entidades que reivindicam essas marcas e nomes ou a seus produtos. A Dell Inc. declara que não tem interesse de propriedade sobre marcas comerciais e nomes de terceiros. Modelo normativo séries E03J e E04J Agosto de 2011 N/P VC9TD Rev. A02Introdução ao Uso do Sistema 37 Antes de começar NOTA: Neste documento, a matriz de armazenamento Dell PowerVault série MD3200 se refere tanto à matriz Dell PowerVault MD3200 quanto à matriz Dell PowerVault MD3220. O gabinete de expansão Dell PowerVault série MD1200 se refere tanto ao Dell PowerVault MD1200 quanto ao Dell PowerVault MD1220. Antes de configurar a matriz de armazenamento Dell PowerVault série MD3200, você precisa considerar certas práticas recomendadas que garantem que a sua matriz de armazenamento funcione com a máxima eficiência e ofereça redundância total (se necessário). • Use sempre cabos de rede Ethernet Categoria 5e (ou melhores) em toda a rede. • Antes de conectar quaisquer cabos entre o servidor host e a matriz de armazenamento, coloque uma etiqueta em cada porta e em cada conector. • Siga sempre os procedimentos adequados para fazer o “power cycle” (desligar e religar em seguida) de dispositivos da rede. Você precisa garantir também que os componentes críticos da rede estejam em circuitos de alimentação separados. Outros documentos e mídias dos quais você pode precisar ADVERTÊNCIA: Consulte as informações de normalização e segurança fornecidas com o sistema. As informações de garantia podem estar neste documento ou podem ser fornecidas como um documento separado. NOTA: Todos os documentos do PowerVault série MD3200 estão disponíveis em support.dell.com/manuals. • The rack documentation included with your rack solution describes how to install your system into a rack. • O Manual do proprietário fornece informações sobre os recursos do sistema e descreve como solucionar problemas do sistema e como instalar ou trocar componentes. • O Guia de implementação fornece informações sobre a instalação e a configuração do software e do hardware. 38 Introdução ao Uso do Sistema • O Guia da Interface de Linha de Comando (CLI) fornece informações sobre o uso da interface de linha de comando para configurar e gerenciar a matriz de armazenamento. • O Guia do programador de SMI-S fornece informações sobre o uso do provedor de SMI-S e sobre a programação de SMI-S. • Qualquer mídia que acompanha o sistema e que contém documentação e ferramentas para a configuração e o gerenciamento do sistema, incluindo aquelas relacionadas ao sistema operacional, software de gerenciamento do sistema, atualizações do sistema e componentes adquiridos com o sistema. NOTA: Verifique sempre se há atualizações disponíveis no site support.dell.com/manuals (em inglês) e leia primeiro as atualizações, pois estas geralmente substituem informações contidas em outros documentos. Sistemas operacionais suportados • Microsoft Windows Server • Red Hat Enterprise Linux • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server • VMware NOTA: Para obter as informações mais recentes sobre todas as versões de sistemas operacionais suportadas, consulte Support Matrix (Matriz de suporte) no site support.dell.com/manuals.Introdução ao Uso do Sistema 39 Configurações comuns Cabeamento de hosts conectados diretamente Servidor 1 Servidor 2 Rede corporativa, pública ou privada Servidor 3 Servidor 4 Matriz de armazenamento PowerVault série MD3200 40 Introdução ao Uso do Sistema Instalação e configuração ADVERTÊNCIA: Antes de executar o procedimento abaixo, siga as instruções de segurança fornecidas com o sistema. Remover o sistema da embalagem Desembale o sistema e identifique cada item de acordo com a lista fornecida. Instalar os trilhos e o sistema no rack Monte os trilhos e instale o sistema no rack, seguindo as instruções de segurança e as instruções de instalação fornecidas com o sistema. NOTA: Para contrabalançar o peso, é recomendável que você instale a matriz de armazenamento PowerVault série MD3200 na parte inferior do rack e os gabinetes de expansão PowerVault série MD1200 acima dela.Introdução ao Uso do Sistema 41 Conectar o(s) cabo(s) de alimentação Verifique se a chave está na posição “desligada” (OFF), antes de conectar os cabos de alimentação. Conecte o(s) cabos de alimentação ao sistema. Prender o(s) cabo(s) de alimentação Prenda firmemente os cabos ao gancho usando a tira fornecida.42 Introdução ao Uso do Sistema Conecte a outra extremidade do(s) cabo(s) de alimentação a uma tomada elétrica aterrada ou a uma fonte de alimentação separada, por exemplo, uma UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply [fonte de alimentação ininterrupta]) ou uma PDU (Power Distribution Unit [unidade de distribuição de energia]). Cada fonte de alimentação precisa ser conectada a um circuito de alimentação separado. Cabeamento do gabinete de expansão Ligar o gabinete Matriz de armazenamento PowerVault série MD3200 Gabinete de expansão PowerVault série MD1200 1 (opcional) Gabinete de expansão PowerVault série MD1200 2 (opcional)Introdução ao Uso do Sistema 43 Ligue os componentes na seguinte ordem: 1 Gabinetes de expansão PowerVault série MD1200 (se estiverem sendo usados) NOTA: Antes de ligar a matriz de armazenamento, verifique se o LED de status do gabinete de expansão está azul. 2 Matriz de armazenamento PowerVault série MD3200 NOTA: Antes de ligar o(s) servidor(es) host, verifique se o LED de status da matriz de armazenamento está azul. 3 Servidor(es) host Instalar o bezel Instale o bezel (opcional). Instalar o software de armazenamento MD NOTA: Para obter instruções detalhadas sobre a instalação do software de armazenamento MD, a configuração do gabinete e as tarefas de pós-instalação, consulte o guia de implementação. O aplicativo MD Storage Manager (gerenciamento de armazenamento MD) configura, gerencia e monitora a matriz de armazenamento. Para instalar o software de armazenamento MD: 1 Insira a mídia de recursos da série MD.44 Introdução ao Uso do Sistema Dependendo do seu sistema operacional, o instalador pode ser aberto automaticamente. Se o instalador não abrir automaticamente, vá até o diretório raiz da mídia de instalação (ou da imagem baixada do instalador) e execute o arquivo md_launcher.exe. Nos sistemas Linux, navegue até a raiz da mídia de recursos e execute o arquivo autorun. NOTA: Por padrão, o sistema operacional Red Hat Enterprise Linux monta a mídia de recursos com a opção –noexec mount, a qual não permite rodar arquivos executáveis. Para mudar esta configuração, consulte o arquivo Readme que está no diretório raiz da mídia de instalação. 2 Selecione Install MD Storage Software. 3 Leia e aceite o contrato de licença. 4 Selecione uma das seguintes opções de instalação no menu suspenso Install Set (Conjunto de instalação): • Full (recommended) — (Completa (recomendável)) - Instala o software cliente do Gerenciador de armazenamento MD (MD Storage Manager (client)), o agente de armazenamento baseado no host, o driver de multi-caminho e os provedores de hardware. • Host Only — (Apenas host) - Instala o agente de armazenamento baseado em host e os drivers de multi-caminhos. • Management — (Gerenciamento) - Instala o software de gerenciamento e os provedores de hardware. • Custom — (Personalizada) - Permite que você selecione componentes específicos. 5 Selecione o(s) modelo(s) de matriz de armazenamento MD que você está configurando como armazenamento de dados para este servidor host. 6 Indique se você quer começar a monitoração de eventos automaticamente quando o servidor é reinicializado ou manualmente. NOTA: Esta opção só se aplica à instalação de software de cliente Windows. 7 Confirme o local de instalação e clique em Install. 8 Se for solicitado, reinicialize o servidor quando a instalação terminar. 9 Abra o aplicativo MD Storage Manager (Gerenciador de armazenamento MD) e faça a descoberta da(s) matriz(es).Introdução ao Uso do Sistema 45 10 Se for o caso, ative todos os recursos Premium comprados com a sua matriz de armazenamento. Se for o caso, consulte o cartão impresso de ativação que é fornecido com a sua matriz de armazenamento. NOTA: O instalador do MD Storage Manager (gerenciador de armazenamento MD) instala automaticamente os drivers, o firmware e os patches do sistema operacional necessários para operar a matriz de armazenamento. Estes drivers e firmware estão também disponíveis em support.dell.com. Além disso, consulte Support Matrix (Matriz de suporte) em support.dell.com/manuals para obter configurações e/ou software adicionais necessários para a sua matriz de armazenamento específica. Localizar a etiqueta de serviço O seu sistema é identificado por um número exclusivo de código de serviço expresso e de etiqueta de serviço. O código de serviço expresso (Express Service Code) e a etiqueta de serviço (Service Tag) estão localizados na parte frontal e na parte traseira do sistema, próximos aos módulos controladores de RAID. Estas informações são usadas pela Dell para dirigir as chamadas que são feitas ao serviço de suporte para o pessoal adequado.46 Introdução ao Uso do Sistema Informações da norma NOM (apenas para o México) As informações a seguir são fornecidas sobre o dispositivo descrito neste documento em conformidade com os requisitos das normas oficiais mexicanas (NOM): Especificações técnicas Importador: Número do modelo: E03J e E04J Tensão de alimentação: 100 a 240 VCA Frequência: 50/60 Hz Consumo de corrente: 8,6 A Unidades PowerVault MD3200 Até 12 discos rígidos SAS de 3,5 polegadas (3,0 Gbps e 6,0 Gbps) com troca a quente (“hot swappable”) PowerVault MD3220 Até 24 discos rígidos SAS de 2,5 polegadas (3,0 Gbps e 6,0 Gbps) com troca a quente (“hot swappable”) Módulos controladores de RAID Módulos controladores de RAID • Um ou dois módulos com troca a quente (“hot-swappable”) com sensores de temperatura • 2 GB de cache por controladorIntrodução ao Uso do Sistema 47 Conectores do painel traseiro (por módulo controlador de RAID) Conectores SAS • Quatro portas de entrada SAS para conectar hosts • Uma porta de saída SAS (SAS OUT) para expansão com um gabinete PowerVault série MD1200 adicional NOTA: Os conectores SAS são compatíveis com SFF-8088. Conector serial Um conector mini-DIN de 6 pinos NOTA: Para uso exclusivo pelo suporte técnico. Conector Ethernet de gerenciamento Uma porta Ethernet 100/1000 Base-T para gerenciamento fora da banda do gabinete NOTA: Os endereços IP padrão das portas de gerenciamento dos módulos controladores de RAID primário e secundário são 192.168.128.101 e 192.168.128.102, respectivamente. Por padrão, as portas de gerenciamento são configuradas para DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). Se o controlador não conseguir obter um endereço IP a partir de um servidor DHCP dentro de um tempo especificado (cerca de 3 minutos), ele volta a usar o padrão, isto é, endereçamento IP estático. Para obter mais informações, consulte o Guia de implementação. Expansão PowerVault série MD1200 Suporta um máximo de 192 discos rígidos com qualquer combinação de gabinetes de expansão PowerVault MD1200 ou PowerVault MD1220. O suporte para 192 discos rígidos é um recurso Premium e precisa ser ativado. O número máximo de discos rígidos suportados sem o uso do recurso Premium é 120. A conectividade de caminho redundante fornece caminhos redundantes de dados para cada disco rígido. 48 Introdução ao Uso do Sistema Placa backplane Conectores • 12 ou 24 conectores para discos rígidos SAS • Dois conectores para módulos de fonte de alimentação ou ventiladores de resfriamento • Dois conjuntos de conectores para módulo de controlador de RAID • Um conector no painel de controle para os LEDs frontais e para o botão de identificação do sistema Sensores Dois sensores de temperatura LEDs indicadores Painel frontal • Um LED de duas cores para indicação do status do sistema • Dois LEDs de cor única para indicação de alimentação e de modo do gabinete. NOTA: O LED de modo do gabinete não é aplicável à matriz de armazenamento PowerVault série MD3200. Apoio do disco rígido • Um LED de cor única para atividade. • Um LED de duas cores para indicação de status, por unidade. Fonte de alimentação ou ventilador de resfriamento Três LEDs para indicar o status da fonte de alimentação, o status de falha da fonte alimentação ou do ventilador e o status da alimentação CA Introdução ao Uso do Sistema 49 Módulo controlador de RAID Seis LEDs de cor única: • Um para falha da bateria • Um para atividade de cache • Um para falha do controlador • Um para alimentação do controlador • Um para identificação do sistema • Um para atividade da Ethernet de gerenciamento Seis LEDs de duas cores: • Quatro para falha ou link de entrada SAS • Um para falha ou link de saída SAS • Um para velocidade do link Ethernet de gerenciamento Chave Botão de identificação do sistema Localizado no painel de controle frontal. Este botão é usado para localizar um sistema dentro de um rack. Chave de modo do gabinete Localizada na parte frontal do sistema. Esta chave não é aplicável à matriz de armazenamento PowerVault série MD3200. Chave de redefinição da senha Localizada no painel traseiro do módulo controlador de RAID. Esta chave é usada para redefinir a senha da matriz de armazenamento. Fontes de alimentação Fonte de alimentação CA (por fonte de alimentação) Potência 600 W Tensão 100 a 240 VAC (8,6 A a 4,3 A) Dissipação de calor 100 W LEDs indicadores (continuação)50 Introdução ao Uso do Sistema Pico de corrente inicial máximo Sob condições de linha típicas e na faixa inteira de temperatura ambiente de funcionamento do sistema, o pico de corrente inicial (“inrush”) pode atingir um máximo de 55 A por fonte de alimentação por 10 ms ou menos. Potência disponível para o disco rígido (por slot) PowerVault MD3200 25 W PowerVault MD3220 12 W Potência do módulo controlador de RAID (por slot) Consumo máximo de potência 100 W Características físicas PowerVault MD3200 Altura 8,68 cm Largura 44,63 cm Profundidade 60,20 cm Peso (com a configuração máxima) 29,30 kg Peso (em vazio) 8,84 kg PowerVault MD3220 Altura 8,68 cm Largura 44,63 cm Profundidade 54,90 cm Peso (com a configuração máxima) 24,22 kg Peso (em vazio) 8,61 kg Fontes de alimentação (continuação)Introdução ao Uso do Sistema 51 Requisitos ambientais NOTA: Para obter informações adicionais sobre os requisitos ambientais para configurações específicas do sistema, visite o site www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets (em inglês). Temperatura De operação 10°C a 35°C com variação máxima de 10°C por hora NOTA: Para altitudes acima de 900 metros, a temperatura máxima de operação diminui à razão de 1°C / 300 metros De armazenamento -40°C a 65°C com variação máxima de temperatura de 20°C por hora. Umidade relativa De operação 20% a 80% (sem condensação) com variação de umidade máxima de 10% por hora De armazenamento 5% a 95% (sem condensação) Vibração máxima De operação 0,25 g em 3 a 200 Hz por 15 minutos De armazenamento 0,5 g em 3 a 200 Hz por 15 minutos Choque máximo De operação Um pulso de choque no eixo z positivo (um pulso em cada lado do sistema) de 31 g por 2,6 ms na orientação operacional De armazenamento Seis pulsos de choque aplicados consecutivamente nos eixos x, y e z positivos e negativos (um pulso de cada lado do sistema) de 71 g por até 2 ms Altitude De operação -16 m a 3.048 m NOTA: Para altitudes acima de 900 m, a temperatura máxima de operação diminui à razão de 1°C / 300 m De armazenamento -16 m a 10.600 m Nível de poluentes transportados pelo ar Classe G1 conforme definido pela norma ISA-S71.04-198552 Introdução ao Uso do SistemaMatrices de almacenamiento Dell PowerVault MD3200 y MD3220 Introducción al sistema Modelo reglamentario, series E03J y E04JNotas, precauciones y avisos NOTA: una NOTA proporciona información importante que le ayudará a utilizar mejor el ordenador. PRECAUCIÓN: un mensaje de PRECAUCIÓN indica la posibilidad de que se produzcan daños en el hardware o haya pérdida de datos si no se siguen las instrucciones. AVISO: un mensaje de AVISO indica la posibilidad de que se produzcan daños materiales, lesiones personales e incluso la muerte. ____________________ La información contenida en esta publicación puede modificarse sin previo aviso. © 2011 Dell Inc. Todos los derechos reservados. Queda estrictamente prohibida la reproducción de estos materiales en cualquier forma sin la autorización por escrito de Dell Inc. Marcas comerciales utilizadas en este texto: Dell™, el logotipo de DELL y PowerVault™ son marcas comerciales de Dell Inc. Microsoft ® y Windows Server ® son marcas comerciales o marcas comerciales registradas de Microsoft Corporation en Estados Unidos y/o en otros países. Red Hat ® y Red Hat Enterprise Linux ® son marcas comerciales registradas de Red Hat, Inc. en los Estados Unidos y en otros países. SUSE ® es una marca comercial registrada de Novell, Inc. en los Estados Unidos y en otros países. VMware ® es una marca comercial registrada de VMware, Inc. en los Estados Unidos y/o en otras jurisdicciones. Otras marcas y otros nombres comerciales pueden utilizarse en esta publicación para hacer referencia a las entidades que los poseen o a sus productos. Dell Inc. renuncia a cualquier interés sobre la propiedad de marcas y nombres comerciales que no sean los suyos. Modelo reglamentario, series E03J y E04J 08/2011 P/N VC9TD Rev. A02Introducción al sistema 55 Antes de comenzar NOTA: a lo largo del documento, la matriz de almacenamiento de la serie Dell PowerVault MD3200 hace referencia a Dell PowerVault MD3200 y Dell PowerVault MD3220. El gabinete de expansión de la serie Dell PowerVault MD1200 hace referencia a Dell PowerVault MD1200 y Dell PowerVault MD1220. Antes de configurar la matriz de almacenamiento de la serie Dell PowerVault MD3200, debe tener en cuenta una serie de prácticas recomendadas para garantizar que la matriz de almacenamiento funcione a un rendimiento máximo y ofrezca completa redundancia (si es necesario). • Utilice en toda la red un cable Ethernet de categoría 5e (o superior). • Antes de conectar cables entre el servidor host y la matriz de almacenamiento, etiquete todos los puertos y conectores. • Durante los ciclos de encendido de la red, siga siempre los procedimientos adecuados de encendido y apagado. Asegúrese también de que los componentes de red críticos se encuentren en circuitos de alimentación diferentes. Documentación y soportes adicionales útiles AVISO: consulte la información sobre normativas y seguridad suministrada con el sistema. La información sobre la garantía puede estar incluida en este documento o en un documento aparte. NOTA: todos los documentos de la serie PowerVault MD3200 están disponibles en la dirección support.dell.com/manuals. • En la documentación del bastidor incluida con la solución de bastidor se describe cómo instalar el sistema en un bastidor. • En el Manual del propietario se proporciona información acerca de las funciones del sistema y se describe cómo solucionar problemas del sistema e instalar o sustituir componentes. • En la Guía de implementación se proporciona información acerca de la instalación y configuración del software y hardware. • En la Guía CLI se proporciona información acerca de cómo utilizar la interfaz de línea de comandos (CLI) para configurar y administrar la matriz de almacenamiento.56 Introducción al sistema • La SMI-S Programmer’s Guide (Guía de los programadores de SMI-S) proporciona información acerca del uso del proveedor de SMI-S y la programación de SMI-S. • En los soportes suministrados con el sistema se incluyen documentación y herramientas para configurar y administrar el sistema, incluidas las del sistema operativo, el software de administración del sistema, las actualizaciones del sistema y los componentes del sistema que haya adquirido con el sistema. NOTA: compruebe si hay actualizaciones en support.dell.com/manuals y, si las hay, léalas antes de proceder a la instalación, puesto que a menudo sustituyen la información contenida en otros documentos. Sistemas operativos admitidos • Microsoft Windows Server • Red Hat Enterprise Linux • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server • VMware NOTA: para obtener la información más actual acerca de todas las versiones de sistemas operativos compatibles, consulte la Matriz de soporte en la dirección support.dell.com/manuals.Introducción al sistema 57 Configuraciones comunes Cableado de los hosts de conexión directa Servidor 1 Servidor 2 Red corporativa, pública o privada Servidor 3 Servidor 4 Matriz de almacenamiento de la serie Dell 58 Introducción al sistema Instalación y configuración AVISO: antes de realizar el procedimiento siguiente, revise las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas con el sistema. Desembalaje del sistema Desembale el sistema e identifique cada elemento de la lista de embalaje que se envió con el sistema. Instalación de los rieles y del sistema en un bastidor Monte los rieles e instale el sistema en el bastidor siguiendo las instrucciones de seguridad y de instalación del bastidor incluidas con el sistema. NOTA: para equilibrar la carga del peso, se recomienda instalar la matriz de almacenamiento de la serie PowerVault MD3200 en la parte inferior del bastidor y los gabinetes de expansión de la serie PowerVault MD1200 encima de este.Introducción al sistema 59 Conexión de los cables de alimentación Asegúrese de que el conmutador de alimentación esté en la posición de APAGADO antes de conectar los cables de alimentación. Conecte los cables de alimentación al sistema. Fijación de los cables de alimentación Fije los cables al soporte con firmeza con la cinta proporcionada.60 Introducción al sistema Conecte el otro extremo de los cables de alimentación a una toma eléctrica con conexión a tierra o a otra fuente de alimentación, como por ejemplo un Sistema de alimentación ininterrumpida (SAI) o una Unidad de distribución de alimentación (PDU). Cada suministro de energía debe estar conectado a un circuito de alimentación diferente. Cableado del gabinete de expansión Encendido del gabinete Matriz de almacenamiento de la serie Dell PowerVault MD3200 Gabinete 1 de expansión de la serie PowerVault MD1200 (opcional) Gabinete 2 de expansión de la serie PowerVault MD1200 (opcional)Introducción al sistema 61 Encienda los componentes en el orden siguiente : 1 Los gabinetes de expansión de la serie PowerVault MD1200 (si es necesario) NOTA: antes de encender la matriz de almacenamiento, asegúrese de que el LED de estado del gabinete de expansión está iluminado en azul. 2 Matriz de almacenamiento de la serie Dell PowerVault MD3200 NOTA: antes de encender los servidores host, asegúrese de que el LED de estado de la matriz de almacenamiento está iluminado en azul. 3 Servidores host Instalación del bisel Instale el bisel (opcional). Instalación del software MD Storage NOTA: para obtener instrucciones detalladas sobre la instalación del software MD Storage, la configuración del gabinete y las tareas posteriores a la instalación, consulte la Guía de implementación. La aplicación MD Storage Manager configura, administra y supervisa la matriz de almacenamiento. Instalación del software MD Storage: 1 Inserte el soporte de recursos de la serie MD.62 Introducción al sistema Dependiendo del sistema operativo, el instalador se puede iniciar automáticamente. Si el instalador no se inicia automáticamente, vaya al directorio raíz del soporte de instalación (o imagen del instalador descargado) y ejecute el archivo md_launcher.exe. Para sistemas basados en Linux, vaya a la raíz del soporte de recursos y ejecute el archivo autorun. NOTA: de manera predeterminada, el sistema operativo Red Hat Enterprise Linux monta el soporte de recursos con la opción noexec mount la cual no permite ejecutar archivos ejecutables. Para cambiar esta configuración, consulte el archivo Readme (Léame) en el directorio raíz del soporte de instalación. 2 Seleccione Install MD Storage Software (Instalar el software MD Storage). 3 Lea y acepte el contrato de licencia. 4 Seleccione una de las siguientes opciones de instalación del menú desplegable Install Set (Conjunto de instalación): • Full (recommended) (Total [recomendado]): instala el software MD Storage Manager (cliente), el agente de almacenamiento basado en host, el controlador multirruta y los proveedores de hardware. • Host Only (Solamente host): instala el agente de almacenamiento basado en host y los controladores multirruta. • Management (Administración): instala el software de administración y los proveedores de hardware. • Custom (Personalizado): permite seleccionar componentes específicos. 5 Seleccione los modelos de matrices de almacenamientos MD que está configurando para que sirvan como almacenamiento de datos para este servidor host. 6 Elija si desea iniciar el servicio de monitor de eventos automática o manualmente al reiniciar el servidor host NOTA: esta opción se aplica solo para la instalación del software cliente de Windows. 7 Confirme la ubicación de la instalación y haga clic en Install (Instalar). 8 Si se le solicita, reinicie el servidor host tras completar la instalación. 9 Inicie MD Storage Manager y detecte las matrices.Introducción al sistema 63 10 Si se aplica, active cualquiera de las funciones premium adquiridas con la matriz de almacenamiento. Si ha adquirido una función premium, consulte la tarjeta de activación impresa enviada con la matriz de almacenamiento. NOTA: el instalador de MD Storage Manager instala automáticamente los controladores, el firmware y las revisiones/correcciones del sistema operativo necesarios para que funcione la matriz de almacenamiento. Estos controladores y el firmware se encuentran disponibles en support.dell.com. Además, consulte la Support Matrix (Matriz de compatibilidad) en support.dell.com/manuals para obtener configuraciones adicionales o software necesarios para la matriz de almacenamiento específica Localización de la etiqueta de servicio El sistema se identifica mediante un Código de servicio rápido y un número de Etiqueta de servicio únicos. El código de servicio rápido y la etiqueta de servicio se encuentran en la parte anterior del sistema y también en la parte posterior, junto a los módulos de la controladora RAID. Dell utiliza esta información para dirigir las llamadas de asistencia al personal correspondiente.64 Introducción al sistema Información de la NOM (sólo para México) La información que se proporciona a continuación aparece en el dispositivo descrito en este documento en cumplimiento con los requisitos de la Norma Oficial Mexicana (NOM): Especificaciones técnicas Importador: Número de modelo: E03J y E04J Voltaje de alimentación: 100-240 VCA Frecuencia: 50 Hz/60 Hz Consumo eléctrico: 8,6 A Unidades PowerVault MD3200 Hasta doce unidades de disco duro de intercambio directo SAS de 3,5 pulgadas (3,0 Gbps y 6,0 Gbps) PowerVault MD3220 Hasta veinticuatro unidades de disco duro de intercambio directo SAS de 2,5 pulgadas (3,0 Gbps y 6,0 Gbps) Módulos de la controladora RAID Módulos de la controladora RAID • Uno o dos módulos de intercambio directo con sensores de temperatura • 2 GB de caché por controladora Conectores del panel posterior (por módulo de controladora RAID) Conectores SAS • Cuatro puertos de entrada SAS para conectar hosts • Un puerto de salida SAS para añadir un gabinete de la serie PowerVault MD1200 adicional NOTA: los conectores SAS son compatibles con SFF-8088.Introducción al sistema 65 Conector serie Un conector miniDIN de 6 patas NOTA: sólo para asistencia técnica. Conector Ethernet de administración Un puerto Ethernet 100/1000 Base-T para la administración fuera de banda del gabinete NOTA: las direcciones IP de puerto de administración predeterminadas para los módulos de la controladora RAID primarios y secundarios son 192.168.128.101 y 192.168.128.102, respectivamente. De manera predeterminada, los puertos de administración se configuran en el Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). Si la controladora no es capaz de obtener una configuración de dirección IP de un servidor DHCP en un tiempo de espera determinado (aproximadamente 3 minutos), vuelve de manera predeterminada al direccionamiento IP estático. Para obtener más información, consulte la Guía de implementación. Expansión PowerVault serie MD1200 Admite un máximo de 192 unidades de disco duro con cualquier combinación de gabinetes de expansión PowerVault MD1200 o PowerVault MD1220. El soporte para 192 unidades de disco duro es una función Premium y requiere activación. La cantidad máxima de discos duros admitidos sin utilizar la función Premium es 120. La conectividad de la ruta de acceso redundante proporciona rutas de acceso redundantes a cada unidad de disco duro. Placa de plano posterior Conectores • 12 ó 24 conectores de unidad de disco duro SAS • Dos conectores para módulos de suministro de energía/ventilador de enfriamiento • Dos conjuntos de conectores del módulo de controladora RAID • Un conector del panel de control para LED anteriores y un botón de identificación del sistema Sensores Dos sensores de temperatura Conectores del panel posterior (por módulo de controladora RAID) (continuación)66 Introducción al sistema Indicadores LED Panel anterior • Un indicador LED de dos colores para el estado del sistema • Dos indicadores LED de un solo color para la alimentación y el modo gabinete NOTA: el LED del modo gabinete no es aplicable a la matriz de almacenamiento de la serie PowerVault MD3200. Portaunidades de disco duro • Un indicador LED de un solo color de actividad • Un indicador LED de dos colores de estado por disco Suministro de energía/ventilador de enfriamiento Tres indicadores LED de estado para el estado del suministro de energía, los fallos del suministro de energía/ventilador y el estado de CA Módulo de la controladora RAID Seis LED de un solo color: • Uno de batería defectuosa • Uno de caché activa • Uno de controladora defectuosa • Uno de alimentación de controladora • Uno de identificación del sistema • Uno de actividad Ethernet de administración Seis LED de dos colores: • Cuatro de fallo o enlace de entrada SAS • Uno de fallo o enlace de salida de SAS • Uno de velocidad del enlace Ethernet de administraciónIntroducción al sistema 67 Conmutador Botón de identificación del sistema Ubicado en el panel de control anterior. Este botón se usa para ubicar un sistema en un bastidor. Conmutador de modo de alojamiento Situado en la parte anterior del sistema. Este conmutador no se aplica a la matriz de almacenamiento de la serie PowerVault MD3200. Conmutador de restablecimiento de contraseña Situado en el panel posterior del módulo de controladora RAID. Este conmutador se utiliza para restablecer la contraseña de la matriz de almacenamiento. Suministros de energía Fuente de alimentación de CA (por fuente de alimentación) Potencia 600 W Voltaje 100–240 VCA (8,6 A–4,3 A) Disipación de calor 100 W Corriente de conexión máxima En condiciones normales de línea y en todo el rango operativo ambiente del sistema, la irrupción de corriente puede alcanzar un máximo de 55 A por cada suministro de energía durante 10 ms o menos. Alimentación de la unidad de disco duro disponible (por ranura) PowerVault MD3200 25 W PowerVault MD3220 12 W Alimentación del módulo de controladora RAID (por ranura) Consumo de energía máximo 100 W Características físicas PowerVault MD3200 Altura 8,68 cm (3,41 pulgadas) Anchura 44,63 cm (17,57 pulgadas) Profundidad 60,20 cm (23,70 pulgadas)68 Introducción al sistema Peso (configuración máxima) 29,30 kg (64,6 libras) Peso (vacío) 8,84 kg (19,5 libras) PowerVault MD3220 Altura 8,68 cm (3,41 pulgadas) Anchura 44,63 cm (17,57 pulgadas) Profundidad 54,90 cm (21,61 pulgadas) Peso (configuración máxima) 24,22 kg (53,4 lbs) Peso (vacío) 8,61 kg (19 lbs) Especificaciones medioambientales NOTA: para obtener información adicional acerca de medidas ambientales relativas a configuraciones del sistema específicas, vaya a www.dell.com/environmental_datasheets. Temperatura En funcionamiento De 10 °C a 35 °C (de 50 °F a 95 °F) con una gradación de temperatura máxima de 10 °C por hora NOTA: para altitudes superiores a 900 m, la temperatura máxima de funcionamiento se reduce 1 °C cada 334 m (1 °F/550 pies). Almacenamiento De -40 °C a 65 °C (de -40 °F a 149 °F) con una gradación de temperatura máxima de 20 °C por hora. Humedad relativa En funcionamiento Del 20% al 80% (sin condensación) con una gradación de humedad máxima del 10% por hora Almacenamiento Del 5% al 95% (sin condensación) Vibración máxima En funcionamiento De 0,25 G a 3-200 Hz durante 15 minutos Almacenamiento De 0.5 G a 3-200 Hz durante 15 minutos Impacto máximo Características físicas (continuación)Introducción al sistema 69 En funcionamiento Un impulso de descarga en el sentido positivo del eje z (un impulso en cada lado del sistema) de 31 G durante 2,6 ms en la orientación de funcionamiento Almacenamiento Seis impulsos de descarga ejecutados consecutivamente en los ejes positivos y negativos x, y y z (un impulso en cada lado del sistema) de 71 G durante un máximo de 2 ms Altitud En funcionamiento De –16 m a 3.048 m (de –50 pies a 10.000 pies) NOTA: para altitudes superiores a 900 m (2950 pies), la temperatura de funcionamiento máxima se reduce 1 °C cada 334 m (1 °F/550 pies). Almacenamiento De –16 m a 10.600 m (de –50 pies a 35.000 pies) Nivel de contaminación atmosférica Clase G1 de acuerdo con ISA-S71.04-1985 Especificaciones medioambientales (continuación)70 Introducción al sistemawww.dell.com | support.dell.com Printed in Brazil. Imprimé au Brésil. Impresso no Brasil. Impreso en Brasil.www.dell.com | support.dell.com Printed in the U.S.A. Imprimé aux U.S.A. Impresso nos EUA. Impreso en los EE.UU. Déballage de votre imprimante multifonction 1. Choisissez un emplacement pour votre imprimante. l Ménagez un espace suffisant pour permettre l'ouverture du bac, des capots, des portes et des différentes options. Il est également important de laisser  un espace suffisant autour de l'imprimante pour permettre une ventilation adéquate. l Choisissez un environnement adéquat : l Une surface solide et plane l Loin de l'air rejeté par les climatiseurs, les radiateurs et les ventilateurs  l Protégé du soleil, d'une humidité excessive ou de variations de température trop importantes  l L'endroit doit être propre, sec et non poussiéreux  2. Assurez-vous que les articles suivants sont dans la boîte avec l'imprimante laser multi-fonctions Dell™ 1815dn. S'il manque un article, contactez Dell : a. L'aspect du câble d'alimentation électrique et du câble de téléphone peut différer en fonction des spécifications en vigueur dans votre pays. b. Le CD Pilotes et Utilitaires contient des pilotes d'impression Dell, des pilotes de numérisation, un utilitaire de paramétrage d'imprimante, un Set  IP, un pilote Macintosh, un pilote Linux, les utilitaires Dell Toner Management System™, Dell ScanCenter™ et PaperPort ®, et le Guide l'utilisateur en version HTML. c. Cet article n'est fourni que dans certains pays. 3. Conservez le carton et les matériaux d'emballage pour le cas où l'imprimante doit être remballée. 4. Retirez les bandes adhésives situées sur le dessus, à l'arrière et sur les côtés de l'imprimante. ATTENTION : Au moins deux personnes sont nécessaires pour soulever l'imprimante en toute sécurité.  REMARQUE : Conservez l'imprimante dans son emballage tant que vous n'êtes pas prêt à l'installer. cartouche de toner cordon d'alimentation a manuel du propriétaire cordon de ligne téléphonique CD Pilotes et Utilitaires b boîtier de terminaison c schéma de montage guide de référence rapide (facultatif)  REMARQUE : Utilisez le câble de téléphone fourni avec votre imprimante. Si vous choisissez d'utiliser un autre câble, utilisez alors un câble calibré AWG n° 26 ou inférieur dont la longueur ne dépasse pas 2,50 m. REMARQUE : Le cordon d'alimentation électrique doit être branché sur une prise reliée à la terre.5. Retirez l'étiquette du module de numérisation en tirant dessus avec précaution. Le bouton de déverrouillage du scanner se met automatiquement en  position déverrouillée. 6. Un espace situé sur le panneau de commande a été aménagé pour maintenir le guide de référence rapide (facultatif) afin d'y accéder facilement à tout  moment. Retirez la bande adhésive placée au dos du guide de référence rapide (facultatif). 7. Fixez le guide de référence rapide (facultatif) sur l'espace prévu sur le panneau de commande. A propos de votre imprimante multifonction Il s'agit des composants principaux de votre imprimante. Les illustrations suivantes présentent le Dell Laser MFP 1815dn avec un bac optionnel 2 : Vue avant REMARQUE : Pour vérifier que le scanner est déverrouillé, ouvrez le capot du scanner et regardez au travers de la vitre d'exposition pour vous  assurer que le verrou bleu est bien dans la position déverrouillée ( ). Si ce n'est pas le cas, attrapez-le sous le panneau de commande, puis tirezle vers l'avant. REMARQUE : Si vous déplacez l'imprimante ou si vous n'avez pas l'intention de l'utiliser pendant une période prolongée, déplacez le taquet VERS  L'ARRIERE pour la mettre dans la position verrouillée, comme indiqué sur l'illustration.  Si vous voulez numériser ou copier un document, le taquet doit être en position déverrouillée.Vue arrière a. Si la communication téléphonique est en mode série dans votre pays (comme en Allemagne, Suède, Danemark, Autriche, Belgique, Italie, France et Suisse), vous devez retirer la fiche du connecteur de téléphone et insérer le boîtier de terminaison fourni. b. Vous pouvez acheter et installer un dispositif de verrouillage interdisant le retrait de la carte mémoire installée. Fonctions des touches du panneau de commande Touches communes Clavier numérique Appuyez sur : Pour : Retourner au niveau supérieur du menu. Faire défiler jusqu'aux options disponibles. Confirmer la sélection sur l'écran. Démarrer une tâche. Arrêter une opération à tout moment ou retourner au menu principal. Appuyez sur : Pour :Polices L'imprimante laser Dell reconnaît les polices suivantes : Installation de la cartouche d'encre 1. Ouvrez le capot avant. 2. Retirez la cartouche de toner de son emballage et secouez-la plusieurs fois de chaque côté pour répartir l'encre uniformément à l'intérieur de celle-ci. Composer/entrer un numéro ou entrer des caractères alphanumérique. Mettre en mémoire des numéros de télécopie fréquemment utilisés ou rechercher des  numéros de télécopie ou des adresses e-mail enregistrées. Cette touche permet également d'imprimer la liste des entrées du répertoire. Insérer une pause dans un numéro de télécopie en mode édition. ATTENTION : Évitez d'exposer la cartouche d'encre à la lumière plus de 2 ou 3 minutes. 3. En maintenant la cartouche de toner par la poignée, faite la glisser dans l'imprimante jusqu'à ce qu'elle soit fermement en place. 4. Fermez le capot avant. Chargement du papier Mettez jusqu'à 250 feuilles de papier ordinaire (75 g/m2 ) dans le bac d'alimentation papier. Chargement du papier : 1. Ouvrez le bac d'alimentation papier et retirez-le de l'imprimante. REMARQUE : Si vous tachez vos vêtements avec de l'encre, éliminez-la avec un chiffon sec et lavez vos vêtements à l'eau froide. L'eau chaude fixe  l'encre sur le tissu. ATTENTION : Evitez de toucher la partie inférieure verte de la cartouche d'encre. Utilisez la poignée de la cartouche pour éviter de toucher  la zone en question. REMARQUE : Définissez le type et le format de papier une fois celui-ci chargé dans le bac d'alimentation. Reportez-vous aux sections "Configuration du type de papier" et "Configuration du format de papier" pour plus d'informations sur le papier à utiliser pour la copie et la télécopie, ou à la section  "Onglet Papier" pour l'impression avec le PC.2. Si vous chargez un papier plus long que le format standard (Letter ou A4), par exemple un papier Legal, appuyez pour débloquer le verrouillage du  guide, puis faites glisser le guide-papier complètement vers l'extérieur pour donner toute sa longueur au bac d'alimentation papier. 3. Déramez les feuilles pour séparer les pages, puis ventilez-les. Evitez le plier ou de froisser le support d'impression. Alignez les bords sur une surface plane. 4. Insérez la pile de papier dans le bac d'alimentation papier en plaçant le côté à imprimer, face vers le bas. 5. Ne dépassez pas la hauteur de papier maximale indiquée sur les deux côtés intérieurs du bac. 6. Faites glisser le guide de longueur du papier jusqu'à ce qu'il touche légèrement l'extrémité de la pile de papier.  Pour les feuilles dont le format est plus petit que le format Letter, réglez le guide de longueur avant de manière à le positionner contre la pile de papier. REMARQUE : Faute de quoi vous risqueriez de créer des bourrages.7. Saisissez le guide-papier, comme indiqué, et amenez-le au contact de la pile de papier sans pression excessive. 8. Insérez et poussez le bac d'alimentation papier dans l'imprimante. 9. Définissez le type et le format de papier. Reportez-vous à la "Configuration du type de papier"et à la "Configuration du format de papier". Connexions Accès à la ligne téléphonique 1. Branchez une extrémité du câble de téléphone dans la prise de ligne du téléphone (Line) et l'autre dans une prise murale active. Pour connecter un téléphone et/ou un répondeur téléphonique à votre imprimante, retirez la fiche de la prise du poste téléphonique (EXT) ( ) et branchez le téléphone ou le répondeur téléphonique dans la prise du poste téléphonique (EXT). Si votre imprimante n'est pas bloquée avec la fiche, branchez directement le téléphone ou le répondeur téléphonique dans la prise du poste  téléphonique (EXT) ( ). REMARQUE : Un mauvais réglage du guide-papier peut entraîner des bourrages papier. REMARQUE : Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section "Utilisation du répondeur téléphonique" ou "Utilisation d'un modem d'ordinateur".Si la communication téléphonique est en mode série dans votre pays (comme en Allemagne, Suède, Danemark, Autriche, Belgique, Italie, France et Suisse),  retirez la fiche du connecteur de la prise du poste téléphonique (EXT) ( ) et insérez le boîtier de terminaison fourni. Branchement du câble d'imprimante Branchement de l'imprimante localement Une imprimante locale est une imprimante branchée à votre ordinateur à l'aide d'un câble USB. Si votre imprimante est reliée à un réseau et non à votre  ordinateur, ignorez cette étape et passez à la section "Connexion de l'imprimante au réseau". Pour connecter l'imprimante à un ordinateur : 1. Assurez-vous que l'imprimante, l'ordinateur et tout autre périphérique raccordé sont éteints et débranchés. 2. Connectez un câble USB au port USB de votre imprimante. 3. Branchez l'autre extrémité du câble dans le port USB disponible sur l'ordinateur, et non pas sur le clavier USB. Connexion de l'imprimante au réseau 1. Assurez-vous que l'imprimante, l'ordinateur et tout autre périphérique raccordé sont éteints et débranchés. 2. Branchez une extrémité d'un câble réseau standard à paire torsadée non blindée (UTP) de catégorie 5 à un terminal multipoint ou un concentrateur  multiport du LAN (réseau local) et l'autre extrémité au port réseau Ethernet situé à l'arrière de l'imprimante. L'imprimante s'adapte automatiquement à  la vitesse du réseau. REMARQUE : Les câbles USB sont vendus séparément. Contactez Dell pour acheter un câble USB. REMARQUE : Un câble certifié USB est nécessaire pour connecter l'imprimante au port USB de l'ordinateur. Vous devrez faire l'acquisition d'un câble USB  2.0 d'environ 3 m de long.Mise sous tension de l'imprimante multifonction Pour mettre l'imprimante sous tension : 1. Branchez une extrémité du câble d'alimentation électrique dans la prise d'alimentation située à l'arrière de l'imprimante et l'autre dans une prise secteur  reliée à la terre.  2. Appuyez sur le bouton marche/arrêt pour mettre l'imprimante sous tension. PRECHAUFFAGE apparaît sur l'affichage indiquant que l'imprimante est  maintenant en marche. Pour afficher le texte de votre écran dans une autre langue, voir "Changement de la langue d'affichage". Dell Laser MFP 1815dn - Menu Fonctions REMARQUE : Une fois l'imprimante installée, vous devez configurer les paramètres réseau sur le panneau de commande. Reportez-vous à la  "Impression d'une page de configuration réseau". ATTENTION : La zone de chauffe à l'arrière de la partie intérieure de votre imprimante devient chaude lorsque l'imprimante est mise sous  tension. ATTENTION : En accédant à cette partie, faites attention aux zones très chaudes.  ATTENTION : Ne démontez jamais l'imprimante lorsqu'elle est sous tension. Si vous procédez ainsi, vous risquez de recevoir une décharge  électrique.  1. CONFIG PAPIER 2. REGL DEF COPIE 3. REGL. DEF. FAX FORMAT PAPIER TYPE PAPIER NB DE COPIES ZOOM CONTRASTE QUALITE SELECT BAC RECTO-VERSO CONTRASTE RESOLUTION NB. SONNERIES MODE RECEPTION RECOMP. DIFF. TENT. RECOMP. CONF. EMISSION JOURNAL AUTO REDUCTION AUTO EFFACER TAILLE CODE RECEPTION MODE DRPD RECTO-VERSO 4. REGL. DEF NUM. 5. FONCT AV. FAX 6. REPERTOIRE TAILLE IMAGE FORMAT FICHIER RESOLUTION TEMP. NUM RES RENVOI EMISS. RECEPT ENVOIS APPEL ECO CFG FAX INDES. RECEP PROTEGEE PREFIXE RECOMP DONNEES RECEPT MODE ECM VITESSE MODEM DESACT. RECEP. ANNUAIRE E-MAIL1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance le paramètre désiré. 3. Appuyez sur OK ( ) ou sélectionnez le paramètre affiché. Changement de la langue d'affichage Pour modifier la langue d'affichage du panneau de commande, procédez comme suit : 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG MACHINE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance LANGUE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher la langue souhaitée. Les langues disponibles sont les suivantes : anglais, français, allemand, italien, espagnol, tchèque, portugais ibérique, néerlandais, polonais, norvégien,  suédois, finnois, danois et russe.  5. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour enregistrer la langue choisie. 6. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille. Choix Pays Pour modifier le pays qui s'affiche sur le panneau de commande, procédez comme suit : 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG MACHINE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CHOIX PAYS, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher le pays de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille. 7. JOURNAUX 8. CONFIG E-MAIL 9. CONFIG RESEAU ANNUAIRE JOURN ENVOIS JOURN RECEPT. DONNEES SYST TRAV. PROGRAM. CONF. EMISSION LISTE REC SEL. JOURNAL NUMER. RAPPORT E-MAIL SERVEUR SMTP CONFIG. UTIL. AUTO-ENVOI DESTIN. DEFAUT OBJET DEFAUT TRANSF. E-MAIL CONTROLE ACCES DEFINIR LE CODE CONFIGURATION EFFACER REGL. IMPR DONN. SYS 10. SON/VOLUME 11. CONFIG MACHINE 12. MAINTENANCE HAUT-PARLEUR SONNERIE TOUCHE TONAL. ALARME ID MACHINE DATE & HEURE MODE HORLOGE LANGUE ECO ENERGIE TEMPORISATION ECO ENERG CCD ECO TONER CHOIX PAYS ACCES GLOBAL CONFIG IMPORT. CONFIG EXPORT. NETT. TAMBOUR EFFACER REGL.Mode Économie d'encre Le mode Économie d'encre permet à votre imprimante d'utiliser moins d'encre par page. Avec ce mode, la durée de vie de la cartouche peut être rallongée par  rapport au mode normal, mais la qualité d'impression est moins bonne. Pour activer le mode Économie d'encre : 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG MACHINE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ECO TONER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ACTIVE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille. Mode veille Le mode veille permet à votre imprimante de réduire sa consommation électrique, si vous ne l'utilisez pas. Vous pouvez activer ce mode en sélectionnant le  temps d'attente après une impression pour que l'imprimante passe en mode de consommation d'énergie réduite. 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG MACHINE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ECO ENERGIE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher ACTIVE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher le paramétrage de temps de votre choix. Vous pouvez choisir entre 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 et 120 (minutes).  6. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour enregistrer la langue choisie. 7. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille. Mode Économie d'énergie CCD (Charge-Coupled Device) La lampe de numérisation située sous la vitre d'exposition s'éteint automatiquement si elle n'est pas utilisée pendant une période prédéfinie afin de réduire la  consommation électrique et de prolonger la durée de vie de la lampe. La lampe s'allume automatiquement et le cycle de préchauffage démarre dès qu'une  touche quelconque est activée, que le chargeur de document est ouvert ou qu'un document est détecté dans le chargeur automatique. Vous pouvez sélectionner le temps mis par la lampe de numérisation à passer en mode Économie d'énergie après une tâche de numérisation.  1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG MACHINE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ECO ENERG CCD, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher le paramétrage de temps de votre choix. Les options disponibles sont 30, 60 et 120 (minutes). 5. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour enregistrer la langue choisie. 6. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille. REMARQUE : En mode d'impression PC, vous pouvez aussi activer ou désactiver le mode Économie d'encre dans les propriétés de l'imprimante.  Reportez-vous à la "Onglet Graphiques".Réglage du délai de réinitialisation Vous pouvez définir le temps que l'imprimante doit attendre avant de restaurer les paramètres par défaut de copie ou de télécopie, si aucune copie ou télécopie  n'est lancée après avoir modifié les paramètres sur le panneau de commande. 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG MACHINE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance TEMPORISATION, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher la valeur de temporisation de votre choix. Vous avez le choix entre 15, 30, 60 et 180 (secondes). Si vous sélectionnez DESACTIVE, vous spécifiez que l'imprimante ne doit pas restaurer les  paramètres par défaut tant que vous n'avez pas appuyez sur Départ ( ) pour lancer la copie ou la télécopie ou sur Annuler ( ) pour annuler. 5. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour enregistrer la langue choisie. 6. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille. Protection de votre imprimante par un code Vous pouvez attribuer un code à votre imprimante pour empêcher tout utilisateur non autorisé de l'utiliser. Attribution d'un code 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG MACHINE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ACCES GLOBAL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REGLAGE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. Entrez un code de quatre chiffres, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 6. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille. Activation de la fonction de protection 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG MACHINE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ACCES GLOBAL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour accéder à PROTEGER. 5. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher ACTIVE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 6. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.Copie Chargement du papier Que vous travailliez en mode impression, copie ou télécopie, les instructions relatives au chargement du papier sont identiques. Pour plus d'informations,  reportez-vous à la section "Chargement du papier" pour le chargement du papier dans le bac d'alimentation papier et à la section "Utilisation du passe copie" pour le chargement du papier dans le passe copie. Sélection du bac d'alimentation Après avoir chargé le support, sélectionnez le bac d'alimentation que vous allez utiliser. 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance COP., puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance SELECT BAC, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher le bac d'alimentation papier de votre choix. Vous pouvez choisir entre le BAC 1, BAC 2 (option) et SPECIAL. Si vous n'installez pas le bac optionnel 2, l'option de menu BAC 2 (option) peut ne pas apparaître sur l'écran. 4. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour enregistrer la langue choisie. 5. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille. Préparation d'un document Vous pouvez utiliser la vitre d'exposition ou le chargeur automatique pour charger un document original en copie, en numérisation et pour un envoi par  télécopie. Si vous optez pour le chargeur automatique, vous pouvez introduire des documents de jusqu'à 50 feuilles de papier 75 g/m2  pour une tâche. En  revanche, si vous utilisez la vitre d'exposition, le chargement s'effectue feuille par feuille. Lorsque vous utilisez le chargeur : l Ne chargez pas de documents de format inférieur à 142 x 148 mm ou supérieur à 216 x 356 mm. l Ne chargez pas les types de document suivants : Papier carbone ou papier autocopiant Papier couché Papier bible ou trop fin Papier froissé ou plié Papier ondulé ou en rouleau Chargement du papier Paramétrage des options de copie Sélection du bac d'alimentation Utilisation des fonctions de copie spéciales Préparation d'un document Impression de copies en mode resto-verso Chargement d'un document original Modification des réglages par défaut Réalisation de copies REMARQUE : Vous obtiendrez une meilleure qualité de numérisation, notamment pour des images en couleur ou en nuances de gris, en préférant la  vitre d'exposition au chargeur automatique.Papier déchiré l Retirez tout trombone ou agrafe avant de charger des documents. l Si vous avez utilisé de la colle ou du correcteur ou si vous avez écrit à l'encre, vérifiez que le papier est entièrement sec avant de charger les  documents. l Ne chargez pas de documents de tailles ou de grammages différents les uns des autres. l Ne chargez pas de documents reliés, de livrets, de transparents ou de documents non standard. Chargement d'un document original Vous pouvez utiliser le chargeur automatique ou la vitre d'exposition pour charger un document original. Si vous utilisez le chargeur automatique, vous pouvez insérer jusqu'à 50 feuilles de papier 75 g/m2  à la fois. En revanche, si vous utilisez la vitre d'exposition, le chargement s'effectue feuille par feuille. Pour charger le document dans le chargeur automatique, procédez comme suit : 1. Placez le ou les documents face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique, le bord supérieur en premier. 2. Réglez les guides de largeur de document à la taille du document. Assurez-vous que le bord droit du document est aligné sur la marque de format de  papier présente sur le chargeur automatique. Pour des consignes détaillées de préparation du document original, reportez-vous à la "Préparation d'un document". Pour charger le document sur la vitre d'exposition, procédez comme suit : 1. Ouvrez le capot. REMARQUE : Avant de numériser un document à partir de la vitre d'exposition, vérifiez que le chargeur automatique ne contient aucun document. Tout document détecté dans le chargeur automatique est prioritaire sur le document posé sur la vitre d'exposition. REMARQUE : Vous obtiendrez une meilleure qualité de numérisation, notamment pour des images en couleur ou en nuances de gris, en préférant la  vitre d'exposition au chargeur automatique.2. Placez le document face vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition en l'alignant avec le guide de repérage situé à l'angle supérieur gauche de la vitre. Pour des consignes détaillées de préparation du document original, reportez-vous à la "Préparation d'un document". 3. Fermez le couvercle. Réalisation de copies 1. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur. OU Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition. Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original". 2. Personnalisez les paramètres de copie, notamment le nombre de copies, leur format, le contraste et la qualité de l'image, en sélectionnant le menu de  copie ou en utilisant les boutons du panneau de commande. Reportez-vous à la "Paramétrage des options de copie". Pour effacer les paramètres, utilisez le bouton Annuler ( ). 3. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez utiliser des fonctions de copie spéciales, comme l'ajustement automatique, le clone, le poster ou la copie d'identité en vous  reportant à la section "Utilisation des fonctions de copie spéciales". 4. Appuyez sur Départ ( ) pour démarrer la copie. L'écran affiche la progression du travail en cours. REMARQUE : Lorsque vous numérisez une page d'un livre ou d'un magazine, ouvrez complètement le chargeur, puis refermez-le. Si l'épaisseur du  livre ou du magazine est supérieure à 30 mm, copiez avec le capot ouvert. REMARQUE : Refermez toujours le chargeur de documents pour obtenir une qualité d'impression optimale et réduire la consommation d'encre. REMARQUE : Il n'est pas nécessaire d'être connecté à un ordinateur pour effectuer une copie de documents. REMARQUE : Toute impureté présente sur la vitre du chargeur automatique ou sur la vitre d'exposition peuvent se retrouver sur le document imprimé  sous la forme de lignes noires verticales ou de point noirs. Pour obtenir de meilleurs résultats, nettoyez la vitre du chargeur de document ou la vitre  d'exposition avant usage. Reportez-vous à la "Nettoyage du scanner". REMARQUE : Vous pouvez annuler la tâche en cours à tout moment. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour arrêter la copie.Paramétrage des options de copie Les menus Copie du panneau de commande vous permettent de personnaliser toutes les options de copie de base : nombre de copies, format des copies,  contraste et qualité de l'image. Définissez les options suivantes pour la tâche de copie en cours avant d'appuyer sur Départ ( ) pour effectuer les copies. Nombre de copies Vous pouvez sélectionner un nombre de copie compris entre 1 et 199.  1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance COP., puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à NB DE COPIES. 3. Entrez la valeur de votre choix à l'aide du clavier numérique. Réduction ou agrandissement Vous pouvez réduire ou agrandir la taille d'une image copiée, de 25 % à 400 % avec des documents originaux disposés sur la vitre d'exposition ou de 25 % à  100 % avec des documents placés dans le chargeur automatique. Veuillez noter que les facteurs de zoom disponibles diffèrent selon que vous utilisez la vitre  d'exposition ou le chargeur automatique de documents. Pour sélectionner des tailles de copie prédéfinies : 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance COP., puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ZOOM, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour trouver le paramètre de taille de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Pour définir avec précision le format de copie : 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance COP., puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ZOOM, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher AUTRE (25-400) (à partir du verre inactinique) ou AUTRE (25-100) (à partir de l'ADF)  et appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Entrez la valeur de votre choix à l'aide du clavier numérique. Contraste Réglez le contraste pour que la copie soit plus claire ou plus foncée que l'original.  1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance COP., puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONTRASTE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour régler le contraste. Qualité Les réglages Qualité vous permettent d'améliorer la qualité de l'image en sélectionnant le type de document pour la tâche de copie en cours. REMARQUE : Si vous appuyez sur Annuler ( ) alors que vous définissez les options de copie, vous risquez d'annuler toutes les options que vous avez définies pour la tâche de copie en cours et de les voir revenir à leur valeurs par défaut. Les réglages reprendront leurs valeurs par défaut une fois la  copie terminée. REMARQUE : Lors d'une réduction d'échelle, des lignes noires peuvent apparaître dans la partie inférieure de votre copie.1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance COP., puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance QUALITE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner le mode de qualité de l'image, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). l TEXTE : Adapté aux documents contenant des détails, tels que de petits caractères.  l TEXTE & PHOTO : Adapté aux documents contenant à la fois du texte et des photos ou des niveaux de gris.  l PHOTO : Adapté aux documents contenant des photos ou des niveaux de gris. Utilisation des fonctions de copie spéciales Le menu MISE EN PAGE vous permet d'accéder aux fonctions de copie suivantes : l DESACTIVE : Imprime en mode normal. l ID COPIE : Permet d'imprimer un document original de deux pages sur une seule feuille. Reportez-vous à la "Copie d'identité". l AUTO-AJUST. : Réduit ou agrandit automatiquement l'image originale pour l'ajuster au format du papier actuellement chargé dans l'imprimante.  Reportez-vous à la "Ajustement automatique". l AFFICHE : Permet d'imprimer une image sur 9 feuilles (3 x 3). Il suffit ensuite de coller ces feuilles ensemble pour former un poster. Reportez-vous à la  "Copie de type Affiche". l CLONE : Permet de reproduire plusieurs copies d'un original sur une seule page. Le nombre d'images est automatiquement déterminé en fonction de  l'image d'origine et du format du papier. Reportez-vous à la "Clone". Copie d'identité Pour effectuer une copie d'identité, procédez comme suit : 1. Placez le document à copier sur la vitre d'exposition, puis refermez le chargeur.  2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance COP., puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MISE EN PAGE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ID COPIE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. Si nécessaire, personnalisez les paramètres de copie, notamment le nombre de copies, le contraste et la qualité de l'image à l'aide des menus Copie.  Reportez-vous à la "Paramétrage des options de copie". 6. Appuyez sur Départ ( ) pour démarrer la copie. Votre imprimante commence par numériser le côté recto. 7. Lorsque PRESENTER VERSO apparaît sur la ligne du bas, soulevez le couvercle du chargeur de document, puis retournez le document en plaçant le  côté verso face vers le bas. Fermez le couvercle. 8. Appuyez à nouveau sur Départ ( ). REMARQUE : Certaines fonctions peuvent ne pas être accessibles selon le mode de chargement utilisé : vitre d'exposition ou chargeur automatique. Si vous utilisez cette fonction pour une copie, l'imprimante imprime un côté sur la moitié supérieure du papier et l'autre côté sur la moitié  inférieure sans réduire le format de l'original. Cette fonction est particulièrement adaptée aux documents de format réduit, tels que les  cartes de visite. Si le document original est plus grand que la zone imprimable, certaines parties peuvent ne pas être imprimées. Cette fonction de copie spéciale ne s'applique qu'aux documents placés sur la vitre d'exposition. Si un document est détecté dans le chargeur automatique, la fonction de copie d'identité ne fonctionne pas. REMARQUE : Vous ne pouvez pas régler le format de copie à l'aide du menu ZOOM pour la copie d'identité. REMARQUE : Si vous appuyez sur le bouton Annuler ( ) ou si vous n'appuyez sur aucun bouton dans les 30 secondes, l'imprimante annule la tâche  de copie et retourne au mode veille.Ajustement automatique Copie de type Affiche Clone Cette fonction de copie spéciale ne s'applique qu'aux documents placés sur la vitre d'exposition. Si un document est détecté dans le chargeur automatique, la fonctionnalité Ajustement automatique ne fonctionne pas. Pour effectuer un ajustement automatique : 1. Placez le document à copier sur la vitre d'exposition, puis refermez le couvercle du chargeur de document.  2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance COP., puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MISE EN PAGE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance AUTO-AJUST., puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. Si nécessaire, personnalisez les paramètres de copie, notamment le nombre de copies, le contraste et la qualité de l'image à l'aide  des menus Copie. Reportez-vous à la "Paramétrage des options de copie". 6. Appuyez sur Départ ( ) pour démarrer la copie.  REMARQUE : Vous ne pouvez pas régler le format de copie à l'aide du menu ZOOM tant que la copie avec Ajustement automatique est activée. Cette fonction de copie spéciale ne s'applique qu'aux documents placés sur la vitre d'exposition. Si un document est détecté dans le chargeur  automatique, la fonction de copie Poster ne fonctionne pas. Pour effectuer une copie en mode Poster : 1. Placez le document à copier sur la vitre d'exposition, puis refermez le chargeur. 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance COP., puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MISE EN PAGE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance AFFICHE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. Si nécessaire, personnalisez les paramètres de copie, notamment le nombre de copies, le contraste et la qualité de l'image à l'aide  des menus Copie. Reportez-vous à la "Paramétrage des options de copie". 6. Appuyez sur Départ ( ) pour démarrer la copie. Le document est divisé en 9 zones. Les zones sont numérisées et imprimées les unes après les autres dans l'ordre ci-contre. REMARQUE : Vous ne pouvez pas régler le format de copie à l'aide du bouton du menu ZOOM pour faire un poster. La copie Clone ne fonctionne que si vous chargez un document à l'aide de la vitre d'exposition. Si un document est détecté dans le chargeur  automatique, la fonction de copie Clone ne fonctionne pas. Pour utiliser le mode Clone :  1. Placez le document à copier sur la vitre d'exposition, puis refermez le chargeur.  2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance COP., puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MISE EN PAGE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CLONE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). REMARQUE : Vous ne pouvez pas régler le format de copie à l'aide du menu ZOOM tant que vous êtes en mode copie Clone.Impression de copies en mode resto-verso Vous pouvez régler l'imprimante pour une impression en mode recto-verso automatiquement. 1. Chargez les documents à copier dans le chargeur automatique. 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance COP., puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance RECTO-VERSO, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner l'option de reliure de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). l DESACTIVE : Imprime en mode normal.  l BORD LONG : Imprime les pages pour être lues comme un livre.  l BORD COURT : Imprime les pages pour être lues en les feuilletant comme sur un bloc-note. 5. Si nécessaire, personnalisez les paramètres de copie, notamment le nombre de copies, le format de copie, le contraste et la qualité de l'image à l'aide  des menus Copie. Reportez-vous à la "Paramétrage des options de copie". 6. Appuyez sur Départ ( ) pour démarrer la copie.  Votre imprimante imprime des deux côtés du papier automatiquement. Modification des réglages par défaut Les options de copie, telles que le contraste, la qualité d'image, le nombre et le format, peuvent être définies pour les modes les plus fréquemment utilisés.  Lorsque vous copiez un document, les paramètres par défaut sont utilisez sauf si vous les modifiez à l'aide des menus Copie. Pour créer vos propres paramètres par défaut : 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance COP., puis appuyez sur OK ( ). OU Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REGL DEF COPIE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour faire défiler les options jusqu'aux options de configuration. 4. Lorsque l'option à définir apparaît, appuyez sur OK ( ) pour y accéder. 5. Modifiez le paramétrage à l'aide du bouton de défilement ( ou ) ou entrez la valeur à l'aide du clavier numérique. 6. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour enregistrer la langue choisie. 7. Répétez les étapes 3 à 6, si nécessaire. 8. Pour retourner au mode veille, appuyez sur Annuler ( ). 5. Si nécessaire, personnalisez les paramètres de copie, notamment le nombre de copies, le contraste et la qualité de l'image à l'aide  des menus Copie. Reportez-vous à la "Paramétrage des options de copie". 6. Appuyez sur Départ ( ) pour démarrer la copie.  REMARQUE : Si vous appuyez sur Annuler ( ) alors que vous modifiez des options de copie, vous annulez les modifications apportées aux paramètres  qui reprennent leur valeur par défaut.Télécopie  Configuration de l'ID de l'imprimante Dans la plupart des pays, vous êtes légalement obligés d'indiquer votre numéro de télécopie sur chaque document envoyé. L'ID de l'imprimante, contenant  votre numéro de téléphone et votre notre nom ou celui de la société, peut être imprimé en haut de chaque page envoyée depuis votre imprimante. 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG MACHINE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à ID MACHINE. 4. Saisissez votre numéro de télécopie à l'aide du pavé numérique. 5. Appuyez sur OK ( ) si le numéro affiché à l'écran est correct. Un message vous demande de saisir l'identifiant de l'appareil. 6. Entrez votre nom ou celui de votre entreprise à l'aide du clavier numérique. 7. Le clavier numérique vous permet d'entrer des caractères alphanumériques ainsi que des symboles spéciaux en appuyant sur le bouton 1. Pour plus de détails concernant l'utilisation du pavé numérique pour saisir des caractères alphanumériques, voir "Utilisation du clavier numérique pour la  saisie de caractères". 8. Appuyez sur OK ( ) si le nom affiché à l'écran est correct. 9. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille. Utilisation du clavier numérique pour la saisie de caractères  Lors de l'exécution de diverses tâches, vous devrez indiquer différents noms et numéros. Par exemple, lorsque vous configurez votre imprimante, vous entrez  votre nom ou celui de votre société ainsi que le numéro de téléphone. Lorsque vous enregistrez des numéros de télécopie en mémoire, vous pouvez  également entrer les noms correspondants. l Lorsque vous êtes invité à saisir une lettre, appuyez sur la touche appropriée jusqu'à ce que la lettre souhaitée s'affiche à l'écran. Par exemple, pour entrer un O, appuyez sur 6. l A chaque pression successive sur la touche 6, une lettre différente s'affiche : M, N, O et finalement 6. l Pour saisir des caractères supplémentaires, recommencez la procédure à partir de l'étape initiale. l Appuyez sur 1 plusieurs fois pour entrer un espace et appuyez également sur 1 pour entrer des caractères spéciaux. l Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur OK ( ). Configuration de l'ID de l'imprimante Envoi d'une télécopie Utilisation du clavier numérique pour la saisie de caractères Réception d'une télécopie Configuration de l'heure et de la date Composition automatique Modification du mode d'horloge Fonctions avancées Réglage du son Fonctions supplémentaires Mode d'envoi économique Envoi d'une télécopie depuis un PC Configuration du télécopieur REMARQUE : En cas d'erreur en entrant des numéros, appuyez sur le bouton défilement ( ) gauche pour supprimer le dernier chiffre.Lettres et chiffres du clavier Modification de numéros ou de noms En cas d'erreur en entrant un numéro ou un nom, appuyez sur le bouton de défilement ( ) gauche pour supprimer le dernier chiffre ou caractère. Tapez  ensuite le chiffre ou le caractère approprié. Insertion d'une pause Certains systèmes téléphoniques requièrent la saisie d'un code d'accès suivi d'une tonalité. Vous devez insérer une pause afin que le code d'accès fonctionne.  Par exemple, entrez le code d'accès 9, puis appuyez sur Pause ( ) avant d'entrer le numéro de téléphone. Le symbole " , " apparaît à l'écran pour indiquer  qu'une pause a été insérée. Configuration de l'heure et de la date L'heure et la date sont imprimées sur tous les fax envoyés. Pour définir l'heure et la date : 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG MACHINE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance DATE & HEURE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Saisissez la date et l'heure correctes à l'aide du clavier numérique. Mois = 01 ~ 12 Jour = 01 à 31 Année = 1990 ~ 2089 Heure = 01 ~ 12 (format 12 heures) 00 à 23 (format 24 heures) Minute = 00 ~ 59 Vous pouvez également utiliser le bouton de défilement ( ou ) pour déplacer le curseur sous le chiffre que vous souhaitez corriger et entrer un  autre numéro. 5. Pour sélectionner AM ou PM pour un format 12 heures, appuyez sur le bouton ou . Si le curseur n'est pas placé sous l'indicateur AM ou PM, appuyez sur le bouton ou  pour déplacer immédiatement le curseur vers l'indicateur. Vous pouvez afficher l'heure au format 24 heures (ex : 01:00 PM devient 13:00). Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Modification du mode Touche Chiffres, lettres ou caractères associés 1 1   @   .   _   space   ,   /    *  #   &   $   +   -   ` 2 A   B   C   2  3 D   E   F   3  4 G   H   I   4 5  J   K   L   5 6 M   N   O   6 7 P   Q   R   S   7 8 T   U   V   8  9 W   X   Y   Z   9 0 0 REMARQUE : Vous pouvez avoir besoin de modifier la date et l'heure exactes en cas de panne de courant sur l'imprimante.d'horloge". 6. Appuyez sur OK ( ) si la date et l'heure affichées à l'écran sont correctes.  Modification du mode d'horloge Vous pouvez définir votre imprimante pour qu'elle affiche l'heure, au format 12 heures ou 24 heures. 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG MACHINE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MODE HORLOGE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). L'imprimante affiche l'état du mode Horloge qui est actuellement défini. 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner l'autre mode et appuyez sur OK ( ) pour enregistrer la sélection. 5. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode veille. Réglage du son Sons du haut-parleur, des sonneries, des boutons et des alarmes 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance SON/VOLUME, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour faire défiler les options. Appuyez sur OK ( ) lorsque l'option de son de votre choix apparaît. 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher l'état ou la sonorité désirée pour l'option sélectionnée.  Pour le volume de sonnerie, vous pouvez sélectionner entre DESACTIVE, FAIBLE, MOYEN et ELEVEE. Sélectionnez DESACTIVE pour désactiver la  sonnerie. L'imprimante fonctionne normalement même lorsque la sonnerie est désactivée. 5. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour enregistrer la langue choisie. 6. Si nécessaire, répétez les étapes 3 à 5. 7. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode veille. Volume du haut-parleur 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance COMP. EN LIGNE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à OUI. 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez la sonorité voulue. L'écran affiche le niveau de volume  correspondant. Mode d'envoi économique Vous pouvez utiliser le mode d'envoi économique pour enregistrer des documents numérisés et les transmettre à une heure donnée, et bénéficier ainsi de  tarifs longues distances avantageux. REMARQUE : L'imprimante émet un signal sonore et vous interdit de passer à l'étape suivante si un numéro incorrect est entré. REMARQUE : Vous ne pouvez régler le volume du haut-parleur que lorsque le cordon de la ligne téléphonique est connecté.Pour activer le mode d'envoi économique : 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FONCT AV. FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance APPEL ECO, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher ACTIVE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. Après 1 seconde, entrez à l'aide du clavier numérique, la date et l'heure de début d'envoi de télécopies en mode d'envoi économique. Pour sélectionner AM ou PM pour un format 12 heures, appuyez sur le bouton ou . 6. Appuyez sur OK ( ) si l'heure de début affichée à l'écran est correcte. 7. Après 1 seconde, entrez à l'aide du clavier numérique, la date et l'heure de fin de transmission en mode d'envoi économique. 8. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour enregistrer le réglage. 9. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode veille. Lorsque vous avez activé le mode d'envoi économique, votre imprimante enregistre dans sa mémoire tous les documents à télécopier, puis les envoi à l'heure  programmée.  Désactivez le mode d'envoi économique, suivez les étapes 1 et 3 de la section "Mode d'envoi économique", appuyez ensuite sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) jusqu'à ce que DESACTIVE apparaisse, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Configuration du télécopieur Modification des paramètres du télécopieur 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). OU Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REGL. DEF. FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher l'option de menu désirée, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Utiliser le bouton de défilement ( ou ) pour connaître l'état de l'option ; vous pouvez également entrer une valeur pour l'option sélectionnée à  l'aide du clavier numérique. 5. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour enregistrer la langue choisie. 6. Si nécessaire, répétez les étapes 3 à 5. 7. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode veille. Options par défaut disponibles pour des télécopies Vous pouvez utiliser les options de configuration suivantes pour configurer votre télécopieur : option Description CONTRASTE Vous pouvez sélectionner la valeur de contraste par défaut pour télécopier vos documents trop clairs ou trop  foncés. RESOLUTION Vous pouvez sélectionner le paramètre de résolution par défaut à STANDARD, SUPERIEURE ou OPTIMALE. NB. SONNERIES Vous pouvez spécifier le nombre de fois que la sonnerie de l'imprimante doit retentir, de 1 à 7, avant de répondre  à un appel entrant. MODE RECEPTION Vous pouvez sélectionner le mode de réception de télécopie par défaut. • Mode Fax (mode de réception automatique) : L'imprimante répond à un appel entrant et  passe directement en mode réception. Vous pouvez définir le nombre de sonneries à  entendre avant que l'imprimante ne réponde à l'aide de l'option NB. SONNERIES. Si la  mémoire de l'utilisateur est pleine, l'imprimante ne peut plus recevoir de fax entrant.  Assurez-vous de la mémoire libre en supprimant certaines données stockées dans la  mémoire. • Mode TEL (mode de réception manuelle) : Le mode de réception manuelle est activé lorsque la  réception automatique des télécopies est désactivée. Vous pouvez recevoir des télécopies par les moyens suivants :Envoi d'une télécopie Il est possible de commencer à composer le numéro sur le clavier numérique sans avoir préalablement sélectionné le mode télécopie. L'imprimante peut passer  automatiquement en mode télécopie dès l'entrée du quatrième chiffre que le clavier numérique. Réglage du contraste du document Utilisez le paramètre Contraste pour télécopier vos documents trop clairs ou trop foncés. 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONTRASTE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner le CONTRASTE de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). l PLUS CLAIR convient aux images sombres. l NORMAL convient aux documents imprimés ou dactylographiés classiques.  l PLUS SOMBRE convient aux documents clairs ou écrits à la main. Réglage de la résolution du document • en décrochant le combiné du poste téléphonique n'étant pas directement raccordé à l'arrière de  l'imprimante, puis en entrant le code de réception à distance, ou • en décrochant le combiné du poste téléphonique directement raccordé à l'arrière de l'imprimante  multifonction, puis en appuyant sur Départ ( ), ou • en accédant à FAX COMP. EN LIGNE OUI lorsque la sonnerie retentit (vous pouvez entendre des tonalités vocales ou de fax émises par l'appareil distant), puis en appuyant sur Départ ( ) sur le panneau de commande. • Mode REP/FAX : L'imprimante peut partager une ligne de téléphone avec un répondeur  téléphonique. Dans ce mode, l'imprimante peut surveiller le signal de télécopie et prendre  la ligne s'il s'agit d'une tonalité de télécopie. Si les communications téléphoniques sont en  mode série dans votre pays, ce mode n'est pas disponible. • Mode DRPD : Avant d'utiliser l'option DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection , détection du motif de  sonnerie distincte), assurez-vous que le service de sonnerie distincte a été installé sur votre ligne  téléphonique par l'opérateur télécom. Une fois que l'opérateur télécom vous a fourni un numéro de fax  séparé avec motif de sonnerie identifiable, vous devez définir en conséquence les options de  configuration du télécopieur. RECOMP. DIFF. Votre imprimante peut recomposer automatiquement le numéro d'un télécopieur distant, si celui-ci sonnait occupé. Vous pouvez définir des intervalles compris entre 1 et 15 minutes. TENT. RECOMP. Vous pouvez spécifier le nombre de tentatives d'appel entre 1 et 13. CONF. EMISSION Vous pouvez configurer votre imprimante pour qu'elle imprime un rapport indiquant que la transmission a réussi,  le nombre de pages envoyées, etc. Les options disponibles sont ACTIVE, DESACTIVE et SI ERREUR, qui n'est imprimé que lorsque la transmission échoue. JOURNAL AUTO Rapport détaillé concernant les 50 dernières communications, heures et dates comprises. Les options disponibles  sont ACTIVE ou DESACTIVE. REDUCTION AUTO Si la longueur d'un document en réception est égale ou supérieure au à celle du papier chargé dans le bac  d'alimentation papier, l'imprimante peut réduire la taille du document pour l'adapter au format de papier chargé  dans l'imprimante. Sélectionnez ACTIVE pour que le document entrant soit automatiquement réduit. Si cette fonction est définie à DESACTIVE, l'imprimante ne peut pas réduire la taille du document pour l'adapter  au format d'une page. Le document est divisé et imprimé au format réel, sur deux pages ou plus. EFFACER TAILLE Si la longueur du document est égale ou supérieure à celle du papier installé dans votre imprimante, vous pouvez  paramétrer votre imprimante pour qu'elle efface tout excédant situé au bas de la page. Si la page reçue va au-delà  des marges que vous avez définies, celle-ci peut s'imprimer sur deux feuilles de papier en respectant la taille réelle. Si le document respecte les marges et que la fonction REDUCTION AUTO (Auto Reduction) est activée, l'imprimante  réduit le document pour qu'il s'adapte au format de papier approprié sans avoir à effacer les parties en surplus. Si la fonction de réduction automatique est désactivée ou ne fonctionne pas, les données débordant des marges  peuvent être supprimées. Vous pouvez définir une marge comprise entre 0 et 30 mm. CODE RECEPTION Le code de réception vous permet de lancer la réception d'une télécopie à partir d'un poste téléphonique branché  sur la prise du poste téléphonique ( ) située à l'arrière de l'imprimante. Si vous décrochez le combiné du poste  téléphonique et entendez la tonalité de réception d'une télécopie, entrez le code de réception. Le code de réception  est prédéfini en usine à *9* (étoile 9 étoile). Vous pouvez définir une marge comprise entre 0 et 9. Pour plus  d'informations sur l'utilisation du code, reportez-vous à la section "Réception manuelle avec un poste  téléphonique". MODE DRPD Lors de toute réception d'appel, vous pouvez utiliser la fonction DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection) qui  permet de répondre à plusieurs numéros différents à l'aide d'une seule ligne téléphonique. Ce menu vous permet  de configurer l'imprimante pour qu'elle reconnaisse les modes de sonnerie auxquelles elle doit répondre. Pour  plus d'informations sur cette fonction, reportez-vous à la "Réception de télécopies en mode DRPD". RECTO-VERSO Vous pouvez définir l'imprimante pour qu'elle imprime les télécopies reçues en mode recto-verso. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : DESACTIVE, BORD LONG et BORD COURT.Utilisez le paramètre Résolution pour améliorer la qualité de la sortie d'un original ou pour numériser des photographies. 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance RESOLUTION, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher le mode de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Les types de documents recommandés pour chaque réglage de résolution sont décrits ci-dessous. Envoi automatique d'une télécopie 1. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur. OU Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition. Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original". 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Réglez les paramètres de contraste et de résolution qui répondent le mieux à vos besoins en matière de télécopies. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Réglage du contraste du document"et à la "Réglage de la résolution du document". 4. Saisissez le numéro du télécopieur destinataire à l'aide du pavé numérique. Vous pouvez également utiliser les numéros de composition abrégée à un, deux ou trois chiffres ou les numéros composition de groupes. Pour plus  d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Composition automatique". 5. Appuyez sur Départ ( ). 6. Lorsque vous chargez le document à partir de la vitre d'exposition, AUTRE PAGE ? apparaît sur la ligne supérieur de l'écran, une fois le document  numérisé et mémorisé. Si vous avez d'autres pages à numériser, retirez la page numérisée et placez la nouvelle page sur la vitre d'exposition, puis  sélectionnez OUI. Répétez ces étapes si nécessaire. Après avoir numérisé toutes les pages, sélectionnez NON lorsque AUTRE PAGE ? apparaît sur l'écran. 7. Lorsque l'imprimante établit un contact avec l'appareil en réception, elle compose son numéro et envoie la télécopie. Envoi manuel d'une télécopie 1. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur. OU Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition. Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original". 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Réglez les paramètres de contraste et de résolution qui répondent le mieux à vos besoins en matière de télécopies. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Réglage du contraste du document"et à la "Réglage de la résolution du document". 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance COMP. EN LIGNE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Mode Recommandé pour : STANDARD Documents comportant des caractères de taille normale. SUPERIEURE pour les documents contenant des petits caractères ou des lignes fines, ou imprimés à l'aide d'une imprimante matricielle. OPTIMALE Documents contenant des détails extrêmement fins. Le mode de résolution Très élevée n'est disponible que si le système  cible prend également en charge ce type de résolution. Reportez-vous aux remarques ci-dessous. PHOTO Documents contenant des niveaux de gris ou des photographies. COULEUR Documents comportant des couleurs. Vous ne pouvez envoyer un fax en couleur que si l'imprimante à distance prend en  charge la réception des fax en couleur et si vous envoyez le fax manuellement. Dans ce mode, l'envoi de documents  mémorisés n'est pas disponible. REMARQUE : Les télécopies numérisées avec une résolution Super Fine peuvent être transmises à la résolution la plus élevée qui est acceptée par le  périphérique en réception. REMARQUE : Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour annuler à tout moment la tâche de télécopie, lors de l'envoi de la télécopie.5. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour sélectionner OUI. 6. Entrez le numéro du télécopieur distant à l'aide du clavier numérique. 7. Si vous entendez une tonalité aiguë de télécopie émise par le télécopieur distant, appuyez sur Départ ( ). Confirmation d'un envoi Après avoir correctement envoyé la dernière page de votre document, l'imprimante émet un signal sonore et retourne au mode veille.  Si quelque chose d'anormal se produit alors vous envoyez votre télécopie, l'écran affiche alors un message d'erreur. Pour obtenir la liste des messages d'erreur et  leur signification, reportez-vous à la "Messages d'erreur et dépannage". Si vous recevez un message d'erreur, appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour effacer le message et effectuer une nouvelle tentative d'envoi du document. Vous pouvez configurer votre imprimante pour qu'elle imprime automatiquement un rapport de confirmation après chaque transmission par télécopie. Pour de  plus amples informations, reportez-vous à la rubrique CONF. EMISSION de la section "Options par défaut disponibles pour des télécopies". Recomposition automatique Si le numéro que vous avez composé sonne occupé ou si vous n'obtenez pas de réponse lorsque vous envoyez une télécopie, l'imprimante recompose  automatiquement le numéro toutes les trois minutes, jusqu'à sept fois. Quand Att. recomp. apparaît sur l'affichage, appuyez sur OK ( ) pour recomposer le numéro sans attendre. Pour annuler la recomposition automatique,  appuyez sur Annuler ( ). Pour modifier l'intervalle de temps séparant des recompositions de numéros et le nombre de tentatives de recomposition, reportez-vous à la section "Options par défaut disponibles pour des télécopies". Réception d'une télécopie À propos des modes de réception Lorsque la mémoire est pleine, l'imprimante ne peut plus recevoir de fax entrant. Assurez-vous de la mémoire libre en supprimant certaines données  stockées dans la mémoire. Chargement du papier pour les télécopies entrantes  Le chargement du papier dans le bac d'alimentation s'effectue de la même façon pour l'impression, la télécopie ou la copie, si ce n'est que les télécopies  peuvent uniquement être imprimées sur du papier au format Letter, A4 ou Legal. Pour plus d'informations sur le chargement du papier, reportez-vous à la  section "Chargement du papier". Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage du type et du format de papier, reportez-vous aux sections "Configuration du type de papier" et "Configuration du format de papier". REMARQUE : Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour annuler à tout moment la tâche de télécopie, lors de l'envoi de la télécopie. REMARQUE : Le Dell Laser MFP 1815dn ne peut pas recevoir de fax en couleurs. REMARQUE : Pour utiliser le mode REP/FAX, branchez un répondeur téléphonique sur la prise du poste téléphonique ( ) située à l'arrière de votre  imprimante. Réception automatique en mode FAX  Votre imprimante est prédéfinie en usine en mode télécopie.  Lorsque vous recevez une télécopie, l'imprimante répond à l'appel en respectant le nombre de sonneries spécifiées, puis reçoit automatiquement la télécopie.  Pour modifier le nombre de sonneries, voir "Options par défaut disponibles pour des télécopies". Pour régler le volume de la sonnerie, reportez-vous à la section "Réglage du son". Réception manuelle en mode TEL  Vous pouvez recevoir une télécopie en décrochant le combiné du poste téléphonique, puis en entrant le code de réception à distance (voir la section "CODE RECEPTION"), ou en accédant à FAX COMP. EN LIGNE OUI lorsque la sonnerie retentit (vous pouvez entendre des tonalités vocales ou de fax émises  par l'appareil distant), puis en appuyant sur Départ ( ) sur le panneau de commande. L'imprimante commence la réception de la télécopie, puis retourne au mode veille, une fois la réception terminée. Réception automatique en mode REP/FAX  Si vous utilisez un répondeur téléphonique dans ce mode, raccordez-le à la prise du poste téléphonique ( ) située à l'arrière de votre imprimante.  Si votre imprimante ne détecte pas la tonalité de la télécopie, le répondeur téléphonique prend alors l'appel. En revanche, si la tonalité de la télécopie est détectée, l'imprimante lance alors automatiquement la réception de télécopie. Réception manuelle avec un poste téléphonique Vous obtenez un meilleur résultat avec cette fonctionnalité si vous utilisez un poste téléphonique connecté à la prise du poste téléphonique ( ) située à  l'arrière de votre imprimante. Vous pouvez recevoir une télécopie d'une personne à laquelle vous parlez sur le téléphone auxiliaire sans accéder au  télécopieur. Lorsque vous recevez un appel sur le poste téléphonique et entendez la tonalité d'une télécopie, appuyez sur les touches *9* (étoile neuf étoile) du poste  téléphonique. L'imprimante reçoit le document. Appuyez sur les touches doucement et l'une après l'autre. Si vous continuez à entendre la tonalité de la télécopie provenant de l'appareil distant, refaites une tentative en appuyant sur *9* une nouvelle fois. *9* est le code de réception prédéfini en usine. Le premier et le dernier caractère sont fixes, mais vous pouvez modifier le caractère central comme vous le  souhaitez. Le code doit comporter un chiffre. Pour plus d'informations sur le changement de code, reportez-vous à la "Options par défaut disponibles pour des  télécopies". Réception de télécopies en mode DRPD REMARQUE : Si vous avez activé votre imprimante en mode REP/FAX et que votre répondeur téléphonique est éteint ou qu'aucun répondeur n'est  connecté à votre appareil, votre imprimante peut passer automatiquement en mode télécopie après un nombre prédéfini de sonneries. La sonnerie distincte est un service des opérateurs télécom qui vous permet d'utiliser une même ligne téléphonique pour répondre à plusieurs numéros de  téléphones différents. Différents motifs de sonneries, combinés à des sonneries d'appel longues ou courtes, permettent d'identifier le numéro particulier qu'un  individu utilise pour vous appeler. La fonction de détection du motif de sonnerie distincte (DRPD) permet à votre télécopieur de mémoriser le motif de sonnerie auquel il doit répondre. Ce motif  de sonnerie est reconnaissable pour y répondre comme pour un appel fax, tandis que tous les autres motifs de sonnerie peuvent être transférés vers le poste  ou le répondeur téléphonique raccordé à la prise du poste téléphonique ( ) située à l'arrière de votre imprimante. À tout moment, vous pouvez suspendre ou  modifier la détection du motif de sonnerie distinct. Avant d'utiliser l'option de détection du motif de sonnerie distincte (DRPD), assurez-vous que le service de sonnerie distincte a été installé pour votre ligne  téléphonique par l'opérateur télécom. Pour configurer l'option de détection du motif de sonnerie distincte (DRPD), vous pouvez avoir besoin d'une autre ligne  de téléphone sur place et composer le numéro de votre à partir de l'autre ligne.  Pour configurer le mode DRPD : 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). OU Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REGL. DEF. FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MODE DRPD, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REGLAGE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). L'écran LCD affiche Waiting Ring.  5. Composez votre numéro de télécopieur à partir d'un autre téléphone. Il n'est pas nécessaire d'effectuer l'appel à partir d'un télécopieur.  6. Lorsque votre imprimante commence à sonner, ne répondez pas à l'appel. L'imprimante doit attendre plusieurs sonneries pour apprendre le motif de  sonnerie. 7. Lorsque l'imprimante a fini d'apprendre, l'écran affiche End DRPD [Setup]. Si la configuration DRPD échoue, c'est le message "DRPD Ring Error" qui apparaîtra. Appuyez sur OK ( ) à l'affichage de MODE DRPD, puis refaites une tentative à partir de l'étape 5. 8. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode veille. Lorsque la configuration de la fonctionnalité DRPD est terminée, l'option DRPD devient accessible dans le menu MODE RECEPTION. Pour recevoir des télécopies  en mode DRPD, vous devez régler le menu sur DRPD. Consultez "Options par défaut disponibles pour des télécopies". Réception de télécopies en mémoire REMARQUE : Vous devez reconfigurer DRPD en cas de réattribution de votre numéro de télécopie ou si vous raccordez votre imprimante à une autre  ligne téléphonique. REMARQUE : Après avoir configuré DRPD, composez votre numéro de télécopie pour vérifier que l'imprimante répond avec une tonalité de télécopie.  Appelez ensuite un numéro différent attribué à cette même ligne pour vous assurer que l'appel est bien transféré au poste ou au répondeur  téléphonique branché sur la prise du poste téléphonique ( ) située à l'arrière de l'imprimante. Puisque votre imprimante est un périphérique multitâche, elle peut recevoir des télécopies tout en exécutant d'autres tâches. Si vous recevez une télécopie  alors que copiez, imprimez ou même tombez en panne de papier ou d'encre, votre imprimante stocke les télécopies entrantes dans la mémoire. Dès que vous avez  terminé de copier, d'imprimer ou de réalimenter les consommables, l'imprimante procède automatiquement à l'impression de la télécopie mémorisée. Composition automatique Composition abrégée Vous pouvez mémoriser jusqu'à 400 numéros fréquemment utilisés, sous forme de numéros de composition abrégée à un, deux ou trois chiffres (de 0 à 399).  Enregistrement d'un numéro de composition abrégée 1. Sur le panneau de commande, appuyez sur Répertoire ( ).OU Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). OU Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REPERTOIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ANNUAIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance AJOUT PERSONNE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Entrez un nom, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie d'un nom, reportez-vous à "Utilisation du clavier numérique pour la  saisie de caractères". 5. À l'aide du clavier numérique, entrez un numéro de composition abrégée à un, deux ou trois chiffres compris entre 0 et 399, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Ou sélectionnez l'emplacement en appuyant sur le bouton de défilement ( ou ), puis en appuyant sur OK ( ). 6. À l'aide du clavier numérique, entrez le numéro de télécopie que vous souhaitez mémoriser, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Pour insérer une pause entre des numéros, appuyez sur Pause ( ) et un " , " apparaît sur l'écran. 7. Pour enregistrer des numéros de télécopie supplémentaires, répétez les étapes 3 à 6.  OU Pour retourner au mode veille, appuyez sur Annuler ( ). Modification des numéros de composition abrégée Vous pouvez modifier un numéro d'appel de composition abrégée spécifique. 1. Sur le panneau de commande, appuyez sur Répertoire ( ). OU Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). OU Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REPERTOIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ANNUAIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MODIFIER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour accéder à MODIF PERSONNE. 5. Entrez le numéro de composition abrégée à modifier ou sélectionnez le numéro de composition abrégée en appuyant sur le bouton de défilement ( ou ), puis en appuyant sur OK ( ). 6. Entrez le numéro de télécopie de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 7. Entrez le nom de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 8. Pour modifier un autre numéro de composition abrégée, recommencez la procédure à partir de l'étape 5. OU Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille. Envoi d'une télécopie à l'aide d'un numéro de composition abrégée 1. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur.  OU Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition. Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original". 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Réglez les paramètres de contraste et de résolution qui répondent le mieux à vos besoins en matière de télécopies. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Réglage du contraste du document"et à la "Réglage de la résolution du document". 4. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour sélectionner FAX VERS.5. Saisissez le numéro de composition abrégée. l Dans le cas d'un numéro de composition abrégée à un chiffre, appuyez sur la touche appropriée et maintenez-la enfoncée.  l Pour un numéro de composition abrégée à deux chiffres, appuyez une fois sur la première touche et de façon prolongée sur la seconde.  l Pour un numéro de composition abrégé à trois chiffres, appuyez une fois sur la première et la deuxième touche et de façon prolongée sur la  troisième.  Le nom de l'entrée correspondante s'affiche brièvement. 6. Le document est mémorisé.  Si vous utilisez la vitre d'exposition, un message vous demande si vous souhaitez envoyer une autre page. Sélectionnez OUI pour ajouter d'autres documents ou NON pour démarrer immédiatement l'envoi de la télécopie.  7. Le numéro de télécopie enregistré dans le registre des numéros de composition abrégée est composé de façon automatique. Le document est transmis  lorsque le télécopieur distant répond. Composition de groupe Si vous envoyez fréquemment un même document à plusieurs destinataires, vous pouvez créer un groupe de diffusion et l'attribuer à un numéro de composition  de groupe à un, deux ou trois chiffres. Vous pouvez dès lors envoyer le même document à l'ensemble des membres du groupe à l'aide du numéro de groupe.  Définition d'un groupe de diffusion 1. Sur le panneau de commande, appuyez sur Répertoire ( ). OU Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). OU Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REPERTOIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ANNUAIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance AJOUT GROUPE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Entrez un nom, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. Entrez un numéro de groupe compris entre 0 et 399, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Ou sélectionnez l'emplacement de votre choix en appuyant sur le bouton de défilement ( ou ), puis en appuyant sur OK ( ). 6. Entrez un numéro de composition abrégée à un, deux ou trois chiffres que vous souhaitez attribuer au groupe, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Ou sélectionnez l'emplacement en appuyant sur le bouton de défilement ( ou ), puis en appuyant sur OK ( ). 7. A l'invite Ajouter un autre ? (Add Another?) appuyez sur OK ( ) pour entrer d'autres numéros de composition abrégée dans le groupe.  Ou, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( or ) pour afficher NON, appuyez ensuite sur OK ( ) après avoir entré tous les numéro désirés. 8. Pour attribuer un autre groupe de diffusion, recommencez la procédure à partir de l'étape 3. OU Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode veille. Modification des numéros d'appel de groupe Vous pouvez supprimer un numéro de composition abrégée d'un groupe ou ajouter un nouveau numéro au groupe sélectionné. 1. Sur le panneau de commande, appuyez sur Répertoire ( ). OU Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). OU Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REPERTOIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). REMARQUE : Il n'est pas possible d'inclure un numéro de groupe dans un autre numéro de groupe.2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ANNUAIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MODIFIER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MODIF GROUPE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. Entrez le numéro d'appel de groupe à modifier ou sélectionnez le numéro d'appel de groupe en appuyant sur le bouton de défilement ( ou ), puis en appuyant sur OK ( ). 6. Modifiez le nom, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 7. Pour ajouter un numéro de composition abrégée, appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à AJOUT PERSONNE. Pour supprimer le numéro de composition abrégée, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher SUPPR. PERSONNE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 8. Saisissez le numéro abrégé à ajouter ou à supprimer. 9. Appuyez sur OK ( ). 10. Pour modifier un autre groupe de diffusion, recommencez la procédure à partir de l'étape 4. OU Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille. Utilisation de la numérotation de groupe pour l'envoi d'une télécopie (transmission multiple) Vous pouvez utiliser la numérotation de groupe pour la multidiffusion ou la transmission en différé. Suivez la procédure propre à chacune de ces fonctions (multidiffusion - "Multidiffusion", transmission différée - "Envoi d'une télécopie en différé"). Lorsqu'un message vous demande de saisir le numéro du télécopieur distant, procédez comme suit : l Dans le cas d'un raccourci à un chiffre, appuyez sur la touche appropriée et maintenez-la enfoncée. l Pour un numéro à deux chiffres, appuyez une fois sur la première touche et de façon prolongée sur la seconde. l Pour un numéro de composition abrégé à trois chiffres, appuyez une fois sur la première et la deuxième touche et de façon prolongée sur la troisième. Vous ne pouvez utiliser qu'un seul numéro de groupe par opération. Suivez la procédure nécessaire pour effectuer l'opération souhaitée.  Votre imprimante numérise et stocke automatiquement en mémoire le document chargé dans le chargeur automatique ou posé sur la vitre d'exposition.  L'imprimante compose chaque numéro du groupe.  Recherche d'un numéro dans la mémoire Il existe deux manières de retrouver un numéro en mémoire. Vous pouvez soit le rechercher de façon séquentielle, de A à Z, soit à l'aide de la première lettre  du nom associé au numéro considéré. Recherche séquentielle dans la mémoire 1. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur. OU Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition. Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original". 2. Sur le panneau de commande, appuyez sur Répertoire ( ). OU Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). OU REMARQUE : Lorsque vous supprimez le dernier numéro abrégé d'un groupe, vous supprimez le groupe en entier.Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REPERTOIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ANNUAIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à RECHERCHER. 5. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour faire défiler le contenu en mémoire jusqu'à l'affichage du nom et du numéro que vous souhaitez  composer. Vous pouvez chercher vers le haut ou vers le bas dans l'ensemble de la mémoire et par ordre alphabétique, de A à Z.  Lors d'une recherche dans la mémoire du télécopieur, vous verrez que chaque entrée est précédée de l'une des deux lettres suivantes : "S" pour la numérotation abrégée ou "G" pour la numérotation de groupe. Ces lettres indiquent le mode de mémorisation du numéro. 6. Lorsque le nom et/ou le numéro voulu s'affiche, appuyez sur Départ ( ) or OK ( ) pour composer l'appel. Recherche par la première lettre 1. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur. OU Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition. Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original". 2. Sur le panneau de commande, appuyez sur Répertoire ( ). OU Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). OU Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REPERTOIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ANNUAIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à RECHERCHER. 5. Appuyez sur la touche sur laquelle figure la lettre à rechercher. Un nom commençant par la lettre en question s'affiche. Par exemple, pour retrouver le nom "MOBILE", appuyez sur le bouton 6, sur lequel figure les lettres "MNO". 6. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher le nom suivant. 7. Lorsque le nom et/ou le numéro voulu s'affiche, appuyez sur Départ ( ) or OK ( ) pour composer l'appel. Impression d'un répertoire Vous pouvez vérifier les numéros à composition automatique en imprimant un relevé du répertoire. 1. Sur le panneau de commande, appuyez sur Répertoire ( ). OU Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). OU Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REPERTOIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ANNUAIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance IMPRIMER, puis appuyez sur Départ ( ) ou OK ( ). Un relevé comportant les numéros abrégés et les numéros de groupes est imprimé. Fonctions avancéesRecomposition Pour recomposer le dernier numéro appelé : 1. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur. OU Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition. Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original". 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance RECOMPOSER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Si un document est chargé dans le chargeur automatique, l'imprimante débute immédiatement l'envoi. Pour les documents transmis à partir de la vitre d'exposition, un message vous demande si vous souhaitez envoyer une autre page. Sélectionnez OUI pour  ajouter une nouvelle page. Sinon sélectionnez NON. Multidiffusion La fonctionnalité de multidiffusion permet d'envoyer un document vers différents emplacements. Les documents sont automatiquement mémorisés puis  envoyés à un télécopieur distant. Après l'envoi, les documents sont automatiquement supprimés de la mémoire. 1. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur. OU Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition. Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original". 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Réglez les paramètres de contraste et de résolution qui répondent le mieux à vos besoins en matière de télécopies. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Réglage du contraste du document"et à la "Réglage de la résolution du document". 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance DIFFUSER FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. Entrez le numéro de l'imprimante distante à l'aide du clavier numérique. Vous pouvez également utiliser les numéros de composition abrégés à un, deux ou trois chiffres ou les numéros de composition de groupes. 6. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour confirmer le numéro. Un message vous demande d'entrer un autre numéro de télécopie. 7. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour entrer un autre numéro.  Ou, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner NON, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 8. Pour entrer davantage de numéros de télécopie, répétez les étapes 5 et 6. Vous pouvez ajouter jusqu'à 10 numéros de télécopie. 9. Après avoir terminé d'entrer des numéros de télécopie, appuyez sur Départ ( ). Le document est mémorisé avant d'être transmis. L'écran indique la capacité mémoire restante, ainsi que le nombre de pages mémorisées. Dans le cas d'une transmission de documents transmis à partir de la vitre d'exposition, un message vous demande si vous souhaitez envoyer une autre  page. Sélectionnez OUI pour ajouter une nouvelle page. Sinon sélectionnez NON. 10. L'imprimante débute l'envoi du document dans l'ordre des numéros que vous avez entrés. Envoi d'une télécopie en différé Vous pouvez demander à ce que votre imprimante mémorise une télécopie pour l'envoyer ultérieurement.  1. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur. REMARQUE : Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser plus d'un numéro de groupe par opération de diffusion.OU Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition. Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original". 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Réglez les paramètres de contraste et de résolution qui répondent le mieux à vos besoins en matière de télécopies. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Réglage du contraste du document"et à la "Réglage de la résolution du document". 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FONCTIONS FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance DIFFERER FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 6. Entrez le numéro du télécopieur distant à l'aide du clavier numérique. Vous pouvez utiliser un numéro abrégé à un, deux ou trois chiffres ou un numéro de groupe. 7. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour confirmer le numéro affiché sur l'écran. Un message vous demande d'entrer un autre numéro de télécopie.  8. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour entrer le numéro. Ou, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner NON, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 9. Si vous souhaitez donner un nom à la transmission, entrez ce nom. Sinon, passez cette étape. Pour plus d'informations l'entrée du nom à l'aide du clavier numérique, reportez-vous à "Utilisation du clavier numérique pour la saisie de caractères". 10. Appuyez sur OK ( ). L'écran affiche l'heure de saisie et vous demande d'indiquer celle à laquelle vous voulez envoyer la télécopie.  11. Saisissez l'heure en question à l'aide du pavé numérique. Pour sélectionner AM ou PM pour un format 12 heures, appuyez sur le bouton  ou . Si le curseur n'est pas placé sous l'indicateur AM ou PM, appuyez sur le bouton  ou  pour déplacer immédiatement le curseur vers l'indicateur. Si l'heure que vous définissez précède l'heure actuelle, le document peut alors être envoyé à cette heure précise le jour suivant.  12. Appuyez sur OK ( ) si l'heure de début affichée est correcte. 13. Le document est mémorisé avant d'être transmis. L'écran indique la capacité mémoire restante, ainsi que le nombre de pages mémorisées. Pour les documents transmis à partir de la vitre d'exposition, un message vous demande si vous souhaitez envoyer une autre page. Sélectionnez OUI  pour ajouter une nouvelle page. Sinon sélectionnez NON. 14. L'imprimante retourne au mode veille. L'écran affiche un message vous indiquant que le mode veille est activé et qu'un envoi en différé est programmé. Envoi d'une télécopie prioritaire La fonction de Fax prioritaire permet d'envoyer un document hautement prioritaire avant le reste des opérations prévues. Le document est mémorisé puis  envoyé dès la fin de l'opération en cours. En outre, un envoi prioritaire interrompt toute opération de multidiffusion entre deux envois (c'est-à-dire à la fin de  l'envoi au numéro A et avant le début de l'envoi au numéro B) ou entre deux tentatives de rappel. 1. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur. OU Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition. Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original". 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Réglez les paramètres de contraste et de résolution qui répondent le mieux à vos besoins en matière de télécopies. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Réglage du contraste du document"et à la "Réglage de la résolution du document". 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FONCTIONS FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX PRIORIT., puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 6. Entrez le numéro du télécopieur distant à l'aide du clavier numérique. Vous pouvez utiliser un numéro abrégé à un, deux ou trois chiffres ou un numéro de groupe. 7. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour confirmer le numéro affiché sur l'écran. Un message vous demande d'entrer un autre numéro.  8. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour entrer le numéro. REMARQUE : Pour annuler la transmission différée, reportez-vous à la section "Annulation d'une télécopie programmée".Ou, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner NON, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 9. Si vous souhaitez donner un nom à la transmission, entrez ce nom. Sinon, passez cette étape. Pour plus d'informations l'entrée du nom à l'aide du clavier numérique, reportez-vous à "Utilisation du clavier numérique pour la saisie de caractères". 10. Appuyez sur OK ( ). Le document est mémorisé avant d'être transmis. L'écran indique la capacité mémoire restante, ainsi que le nombre de pages mémorisées. Pour les documents transmis à partir de la vitre d'exposition, un message vous demande si vous souhaitez envoyer une autre page. Sélectionnez OUI pour ajouter une nouvelle page. Sinon sélectionnez NON. 11. L'imprimante affiche le numéro composé et commence à envoyer le document. Ajout de documents à une télécopie programmée Vous pouvez ajouter des documents à une opération d'envoi en différé précédemment enregistrée dans la mémoire de votre télécopieur. 1. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur. OU Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition. Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original". 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Réglez les paramètres de contraste et de résolution qui répondent le mieux à vos besoins en matière de télécopies. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Réglage du contraste du document"et à la "Réglage de la résolution du document". 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FONCTIONS FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à AJOUTER PAGE. L'écran affiche les tâches réservées en mémoire. 6. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) jusqu'à ce que la tâche de télécopie à laquelle vous voulez ajouter des documents apparaisse, puis  appuyez sur OK ( ). L'imprimante enregistre automatiquement les documents en mémoire tandis que l'écran affiche la capacité de la mémoire et le nombre de pages.  Pour les documents transmis à partir de la vitre d'exposition, un message vous demande si vous souhaitez envoyer une autre page. Sélectionnez OUI pour ajouter une nouvelle page. Sinon sélectionnez NON. 7. Une fois le document mémorisé, l'imprimante affiche le nombre total de pages et le nombre de pages ajoutées, puis retourne au mode veille. Annulation d'une télécopie programmée 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FONCTIONS FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ANNULER TACHE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). L'écran affiche les tâches réservées en mémoire. 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) jusqu'à ce que la tâche de télécopie que vous souhaitez annuler apparaisse, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. À l'affichage du message de confirmation, appuyez sur OK ( ). La tâche sélectionnée est annulée. Fonctions supplémentaires Utilisation du mode de réception sécurisée Vous pouvez empêcher les personnes non autorisées d'accéder à vos télécopies. Vous pouvez activer le mode de télécopie sécurisée à l'aide de l'option Réception sécurisée pour interdire l'impression des télécopies reçues lorsque l'imprimante est sans surveillance. Lorsque le mode de télécopie sécurisé est  activé, toutes les télécopies entrantes sont mémorisées. Lorsque vous le désactivez, vous pouvez alors imprimer toutes les télécopies mémorisées. Pour activer le mode de réception sécurisée : 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FONCT AV. FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ) 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance RECEP PROTEGEE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur OK ( ) à l'affichage de ACTIVE. 5. À l'aide du clavier numérique, entrez un code de quatre chiffres que vous souhaitez utiliser, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 6. Entrez à nouveau le code, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 7. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille. Lorsque vous recevez une télécopie en mode de réception sécurisée, votre imprimante la stocke en mémoire et affiche RECEP PROTEGEE pour vous  avertir qu'une télécopie est mémorisée. Pour imprimer les documents reçus : 1. Accédez au menu Réception sécurisée en suivant les étapes 1 à 3 de "Pour activer le mode de réception sécurisée :". 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher IMPRIMER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Entrez le code de quatre chiffres, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Les télécopies mémorisées sont imprimées. Pour désactiver le mode de réception sécurisée : 1. Accédez au menu RECEP PROTEGEE en suivant les étapes 1 à 3 de "Pour activer le mode de réception sécurisée :". 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher DESACTIVE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Entrez le code de quatre chiffres, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Le mode est désactivé et l'imprimante imprime les télécopies stockées en mémoire. 4. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille. Rapports d'impression Les rapports disponibles sont les suivants :  Liste des numéros du répertoire Cette liste répertorie tous les numéros actuellement enregistrés dans la mémoire du télécopieur comme numéros abrégés et numéros de groupes.  Vous pouvez imprimer cette liste des entrées du répertoire à l'aide de Répertoire ( ) sur le panneau de commande, voir "Impression d'un répertoire". Journal des envois Ce journal contient des informations sur les télécopies récemment envoyées.  Journal des réceptions Ce journal contient des informations sur les télécopies récemment reçues.  Données système REMARQUE : vous pouvez activer le mode de réception sécurisée sans définir de code, mais vos télécopies ne seront pas protégées.Cette liste indique le statut des options configurables. Vous pouvez imprimer cette liste pour confirmer vos changements apportés à l'un des paramètres.  Journal des programmations en cours Cette liste indique tout document actuellement enregistré pour un envoi en différé ou un envoi économique. Elle précise également l'heure de début, le type  d'opération, etc.  Confirmation de message Ce rapport présente le numéro de télécopie, le nombre de pages, la durée de la tâche, le mode de communication et les résultats de la communication. Liste de réception sélective La liste répertorie jusqu'à 10 numéros de télécopie spécifiés comme des numéros de télécopie indésirables à l'aide du menu CFG FAX INDES. ; reportez-vous à  "Options de configuration de télécopie avancées". Lorsque vous activez la réception sélective, les télécopies entrantes provenant de ces numéros peuvent  être bloquées. Cette fonctionnalité reconnaît les six derniers chiffres du numéro de télécopie défini comme l'identifiant d'un appareil distant. Liste du journal de numérisation Ce rapport affiche des informations pour les enregistrements de numérisation réseau, notamment l'adresse IP, la date et l'heure, le nombre de pages  numérisées et le résultat. Il est automatiquement imprimé tous les 50 tâches Netscan. Rapport e-mail Ce journal contient des informations sur les e-mails récemment envoyés. Journal multicommunication Ce journal est imprimé automatiquement après l'envoi d'un document à plusieurs destinataires.  Avis de panne secteur Ce rapport est automatiquement imprimé une fois le courant rétabli après une panne d'alimentation si des données ont été perdues à cause de cette panne. Impression d'un rapport 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance JOURNAUX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ) 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher le rapport ou la liste que vous souhaitez imprimer sur la ligne du bas. l ANNUAIRE : Liste des numéros du répertoire  l JOURN ENVOIS : journal des envois  l JOURN RECEPT. : journal des réceptions  l DONNEES SYST : données système  l TRAV. PROGRAM. : Journal des programmations en cours  l CONF. EMISSION : Confirmation de message  l LISTE REC SEL. : liste de réception sélective  l JOURNAL NUMER. : liste des sessions de numérisation en réseau  l RAPPORT E-MAIL : A envoyé rapport d'e-mail 4. Appuyez sur OK ( ). Les informations sélectionnées sont imprimées.Utilisation des paramètres avancés Votre imprimante contient divers options configurables pour l'envoi et la réception des télécopies. Ces options sont préréglées en usine, mais vous pouvez les  modifier. Pour déterminer la configuration actuelle des options, imprimez la liste des données du système. Pour plus d'informations sur l'impression de la liste,  reportez-vous à "Impression d'un rapport". Changement des options de configuration 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FONCT AV. FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) jusqu'à ce que l'option de menu désirée apparaisse, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Une fois l'option voulue affichée, sélectionnez l'état désiré en appuyant sur le bouton de défilement ( ou ) ou entrez la valeur désirée à l'aide du  clavier numérique. 5. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour enregistrer la langue choisie. 6. Vous pouvez à tout moment quitter le mode de configuration en appuyant sur Annuler ( ). Options de configuration de télécopie avancées option Description RENVOI EMISS. a Vous pouvez définir l'imprimante pour qu'elle transfère systématiquement toutes les télécopies sortantes vers une  destination spécifique, en plus des numéros de télécopie que vous avez entrés. Sélectionnez DESACTIVE pour désactiver cette fonction. Sélectionnez ACTIVE pour activer cette fonction. Vous pouvez spécifier le numéro du télécopieur distant vers lequel  les fax seront renvoyés.  RECEPT ENVOIS a Vous pouvez définir votre imprimante pour transférer des télécopies entrantes vers un autre numéro de télécopie  durant une période spécifique. Une télécopie qui arrive sur votre imprimante est stocké dans la mémoire.  L'imprimante compose ensuite le numéro de télécopie que vous avez spécifié, puis envoie la télécopie. Sélectionnez DESACTIVE pour désactiver cette fonction. Sélectionnez ACTIVE pour activer cette fonction. Vous pouvez définir le numéro de télécopie associé au transfert des  télécopies ainsi que l'heure de début et l'heure de fin de cette opération. En outre, vous pouvez transférer des  télécopies entrantes vers jusqu'à 25 numéros de télécopie. APPEL ECO Vous pouvez configurer votre imprimante pour qu'elle mémorise vos télécopies et les envoie à une heure plus  économique. Pour plus d'informations sur l'envoi économique de télécopies, reportez-vous à la "Mode d'envoi économique". Sélectionnez DESACTIVE pour désactiver cette fonction. Sélectionnez ACTIVE pour activer cette fonction. Vous pouvez définir l'heure et la date de début et de fin en mode  d'envoi économique. CFG FAX INDES. La réception sélective permet au système de refuser des télécopies provenant de stations distantes. Leurs numéros  sont mémorisés comme des numéros indésirables. Cette fonction est utile pour bloquer toute télécopie indésirable. Sélectionnez DESACTIVE pour désactiver cette fonction. N'importe quelle télécopie entrante est acceptée. Sélectionnez ACTIVE pour activer cette fonction. Vous pouvez définir jusqu'à 10 numéros indésirables. Une fois ces  numéros enregistrés, toutes les télécopies qui en sont originaires seront bloquées. RECEP PROTEGEE Vous pouvez empêcher les personnes non autorisées d'accéder à vos télécopies.  Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration de ce mode, voir "Utilisation du mode de réception sécurisée". PREFIXE RECOMP Vous pouvez définir un préfixe d'appel comportant jusqu'à cinq chiffres. Cette option permet notamment d'accéder  aux autocommutateurs privés. Cette option s'avère pratique pour accéder aux autocommutateurs privés. DONNEES RECEPT Cette option permet à l'imprimante d'imprimer automatiquement le numéro de page ainsi que la date et l'heure de  réception au bas de chaque page du document reçu. Sélectionnez DESACTIVE pour désactiver cette fonction. Sélectionnez ACTIVE pour activer cette fonction. MODE ECM Le mode de correction des erreurs apporte une aide en cas de ligne de mauvaise qualité et s'assure que l'envoi des  télécopies vers tout autre télécopieur équipé du même système de correction des erreurs (ECM, Error Correction  Mode) s'effectue sans problème. Si la qualité de la ligne est mauvaise, il faudra plus de temps pour envoyer une télécopie avec le mode ECM activé. Sélectionnez DESACTIVE pour désactiver cette fonction. Sélectionnez ACTIVE pour activer cette fonction. VITESSE MODEM Sélectionnez la vitesse maximale pour le modem à appliquer, si la ligne téléphonique n'arrive pas à supporter une  vitesse de modem supérieure. Vous pouvez sélectionner 33,6, 28,8, 14,4, 12,0, 9,6 ou 4,8 kbps. DESACT. RECEP. Vous pouvez configurer votre imprimante pour qu'elle ne reçoive aucune télécopie entrante. Sélectionnez DESACTIVE pour désactiver cette fonction. Sélectionnez ACTIVE pour activer cette fonction.a. Vous pouvez configurer l'imprimante pour qu'elle transfère toutes les télécopies entrantes et sortantes vers des adresses e-mails spécifiques.  Consultez "Renvoi de fax vers des adresses e-mail" . Utilisation du répondeur téléphonique Vous pouvez connecter un répondeur téléphonique directement à l'arrière de votre imprimante, comme illustré sur la Figure 1. Activez votre imprimante en mode REP/FAX , puis définissez le paramètre NB. SONNERIES à une valeur supérieure à celle du paramètre NB. SONNERIES du  répondeur téléphonique.  l Lorsque le répondeur téléphonique prend l'appel, l'imprimante surveille et prend la ligne s'il s'agit d'une tonalité de télécopie et lance ensuite la  réception de la télécopie.  l Si le répondeur téléphonique est arrêté, l'imprimante passe directement en mode télécopie (FAX) après un nombre prédéfini de sonneries.  l Si vous répondez à l'appel et entendez une tonalité de télécopie, l'imprimante peut répondre à l'appel fax si vous  accédez à FAX COMP. EN LIGNE OUI et appuyez sur Départ ( ), puis raccrochez le récepteur, ou  entrez le code de réception à distance *9*, puis raccrochez le récepteur. Utilisation d'un modem d'ordinateur Si vous souhaitez utiliser le modem de votre ordinateur pour envoyer une télécopie ou établir une connexion à Internet en mode commuté, raccordez  directement le modem de l'ordinateur à l'arrière de votre imprimante avec le répondeur téléphonique comme illustré à la Figure 2.  l Activez votre imprimante en mode REP/FAX , puis définissez le paramètre NB. SONNERIES à une valeur supérieure à celle du paramètre NB. SONNERIES  du répondeur téléphonique.  l Désactivez la fonction réception de télécopies du modem d'ordinateur. l N'utilisez pas le modem de l'ordinateur si votre imprimante envoie ou reçoit une télécopie. l Pour envoyer une télécopie via le modem de l'ordinateur, suivez les indications fournies avec le modem de votre ordinateur et concernant l'application  de télécopie. l Vous pouvez capturer des images à l'aide de votre imprimante et de la fonction Dell ScanDirect, et les envoyer ensuite en utilisant l'application de  télécopie qui est associée au modem de votre ordinateur.Envoi d'une télécopie depuis un PC Vous pouvez envoyer une télécopie depuis votre PC sans utiliser l'imprimante. Pour envoyer une télécopie à partir de votre PC, installez le logiciel PC-Fax, puis personnalisez les paramètres du logiciel. Installation du logiciel Fax-PC Si vous installez des logiciels Dell, sélectionnez Installation personnalisée, puis cliquez sur la case PC-Fax. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la  "Installation du logiciel sous Windows". Personnalisation des paramètres de télécopie 1. Dans le menu Démarrer, sélectionnez Programmes Dell Imprimantes Dell DELL Laser MFP 1815 Configurer PC Fax. 2. Entrez votre nom et numéro de télécopie. 3. Sélectionnez le carnet d'adresses que vous allez utiliser. 4. Sélectionnez l'imprimante multifonction que vous allez utiliser en choisissant Locale ou Réseau. Si vous sélectionnez Réseau, cliquez sur Parcourir recherchez l'imprimante que vous allez utiliser. 5. Cliquer sur OK. Envoi d'une télécopie depuis votre PC 1. Ouvrez le document à envoyer. 2. Dans le menu Fichier, sélectionnez Imprimer. La boîte de dialogue Imprimer (ou Impression) s'affiche. Son apparence peut légèrement varier selon les applications.  3. Dans la fenêtre Impression, sélectionnez Dell PC Fax. 4. Cliquer sur OK. 5. Composez la page de couverture, puis cliquez sur Continuer.6. Entrez les numéros des destinataires, puis cliquez sur Continuer. 7. Sélectionnez la résolution, puis cliquez sur Envoyer fax. Votre PC commence à envoyer les données de télécopie et l'imprimante envoie la télécopie.Recherche d'informations Que cherchez-vous ? Consultez : • Mes pilotes d'imprimante • Mode d'emploi CD Pilotes et Utilitaires Vous pouvez utiliser le CD-ROM Pilotes et Utilitaires pour installer/désinstaller/réinstaller des pilotes et des  utilitaires ou accéder à votre guide d'utilisation/mode d'emploi. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Généralités concernant le logiciel". Votre CD-ROM Pilotes et Utilitaires peut contenir des fichiers Lisezmoi (Readme) présentant des mises à jour  de dernière minute à propos de modifications techniques pour votre imprimante ou des références  techniques avancées pour des utilisateurs expérimentés ou des techniciens.  • Informations en matière de sécurité • Comment utiliser mon imprimante • Informations en matière de garantie manuel du propriétaire  ATTENTION : Lisez et suivez toutes les instructions de sécurité de votre manuel du propriétaire  avant de configurer et d'utiliser votre imprimante. Comment configurer mon imprimante schéma de montage  Code de service express Code de service express Identifier votre imprimante lorsque vous avez recours à support.dell.com ou que vous contactez l'assistance  technique. Saisissez le code de service express pour orienter votre appel lorsque vous contactez l'assistance technique. Le code de service express n'est pas disponible dans tous les pays. • Derniers pilotes pour mon imprimante • Réponses aux questions en matière  d'assistance technique • Documentation pour mon imprimante Site Web de Dell Support Le site Web de Dell Support fournit en ligne plusieurs outils, notamment :  Vous pouvez accéder à Dell Support à l'adresse suivante support.dell.com. Sélectionnez votre région sur la  page d'accueil DELL SUPPORT, et remplissez les détails demandés pour accéder aux outils et informations  d'aide. • Solutions - fournit des conseils en matière de dépannage, des articles de techniciens et  des cours en ligne • Mises à jour - comporte des informations pour la mise à jour des composants comme la mémoire par  exemple • Assistance client - comporte des informations en matière de contact, d'état des commandes, de garantie  et de réparation • Téléchargements - pour télécharger les différents pilotes • Référence - comporte des documents concernant l'imprimante et des spécifications produit Linux Prise en main Le CD-ROM Pilotes et Utilitaires fourni vous propose un package de pilotes MFP Dell permettant d'utiliser votre imprimante avec un ordinateur Linux. Le package de pilotes MFP Dell contient des pilotes d'imprimante et de scanner permettant d'imprimer des documents et de numériser des images. Le package  fournit également des applications puissantes de configuration pour votre imprimante et pour d'autres traitements de documents numérisés. Après avoir installé le pilote sur votre système Linux, le package de pilotes permet de surveiller plusieurs périphériques MFP via un port USB. Les documents  ainsi acquis peuvent être modifiés, imprimés sur les mêmes imprimantes locales MFP ou réseau, envoyés par messagerie électronique, téléchargés sur un  site FTP ou transférés vers un système de reconnaissance optique de caractères (OCR) externe. Avec le package d'installation des pilotes MFP, vous bénéficiez d'un programme d'installation souple et intelligent. Vous n'avez pas besoin de rechercher des  composants supplémentaires qui pourraient être nécessaires pour le logiciel MFP : tous les packages d'installation nécessaires seront transférés et installés  automatiquement sur votre système. Cette fonction est disponible sur un grand nombre des clones Linux les plus connus. Installation du pilote MFP configuration système Systèmes d'exploitation compatibles l Redhat 8, 9 l Mandrake 9, 10 l SuSE 8.2, 9.1 l Fedora Core 1, 2, 3 Configuration matérielle recommandée l Pentium IV 1 GHz ou supérieur l Au moins 256 Mo de RAM l Disque dur d'une capacité d'1 Go ou plus logiciel Prise en main Installation du pilote MFP Utilisation du configurateur MFP Configuration des propriétés de l'imprimante Impression d'un document Numérisation d'un document REMARQUE : Il est également nécessaire de prévoir une partition swap de 300 Mo ou supérieure pour utiliser de grandes images. REMARQUE : Le pilote de numérisation Linux prend en charge la résolution optique maximale.l Linux Kernel 2.4 ou supérieur l Glibc 2.2 ou supérieur l CUPS l SANE Installation du pilote MFP 1. Vérifiez que votre imprimante est bien connectée à votre ordinateur. Mettez l'imprimante et l'ordinateur sous tension. 2. Lorsque la fenêtre d'ouverture de session Administrateur apparaît, entrez root dans le champ Ouverture de session (Login), entrez le mot de passe du  système. 1. Insérez le CD-ROM Pilotes et Utilitaires. Le CD-ROM Pilotes et Utilitaires s'exécute automatiquement. Si CD-ROM du pilote d'impression ne s'exécute pas automatiquement, cliquez sur l'icône   située au bas du bureau. Lorsque l'écran Terminal apparaît,  tapez : [root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux [root@localhost root]#./install.sh 2. Cliquer sur Install. 3. À l'apparition de l'écran d'accueil, cliquez sur Next. 4. L'installation est lancée. Lorsque l'installation est sur le point de se terminer, l'Assistant d'imprimante Ajouter (Add) apparaît automatiquement. Cliquer  sur Next. 5. Si vous connectez votre imprimante à l'aide d'un câble USB, la fenêtre suivante apparaît. Sélectionnez votre imprimante dans le menu déroulant, puis  cliquez sur Next. REMARQUE : Vous devez vous connecter en tant que super-utilisateur (root) pour installer le pilote d'impression. Si vous n'êtes pas un super utilisateur, demandez à votre administrateur système. REMARQUE : Le programme d'installation s'exécute automatiquement si un logiciel d'exécution automatique est installé et configuré sur votre appareil.OU Si vous connectez votre imprimante à l'aide d'un câble réseau, la fenêtre suivante apparaît. Vérifiez l'Network printer, puis sélectionnez votre imprimante dans la liste déroulante. Cliquer sur Next. 6. Si vous connectez votre imprimante via le câble USB, choisissez un port que allez utiliser avec votre imprimante. Une fois le port choisi, cliquez sur Next. OU Si vous connectez votre imprimante à l'aide d'un câble réseau, passez à l'étape suivante. 7. Sélectionnez le pilote, puis cliquez sur Next.8. Entrez le nom, l'emplacement et la description de votre imprimante, puis cliquez sur Next. 9. Cliquez sur Finish pour terminer l'installation. 10. Lorsque la fenêtre suivante apparaît, cliquez sur Finish. Le programme d'installation a ajouté une icône du configurateur MFP sur le bureau et un groupe Dell MFP au menu système pour des besoins pratiques.  Si vous rencontrez la moindre difficulté, reportez-vous à l'aide à l'écran qui est accessible via votre menu système ou à partir des applications Windows du  package d'intallation des pilotes, comme le configurateur MFP ou l'outil de retouche des Images. Désinstallation du pilote MFP 1. Lorsque la fenêtre d'ouverture de session Administrateur apparaît, entrez root dans le champ Ouverture de session (Login), entrez le mot de passe du  système. REMARQUE : Vous devez vous connecter en tant que super-utilisateur (root) pour installer le pilote d'impression. Si vous n'êtes pas un super utilisateur, demandez à votre administrateur système.2. Insérez le CD-ROM Pilotes et utilitaires. Le CD-ROM Pilotes et utilitaires s'exécute automatiquement. Si CD-ROM Pilotes et Utilitaires ne s'exécute pas automatiquement, cliquez sur l'icône   située au bas du bureau. Lorsque l'écran Terminal apparaît,  tapez : [root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux [root@localhost root]#./install.sh 3. Cliquer sur Uninstall. 4. Cliquer sur Next. 5. Cliquer sur Finish. Utilisation du configurateur MFP Le configurateur MFP est un outil destiné principalement à la configuration des périphériques MFP. Comme un périphérique MFP intègre à la fois l'imprimante et  le scanner, le configurateur MFP fournit des options regroupées de manière logique pour les fonctions d'impression et de numérisation. Il intègre également  une option de port MFP spéciale qui permet de réguler l'accès à un combiné imprimante/scanner MFP via un canal d'E/S unique. Après avoir installé le pilote MFP, le programme d'installation crée automatiquement une icône du configurateur MFP sur votre bureau. Ouverture du configurateur MFP 1. Double-cliquez sur MFP Configurator sur le bureau. Vous pouvez également cliquer sur l'icône du menu de démarrage, et sélectionner ensuite Dell MFP, puis MFP Configurator. 2. Cliquez sur les différents boutons du volet Modules pour ouvrir la fenêtre de configuration correspondante. Cliquez sur Help pour utiliser l'aide à l'écran. 3. Après avoir modifié la configuration, cliquez sur Exit pour fermer le configurateur MFP. Volet Printers Configuration REMARQUE : Le programme d'installation s'exécute automatiquement si un logiciel d'exécution automatique est installé et configuré sur votre appareil.La configuration des imprimantes comporte deux onglets : Printers et Classes. Onglet Printers Pour visualiser la configuration actuelle de l'imprimante système, cliquez sur bouton icône de l'imprimante situé sur le côté gauche de la fenêtre du  configurateur MFP. Vous pouvez utiliser les boutons de commande d'imprimante suivants : l Refresh : Actualise la liste des imprimantes disponibles. l Add Printer : Permet d'ajouter une nouvelle imprimante. l Remove Printer : Supprime l'imprimante sélectionnée. l Set as Default : Définit l'imprimante actuelle comme imprimante par défaut. l Stop/Start : Arrête/démarre l'imprimante. l Test : Permet d'imprimer une page de test pour vérifier le bon fonctionnement de l'appareil. l Properties : Permet de visualiser et de modifier les propriétés de l'imprimante. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Configuration des propriétés de l'imprimante". Onglet Classes L'onglet Classes affiche la liste des catégories d'imprimantes disponibles. l Refresh : Actualise la liste des catégories. l Add Class... : permet d'ajouter une nouvelle classe d'imprimantes. l Remove Class : Supprime l'imprimante sélectionnée.Configuration du scanner Cette fenêtre vous permet de surveiller l'activité des scanners, d'afficher la liste des périphériques MFP Dell installés, de modifier des propriétés de  périphériques et de numériser des images. l Properties... : permet de modifier les propriétés de numérisation et de numériser un document. Reportez-vous à la "Numérisation d'un document". l Drivers... : permet de surveiller l'activité des pilotes de numérisation. Configuration des ports de l'imprimante multifonction Cette fenêtre permet d'afficher la liste des ports MFP disponibles, de vérifier l'état de chaque port et de libérer un port qui reste occupé lorsque le processus  propriétaire a été interrompu pour une quelconque raison. l Refresh : Actualise la liste des ports disponibles. l Release port : Libère le port sélectionné. Partage de ports entre imprimantes et scanners Votre imprimante peut être connectée à un ordinateur hôte via le port d'interface parallèle ou le port USB. Puisque le périphérique MFP regroupe plusieurs  périphériques (imprimante et scanner), il est nécessaire d'organiser un accès approprié aux applications "demandeuses" pour ces périphériques via le même  port d'entrée/sortie. Le package de pilotes MFP Dell fourni un mécanisme de partage de port approprié utilisable par des pilotes d'impression et de numérisation Dell. Les pilotes  s'adressent à leurs dispositifs via les ports MFP. Vous pouvez afficher l'état actuel d'un port MFP dans la fenêtre MFP Ports Configuration. Le partage de ports  permet d'éviter l'accès à un bloc fonctionnel du dispositif MFP alors qu'un autre bloc est en cours d'utilisation. Il est vivement recommandé d'utiliser le configurateur MFP lors de l'installation d'une nouvelle imprimante MFP sur votre système. Si vous le faites, vous serez  invité à choisir un port d'E/S pour le nouveau dispositif. Ce choix doit offrir la configuration la plus appropriée pour les fonctionnalités du périphérique MFP.  Pour des scanners MFP, ce sont les pilotes des scanners qui choisissent automatiquement les ports d'E/S afin que le paramétrage approprié soit appliqué par  défaut.Configuration des propriétés de l'imprimante La fenêtre de propriétés associée à l'option de configuration des imprimantes permet de modifier les propriétés de votre appareil dans son rôle d'imprimante. 1. Ouvrez le configurateur MFP. Si nécessaire, passez à la configuration des imprimantes. 2. Sélectionnez votre imprimante dans la liste des imprimantes disponibles, puis cliquez sur Properties. 3. La fenêtre Printer Properties s'ouvre. Les cinq onglets suivants apparaissent en haut de la fenêtre : l General : permet de modifier l'emplacement et le nom de l'imprimante. Le nom entré dans cet onglet s'affiche dans la liste des imprimantes de la  fenêtre Printers configuration.  l Connection : permet de visualiser ou de sélectionner un autre port. Si vous permutez le port de l'imprimante entre un port USB et un port parallèle  (et réciproquement) alors qu'il est en cours d'utilisation, vous devez reconfigurer l'imprimante sous cet onglet. l Driver : permet de visualiser ou de sélectionner un autre pilote d'imprimante. Cliquez sur Options pour définir les options de périphérique par  défaut.  l Jobs : Affiche la liste des tâches d'impression. Cliquez sur Cancel Job pour annuler la tâche sélectionnée, puis activez la case à cocher Show completed jobs pour visualiser les tâches précédentes sur la liste des tâches.  l Classes : indique la classe à laquelle votre imprimante appartient. Cliquez sur Add to Class pour ajouter votre imprimante à une classe spécifique  ou cliquez sur Remove from Class pour supprimer l'imprimante de la classe sélectionnée.  4. Cliquez sur OK pour appliquer les modifications et fermer la fenêtre des propriétés de l'imprimante. Impression d'un document Impression à partir d'applications Vous pouvez réaliser des impressions à partir de nombreuses applications Linux, à l'aide du système CUPS (Common UNIX Printing System). Vous pouvez ainsi  procéder à des impressions sur votre appareil à partir de n'importe quelle application de ce type. 1. Dans l'application que vous utilisez, sélectionnez Print dans le menu File. 2. Sélectionnez Print directement en utilisant lpr. 3. Dans la fenêtre Dell LPR, sélectionnez le nom de modèle de votre appareil dans la liste des imprimantes, puis cliquez sur Properties.4. Modifiez les propriétés de l'imprimante et des tâches d'impression. Les quatre onglets suivants apparaissent en haut de la fenêtre. l General : permet de changer de format de papier, de type de papier et d'orientation des documents, active la fonctionnalité duplex, ajoute des  bannières de début et de fin et modifie le nombre de page par feuille.  l Text : permet de spécifier les marges de la page et de définir des options de texte, comme l'espacement ou des colonnes.  l Graphics : permet de définir des options d'image utilisables lors de l'impression d'images/fichiers, comme des options de couleur, la taille de  l'image ou la position de l'image. l Device : permet de définir la résolution d'impression, la source de papier et la destination.  5. Cliquez sur OK pour appliquer les modifications et fermer la fenêtre des propriétés.  6. Cliquez sur OK dans la fenêtre Dell LPR pour démarrer l'impression. 7. La fenêtre d'impression s'ouvre : elle vous permet de surveiller l'état de la tâche d'impression. Pour abandonner l'impression, cliquez sur Cancel. Impression de fichiers Vous pouvez imprimer plusieurs types de fichiers sur un périphérique MFP Dell à l'aide de l'utilitaire CUPS standard, directement à partir de l'interface de ligne  de commande. L'utilitaire CUPS lpr permet de le faire. Toutefois, le package de pilotes remplace l'outil lpr standard par un programme LPR Dell bien plus convivial. Pour imprimer un fichier : 1. Entrez lpr sur la ligne de commande du shell Linux, puis appuyez sur Enter. La fenêtre LPR Dell apparaît. Lorsque vous tapez seulement lpr, puis appuyez sur Enter, la fenêtre des fichiers sélectionnés à l'impression apparaît en premier. Il vous suffit de  sélectionner les fichiers que vous voulez imprimer, puis de cliquer sur Open. 2. Dans la fenêtre LPR Dell, sélectionnez votre imprimante dans la liste, puis modifiez les propriétés de l'imprimante et de la tâche d'impression. Pour plus d'informations sur la fenêtre de propriétés, reportez-vous à la "Impression d'un document". 3. Cliquez sur OK pour imprimer le document. Numérisation d'un document Vous pouvez numériser un document à l'aide de la fenêtre MFP Configurator. 1. Sur le bureau, double-cliquez sur MFP Configurator. 2. Cliquez sur le bouton pour passer en mode Scanners Configuration. 3. Sélectionnez le scanner dans la liste. Lorsque vous ne disposez que d'un seul périphérique MFP, et que celui-ci est connecté à l'ordinateur et sous tension, le scanner apparaît dans la liste et  est sélectionné automatiquement. Si vous avez deux ou plusieurs scanners attachés à votre imprimante, vous pouvez sélectionner à tout moment le scanner de votre choix. Par exemple,  pendant que l'opération d'acquisition est en cours sur le premier scanner, vous pouvez sélectionner un deuxième scanner, définir les options du  périphérique et lancer l'acquisition d'image. 4. Cliquer sur Properties. 5. Chargez le document à numériser face vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique ou face vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition. 6. Dans la fenêtre des propriétés du scanner, cliquez sur Preview. Le document est numérisé et l'aperçu de l'image apparaît dans le volet d'aperçu. 7. Modifiez les options de numérisation dans les zones Image Quality et Scan Area. l Image Quality : permet de sélectionner la composition de couleurs et la résolution de numérisation pour l'image.  l Scan Area : permet de sélectionner la taille de la page la taille de la page. Vous pouvez définir manuellement la taille de la page à l'aide du  bouton Advanced. Pour utiliser l'un des paramètres prédéfinis des options de numérisation, sélectionnez-le dans la liste déroulante Type de tâche. Pour plus  d'informations sur les paramètres Job Type prédéfinis, voir "Ajout de paramètres Job Type". Pour restaurer le paramétrage par défaut des options de numérisation, cliquez sur Default . 8. Lorsque vous avez terminé, cliquez sur Scan pour lancer la numérisation. La barre d'état apparaît dans l'angle inférieur gauche de la fenêtre ; elle affiche l'état d'avancement de la numérisation. Pour annuler la numérisation,  REMARQUE : Le nom du scanner qui apparaît dans Scanners Configuration peut être différent du nom du périphérique.cliquez sur Cancel. 9. L'image numérisée apparaît dans la nouvelle fenêtre de l'outil de retouche d'images. Pour modifier l'image numérisée, utilisez la barre d'outils. Pour plus d'informations sur la modification d'images, voir "Utilisation de l'outil de retouche d'images". 10. Lorsque vous avez terminé, cliquez sur Save sur la barre d'outils. 11. Sélectionnez le répertoire de fichiers dans lequel enregistrer l'image et entrez le nom du fichier.  12. Cliquer sur Save. Ajout de paramètres Job Type Vous pouvez enregistrer les paramètres des options de numérisation afin de les réutiliser lors d'une prochaine tâche de numérisation. Pour enregistrer un nouveau paramètre Job Type : 1. Modifiez les options dans la fenêtre Scanner Properties. 2. Cliquer sur Save as. 3. Entrez le nom du paramètre. 4. Cliquer sur OK. Le paramètre est ajouté à la liste déroulante des paramètres enregistrés (Saved Settings). Pour enregistrer un paramètre Job Type pour une prochaine tâche de numérisation : 1. Dans la liste déroulante Job Type, sélectionnez le paramètre à utiliser. 2. Cliquer sur Save. Lorsque vous ouvrez à nouveau la fenêtre Scanner Properties, le paramètre enregistré est sélectionné automatiquement pour la tâche de numérisation. Pour supprimer un paramètre Job Type : 1. Dans la liste déroulante Job Type, sélectionnez le paramètre à supprimer. 2. Cliquer sur Delete. Le paramètre est supprimé de la liste. Utilisation de l'outil de retouche d'images La fenêtre Image Editor permet de modifier les images numérisées, à l'aide de commandes de menu et d'outils.Pour modifier une image, vous pouvez utiliser les outils suivants : Pour plus d'informations sur le programme de retouche d'images, reportez-vous à l'aide à l'écran. Outils Fonction Enregistre l'image. Annule la dernière action. Restaure l'action annulée. Applique un zoom arrière à l'image. Applique un zoom avant à l'image. Permet de faire défiler l'image. Rogne la zone d'image sélectionnée. Permet de mettre la taille de l'image à l'échelle ; vous pouvez entrer la taille manuellement ou définir le rapport pour  une mise à l'échelle proportionnelle, verticalement ou horizontalement. Permet de faire tourner l'image ; vous pouvez sélectionner le nombre de degrés dans le menu déroulant. Permet de basculer l'image de position verticale en position horizontale. Permet de régler la luminosité et le contraste de l'image ou d'inverser l'image. Affiche les propriétés de l'image.Macintosh Vous pouvez utiliser cette imprimante sur les systèmes Macintosh dotés d'une interface USB ou d'une carte d'interface réseau 10/100 Base-TX. Lorsque vous imprimez un fichier sous Macintosh, vous pouvez utiliser le pilote PostScript en installant le fichier PPD.  Installation du logiciel sur Macintosh Le CD-ROM Pilotes et Utilitaires fourni avec votre imprimante contient un fichier PPD qui vous permet d'utiliser le pilote PostScript pour des impressions sur un ordinateur Macintosh. Vérifiez la configuration de votre système avant d'installer le logiciel d'impression : Installation du pilote de l'imprimante 1. Vérifiez que votre imprimante est connectée à l'ordinateur. Mettez l'ordinateur et l'imprimante sous tension. 2. Insérez le CD-ROM Pilotes et Utilitaires fourni avec votre imprimante dans le lecteur de CD-ROM. 3. Double-cliquez sur l'icône CD-ROM qui apparaît sur le bureau du Macintosh. 4. Double-cliquez sur le dossier MAC_Installer. 5. Double-cliquez sur le dossier MAC_Printer. 6. Double-cliquez sur l'icône Dell Laser MFP Installer. 7. Une fois l'installation terminée, cliquez sur Quit. Configuration de l'imprimante La configuration de votre imprimante dépend du câble que vous utilisez pour connecter l'imprimante à votre ordinateur : le câble réseau ou le câble USB. Avec une connexion réseau 1. Suivez les instructions de la section "Installation du logiciel sur Macintosh" pour installer le fichier PPD et le fichier de filtre sur votre ordinateur. 2. Ouvrez Print Setup Utility dans le dossier Utilities. 3. Cliquez sur Add dans la liste des imprimantes. 4. Sélectionnez l'onglet IP Printing. 5. Entrez l'adresse IP de l'imprimante dans le champ Printer Address. 6. Entrez le nom de la file d'attente dans le champ Queue Name. Si vous n'arrivez pas à déterminer le nom de la file d'attente pour votre serveur d'impression, essayez d'utiliser la file d'attente par défaut en premier. 7. Sélectionnez Dell dans Printer Model et votre imprimante dans Model Name. 8. Cliquer sur Add. 9. L'adresse IP de votre imprimante apparaît sur la liste des imprimantes ; elle est définie comme étant l'imprimante par défaut.  Installation du logiciel sur Macintosh configuration de l'imprimante Impression Numérisation Caractéristique Configuration Système d'exploitation Mac OS 10.3.x ou supérieur Mémoire vive (RAM) 128 Mo Espace disque disponible 200 MoAvec une connexion USB 1. Suivez les instructions de la section "Installation du logiciel sur Macintosh" pour installer le fichier PPD et le fichier de filtre sur votre ordinateur. 2. Ouvrez Print Setup Utility dans le dossier Utilities. 3. Cliquez sur Add dans la liste des imprimantes. 4. Sélectionnez l'onglet USB. 5. Sélectionnez Dell dans Printer Model et votre imprimante dans Model Name. 6. Cliquer sur Add. Votre imprimante apparaît sur la liste des imprimantes ; elle est définie comme étant l'imprimante par défaut. Impression Impression d'un document Lorsque vous imprimez à partir d'un ordinateur Macintosh, vous devez vérifier le paramétrage du logiciel d'impression dans chacune des applications que vous  utilisez. Pour imprimer à partir d'un Macintosh, procédez comme suit : 1. Ouvrez une application Macintosh, puis sélectionnez le fichier à imprimer. 2. Ouvrez le menu File, puis cliquez sur Page Setup (Document Setup dans certaines applications). 3. Choisissez le format de papier, l'orientation, l'impression à l'échelle ainsi que d'autres options, puis cliquez sur OK. 4. Ouvrez le menu File, puis cliquez sur Print. 5. Sélectionnez le nombre de copies et indiquez les numéros des pages à imprimer. 6. Cliquez sur Print, une fois le paramétrage des options terminé.  Modification des paramètres d'impression Lorsque vous imprimez, vous pouvez utiliser des options d'impression avancées. Dans votre application Macintosh, sélectionnez l'option Print du menu File. Paramètres de mise en page L'onglet Mise en page permet de présenter le document tel qu'il sera sur la page imprimée. Vous pouvez imprimer plusieurs pages par feuille. Dans la liste déroulante Presets, sélectionnez Layout pour accéder aux fonctionnalités suivantes. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Impression de plusieurs pages sur une seule feuille"et à la "Impression recto verso".Impression de plusieurs pages sur une seule feuille Vous pouvez imprimer plus d'une page sur une seule feuille de papier. Cette option vous permet d'imprimer les brouillons en mode économique. 1. Dans votre application Macintosh, sélectionnez l'option Print du menu File. 2. Sélectionnez Layout. 3. Dans la liste déroulante Pages per Sheet, sélectionnez le nombre de pages à imprimer sur une feuille de papier. 4. Sélectionnez l'ordre des pages à l'aide de l'option Layout Direction. Pour imprimer une bordure autour de chaque page, sélectionnez l'option de votre choix dans la liste déroulante Border. 5. Cliquez sur Print, et l'imprimante imprime le nombre de pages sélectionnées sur une face de chaque feuille de papier.  Impression recto verso Vous pouvez imprimer sur les deux faces de chaque feuille. Avant d'imprimer en mode recto verso, vous devez sélectionner le bord de reliure de votre  document final. Les options de reliure disponibles sont les suivantes : Long-Edge Binding : Mise en page conventionnelle dans le style d'un livre. Short-Edge Binding : Type souvent utilisé avec des calendrier. 1. Dans votre application Macintosh, sélectionnez l'option Print du menu File. 2. Sélectionnez la Layout. ATTENTION : Si vous avez sélectionné l'impression recto verso, puis tentez d'imprimer plusieurs exemplaires d'un documents, l'imprimante peut ne pas imprimer le document de la façon que vous voulez Avec le mode de copie "assemblé", si votre document comporte des pages  impaires, la dernière page de la première copie et la première page de la copie suivante seront imprimées de part et d'autre d'une même feuille.  Avec le mode de copie "désassemblé", la même page sera imprimée de part et d'autre de la feuille. Par conséquent, si vous souhaitez effectuer  plusieurs copies recto verso d'un document, vous devez les effectuer une par une, comme des tâches séparées. 3. A l'aide de l'option Two Sided Printing, sélectionnez une orientation pour la reliure. 4. Cliquez sur Print et l'imprimante imprime sur les deux faces du papier. Paramétrage des options d'impression L'onglet Printer Features fournit des options permettant de sélectionner le type de papier et de régler la qualité d'impression. Dans la liste déroulante Presets, sélectionnez Printer Features pour accéder aux fonctionnalités suivantes. Image Mode Le mode image permet à l'utilisateur d'améliorer les sorties d'impression. Les options disponibles sont Normal et Rendu texte. Fit to page Cette fonctionnalité de l'imprimante vous permet de mettre à l'échelle votre tâche d'impression sur tout format de papier, quelle que soit la taille du document  numérisé. Elle peut s'avérer utile pour vérifier les détails d'un petit document. Paper Type Vérifiez que Paper Type est bien défini à Printer Default. Si vous utilisez un support différent, sélectionnez le type correspondant. Resolution Vous pouvez sélectionner la résolution d'impression. Plus la valeur est élevée, plus les caractères et les graphiques imprimés sont nets. Toutefois, une  résolution élevée peut augmenter le temps d'impression d'un document.Numérisation Pour numériser des documents à l'aide d'autre logiciels, vous devrez alors utiliser des logiciels compatibles TWAIN, comme Adobe PhotoDeluxe ou Adobe Photoshop. La première fois que vous numérisé un document avec votre imprimante, sélectionnez votre source TWAIN dans votre application. Le processus de numérisation de base comprend plusieurs étapes : 1. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur. OU Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition. Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original". 2. Ouvrez une application, telle que PhotoDeluxe ou Photoshop. 3. Ouvrez la fenêtre TWAIN et définissez les options de numérisation. 4. Numérisez le document et enregistrez l'image numérisée. REMARQUE : Vous devez suivre les instructions du programme pour l'acquisition d'une image. Reportez-vous au mode d'emploi de l'application.Maintenance Effacement de la mémoire Vous pouvez effacer de façon sélective des informations stockées dans la mémoire de votre imprimante. 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MAINTENANCE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance EFFACER REGL., puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) jusqu'à ce que l'élément à effacer apparaisse. l TOUS REGLAGES : efface toutes les données stockées dans la mémoire et rétablit tous les paramètres par défaut.  l CONFIG PAPIER : Rétablit toutes les options de configuration papier par défaut.  l CONFIG. COPIE : Rétablit toutes les options de configuration de copie par défaut.  l CONFIG. FAX : Restaure les valeurs par défaut de toutes les options de configuration de télécopie.  l FONCTIONS FAX : annule toutes les programmations de télécopie enregistrées dans la mémoire de l'imprimante multifonction.  l FONCT AV. FAX : Restaure les valeurs par défaut de toutes les options de télécopie avancée.  l JOURN ENVOIS : efface toutes les données concernant vos envois de télécopies.  l JOURN RECEPT. : efface toutes les données concernant vos réceptions de télécopies.  l CARNET ADRES. : Efface les entrées d'e-mail stockées en mémoire.  l ANNUAIRE : efface les numéros abrégés ou les numéros de groupes enregistrés dans la mémoire.  5. Appuyez sur OK ( ). La mémoire sélectionnée est effacée et une invite vous demande si vous souhaitez supprimer l'élément suivant. 6. Répétez les étapes 4 et 5 pour effacer un autre élément. OU Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille. Sauvegarde des données La date qui figure dans la mémoire de l'imprimante peut être effacée accidentellement par une panne de courant ou une défaillance du stockage. La  sauvegarde vous permet de protéger vos entrées du carnet d'adresse/répertoire et les paramètres du système en stockant ces informations sur une clé de  mémoire USB. Sauvegarde des données 1. Insérez la clé de mémoire USB dans le port de mémoire USB de votre imprimante. 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG MACHINE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG EXPORT., puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Les données sont sauvegardées sur la clé de mémoire USB. Effacement de la mémoire Sauvegarde des données Nettoyage de votre imprimante multifonction Entretien de la cartouche d'encre Remplacement des pièces Commande de consommables5. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille. Restauration des données 1. Insérez la clé de mémoire USB dans le port de mémoire USB de votre imprimante. 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG MACHINE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG IMPORT., puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Le fichier de sauvegarde est stocké sur la clé de mémoire USB. 5. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille. Nettoyage de votre imprimante multifonction Pour maintenir une bonne qualité d'impression, suivez les procédures de nettoyage décrites ci-après chaque fois que vous remplacez la cartouche d'encre ou  qu'un problème lié à la qualité d'impression se produit. Nettoyage de la partie externe Nettoyez le boîtier de l'imprimante avec un chiffon doux, humide et non pelucheux. Évitez de laisser goutter de l'eau sur l'imprimante ou à l'intérieur de  l'imprimante. Nettoyage de la partie interne Du papier, du toner et des particules de poussières risquent de s'accumuler à l'intérieur de l'imprimante et d'affecter la qualité d'impression en créant des  problèmes comme des bavures ou des taches d'encre. Nettoyez la partie interne de l'imprimante pour éviter ce genre de problèmes. 1. Coupez l'imprimante et débranchez le câble d'alimentation électrique. Laissez suffisamment de temps à l'imprimante pour qu'elle refroidisse. 2. Ouvrez le capot avant et retirez la cartouche de toner. Posez-la sur une surface plane et propre. 3. Avec un chiffon sec et non pelucheux, essuyez la poussière et les particules d'encre du logement de la cartouche et tout autour. REMARQUE : Ne touchez pas le rouleau de transfert situé sous la cartouche de toner lors du nettoyage de l'intérieur de l'imprimante. Vous risqueriez  de laisser des empreintes qui peuvent entraîner des problèmes de qualité d'impression. ATTENTION : Les solvants de nettoyage contenant de l'alcool ou d'autres substances fortes risquent de décolorer ou de lézarder le boîtier de  l'imprimante ATTENTION : Évitez d'exposer la cartouche d'encre à la lumière plus de 2 ou 3 minutes.  ATTENTION : Evitez de toucher la partie inférieure verte de la cartouche d'encre. Utilisez la poignée de la cartouche pour éviter de toucher  la zone en question. 4. Repérez la vitre (unité de numérisation laser) dans la partie supérieure du compartiment de la cartouche, puis essuyez-la délicatement avec un morceau  de coton. 5. Remettez la cartouche d'encre en place et fermez le capot de l'imprimante. 6. Branchez le cordon d'alimentation et mettez l'imprimante sous tension. Nettoyage du scanner Le maintien de la vitre du scanner et du chargeur automatique propre est la garantie de copies, numérisations et d'envoi de télécopies de la plus haute  qualité. Dell recommande de nettoyer le scanner chaque matin et durant la journée, si nécessaire. 1. Humidifiez légèrement un chiffon doux non pelucheux ou une serviette en papier avec de l'eau. 2. Ouvrez le capot. 3. Essuyez la vitre d'exposition et la vitre de numérisation jusqu'à ce qu'elles soient propres et sèches. 4. Essuyez la face inférieure du couvercle de document blanc et le fond blanc jusqu'à ce qu'ils soient propres et secs. ATTENTION : Évitez de toucher le rouleau de transfert à l'intérieur de l'imprimante. Vous risqueriez de laisser des empreintes qui peuvent entraîner des problèmes de qualité d'impression.  REMARQUE : Si des lignes sont tracées sur des documents copiés ou télécopiés, recherchez sur la vitre du scanner et du chargeur automatique la présence de particules. 1 Fond blanc 2 Couvercle du chargeur de document 3 Vitre du chargeur 4 Vitre d'exposition5. Fermez le couvercle. Entretien de la cartouche d'encre Stockage de la cartouche d'encre Conservez la cartouche d'encre dans l'emballage d'origine jusqu'à l'installation. Evitez de stocker la cartouche d'encre :  l Températures supérieures à 40 °C l Dans un environnement soumis à des variations importantes en termes d'humidité ou de température l Directement à la lumière du soleil l Dans des endroits poussiéreux l Dans une voiture sur une trop longue période l Dans un environnement comportant des gaz corrosifs l Dans un environnement iodé Redistribution de l'encre Lorsque la cartouche d'encre est presque épuisée, des stries blanches ou des zones d'impression plus claires font leur apparition. L'écran LCD affiche le  message d'avertissement, TONER FAIBLE. Secouez la cartouche de toner 5 à 6 fois latéralement pour répartir l'encre uniformément à l'intérieur de celle-ci et améliorer temporairement la qualité d'impression. 1. Ouvrez le capot avant. 2. Retirez la cartouche usagée. 3. Secouez la cartouche de toner 5 à 6 fois latéralement pour répartir l'encre uniformément à l'intérieur de celle-ci. REMARQUE : Si vous tachez vos vêtements avec de l'encre, éliminez-la avec un chiffon sec et lavez vos vêtements à l'eau froide. L'eau chaude fixe  l'encre sur le tissu.4. En maintenant la cartouche de toner par la poignée, insérez lentement la cartouche dans l'ouverture de l'imprimante. 5. Les onglets placés sur les côtés de la cartouche et les rainures correspondantes de l'imprimante vont permettre de guider la cartouche dans sa position  correcte jusqu'à ce qu'elle se verrouille complètement à son emplacement. 6. Fermez le capot avant. Assurez-vous qu'il est bien fermé. Remplacement de la cartouche d'encre En cas d'épuisement définitif du toner, les travaux d'impression ou de copie ne produiront que des pages blanches. Dans ce cas, les télécopies entrantes ne  sont que conservées en mémoire et non imprimées. Vous devez alors remplacer la cartouche de toner.  Commandez une cartouche d'encre supplémentaire afin de pouvoir en disposer une fois la cartouche actuelle épuisée. Pour commander des cartouches de  toner, reportez-vous à la section "Commande de consommables". Pour remplacer la cartouche de toner : 1. Ouvrez le capot avant. 2. Retirez la cartouche usagée. 3. Retirez la nouvelle cartouche de toner de son emballage. 4. Retirez les bandes adhésives et secouez fermement la cartouche de chaque côté afin de répartir uniformément le toner. Conservez la boîte et l'emballage. ATTENTION : Evitez de toucher la partie inférieure verte de la cartouche d'encre. Utilisez la poignée de la cartouche pour éviter de toucher  la zone en question. REMARQUE : L'imprimante laser Dell 1815 peut imprimer des télécopies quand la cartouche de toner est vide. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à  la section "Non-prise en compte du message Cartouche vide". ATTENTION : Pour de meilleurs résultats, utilisez des cartouches de toner Dell. Nous ne garantissons pas la qualité d'impression ni la fiabilité des  imprimantes si vous n'utilisez pas des consommables Dell. 5. En maintenant la cartouche de toner par la poignée, insérez lentement la cartouche dans l'ouverture de l'imprimante. 6. Les onglets placés sur les côtés de la cartouche et les rainures correspondantes de l'imprimante vont permettre de guider la cartouche dans sa position  correcte jusqu'à ce qu'elle se verrouille complètement à son emplacement. 7. Fermez le capot avant. Assurez-vous qu'il est bien fermé. Nettoyage du tambour Si vous constatez la présence de stries ou de petites taches sur vos impressions, le tambour OPC (Organic Photo Conductor) de la cartouche de toner a peut-être  besoin d'être nettoyé. 1. Avant de lancer la procédure de nettoyage, vérifiez que l'imprimante multifonction contient bien du papier.  2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MAINTENANCE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). La première option de menu disponible NETT. TAMBOUR apparaît. 4. Appuyez deux fois sur OK ( ). Votre choix est confirmé à l'écran. L'imprimante imprime une page de nettoyage. Les particules d'encre situées à la surface du tambour sont déposées sur le papier.  5. Si le problème persiste, répétez les étapes 3 à 4 jusqu'à ce que le papier cesse de récupérer des particules d'encre. Non-prise en compte du message Cartouche vide REMARQUE : Si vous tachez vos vêtements avec de l'encre, éliminez-la avec un chiffon sec et lavez vos vêtements à l'eau froide. L'eau chaude fixe  l'encre sur le tissu. ATTENTION : Evitez de toucher la partie inférieure verte de la cartouche d'encre. Utilisez la poignée de la cartouche pour éviter de toucher  la zone en question. Lorsque la cartouche de toner est presque vide, l'imprimante enregistre les télécopies entrantes en mémoire sans les imprimer. Pour imprimer la télécopier alors  que le niveau de toner est faible, vous pouvez configurer l'imprimante pour qu'elle continue à imprimer des télécopies entrantes même si la qualité de  l'impression n'est pas aussi satisfaisante. 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FONCTIONS FAX, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance IGNORER TONER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner l'état désiré, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille. Remplacement des pièces De temps en temps, vous devez remplacer les rouleaux et l'unité de chauffe pour maintenir les performances de votre imprimante à leur maximum et éviter  des problèmes de qualité d'impression et d'alimentation en papier résultant de l'usure de pièces. Les éléments suivants doivent être remplacés après l'impression du nombre de pages indiqué. Pour vous procurer des pièces de rechange, contactez votre revendeur Dell ou le point de vente où vous avez fait l'acquisition de votre imprimante. Nous  Caractéristique Feuilles imprimées (en moyenne) patin du CAD Environ 20 000 pages Rouleau de transfert Environ 70 000 pages Unité de chauffe  Environ 80 000 pages Patin du bac Environ 250 000 pages Rouleau d'entraînement  Environ 150 000 pagesrecommandons vivement de confier l'installation de ces éléments à un professionnel de service formé. Remplacement du patin de chargeur automatique Vous pouvez vous procurer un patin de chargeur automatique auprès de votre revendeur Dell ou au point de vente où vous avez fait l'acquisition de votre  imprimante. 1. Ouvrez le couvercle du CAD. 2. Faites pivoter le manchon situé à l'extrémité droite du rouleau du CAD en direction du CAD et retirez le rouleau de la fente. 3. Retirez le patin du chargeur automatique comme le montre l'illustration. 4. Installez un nouveau patin de chargeur automatique. 5. Alignez l'extrémité gauche du rouleau du chargeur automatique avec l'emplacement, puis poussez l'extrémité droite du rouleau du chargeur  automatique dans l'emplacement de droite. Faites pivoter le manchon situé à l'extrémité droite du rouleau en direction du chargeur automatique. 6. Fermez le chargeur. Commande de consommables Vous pouvez commander des consommables via Dell™ Toner Management System ou l'outil Web de configuration d'imprimante Dell.Si votre imprimante est connectée à un réseau, entrez l'adresse IP de votre imprimante dans votre navigateur Web ou ouvrez le Centre de surveillance d'état  du réseau (voir "Centre de surveillance d'état du réseau") pour lancer l'outil Web de configuration d'imprimante Dell, puis cliquez sur le lien de commande d'encre . 1. Double-cliquez sur l'cône Renouvellement de commande de cartouche d'encre Dell 1815dn sur le bureau. OU 2. A partir du menu Démarrer, cliquez sur Programmes ou Tous les programmes DELL Imprimantes Dell DELL Laser MFP 1815 Renouvellement de commande de cartouche d'encre Dell 1815dn. Allez à premier.dell.com ou www.premier.dell.com pour commander des consommables en ligne. Si vous commandez par téléphone, appelez le numéro apparaît sous l'en-tête Par téléphone. OU 3. Si votre imprimante est connectée à un réseau, entrez l'adresse IP de l'imprimante dans votre navigateur Web pour lancer l'outil Web de configuration d'imprimante Dell, puis cliquez sur le lien de commande d'encre . a. La durée de vie d'une cartouche de toner Dell de capacité standard est de 3 000 pages et celle d'une cartouche de toner Dell de haute capacité est de  5 000 pages. La fenêtre Commander des cartouches d'encre  s'affiche. REMARQUE : premier.dell.com est le site sécurisé, personnalisable, d'approvisionnement et de support de Dell pour ses clients bénéficiant d'un  service étendu. REMARQUE : Reportez-vous au tableau suivant pour commandes de cartouches de toner. Cartouche de toner Numéro de pièce Cartouche de toner Dell de capacité standard a NF485 Cartouche de toner Dell de haute capacité RF223Mise en réseau Partage de l'imprimante sur un réseau Imprimante partagée en mode local Vous pouvez relier l'imprimante directement à un ordinateur désigné, appelé "ordinateur hôte" sur le réseau. Les autres utilisateurs du réseau peuvent dès  lors partager l'imprimante via une connexion réseau Windows 98, Me, 2000, XP, Server 2003, Vista ou NT 4.0. Imprimante connectée à un réseau câblé Votre imprimante dispose d'une interface réseau intégrée. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Connexion de l'imprimante au réseau". Impression en réseau Quelle que soit la connexion de l'imprimante (locale ou en réseau), vous devez installer le logiciel Dell Laser MFP 1815dn sur chaque ordinateur qui imprime des documents avec cette imprimante. Configuration de l'imprimante partagée en mode local Vous pouvez relier l'imprimante directement à un ordinateur désigné, appelé "ordinateur hôte" sur le réseau. Les autres utilisateurs du réseau peuvent dès  lors partager votre imprimante via une connexion réseau Windows 98, Me, 2000, XP, Server 2003, Vista ou NT 4.0. Sous Windows 98/Me Configuration de l'ordinateur hôte 1. Démarrez Windows. 2. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer et pointez sur Panneau de configuration, puis double-cliquez sur l'icône Réseau. 3. Cliquez sur la boîte Partage de fichiers et d'imprimantes, activez la case à cocher située en regard de Je veux pouvoir permettre à d'autres  utilisateurs d'imprimer sur mon imprimante, puis cliquez sur OK. 4. Cliquez sur Démarrer et pointez sur Imprimantes dans Paramètres. Cliquez deux fois sur le nom de votre imprimante. 5. Cliquez sur Propriétés dans le menu Imprimante. 6. Cliquez sur l'onglet Partage et activez la case à cocher Partager en tant que. Renseignez le champ Nom du partage, puis cliquez sur OK. Configuration de l'ordinateur client 1. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sélectionnez Explorer. 2. Ouvrez votre dossier réseau dans la colonne de gauche.  3. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur nom partagé, puis cliquez sur Capturer le port imprimante. 4. Sélectionnez le port de votre choix, activez la case à cocher Se reconnecter à l'ouverture de session, puis cliquez sur OK. Partage de l'imprimante sur un réseau Configuration de l'imprimante partagée en mode local Configuration de l'imprimante partagée en mode local5. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer et pointez sur Paramètres, puis sur Imprimantes. 6. Double-cliquez sur l'icône de votre imprimante. 7. Cliquez sur le menu Imprimante et pointez sur Propriétés. 8. Cliquez sur l'onglet Détails, pointez sur le port de l'imprimante, puis cliquez sur OK. Sous Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista Configuration de l'ordinateur hôte 1. Démarrez Windows.  2. Sous Windows NT 4.0/2000, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer Paramètres Imprimantes. Sous Windows XP/Server 2003, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer et pointez sur Imprimantes et télécopieurs.  Pour Windows Vista, cliquer sur et cliquer sur Panneau de configuration Matériel et Son Imprimantes. 3. Double-cliquez sur l'icône de votre imprimante.  4. Cliquez sur le menu Imprimante et pointez sur Partage. 5. Sous Windows NT 4.0, activez la case à cocher Partagé. Sous Windows 2000, activez la case à cocher Partager en tant que. Sous Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista, activez la case à cocher Partager cette imprimante. 6. Renseignez le champ Nom du partage, puis cliquez sur OK. Configuration de l'ordinateur client 1. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le bouton Démarrer, puis pointez sur Explorer. 2. Ouvrez votre dossier réseau dans la colonne de gauche.  3. Cliquez sur le nom de partage. 4. Pour Windows NT 4.0/2000, à partir du bouton Démarrer, cliquez sur Paramètres et pointez sur Imprimantes. Pour Windows XP/Server 2003, à partir du bouton Démarrer, cliquez et pointez vers Imprimantes et télécopieurs. Pour Windows Vista, cliquer sur et cliquer sur Panneau de configuration Matériel et Son Imprimantes. 5. Double-cliquez sur l'icône de votre imprimante. 6. Cliquez sur le menu Imprimante et pointez sur Propriétés. 7. Cliquez sur l'onglet Ports et pointez sur Ajouter un port. 8. Cliquez sur Port local et pointez sur Ajouter un port. 9. Renseignez le champ Entrez un nom de port et entrez le nom partagé.  10. Cliquez sur OK et pointez sur Fermer. 11. Sous Windows NT 4.0, cliquez sur OK. Sous Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, cliquez sur Appliquer et pointez sur OK. Configuration de l'imprimante partagée en mode local Vous devez configurer les protocoles réseau sur l'imprimante que vous souhaitez utiliser comme imprimante réseau. Les protocoles peuvent être configurés à  l'aide de deux méthodes différentes : 1 Via des programmes d'administration réseau Vous pouvez configurer les paramètres du serveur d'impression de votre imprimante et le gérer à l'aide des programmes suivants :l Embedded Web Service (Service Web intégré) : Serveur Web intégré au serveur d'impression réseau, qui vous permet de : Configurer les paramètres réseaux nécessaires à l'imprimante pour se connecter à différents environnements de réseau. l SetIP : Programme utilitaire permettant de sélectionner une carte d'interface réseau et de configurer manuellement des adresses utilisables avec le  protocole TCP/IP. 2 Via le panneau de commande Vous pouvez configurer les paramètres réseau de base par le biais du panneau de commande de l'imprimante. Utilisez le panneau en question pour : l Impression d'une page de configuration réseau l Configuration du protocole TCP/IP l Configurer EtherTalk Configuration des paramètres réseau à partir du panneau de commande Impression d'une page de configuration réseau La page de configuration du réseau affiche le mode de configuration de la carte d'interface réseau pour votre imprimante. Les paramètres par défaut  conviennent à la plupart des applications. 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG RESEAU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance IMPR DONN. SYS, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). La première option de menu disponible, OUI apparaît sur la ligne du bas d'écran. 4. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour imprimer une page de configuration réseau. Une page de configuration réseau est imprimée. Configuration des protocoles réseau Caractéristique Configuration Interface réseau 10/100 Base-TX Système d'exploitation réseau Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista Protocole réseau • TCP/IP sous Windows • Port9100 sous Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista Serveur d'adressage dynamique • DHCP, BOOTP Lorsque vous installez l'imprimante et la mettez sous tension la première fois, tous les protocoles réseau compatibles sont activés. Si un protocole réseau est  activé, l'imprimante peut activement effectuer des transmissions sur le réseau même lorsque le protocole n'est pas utilisé. Le trafic réseau peut s'en trouver  légèrement accru. Pour éliminer un trafic inutile, vous devez désactiver les protocoles inutilisés. 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG RESEAU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIGURATION, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) jusqu'à ce que le protocole désiré apparaisse, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. Si vous avez sélectionné ETHERNET, sélectionnez une vitesse de réseau. Si vous avez sélectionné TCP/IP, attribuez un adresse TCP/IP. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Configuration du protocole TCP/IP". Si vous avez sélectionné ETHERTALK, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour modifier le paramétrage pour ACTIVE (activé) ou  DESACTIVE (désactivé). 6. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour enregistrer la langue choisie. Configuration du protocole TCP/IP l Adressage statique : L'adresse TCP/IP est assignée manuellement par l'administrateur système. l Adressage dynamique BOOTP/DHCP (par défaut) : L'adresse TCP/IP est assignée automatiquement par le serveur DHCP ou BOOTP de votre réseau. Adressage statique Pour entrer l'adresse TCP/IP à partir du panneau de commande de votre imprimante, procédez comme suit :  1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG RESEAU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIGURATION, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance TCP/IP, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). La première option de menu disponible, MANUEL, apparaît et appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. La première option de menu disponible, ADRESSE IP apparaît. 6. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder au menu ADRESSE IP. 7. Entrez les chiffres à l'aide du clavier numérique et utilisez le bouton de défilement ( ou ) pour vous déplacer entre les chiffres, puis appuyez sur  OK ( ). 8. Entrez d'autres paramètres, comme le MASQUE SS RES., PASSERELLE ou DNS PRINCIPAL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 9. Après avoir entré tous les paramètres, appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode veille. Une adresse IP se compose de 4 octets. Adressage dynamique (BOOTP/DHCP) Pour attribuer l'adresse TCP/IP automatiquement à l'aide du serveur DHCP ou BOOTP de votre réseau. 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG RESEAU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIGURATION, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance TCP/IP, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance DHCP, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Pour attribuer l'adresse à partir du serveur BOOTP, appuyez sur OK ( ) lorsque BOOTP s'affiche. Restauration de la configuration réseau Vous pouvez rétablir la configuration réseau par défaut. 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG RESEAU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance EFFACER REGL., puis appuyez sur OK ( ). La première option de menu disponible, OUI apparaît sur la ligne du bas d'écran. 4. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour restaurer la configuration réseau.  5. Eteignez l'imprimante, puis rallumez-la ou réinitialisez la carte d'interface réseau.Installation des Accessoires Précautions à prendre lors de l'installation des accessoires de l'imprimante Débranchement du cordon d'alimentation : Ne retirez jamais le panneau de commande de l'imprimante lorsque celle-ci est branchée. Pour éviter tout risque de choc électrique, débranchez toujours le câble d'alimentation électrique avant d'installer ou de retirer TOUT matériel en option à  l'intérieur ou à l'extérieur de l'imprimante. Décharge d'électricité statique : Le panneau de commande et la mémoire interne de l'imprimante sont sensibles à l'électricité statique. Avant d'installer ou de supprimer une mémoire interne  d'imprimante, déchargez l'électricité statique de votre corps en touchant la partie métallique d'un appareil branché dans une prise mise à la terre quelconque.  Répétez l'opération si vous vous déplacez avant de terminer l'installation. Installation de la mémoire Vous pouvez augmenter la mémoire de l'imprimante grâce à une barrette DIMM (Dual In-line Memory Module). Votre imprimante a 92 MB de mémoire. Elle peut être étendue à 192 Mo. Retirez la mémoire DIMM préinstallée avant de mettre à jour la mémoire. 1. Mettez l'imprimante hors tension et débranchez tous les câbles de l'imprimante. 2. Saisissez le capot du panneau de commande et ouvrez-le. 3. Ouvrez complètement les verrous de chaque côté du slot DIMM et retirez la mémoire DIMM préinstallée. Précautions à prendre lors de l'installation des accessoires de l'imprimante Installation de la mémoire Installation d'un bac 2 optionnel REMARQUE : Votre imprimante n'accepte que des barrettes DIMM Dell. Commandez vos barrettes DIMM en ligne à www.dell.com.4. Retirez la barrette mémoire neuve de son emballage antistatique. 5. Tenez la barrette par les bords, alignez les encoches de la barrette sur les rainures situées en haut de l'emplacement DIMM. 6. Poussez la barrette dans l'emplacement DIMM, jusqu'à ce qu'un déclic indique qu'elle est bien en place. Vérifiez que les verrous s'insèrent bien dans les  encoches situées de chaque côté de la barrette. 7. Remettez la trappe d'accès à la carte électronique en place. 8. Rebranchez le cordon d'alimentation et le câble de l'imprimante, puis mettez celle-ci sous tension. Activation de la mémoire additionnelle dans les propriétés de l'imprimante PS Après avoir installé le barrette mémoire, vous devez la sélectionner dans les propriétés du pilote d'impression PostScript de l'imprimante pour pouvoir  l'utiliser : 1. Assurez-vous que le pilote d'impression PostScript est installé sur votre ordinateur. Pour plus d'informations sur l'installation du pilote d'impression PS,  reportez-vous à la "Installation du logiciel sous Windows". 2. Cliquez sur le menu Démarrer de Windows. 3. Sous Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, sélectionnez Paramètres, puis Imprimantes. Sous Windows XP/Server 2003, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs. Pour Windows Vista, cliquer sur Panneau de configuration Matériel et Son Imprimantes. 4. Sélectionnez l'imprimante Dell Laser MFP 1815 PS. 5. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône d'imprimante et,  Sous Windows 98/Me, cliquez sur Propriétés. Sous Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, cliquez sur Configuration de l'impression ou cliquez sur Propriétés, puis pointez sur Options d'impression. Sous Windows NT 4.0, cliquez sur Donnees du doc. par defaut. 6. Sous Windows 98/Me, sélectionnez Options du périphérique. Sous Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, sélectionnez Paramètres du périphérique. 7. Sélectionnez la barrette mémoire que vous avez installée dans Mémoire de l'imprimante de la section Options d'installation. Sous Windows 98, sélectionnez Options d'installation OptionVM changer le paramètre pour :OptionVM changer la mémoire. 8. Cliquer sur OK. Installation d'un bac 2 optionnel Vous pouvez accroître la capacité d'alimentation papier de votre imprimante en y installant un bac optionnel 2. Ce bac accepte 250 feuilles de papier.  1. Mettez l'imprimante hors tension et débranchez tous les câbles de l'imprimante. 2. Retirez la bande adhésive et la bande de fixation du câble du bac optionnel 2 situé au fond du bac optionnel 2. 3. Repérez le connecteur et les repères de positionnement du bac optionnel. 4. Placez l'imprimante sur le bac, en alignant le pied de l'imprimante avec les repères de positionnement du bac optionnel 2. 5. Branchez le câble dans le connecteur situé à l'arrière de l'imprimante. 6. Chargez du papier dans le bac optionnel 2. Pour plus d'informations sur le chargement du papier dans le bac, reportez-vous à la "Chargement du papier". 7. Rebranchez le câble d'alimentation électrique et les câbles, puis mettez l'imprimante sous tension Lorsque vous imprimez un document sur du papier chargé dans le bac optionnel 2, vous devez configurer les propriétés du pilote d'impression.  Pour accéder aux propriétés du pilote : 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows. 2. Sous Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, cliquez sur Paramètres et pointez sur Imprimantes. Sous Windows XP/Server 2003, cliquez sur Imprimantes et télécopieurs. Pour Windows Vista, cliquer sur Panneau de configuration Matériel et Son Imprimantes. 3. Cliquez sur l'imprimante Dell Laser MFP 1815. 4. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône d'imprimante et,  Sous Windows 98/Me, cliquez sur Propriétés. Sous Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, cliquez sur Configuration de l'impression ou cliquez sur Propriétés, puis pointez sur Options d'impression. Sous Windows NT 4.0, cliquez sur Donnees du doc. par defaut. 5. Cliquez sur l'onglet Imprimante, puis sélectionnez Bac 2 dans la liste déroulante Bac optionnel. 6. Cliquez sur OK pour imprimer le document. Pour définir le bac dans les propriétés du pilote d'impression PostScript de l'imprimante. 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows. 2. Sous Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, sélectionnez Paramètres, puis Imprimantes. Sous Windows XP/Server 2003, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs. Pour Windows Vista, cliquer sur Panneau de configuration Matériel et Son Imprimantes. 3. Sélectionnez l'imprimante Dell Laser MFP 1815 PS. 4. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône d'imprimante et,  Sous Windows 98/Me, cliquez sur Propriétés. Sous Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, cliquez sur Configuration de l'impression ou cliquez sur Propriétés, puis pointez sur Options d'impression. Sous Windows NT 4.0, cliquez sur Donnees du doc. par defaut. 5. Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramètres du périphérique, puis sélectionnez Installé dans la liste déroulante Bac 2.6. Cliquer sur OK.Manipulation du papier Consignes relatives aux supports d'impression Par supports d'impression, on entend le papier, le papier cartonné, les transparents, les étiquettes et les enveloppes. Votre imprimante permet d'obtenir une  impression de grande qualité sur différents supports d'impression. La sélection d'un support d'impression adapté à votre imprimante vous permettra d'éviter  les problèmes d'impression. Ce chapitre fournit des informations sur le mode de sélection du support d'impression, sur la façon d'entretenir le support  d'impression et sur le mode de chargement du support d'impression dans le bac 1, le bac optionnel 2 ou le passe-copie. Papier Pour une qualité d'impression optimale, utilisez le papier xérographique à grain sens machine 75 g/m2 . Faites un essai avec un échantillon du papier que vous  prévoyez d'utiliser avec l'imprimante, avant d'en acheter de grandes quantités. Avant de charger votre papier, vérifiez quelle est la face imprimable sur l'emballage du papier et effectuez le chargement en conséquence. Pour plus  d'informations sur le chargement, reportez-vous aux sections "Chargement des supports d'impression dans le bac" et "Utilisation du passe copie". Caractéristiques papier Les caractéristiques suivantes ont un effet sur la qualité et la fiabilité de l'impression. Nous vous recommandons de suivre ces consignes avant d'acheter du  papier. Poids L'imprimante peut détecter automatiquement le grammage papier de 60 à 105 g/m2  à grain long dans le chargeur automatique et de 60 à 90 g/m2  à grain  long dans le bac d'alimentation papier. Le papier de moins de 60 g/m2  risque de ne pas être suffisamment rigide et de causer des bourrages. Pour des  performances optimales, utilisez le papier à grain sens machine 75 g/m2 . Pour une impression recto verso, utilisez un papier de 75 à 90 g/m2 . Ondulations Le plissement fait référence à la tendance qu'a un support d'impression à se courber sur les bords. Un plissement excessif risque de créer des problèmes  d'alimentation papier. Le papier prend normalement un aspect ondulé après son passage par l'imprimante car il est exposé à des températures élevées. Ne  stockez pas le papier, pas même dans le bac d'alimentation, sans le couvrir car cela risquerait d'entraîner des problèmes de plissement et d'alimentation  papier. Satinage Le degré de satinage du papier a un effet direct sur la qualité de l'impression. Si le papier est trop rugueux, la fusion du toner n'effectue pas correctement, ce qui se traduit par une qualité d'impression médiocre. Si le papier est trop lisse, il peut provoquer des problèmes au moment de l'alimentation. En ce qui  concerne le satinage, le papier doit avoir un indice Sheffield compris entre 100 et 300 ; toutefois, la meilleure qualité d'impression s'obtient avec un indice  Sheffield compris entre 150 et 250. Teneur en humidité Le niveau d'humidité du papier affecte la qualité d'impression et la capacité de l'imprimante à alimenter le papier correctement. Conservez le papier dans son  emballage jusqu'au moment de son utilisation. Il est ainsi protégé de l'humidité, celle-ci pouvant avoir des effets négatifs sur ses performances. Consignes relatives aux supports d'impression Chargement des supports d'impression dans le bac Stockage des supports d'impression Utilisation du passe copie Identification des sources et spécifications des supports d'impression Configuration du format de papier Choix du type de sortie Configuration du type de papierDirection du grain Le grain fait référence à l'alignement des fibres dans une feuille de papier. Le grain est soit long (dans le sens de la longueur), soit court (dans le sens de la  largeur). Pour les papiers de grammage compris entre 60 et 90 g/m2 , les fibres à grain long sont recommandées. Pour le papier de grammage supérieur à 90 g/m2 , préférez le grain court. Pour le passe copie, un papier de grammage compris entre 60 et 90 g/m2  et des fibres à grain long sont recommandées. Teneur en fibres Le papier xérographique de bonne qualité est généralement constitué entièrement de bois transformé en pâte par un procédé chimique. Cette méthode  produit un papier très stable qui cause moins de problèmes d'alimentation et garantit une meilleure qualité d'impression. Le papier contenant d'autres types  de fibres (coton, par exemple) possède des caractéristiques pouvant entraîner des problèmes de manipulation. Papier recommandé Pour une qualité d'impression optimum et une alimentation fiable, utilisez du papier xérographique 75 g/m2 . Les papiers de type commercial destinés aux  usages courants peuvent également fournir une qualité d'impression acceptable. N'oubliez pas d'imprimer plusieurs pages d'un support d'impression avant d'en acheter de grandes quantités. Lorsque vous choisissez un support  d'impression, n'oubliez pas de tenir compte de son poids, de sa teneur en fibres et de sa couleur. N'utilisez que du papier capable de résister aux températures existant dans l'imprimante sans décoloration, transferts ni émissions de substances toxiques.  Consultez le fabricant ou le vendeur du papier pour déterminer si le papier que vous avez choisi convient aux imprimantes laser. Papiers inacceptables L'utilisation des papier suivants n'est pas recommandée pour l'imprimante : l Papiers traités par procédé chimique et utilisés pour faire des copies sans papier carbone, également appelés papiers autocopiants (CCP) ou papiers ne  nécessitant pas de carbone (NCR) l Des papiers préimprimés avec des produits chimiques peuvent contaminer l'imprimante l Papiers préimprimés pouvant être affectés par la température du four de l'imprimante l Les papiers préimprimés nécessitant un repérage (il s'agit d'un emplacement précis d'impression sur la page) plus grand que  2 mm, comme des formulaires avec reconnaissance optique des caractères (OCR) l Papiers couchés (effaçables), papiers synthétiques, papiers thermosensibles l Papiers à bords rugueux, à surface rugueuse ou fortement texturée ou papiers ondulés l Papiers recyclés contenant plus de 25 % de fibres de recyclage non conformes à la norme DIN 19 309 l Papiers recyclés de poids inférieur à 60 g/m2 l Documents ou formulaires à plusieurs parties Choix du papier Un chargement correct du papier évite les bourrages et autres problèmes d'impression. Pour éviter le bourrage ou une mauvaise qualité d'impression :l N'utilisez que du papier neuf et non endommagé. l Avant de charger le papier, assurez-vous que vous savez quelle face imprimer. La face à imprimer est généralement indiquée sur l'emballage du papier. l N'utilisez pas du papier que vous avez découpé vous-même. l Evitez de mélanger des supports d'impression de tailles, poids ou types différents car cela risquerait d'entraîner des bourrages. l N'utilisez pas de papiers couchés. l Pensez à changer le format du papier lorsque vous utilisez une alimentation qui ne détecte pas la taille de façon automatique. l Ne retirez pas les bacs durant l'impression ou lorsque le panneau indique que l'imprimante est occupée. l Vérifiez que le papier est bien chargé dans l'alimentation. l Déramez les feuilles de papier. Evitez de plier ou de froisser le papier. Alignez les feuilles en les posant sur une surface plane. Sélection de formulaires préimprimés et papier à en-tête Appliquez les consignes suivante lorsque vous sélectionnez des formulaires préimprimés et du papier à en-tête pour l'imprimante : l Utilisez du papier à grain sens machine pour de meilleurs résultats. l N'utiliser que les formulaires et le papier à en-tête imprimés par lithographie offset ou gravure au burin. l Choisissez du papier capable d'absorber l'encre mais sans transfert. l Évitez le papier à surface rugueuse ou trop texturée. Utiliser du papier imprimé avec des encres capables de résister à la chaleur pour photocopieurs xérographiques. L'encre doit résister à des températures de  180 °C sans fusion ni émission de substances toxiques. Utiliser des encres non affectées par la résine du toner ou la silicone du four. Les encres à base  d'oxydants ou d'huile végétale devraient convenir, mais pas les encres latex. En cas de doute, contactez votre fournisseur de papier. Des papiers préimprimés comme du papier à en-tête doit être capable de résister à des températures pouvant atteindre 180 °C sans fusion ni émission de  substances toxiques. Impression sur papier à en-tête Consultez le fabricant ou le vendeur pour déterminer si le papier à en-tête que vous avez choisi convient aux imprimantes laser. L'orientation de la page est importante lorsque vous imprimez sur du papier à en-tête. Le tableau suivant vous aidera à charger votre papier à en-tête dans  les alimentations de supports d'impression. Alimentation des supports d'impression Haut de la page Face à imprimer Portrait Paysage bac 1 (bac standard) bac 2 optionnel Face imprimée vers le bas  Façade du bac  Côté gauche du bac  passe copie Face imprimée vers le haut Le logo entre dans l'imprimante en premier Côté gauche du bac Sélection de papier perforé Les différents types de papier perforé varient en termes de nombre de trous et de leur emplacement ainsi que des techniques de fabrication employées. Suivez les instructions ci-après pour choisir et utiliser le papier perforé : l Essayer le papier perforé de plusieurs fabricants avant d'en commander de grandes quantités. l Le papier devrait être perforé au moment de la fabrication et non pas perforé dans sa rame une fois emballé. Le papier perforé pour provoquer des  bourrages lorsque plusieurs feuilles passent dans l'imprimante. l Le papier perforé peut contenir plus de poussière que le papier normal. Votre imprimante peut nécessiter davantage de nettoyages fréquents et la  fiabilité de l'alimentation risque de ne pas être aussi bonne que dans le cas du papier standard. Transparents Faites un essai avec des transparents que vous prévoyez d'utiliser avec l'imprimante, avant d'en acheter de grandes quantités. l Utilisez des transparents fabriqués spécialement pour les imprimantes laser. Les transparents doivent doit être capables de résister à des  températures de 180 °C sans fusion, décoloration, transfert ni émission de substances toxiques. l Évitez de toucher les transparents avec les doigts afin de ne pas compromettre la qualité de l'impression. l Avant de charger une pile de transparents, ventilez-la afin de séparer les feuilles. l Chargez un transparent dans le passe copie. Choix des transparents L'imprimante peut imprimer directement sur des transparents conçus pour un usage avec des imprimantes laser. La qualité et la durabilité de l'impression  dépendent des transparents utilisés. Avant d'acheter des transparents en grandes quantités, essayez d'en imprimer quelques-uns. Vérifiez auprès du fabricant ou du fournisseur la compatibilité des transparents avec des imprimantes laser chauffant les transparents à 180 °C. N'utilisez que  les transparents capables de résister à ces températures sans fusion, décoloration, transfert ni émission de substances toxiques. Enveloppes Vous pouvez charger une enveloppe à la fois dans le passe copie. Faites un essai avec des enveloppes que vous prévoyez d'utiliser avec l'imprimante, avant  d'en acheter de grandes quantités. Pour plus d'informations sur le chargement d'une enveloppe, reportez-vous à la section "Utilisation du passe copie". Impression sur enveloppe : l Pour obtenir la meilleure qualité d'impression possible, utilisez uniquement des enveloppes de grande qualité, conçues pour les imprimantes laser. l Pour de meilleurs résultats, utilisez des enveloppes fabriquées à base de papier 75 g/m2 . Vous pouvez utiliser un grammage allant jusqu'à 90 g/m2 avec le passe copie tant que le coton grammage ne dépasse pas 25 %. l N'utilisez que des enveloppes neuves et non endommagées.l Pour de meilleurs résultats, et afin de minimiser les bourrages, évitez les enveloppes : - Excessivement pliées ou déformées - Collées entre elles ou endommagées - Qui présentent des fenêtres, des trous, des perforations, des découpes ou des reliefs - Qui comportent des agrafes, des ficelles ou des barres métalliques - Qui s'emboîtent - Qui comportent des timbres - Qui présentent une substance adhésive lorsque le rabat de l'enveloppe est scellé - Dont les bords sont froissés ou les coins recourbés - Dont la finition est rugueuse ou imparfaite l Utilisez des enveloppes capables de résister à des températures de 180 °C sans collage, ondulation excessive, froissement ni émission de substances  toxiques. Si vous avez un doute quelconque sur les enveloppes que vous avez l'intention d'utiliser, consultez votre fournisseur. l Ajustez le guide-papier à la largeur des enveloppes. l Insérez les enveloppes côté adresse vers le bas et zone réservée au timbre en haut à gauche. Le bord de l'enveloppe avec la zone réservée pour le  timbre passe en premier dans le passe copie. Pour plus d'informations sur le chargement d'une enveloppe, reportez-vous à la section "Utilisation du passe copie". l Les enveloppes peuvent se sceller d'elles-mêmes en cas d'humidité élevée (plus de 60 %) et de haute température d'impression. Étiquettes Votre imprimante peut imprimer sur de nombreuses étiquettes utilisables avec des imprimantes laser. Ces étiquettes sont fournies aux formats Letter, A4 et  Legal. Les adhésifs des étiquettes, la feuille protectrice (partie imprimable) et les couches de finition doivent être capable de résister à des températures de  180 °C et à une pression de 25 livres par pouce carré (psi). Vous pouvez charger une feuille d'étiquette à la fois dans le passe copie. Faites un essai avec les étiquettes que vous prévoyez d'utiliser avec l'imprimante, avant d'en acheter une grande quantité : l Utilisez des planches d'étiquettes entières. L'utilisation de planches où manquent certaines étiquettes risque d'entraîner le décollage des étiquettes  restantes et de causer un bourrage. Ces planches contaminent également votre imprimante et votre cartouche avec de l'adhésif et pourraient  provoquer l'annulation des garanties qui s'appliquent à votre imprimante et à la cartouche. l Utilisez des étiquettes capables de résister à des températures de 180 °C sans collage, ondulation excessive, froissement ni émission de substances  toxiques. l N'imprimez pas à moins de 1 mm du bord de l'étiquette ou des perforations, ou entre les découpes de l'étiquette. l N'utilisez pas les planches d'étiquettes dont le bord contient une substance adhésive. Nous recommandons des planches dont les zones adhésives sont  situées à au moins 1 mm des bords. Des produits adhésifs contaminent votre imprimante et peuvent provoquer l'annulation de la garantie. l S'il n'est pas possible d'avoir un écart de zone adhésive, une bande de 3 mm doit être retirée du bord avant et pilote, et un adhésif sans suintement doit  être utilisé. l Retirez une bande de 3 mm du bord avant pour empêcher le pelurage des étiquettes à l'intérieur de l'imprimante.l Préférez l'orientation Portrait, surtout lorsque vous imprimez des codes à barres. l N'utilisez pas les étiquettes dont la substance adhésive est apparente. Papier cartonné Le papier cartonné est composé d'une seule couche, et comporte toute une gamme de propriétés telles que la teneur en humidité, l'épaisseur et la texture,  qui peuvent avoir un effet important sur la qualité de l'impression. Reportez-vous à la section "Identification des sources et spécifications des supports  d'impression" pour plus d'informations sur le grammage préféré associé au sens du grain du support d'impression. Faites un essai avec un papier cartonné que vous prévoyez d'utiliser avec l'imprimante, avant d'en acheter une grande quantité : l N'oubliez pas que la préimpression, la perforation et le froissement peuvent avoir un effet important sur la qualité d'impression et causer des problèmes  de manipulation des supports d'impression ou des bourrages. l Évitez les papiers cartonnés qui risquent d'émettre des substances toxiques à la chaleur. l N'utilisez pas de papier cartonné préimprimé et fabriqué avec des produits chimiques pouvant contaminer l'imprimante. La préimpression introduit des  composants semi-liquides et volatils dans l'imprimante. l Nous recommandons l'utilisation de papier cartonné à grain sens machine. Stockage des supports d'impression Suivez les instructions ci-après pour le stockage des supports d'impression. Vous pourrez ainsi éviter les problèmes d'alimentation de supports d'impression et  d'irrégularité d'impression : l Pour obtenir de meilleurs résultats, stockez les supports d'impression à une température d'environ 21° C et une humidité relative de 40 %. l Stockez les cartons de supports d'impression sur une palette ou une étagère et évitez de les placer à même le sol. l Si vous stockez des rames de supports d'impression individuelles provenant du carton d'origine, veillez à les placer sur une surface plate afin d'éviter le  plissement ou la déformation des bords des feuilles. l Ne mettez rien sur les piles de supports d'impression. Identification des sources et spécifications des supports d'impression Les tableaux suivants fournissent des informations concernant les sources d'alimentation standard et en option, notamment les formats de support d'impression que vous pouvez sélectionner à partir du menu format de papier, ainsi que les grammages pris en charge. Formats de supports d'impression et supports d'impression REMARQUE : Si le format de support d'impression que vous utilisez n'est pas dans la liste, sélectionnez le format immédiatement supérieur. Légende Oui- correspond à support  d'impression Format du support d'impression Formats Bac d'alimentation (bac 1 et bac optionnel 2) Passe copie Impression recto verso A4 210 x 297 mm Oui Oui Oui A5 148 x 210 mm Oui Oui -Supports d'impressions pris en charge Types et grammages de supports d'impression a. Il est préférable d'utiliser un grain court pour les papiers dont le grammage est supérieur à 163 g/m2 . Choix du type de sortie A6 105 x 148,5 mm Oui Oui - B5 (JIS) 182 x 257 mm Oui Oui - ISO B5 176 x 250 mm Oui Oui - Letter 215,9 x 279,4 mm Oui Oui Oui Legal 215,9 x 355,6 mm Oui Oui Oui EXECUTIVE 184,2 x 266,7 mm Oui Oui - OFICIO 216 x 343 mm Oui Oui Oui FOLIO 216 x 330 mm Oui Oui Oui Enveloppe 7-3/4 (Monarch) 98,4 x 190,5 mm - Oui - Enveloppe COM-10 105 x 241 mm - Oui - Enveloppes DL 110 x 220 mm - Oui - Enveloppe C5 162 x 229 mm - Oui - Enveloppe C6 114 x 162 mm - Oui - Personnalisée de 76 x 127 mm à 216 x 356  mm - Oui - Support d'impression Bac d'alimentation Passe copie Réceptacle de sortie standard Papier Oui Oui Oui Papier cartonné  - Oui Oui Transparents - Oui - Étiquettes  - Oui Oui Etiquettes dual-web et intégrées  - Oui Oui Enveloppes - Oui Oui Support d'impression Type Grammage du support d'impression Bac 1 et Bac optionnel 2 Passe copie Papier Papier xérographique ou entreprise  60 à 90 g/m2 grain long 60 à 135 g/m2 grain long Papier cartonné - maximum (grain long) a Bristol - 120 g/m2 Etiquette - 120 g/m2 Couverture - 135 g/m2 Papier cartonné - maximum (grain court) a Bristol - 163 g/m2 Etiquette - 163 g/m2 Couverture - 163 g/m2 Transparents Imprimante laser - 138 à 146 g/m2 Etiquettes - maximum Papier - 163 g/m2 Papier dual-web - 163 g/m2 Polyester - 163 g/m2 Vinyle - 163 g/m2 Formulaires intégrés Zone sensible à la pression (à  charger dans l'imprimante en premier) - 135 à 140 g/m2 Base papier (grain long) - 75 à 135 g/m2 Enveloppes 100 % coton grammage  maximum - 90 g/m² Sulfate, sans bois ou papier à lettre  jusqu'à 100 % coton  - 75 à 90 g/m2L'imprimante dispose de deux emplacement de la sortie papier ; le réceptacle de sortie (face vers le bas) et le capot arrière (face vers le haut). Assurez-vous que le capot arrière est bien fermé pour utiliser le réceptacle de sortie. Pour utiliser le capot arrière, ouvrez-le. REMARQUE : Si le papier ne sort pas correctement du réceptacle de sortie, par exemple s'il est anormalement ondulé, essayez d'utiliser le capot arrière.  REMARQUE : Pour éviter les bourrages papier, évitez d'ouvrir ou de refermez le capot arrière alors que l'imprimante est en cours d'impression. Impression vers le réceptacle de sortie (face vers le bas) Le réceptacle de sortie récupère le papier imprimé face vers le bas, dans l'ordre correct. L'utilisation de ce plateau convient à la plupart des travaux. Si nécessaire, ouvrez l'extension de sortie du papier afin d'éviter que le support d'impression ne fasse tomber le réceptacle de sortie. Impression vers le capot arrière (face vers le haut) En utilisant le capot arrière, le papier sort de l'imprimante face vers le haut. Lors d'une impression du passe copie vers le capot arrière, le papier emprunte un chemin en ligne droite. L'utilisation du capot arrière améliore la qualité de  la sortie avec des supports spéciaux. Pour utiliser le capot arrière, procédez comme suit : Ouvrez le capot arrière en le tirant.Chargement des supports d'impression dans le bac Vous pouvez charger environ 250 feuille de papier ordinaire dans le bac 1 ou le bac optionnel 2. Si vous avez acheté le bac optionnel 2, reportez-vous à la  section "Installation d'un bac 2 optionnel" pour plus d'informations sur l'installation. Pour la télécopie, vous ne pouvez utiliser que les formats A4, Letter ou  Legal. Pour la copie ou l'impression PC, vous pouvez utiliser différents types et formats de papier ; voir "Identification des sources et spécifications des  supports d'impression". Suivez les instructions de chargement du support d'impression dans le bac 1 ou le bac optionnel 2. Le chargement de ces bacs s'effectue de la même façon. 1. Ouvrez le bac en le tirant vers vous et insérez le papier face à imprimer orientée vers le bas. Le papier à en-tête peut être chargé face préimprimée vers le bas. Placez le bord supérieur de la feuille, avec le logo, à l'avant du plateau. Pour plus d'informations sur le chargement du papier dans le bac, reportez-vous à "Chargement du papier". Utilisation du passe copie Outre des opérations rapides avec des types et des formats de papier qui ne sont pas actuellement chargés dans le bac d'alimentation papier, utilisez le  passe copie pour imprimer des transparents, des étiquettes, des enveloppes et des cartes postales. Cette imprimante permet d'imprimer des cartes (fiches) de 88 x 148 mm et des supports aux formats personnalisés. Le format minimal accepté est de 76 x 127  mm et le format maximal de 216 x 356 mm. Les supports d'impression acceptables sont le papier ordinaire avec des tailles allant de 76 x 127 mm au Legal US, 216 x 356 mm, la plus grande taille acceptable, avec un grammage compris entre 60 et 163 g/m2 . ATTENTION : La zone de l'unité de chauffe située à l'intérieur du capot arrière de votre imprimante devient très chaude lorsqu'elle est utilisée.  Faites attention lorsque vous accédez à cette zone.  REMARQUE : En cas de problèmes avec l'alimentation en papier, placez le papier dans le passe copie. REMARQUE : Vous pouvez utiliser du papier préimprimé. La face imprimée doit être orientée vers le haut et le côté introduit en premier reposer bien à  plat. Si vous rencontrez des problèmes d'alimentation papier, retournez la pile. Nous ne garantissons pas la qualité d'impression.Pour utiliser le passe copie, procédez comme suit : 1. Ouvrez le passe copie et dépliez l'extension du support papier, comme illustré. 2. Si vous utilisez du papier, déramez ou ventilez le bord de la pile de papier afin de séparer les pages avant de la charger. Pour les transparents, tenez-les par les bords et évitez de toucher le côté à imprimer. Vous pourriez laisser des empreintes qui risqueraient d'entraîner  des problèmes de qualité d'impression.  3. Chargez le support d'impression avec le côté à imprimer face vers le haut. Selon le type de papier employé, maintenez la méthode de chargement suivantes : l Enveloppes : Insérez-les côté adresse vers le bas et zone réservée au timbre en haut à gauche.  l Transparents : chargez-les face à imprimer vers le haut, le bord muni d'une bande adhésive passant en premier dans le chargeur.  l Étiquettes : chargez-les côté à imprimer vers le haut et le bord court entrant en premier dans le chargeur.  l Papier préimprimé : chargez les feuilles face préimprimée vers le haut, le bord supérieur orienté vers l'imprimante.  l Papier cartonné : chargez-les côté à imprimer vers le haut et le bord court entrant en premier dans le chargeur.  l Papier préimprimé : la face imprimée doit être orientée vers le bas et le côté introduit en premier reposer bien à plat.  4. Appuyez sur le guide de largeur et réglez-le à la largeur du support d'impression. Ne forcez pas trop fort sous peine de plier le papier et de provoquer  un bourrage papier ou une mise de travers du papier. 5. Définissez le type et le format de papier une fois celui-ci chargé dans le passe copie. Reportez-vous à la "Configuration du type de papier"pour plus d'informations sur la copie et la télécopie, ou à la "Onglet Papier"pour en savoir plus sur l'impression avec le PC. REMARQUE : Chargez uniquement les supports d'impression indiqués dans "Spécifications" à la "Spécifications du papier" afin d'éviter les bourrages  papier et les problèmes liés à la qualité d'impression.  REMARQUE : Aplatissez toute ondulation sur des cartes postales, des enveloppes et des étiquettes avant de les charger dans le passe copie.6. Une fois l'impression terminée, repliez l'extension du support d'impression et fermez le passe copie. Conseils sur l'utilisation du passe copie l Ne chargez qu'un seul format d'un support d'impression à la fois dans le passe copie. l Pour éviter les bourrages papier, n'ajoutez pas de papier tant qu'il reste du papier dans le passe copie. Cela s'applique également aux autres types de  support. l Les supports d'impression doivent être chargés face vers le haut, le bord supérieur inséré en premier dans le passe copie, et être placés au centre du  bac. l Chargez uniquement les supports d'impression spécifiés dans "Consignes relatives aux supports d'impression" afin d'éviter les bourrages papier et des  problèmes de qualité d'impression. l Aplatissez toute ondulation sur des cartes postales, des enveloppes et des étiquettes avant de les charger dans le passe copie. l Lorsque vous imprimez sur un support formaté 76 x 127 mm placé sur le passe copie, ouvrez le capot arrière afin que le chemin du papier soit en ligne  droite, et éviter ainsi des bourrages papier. l Vérifiez que le capot arrière est ouvert lorsque vous imprimez sur des transparents. S'il n'est pas ouvert, les transparents risquent de se déchirer  lorsqu'ils sortent de l'appareil. Configuration du format de papier Une fois le papier chargé dans le bac d'alimentation, vous devez définir le format du papier à l'aide des touches du panneau de commande. Cette configuration  s'applique aux modes Télécopie et Copie. En mode d'impression PC, vous devez sélectionner le type de papier dans l'application utilisée. 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à CONFIG PAPIER. 3. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à FORMAT PAPIER. 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner le bac d'alimentation papier que vous souhaitez utiliser, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour trouver le format de papier que vous utiliser, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 6. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille. Configuration du type de papier Une fois le papier chargé dans le bac d'alimentation papier ou le passe copie, vous devez définir le type de papier à l'aide des touches du panneau de  commande. Cette configuration s'applique aux modes Télécopie et Copie. En mode Fax, vous ne pouvez choisir que Papier ordinaire. En mode d'impression PC,  vous devez sélectionner le type de papier dans l'application utilisée.  1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à CONFIG PAPIER. 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance TYPE PAPIER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour trouver le type de papier que vous utilisez, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille. REMARQUE : Le paramétrage établi à partir du pilote d'impression remplace le paramétrage du panneau de commande. ATTENTION : Vérifiez que le capot arrière est ouvert lorsque vous imprimez sur des transparents. S'il n'est pas ouvert, les transparents risquent de se déchirer lorsqu'ils sortent de l'appareil. Impression Impression d'un document Votre imprimante imprime des documents à l'aide d'un pilote d'impression GDI (interface de dispositif graphique), PCL (langage de commande d'imprimante) ou  Postscript (PS). Lorsque vous installez le logiciel Dell, votre imprimante installe automatiquement les pilotes d'impression GDI et PCL. L'installation du pilote d'impression PS est en option. Reportez-vous à la "Installation du logiciel Dell pour impression en mode local". Les pilotes fournis avec votre imprimante offre un choix étendu d'options. A l'aide du tableau ci-dessous, vous pourrez déterminer quel pilote d'impression est  le plus approprié selon les tâches effectuées. Les fonctions fournies par chaque pilote d'impression sont les suivantes : La procédure ci-dessous décrit les étapes à suivre pour effectuer des impressions à partir de diverses applications Windows. Les étapes peuvent légèrement  varier d'une application à l'autre. Pour plus d'informations sur la procédure exacte d'impression, reportez-vous au Guide d'utilisation du logiciel. 1. Ouvrez le document à imprimer. 2. Dans le menu Fichier, sélectionnez Imprimer. La boîte de dialogue Imprimer (ou Impression) s'affiche. Son apparence peut légèrement varier selon les applications.  Cette fenêtre permet de sélectionner les options d'impression de base, parmi lesquelles le nombre de copies et les pages à imprimer. 3. Sélectionnez le pilote d'impression que vous souhaitez utiliser dans la fenêtre Impression. 4. Afin de profiter des fonctionnalités d'impression offertes par votre imprimante, cliquez sur Préférences ou Propriétés, selon le programme ou le système d'exploitation dans la fenêtre ci-dessus, puis passez à l'étape 5.  Si vous voyez Configuration, Imprimante ou Options, cliquez alors sur ce bouton. Sur l'écran suivant, cliquez sur Propriétés. Impression d'un document Impression d'affiches Paramètres de l'imprimante Impression recto-verso Impression de plusieurs pages sur une seule feuille Impression de filigranes Modification de l'échelle d'un document Utilisation de surimpressions Impression d'un document sur un format de papier donné Fonction Pilote d'imprimante GDI PS PCL Économie d'encre Oui Oui Oui Option de qualité d'impression Oui Oui Oui Poster Oui N Oui Réduire/Agrandir Oui Oui Oui Plusieurs pages par côté Oui Oui Oui Ajuster à la page Oui Oui Oui Filigrane Oui N Oui Surimpression Oui N Oui5. Cliquez sur OK pour fermer la fenêtre des propriétés de l'imprimante.  6. Pour démarrer la tâche d'impression, dans la fenêtre Imprimer, cliquez sur Imprimer ou OK selon le programme ou le système d'exploitation. Annulation d'une impression Il existe deux méthodes pour annuler une impression. Pour arrêter une impression à partir du panneau de commande : Appuyez sur Annuler ( ). Votre imprimante termine l'impression de la page en cours et supprime le reste de la tâche d'impression. Le fait d'appuyer sur cette touche annule uniquement  l'impression en cours. Si plusieurs travaux ont été mémorisés, vous devez appuyer sur la touche pour annuler chacun d'entre eux. Pour arrêter une impression à partir du dossier Imprimantes : 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows, puis pointez sur Paramètres. 2. Sous Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, cliquez sur Paramètres et pointez sur Imprimantes. Sous Windows XP/Server 2003, cliquez sur Imprimantes et télécopieurs. Pour Windows Vista, cliquer sur Panneau de configuration Matériel et Son Imprimantes. 3. Pointez sur l'imprimante Dell Laser MFP 1815. 4. Dans le menu Document, cliquez sur Annuler (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista) ou Annuler l'impression (Windows 98/Me). Paramètres de l'imprimante Vous pouvez utiliser la fenêtre des propriétés d'imprimante, qui vous permet d'accéder à toutes les options d'imprimante utiles lorsque vous utilisez votre  imprimante. Une fois les propriétés de l'imprimante affichées, vous pouvez modifier les paramètres requis pour l'impression. La fenêtre des propriétés de l'imprimante peut varier en fonction du pilote d'impression que vous avez sélectionné et de votre système d'exploitation. Pour  plus d'informations sur la sélection d'un pilote d'impression, reportez-vous à la section "Impression d'un document". Le Guide d'utilisation présente la fenêtre  des préférences d'impression du pilote d'impression GDI sous Windows XP. REMARQUE : Vous pouvez accéder à cette fenêtre de façon simple en double-cliquant sur l'icône d'imprimante située dans la partie inférieure droite du  bureau Windows.a. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows. b. Sous Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, cliquez sur Paramètres et pointez sur Imprimantes. Sous Windows XP/Server 2003, cliquez sur Imprimantes et télécopieurs. Pour Windows Vista, cliquer sur Panneau de configuration Matériel et Son Imprimantes. c. Pointez sur l'imprimante Dell Laser MFP 1815. d. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône d'imprimante et :  l Sous Windows 98/Me, cliquez sur Propriétés. l Sous Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, cliquez sur Configuration de l'impression ou Propriétés, puis pointez sur Options d'impression. l Sous Windows NT 4.0, cliquez sur Donnees du doc. par defaut. e. Modifiez les paramètres nécessaires sous chaque onglet, puis cliquez sur OK. Onglet Mise en page L'onglet Mise en page permet de présenter le document tel qu'il sera sur la page imprimée. La section Options de mise en page propose des options d'impression avancées, comme Plusieurs pages par face et Impression d'affiche. Onglet Papier Les options suivantes de la boîte de dialogue des propriétés permettent de définir les paramètres relatifs à la gestion du papier. Cliquez sur l'onglet Papier pour accéder aux propriétés du papier. REMARQUE : La plupart des applications Windows l'emportent sur les paramètres spécifiés au niveau du pilote d'impression. Commencez donc par  modifier tous les paramètres d'impression dans l'application, puis les paramètres restants dans le pilote d'impression.  REMARQUE : Les paramètres modifiés ne restent en vigueur que le temps d'utilisation du programme en cours. Pour que vos modifications deviennent  permanentes, entrez-les dans le dossier Imprimantes. Suivez les étapes ci-après : Propriété Description Orientation du papier Orientation du papier permet de choisir le sens de l'impression. Pour faire tourner la page sur 180 degrés, sélectionnez 180 dans la liste déroulante Rotation. • L'option Portrait imprime les données sur la largeur de la page, dans le style d'une lettre. • L'option Paysage imprime les données sur la longueur de la page, dans le style d'une feuille de calcul. Options de mise en page Options de mise en page permet de sélectionner des options d'impression avancées. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la  "Impression de plusieurs pages sur une seule feuille"et à la "Impression d'affiches". Impression recto-verso Impression recto-verso permet d'imprimer en mode recto-verso. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Impression rectoverso".Onglet Graphiques Les options de l'onglet Graphiques permettent de régler la qualité d'impression en fonction de vos besoins. Cliquez sur l'onglet Graphiques pour afficher les paramètres présentés ci-dessous. Propriété Description Copies (1-999) Copies (1-999) permet de choisir le nombre d'exemplaires à imprimer. La limite est fixée à 999. Format L'option Format permet de choisir le format du papier inséré dans le bac d'alimentation papier.  Si le format requis n'apparaît pas dans la zone Format, cliquez sur Personnalisé. Dans la fenêtre du Réglage papier personnalisé  qui s'affiche, définissez le format de papier, puis cliquez sur OK. Le paramètre apparaît alors dans la liste afin que vous puissiez le  sélectionner. Alimentation Vérifiez que Alimentation s'applique bien au bac d'alimentation papier correspondant. Si la source d'alimentation papier est définie à Sélection automatique, l'imprimante commence par prélever automatiquement les  supports d'impression dans le passe copie, puis dans le bac d'alimentation papier. Type Vérifiez que Type est bien défini à Options par défaut. Si vous utilisez un support différent, sélectionnez le type correspondant. Pour  plus d'informations sur les supports d'impression, reportez-vous à la section "Consignes relatives aux supports d'impression". Première page Cette option permet d'utiliser un type de papier différent pour la première page d'un document. Vous pouvez sélectionner  l'alimentation papier pour la première page. Type impr. Type impr. permet de sélectionner des options d'impression avancées. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Modification de l'échelle d'un document"et à la "Impression d'un document sur un format de papier donné". Propriété DescriptionOnglet Autres options Cliquez sur l'onglet Autres options pour accéder aux fonctions suivantes : Résolution Vous pouvez sélectionner la résolution d'impression en choisissant 1200 ppp (optimale) ou 600 ppp (normale). Plus la valeur est élevée, plus les caractères et les graphiques imprimés sont nets. En revanche, une résolution élevée peut augmenter le  temps d'impression d'un document. Mode image Une fois imprimés, certains caractères présentent des bords irréguliers. Activez cette option Mode image pour améliorer la  qualité d'impression de vos textes et donner un aspect plus lissé aux caractères. • Normal : ce réglage permet d'imprimer un texte en mode normal. • Amélioration du texte : ce réglage permet d'améliorer la qualité d'impression des caractères par un lissage des bords  irréguliers apparaissant au niveau des angles et des courbes de chaque caractère. Mode économie  d'encre En sélectionnant cette option, vous augmentez la durée d'utilisation de la cartouche d'encre, tout en réduisant le coût par page,  au prix d'une faible réduction de la qualité d'impression.  • Configuration de l'imprimante : Si vous sélectionnez cette option, c'est le réglage que vous avez effectué sur le  panneau de commande qui détermine la fonctionnalité ECO TONER. • Activé : sélectionnez cette option pour permettre à l'imprimante d'utiliser moins de toner sur chaque page. • Désactivé : sélectionnez cette option si vous n'avez pas besoin d'économiser l'encre lors de l'impression. Options avancées Vous pouvez effectuer des réglages avancés en cliquant sur le bouton Options avancées. Obscurité Cette option permet d'augmenter ou de diminuer le contraste du document imprimé. Options TrueType cette option détermine la façon dont l'imprimante traite graphiquement le texte d'un document. Sélectionnez le paramètre  adéquat en fonction de votre document. Imprimer tout le texte en noir Si vous cochez la case Imprimer tout le texte en noir, tout le texte du document est imprimé en noir plein, quelle que soit la  couleur dans laquelle il apparaît à l'écran. Décochez cette case pour que le texte en couleur soit imprimé en niveaux de gris. Imprimer tout le texte en foncéa Lorsque la case à cocher de l'option Imprimer tout le texte en foncéa est activée, tout le texte de votre document est alors  imprimé de façon plus foncée que pour un document normal. • Normal : Sélectionnez cette option pour imprimer les images en mode normal. • Clair : sélectionnez cette option pour diminuer le contraste de l'image. • Foncé : sélectionnez cette option pour augmenter le contraste de l'image. • Télécharger en tant que bitmap : Si vous sélectionnez cette option, le pilote télécharge les polices utilisées sous  forme d'images binaires. Cette option permet d'imprimer plus rapidement des documents comportant des polices complexes de langues telles que le coréen ou le chinois. • Imprimer en tant que graphique : si vous sélectionnez cette option, le pilote télécharge les polices utilisées sous forme de  graphiques. Cette option permet d'améliorer la vitesse d'impression de documents comportant de nombreux graphiques et  relativement peu de polices TrueType.Onglet À propos Utilisez l'onglet À propos pour afficher les informations de copyright et le numéro de version du pilote. Si vous possédez un navigateur Internet, vous pouvez  vous connecter à Internet en cliquant sur l'icône du site Web. Utilisation d'un réglage favori L'option Favoris, qui est visible sous chaque onglet des propriétés, vous permet d'enregistrer les paramètres de propriétés actuels pour un usage ultérieur.  Pour enregistrer vos paramètres favoris : 1. Modifiez les réglages dans chaque onglet selon vos préférences.  2. Donnez un nom à l'élément dans la zone de saisie Favoris. 3. Cliquer sur Enreg. Pour utiliser un paramétrage enregistré, sélectionnez le nom correspondant dans la liste déroulante Favoris. Pour supprimer un paramétrage enregistré, sélectionnez le nom correspondant dans la liste, puis cliquez sur Supprimer. Propriété Description Filigrane Vous pouvez créer une image en arrière-plan du texte à imprimer sur chaque page de votre document. Reportez-vous à la  "Impression de filigranes". Cette fonctionnalité n'est pas disponible si vous utilisez le pilote Postscript (PS).  Surimpression Les surimpressions remplacent souvent les formulaires préimprimés et les papiers à en-tête. Reportez-vous à la "Utilisation de surimpressions". Options de sortie vous pouvez définir l'ordre d'impression des pages. Sélectionnez l'ordre d'impression désiré dans la liste déroulante. • Normal (1, 2, 3) : permet d'imprimer les pages de la première à la dernière. • Ordre inversé (3, 2, 1) : permet d'imprimer toutes les pages dans l'ordre inverse. • Pages impaires : permet d'imprimer uniquement les pages impaires de votre document. • Pages paires : permet d'imprimer uniquement les pages paires de votre document.Vous pouvez également restaurer les réglages par défaut du pilote d'impression en sélectionnant Options par défaut dans la liste. Utilisation de l'aide Votre imprimante propose un écran d'aide que vous pouvez activer à l'aide du bouton Aide de la fenêtre des propriétés de l'imprimante. Ces écrans d'aide  donnent des indications détaillées sur les fonctions du pilote d'impression. Vous pouvez également cliquer sur   dans l'angle supérieur droit de la boîte de dialogue des propriétés, puis sur le paramètre à propos duquel vous  souhaitez obtenir des explications. Impression de plusieurs pages sur une seule feuille Modification de l'échelle d'un document Vous pouvez sélectionner le nombre de pages à imprimer sur une même feuille. Si vous choisissez d'imprimer plusieurs pages par feuille,  celles-ci apparaissent dans un format réduit. Vous pouvez imprimer jusqu'à 16 pages par feuille. 1. Pour modifier les paramètres d'impression à partir de votre application, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de l'imprimante. 2. Sous l'onglet Mise en page, choisissez Plusieurs pages par face dans la liste déroulante Mise en p. 3. Dans la liste déroulante Pages par face, sélectionnez le nombre de pages à imprimer par feuille (1, 2, 4, 6, 9 ou 16). 4. Si nécessaire, Sélectionnez l'ordre des pages dans la liste déroulante Ordre des pages. Cochez la case Bordures pour imprimer une bordure autour de chaque page sur la feuille. Bordures n'est activé que si le paramètre  Pages par face est défini à un nombre supérieur à un. 5. Sous l'onglet Papier, sélectionnez la source d'alimentation, le format et le type de papier. 6. Cliquez sur OK pour imprimer le document.Impression d'un document sur un format de papier donné Impression d'affiches Vous pouvez mettre à l'échelle le document que vous souhaitez imprimer.  1. Pour modifier les paramètres d'impression à partir de votre application, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de l'imprimante. 2. Sous l'onglet Papier, sélectionnez Réduire/Agrandir dans la liste déroulante Type impr. 3. Entrez le taux d'échelle dans la zone de saisie Facteur. Vous pouvez également cliquez sur les touches  ou . 4. Sélectionnez la source d'alimentation, le format et le type de papier.  5. Cliquez sur OK pour imprimer le document. Cette fonction vous permet d'adapter une tâche d'impression à tout format de papier, quelle que soit la taille du document numérisé. Elle  peut s'avérer utile pour vérifier les détails d'un petit document.  1. Pour modifier les paramètres d'impression à partir de votre application, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de l'imprimante. 2. Sous l'onglet Papier, sélectionnez Ajuster à la page dans la liste déroulante Type impr. 3. Sélectionnez le format approprié dans la liste déroulante Taille de sortie. 4. Sélectionnez la source d'alimentation, le format et le type de papier. 5. Cliquez sur OK pour imprimer le document.Impression recto-verso Cette fonction vous permet d'imprimer un document d'une seule page sur 4, 9 ou 16 pages que vous pouvez coller ensemble pour former un poster. 1. Pour modifier les paramètres d'impression à partir de votre application, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de l'imprimante. 2. Sous l'onglet Mise en page, sélectionnez Impression d'affiche dans la liste déroulante Mise en p. 3. Configurer l'option Affiche : Vous pouvez sélectionner la mise en page dans Affiche<2x2>, Affiche<3x3> ou Affiche<4x4>. Si vous sélectionnez  Affiche<2x2>, la sortie sera automatiquement agrandie pour occuper 4 feuilles. Définissez un chevauchement en millimètres ou en pouces pour reconstituer plus aisément l'affiche. 4. Sous l'onglet Papier, sélectionnez la source d'alimentation, le format et le type de papier. 5. Cliquez sur OK pour imprimer le document. Vous pouvez reconstituer le poster en collant les feuilles imprimées. Votre imprimante imprime des deux côtés du papier automatiquement.  Avant d'imprimer, vous devez sélectionner le bord auquel s'appliquera la reliure sur votre document fini. Les options de reliure disponibles  sont les suivantes : l Bord long, qui permet de relier un document dans le style d'un livre. l Bord court, qui permet de relier un document dans le style d'un calendrier.1. Pour modifier les paramètres d'impression à partir de votre application, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de l'imprimante. 2. Sous l'onglet Mise en page, sélectionnez l'orientation du papier. 3. Dans la section Impression recto-verso, sélectionnez l'option de reliure de votre choix. 4. Sous l'onglet Papier, sélectionnez la source d'alimentation, le format et le type de papier. 5. Cliquez sur OK pour imprimer le document. Votre imprimante imprime des deux côtés du papier automatiquement. Impression de filigranes Utilisation d'un filigrane existant 1. Pour modifier les paramètres d'impression à partir de votre application, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de l'imprimante. 2. Sous l'onglet Autres options, sélectionnez un filigrane dans la liste déroulante Filigrane. Il apparaît dans la fenêtre d'aperçu. 3. Cliquez sur OK pour lancer l'impression. Création d'un filigrane 1. Pour modifier les paramètres d'impression à partir de votre application, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de l'imprimante. REMARQUE : N'effectuez pas d'impression recto/verso sur des étiquettes, des transparents, des enveloppes ou du papier épais, Vous risqueriez de  provoquer des bourrages ou d'endommager l'imprimante. REMARQUE : Pour utiliser le mode recto-verso, vous ne pouvez utiliser que les formats de papier suivants : A4, Letter, Legal et Folio. L'option Filigrane vous permet d'imprimer du texte sur un document existant. Par exemple, vous pouvez imprimer le texte "BROUILLON" ou "CONFIDENTIEL" en diagonale sur la première page ou sur toutes les pages d'un document.  Plusieurs filigranes prédéfinis sont fournis avec votre imprimante. Vous pouvez les modifier ou en ajouter des nouveaux à la liste. 2. Sous l'onglet Autres options, cliquez sur Modifier dans la section Filigrane. La fenêtre Modifier filigranes s'affiche. 3. Entrez le texte à imprimer dans la zone Texte du filigrane. Le texte s'affiche dans la fenêtre d'aperçu d'image. Cette fenêtre vous permet de voir l'apparence du filigrane avant l'impression. Si la case Première page seulement est cochée, le filigrane s'imprime sur la première page uniquement. 4. Sélectionnez les options de filigrane souhaitées.  Vous pouvez choisir la police, le style et la taille et l'échelle de gris dans la zone Attributs de police, et définir l'inclinaison du filigrane dans la zone Angle du texte. 5. Pour ajouter un nouveau filigrane à la liste, cliquez sur Ajouter. 6. Lorsque le filigrane est créé, cliquez sur OK pour lancer l'impression. Pour arrêter l'impression du filigrane, sélectionnez Sans filigrane dans la liste déroulante Filigrane. Modification d'un filigrane 1. Pour modifier les paramètres d'impression à partir de votre application, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de l'imprimante. 2. Sous l'onglet Autres options, cliquez sur Modifier dans la section Filigrane. La fenêtre Modifier filigranes s'affiche. 3. Dans la liste Filigranes actuels, sélectionnez le filigrane à modifier, puis modifiez le message du filigrane ainsi que les options. 4. Cliquez sur Mettre à jour pour enregistrer les modifications. 5. Cliquer sur OK. Suppression d'un filigrane 1. Pour modifier les paramètres d'impression à partir de votre application, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de l'imprimante. 2. Sous l'onglet Autres options, cliquez sur Modifier dans la section Filigrane. La fenêtre Modifier filigranes s'affiche. 3. Dans la liste Filigranes actuels, sélectionnez le filigrane à supprimer, puis cliquez sur Supprimer. 4. Cliquer sur OK. Utilisation de surimpressions Qu'est-ce qu'une surimpression ? Création d'une nouvelle surimpression de page Les surimpressions consistent en du texte et/ou en des images enregistrés sur le disque dur de l'ordinateur sous un format spécial et qui  peuvent être imprimés sur n'importe quel document. Les surimpressions remplacent souvent les formulaires préimprimés et les papiers à  en-tête. Plutôt que d'avoir recours à un en-tête préimprimé, vous pouvez créer une surimpression comportant les mêmes informations que  cet en-tête. Pour imprimer une lettre avec l'en-tête de votre compagnie, il n'est pas nécessaire que vous chargiez un papier à en-tête  préimprimé dans l'imprimante. Vous devez simplement dire à l'imprimante d'appliquer la surimpression d'en-tête sur votre document.Utilisation d'une surimpression de page Une fois la surimpression créée, vous pouvez l'imprimer en l'appliquant à votre document. Pour imprimer une surimpression avec un document : 1. Créez ou ouvrez le document à imprimer.  2. Pour changer les paramètres d'impression à partir de votre application, accédez à la fenêtre des propriétés de l'imprimante. 3. Cliquez sur l'onglet Autres options. 4. Sélectionnez la surimpression à imprimer dans la zone de liste déroulante Surimpression. 5. Si le fichier de surimpression n'apparaît pas sur la liste Liste des surimpressions, cliquez sur Modifier, puis sur Charger surimpression, et sélectionnez  ensuite le fichier de surimpression. Pour utiliser une surimpression de page, vous devez préalablement la créer, et y insérer un logo ou une image. 1. Créez ou ouvrez un document contenant le texte ou l'image que vous souhaitez utiliser comme nouvelle surimpression de page.  Placez les éléments exactement comme vous souhaitez qu'ils apparaissent à l'impression sous forme de surimpression. Le cas échéant, sauvegardez le fichier pour un usage ultérieur. 2. Pour modifier les paramètres d'impression à partir de votre application, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de l'imprimante. 3. Sous l'onglet Autres options, cliquez sur Modifier dans la section Surimpression. 4. Dans la fenêtre Modifier surimpressions, cliquez sur Créer surimpression. 5. Dans la zone Nom du fichier de la fenêtre Créer surimpression, entrez un nom de huit caractères maximum. Sélectionnez le chemin  de destination, si nécessaire. (Le chemin par défaut est C:\FormOver). 6. Cliquer sur Enregistrer. Vous pouvez voir le nom sur la Liste des surimpressions. 7. Cliquez sur OK ou Oui jusqu'à ce que la création soit terminée.  Le fichier n'est pas imprimé ; il est enregistré dans votre ordinateur.  REMARQUE : la taille du document de surimpression doit être identique à celle des documents imprimés avec la surimpression. Vous  ne pouvez pas créer de surimpression comportant un filigrane. REMARQUE : Le fichier de surimpression et le document doivent avoir la même résolution. La fenêtre Charger surimpression permet également de charger les fichiers de surimpression enregistrés sur une source externe, telle qu'un CD ou une  disquette. Après avoir sélectionné le fichier, cliquez sur Ouvrir. Le fichier apparaît maintenant dans la zone Liste des surimpressions et est disponible pour l'impression. Sélectionnez la surimpression dans la zone Liste des surimpressions. 6. Si nécessaire, cliquez sur Confirmer surimpression. Lorsque cette case est cochée, à chaque fois que vous lancez une impression, un message vous  invite à confirmer que vous souhaitez imprimer une surimpression sur votre document. Si vous répondez Oui dans la fenêtre, la surimpression sélectionnée sera imprimée avec votre document. Si vous répondez No l'utilisation de la page de surimpression est annulée.  Si cette case n'est pas cochée et qu'une surimpression est sélectionnée, celle-ci sera automatiquement imprimée avec votre document.  7. Cliquez sur OK ou Oui jusqu'au lancement de l'impression. La surimpression sélectionnée est téléchargée avec le document et imprimée sur la feuille.  Suppression d'une surimpression Vous pouvez supprimer les surimpressions dont vous ne vous servez plus. 1. Dans la fenêtre des propriétés de l'imprimante, cliquez sur l'onglet Autres options. 2. Cliquez sur Modifier dans la section Surimpression. 3. Sélectionnez la surimpression à supprimer dans la zone Liste des surimpressions. 4. Cliquer sur Supprimer surimpression. 5. Lorsque le message de confirmation apparaît, cliquez sur Oui. 6. Cliquez sur OK jusqu'à ce vous quittiez la fenêtre Imprimer.Numérisation  Généralités concernant la numérisation Utilisez votre Dell Laser MFP 1815dn pour convertir les illustrations et les textes en images éditables sur votre ordinateur. Après avoir installé le logiciel à  partir du CD-ROM Pilotes et Utilitaires, vous pouvez commencer à numéroser des images soit à l'aide du panneau de commande soit en utilisant des  applications comme Dell ScanCenter™, PaperPort et Adobe PhotoShop  installées sur votre ordinateur. Via le réseau, vous pouvez également utiliser la  numérisation en réseau, pour numériser un document sur votre imprimante (sous la forme d'un fichier JPEG, TIFF ou PDF) et l'enregistrer ensuite sur un  ordinateur connecté au réseau. Vous pouvez aussi envoyer l'image numérisée sous la forme d'une pièce jointe directement à partir de votre imprimante. Le type de résolution à utiliser pour la numérisation d'un élément à l'aide de PaperPort dépend du type d'élément considéré et de la façon dont vous  envisagez d'utiliser l'image ou le document une fois l'élément numérisé sur votre ordinateur. Pour obtenir les meilleurs résultats possibles, utilisez les  paramètres recommandés suivants. Généralités concernant la numérisation Configuration des e-mails Numérisation vers une application Numérisation et envoi d'un e-mail Utilisation de la numérisation en réseau Configuration du Carnet d'adresses Numérisation à l'aide du pilote WIA (Windows Image Acquisition) Numéros de groupe Numérisation vers une clé de mémoire USB Modification des paramètres par défaut Gestion d'une clé de mémoire USB Renvoi de fax vers des adresses e-mail REMARQUE : PaperPort est le programme de numérisation fourni avec votre imprimante.  REMARQUE : Les applications Dell ScanCenter et PaperPort ne sont pas prises en charge dans le système d'exploitation Windows Server 2003, XP  (édition x64), et Vista. Type d'objet Résolution Documents 300 ppp, noir et blanc – ou – 200 ppp, nuances de gris ou couleur Documents de qualité médiocre ou imprimés en petits caractères 400 ppp, noir et blanc – ou – 300 ppp, nuances de gris Photos et éléments graphiques 100 à 200 ppp, couleur – ou – 200 ppp, nuances de gris Images sur imprimante jet d'encre de 150 ppp à 300 ppp  Images sur imprimante haute résolution  de 300 ppp à 600 ppp Toute numérisation réalisée à une résolution supérieure à celles présentées ci-dessus excédera les capacités de l'application. Si vous devez réaliser des  numérisations à des résolutions supérieures à celles recommandées dans le tableau précédent, nous vous conseillons de réduire la taille de votre image en la  prévisualisant (ou en la pré-numérisant), puis en la recadrant avant de la numériser.  Si vous préférez utiliser une autre application, comme Adobe PhotoShop, vous devez attribuer l'application à l'imprimante en la sélectionnant dans la liste des  applications disponibles. Consultez "Utilitaire de paramétrage d'imprimante" . Dell ScanCenter est une application PaperPort qui permet de numériser des éléments et de les envoyer directement à PaperPort ou à d'autres programmes de  votre ordinateur sans nécessité d'exécuter en premier lieu PaperPort. Dell ScanCenter fonctionne en tant qu'application séparée du menu Démarrer de  Windows et affiche la barre Dell ScanCenter. Pour de plus amples informations concernant l'utilisation de Dell ScanCenter, reportez-vous au menu d'aide de PaperPort. Les icônes situées sur la barre Dell ScanCenter correspondent à des programmes exécutés uniquement dans PaperPort et Dell ScanCenter. Pour numériser et  envoyer un élément vers un programme, cliquez sur l'icône du programme, puis numérisez l'élément en question. Dell ScanCenter lance automatiquement le  programme sélectionné, une fois la numérisation effectuée. REMARQUE : Le logiciel d'OCR intégré à PaperPort permet d'extraire le texte d'un document numérisé et de l'utiliser dans un éditeur de texte, une  application de traitement de texte ou un tableur. Le processus d'OCR exige une résolution comprise entre 150 et 600 ppp pour les images de texte et  de 300 ou 600 ppp pour les graphiques. REMARQUE : La première fois que vous utilisez PaperPort, ouvrez l'application sur votre ordinateur avant de lancer la numérisation, pour que le  document numérisé soit enregistré sur votre ordinateur.Numérisation vers une application 1. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur. OU Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition. Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original". 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance NUM., puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance PC, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner l'application vers laquelle vous voulez envoyer l'image numérisée. Les applications  par défaut sont MS Paint, Email, Mes documents, PaperPort et OCR. l MS Paint : Envoie l'image numérisée à Microsoft Paint.  l E-MAIL : Envoie l'image numérisée au programme e-mail par défaut sur l'ordinateur. Une fenêtre de nouveau message s'ouvre, avec l'image en  pièce jointe.  l MES DOCUMENTS : Sauvegarde l'image numérisée dans le dossier Mes documents de votre ordinateur.  l PaperPort : Envoie l'image numérisée à PaperPort.  l OCR : Envoie l'image numérisée vers l'OCR.  5. Appuyez sur Départ ( ). La fenêtre de l'application sélectionnée s'ouvre. Réglez les paramètres de numérisation et lancez la numérisation. Pour plus  d'informations, reportez-vous au mode d'emploi de l'application. Utilisation de la numérisation en réseau À propos de la numérisation en réseau La numérisation en réseau vous permet de numériser avec votre imprimante votre document en tant que fichier JPEG, TIFF ou PDF et de l'enregistrer sur un  ordinateur connecté au réseau. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez installer la numérisation en réseau sur votre ordinateur.  Ajout d'un utilisateur Pour vous enregistrer en tant qu'utilisateur autorisé de la numérisation en réseau, suivez les instructions à l'écran du Gestionnaire de numérisation en réseau  Dell. 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Ajout de périphérique. 2. Cliquer sur Suivant. 3. Indiquez le scanner dans le réseau que vous souhaitez utiliser en le sélectionnant à l'emplacement correspondant ou en indiquant son adresse IP pour  vous connecter directement au scanner. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation d'une adresse IP, reportez-vous à la section "Ajout d'un scanner". Cliquer sur Suivant. 4. Entrez votre identifiant et votre numéro d'identification personnelle (PIN), puis cliquez sur Suivant. Suppression d'un utilisateur Pour supprimer un utilisateur autorisé, cliquez sur le bouton Suppression de périphérique et suivez les instructions à l'écran. Utilisation de la numérisation en réseau REMARQUE : La liste des applications du panneau de commande accepte jusqu'à 30 applications ; son affichage est uniquement en anglais. REMARQUE : Vous pouvez ajouter d'autres logiciels compatibles TWAIN pour la numérisation, comme Adobe Photoshop Deluxe, ou Adobe Photoshop, à  l'aide de l'Utilitaire de paramétrage de l'imprimante. Reportez-vous à la "La section Destination". REMARQUE : Cliquez sur le bouton Aide pour consulter l'aide en ligne sur la numérisation en réseau.Grâce à la numérisation en réseau, vous pouvez numériser un document depuis votre imprimante et l'enregistrer sur votre ordinateur via le réseau. 1. Placez le document que vous souhaitez numériser soit dans le CAD, soit sur la vitre d'exposition. 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance NUM., puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance RESEAU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance PC, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner le nom enregistré de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 6. Entrez le PIN que vous avez enregistré, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 7. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher le programme que vous utiliserez, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 8. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance Config. num., puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 9. Choisissez le type de fichier et la résolution, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). l NOIR & BLANC : Si vous avez sélectionné cette option, sélectionnez un type de fichier PDF ou TIFF. l COUL.-JPEG200 : Si vous avez sélectionné cette option, la résolution de 200 ppp et le type de fichier JPEG peuvent être automatiquement  sélectionnés.  l RESOLUTION : Choisissez une résolution de 100 ppp, 200 ppp ou 300 ppp.  10. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher DEMAR. NUMER., puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Si vous appuyez sur OK ( ) lorsque DECONNEXION s'affiche, votre imprimante sera hors session. 11. Le document peut être numérisé et enregistré sur l'ordinateur si la numérisation en réseau est activée. Si votre type de fichier est TIFF ou PDF, le message qui s'affiche à l'écran vous demande si vous souhaitez numériser une autre page. Sélectionnez OUI à l'aide des boutons de défilement ( ou ), puis appuyez sur OK ( ). La page suivante est numérisée et constitue la deuxième page du document. Répétez cette procédure jusqu'à ce que la  totalité des pages soit numérisée, puis sélectionnez NON. Ajout d'un scanner Pour enregistrer votre scanner en tant que scanner de réseau autorisé, utilisez la fenêtre du Gestionnaire de numérisation en réseau Dell. 1. Dans la fenêtre Gestionnaire de numérisation en réseau Dell, cliquez sur la touche Ajout de périphérique ou double-cliquez sur l'icône Ajout de périphérique. 2. Cliquer sur Suivant. 3. Sélectionnez Rechercher un scanner. (recommandé) ou Se connecter au scanner considéré. Si vous sélectionnez Se connecter au scanner considéré, entrez une adresse IP, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 4. Une liste de scanners connectés à votre réseau apparaît. Sélectionnez votre imprimante dans la liste et saisissez son nom, l'identifiant ainsi que le  numéro d'identification personnelle (PIN). Cliquer sur Suivant. l Vous pouvez saisir un identifiant d'une longueur maximale de 8 caractères. Le premier caractère doit être une lettre.  l Le code PIN doit comporter quatre chiffres. Cette option est facultative. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'option de mot de passe par défaut.5. Si vous avez ajouté votre imprimante au réseau, cliquez sur Terminer. Votre imprimante apparaît dans la fenêtre du Gestionnaire de numérisation en  réseau Dell. Vous pouvez à présent numériser des documents sur l'ensemble du réseau.  Configuration des propriétés 1. Dans la fenêtre Gestionnaire de numérisation en réseau Dell, double-cliquez sur l'icône du scanner ou cliquez sur le bouton Propriétés. 2. Après avoir paramétré les propriétés, cliquez sur OK. Page Général Page ServeurPage Avancé Page Préférences Utilisation de la numérisation en réseau 1. Vérifiez si votre scanner est disponible grâce à l'icône d'état de votre scanner. 2. Configurez les paramètres de votre scanner dans le réseau. Reportez-vous à la "Configuration des propriétés". 3. Placez le document à numériser. 4. Lancez la numérisation conformément aux instructions de "Utilisation de la numérisation en réseau" 5. Une fois la numérisation lancée, le document numérisé est envoyé à l'emplacement que vous avez choisi. L'emplacement peut être modifié dans la page  Avancé de la fenêtre Propriétés de la numérisation en réseau. Reportez-vous à la "Page Avancé". Icônes du scannerNumérisation à l'aide du pilote WIA (Windows Image Acquisition) Votre imprimante reconnaît également le pilote WIA de numérisation d'images. WIA est l'un des composants standard fournis par Microsoft Windows XP/Server  2003/Vista ; il fonctionne avec les appareils photo numériques et les scanners. Contrairement au pilote TWAIN, le pilote WIA permet de numériser des images  et de les manipuler facilement sans avoir recours à d'autres logiciels. 1. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur. OU Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition. Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original". 2. Cliquer sur Démarrer Panneau de configuration Imprimantes et autres périphériques Scanneurs et appareils photo Pour Windows Vista, cliquer sur et cliquer sur Panneau de configuration Matériel et Son  Scanneurs et Appareils photo. 3. Double-cliquez sur l'icône de votre scanner. L'assistant Scanners et Appareils photo démarre. 4. Choisissez des options de numérisation et cliquez sur Aperçu pour obtenir un aperçu de votre image en fonction des options choisies. 5. Entrez un nom d'image, puis sélectionnez un format et une destination de fichier pour enregistrer l'image. 6. Suivez les instructions décrites à l'écran pour modifier l'image copiée sur votre ordinateur. Numérisation vers une clé de mémoire USB Vous pouvez numériser un document et enregistrer l'image numérisée dans une clé de mémoire USB. Pour ce faire, vous pouvez effectuer une numérisation  vers la clé de mémoire USB en utilisant les paramètres par défaut ou en sélectionnant manuellement vos propres paramètres. À propos de la clé de mémoire USB Il existe des clés de mémoire USB de différentes capacités de mémoire qui vous permettent de stocker des documents, présentations, téléchargements  (musique et vidéos), photographies en haute définition ou fichiers de votre choix. Une clé de mémoire USB en option vous permet d'effectuer les opérations suivantes : l Numériser des documents et les enregistrer sur la clé de mémoire USB. l Formater une clé de mémoire USB. l Vérifier l'espace mémoire disponible. REMARQUE : Le pilote WIA fonctionne uniquement sous Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista. REMARQUE : Un logiciel OCR intégré à PaperPort peut copier un texte à partir de documents numérisés vers n'importe quel programme de type éditeur  de texte, traitement de texte ou feuille de calcul. Le processus OCR nécessite des images numérisées avec une résolution de 150 à 600 ppp. Une  résolution de 300 ppp ou de 600 ppp est recommandée pour des graphiques. Branchement d'une clé de mémoire USB Le port de mémoire USB situé à l'avant de votre imprimante est prévu pour des mémoires USB V1.1.et USB V2.0. Vous devez utiliser uniquement une clé de  mémoire USB autorisée et équipée d'un connecteur de style A. Insérez la clé de mémoire USB dans le port USB situé à l'avant de votre imprimante. Numérisation en utilisant les réglages par défaut Le tableau suivant présente les réglages par défaut. 1. Insérez la clé de mémoire USB dans le port de mémoire USB de votre imprimante. 2. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur. OU Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition. Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original". 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance NUM., puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à CLE USB. 5. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à NUMER. RAPIDE. Votre imprimante commence par numériser le document, et l'enregistre ensuite dans votre clé de mémoire USB. Pour les documents transmis à partir de la vitre d'exposition, un message vous demande si vous souhaitez envoyer une autre page. Sélectionnez OUI pour ajouter une nouvelle page. Sinon sélectionnez NON. Les documents numérisés sont sauvegardés sur la clé de mémoire USB. Numérisation en utilisant mes réglages Le tableau suivant présente les options que vous pouvez sélectionner. ATTENTION : Ne retirez pas la clé de mémoire USB si l'imprimante est en cours de fonctionnement. Vous risqueriez d'endommager votre imprimante. ATTENTION : Si votre clé de mémoire USB possède des caractéristiques particulières, comme des paramètres de sécurité et des mots de passe,  il se peut que votre imprimante ne les détecte pas automatiquement. Pour plus d'informations sur ces caractéristiques, reportez-vous au mode d'emploi fourni avec votre clé de mémoire USB.  Taille de l'image Format du fichier Résolution Letter (Etats-Unis), A4 (Grande Bretagne) JPEG 200 ppp Taille de l'image Format du fichier Couleur Résolution Letter, A4, Legal, Folio, Executive, A5, B5, A6 JPEG, BMP, TIFF, PDF Couleur, Gris, Mono 100, 200, 300 ppp1. Insérez la clé de mémoire USB dans le port de mémoire USB de votre imprimante. 2. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur. OU Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition. Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original". 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance NUM., puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à CLE USB. 5. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance NUMER. PERSO, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 6. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner la taille de l'image de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 7. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner le type de fichier de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Si vous sélectionnez BMP sélectionnez la couleur et la résolution de numérisation. Si vous sélectionnez TIFF, sélectionnez la résolution et l'option page multiple. 8. La numérisation est lancée. Pour les documents transmis à partir de la vitre d'exposition, un message vous demande si vous souhaitez envoyer une autre page. Sélectionnez OUI pour ajouter une nouvelle page. Sinon sélectionnez NON. Les documents numérisés sont sauvegardés sur la clé de mémoire USB. Modification des réglages par défaut Pour modifier les valeurs par défaut de numérisation rapide, procédez comme suit. 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance NUM., puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à CLE USB. 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MOD. REGL. DEF, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à TAILLE IMAGE. 5. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance la taille de l'image, Letter, A4, Legal, Folio, Executive, A5, B5 ou A6, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 6. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance VERSION, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 7. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance le format du fichier, BMP, TIFF, PDF ou JPEG, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 8. Si vous sélectionnez JPEG, passez à l'étape 11.  Si vous sélectionnez TIFF ou PDF, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner l'option multi-pages et ensuite sur OK ( ). Si vous sélectionnez BMP, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner le mode couleur, COULEUR, GRIS, ou MONOCHROME, et  ensuite sur OK ( ). 9. Si vous sélectionnez TIFF, PDF, ou le mode couleur MONOCHROME pour BMP, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en évidence RESOLUTION et ensuite sur OK ( ). 10. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance la résolution, 100 ppp, 200 ppp, ou 300 ppp, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 11. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille. Gestion d'une clé de mémoire USB Vous pouvez supprimer des fichiers images stockés sur une clé de mémoire USB un par un, ou les supprimer tous à la fois en reformatant la clé. Suppression d'un fichier image Pour supprimer un fichier image numérisé et enregistré sur votre clé de mémoire USB, procédez comme suit. 1. Insérez la clé de mémoire USB dans le port de mémoire USB de votre imprimante. 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance NUM., puis appuyez sur OK ( ).3. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à CLE USB. 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance GEST. FICHIERS, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. Appuyez sur OK ( ) à l'affichage de SUPPRIMER. 6. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner le dossier ou le fichier de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Si le caractère "\" est placé devant un nom de dossier, celui-ci contient un ou plusieurs dossiers. 7. Si vous avez sélectionné un fichier à l'étape 6, l'écran affiche sa taille pendant 2 secondes environ. Passez à l'étape suivante. Si vous avez sélectionné un dossier, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner le fichier de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 8. Appuyez sur OK ( ) lorsque OUI apparaît pour confirmer votre choix. 9. Un message vous demande si vous souhaitez supprimer un autre fichier. Sélectionnez OUI ou NON. 10. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille. Formatage d'une clé de mémoire USB 1. Insérez la clé de mémoire USB dans le port de mémoire USB de votre imprimante. 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance NUM., puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à CLE USB. 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance GEST. FICHIERS, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance FORMAT, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 6. Appuyez sur OK ( ) lorsque OUI apparaît pour confirmer votre choix. 7. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille. Impression à partir de la clé de mémoire USB Vous pouvez imprimer des fichiers stockés dans la clé de mémoire USB. Les formats de fichier TIFF, BMP, TXT, PDF et PRN sont pris en charges. 1. Insérez la clé de mémoire USB dans le port de mémoire USB de votre imprimante. 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance NUM., puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à CLE USB. 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance IMPR. DEPUIS, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner le dossier ou le fichier de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 6. Si vous avez sélectionné un fichier à l'étape 5, passez à l'étape suivante.  Si vous avez sélectionné un dossier, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner le fichier de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 7. Entrez le nom du groupe, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). L'impression est lancée. Si le format de fichier sélectionné n'est pas pris en charge, VERSION NON COMPATIBLE apparaît. 8. Un message vous demande si vous souhaitez imprimer un autre fichier. Sélectionnez OUI ou NON. 9. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille. Affichage de l'état de la clé de mémoire USB Vous pouvez vérifier la quantité de mémoire disponible pour la numérisation et l'enregistrement de documents. 1. Insérez la clé de mémoire USB dans le port de mémoire USB de votre imprimante. 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance NUM., puis appuyez sur OK ( ). REMARQUE : Seuls les fichiers TXT en anglais, les fichiers PDF produits par cette imprimante et les fichiers TIFF 6.0 sont disponibles.3. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à CLE USB. 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance AFFICH. ESPACE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). L'espace mémoire disponible est affiché. 5. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode veille. Configuration des e-mails Pour utiliser des fonctionnalités d'e-mail comme la numérisation vers un e-mail et la transmission d'une télécopie vers des adresses e-mail, vous devez tout d'abord configurer les paramètres du réseau et définir votre compte e-mail. Pour plus d'informations sur les paramètres du réseau, reportez-vous à la section  "Configuration de l'imprimante partagée en mode local". Configuration d'un compte e-mail 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG E-MAIL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance l'élément de menu de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Si nécessaire, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) jusqu'à ce que l'élément de sous-menu de votre choix apparaisse, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. Entrez les informations requises ou sélectionnez l'état désiré, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 6. Répétez les étapes 3 à 5 pour modifier d'autres options. 7. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille. Options disponibles pour la configuration d'un compte e-mail Numérisation et envoi d'un e-mail 1. Vérifiez que votre imprimante est bien connectée à un réseau. 2. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur. OU Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition. Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original". option Description SERVEUR SMTP Vous pouvez définir l'imprimante pour qu'elle accède à un serveur SMTP pour un message mail sortant.  • IP SERV. SMTP : permet d'entrer l'adresse IP ou le nom d'hôte du serveur SMTP. Celle-ci peut être fournie en notation décimale ou sous forme d'un nom de domaine. (par exemple  111. 222. 333. 444 ou smtp.xyz.com) • TAILLE MAX MSG : permet de spécifier la taille maximale du mail pouvant être envoyé. CONFIG. UTIL. Vous pouvez configurer des utilisateurs autorisés à envoyer des e-mails via votre imprimante. • MODE SECURISE : permet d'activer ou de désactiver une authentification utilisateur. Si  vous activez une authentification, vous pouvez définir si l'imprimante doit se souvenir d'un  utilisateur autorisé après sa fin de session pour chaque transmission d'e-mail effectuée. • AJOUT. UTILIS. : permet d'ajouter un nom de connexion et un mot de passe d'un utilisateur. • SUPPR. UTILIS. : permet de supprimer un utilisateur autorisé. AUTO-ENVOI Vous pouvez définir si des messages sortants doivent ou non être envoyés vers un compte e-mail. DESTIN. DEFAUT Vous pouvez définir l'adresse e-mail par défaut pour l'adresse "De" si vous définissez le MODE SECURISE à  DESACTIVER. OBJET DEFAUT Vous pouvez définir le sujet par défaut de vos e-mails. TRANSF. E-MAIL Vous pouvez configurer l'imprimante pour qu'elle transfère toutes les télécopies entrantes et sortantes vers des  adresses e-mails spécifiques. Consultez "Renvoi de fax vers des adresses e-mail" . CONTROLE ACCES Vous pouvez protéger la fonction de configuration des e-mails par un mot de passe. DEFINIR LE CODE Vous pouvez modifier le mot de passe permettant d'accéder à la fonction de configuration des e-mails.3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance NUM., puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance RESEAU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à E-MAIL. 6. Entrez votre identifiant de connexion, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 7. Entrez votre mot de passe de connexion, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 8. Entrez l'adresse e-mail du destinataire et appuyez sur OK ( ). Un message vous demande si vous souhaitez entrer une autre adresse. 9. Pour entrer des adresses supplémentaires, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner AJOUTER, puis répétez l'étape 8. Pour poursuivre avec l'étape suivante, appuyez sur OK ( ) lorsque TERMINE apparaît.  10. Un message affiché vous demande si vous souhaitez revoir des adresses. Pour revoir des adresses, appuyez sur OK ( ) pour sélectionner OUI. Pour continuer avec l'étape suivante, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner NON, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 11. Un message affiché vous demande si vous voulez vous adresser l'e-mail à vous-même. Pour faire un envoi à votre adresse e-mail, appuyez sur OK ( ) pour sélectionner OUI. Ou, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner NON, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 12. Entrez le sujet de l'e-mail, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 13. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner le type de fichier dans lequel l'image numérisée peut être convertie, puis appuyez  sur OK ( ). 14. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner la résolution de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 15. Appuyez sur Départ ( ) ou OK ( ). L'imprimante commence la numérisation et envoie ensuite l'e-mail. 16. Si le message affiché vous demande si vous souhaitez fermer la session de votre compte, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( or ) pour sélectionner OUI ou NON, puis appuyer sur OK ( ). 17. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille. Configuration du Carnet d'adresses Vous pouvez configurer le carnet d'adresses avec les adresses email que vous utilisez fréquemment. Vous pouvez alors entrer facilement et rapidement des  adresses e-mail en entrant le nom que vous avez attribué dans le carnet d'adresses.  Ajouter une adresse e-mail au carnet d'adresses 1. Sur le panneau de commande, appuyez sur Répertoire ( ). OU Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REPERTOIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance E-MAIL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ADRESSE E-MAIL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour sélectionner NOUVEAU. 5. Entrez le nom que vous voulez ajouter, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 6. Entrez l'adresse e-mail pour le nom et appuyez sur OK ( ). 7. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille. Envoi d'un e-mail à l'aide d'une adresse e-mail 1. Chargez un document dans le chargeur automatique ou placez-le sur la vitre d'exposition. REMARQUE : Vous pouvez entrer un nom que vous avez enregistré dans le carnet d'adresses. Reportez-vous à la "Configuration du Carnet d'adresses".2. Sur le panneau de commande, appuyez sur Répertoire ( ). OU Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REPERTOIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance E-MAIL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ADRESSE E-MAIL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ENVOYER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 6. Entrez le nom de l'expéditeur, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 7. L'adresse e-mail que vous avez associée au nom apparaît. Appuyez sur OK ( ). 8. Entrez le nom du destinataire, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Pour plus d'informations sur le mode de saisie des caractères, voir "Utilisation du clavier numérique pour la saisie de caractères". 9. L'adresse e-mail que vous avez associée au nom apparaît. Appuyez sur OK ( ). 10. Un message vous demande si vous souhaitez entrer une autre adresse. Pour entrer des adresses supplémentaires, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner AJOUTER, puis répétez les étapes 8  et 9. Pour poursuivre avec l'étape suivante, appuyez sur OK ( ) lorsque TERMINE apparaît. 11. Un message affiché vous demande si vous souhaitez revoir des adresses. Pour revoir les adresses, appuyez sur OK ( ) pour sélectionner OUI, puis vérifiez les adresses que vous avez entrées. Pour continuer avec l'étape suivante, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner NON, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 12. Un message affiché vous demande si vous voulez vous adresser un e-mail à vous-même. Sélectionnez OUI ou NON, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 13. Entrez le sujet de l'e-mail, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 14. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner le type de fichier dans lequel l'image numérisée peut être convertie, puis appuyez  sur OK ( ). 15. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner la résolution de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 16. Appuyez sur Départ ( ) ou OK ( ). L'imprimante commence la numérisation et envoie ensuite l'e-mail. 17. Appuyez sur OK ( ) lorsque l'écran affiche DECONN. MAINT ? Votre imprimante retourne au mode veille. Modification ou suppression d'une adresse e-mail 1. Sur le panneau de commande, appuyez sur Répertoire ( ). OU Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REPERTOIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance E-MAIL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ADRESSE E-MAIL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MODIFIER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner l'adresse e-mail à modifier ou à supprimer, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 6. Pour supprimer l'adresse sélectionnée, appuyez sur OK ( ). OU Pour modifier l'adresse sélectionnée, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner MODIFIER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 7. Si vous sélectionnez MODIFIER, éditez le nom et appuyez sur OK ( ). Editez l'adresse e-mail et appuyez sur OK ( ). 8. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.Numéros de groupe Si vous envoyez fréquemment un même document à plusieurs destinataires, vous pouvez grouper ces destinataires et les affecter à un registre de composition  de groupe. Vous pouvez dès lors envoyer un document à l'ensemble des destinations du groupe à l'aide du numéro de groupe. Vous pouvez configurer  jusqu'à 50 (de 1 à 50) numéros de groupe. Attribution des adresses e-mail à un numéro de groupe 1. Sur le panneau de commande, appuyez sur Répertoire ( ). OU Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REPERTOIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance E-MAIL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour sélectionner MAIL GROUPE. 4. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour sélectionner NOUVEAU. 5. Entrez un numéro d'emplacement de groupe compris entre 1 et 50, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 6. Entrez le nom du groupe, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 7. Entrez le nom du destinataire que vous avez enregistré, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 8. A l'invite de AUTRE ADRESSE, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher AJOUTER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Répétez l'étape 7. OU Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour sélectionner TERMINE. 9. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille. Suppression d'un numéro de groupe 1. Sur le panneau de commande, appuyez sur Répertoire ( ). OU Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REPERTOIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance E-MAIL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour sélectionner MAIL GROUPE. 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner SUPPRIMER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. Entrez un numéro d'emplacement de groupe à supprimer, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 6. Appuyez sur OK ( ) à l'affichage de OUI. 7. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille. Modification des numéros de groupe 1. Sur le panneau de commande, appuyez sur Répertoire ( ). OU Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REPERTOIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance E-MAIL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour sélectionner MAIL GROUPE. 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MODIFIER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. Entrez un numéro d'emplacement de groupe à modifier, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 6. Modifiez le nom du groupe, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 7. Appuyez sur OK ( ) lorsque AFFICHAGE apparaît pour vérifier la liste des adresses du groupe.OU Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher AJOUTER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ) pour ajouter d'autres adresses e-mail. Entrez le nom du destinataire que vous avez enregistré, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). OU Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour afficher SUPPRIMER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ) pour supprimer des adresses e-mail du groupe. Envoi d'un e-mail à l'aide d'un numéro de groupe 1. Insérez le ou les documents à numériser face imprimée vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique en commençant par le bord supérieur. OU Placez un seul document face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition. Pour plus d'informations sur la préparation des documents, voir "Chargement d'un document original". 2. Sur le panneau de commande, appuyez sur Répertoire ( ). OU Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REPERTOIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance E-MAIL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MAIL GROUPE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance ENVOYER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 6. Si le mode sécurisé est désactivé, entrez le nom de l'expéditeur et appuyez sur OK ( ). 7. L'adresse e-mail que vous avez associée au nom apparaît. Appuyez sur OK ( ). 8. Un message affiché vous demande si vous voulez vous adresser un e-mail à vous-même. Sélectionnez OUI ou NON, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 9. Entrez le numéro d'emplacement du groupe, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 10. Un message affiché vous demande si vous souhaitez revoir des adresses. Pour revoir les adresses, appuyez sur OK ( ) pour sélectionner OUI, puis vérifiez les adresses que vous avez entrées. Pour continuer avec l'étape suivante, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner NON, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 11. Entrez le sujet de l'e-mail, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 12. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner le type de fichier dans lequel l'image numérisée peut être convertie, puis appuyez  sur OK ( ). 13. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner la résolution de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 14. Appuyez sur Départ ( ) ou OK ( ). L'imprimante commence la numérisation et envoie ensuite l'e-mail. 15. Appuyez sur OK ( ) lorsque l'écran affiche DECONN. MAINT ? Votre imprimante retourne au mode veille. Impression du Carnet d'adresses Vous pouvez vérifier le paramétrage de votre carnet d'adresses et la liste du carnet d'adresses. 1. Sur le panneau de commande, appuyez sur Répertoire ( ). OU Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REPERTOIRE, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance E-MAIL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance IMPRIMER, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner INDIVIDUEL, ADRESSE GROUPE ou TOUS, puis appuyez sur OK ( ).La liste sélectionnée est imprimée. Modification des paramètres par défaut Vous pouvez configurer des paramètres de numérisation par défaut. 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance REGL. DEF NUM., puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour accéder à TAILLE IMAGE. 4. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance la taille de l'image de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 5. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance VERSION, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 6. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance le format de fichier de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). Si vous sélectionnez TIFF ou PDF, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour sélectionner l'option multi-pages et ensuite sur OK ( ). Si vous sélectionnez BMP, appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou  ) pour sélectionner le mode couleur, COULEUR, GRIS, ou MONOCHROME, et  ensuite sur OK ( ). 7. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance RESOLUTION, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 8. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance la résolution de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 9. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance TEMP. NUM RES, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 10. Entrez la valeur de temps de votre choix, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 11. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille. Renvoi de fax vers des adresses e-mail Vous pouvez configurer l'imprimante pour qu'elle transfère toutes les télécopies entrantes et sortantes vers les adresses e-mails. 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG E-MAIL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance TRANSF. E-MAIL, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 4. Sélectionnez l'état désiré en appuyant sur le bouton de défilement ( or ), puis en appuyant sur OK ( ). l DESACTIVE : permet de désactiver cette fonction.  l ENVOI UNIQ. : permet de transférer seulement les télécopies sortantes vers une adresse e-mail spécifique.  l RECEPT. UNIQ. : permet de transférer seulement les télécopies entrantes vers une adresse e-mail spécifique. Lorsque vous sélectionnez cette  option, vous choisir si l'imprimante doit ou non imprimer les télécopies entrantes.  l TOUS LES FAX : permet de transférer à la fois les télécopies entrantes et sortantes vers une adresse e-mail spécifique.  5. Appuyez sur Annuler ( ) pour retourner au mode Veille.Généralités concernant le logiciel Après avoir configuré votre imprimante et l'avoir connectée à votre ordinateur, installez les pilotes et les utilitaires du CD Pilotes et Utilitaires fourni avec votre  imprimante. Si vous avez acheté en même temps un ordinateur et une imprimante Dell™, les pilotes et utilitaires sont automatiquement installés. Vous n'avez  pas besoin de les installer. Le CD Pilotes et Utilitaires contient les éléments suivants : l Pilote d'impression Dell - permet à votre ordinateur de communiquer avec votre imprimante. Pour utiliser votre imprimante en tant qu'imprimante sous  Windows, vous devez installer le ou les pilotes d'impression. Pour plus d'informations concernant l'installation des pilotes d'impression sous Windows, reportez-vous à "Installation du logiciel sous Windows". l Outil Web de configuration d'imprimante Dell - permet de surveiller l'état de votre imprimante réseau sans quitter votre bureau. l Utilitaire de paramétrage d'imprimante - permet de configurer le répertoire de télécopieur et d'autres options de l'imprimante depuis le bureau de votre  ordinateur. Vous pouvez également configurer l'application de destination des numérisations qui est lancée lorsque vous accédez à NUM., puis au menu  PC. l Dell Toner Management System™- indique l'état de l'imprimante et le nom de la tâche lorsque vous envoyez une tâche en impression. La fenêtre Dell  Toner Management System indique également le niveau d'encre restant et vous permet de commander de nouvelles cartouches de toner.  l PaperPort - permet de numériser des documents, de créer des fichiers PDF et de convertir les images numérisées en fichiers Microsoft Word, Excel ou  texte. PaperPort fournit des options de numérisation avancées et permet de créer des annotations sur tous les types d'images. La fonction de  recherche avancée de PaperPort permet de rechercher des éléments selon des propriétés spécifiques.  l Dell ScanCenter™- Ce terminal vous permet de numériser rapidement des documents dans de nombreuses applications, telles que les applications de  messagerie et d'édition de photos et de texte. l Pilote de numérisation - pour numériser des documents, les pilotes TWAIN ou WIA (Windows Image Acquisition) sont disponibles sur votre imprimante. l Guide d'utilisation– la documentation HTML fournit des informations détaillées concernant l'utilisation de votre imprimante. l Set IP - Utilisez ce programme pour paramétrer les adresses TCP/IP de votre imprimante. Pour plus d'informations sur ce programme, reportez-vous au mode d'emploi de l'imprimante réseau qui figure sur le CD-ROM des utilitaires réseau. l Pilote PS - Fichier PPD (Postscript Printer Description). Vous pouvez utiliser le pilote PostScript pour imprimer des documents. l Numérisation en réseau - permet de numériser un document sur votre imprimante et de l'enregistrer sur un ordinateur connecté au réseau. l PC-Fax/Réseau-Fax - permet d'envoyer une télécopie depuis votre ordinateur.  l Pilote Linux - permet d'imprimer et de numériser dans un environnement Linux. l Pilote d'impression Macintosh - permet d'utiliser votre imprimante avec un ordinateur Macintosh. Outil Web de configuration d'imprimante Dell L'outil Web de configuration d'imprimante Dell, également appelé serveur Web intégré à l'imprimante, vous permet de surveiller l'état de votre imprimante  réseau sans quitter votre bureau. Vous pouvez visualiser et/ou modifier les paramètres de configuration de l'imprimante et contrôler le niveau d'encre. Et  lorsque vous souhaitez commander des cartouches de remplacement, cliquez tout simplement sur le lien Fournitures Dell, directement à partir de votre  navigateur Web. Pour lancer l'outil Web de configuration d'imprimante, contentez-vous de taper l'adresse IP de votre imprimante réseau dans votre navigateur. Vous pouvez  aussi lancer l'outil Web de configuration d'imprimante à partir du Centre de contrôle de l'état du réseau. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Centre de surveillance d'état du réseau". Pour connaître l'adresse IP de votre imprimante, imprimez une page de configuration qui répertorie les adresses IP : 1. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance MENU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). REMARQUE : Les applications Dell ScanCenter et PaperPort ne sont pas prises en charge dans le système d'exploitation Windows Server 2003, XP  (édition x64), et Vista. REMARQUE : L'outil Web de configuration d'imprimante Dell n'est accessible que si l'imprimante est connectée à un (au) réseau. Reportez-vous à la  page "Utilisation de Dell Toner Management System".2. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance CONFIG RESEAU, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). 3. Appuyez sur les touches de défilement ( ou ) pour mettre en surbrillance IMPR DONN. SYS, puis appuyez sur OK ( ). La première option de menu, OUI apparaît. 4. Appuyez sur OK ( ) pour imprimer une page de configuration réseau. Si aucune adresse IP n'a été attribuée, attribuez-en une à votre imprimante. Reportez-vous à la "Configuration du protocole TCP/IP". Sélectionnez un lien approprié comme "Configuration de l'imprimante partagée en mode local" pour afficher l'état de votre imprimante réseau et/ou modifier  les paramètres de Configuration de l'imprimante. Etat de l'imprimante Soyez en permanence informé du niveau des consommables de l'imprimante. Lorsque l'encre commence à manquer, cliquez sur le lien de commande d'encre  situé sur le premier écran afin de commander des cartouches d'encre supplémentaires. Paramètres de l'imprimante Modifiez les paramètres de l'imprimante, consultez le panneau de commande à distance et mettez à jour le micrologiciel du serveur d'impression. Paramètres de fax Configurer les paramètres de fax, tels que le bordereau de fax, le protocole, l'annuaire téléphonique et le mode de réception. Paramètres d'e-mail Configurez les paramètres d'e-mail, tels que le serveur SMTP, l'alerte d'e-mail et l'adresse. Copie des paramètres d'imprimante Transférez rapidement les paramètres de l'imprimante vers une ou plusieurs autres imprimantes du réseau en entrant chacune des adresses IP  correspondantes. Statistiques d'impression Suivez l'évolution de vos besoins d'impression, comme votre consommation de papier et les types de tâches d'impression. Informations concernant l'imprimante Obtenez les informations dont vous avez besoin pour vos consultations en cas de problème technique, vos rapports d'inventaire ou pour connaître l'état  actuel de la mémoire et les niveaux de code machine. Définition du mot de passe Verrouillez le panneau de commande avec un mot de passe afin d'empêcher les autres utilisateurs de modifier par inadvertance les paramètres d'imprimante  que vous avez choisis. REMARQUE : Vous devez bénéficier du statut d'administrateur réseau pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction.Aide en ligne Cliquez sur Aide pour visiter le site Web de Dell et bénéficier du dépannage d'imprimante en ligne. Installation du logiciel sous Windows Avant de commencer, assurez-vous que votre système satisfait les "Configuration minimum" Systèmes d'exploitation pris en charge l Windows 98/98 SE/Me/NT 4 Station de travail ou Serveur avec Service Pack 3 l Windows 2000 Professionnel ou Advanced Server l Windows XP Édition familiale ou professionnelle l Windows 2003 Server l Windows Vista Configuration minimum l Espace disque : Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000 : 300 Mo Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista : 1 Go l Mémoire : Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000 : 64 Mo Windows XP/Server 2003 : 128 Mo Windows Vista: 512 Mo l Processeur : Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000 : Pentium II 400 MHz ou supérieur Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista : Pentium III 933 MHz ou supérieur l Logiciel requis : Internet Explorer 5.0 Installation du logiciel Dell pour impression en mode local Une imprimante locale est une imprimante branchée à votre ordinateur à l'aide d'un câble USB. Si votre imprimante est reliée à un réseau et non à votre  ordinateur, ignorez cette étape et passez à la section "Installation du logiciel Dell pour impression en réseau". Un pilote d'imprimante est un logiciel permettant à votre ordinateur de communiquer avec votre imprimante. La procédure d'installation des pilotes dépend du  système d'exploitation que vous utilisez. REMARQUE : Vous devez bénéficier du statut d'administrateur réseau pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. REMARQUE : Le nom d'utilisateur par défaut est admin et le mot de passe par défaut est laissé à blanc (vide). REMARQUE : Pour plus d'informations sur la page principale Tout-en-Un, la page Affichage des images enregistrées ou la page Entretien/Dépannage,  cliquez sur le lien Aide situé dans le coin supérieur droit de l'écran. REMARQUE : Sous Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, l'administrateur système doit installer le logiciel Dell. 1. Assurez-vous que l'imprimante est connectée à votre réseau et qu'elle est sous tension. Fermez tous les programmes inutiles. 2. Insérez le CD-ROM Pilotes et Utilitaires. 3. Si nécessaire, appuyez sur le bouton Langue pour sélectionner une langue. 4. Sélectionnez Installation personnelle, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 5. Sélectionner Installation standard, puis cliquez sur Suivant pour installer le mode d'emploi, les pilotes d'impression, le pilote du scanner et PaperPort comme paramètres par défaut. Pour installer le logiciel sélectionné, notamment le pilote d'impression Postscript, sélectionnez Installation personnalisée, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Vous pouvez modifier le dossier de destination. 6. Lorsque l'installation est terminée, imprimez une page de test. Cliquez sur Terminer et fermez l'Assistant. L'impression est prête à être lancée. Attribution d'une adresse IP Avant d'utiliser l'imprimante en réseau, vous devez créer une adresse IP, un masque de sous-réseau et une passerelle pour l'imprimante. Pour définir  automatiquement l'adresse IP, un serveur DHCP ou BOOTP doit exister sur le réseau. Pour configurer l'adresse IP manuellement, vous pouvez utiliser le CD-ROM Pilotes et Utilitaires fourni. Imprimez la page de configuration de l'imprimante pour connaître la configuration réseau actuelle et l'adresse MAC. Vous aurez besoin de ces informations pour configurer l'imprimante sur le réseau. 1. Assurez-vous que l'imprimante est branchée à votre réseau et qu'elle est sous tension. Fermez tous les programmes inutiles. 2. Insérez le CD-ROM Pilotes et Utilitaires. REMARQUE : Si vous branchez un câble d'imprimante USB alors que votre imprimante multifonction et votre ordinateur sont sous tension, l'assistant  matériel de Windows démarre automatiquement. Fermez l'écran et installez le logiciel Dell à l'aide du CD-ROM Pilotes et Utilitaires. REMARQUE : Si l'imprimante n'est pas connectée à votre ordinateur lorsque vous installez le CD-ROM Pilotes et Utilitaires, l'écran Aucune  imprimante trouvée apparaît alors. Suivez les instructions pour installer le logiciel. REMARQUE : Pour Windows Vista, cliquer sur Continuer lorsque l'écran Contrôle de compte utilisateur apparaît. REMARQUE : Pour Windows Vista, cliquer sur Continuer lorsque l'écran Contrôle de compte utilisateur apparaît.3. Si nécessaire, appuyez sur le bouton Langue pour sélectionner une langue. 4. Sélectionnez Définir l'utilitaire d'adresse IP. La liste des imprimantes disponibles sur le réseau apparaît. 5. Sélectionnez l'imprimante à laquelle vous souhaitez attribuer une adresse IP. L'adresse IP par défaut de l'imprimante figure sur la page Configuration. 6. Après avoir attribué l'adresse IP pour l'imprimante, quittez le programme. Installation du logiciel Dell pour impression en réseau Lorsque vous connectez votre imprimante au réseau, configurez les paramètres TCP/IP pour l'imprimante avec d'installer le logiciel Dell sur chacune des  imprimantes du réseau. Vous pouvez installer le logiciel Dell sur les ordinateurs du réseau, en local ou à distance. 1. Assurez-vous que l'imprimante est branchée à votre réseau et qu'elle est sous tension. Fermez tous les programmes inutiles. Pour plus d'informations  sur la connexion au réseau, reportez-vous à la "Connexion de l'imprimante au réseau". 2. Insérez le CD-ROM Pilotes et Utilitaires. 3. Si nécessaire, appuyez sur le bouton Langue pour sélectionner une langue. 4. Sélectionnez Installation réseau, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 5. Pour installer les pilotes sur cet ordinateur pour un fonctionnement en réseau, sélectionnez Installation locale, puis cliquez sur Suivant. REMARQUE : L'administrateur système doit installer les pilotes d'impression sur les ordinateurs du réseau. REMARQUE : Pour Windows Vista, cliquer sur Continuer lorsque l'écran Contrôle de compte utilisateur apparaît.Pour installer le logiciel Dell sur des ordinateurs distants ou des serveurs réseau du même réseau, sélectionnez Installation à distance. Vous devrez saisir l'ID et le mot de passe de l'administrateur de domaine. Sélectionnez le ou les ordinateurs clients du même domaine sur un réseau, puis cliquez sur  Suivant. 6. La liste des imprimantes disponibles sur le réseau apparaît. Sélectionnez l'imprimante à installer, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Si votre imprimante n'apparaît pas sur la liste, cliquez sur Mettre à jour pour actualiser la liste ou sélectionnez Ajouter imprimante pour ajouter l'imprimante au réseau. Pour ajouter l'imprimante au réseau, entrez le nom de port et l'adresse IP actuelle de l'imprimante.  Pour installer l'imprimante sur un serveur, activez la case à cocher J'installe cette imprimante sur un serveur. 7. La liste des pilotes et utilitaires d'impression apparaît. Cliquez sur et sélectionnez les pilotes et utilitaires requis que allez utiliser, puis cliquez sur  Suivant. 8. La liste des imprimantes disponibles sur le réseau apparaît. Sélectionnez l'imprimante à installer, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Si votre imprimante n'apparaît pas sur la liste, cliquez sur Mettre à jour pour actualiser la liste ou sélectionnez Ajouter imprimante pour ajouter l'imprimante au réseau. Pour ajouter l'imprimante au réseau, entrez le nom de port et l'adresse IP actuelle de l'imprimante.  9. L'écran affiche les pilotes d'impression installés sur votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez modifier le nom de l'imprimante et définir l'imprimante comme imprimante par défaut à partager sur le réseau. Cliquer sur Suivant. REMARQUE : Le serveur et l'ordinateur client doivent être tous deux avoir l'un des systèmes d'exploitation suivants : Windows XP, Windows  2000, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista ou Windows NT 4.0 REMARQUE : Le serveur doit pouvoir convertir le nom de l'ordinateur client en adresse IP.10. Une fois l'installation de l'imprimante terminée, vous pouvez imprimer une page de test. Cliquer sur Terminer. Si vous installez l'utilitaire de numérisation en réseau après avoir installé votre imprimante, le Gestionnaire de numérisation en réseau apparaît à l'écran.  Vous devez configurer les paramètres de la numérisation en réseau. Reportez-vous aux étapes de "Ajout d'un scanner". Désinstallation du logiciel Si vous mettez le logiciel à niveau ou si l'installation échoue, vous devez désinstaller les pilotes d'impression. Vous pouvez supprimer le logiciel à l'aide du CDROM Pilotes et Utilitaires ou bien à l'aide de la désinstallation Windows. 1. A partir du menu Démarrer, sélectionnez Programmes ou Tous les programmes DELL Imprimantes Dell DELL Laser MFP 1815 Désinstallation du logiciel Dell MFP. 2. Sélectionnez le logiciel que vous souhaitez supprimer. 3. Cliquer sur OK. 4. Redémarrez votre ordinateur. Utilisation de Dell Toner Management System Le Moniteur d'état local affiche l'état de l'imprimante (Imprimante prête, Imprimante hors ligne et Erreur-Vérifier l'imprimante), le nom de la tâche en cours  d'impression et le niveau d'encre (100 %, 50 %, Niveau de toner bas) de votre imprimante.  Si vous utilisez un réseau, vous pouvez accéder au Centre Moniteur d'état du réseau qui indique l'état de toutes les imprimantes disponibles dans le réseau. Moniteur d'état des imprimantes locales L'écran Moniteur d'état local démarre lorsque vous envoyez une tâche d'impression à l'imprimante. Il n'apparaît que sur l'écran de l'ordinateur. Selon le niveau  de toner restant, l'écran Moniteur d'état local est différent. REMARQUE : Fermez tous les programmes avant de lancer la désinstallation du logiciel, puis redémarrez votre ordinateur une fois le processus de  désinstallation terminé. REMARQUE : Pour Windows Vista, cliquer sur Continuer lorsque l'écran Contrôle de compte utilisateur apparaît.Centre de surveillance d'état du réseau Si votre imprimante est connectée à un réseau, vous pouvez utiliser le Centre Moniteur d'état du réseau. Ce faisant, vous pouvez lancer l'utilitaire Web de  configuration des imprimantes Dell et gérer l'état de plusieurs imprimantes sur le réseau. 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer Programmes DELL Imprimantes Dell DELL Laser MFP 1815 Centre de contrôle d'état du réseau. 2. Double-cliquez sur un nom d'imprimante pour ouvrir son Moniteur d'état ou sélectionner Exécuter... pour ouvrir le Moniteur d'état d'une imprimante  donnée. 3. Sélectionnez Actualiser pour modifier l'apparence de la liste d'imprimantes. Utilitaire de paramétrage d'imprimante A l'aide de la fenêtre Utilitaire de paramétrage d'imprimante, vous pouvez configurer les options de données du télécopieur et créer et modifier les entrées du  répertoire à partir de votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez également configurer les lancements de destination lorsque vous accédez à Numérisation, puis à PC. Lorsque vous installez le logiciel Dell, l'utilitaire de paramétrage d'imprimante est installé de façon automatique.  Pour plus d'informations sur l'installation du logiciel, reportez-vous à la "Installation du logiciel sous Windows". Pour ouvrir l'utilitaire de paramétrage d'imprimante : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer Programmes DELL Imprimantes Dell DELL Laser MFP 1815 Utilitaire de paramétrage d'imprimante. La fenêtre Utilitaire de paramétrage d'imprimante s'ouvre. 2. La fenêtre Utilitaire de paramétrage d'imprimante offre plusieurs fonctions : Répertoire (Repertoire, Carnet adres.), Paramètres de télécopie (Page de couverture de télécopie) et Numérisation (Emplacement, Résolution, Couleur de numérisation, Afficher la prévisualisation). Pour plus d'informations, cliquez sur bouton . Pour utiliser les paramètres par défaut, cliquez sur le bouton Param. par défaut. Pour quitter, cliquez sur le bouton Quitter situé en bas de la fenêtre. REMARQUE : Cette application n'est disponible que si l'imprimante est connectée à un réseau.Section Répertoire Cliquez sur la section Repertoire ou Carnet adres., puis sur le bouton Paramètres pour créer et modifier des entrées de répertoire ou de répertoire d'e-mails. Section Paramètres de télécopie Cliquez sur la section Paramètres de télécopie pour créer une page de couverture de télécopie. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la "Options de configuration de télécopie avancées". La page de garde de télécopie contient la date, le numéro du télécopieur et l'ID de l'imprimante de l'expéditeur, le  numéro du télécopieur et l'ID de l'imprimante du destinataire enregistrés dans le répertoire de l'expéditeur ainsi que le nombre total de pages que vous avez  envoyées. Section Numérisation La section Emplacement Pour configurer la liste de destination de numérisation qui apparaît sur le panneau de commande lorsque vous accédez à Scan (Numériser), puis à PC, cliquez sur Emplacement, puis sur le bouton Paramètres. La liste de destinations permet de sélectionner les programmes logiciels susceptibles de traiter les images  numérisées.La section Résolution Cliquez sur la section Résolution, puis sélectionnez la résolution de numérisation par défaut dans la liste déroulante. Vous pouvez sélectionner 75 ppp  (brouillon), 150 ppp, 200 ppp, 300 ppp (normal) ou 600 ppp. La section Couleur de numérisation Cliquez sur la section Couleur de numérisation, puis sélectionnez la couleur de numérisation par défaut dans la liste déroulante. Vous pouvez sélectionner  Couleur de numérisation, Noir et blanc, Gris, 256 couleurs ou Couleurs naturelles. La section Prévisualisation Cliquez sur la section Afficher la prévisualisation, puis cochez la case pour afficher l'écran de prévisualisation.Spécifications  Spécifications générales a. Moyenne de toner basée sur une page imprimée avec 5 % d'aplat, conformément aux méthodes de test ISO/IEC 19752. Les moyennes varient en  fonction de l'usage et des conditions ambiantes. Spécifications du scanner et du copieur Spécifications générales Spécifications du scanner et du copieur Spécifications de l'imprimante multifonction Spécifications du télécopieur  Spécifications du papier Caractéristique Description Chargeur automatique de documents Jusqu'à 50 pages (75 g/m2 ) Format de document pour le chargeur automatique Largeur : 142 à 216 mm Longueur : 148 à 356 mm Capacité d'alimentation papier Bac d'alimentation : 250 feuilles (grammage : 75 g/m2 ) Passe copie : papier ordinaire 50 feuilles (grammage : 75 g/m2 ), support spécial : 5 feuilles Capacité de sortie papier Réceptacle de sortie : 150 feuilles (face imprimée vers le bas) Capot arrière : 1 feuille (face imprimée vers le haut) "TYPE PAPIER" Bac d'alimentation : Papier ordinaire (60 à 90 g/m2 ) Passe copie : Papier ordinaire, transparents, étiquettes, cartes, cartes postales (60 à 163 g/m2 ), enveloppes (75 à  90 g/m2 ) Impression recto verso : Papier ordinaire (75 à 90 g/m2 ) Consommables Système à une cartouche d'encre Configuration électrique 110-127 VCA, 50/60 Hz, 5,4 A 220-240 VCA, 50/60 Hz, 3,0 A Consommation électrique Moyenne : inférieure à 450 W Mode veille : inférieure à 30 W Niveau sonore Copie : 55 dBA Mode veille : 33 dBA Impression : 54 dBA Temps de préchauffage Moins de 42 secondes Conditions de fonctionnement Température : 10 °C à 32 °C Humidité : 20 % - 80 % RH Écran LCD 16 caractères x 2 lignes Durée de vie de la cartouche d'encre Durée de vide de la cartouche de toner Dell de capacité standard : 3 000 pages a Durée de vide de la cartouche de toner Dell de haute capacité 5 000 pages a Spécifications de l'imprimante  multifonction (L x P x H) 450 x 438 x 457,2 mm Mémoire vive (RAM) 96 Mo (Max. 192 Mo) Poids Net : 16 kg (y compris cartouche d'encre), 14,5 kg (hors cartouche d'encre) Brut : 22,3 kg (y compris consommables, accessoires et emballage) Poids de l'emballage Papier : 2.7 Kg Plastique : 0,7 kg Caractéristique Description Compatibilité Norme TWAIN/Norme WIA Méthode de numérisation Chargeur automatique et à plat Module avec capteur à transfert de charge (CCD) couleur  Résolution Optique : 600 x 1 200 ppp (monochrome et couleur) Améliorée : 4 800 x 4 800 ppp  Longueur de numérisation effective Vitre d'exposition : 293 mm CAD : 352 mmSpécifications de l'imprimante multifonction Spécifications du télécopieur Largeur de numérisation effective 208 mm Profondeur de bit couleur 24 bits Profondeur de bit mono 1 bit avec Lineart 8 bits en Echelle de gris Vitesse de numérisation (en mode  texte) Vitre d'exposition : 15 (Lineart), 20 (Gris), 30 secondes (Couleur) CAD : 26 (Lineart), 26 (Gris), 64 secondes (Couleur) Vitesse de copie SDMC (Single Document Multiple Copy) : 27 cpm (copies par minute pour Letter), 25 cpm pour A4 MDMC (Multi-document Multiple Copy) en mode Texte et Mixte : 7 cpm MDSC (Multi-document Single Copy) : 7 cpm MDMC en mode Photo : 4 cpm Format de papier Letter, A4, Legal, Folio, Executive, A5, B5, A6 Zoom CAD : Vitre d'exposition : 25 %   25 % - 100 % - 400 % Copies multiples 1 à 199 pages Mode Copie (=Type d'origine) Texte, Texte&Photo, Photo Caractéristique Description Méthode d'impression Impression par faisceau laser Vitesse d'impression (recto) Letter : 27 ppm (pages par minute) A4 : 25 ppm Vitesse d'impression (recto-verso) Letter : 18 images par minute A4 : 17 images par minute Format de papier Bac d'alimentation : Letter, A4, Legal, Oficio, Folio, A5, A6  Passe copie : Letter, Legal, A4, Oficio, Folio, Executive, A5, A6, A6 carton, Carte postale 4x6, HagaKi, Enveloppe 7- 3/4, Enveloppe 9, Enveloppe 10, Enveloppe COM-10, Enveloppe DL, Enveloppe C5, Enveloppe C6, Enveloppe B5, JIS B5, ISO B5 * Min. : 76 x 127 mm Max. : 216 x 356 mm Impression recto verso : Letter, A4, Legal, Oficio, Folio Résolution d'impression Jusqu'à 1 200 ppp en sortie effective Émulation GDI, PCL6, PCL5e, PostScript Level3 Interface PC USB 2.0 Interface réseau 10/100 Base-TX Compatibilité Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista Divers systèmes d'exploitation y compris Red Hat 8.0 ~ 9.0 Fedora Core 1 ~ 3, Mandrake 9 ~ 10, and SuSE 8.2 ~ 9.1 Mac. 10.3 et supérieur Durée de la première impression Mode veille : Moins de 10 secondes Caractéristique Description Compatibilité ITU-T Groupe 3 Ligne applicable Réseau téléphonique public commuté (RTPC) et auto-commutateur privé (PABX) Codage des données MH/MR/MMR (mode ECM) et JPEG/JBIG pour l'envoi de télécopies couleur Vitesse du modem 33,6 Kbits/s Vitesse de transmission Environ 3 secondes/page * La vitesse de transmission correspond à la transmission de données textuelles à partir de la mémoire, avec  compression ECM et uniquement à l'aide du tableau ITU-T n 1. Vitesse de numérisation Vitre d'exposition : environ 3 secondes/A4 (en mode télécopie avec résolution standard) CAD : environ 5 secondes/Letter (en mode télécopie avec résolution standard), 7,5 secondes/Letter (en mode  télécopie avec résolution élevée) Longueur de document maximale Vitre d'exposition : 297 mm CAD : 356 mm Format de papier A4, Letter, Legal Résolution Standard : 203 x 98 ppp Fine : 203 x 196 ppp Super fine : 300 x 300 ppp Spécifications du papier Généralités Votre imprimante accepte différents supports, comme le papier recyclé (y compris le papier 100 % fibre), les enveloppes, les étiquettes, les transparents et du  papier au format spécial. Les caractéristiques comme le poids, la composition, le grain et la teneur en humidité sont des facteurs importants qui ont une  incidence sur les performances de l'imprimante et sur la qualité d'impression en général. L'utilisation de papier non conforme aux spécifications décrites dans  ce mode d'emploi peut provoquer des problèmes, par exemple : l Une qualité d'impression médiocre l Des bourrages fréquents l Usure prématurée de l'imprimante Formats de papier acceptés a. L'imprimante accepte une grande variété de formats. b. La contenance des bacs peut varier en fonction du poids et de l'épaisseur des supports et des conditions ambiantes.  Consignes d'utilisation du papier Pour obtenir un résultat optimal, utilisez un papier standard de 75 g/m2 . Assurez-vous qu'il est de bonne qualité et qu'il ne présente pas de défauts (entailles,  déchirures, taches, particules, plis, bords ondulés ou recourbés). Si vous avez un doute sur le type de papier que vous vous apprêtez à utiliser (papier à fort grammage ou recyclé par exemple), vérifiez l'étiquette sur l'emballage. Mémoire utilisateur 4 Mo (320 pages) Demi-teinte 256 niveaux REMARQUE : Il arrive que certains papiers répondant aux conditions décrites dans ce manuel ne fournissent cependant pas des résultats satisfaisants.  Cela peut provenir d'une manipulation incorrecte du papier, de niveaux d'humidité et de températures excessifs ou d'autres facteurs indépendants de  Dell. REMARQUE : Avant d'acheter une quantité importante de papier, assurez-vous qu'il répond aux exigences mentionnées dans ce mode d'emploi ATTENTION : L'utilisation d'un papier non conforme aux spécifications peut provoquer des problèmes de fonctionnement de l'appareil, allant  jusqu'à nécessiter l'intervention d'un réparateur. Ce type d'intervention n'est pas couvert par la garantie Dell ni par les contrats de maintenance. Papier Formats a Poids Capacité b Letter 216 x 279 mm • 60-90 g/m2 pour le bac d'alimentation papier • 60-163 g/m2 pour le bac d'alimentation papier • 75-90 g/m2 pour l'impression rectoverso • 250 feuilles de papier 75 g/m2 dans le bac d'alimentation papier • 50 feuilles de papier 75 g/m2 dans le passe copie A4 210 x 297 mm EXECUTIVE 184 x 267 mm Légal 216 x 356 mm OFICIO 216 x 343 mm FOLIO 216 x 330 mm Format minimal (personnalisé) 76 x 127 mm 60 à 163 g/m2 5 feuilles de papier pour le passe copie Format maximum (Legal US) 216 x 356 mm Transparents Mêmes dimensions minimales et  maximales que ci-dessus. 138 à 146 g/m2 Étiquettes 120 à 150 g/m2 Papier cartonné 105 à 163 g/m2 Enveloppes 75 à 90 g/m2 REMARQUE : Si vous utilisez un support inférieur à 127 mm de long, des bourrages risquent de se produire. Pour des performances optimales, stockez  et manipulez correctement le papier. Consultez "Environnement d'impression et stockage du papier" . REMARQUE : En mode recto-verso, vous pouvez utiliser du papier au format A4, Letter, Folio, Oficio, Legal.Le tableau ci-dessous présente des problèmes liés au papier pouvant entraîner une mauvaise qualité d'impression ou des bourrages et risquant  d'endommager l'imprimante. Spécifications du papier Capacité de sortie papier Environnement d'impression et stockage du papier Les conditions de stockage ont une incidence directe sur l'alimentation dans l'appareil. Dans l'idéal, l'imprimante et le papier doivent se trouver dans un environnement à température ambiante, ni trop sec ni trop humide. N'oubliez pas que le  papier absorbe et perd rapidement l'humidité. La chaleur et l'humidité contribuent à altérer le papier. La chaleur provoque l'évaporation de l'humidité contenue dans le papier, alors que le froid la condense  sur les feuilles. Les systèmes de chauffage et de climatisation assèchent l'air. À mesure que le papier est sorti de son emballage et utilisé, il perd son humidité,  d'où un risque de rayure et de souillure. À l'inverse, un temps humide ou la présence d'un système réfrigérant peut augmenter l'humidité d'un local. Dans ce  cas, lorsque le papier est sorti de son emballage, il absorbe l'humidité, ce qui provoque à l'impression un éclaircissement du texte et des zones vides. En  outre, lorsque le papier perd et absorbe l'humidité, il peut se déformer et risque de provoquer des bourrages. Symptôme Problème lié au papier Solution Mauvaise qualité d'impression ou dépôt d'encre,  problèmes d'alimentation Papier trop humide, rugueux, lisse ou gaufré ; rame  de papier défectueuse Essayez un autre type de papier avec une perméabilité de 100 à 400 (méthode Sheffield) et  une teneur en humidité de 4 à 5 %. Zones vides, bourrage, ondulation Stockage inadéquat Stockez le papier à plat dans un emballage  étanche. Fond excessivement grisé / usure de  l'imprimante Papier trop épais Utilisez du papier plus fin ou utilisez le capot arrière. Ondulation excessive au moment de l'alimentation Papier trop humide, mauvais sens du grain ou grain trop court • Utilisez le capot arrière. • Utilisez du papier à grain long. Bourrage, endommagement de l'imprimante Découpes ou perforations N'utilisez pas de papier présentant des découpes  ou des perforations. Problèmes d'alimentation Bords irréguliers Utilisez du papier de bonne qualité. REMARQUE : Évitez d'utiliser du papier à en-tête sur lequel un texte a été préimprimé avec des encres à basse température comme celles utilisées  dans certains procédés de thermographie. REMARQUE : N'utilisez pas du papier gaufré ou à reliefs. REMARQUE : La fixation de l'encre sur le papier se fait par pression et par fusion. Par conséquent, le papier de couleur ou les formulaires préimprimés  doivent utiliser une encre résistant à une température de fusion de (180 °C pendant un dixième de seconde). Catégorie Spécifications Teneur en acide pH de 5,5 ou inférieur Épaisseur 0,094 à 0,18 mm Plissement Plat sur 5 mm Bords Coupés avec une lame tranchante, sans effilochure. Résistance à la fusion Ne doit pas roussir, fondre ou émettre des substances toxiques lors du chauffage à 180 °C pendant un dixième de  seconde. Grain Grain sens machine Teneur en humidité Entre 4 % et 6 % selon le poids Satinage 100 à 400 (méthode Sheffield) Sortie Capacité réceptacle de sortie (face à imprimer  vers le bas) 150 feuilles de papier à lettre 75 g/m2 capot arrière (face imprimée vers le  haut) 1 feuilles de papier à lettre 75 g/m2Évitez d'acheter des réserves de papier supérieures à trois mois d'utilisation. Le papier stocké pendant de longues périodes souffre de la chaleur et de  l'humidité, provoquant des problèmes à l'utilisation. Planifiez vos achats pour éviter tout endommagement du papier. Les rames de papier maintenues dans leur emballage étanche se conservent sans problème pendant plusieurs mois. En revanche, dès que l'emballage est  ouvert, le papier est soumis aux conditions ambiantes, et plus particulièrement s'il n'est pas protégé par un emballage étanche. Il convient d'assurer de bonnes conditions de stockage du papier afin de garantir des performances optimales. Les conditions idéales correspondent à une  température de 20 °C à 24 °C, avec un taux d'humidité de 4 à 55 %. Les consignes suivantes vous aideront à déterminer l'environnement de stockage  approprié. l Stockez le papier à température ambiante. l L'air ne doit être ni trop sec ni trop humide. l Lorsqu'une rame de papier est ouverte, le mieux, après avoir prélevé la quantité de feuilles nécessaire, est de replier avec soin l'emballage étanche. Si l'environnement d'impression est soumis à des conditions extrêmes, ne sortez de l'emballage que la quantité de papier à utiliser pour la journée, afin  d'éviter toute variation d'humidité.Guide de l'utilisateur de l'Imprimante Laser Multi-Functions Dell™ 1815dn Cliquez sur les liens à gauche, pour obtenir des renseignements sur les fonctionnalités, les options, et le fonctionnement de votre imprimante. Pour obtenir  des informations sur d'autres documentations fournis avec votre imprimante, reportez-vous à "Recherche d'informations". Pour commander de cartouches de toner de remplacement ou des consommables Dell : 1. Double-cliquez sur l'cône Renouvellement de commande de cartouche d'encre Dell 1815dn sur le bureau. OU 2. Visitez le site Web de Dell , ou commandez des consommables d'imprimante Dell par téléphone. www.dell.com/supplies OU premier.dell.com est le site sécurisé, personnalisable, d'approvisionnement et de support de Dell pour ses clients bénéficiant d'un service étendu. Remarques, Observations et Mises en garde ----------------------------------------------------------------- Les informations de ce document sont sujettes à des modifications sans préavis.  © 2006 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction sous quelque forme que ce soit sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Microsoft et Windows sont des marques déposées et Windows Vista est une marque de Microsoft Corporation; VESA est une marque déposée de Video Electronics Standards  Association.;EMC est une marque déposée de EMC Corporation; ENERGY STAR et le logo ENERGY STAR sont des marques déposées de la U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. En  tant que partenaire Energy Star, Dell Computer Corporation a décidé de rendre ses produits conformes aux normes Energy Star en matière d’économies d’énergie. Marques utilisées dans ce texte : Dell, le logo DELL, Dell Precision, PowerEdge, PowerConnect, PowerVault, XPS, Dimension, Optiplex, Latitude, et Dell Toner Management System sont des marques de Dell Inc.; Microsoft et Windows sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation.  PaperPort ® est une marque déposée de ScanSoft, Inc. Adobe® et PhotoShop® sont des marques déposées de Adobe Systems Incorporated. D'autres marques et noms commerciaux peuvent être utilisés dans ce document en référence aussi bien aux entités revendiquant les marques et les noms en questions qu'aux  produits eux-mêmes. Dell Inc. dénie tout intérêt propriétaire aux marques et noms commerciaux autres que les siens. ----------------------------------------------------------------- Modèle 1815 Juin 2006      SRV       Rév. A03 REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE signale des informations importantes qui vous aident à mieux utiliser votre imprimante. OBSERVATION : Une OBSERVATION sert à avertir de dommages matériels ou d'une perte de données potentiels et de la façon dont le problème peut  être éviter. ATTENTION : Une MISE EN GARDE signale la possibilité de dommages vis-à-vis des biens et de blessures, voire de décès, vis-à-vis des personnes. Dépannage  Suppression de bourrages papier au niveau du chargeur automatique de documents Quand un document se bloque alors qu'il passe par le chargeur automatique, le message BOURRAGE DOC. apparaît sur l'écran. 1. Retirez les feuilles restantes du chargeur. Si le document est coincé au niveau des bacs d'alimentation : a. Ouvrez le couvercle du CAD. b. Retirez le document en le tirant délicatement. c. Fermez le chargeur. Puis réintroduisez le document. Si le document est coincé au niveau de la sortie papier : a. Ouvrez le couvercle de document, puis faites tourner la molette de dégagement pour sortir les feuilles coincées au niveau du plateau de  réception des documents. Suppression de bourrages papier au niveau du chargeur automatique de documents Suppression du bourrage dans les circuits d'entraînement du papier Messages d'erreur et dépannage Dépannage REMARQUE : Afin d'éviter les bourrages papier, utilisez la vitre d'exposition pour les documents épais, fins ou mixtes.b. Fermez le couvercle. puis remettez les documents en place. 2. Si vous ne voyez pas le papier ou si le papier ne bouge pas lorsque vous tirez dessus, ouvrez le couvercle du chargeur de document. 3. Faites tourner la molette de dégagement pour retirer la feuille coincée au niveau du rouleau ou de la fente d'insertion en la tirant avec précaution. 4. Fermez le couvercle. puis remettez les documents en place. Suppression du bourrage dans les circuits d'entraînement du papier Lorsqu'un bourrage papier survient, le message BOURR PAPIER s'affiche à l'écran. Reportez-vous au tableau ci-dessous pour localiser et supprimer le bourrage. Pour éviter que le papier ne se déchire, tirez dessus avec précaution et lentement. Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour supprimer le bourrage. Bourrage au niveau du bac d'alimentation (bac 1) 1. Ouvrez et refermez le capot avant. Le papier bloqué sort automatiquement de l'imprimante. Si le papier ne sort pas, passez à l'étape suivante. 2. Ouvrez le bac d'alimentation papier. 3. Retirez le papier coincé en tirant dessus avec précaution. Message du panneau de commande Localisation du bourrage Voir BOURR PAPIER 0 OUV./FERM. CAPOT Bourrage au niveau du bac d'alimentation (bac 1) Bourrage au niveau du bac d'alimentation (bac optionnel 2) "Bourrage au niveau du bac d'alimentation (bac 1)" ou "Bourrage au niveau du bac d'alimentation (bac optionnel 2)". BOURR PAPIER 1 ZONE CARTOUCHE Bourrage au niveau du four "Bourrage au niveau du four". BOUR. 2 OUVRIR ARR. ET AVANT Bourrage au niveau de la sortie papier "Bourrage au niveau de la sortie papier". BOURR REC-VER 0 VERIF. INTERIEUR Au niveau du module recto-verso "Bourrage en impression recto-verso 1". BOURR REC-VER 1 VERIF. INTERIEUR Entre le module recto-verso et l'unité de chauffe "Bourrage en impression recto-verso 0".Si vous ne voyez pas le papier ou si le papier ne bouge pas lorsque vous tirez dessus, vérifiez la zone de four. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la  section "Bourrage au niveau du four". 4. Insérez le bac d'alimentation papier dans l'imprimante jusqu'à ce qu'un déclic indique qu'il est bien en place. L'impression reprend automatiquement. Bourrage au niveau du bac d'alimentation (bac optionnel 2) 1. Ouvrez le bac 2 optionnel. 2. Retirez la feuille coincée de l'imprimante. Si vous ne voyez pas le papier dans cette zone ou si le papier ne bouge pas lorsque vous tirez dessus, passez à l'étape suivante. 3. Ouvrez le bac 1 à moitié. 4. Retirez la feuille en tirant dessus. 5. Insérez les bacs en place dans l'imprimante. L'impression reprend automatiquement. Bourrage au niveau du passe copie 1. Si le papier n'est pas correctement entraîné, enlevez-le de l'imprimante.2. Ouvrez et refermez le capot avant pour reprendre l'impression. Bourrage au niveau du four 1. Ouvrez le capot avant et retirez la cartouche d'encre. 2. Retirez le papier coincé en tirant dessus avec précaution. 3. Remettez la cartouche d'encre en place et fermez le capot avant. L'impression reprend automatiquement. Bourrage au niveau de la sortie papier 1. Ouvrez et refermez le capot avant. Le papier bloqué sort automatiquement de l'imprimante. Si le papier ne sort pas, passez à l'étape suivante. 2. Sortez le papier du plateau de sortie en tirant dessus avec précaution. OBSERVATION : La zone du four est extrêmement chaude. Procédez avec prudence lorsque vous retirez du papier coincé de l'imprimante.3. Si vous ne voyez pas le papier dans le réceptacle de sortie ou si le papier ne bouge pas lorsque vous tirez dessus, ouvrez le capot arrière. 4. Si vous voyez le papier bloqué, soulevez les deux manettes bleues et retirez le papier. Passez ensuite à l'étape 9 Si vous ne voyez pas le papier, passez à l'étape suivante. 5. Soulevez la languette bleue, la butée du capot arrière et ouvrez-le complètement comme illustré. 6. Dépliez entièrement le guide recto-verso. 7. Tout en poussant la manette de l'unité de chauffe vers la droite, ouvrez la porte de l'unité de chauffe. 8. Tirez sur le papier bloqué pour le sortir. Si le papier bloqué ne bouge pas lorsque vous tirez, soulevez les deux manettes bleues pour libérer le papier et retirez-le. OBSERVATION : Assurez-vous que le guide du duplex est bien déployé avant d'ouvrir la porte de l'unité de chauffe sinon vous risquez  d'endommager cette porte. 9. Replacez les leviers, la porte de l'unité de chauffe, le butée du capot arrière et guide recto-verso dans leur position d'origine. 10. Fermez le capot arrière. 11. Ouvrez et refermez le capot avant. L'impression reprend automatiquement. Bourrage en impression recto-verso Bourrage en impression recto-verso 0 1. Retirez le module recto-verso de l'imprimante. 2. Retirez le papier bloqué du module recto-verso. Si le papier ne sort pas avec le module recto-verso, retirez-le depuis le fond de l'imprimante. 3. Poussez l'unité recto-verso vers l'imprimante. 4. Ouvrez et refermez le capot avant. L'impression reprend automatiquement. Bourrage en impression recto-verso 1 ATTENTION : Si vous entrez l'unité recto-verso de façon incorrecte en la poussant, vous risquez de provoquer un bourrage papier. 1. Ouvrez le capot arrière. 2. Dépliez entièrement le guide recto-verso. 3. Tirez sur le papier bloqué pour le sortir. 4. Remettez le guide recto-verso en place et fermez le capot arrière.  5. Ouvrez et refermez le capot avant. L'impression reprend automatiquement. Conseils pour éviter les bourrages papier Si vous choisissez soigneusement le type de papier, vous éviterez la plupart des problèmes causés par les bourrages papier. Toutefois, en cas de bourrage,  suivez les instructions de la section "Suppression du bourrage dans les circuits d'entraînement du papier". l Suivez les instructions de la section "Chargement des supports d'impression dans le bac". Assurez-vous que les guides-papier ajustables sont correctement positionnés. l Ne remplissez pas trop le bac d'alimentation papier. Vérifiez que la pile de papier ne dépasse pas la limite de capacité du bac d'alimentation papier. l N'enlevez pas le papier du bac d'alimentation lorsqu'une impression est en cours. l Déramez, ventilez et alignez le papier avant de l'insérer dans le bac d'alimentation.  l N'utilisez pas de papier froissé, humide ou recourbé. l Évitez de mélanger les types de papier dans le bac d'alimentation papier. l Utilisez uniquement les supports d'impression recommandés. Reportez-vous à la "Spécifications du papier". l Assurez-vous que la face à imprimer est orientée vers le dessous dans le bac et vers le dessus dans le passe copie. l Assurez-vous que l'unité duplex est installée correctement. Messages d'erreur et dépannage Écran Signification Solutions éventuelles AJOUTER PAPIER & APP SUR START Le passe copie est vide en mode alimentation manuelle. Chargez une feuille à imprimer et appuyez sur la touche Départ ( ). Vous devez appuyer sur cette touche pour chaque page à imprimer. Att. recomp. L'appareil attend que l'intervalle programmé soit écoulé  pour recomposer le numéro automatiquement. Veuillez patienter quelques minutes. AUTO-DIAGNOST... Le moteur de votre imprimante contrôle certains  problèmes détectés. Veuillez patienter quelques minutes. BOUR. 2 OUVRIR ARR. ET AVANT Un bourrage papier est survenu au niveau du plateau de sortie. Supprimez le bourrage. Reportez-vous à la "Bourrage au niveau de la sortie papier". BOURR PAPIER 0 OUV./FERM. CAPOT Un bourrage papier est survenu au niveau de la zone d'alimentation du bac. Supprimez le bourrage. Reportez-vous à la "Bourrage au niveau du bac d'alimentation (bac 1)"ou à la "Bourrage au niveau du bac d'alimentation (bac optionnel 2)". BOURR PAPIER 1 ZONE CARTOUCHE Un bourrage papier est survenu au niveau du four. Supprimez le bourrage. Reportez-vous à la "Bourrage au niveau du four". BOURR REC-VER 0 VERIF. INTERIEUR Le papier s'est bloqué pendant l'impression recto-verso. Supprimez le bourrage. Reportez-vous à la "Bourrage en impression recto-verso 0". BOURR REC-VER 1 VERIF. INTERIEUR Le papier s'est bloqué pendant l'impression recto-verso. Supprimez le bourrage. Reportez-vous à la "Bourrage en impression recto-verso 1". BOURRAGE DOC. VERIF. CHARGEUR Le document chargé est coincé dans le chargeur  automatique. Supprimez le bourrage causé par le document. Reportezvous à la "Suppression de bourrages papier au niveau du chargeur automatique de documents". CAPOT OUVERT CAPOT AVANT Le capot avant n'est pas correctement verrouillé. Refermez le capot jusqu'à ce qu'un déclic indique qu'il est  bien en place. CARTOUCHE INCORRECTE La cartouche d'encre que vous avez installée n'est pas  adaptée à votre imprimante. Installez une cartouche d'encre authentique Dell et conçue pour votre imprimante. COURRIER EXCEDE CAPACITE SERVEUR La taille du courrier est plus grande que la taille prise en charge par le serveur SMTP. Divisez votre courrier ou réduisez la résolution. ECH LECT DONNEES VERIF. MEM. USB Le stockage sur la clé de mémoire USB a échoué. Vérifier l'espace mémoire USB disponible. ECH LECT DONNEES VERIF. MEM. USB Le temps a expiré pendant la lecture des données. Essayez de nouveau. ERR TEMP INSUF. REINIT. COURANT Un problème est survenu au niveau du four. Débranchez, puis rebranchez le cordon d'alimentation. Si le problème persiste, contactez le service de maintenance. ERREUR COM. ESSAYER A NOUV. L'imprimante rencontre un problème de communication. Demandez à l'expéditeur d'essayer de nouveau. ERREUR CONNEXION La connexion avec le serveur SMTP a échoué. Vérifiez les paramètres de serveur et le câble réseau. ERREUR D'ENVOI (AUTH) Il y a un problème dans l'authentification SMTP.  Configurez le paramètre d'authentification. ERREUR D'ENVOI (CONFIG. INCOR.) Il y a un problème sur la carte d'interface réseau.  Configurez votre carte d'interface réseau correctement. ERREUR D'ENVOI (DNS) Il y a un problème dans le DNS.  Configurez le paramètre DNS. ERREUR D'ENVOI (POP3) Il y a un problème dans POP3.  Configurez le paramètre POP3. ERREUR D'ENVOI (SMTP) Il y a un problème dans le SMTP.  Changez de serveur et choisissez-en un disponible. ERREUR HSYNC Un problème est survenu au niveau de l'unité de  numérisation laser (LSU). Débranchez, puis rebranchez le cordon d'alimentation. Si le problème persiste, contactez le service de maintenance. ERREUR IMPR. REINIT. COURANT Un problème est survenu au niveau de l'unité de  numérisation laser (LSU). Débranchez, puis rebranchez le cordon d'alimentation. Si le problème persiste, contactez le service de maintenance. ERREUR LIGNE ESSAYER A NOUV. Votre imprimante ne parvient pas à se connecter à une  imprimante distante ou a perdu le contact en raison d'un problème avec la ligne téléphonique. Essayez de nouveau. Si le problème persiste, patientez environ une heure ou, dans la mesure du possible, essayez de vous connecter à l'aide d'une autre ligne  téléphonique. Vous pouvez également activer le mode ECM. Reportezvous à la "MODE ECM". ERREUR RESEAU Il y a un problème avec le réseau. Contactez votre administrateur réseau. FAX INDESIRABLE TACHE ANNULEE Le numéro de télécopie reçu correspond à un numéro  mémorisé comme numéro de télécopie indésirable. Modifiez l'option de configuration des télécopies  indésirables. FORMAT FICHIER INCOMPATIBLE Le format de fichier sélectionné n'est pas pris en charge. Utilisez le format de fichier correct. FOUR CAPOT OUVERT La porte de l'unité de chauffe n'est pas bien fermée. Ouvrez le capot arrière et refermez la porte de l'unité de  chauffe jusqu'à ce qu'un déclic indique qu'elle est bien en  place. Pour l'emplacement de la porte de l'unité de Dépannage Le tableau suivant dresse la liste des problèmes que vous pouvez rencontrer et des solutions recommandées correspondantes. Appliquez les solutions  proposées jusqu'à ce que le problème soit résolu. Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell. Problèmes d'alimentation papier chauffe, reportez-vous à "Bourrage au niveau de la sortie papier". GROUPE NON DISPONIBLE Vous avez utilisé un numéro de groupe au lieu d'un  numéro simple, en essayant d'ajouter, par exemple, un  numéro de groupe à une liste de multidiffusion. Utilisez un numéro de composition abrégée ou composez  manuellement le numéro à l'aide du clavier numérique. LIGNE OCCUPEE ESSAYER + TARD Le télécopieur destinataire ne répond pas ou la ligne est  occupée. Essayez de nouveau après quelques minutes. LIM. TACHES (15) ATTEINTE Le nombre de tâches mémorisées dans l'imprimante est  15 et vous tentez d'en ajouter une 16ème. Supprimez des tâches dans l'imprimante ou essayez  ultérieurement, une fois certaines tâches terminées. MEMOIRE PLEINE ANNUL. OU DEMAR. La mémoire est pleine. Supprimez les documents inutiles, puis renvoyez-les après  avoir libéré de la mémoire. MEMOIRE PLEINE DIVISER TACHE La mémoire est pleine. Vous pouvez effectuer la transmission en plusieurs fois. NO. NON ATTRIBUE CHOISIR AUTRE Vous avez essayé de supprimer le numéro de la  télécopie retardée. Vérifiez le numéro à supprimer et essayez à nouveau. OU Supprimez le numéro une fois la télécopie retardée  envoyée. PANNE SECTEUR DONNEES PERDUES On a éteint puis rallumé l'appareil et la mémoire de  l'imprimante n'a pas été sauvegardée. La mémoire de l'imprimante n'a pas été enregistrée à  cause d'une coupure d'alimentation. Veuillez recommencer la tâche. PAS DE CARTOUCHE CHARGER CART. La cartouche de toner n'est pas installée. Installez la cartouche d'encre. Reportez-vous à la  "Installation de la cartouche d'encre". PAS DE PAPIER AJOUTER PAPIER Le bac d'alimentation papier est vide. Chargez du papier dans le bac d'alimentation papier. Reportez-vous à la "Chargement du papier". PAS DE REPONSE ESSAYER + TARD Le télécopieur distant ne répond pas malgré toutes les  tentatives d'appel. Essayez de nouveau. Vérifiez le numéro et assurez-vous qu'il s'agit bien d'un numéro de fax. PAS DE TACHE Vous souhaitez effectuer une opération  d'ajout/annulation, mais aucune tâche n'est en attente. Vérifiez sur l'écran si des tâches programmées sont en  attente. L'écran doit indiquer si des tâches en attente  sont en mode Veille, du type FAX DIFF par exemple. PRET-TONER 0% TONER VIDE La cartouche d'encre est vide. Remplacez la cartouche. Reportez-vous à la  "Remplacement de la cartouche d'encre". PRET-TONER 7% TONER FAIBLE la cartouche d'encre est presque vide. Retirez la cartouche d'encre et secouez-la à plusieurs  reprises. Vous pourrez ainsi reprendre temporairement les impressions. OU Remplacez la cartouche d'encre afin d'améliorer la qualité  d'impression. Reportez-vous à la "Remplacement de la cartouche d'encre". SAISIR A NOUV. Vous avez saisi un élément non disponible. Saisissez l'élément correct. SCANNER VERR. DEVERR. SCANNER Le module de numérisation est verrouillé. Déverrouillez le module de numérisation, puis appuyez sur  Départ ( ). SURCHAUFFE APPELER SERVICE Un problème est survenu au niveau du four. Débranchez, puis rebranchez le cordon d'alimentation. Si le problème persiste, contactez le service de maintenance. TACHE ANNULEE PAR UTILISATEUR Annuler ( ) est enfoncé durant une transmission. Essayez de nouveau après quelques minutes. UNE PAGE EST TROP GRANDE Les données de page simple excèdent la taille de  courrier configurée. Réduisez la résolution et réessayez. UNITÉ NON CHAUF. APPELER  SERVICE Un problème est survenu au niveau du four. Débranchez, puis rebranchez le cordon d'alimentation. Si le problème persiste, contactez le service de maintenance.Problèmes d'impression Situation Solutions éventuelles Un bourrage papier survient lors de l'impression. Eliminer le bourrage papier. Reportez-vous à la "Suppression du bourrage dans les circuits d'entraînement du  papier". Plusieurs feuilles sont collées les  unes aux autres. • Assurez-vous qu'il n'y a pas trop de papier dans le bac d'alimentation papier. Le bac d'alimentation papier peut contenir 250 feuilles de papier au maximum, en fonction de l'épaisseur de votre papier. • Vérifiez que vous utilisez un type de papier adéquat. Reportez-vous à la "Spécifications du papier". • Retirez le papier du bac d'alimentation papier, et déramez-le ou ventilez-le. • Dans un environnement humide, les feuilles risquent de se coller les unes aux autres. Impossible d'insérer plusieurs feuilles  de papier. • Il se peut que différents types de papier soient empilés dans le bac d'alimentation papier. Chargez des feuilles  d'un type, d'un format et d'un grammage identiques. • En cas de bourrage dû à la présence de différents types de feuilles, retirez les feuilles coincées. Reportez-vous à la  "Suppression du bourrage dans les circuits d'entraînement du papier". Le papier n'est pas entraîné dans  l'imprimante. • Eliminez tous les blocages à l'intérieur de l'imprimante. Reportez-vous à la "Nettoyage de la partie interne". • Le papier n'a pas été chargé correctement. Retirer le papier du bac d'alimentation et le recharger correctement. • Il y a trop de papier dans le bac d'alimentation papier. Enlever le surplus de papier. • Le papier est trop épais. N'utiliser que du papier conforme aux spécifications de l'imprimante. Reportez-vous à la  "Spécifications du papier". Le papier ne cesse de se coincer. • Vérifiez que vous avez bien sélectionné le bon format de papier. Reportez-vous à la "Configuration du format de papier". • Le type de papier utilisé n'est pas correct. N'utiliser que du papier conforme aux spécifications de l'imprimante.  Reportez-vous à la "Spécifications du papier". • Des particules (poussière, toner ou papier) se sont accumulées dans l'imprimante. Ouvrir le capot avant de  l'imprimante et retirer les particules en question. Les transparents se collent les uns aux autres au niveau du plateau de sortie. Utilisez uniquement des transparents conçus spécifiquement pour une imprimante laser. Retirez chaque transparent  au fur et à mesure qu'il sort de l'imprimante. Les enveloppes s'impriment de travers ou ne sont pas entraînées  correctement. Assurez-vous que les guide-papier appuient bien sur les deux côtés des enveloppes. Situation Cause possible Solutions éventuelles L'imprimante n'imprime pas. L'imprimante n'est pas sous tension. Vérifier que le cordon d'alimentation est correctement  branché. Vérifier le bouton Marche/Arrêt et l'alimentation  électrique. Vous n'avez pas défini votre imprimante comme  imprimante par défaut. Sélectionnez Dell Laser MFP 1815 en tant qu'imprimante par défaut sous Windows. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur Démarrer Paramètres Imprimantes. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l'icône  de l'imprimante Dell Laser MFP 1815, puis sélectionnez  Définir comme imprimante par défaut. Vérifiez les éléments ci-contre sur l'imprimante : En cas d'erreur système de l'imprimante, contactez votre technicien de maintenance. • Les capots avant et arrière ne sont pas fermés. • Du papier est coincé. • Il n'y a pas de papier dans le bac. • La cartouche de toner n'est pas installée. Le câble de connexion qui relie l'ordinateur à  l'imprimante n'est pas correctement raccordé. Déconnecter le câble d'imprimante, puis le reconnecter. Le câble de connexion qui relie l'ordinateur à  l'imprimante est défectueux. Si possible, raccordez le câble à un autre ordinateur en  bon état de marche et imprimez un document. Vous  pouvez également utiliser un autre câble d'imprimante. L'imprimante est mal configurée.  Vérifiez dans les propriétés de l'imprimante que tous les  paramètres d'impression sont corrects.  Le pilote d'impression est peut-être mal installé. Supprimez le pilote d'impression, puis réinstallez-le ;  reportez-vous respectivement à la "Désinstallation du  logiciel"et à la "Installation du logiciel sous Windows". L'imprimante présente un dysfonctionnement. Vérifiez le message affiché à l'écran pour déterminer si  l'imprimante signale une erreur système. L'imprimante n'utilise pas le bon bac d'alimentation. La source d'alimentation papier sélectionnée dans les  propriétés de l'imprimante est incorrecte. Pour la plupart des logiciels d'application, pour sélectionner la source d'alimentation du papier il faut aller  sous l'onglet Papier du menu Propriétés de l'imprimante.  Sélectionnez la source d'alimentation papier adéquate.  Reportez-vous à la "Onglet Papier". Une tâche d'impression est très lente. L'impression est peut-être très complexe. Simplifier la page ou modifier les paramètres de qualité  d'impression. La vitesse d'impression maximale de votre imprimante est 27 pages/minute au format Letter. Si vous utilisez Windows 98/Me, il se peut que les paramètres du spouleur soient mal définis. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur Démarrer Paramètres Imprimantes. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l'icône  de l'imprimante Dell Laser MFP 1815, puis cliquez sur Propriétés Détails Paramètres du spouleur. Sélectionnez le paramètre désiré.Problèmes de qualité d'impression L'intérieur de l'imprimante est peut-être sale ou le chargement d'un papier inadéquat peut réduire la qualité d'impression. Reportez-vous au tableau cidessous pour résoudre le problème. La moitié de la page est blanche. L'orientation de la page n'est peut-être pas correcte. Changez l'orientation de la page dans votre application. Reportez-vous à la "Onglet Mise en page". Le format du papier et les paramètres de format ne  correspondent pas. Assurez-vous que le format de papier défini dans les  paramètres du pilote d'impression correspond au format  du papier se trouvant dans le bac d'alimentation. L'imprimante imprime mais le texte est faux, tronqué ou incomplet. Le câble d'imprimante est mal raccordé ou défectueux. Débrancher le câble de l'imprimante, puis le rebrancher.  Essayez d'imprimer un document ayant déjà été  correctement imprimé. Si possible, reliez le câble et  l'appareil à un autre ordinateur et lancez l'impression d'un  document ayant déjà été correctement imprimé. Si ces  solutions n'aboutissent pas, remplacez le câble de  l'imprimante. Vous avez sélectionné le mauvais pilote d'impression. Vérifiez que votre imprimante est sélectionnée dans le  menu de sélection de l'imprimante de l'application. L'application ne fonctionne pas correctement. Essayer d'imprimer un document à partir d'une autre  application. Le système d'exploitation ne fonctionne pas  correctement. Quittez Windows, puis redémarrez l'ordinateur. Éteignez  l'imprimante, puis rallumez-la. Les pages s'impriment mais elles sont blanches. La cartouche d'encre est défectueuse ou vide. Secouez la cartouche de toner à plusieurs reprises.  Reportez-vous à la "Redistribution de l'encre". Le cas échéant, remplacez la cartouche. Le fichier contient peut-être des pages blanches. Vérifiez que le fichier ne contient pas de pages blanches. Certains éléments, comme le contrôleur ou la carte, sont  peut-être défectueux. Contactez un technicien de maintenance. Les illustrations ne s'impriment pas correctement dans Adobe Illustrator. L'application est mal configurée. Imprimez le document en sélectionnant Télécharger en  tant qu'image bit dans la fenêtre Options avancées des propriétés graphiques. Situation Solutions éventuelles Impression claire ou floue Si une strie blanche verticale ou une zone floue apparaît sur la page : • Le niveau d'encre de la cartouche est insuffisant. Essayez de secouer la cartouche pour redistribuer le reste d'encre et prolonger son utilisation. Reportez-vous à la "Redistribution de l'encre". Si la qualité ne s'améliore pas, installez une cartouche de toner neuve. • Le papier n'est pas conforme aux spécifications (papier humide ou rugueux, par exemple). Reportez-vous à la  "Spécifications du papier". • Si toute la page est claire, la résolution d'impression choisie est trop basse ou le mode Économie d'encre est activé.  Réglez la résolution et désactivez le mode Économie d'encre. Reportez-vous à la "Onglet Graphiques". • La présence à la fois de zones floues et de traînées d'encre peut indiquer la nécessité de nettoyer la cartouche.  Reportez-vous à la "Nettoyage de la partie interne". • La surface de la vitre LSU à l'intérieur de l'imprimante peut être sale. Nettoyez la LSU (reportez-vous à la "Nettoyage de la partie interne"). Taches d'encre • Le papier n'est pas conforme aux spécifications (papier humide ou rugueux, par exemple). Reportez-vous à la  "Spécifications du papier". • Le rouleau de l'imprimante est peut-être sale. Nettoyez l'intérieur de votre imprimante. Reportez-vous à la  "Nettoyage de la partie interne". • Le circuit d'entraînement du papier a besoin d'être nettoyé. Reportez-vous à la "Nettoyage du tambour". Zones vides Si des zones floues ou vides, généralement au niveau des arrondis des caractères, apparaissent sur la page : • Il se peut qu'une feuille de papier soit de mauvaise qualité. Essayez de réimprimer la  page. • Le taux d'humidité du papier n'est pas homogène ou certaines zones du papier sont humides. Changez de type de  papier. Reportez-vous à la "Spécifications du papier". • La rame de papier est peut-être de mauvaise qualité. Le processus de fabrication du papier est à l'origine du  problème et empêche l'encre de se fixer sur certaines zones. Changez de marque ou de type de papier. • La cartouche d'encre est peut-être défectueuse. Reportez-vous à la section "Défauts verticaux répétitifs", page suivante. • Si le problème persiste, contactez un technicien de maintenance. Lignes verticales • Si des lignes noires verticales font leur apparition sur la page, c'est que le tambour situé à l'intérieur de la cartouche de  toner a probablement été rayé. Installez une nouvelle cartouche. Reportez-vous à la "Remplacement de la cartouche d'encre". • Si des bandes blanches verticales apparaissent sur la page, vérifiez l'état de propreté de la surface de la vitre LSU à  l'intérieur de l'imprimante. Nettoyez la LSU (reportez-vous à la "Nettoyage de la partie interne").Fond grisé Si la quantité d'encre déposée sur la page crée un fond grisé inacceptable : • Choisissez un papier d'un grammage inférieur. Reportez-vous à la "Spécifications du papier". • Vérifiez l'environnement de l'imprimante ; un air trop sec (peu d'humidité) ou trop humide (plus de 80 % d'humidité  relative) peut avoir une incidence sur l'ombrage du fond. • Retirez l'ancienne cartouche et installez-en une nouvelle. Reportez-vous à la "Remplacement de la cartouche d'encre". Traînées d'encre • Nettoyez l'intérieur de l'imprimante. Reportez-vous à la "Nettoyage de la partie interne". • Vérifiez le format et la qualité du papier. Reportez-vous à la "Spécifications du papier". • Retirez la cartouche et installez-en une nouvelle. Reportez-vous à la "Remplacement de la cartouche d'encre". Défauts verticaux répétitifs Si des marques apparaissent plusieurs fois sur une page, à intervalles réguliers : • La cartouche d'encre est peut-être endommagée. Si une marque se répète sur la page, imprimez plusieurs pages de nettoyage afin de nettoyer la cartouche (voir "Nettoyage du tambour"). Si le problème persiste, remplacez la cartouche. Reportez-vous à la "Remplacement de la cartouche d'encre". • Il se peut que de l'encre se soit déposée sur certains éléments de l'imprimante. Si le défaut apparaît au dos de la page, le problème se résoudra sans doute de lui-même après l'impression de quelques pages. • Le module du four est peut-être endommagé. Contactez un technicien de maintenance. Fond moucheté Les fonds mouchetés apparaissent lorsque des particules de toner se déposent sur la page.  • Le papier peut être trop humide. Essayez une autre rame de papier. N'ouvrez les rames qu'au dernier moment afin  d'éviter que le papier n'absorbe l'humidité de l'air. • Si le fond moucheté apparaît sur une enveloppe, changez la mise en page pour éviter l'impression sur des zones de  pliure. L'impression sur une zone de pliure peut causer des problèmes. • Si le fond moucheté recouvre la totalité de la page, réglez la résolution à partir de l'application ou des propriétés de  l'imprimante. Caractères mal formés • Si des caractères sont mal formés, donnant l'impression d'images creuses, le papier est peut-être trop lisse. Changez  de type de papier. Reportez-vous à la "Spécifications du papier". • Si les caractères sont mal formés, créant un effet d'ondulation, le scanner a peut-être besoin d'une révision. Dans ce  cas, contactez un technicien de maintenance. Impression oblique • Assurez-vous que le papier est correctement chargé. • Vérifiez le format et la qualité du papier. Reportez-vous à la "Spécifications du papier". • Assurez-vous que le papier ou tout autre support est correctement chargé, et que les guides ne sont ni trop proches  ni trop éloignés des bords du papier. Pages gondolées • Assurez-vous que le papier est correctement chargé. • Vérifiez le format et la qualité du papier. Une température et une humidité élevées peuvent provoquer une  ondulation du papier. Reportez-vous à la "Spécifications du papier". • Retournez la pile de papier dans le bac d'alimentation papier. Essayez également de changer le sens du papier  (rotation à 180 degrés) dans le bac d'alimentation papier. • Essayez d'imprimer vers le capot arrière. Pages pliées ou froissées • Assurez-vous que le papier est correctement chargé. • Vérifiez le format et la qualité du papier. Reportez-vous à la "Spécifications du papier". • Retournez la pile de papier dans le bac d'alimentation papier. Essayez également de changer le sens du papier  (rotation à 180 degrés) dans le bac d'alimentation papier. • Essayez d'imprimer vers le capot arrière. Dos de la page taché Localisez d'éventuelles fuites d'encre. Nettoyez l'intérieur de l'imprimante. Reportez-vous à la "Nettoyage de la partie Problèmes de télécopie interne". Pages noires • La cartouche d'encre n'est sans doute pas installée correctement. Enlevez-la, puis réinstallez-la. • La cartouche d'encre est peut-être défectueuse. Installez une nouvelle cartouche. Reportez-vous à la  "Remplacement de la cartouche d'encre". • Il se peut que l'imprimante ait besoin d'une révision. Contactez un technicien de maintenance. Encre non fixée • Nettoyez l'intérieur de l'imprimante. Reportez-vous à la "Nettoyage de la partie interne". • Vérifiez le format et la qualité du papier. Reportez-vous à la "Spécifications du papier". • Installez une nouvelle cartouche. Reportez-vous à la "Remplacement de la cartouche d'encre". • Si le problème persiste, l'imprimante a peut-être besoin d'une révision. Contactez un technicien de maintenance. Caractères tachés de blanc Certains caractères présentent des zones blanches alors qu'ils devraient être uniformément noirs. • Si vous utilisez des transparents, choisissez-en un autre type. Etant donné la composition du transparent, il est  normal de constater certains espacements entre les caractères. • Il se peut que vous imprimiez du mauvais côté du papier. Retournez la pile de papier dans le bac d'alimentation  papier. • Le papier n'est peut-être pas conforme aux spécifications. Reportez-vous à la "Spécifications du papier". Stries horizontales Des stries noires horizontales ou des traînées d'encre apparaissent : • La cartouche d'encre est peut-être mal installée. Enlevez-la, puis réinstallez-la. • La cartouche d'encre est peut-être défectueuse. Installez une nouvelle cartouche. Reportez-vous à la  "Remplacement de la cartouche d'encre". • Si le problème persiste, l'imprimante a peut-être besoin d'une révision. Contactez un technicien de maintenance. Ondulations Les feuilles imprimées présentent des plissements ou le papier n'est pas entraîné dans l'imprimante. • Retournez la pile de papier dans le bac d'alimentation papier. Essayez également de changer le sens du papier  (rotation à 180 degrés) dans le bac d'alimentation papier. • Essayez d'imprimer vers l'autre capot arrière. Situation Solutions éventuelles L'imprimante ne fonctionne pas, rien ne s'affiche à l'écran et les touches ne répondent  pas. • Débranchez et rebranchez le cordon d'alimentation. • Vérifiez que la prise secteur est alimentée. Aucune tonalité d'appel émise. • Vérifiez que le cordon de la ligne téléphonique est correctement branché. Reportez-vous à la "Accès à la  ligne téléphonique". • Pour vérifier que la prise téléphonique murale fonctionne correctement, branchez-y un autre téléphone. Les numéros mémorisés ne sont pas  composés correctement. Vérifiez que les numéros sont correctement mémorisés. Imprimez la liste des entrées du répertoire en vous  reportant à la section "Impression d'un répertoire". Le document n'est pas entraîné dans  l'imprimante. • Assurez-vous que le document n'est pas froissé et que vous l'insérez correctement. Vérifiez que tous les  documents sont du bon format et qu'ils ne sont ni trop épais ni trop fins. • Assurez vous que le capot du chargeur automatique est correctement fermé. Impossible de recevoir automatiquement les télécopies. • Vous devez sélectionner le mode fax. • Vérifiez que le chargeur automatique est plein. • Regardez si l'écran affiche le message "MEMOIRE PLEINE". L'imprimante n'effectue pas d'envoi. • Vérifiez que le document est placé dans le chargeur ou sur la vitre d'exposition. • ENVOI Le message doit s'afficher sur l'écran. • Assurez-vous que le télécopieur distant est en mesure de recevoir votre fax.Problèmes de copie Problèmes de numérisation Les fax reçus comportent des espaces blancs  ou les copies sont de mauvaise qualité. • Il se peut que le télécopieur source soit défectueux. • Une ligne téléphonique bruyante peut provoquer des erreurs de ligne. • Vérifiez le fonctionnement de votre imprimante en imprimant une copie. • Il se peut que la cartouche d'encre soit vide. Remplacez la cartouche d'encre, en vous reportant à la  "Remplacement de la cartouche d'encre". Certains mots de la télécopie reçue sont  étirés. Le télécopieur source a rencontré un problème de bourrage temporaire causé par le document.  Des lignes apparaissent sur le document que vous envoyez. La vitre de numérisation est peut-être sale. Nettoyez-la. Reportez-vous à la "Nettoyage du scanner". L'imprimante compose un numéro, mais ne  parvient pas à se connecter à l'appareil  distant. Il se peut que l'autre télécopieur soit éteint, qu'il manque de papier ou qu'il ne puisse pas recevoir d'appels  entrants. Demandez à l'opérateur de ce télécopieur de résoudre le problème. Les documents ne sont pas stockés dans la  mémoire.  La mémoire est peut-être insuffisante pour enregistrer le document. Si le message MEMOIRE PLEINE apparaît, effacez les documents inutiles de la mémoire, puis réenregistrez votre document. Des zones blanches apparaissent en bas de chaque page, ainsi qu'une petite bande de texte dans la partie supérieure. Il se peut que vous ayez choisi une configuration de papier incorrecte dans le paramètre d'option  d'utilisateur. Reportez-vous à la "Configuration du type de papier"et à la "Configuration du format de papier". Situation Solutions éventuelles Les copies sont trop claires ou trop sombres. Utilisez le menu CONTRASTE pour augmenter ou diminuer le contraste du fond des copies. Les copies contiennent des traînées, des  lignes, des traces ou des taches. • Si les défauts sont sur l'original, sélectionnez COP. CONTRASTE pour éclairer l'arrière-plan de vos copies. • Si l'original est de bonne qualité, nettoyez la vitre d'exposition et la surface intérieure du chargeur.  Reportez-vous à la "Nettoyage du scanner". L'image copiée est de travers. • Vérifiez que l'original est correctement positionné sur la vitre d'exposition. • Assurez-vous que le papier est correctement chargé. Des copies blanches sont imprimées. Assurez-vous que l'original est face vers le bas sur le verre inactinique ou face vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique. L'image s'efface facilement de la copie. • Remplacez le papier du bac d'alimentation papier par du papier provenant d'un nouveau paquet. • Dans les environnements très humides, ne laissez pas le papier dans l'imprimante pendant une durée  prolongée. Des bourrages papier surviennent régulièrement. • Ventilez la pile de papier, puis retournez-la dans le bac d'alimentation papier. Changez la pile de papier du bac d'alimentation. Le cas échéant, vérifiez/ajustez les guides papier. • Assurez-vous que le grammage du papier est correct. L'utilisation d'un papier à lettre de 75 g/m2 est recommandée. • Vérifiez qu'aucune feuille ni aucun morceau de papier ne reste coincé dans l'imprimante après un  bourrage papier. La cartouche d'encre ne permet pas d'imprimer autant de copies que prévu. • Les originaux contiennent peut-être des images, des zones sombres ou des lignes épaisses. Les  documents de type formulaire, lettres d'information ou livres consomment plus d'encre. • L'imprimante est peut-être mise sous et hors tension très fréquemment. • Le chargeur de documents reste peut-être ouvert lorsque vous effectuez des copies. Situation Solutions éventuelles Le scanner ne fonctionne pas. • Assurez-vous que le document à numériser est placé face imprimée vers le bas sur la vitre  de d'exposition ou vers le haut dans le chargeur automatique. • Il se peut qu'il n'y ait pas assez de mémoire disponible pour vous permettre de stocker le document que  vous souhaitez numériser. Essayez la fonction de pré-numérisation pour voir si elle fonctionne. Essayez  de diminuer la résolution de numérisation. • Vérifiez que le câble USB ou parallèle est correctement branché. • Assurez-vous que le câble USB ou parallèle n'est pas défectueux Le cas échéant, remplacez le câble. • Vérifiez que le scanner est correctement configuré. Examinez l'application que vous souhaitez utiliser et  vérifiez que la tâche de numérisation est bien envoyée au port adéquat. La numérisation est très lente. • Vérifiez si l'imprimante est en train d'imprimer des données reçues. Numérisez le document une fois la  tâche en cours terminée. • La numérisation des graphiques est plus lente que celle des textes. • La vitesse de communication diminue en mode numérisation, car une grande quantité de mémoire est  requise pour analyser et reproduire l'image numérisée. Un message s'affiche sur l'écran de votre  ordinateur : • "Le périphérique ne peut être réglé  sur le mode matériel souhaité." • "Le port est actuellement utilisé par  autre programme." • "Le port est désactivé." • "Réception ou impression de données en  • L'imprimante est peut-être en cours de copie ou d'impression. Une fois la tâche terminée,  essayez de nouveau. • Le port sélectionné est en cours d'utilisation. Redémarrez votre ordinateur et réessayez. • Il se peut que le câble d'imprimante soit mal branché ou que l'imprimante ne soit pas sous tension. • Le pilote du scanner n'est pas installé ou bien l'environnement d'exploitation n'est pas correctement  configuré. • Vérifiez que le port est branché correctement et que le système est sous tension. Puis redémarrer  l'ordinateur. • Vérifiez que le câble USB est correctement branché.Problèmes de numérisation en réseau Problèmes liés à Windows Problèmes liés au système Linux cours. Réessayez une fois la tâche  terminée." • "Traitement non valide" • "La numérisation a échoué" Situation Solutions éventuelles Je ne trouve pas un fichier image numérisé.  Vous pouvez vérifier la destination d'un fichier numérisé dans la page Avancé de la fenêtre Propriétés de la  numérisation en réseau.  Je ne trouve pas un fichier image juste après  sa numérisation.  Assurez-vous que l'application correspondant au fichier numérisé est présente sur votre ordinateur. Assurez-vous que l'option "Afficher l'image dès sa numérisation" est sélectionnée dans la page Avancé de la  fenêtre Propriétés de la numérisation en réseau, afin que l'image numérisée s'ouvre immédiatement après la  numérisation. J'ai oublié mon identifiant et mon code PIN. Consultez votre identifiant et votre code PIN sur la page du serveur dans la fenêtre Propriétés de la  numérisation en réseau.  Je n'arrive pas à consulter le fichier d'aide.  Pour consulter le fichier d'aide, vous avez besoin de Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 service pack 2 ou supérieur.  Je n'arrive pas à utiliser le Gestionnaire de  numérisation en réseau.  Vérifiez votre système d'exploitation. Les systèmes d'exploitation compatibles sont : Microsoft Windows 98/ME/NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista. Situation Solutions éventuelles Le message "Fichier utilisé" s'affiche durant  l'installation. Fermez tous les programmes ouverts. Supprimez tous les logiciels du groupe de démarrage, puis redémarrez  Windows. Réinstallez le pilote d'impression. Le message "Erreur d'écriture sur LPTx"  apparaît. • Vérifiez si les câbles sont correctement branchés et que l'appareil est en marche. • Ce message peut également apparaître si l'option de transmission bidirectionnelle n'est pas activée dans  le pilote. Le message "Erreur de protection générale",  "Exception OE", "Spool32" ou "Opération non  conforme" apparaît. Fermez toutes les applications, redémarrez Windows et recommencez l'impression. Les messages "Échec d'impression" et "Erreur  de temporisation de l'imprimante" s'affichent. Ces messages sont susceptibles d'apparaître en cours d'impression. Attendez simplement jusqu'à ce que  l'appareil ait terminé l'impression. Si le message apparaît en mode veille ou une fois l'impression achevée,  vérifiez le branchement et/ou l'existence d'une erreur éventuelle. REMARQUE : Référez-vous au Guide d'utilisation de Microsoft Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista fourni avec votre PC pour plus d'informations sur les messages d'erreur Windows. Situation Solutions éventuelles L'imprimante n'imprime pas. • Vérifiez si le pilote d'impression est installé. Ouvrez le configurateur MFP et sélectionnez l'onglet Printers  dans la fenêtre Printers configuration pour afficher la liste des imprimantes disponibles. Vérifiez que votre  imprimante figure bien sur la liste. Si ce n'est pas le cas, ouvrez l'assistant Add new printer (Ajout d'une nouvelle imprimante) pour paramétrer l'imprimante. • Vérifiez que l'imprimante est sous tension. Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Printers configuration  (Configuration des imprimantes) et sélectionnez votre imprimante dans la liste des imprimantes. Vérifiez la  description indiquée dans la zone Selected printer. Si son état contient la chaîne "(stopped)", appuyez sur le bouton Démarrer. Une fois que vous avez effectué ces étapes, l'imprimante devrait reprendre son  fonctionnement normal. L'état "stopped" peut être activé lorsque certains problèmes d'impression  apparaissent. Il peut être généré, par exemple, si vous tentez d'imprimer un document alors que le port  MFP est utilisé par une application de numérisation. • Vérifiez que le port MFP est disponible. Étant donné que les composants MFP (imprimante et scanner)  partagent la même interface d'E/S (port MFP), plusieurs applications clientes risquent d'accéder au port  MFP au même moment. Pour éviter tout conflit, une seule application est autorisée à accéder au  périphérique. Un message signalant que le périphérique est occupé est envoyé à l'autre application  demandeuse. Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue MFP ports configuration et sélectionnez le port affecté à  l'imprimante. Vérifiez dans la zone Selected port si le port est occupé par une autre application. Si tel est le cas, attendez la fin de la tâche ou cliquez sur Release port si l'application utilisant le port ne fonctionne  pas correctement. • Vérifiez si votre application comporte une option d'impression spéciale du type "-oraw". Si "-oraw" figure dans le paramètre de ligne de commande, supprimez-le pour obtenir une impression correcte. Dans le cas du terminal Gimp, sélectionnez "print"   "Setup printer" et modifiez le paramètre de ligne de commande  dans l'élément de commande. L'imprimante n'apparaît pas dans la liste des  scanners. • Vérifiez si l'imprimante est bien connectée à l'ordinateur. Vérifiez qu'il est correctement connecté via le  port USB et qu'il est sous tension. • Vérifiez si le pilote de numérisation correspondant à votre imprimante est installé sur votre système.  Ouvrez le configurateur MFP, allez à Configuration des scanners, puis appuyez sur Drivers. Vérifiez que le  pilote portant le même nom que votre imprimante est répertorié dans la fenêtre. • Vérifiez que le port MFP est disponible. Étant donné que les composants MFP (imprimante et scanner) Problèmes liés au système Macintosh Problèmes au niveau du Sélecteur Résolution des problèmes Postscript (PS) Les problèmes présentés ci-dessous sont propres au langage PostScript et peuvent survenir lorsque différents langages d'impression sont utilisés en même  temps. partagent la même interface d'E/S (port MFP), plusieurs applications clientes risquent d'accéder au port  MFP au même moment. Pour éviter tout conflit, une seule application est autorisée à accéder au  périphérique. Un message signalant que le périphérique est occupé est envoyé à l'autre application  demandeuse. Ceci se produit généralement au début de la procédure de numérisation, et une boîte de  message appropriée s'affiche. • Pour identifier la source du problème, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue MFP ports configuration et sélectionnez  le port affecté à l'imprimante. Le symbole du port MFP /dev/mfp0 correspond à l'indication LP:0 affichée  dans les options du scanner, /dev/mfp1 correspond à LP:1, etc. Les ports USB démarrant à  l'indication /dev/mfp4, le scanner sur USB:0 correspond à /dev/mfp4, et ainsi de suite. Vérifiez dans la  zone Selected port si le port est occupé par une autre application. Si tel est le cas, attendez la fin de la tâche ou cliquez sur Release port si l'application utilisant le port ne fonctionne pas correctement. L'imprimante ne numérise pas. • Vérifiez qu'un document est chargé dans l'imprimante. • Vérifiez que l'appareil est connecté à l'ordinateur. En cas d'erreur d'E/S pendant la numérisation, vérifiez  si la connexion est correcte. • Vérifiez que le port MFP est disponible. Étant donné que les composants MFP (imprimante et scanner)  partagent la même interface d'E/S (port MFP), plusieurs applications clientes risquent d'accéder au port  MFP au même moment. Pour éviter tout conflit, une seule application est autorisée à accéder au  périphérique. Un message signalant que le périphérique est occupé est envoyé à l'autre application  demandeuse. Ce problème se produit généralement pendant le démarrage de la procédure de  numérisation ; un message approprié s'affiche. Pour identifier la source du problème, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue MFP ports configuration et sélectionnez  le port affecté à l'imprimante. Le symbole du port MFP /dev/mfp0 correspond à l'indication LP:0 affichée  dans les options du scanner, /dev/mfp1 correspond à LP:1, etc. Les ports USB démarrant à  l'indication /dev/mfp4, le scanner sur USB:0 correspond à /dev/mfp4, et ainsi de suite. Vérifiez dans la  zone Selected port si le port est occupé par une autre application. Si tel est le cas, attendez la fin de la tâche ou cliquez sur Release port si l'application utilisant le port ne fonctionne pas correctement. Impossible d'imprimer après avoir installé  simultanément le logiciel d'imprimante Linux  et le pilote MFP sur le même ordinateur. • Étant donné que le logiciel d'imprimante Linux et le pilote MFP créent un lien symbolique  vers la commande d'impression "lpr", fréquemment utilisée sur les clones Unix, il n'est pas  recommandé d'installer ces deux composants sur le même ordinateur. Impossible de numériser au moyen du  terminal Gimp. • Vérifiez que le menu Acquire du terminal Gimp comporte bien l'option "Xsane:Device dialog". Sinon, installez le compagnon Xsane pour Gimp sur votre ordinateur. Vous trouverez l'ensemble compagnon Xsane pour Gimp sur le CD Linux ou sur la page d'accueil Gimp. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au CD-ROM d'aide de Linux ou à l'application de terminal Gimp. Si vous souhaitez utiliser un autre programme de numérisation, reportez-vous à l'Aide de l'application. Le message d'erreur "Unable to open MFP port device file" s'affiche lors de l'impression d'un document. Il n'est pas conseillé de modifier les paramètres de la tâche d'impression (via l'utilitaire SLPR, par exemple)  pendant l'impression d'une tâche. Les versions connues du serveur CUPS interrompent la tâche d'impression  si les options d'impression sont modifiées, puis tentent de relancer la tâche depuis le début. Étant donné  que le pilote MFP pour Linux verrouille le port MFP pendant l'impression, ce port reste verrouillé en cas  d'interruption soudaine du pilote et, par conséquent, n'est pas disponible pour les tâches d'impression  suivantes. Si cette situation se produit, essayez de déverrouiller le port MFP.  Situation Solutions éventuelles L'imprimante n'imprime pas à partir d'Acrobat Reader. Changez l'option Méthode d'impression pour Print as Image lorsque vous imprimez à partir  d'Acrobat Reader. Le document a été imprimé, mais le travail d'impression  n'a pas disparu de la file d'attente sous Mac OS 10.3.2. Mettez à jour votre système d'exploitation Mac et passez au système 10.3.3. ou plus. REMARQUE : Pour que les messages d'erreurs PS s'impriment ou s'affichent en cas de problème, ouvrez la fenêtre des options d'impression et cliquez  sur l'option désirée située en regard de la section des erreurs PostScript. Problème Cause possible Solution Vous ne pouvez pas imprimer de fichier PostScript. Le module PostScript n'est peut-être pas installé. Imprimez une page de configuration et vérifiez que la  version PostScript est disponible pour impression. Erreur de contrôle de limite (Limit  Check Error) La tâche d'impression peut être trop complexe. Simplifier la page ou modifier les paramètres de qualité  d'impression. Ou, augmentez la capacité de la mémoire. Une page d'erreurs PostScript s'imprime. La tâche d'impression ne contient peut-être pas de  données PostScript. Assurez-vous que le document est de type PostScript. Vérifiez si le pilote attend l'envoi d'un fichier de  configuration ou d'en-tête PostScript à l'imprimante. Le bac optionnel 2 n'est pas  sélectionné dans le pilote. Le pilote d'impression n'a pas été configuré pour  reconnaître le bac optionnel 2. Ouvrez les propriétés du pilote PostScript et définissez  l'élément Bac optionnel de l'option Périphérique à  Installé. http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_printers_main/esuprt_printers/dell-1815dn_User's%20Guide_fr-fr.pdf Systèmes Dell™ PowerVault™ 500 Manuel du propriétaire Présentation du système Utilisation du programme de configuration du système Installation des composants du système Dépannage du système Exécution des diagnostics du système Cavaliers et connecteurs Obtention d'aide Glossaire Remarques, avis et précautions Les informations contenues dans ce document peuvent être modifiées sans préavis. © 2007 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction de ce document de quelque manière que ce soit sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell, le logo DELL, PowerEdge, PowerVault, PowerApp, PowerConnect, XPS et Dell OpenManage sont des marques de Dell Inc. ; Intel est une marque déposée de Intel Corporation aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays ; Microsoft, MS-DOS et Windows sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. D'autres marques et noms de marques peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence aux entités se réclamant de ces marques et de ces noms ou à leurs produits.  Dell Inc. dénie tout intérêt propriétaire vis-à-vis des marques et des noms de marque autres que les siens. REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent vous aider à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur.  AVIS : Un AVIS vous avertit d'un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème.  PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque potentiel d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. Retour au sommaire  Présentation du système  Systèmes Dell™ PowerVault™ 500 Manuel du propriétaire   Autres informations utiles Fonctions du système accessibles au démarrage  Voyants et caractéristiques du panneau avant  Voyants et caractéristiques du panneau arrière  Codes du voyant d'alimentation Codes des voyants de NIC Messages d'état affichés sur l'écran LCD  Messages système  Messages d'avertissement Messages de diagnostic Messages d'alerte Cette section décrit les caractéristiques essentielles au fonctionnement du système (matériel, micrologiciel et interface logicielle). Les connecteurs situés sur  les panneaux avant et arrière permettent au système de bénéficier d'une connectivité optimale et de nombreuses possibilités d'extension. Le micrologiciel, le  système d'exploitation et les applications gèrent le système ainsi que l'état des composants. Ils vous alertent lorsqu'un incident survient. Les informations  concernant l'état du système peuvent être transmises par les éléments suivants : l Voyants des panneaux avant et arrière l Messages du système l Messages d'avertissement l Messages de diagnostic l Messages d'alerte Cette section décrit chaque type de message et répertorie les causes possibles, ainsi que les mesures à prendre pour résoudre les incidents indiqués. Elle  contient également une description des voyants et des caractéristiques du système.  Autres informations utiles l Les documents Rack Installation Guide (Guide d'installation du rack) et Rack Installation Instructions (Instructions d'installation du rack) fournis avec la solution rack décrivent l'installation du système. l Le document Getting Started Guide (Guide de mise en route) décrit les caractéristiques du système, les procédures de configuration et les spécifications  techniques. l Les CD fournis avec le système contiennent des documents et des outils relatifs à la configuration et à la gestion du système. l La documentation des logiciels de gestion de systèmes contient des informations sur les fonctionnalités, l'installation et l'utilisation de base de ces  logiciels, ainsi que sur la configuration requise. l La documentation du système d'exploitation indique comment installer (au besoin), configurer et utiliser le système d'exploitation. l La documentation fournie avec les composants achetés séparément contient des informations permettant de configurer et d'installer ces options. l Des mises à jour sont parfois fournies avec le système. Elles décrivent les modifications apportées au système, aux logiciels ou à la documentation. l Si des notes d'édition ou des fichiers lisez-moi (readme) sont fournis, ils contiennent des mises à jour de dernière minute apportées au système ou à la  documentation, ou bien des informations techniques avancées destinées aux utilisateurs expérimentés ou aux techniciens. Fonctions du système accessibles au démarrage  Le tableau 1-1 décrit certaines touches pouvant être utilisées lors du démarrage pour accéder aux fonctions du système. Si le système d'exploitation  commence à se charger alors que vous n'avez pas encore appuyé sur la touche voulue, laissez-le finir de démarrer, puis arrêtez-le et réessayez. Tableau 1-1. Touches d'accès aux fonctions du système  PRÉCAUTION : Le document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) contient d'importantes informations se rapportant à  la sécurité et aux réglementations. Les informations sur la garantie se trouvent soit dans ce document, soit à part.  REMARQUE : Vérifiez toujours si des mises à jour sont disponibles sur le site support.dell.com et lisez-les en premier, car elles remplacent souvent les informations contenues dans les autres documents. Touche(s) Description Permet d'accéder au programme de configuration du système. Voir Utilisation du programme de configuration du système. Ouvre la partition d'utilitaires, qui permet d'exécuter les diagnostics. Voir Exécution des diagnostics du système.Voyants et caractéristiques du panneau avant  La figure 1-1 présente les boutons, les voyants et les connecteurs situés derrière le cadre de rack (en option), sur le panneau avant. Figure 1-1. Voyants et caractéristiques du panneau avant Tableau 1-2. Voyants, boutons et connecteurs du panneau avant  Ouvre l'utilitaire de gestion du contrôleur BMC (BaseBoard Management Controller), qui permet d'accéder au journal d'événements du  système (SEL). Voir le document BMC User's Guide (Contrôleur BMC - Guide d'utilisation) pour plus d'informations sur la configuration et l'utilisation de ce contrôleur. Ouvre l'utilitaire de configuration SAS. Consultez le guide d'utilisation de la carte SAS pour plus d'informations. Ouvre l'utilitaire de configuration RAID, qui permet de configurer une carte contrôleur RAID (en option). Pour plus d'informations, consultez la  documentation de la carte RAID. Cette option s'affiche uniquement si le support PXE est activé dans le programme de configuration du système. (Voir Écran Integrated  Devices (Périphériques intégrés)). Cette combinaison de touches permet de configurer les paramètres du NIC pour l'amorçage PXE. Pour plus  d'informations, consultez la documentation du NIC intégré. Si vous utilisez le contrôleur DRAC (Dell Remote Access Controller) en option, cette combinaison de touches permet d'accéder aux paramètres  de configuration correspondants. Consultez le guide d'utilisation du contrôleur DRAC pour plus d'informations sur la configuration et  l'utilisation de ce contrôleur.  Numéro Voyant, bouton ou connecteur Icône Description 1 Voyant et bouton d'alimentation Le voyant d'alimentation est fixe quand le système est allumé. Le bouton d'alimentation contrôle la sortie du bloc d'alimentation en CC qui alimente le système. REMARQUE : Si vous éteignez un ordinateur utilisant un système d'exploitation conforme ACPI en appuyant sur le  bouton d'alimentation, le système peut effectuer un arrêt normal avant que l'alimentation ne soit coupée. Si le  système d'exploitation n'est pas conforme ACPI, une pression sur le bouton d'alimentation l'éteint immédiatement. 2 Bouton NMI Ce bouton est utilisé pour la résolution de certains incidents liés aux logiciels et aux pilotes de périphériques avec  certains systèmes d'exploitation. Pour l'activer, utilisez la pointe d'un trombone.  Appuyez sur ce bouton uniquement si un technicien de support qualifié vous demande de le faire, ou si cela est  préconisé dans la documentation du système d'exploitation. 3 Bouton d'identification du système Les boutons d'identification des panneaux avant et arrière peuvent servir à identifier un système spécifique au  sein d'un rack. Si l'un de ces boutons est activé, l'écran LCD du panneau avant et le voyant d'état du système  (bleu) situé sur le panneau arrière clignotent jusqu'à ce que l'utilisateur appuie de nouveau sur l'un des boutons. 4 Écran LCD    Affiche l'ID du système, des informations d'état et des messages d'erreur.  L'écran LCD s'allume lorsque le système fonctionne normalement. Les logiciels de gestion de systèmes, tout  comme les boutons d'identification situés à l'avant et à l'arrière du système, peuvent faire clignoter l'écran LCD en  bleu pour identifier un système spécifique. L'écran LCD s'allume en orange lorsque le système nécessite une intervention. Il affiche alors un code d'erreur  suivi d'un texte descriptif. REMARQUE : Si le système est connecté à l'alimentation en CA et si une erreur a été détectée, l'écran LCD  s'allume en orange, que le système soit allumé ou non. 5 Connecteurs USB (2) Permettent de connecter des périphériques compatibles USB 2.0 au système. 6 Connecteur vidéo Permet de connecter un moniteur au système. 7 Disques durs (6)    Six disques de 3,5 pouces enfichables à chaud OU Quatre disques de 3,5 pouces enfichables à chaud 8 Lecteur optique (en option)    Un lecteur slim (IDE ou DVD, en option)Codes des voyants de disques durs Les supports de disque dur comprennent un voyant d'activité et un voyant d'état. Voir figure 1-2. Dans les configurations RAID, le voyant d'état s'allume pour  indiquer l'état de l'unité. Dans les autres configurations, seul le voyant d'activité s'allume. Figure 1-2. Voyants des disques durs Le tableau 1-3 répertorie les codes de voyants des disques durs RAID. Ce comportement varie en fonction des événements affectant les lecteurs du système.  Par exemple, si un disque dur tombe en panne, la séquence "Panne du lecteur" apparaît. Lorsque vous avez sélectionné le lecteur à retirer, la séquence  "Préparation au retrait" apparaît, suivie de la séquence "Lecteur prêt à être inséré ou retiré". Une fois le lecteur de rechange installé, la séquence indiquant  que le lecteur est en cours de préparation apparaît, suivie de la séquence "Lecteur en ligne". Tableau 1-3. Codes des voyants de disques durs RAID  Voyants et caractéristiques du panneau arrière  La figure 1-3 présente les boutons, les voyants et les connecteurs situés sur le panneau arrière du système. Figure 1-3. Voyants et caractéristiques du panneau arrière 1 Voyant d'état du lecteur (vert et orange) 2 Voyant d'activité du lecteur (vert) REMARQUE : Dans les configurations non RAID, seul le voyant d'activité est opérationnel. Le voyant d'état reste éteint. Condition Comportement du voyant d'état Identification de l'unité/Préparation  au retrait Clignotement vert deux fois par seconde Lecteur prêt à être inséré ou retiré Éteint Panne anticipée du lecteur Clignotement vert, orange, puis extinction Panne du lecteur Clignotement orange quatre fois par seconde Disque en cours de reconstruction Vert, clignotement lent Lecteur en ligne Vert fixe Reconstruction annulée Clignotement vert pendant trois secondes, puis orange pendant trois secondes, puis extinction pendant six secondes 1 Carte de montage PCI centrale (logement 1) 2 Carte de montage PCI de gauche  (logement 2)Connexion de périphériques externes Appliquez les consignes suivantes lorsque vous connectez des périphériques externes au système : l La plupart des périphériques doivent être reliés à un connecteur spécifique et requièrent l'installation de pilotes pour pouvoir fonctionner correctement.  Les pilotes sont généralement fournis avec le système d'exploitation ou avec le périphérique lui-même. Consultez la documentation du périphérique  pour obtenir des instructions spécifiques sur l'installation et la configuration.  l Avant de connecter un périphérique externe, mettez toujours le système hors tension. Le périphérique doit également être éteint. Ensuite, allumez les  périphériques externes avant le système, à moins que la documentation du périphérique ne stipule le contraire. Pour plus d'informations sur chaque connecteur, voir Cavaliers et connecteurs. Pour plus d'informations sur l'activation, la désactivation et la configuration des  ports d'E/S et des connecteurs, voir Utilisation du programme de configuration du système. Codes du voyant d'alimentation Le bouton d'alimentation du panneau avant contrôle la mise sous tension des blocs d'alimentation du système. Le voyant d'alimentation s'allume en vert  lorsque le système est sous tension. Les voyants des blocs d'alimentation redondants indiquent si le système est alimenté et permettent de détecter une éventuelle panne d'alimentation  (voir figure 1-4). Le tableau 1-4 répertorie les codes des voyants des blocs d'alimentation. Tableau 1-4. Voyants des blocs d'alimentation redondants  Figure 1-4. Voyants des blocs d'alimentation redondants Codes des voyants de NIC Chaque NIC du panneau arrière est associé à un voyant qui fournit des informations sur l'activité du réseau et l'état du lien. Voir figure 1-5. Le tableau 1-5 répertorie les codes des voyants de NIC. Figure 1-5. Voyants de NIC 3 Carte de montage PCI de gauche (logement 3) 4 Blocs d'alimentation (2) 5 Bouton d'identification du système 6 Voyant d'état du système 7 Connecteur du voyant d'état du système 8 Connecteur NIC2 9 Connecteur NIC1 10 Connecteurs USB (2) 11 Connecteur vidéo 12 Connecteur série 13 Contrôleur d'accès à distance (en option) Voyant Fonction État du bloc d'alimentation Un voyant vert indique que le bloc d'alimentation fonctionne normalement. Panne du bloc d'alimentation Un voyant orange indique qu'un incident lié au bloc d'alimentation s'est produit. État de l'alimentation en CA Un voyant vert indique qu'une source de courant alternatif valide est reliée au bloc d'alimentation. 1 État du bloc d'alimentation 2 Panne du bloc d'alimentation 3 État de l'alimentation en CATableau 1-5. Codes des voyants de NIC Messages d'état affichés sur l'écran LCD  L'écran LCD du panneau de commande affiche des messages d'état indiquant si le système fonctionne correctement ou s'il requiert une intervention. Il s'allume en bleu en cas de fonctionnement normal et en orange si une erreur est détectée. Dans ce dernier cas, il affiche un message comprenant un code  d'état suivi d'un texte descriptif. Le tableau 1-6 répertorie les messages d'état qui peuvent s'afficher sur l'écran LCD et indique leur cause probable. Les  messages de l'écran LCD se rapportent aux événements enregistrés dans le journal d'événements du système (SEL). Pour plus d'informations sur ce journal  et sur la configuration des paramètres de gestion du système, consultez la documentation du logiciel de gestion de systèmes. Tableau 1-6. Messages d'état affichés sur l'écran LCD  1 Voyant de lien 2 Voyant d'activité Voyant Code du voyant Les voyants de lien et d'activité sont éteints. Le NIC n'est pas connecté au réseau. Le voyant de lien est vert. Le NIC est connecté à un périphérique valide sur le réseau. Le voyant d'activité clignote en orange. Des données sont en cours d'envoi ou de réception sur le réseau. PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les  consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges électrostatiques. REMARQUE : Si le démarrage du système échoue, appuyez sur le bouton d'ID du système pendant au moins cinq secondes, jusqu'à ce qu'un code  d'erreur s'affiche sur l'écran LCD. Notez ce code, puis reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'aide. Code Texte Causes Mesures correctives N/A NOM DU SYSTÈME Chaîne de 62 caractères pouvant être définie par  l'utilisateur dans le programme de configuration du système. Ce nom s'affiche dans les cas suivants : l Le système est sous tension. l Le système est hors tension et des erreurs  POST sont affichées. Ce message est affiché uniquement pour information. Vous pouvez modifier l'identificateur et le nom du système dans le  programme de configuration du système. Voir Utilisation du programme de configuration du système. E1000 FAILSAFE, Call Support Voir Obtention d'aide. E1114 Temp Ambient La température ambiante du système est en dehors  des limites autorisées. Voir Dépannage des incidents de refroidissement du système. E1116 Temp Memory La température de la mémoire est en dehors des  limites autorisées. La mémoire a été désactivée pour  éviter que les composants ne soient endommagés. Voir Dépannage des incidents de refroidissement du système. E12nn xx PwrGd Panne du régulateur de tension indiqué. Voir Obtention d'aide. E1210 CMOS Batt La pile CMOS est manquante ou la tension est en dehors des limites autorisées. Voir Dépannage de la pile du système. E1211 ROMB Batt La batterie RAID est manquante ou endommagée, ou  bien elle ne peut pas se recharger suite à un incident  lié aux conditions thermiques. Remboîtez le connecteur de la batterie RAID. Voir Batterie RAID et Dépannage des incidents de refroidissement du système. E1229 CPU n VCORE Panne du régulateur de tension VCORE du  processeur n. Voir Obtention d'aide. E1310 RPM Fan nn Le nombre de tours par minute du ventilateur indiqué  est en dehors des limites autorisées. Voir Dépannage des incidents de refroidissement du système. E1313 Fan Redundancy Les ventilateurs du système ne sont plus redondants.  Une autre panne de ventilateur pourrait provoquer une surchauffe du système. Vérifiez l'écran LCD du panneau de commande pour voir si des messages  supplémentaires défilent. Voir Dépannage des incidents de refroidissement  du système. E1410 CPU n IERR Le microprocesseur indiqué renvoie une erreur interne. Pour obtenir les informations les plus récentes sur le système, voir le  document Information Update Tech Sheet (Fiche technique de mise à jour des  informations), qui est accessible à partir du site support.dell.com. Si l'incident persiste, voir Obtention d'aide. E1414 CPU n La température du microprocesseur spécifié est en  Voir Dépannage des incidents de refroidissement du système. Si l'incident Thermtrip dehors des limites autorisées et celui-ci s'est arrêté.  persiste, assurez-vous que les dissipateurs de chaleur du microprocesseur sont correctement installés. Voir Dépannage des microprocesseurs. REMARQUE : L'écran LCD continue à afficher ce message jusqu'à ce que le  câble d'alimentation du système soit débranché puis rebranché à la source  d'alimentation en CA, ou jusqu'à ce que le journal d'événements soit effacé  à l'aide de Server Assistant ou de BMC Management Utility. Consultez le  document Dell OpenManage Baseboard Management Controller User's Guide (Guide d'utilisation du contrôleur BMC Dell OpenManage) pour plus  d'informations concernant ces utilitaires. E1418 CPU n Presence Le processeur indiqué est manquant ou endommagé et  la configuration du système n'est pas prise en charge. Voir Dépannage des microprocesseurs. E141C CPU Mismatch La configuration des processeurs n'est pas prise en charge par Dell. Vérifiez que les processeurs sont de même type et conformes aux  spécifications techniques du microprocesseur (voir le document Getting Started Guide [Guide de mise en route] du système). E141F CPU Protocol Le BIOS du système a renvoyé une erreur de protocole  liée au processeur. Voir Obtention d'aide. E1420 CPU Bus PERR Le BIOS du système a renvoyé une erreur de parité liée  au bus du processeur. Voir Obtention d'aide. E1421 CPU Init Le BIOS du système a renvoyé une erreur  d'initialisation du processeur. Voir Obtention d'aide. E1422 CPU Machine Chk Le BIOS du système a renvoyé une erreur liée à la  vérification du système. Voir Obtention d'aide. E1610 PS n Missing La source d'alimentation indiquée n'est pas disponible,  ou bien le bloc d'alimentation est défectueux ou mal  installé. Voir Dépannage des blocs d'alimentation. E1614 PS n Status La source d'alimentation indiquée n'est pas disponible,  ou bien le bloc d'alimentation est défectueux ou mal  installé. Voir Dépannage des blocs d'alimentation. E1618 PS n Predictive La tension du bloc d'alimentation est en dehors des limites autorisées. Le bloc d'alimentation indiqué est  défectueux ou mal installé. Voir Dépannage des blocs d'alimentation. E161C PS n Input Lost La source d'alimentation du bloc d'alimentation indiqué  est indisponible ou en dehors des limites autorisées. Vérifiez la source d'alimentation du bloc d'alimentation indiqué. Si l'incident  persiste, voir Dépannage des blocs d'alimentation. E1620 PS n Input Range La source d'alimentation du bloc d'alimentation indiqué  est indisponible ou en dehors des limites autorisées. Vérifiez la source d'alimentation du bloc d'alimentation indiqué. Si l'incident  persiste, voir Dépannage des blocs d'alimentation. E1624 PS Redundancy Le sous-système d'alimentation n'est plus redondant.  Si le dernier bloc d'alimentation tombe en panne, le système s'arrêtera. Voir Dépannage des blocs d'alimentation. E1710 I/O Channel Chk Le BIOS du système a renvoyé une erreur liée à  la vérification des canaux d'E/S. Voir Obtention d'aide. E1711 PCI PERR Bnn Dnn Fnn PCI PERR Slot n Le BIOS du système a renvoyé une erreur de parité PCI  liée à un composant résidant dans l'espace de  configuration PCI du bus nn, périphérique nn, fonction  nn. Le BIOS du système a renvoyé une erreur de parité PCI  liée à un composant installé dans le logement PCI  indiqué. Retirez et réinstallez les cartes d'extension PCI. Si l'incident persiste, voir  Dépannage des cartes d'extension. Réinstallez le bâti des cartes d'extension. Voir Bâti des cartes d'extension. Si l'incident persiste, la carte de montage ou la carte système est  défectueuse. Voir Obtention d'aide. E1712 PCI SERR Bnn Dnn Fnn PCI SERR Slot n Le BIOS du système a renvoyé une erreur système PCI  liée à un composant résidant dans l'espace de  configuration PCI du bus nn, périphérique nn, fonction  nn. Le BIOS du système a renvoyé une erreur système PCI  liée à un composant installé dans le logement indiqué. Retirez et réinstallez les cartes d'extension PCI. Si l'incident persiste, voir  Dépannage des cartes d'extension. Réinstallez le bâti des cartes d'extension. Voir Bâti des cartes d'extension. Si l'incident persiste, la carte de montage ou la carte système est  défectueuse. Voir Obtention d'aide. E1714 Unknown Err Le BIOS du système a détecté une erreur système non  identifiée. Voir Obtention d'aide. E171F PCIE Fatal Err Bnn Dnn Fnn PCIE Fatal Err Slot n Le BIOS du système a renvoyé une erreur fatale PCIe  liée à un composant résidant dans l'espace de  configuration PCI du bus nn, périphérique nn, fonction  nn. Le BIOS du système a renvoyé une erreur fatale PCIe  liée à un composant installé dans le logement indiqué. Retirez et réinstallez les cartes d'extension PCI. Si l'incident persiste, voir  Dépannage des cartes d'extension. Réinstallez le bâti des cartes d'extension. Voir Bâti des cartes d'extension. Si l'incident persiste, la carte de montage ou la carte système est  défectueuse. Voir Obtention d'aide. E1810 HDD nn Fault Le sous-système SAS a détecté une panne du disque  dur nn. Voir Dépannage d'un disque dur. E1811 HDD nn Rbld Abrt La reconstruction du disque dur indiqué a été annulée. Voir Dépannage d'un disque dur. Si l'incident persiste, consultez la documentation RAID. E1812 HDD nn Removed Le disque dur indiqué a été retiré du système. Ce message s'affiche uniquement à titre d'information. E1913 CPU & Firmware Mismatch Le micrologiciel du contrôleur BMC ne prend pas en  charge le processeur. Mettez à jour le micrologiciel du contrôleur BMC. Voir le document BMC User's Guide (Contrôleur BMC - Guide d'utilisation) pour plus d'informations sur la configuration et l'utilisation de ce contrôleur. E1A11 PCI Rsr Config Les cartes de montage PCI ne sont pas configurées  correctement. Une ou plusieurs configurations incorrectes peuvent empêcher la mise sous tension du  Voir Cartes de montage pour cartes d'extension. système. E1A12 PCI Rsr Missing Le système ne peut pas être mis sous tension car une  ou plusieurs cartes de montage PCI sont manquantes. Ce message s'affiche uniquement à titre d'information. E1A14 SAS Cable A Le câble SAS A est manquant ou endommagé. Remboîtez le câble dans son connecteur. Si l'incident persiste, remplacez le  câble. Voir Carte contrôleur fille SAS. E1A15 SAS Cable B Le câble SAS B est manquant ou endommagé. Remboîtez le câble dans son connecteur. Si l'incident persiste, remplacez le  câble. Voir Carte contrôleur fille SAS. E2010 No Memory Aucune mémoire n'est installée dans le système. Installez de la mémoire. Voir Installation de barrettes de mémoire. E2011 Mem Config Err Mémoire détectée mais non configurable. Erreur  détectée lors de la configuration de la mémoire. Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système. E2012 Unusable Memory Mémoire configurée mais inutilisable. Échec du soussystème de mémoire. Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système. E2013 Shadow BIOS Fail Le BIOS du système n'est pas parvenu à copier son  image flash dans la mémoire. Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système. E2014 CMOS Fail Échec du CMOS. La RAM CMOS ne fonctionne pas  correctement. Voir Obtention d'aide. E2015 DMA Controller Échec du contrôleur DMA. Voir Obtention d'aide. E2016 Int Controller Échec du contrôleur d'interruptions. Voir Obtention d'aide. E2017 Timer Fail Échec de rafraîchissement du temporisateur. Voir Obtention d'aide. E2018 Prog Timer Échec du temporisateur d'intervalle programmable. Voir Obtention d'aide. E2019 Parity Error Erreur de parité. Voir Obtention d'aide. E201A SIO Err Échec de la puce super E/S. Voir Obtention d'aide. E201B Kybd Controller Échec du contrôleur du clavier. Voir Obtention d'aide. E201C SMI Init Échec d'initialisation SMI (System Management  Interrupt). Voir Obtention d'aide. E201D Shutdown Test Échec du test d'arrêt du BIOS. Voir Obtention d'aide. E201E POST Mem Test Échec du test mémoire pendant l'auto-test de démarrage du BIOS. Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système. Si l'incident persiste, voir Obtention d'aide. E201F DRAC Config Échec de la configuration du contrôleur DRAC  (Dell Remote Access Controller).  Vérifiez si l'écran affiche des messages d'erreur spécifiques. Assurez-vous que les câbles et les connecteurs de la carte DRAC sont  correctement emboîtés. Si l'incident persiste, consultez la documentation du  contrôleur DRAC. E2020 CPU Config Échec de configuration du processeur.  Vérifiez si l'écran affiche des messages d'erreur spécifiques. E2021 Memory Population Configuration de la mémoire incorrecte. L'ordre  d'insertion des barrettes de mémoire est incorrect.  Vérifiez si l'écran affiche des messages d'erreur spécifiques. Voir Dépannage  de la mémoire système. E2022 POST Fail Échec général après le test vidéo. Vérifiez si l'écran affiche des messages d'erreur spécifiques.  E2110 MBE Crd n DIMM nn & nn L'une des barrettes DIMM du groupe "nn & nn" présente une erreur de mémoire multibits (MBE). Si le  système n'est pas équipé d'une carte de mémoire, la  chaîne "Crd n" n'apparaît pas dans le message. Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système. E2111 SBE Log Disable Crd n DIMM nn Le BIOS du système a désactivé la consignation des  erreurs de mémoire portant sur un seul bit (SBE)  jusqu'au prochain redémarrage du système. "nn"  représente la barrette DIMM indiquée par le BIOS. Si le  système n'est pas équipé d'une carte de montage de  mémoire, la chaîne "Crd n" n'apparaît pas dans le  message. Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système. E2112 Mem Spare Crd n DIMM nn Le BIOS du système a activé la mémoire de réserve car  il a détecté un nombre d'erreurs trop important. "nn &  nn" représente la paire de barrettes DIMM indiquée par  le BIOS. Si le système n'est pas équipé d'une carte de  mémoire, la chaîne "Crd n" n'apparaît pas dans le  message. Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système. E2113 Mem Mirror Crd n DIMM nn & nn Le BIOS du système a désactivé la mise en miroir de la  mémoire car il a détecté qu'une moitié du miroir  contenait un nombre d'erreurs trop important. "nn & nn" représente la paire de barrettes DIMM indiquée par  le BIOS. Si le système n'est pas équipé d'une carte de  mémoire, la chaîne "Crd n" n'apparaît pas dans le  message. Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système. E2118 Fatal NB Mem CRC L'une des connexions du sous-système de mémoire FBDIMM a échoué en amont. Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système. E2119 Fatal SB Mem CRC L'une des connexions du sous-système de mémoire FBDIMM a échoué en aval. Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système. I1910 Intrusion Le capot du système a été retiré. Ce message s'affiche uniquement à titre d'information. I1911 >3 ERRs Chk Log Les messages à afficher dépassent la capacité de  l'écran LCD.  L'écran LCD ne peut afficher que trois messages  d'erreur à la suite. Le quatrième message indique que  la capacité de l'écran est à son maximum. Vérifiez le journal d'événements du système pour plus de détails.Résolution des incidents décrits par les messages d'état de l'écran LCD Le code et le texte affichés sur l'écran LCD permettent souvent d'identifier une panne précise pouvant facilement être corrigée. Par exemple, si le code  E1418  CPU_1_Presence s'affiche, cela signifie qu'aucun microprocesseur n'est installé dans le support 1. En outre, il est possible de déterminer la cause de l'incident si plusieurs erreurs de même type surviennent. Par exemple, si vous recevez une série de  messages indiquant plusieurs incidents liés à la tension, le problème peut être lié à une défaillance d'un bloc d'alimentation. Suppression des messages d'état de l'écran LCD Pour les pannes liées aux capteurs (de température, de tension, des ventilateurs, etc.), le message de l'écran LCD est supprimé automatiquement lorsque le  capteur revient à la normale. Par exemple, l'écran LCD affiche un message indiquant que la température d'un composant n'est pas conforme aux limites  acceptables, puis supprime ce message lorsque la température redevient normale. Pour les messages suivants, une intervention de l'utilisateur est requise : l Clear the SEL (Vider le journal d'événements du système) : cette tâche doit être effectuée à partir du logiciel de gestion du système. L'historique des  événements du système sera perdu. l Power cycle (Mettre le système hors tension) : mettez le système hors tension et débranchez-le de la prise secteur. Attendez environ 10 secondes,  puis rebranchez le câble d'alimentation et redémarrez le système. Ces interventions permettent d'effacer les messages d'erreur. Les voyants d'état et l'écran LCD reviennent à l'état normal. Les messages réapparaîtront dans  les conditions suivantes : l Le capteur est revenu à l'état normal mais a de nouveau subi une panne et une nouvelle entrée a été créée dans le journal d'événements. l Le système a été réinitialisé et de nouvelles erreurs ont été détectées. l Une panne a été détectée sur une autre source correspondant au même message. Messages système  Les messages système sont affichés à l'écran pour informer l'utilisateur qu'un incident peut s'être produit. Le tableau 1-3 répertorie les messages système qui  peuvent s'afficher. Il indique leur cause probable et les mesures correctives appropriées. Tableau 1-7. Messages système  I1912 SEL Full Le journal d'événements du système est saturé et ne  peut plus contenir d'événements.  Supprimez des événements du journal. W1228 ROMB Batt < 24hr Ce message avertit qu'il reste moins de 24 heures de  charge à la batterie RAID.  Remplacez la batterie RAID. Voir Batterie RAID. REMARQUE : Pour obtenir le nom complet d'une abréviation ou d'un sigle utilisé dans ce tableau, voir le Glossaire. REMARQUE : Si vous recevez un message du système qui n'est pas répertorié dans le tableau 1-3, consultez la documentation de l'application que vous utilisiez au moment où le message est apparu. Vous pouvez aussi vous reporter à la documentation du système d'exploitation pour obtenir une  explication du message et l'action conseillée. PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les  consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges électrostatiques. Message Causes Mesures correctives Alert! Redundant memory disabled! Memory configuration does not support redundant memory. Les barrettes de mémoire installées ne sont pas du  même type ni de la même taille ; une ou plusieurs  barrettes de mémoire sont défectueuses. Vérifiez que toutes les barrettes de mémoire sont du  même type et de la même taille et qu'elles sont  correctement installées. Si l'incident persiste, voir  Dépannage de la mémoire système. Attempting to update Remote Configuration. Please wait... Une requête de configuration à distance a été  détectée et est en cours de traitement. Attendez que le processus se termine. BIOS Update Attempt Failed! La tentative de mise à jour à distance du BIOS a  échoué. Réessayez de mettre le BIOS à jour. Si l'incident persiste,  voir Obtention d'aide. Caution! NVRAM_CLR jumper is installed on system board. Le cavalier NVRAM_CLR est installé. Le CMOS a été  initialisé. Retirez le cavalier NVRAM_CLR. Voir figure 6-1 pour identifier son emplacement. CPUs with different cache sizes detected! Des microprocesseurs possédant des tailles de  mémoire cache différentes sont installés. Vérifiez que tous les microprocesseurs ont une taille de  mémoire cache identique et qu'ils sont correctement  installés. Voir Processeurs. Decreasing available memory Barrette(s) de mémoire défectueuse(s) ou mal  installée(s). Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système. DIMM pairs must be matched in size, speed, and technology. The following DIMM pair is mismatched: DIMM x and DIMM y. Barrettes DIMM incompatibles ; barrette(s) de  mémoire défectueuse(s) ou mal installée(s). Vérifiez que toutes les paires de barrettes de mémoire  sont du même type et de la même taille et qu'elles sont  correctement installées. Voir Mémoire système. Si l'incident persiste, voir Dépannage de la mémoire  système.DIMMs must be populated in sequential order beginning with slot 1. The following DIMM is electrically isolated: DIMM x. L'emplacement de la barrette DIMM indiquée n'est  pas accessible. Les barrettes DIMM doivent être  installées en respectant l'ordre des numéros  d'emplacement. Installez 2, 4, ou 8 barrettes l'une après l'autre, en  commençant par le logement 1. Voir Mémoire système. DIMMs should be installed in pairs. Pairs must be matched in size, speed, and technology. Barrettes DIMM incompatibles ; barrette(s) de  mémoire défectueuse(s) ou mal installée(s). Le  fonctionnement du système risque d'être altéré et  de présenter une protection ECC réduite. Seule la  mémoire installée dans le canal 0 sera accessible. Vérifiez que toutes les paires de barrettes de mémoire  sont du même type et de la même taille et qu'elles sont  correctement installées. Voir Mémoire système. Si l'incident persiste, voir Dépannage de la mémoire  système. Dual-rank DIMM paired with Single-rank DIMM - The following DIMM/rank has been disabled by BIOS: DIMM x Rank y Barrettes DIMM incompatibles ; barrette(s) de  mémoire défectueuse(s). Le système a détecté  qu'une barrette DIMM à double rangée de  connexions a été installée avec une barrette à une  seule rangée de connexions. La seconde rangée de  la première barrette sera désactivée. Vérifiez que toutes les paires de barrettes de mémoire  sont du même type et de la même taille et qu'elles sont  correctement installées. Voir Mémoire système. Si l'incident persiste, voir Dépannage de la mémoire  système. Diskette drive n seek failure Paramètres incorrects dans le programme de  configuration du système. Lancez le programme de configuration du système pour  corriger les paramètres. Voir Utilisation du programme de configuration du système. Lecteur de disquette défectueux ou mal installé. Remplacez la disquette. Si l'incident persiste, voir Dépannage d'un lecteur de disquette. Câble d'interface du lecteur de bande ou câble  d'alimentation débranché. Réinsérez le câble d'interface du lecteur de bande ou le  câble d'alimentation. Si l'incident persiste, voir Dépannage  d'un lecteur de disquette. Diskette read failure Lecteur de disquette ou de bande défectueux ou  mal installé. Remplacez la disquette. Voir Dépannage d'un lecteur de  disquette. Diskette subsystem reset failed Lecteur de disquette ou de bande défectueux ou  mal installé. Remplacez la disquette ou la bande. Si l'incident persiste, voir Dépannage d'un lecteur de disquette. Drive not ready Disquette manquante ou mal insérée dans le  lecteur. Remplacez la disquette. Si l'incident persiste, voir Dépannage d'un lecteur de disquette. Error: Incorrect memory configuration. DIMMs must be installed in pairs of matched memory size, speed, and technology. Barrettes DIMM incompatibles ; barrette(s) de  mémoire défectueuse(s) ou mal installée(s). Vérifiez que toutes les paires de barrettes de mémoire  sont du même type et de la même taille et qu'elles sont  correctement installées. Voir Mémoire système. Si l'incident persiste, voir Dépannage de la mémoire  système. Error: Memory failure detected. Memory size reduced. Replace the faulty DIMM as soon as possible. Barrettes de mémoire défectueuses ou mal  installées. Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système. !!*** Error: Remote Access Controller initialization failure*** RAC virtual USB devices may not be available... Échec de l'initialisation du contrôleur d'accès  distant. Assurez-vous que le contrôleur DRAC est correctement  installé. Voir Installation d'une carte RAC. FBD training error: The following branch has been disabled: Branch x Le groupe indiqué (paire de canaux) contient des  barrettes DIMM qui ne sont pas compatibles entre elles. Vérifiez que vous utilisez uniquement des barrettes de  mémoire certifiées par Dell. Nous vous recommandons  d'acheter les kits d'extension de mémoire directement sur  le site www.dell.com ou de contacter votre représentant  commercial Dell à cet effet. Gate A20 failure Contrôleur du clavier défectueux ; carte système  défectueuse. Voir Obtention d'aide. General failure Le système d'exploitation ne peut pas exécuter la  commande. Ce message est habituellement suivi d'informations spécifiques. Notez ces informations et prenez les mesures  adéquates pour résoudre l'incident. Invalid NVRAM configuration, resource re-allocated Le système a détecté et corrigé un conflit de  ressources. Aucune action n'est requise. Keyboard Controller failure Contrôleur du clavier défectueux ; carte système  défectueuse. Voir Obtention d'aide. Manufacturing mode detected Le système est en mode assemblage. Redémarrez le système pour lui faire quitter le mode  assemblage. MEMBIST failure - The following DIMM/rank has been disabled by BIOS: DIMM x Rank y Barrette(s) de mémoire défectueuse(s). Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système. Memory address line failure at adresse, read valeur expecting valeur Barrette(s) de mémoire défectueuse(s) ou mal  installée(s). Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système. Memory double word logic failure at adresse, read valeur expecting valeur Memory odd/even logic failure at adresse, read valeur expecting valeur Memory write/read failure at adresse, read valeur expecting valeur Memory tests terminated by keystroke. Test de la mémoire interrompu à l'aide de la barre  d'espacement lors de l'auto-test de démarrage. Ce message s'affiche uniquement à titre d'information. No boot device available Sous-système du lecteur optique, du lecteur de  disquette ou du disque dur défectueux ou  manquant ; disque dur défectueux ou manquant ;  aucune disquette de démarrage dans l'unité A. Utilisez une disquette, un CD ou un disque dur amorçable.  Si l'incident persiste, voir Dépannage d'un lecteur de  disquette, Dépannage d'un lecteur optique et Dépannage  d'un disque dur. Voir Utilisation du programme de configuration du système pour plus d'informations sur la définition de la séquence d'amorçage. No boot sector on hard drive Paramètres incorrects dans le programme de  configuration du système ; système d'exploitation  introuvable sur le disque dur. Vérifiez les paramètres de configuration du disque dur  dans le programme de configuration du système. Voir  Utilisation du programme de configuration du système. Si nécessaire, installez le système d'exploitation sur le  disque dur. Consultez la documentation du système  d'exploitation.No timer tick interrupt Carte système défectueuse. Voir Obtention d'aide. Northbound merge error - The following DIMM has been disabled by BIOS: DIMM x La barrette DIMM indiquée n'a pas pu établir de  liaison de données avec le contrôleur de mémoire. Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système. Not a boot diskette La disquette ne contient pas de système  d'exploitation. Utilisez une disquette amorçable. PCIe Degraded Link Width Error: Embedded Busnnn/Devnnn/Funcn Expected Link Width is n Actual Link Width is n Carte PCIe défectueuse ou mal installée dans le  support spécifié. Réinstallez la carte PCIe dans le support dont le numéro  est spécifié. Voir Cartes d'extension. Si l'incident persiste, voir Obtention d'aide. PCIe Degraded Link Width Error: Slot n Expected Link Width is n Actual Link Width is n Carte PCIe défectueuse ou mal installée dans le  support spécifié. Réinstallez la carte PCIe dans le support dont le numéro  est spécifié. Voir Cartes d'extension. Si l'incident persiste, voir Obtention d'aide. PCIe Training Error: Embedded Busnnn/Devnnn/Funcn PCIe Training Error: Slot n Carte PCIe défectueuse ou mal installée dans le  support spécifié. Réinstallez la carte PCIe dans le support dont le numéro  est spécifié. Voir Cartes d'extension. Si l'incident persiste, voir Obtention d'aide. PCI BIOS failed to install Un échec de la somme de contrôle du BIOS du  périphérique (ROM d'option) est détecté lors de la  duplication miroir. Câbles de carte(s) d'extension mal branchés ; carte (s) d'extension défectueuse(s) ou mal installée(s). Réinstallez la ou les cartes PCIe dans leur logement.  Vérifiez que tous les câbles sont fermement raccordés  aux cartes d'extension. Si l'incident persiste, voir Dépannage des cartes d'extension. Plug & Play Configuration Error Une erreur s'est produite lors de l'initialisation d'un périphérique PCI ; la carte système est  défectueuse. Installez la fiche du cavalier NVRAM_CLR et redémarrez le  système. Voir figure 6-1 pour identifier son emplacement. Si l'incident persiste, voir Dépannage des cartes  d'extension. Read fault Requested sector not found Le système d'exploitation ne peut pas lire la  disquette ou le disque dur ; l'ordinateur n'a pas  trouvé un secteur particulier sur le disque, ou bien  le secteur demandé est défectueux. Remplacez la disquette. Assurez-vous que les câbles du  lecteur de disquette et du disque dur sont correctement connectés. Voir Dépannage d'un périphérique USB ou Dépannage d'un disque dur. Remote configuration update attempt failed Le système n'est pas parvenu à traiter la requête  de configuration à distance. Faites une nouvelle tentative. ROM bad checksum = address Carte d'extension défectueuse ou mal installée. Réinstallez la ou les cartes PCIe dans leur logement.  Vérifiez que tous les câbles sont fermement raccordés  aux cartes d'extension. Si l'incident persiste, voir Dépannage des cartes d'extension. Sector not found Seek error Seek operation failed Le lecteur de disquette ou de disque dur est défectueux. Voir Dépannage d'un lecteur de disquette, Dépannage  d'un périphérique USB ou Dépannage d'un disque dur. Shutdown failure Le test d'arrêt a échoué. Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système. The amount of system memory has changed Ajout ou suppression de mémoire, ou barrette de  mémoire défectueuse. Si vous venez d'ajouter ou de supprimer de la mémoire,  ce message s'affiche uniquement pour information et peut être ignoré. Dans le cas contraire, vérifiez le journal  d'événements du système pour identifier les erreurs  détectées et remplacez la barrette de mémoire  défectueuse. Voir Dépannage de la mémoire système. Time-of-day clock stopped Pile ou puce défectueuse. Voir Dépannage de la pile du système. The following DIMM pair is not compatible with the memory controller: DIMM x et DIMM y. Les barrettes DIMM indiquées sont incompatibles  avec le système. Vérifiez que vous utilisez uniquement des barrettes de  mémoire certifiées par Dell. Nous vous recommandons  d'acheter les kits d'extension de mémoire directement sur  le site www.dell.com ou de contacter votre représentant  commercial Dell à cet effet. The following DIMMs are not compatible: DIMM x et DIMM y. Les barrettes DIMM indiquées sont incompatibles  avec le système. Utilisez exclusivement des barrettes FB-DIMM1 avec ECC. Nous vous recommandons d'acheter les kits d'extension de mémoire directement sur le site www.dell.com ou de contacter votre représentant commercial Dell à cet effet. Time-of-day not set - please run SETUP program. Paramètres d'heure ou de date incorrects ; pile du  système défectueuse. Vérifiez les paramètres de l'heure et de la date. Voir  Utilisation du programme de configuration du système. Si l'incident persiste, remplacez la pile du système. Voir Pile du système. Timer chip counter 2 failed Carte système défectueuse. Voir Obtention d'aide. Unsupported CPU combination Le ou les microprocesseurs ne sont pas pris en charge par le système. Installez un microprocesseur ou une combinaison de microprocesseurs pris en charge. Voir Processeurs. Unsupported CPU stepping detected Utility partition not available Vous avez appuyé sur la touche  pendant  l'auto-test de démarrage, mais le disque dur  d'amorçage ne contient aucune partition  d'utilitaires. Créez une partition d'utilitaires sur le disque dur  d'amorçage. Reportez-vous aux CD fournis avec le système. Warning! No micro code update loaded for processor 0 La mise à jour du micrologiciel a échoué. Mettez le BIOS à jour. Voir Obtention d'aide. Warning: Embedded RAID firmware is not present. Le micrologiciel RAID intégré ne répond pas. Lisez la documentation du contrôleur RAID pour obtenir  des informations sur l'installation et la mise à jour du  micrologiciel RAID.Messages d'avertissement Un message d'avertissement signale un incident possible et vous demande une réponse avant de laisser le système poursuivre son exécution. Par exemple,  lorsque vous lancez le formatage d'une disquette, un message vous avertit que vous allez perdre toutes les données qu'elles contient. Les messages  d'avertissement interrompent la tâche en cours et vous demandent de répondre en tapant y (pour oui) ou n (pour non). Messages de diagnostic Les diagnostics du système peuvent afficher un ou plusieurs messages d'erreur. Ceux-ci ne sont pas traités dans la présente section. Prenez note  du message sur une copie de la liste de vérification des diagnostics (voir Obtention d'aide), puis suivez les instructions de cette section pour obtenir une assistance technique. Messages d'alerte Le logiciel de gestion de systèmes génère des messages d'alerte système. Ils comprennent des messages d'informations, d'état, d'avertissement et de panne  concernant les conditions des lecteurs, de la température, des ventilateurs et de l'alimentation. Pour obtenir des informations supplémentaires, consultez la  documentation du logiciel de gestion de systèmes. Retour au sommaire Warning: Embedded RAID error. Le micrologiciel RAID intégré renvoie une erreur. Voir Dépannage d'une carte contrôleur fille SAS ou RAID  SAS. Lisez la documentation du contrôleur RAID pour  obtenir des informations sur l'installation et la mise à jour  du micrologiciel RAID. Warning: The current memory configuration is not optimal. Dell recommends a population of 2, 4, or 8 DIMMs. DIMMs should be populated sequentially starting in slot 1. Le système a détecté une configuration autorisée  mais non optimale des barrettes DIMM (par exemple : 1 DIMM, 6 DIMM, 4 DIMM dans les  logements 1, 2, 5 et 6, etc.). Le système pourra  accéder à l'intégralité de la mémoire, mais ses  performances ne seront pas optimales. Installez 2, 4, ou 8 barrettes l'une après l'autre, en  commençant par le logement 1. Voir Mémoire système. Write fault Disquette ou disque dur défectueux ; défaillance du  sous-système du lecteur optique, du lecteur de  disquette ou du disque dur. Voir Dépannage d'un lecteur de disquette, Dépannage  d'un lecteur optique et Dépannage d'un disque dur. Write fault on selected drive REMARQUE : Pour obtenir le nom complet d'une abréviation ou d'un sigle utilisé dans ce tableau, voir le Glossaire. REMARQUE : Ces messages sont générés par l'application ou par le système d'exploitation. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la documentation  fournie avec le système d'exploitation ou l'application.Retour au sommaire Systèmes Dell™ PowerVault™ 500 Manuel du propriétaire Les informations contenues dans ce document peuvent être modifiées sans préavis. © 2007 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction de ce document de quelque manière que ce soit sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell, le logo DELL, PowerEdge, PowerVault, PowerApp, PowerConnect, XPS et Dell OpenManage sont des marques de Dell Inc. ; Intel est une marque déposée de Intel Corporation aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays ; Microsoft, MS-DOS et Windows sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. D'autres marques et noms de marques peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence aux entités se réclamant de ces marques et de ces noms ou à leurs produits.  Dell Inc. dénie tout intérêt propriétaire vis-à-vis des marques et des noms de marque autres que les siens. Retour au sommaire REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent vous aider à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur.  AVIS : Un AVIS vous avertit d'un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème.  PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque potentiel d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. Retour au sommaire  Exécution des diagnostics du système  Systèmes Dell™ PowerVault™ 500 Manuel du propriétaire   Utilisation des diagnostics de Server Administrator Fonctionnalités des diagnostics du système  Quand utiliser les diagnostics du système  Exécution des diagnostics du système  Options de test des diagnostics du système  Utilisation des options de test personnalisées  Si vous rencontrez des difficultés lors de l'utilisation du système, lancez les diagnostics avant de demander une assistance technique. Le but des diagnostics  est de tester le matériel du système sans nécessiter d'équipement supplémentaire et sans risque de perte de données. Si vous ne réussissez pas à corriger  l'incident, le personnel de service et de support peut s'aider des résultats de ces tests. Utilisation des diagnostics de Server Administrator Pour évaluer un incident du système, commencez par utiliser les diagnostics en ligne de Server Administrator. Si vous n'arrivez pas à identifier l'incident,  utilisez les diagnostics du système. Pour accéder aux diagnostics en ligne, ouvrez une session sur la page d'accueil de Server Administrator, puis cliquez sur l'onglet Diagnostics. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation des diagnostics, consultez l'aide en ligne. Vous trouverez également des informations supplémentaires dans le document Server Administrator User's Guide (Server Administrator - Guide d'utilisation). Fonctionnalités des diagnostics du système  Les diagnostics du système contiennent des menus et des options permettant de tester des groupes de périphériques ou des périphériques particuliers. Ces  options permettent : l de lancer un ou plusieurs tests ; l de définir l'ordre des tests ; l de répéter des tests ; l d'afficher, d'imprimer et d'enregistrer les résultats des tests ; l d'interrompre temporairement un test quand une erreur est détectée ou de l'arrêter lorsqu'une limite d'erreur définie par l'utilisateur est atteinte ; l d'afficher des messages d'aide qui décrivent brièvement chaque test et ses paramètres ; l d'afficher des messages d'état qui vous indiquent si les tests ont abouti ; l d'afficher des messages d'erreur qui vous indiquent si des incidents sont survenus pendant les tests. Quand utiliser les diagnostics du système  Le fait qu'un composant ou un périphérique important du système ne fonctionne pas normalement peut être le symptôme d'une panne. Tant que le processeur  et les périphériques d'entrée/sortie du système (le moniteur, le clavier et le lecteur de disquette) fonctionnent, vous pouvez utiliser les diagnostics pour  faciliter l'identification de l'incident. Exécution des diagnostics du système  Les diagnostics du système s'exécutent à partir de la partition d'utilitaires du disque dur. 1. Au démarrage du système, appuyez sur  pendant l'auto-test de démarrage.  2. Dans le menu principal de la partition d'utilitaires, sélectionnez Run System Diagnostics (Exécuter les diagnostics du système), ou sélectionnez Run Memory Diagnostics (Exécuter les diagnostics de la mémoire) si vous cherchez à identifier un incident lié à la mémoire.  Quand vous lancez les diagnostics du système, un message s'affiche, indiquant qu'ils sont en cours d'initialisation. Ensuite, le menu Diagnostics s'affiche. Ce menu vous permet de lancer tous ou certains tests, ou encore de quitter les diagnostics du système. AVIS : N'utilisez les diagnostics que sur ce système. Leur utilisation sur d'autres systèmes peut entraîner des résultats non valides ou générer des  messages d'erreur. De plus, n'utilisez que le programme fourni avec le système (ou une mise à jour). REMARQUE : Avant de lire le reste de cette section, lancez les diagnostics du système pour afficher l'utilitaire à l'écran.Options de test des diagnostics du système  Cliquez sur l'option de test voulue dans la fenêtre Main Menu (Menu principal). Le tableau 5-1 contient une brève explication sur les options de test  disponibles. Tableau 5-1. Options de test des diagnostics du système  Utilisation des options de test personnalisées  Lorsque vous sélectionnez l'option Custom Test (Test personnalisé) dans l'écran Main Menu (Menu principal), la fenêtre Customize (Personnaliser) s'affiche. Elle permet de sélectionner les périphériques à tester, de choisir des options de test spécifiques et de visualiser les résultats obtenus. Sélection de périphériques à tester La partie gauche de la fenêtre Customize (Personnaliser) répertorie les périphériques qui peuvent être testés. Ceux-ci sont regroupés par type ou par  module, selon l'option sélectionnée. Cliquez sur le signe (+) en regard d'un périphérique ou d'un module pour visualiser ses composants. Cliquez sur (+) en regard d'un composant pour visualiser les tests disponibles. Si vous cliquez sur un périphérique et non sur ses composants, tous les composants de ce  périphérique sont sélectionnés pour le test. Sélection d'options de diagnostic Le champ Diagnostics Options (Options de diagnostic) permet de sélectionner la façon dont le périphérique sera testé. Vous pouvez définir les options  suivantes : l Non-Interactive Tests Only (Tests non-interactifs uniquement) : permet d'exécuter uniquement les tests ne nécessitant aucune intervention de  l'utilisateur. l Quick Tests Only (Tests rapides uniquement) : permet d'exécuter uniquement les tests rapides sur le périphérique sélectionné. Les tests étendus ne  seront pas lancés si vous sélectionnez cette option. l Show Ending Timestamp (Afficher l'horodatage de fin) : permet d'ajouter un horodatage au journal de test. l Test Iterations (Nombre d'itérations) : permet de sélectionner le nombre d'exécutions du test. l Log output file pathname (Emplacement du fichier de sortie) : permet d'indiquer l'emplacement où le journal de test doit être sauvegardé. Visualisation des informations et des résultats Les onglets de la fenêtre Customize (Personnaliser) contiennent des informations sur les tests et les résultats. Les onglets suivants sont disponibles : l Results (Résultats) : indique le test exécuté et son résultat. l Errors (Erreurs) : affiche les erreurs qui se sont produites pendant le test. l Help (Aide) : affiche des informations sur le périphérique, le composant ou le test sélectionné. l Configuration : affiche des informations de base concernant la configuration du périphérique sélectionné. l Parameters (Paramètres) : le cas échéant, cet onglet affiche les paramètres que vous pouvez définir pour le test à exécuter. Retour au sommaire Option de test Fonction Express Test Effectue une vérification rapide du système. Cette option exécute les tests de périphériques qui ne requièrent pas d'action de l'utilisateur.  Elle permet d'identifier rapidement la source de l'incident. Extended Test Effectue une vérification plus complète du système. Ce test peut prendre plus d'une heure. Custom Test Teste un périphérique particulier. Information Affiche les résultats des tests.Retour au sommaire Obtention d'aide Systèmes Dell™ PowerVault™ 500 Manuel du propriétaire   Contacter Dell Contacter Dell Aux États-Unis, appelez le 800-WWW-DELL (800-999-3355). Dell fournit plusieurs options de service et de support en ligne et par téléphone. Leur disponibilité variant d'un pays à l'autre, il est possible que certains  services ne soient pas proposés dans votre région. Pour contacter Dell pour des questions ayant trait aux ventes, au support technique ou au service  clientèle : 1. Rendez-vous sur le site support.dell.com. 2. Sélectionnez l'option appropriée dans le menu déroulant Choose A Country/Region (Choisissez un pays ou une région) situé au bas de la page.  3. Cliquez sur Contact Us (Nous contacter) sur la gauche de la page. 4. Sélectionnez le lien correspondant au service ou au support requis.  5. Choisissez la méthode de contact qui vous convient.  Retour au sommaire REMARQUE : Si vous ne disposez pas d'une connexion Internet active, vous pouvez utiliser les coordonnées figurant sur votre preuve d'achat, votre  bordereau de livraison, votre facture ou encore sur le catalogue des produits Dell. Retour au sommaire Glossaire Systèmes Dell™ PowerVault™ 500 Manuel du propriétaire Cette section définit ou identifie les termes techniques, abréviations et sigles utilisés dans la documentation fournie avec le système. A : Ampère(s). ACPI : Acronyme de "Advanced Configuration and Power Interface". Interface standard qui permet au système d'exploitation de contrôler les paramètres  relatifs à la configuration et à la gestion de l'alimentation. adaptateur hôte : Carte assurant la communication entre le bus du système et le contrôleur d'un périphérique. Les sous-systèmes de contrôleurs de disque  dur comprennent des circuits d'adaptateur hôte intégrés. Pour ajouter un bus d'extension SCSI au système, vous devez installer ou raccorder l'adaptateur  hôte adéquat. adresse MAC : Adresse de contrôle d'accès aux supports. L'adresse MAC identifie le matériel du système de manière unique sur un réseau. adresse mémoire : Emplacement spécifique dans la RAM du système, généralement exprimé sous forme de nombre hexadécimal. ANSI : Acronyme de "American National Standards Institute", institut des normes nationales américaines. Principal organisme dédié au développement des  normes technologiques spécifiques des États-Unis. application : Logiciel conçu pour effectuer une tâche spécifique ou une série de tâches. Les applications s'exécutent à partir du système d'exploitation. ASCII : Acronyme de "American Standard Code for Information Interchange", code des normes américaines pour l'échange d'informations. barrette de mémoire : Petite carte de circuits, contenant des puces de mémoire, qui se connecte à la carte système. BIOS : Acronyme de "Basic Input/Output System", système d'entrées/sorties de base. Le BIOS du système contient des programmes stockés sur une puce de  mémoire flash. Le BIOS contrôle : l les communications entre le processeur et les périphériques, l diverses fonctions, comme les messages du système. bit : Plus petite unité d'information interprétée par le système. BMC : Acronyme de "Baseboard Management Controller", contrôleur de gestion de la carte de base. BTU : Acronyme de "British Thermal Unit", unité thermique britannique. bus : Chemin d'informations entre les différents composants du système. Le système contient un bus d'extension qui permet au processeur de communiquer  avec les contrôleurs des différents périphériques connectés au système. Il contient également un bus d'adresse et un bus de données pour les  communications entre le processeur et la RAM. bus d'extension : Votre système contient un bus d'extension qui permet au processeur de communiquer avec les contrôleurs des périphériques (NIC, etc.). bus frontal : Chemin des données et interface physique entre le microprocesseur et la mémoire principale (RAM).  bus local : Sur les systèmes à bus local, certains matériels (comme l'adaptateur vidéo) peuvent être conçus pour fonctionner beaucoup plus vite que sur un  bus d'extension traditionnel. Voir aussi bus. C : Celsius. CA : Courant alternatif. carte d'extension : Carte supplémentaire (par exemple un adaptateur SCSI ou un NIC) qui se branche dans un connecteur d'extension sur la carte système  de l'ordinateur. Une carte d'extension ajoute des fonctions spéciales au système en fournissant une interface entre le bus d'extension et un périphérique. carte système : La carte système contient en général la plupart des composants intégrés à votre système, comme le processeur, la RAM, des contrôleurs et  divers circuits de ROM. carte vidéo : Circuits qui assurent les fonctions vidéo de l'ordinateur (en association avec le moniteur). Il peut s'agir d'une carte d'extension installée dans un  connecteur, ou de circuits intégrés à la carte système. cavalier : Petit composant pour carte à circuits imprimés, disposant de deux ou plusieurs broches. Des fiches de plastique contenant un fil s'emboîtent sur les  broches. Ce fil relie les broches et ferme un circuit, offrant un moyen simple et réversible de changer le câblage de la carte. CC : Courant continu. CD : Disque compact. Les lecteurs de CD utilisent une technologie optique pour lire les données sur les CD.  cm : Centimètres. CMOS : Acronyme de "Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor", semi-conducteur d'oxyde métallique supplémentaire. code sonore : Message de diagnostic généré par le système, sous la forme d'une série de signaux sonores émis par le haut-parleur. Par exemple, un bip suivi d'un second puis d'une rafale de trois bips, correspond au code 1-1-3. COMn : Nom de périphérique associé aux ports série du système. combinaison de touches : Commande exécutée lorsque l'utilisateur appuie sur plusieurs touches en même temps (par exemple ). composant : Dans le contexte de l'interface DMI, un composant est un élément compatible DMI, comme un système d'exploitation, un ordinateur, une carte  d'extension ou un périphérique. Chaque composant est constitué de groupes et d'attributs, définis comme caractéristiques de ce composant.connecteur d'extension : Connecteur situé sur la carte système ou la carte de montage, auquel se branche une carte d'extension. contrôleur : Circuit qui contrôle le transfert des données entre le microprocesseur et la mémoire ou entre le microprocesseur et les périphériques. coprocesseur : Circuit qui libère le processeur principal de certaines tâches de traitement. Par exemple, un coprocesseur mathématique se charge des  opérations de calcul. CPU : Acronyme de "Central Processing Unit", unité centrale de traitement. Voir processeur. DDR : Acronyme de "Double Data Rate", double débit de données. Technologie des barrettes de mémoire permettant de doubler le débit. DEL : Diode luminescente. Composant électronique qui s'allume lorsqu'il est traversé par un courant. DHCP : Acronyme de "Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol". Méthode permettant d'affecter automatiquement une adresse IP à un système client. diagnostics : Série de nombreux tests pour le système. DIMM : Acronyme de "Dual In-Line Memory Module", barrette de mémoire à double rangée de connexions. Voir aussi barrette de mémoire. DIN : Acronyme de "Deutsche Industrie-Norm", norme de l'industrie allemande. disquette d'amorçage : Disquette utilisée pour démarrer le système si celui-ci ne peut pas être initialisé à partir du disque dur. disquette système : Voir disquette d'amorçage. DMA : Acronyme de "Direct Memory Access", accès direct à la mémoire. Un canal DMA permet le transfert direct de certains types de données entre la RAM et  un périphérique, sans passer par le processeur. DMI : Acronyme de "Desktop Management Interface", interface de gestion de bureau. L'interface DMI permet de gérer les logiciels et matériels du système en  recueillant des informations sur ses composants, comme le système d'exploitation, la mémoire, les périphériques, les cartes d'extension et le numéro  d'inventaire. DNS : Acronyme de "Domain Name System", système de noms de domaines. Méthode de conversion des noms de domaines Internet (par exemple  www.dell.com) en adresses IP (comme 143.166.83.200). DRAM : Acronyme de "Dynamic Random-Access Memory", mémoire vive dynamique. Normalement, la mémoire vive d'un système est composée entièrement de  puces DRAM. DVD : Acronyme de "Digital Versatile Disc", disque numérique polyvalent. E/S : Entrée/sortie. Un clavier est un périphérique d'entrée et une imprimante est un périphérique de sortie. En général, l'activité d'E/S peut être différenciée  de l'activité de calcul. ECC : Acronyme de "Error Checking and Correction", vérification et correction d'erreur. EEPROM : Acronyme de "Electronically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory", mémoire morte reprogrammable électroniquement. EMC : Acronyme de "Electromagnetic Compatibility", compatibilité électromagnétique. EMI : Acronyme de "ElectroMagnetic Interference", interférence électromagnétique. ERA : Acronyme de "Embedded Remote Access", accès distant intégré. L'ERA permet de gérer à distance ("hors-bande") le serveur de votre réseau à l'aide  d'une carte contrôleur d'accès à distance.  ESD : Acronyme de "Electrostratic Discharge", décharge électrostatique. ESM : Acronyme de "Embedded Server Management", gestion de serveur intégrée. étiquette de service : Code à barres qui se trouve sur le système et permet de l'identifier lorsque vous appelez le support technique de Dell. F : Fahrenheit. FAT : Acronyme de "File allocation table", table d'allocation des fichiers. Structure du système de fichiers utilisée par MS-DOS pour organiser et suivre le stockage des fichiers. Le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® permet d'utiliser une structure de système de fichiers FAT. fichier read-only : Fichier en lecture seule, qui ne peut être ni modifié, ni effacé. formater : Préparer un lecteur de disque dur ou une disquette à stocker des fichiers. Un formatage inconditionnel efface toutes les données stockées sur le  disque. ft : Foot (pied). FTP : Acronyme de "File Transfert Protocol", protocole de transfert de fichiers. g : Gramme(s). G : Gravité. Gb : Gigabit, 1024 mégabits ou 1 073 741 824 bits. Go : Giga-octet, 1024 Mo ou 1 073 741 824 octets. La mesure est souvent arrondie à 1 000 000 000 octets lorsqu'elle fait référence à la capacité d'un disque  dur. groupe : Dans le contexte de l'interface DMI, un groupe est une structure de données qui définit les informations courantes, ou attributs, d'un composant  gérable. guarding : Type de mise en redondance des données qui utilise un groupe de disques physiques pour stocker les données, et un disque supplémentaire pour stocker les informations de parité. Voir aussi mise en miroir, striping et RAID. h : Hexadécimal. Système de numération en base 16, souvent utilisé en programmation pour identifier les adresses mémoire de RAM et d'E/S du système pour  les périphériques. Dans le texte, les chiffres hexadécimaux sont souvent suivis d'un h. Hz : Hertz. ID : Identification. IDE : Acronyme de "Integrated Drive Electronics". Interface standard entre la carte système et les périphériques de stockage. informations de configuration du système : Données stockées en mémoire, qui informent un système sur la manière dont le matériel est installé et dont le  système doit être configuré pour fonctionner. IP : Acronyme de "Internet Protocol", protocole Internet. IPX : Acronyme de "Internet package exchange". IRQ : Interrupt ReQuest (demande d'interruption). Signal indiquant que des données vont être envoyées ou reçues par un périphérique, et envoyé au  processeur par une ligne d'IRQ. Chaque liaison avec un périphérique doit avoir un numéro d'IRQ. Deux périphériques peuvent avoir la même IRQ, mais vous ne  pouvez pas les utiliser simultanément. K : Kilo, 1000. Kb : Kilobit, 1024 bits. Kbps : Kilobits par seconde. kg : Kilogramme, 1000 grammes. kHz : Kilohertz. KMM : Acronyme de "Keyboard/Monitor/Mouse", ensemble clavier/moniteur/souris. Ko : Kilo-octet, 1024 octets. Ko/s : Kilo-octets par seconde. KVM : Acronyme de "Keyboard/Video/Mouse", ensemble clavier/vidéo/souris. Le terme KVM désigne un commutateur qui permet de sélectionner le système  correspondant à la sortie vidéo affichée et auquel s'applique l'utilisation du clavier et de la souris. lame : Module équipé d'un processeur, de mémoire et d'un disque dur. Ces modules sont montés dans un châssis équipé de blocs d'alimentation et de  ventilateurs. LAN : Réseau local. Un LAN se limite normalement à un bâtiment ou à un groupe de bâtiments proches, où tout l'équipement est relié par des fils réservés au  réseau LAN. lb : Livres (poids). LCD : Écran à cristaux liquides. Linux : Système d'exploitation similaire à UNIX® et pouvant être utilisé sur une grande diversité de plates-formes matérielles. Linux est un logiciel libre et  gratuit. Certaines distributions payantes plus complètes, fournies avec un support technique et des formations, sont proposées par des distributeurs tels que  Red Hat ® Software. LVD : Acronyme de "Low Voltage Differential", différentiel à basse tension. m : Mètre(s). mA : Milliampère(s). mAh : Milliampère à l'heure. Mb : Mégabit, soit 1 048 576 bits. Mbps : Mégabits par seconde. MBR : Acronyme de "Master Boot Record", enregistrement d'amorçage principal. mémoire : Zone de stockage des données de base du système. Un ordinateur peut disposer de différentes sortes de mémoire, intégrée (RAM et ROM) ou  ajoutée sous forme de barrettes DIMM.  mémoire cache : Zone de mémoire rapide contenant une copie des données ou des instructions pour les récupérer plus vite. Quand un programme demande  des données qui se trouvent dans la mémoire cache, l'utilitaire de mise en mémoire cache du disque peut extraire les données plus vite de la RAM que du  disque même. mémoire cache interne du processeur : Mémoire cache d'instructions et de données intégrée au processeur. mémoire conventionnelle : Les premiers 640 Ko de la RAM. La mémoire conventionnelle est présente dans tous les systèmes. Sauf s'ils ont été conçus de  façon particulière, les programmes MS-DOS® sont limités à cette mémoire de base. mémoire flash : Type d'EEPROM pouvant être reprogrammée en place dans le système, à partir d'un utilitaire sur disquette. La plupart des EEPROM ne  peuvent être reprogrammées qu'avec un équipement spécial. mémoire système : Voir RAM. mémoire vidéo : La plupart des cartes vidéo VGA et SVGA contiennent de la mémoire, différente de la RAM du système. La mémoire vidéo installée affecte  surtout le nombre de couleurs affichables (ce qui dépend aussi du pilote vidéo et du moniteur).MHz : Mégahertz. mise en miroir : Type de mise en redondance de données qui utilise un ensemble de disques physiques pour stocker les données et un ou plusieurs  ensembles de disques supplémentaires pour stocker des copies de ces données. La mise en miroir est généralement implémentée au moyen d'un logiciel. Voir  aussi guarding, mise en miroir intégrée, striping et RAID. mise en miroir intégrée : Mise en miroir physique de deux disques. Cette fonction intégrée est assurée par le matériel du système. Voir aussi mise en miroir. mm : Millimètre. Mo : Méga-octet, soit 1 048 576 octets. La mesure est souvent arrondie à 1 000 000 octets lorsqu'elle fait référence à la capacité d'un disque dur. Mo/s : Méga-octets par seconde. mode graphique : Mode vidéo qui peut être défini par le nombre de pixels horizontaux x, le nombre de pixels verticaux y et le nombre de couleurs z. mode protégé : Mode d'exploitation qui permet aux systèmes d'exploitation de mettre en uvre les éléments et fonctions suivants : l Espace d'adresse mémoire de 16 Mo à 4 Go l Traitement multitâche l De la mémoire virtuelle, une méthode pour augmenter la mémoire adressable en utilisant le lecteur de disque dur Les systèmes d'exploitation Windows 2000 et UNIX 32 bits s'exécutent en mode protégé. En revanche, cela n'est pas possible pour MS-DOS. ms : Milliseconde. MS-DOS® : Microsoft Disk Operating System. NAS : Acronyme de "Network Attached Storage", stockage réseau. Le NAS est l'un des concepts utilisés pour l'implémentation du stockage partagé sur un  réseau. Les systèmes NAS ont leurs propres systèmes d'exploitation, matériel intégré, et leurs propres logiciels optimisés pour répondre à des besoins  spécifiques en termes de stockage. NIC : Acronyme de "Network Interface Controller". Carte réseau intégrée ou installée sous forme de carte d'extension, pour relier le système à un réseau. NMI : Acronyme de "NonMaskable Interrupt", interruption non masquable. Un matériel envoie une NMI pour signaler au processeur des erreurs matérielles. ns : Nanoseconde. NTFS : Option du système de fichiers NT dans le système d'exploitation Windows 2000. numéro d'inventaire : Code individuel attribué à un système, normalement par un administrateur, à des fins de sécurité ou de suivi. NVRAM : Mémoire vive rémanente. Mémoire qui ne perd pas son contenu lorsque le système est mis hors tension. La NVRAM est utilisée pour conserver la  date, l'heure et la configuration du système. panneau de commande : Pièce du système sur laquelle se trouvent les voyants et les contrôles (bouton d'alimentation, voyant d'alimentation, etc.). parité : Informations redondantes associées à un bloc de données. partition : Vous pouvez partager un disque dur en plusieurs sections physiques appelées partitions, avec la commande fdisk. Chaque partition peut contenir plusieurs disques logiques. Après un partitionnement, vous devez formater chaque disque logique avec la commande format. PCI : Acronyme de "Peripheral Component Interconnect", interconnexion de composants périphériques. Norme pour l'implémentation des bus locaux. PDU : Acronyme de "Power Distribution Unit", unité de distribution électrique. Source d'alimentation dotée de plusieurs prises de courant qui fournit  l'alimentation électrique aux serveurs et aux systèmes de stockage d'un rack. périphérique : Matériel interne ou externe, connecté à un système, comme une imprimante, un lecteur de disquette ou un clavier. PGA : Acronyme de "Pin Grid Array", matrice de broches. Type de support permettant le retrait de la puce du processeur. pile de sauvegarde : Pile qui conserve dans une région spécifique de la mémoire les informations sur la configuration du système, la date et l'heure, lorsque  vous éteignez le système. pilote de périphérique : Programme qui permet au système d'exploitation ou à un autre programme de communiquer correctement avec un périphérique ou  un matériel donné. Certains pilotes de périphériques, comme les pilotes réseau, doivent être chargés par le fichier config.sys ou comme programmes résidant  en mémoire (en général par le fichier autoexec.bat). D'autres, comme le pilote vidéo, se chargent lorsque vous démarrez le programme pour lequel ils sont  conçus. pilote vidéo : Programme qui permet aux applications exécutées en mode graphique et aux systèmes d'exploitation d'afficher les données avec la résolution  et le nombre de couleurs voulus. Le pilote vidéo doit correspondre à la carte vidéo installée. pixel : Point sur un écran vidéo. Les pixels sont disposés en lignes et en colonnes afin de créer une image. Une résolution vidéo, par exemple 640 x 480,  indique le nombre de pixels en largeur et en hauteur. port en amont : Port sur un commutateur ou un concentrateur réseau, qui sert à le relier à un autre commutateur ou concentrateur, sans utiliser de câble  croisé. port série : Port d'E/S, utilisé le plus souvent pour connecter un modem au système. Normalement, vous pouvez identifier un port série sur le système grâce à  son connecteur à 9 broches. POST : Acronyme de "Power-On Self-Test", auto-test de démarrage. Au démarrage du système, ce programme teste différents composants (RAM, disques  durs, etc.) avant le chargement du système d'exploitation. processeur : Circuit de calcul principal du système, qui contrôle l'interprétation et l'exécution des fonctions mathématiques et logiques. Un logiciel écrit pour un  processeur doit souvent être révisé pour fonctionner sur un autre processeur. CPU est un synonyme de processeur.programme de configuration du système : Programme basé sur le BIOS et permettant de configurer le matériel du système et de personnaliser son  fonctionnement, en paramétrant des fonctions telles que la protection par mot de passe et la gestion d'énergie. Le programme de configuration du système  étant stocké dans la mémoire vive rémanente, tous les paramètres définis demeurent inchangés tant qu'ils ne sont pas modifiés manuellement. PS/2 : Personal System/2. PXE : Acronyme de "Preboot eXecution Environment", environnement d'exécution avant démarrage. La fonction PXE permet de démarrer un système (sans  disque dur ni disquette amorçable) à partir d'une unité réseau. RAC : Acronyme de "Remote Access Controller", contrôleur d'accès à distance. RAID : Acronyme de "Redundant Array of Independent Disks", matrice redondante de disques indépendants. Technologie permettant la mise en redondance  des données. Les types RAID les plus fréquents sont les RAID 0, 1, 5, 10 et 50. Voir aussi guarding, mise en miroir et striping. RAM : Acronyme de "Random-Access Memory", mémoire vive. Zone principale de stockage temporaire du système pour les instructions d'un programme et les  données. Toutes les informations stockées dans la RAM sont perdues lorsque vous éteignez le système. RAS : Acronyme de "Remote Access Service", service d'accès à distance. Sous Microsoft Windows, ce service permet d'accéder à un réseau distant à l'aide d'un  modem. readme : Fichier texte fourni avec un logiciel ou un matériel, et qui contient des informations complétant ou mettant à jour la documentation. répertoire : Les répertoires permettent de conserver des fichiers apparentés sur un disque en les organisant hiérarchiquement dans une structure en  "arborescence inversée". Chaque disque possède un répertoire "racine". Les répertoires supplémentaires qui partent du répertoire racine sont appelés sousrépertoires. Ces derniers peuvent contenir d'autres répertoires, formant une sous-arborescence. résolution : Indique le nombre de pixels en largeur et en hauteur, par exemple 640 x 480. Pour afficher une application dans une résolution vidéo donnée,  vous devez installer les pilotes vidéo appropriés. En outre, la résolution voulue doit être prise en charge par le moniteur. ROM : Acronyme de "Read-Only Memory", mémoire morte. La ROM contient les programmes essentiels au fonctionnement du système. Ces informations sont  conservées lorsque le système est mis hors tension. Le programme qui lance la procédure d'amorçage et l'auto-test de démarrage de l'ordinateur sont des  exemples de code résidant dans la ROM. ROMB : Acronyme de "RAID on Motherboard", fonction RAID incluse sur la carte mère. routine d'amorçage : Programme qui initialise la mémoire et les périphériques matériels, puis charge le système d'exploitation. À moins que le système  d'exploitation ne réponde pas, vous pouvez redémarrer le système (faire un démarrage à chaud) en appuyant sur . Sinon, vous devez appuyer sur le bouton de réinitialisation ou éteindre puis rallumer le système. rpm : Acronyme de "Revolutions Per Minute", tours par minute. RTC : Acronyme de "Real-Time Clock", horloge temps réel. SAS : Acronyme de "Serial-Attached SCSI". SATA : Acronyme de "Serial Advanced Technology Attachment", connexion par technologie série avancée. Interface standard entre la carte système et les  périphériques de stockage. sauvegarde : Copie d'un programme ou de données. Par précaution, il convient de sauvegarder régulièrement le disque dur du système. Avant de modifier la  configuration du système, il est conseillé de sauvegarder les fichiers de démarrage importants du système d'exploitation. SCSI : Acronyme de "Small Computer System Interface", interface pour petits systèmes informatiques. Interface de bus d'E/S autorisant des transmissions de  données plus rapides que les ports de modem standard. SDRAM : Acronyme de "Synchronous Dynamic Random-Access Memory", mémoire vive dynamique synchrone. sec : Seconde(s). SMART : Acronyme de "Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology", technologie de prévision des défaillances des lecteurs de disque. Cette  technologie permet aux lecteurs de disque dur de signaler les erreurs et les pannes au BIOS du système puis d'afficher un message d'erreur sur l'écran. SMP : Multiprocesseur symétrique. Se dit d'un système qui dispose de plusieurs processeurs reliés par un lien haut débit géré par un système d'exploitation  où tous les processeurs ont les mêmes priorités d'accès au système d'E/S. SNMP : Acronyme de "Simple Network Management Protocol", protocole de gestion de réseau simple. Interface standard qui permet au gestionnaire du  réseau de surveiller et de gérer les stations de travail à distance. spanning (concaténation) : Dans ce mode, les volumes de disques attachés sont combinés ensemble et vus par le système d'exploitation comme un disque  unique. L'espace disponible est ainsi mieux utilisé. striping (répartition des données) : Méthode qui consiste à écrire des données sur au moins trois disques d'une matrice en utilisant uniquement une partie  de l'espace disponible sur chacun. L'espace occupé par une bande ("stripe") est le même sur chaque disque. Un disque virtuel peut utiliser plusieurs bandes  sur le même jeu de disques d'une matrice. Voir aussi guarding, mise en miroir et RAID. SVGA : Acronyme de "Super Video Graphics Array", super matrice graphique vidéo. VGA et SVGA sont des normes de cartes graphiques. Leur résolution et le  nombre de couleurs possibles sont supérieurs à celles des normes précédentes. system.ini : Fichier de démarrage du système d'exploitation Windows. Au démarrage de Windows, le système d'exploitation consulte le fichier system.ini afin de déterminer les options à utiliser dans l'environnement Windows. Entre autres, le fichier system.ini indique les pilotes vidéo, souris et clavier qui sont  installés pour Windows. système "sans tête" : Système ou périphérique qui fonctionne sans moniteur, souris ni clavier. Habituellement, les systèmes sans tête sont gérés par le  réseau à l'aide d'un navigateur Internet. TCP/IP : Acronyme de "Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol". température ambiante : Température de l'endroit ou de la pièce où se trouve le système. terminaison : Certains périphériques (par exemple à chaque extrémité d'une chaîne SCSI) doivent être dotés d'une terminaison pour empêcher les réflexions  et les signaux parasites sur le câble. Lorsque de tels périphériques sont connectés en série, il est parfois nécessaire d'activer ou de désactiver leur terminaison en modifiant le réglage des cavaliers ou des commutateurs de ces périphériques ou en modifiant des paramètres à l'aide du logiciel de  configuration approprié. TOE : Acronyme de "TCP/IP Offload Engine", moteur de décentralisation TCP/IP. UNIX : Universal Internet Exchange. UNIX est un système d'exploitation écrit en langage C. Il est le précurseur de Linux. UPS : Acronyme de "Uninterruptible Power Supply", alimentation sans interruption. Unité, alimentée par batterie, qui fournit automatiquement l'alimentation  du système en cas de coupure de courant. USB : Un connecteur USB permet de relier divers périphériques compatibles avec la norme USB, comme des souris, claviers, imprimantes, haut-parleurs, etc. Les périphériques USB peuvent être branchés et débranchés pendant que le système est en fonctionnement. utilitaire : Programme qui sert à gérer les ressources du système (mémoire, disques durs, imprimantes, etc.). UTP : Acronyme de "Unshielded Twisted Pair", paire torsadée non blindée. Type de câblage utilisé pour relier un ordinateur à une ligne téléphonique. V : Volt(s). VCA : Volts en courant alternatif. VCC : Volts en courant continu. VGA : Acronyme de "Video Graphics Array", matrice graphique vidéo. VGA et SVGA sont des normes de cartes graphiques offrant une résolution et un nombre  de couleurs supérieurs à ceux des normes précédentes. volume de disque simple : Volume d'espace disponible sur un disque physique dynamique. W : Watt(s). WH : Wattheure(s). win.ini : Fichier de démarrage du système d'exploitation Windows. Au démarrage de Windows, le système d'exploitation consulte le fichier win.ini afin de déterminer les options à utiliser dans l'environnement Windows. Ce fichier comprend aussi des sections qui contiennent les paramètres facultatifs pour les  programmes Windows installés sur le disque dur. Windows 2000 : Système d'exploitation Microsoft Windows complet et intégré qui ne requiert pas MS-DOS et fournit des performances avancées en matière  de système d'exploitation, une facilité d'utilisation accrue, une fonctionnalité de groupe de travail améliorée ainsi qu'un système de navigation et de gestion  de fichiers simplifié. Windows Powered : Se dit d'un système d'exploitation Windows conçu pour les systèmes NAS (stockage relié au réseau) et dédié au service des fichiers pour  les clients réseau. Windows Server 2003 : Ensemble de technologies Microsoft permettant l'intégration de logiciels via l'utilisation de services Web XML. Ces services sont de  petites applications réutilisables écrites en XML qui permettent de transférer des données entre des sources qui ne sont pas connectées par un autre moyen. XML : Acronyme de "Extensible Markup Language". Le langage XML sert à créer des formats communs d'information, puis à partager le format et les données  sur le Web, les intranets, etc. ZIF : Acronyme de "Zero insertion force", force d'insertion nulle. Retour au sommaireRetour au sommaire  Installation des composants du système  Systèmes Dell™ PowerVault™ 500 Manuel du propriétaire   Outils recommandés  Intérieur du système  Cadre avant Ouverture et fermeture du système  Disques durs Réinstallation d'un support de disque dur  Blocs d'alimentation Ventilateurs du système  Protecteur de ventilation Supports de ventilateur Carte contrôleur fille SAS  Batterie RAID Configuration du périphérique d'amorçage  Cartes d'extension Bâti des cartes d'extension  Installation d'une carte RAC Lecteur optique Lecteur de disquette Lecteur de bande SCSI Mémoire système  Activation du moteur TOE sur le NIC intégré  Processeurs Pile du système  Cartes de montage pour cartes d'extension Carte latérale  Carte de fond de panier SAS Assemblage du panneau de commande (maintenance uniquement) Carte système (maintenance uniquement)  Cette section décrit l'installation des composants suivants : l Disques durs l Blocs d'alimentation l Ventilateurs du système l Protecteur de ventilation l Supports de ventilateur l Carte contrôleur fille SAS l Batterie RAID l Cartes d'extension l Bâti des cartes d'extension l Carte RAC l Lecteurs optiques, lecteurs de disquette et lecteurs de bande l Mémoire système l Processeurs l Pile du système l Cartes de montage pour cartes d'extension l Carte latérale l Carte de fond de panier SAS l Panneau de commande l Carte système Outils recommandés  Vous pouvez avoir besoin des éléments suivants pour exécuter les procédures de cette section :l Clé du système l Tournevis cruciformes n°1 et n°2 l Tournevis Torx T-10 l Bracelet anti-statique Intérieur du système  Dans la figure 3-1, les panneaux sont ouverts pour montrer l'intérieur du système. Figure 3-1. Intérieur du système La carte système contient les circuits de contrôle du système et d'autres composants électroniques. Plusieurs options matérielles, telles que les  microprocesseurs et la mémoire, sont directement installées sur la carte système. Le bâti des cartes d'extension contenant la carte de montage de gauche  peut recevoir deux cartes d'extension PCIe ou PCI-X pleine longueur. La carte de montage centrale peut accueillir une seule carte d'extension PCIe milongueur. Le système permet d'installer un lecteur optique en option, qui doit être connecté aux contrôleurs de la carte système par l'intermédiaire de la carte latérale.  Pour plus d'informations, voir Lecteur optique. Selon la configuration de disque dur que vous avez commandée, un lecteur de disquette 3,5 pouces et un lecteur de bande (tous deux en option) peuvent  également être disponibles pour installation dans une baie de média. Voir tableau 3-1 pour savoir quelles sont les options de configuration disponibles. Tableau 3-1. Configuration des disques durs et de la baie de média Les baies de disques durs peuvent accueillir jusqu'à six disques durs SAS ou SATA de 3,5 pouces. Les disques durs se connectent à un contrôleur RAID par  l'intermédiaire de la carte de fond de panier SAS. Pour plus d'informations, voir Disques durs et Carte contrôleur fille SAS. Au cours d'une procédure d'installation ou de dépannage, vous devrez peut-être changer le réglage d'un cavalier. Pour plus d'informations, voir Cavaliers de la carte système. Cadre avant Le cadre est doté d'un verrou qui permet de restreindre l'accès au bouton d'alimentation, au lecteur de disquette, au lecteur optique et au(x) disque(s) dur(s).  PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les  consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges électrostatiques. 1 Batterie RAID (en option) 2 Carte contrôleur fille SAS ou RAID  SAS (en option) 3 Carte latérale 4 Baie d'alimentation 5 Blocs d'alimentation (2) 6 Carte de montage de gauche 7 Carte de montage centrale 8 Barrettes de mémoire (8) 9 Microprocesseurs et dissipateurs de chaleur (2) 10 Ventilateurs enfichables à chaud (4) 11 Fond de panier SAS 12 Lecteur optique slim (en option) 13 Disques durs SAS ou SATA (8 au maximum, selon la configuration) 14 Panneau de commande Nombre de disques durs sur le fond de panier Taille du disque dur Baie de média 6 3,5 pouces Non 4 3,5 pouces OuiL'état du système est affiché sur l'écran LCD du panneau de commande, qui se trouve sur le panneau avant et est accessible au travers du cadre avant. Retrait du cadre avant 1. Déverrouillez le cadre à l'aide de la clé du système.  2. Appuyez sur la patte située à l'extrémité gauche du cadre.  3. Faites pivoter la partie gauche du cadre pour dégager son côté droit.  4. Retirez le cadre. Voir figure 3-2. Figure 3-2. Retrait du cadre avant Réinstallation du cadre avant Pour réinstaller le cadre avant, suivez les étapes précédentes dans l'ordre inverse. Ouverture et fermeture du système  Ouverture du système Pour mettre le système à niveau ou le dépanner, vous devez retirer le capot afin d'avoir accès aux composants internes. 1. Sauf si vous installez un composant enfichable à chaud tel qu'un ventilateur ou un bloc d'alimentation, vous devez arrêter le système et les  périphériques connectés, puis le débrancher de la prise secteur et des périphériques.  2. Pour retirer le capot du système, tournez le verrou du dispositif de fermeture dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre. Voir figure 3-3. 3. Soulevez le loquet situé sur la partie supérieure du système. Voir figure 3-3. 4. Saisissez le capot de chaque côté et soulevez-le doucement pour le retirer du système.  Fermeture du système 1. Soulevez le loquet du capot. 2. Placez le capot sur le haut du système et décalez-le légèrement vers l'arrière pour le dégager des crochets en J du châssis, de sorte qu'il repose  totalement à plat sur ce dernier. Voir figure 3-3. 3. Rabattez le loquet pour faire pivoter le capot en position fermée.  1 Verrou du cadre 2 Écran LCD du panneau de commande PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les  consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges électrostatiques.4. Tournez le verrou du dispositif de fermeture dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre pour fixer le capot. Figure 3-3. Retrait du capot Disques durs Cette sous-section décrit les procédures permettant d'installer et de configurer des disques durs SAS ou SATA dans les baies internes du système. Le système  peut contenir jusqu'à six disques durs SAS ou SATA de 3,5 pouces. Tous les lecteurs sont connectés à la carte système par l'intermédiaire de l'une des trois  cartes de fond de panier SAS en option. Voir Connecteurs de la carte de fond de panier SAS pour plus d'informations sur ces options. Avant de commencer Les disques durs sont fournis dans des supports de lecteur spéciaux enfichables à chaud, qui s'encastrent dans les baies de disque dur. Selon la configuration  que vous utilisez, vous avez reçu l'un des deux types de support suivants : l Support de lecteur SATA : utilisable uniquement avec un disque dur SATA. l Support de lecteur SATAu : utilisable avec un disque dur SAS ou avec un disque dur SATA équipé d'une carte intermédiaire universelle. Cette carte offre  des fonctionnalités étendues permettant au disque dur SATA de pouvoir être utilisé dans certains systèmes de stockage.  Vous devrez peut-être utiliser des programmes autres que ceux fournis avec le système d'exploitation pour partitionner et formater les disques durs SAS ou  SATA. Lorsque vous formatez un disque dur à haute capacité, prévoyez suffisamment de temps pour que le formatage s'exécute entièrement. De longs délais de  formatage sont normaux pour ces lecteurs. Par exemple, le formatage d'un lecteur de disque dur de 9 Go peut prendre jusqu'à deux heures et demie. Retrait d'un cache de lecteur Si vous utilisez des disques durs de 3,5 pouces : 1. Retirez le cadre avant, s'il est installé. Voir Retrait du cadre avant. 2. Pour éjecter un cache, passez le doigt sous son extrémité carénée et appuyez sur le loquet.  1 Loquet 2 Verrou du dispositif de fermeture 3 Crochets d'alignement en J REMARQUE : Selon la configuration que vous avez commandée pour vos disques durs, il est possible que ceux-ci aient été livrés avec une carte  intermédiaire permettant de rattacher un lecteur SATA au connecteur SAS du fond de panier. AVIS : Avant de tenter de retirer ou d'installer un lecteur pendant que le système est en cours de fonctionnement, reportez-vous à la documentation  de la carte contrôleur fille RAID SAS (en option) pour vérifier que la configuration de l'adaptateur hôte lui permet de prendre en charge le retrait et  l'insertion de lecteurs à chaud. REMARQUE : Il est recommandé d'utiliser uniquement des lecteurs testés et approuvés pour une utilisation avec la carte de fond de panier SAS. AVIS : Pendant le formatage du lecteur, vous ne devez pas éteindre ni redémarrer le système. Cela risquerait d'endommager le lecteur. AVIS : Pour assurer un refroidissement correct du système, vous devez installer un cache sur toutes les baies de disque dur inoccupées. Si vous retirez  un support de disque dur du système et ne le réinstallez pas immédiatement, installez un cache sur l'emplacement vide.3. Tirez les extrémités du cache vers l'extérieur jusqu'à ce qu'il soit complètement dégagé.  Installation d'un cache de lecteur Le cache de lecteur est muni d'un détrompeur permettant de s'assurer qu'il sera correctement inséré dans la baie. Pour installer un cache de lecteur  3,5 pouces, insérez et faites pivoter le côté avec détrompeur dans la baie de lecteurs. Appuyez de manière égale sur l'autre côté du cache jusqu'à ce qu'il soit  correctement emboîté.  Retrait d'un disque dur enfichable à chaud 1. Retirez le cadre avant, s'il est installé. Voir Retrait du cadre avant. 2. Préparez le retrait du disque à l'aide du logiciel de gestion RAID. Attendez que les voyants du support indiquent que le disque peut être retiré en toute  sécurité. Reportez-vous à la documentation du contrôleur RAID SAS pour plus d'informations sur le retrait d'un lecteur enfichable à chaud.  Si le lecteur était en ligne, le voyant d'activité/panne vert clignote lors de la mise hors tension du disque. Quand les deux voyants sont éteints, vous  pouvez retirer le lecteur. 3. Ouvrez la poignée du support pour débloquer le lecteur. Voir figure 3-4. 4. Extrayez le disque de la baie. 5. Si vous ne réinstallez pas le disque dur ou si vous ne le remplacez pas par un autre, placez un cache sur la baie vide. Voir Installation d'un cache de lecteur. Installation d'un disque dur enfichable à chaud 1. Retirez le cadre avant, s'il est installé. Voir Retrait du cadre avant. 2. Si la baie est fermée par un cache, retirez-le. Voir Retrait d'un cache de lecteur. 3. Installez le disque dur enfichable à chaud.  a. Ouvrez la poignée du support de disque dur.  Figure 3-4. Installation d'un disque dur enfichable à chaud b. Insérez le support de disque dans la baie jusqu'à ce qu'il touche le fond de panier.  AVIS : Pour assurer un refroidissement correct du système, vous devez installer un cache sur toutes les baies de disque dur inoccupées. AVIS : Lorsque vous installez un disque dur, assurez-vous que les lecteurs adjacents ne sont pas en cours d'installation. Si vous insérez un support de  disque dur et tentez d'en verrouiller la poignée alors qu'un disque dur voisin n'est que partiellement installé, vous risquez d'endommager le ressort de  protection de ce dernier et de le rendre inutilisable. AVIS : Certains systèmes d'exploitation ne prennent pas en charge les disques durs enfichables à chaud. Reportez-vous à la documentation fournie  avec le système d'exploitation. 1 Disque dur 2 Support de lecteur 3 Poignée d'extraction du support de lecteurc. Refermez la poignée pour maintenir le disque dur en place.  4. Réinstallez le cadre avant, s'il a été retiré à l'étape 1. Réinstallation d'un support de disque dur  Retrait d'un lecteur du support de disque dur 1. Si vous retirez un disque dur SATA d'un support SATAu, retirez la carte intermédiaire :  a. Repérez le levier d'éjection. Lorsque le support de disque dur est vu depuis l'arrière, ce levier se trouve à l'extrémité gauche de la carte  intermédiaire.  b. Écartez le levier du rail du support afin de dégager le côté gauche de la carte.  c. Faites pivoter le côté gauche de la carte de manière à dégager le connecteur.  d. Tirez le côté droit de la carte intermédiaire pour la dégager des encoches situées sur le rail du support.  2. Retirez les quatre vis situées sur les rails coulissants du support, puis retirez le disque dur.  Installation d'un disque dur SAS dans un support SATAu 1. Insérez un disque dur SAS dans le support, connecteur vers l'arrière. Voir figure 3-5. 2. En disposant l'assemblage tel qu'il est représenté figure 3-5, faites correspondre le trou situé sous l'arrière du disque dur avec celui marqué "SAS" sur le  support. Si la position est correcte, l'arrière du disque dur arrive au même niveau que l'arrière du support. 3. Fixez le disque dur sur le support à l'aide des quatre vis. Voir figure 3-5. Figure 3-5. Installation d'un disque dur SAS dans un support SATAu Installation d'un disque dur SATA dans un support SATA REMARQUE : Les disques durs SAS doivent être installés uniquement dans des supports SATAu. Les supports SATAu portent la mention "SATAu" et  présentent des marques indiquant l'emplacement des vis de montage pour les lecteurs SAS et SATA. 1 Vis (4) 2 Support de lecteur SATAu 3 Disque dur SAS1. Insérez un disque dur SATA dans le support, connecteur vers l'arrière. Voir figure 3-6. 2. Alignez les trous de vis du disque dur avec ceux du support. Voir figure 3-6. 3. Fixez le disque dur sur le support à l'aide des quatre vis. Voir figure 3-6. Figure 3-6. Installation d'un disque dur SATA dans un support SATA Installation d'un disque dur SATA et d'une carte intermédiaire dans un support SATAu 1. Insérez un disque dur SATA dans le support SATAu, connecteur vers l'arrière. Voir figure 3-7. 2. En disposant l'assemblage tel qu'il est représenté figure 3-7, faites correspondre le trou arrière inférieur du disque dur avec celui marqué "SATAu" sur le  support. Si la position est correcte, l'arrière du disque dur doit être au même niveau que l'arrière du support. 3. Fixez le disque dur sur le support à l'aide des quatre vis. Voir figure 3-7. 4. Fixez la carte intermédiaire sur l'arrière du disque dur SATA :  a. Insérez le haut de la carte intermédiaire dans le rail supérieur interne, de manière à emboîter les pattes du support de carte dans les encoches  situées à l'intérieur du rail. Voir figure 3-7. b. Rabattez la carte sur le disque dur pour enclencher le connecteur. Voir figure 3-7. c. Appuyez sur le bas de la carte jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un déclic indiquant que le loquet du support de carte est en place.  Figure 3-7. Installation d'un disque dur SATA et d'une carte intermédiaire dans un support SATAu REMARQUE : Les disques durs SATA directement connectés au fond de panier SAS doivent être installés dans des supports marqués "SATA". Seuls les  disques durs SATA équipés de cartes intermédiaires peuvent être installés dans des supports SATAu. 1 Vis (4) 2 Support de lecteur SATA 3 Disque dur SATA REMARQUE : Pour pouvoir installer un disque dur SATA dans un support SATAu, vous devez fixer une carte intermédiaire à l'arrière du disque. Les  supports SATAu portent la mention "SATAu" et présentent des marques indiquant l'emplacement des vis de montage pour les lecteurs SAS et SATA.Blocs d'alimentation Le système prend en charge un ou deux blocs d'alimentation d'une puissance de sortie de 750 W. Si un seul bloc est installé, il doit se trouver dans la baie de  gauche (1). Si deux blocs sont installés, le second est utilisé comme source d'alimentation redondante enfichable à chaud. Retrait d'un bloc d'alimentation 1. Si le système contient un seul bloc d'alimentation, mettez le système et tous les périphériques connectés hors tension. S'il contient deux blocs  d'alimentation, vous pouvez laisser le système sous tension et passer à l'étape suivante.  2. Débranchez le câble d'alimentation de la source d'alimentation.  3. Déconnectez le câble d'alimentation du bloc puis retirez-le de son support. 4. Poussez vers la droite la patte de verrouillage située à gauche du bloc d'alimentation, afin de la débloquer. Relevez la poignée jusqu'à ce que le bloc  d'alimentation se dégage du châssis. Voir figure 3-8. 5. Retirez le bloc d'alimentation du châssis.  Figure 3-8. Retrait et installation d'un bloc d'alimentation 1 Vis (4) 2 Support de lecteur SATAu 3 Carte intermédiaire (SATA uniquement) 4 Disque dur SATA 5 Libellés AVIS : Si un seul bloc d'alimentation est installé, vous devez installer un cache sur la baie vide pour assurer un refroidissement correct du système. Voir  Installation d'un cache de bloc d'alimentation. AVIS : Le système ne peut fonctionner normalement que si au moins un bloc d'alimentation est installé ; il est en mode redondant si deux blocs  d'alimentation sont installés et connectés à une source de courant alternatif. Ne retirez et n'installez qu'un seul bloc d'alimentation à la fois dans un  système sous tension. Il risque de surchauffer si vous l'utilisez pendant une période prolongée avec un seul bloc d'alimentation et sans avoir installé de  cache de bloc d'alimentation. AVIS : Si le système comprend un seul bloc d'alimentation, celui-ci doit être installé dans la baie de gauche (1). AVIS : Si vous connectez un système équipé de deux blocs d'alimentation à une source d'alimentation dont la tension est comprise entre 120 et  220 VCA, le second bloc sert de source d'alimentation redondante (enfichable à chaud). REMARQUE : Sur un système installé dans un rack, vous devrez peut-être débloquer et soulever le passe-câbles, s'il gêne le retrait du bloc  d'alimentation. Pour plus d'informations sur le bras de gestion des câbles, consultez le document Rack Installation Guide (Guide d'installation du rack).Réinstallation d'un bloc d'alimentation 1. Dépliez la poignée du bloc d'alimentation, puis insérez celui-ci dans le châssis. Voir figure 3-8. 2. Abaissez la poignée jusqu'à ce qu'elle soit au même niveau que la façade du bloc d'alimentation et que la patte orange se mette en place. Voir figure 3- 8. 3. Faites passer le câble d'alimentation dans le support de fixation, connectez-le au bloc d'alimentation et branchez l'autre extrémité sur une prise secteur.  Retrait d'un cache de bloc d'alimentation A l'aide d'un tournevis cruciforme, retirez la vis située sur le côté gauche du cache, inclinez ce dernier légèrement pour le dégager de la baie et retirez-le du châssis. Installation d'un cache de bloc d'alimentation Pour installer le cache, insérez la patte située sur son bord droit dans l'encoche correspondante située sur la paroi de la baie du bloc d'alimentation. Rabattez  le cache sur la baie et fixez-le à l'aide de la vis cruciforme.  Ventilateurs du système  Le système est muni de quatre ventilateurs enfichables à chaud. Retrait d'un ventilateur du système 1. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture du système. 1  Patte de verrouillage 2 Support de fixation du câble 3 Poignée du bloc d'alimentation REMARQUE : Après avoir installé un nouveau bloc d'alimentation, patientez quelques secondes pour que le système reconnaisse ce module et  détermine s'il fonctionne correctement. Si tel est le cas, le voyant d'état du bloc d'alimentation doit devenir vert. Voir figure 1-4. AVIS : Si un seul bloc d'alimentation est installé, vous devez installer un cache sur la baie vide pour assurer un refroidissement correct du système.  Retirez le cache uniquement si vous installez un second bloc d'alimentation. PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les  consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges électrostatiques. AVIS : Les ventilateurs du système sont enfichables à chaud. Pour maintenir le refroidissement requis pendant le fonctionnement du système, ne  remplacez qu'un ventilateur à la fois. PRÉCAUTION : Attendez que les lames du ventilateur se soient arrêtées pour le manipuler.2. Relevez la poignée du ventilateur et tirez ce dernier vers le haut pour le dégager du châssis. Voir figure 3-9. Figure 3-9. Retrait et installation d'un ventilateur Réinstallation d'un ventilateur 1. Vérifiez que la poignée du ventilateur est relevée et enfoncez ce dernier sur le bâti jusqu'à ce qu'il soit correctement emboîté. Abaissez la poignée du  ventilateur jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un déclic. Voir figure 3-9. 2. Refermez le système. Voir Fermeture du système. Protecteur de ventilation Le protecteur de ventilation produit un flux d'air qu'il dirige sur les barrettes de mémoire du système. Retrait du protecteur de ventilation 1. Le protecteur de ventilation est maintenu par un loquet. Pour débloquer ce dernier, tirez-le vers la paroi externe du châssis. Voir figure 3-10. 2. Faites pivoter le protecteur de ventilation sur ses charnières pour l'amener vers l'avant du système, puis soulevez-le pour le retirer. Figure 3-10. Retrait et installation du protecteur de ventilation 1 Support de ventilateur 2 Poignée du ventilateur 3 Ventilateur PRÉCAUTION : Les barrettes DIMM restent chaudes un certain temps après la mise hors tension du système. Laissez-les tiédir avant de les  manipuler. AVIS : Ne faites jamais fonctionner le système si le protecteur de ventilation de la mémoire a été retiré. Le système pourrait surchauffer et s'arrêter,  entraînant une perte de données.Installation du protecteur de ventilation 1. Alignez les charnières sur les pivots du protecteur de ventilation, qui sont situés de chaque côté du support de ventilateur. Voir figure 3-10. 2. Abaissez doucement le protecteur de ventilation dans le système jusqu'à ce que le connecteur du ventilateur s'enclenche et que les loquets se mettent  en place. Supports de ventilateur Retrait du support de ventilateur 1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur. 2. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture du système. 3. Retirez le protecteur de ventilation. Voir Retrait du protecteur de ventilation. 4. Retirez la carte contrôleur fille SAS. Voir Retrait d'une carte contrôleur fille SAS. 5. Retirez les ventilateurs du support. Voir Retrait d'un ventilateur du système. 6. Retirez le support de ventilateur du système :  a. Appuyez sur le loquet de dégagement situé sur le côté gauche du support de ventilateur. Voir figure 3-11. Si le support ne se dégage pas complètement, appuyez doucement dessus lorsque vous débloquez le loquet. b. Relevez le côté gauche du support pour débloquer le clip de plastique de son logement, dans le bâti des blocs d'alimentation.  c. Tirez le support hors du système.  Figure 3-11. Retrait et installation du support de ventilateur 1 Pivots du protecteur de ventilation (2) 2 Protecteur de ventilation 3 Loquet de dégagement 4 Charnières (2) 5 Support de ventilateur PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les  consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges électrostatiques.Réinstallation du support de ventilateur 1. Insérez les deux pattes situées à droite du support de ventilateur dans les emplacements correspondants, sur le plateau de la carte système.  2. Inclinez le côté gauche du support de ventilateur et insérez-le dans le système jusqu'à ce que le loquet de dégagement et le clip de plastique  s'emboîtent complètement.  3. Réinstallez la carte contrôleur fille SAS. Voir Installation d'une carte contrôleur fille SAS. 4. Réinstallez les ventilateurs dans le support. Voir Réinstallation d'un ventilateur. 5. Refermez le système. Voir Fermeture du système. 6. Rebranchez le système sur la prise secteur et allumez-le, ainsi que les périphériques connectés.  Carte contrôleur fille SAS  La carte latérale du système comprend un logement réservé à l'installation d'une carte contrôleur fille SAS. Cette dernière fournit le sous-système de stockage  SAS nécessaire aux disques durs internes du système. La carte contrôleur fille RAID SAS disponible en option permet pour sa part de mettre en place une  configuration RAID pour les disques durs internes. Bien que le câblage utilisé pour les deux cartes filles soit différent (la carte contrôleur fille SAS standard  comprend un seul connecteur, tandis que la version RAID en comporte deux), leur installation dans la carte latérale s'effectue de la même façon. La figure 3-12 représente une carte contrôleur fille RAID SAS. Installation d'une carte contrôleur fille SAS 1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur. 2. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture du système. 3. Déconnectez le câble reliant le panneau de commande à la carte latérale. Voir Retrait du panneau de commande. 4. Tenez la carte fille SAS par les bords, son connecteur faisant face à la carte latérale.  5. Alignez les orifices situés sur le plateau de la carte fille SAS avec les crochets correspondants du châssis, puis insérez la carte dans le connecteur  approprié de la carte latérale. Voir figure 3-12. Vérifiez que la carte est alignée avec la partie centrale de la carte contrôleur SAS et emboîtez complètement cette dernière dans la carte latérale. Figure 3-12. Installation d'une carte contrôleur fille SAS 1 Loquet de dégagement 2 Support de ventilateur 3 Clip de plastique 4 Emplacement du support de ventilateur dans le bâti des blocs  d'alimentation 5 Pattes (2) AVIS : N'appuyez pas sur la barrette DIMM de la carte RAID lorsque vous installez celle-ci dans la carte latérale. REMARQUE : Si vous installez une carte RAID en remplacement d'une autre, attendez d'avoir terminé l'installation de la nouvelle carte pour retirer le film  de plastique qui la recouvre.6. Installez les câbles requis pour relier la carte contrôleur fille SAS au fond de panier. Reportez-vous au graphique approprié (figure 3-13, figure 3-14 ou figure 3-15) pour obtenir les instructions de câblage relatives à la combinaison carte / fond de panier utilisée dans votre système.  Câblage de la carte contrôleur fille SAS (avec et sans option RAID) Figure 3-13. Câblage de la carte contrôleur fille SAS (tous fonds de panier) Figure 3-14. Câblage de la carte contrôleur fille RAID SAS avec le fond de panier 3,5 pouces x6 Figure 3-15. Câblage de la carte contrôleur fille RAID SAS avec le fond de panier 3,5 pouces x4 1 Carte contrôleur fille SAS 2 Emplacement pour carte contrôleur fille SAS 3 Patte de dégagement 4 Connecteur de pile de la carte contrôleur fille SAS 5 Connecteurs SAS 0 et 1 (carte RAID uniquement), à  relier au connecteur SAS_A ou SAS_B du fond de panier 6 Orifices (2) 7 Plateau de la carte contrôleur fille SAS 1 Carte contrôleur fille SAS 2 Contrôleur SAS 0 3 Fond de panier SAS A 4 Fond de panier 1 Contrôleur SAS 0 2 Carte contrôleur fille RAID SAS 3 Contrôleur SAS 1 4 Fond de panier SAS A 5 Fond de panier 3,5 pouces x6 6 Fond de panier SAS BRetrait d'une carte contrôleur fille SAS 1. Débranchez tous les connecteurs de batterie, le cas échéant.  2. Débranchez le câble du panneau de commande. Voir Retrait du panneau de commande 3. Déconnectez les câbles SAS de la carte, le cas échéant.  4. Appuyez doucement sur la patte de dégagement tout en écartant la carte contrôleur fille SAS (sur son plateau) du connecteur de la carte latérale. Cette  opération permet de dégager les crochets des orifices situés sur le plateau. Soulevez ensuite la carte contrôleur pour l'extraire du système. Voir  figure 3-12. Batterie RAID Installation d'une batterie RAID 1. Insérez la batterie RAID dans le support prévu à cet effet. Voir figure 3-16. 2. Repérez l'emplacement de la baie de batterie appropriée. Elle se trouve à droite de la carte fille SAS, au-dessus des baies de disque dur. 3. Insérez la batterie RAID et son support dans les encoches appropriées du châssis. Enfichez le câble de la batterie dans la carte de stockage fille, en  vous assurant que le support de la batterie est aligné et correctement emboîté dans les encoches.  Figure 3-16. Installation d'une batterie RAID 1 Contrôleur SAS 0 2 Carte contrôleur fille RAID SAS 3 Contrôleur SAS 1 4 Fond de panier SAS A 5 Fond de panier 3,5 pouces x4 1 Encoches (2) 2 Câble de la batterieRetrait d'une batterie RAID 1. Déconnectez le câble reliant la batterie RAID à la carte contrôleur fille RAID SAS. Voir figure 3-16. 2. Appuyez sur le support de la batterie tout en le poussant vers la gauche, de manière à le dégager des encoches dans lesquelles il est emboîté sur  le châssis.  3. Tout en écartant doucement les deux guides de fixation, extrayez la batterie RAID de son support.  Configuration du périphérique d'amorçage  Si vous envisagez de démarrer le système à partir d'un disque dur, celui-ci doit être relié au contrôleur principal (d'amorçage). L'ordre de démarrage spécifié  dans le programme de configuration du système détermine le périphérique utilisé pour l'amorçage du système. Le programme de configuration du système contient des options qui sont utilisées par le système pour rechercher les périphériques de démarrage installés.  Voir Utilisation du programme de configuration du système pour plus d'informations sur le programme de configuration du système. Cartes d'extension La carte de montage de gauche (disponible en option) peut être de type PCI\x7f X ou PCI Express (PCIe). La version PCI-X contient deux logements d'extension PCI-X 64 bits à 133 MHz. La version PCIe contient un logement PCIe x8 et un logement PCIe x4. La carte de montage centrale mi-hauteur fournie avec les options de cartes de montage PCI-X et PCIe contient un logement PCIe x8. Les trois logements d'extension se trouvent sur des bus distincts. Consignes d'installation des cartes d'extension Pour identifier les emplacements des cartes d'extension, voir Composants et bus PCI de la carte de montage pour cartes d'extension. Installation d'une carte d'extension 1. Déballez la carte d'extension et préparez-la en vue de son installation. Pour obtenir des instructions, consultez la documentation fournie avec la carte. 2. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur.  3. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture du système. 4. Ouvrez le loquet du guide de la carte d'extension et retirez la plaque de recouvrement. Voir figure 3-17. 5. Installez la carte d'extension :  a. S'il s'agit d'une carte pleine longueur, alignez son bord avant avec le guide d'alignement. Voir figure 3-17. b. Placez la carte d'extension de façon que son connecteur latéral soit face au connecteur correspondant de la carte de montage.  3 Support de la batterie 4 Batterie de la carte contrôleur fille RAID SAS REMARQUE : Le démarrage du système à partir d'un périphérique externe connecté à une carte SAS ou SCSI n'est pas pris en charge. Voir le site  support.dell.com pour obtenir les informations les plus récentes concernant le démarrage à partir de périphériques externes. REMARQUE : Les logements de cartes d'extension ne prennent pas en charge l'installation à chaud.  REMARQUE : Bien que le logement PCIe x4 de la carte de montage de gauche soit physiquement un connecteur PCIe x8, il fonctionne uniquement  en x4.  REMARQUE : L'emplacement 1 de la carte de montage centrale prend uniquement en charge les cartes d'extension mi-longueur. Les emplacements 2  et 3 de la carte de montage de gauche prennent en charge les cartes d'extension pleine longueur.  REMARQUE : Le système prend en charge jusqu'à deux cartes d'extension RAID pour la gestion du stockage externe.  PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les  consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges électrostatiques. REMARQUE : La procédure utilisée pour installer les cartes d'extension dans les cartes de montage de gauche et centrale est la même. La seule  différence est que la carte centrale ne contient pas de guides d'alignement et ne prend en charge que les cartes de mi-hauteur. La figure 3-17 représente l'installation d'une carte d'extension pleine longueur. c. Emboîtez les deux connecteurs.  d. Lorsque la carte est insérée dans le connecteur, fermez le loquet de la carte d'extension. Voir figure 3-17. Figure 3-17. Installation d'une carte d'extension 6. Connectez tous les câbles requis pour la nouvelle carte.  Consultez la documentation accompagnant la carte pour obtenir des informations sur la connexion des câbles. 7. Refermez le système. Voir Fermeture du système. Retrait d'une carte d'extension 1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur. 2. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture du système. 3. Déconnectez tous les câbles de la carte d'extension.  4. Dégagez la carte d'extension :  a. Ouvrez le loquet de la carte d'extension. Voir figure 3-17. b. Tenez la carte d'extension par les coins supérieurs et retirez-la doucement du connecteur. 5. Si vous retirez définitivement la carte, installez une plaque de recouvrement métallique sur l'ouverture du logement vide et refermez le loquet.  6. Reconnectez tous les câbles des cartes d'extension.  7. Refermez le système. Voir Fermeture du système. Bâti des cartes d'extension  Retrait du bâti des cartes d'extension 1 Guide d'alignement avant 2 Connecteur de carte d'extension 3 Connecteur latéral de la carte 4 Carte d'extension 5 Loquet PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les  consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges électrostatiques. REMARQUE : L'installation d'une plaque de recouvrement sur les logements d'extension vides est obligatoire pour que le système reste conforme  à l'homologation FCC (Federal Communications Commission). Ces plaques empêchent en outre la poussière et les impuretés de pénétrer dans le  système et facilitent le refroidissement et la ventilation.1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur. 2. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture du système. 3. Déconnectez tous les câbles de la carte d'extension.  4. Retirez toutes les cartes d'extension du bâti. Voir Retrait d'une carte d'extension. 5. Appuyez sur les deux loquets de dégagement bleus du bâti des cartes d'extension. Voir figure 3-18. Figure 3-18. Installation et retrait du bâti des cartes d'extension 6. Soulevez le bâti pour le dégager du châssis. Voir figure 3-18. Réinstallation du bâti des cartes d'extension 1. Alignez les guides situés de chaque côté du bâti des cartes d'extension avec les plots de la carte système, puis mettez le bâti en place. Voir figure 3-18. 2. Installez toutes les cartes d'extension. 3. Reconnectez tous les câbles des cartes d'extension.  4. Refermez le système. Voir Fermeture du système. Installation d'une carte RAC Le contrôleur d'accès distant ou RAC (Remote Access Controller) disponible en option fournit un ensemble de fonctionnalités avancées pour la gestion à  distance du serveur. La procédure suivante décrit l'installation de la carte RAC disponible en option. PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les  consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges électrostatiques. REMARQUE : Avant de retirer le bâti des cartes d'extension, vous devez retirer toutes les cartes qui s'y trouvent. 1 Bâti des cartes d'extension 2 Plots du châssis (2) 3 Loquets de dégagement (2) PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les  consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges électrostatiques. PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les  consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges électrostatiques.1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur. 2. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture du système. 3. Retirez l'obturateur de prise du panneau arrière du système. Voir figure 3-19. 4. Retirez la carte de montage centrale. Voir Retrait de la carte de montage centrale. 5. Orientez la carte RAC pour que son connecteur de NIC s'insère dans l'ouverture appropriée du panneau arrière, puis redressez la carte.  Figure 3-19. Installation d'une carte RAC 6. Alignez le bord avant de la carte RAC avec les deux picots de fixation avant en plastique, qui se trouvent à côté du connecteur de RAC de la carte  système. Appuyez sur le côté de la carte jusqu'à ce qu'elle soit correctement emboîtée. Voir figure 3-19. Lorsque la carte est en place, les deux picots de plastique se referment sur son rebord. 7. Reliez la carte RAC à la carte système à l'aide des deux câbles rubans courts. Voir figure 6-2 pour identifier l'emplacement des connecteurs. a. Branchez un câble sur le connecteur 1 de la carte RAC et sur le connecteur RAC_CONN1 de la carte système.  b. Branchez le second câble sur le connecteur 2 de la carte RAC et sur le connecteur RAC_CONN2 de la carte système. Réinstallez la carte de  montage centrale. Voir Installation de la carte de montage centrale. 8. Refermez le système. Voir Fermeture du système. 9. Rebranchez le système sur la prise secteur et allumez-le, ainsi que les périphériques connectés.  Consultez la documentation de la carte RAC pour plus d'informations sur sa configuration et son utilisation. Lecteur optique Il est possible de monter un lecteur optique slim (en option) sur un plateau qui se glisse dans le panneau avant et se connecte aux contrôleurs de la carte  système par l'intermédiaire de la carte de fond de panier SAS.  Retrait du lecteur optique 1 Connecteurs de carte RAC (2) 2 Câbles de la carte RAC (2) 3 Orifice du picot de fixation 4 Carte RAC 5 Obturateur de prise 6 Orifices des picots de support (2) AVIS : Lorsque vous enfichez des câbles sur la carte système, prenez garde à ne pas endommager les composants adjacents.  AVIS : Pour déconnecter les câbles de la carte RAC enfichés sur la carte système, appuyez sur les extrémités métalliques des connecteurs de câbles et  retirez doucement le connecteur du support. Ne tirez pas sur le câble pour le dégager de son connecteur. Vous risqueriez de l'endommager. 1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur. 2. Retirez le cadre. Voir Retrait du cadre avant. 3. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture du système. 4. Déconnectez le câble d'interface de l'arrière du lecteur optique.  5. Pour retirer le plateau du lecteur optique, appuyez sur la patte de dégagement bleue, puis faites glisser le plateau hors du système. Voir figure 3-20. Figure 3-20. Retrait et installation du plateau du lecteur optique Installation du lecteur optique 1. Alignez le plateau avec l'ouverture correspondante du panneau avant. Pour le lecteur optique, cette ouverture se trouve tout à fait à droite, au-dessus des compartiments de disque dur ou de la baie modulaire, selon la configuration de votre système. Les compartiments de disque dur sont identifiés par des inscriptions sur le panneau avant du système.  2. Faites glisser le plateau du lecteur jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche. Voir figure 3-20. 3. Connectez le câble du lecteur optique à l'arrière du lecteur.  4. Refermez le système. Voir Fermeture du système. 5. Réinstallez le cadre. Voir Réinstallation du cadre avant. 6. Reconnectez le système et les périphériques sur le secteur, puis remettez- les sous tension. Lecteur de disquette Retrait du lecteur de disquette 1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur. 2. Retirez le cadre avant, s'il est installé. Voir Retrait du cadre avant. PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les  consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges électrostatiques. 1 Câble du lecteur optique 2 Patte de dégagement du lecteur optique 3 Plateau du lecteur optique 4 Lecteur optique PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les  consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges électrostatiques.3. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture du système. 4. Si le système contient une unité de sauvegarde sur bande installée dans la baie de média (en option), retirez le support de fixation du câble de cette  unité. Voir Retrait et réinstallation du support de fixation du câble pour le lecteur de bande. 5. Déconnectez le câble de l'arrière du lecteur de disquette.  6. Dégagez le support du lecteur de disquette de son logement dans la baie de média :  a. Appuyez doucement sur les pattes de plastique situées sur le côté du support tout en poussant vers l'avant du système, jusqu'à ce que le  support se déboîte.  b. Poussez le support vers l'avant puis retirez-le du châssis. Voir figure 3-22. Figure 3-21. Installation et retrait du lecteur de disquette Installation du lecteur de disquette 1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur. 2. Retirez le cadre avant, s'il est installé. Voir Retrait du cadre avant. 3. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture du système. 4. Installez le support du lecteur de disquette dans le système :  a. Alignez les fentes situées sous le support du lecteur de disquette avec les rails de la baie de média.  b. Poussez le support vers la façade du système jusqu'à ce que son loquet de plastique se mette en place.  5. Insérez l'une des extrémités du câble ruban dans le connecteur marqué "FLOPPY" sur la carte système, et l'autre dans le connecteur situé à l'arrière du  lecteur. Voir figure 6-2 pour identifier l'emplacement de ce connecteur. 6. Refermez le système. Voir Fermeture du système. 7. Remettez le cadre avant en place, s'il a été retiré à l'étape 2. Voir Réinstallation du cadre avant. 8. Rebranchez le système et les périphériques sur les prises secteur.  Retrait du lecteur de disquette de son support 1. Retirez le lecteur de disquette du système. Voir Retrait du lecteur de disquette. 1 Support du lecteur de disquette 2 Pattes de dégagement (2) 3 Baie de média PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les  consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges électrostatiques.2. Tirez doucement sur un côté du support pour le séparer du lecteur, jusqu'à ce que ce dernier soit éjecté du plateau. Voir figure 3-22. Figure 3-22. Installation et retrait du lecteur de disquette de son support Installation du lecteur de disquette dans son support 1. Alignez l'arrière du lecteur de disquette avec l'arrière du support.  2. Ajoutez la cale. 3. Enfoncez doucement le lecteur dans le support jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche. Voir figure 3-22. Lecteur de bande SCSI Cette section décrit la configuration et l'installation d'un lecteur de bande SCSI interne. Retrait et installation d'un lecteur de bande SCSI interne 1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur. 2. Retirez le support du lecteur de bande de son logement, dans la baie de média. Pour ce faire, appuyez sur les pattes de dégagement situées de chaque  côté du support et poussez vers l'avant pour dégager ce dernier de la baie. Voir figure 3-23. Figure 3-23. Retrait et installation du support de lecteur de bande 1 Plateau du lecteur de disquette 2 Cale 3 Lecteur de disquette 4 Pattes de dégagement du lecteur de disquette (2) REMARQUE : L'installation d'un lecteur de bande SCSI requiert une carte contrôleur SCSI (en option). AVIS : Lisez la section "Protecting Against Electrostatic Discharge" (Protection contre les décharges électrostatiques), qui figure dans les consignes de  sécurité du document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit). 3. Retirez les quatre vis fixant le cache du lecteur de bande aux rails, puis mettez ces derniers de côté pour pouvoir les installer sur le lecteur  ultérieurement. Voir figure 3-24. 4. Préparez le lecteur de bande en vue de son installation.  Mettez-vous à la terre en touchant une partie métallique non peinte à l'arrière du système, déballez le lecteur (et la carte contrôleur, le cas échéant),  puis comparez les réglages du cavalier et du commutateur avec ceux décrits dans la documentation. 5. Alignez les quatre orifices du lecteur de bande avec ceux des rails, puis fixez ces derniers sur le lecteur. 6. Insérez le lecteur dans la baie de média. Voir figure 3-24. Figure 3-24. Retrait et installation d'un lecteur de bande SCSI interne 7. Acheminez le câble d'interface SCSI du lecteur de bande dans son support de fixation, puis enfichez-le dans le connecteur de la carte contrôleur SCSI.  Voir Retrait et réinstallation du support de fixation du câble pour le lecteur de bande. 8. Enfichez le câble d'alimentation du lecteur de bande dans le connecteur d'alimentation approprié, sur la carte de fond de panier. Voir figure 6-4 pour identifier l'emplacement des connecteurs. 9. Rebranchez le système sur la prise secteur et allumez-le, ainsi que tous les périphériques connectés.  10. Effectuez une sauvegarde sur bande et un test de vérification de l'unité, en suivant les instructions de la documentation correspondante.  Retrait et réinstallation du support de fixation du câble pour le lecteur de bande Si vous utilisez un fond de panier 3,5 pouces x4, le lecteur de bande disponible en option se connecte à la carte système par l'intermédiaire d'une carte  d'extension installée dans un logement PCI. Le câble du lecteur de bande est acheminé sur la droite du châssis, puis derrière son support de fixation. 1 Cache du lecteur de bande 2 Rails du lecteur de bande 3 Patte de dégagement (2) 4 Baie de média 1 Vis (4) 2 Rails du lecteur de bande (2) 3 Pattes de dégagement du rail (2) 4 Lecteur de bandePour retirer le support de fixation du câble, tirez doucement le loquet de dégagement bleu vers le centre du système, tout en amenant le support vers l'avant  du système pour le dégager de la paroi du châssis. Voir figure 3-25. Pour réinstaller le support, alignez ses clips avec les fentes correspondantes sur la paroi du châssis. Insérez le support dans le système jusqu'à ce que tous  les clips et le loquet bleu s'enclenchent. Figure 3-25. Installation et retrait du support de fixation du câble pour le lecteur de bande Mémoire système  Vous pouvez ajouter de la mémoire supplémentaire au système (maximum autorisé : 32 Go). Pour ce faire, installez des barrettes FB-DIMM DDR II à 533 MHz  ou 667 MHz, par paires de 256 Mo, 512 Mo, 1 Go, 2 Go ou 4 Go. Les huit emplacements mémoire se trouvent sur la carte système, sous le protecteur de  ventilation placé à côté des baies d'alimentation. Voir figure 6-2. Vous pouvez vous procurer des kits d'extension de mémoire auprès de Dell. Les emplacements mémoire sont divisés en deux groupes égaux (0 et 1). Chaque groupe est composé de deux canaux :  l Les canaux 0 et 1 font partie du groupe 0. l Les canaux 2 et 3 font partie du groupe 1. Chacun de ces canaux comprend deux logements DIMM :  l Le canal 0 contient les barrettes DIMM_1 et DIMM_5. l Le canal 1 contient les barrettes DIMM_2 et DIMM_6. l Le canal 2 contient les barrettes DIMM_3 et DIMM_7. l Le canal 3 contient les barrettes DIMM_4 et DIMM_8. Le premier logement DIMM de chaque canal est équipé de pattes d'éjection blanches. Consignes générales d'installation des barrettes de mémoire Pour optimiser les performances du système, observez les consignes suivantes lorsque vous configurez la mémoire système.  l Utilisez uniquement des barrettes FB-DIMM certifiées. Ces dernières peuvent être à simple ou à double rangée de connexions. Les barrettes marquées  "1R" sont des barrettes à une seule rangée de connexions, tandis que la mention "2R" identifie les barrettes à double rangée de connexions.  l Vous devez installer au moins deux barrettes FB-DIMM identiques. l Les barrettes doivent être insérées en suivant l'ordre des numéros d'emplacement (du moins élevé au plus élevé). l Les barrettes FB-DIMM doivent être installées par paires de taille, vitesse et technologie identiques. Leur nombre total doit être de deux, quatre ou  huit. Pour optimiser les performances du système, ces quatre ou huit barrettes doivent être de taille, vitesse et technologie identiques. l La mise en miroir de la mémoire et l'utilisation d'une mémoire de réserve requièrent 8 barrettes FB-DIMM de même taille, vitesse et technologie. l Ces deux fonctionnalités ne peuvent pas être implémentées en même temps. 1 Câble du lecteur de bande 2 Carte contrôleur SCSI 3 Loquet de dégagement 4 Clips du support (6) 5 Support de fixation du câble AVIS : Si vous retirez les barrettes de mémoire d'origine de l'ordinateur au cours d'une extension de mémoire, ne les mélangez pas avec les nouvelles,  même si elles ont toutes été achetées chez Dell. Utilisez uniquement des barrettes FB-DIMM DDR II à 533 MHz ou 667 MHz.Configurations de mémoire entraînant une dégradation des performances Une mémoire dont la configuration n'est pas conforme aux consignes ci-dessus peut entraîner une dégradation des performances du système. Ce dernier peut  alors afficher un message d'erreur au démarrage pour indiquer que la configuration de la mémoire n'est pas optimale. Prise en charge de la mémoire de réserve Le système prend en charge l'utilisation d'une mémoire de réserve s'il est équipé de huit barrettes de mémoire identiques. La mémoire de réserve doit être  activée via le programme de configuration du système. Elle peut être utilisée uniquement si la mise en miroir de la mémoire n'est pas activée. Cette fonctionnalité permet d'allouer quatre rangées DIMM au banc de réserve (première rangée des logements DIMM 1 à 4). La capacité totale des quatre  DIMM est allouée à la mémoire de réserve pour les barrettes à une seule rangée de connexions, et seulement la moitié si vous utilisez des barrettes à double  rangée de connexions. Le tableau 3-2 indique comment cette fonction répartit la mémoire disponible et la mémoire de réserve pour chaque combinaison de  barrettes (à simple et à double rangée de connexions). Tableau 3-2. Configurations pour l'utilisation d'une mémoire de réserve Prise en charge de la mise en miroir de la mémoire Le système prend en charge la mise en miroir de la mémoire s'il est équipé de huit barrettes de mémoire identiques. La mise en miroir doit être activée via le  programme de configuration du système. Elle peut être utilisée uniquement si la mémoire de réserve n'est pas activée. Dans une configuration en miroir, seule  la moitié de la mémoire système installée est disponible. Installation de barrettes de mémoire 1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur. 2. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture du système. 3. Retirez le protecteur de ventilation de la mémoire. Voir Retrait du protecteur de ventilation. 4. Repérez les emplacements mémoire sur la carte système. Voir figure 6-2. 5. Appuyez sur les dispositifs d'éjection du support, puis écartez-les (voir figure 3-26) pour pouvoir insérer la barrette.  Barrettes DIMM Taille/Type Mémoire totale Disponible Réserve 8 256 Mo, simple rangée de connexions 2 Go 1 Go 1 Go 512 Mo, simple rangée de connexions 4 Go 2 Go 2 Go 1 Go, simple rangée de connexions 8 Go 4 Go 4 Go 2 Go, simple rangée de connexions 16 Go 8 Go 8 Go 2 Go, double rangée de connexions 16 Go 12 Go 4 Go 4 Go, double rangée de connexions 32 Go 24 Go 8 Go PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les  consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges électrostatiques. AVIS : Ne retirez jamais le protecteur de ventilation de la mémoire sans mettre le système hors tension au préalable. Le système pourrait surchauffer  et s'arrêter, entraînant une perte de données. PRÉCAUTION : Les barrettes DIMM restent chaudes un certain temps après la mise hors tension du système. Laissez-les tiédir avant de les  manipuler. Tenez-les par les bords en évitant de toucher leurs composants. 5. Appuyez sur les dispositifs d'éjection du support, puis écartez-les (voir figure 3-26) pour pouvoir insérer la barrette.  Figure 3-26. Installation et retrait d'une barrette de mémoire6. Alignez le connecteur latéral de la barrette avec le détrompeur du support, puis insérez la barrette dans le support.  7. Appuyez sur la barrette de mémoire avec les pouces tout en relevant les dispositifs d'éjection avec les index pour verrouiller la barrette dans son  support. Si la barrette est installée correctement, les dispositifs d'éjection sont alignés avec ceux des autres connecteurs contenant également des barrettes. 8. Recommencez la procédure décrite de l'étape 3 à l'étape 7 pour installer les barrettes de mémoire restantes.  9. Réinstallez le protecteur de ventilation de la mémoire. Voir Installation du protecteur de ventilation. 10. Refermez le système. Voir Ouverture du système. 11. (Facultatif) Accédez au programme de configuration du système et vérifiez le paramètre System Memory (Mémoire système) dans l'écran principal  System Setup (Configuration du système). Voir Accès au programme de configuration du système. La valeur indiquée doit déjà avoir été modifiée par le système pour prendre en compte la mémoire qui vient d'être installée. 12. Si la valeur est fausse, il est possible qu'une ou plusieurs barrettes de mémoire soient mal installées. Recommencez la procédure décrite de l'étape 2 à  l'étape 11, en vérifiant que les barrettes de mémoire sont correctement insérées dans leur support.  13. Exécutez le test de mémoire des diagnostics du système. Voir Exécution des diagnostics du système. Retrait de barrettes de mémoire 1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur. 2. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture du système. 3. Retirez le protecteur de ventilation de la mémoire. Voir Retrait du protecteur de ventilation. 4. Repérez les emplacements mémoire sur la carte système. Voir figure 6-2. 1 Barrette de mémoire 2 Dispositifs d'éjection (2) 3 Support 4 Détrompeur REMARQUE : Les détrompeurs permettent de s'assurer que la barrette sera insérée dans le bon sens. AVIS : Ne faites jamais fonctionner le système si le protecteur de ventilation de la mémoire a été retiré. Le système pourrait surchauffer et s'arrêter,  entraînant une perte de données. PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les  consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges électrostatiques. AVIS : Ne retirez jamais le protecteur de ventilation de la mémoire sans mettre le système hors tension au préalable. Le système pourrait surchauffer  et s'arrêter, entraînant une perte de données. PRÉCAUTION : Les barrettes DIMM restent chaudes un certain temps après la mise hors tension du système. Laissez-les tiédir avant de les  manipuler. Tenez-les par les bords en évitant de toucher leurs composants.5. Écartez les dispositifs d'éjection situés à chaque extrémité du support pour extraire la barrette de mémoire. Voir figure 3-26. 6. Réinstallez le protecteur de ventilation de la mémoire. Voir Installation du protecteur de ventilation. 7. Refermez le système. Voir Fermeture du système. Activation du moteur TOE sur le NIC intégré  Pour activer le moteur TOE (TCP/IP Offload Engine, moteur de décentralisation TCP/IP) sur le NIC intégré du système, installez la clé matérielle TOE dans le  connecteur TOE_KEY de la carte système (voir figure 6-2). Processeurs Pour tirer parti des futures options en matière de vitesse et des nouvelles fonctionnalités émergentes, vous pouvez mettre le ou les processeur(s) existant(s)  à niveau. Chaque processeur et sa mémoire cache interne sont contenus dans une matrice LGA (Land Grid Array), installée dans un support ZIF de la carte  système.  Retrait d'un processeur 1. Avant de mettre le système à niveau, téléchargez la version du BIOS système la plus récente disponible à l'adresse support.dell.com. 2. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur. 3. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture du système. 4. Retirez les ventilateurs. Voir Retrait d'un ventilateur du système. 5. Retirez le support de ventilateur. Voir Retrait du support de ventilateur. 6. Appuyez sur la patte bleue située à l'extrémité de l'un des leviers de fixation du dissipateur de chaleur, puis relevez ce levier de 90 degrés. Voir figure 3- 27. Figure 3-27. Installation et retrait du dissipateur de chaleur AVIS : Ne faites jamais fonctionner le système si le protecteur de ventilation de la mémoire a été retiré. Le système pourrait surchauffer et s'arrêter,  entraînant une perte de données. PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les  consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges électrostatiques. AVIS : Lorsque vous retirez le dissipateur de chaleur, il est possible que le processeur reste collé et sorte de son support. C'est pourquoi il est  recommandé de retirer le dissipateur de chaleur quand le processeur est encore tiède. AVIS : Ne retirez jamais le dissipateur de chaleur d'un processeur si vous n'avez pas l'intention de retirer le processeur lui-même. Le dissipateur de  chaleur est indispensable pour maintenir les conditions de température adéquates.7. Attendez 30 secondes pour que le dissipateur de chaleur se détache du processeur.  8. Ouvrez l'autre levier de fixation du dissipateur de chaleur. 9. Si le dissipateur de chaleur ne s'est pas détaché du processeur, faites-le doucement tourner dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre, puis dans l'autre sens jusqu'à ce qu'il se détache. Ne tirez pas dessus pour le détacher du processeur.  10. Soulevez le dissipateur de chaleur pour le dégager du processeur et mettez- le de côté.  11. Relevez le levier d'éjection de 90 degrés jusqu'à ce que le processeur sorte de son support. Voir figure 3-28. 12. Relevez le cadre de protection pour dégager le processeur.  Figure 3-28. Installation et retrait d'un processeur 13. Sortez le processeur et laissez le levier relevé afin de pouvoir installer le nouveau processeur.  Installation d'un processeur 1. Déballez le nouveau processeur.  2. Alignez le processeur avec les détrompeurs du support ZIF. Voir figure 3-28. 3. Installez le processeur dans le support. a. Si ce n'est déjà fait, redressez le levier d'éjection.  b. Une fois que vous avez aligné le processeur sur les détrompeurs, insérez-le doucement dans le support. c. Fermez le cadre de protection du processeur. Voir figure 3-28. d. Lorsque le processeur est parfaitement positionné dans le connecteur, abaissez le levier d'éjection jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche, verrouillant le  processeur dans le connecteur. Voir figure 3-28. 4. Installez le dissipateur de chaleur. a. Si un nouveau dissipateur de chaleur vous a été fourni avec le kit du processeur, retirez le feuillet de protection de la couche de pâte thermique  déjà appliquée sur le dessus du dissipateur.  1 Dissipateur de chaleur 2 Leviers de fixation du dissipateur de chaleur (2) 3 Loquet du levier de fixation 1 Encoche du processeur (2) 2 Processeur 3 Levier d'éjection 4 Cadre de protection du processeur 5 Support ZIF 6 Détrompeurs (2) AVIS : Veillez à ne pas tordre les broches du support ZIF lors du retrait du processeur. Vous risqueriez d'endommager définitivement la carte système. AVIS : Le fait de remettre le système sous tension alors que le processeur est mal positionné risque de provoquer des dommages irréparables, à la fois  pour le processeur et pour la carte système. Lorsque vous insérez le processeur dans le support, prenez garde à ne pas tordre les broches de ce  dernier. AVIS : Ne forcez pas lorsque vous installez le processeur. S'il est positionné correctement, il s'insère dans le support très facilement. REMARQUE : Si aucun nouveau dissipateur de chaleur n'est fourni, utilisez celui que vous avez retiré à l'étape 10.Si le kit a été livré sans dissipateur de chaleur, procédez comme suit : ¡ À l'aide d'un chiffon propre et non pelucheux, enlevez la graisse thermique qui recouvre le dissipateur de chaleur retiré à l'étape 10. ¡ Ouvrez le paquet de graisse fourni avec le kit du processeur et appliquez-en une couche régulière sur le dessus du processeur. ¡ Placez le dissipateur de chaleur sur le processeur. Voir figure 3-27. ¡ Fermez puis verrouillez l'un des deux leviers de fixation du dissipateur de chaleur. Voir figure 3-27. ¡ Verrouillez l'autre levier de fixation. l Réinstallez le support de ventilateur. Voir Réinstallation du support de ventilateur. l Refermez le système. Voir Fermeture du système. Lorsque le système démarre, il détecte le nouveau processeur et modifie automatiquement les informations du programme de configuration du système. 7. Appuyez sur  pour accéder au programme de configuration du système et vérifier que les informations relatives au processeur correspondent bien à la nouvelle configuration. Voir Accès au programme de configuration du système. 8. Exécutez les diagnostics du système pour vérifier que le nouveau processeur fonctionne correctement.  Voir Exécution des diagnostics du système pour plus d'informations concernant l'exécution des diagnostics. Pile du système  La pile du système est une pile bouton de 3,0 volts (V). Remplacement de la pile du système 1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur. 2. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture du système 3. Identifiez le support de la pile. Voir Connecteurs de la carte système. 4. Retirez la pile du système.  a. Maintenez le connecteur de pile en place en appuyant fermement sur le côté positif du connecteur.  b. Tout en maintenant le connecteur, poussez la pile vers le côté positif et soulevez-la pour la retirer du connecteur. Figure 3-29. Remplacement de la pile du système PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les  consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges électrostatiques. PRÉCAUTION : Une pile neuve mal installée risque d'exploser. Lors d'un remplacement, utilisez une pile de type identique ou d'un type équivalent  recommandé par le fabricant. Mettez les piles usagées au rebut selon les instructions du fabricant. Consultez le document System Information Guide (Guide d'informations du système) pour obtenir des informations supplémentaires. AVIS : Si vous sortez la pile de son support avec un objet non pointu, prenez garde de ne pas toucher la carte système. Vérifiez que l'objet est inséré  entre la pile et son support avant de tenter d'extraire la pile. Sinon, vous risquez d'endommager la carte système en arrachant le support ou en brisant  des éléments de circuit sur la carte système. AVIS : Pour ne pas endommager le connecteur de pile, maintenez-le en place lorsque vous installez ou retirez une pile. 1 Côté positif du connecteur de pile 2 Pile du système5. Installez la nouvelle pile. a. Maintenez le connecteur de pile en place en appuyant fermement sur le côté positif du connecteur.  b. Tenez la pile en plaçant le "+" vers le haut et faites-la glisser sous les pattes de fixation situées du côté positif du connecteur.  c. Appuyez sur la pile pour l'installer dans le connecteur. 6. Refermez le système. Voir Fermeture du système. 7. Rebranchez le système sur la prise secteur et allumez-le, ainsi que tous les périphériques connectés.  8. Accédez au programme de configuration du système pour vérifier que la pile fonctionne correctement. Voir Accès au programme de configuration  du système. 9. Entrez la date et l'heure dans les champs Time (Heure) et Date du programme de configuration du système.  10. Quittez le programme de configuration du système.  11. Pour tester la pile qui vient d'être installée, éteignez le système et débranchez-le de la prise secteur pendant au moins une heure. 12. Une heure plus tard, rebranchez le système sur la prise secteur et allumez- le. 13. Accédez au programme de configuration du système. Si l'heure et la date sont toujours incorrectes, voir Obtention d'aide pour savoir comment obtenir une assistance technique. Cartes de montage pour cartes d'extension Retrait de la carte de montage de gauche pour cartes d'extension 1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur. 2. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture du système. 3. Retirez toutes les cartes d'extension installées dans les logements de la carte de montage de gauche. Voir Retrait d'une carte d'extension. 4. Retirez le bâti des cartes d'extension. Voir Retrait du bâti des cartes d'extension. 5. Retirez la carte de montage pour cartes d'extension :  a. Tirez sur le plot de dégagement de la carte de montage. Voir figure 3-30. b. Simultanément, retirez la carte de montage des ouvertures dans lesquelles elle est emboîtée.  c. Soulevez la carte de montage pour l'extraire des six pattes de fixation. Figure 3-30. Réinstallation de la carte de montage de gauche 3 Côté négatif du connecteur de pile AVIS : Pour ne pas endommager le connecteur de pile, maintenez-le en place lorsque vous installez ou retirez une pile. PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les  consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges électrostatiques.Installation de la carte de montage de gauche 1. Placez la carte de montage dans le bâti, en faisant en sorte que les six pattes de fixation s'insèrent dans les encoches correspondantes. Voir figure 3- 30. 2. Insérez la carte de montage dans les ouvertures des cartes d'extension jusqu'à ce que ses plots de dégagement s'enclenchent.  3. Réinstallez le bâti des cartes d'extension. Voir Réinstallation du bâti des cartes d'extension. 4. Installez toutes les cartes d'extension dans leur logement. Voir Installation d'une carte d'extension. 5. Refermez le système. Voir Fermeture du système. Retrait de la carte de montage centrale 1. Pour retirer la carte de montage centrale de son logement sur la carte système, soulevez-la par les extrémités tout en appuyant sur la patte de  dégagement bleue située en son milieu.  2. Soulevez la carte de montage pour la dégager des deux plots situés à chacune de ses extrémités, puis retirez-la de la carte système.  Figure 3-31. Réinstallation de la carte de montage centrale 1 Plot de dégagement de la carte de  montage 2 Rails des cartes d'extension 3 Bâti des cartes d'extension 4 Pattes de fixation de la carte de montage (6) 5 Fentes de fixation de la carte de montage  (6) PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les  consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges électrostatiques. PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les  consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges électrostatiques.Installation de la carte de montage centrale Alignez les deux plots de la carte système avec les guides de la carte de montage, puis enfoncez cette dernière jusqu'à ce que son connecteur soit  complètement inséré dans le logement de la carte système. Voir figure 3-31. Carte latérale  Retrait de la carte latérale 1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur. 2. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture du système. 3. Retirez la carte contrôleur fille SAS. Voir Retrait d'une carte contrôleur fille SAS. 4. Débranchez tous les câbles de la carte latérale.  5. Tout en appuyant sur les pattes de dégagement de la carte latérale, soulevez cette dernière pour la retirer du système. Voir figure 3-32 Figure 3-32. Installation et retrait de la carte latérale 1 Guide de la carte (2) 2 Patte de dégagement 3 Carte de montage centrale 4 Plots d'alignement (2) 5 Logement de la carte système PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les  consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges électrostatiques.Installation de la carte latérale 1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur.  2. Alignez les deux guides de la carte latérale avec les plots de la carte de fond de panier SAS, puis enfoncez-la doucement jusqu'à ce que son connecteur  soit complètement inséré dans celui du fond de panier. Voir figure 3-32. 3. Reconnectez tous les câbles requis sur la carte latérale.  4. Le cas échéant, réinstallez la carte contrôleur de stockage fille. Voir Installation d'une carte contrôleur fille SAS. 5. Refermez le système. Voir Fermeture du système. Carte de fond de panier SAS Retrait de la carte de fond de panier SAS 1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur.  2. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture du système. 3. Le cas échéant, déconnectez le lecteur optique du fond de panier SAS. Voir Retrait du lecteur optique. 4. Le cas échéant, déconnectez le lecteur de disquette. Voir Retrait du lecteur de disquette. 5. Le cas échéant, déconnectez le lecteur de bande. Voir Retrait et installation d'un lecteur de bande SCSI interne. 6. Retirez les disques durs. Voir Retrait d'un disque dur enfichable à chaud. 1 Carte latérale 2 Pattes de dégagement de la carte latérale (2) 3 Guides d'alignement (2) 4 Connecteur de fond de panier 5 Plots (2) PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les  consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges électrostatiques. PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les  consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges électrostatiques.7. Débranchez le(s) câble(s) SAS et le câble du panneau de commande de leurs connecteurs respectifs, sur le fond de panier. Voir les sections Câblage de  la carte contrôleur fille SAS (avec et sans option RAID) et Retrait du panneau de commande. 8. Le cas échéant, retirez la carte contrôleur de stockage fille. Voir Retrait d'une carte contrôleur fille SAS. 9. Retirez le protecteur de ventilation. Voir Retrait du protecteur de ventilation. 10. Retirez les ventilateurs. Voir Retrait d'un ventilateur du système 11. Retirez le support de ventilateur. Voir Retrait du support de ventilateur. 12. Retirez la carte de fond de panier SAS :  a. Tirez sur le plot de dégagement de la carte de fond de panier SAS. Voir figure 3-33. b. Tout en tirant sur ce plot, inclinez la carte de fond de panier vers l'arrière du système.  c. Soulevez la carte de fond de panier pour la dégager des pattes de fixation, puis retirez-la du châssis.  Figure 3-33. Retrait de la carte de fond de panier SAS Installation de la carte de fond de panier SAS 1. Positionnez la carte de fond de panier SAS de sorte que les pattes de fixation du bâti des lecteurs entrent entièrement dans les fentes appropriées. Voir  figure 3-33. 2. Tirez sur le plot de dégagement de la carte de fond de panier SAS. Voir figure 3-33. 3. Tout en maintenant le plot de dégagement, inclinez la carte de fond de panier SAS vers l'avant du système jusqu'à ce qu'elle se bloque. Ensuite,  relâchez le plot et vérifiez qu'il est correctement enclenché.  4. Réinstallez le support de ventilateur. Voir Réinstallation du support de ventilateur. 5. Réinstallez les ventilateurs. Voir Réinstallation d'un ventilateur. 6. Réinstallez le protecteur de ventilation. Voir Installation du protecteur de ventilation. 7. Réinstallez la carte contrôleur fille SAS. Voir Installation d'une carte contrôleur fille SAS. 8. Reconnectez les câbles de la carte contrôleur fille SAS, ainsi que celui du panneau de commande. Voir Câblage de la carte contrôleur fille SAS (avec et  sans option RAID). REMARQUE : Notez la baie dans laquelle chaque disque dur est installé, de manière à pouvoir reproduire la configuration correcte par la suite.  1 Support de lecteur 2 Plot de dégagement de la carte de fond de panier SAS 3 Carte de fond de panier SAS 4 Orifices de fixation (10) 5 Pattes de fixation (10) PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les  consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges électrostatiques.9. Réinstallez les disques durs. Voir Installation d'un disque dur enfichable à chaud. 10. Le cas échéant, reconnectez le lecteur de bande interne. Voir Retrait et installation d'un lecteur de bande SCSI interne. 11. Le cas échéant, reconnectez le lecteur de disquette. Voir Installation du lecteur de disquette. 12. Le cas échéant, reconnectez le lecteur optique. Voir Installation du lecteur optique. 13. Refermez le système. Voir Fermeture du système. Assemblage du panneau de commande (maintenance uniquement) Retrait du panneau de commande 1. Retirez le cadre, le cas échéant. Voir Retrait du cadre avant. 2. Mettez le système hors tension, y compris les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur et des périphériques.  3. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture du système. 4. Débranchez le câble connecté à l'arrière de la carte du panneau de commande. Voir figure 3-34. a. Appuyez sur les pattes métalliques situées de chaque côté du connecteur du câble.  b. Retirez doucement le connecteur de son support. e. Déconnectez le câble du module d'affichage de la carte du panneau de commande. Voir figure 3-34. f. Retirez les trois vis qui fixent la carte du panneau de commande au châssis, puis retirez la carte. Voir figure 3-34. g. Retirez le module d'affichage :  a. Insérez le bout d'un trombone dans l'orifice situé sur le côté droit du module d'affichage, puis retirez doucement l'étiquette.  b. À l'aide d'un tournevis Torx T10, retirez les deux vis qui fixent le module d'affichage au châssis.  c. Retirez le module d'affichage. Figure 3-34. Retrait du panneau de commande REMARQUE : Réinstallez chaque disque dur dans sa baie d'origine.  REMARQUE : L'assemblage du panneau de commande se compose de deux modules distincts : le module d'affichage et la carte du panneau de  commande. Utilisez les instructions suivantes pour retirer et installer chaque module. PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les  consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges électrostatiques. AVIS : Ne tirez pas sur le câble pour le dégager de son connecteur. Vous risqueriez de l'endommager.Installation de l'assemblage du panneau de commande 1. Insérez le module d'affichage dans l'ouverture du châssis et fixez-le à l'aide des deux vis Torx.  2. Placez l'étiquette sur le module d'affichage.  3. Installez la carte du panneau de commande dans le châssis et fixez-la à l'aide des trois vis cruciformes. Voir figure 3-34. 4. Connectez le câble du module d'affichage à la carte du panneau de commande. Voir figure 3-34. 5. Connectez le câble du panneau de commande à la carte du panneau de commande. Voir figure 3-34. 6. Refermez le système. Voir Fermeture du système. 7. Rebranchez le système sur la prise secteur et allumez-le, ainsi que les périphériques connectés.  8. Installez le cadre, le cas échéant.  Carte système (maintenance uniquement)  Retrait de la carte système 1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur.  2. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture du système 3. Le cas échéant, retirez toutes les cartes d'extension. Voir Installation d'une carte d'extension 4. Retirez le bâti des cartes d'extension. Voir Retrait du bâti des cartes d'extension 5. Retirez le protecteur de ventilation. Voir Retrait du protecteur de ventilation. 6. Retirez les ventilateurs. Voir Retrait d'un ventilateur du système. 7. Retirez le support de ventilateur. Voir Retrait du support de ventilateur 8. Le cas échéant, retirez la carte RAC. Voir Installation d'une carte RAC. 9. Retirez les barrettes de mémoire. Voir Retrait de barrettes de mémoire. 10. Retirez le(s) dissipateur(s) de chaleur et le(s) microprocesseur(s). Voir Retrait d'un processeur. 11. Retirez la clé TOE, le cas échéant. Voir figure 6-2 pour identifier l'emplacement de la clé TOE.  1 Étiquette du module d'affichage 2 Vis de fixation du module d'affichage (2) 3 Module d'affichage 4 Câble du module d'affichage 5 Câble du panneau de commande 6 Carte du panneau de commande 7 Vis de fixation de la carte du panneau de commande (3) PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les  consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges électrostatiques. PRÉCAUTION : Les barrettes DIMM restent chaudes un certain temps après la mise hors tension du système. Laissez-les tiédir avant de les  manipuler. Tenez-les par les bords en évitant de toucher leurs composants. REMARQUE : Lorsque vous retirez les barrettes de mémoire, notez leurs emplacements afin de pouvoir les réinstaller correctement. 12. Retirez la carte latérale. Voir Retrait de la carte latérale. 13. Retirez le fond de panier SAS. Voir Retrait de la carte de fond de panier SAS. 14. Retirez la carte système :  a. Tirez sur le plot de dégagement situé sur la carte de montage fixée au plateau de la carte système. Voir figure 3-35. b. Tout en maintenant ce plot, faites glisser le plateau de la carte système vers l'avant du châssis.  c. Soulevez le plateau et retirez-le du châssis.  Figure 3-35. Retrait de la carte système Installation de la carte système 1. Abaissez le plateau de la carte système jusqu'à ce qu'il soit posé à plat au fond du châssis.  2. Vérifiez que les 17 pattes de fixation de la carte système sont correctement insérées dans les fentes correspondantes. Voir figure 3-35. 3. Faites glisser le plateau de la carte système vers l'arrière du châssis jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche.  4. Réinstallez le fond de panier SAS. Voir Installation de la carte de fond de panier SAS. 5. Réinstallez la carte latérale. Voir Installation de la carte latérale 6. Réinstallez la clé TOE, le cas échéant. Voir figure 6-2 pour identifier l'emplacement de la clé TOE.  7. Réinstallez le(s) dissipateur(s) de chaleur et le(s) microprocesseur(s). Voir Installation d'un processeur. 8. Réinstallez les barrettes de mémoire. Voir Installation de barrettes de mémoire. 9. Le cas échéant, réinstallez la carte RAC. Voir Installation d'une carte RAC. 10. Réinstallez le support de ventilateur. Voir Réinstallation du support de ventilateur. 11. Réinstallez les ventilateurs. Voir Réinstallation d'un ventilateur. 1 Plateau de la carte système 2 Plot de dégagement 3 Carte système 4 Pattes de fixation de la carte système PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les  consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges électrostatiques.12. Réinstallez le protecteur de ventilation. Voir Installation du protecteur de ventilation. 13. Réinstallez le bâti des cartes d'extension. Voir Réinstallation du bâti des cartes d'extension. 14. Le cas échéant, réinstallez toutes les cartes d'extension. Voir Installation d'une carte d'extension. 15. Refermez le système. Voir Fermeture du système. Retour au sommaireRetour au sommaire Cavaliers et connecteurs Systèmes Dell™ PowerVault™ 500 Manuel du propriétaire   Cavaliers de la carte système  Connecteurs de la carte système  Connecteurs de la carte de fond de panier SAS Connecteurs de la carte latérale  Composants et bus PCI de la carte de montage pour cartes d'extension Désactivation d'un mot de passe oublié  Cette section contient des informations spécifiques concernant les cavaliers du système. Elle décrit également les connecteurs qui se trouvent sur les  différentes cartes installées dans le système. Cavaliers de la carte système  La figure 6-1 indique l'emplacement des cavaliers de configuration sur la carte système. Le tableau 6-1 répertorie les réglages de ces cavaliers.  Figure 6-1. Cavaliers de la carte système Tableau 6-1. Réglages des cavaliers de la carte système Connecteurs de la carte système  Consultez la figure 6-2 et le tableau 6-2 pour obtenir la description et l'emplacement des connecteurs de la carte système. Figure 6-2. Connecteurs de la carte système REMARQUE : Pour accéder aux cavaliers, retirez le protecteur de ventilation. Pour ce faire, soulevez le loquet de dégagement tout en faisant glisser le  protecteur de ventilation vers l'avant du système. Voir figure 3-10. REMARQUE : Relevez le protecteur de ventilation de la mémoire pour accéder plus facilement aux cavaliers.  Cavalier Réglage Description 1 PWRD_EN     (par défaut) La fonction de mot de passe est activée. La fonction de mot de passe est désactivée. 2 NVRAM_CLR    (par défaut) Les paramètres de configuration sont conservés au démarrage du système. Les paramètres de configuration sont effacés au prochain démarrage du système. Si les paramètres de configuration sont  altérés au point d'empêcher le redémarrage du système, installez ce cavalier et démarrez le système. Retirez ensuite le  cavalier avant de restaurer les informations de configuration. REMARQUE : Pour obtenir le nom complet d'une abréviation ou d'un sigle utilisé dans ce tableau, voir le Glossaire.Tableau 6-2. Connecteurs de la carte système Connecteurs de la carte de fond de panier SAS La figure 6-3 et la figure 6-4 montrent l'emplacement des connecteurs sur les trois configurations possibles pour la carte de fond de panier SAS. Connecteur Description 1 RAC_CONN2 Carte RAC 2 2 SATA_B Connecteur SATA B 3 RAC_CONN1 Carte RAC 1 4 DIMM 1 Barrette de mémoire, logement 1 5 DIMM 5 Barrette de mémoire, logement 5 6 DIMM 2 Barrette de mémoire, logement 2 7 DIMM 6 Barrette de mémoire, logement 6 8 DIMM 3 Barrette de mémoire, logement 3 9 DIMM 7 Barrette de mémoire, logement 7 10 DIMM 4 Barrette de mémoire, logement 4 11 DIMM 8 Barrette de mémoire, logement 8 12 CPU1 Microprocesseur 1 13 FAN4_2U Ventilateur du système 14 FLOPPY Connecteur du lecteur de disquette 15 FAN3_2U Ventilateur du système 16 FAN2_2U Ventilateur du système 17 FAN1_2U Ventilateur du système 18 CPU2 Microprocesseur 2 19 TOE_KEY Clé TOE (TCP/IP Offload Engine) 20 BACKPLANE Connecteur d'alimentation du fond de panier 21 SIDEPLANE Connecteur de la carte latérale 22 RISER1 Connecteur de la carte de montage de gauche 23 SATA_A Connecteur SATA A 24 BATTERY Pile du système 25 RISER2 Connecteur de la carte de montage centraleFigure 6-3. Composants de la carte de fond de panier SAS : option 3,5 pouces x6 Figure 6-4. Composants de la carte de fond de panier SAS : option 3,5 pouces x4 Connecteurs de la carte latérale  Voir figure 6-5 pour obtenir la description et l'emplacement des connecteurs de la carte latérale. Figure 6-5. Connecteurs de la carte latérale 1 Lecteur 0 (SASDRV0) 2 Connecteur SAS principal (SAS_A) 3 Lecteur 2 (SASDRV2) 4 Alimentation du lecteur optique (CD_PWR) 5 Connecteur SAS secondaire (SAS_B) 6 Lecteur 4 (SASDRV4) 7 Lecteur 5 (SASDRV5) 8 Lecteur 3 (SASDRV3) 9 Lecteur 1 (SASDRV1) 10 Alimentation du fond de panier (BP_PWR) 1 Lecteur 0 (SASDRV0) 2 SAS (SAS_A) 3 Connecteur d'alimentation du lecteur de bande (J_TBU_PWR) 4 Lecteur 2 (SASDRV2) 5 Lecteur 3 (SASDRV3) 6 Lecteur 1 (SASDRV1) 7 Alimentation du fond de panier (J_BP_PWR)Composants et bus PCI de la carte de montage pour cartes d'extension La figure 6-6, la figure 6-7 et la figure 6-8 montrent les composants des cartes de montage pour cartes d'extension PCI-X/PCIe en option (logements, bus, etc.). Figure 6-6. Composants de la carte de montage de gauche pour cartes d'extension PCIe (en option) Figure 6-7. Composants de la carte de montage de gauche pour cartes d'extension PCI-X (en option) Figure 6-8. Composants de la carte de montage centrale pour cartes d'extension PCIe (en option) 1 Panneau de commande (CTRL) 2 Carte contrôleur fille SAS (PCIE_STORAGE) 3 Commutateur d'intrusion du châssis 4 CD IDE (IDE) 5 Guides (2) 6 Connecteur de la carte système 1 Plot de dégagement de la carte de montage 2 Logement PCIe 2 (x8) 3 Logement PCIe 3 (x4) 4 Guides (2) 5 Connecteur de la carte système 1 Plot de dégagement de la carte de montage 2 Logement 2 : PCI-X 133 MHz 3 Logement 3 : PCI-X 133 MHz 4 Guides (2) 5 Connecteur de la carte systèmeDésactivation d'un mot de passe oublié  Les fonctionnalités logicielles de protection du système comprennent un mot de passe système et un mot de passe de configuration, qui sont présentés en  détail dans la section Utilisation du programme de configuration du système. Le cavalier de mot de passe active ces fonctions ou les désactive, et efface le(s)  mot(s) de passe utilisé(s). 1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur. 2. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 3. Relevez le protecteur de ventilation de la mémoire.  4. Retirez la fiche du cavalier de mot de passe. Voir figure 6-1 pour identifier l'emplacement du cavalier de mot de passe ("PWRD_EN") sur la carte système. 5. Refermez le système.  6. Reconnectez le système et les périphériques sur le secteur, puis remettez- les sous tension. Pour que les mots de passe existants soient désactivés (effacés), le système doit démarrer avec la fiche du cavalier de mot de passe retirée. Toutefois,  avant d'attribuer un nouveau mot de passe système et/ou de configuration, vous devez réinstaller la fiche du cavalier. 7. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur. 8. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 9. Installez la fiche sur le cavalier du mot de passe. 10. Abaissez le protecteur de ventilation de la mémoire.  11. Refermez le système.  12. Reconnectez le système et les périphériques sur le secteur, puis remettez- les sous tension. 13. Attribuez un nouveau mot de passe système et/ou de configuration.  Pour attribuer un nouveau mot de passe à l'aide du programme de configuration du système, voir Attribution d'un mot de passe système. Retour au sommaire 1 Logement PCI-X 1 (x8) 2 Connecteur de la carte système AVIS : Lisez la section "Protecting Against Electrostatic Discharge" (Protection contre les décharges électrostatiques), qui figure dans les consignes de  sécurité du document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit). REMARQUE : Si vous attribuez un nouveau mot de passe système et/ou de configuration alors que la fiche de cavalier est encore retirée, le  système désactive les nouveaux mots de passe à son prochain démarrage.Retour au sommaire  Utilisation du programme de configuration du système  Systèmes Dell™ PowerVault™ 500 Manuel du propriétaire   Accès au programme de configuration du système  Options du programme de configuration du système  Mot de passe système et mot de passe de configuration  Désactivation d'un mot de passe oublié  Configuration du contrôleur BMC  Après avoir installé le système, lancez le programme de configuration pour vous familiariser avec la configuration et les paramètres facultatifs disponibles.  Notez les informations contenues dans la configuration pour pouvoir vous y reporter ultérieurement. Vous pouvez utiliser le programme de configuration du système pour : l Modifier les informations de configuration stockées dans la mémoire vive rémanente après l'ajout, la modification ou le retrait de matériel l Définir ou modifier les options que l'utilisateur peut sélectionner, par exemple l'heure et la date du système l Activer ou désactiver les périphériques intégrés l Corriger les incohérences éventuelles entre le matériel installé et les paramètres de configuration Accès au programme de configuration du système  1. Allumez ou redémarrez le système.  2. Appuyez sur  immédiatement après le message suivant :  = System Setup Si le système d'exploitation commence à se charger alors que vous n'avez pas encore appuyé sur , laissez-le finir de démarrer, puis arrêtez-le et réessayez. Réponse aux messages d'erreur Vous pouvez accéder au programme de configuration du système en répondant à certains messages d'erreur. Si un message d'erreur s'affiche quand le  système démarre, notez ce message. Avant d'accéder au programme de configuration du système, voir Messages système pour trouver une explication du message et des suggestions de correction. Utilisation du programme de configuration du système Le tableau 2-1 répertorie les touches utilisées pour afficher ou modifier les informations affichées dans les écrans du programme de configuration du système,  et pour quitter ce programme. Tableau 2-1. Touches de navigation du programme de configuration du système Options du programme de configuration du système  REMARQUE : Pour arrêter correctement le système, consultez la documentation du système d'exploitation. REMARQUE : Il est normal qu'un message d'erreur s'affiche lorsque vous redémarrez le système après avoir installé une extension de mémoire. Touches Action Flèche vers le haut ou  Le curseur passe au champ précédent. Flèche vers le bas ou  Le curseur passe au champ suivant. Barre d'espacement, <+>, <–>, flèche vers la gauche  ou vers la droite Permet de faire défiler les options disponibles pour un champ. Vous pouvez également taper la  valeur appropriée dans certains champs. <Échap> Quitte le programme et redémarre le système si des changements ont été effectués.  Ouvre le fichier d'aide du programme de configuration du système. REMARQUE : Pour la plupart des options, les modifications effectuées sont enregistrées mais ne prennent effet qu'au redémarrage du système.Écran principal Lorsque vous accédez au programme de configuration du système, son écran principal apparaît (voir figure 2-1). Figure 2-1. Écran principal du programme de configuration du système Le tableau 2-2 répertorie les options et les descriptions des champs qui apparaissent dans l'écran principal du programme de configuration du système. Tableau 2-2. Options du programme de configuration du système  REMARQUE : Les options disponibles varient en fonction de la configuration du système. REMARQUE : Les valeurs par défaut sont répertoriées sous l'option correspondante, le cas échéant. Option Description System Time Réinitialise l'heure de l'horloge interne du système. System Date Réinitialise la date du calendrier interne du système. Memory Information Affiche des informations relatives à la mémoire système, vidéo et redondante, y compris la taille, le type et la vitesse. CPU Information Affiche des informations relatives aux microprocesseurs (vitesse, taille de la mémoire cache, etc.). Pour activer ou désactiver la  technologie Hyper-Threading, modifiez le paramètre de l'option Logical Processor (Processeur logique). Voir tableau 2-4. SATA Port X Affiche le type et la capacité du lecteur SATA connecté au port X. Boot Sequence Détermine l'ordre dans lequel le système recherche les périphériques d'amorçage pendant le démarrage du système. Les options  disponibles sont le lecteur de disquette, le lecteur de CD, les disques durs et le réseau. Des options supplémentaires (telles qu'un  lecteur de disquette et de CD-ROM virtuel) peuvent être disponibles si vous avez installé une carte RAC. REMARQUE : Le démarrage du système à partir d'un périphérique externe connecté à une carte SAS ou SCSI n'est pas pris en  charge. Voir le site support.dell.com pour obtenir les informations les plus récentes concernant le démarrage à partir de  périphériques externes. USB Flash Drive Type Auto (option par défaut) Détermine le type d'émulation pour le lecteur flash USB. L'option Hard disk (Disque dur) permet au lecteur flash USB de fonctionner comme un disque dur. L'option Floppy (Lecteur de disquette) permet au lecteur flash USB de se comporter comme un lecteur de disquette amovible. L'option Auto choisit automatiquement le type d'émulation. Boot Sequence Retry Disabled (Désactivé,  option par défaut) Active ou désactive la fonction de ré-exécution de la séquence d'amorçage. Si vous sélectionnez Enabled (Activé), le système ré- exécute la séquence d'amorçage après un délai de 30 secondes si la tentative d'amorçage précédente a échoué. Integrated Devices Voir tableau 2-5. PCI IRQ Assignment Affiche un écran permettant de modifier l'IRQ affectée à chaque périphérique intégré du bus PCI, ainsi qu'à toutes les cartes  d'extension nécessitant une IRQ. Serial Communication Affiche un écran permettant de configurer une communication série, un connecteur série externe, le débit de la ligne de secours, le  type de terminal distant et les paramètres de redirection après amorçage. Embedded Server Management Affiche un écran permettant de configurer les options de l'écran LCD du panneau avant et de définir une chaîne affichée sur cet  écran. System Security Affiche un écran permettant de configurer le mot de passe système ainsi que les fonctions de mot de passe. Voir tableau 2-7. Pour plus d'informations, voir Utilisation du mot de passe système et Utilisation du mot de passe de configuration. Keyboard NumLock On (Activé, option par  défaut) Détermine si le système démarre en mode VERR NUM s'il est équipé d'un clavier à 101 ou 102 touches (cette option ne s'applique pas  aux claviers à 84 touches). Report Keyboard Errors Report (Signaler, option par défaut) Active ou désactive la consignation des erreurs liées au clavier pendant l'auto-test de démarrage. Sélectionnez Report (Signaler) pour les systèmes hôtes équipés de claviers. Sélectionnez Do Not Report (Ne pas signaler) pour supprimer tous les messages d'erreur liés au clavier ou à son contrôleur pendant l'auto-test de démarrage. Ce paramètre n'affecte pas le fonctionnement du  clavier lui-même, s'il est connecté au système. Asset Tag Affiche le numéro d'inventaire du système, s'il existe. Ce numéro peut être défini par le client.Écran Memory Information (Informations sur la mémoire) Le tableau 2-3 répertorie les descriptions des champs qui apparaissent dans l'écran Memory Information (Informations sur la mémoire). Tableau 2-3. Écran Memory Information (Informations sur la mémoire)  Écran CPU Information (Informations sur les processeurs) Le tableau 2-4 répertorie les options et les descriptions des champs qui apparaissent dans l'écran CPU Information (Informations sur les processeurs). Tableau 2-4. Écran CPU Information (Informations sur les processeurs)  Écran Integrated Devices (Périphériques intégrés) Le tableau 2-5 répertorie les options et les descriptions des champs qui apparaissent dans l'écran Integrated Devices (Périphériques intégrés). Tableau 2-5. Options de l'écran Integrated Devices (Périphériques intégrés)  Option Description System Memory Size Affiche la quantité de mémoire système. System Memory Type Affiche le type de la mémoire. System Memory Speed Affiche la vitesse de la mémoire système. Video Memory Affiche la quantité de mémoire vidéo. System Memory Testing Indique si la mémoire système doit être testée à chaque amorçage. Les valeurs possibles sont Enabled (Activé) et Disabled (Désactivé).  Redundant Memory Disabled (Désactivé,  option par défaut) Active ou désactive la fonction de mémoire redondante. Lorsque l'option Spare Mode (Mode réserve) est sélectionnée, la première  rangée de chaque barrette DIMM est dédiée à la mémoire de réserve. Voir Prise en charge de la mémoire de réserve. Lorsque le champ Node Interleaving (Imbrication des nuds) est activé, la fonction de mémoire redondante est désactivée.  Snoop Filter Disabled (Désactivé,  option par défaut) Active ou désactive le filtre de surveillance. Low Power Mode Disabled (Désactivé,  option par défaut) Active ou désactive le mode d'économie d'énergie pour la mémoire. Si l'option Disabled (Désactivé) est sélectionnée, la mémoire  fonctionne à sa vitesse maximale. Si l'option Enabled (Activé) est sélectionnée, la mémoire fonctionne à vitesse réduite afin  d'économiser de l'énergie. REMARQUE : Sur certains systèmes et avec certaines configurations de mémoire, vous devez effectuer un redémarrage à froid si vous  modifiez cette option pour passer de Enabled (Activé) à Disabled (Désactivé). Option Description Bus Speed Affiche la vitesse de bus des processeurs. Logical Processor Enabled (Activé,  option par défaut) Indique si les processeurs prennent en charge la fonction HyperThreading. L'option Enabled (Activé) permet au système  d'exploitation d'utiliser tous les processeurs logiques. Si l'option Disabled (Désactivé) est sélectionnée, seul le premier processeur  logique de chaque processeur installé est utilisé par le système d'exploitation. Adjacent Cache Line Prefetch Enabled (Activé,  option par défaut) Active ou désactive l'utilisation optimale de l'accès séquentiel à la mémoire. Désactivez cette option pour les applications utilisant  majoritairement un accès aléatoire à la mémoire. Virtualization Technology Disabled (Désactivé,  option par défaut) S'affiche si le ou les processeurs prennent en charge la technologie Virtualization. L'option Enabled (Activé) permet aux logiciels de  virtualisation d'utiliser cette technologie intégrée au processeur. Cette fonction peut être utilisée uniquement par les logiciels  compatibles. Hardware Prefetcher Enabled (Activé,  option par défaut) Active ou désactive le service Prefetcher pour le matériel. Demand-Based Power Management Enabled (Activé,  option par défaut) Active ou désactive la gestion de l'alimentation en fonction de la demande. Si cette option est activée, les tables d'état des  performances du processeur sont envoyées au système d'exploitation. Si l'un des processeurs ne prend pas en charge la gestion de  l'alimentation en fonction de la demande, le champ est en lecture seule et est défini sur Disabled (Désactivé). Processor X ID Affiche la série et le numéro de modèle de chaque processeur. Un sous-menu affiche la vitesse d'horloge du processeur, la taille de la mémoire cache de niveau 2 et le nombre de curs. Option DescriptionÉcran Serial Communication (Communication série) Le tableau 2-6 répertorie les options et les descriptions des champs qui apparaissent dans l'écran Serial Communication (Communication série).  Tableau 2-6. Options de l'écran Serial Communication (Communication série)  Écran System Security (Sécurité du système) Integrated SAS Controller Enabled (Activé, option  par défaut) Active ou désactive le contrôleur SAS intégré. Embedded SATA Off (Désactivé, option  par défaut) Permet de paramétrer le contrôleur SATA intégré sur Off (Désactivé) ou sur ATA Mode (Mode ATA). IDE CD-ROM Controller Auto (option par défaut) Active le contrôleur IDE intégré. Si cette option est définie sur Auto, chaque canal du contrôleur IDE intégré est activé si des  périphériques IDE sont connectés au canal et si aucun contrôleur IDE externe n'est détecté. REMARQUE : Cette option ne s'affiche pas dans le menu si le système n'est pas équipé de ce périphérique en option. User Accessible USB Ports All Ports On (Tous ports activés, option par  défaut) Active ou désactive les ports USB du système qui sont accessibles à l'utilisateur. Les options disponibles sont All Ports On (Tous ports activés), Only Back Ports On (Ports arrières activés) et All Ports Off (Tous ports désactivés). Internal USB Port On (Activé, option par  défaut) Active ou désactive le port USB interne du système. Cette option est active uniquement lorsque l'option User Accessible USB ports  (Ports USB accessibles à l'utilisateur) est définie sur All Ports On (Tous ports activés). Embedded Gb NIC1 Enabled with PXE (Activé avec PXE, option  par défaut) Active ou désactive le NIC intégré du système. Les options disponibles sont Enabled without PXE (Activé sans PXE), Enabled with PXE (Activé avec PXE) et Disabled (Désactivé). Le support PXE permet au système de démarrer à partir du réseau. Les  modifications prennent effet après le redémarrage du système. MAC Address Affiche l'adresse MAC du NIC 10/100/1000 intégré. L'utilisateur ne peut pas modifier la valeur de ce champ. TOE Capability Affiche l'état de la fonctionnalité TOE (TCP/IP Offload Engine, moteur de décentralisation TCP/IP) pour le NIC intégré. Embedded Gb NIC2 Enabled with PXE (Activé avec PXE, option  par défaut) Active ou désactive le NIC intégré du système. Les options disponibles sont Enabled without PXE (Activé sans PXE), Enabled with PXE (Activé avec PXE) et Disabled (Désactivé). Le support PXE permet au système de démarrer à partir du réseau. Les  modifications prennent effet après le redémarrage du système. MAC Address Affiche l'adresse MAC du NIC 10/100/1000 intégré. L'utilisateur ne peut pas modifier la valeur de ce champ. TOE Capability Affiche l'état de la fonctionnalité TOE (TCP/IP Offload Engine, moteur de décentralisation TCP/IP) pour le NIC intégré. Diskette Controller Auto (option par défaut) Active ou désactive le contrôleur du lecteur de disquette. Si l'option Auto est sélectionnée, le système désactive le contrôleur pour  pouvoir prendre en charge une carte contrôleur installée dans un logement d'extension. Les autres options disponibles sont  Read-Only (Lecture seule) et Off (Désactivé). Si vous sélectionnez Read-Only, le lecteur ne peut pas être utilisé pour écrire des  données. OS Watchdog Timer Disabled (Désactivé,  option par défaut) REMARQUE : Cette fonction peut être utilisée uniquement avec les systèmes d'exploitation prenant en charge les implémentations  WDAT de la spécification ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) 3.0b. Cette option définit un temporisateur qui surveille l'activité du système d'exploitation et aide à sa restauration si le système cesse  de répondre. Si l'option Enabled (Activé) est sélectionnée, le système d'exploitation est autorisé à initialiser ce temporisateur. Si  l'option Disabled (Désactivé) est sélectionnée, le temporisateur n'est pas initialisé. I/OAT DMA Engine Disable (Désactivé,  option par défaut) Active ou désactive la technologie d'accélération des E/S (I/OAT). Cette fonction doit être activée uniquement si cette technologie  est prise en charge à la fois par le matériel et par les logiciels. System Interrupts Assignment Standard (Option par défaut) Contrôle les interruptions affectées aux périphériques PCI du système. L'option Distributed (Distribué) redéfinit le routage des  interruptions de manière à réduire au minimum le partage des IRQ. Option Description Serial Communication Off (Désactivé, option par  défaut) Les options disponibles sont On with Console Redirection (Activé avec redirection de console) via COM2 et Off (Désactivé).  Failsafe Baud Rate 57600 (option par défaut) Affiche le débit de la ligne de secours utilisée pour la redirection de console lorsque le débit (en bauds) ne peut pas être  négocié automatiquement avec le terminal distant. Ce débit ne doit pas être modifié. Remote Terminal Type VT 100/VT 220 (option par défaut) Sélectionnez VT 100/VT 220 ou ANSI. Redirection After Boot Enabled (Activé, option par  défaut) Active ou désactive la redirection de console pour le BIOS après le démarrage du système d'exploitation.Le tableau 2-7 répertorie les options et les descriptions des champs qui apparaissent dans l'écran System Security (Sécurité du système). Tableau 2-7. Options de l'écran System Security (Sécurité du système)  Option Description System Password Affiche l'état actuel de la fonction de protection par mot de passe et permet d'attribuer et de confirmer un nouveau mot de passe  système. REMARQUE : Voir Utilisation du mot de passe système pour obtenir des instructions sur l'attribution, l'utilisation ou la modification d'un mot de passe système existant. Setup Password Restreint l'accès au programme de configuration du système, tout comme le mot de passe système protège l'accès à ce dernier. REMARQUE : Voir Utilisation du mot de passe de configuration pour plus d'instructions sur l'attribution, l'utilisation ou la modification d'un mot de passe de configuration existant. Password Status Si l'option Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration) est définie sur Enabled (Activé), le mot de passe système ne peut pas être  modifié ni désactivé au démarrage du système. Pour empêcher toute modification du mot de passe système, définissez un mot de passe de configuration à l'aide de l'option Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration), puis paramétrez Password Status (État du mot de passe) sur Locked (Verrouillé). Le mot  de passe système ne peut alors plus être changé via l'option System Password. Il est également impossible de le désactiver au  démarrage du système en appuyant sur . Pour déverrouiller le mot de passe système, entrez le mot de passe de configuration dans le champ Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration) et paramétrez Password Status (État du mot de passe) sur Unlocked (Non verrouillé). Il redevient alors possible de  désactiver le mot de passe système au démarrage en appuyant sur , puis de le modifier en utilisant l'option System Password (Mot de passe système). TPM Security Off (Désactivé,  option par défaut) Définit les modalités de déclaration du module TPM (Trusted Platform Module) dans le système. Lorsque l'option par défaut Off (Désactivé) est sélectionnée, la présence du module TPM n'est pas signalée au système d'exploitation. Lorsque l'option On with Pre-boot Measurements (Activée avec mesures pré-amorçage) est sélectionnée, le système signale la  présence du module TPM au système d'exploitation et stocke les mesures pré-amorçage dans ce module lors de l'auto-test de démarrage, conformément aux normes du Trusted Computing Group. Lorsque l'option On without Pre-boot Measurements (Activé sans mesures pré-amorçage) est sélectionnée, le système signale la  présence du module TPM au système d'exploitation mais n'effectue aucune mesure pré-amorçage. TPM Activation Modifie l'état de fonctionnement du module TPM. Lorsque l'option Activate (Activer) est sélectionnée, le module TPM est activé par défaut. Lorsque l'option Deactivate (Désactiver) est sélectionnée, le module TPM est désactivé. L'état No Change ne lance aucune action. L'état de fonctionnement du module TPM reste inchangé (tous les paramètres utilisateur  correspondants sont conservés). REMARQUE : Lorsque le champ TPM Security (Sécurité TPM) est défini sur Off (Désactivé), ce champ est uniquement accessible en  lecture. TPM Clear No (Non, Option par défaut) AVIS : L'effacement du module TPM entraîne la perte de toutes les clés de cryptage qu'il contient. Cette opération empêche le  démarrage du système d'exploitation. Si les clés de cryptage ne peuvent pas être restaurées, des données risquent d'être perdues.  Vous devez donc impérativement créer une copie de sauvegarde des clés TPM avant d'activer cette option. Si l'option Yes (Oui) est sélectionnée, le contenu intégral des clés TPM est effacé. REMARQUE : Lorsque le champ TPM Security (Sécurité TPM) est défini sur Off (Désactivé), ce champ est uniquement accessible en  lecture. Power Button Enabled (Activé,  option par défaut) Ce bouton met le système sous tension et hors tension. l Si vous éteignez un ordinateur utilisant un système d'exploitation conforme ACPI en appuyant sur le bouton d'alimentation, le  système peut effectuer un arrêt normal avant que l'alimentation ne soit coupée. l Si le système d'exploitation n'est pas conforme ACPI, une pression sur ce bouton met immédiatement l'ordinateur hors tension. Ce bouton est activé dans le programme de configuration du système. Si vous sélectionnez "Disabled" (Désactivé), le bouton sert  uniquement à mettre le système sous tension. REMARQUE : Il est toujours possible d'allumer le système à l'aide du bouton d'alimentation, même si l'option Power Button (Bouton d'alimentation) a la valeur Disabled (Désactivé). NMI Button Disabled (Désactivé, option  par défaut) AVIS : Utilisez ce bouton uniquement si un technicien de support qualifié vous demande de le faire, ou si cela est préconisé dans la  documentation du système d'exploitation. Lorsque vous appuyez dessus, le système d'exploitation s'arrête et affiche un écran de  diagnostic.Écran Exit (Quitter) Une fois que vous avez appuyé sur <Échap> pour quitter le programme de configuration du système, l'écran Exit (Quitter) affiche les options suivantes : l Save Changes and Exit (Enregistrer les modifications et quitter) l Discard Changes and Exit (Annuler les modifications et quitter) l Return to Setup (Retourner au programme de configuration) Mot de passe système et mot de passe de configuration  À la livraison de l'ordinateur, le mot de passe système n'est pas activé. Si votre système doit impérativement être protégé, ne l'utilisez qu'après avoir activé la  protection par mot de passe. Vous ne pouvez changer ou supprimer que les mots de passe que vous connaissez (voir Suppression ou modification d'un mot de passe système existant). Si vous avez oublié votre mot de passe, vous ne pourrez pas faire fonctionner le système ni modifier sa configuration tant qu'un technicien de maintenance  qualifié n'aura pas désactivé et effacé les mots de passe en déplaçant le cavalier approprié sur la carte mère. Cette procédure est décrite dans la section  Désactivation d'un mot de passe oublié. Utilisation du mot de passe système Si un mot de passe système est défini, seuls ceux qui le connaissent ont accès au système. Si le paramètre System Password (Mot de passe système) est  réglé sur Enabled (Activé), le mot de passe doit être entré au démarrage de l'ordinateur. Attribution d'un mot de passe système  Avant d'attribuer un mot de passe système, accédez au programme de configuration du système et vérifiez l'option System Password (Mot de passe système). Si un mot de passe système est attribué, l'option System Password a la valeur Enabled (Activé). Si le paramètre Password Status (État du mot de passe)  indique Unlocked (Non verrouillé), vous pouvez modifier le mot de passe système. Si Password Status (État du mot de passe) indique Locked (Verrouillé),  vous ne pouvez pas modifier ce mot de passe. Si le mot de passe système est désactivé par la position d'un cavalier, l'état est Disabled (Désactivé). Il est  alors impossible d'entrer ce mot de passe et de le modifier. Si aucun mot de passe système n'est attribué et si le cavalier de mot de passe de la carte système est sur la position activée (réglage par défaut), l'option  System Password (Mot de passe système) est définie sur Not Enabled (Non activé) et le champ Password Status (État du mot de passe) indique Unlocked (Non verrouillé). Pour attribuer un mot de passe système : 1. Vérifiez que l'option Password Status (État du mot de passe) a la valeur Unlocked (Non verrouillé).  2. Sélectionnez System Password (Mot de passe système) et appuyez sur .  3. Tapez le nouveau mot de passe système.  Le mot de passe peut contenir jusqu'à 32 caractères. Les caractères entrés ne sont pas affichés dans le champ, ils sont remplacés (y compris les espaces) par des caractères génériques. Le mot de passe ne tient pas compte de la différence entre majuscules et minuscules. Cependant, certaines combinaisons de touches ne sont pas  valides. Si vous entrez une de ces combinaisons, le système émet un signal sonore. Pour supprimer un caractère lors de l'entrée de votre mot de passe,  appuyez sur la touche  ou sur la touche fléchée vers la gauche. 4. Appuyez sur .  5. Pour confirmer votre mot de passe, tapez-le une seconde fois et appuyez sur .  Cette option permet d'activer (On) ou de désactiver (Off) la fonction NMI. AC Power Recovery Last (Dernier, option par défaut) Détermine le comportement du système au retour de l'alimentation secteur. L'option Last (Dernier) indique que le système doit revenir  au même état qu'avant la coupure d'alimentation. Avec l'option On (Marche), le système démarre dès que l'alimentation en CA est  rétablie. Avec l'option Off (Arrêt), il reste hors tension quand l'alimentation en CA est rétablie. AVIS : Les mots de passe offrent simplement une fonction de sécurité de base protégeant les données du système. Si vos données nécessitent une  protection plus importante, prenez des mesures supplémentaires (chiffrement des données, etc.).  AVIS : Il est très facile d'accéder aux données stockées sur le système si vous laissez celui-ci sans surveillance alors que vous n'avez pas défini de mot  de passe système. Si l'ordinateur n'est pas verrouillé, une personne non autorisée peut aussi déplacer le cavalier d'activation du mot de passe et  effacer ce dernier. REMARQUE : Pour quitter le champ sans attribuer de mot de passe, appuyez sur  pour passer à un autre champ, ou bien appuyez sur  <Échap> à tout moment avant la fin de l'étape 5.L'option System Password (Mot de passe système) prend la valeur Enabled (Activé). Quittez le programme de configuration en sauvegardant et  commencez à utiliser le système. 6. Vous pouvez redémarrer le système immédiatement pour activer la protection par mot de passe, ou simplement continuer à travailler.  Protection de l'ordinateur à l'aide d'un mot de passe système  Lorsque le paramètre Password Status (État du mot de passe) a la valeur Unlocked (Non verrouillé), vous pouvez activer ou désactiver la protection par mot  de passe. Pour laisser la protection par mot de passe activée : 1. Démarrez le système ou redémarrez-le en appuyant sur . 2. Tapez le mot de passe et appuyez sur .  Pour désactiver la protection par mot de passe : 1. Démarrez le système ou redémarrez-le en appuyant sur . 2. Tapez le mot de passe et appuyez sur .  Si l'option Password Status (État du mot de passe) a la valeur Locked (Verrouillé) lorsque vous allumez ou redémarrez le système (en appuyant sur  ), tapez votre mot de passe et appuyez sur  à l'invite du système. Une fois que vous avez tapé le mot de passe système correct et appuyé sur , le système fonctionne normalement. Si vous entrez un mot de passe incorrect, le système affiche un message et vous invite à entrer de nouveau votre mot de passe. Vous disposez de trois  tentatives pour entrer le bon mot de passe. Après une troisième tentative infructueuse, le système indique qu'il va s'arrêter. Ce message peut vous alerter du  fait qu'une personne a essayé d'utiliser le système à votre insu. Même si vous avez éteint et redémarré le système, le message d'erreur continue à s'afficher jusqu'à ce que le bon mot de passe soit entré. Suppression ou modification d'un mot de passe système existant  1. À l'invite, appuyez sur  pour désactiver le mot de passe système existant.  S'il vous est demandé d'entrer le mot de passe de configuration, contactez votre administrateur réseau. 2. Pour ouvrir le programme de configuration du système, appuyez sur  pendant l'auto-test de démarrage.  3. Sélectionnez le champ System Security (Sécurité du système) pour vérifier que l'option Password Status (État du mot de passe) est définie sur  Unlocked (Non verrouillé).  4. À l'invite, entrez le mot de passe système.  5. Vérifiez que l'option System Password (Mot de passe système) est définie sur Not Enabled (Non activé).  Si tel est le cas, le mot de passe système a été supprimé. Si l'option System Password (Mot de passe système) est définie sur Enabled (Activé),  appuyez sur  pour redémarrer le système, puis recommencez les étapes 2 à 5. Utilisation du mot de passe de configuration Attribution d'un mot de passe de configuration Un mot de passe de configuration ne peut être attribué (ou modifié) que lorsque l'option Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration) est définie sur Not Enabled (Non activé). Pour attribuer un mot de passe de configuration, sélectionnez l'option Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration) et appuyez sur <+> ou sur <–>. Le système vous invite à entrer et à confirmer le mot de passe. Si vous utilisez un caractère non autorisé, le système émet un signal sonore. REMARQUE : La protection par mot de passe ne prend effet que lorsque vous redémarrez le système. REMARQUE : Si vous avez attribué un mot de passe de configuration (voir Utilisation du mot de passe de configuration), le système l'accepte également  comme mot de passe système. REMARQUE : Vous pouvez combiner l'utilisation des paramètres Password Status (État du mot de passe), System Password (Mot de passe système)  et Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration) pour mieux protéger le système contre toute modification non autorisée. REMARQUE : Le mot de passe de configuration peut être identique à celui du système. Si les deux mots de passe sont différents, le mot de passe de  configuration peut être utilisé à la place du mot de passe système, mais l'opération inverse n'est pas possible.Le mot de passe peut contenir jusqu'à 32 caractères. Les caractères entrés ne sont pas affichés dans le champ, ils sont remplacés (y compris les espaces) par des caractères génériques. Le mot de passe ne tient pas compte de la différence entre majuscules et minuscules. Cependant, certaines combinaisons de touches ne sont pas valides. Si  vous entrez une de ces combinaisons, le système émet un signal sonore. Pour supprimer un caractère lors de l'entrée de votre mot de passe, appuyez sur la  touche  ou sur la touche fléchée vers la gauche. Une fois le mot de passe vérifié, le paramètre Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration) prend la valeur Enabled (Activé). La prochaine fois que vous  accéderez au programme de configuration, le système vous demandera d'entrer le mot de passe de configuration. La modification du mot de passe de configuration prend effet immédiatement (il n'est pas nécessaire de redémarrer le système). Fonctionnement du système avec un mot de passe de configuration activé  Si le paramètre Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration) a la valeur Enabled (Activé), vous devez entrer ce mot de passe pour modifier la plupart des  options de configuration du système. Une invite de saisie s'affiche lorsque vous accédez au programme de configuration du système. Si vous n'entrez pas le bon mot de passe au bout de trois essais, vous pouvez visualiser les écrans de configuration du système mais vous ne pouvez y  apporter aucune modification. La seule exception est la suivante : si le paramètre System Password (Mot de passe système) n'a pas la valeur Enabled (Activé) et n'est pas verrouillé par l'option Password Status (État du mot de passe), vous pouvez attribuer un mot de passe système. Cependant, vous ne  pouvez pas désactiver ni modifier le mot de passe système existant. Suppression ou modification d'un mot de passe de configuration existant 1. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système et sélectionnez l'option System Security (Sécurité du système).  2. Sélectionnez l'option Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration), appuyez sur  pour accéder à la fenêtre appropriée, et appuyez sur   deux fois pour effacer le mot de passe en cours.  Le paramètre prend la valeur Not Enabled (Non activé).  3. Si vous souhaitez attribuer un nouveau mot de passe de configuration, suivez les étapes décrites dans la section Attribution d'un mot de passe de configuration. Désactivation d'un mot de passe oublié  Voir Désactivation d'un mot de passe oublié. Configuration du contrôleur BMC  Le contrôleur BMC (Baseboard Management Controller) permet de configurer, contrôler et restaurer les systèmes à distance. Il offre les fonctionnalités  suivantes : l Utilisation du NIC intégré au système l Consignation des incidents et alertes SNMP l Accès au journal d'événements du système et à l'état du capteur l Contrôle des fonctions du système, y compris la mise sous tension et hors tension l Support indépendant de l'état d'alimentation ou de fonctionnement du système l Redirection de la console de texte pour le programme de configuration du système, les utilitaires à interface texte et les consoles du système  d'exploitation Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation du contrôleur BMC, consultez la documentation des applications BMC et des logiciels de gestion de systèmes. Accès au module de configuration BMC 1. Allumez ou redémarrez le système.  2. À l'invite qui s'affiche après l'auto-test de démarrage, appuyez sur . Si le système d'exploitation commence à se charger alors que vous n'avez pas encore appuyé sur , laissez-le finir de démarrer, puis arrêtez-le REMARQUE : Il est possible de combiner l'utilisation des options Password Status (État du mot de passe) et Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration) pour empêcher toute modification du mot de passe système. REMARQUE : Pour accéder à distance au contrôleur BMC à l'aide du NIC intégré, vous devez connecter le réseau au NIC1 intégré.et réessayez. Options du module de configuration du contrôleur BMC Pour plus d'informations concernant les options du module de configuration du contrôleur BMC et du port EMP (port de gestion d'urgence), consultez le  document BMC User's Guide (Contrôleur BMC - Guide d'utilisation). Retour au sommaireRetour au sommaire  Dépannage du système  Systèmes Dell™ PowerVault™ 500 Manuel du propriétaire   La sécurité d'abord, pour vous et pour le système  Routine de démarrage  Vérification du matériel  Dépannage des fonctions d'E/S de base  Dépannage d'un NIC  Dépannage d'un système mouillé  Dépannage d'un système endommagé  Dépannage de la pile du système  Dépannage des blocs d'alimentation  Dépannage des incidents de refroidissement du système  Dépannage de la mémoire système  Dépannage d'un lecteur de disquette  Dépannage d'un lecteur optique  Dépannage d'un lecteur de bande SCSI externe  Dépannage d'un disque dur  Dépannage d'une carte contrôleur fille SAS ou RAID SAS  Dépannage des cartes d'extension  Dépannage des microprocesseurs  La sécurité d'abord, pour vous et pour le système  Pour effectuer certaines des procédures décrites ici, vous devez retirer le capot du système et intervenir à l'intérieur. Lorsque vous intervenez sur le système,  suivez strictement les opérations décrites dans ce guide ou dans une autre documentation accompagnant le système.  Routine de démarrage  Écoutez et observez le système pendant la procédure de démarrage, pour repérer les symptômes décrits dans le tableau 1-1. Vérification du matériel  Cette section contient les procédures de dépannage des périphériques externes directement connectés au système, comme le moniteur, le clavier ou la  souris. Avant de suivre l'une de ces procédures, voir Dépannage des connexions externes. Résolution des conflits d'attribution d'IRQ La plupart des périphériques PCI peuvent partager une IRQ avec un autre périphérique ; cependant, les deux périphériques concernés ne peuvent pas  PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Avant de commencer toute intervention, reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges  électrostatiques. Symptôme Action L'écran LCD du panneau avant affiche un message d'état ou d'erreur. Voir Messages d'état affichés sur l'écran LCD. Affichage d'un message d'erreur sur le moniteur. Voir Messages système. Messages d'alerte du logiciel de gestion de systèmes. Consultez la documentation du logiciel de gestion de systèmes. Comportement du voyant d'alimentation du moniteur. Voir Dépannage du sous-système vidéo. Comportement des voyants du clavier. Voir Dépannage du clavier. Comportement du voyant d'activité du lecteur de disquette USB. Voir Dépannage d'un périphérique USB. Comportement du voyant d'activité du lecteur de CD USB. Voir Dépannage d'un périphérique USB. Comportement du voyant d'activité du lecteur de disquette. Voir Dépannage d'un lecteur de disquette. Comportement du voyant d'activité du lecteur de CD. Voir Dépannage d'un lecteur optique. Comportement du voyant d'activité du disque dur. Voir Dépannage d'un disque dur. Bruit inhabituel de raclement ou de grincement constant lors de l'accès à un lecteur. Voir Obtention d'aide.fonctionner simultanément. Pour éviter ce type de conflit, consultez la documentation de chaque périphérique PCI pour obtenir ses spécifications d'IRQ. Les  affectations des IRQ sont répertoriées dans le tableau 4-2. Tableau 4-2. Affectations par défaut des IRQ  Dépannage des connexions externes Le plus souvent, les incidents liés au système, au moniteur et aux autres périphériques (comme une imprimante, un clavier, une souris ou un autre  périphérique externe) sont causés par des câbles mal raccordés ou débranchés. Vérifiez que tous les câbles externes sont fermement raccordés aux  connecteurs correspondants. Voir les sections Voyants et caractéristiques du panneau avant et Voyants et caractéristiques du panneau arrière pour identifier les connecteurs des panneaux avant et arrière du système. Dépannage du sous-système vidéo  Incident l Le moniteur ne fonctionne pas correctement. l La mémoire vidéo est défectueuse. Action 1. Vérifiez les connexions du moniteur à l'alimentation et au système.  2. Déterminez si le système contient une carte d'extension équipée d'un connecteur de sortie vidéo.  Si tel est le cas, le câble du moniteur doit être branché sur le connecteur de la carte d'extension, et non sur le connecteur vidéo intégré du système. Pour vérifier que le moniteur est relié au connecteur approprié, mettez le système hors tension, attendez une minute, puis reliez le moniteur à l'autre  connecteur vidéo. Remettez ensuite le système sous tension. 3. Déterminez si des moniteurs sont reliés à la fois au connecteur vidéo avant et au connecteur vidéo arrière.  Le système prend en charge un seul moniteur, qui doit être connecté soit à l'avant, soit à l'arrière. Si un moniteur est connecté au panneau avant,  le connecteur vidéo et les connecteurs de clavier et de souris PS/2 situés sur le panneau arrière sont désactivés. Si deux moniteurs sont reliés au système, déconnectez-en un. Si l'incident persiste, passez à l'étape suivante. 4. Exécutez le test de diagnostic en ligne approprié. Voir Utilisation des diagnostics de Server Administrator. Si les tests aboutissent, l'incident n'est pas lié au matériel vidéo. Si les tests échouent, voir Obtention d'aide. Ligne IRQ Affectation IRQ0 Horloge du système IRQ1 Contrôleur du clavier IRQ2 Contrôleur d'interruption 1, pour activer les IRQ 8 à 15 IRQ3 Port série 2 (COM2 et COM4) IRQ4 Port série 1 (COM1 et COM3) IRQ5 Contrôleur RAC IRQ6 Contrôleur du lecteur de disquette IRQ7 Réservé IRQ8 Horloge temps réel IRQ9 Fonctions ACPI (pour la gestion de l'alimentation) IRQ10 Disponible IRQ11 Disponible IRQ12 Port de souris PS/2, sauf si celle-ci est désactivée dans le programme de configuration du système IRQ13 Coprocesseur mathématique IRQ14 Contrôleur du lecteur de CD IDE IRQ15 DisponibleDépannage du clavier Incident l Un message d'erreur du système signale un incident lié au clavier. l Le clavier ne fonctionne pas correctement. Action 1. Accédez au programme de configuration du système et vérifiez que les ports USB sont activés. Voir Utilisation du programme de configuration du  système. 2. Examinez le clavier et son câble pour voir s'ils sont endommagés.  3. Remplacez le clavier défectueux par un clavier fiable.  Si l'incident est résolu, remplacez le clavier défectueux. Voir Obtention d'aide. 4. Exécutez le test de diagnostic en ligne approprié. Voir Utilisation des diagnostics de Server Administrator. Si l'incident persiste, voir Obtention d'aide. Dépannage de la souris Incident l Un message d'erreur du système signale un incident lié à la souris. l La souris ne fonctionne pas correctement. Action 1. Exécutez le test de diagnostic en ligne approprié. Voir Utilisation des diagnostics de Server Administrator. Si le test échoue, passez à l'étape suivante. 2. Examinez la souris et son câble pour voir s'ils sont endommagés.  Si la souris n'est pas endommagée, passez à l'étape 4. Si la souris est endommagée, passez à l'étape suivante. 3. Remplacez la souris défectueuse par une souris fiable.  Si l'incident est résolu, remplacez la souris défectueuse. Voir Obtention d'aide. 4. Accédez au programme de configuration du système et vérifiez que le port USB est activé. Voir Utilisation du programme de configuration du système. Si l'incident persiste, voir Obtention d'aide. Dépannage des fonctions d'E/S de base  Incident l Un message d'erreur signale un incident lié à un port série. l Un périphérique connecté à un port série ne fonctionne pas correctement. Action1. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système, vérifiez que le port série est activé et que les ports série/COM sont configurés de manière adéquate  pour les applications que vous utilisez. Voir Utilisation du programme de configuration du système. 2. Si l'incident affecte uniquement une application particulière, consultez sa documentation pour connaître la configuration requise des différents ports.  3. Exécutez le test de diagnostic en ligne approprié. Voir Utilisation des diagnostics de Server Administrator. Si l'incident persiste alors que le test a abouti, voir Dépannage d'un périphérique d'E/S série. Dépannage d'un périphérique d'E/S série  Incident l Le périphérique connecté au port série ne fonctionne pas correctement. Action 1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés au port série.  2. Remplacez le câble d'interface série par un câble fiable, puis allumez le système et le périphérique série.  Si l'incident est résolu, remplacez le câble d'interface. 3. Éteignez le système et le périphérique série et remplacez ce dernier par un périphérique similaire.  4. Allumez le système et le périphérique série.  Si l'incident est résolu, remplacez le périphérique série. Voir Obtention d'aide. Si l'incident persiste, voir Obtention d'aide. Dépannage d'un périphérique USB  Incident l Un message du système signale un incident lié à un périphérique USB. l Un périphérique connecté à un port USB ne fonctionne pas correctement. Action 1. Accédez au programme de configuration du système et vérifiez que les ports USB sont activés. Voir Utilisation du programme de configuration du  système. 2. Éteignez le système et tous les périphériques USB.  3. Déconnectez les périphériques USB, puis raccordez le périphérique défectueux à l'autre connecteur USB.  4. Allumez le système et le périphérique reconnecté.  Si l'incident est résolu, le connecteur USB est peut-être défectueux. Voir Obtention d'aide. 5. Si possible, remplacez le câble d'interface par un câble fiable.  Si l'incident est résolu, remplacez le câble d'interface. Voir Obtention d'aide. 6. Éteignez le système et le périphérique USB et remplacez ce dernier par un périphérique similaire.  7. Allumez le système et le périphérique USB.  Si l'incident est résolu, remplacez le périphérique USB. Voir Obtention d'aide.Si l'incident persiste, voir Obtention d'aide. Dépannage d'un NIC  Incident l Le NIC ne parvient pas à communiquer avec le réseau. Action 1. Exécutez le test de diagnostic en ligne approprié. Voir Exécution des diagnostics du système. 2. Observez le voyant approprié du connecteur de NIC. Voir Codes des voyants de NIC. l Si le voyant de lien ne s'allume pas, vérifiez toutes les connexions des câbles. l Si le voyant d'activité ne s'allume pas, les fichiers des pilotes réseau sont peut-être altérés ou manquants. Supprimez puis réinstallez les pilotes le cas échéant. Consultez la documentation du NIC. l Si possible, modifiez le paramétrage de négociation automatique. l Utilisez un autre connecteur sur le commutateur ou le concentrateur. Si vous utilisez une carte réseau au lieu d'un NIC intégré, consultez la documentation fournie avec celle-ci. 3. Vérifiez que les pilotes appropriés sont installés et que les protocoles sont liés. Consultez la documentation du NIC.  4. Accédez au programme de configuration du système et vérifiez que les interfaces réseau sont activées. Voir Utilisation du programme de configuration  du système. 5. Vérifiez que les NIC, les concentrateurs et les commutateurs du réseau sont tous réglés sur la même vitesse de transmission des données. Consultez la  documentation du matériel réseau.  6. Vérifiez que tous les câbles réseau sont du type approprié et qu'ils ne dépassent pas la longueur maximum. Voir le câblage réseau requis dans  le document Getting Started Guide (Guide de mise en route). Dépannage d'un système mouillé  Incident l Système mouillé. l Excès d'humidité. Action 1. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur. 2. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 3. Retirez toutes les cartes d'extension du système. Voir Retrait d'une carte d'extension. 4. Laissez le système sécher complètement pendant au moins 24 heures.  5. Refermez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 6. Rebranchez le système sur la prise secteur et allumez-le, ainsi que les périphériques connectés.  PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Avant de commencer toute intervention, reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges  électrostatiques.Si le système ne démarre pas normalement, voir Obtention d'aide. 7. Si le système démarre normalement, arrêtez-le et réinstallez les cartes d'extension que vous avez retirées. Voir Installation d'une carte d'extension. 8. Exécutez le test de diagnostic en ligne approprié. Voir Utilisation des diagnostics de Server Administrator. Si les tests échouent, voir Obtention d'aide. Dépannage d'un système endommagé  Incident l Le système est tombé ou a été endommagé. Action 1. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 2. Assurez-vous que les composants suivants sont correctement installés :  l Cartes d'extension et de montage l Blocs d'alimentation l Ventilateurs l Processeurs et dissipateurs de chaleur l Barrettes de mémoire l Connexions des supports de lecteurs avec le fond de panier SAS, le cas échéant 3. Vérifiez que tous les câbles sont correctement connectés.  4. Refermez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 5. Lancez les tests System board (Carte système) des diagnostics du système. Voir Exécution des diagnostics du système. Si les tests échouent, voir Obtention d'aide. Dépannage de la pile du système  Incident l Un message du système signale un incident lié à la pile. l Le programme de configuration du système perd les informations. l La date et l'heure du système se dérèglent constamment. Action 1. Entrez de nouveau l'heure et la date dans le programme de configuration du système. Voir Utilisation du programme de configuration du système. 2. Éteignez et débranchez le système de la prise secteur pendant au moins une heure.  3. Rebranchez le système sur la prise secteur et allumez-le. PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Avant de commencer toute intervention, reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges  électrostatiques. REMARQUE : Si le système reste éteint longtemps (pendant des semaines ou des mois), la NVRAM peut perdre ses informations de configuration. Cette  situation est causée par une pile défectueuse. 4. Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système.  Si la date et l'heure du programme de configuration du système ne sont pas correctes, remplacez la pile. Voir Pile du système. Si l'incident persiste malgré le remplacement de la pile, voir Obtention d'aide. Dépannage des blocs d'alimentation  Incident l Les voyants d'état du système sont orange. l Les voyants de panne des blocs d'alimentation sont orange. l L'écran LCD du panneau avant indique qu'un incident lié aux blocs d'alimentation s'est produit. Action 1. Exécutez le test des diagnostics en ligne approprié. Voir Utilisation des diagnostics de Server Administrator. 2. Déterminez l'emplacement du bloc d'alimentation défectueux.  Le voyant de panne du bloc d'alimentation est allumé. Voir Codes du voyant d'alimentation. Retirez le bloc d'alimentation défectueux. Voir Retrait d'un bloc d'alimentation. 3. Retirez et réinstallez le bloc d'alimentation pour vous assurer qu'il est bien en place. Voir Réinstallation d'un bloc d'alimentation. 4. Observez les voyants pour voir si l'incident est résolu. Si tel n'est pas le cas, retirez le bloc d'alimentation défectueux. Voir Retrait d'un bloc d'alimentation. 5. Installez un nouveau bloc d'alimentation. Voir Réinstallation d'un bloc d'alimentation. Si l'incident persiste, voir Obtention d'aide. Dépannage des incidents de refroidissement du système  Incident l Le logiciel de gestion de systèmes a émis un message d'erreur concernant les ventilateurs. Action Vérifiez qu'aucune des conditions suivantes n'est présente : l La température ambiante est trop élevée. l La circulation de l'air extérieur est bloquée. REMARQUE : Certains logiciels peuvent provoquer une accélération ou un ralentissement de l'heure système. Si le système semble fonctionner  normalement à l'exception de l'heure qui est conservée dans le programme de configuration du système, l'incident peut être causé par un logiciel plutôt  que par une pile défectueuse. PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Avant de commencer toute intervention, reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges  électrostatiques. AVIS : Les blocs d'alimentation sont enfichables à chaud. Le système ne peut fonctionner que si au moins un bloc d'alimentation est installé ; il est en  mode redondant si deux blocs d'alimentation sont installés. Ne retirez et ne remplacez qu'un seul bloc d'alimentation à la fois dans un système sous  tension. Il risque de surchauffer si vous l'utilisez pendant une période prolongée avec un seul bloc d'alimentation et sans avoir installé de cache de bloc  d'alimentation. REMARQUE : Après avoir installé un bloc d'alimentation, patientez plusieurs secondes pour laisser au système le temps de le reconnaître et de  déterminer s'il fonctionne correctement. Le voyant d'alimentation s'allume en vert si le bloc d'alimentation fonctionne normalement. Voir Codes du voyant d'alimentation.l Les câbles à l'intérieur du système obstruent la ventilation. l Un des ventilateurs de refroidissement est en panne. Voir Dépannage d'un ventilateur. Dépannage d'un ventilateur Incident l Le voyant d'état du système est orange. l Le logiciel de gestion de systèmes a émis un message d'erreur concernant les ventilateurs. l L'écran LCD du panneau avant signale un incident au niveau du ventilateur. Action 1. Exécutez le test de diagnostic approprié. Voir Utilisation des diagnostics de Server Administrator. 2. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 3. Identifiez le ventilateur défectueux indiqué par l'écran LCD ou le logiciel de diagnostic. Pour connaître le numéro d'identification de chaque ventilateur,  voir figure 3-9. 4. Vérifiez que le câble d'alimentation du ventilateur défectueux est bien raccordé au connecteur approprié. Voir Ventilateurs du système. 5. Si l'incident persiste, installez un nouveau ventilateur. Voir Ventilateurs du système. Si le nouveau ventilateur fonctionne normalement, refermez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. Si le ventilateur de remplacement ne fonctionne pas, voir Obtention d'aide. Dépannage de la mémoire système  Incident l Une barrette de mémoire est défectueuse. l Carte système défectueuse. l L'écran LCD du panneau avant indique qu'un incident lié à la mémoire système s'est produit. Action 1. Exécutez le test de diagnostic en ligne approprié. Voir Utilisation des diagnostics de Server Administrator. 2. Allumez le système et les périphériques connectés.  PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Avant de commencer toute intervention, reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges  électrostatiques. PRÉCAUTION : Les ventilateurs sont enfichables à chaud. Pour maintenir un refroidissement adéquat lorsque le système est sous tension,  remplacez les ventilateurs un à la fois.  REMARQUE : Patientez 30 secondes pour laisser au système le temps de reconnaître le ventilateur et de déterminer s'il fonctionne normalement. PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Avant de commencer toute intervention, reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges  électrostatiques.Si aucun message d'erreur n'apparaît, passez à l'étape suivante. Si un message d'erreur apparaît, passez à l'étape 11. 3. Accédez au programme de configuration du système et vérifiez le paramètre de la mémoire système. Voir Accès au programme de configuration  du système. Si la quantité de mémoire installée correspond au paramètre de mémoire système, passez à l'étape 11. 4. Retirez le cadre. Voir Cadre avant. 5. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur.  6. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 7. Remboîtez les barrettes de mémoire dans leurs supports. Voir Installation de barrettes de mémoire. 8. Refermez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 9. Rebranchez le système sur la prise secteur et allumez-le, ainsi que les périphériques connectés.  10. Accédez au programme de configuration du système et vérifiez le paramètre de la mémoire système. Voir Utilisation du programme de configuration du  système. Si l'espace mémoire installé ne correspond pas au paramètre de mémoire système, effectuez les opérations suivantes : a. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur. b. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. c. Remplacez la barrette de mémoire installée dans le support 1 par une autre de même capacité. Voir Installation de barrettes de mémoire. d. Refermez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. e. Rebranchez le système sur la prise secteur et allumez-le, ainsi que les périphériques connectés.  f. Au démarrage du système, observez l'écran du moniteur et les voyants du clavier.  11. Effectuez les opérations suivantes :  a. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur. b. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. c. Suivez les instructions de l'étape 10 (sections c à f) pour chaque barrette de mémoire installée.  Si l'incident persiste, voir Obtention d'aide. Dépannage d'un lecteur de disquette  Incident l Un message d'erreur signale un incident lié au lecteur de disquette. Action 1. Accédez au programme de configuration du système et vérifiez que le lecteur de disquette est configuré correctement. Voir Utilisation du programme de configuration du système. 2. Ouvrez ou retirez le cadre. Voir Cadre avant. 3. Exécutez le test de diagnostic en ligne approprié. Voir Utilisation des diagnostics de Server Administrator. REMARQUE : Il existe plusieurs configurations pour les barrettes de mémoire. Voir Consignes générales d'installation des barrettes de mémoire. PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Avant de commencer toute intervention, reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges  électrostatiques.4. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur.  5. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 6. Vérifiez que le câble d'interface du lecteur de disquette est fermement raccordé au lecteur de disquette et à la carte système.  7. Vérifiez que le câble d'alimentation est bien connecté au lecteur.  8. Refermez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 9. Rebranchez le système sur la prise secteur et allumez-le, ainsi que les périphériques connectés.  10. Exécutez le test de diagnostic en ligne approprié pour vérifier que le lecteur de disquette fonctionne correctement.  11. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur.  12. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 13. Retirez toutes les cartes d'extension du système. Voir Retrait d'une carte d'extension. 14. Refermez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 15. Rebranchez le système sur la prise secteur et allumez-le, ainsi que les périphériques connectés.  16. Exécutez le test de diagnostic en ligne approprié pour vérifier que le lecteur de disquette fonctionne correctement.  Si les tests réussissent, il est possible qu'une carte d'extension soit en conflit avec la logique du lecteur de disquette ou qu'elle soit défectueuse. Passez  à l'étape suivante. Si les tests échouent, voir Obtention d'aide. 17. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur.  18. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 19. Réinstallez l'une des cartes d'extension retirées à l'étape 13. Voir Installation d'une carte d'extension. 20. Refermez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 21. Rebranchez le système sur la prise secteur et allumez-le, ainsi que les périphériques connectés.  22. Exécutez le test de diagnostic en ligne approprié pour vérifier que le lecteur de disquette fonctionne correctement.  23. Recommencez la procédure décrite de l'étape 17 à l'étape 23, jusqu'à ce que toutes les cartes d'extension soient réinstallées ou que l'une des cartes  fasse échouer les tests.  Si l'incident persiste, voir Obtention d'aide. Dépannage d'un lecteur optique  Incident l Le système ne peut pas lire les données d'un CD ou d'un DVD placé dans le lecteur. l Le voyant du lecteur optique ne clignote pas au démarrage du système. Action 1. Essayez un autre CD ou DVD fiable. PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Avant de commencer toute intervention, reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges  électrostatiques.2. Accédez au programme de configuration du système et vérifiez que le contrôleur IDE du lecteur est activé. Voir Utilisation du programme de configuration du système. 3. Exécutez le test de diagnostic en ligne approprié. Voir Utilisation des diagnostics de Server Administrator. 4. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur.  5. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 6. Vérifiez que le câble d'interface est correctement connecté au lecteur optique et à la carte latérale.  7. Vérifiez que le câble d'alimentation est bien connecté au lecteur.  8. Refermez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 9. Rebranchez le système sur la prise secteur et allumez-le, ainsi que les périphériques connectés.  Si l'incident persiste, voir Obtention d'aide. Dépannage d'un lecteur de bande SCSI externe  Incident l Lecteur de bande défectueux. l Cartouche défectueuse. l Logiciel de sauvegarde sur bande ou pilote du lecteur de bande manquant ou altéré. l Contrôleur SCSI défectueux. Action 1. Retirez la cartouche que vous utilisiez lorsque l'incident s'est produit, et remplacez-la par une autre dont vous êtes certain qu'elle fonctionne.  2. Assurez-vous que les pilotes SCSI nécessaires sont installés et configurés correctement. Voir Retrait et installation d'un lecteur de bande SCSI interne. 3. Réinstallez le logiciel de sauvegarde sur bande en suivant les instructions de sa documentation d'accompagnement.  4. Vérifiez que le câble d'interface/alimentation en CC du lecteur de bande est connecté au lecteur de bande et au contrôleur SCSI.  5. Vérifiez que le lecteur de bande est associé à un ID SCSI unique et qu'il est doté ou non d'une terminaison, selon le câble d'interface utilisé pour  le branchement du lecteur.  Consultez la documentation du lecteur de bande pour savoir comment configurer l'ID SCSI et activer ou désactiver la terminaison. 6. Exécutez les diagnostics en ligne appropriés. Voir Utilisation des diagnostics de Server Administrator. 7. Ouvrez ou retirez le cadre. Voir Cadre avant. 8. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur.  9. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 10. Vérifiez que la carte contrôleur SCSI est correctement emboîtée dans son connecteur. Voir Installation d'une carte d'extension. 11. Refermez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 12. Rebranchez le système sur la prise secteur et allumez-le, ainsi que les périphériques connectés.  13. Si l'incident n'est pas résolu, consultez la documentation du lecteur de bande pour obtenir des instructions de dépannage supplémentaires.  PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Avant de commencer toute intervention, reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges  électrostatiques.14. Si vous ne parvenez pas à résoudre l'incident, voir Obtention d'aide pour savoir comment obtenir une assistance technique. Dépannage d'un disque dur  Incident l Erreur liée à un pilote de périphérique. l Un ou plusieurs disques durs ne sont pas reconnus par le système. Action 1. Exécutez le test des diagnostics en ligne approprié. Voir Utilisation des diagnostics de Server Administrator. Procédez comme suit, selon les résultats du test de diagnostic. 2. Retirez le cadre. Voir Retrait du cadre avant. 3. Si l'incident concerne plusieurs disques durs, passez à l'étape 8. S'il concerne un seul disque dur, passez à l'étape suivante.  4. Mettez le système hors tension, remboîtez le disque dur et redémarrez le système.  5. Si le système est équipé d'une carte contrôleur fille RAID SAS, effectuez les opérations suivantes.  a. Redémarrez le système et appuyez sur  pour ouvrir l'utilitaire de configuration de l'adaptateur hôte.  Reportez-vous à la documentation fournie avec l'adaptateur hôte pour obtenir des informations sur cet utilitaire. b. Assurez-vous que le disque dur a été correctement configuré pour une utilisation en RAID.  c. Quittez l'utilitaire de configuration et laissez le système d'exploitation démarrer.  6. Assurez-vous que les pilotes requis pour la carte contrôleur fille sont installés et configurés correctement. Reportez-vous à la documentation du système  d'exploitation pour plus d'informations. 7. Si le système contient une carte contrôleur fille SAS sans option RAID, retirez le disque dur et échangez-le avec un disque opérationnel installé dans une  autre baie. Si l'incident est résolu, réinstallez le disque dur dans la baie d'origine. Voir Installation d'un disque dur enfichable à chaud. Si le disque dur fonctionne correctement dans la baie d'origine, il se peut que des incidents liés au support de lecteur surviennent par intermittence.  Remplacez ce support. Voir Obtention d'aide. Si le disque dur fonctionne correctement dans une autre baie, mais pas dans sa baie d'origine, l'incident est lié à un connecteur du fond de panier SAS.  Voir Obtention d'aide. 8. Vérifiez les connexions des câbles à l'intérieur du système :  a. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur. b. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture du système. c. Vérifiez le câblage entre les fonds de panier SAS et la carte fille SAS. Voir Installation d'une carte contrôleur fille SAS. d. Vérifiez que les câbles SAS sont correctement insérés dans leurs connecteurs.  e. Vérifiez que les connecteurs d'alimentation des fonds de panier SAS sont correctement insérés dans leur connecteur.  f. Refermez le système. Voir Fermeture du système. g. Rebranchez le système sur la prise secteur et allumez-le, ainsi que les périphériques connectés.  Si l'incident persiste, voir Obtention d'aide. PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Avant de commencer toute intervention, reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges  électrostatiques. AVIS : Cette procédure de dépannage risque de supprimer les données stockées sur le disque dur. Avant de continuer, créez une copie de sauvegarde  de tous les fichiers qui se trouvent sur le disque dur. AVIS : Si le système contient une carte contrôleur fille RAID SAS, ne tenez pas compte de l'étape suivante.Dépannage d'une carte contrôleur fille SAS ou RAID SAS  Incident l Un message d'erreur signale un incident lié à la carte contrôleur fille SAS ou RAID SAS. l La carte contrôleur fille SAS ou RAID SAS ne fonctionne pas correctement ou pas du tout. Action 1. Exécutez le test de diagnostic en ligne approprié. Voir Utilisation des diagnostics de Server Administrator. 2. Accédez au programme de configuration du système et vérifiez que la carte contrôleur fille SAS ou RAID SAS est activée. Voir Utilisation du programme de configuration du système. 3. Redémarrez le système et appuyez sur la séquence de touches permettant d'ouvrir l'utilitaire de configuration approprié :  l  pour un contrôleur SAS l  pour un contrôleur RAID SAS Reportez-vous à la documentation du contrôleur pour obtenir des informations sur les paramètres de configuration. 4. Vérifiez les paramètres de configuration, corrigez-les au besoin et redémarrez le système.  Si l'incident persiste, passez à l'étape suivante. 5. Retirez le cadre. Voir Retrait du cadre avant. 6. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur. 7. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 8. Vérifiez que la carte contrôleur est correctement insérée dans son connecteur. Voir Carte contrôleur fille SAS. 9. Si le système est équipé d'une carte contrôleur fille RAID SAS, vérifiez que les composants RAID suivants sont correctement installés et connectés :  l Barrette de mémoire l Batterie 10. Vérifiez le câblage entre le(s) fond(s) de panier SAS et la carte contrôleur fille SAS. Voir Installation d'une carte contrôleur fille SAS. 11. Vérifiez que les câbles sont correctement connectés à la carte contrôleur fille SAS et au fond de panier SAS.  12. Refermez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 13. Rebranchez le système sur la prise secteur et allumez-le, ainsi que les périphériques connectés. Si l'incident persiste, procédez comme suit :  l Si le système est équipé d'une carte contrôleur fille SAS, voir Obtention d'aide. l Si le système est équipé d'une carte contrôleur fille RAID SAS, remplacez la batterie de cette dernière. Voir Installation d'une batterie RAID. Si le remplacement de la batterie ne résout pas l'incident, voir Obtention d'aide. Dépannage des cartes d'extension  REMARQUE : Lorsque vous dépannez une carte contrôleur fille SAS ou RAID SAS, consultez également la documentation du système d'exploitation et de  la carte. PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Avant de commencer toute intervention, reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges  électrostatiques. REMARQUE : Pour dépanner une carte d'extension, reportez-vous également à sa documentation et à celle du système d'exploitation.Incident l Un message d'erreur signale un incident lié à une carte d'extension. l La carte d'extension ne fonctionne pas correctement ou pas du tout. Action 1. Exécutez le test de diagnostic en ligne approprié. Voir Utilisation du programme de configuration du système. 2. Ouvrez ou retirez le cadre. Voir Cadre avant. 3. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur. 4. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 5. Vérifiez que chaque carte d'extension est insérée à fond dans son connecteur. Voir Installation d'une carte d'extension. 6. Refermez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 7. Rebranchez le système sur la prise secteur et allumez-le, ainsi que les périphériques connectés.  Si l'incident persiste, passez à l'étape suivante. 8. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur. 9. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 10. Retirez toutes les cartes d'extension du système. Voir Retrait d'une carte d'extension. 11. Refermez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 12. Rebranchez le système sur la prise secteur et allumez-le, ainsi que les périphériques connectés.  13. Exécutez le test de diagnostic en ligne approprié.  Si les tests échouent, voir Obtention d'aide. 14. Pour chaque carte d'extension retirée à l'étape 10, effectuez les opérations suivantes :  a. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur. b. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. c. Réinstallez une des cartes d'extension.  d. Refermez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. e. Exécutez le test de diagnostic approprié.  Si les tests échouent, voir Obtention d'aide. Dépannage des microprocesseurs  Incident l Un message d'erreur signale un incident lié au processeur. l L'écran LCD du panneau avant indique qu'un incident lié aux processeurs ou à la carte système s'est produit. l Un dissipateur de chaleur n'est pas installé pour chaque processeur. Action PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Avant de commencer toute intervention, reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges  électrostatiques.1. Exécutez le test des diagnostics en ligne approprié. Voir Utilisation des diagnostics de Server Administrator. 2. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur.  3. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 4. Vérifiez que chaque processeur et chaque dissipateur de chaleur est installé correctement. Voir Processeurs. 5. Refermez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 6. Rebranchez le système sur la prise secteur et allumez-le, ainsi que les périphériques connectés.  7. Exécutez le test de diagnostic en ligne approprié.  Si les tests échouent ou si l'incident persiste, passez à l'étape suivante. 8. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur.  9. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 10. Retirez le processeur 2 et laissez uniquement le processeur 1 installé. Voir Processeurs. Pour identifier l'emplacement des processeurs, voir figure 6-2. Si un seul processeur est installé, voir Obtention d'aide. 11. Refermez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 12. Rebranchez le système sur la prise secteur et allumez-le, ainsi que les périphériques connectés.  13. Exécutez le test de diagnostic en ligne approprié.  Si les tests aboutissent, passez à l'étape 19. 14. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur.  15. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 16. Remplacez le processeur 1 par un autre processeur de même capacité. Voir Processeurs. 17. Refermez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 18. Exécutez le test de diagnostic en ligne approprié.  Si les tests aboutissent, remplacez le processeur 1. Voir Obtention d'aide. 19. Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise secteur. 20. Ouvrez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 21. Réinstallez les processeurs retirés à l'étape 10. Voir Processeurs. 22. Refermez le système. Voir Ouverture et fermeture du système. 23. Rebranchez le système sur la prise secteur et allumez-le, ainsi que les périphériques connectés.  Si l'incident persiste, voir Obtention d'aide. Retour au sommaire PRÉCAUTION : Seuls les techniciens de maintenance qualifiés sont habilités à retirer le capot du système pour accéder aux composants internes.  Avant de commencer toute intervention, reportez-vous au document Product Information Guide (Guide d'information sur le produit) pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur les consignes de sécurité, les interventions dans l'ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges  électrostatiques. w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Dell™ Inspiron™ 5100 et 5150 Manuel d'utilisation Modèle PP07L et PP08LRemarques, Avis et Avertissements REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE indique une information importante qui peut vous aider à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur. AVIS : Un AVIS vous avertit d’un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème. PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque potentiel d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. Abréviations et acronymes Pour une liste complète des abréviations et des sigles, reportez-vous au fichier d'aide Procédure. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la section page 80. ____________________ Les informations contenues dans ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. © 2003 Dell Computer Corporation. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction de quelque manière que ce soit sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Computer Corporation est strictement interdite. Les marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell, le logo DELL, AccessDirect, UltraSharp, Inspiron, Dell Precision, Dimension, OptiPlex, Latitude, Dell TrueMobile, et DellNet sont des marques de Dell Computer Corporation ; Intel, Pentium, et Celeron sont des marques déposées de Intel Corporation ; Microsoft et Windows sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation ; EMC est une marque déposée de EMC Corporation ; Bluetooth est une marque appartenant à Bluetooth SIG, Inc. est utilisée sous licence par Dell Computer Corporation. D'autres marques et noms commerciaux peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence aux entités se réclamant de ces marques et de ces noms ou à leurs produits. Dell rejette tout intérêt propriétaire dans les marques et les noms commerciaux autres que les siens. Modèle PP07L et PP08L Juillet 2003 Réf N1609 Rév. A02Sommaire 3 Sommaire PRÉCAUTION : Consignes de sécurité . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Généralités . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Alimentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Transport aérien . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Instructions de CEM (Compatibilité Electro Magnétique) . . . . 14 Lors de l'utilisation de l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Conseils en ergonomie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . 16 Protection contre les décharges électrostatiques . . . . . . . . . 17 Enlèvement de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 1 Présentation de votre ordinateur Vue avant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Vue du côté gauche . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Vue du côté droit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Vue arrière . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Vue de dessous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 2 Configuration de votre système Réglage des tailles de police et d'icônes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Réglage des tailles de police . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Réglage des tailles d'icônes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Sommaire Caractéristiques de Dell™ QuickSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Cliquer sur l'icône QuickSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Double-cliquer sur l'icône QuickSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône QuickSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Connexion à Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Configuration de la connexion Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Problèmes liés au modem et à la connexion à Internet . . . . . . 35 Problèmes de messagerie électronique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Transfert d'informations vers un nouvel ordinateur . . . . . . . . 36 Installation d'une imprimante . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Câble de l'imprimante . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Connexion d'une imprimante USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Problèmes d'imprimante . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Dispositifs de protection contre les sautes de tension électrique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Protecteurs de sautes de tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Filtres de ligne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Systèmes d'alimentation sans interruption . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 3 Utilisation d'une batterie Performances de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Vérification de la charge de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Wattmètre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Alerte de batterie faible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chargement de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Retrait de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Sommaire 5 Installation de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Stockage de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Problèmes de batterie et d'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Si la batterie ne se charge pas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Si la tension de la batterie est basse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 4 Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile (Touch Pad) Bouton Dell™ AccessDirect™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Reprogrammation du bouton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Pavé numérique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Raccourcis clavier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Fonctions système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Fonctions d'affichage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Gestion de l'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Fonctions de haut-parleur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Fonctions de la touche logo Microsoft® Windows® . . . . . . . 50 Tablette tactile (Touch Pad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Personnalisation de la tablette tactile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Problèmes liés à la tablette tactile et à la souris . . . . . . . . . . 52 Problèmes liés au clavier externe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Caractères inattendus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 5 Utilisation des CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia Utilisation de CD ou de DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Problèmes liés au CD ou au DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566 Sommaire Si vous ne parvenez pas à éjecter un CD, CD-RW, DVD ou DVD+RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Si vous ne parvenez pas à éjecter un CD, CD-RW, DVD ou DVD+RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Si vous entendez un frottement ou grincement inhabituel . . . . 56 Si l'écriture s'arrête sur le lecteur de CD-RW ou DVD+RW . . 56 Problèmes de son et de haut-parleurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Si vous avez un problème avec les haut-parleurs intégrés . . . . 57 Si vous avez un problème avec les haut-parleurs externes . . . . 57 Raccordement d'un téléviseur à l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Connexion S-vidéo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Connecteur vidéo composite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Activation des paramètres d'affichage pour téléviseur . . . . . . 62 6 Installation d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau au sein d'un bureau Connexion à une carte réseau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Assistant Installation d'un réseau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Problèmes de réseau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Connexion à des réseaux locaux sans fil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Détermination du type de réseau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Connexion à un réseau sous Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Finalisation de la connexion réseau (paramètres de sécurité) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 7 Résolution des problèmes Résolutions de problèmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Accès à l'aide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Messages d'erreur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Sommaire 7 Problèmes liés à la vidéo et à l'affichage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Si l'écran reste vide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Si l'affichage est difficile à lire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Si seule une partie de l'écran est lisible . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Problèmes de scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Problèmes de lecteur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Si vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer un fichier sur une disquette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Si vous rencontrez des problèmes liés à une unité de disque dur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Problèmes de carte PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Problèmes de programmes généraux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Un programme s'arrête accidentellement . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Un programme ne répond plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Des messages d'erreur s'affichent à l'écran . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Résolution d'autres problèmes techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Si l'ordinateur est mouillé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Si vous laissez tomber votre ordinateur ou s'il est endommagé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Pilotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Qu'est-ce qu'un pilote ? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Identification des pilotes : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Réinstallation des pilotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Réinstallation manuelle des pilotes pour Windows XP . . . . . . 91 Résolution des incompatibilités logicielles et matérielles . . . . . 92 Utilisation de la fonction Restauration du système . . . . . . . . 93 Création d'un point de restauration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Restauration de l'ordinateur à un état antérieur . . . . . . . . . 93 Annulation de la dernière restauration du système . . . . . . . . 94 Réinstallation de Microsoft® Windows® XP . . . . . . . . . . . . 958 Sommaire Avant de réinstaller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Réinstallation de Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 8 Ajout et remplacement de pièces Avant d'ajouter ou de remplacer des pièces . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Mémoire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Modem et carte Mini PCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Ajout d'un modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Ajout d'une carte Mini PCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Disque dur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Retour d'un disque dur à Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Lecteur de CD ou DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Clavier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 9 Annexe Spécifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système . . . . . 121 Présentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Consultation des écrans d'installation du système . . . . . . . . 122 Écrans de configuration du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Options les plus communément utilisées . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Optimiser les performances du système et de la batterie . . . . . 124 Présentation des performances du système . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Optimiser la consommation d'énergie et la durée de charge de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Ventilateur à vitesse variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Règle de support technique de Dell (États-Unis uniquement) . . 125 Définition des logiciels et périphériques installés par Dell . . . . 126Sommaire 9 Définition des logiciels et périphériques de sociétés tierces . . . 126 Contacter Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Réglementations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Garantie limitée et règle de retour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Conditions de garantie limitée pour les matériels de marque Dell (Canada uniquement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Politique de retour «Satisfait ou remboursé» (Canada uniquement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Logiciels et périphériques Dell (Canada uniquement) . . . . . 148 Déclaration de garantie Intel® réservée aux processeurs Pentium® et Celeron® (États-Unis et Canada uniquement) . . 150 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15310 SommairePRÉCAUTION : Consignes de sécurité 11 PRÉCAUTION : Consignes de sécurité Les consignes de sécurité suivantes vous aideront à protéger votre ordinateur de dommages éventuels et à garantir votre sécurité personnelle. Généralités • N'essayez pas de réparer l'ordinateur vous-même à moins que vous ne soyez un technicien qualifié. Suivez toujours scrupuleusement les instructions d'installation. • Si vous raccordez une rallonge à votre adaptateur CA/CC, assurez-vous que l'intensité totale des appareils raccordés à cette rallonge ne dépasse pas son intensité nominale. • N'insérez pas d'objets dans les orifices d'aération ou dans les ouvertures de votre ordinateur. Cela risquerait un court-circuit, et donc un incendie ou un choc électrique. • Ne conservez pas votre ordinateur sous tension dans un environnement peu aéré, comme une mallette de transport ou une mallette fermée. Cela risquerait de provoquer un incendie ou d'endommager l'ordinateur. • Gardez votre ordinateur loin des radiateurs et des sources de chaleur. Ne bouchez pas les orifices d'aération. Évitez de placer des feuilles volantes sous votre ordinateur ; ne placez pas votre ordinateur dans une alcôve fermée ou sur un lit, un canapé ou un tapis. • L'adaptateur secteur doit se trouver dans une zone aérée, par exemple sur un bureau ou sur le sol, lorsqu'il est utilisé pour alimenter l'ordinateur ou pour charger la batterie. Ne le recouvrez pas de papiers ou autres objets susceptibles d'entraver le refroidissement. De même, ne l'utilisez pas dans une mallette de transport. • L'adaptateur CA/CC peut devenir chaud lors du fonctionnement de l'ordinateur. Faites donc très attention lorsque vous le manipulez pendant ou après le fonctionnement de l'ordinateur. • Évitez de poser votre ordinateur portable en fonctionnement à même la peau pendant une période prolongée. La température augmente sur la surface de la base pendant le fonctionnement normal de l'ordinateur (notamment s'il est alimenté par le secteur). Le contact prolongé avec la peau peut provoquer inconfort ou brûlure. • N'utilisez pas votre ordinateur dans un environnement humide, par exemple près d'une baignoire, d'un évier, d'une piscine ou dans un sous-sol humide • Si votre ordinateur est équipé d'un modem intégré ou en option (carte PC), débranchez le câble du modem en cas d'orage, afin d'éviter tout risque de décharge électrique transmise par la ligne téléphonique.12 PRÉCAUTION : Consignes de sécurité w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m • Pour éviter tout risque de décharge électrique, n'effectuez aucun branchement ou débranchement, ni aucune opération de maintenance ou de reconfiguration de ce produit pendant un orage. N'utilisez pas votre ordinateur pendant un orage, à moins qu'il n'ait été déconnecté de tous ses câbles et qu'il fonctionne sur batterie. • Si votre ordinateur est équipé d'un modem, le câble correspondant doit avoir une taille minimale de 26 AWG (American wire gauge) et posséder une fiche RJ-11 conforme à la norme FCC. • Avant d'ouvrir le capot du modem/carte Mini PCI/ module mémoire de la face inférieure de votre ordinateur, débranchez le câble de téléphone et tous les câbles d'alimentation des prises électriques. • Si votre ordinateur dispose d'un connecteur modem RJ11 et d'un connecteur réseau RJ45, branchez le câble téléphonique dans le connecteur RJ11 et non pas dans le connecteur RJ45. • Une carte PC peut chauffer considérablement en fonctionnement normal. Faites donc très attention lorsque vous les retirez après une utilisation prolongée. • Avant de nettoyer votre ordinateur, éteignez-le et débranchez-le de la prise électrique. Nettoyez votre ordinateur avec un tissu doux et humidifié avec de l'eau. N'utilisez pas de liquide ni d'aérosol nettoyants, ils peuvent contenir des substances inflammables. Alimentation • Utilisez uniquement l'adaptateur CA/CC fourni par Dell et homologué pour cet ordinateur. L'utilisation d'un autre adaptateur peut provoquer un incendie ou une explosion. • Avant de raccorder l'ordinateur à une prise électrique, assurez-vous que la tension du secteur est compatible avec la tension d'entrée de l'adaptateur. • Pour mettre l'ordinateur totalement hors tension, éteignez-le, retirez toute batterie présente dans la baie de batterie ou la baie modulaire et débranchez l'adaptateur de la prise de courant. • Pour éviter tout risque d'électrocution, branchez l'adaptateur secteur et les cordons d'alimentation de l'ordinateur et de ses périphériques sur des prises possédant un circuit de mise à la terre adéquat. Ces prises peuvent être équipées de trois broches, dont une pour la mise à la terre. N'utilisez pas d'adaptateurs et ne retirez pas la fiche de mise à la terre. Si vous utilisez une rallonge électrique, veillez à ce qu'elle comporte le nombre de broches voulu, afin de pouvoir la raccorder au câble d'alimentation de l'adaptateur. PRÉCAUTION : Consignes de sécurité (Suite)PRÉCAUTION : Consignes de sécurité 13 • Assurez-vous que rien ne repose sur le cordon d'alimentation de l'adaptateur CA/CC et que ce cordon n'est pas placé dans un endroit où l'on pourrait marcher ou trébucher dessus. • Si vous utilisez plusieurs rampes d'alimentation , soyez prudent lorsque vous raccordez le câble d'alimentation de l'adaptateur c.a./c.c. à la rampe d'alimentation. Certaines prises multiples permettent d'insérer une prise de façon incorrecte. L'insertion incorrecte de la prise de courant peut endommager définitivement votre ordinateur, ou présenter des risques d'électrocution et/ou d'incendie. Assurez-vous que le contact de mise à la terre de la prise de courant est inséré dans le contact correspondant de la rampe d'alimentation. Batterie • N'utilisez que des batteries Dell™ homologuées pour cet ordinateur. L'utilisation d'autres types peut présenter un risque d'incendie ou d'explosion. • Ne transportez pas la batterie dans votre poche, dans votre sac ou dans tout autre lieu contenant également des objets métalliques (clés ou trombones, par exemple), susceptibles de court-circuiter les bornes de la batterie. L'excès de courant qui en résulterait pourrait entraîner des températures extrêmement élevées et endommager la batterie ou provoquer une flamme ou des brûlures. • En cas de mauvaise manipulation, la batterie présente un danger de brûlure. Ne démontez pas la batterie. Manipulez les batteries endommagées ou percées avec une extrême précaution. Si la batterie est endommagée, l'électrolyte peut fuir des éléments et provoquer des blessures corporelles. • Conservez la batterie hors de portée des enfants. • Ne rangez pas et ne laissez pas votre ordinateur ou votre batterie près d'une source de chaleur telle qu'un radiateur, une cheminée, un poêle, un appareil de chauffage électrique ou tout autre appareil générateur de chaleur, et ne l'exposez pas à des températures supérieures à 60ºC (140ºF). Si la température de la batterie devient excessive, ses cellules peuvent exploser ou fuir, présentant alors un risque d'incendie. • Ne jetez pas la batterie de votre ordinateur au feu ni avec les ordures ménagères. Les cellules de la batterie risquent d'exploser. Débarrassez-vous de la batterie usagée selon les instructions du fabricant ou contactez le service municipal de traitement des déchets afin de connaître les instructions de mise au rebut. Débarrassez-vous rapidement d'une batterie usagée ou endommagée. PRÉCAUTION : Consignes de sécurité (Suite)14 PRÉCAUTION : Consignes de sécurité w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Transport aérien • Les réglementations de certaines administrations fédérales d'aviation et/ou les restrictions propres à chaque compagnie aérienne peuvent s'appliquer au fonctionnement de votre ordinateur Dell pendant que vous voyagez à bord d'un avion. Par exemple, elles peuvent interdire l'utilisation, pendant le vol, de tout appareil électronique personnel ayant la capacité de transmettre des fréquences radio ou d'autres signaux électromagnétiques. – Afin de vous conformer à ces restrictions et si votre ordinateur portable Dell est équipé d'un périphérique Dell TrueMobile™ ou de tout autre périphérique de communication sans fil, nous vous recommandons de le désactiver avant de monter à bord et de suivre toutes les instructions fournies à ce sujet par le personnel de navigation. – En outre, l'utilisation d'appareils électroniques personnels, comme un ordinateur portable, peut être interdite pendant certaines phases critiques du vol, par exemple pendant le décollage et l'atterrissage. Certaines compagnies aériennes déterminent parfois la phase critique à n'importe quel moment du vol, dans la mesure où l'avion vole au-dessous de 3050 m. Veuillez suivre les instructions propres à la compagnie aérienne quant à l'autorisation d'utiliser un appareil électronique personnel. Instructions de CEM (Compatibilité Electro Magnétique) Utilisez des câbles blindés afin de vous assurer de conserver la classification CEM adaptée à l'environnement donné. Pour les imprimantes parallèles, un câble approprié peut être obtenu auprès de Dell. Si vous le souhaitez, vous pouvez commander un câble sur le site Web de Dell, à l'adresse suivante : www.dell.com . L'électricité statique peut endommager les composants électroniques de votre ordinateur. Pour éviter de tels dommages, déchargez l’électricité statique de votre corps avant de toucher tout composant électronique de votre ordinateur, comme par exemple, un module de mémoire. Il vous suffit pour cela de toucher une surface métallique non peinte sur le panneau d'entrée/sortie de l'ordinateur. AVERTISSEMENT : Les cordons de ce produit et de ses accessoires contiennent des produits chimiques contenant du plomb, considéré par l'état de Californie comme produit pouvant provoquer des malformations congénitales ou autres anomalies de ce genre. Lavez-vous les mains après avoir manipulé les cordons.. PRÉCAUTION : Consignes de sécurité (Suite)Lors de l'utilisation de l'ordinateur 15 Lors de l'utilisation de l'ordinateur Respectez les consignes de sécurité suivantes afin d'éviter d'endommager votre ordinateur : • Lorsque vous installez l'ordinateur pour travailler, placez-le sur une surface plane. • Lorsque vous vous déplacez en avion, ne faites pas enregistrer votre ordinateur comme bagage. Vous pouvez soumettre votre ordinateur à la détection d'un dispositif de sécurité à rayons X, mais jamais à un détecteur de métaux. Veillez à toujours disposer d'une batterie chargée, au cas où l'on vous demanderait, lors d'un contrôle manuel, d'allumer l'ordinateur. • Si vous êtes amené à voyager en ayant préalablement retiré l'unité de disque dur de l'ordinateur, veillez à envelopper le disque dur dans un matériau non-conducteur, tissu ou papier, par exemple. Si un contrôle manuel est effectué sur l'unité, soyez prêt à la réinstaller dans l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez soumettre le disque dur à la détection d'un dispositif de sécurité à rayons X, mais jamais à un détecteur de métaux. • Lorsque vous voyagez, ne placez pas l'ordinateur dans les compartiments de rangement dans lesquels il risquerait de glisser et de se cogner contre les parois. Évitez de laisser tomber votre ordinateur et de le soumettre à tout autre choc mécanique. • Protégez l'ordinateur, les batteries et le disque dur contre les risques liés à l'environnement : poussière, nourriture, liquides, températures extrêmes et exposition prolongée aux rayons du soleil. • Lorsque vous exposez votre ordinateur à des environnements présentant des différences de température et/ou d'humidité très marquées, de la condensation peut se former sur lui ou à l'intérieur. Dans ce cas, attendez l'évaporation complète de cette humidité avant de réutiliser votre ordinateur, afin de ne pas l'endommager. AVIS : Lorsque vous faites passer l'ordinateur d'un environnement à basse température à un environnement plus chaud, ou vice versa, laissez-le revenir à la température ambiante avant de l'allumer. • Lorsque vous débranchez un câble, tirez sur la prise ou sur la boucle prévue à cet effet, jamais sur le câble lui-même. Quand vous tirez sur le connecteur, maintenez-le correctement aligné, afin d'éviter de tordre les broches. Pour la même raison, lors du raccordement d'un câble, vérifiez bien l'orientation et l'alignement des deux connecteurs. • Manipulez les composants avec précaution. Un composant tel qu'un module de mémoire doit être tenu par les bords, pas par les broches. • Avant de retirer un module de mémoire de la carte système ou de déconnecter un périphérique de l'ordinateur, patientez cinq secondes après avoir éteint l'ordinateur, déconnecté le cordon d'alimentation et retiré toute batterie installée, afin d'éviter d'endommager la carte système.16 Lors de l'utilisation de l'ordinateur w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m • Nettoyez l'écran avec un tissu doux et propre, humidifié avec de l'eau. Appliquez l'eau sur le chiffon, et non directement sur l'écran, puis passez le chiffon sur l'écran toujours dans le même sens, de haut en bas. Retirez rapidement l'humidité de l'écran et conservez-le sec. Une exposition prolongée à l'humidité pourrait l'endommager. N'utilisez pas de nettoyant pour vitres sur l'écran. • Si l'ordinateur est mouillé ou endommagé, suivez les procédures décrites dans «Si votre ordinateur est mouillé» à la page 87 ou «Si vous laissez tomber ou si vous endommagez votre ordinateur» à la page 88. Si, après avoir effectué ces procédures, vous constatez que votre ordinateur ne fonctionne pas correctement, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la section page 126 pour obtenir les coordonnées du contact approprié). Conseils en ergonomie PRÉCAUTION : Une mauvaise utilisation ou une utilisation prolongée du clavier peut provoquer des blessures. PRÉCAUTION : Une exposition prolongée devant l'écran du moniteur peut occasionner des troubles de la vue. Pour un plus grand confort et une plus grande efficacité, observez les consignes ergonomiques du fichier d'aide Procédure lors de l'installation et de l'utilisation de votre système informatique. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 80. Cet ordinateur portable n'a pas été conçu pour une utilisation prolongée au bureau. Pour ce type d'utilisation, nous vous recommandons d'y connecter un clavier externe. Intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur Avant de retirer ou d'installer des modules de mémoire, des cartes Mini PCI ou des modems, suivez les étapes ci-après dans l'ordre indiqué. AVIS : Vous ne devez intervenir à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur que pour installer des modules de mémoire, une carte Mini PCI ou un modem. AVIS : Avant de déconnecter un périphérique ou de retirer un module de mémoire, une carte Mini PCI ou un modem, patientez 5 secondes après la mise hors tension de l'ordinateur, pour éviter d'endommager la carte système. 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur et tous les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 2 Débranchez votre ordinateur et tous les périphériques connectés de leurs prises électriques pour réduire le risque de blessure ou de décharge électrique. Déconnectez également les lignes téléphoniques ou de télécommunication. Lors de l'utilisation de l'ordinateur (Suite)Lors de l'utilisation de l'ordinateur 17 3 Retirez la batterie principale de la baie de batterie et, si nécessaire, la batterie secondaire de la baie modulaire. 4 Raccordez-vous à la masse en touchant la surface métallique non peinte au dos de l'ordinateur. Pendant votre travail à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur, touchez régulièrement la surface métallique non peinte de l'ordinateur pour dissiper toute électricité statique qui risquerait d'endommager les composants. Protection contre les décharges électrostatiques L'électricité statique peut endommager les composants électroniques de votre ordinateur. Pour éviter de tels dommages, déchargez l’électricité statique de votre corps avant de toucher tout composant électronique de votre ordinateur, comme par exemple, un module de mémoire. Pour ce faire, touchez une surface métallique non peinte à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Au cours de votre travail sur l'ordinateur, pensez à toucher de temps à autre une telle surface non peinte de l'arrière de votre ordinateur pour vous débarrasser de la charge statique accumulée par votre corps. Vous pouvez également prendre les mesures suivantes pour prévenir les dommages dus aux décharges d'électricité statique (ESD) : • Ne sortez un composant sensible à l'électricité statique de son emballage antistatique que lorsque vous êtes prêt à l'installer. Juste avant d'ôter l'emballage antistatique, veillez à décharger votre corps de son électricité statique. • Quand vous transportez un composant sensible, placez-le d'abord dans un emballage ou un conteneur antistatique. • Manipulez tous les composants sensibles dans une zone antistatique. Si possible, utilisez des tapis antistatiques sur le sol et sur votre plan de travail. Lors de l'utilisation de l'ordinateur (Suite)18 Lors de l'utilisation de l'ordinateur w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Enlèvement de la batterie Votre ordinateur utilise une batterie au lithium-ion et une batterie de réserve. Pour obtenir des instructions sur le remplacement de la batterie au lithium-ion de votre ordinateur, reportezvous à la section «Retrait d'une batterie» à la page page 44. La durée de vie de la batterie de réserve est telle qu'il est fort probable que vous n'ayez jamais besoin de la remplacer. Si toutefois vous deviez la remplacer, adressez-vous à un technicien de maintenance agréé, qui est le seul habilité à effectuer cette opération. Ne jetez pas la batterie avec les ordures ménagères. Contactez le service municipal de traitement des déchets pour connaître l'adresse du site de dépôt le plus proche de votre domicile. Lors de l'utilisation de l'ordinateur (Suite)S E C T I O N 1 Présentation de votre ordinateur Vue avant Vue du côté gauche Vue du côté droit Vue arrière Vue de dessous20 Présentation de votre ordinateur w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Vue avant DI SPO S I T I F DE B LOCAGE DE L'ÉCRA N — Permet de garder l'écran fermé. ÉCRA N — Consultez le fichier d'aide Procédure pour obtenir davantage d'informations sur l'écran. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 80 Pour en savoir plus sur le réglage des tailles de police et d'icône, reportez-vous à la page 32. dispositif de blocage de l'écran écran haut-parleur clavier voyants d'état du périphérique tablette tactile haut-parleur boutons de la tablette tactile bouton d'alimentation bouton Dell™ AccessDirect™ voyants d'état du clavierPrésentation de votre ordinateur 21 VO YA N T S D'É TA T D U C LAV IER Les voyants verts situés en haut du clavier indiquent les points suivants : C LAV IER — Le clavier comprend un pavé numérique ainsi que la touche du logo Microsoft® Windows® . Pour plus d'informations sur les raccourcis clavier disponibles, reportez-vous à la page 49. HA U T-PAR LE UR S — Utilisez les raccourcis clavier pour régler le volume des haut-parleurs intégrés. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la page 50. S'allume lorsque le pavé numérique est activé. S'allume lorsque la fonction Verr Maj défil est activée. S'allume lorsque la fonction Arrêt défil est activée. 9 A22 Présentation de votre ordinateur w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m VO YA N T S D'É TA T D U PÉR IP HÉR IQ UE Si l'ordinateur est relié à une prise secteur, le voyant fonctionne comme suit : – Vert fixe : la batterie est en cours de charge. Si l'ordinateur fonctionne sur batterie, le voyant fonctionne comme suit : – Éteint: la batterie est suffisamment chargée (ou l'ordinateur est hors tension). – Orange clignotant : le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible. – Orange fixe : le niveau de charge de la batterie est critique. BO U TO N S DE LA TAB LE T TE TAC T I LE — Utilisez la tablette tactile et ses boutons comme s'il s'agissait d'une souris. Pour de plus amples informations, reportez-vous à la page 51. TAB LE T TE TAC T I LE — Utilisez la tablette tactile et ses boutons comme s'il s'agissait d'une souris. Pour obtenir de plus amples informations, reportez-vous à la page 51. BO U TO N D'A L IME N TA T IO N — Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour mettre l'ordinateur sous tension ou sortir du mode d'économie d'énergie. Pour davantage d'informations, reportez-vous à la rubrique «Gestion de l'alimentation» du fichier d'aide Procédure. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 80. S'allume lorsque vous mettez l'ordinateur sous tension. Clignote ou s'éteint en mode d'économie d'énergie. S'allume lorsque l'ordinateur lit ou écrit des données sur le disque dur. AVIS : Pour éviter une perte de données, n'éteignez jamais l'ordinateur lorsque le voyant clignote. S'allume de façon intermittente pour indiquer l'état de la batterie.Présentation de votre ordinateur 23 AVIS : Pour éteindre votre ordinateur en évitant de perdre des données, procédez à un arrêt système Microsoft Windows ® (reportez-vous à la page 40) plutôt que d'appuyer sur le bouton d'alimentation. Si l'ordinateur ne répond plus, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé jusqu'à ce que l'ordinateur s'éteigne complètement (cela peut prendre plusieurs secondes). BO U TO N DE L L™ ACCE S SDIREC T™ — Appuyez sur ce bouton pour lancer un programme utilisé fréquemment, par exemple outils de support et éducationnels. Vous pouvez reprogrammer le bouton pour qu'il lance le programme de votre choix. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la page 48. Vue du côté gauche EMP LACEME N T PO UR CAR TE PC — Accepte une carte PC, comme un modem ou une carte réseau. Pour davantage d'informations, reportez-vous à la rubrique «Utilisation de cartes PC» du fichier d'aide Procédure. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 80. emplacement pour carte PC connecteurs audio (2) Lecteur de CD ou de DVD24 Présentation de votre ordinateur w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m CO N NEC TE UR S A UD IO LEC TE UR DE CD O U DVD — Prend un lecteur de CD, un lecteur de DVD, un lecteur de CDRW, un lecteur DVD+RW, ou un lecteur composite CD-RW/DVD. Vue du côté droit BA T TER IE/BA IE DE BA T TER IE — Quand une batterie est installée, vous pouvez utiliser l'ordinateur sans le raccorder à une prise secteur. Voir la page 41. Raccordez des écouteurs ou des haut-parleurs au connecteur . Raccordez un micro au connecteur . batterie/baie de batterie connecteur du modem entrées d'air emplacement pour câble de sécuritéPrésentation de votre ordinateur 25 CO N NEC TE UR MODEM EN TRÉE S D'A IR — Un ventilateur interne permet d'aérer l'ordinateur, prévenant ainsi la surchauffe des composants. PRÉCAUTION : Évitez d'introduire des objets dans les entrées d'air, de les obstruer ou de laisser de la possière s'y accumuler. Ne gardez pas votre ordinateur en fonctionunement dans un environnement peu aéré, comme une mallette fermée. Le manque de ventilation risquerait de provoquer un incendie ou d'endommager l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Le ventilateur fonctionne en permanence et sa vitesse varie selon l'utilisation. Le bruit généré est tout à fait normal et n'indique en aucun cas un défaut du ventilateur ou de l'ordinateur. EMP LACEME N T PO UR CÂB LE DE SÉC UR I TÉ — Permet de relier à l'ordinateur un dispositif antivol disponible dans le commerce. Reportez-vous aux instructions livrées avec le produit pour des informations supplémentaires. AVIS : Avant d'acheter un tel dispositif, assurez-vous qu'il s'adaptera à l'emplacement pour câble de sécurité de votre ordinateur. Connectez la ligne téléphonique au modem. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation du modem, reportez-vous à la documentation en ligne livrée avec votre ordinateur.26 Présentation de votre ordinateur w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Vue arrière REMARQUE : Le connecteur de l'adaptateur secteur de voutre ordinateur peut présenter un aspect différent de celui du connecteur illustré dans les graphiques suivants. EN TRÉE S D'A IR — Un ventilateur interne permet d'aérer l'ordinateur, prévenant ainsi la surchauffe des composants. PRÉCAUTION : Évitez d'introduire des objets dans les entrées d'air, de les obstruer ou de laisser de la poussière s'y accumuler. Ne gardez pas votre ordinateur en fonctionnement dans un environnement peu aéré, comme une mallette fermée. Le manque de ventilation risquerait de provoquer un incendie ou d'endommager l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Le ventilateur fonctionne en permanence et sa vitesse varie selon l'utilisation. Le bruit généré est tout à fait normal et n'indique en aucun cas un défaut du ventilateur ou de l'ordinateur. CO N NEC TE UR DE L'ADAP TA TE UR SEC TE UR — Sert à relier l'adaptateur secteur à l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Le connecteur de l'adaptateur secteur illustré dans le graphique suivant peut présenter un aspect différent de celui du connecteur qui vous a été livré avec votre ordinateur. connecteurs USB (2) connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo connecteur vidéo connecteur réseau connecteur de l'adaptateur secteur entrées d'air connecteur IEEE 1394Présentation de votre ordinateur 27 AVIS : Utilisez uniquement l'adaptateur CA/CC livré avec votre ordinateur. Cet adaptateur convertit le courant alternatif en courant continu, requis par l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez connecter l'adaptateur secteur à votre ordinateur, que ce dernier soit allumé ou éteint. PRÉCAUTION : L'adaptateur secteur fonctionne avec les tensions secteur disponibles dans le monde entier. Cependant, les connecteurs et les rampes d'alimentation varient selon les pays. Le fait d'utiliser un câble incompatible, ou de mal brancher le câble aux prises peut endommager l'équipement ou causer un incendie. PRÉCAUTION : L'adaptateur secteur doit se trouver dans une zone aérée, par exemple sur un bureau ou sur le sol, lorsqu'il est utilisé pour alimenter l'ordinateur ou pour charger la batterie. Ne le recouvrez pas de papiers ou autres objets susceptibles d'entraver le refroidissement. De même, ne l'utilisez pas dans une mallette de transport. AVIS : Lorsque vous déconnectez l'adaptateur secteur de l'ordinateur, tenez le connecteur du câble de l'adaptateur, pas le câble lui-même, et tirez dessus fermement mais sans forcer, afin d'éviter de l'endommager. CO N NEC TE UR DE SOR T IE TV S-V IDÉO Permet de relier l'ordinateur à un téléviseur. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la page 58. connecteur de l'adaptateur secteur adaptateur de CA28 Présentation de votre ordinateur w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m CO N NEC TE UR S USB CO N NEC TE UR V IDÉO CO N NEC TE UR IEEE 1394 — Utilisez ce connecteur pour raccorder des périphérqiues prenant en charge les taux de transfert à vitesse élevée IEEE 1394, tels que certains appareils photo numériques. CO N NEC TE UR RÉ SEA U AVIS : Le connecteur réseau est légèrement plus large que le connecteur modem. Pour éviter d'endommager votre ordinateur, ne branchez pas une ligne téléphonique au connecteur réseau. Sert à relier des périphériques USB, tels qu'une souris, un clavier ou une imprimante. Sert à brancher un moniteur externe. Pour davantage d'informations, reportez-vous à la rubrique «Utilisation de l'écran» du fichier d'aide Procédure. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 80. Raccorde l'ordinateur à un réseau. Les voyants situés près du connecteur indiquent l'activité de communication des réseaux filaire ou sans fil. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation de la carte réseau, consultez la documentation en ligne de la carte réseau fournie avec votre ordinateur.Présentation de votre ordinateur 29 Vue de dessous CAC HE DE LA CAR TE MODEM/MI N PCI — Recouvre le compartiment de la carte modem et Mini PCI. Voir la page 102. BA T TER IE/BA IE DE BA T TER IE — Quand une batterie est installée, vous pouvez utiliser l'ordinateur sans le raccorder à une prise secteur. Voir la page 41. EN TRÉE S D'A IR — Un ventilateur interne permet d'aérer l'ordinateur, prévenant ainsi la surchauffe des composants. PRÉCAUTION : Évitez d'introduire des objets dans les entrées d'air, de les obstruer ou de laisser de la poussière s'y accumuler. Ne gardez pas votre ordinateur en fonctionnement dans un environnement peu aéré, comme une mallette fermée. Le manque de ventilation risquerait de provoquer un incendie ou d'endommager l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Le ventilateur fonctionne en permanence et sa vitesse varie selon l'utilisation. Le bruit généré est tout à fait normal et n'indique en aucun cas un défaut du ventilateur ou de l'ordinateur. cache du module de mémoire dispositif d'extraction de la baie de batterie capot de carte Mini PCI batterie/baie de batterie unité de disque dur entrées d'air30 Présentation de votre ordinateur w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m DI SPO S I T I F D'EX TRAC T IO N DE LA BA IE DE BA T TER IE — Permet d'extraire la batterie. Pour plus d'instructions, voir la page 44. CAC HE D U MOD U LE DE MÉMO IRE — Recouvre le compartiment qui contient le(s) module(s) de mémoire et le dispositif de déverrouillage du lecteur de CD ou DVD. Voir la page 100. DI SQ UE D UR — Stocke des logiciels et des données.S E C T I O N 2 Configuration de votre système Réglage des tailles de police et d'icônes Caractéristiques de Dell™ QuickSet Connexion à Internet Problèmes liés au modem et à la connexion à Internet Problèmes de messagerie électronique Transfert d'informations vers un nouvel ordinateur Installation d'une imprimante Problèmes d'imprimante Dispositifs de protection contre les sautes de tension électrique Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur32 Configuration de votre système w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Réglage des tailles de police et d'icônes Réglage des tailles de police 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Apparence et thèmes. 3 Sous ou une icône du Panneau de configuration, cliquez sur Affichage. 4 Dans la fenêtre Propriétés d'affichage, cliquez sur l'onglet Apparence. 5 Sous Taille de police :, cliquez sur Grand dans le menu déroulant. 6 Cliquez sur OK. Réglage des tailles d'icônes 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Apparence et thèmes. 3 Sous ou une icône du Panneau de configuration, cliquez sur Affichage. 4 Dans la fenêtre Propriétés d'affichage, cliquez sur l'onglet Apparence puis sur Effets. 5 Dans la fenêtre Effets, cochez Utiliser de grandes icônes. 6 Dans la fenêtre Effets, cliquez sur OK, puis cliquez sur OK dans la fenêtre Propriétés d'affichage. Caractéristiques de Dell™ QuickSet Dell QuickSet s'exécute depuis l'icône située sur la barre de tâches et fonctionne différemment selon que vous cliquez, double-cliquez ou cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône. Cliquer sur l'icône QuickSet Pour effectuer les tâches suivantes, cliquez sur l'icône : • Réglez les paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation à l'aide de l'Assistant Gestion de l'alimentation. • Réglez la taille des icônes et des barres d'outils. • Sélectionnez une méthode d'alimentation que vous avez définie dans l'Assistant Gestion de l'aliemntation. • Activez ou désactivez le mode Présentation.Configuration de votre système 33 Double-cliquer sur l'icône QuickSet Double-cliquez sur l'icône pour régler les paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation à l'aide de l'Assistant Gestion de l'alimentation. Cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône QuickSet Pour effectuer les tâches suivantes, cliquez sur l'icône : • Activez ou désctivez le luminancemètre sur l'écran. • Activez ou désctivez the décibelmètre sur l'écran. • Activez ou désactivez la fonctionnalité sans fil. • Afficher l'aide sur Dell QuickSet. • Affiche les données de version et de copyright du programme QuickSet installé sur votre ordianateur. Pour plus d'informations sur QuickSet, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône dans la barre des tâches, puis cliquez sur Aide. Connexion à Internet REMARQUE : Les fournisseurs d'accès à Internet (FAI) et leurs offres varient en fonction des pays. Pour vous connecter à Internet, vous devez disposer d'un modem ou d'une connexion réseau, ainsi que des services d'un fournisseur d'accès à Internet (FAI), AOL, MSN ou autre. Votre FAI vous proposera une ou plusieurs des options de connexion suivantes : • Connexions à la demande, permettant d'accéder à Internet depuis une ligne téléphonique. Les connexions à la demande sont plus lentes que les connexions par ADSL ou par câble. • Connexions ADSL, fournissant un accès Internet très rapide depuis votre ligne téléphonique. Avec une connexion ADSL, vous pouvez utiliser simultanément la même ligne téléphonique pour Internet et le téléphone. • Connexions par modem câble, fournissant un accès Internet très rapide depuis votre ligne d'abonné à la télévision par câble. Si vous utilisez une connexion à la demande, raccordez le câble téléphonique au connecteur du modem de votre ordinateur et à la prise murale du téléphone, avant de configurer votre connexion Internet. Si vous utilisez une connexion par modem câble ou ADSL, veuillez contacter votre FAI pour obtenir les instructions de configuration.34 Configuration de votre système w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Configuration de la connexion Internet Pour configurer une connexion AOL ou MSN : 1 Enregistrez et fermez tout fichier ouvert et quittez tout programme en cours d'utilisation. 2 Double-cliquez sur l'icône MSN Explorer ou AOL située sur le bureau Windows® . 3 Suivez les instructions à l'écran pour terminer la procédure de configuration. S'il n'existe pas d'icône MSN Explorer ou AOL sur votre bureau ou si vous souhaitez configurer une connexion Internet avec un fournisseur d'accès différent : 1 Enregistrez et fermez tout fichier ouvert et quittez tout programme en cours d'utilisation. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Internet Explorer. L'Assistant Nouvelle Connexion apparaît. 3 Cliquez sur Connecter à Internet. 4 Dans la fenêtre suivante, cliquez sur les options appropriées : • Si vous n'avez pas de fournisseur d'accès à Internet et que vous souhaitez en choisir un, cliquez sur Choisir dans une liste de fournisseurs de services Internet. • Si vous avez déjà obtenu des informations de configuration de votre fournisseur d'accès à Internet mais que vous n'avez pas reçu de CD d'installation, cliquez sur Configurer ma connexion manuellement. • Si vous disposez d'un CD, cliquez sur Utiliser le CD fourni par mon fournisseur de services Internet. 5 Cliquez sur Suivant. Si vous avez sélectionné Configurer ma connexion manuellement, passez à l'étape 6. Sinon, suivez les instructions à l'écran pour terminer la procédure de configuration. REMARQUE : En cas d'hésitation sur le type de connexion, consultez votre FAI. 6 Cliquez sur l'option appropriée dans Comment souhaitez-vous vous connecter à Internet ?, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 7 Utilisez les instructions de configuration fournies par votre FAI pour terminer la configuration. Si vous éprouvez des difficultés à vous connecter à Internet, reportez-vous à la section «Problèmes liés au modem et à la connexion à Internet» Si vous ne parvenez pas à vous connecter à Internet alors que vous pouviez le faire précédemmemnt, le service fourni par votre FAI peut être en panne. Contactez votre fournisseur pour vérifier l'état du service, ou essayez de vous connecter à nouveau un peu plus tard.Configuration de votre système 35 Problèmes liés au modem et à la connexion à Internet AVIS : Connectez le modem uniquement à un réseau téléphone analogique. Le fait de le brancher sur un réseau téléphonique numérique peut l'endommager. AVIS : Les connecteurs de modem et les connecteurs réseaux se ressemblent. Ne branchez pas une ligne téléphonique au connecteur réseau. REMARQUE : Si vous pouvez vous connecter à votre fournisseur d'accès Internet, votre modem fonctionne correctement. Si vous êtes sûr que votre modem fonctionne correctement mais que les problèmes persistent, contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet. VÉR I F IE Z LA PR I SE TÉ LÉ P HO N IQ UE M URA LE — Déconnectez la ligne téléphonique du modem et connectez-la à un téléphone. Attendez la tonalité. Assurez-vous de disposer d'un service téléphonique à impulsions. Connectez le modem à une autre prise téléphonique murale. La présence de parasites, l'état de la ligne téléphonique et les conditions du réseau peuvent diminuer le débit de la connexion. Pour plus d'informations, contactez votre opérateur téléphonique ou votre administrateur réseau. CO N NEC TE Z LE MODEM D IREC TEME N T À LA PR I SE TÉ LÉ P HO N IQ UE M URA LE — Si d'autres appareils téléphoniques partagent cette ligne, comme par exemple un répondeur téléphonique, un télécopieur, un onduleur ou un séparateur de ligne, débranchez-les et connectez le modem directement à la prise téléphonique murale. VÉR I F IE Z LA CO N NEX IO N — Vérifiez que la ligne téléphonique est connectée au modem. VÉR I F IE Z LA L IG NE TÉ LÉP HO N IQ UE — Essayez d'utiliser une autre ligne téléphonique. Si vous utilisez un câble qui mesure 3 mètres ou plus, essayez-en un plus court. TO NA L I TÉ IRRÉG U L IÈRE — Si vous disposez d'un service de messagerie vocale, une tonalité irrégulière peut être émise lorsque vous avez des messages. Contactez votre opérateur téléphonique pour savoir comment rétablir une tonalité normale. DÉ SAC T IVE Z LA M I SE E N A T TE N TE DE S APPE L S (S IG NA L D'APPE L) — Consultez l'annuaire téléphonique pour obtenir des instructions sur la désactivation de cette fonctionnalité. Réglez ensuite les propriétés de connexion de l'accès réseau à distance. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques, sur Options de modems et téléphonie, sur Règles de numérotation, puis sur Modifier.... 3 Dans la fenêtre Modifier le site, vérifiez que l'option Pour désactiver l'attente d'appel, composer : est cochée, puis sélectionnez l'indicatif approprié indiqué dans votre annuaire téléphonique. 4 Cliquez sur Appliquer, puis sur OK. 5 Fermez la fenêtre Options de modems et téléphonie. 6 Fermez la fenêtre Panneau de configuration. VÉR I F IE Z Q UE LE MODEM COMM U N IQ UE AVEC WI NDOW S. — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques, puis sur Options de modems et téléphonie. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Modems. 4 Cliquez sur le port COM de votre modem.36 Configuration de votre système w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 5 Cliquez sur Propriétés, cliquez sur l'onglet Diagnostics, puis sur Interroger le modem pour vérifier que le modem communique avec Windows. Si toutes les commandes reçoivent des réponses, le modem fonctionne correctement. Problèmes de messagerie électronique VÉR I F IE Z Q UE VO U S Ê TE S CO N NEC TÉ À IN TER NE T — Une fois le programme de messagerie électronique Outlook Express ouvert, cliquez sur Fichier. Si une coche apparaît en regard de l'option Travailler hors connexion, cliquez sur la coche pour la supprimer et vous connecter à Internet. Transfert d'informations vers un nouvel ordinateur Le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® XP dispose d'un Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres qui permet de déplacer des données d'un ordinateur à un autre. Vous pouvez transférer des données telles que : • Messages électroniques • Paramètres de barre d'outils • Tailles de fenêtre • Signets Internet Vous pouvez transférer les données vers le nouvel ordinateur par l'intermédiaire d'une connexion réseau ou série, ou encore sur un support amovible, un CD inscriptible ou une disquette. Pour préparer le nouvel ordinateur au transfert de fichier : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Outils système, puis cliquez sur Assistant Transfert de fichiers. 2 Lorsque l'écran d'accueil de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres apparaît, cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Nouvel ordinateur, puis sur Suivant. 4 Dans l'écran Avez-vous un CD-ROM de Windows XP ?, cliquez sur J'utiliserai l'Assistant du CD-ROM de Windows XP, puis sur Suivant. 5 Lorsque l'écran Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur apparaît, allez sur l'ancien ordinateur ou ordinateur source. Ne cliquez pas sur Suivant pour l'instant. Pour copier les données de l'ancien ordinateur :Configuration de votre système 37 1 Sur l'ancien ordinateur, insérez le CD ROM du Système d'exploitation Windows XP. 2 Lorsque l'écran Bienvenue dans Microsoft Windows XP apparaît, cliquez sur Effectuer des tâches supplémentaires. 3 Sous Que voulez-vous faire ?, cliquez sur Transférer des fichiers et des paramètres. 4 Lorsque l'écran d'accueil de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres apparaît, cliquez sur Suivant. 5 Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Ancien ordinateur, puis sur Suivant. 6 Dans l'écran Sélectionnez une méthode de transfert, cliquez sur la méthode de transfert que vous préférez. 7 Dans l'écran Que voulez-vous transférer ?, sélectionnez les éléments à transférer, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Une fois les informations copiées, l'écran Fin de la phase de collecte des données apparaît. 8 Cliquez sur Terminer. Pour transférer des données vers le nouvel ordinateur : 1 Dans l'écran Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur ouvert sur le nouvel ordinateur, cliquez sur Suivant. 2 Dans l'écran Où sont les fichiers et les paramètres ? , sélectionnez la méthode de transfert de vos paramètres et fichiers, puis cliquez sur Suivant. L'Assistant lit les paramètres et fichiers collectés puis les applique à votre nouvel ordinateur. Lorsque tous les paramètres et fichiers ont été appliqués, l'écran Terminé apparaît. 3 Cliquez sur Terminé et redémarrez le nouvel ordinateur. Installation d'une imprimante AVIS : Configurez entièrement le système d'exploitation avant de connecter une imprimante à l'ordinateur. Reportez-vous à la documentation livrée avec votre imprimante pour obtenir des informations sur la configuration, notamment comment : • Obtenir et installer des pilotes à jour. • Brancher l'imprimante à votre ordinateur.38 Configuration de votre système w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m • Charger du papier et installer la cartouche de toner ou d'encre. • Contacter le fabricant de l'imprimante pour obtenir une assistance technique. Câble de l'imprimante Le câble n'est pas toujours livré avec l'imprimante. Si vous devez en acheter un séparément, vérifiez qu'il est bien compatible avec votre imprimante. Si vous avez commandé un câble d'imprimante en même temps que votre ordinateur, il doit être livré avec l'ordinateur. Connexion d'une imprimante USB REMARQUE : Vous pouvez connecter des périphériques USB pendant que l'ordinateur est sous tension. 1 Si ce n'est déjà fait, terminez la configuration du système d'exploitation. 2 Installez le pilote de l'imprimante si nécessaire. Consultez la documentation livrée avec votre imprimante. 3 Branchez le câble USB de l'imprimante au connecteur USB de l'ordinateur et à celui de l'imprimante. Les connecteurs USB ne s'insèrent que dans un seul sens. câble de l'imprimante USB connecteur USB de l'ordinateur connecteur USB de l'imprimanteConfiguration de votre système 39 Problèmes d'imprimante VÉR I F IE Z LE S CO N NEX IO N S DE S CÂB LE S DE L'IMPR IMA N TE — Assurez-vous que le câble de l'imprimante est correctement connecté à l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 38. TE S TE Z LA PR I SE É LEC TR IQ UE — Vérifiez que la prise de courant fonctionne en la testant avec un autre appareil, comme une lampe. VÉR I F IE Z Q UE L'IMPR IMA N TE E S T A L L UMÉE — Consultez la documentation fournie avec l'imprimante. VÉR I F IE Z Q UE L'IMPR IMA N TE E S T RECO N N UE PAR WI NDOW S ® — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer. 2 Cliquez sur Panneau de configuration. 3 Cliquez sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques. 4 Cliquez sur Afficher les imprimantes ou les imprimantes télécopieurs installées. Si le modèle d'imprimante utilisé est répertorié, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur son icône. 5 Cliquez sur Propriétés, puis sur l'onglet Ports. Vérifiez que le paramètre Port d'impression : est correct. RÉ I N S TA L LA T IO N D U P I LO TE DE L'IMPR IMA N TE — Voir la page 90 Dispositifs de protection contre les sautes de tension électrique Il existe des dispositifs qui protègent l'ordinateur des coupures et sautes de tension : • Protecteurs de sautes de tension • Filtres de ligne • Onduleurs (UPS) Protecteurs de sautes de tension Les protecteurs de sautes de tension et les prises multiples équipées de ce système réduisent les risques d'endommager votre ordinateur par les pointes de tension pouvant survenir au cours d'un orage ou après une coupure de courant. Le niveau de protection varie souvent en fonction du coût du protecteur de sautes de tension. Certains fabricants proposent une garantie pour certains types de dommages. Lisez attentivement la garantie du périphérique lorsque vous choisissez un protecteur de sautes de tension. La protection est meilleure sur un périphérique disposant de valeurs nominales plus élevées. Comparez les valeurs nominales, en joules, afin de déterminer l'efficacité relative des différents dispositifs. AVIS : La plupart des protecteurs de sautes de tension ne protègent pas contre les fluctuations de tension ou les coupures de courant provoquées par la foudre. Lorsque la foudre est proche, débranchez la ligne téléphonique de la prise murale et déconnectez votre ordinateur de la prise de courant.40 Configuration de votre système w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m De nombreux protecteurs de sautes de tension sont munis d'une prise de téléphone pour assurer la protection d'un modem. Consultez la documentation du protecteur de sautes de tension pour obtenir des instructions sur la connexion du modem. AVIS : Les protecteurs de sautes de tension ne protègent pas tous l'adaptateur réseau. Déconnectez le câble réseau de la prise jack murale du réseau pendant un orage. Filtres de ligne AVIS : Les filtres de ligne ne protègent pas contre les coupures de courant. Ils sont conçus pour maintenir la tension secteur à un niveau relativement constant. Systèmes d'alimentation sans interruption AVIS : Une baisse de tension pendant l'enregistrement de données sur l'unité de disque dur peut provoquer la perte des données ou l'endommagement du fichier. REMARQUE : Pour optimiser l'autonomie du système UPS, n'y branchez que votre ordinateur. Connectez les autres périphériques, tels que l'imprimante, à une prise multiple différente, munie d'une protection contre les sautes de tension. Un système d'alimentation sans interruption protège contre les fluctuations de tension et les coupures de courant. Il comporte une batterie qui alimente les appareils connectés lorsque l'alimentation secteur est coupée. La batterie se charge lorsque l'alimentation secteur est disponible. Consultez la documentation fournie par le fabricant de l'onduleur afin d'obtenir des informations sur l'autonomie de la batterie, et vous assurer que le dispositif est approuvé par Underwriters Laboratories (UL). Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur AVIS : Pour éteindre votre ordinateur en évitant la perte de données, procédez à un arrêt du système par Microsoft® Windows® , comme décrit par la suite, plutôt que d'appuyer sur le bouton d'alimentation. REMARQUE : Une autre manière de mettre votre ordinateur hors tension consiste à le paramétrer pour entrer en mode Attente ou Mise en veille prolongée. Voir le fichier d'aide Procédure pour obtenir des instructions. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 80. 1 Enregistrez et quittez tous les programmes et fichiers que vous avez ouverts, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Éteindre l'ordinateur. 2 Dans la fenêtre Éteindre l'ordinateur, cliquez sur Éteindre. L'ordinateur s'éteint une fois le processus d'arrêt terminé.S E C T I O N 3 Utilisation d'une batterie Performances de la batterie Vérification de la charge de la batterie Chargement de la batterie Retrait de la batterie Installation de la batterie Stockage de la batterie Problèmes de batterie et d'alimentation42 Utilisation d'une batterie w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Performances de la batterie REMARQUE : Les batteries des ordinateurs portables ne sont couvertes que pendant la période initiale d'un an de la garantie limitée de votre ordinateur. Pour plus d'informations sur la garantie Dell applicable à votre ordinateur, reportez-vous à la page 145. Utilisez une batterie pour alimenter l'ordinateur lorsqu'il n'est pas branché à une prise électrique. L'ordinateur est livré en standard avec une batterie dans la baie. L'autonomie de la batterie varie en fonction de l'utilisation. L'autonomie est considérablement réduite par certaines opérations, notamment : REMARQUE : Il est recommandé de connecter l'ordinateur à une prise électrique lorsque vous gravez un CD. • Utilisation de lecteurs optiques, notamment de lecteurs de CD-ROM et de DVDROM • Utilisation de périphériques de communication sans fil, de cartes PC ou de périphériques USB • Utilisation de paramètres d'affichage haute luminosité. • Utilisation de paramètres d'affichage et de luminosité élevés, d'économiseurs d'écran en 3D ou d'autres programmes gourmands en ressources tels que des jeux en 3D. • Fonctionnement de l'ordinateur en mode performances maximales Pour davantage d'informations, reportez-vous à la rubrique «Gestion de l'alimentation» du fichier d'aide Procédure. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 80. Vous pouvez également définir des options de gestion de l'alimentation afin que l'ordinateur vous alerte lorsque le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible. Vous pouvez également définir des options de gestion de l'alimentation afin d'optimiser la consommation électrique et la durée de charge de la batterie. Pour en savoir plus, reportezvous à la section page 124. PRÉCAUTION : L'utilisation d'une batterie non compatible peut accroître le risque d'incendie ou d'explosion. Ne remplacez la batterie que par une batterie compatible fournie par Dell. La batterie au lithium-ion est conçue pour fonctionner avec les ordinateurs Dell™. N'utilisez pas une batterie provenant d'autres ordinateurs. PRÉCAUTION : Ne jetez pas les batteries avec les ordures ménagères. Lorsque votre batterie au lithium-ion ne peut plus être rechargée, contactez le service local de traitement des déchets pour savoir comment vous en débarrasser. Voir la section «Enlèvement de la batterie» à la page 18.Utilisation d'une batterie 43 PRÉCAUTION : L'utilisation incorrecte d'une batterie peut accroître le risque d'incendie ou de brûlures chimiques. Vous ne devez pas percer, brûler, démonter la batterie ni l'exposer à des températures supérieures à 65°C (149°F). Conservez la batterie hors de portée des enfants. Manipulez avec précaution les batteries endommagées ou qui présentent des fuites. Les batteries endommagées peuvent fuir et provoquer des blessures ou des dommages matériels. Vérification de la charge de la batterie La fenêtre et l'icône du wattmètre Microsoft® Windows® , la jauge de charge de la batterie et l'avertissement de charge faible fournissent des informatios sur le niveau de charge de la batterie. Wattmètre La jauge d'alimentation Windows indique la charge restante de la batterie. Pour vérifier la jauge d'alimentation, double-cliquez sur l'icône sur la barre des tâches. Reportez-vous au fichier d'aide Procédure pour obtenir davantage d'informations sur l'onglet Wattmètre. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 80. Si l'ordinateur est relié à une prise secteur, une icône apparaît. Alerte de batterie faible AVIS : Pour éviter la perte ou la corruption de vos données, enregistrez votre travail immédiatement après avoir reçu une alerte de niveau de batterie faible. Connectez votre ordinateur directement à une prise secteur Si la batterie est complètement déchargée, le mode Mise en veille prolongée. Une alerte de batterie déchargée s'affiche lorsque la batterie est déchargée à environ 90 %. Reportez-vous à la rubrique «Gestion de l'alimentation» dans le fichier d'aide «Procédure» pour obtenir davantage d'informations sur les alertes de batterie déchargée. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 80. Chargement de la batterie REMARQUE : L'adaptateur secteur charge une batterie complètement déchargée en 3 heures environ, si l'ordinateur est éteint. Le temps nécessaire pour charger la batterie est sensiblement accru lorsque l'ordinateur est sous tension et fonctionne à des vitesses de processeur et des niveaux d'activité élevés. La batterie peut ne pas se charger lorsque l'ordinateur fonctionne à de tels niveaux pendant de longues périodes de temps. 44 Utilisation d'une batterie w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Chaque fois que vous connectez l'ordinateur à une prise secteur ou que vous installez une batterie quand l'ordinateur est connecté à une prise secteur, celui-ci vérifie la charge de la batterie et sa température. L'adaptateur CA/CC charge alors la batterie si nécessaire et maintient sa charge. Si la batterie est chaude après utilisation ou parce qu'elle se trouve dans un environnement chaud, il se peut qu'elle ne puisse être chargée lorsque vous branchez l'ordinateur sur secteur. Si le voyant d'état de la batterie clignote alternativement vert et orange, la batterie est trop chaude pour être chargée. Débranchez l'ordinateur de la prise de courant et laissez la batterie et l'ordinateur revenir à la température ambiante. Branchez ensuite l'ordinateur à une prise électrique pour continuer la charge de la batterie. REMARQUE : Vous pouvez laisser la batterie dans l'ordinateur aussi longtemps que vous le souhaitez. Ses circuits la protègent de toute surcharge. Reportez-vous à la rubrique «Gestion de l'alimentation» dans le fichier d'aide «Procédure» pour obtenir davantage d'informations sur la résolution des problèmes de batterie. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 80. Retrait de la batterie PRÉCAUTION : Avant d'effectuer ces procédures, déconnectez le modem de la prise jack téléphonique murale. 1 Assurez-vous que l'ordinateur est éteint ou connecté à une prise secteur. 2 Faites glisser le dispositif d'extraction de la batterie et maintenez-le. 3 Retirez la batterie.Utilisation d'une batterie 45 Installation de la batterie Faites glisser la batterie dans la baie jusqu'à ce que le loquet s'enclenche. Stockage de la batterie Retirez la batterie lorsque vous rangez votre ordinateur pour de longues périodes. La batterie se décharge peu à peu, même si elle est retirée de l'ordinateur. Après de longues périodes de stockage, rechargez totalement la batterie avant de l'utiliser. Problèmes de batterie et d'alimentation REMARQUE : Reportez-vous au fichier d'aide Procédure pour obtenir des informations sur le mode Veille. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 80. VÉR I F IE Z LE VO YA N T D'A L IME N TA T IO N — Lorsque le voyant d'alimentation est allumé ou qu'il clignote, l'ordinateur est alimenté. Si le voyant clignote, l'ordinateur est est en mode Veille —appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour revenir au mode Normal. Si le voyant est éteint, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour mettre l'ordinateur sous tension ou sortir du mode d'économie d'énergie. Si l'ordinateur ne s'allume pas appuyez sur le bouton d’alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant quelques secondes. CHARGE Z LA BA T TER IE — Il se peut que la batterie soit déchargée. 1 Réinstallez la batterie. 2 Utilisez l'adaptateur secteur pour connecter votre ordinateur à une prise électrique. 3 Allumez l'ordinateur. dispositif d'extraction de la baie de batterie batterie46 Utilisation d'une batterie w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m VÉR I F IE Z LE VO YA N T D'É TA T DE LA BA T TER IE — Si le voyant d'état de la batterie est orange clignotant ou orange fixe, la batterie est peu chargée ou complètement déchargée. Connectez l'ordinateur à une prise électrique. Si le voyant d'état de la batterie clignote alternativement vert et orange, la batterie est trop chaude pour être chargée. Éteignez l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section page 40), débranchez l'ordinateur de la prise de courant et laissez la batterie et l'ordinateur revenir à température ambiante. Si le voyant d'état de la batterie est orange et clignote rapidement, il se peut que la batterie soit défectueuse. Contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la page 126). TE S TE Z LA PR I SE É LEC TR IQ UE — Vérifiez que la prise de courant fonctionne en la testant avec un autre appareil, comme une lampe. VÉR I F IE Z L'ADAP TA TE UR SEC TE UR — Vérifiez les connexions des câbles de l'adaptateur. Si l'adaptateur secteur est muni d'un voyant, assurez-vous que ce dernier est allumé. CO N NEC TE Z VO TRE ORD I NA TE UR D IREC TEME N T À U NE PR I SE É LEC TR IQ UE — Débranchez les périphériques de protection contre les surtensions électriques, les multiprises et les rallonges de câble pour vérifier que l'ordinateur fonctionne s'il est branché directement sur la prise. ÉL IM I NE Z LE S SO URCE S PO TE N T IE L LE S D'I N TER FÉRE NCE S — Éteignez les ventilateurs, les lampes fluorescentes ou halogènes se trouvant à proximité. RÉG LE Z LE S PROPR IÉ TÉ S DE L'A L IME N TA T IO N — Consultez le fichier d'aide Procédures ou lancez une recherche à l'aide du mot-clé attente dans le Centre d'aide et de support. Pour accéder à l'aide, reportez-vous à la page 80. REME T TE Z E N P LACE LE S MOD U LE S DE MÉMO IRE — Si le voyant d'alimentation de votre ordinateur s'allume mais que l'écran reste vide, remettez en place les modules de mémoire (reportezvous à la page 100 . Si la batterie ne se charge pas. ÉTE IG NE Z VO TRE ORD I NA TE UR — Le temps nécessaire pour charger la batterie est sensiblement accru lorsque l'ordinateur est sous tension et fonctionne à des vitesses de processeur et des niveaux d'activité élevés. La batterie peut ne pas se charger lorsque l'ordinateur fonctionne à de tels niveaux pendant de longues périodes de temps. Si la tension de la batterie est basse VO IR «PER FORMA NCE S DE LA BA T TER IE» À LA PAGE 42 — La durée de fonctionnement peut être considérablement réduite dans certains cas. OP T IM I SER LE S PER FORMA NCE S D U PROCE S SE UR E T LA CO N SOMMA T IO N É LEC TR IQ UE — Voir la page 124. S E C T I O N 4 Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile (Touch Pad) Bouton Dell™ AccessDirect™ Pavé numérique Raccourcis clavier Tablette tactile (Touch Pad) Problèmes liés à la tablette tactile et à la souris Problèmes liés au clavier externe Caractères inattendus48 Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile (Touch Pad) w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Bouton Dell™ AccessDirect™ Appuyez sur ce bouton pour lancer un programme utilisé fréquemment, tel que les outils de support et de formation et votre navigateur Internet par défaut. Reprogrammation du bouton Pour modifier les paramètres du bouton reprogrammable ou pour rechercher des informations sur l'utilisation de ce bouton : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer→ Panneau de configuration→ Imprimantes et autres périphériques→ icône Clavier. 2 Cliquez sur l'onglet AccessDirect. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton Aide et suivez les instructions à l'écran. Pavé numérique pavé numériqueUtilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile (Touch Pad) 49 Utilisez le pavé numérique comme s'il s'agissait du pavé numérique d'un clavier externe. Chaque touche du clavier correspond à plusieurs fonctions. Les chiffres et les symboles du pavé numérique figurent en bleu à droite de ces touches. • Pour activer ou désactiver le pavé, appuyez sur . Le voyant indique que le pavé numérique est activé. • Pour utiliser la focntion nuumérique alors que le pavé numérique est activé, appuyez sur et sur la touche souhaitée. • Pour désactiver le pavé numérique, appuyez de nouveau sur . Raccourcis clavier Fonctions système Fonctions d'affichage Ouvre la fenêtre Gestionnaire des tâches Active et désactive le pavé numérique . Active et désactive la fonction Arrêt défil. Bascule l'image vidéo vers l'écran suivant. Les options comprennent l'écran intégré, un moniteur externe et les deux types d'affichage en simultané. REMARQUE : Si l'ordinateur est connecté à un téléviseur, vous devez activer celui-ci par l'intermédiaire des paramètres d'affichage de Windows (voir la page 58). Augmente la luminosité sur l'écran intégré uniquement (pas sur un moniteur externe). Diminue la luminosité sur l'écran intégré uniquement (pas sur un moniteur externe). 950 Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile (Touch Pad) w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Gestion de l'alimentation Fonctions de haut-parleur Fonctions de la touche logo Microsoft® Windows® Active un mode de gestion de l'alimentation. À l'aide de l'onglet Avancé de la fenêtre Propriétés des options d'alimentation, vous pouvez reprogrammer ce raccourci clavier pour qu'il active un autre mode de gestion de l'alimentation. Pour davantage d'informations, reportez-vous à la rubrique «Gestion de l'alimentation» du fichier d'aide Procédure Augmente le volume des haut-parleurs intégrés et des haut-parleurs externes, si des haut-parleurs externes sont branchés. Baisse le volume des haut-parleurs intégrés et des hautparleurs externes, si des haut-parleurs externes sont branchés. Active ou désactive le son sur les haut-parleurs intégrés ou externes, si ceux-ci sont branchés. Réduit toutes les fenêtres ouvertes Agrandit toutes les fenêtres Lance l'Explorateur Windows Ouvre la boîte de dialogue Exécuter Ouvre la la boîte de dialogue Résultats de la recherche . Ouvre la boîte de dialogue Résultats de la recherche - Ordinateurs (si vous êtes connecté à un réseau) Ouvre la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du systèmeUtilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile (Touch Pad) 51 Pour régler les options du clavier, telles que la vitesse de répétition des caractères, cliquez sur Démarrer→ Panneau de configuration→ Imprimantes et autres périphériques→ Clavier. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. Tablette tactile (Touch Pad) La tablette tactile détecte la pression et la direction dans laquelle vous déplacez votre doigt, et vous permet de contrôler le pointeur à l'écran. Utilisez la tablette tactile et ses boutons comme s'il s'agissait d'une souris. • Posez et déplacez votre doigt sur la surface de la tablette tactile pour déplacer le curseur. • Pour sélectionner un objet, tapez doucement une fois sur la surface de la tablette tactile ou utilisez votre pouce pour appuyer sur le bouton gauche de la tablette tactile. • Pour sélectionner (ou déplacer) un objet, placez le pointeur dessus et faites un «tap et demi» (appuyez, levez, appuyez le doigt). Après le premier tap, laissez votre doigt sur la tablette tactile et déplacez l'objet sélectionné en faisant glisser votre doigt sur la surface. • Pour double-cliquer sur un objet, placez le curseur sur l'objet et appuyez doucement deux fois sur la tablette tactile ou appuyez deux fois sur le bouton gauche à l'aide de votre pouce. tablette tactile boutons de la tablette tactile52 Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile (Touch Pad) w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Personnalisation de la tablette tactile Vous pouvez désactiver la tablette tactile ou régler ses paramètres au moyen de la fenêtre de propriétés Souris . 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, sur Panneau de configuration, puis sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques. 2 Cliquez sur Souris. 3 Dans la fenêtre Souris, cliquez sur l'onglet Paramètres. Pour activer ou désactiver la tablette tactile ou la souris, sélectionnez le périphérique et cliquez sur Désactiver. Pour modifier les paramètres de la tablette tactile ou de la souris, sélectionnez le périphérique, cliquez sur Paramètres, sélectionnez les paramètres de votre choix, puis cliquez sur Appliquer. 4 Cliquez sur OK pour enregistrer les paramètres et fermer la fenêtre, puis cliquez de nouveau sur OK pour quitter la fenêtre de propriétés Souris. Problèmes liés à la tablette tactile et à la souris VÉR I F IER LE S PARAMÈ TRE S DE LA TAB LE T TE TAC T I LE — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, sur Panneau de configuration, puis sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques. 2 Cliquez sur Souris. 3 Essayez de régler les paramètres. VÉR I F IE Z LE CÂB LE DE LA SO UR I S — Éteignez votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 40). Déconnectez le câble du clavier et vérifiez qu'il n'est pas endommagé. Reconnectez le câble d'alimentation. Si vous utilisez un câble d'extension pour souris, déconnectez-le et connectez la souris directement sur l'ordinateur. PO UR VO U S A S S URER Q UE LE PROB LÈME V IE N T DE LA SO UR I S, VÉR I F IE Z LA TAB LE T TE TAC T I LE — 1 Éteignez votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section page 40). 2 Déconnectez la souris. 3 Allumez l'ordinateur. 4 Lorsque le bureau Windows apparaît, utilisez la tablette tactile pour déplacer le curseur, sélectionnez une icône et ouvrez-la. Si la tablette tactile fonctionne correctement, la souris est probablement défectueuse. RÉ I N S TA L LE Z LE P I LO TE DE LA TAB LE T TE TAC T I LE — Voir la page 90. Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile (Touch Pad) 53 Problèmes liés au clavier externe REMARQUE : Lorsque vous connectez un clavier externe, le clavier intégré reste entièrement opérationnel. VÉR I F IE Z LE CÂB LE D U C LAV IER — Éteignez votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 40). Déconnectez le câble du clavier et vérifiez qu'il n'est pas endommagé. Reconnectez le câble d'alimentation. Si vous utilisez un câble d'extension pour clavier, déconnectez-le et branchez le clavier directement sur l'ordinateur. VÉR I F IE Z LE C LAV IER EX TER NE — 1 Éteignez votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 40), patientez une minute, puis rallumez-le. 2 Vérifiez que les voyants des touches Verr num, Verr Maj et Arrêt défil sur le clavier clignotent pendant le processus d'initialisation. 3 Sur le bureau Windows® , cliquez sur Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes, Accessoires, puis cliquez sur Bloc-notes. 4 Tapez quelques caractères à l'aide du clavier intégré et vérifiez qu'ils s'affichent à l'écran. Si vous ne parvenez pas à effectuer ces vérifications, votre clavier externe est probablement défectueux. PO UR VO U S A S S URER Q UE LE PROB LÈME PROV IE N T B IE N D U C LAV IER EX TER NE, VÉR I F IE Z LE C LAV IER I N TÉGRÉ — 1 Éteignez votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 40). 2 Déconnectez le clavier externe. 3 Allumez l'ordinateur. 4 Sur le bureau Windows, cliquez sur Démarrer, pointez sur Programmes, Accessoires, puis cliquez sur Bloc-notes. 5 Tapez quelques caractères à l'aide du clavier intégré et vérifiez qu'ils s'affichent à l'écran. Si les caractères s'affichent maintenant alors qu'ils ne s'affichaient pas avec le clavier externe, ce dernier est probablement défectueux. Contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la page 126). Caractères inattendus DÉ SAC T IVE Z LE PAVÉ N UMÉR IQ UE. Appuyez sur pour désactiver le pavé numérique si des nombres s'affichent au lieu de lettres. Vérifiez que le voyant Verr Num n'est pas allumé.54 Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile (Touch Pad) w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o mS E C T I O N 5 Utilisation des CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia Utilisation de CD ou de DVD Problèmes liés au CD ou au DVD Problèmes de son et de haut-parleurs Raccordement d'un téléviseur à l'ordinateur56 Utilisation des CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Utilisation de CD ou de DVD Consultez le fichier d'aide Procédure pour obtenir davantage d'informations sur l'utilisation des CD et DVD sur votre ordinateur. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 80. Problèmes liés au CD ou au DVD Si vous ne parvenez pas à éjecter un CD, CD-RW, DVD ou DVD+RW REMARQUE : Du fait des différentes zones, les DVD ne fonctionnent pas dans tous les lecteurs. La vibration du lecteur de CD à haute vitesse est normale et peut être bruyante. Ce bruit n'indique pas un défaut du lecteur ou du CD. VÉR I F IE Z Q UE WI NDOW S ® RECO N NA Î T LE LEC TE UR — Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Poste de travail. Si le lecteur n'est pas répertorié, effectuez une analyse complète avec votre logiciel anti-virus pour rechercher d'éventuels virus et les supprimer. Les virus peuvent parfois empêcher Windows de reconnaître le lecteur. Insérez une disquette damorçage et redémarrez l'ordinateur. Vérifiez que le voyant clignote pour indiquer un fonctionnement normal. ES SA YE Z U N A U TRE D I SQ UE. Insérez un autre support pour éliminer la possibilité que le premier soit défectueux. RÉG LE Z LE VO L UME DE WI NDOW S — Double-cliquez sur l'icône représentant un haut-parleur, dans l'angle inférieur droit de votre écran. Assurez-vous d'avoir monté le volume et que le son n'est pas mis en sourdine. NE T TO YE Z LE LEC TE UR O U LE D I SQ UE — Reportez-vous à la section «Nettoyage de votre ordinateur» dans le fichier d'aide Procédure pour obtenir des instructions détaillées. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 80. Si vous ne parvenez pas à éjecter un CD, CD-RW, DVD ou DVD+RW 1 Vérifiez que l'ordinateur est éteint et hors tension (voir la page 40). 2 Redressez un trombone et insérez l'une de ses extrémités dans le trou d'éjection situé à l'avant du lecteur ; poussez ensuite fermement jusqu'à ce que le plateau soit partiellement éjecté. 3 Tirez le plateau avec précaution jusqu'à ce qu'il s'arrête. Si vous entendez un frottement ou grincement inhabituel • Assurez-vous que ce son n'est pas émis par un programme en cours d'exécution. • Assurez-vous que le disque est correctement inséré. Si l'écriture s'arrête sur le lecteur de CD-RW ou DVD+RW AVA N T D'ÉCR IRE S UR U N D I SQ UE CD-RW, DÉ SAC T IVE Z LE MODE A T TE N TE DA N S WI NDOW S — Lancez une recherche à l'aide du mot-clé attente dans le Centre d'aide et de support. Pour accéder à l'aide, reportez-vous à la page 80.Utilisation des CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia 57 RÉD U I SE Z LA V I TE S SE D'ÉCR I T URE — Consultez les fichiers d'aide de votre logiciel de gravure de CD. FERME Z TO U S LE S A U TRE S PROGRAMME S O UVER T S — La fermeture de tous les autres programmes ouverts avant la gravure d'un CD-RW ou DVD+RW peut également résoudre le problème. Problèmes de son et de haut-parleurs Si vous avez un problème avec les haut-parleurs intégrés RÉG LE Z LE VO L UME DE WI NDOW S ® — Double-cliquez sur l'icône représentant un hautparleur, dans l'angle inférieur droit de votre écran. Assurez-vous d'avoir monté le volume et que le son n'est pas mis en sourdine. Réglez le volume, les aigus ou les basses pour supprimer toute distorsion. UT I L I SE Z LE S RACCO URC I S C LAV IER PO UR RÉG LER LE VO L UME. Pour désactiver (mettre en sourdine) les haut-parleurs intégrés, appuyez sur . RÉ I N S TA L LE Z LE P I LO TE A UD IO. Voir la page 90. Si vous avez un problème avec les haut-parleurs externes REMARQUE : Le volume de certains lecteurs MP3 annule l'effet du paramètre de volume de Windows. Si vous avez écouté des musiques MP3, vérifiez que vous n'avez pas baissé ou éteint le volume du lecteur. VÉR I F IE Z LE S CO N NEX IO N S DE S CÂB LE S DE S HA U T-PAR LE UR S — Consultez le schéma d'installation fourni avec les haut-parleurs. TE S TE Z LA PR I SE É LEC TR IQ UE — Vérifiez que la prise de courant fonctionne en la testant avec un autre appareil, comme une lampe. VÉR I F IE Z Q UE LE S HA U T-PAR LE UR S SO N T A L L UMÉ S — Consultez le schéma d'installation fourni avec les haut-parleurs. RÉG LE Z LE VO L UME DE WI NDOW S — Double-cliquez sur l'icône représentant un haut-parleur, dans l'angle inférieur droit de votre écran. Assurez-vous d'avoir monté le volume et que le son n'est pas mis en sourdine. Réglez le volume, les aigus ou les basses pour supprimer toute distorsion. TE S TE Z LE S HA U T-PAR LE UR S — Branchez le câble audio du haut-parleur au connecteur de sortie ligne de l'ordinateur. Assurez-vous que le volume du casque n'est pas à zéro. Lancez la lecture d'un CD de musique. EXÉC U TE Z L'A U TO-TE S T D U HA U T-PAR LE UR — Les caissons d'extrêmes graves de certains systèmes de haut-parleurs sont équipés d'un bouton d'auto-test. Consultez la documentation des haut-parleurs pour obtenir des instructions sur l'auto-test. ÉL IM I NE Z LE S SO URCE S PO TE N T IE L LE S D'I N TER FÉRE NCE S — Éteignez les ventilateurs, tubes au néon ou lampes halogènes proches afin de vérifier s'ils produisent des interférences. RÉ I N S TA L LE Z LE P I LO TE A UD IO — Voir la page 90.58 Utilisation des CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Raccordement d'un téléviseur à l'ordinateur Votre ordinateur est équipé d'un connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo pour être relié à un téléviseur. Vous pouvez utiliser un câble vidéo composite ou S-vidéo vendu dans le commerce pour connecter l'ordinateur à un téléviseur, de l'une des deux façons suivantes : REMARQUE : Votre ordinateur n'est pas forcément livré avec les câbles audio et vidéo nécessaires pour le relier à un téléviseur. Vous pouvez vous procurer ce genre de câble dans les magasins spécialisés. • S-vidéo (pour un téléviseur avec entrée S-vidéo) • Vidéo composite (pour un téléviseur uniquement équipé d'une entrée vidéo composite ; utilise également le câble Dell de sortie TV composite) Le connecteur audio situé sur le côté de l'ordinateur vous permet de le relier au téléviseur ou au périphérique audio, en utilisant un câble audio disponible dans le commerce. REMARQUE : Les schémas illustrant chaque combinaison apparaissent au début de chaque sous-section, pour vous aider à déterminer la méthode la plus appropriée. Une fois la connexion des câbles terminée, reportez-vous à la section «Activation des paramètres d'affichage pour téléviseur» à la page 62 pour vérifier que l'ordinateur reconnaît le téléviseur et fonctionnera convenablement. Connexion S-vidéoUtilisation des CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia 59 Avant d'entamer les procédures, assurez-vous que vous disposez des câbles suivants : 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur et le téléviseur et/ou le périphérique audio que vous souhaitez connecter. 2 Connectez une extrémité du câble S-vidéo au connecteur S-vidéo de l'ordinateur. 3 Connectez l'autre extrémité du câble S-vidéo sur votre téléviseur. 4 Branchez l'extrémité à un seul connecteur du câble audio dans la prise écouteurs de l'ordinateur. câble S-vidéo câble audio60 Utilisation des CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 5 Connectez les deux prises RCA situées à l'autre extrémité du câble audio aux connecteurs d'entrée audio de votre téléviseur ou de votre périphérique audio. 6 Allumez le téléviseur et tous les périphériques audio connectés, puis l'ordinateur. 7 Voir «Activation des paramètres d'affichage pour téléviseur» à la page 62 pour vérifier que l'ordinateur reconnaît le téléviseur et fonctionnera convenablement. Connecteur vidéo compositeUtilisation des CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia 61 Pour connecter l'ordinateur à un téléviseur uniquement équipé d'une entrée vidéo composite, Dell fournit un câble de sortie TV composite. Avant d'entamer les procédures, assurez-vous que vous disposez des câbles suivants : 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur et le téléviseur et/ou le périphérique audio que vous souhaitez connecter. 2 Connectez l'adaptateur de sortie TV composite au connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo situé sur l'ordinateur. adaptateur de sortie TV composite câble vidéo composite câble audio connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo connecteur vidéo composite adaptateur de sortie TV composite connecteur S-vidéo62 Utilisation des CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 3 Connectez l'une des extrémités du câble vidéo composite au connecteur correspondant de l'adaptateur. 4 Connectez l'autre extrémité du câble vidéo composite au connecteur vidéo composite du téléviseur. 5 Branchez l'extrémité à un seul connecteur du câble audio dans la prise écouteurs de l'ordinateur. 6 Connectez les deux prises RCA situées à l'autre extrémité du câble audio aux connecteurs d'entrée audio de votre téléviseur ou de votre périphérique audio. Activation des paramètres d'affichage pour téléviseur Contrôleur vidéo ATI REMARQUE : Vérifiez que le téléviseur est correctement connecté avant d'activer les paramètres d'affichage. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Apparence et thèmes, puis sur Affichage. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramètres, puis sur Avancés.Utilisation des CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia 63 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Affichage. 5 Cliquez sur le coin supérieur gauche du bouton TV pour activer le téléviseur. 6 Pour lire un DVD sur le téléviseur, cliquez sur le petit bouton «principal» (en forme de cible) situé en bas à gauche sous l'image TV. REMARQUE : Les modes d'accès au matériel dépendent des programmes utilisés. Selon les programmes, vous aurez ou non à cliquer sur le bouton principal pour les fonctions autres que la lecture d'un DVD. 7 Cliquez sur Appliquer. 8 Cliquez sur Oui pour valider le nouveau réglage. 9 Cliquez sur OK La vidéo DVD n'est visible que sur l'écran désigné comme principal. Pendant la lecture du DVD, la fenêtre du lecteur de DVD sur l'écran de l'ordinateur est vide, ou (si la fenêtre est en mode plein écran) tout l'écran de l'ordinateur est vide. Contrôleur vidéo Nvidia REMARQUE : Vérifiez que le téléviseur est correctement connecté avant d'activer les paramètres d'affichage. 1 Ouvrez la fenêtre Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur l'icône Panneau de configuration. 3 Double-cliquez sur l'icône Affichage, puis cliquez sur l'onglet Paramètres, et sur Avancés. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet TwinView (Double affichage). 5 Cliquez sur le bouton Cloner pour activer le téléviseur. REMARQUE : Les modes d'accès au matériel dépendent des programmes utilisés. Selon les programmes, vous aurez ou non à cliquer sur le bouton principal pour les fonctions autres que la lecture d'un DVD. 6 Cliquez sur Appliquer. 7 Cliquez sur OK pour valider le nouveau réglage. 8 Cliquez sur Oui pour valider le nouveau réglage. 9 Cliquez sur OK.64 Utilisation des CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o mS E C T I O N 6 Installation d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau au sein d'un bureau Connexion à une carte réseau Assistant Installation d'un réseau Problèmes de réseau Connexion à des réseaux locaux sans fil66 Installation d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau au sein d'un bureau w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Connexion à une carte réseau Pour pouvoir relier votre ordinateur à un réseau, il doit être équipé d'une carte réseau, laquelle doit être reliée au réseau par le câble adéquat. Pour connecter un câble réseau : 1 Branchez le câble réseau au connecteur qui se trouve sur votre ordinateur. REMARQUE : Insérez le câble jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche et tirez dessus doucement pour vous assurer qu'il est correctement fixé. 2 Connectez l'autre extrémité du câble réseau à un dispositif de connexion réseau, tel qu'une prise réseau murale. REMARQUE : Ne branchez pas le câble réseau dans la prise téléphonique murale. Assistant Installation d'un réseau Le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® XP dispose d'un Assistant Installation réseau qui vous guide dans la procédure de partage des fichiers, des imprimantes ou d'une connexion Internet entre ordinateurs présents au sein d'un réseau familial ou d'une petite entreprise. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Communications, puis sur Assistant Installation réseau.Installation d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau au sein d'un bureau 67 2 Dans l'écran d'accueil, cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Cliquez sur Liste de vérification pour la création d'un réseau. REMARQUE : La sélection de la méthode de connexion Cet ordinateur se connecte directement à Internet active le pare-feu intégré fourni avec Windows XP. 4 Effectuez la série d'étapes et les opérations requises, puis revenez à l'Assistant Installation réseau. 5 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. Problèmes de réseau VÉR I F IE Z LA CO N NEX IO N D U CÂB LE RÉ SEA U — Vérifiez que le connecteur du câble réseau est bien relié au connecteur de l'ordinateur et à la prise murale du réseau. VÉR I F IE Z LE S VO YA N T S D U RÉ SEA U S UR LE CO N NEC TE UR RÉ SEA U — Si le voyant est vert, la connexion réseau est active. Si le voyant d'état n'est pas vert, essayez de remplacer le câble réseau. Le voyant orange indique que le pilote de carte réseau est chargé et que la carte détecte de l'activité. REDÉMARRE Z L'ORD I NA TE UR — Essayez de vous connecter à nouveau au réseau. CO N TAC TE Z VO TRE ADM I N I S TRA TE UR RÉ SEA U — Vérifiez que vos paramètres réseau sont corrects et que le réseau fonctionne. Connexion à des réseaux locaux sans fil Vous devez connaître des informations spécifiques à votre réseau avant de pouvoir vous connecter à un réseau local (LAN) sans fil. Demandez le nom de votre réseau sans fil ainsi que les paramètres de sécurité spécifiques à votre administrateur de réseau. Ces paramètres sont propres à votre réseau. Dell ne peut donc pas vous fournir ces informations. REMARQUE : Ces instructions concernant la mise en réseau ne s'appliquent ni à Bluetooth ni aux produits cellulaires.68 Installation d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau au sein d'un bureau w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Détermination du type de réseau Les réseaux sans fil se divisent en deux catégories — les réseaux infrastructurels et les réseaux ad-hoc. Un réseau infrastructurel utilise des routeurs ou des points d'accès pour connecter plusieurs ordinateurs ensemble. Un réseau ad-hoc n'utilise pas de routeurs ni de points d'accès. Il se compose d'ordinateurs qui diffusent à un autre ordinateur. REMARQUE : La plupart des réseaux sans fil sont de type infrastructurel. Si vous n'êtes pas sûr de connaître le type du réseau auquel vous vous connectez, contactez votre administrateur de réseau. Connexion à un réseau sous Windows XP Votre carte réseau sans fil doit disposer du logiciel et des pilotes appropriés pour se connecter à un réseau. Ce logiciel est pré-installé en usine. S'il a été supprimé ou corrompu, suivez les instructions répertoriées dans le Guide d'utilisation de votre carte sans fil. Vous trouverez ce Guide d'utilisation sur le CD des pilotes, des utilitaires et des applications (livré avec l'ordinateur) dans le répertoire «Guides d'utilisation-Guide d'utilisation du réseau». Il est également disponible sur le site Web de support de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com. 1 Cliquez sur Démarrer, Panneau de configuration, puis sur Switch to Classic View (Passer en affichage classique). 2 Double-cliquez sur Network Connections (Connexions réseau). 3 Cliquez sur Wireless Network Connection (Connexion réseau sans fil). L'icône Connexion réseau sans fi) apparaît en surbrillance. 4 Sous Network Tasks (Tâches réseau) (côté gauche), cliquez sur Change settings of this connection (Modifier les paramètres de cette connexion). Réseau infrastructurel Réseau ad-hocInstallation d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau au sein d'un bureau 69 La fenêtre Wireless Network Connection Properties (Propriétés de la connexion réseau sans fil) apparaît. 5 Sélectionnez l'onglet Wireless Networks (Réseaux sans fil). REMARQUE : Les noms des réseaux sans fil que votre ordinateur peut visualiser sont répertoriés dans la zone Available Networks (Réseaux disponibles). 6 Cliquez sur Ajouter. La fenêtre Wireless network properties (Propriétés du réseau sans fil) apparaît. 70 Installation d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau au sein d'un bureau w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 7 Saisissez le nom de votre réseau dans le champ Network name (SSID) (Nom du réseau (SSID). 8 Si vous vous connectez à un réseau ad-hoc, qui n'utilise pas de routeurs ou de points d'accès, cochez la case This is a computer-to-computer (ad hoc) network; wireless access points are not used (Il s'agit d'un réseau ordinateur à ordinateur (ad hoc) ; les points d'accès sans fil ne sont pas utilisés). 9 Cliquez sur OK. Le nouveau nom de réseau apparaît dans la zone Preferred networks (Réseaux préférés). Installation d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau au sein d'un bureau 71 Finalisation de la connexion réseau (paramètres de sécurité) Pour finaliser votre connexion, vous devez modifier vos paramètres de sécurité sans fil pour qu'ils correspondent à ceux du réseau sans fil auquel vous essayez de vous connecter. Choisissez l'une des options de connexion suivantes basées sur les paramètres de sécurité de votre réseau: • Connexion à un réseau sans exigences de sécurité (commune aux réseaux domestiques et de petite entreprise) • Connexion à un réseau avec exigences de sécurité WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) • Connexion à un réseau avec exigences de sécurité WEP (Wired Equivalent Protocol) REMARQUE : Les paramètres de sécurité du réseau sont fournis par l'administrateur du réseau et sont propres à votre réseau. Dell ne peut pas vous fournir ces informations.72 Installation d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau au sein d'un bureau w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Connexion à un réseau sans exigences de sécurité 1 Dans la zone Preferred networks (Réseaux préférés), cliquez sur le nom de votre réseau sans fil. 2 Cliquez sur Propriétés. 3 Dans le menu déroulant Network Authentication (Authentification réseau), sélectionnez Ouvrir. Les versions antérieures du logiciel sans fil Dell n'intègrent peut-être pas les menus déroulants. Si vous utilisez une version antérieure, décochez la case Data encryption (WEP enabled) (Cryptage des données (WEP activé) et passez à l'étape 5. 4 Dans le menu déroulant Data encryption (Cryptage des données), sélectionnez Disabled (Désactivé). 5 Cliquez sur OK. La configuration de votre réseau est terminée. REMARQUE : La connexion au réseau peut prendre une minute. Connexion à un réseau avec exigences de sécurité WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) Les instructions suivantes sont la procédure de base à suivre pour la connexion à un réseau WPA. Si votre réseau exige un nom d'utilisateur, un mot de passe ou des paramètres de domaine, reportez-vous aux instructions de configuration du Guide d'utilisation de votre carte réseau sans fil. REMARQUE : Les protocoles WPA exigent que vous connaissiez les paramètres d'authentification réseau et de cryptage des données de votre réseau sans fil. Par ailleurs, votre réseau protégé par WPA exigera peut-être des paramètres spéciaux, comme une clé de réseau, un nom d'utilisateur, un mot de passe et un nom de domaine. Assurez-vous que vous disposez de tous les paramètres WPA nécessaires avant de continuer. Dans le cas, contraire, contactez votre administrateur de réseau. 1 Dans la zone Preferred networks (Réseaux préférés), cliquez sur le nom de votre réseau sans fil. 2 Cliquez sur Propriétés. 3 Dans le menu déroulant Network Authentication (Authentification réseau), sélectionnez le type d'authentification de votre réseau (conformément aux indications de votre administrateur de réseau). Si vous ne visualisez pas les menus déroulants, vous devez mettre à jour votre logiciel sans fil avant de continuer. Téléchargez et installez la dernière version de votre logiciel de pilote sans fil disponible sur le site Web de support de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com.Installation d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau au sein d'un bureau 73 4 Dans le menu déroulant Data encryption (Cryptage des données), sélectionnez le type de cryptage de vos données (conformément aux indications de votre administrateur de réseau). 5 Si votre réseau sans fil exige une clé, saisissez-la dans le champ Network key (Clé de réseau). 6 Cliquez sur OK. La configuration de votre réseau est terminée. REMARQUE : La connexion au réseau peut prendre une minute. Connexion à un réseau avec exigences de sécurité WEP (Wired Equivalent Protocol) 1 Dans la zone Preferred networks (Réseaux préférés), cliquez sur le nom de votre réseau sans fil. 74 Installation d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau au sein d'un bureau w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 2 Cliquez sur Propriétés. 3 Dans le menu déroulant Network Authentication (Authentification réseau), sélectionnez Ouvrir. Les versions antérieures du logiciel sans fil Dell n'intègrent peut-être pas les menus déroulants. Si vous utilisez une version antérieure, cochez la case Data encryption (WEP enabled) (Cryptage des données (WEP activé) et passez à l'étape 5. 4 Dans le menu déroulant Data encryption (Cryptage des données), sélectionnez WEP. 5 Si le réseau sans fil n'exige pas de clé de réseau (mais par exemple un mot de passe), passez à l'étape 8. 6 Décochez la case The key is provided for me automatically (la clé m'est fournie automatiquement). Installation d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau au sein d'un bureau 75 7 Saisissez dans le champ Network key (Clé de réseau) la clé de réseau WEP, fournie par votre administrateur de réseau. 8 Saisissez de nouveau cette clé dans le champ Confirm network key (Confirmer clé de réseau). 9 Cliquez sur OK. La configuration de votre réseau est terminée. REMARQUE : La connexion au réseau peut prendre une minute.76 Installation d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau au sein d'un bureau w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o mS E C T I O N 7 Résolution des problèmes Résolutions de problèmes Accès à l'aide Messages d'erreur Problèmes liés à la vidéo et à l'affichage Problèmes de scanner Problèmes de lecteur Problèmes de carte PC Problèmes de programmes généraux Résolution d'autres problèmes techniques Si l'ordinateur est mouillé Si vous laissez tomber votre ordinateur ou s'il est endommagé Pilotes Résolution des incompatibilités logicielles et matérielles Utilisation de la fonction Restauration du système Réinstallation de Microsoft® Windows® XP78 Résolution des problèmes w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Résolutions de problèmes REMARQUE : Si vous avez un problème avec un périphérique externe, consultez sa documentation ou contactez son fabricant. Il est parfois difficile de savoir où trouver des réponses. Ce diagramme peut vous aider à trouver rapidement les réponses à vos questions. Voir la page 45. Voir la page 80. Obtenir une assistance technique auprès de Dell. Voir la page 126. Pour quitter le mode Mise en veille prolongée, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation. Reportez-vous au fichier d'aide Procédure pour obtenir des informations supplémentaires sur le mode Attente.Résolution des problèmes 79 Voir la page 81. Voir la page 57. Voir la page 39. Voir page 35. Voir la page 83. Voir la page 67. Voir la page 53. Voir la page 86. Voir la page 35. Voir la page 80. Voir la page 36. Voir la page 87. Voir la page 84–85. Voir la page 52. Voir la page 53.80 Résolution des problèmes w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Accès à l'aide Messages d'erreur Si le message n'est pas répertorié, consultez la documentation du système d'exploitation ou du programme en cours d'utilisation au moment où le message est apparu. PO UR ACCÉDER A U F IC H IER D'A IDE PROCÉD URE — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer , puis sur Aide et Support. 2 Cliquez sur Guides d'utilisation du système, puis sur Guides d'utilisation. 3 Cliquez sur Procédure. PO UR ACCÉDER À L'A IDE DE WI NDOW S XP — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer , puis sur Aide et Support. 2 Entrez un mot ou une expression qui décrit votre problème, puis cliquez sur l'icône en forme de flèche. 3 Cliquez sur la rubrique qui décrit votre problème. 4 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. LE F IC H IER E N CO UR S DE COP IE E S T TRO P VO L UM I NE UX PO UR LE LEC TE UR DE DE S T I NA T IO N — Le fichier que vous essayez de copier est trop volumineux pour le disque ou le disque est plein. Essayez de copier le fichier sur un disque différent ou utilisez un disque de capacité plus grande. UN NOM DE F IC H IER NE PE U T PA S CO N TE N IR L'U N DE S CARAC TÈRE S S U IVA N T S: \ / : * ? “ < > | — N'utilisez pas ces caractères lorsque vous nommez un fichier. IN TROD U IRE U N S UPPOR T AMORÇAB LE — Le système d'exploitation tente de démarrer sur une disquette ou un CD-ROM non amorçable. Introduisez une disquette ou un CD amorçable. NO N-S Y S TEM D I S K OR D I S K ERROR (ERRE UR D I SQ UE O U D I SQ UE NO N-S Y S TÈME) — Une disquette se trouve dans le lecteur de disquette. Retirez la disquette et redémarrez l'ordinateur.Résolution des problèmes 81 Problèmes liés à la vidéo et à l'affichage Si l'écran reste vide REMARQUE : Si vous utilisez un programme qui exige une résolution supérieure à celle dont vous disposez, Dell vous conseille de brancher un écran externe à votre ordinateur. MÉMO IRE O U RE S SO URCE S I N S U F F I SA N TE S. FERME Z DE S PROGRAMME S E T RÉE S SA YE Z — Trop d'applications sont ouvertes. Fermez toutes les fenêtres et ouvrez le programme que vous voulez utiliser. SY S TÈME D'EXP LO I TA T IO N I N TRO UVAB LE — Contactez Dell (reportezvous à la page 126). UN F IC H IER .DLL REQ U I S E S T I N TRO UVAB LE — Il manque un fichier essentiel au programme que vous essayez d'ouvrir. Supprimez puis réinstallez le programme. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer. 2 Cliquez sur Panneau de configuration. 3 Cliquez sur Ajout/Suppression de programmes. 4 Sélectionnez le programme à supprimer. 5 Cliquez sur Supprimer ou Modifier/Supprimer des programmes et suivez les invites à l'écran. 6 Reportez-vous à la documentation du programme pour obtenir les instructions d'installation. X:\ N'E S T PA S ACCE S S IB LE. LE PÉR IP HÉR IQ UE N'E S T PA S PRÊ T — Insérez une disquette dans le lecteur et réessayez. VÉR I F IE Z LE VO YA N T — Quand le voyant clignote, l'ordinateur est sous tension. • Si le voyant clignote, l'ordinateur est en mode Veille—appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour revenir au mode Normal. • Si le voyant est éteint, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation. • Si le voyant est allumé, les réglages de gestion de l'alimentation ont peut- être entraîné l'extinction de l'écran. Appuyez sur une touche quelconque ou déplacez le curseur pour quitter le mode veille.82 Résolution des problèmes w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Si l'affichage est difficile à lire VÉR I F IE Z LA BA T TER IE — Si vous utilisez une batterie pour alimenter votre ordinateur, la batterie est peut-être déchargée. Connectez l'ordinateur à une prise électrique en utilisant l'adaptateur CA/CC, puis allumez votre ordinateur. TE S TE Z LA PR I SE É LEC TR IQ UE — Vérifiez que la prise de courant fonctionne en la testant avec un autre appareil, comme une lampe. VÉR I F IE Z L'ADAP TA TE UR SEC TE UR — Vérifiez les connexions des câbles de l'adaptateur. Si l'adaptateur secteur est muni d'un voyant, assurez-vous que ce dernier est allumé. CO N NEC TE Z VO TRE ORD I NA TE UR D IREC TEME N T À U NE PR I SE É LEC TR IQ UE — Débranchez les périphériques de protection contre les surtensions électriques, les multiprises et les rallonges de câble pour vérifier que l'ordinateur fonctionne s'il est branché directement sur la prise. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 80. RÉG LE Z LE S PROPR IÉ TÉ S DE L'A L IME N TA T IO N — Lancez une recherche à l'aide du mot-clé attente dans le Centre d'aide et de support de Windows. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 80. BA SC U LE Z L'IMAGE V IDÉO — Si votre ordinateur est connecté à un moniteur externe, appuyez sur pour basculer l'affichage de l'image vidéo vers l'écran. REMARQUE : Si l'ordinateur est connecté à un téléviseur, vous devez activer celui-ci par l'intermédiaire des paramètres d'affichage de Windows (voir la page 59). RÉG LE Z LA L UM I NO S I TÉ — Voir le fichier d'aide Procédure pour obtenir des instructions sur le réglage de la luminosité. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 80. RÉG LE Z DE S TA I L LE S DE PO L ICE E T D'ICÔ NE — Voir la page 32. ÉLO IG NE Z LE S CA I S SO N S D'EX TRÊME S GRAVE S DE L'ORD I NA TE UR O U DE L'ÉCRA N — Si votre système de haut-parleurs externes comporte un caisson d'extrêmes graves, vérifiez que ce dernier se trouve à au moins 60 cm (2 pieds) de l'ordinateur ou du moniteur externe.Résolution des problèmes 83 Si seule une partie de l'écran est lisible Problèmes de scanner ÉL IM I NE Z LE S SO URCE S PO TE N T IE L LE S D'I N TER FÉRE NCE S — Éteignez les ventilateurs, les lampes fluorescentes ou halogènes se trouvant à proximité. OR IE N TE Z L'ORD I NA TE UR DA N S U NE D IREC T IO N D I F FÉRE N TE — Éliminez les reflets du soleil pouvant altérer la qualité de l'image. RÉG LE Z LE S PARAMÈ TRE S D'A F F IC HAGE WI NDOW S — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Apparence et thèmes. 3 Cliquez sur la zone que vous souhaitez modifier ou sur l'icône Affichage. 4 Essayez différents paramètres de Qualité couleur et Résolution d'écran. REPOR TE Z-VO U S À LA SEC T IO N «ME S SAGE S D'ERRE UR» — Si un message d'erreur apparaît, reportez-vous à la page 80. CO N NEC TE Z U N MO N I TE UR EX TER NE — 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur et connectez un moniteur externe à l'ordinateur. 2 Allumez l'ordinateur et le moniteur, puis réglez la luminosité et le contraste. Si le moniteur externe fonctionne correctement, le moniteur ou le contrôleur vidéo de l'ordinateur est peut-être défectueux. Contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la page 126). VÉR I F IE Z LA CO N NEX IO N D U CÂB LE D'A L IME N TA T IO N — Vérifiez que le câble d'alimentation du scanner est fermement connecté à une source d'alimentation électrique fonctionnelle et que le scanner est sous tension. VÉR I F IE Z LA CO N NEX IO N D U CÂB LE D U SCA N NER — Vérifiez que le câble du scanner est fermement connecté à l'ordinateur et au scanner. DÉVERRO U I L LE Z LE SCA N NER — Vérifiez que votre scanner est déverrouillé s'il comporte un bouton ou une languette de verrouillage.84 Résolution des problèmes w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Problèmes de lecteur REMARQUE : Pour des informations sur l'enregistrement de fichiers sur une disquette, consultez le fichier d'aide Procédure. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 80. Si vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer un fichier sur une disquette RÉ I N S TA L LE Z LE P I LO TE D U SCA N NER — Reportez-vous à la documentation du scanner pour obtenir des instructions. VÉR I F IE Z Q UE WI NDOW S ® RECO N NA Î T LE LEC TE UR — Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Poste de travail. Si le lecteur n'est pas répertorié, effectuez une analyse complète avec votre logiciel anti-virus pour rechercher d'éventuels virus et les supprimer. Les virus peuvent parfois empêcher Windows de reconnaître le lecteur. Insérez une disquette damorçage et redémarrez l'ordinateur. Vérifiez que le voyant clignote pour indiquer un fonctionnement normal. VÉR I F IE Z Q UE LA D I SQ UE T TE N'E S T PA S PRO TÉGÉE E N ÉCR I T URE — Vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer sur une disquette protégée contre l'écriture. Reportez-vous à la figure suivante. ES SA YE Z U NE A U TRE D I SQ UE T TE — Insérez une autre disquette pour éliminer la possibilité que la première soit défectueuse. écriture interdite écriture autorisée dos de la disquetteRésolution des problèmes 85 Si vous rencontrez des problèmes liés à une unité de disque dur Problèmes de carte PC RECO N NEC TE Z LE LEC TE UR — 1 Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts, quittez tous les programmes ouverts, puis éteignez l'ordinateur. 2 Déconnectez et reconnectez le lecteur 3 Allumez l'ordinateur. NE T TO YE Z LE LEC TE UR — Reportez-vous à la section «Nettoyage de votre ordinateur» dans le fichier d'aide Procédure pour obtenir des instructions détaillées. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 80. LA I S SE Z L'ORD I NA TE UR RE FRO ID IR AVA N T DE L'A L L UMER — Une unité de disque dur chaude peut empêcher le fonctionnement du système d'exploitation. Laissez l'ordinateur revenir à la température ambiante avant de l'allumer. REC HERC HE Z LE S ERRE UR S ÉVE N T UE L LE S A U N IVEA U D U LEC TE UR — 1 Cliquez sur Démarrer, puis sur Poste de travail. 2 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la lettre du lecteur (disque local) que vous souhaitez scanner pour détecter les erreurs, puis cliquez sur Propriétés. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Outils. 4 Sous Détection d'erreurs, cliquez sur Vérifier maintenant. 5 Cliquez sur Démarrer. VÉR I F IE Z LA CAR TE PC — Assurez-vous que la carte PC est correctement insérée dans le connecteur. VÉR I F IE Z Q UE LA CAR TE E S T RECO N N UE PAR WI NDOW S ® — Doublecliquez sur l'icône Déconnexion ou éjection de matériel dans la barre des tâches Windows. Vérifiez que la carte est répertoriée. SI VO U S RE NCO N TRE Z DE S PROB LÈME S A U N IVEA U D'U NE CAR TE PC FO UR N IE PAR DE L L — Contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la page 126).86 Résolution des problèmes w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Problèmes de programmes généraux REMARQUE : Chaque logiciel inclut généralement des instructions d'installation dans la documentation ou sur la disquette ou le CD qui l'accompagne. Un programme s'arrête accidentellement Un programme ne répond plus Des messages d'erreur s'affichent à l'écran SI VO U S RE NCO N TRE Z DE S PROB LÈME S AVEC U NE CAR TE PC NO N FO UR N IE PAR DE L L — Contactez le fabricant de la carte PC. REPOR TE Z-VO U S À LA DOC UME N TA T IO N D U LOG IC IE L. — De nombreux fabricants de logiciels maintiennent des sites Web avec des informations pouvant vous aider à résoudre les problèmes. Vérifiez que vous avez installé et configuré correctement le programme. Réinstallez le programme si nécessaire. ARRÊ TE Z LE PROGRAMME — 1 Appuyez simultanément sur . 2 Cliquez sur l'onglet Applications, puis sélectionnez le programme qui ne répond plus. 3 Cliquez sur Fin de tâche. REPOR TE Z-VO U S À LA SEC T IO N «ME S SAGE S D'ERRE UR» À LA PAGE 80 — Recherchez le message et effectuez l'action corrective appropriée. Reportez-vous à la documentation du logiciel.Résolution des problèmes 87 Résolution d'autres problèmes techniques Si l'ordinateur est mouillé PRÉCAUTION : Effectuez la procédure suivante uniquement si vous êtes certain de pouvoir le faire en toute sécurité. Si l'ordinateur est raccordé à une prise électrique, il est recommandé de couper le courant au niveau du disjoncteur ou du coupe-circuit avant de tenter de débrancher le câble d'alimentation de la prise électrique. Soyez extrêmement prudent lorsque vous débranchez des câbles mouillés d'une source électrique alimentée. 1 Éteignez votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section page 40), débranchez l'adaptateur c.a. de l'ordinateur, puis de la prise de courant. 2 Éteignez les périphériques externes éventuellement reliés à l'ordinateur et débranchezles de leur source d'alimentation puis de l'ordinateur. 3 Raccordez-vous à la masse en touchant l'un des connecteurs en métal situés à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. 4 Enlevez toutes les cartes PC installées, puis mettez-les à sécher dans un endroit sûr. 5 Retirez la batterie. 6 Essuyez la batterie et placez-la dans un endroit où elle pourra sécher en toute sécurité. VI S I TE Z LE S I TE WEB DE S UPPOR T DE DE L L — Visitez le site support.dell.com pour obtenir une aide sur les questions d'utilisation générale, d'installation et de dépannage. Pour obtenir la description du support matériel et logiciel fourni par Dell, reportez-vous à la section «Règle de support technique de Dell (États-Unis uniquement)» à la page 125. CO N TAC TE Z DE L L PAR CO URR IER É LEC TRO N IQ UE — Visitez le site support.dell.com, puis cliquez sur Contacter Dell par courrier électronique dans la liste Communiquer. Envoyez un message électronique à Dell concernant votre problème ; vous pouvez espérer recevoir un message électronique de Dell quelques heures plus tard. Pour obtenir la description du support matériel et logiciel fourni par Dell, reportez-vous à la section «Règle de support technique de Dell (États-Unis uniquement)» à la page 125. CO N TAC TE Z DE L L — Si vous ne parvenez pas à résoudre votre problème à l'aide du site Web de support de Dell ou du service de messagerie électronique, contactez Dell pour obtenir une assistance technique (reportez-vous à la page 126 . Pour obtenir la description du support matériel et logiciel fourni par Dell, reportez-vous à la section «Règle de support technique de Dell (États-Unis uniquement)» à la page 125.88 Résolution des problèmes w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 7 Essuyez l'écran. 8 Retirez l'unité de disque dur (reportez-vous à la page 106). 9 Retirez le(s) module(s) de mémoire (reportez-vous à la page 100). 10 Ouvrez l'écran et installez l'ordinateur côté droit vers le haut sur deux livres ou sur deux supports quelconques afin que l'air puisse circuler tout autour de l'ordinateur. Laissez sécher l'ordinateur pendant au moins 24 heures dans une zone sèche à température ambiante. AVIS : N'accélérez pas le séchage, par exemple avec un sèche-cheveux ou un ventilateur. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter un choc électrique, vérifiez que l'ordinateur est bien sec avant de continuer la procédure. 11 Raccordez-vous à la masse en touchant l'un des connecteurs en métal situés à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. 12 Replacez le ou les modules de mémoire, le capot et les vis du compartiment des modules de mémoire. 13 Remettez le disque dur en place. 14 Remettez en place les cartes PC retirées. 15 Remettez la batterie en place. 16 Allumez l'ordinateur et vérifiez qu'il fonctionne correctement. REMARQUE : Pour plus d'informations sur la garantie de votre ordinateur, reportez-vous à la section «Garantie limitée et règle de retour» à la page 145. Si l'ordinateur ne démarre pas ou si vous ne parvenez pas à identifier les composants endommagés, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la page 126). Si vous laissez tomber votre ordinateur ou s'il est endommagé 1 Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts, quittez tous les programmes ouverts, puis arrêtez l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section page 40). 2 Débranchez l'adaptateur CA/CC de l'ordinateur et de la prise de courant. 3 Éteignez les périphériques externes éventuellement reliés à l'ordinateur et débranchezles de leur source d'alimentation puis de l'ordinateur. 4 Enlevez et réinstallez la batterie. 5 Allumez l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Pour plus d'informations sur la garantie de votre ordinateur, reportez-vous à la section «Garantie limitée et règle de retour» à la page 145. Résolution des problèmes 89 Si l'ordinateur ne démarre pas ou si vous ne pouvez identifier les composants endommagés, contactez Dell. (reportez-vous à la page 126) . Pilotes Qu'est-ce qu'un pilote ? Un pilote est un programme qui contrôle un matériel ou un périphérique, par exemple une imprimante, une souris ou un clavier. Tous les périphériques nécessitent un pilote. Un pilote sert d'interprète entre le périphérique et le programme qui l'utilise. Chaque périphérique dispose de son propre jeu de commandes spécialisées que seul son pilote reconnaît. De nombreux pilotes, comme le pilote de clavier, sont livrés avec le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® . Vous pouvez avoir à installer des pilotes si vous : • mettez à jour votre système d'exploitation. • réinstallez votre système d'exploitation. • connectez ou installez un nouveau pilote. Si vous avez un problème avec un périphérique, suivez les étapes décrites dans la section suivante pour identifier le pilote à l'origine du problème et pour mettre à jour le pilote, le cas échéant. Identification des pilotes : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Dans le Panneau de configuraton, sous Choisir une catégorie, cliquez sur Performances et maintenance. 3 Dans la fenêtre Performances et maintenance, cliquez sur Système. 4 Dans l'écran Propriétés du système, cliquez sur l'onglet Matériel. 5 Cliquez sur Gestionnaire de périphériques. 6 Dans la fenêtre Gestionnaire de périphériques, faites défiler la liste vers le bas pour vérifier qu'il n'y a aucun point d'exclamation (cercle jaune avec un [!]) devant le périphérique, au niveau de son icône. Lorsqu'un point d'exclamation se trouve à côté du nom du périphérique, vous devez réinstaller le pilote ou en installer un nouveau.90 Résolution des problèmes w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Réinstallation des pilotes AVIS : Le site Web de support de Dell et le cédérom CD Pilotes et Utilitaires fournissent les pilotes appropriés pour les ordinateurs Dell™. Si vous installez des pilotes obtenus auprès d'autres sources, il se peut que votre ordinateur ne fonctionne pas correctement. Utilisation de la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques de Windows XP Si vous installez un nouveau pilote de périphérique qui provoque l'instabilité du système, utilisez la fonction de récupération de Windows XP pour remplacer la nouvelle version du pilote par l'ancienne. Pour utiliser la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Dans le Panneau de configuraton, sous Choisir une catégorie, cliquez sur Performances et maintenance. 3 Dans la fenêtre Performances et maintenance, cliquez sur Système. 4 Dans l'écran Propriétés du système, cliquez sur l'onglet Matériel. 5 Cliquez sur Gestionnaire de périphériques. 6 Dans la fenêtre Gestionnaire de périphériques, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le périphérique pour lequel le nouveau pilote a été installé, puis cliquez sur Propriétés. 7 Cliquez sur l'onglet Pilotes. 8 Cliquez sur Restauration des pilotes. Si la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques ne résout pas le problème, utilisez la fonction Restauration du système (reportez-vous à la page 93) pour remettre votre système d'exploitation dans un état de fonctionnement antérieur à l'installation du nouveau pilote de périphérique. Utilisation du cédérom Pilotes et Utilitaires Si l'utilisation de la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques ou Restauration du système (reportez-vous à la page 93) ne permet pas de résoudre le problème, réinstallez le pilote à partir du cédérom Pilotes et Utilitaires. 1 Enregistrez et fermez tout fichier ouvert et quittez tout programme en cours d'utilisation. 2 Insérez le CD Pilotes et utilitaires.Résolution des problèmes 91 Dans la plupart des cas, le CD démarre automatiquement. Dans le cas contraire, démarrez Windows Explorer, cliquez sur le répertoire du lecteur de CD pour afficher le contenu du CD, puis double-cliquez sur le fichier autocd.exe. La première fois que vous exécutez le CD, il se peut qu'il vous invite à installer des fichiers de configuration. Cliquez sur OK, et suivez les instructions à l'écran pour continuer. 3 Dans le menu déroulant Langue de la barre d'outils, sélectionnez la langue de votre choix pour le pilote ou l'utilitaire (si elle est disponible). Un écran d'accueil s'affiche. 4 Cliquez sur Suivant. Le CD analyse automatiquement votre matériel et détecte les pilotes et les utilitaires employés par votre ordinateur. Une fois l'analyse du matériel terminée, vous pouvez détecter d'autres pilotes et utilitaires. Sous Critères de recherche, sélectionnez les catégories appropriées dans les menus déroulants Modèle de système, Système d'exploitation et Rubriques. Un ou plusieurs liens s'affichent pour les pilotes et les utilitaires spécifiques utilisés par votre ordinateur. 5 Cliquez sur le lien d'un pilote ou d'un utilitaire pour afficher des informations le concernant. 6 Cliquez sur le bouton Installer (s'il est disponible) pour lancer l'installation du pilote ou de l'utilitaire. Dans l'écran d'accueil, suivez les invites à l'écran pour terminer l'installation. Si aucun bouton Installer n'est disponible, une installation automatique n'est pas possible. Pour des instructions d'installation, reportez-vous aux sous-sections appropriées suivantes ou cliquez sur Extraire, suivez les instructions d'extraction et lisez le fichier Lisez-moi. S'il vous est demandé de trouver les fichiers de pilote, cliquez sur le répertoire du CD dans la fenêtre d'information sur le pilote pour afficher les fichiers associés à ce pilote. Réinstallation manuelle des pilotes pour Windows XP 1 Une fois les fichiers de pilote extraits vers votre disque dur, tel que décrit dans la section précédente, clquez sur Démarer, puis cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur Poste de travail. 2 Cliquez sur Propriétés. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Matériel, puis sur Gestionnaire de périphériques. 4 Double-cliquez sur le type du périphérique pour lequel vous êtes en train d'installer le pilote (par exemple, Modems ou Périphériques infrarouge). 5 Double-cliquez sur le nom du périphérique pour lequel vous installez le pilote.92 Résolution des problèmes w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 6 Cliquez sur l'onglet Pilote, puis sur Mettre à jour le pilote. 7 Cliquez sur Installer à partir d'une liste ou d'un emplacement spécifié (Utilisateurs expérimentés), puis cliquez sur Suivant. 8 Cliquez sur Parcourir, et allez à l'emplacement cible de l'extraction des fichers de pilote. 9 Lorsque le nom du pilote approprié apparaît, cliquez sur Suivant. 10 Cliquez sur Terminer et redémarrez l'ordinateur. Résolution des incompatibilités logicielles et matérielles Sous Windows XP, les conflits d'interruption (IRQ) apparaissent lorsqu'un périphérique n'est pas détecté lors de l'utilisation du système de configuration ou lorsqu'il est détecté, mais qu'il n'est pas correctement configuré. Pour rechercher les conflits sur un ordinateur sous Windows XP: 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Performances et maintenance, puis sur Système. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Matériel, puis sur Gestionnaire de périphériques. 4 Dans la liste Gestionnaire de périphériques, vérifiez s'il existe des conflits avec les autres périphériques. Les périphériques en conflit sont indiqués par un point d'exclamation jaune (!) placé en regard, et ceux qui sont désactivés, par une croix rouge X. 5 Double-cliquez sur un conflit pour afficher la fenêtre Propriétés. En cas de conflit d'IRQ, la zone d'état Périphérique de la fenêtre Propriétés indique les cartes ou les périphériques partageant l'IRQ du périphérique en conflit. 6 Résolvez les conflits en reconfigurant les périphériques ou en retirant les périphériques du Gestionnaire de périphériques. Utilitaire de résolution des conflits matériels de Windows XP : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer , puis sur Aide et Support. 2 Tapez résolution de problèmes matériels dans le champ Rechercher, puis cliquez sur la flèche pour lancer la recherche. 3 Cliquez sur Dépanneur de conflits matériels dans la liste Résultats de la recherche .Résolution des problèmes 93 4 Dans la liste Dépanneur de conflits matériels, cliquez sur Je dois résoudre un conflit matériel sur mon ordinateur, puis sur Suivant. Utilisation de la fonction Restauration du système Le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® XP propose la fonction Restauration du système, qui vous permet de restaurer l'ordinateur à un état antérieur (sans affecter les fichiers de données) si les modifications apportées au matériel, aux logiciels ou aux paramètres du système empêchent l'ordinateur de fonctionner correctement. Pour plus d'informations sur la fonction de Restauration du système, reportez-vous au Centre d'aide et de support. Pour accéder à l'aide, reportez-vous à la page 80. AVIS : Sauvegardez régulièrement vos fichiers de données. La fonction Restauration du système ne gère pas ni ne récupère vos fichiers de données. Création d'un point de restauration 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Aide et support. 2 Cliquez sur Restauration du système. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. Restauration de l'ordinateur à un état antérieur Si des problèmes surviennent après l'installation d'un pilote de périphérique, utilisez la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques (reportez-vous à la page 90) pour résoudre le problème.Si le problème persiste, utilisez la fonction Restauration du système. AVIS : Avant de restaurer l'ordinateur à un état antérieur, enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et les programmes ouverts. Ne modifiez, n'ouvrez ou ne supprimez en aucun cas des fichiers ou des programmes tant que la restauration du système n'est pas terminée. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Outils système, puis cliquez sur Restauration du système. 2 Assurez-vous que l'option Remettre mon ordinateur dans un état antérieur est sélectionnée, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Cliquez sur la date à laquelle vous souhaitez restaurer l'ordinateur. L'écran Sélectionner un point de restauration affiche un calendrier vous permettant de visualiser et de sélectionner les points de restauration. Toutes les dates du calendrier comportant des points de restauration apparaissent en gras. 4 Sélectionnez un point de restauration, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 94 Résolution des problèmes w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Si une date du calendrier contient un seul point de restauration, ce dernier est sélectionné automatiquement. Si plusieurs points de restauration sont disponibles, cliquez sur celui que vous souhaitez utiliser. 5 Cliquez sur Suivant. L'écran Restauration terminée s'affiche une fois que la collecte des données par la fonction Restauration du système est terminée. L'ordinateur redémarre. 6 Une fois l'ordinateur redémarré, cliquez sur OK. Pour changer de point de restauration, répétez les étapes précédentes un utilisant un autre point de restauration ou annulez la restauration. Annulation de la dernière restauration du système AVIS : Avant de procéder à l'annulation de la dernière restauration système, sauvegardez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts et quittez tous les programmes. Ne modifiez, n'ouvrez ou ne supprimez en aucun cas des fichiers ou des programmes tant que la restauration du système n'est pas terminée. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Outils système, puis cliquez sur Restauration système. 2 Cliquez sur Undo my last restoration (Annuler ma dernière restauration) puis sur Suivant. 3 Cliquez sur Suivant. L'écran Restauration du système apparaît et l'ordinateur redémarre. 4 Une fois l'ordinateur redémarré, cliquez sur OK. Activation de la fonction Restauration du système Si vous réinstallez Windows XP avec moins de 200 Mo d'espace disponible sur le disque dur, la fonction Restauration du système est automatiquement désactivée. Pour vérifier si la fonction Restauration du système est activée : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Performances et maintenance. 3 Cliquez sur Système. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Restauration du système. 5 Assurez-vous que l'option Désactiver la Restauration du système est bien désactivée.Résolution des problèmes 95 Réinstallation de Microsoft® Windows® XP Avant de réinstaller Si vous réinstallez le système d'exploitation Windows XP pour corriger un problème lié à un pilote nouvellement installé, utilisez la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques de Windows XP (reportez-vous à la page 90) pour remplacer le pilote de périphérique par une version précédemment installée. Si la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques ne résout pas le problème, utilisez la fonction Restauration du système (reportez-vous à la page 93) pour remettre votre système d'exploitation dans un état de fonctionnement antérieur à l'installation du nouveau pilote de périphérique. Réinstallation de Windows XP Pour réinstaller Windows XP, suivez les étapes décrites dans les sections suivantes en respectant l'ordre dans lequel elles sont répertoriées. Le processus de réinstallation prend de 1 à 2 heures. Une fois la réinstallation terminée, vous devrez réinstaller les pilotes de périphériques, le programme de protection antivirus et les autres logiciels. AVIS : Le CD Operating System (Système d'exploitation) offre des options de réinstallation pour Windows XP. Ces options peuvent écraser les fichiers et affecter les programmes installés sur votre disque dur. Par conséquent, ne réinstallez pas Windows XP à moins qu'un membre de l'équipe du support technique de Dell ne vous le demande. AVIS : Pour éviter des conflits avec Windows XP, vous devez désactiver tout logiciel de protection anti-virus installé sur l'ordinateur avant de réinstaller le système d'exploitation. Pour obtenir des instructions, consultez la documentation qui accompagne les logiciels. Amorçage à partir du CD Operating System (Système d'exploitation) 1 Insérez le CD du Système d'exploitation. 2 Quittez tout programme ou utilitaire pouvant être exécuté après l'insertion du CD. 3 Arrêtez (reportez-vous à la page 40) et redémarrez l'ordinateur. 4 Lorsque le logo DELL™ apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo Windows apparaît, attendez encore jusqu'à ce que le bureau Windows s'affiche. Éteignez alors l'ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative.96 Résolution des problèmes w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 5 Utilisez les touches de direction pour sélectionner l'option CD-ROM, puis appuyez sur . 6 Appuyez sur une touche lorsque le message Appuyez sur une touche pour démarrer depuis le CD apparaît à l'écran. Installation de Windows XP 1 Lorsque l'écran Installation de Windows XP apparaît, appuyez sur pour sélectionner Pour installer Windows maintenant. 2 Lisez les informations de l'écran Contrat de licence Microsoft Windows, puis appuyez sur la touche pour accepter le contrat de licence. 3 Si votre ordinateur dispose déjà de Windows XP et que vous souhaitez récupérer vos données, entrez r pour sélectionner l'option de réparation, puis retirez le CD du lecteur. 4 Si vous souhaitez installer une nouvelle copie de Windows XP, appuyez sur pour poursuivre l'installation. 5 Appuyez sur pour sélectionner la partition en surbrillance (recommandé), puis suivez les instructions à l'écran. REMARQUE : Le temps requis pour terminer linstallation dépend de la taille de votre disque dur et de la rapidité de votre ordinateur. L'écran Installation de Windows XP s'affiche et le système d'exploitation commence à copier les fichiers et à installer les périphériques. L'ordinateur redémarre plusieurs fois. Achèvement de l'installation de l'interface graphique utilisateur AVIS : Lorsque l'ordinateur redémarre, n'appuyez sur aucune touche quand le message suivant s'affiche : Appuyez sur une touche pour démarrer à partir du CD. 1 Lorsque l'écran Options régionales et linguistiques s'affiche, sélectionnez les paramètres de votre région, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 2 Entrez votre nom et organisme (facultatif) dans l'écran Personnalisez votre logiciel et cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Si vous réinstallez Windows XP Édition Familiale, entrez un nom pour votre ordinateur lorsque la fenêtre Nom de l'ordinateur apparaît (ou acceptez le nom proposé), puis cliquez sur Suivant.Résolution des problèmes 97 Si vous réinstallez Windows XP Professionnel, entrez un nom pour votre ordinateur (ou acceptez le nom proposé) ainsi qu'un mot de passe lorsque la fenêtre Nom de l'ordinateur et mot de passe Administrateur s'affiche, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 4 Si votre ordinateur est équipé d'un modem, entrez les informations demandées et cliquez sur Suivant lorsque l'écran Informations de numérotation pour le modem s'affiche. 5 Entrez la date, l'heure et le fuseau horaire dans la fenêtre Réglage de la date et de l'heure, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 6 Si votre ordinateur est équipé d'une carte réseau, sélectionnez Type dans l'écran Paramètres de gestion de réseau , puis cliquez sur Suivant. Si votre ordinateur n'a pas de carte réseau, cette option n'apparaît pas. 7 Si vous réinstallez Windows XP Professionnel, vous serez peut-être invité à fournir des informations supplémentaires concernant la configuration réseau, comme le nom du domaine ou le nom du groupe de travail. Si vous n'êtes pas sûr de vos paramètres, acceptez les sélections par défaut. Windows XP installe les composants du système d'exploitation, configure et redémarre l'ordinateur. Achèvement de l'installation du système d'exploitation AVIS : Lorsque l'ordinateur redémarre, n'appuyez sur aucune touche quand le message suivant s'affiche : Appuyez sur une touche pour démarrer à partir du CD. 1 Lorsque l'écran Bienvenue dans Microsoft s'affiche, cliquez sur Suivant. 2 Lorsque le message Comment cet ordinateur sera-t-il connecté à Internet ? apparaît, cliquez sur Ignorer. 3 Lorsque le message Prêt à vous enregistrer auprès de Microsoft ? apparaît, sélectionnez Non, pas cette fois-ci et cliquez sur Suivant. Lorsque le message Qui va utiliser cet ordinateur ? apparaît, vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à cinq utilisateurs. 4 Cliquez sur Suivant. 5 Cliquez sur Terminer pour achever l'installation et retirez le CD du lecteur. Réinstallation des pilotes et des logiciels 1 Réinstallez les pilotes appropriés (reportez-vous à la page 90). 2 Réinstallez votre logiciel anti-virus. Pour obtenir des instructions, consultez la documentation qui accompagne les logiciels.98 Résolution des problèmes w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 3 Réinstallez vos autres logiciels. Pour obtenir des instructions, consultez la documentation qui accompagne les logiciels.S E C T I O N 8 Ajout et remplacement de pièces Avant d'ajouter ou de remplacer des pièces Mémoire Modem et carte Mini PCI Disque dur Lecteur de CD ou DVD Clavier100 Ajout et remplacement de pièces w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Avant d'ajouter ou de remplacer des pièces PRÉCAUTION : Avant de travailler à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, consultez les instructions de sécurité au début de ce guide (voir la page 11). 1 Vérifiez que la surface de travail est plane et propre afin d'éviter de rayer le capot de l'ordinateur. 2 Enregistrez et fermez tout fichier ouvert, quittez tous les programmes ouverts, puis éteignez l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 40). 3 Débranchez le câble d'alimentation de l'ordinateur de la prise électrique. 4 Attendez de 10 à 20 secondes, puis débranchez tous les périphériques connectés. 5 Retirez toutes les cartes PC installées et la batterie. AVIS : Saisissez les composants et les cartes par leurs bords et évitez de toucher les broches et les contacts. Raccordez-vous à la masse en touchant l'un des connecteurs en métal situés à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Continuez à le faire régulièrement tout au long de cette procédure.. Mémoire Vous pouvez augmenter la mémoire de votre ordinateur en installant des modules de mémoire sur la carte système. Pour plus d'informations sur le type de mémoire pris en charge par votre ordinateur, reportez-vous à la page 115. Vérifiez que vous ajoutez des modules conçus spécifiquement pour votre ordinateur. 1 Suivez les instructions de la section précédente , «Avant d'ajouter et de remplacer des pièces» 2 Retournez l'ordinateur, dévissez les vis imperdables du capot du module de mémoire, puis retirez le capot. vis imperdable cache du module de mémoireAjout et remplacement de pièces 101 REMARQUE : Les modules mémoire achetés auprès de Dell sont couverts par la garantie de votre ordinateur. 3 Si vous remplacez un module de mémoire, retirez le module déjà installé. a Avec précaution, écartez du bout des doigts les fixations situées à chaque extrémité du connecteur du module mémoire, jusqu'à ce qu'il se dégage. b Retirez le module du connecteur. 4 Mettez-vous à la masse et installez le nouveau module de mémoire : REMARQUE : Si le module de mémoire n'est pas installé correctement, l'ordinateur ne démarre pas. Aucun message d'erreur n'indique ce problème. a Alignez l'encoche du module avec l'emplacement situé au centre du connecteur. b Faites glisser fermement le bord du module à un angle de 45 degrés dans le connecteur, puis faites-le pivoter jusqu'à ce que vous le sentiez s'enclencher. S'il ne s'enclenche pas, retirez le module et réinstallezle. clips de fixation module de mémoire102 Ajout et remplacement de pièces w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 5 Remettez le cache en place. AVIS : Si vous avez des difficultés à fermer le capot, retirez le module et réinstallez-le. Attention, une pression trop importante exercée pour fermer le capot peut endommager votre ordinateur. 6 Insérez la batterie dans sa baie ou connectez l'adaptateur CA/CC à votre ordinateur et à une prise électrique. 7 Allumez l'ordinateur. Lors de son démarrage, l'ordinateur détecte la mémoire supplémentaire et met automatiquement à jour les informations de configuration du système. Pour vérifier la quantité de mémoire installée, cliquez sur Démarrer, sur Aide et support, puis sur Informations sur l'ordinateur. Modem et carte Mini PCI 1 Suivez les instructions de la section «Avant d'ajouter ou de remplacer des pièces» à la page 100, pour terminer l'installation. 2 Retournez l'ordinateur, dévissez les vis imperdables du capot du module de mémoire, puis retirez le capot.Ajout et remplacement de pièces 103 3 Passez à la section approprié: • Pour ajouter un modem, reportez-vous à la section suivante, «Ajout d'un modem». • Pour ajouter une carte Mini PCI, reportez-vous à la page 104. Ajout d'un modem Si vous avez commandé le modem optionnel en même temps que votre ordinateur, Dell l'a déjà installé dans l'ordinateur. 1 Lorsque vous remplacez le modem, retirez le modem existant : a Retirez les vis de fixation du modem à la carte système et mettez-les de côté. b Tirez tout droit vers le haut sur la languette rattachée, pour soulever le modem hors de son connecteur sur la carte système et déconnectez le câble du modem. vis capot de carte Mini PCI104 Ajout et remplacement de pièces w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 2 Connecter le câble du modem au modem. AVIS : Les connecteurs sont conçus pour éviter une mauvaise insertion ; ne les forcez jamais. 3 Alignez le modem par rapport aux trous de vis et, en appuyant dessus, insérez le modem dans le connecteur situé sur la carte système. 4 Installez les vis pour fixer le modem à la carte système. 5 Remettez le cache en place. Ajout d'une carte Mini PCI PRÉCAUTION : La réglementation de la FCC interdit strictement aux utilisateurs d'installer des cartes Mini PCI de réseau local sans fil 5 GHz (802.11a, 802.11a/b, 802.11a/b/g). L'utilisateur ne doit en aucun cas installer ces cartes. Seul un technicien Dell est autorisé à les installer. Pour retirer et/ou installer une carte Mini PCI 2,4 GHz (802.11b, 802.11b/g), suivez les instructions ci-dessous. Seuls les produits approuvés pour une utilisation sur votre ordinateur portable peuvent être installés. Les cartes Mini PCI homologuées ne peuvent être achetées qu'auprès de Dell. REMARQUE : L'utilisateur peut retirer et installer les cartes PC LAN sans fil 2,4 GHz. connecteur du câble de modem câble de modem languette de retrait vis (2)Ajout et remplacement de pièces 105 Si vous avez commandé la carte Mini PCI en même temps que votre ordinateur, Dell l'a déjà installée dans l'ordinateur. 1 Si aucune carte Mini PCI n'est encore installée, passez à l'étape 2. Pour remplacer une carte Mini PCI, vous devez retirer celle qui est installée. a Déconnectez les câbles reliés à la carte Mini PCI. b Pour libérer la carte Mini PCI, écartez les pattes métalliques de fixation jusqu'à ce que la carte se soulève légèrement. c Retirez la carte Mini PCI du connecteur. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte Mini PCI, ne placez jamais les câbles sur ou sous la carte. AVIS : Ces connecteurs sont munis d'un détrompeur pour assurer qu'ils soient correctement insérés. S'ils ne s'enclenchent pas, vérifiez les connecteurs et réalignez la carte. carte Mini PCI connecteur de carte Mini PCI câbles de l'antenne languettes de fixation en métal (2)106 Ajout et remplacement de pièces w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 2 Alignez la nouvelle carte Mini PCI sur le connecteur, suivant un angle de 45 degrés, et appuyez sur la carte pour l'insérer dans le connecteur. 3 Connectez les câbles de l'antenne à la carte Mini PCI. 4 Remettez le capot et serrez la vis. Disque dur PRÉCAUTION : Si vous enlevez le disque dur lorsqu'il est chaud, ne touchez pas son habitacle en métal. AVIS : Pour éviter de perdre des données, arrêtez l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 40) avant de retirer le disque dur. Ne retirez jamais l'unité de disque dur lorsque l'ordinateur est allumé, en mode attente ou en mode mise en veille prolongée. AVIS : Les unités de disque dur sont très fragiles ; même un léger choc peut les endommager. REMARQUE : Dell ne garantit ni la compatibilité ni la prise en charge des unités de disque dur provenant d'autres sources. REMARQUE : Le CD Système d'exploitation est requis pour installer le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® . Vous avez également besoin du CD Pilotes et utilitaires pour installer les pilotes et les utilitaires sur la nouvelle unité de disque dur. Pour replacer l'unité de disque dur dans la baie d'unité de disque dur. carte Mini PCI connecteur de carte Mini PCI câbles de l'antenneAjout et remplacement de pièces 107 1 Suivez les instructions de la section «Avant d'ajouter ou de remplacer des pièces» à la page 100. 2 Retournez votre ordinateur et retirez les vis du disque dur. AVIS : Lorsque le disque dur n'est pas dans l'ordinateur, conservez-le dans son emballage protecteur antistatique. Voir «Protection contre les décharges électrostatiques» à la page 17. 3 Faites glisser le disque dur hors de l'ordinateur. 4 Enlevez la nouvelle unité de son emballage. Conservez cet emballage d'origine pour l'utiliser à nouveau lors du stockage ou de l'expédition du disque dur. AVIS : Faites glisser l'unité dans son logement en exerçant une pression ferme et uniforme. Si vous exercez une pression trop forte sur le disque pour le mettre en place, vous risquez d'endommager le connecteur. 5 Appuyez sur l'unité de disque dur pour la placer dans la baie jusqu'à ce qu'elle y soit complètement enfoncée. 6 Remettez et serrez les vis. 7 Utilisez le CD Système d'exploitation pour installer le système d'exploitation sur votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 95). 8 Utilisez le CD Pilotes et utilitaires pour installer les pilotes et les utilitaires sur votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 90). unité de disque dur vis (2)108 Ajout et remplacement de pièces w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Retour d'un disque dur à Dell Pour retourner votre ancien disque dur à Dell, placez-le dans son emballage d'origine ou dans un emballage similaire. Faute de quoi il risque d'être endommagé en transit. Lecteur de CD ou DVD 1 Suivez les instructions de la section «Avant d'ajouter ou de remplacer des pièces» à la page 100. 2 Retournez l'ordinateur, dévissez les vis imperdables du capot du module de mémoire, puis retirez le cache. unité de disque dur emballage en plastique vis cache du module de mémoireAjout et remplacement de pièces 109 3 Retirez la vis «O» située à côté du cache du module de mémoire, 4 Pour libérer l'unité, appuyez dans la direction de la flèche (vers l'unité), sur le levier situé à côté des connecteurs du module de mémoire. 5 Retirez l'unité de la baie. 6 Faites glisser la nouvelle unité dans la baie jusqu'à ce qu'elle y soit complètement enfoncée. 7 Remettez la vis que vous avez enlevée au cours de l'étape 3. 8 Remettez le cache et serrez la vis. Clavier 1 Suivez les instructions de la section «Avant d'ajouter ou de remplacer des pièces» à la page 100. 2 Utilisez un tournevis à lame plate ou une pointe en plastique pour soulever le côté droit avec encoches du capot, et détachez le capot des charnières et du boîtier inférieur. vis levier lecteur de CD ou de DVD110 Ajout et remplacement de pièces w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 3 Soulevez soigneusement le capot pour l'écarter des charnières et du compartiment. 4 Retirez les quatre vis du clavier. capot vis (4) clavierAjout et remplacement de pièces 111 AVIS : Les couvertures des touches du clavier sont fragiles, facilement délogées et leur remise en place exige beauoup de temps. Faites plus particulièrement attention au cours du retrait et de la manipulation du clavier. 5 Soulevez le clavier hors du compartiment et déposez-le sur les charnières de l'écran afin d'exposer le connecteur du clavier. 6 Tirez sur le connecteur du clavier pour le déconnecter du connecteur d'interface sur la carte système. 7 Retirez le clavier du compartiment. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager les broches du connecteur, insérez le connecteur de clavier dans le connecteur d'interface en appuyant uniformément sur le connecteur de clavier ; assurezvous de ne pas inverser le connecteur de clavier. 8 Connectez le connecteur de clavier du clavier de remplacement au connecteur d'interface sur la carte système. connecteur d'interface connecteur de clavier112 Ajout et remplacement de pièces w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 9 Insérez les quatre languettes de fixation du clavier dans leurs emplacements respectifs du repose mains, puis placez le clavier dans le compartiment. Assurez-vous que les quatre languettes de fixation sont engagées avant de fixer le clavier. 10 Remettez les quatre vis du clavier. 11 Remettez en place le capot. connecteur d'interface connecteur de clavier vis (4) languettes de fixation(4)S E C T I O N 9 Annexe Spécifications Utilisation du programme de configuration du système Optimiser les performances du système et de la batterie Règle de support technique de Dell (États-Unis uniquement) Contacter Dell Réglementations Garantie limitée et règle de retour114 Annexe w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Spécifications REMARQUE : Afin de respecter les exigences de refroidissement du système et/ou d'alimentation, les fonctionnalités de gestion de l'alimentation limitent la vitesse du processeur lorsque l'ordinateur est alimenté par la batterie. Microprocesseur Microprocesseur Microprocesseur Intel® Pentium® 4 (Inspiron™ 5100) Microprocesseur Mobile Intel Pentium 4 (Inspiron 5150) Mémoire cache L1 8 Ko (interne) Cache externe 512 Ko Fréquence du bus externe 533 MHz Informations sur le système Jeu de puces du système Intel 845PE (Inspiron 5100) Intel 852PM (Inspiron 5150) Largeur du bus de données 64 bits Largeur du bus de la mémoire DRAM 64 bits Largeur du bus d'adresses du microprocesseur 32 bits carte PC Contrôleur CardBus TI PCI4510 Connecteur de carte PC prend une carte de Type I ou de Type II Cartes prises en charge 3,3 V et 5 V Taille du connecteur de carte PC 68 broches Largeur de données (maximale) PCMCIA 16 bits CardBus 32 bitsAnnexe 115 Mémoire Connecteur du module de mémoire deux sockets SODIMM accessibles à l'utilisateur Capacités du module de mémoire 64, 128, 256, et 512 Mo Type de mémoire 2,5-V DDR SODIMM Mémoire standard 128 Mo Mémoire maximale 1 Go (Inspiron 5100) 2 Go (Inspiron 5150) Temps d'accès à la mémoire : vitesse d'horloge 266 MHz (Inspiron 5100) 333 MHz (Inspiron 5150) Ports et connecteurs Vidéo Connecteur à 15 trous Audio connecteur de microphone, connecteur de casque/haut-parleurs USB (2) deux connecteurs à 4 broches conformes à la norme USB 2.0 Modem connecteur RJ-11 LAN Ethernet connecteur RJ-45 (en option dans certains pays) Sortie TV S-vidéo connecteur DIN miniature à 7 broches IEEE 1394 connecteur série à 4 broches Communications Modem: Type v.92 56K MDC Contrôleur softmodem Interface bus AC 97 interne Carte réseau Ethernet 10/100 sur la carte système116 Annexe w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Vidéo Type de vidéo solution graphique discrète ATI externe solution graphique discrète Nvidia externe interface hôte AGP 4x externe Contrôleur vidéo ATI Mobility Radeon 7500 (Inspiron 5100) ATI Mobility Radeon 9000 (Inspiron 5150) Nvidia GeForce FX Go 5200 (Inspiron 5150) Mémoire vidéo 16 Mo, 32 Mo ou 64 Mo Interface LCD SPWG-A Audio Type audio AC97 (Soft Audio) Contrôleur audio Sigmatel 9750 Conversion stéréo 18 bits (analogique-numérique et numérique-analogique) Interfaces : Interne PCI bus /AC 97 Externe connecteur microphone intégré, stéréo connecteur casque/haut-parleurs Haut-parleur deux haut-parleurs 4 ohm Amplificateur de haut-parleur interne canal de 1,0 W en 4 ohms Commandes de volume raccourcis clavier ou menus de programme Écran Type (matrice active TFT) XGA ou SXGA+ (Inspiron 5100) SXGA+ ou UltraSharp™ UXGA (Inspiron 5150) Dimensions : 14,1 pouces (Inspiron 5100 uniquement ) ou 15 pouces Hauteur : 14,1 pouces (Inspiron 5100 uniquement) 15 pouces 215,8 mm (8,5 pouces) 229,7 mm (9 pouces)Annexe 117 Largeur : 14.1 pouces (Inspiron 5100 uniquement) 15 pouces 287,1 mm (11,3 pouces) 305,7 mm (12 pouces) Diagonale 14,1 pouces (Inspiron 5100 uniquement) 15 poucea 359,16 mm (14,1 pouces) 380,1 mm (15,0 pouces) Résolutions maximales 1024 x 768 à 16,8 millions de couleurs (XGA); 1400 x 1050 à 16,8 millions de couleurs (SXGA+) 1600 x 1200 à 16,8 millions de couleurs (UltraSharp UXGA) Temps de réponse (type) en montée 20-ms (maximum); en descente 30-ms (maximum) en montée 9-ms (maximum), en descente 16-ms (maximum) (UltraSharp UXGA) Taux de rafraîchissement 60 Hz Angle de fonctionnement 0° (refermé) à 180 Angles de lisibilité : Horizontal (XGA et SXGA+) ±40° Vertical (XGA et SXGA+) +10°/–30° Horizontal (UltraSharp UXGA) ±70° Vertical (UltraSharp UXGA) +50°/–60° Taille du pixel 0,28 x 0,28 mm (XGA) 0,20 x 0,20 mm (SXGA+) 0,19 x 0,19 mm (UltraSharp UXGA) Consommation électrique: Avec rétroéclairage (standard) 6,5 W (XGA) 7,0 W (SXGA+) 7,5 W (UltraSharp UXGA) Réglages possibilité de réglage de la luminosité à l'aide de raccourcis clavier Écran (Suite)118 Annexe w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Clavier Nombre de touches 85 (États-Unis et Canada) ; 86 (Europe) ; 90 (Japon) Course des touches 2,7 mm ± 0,3 (0,11 pouce ± 0,016 pouce) Répartition des touches 19,05 mm ±0,3 mm (0,75 pouce ± 0,012 pouce) Disposition QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji Tablette tactile (Touchpad) Résolution X/Y (mode tablette graphique) 240 cpi Taille: Largeur Zone sensible de 64,88mm (2,55 pouces) Hauteur Rectangle de 48,88 mm (1,92 pouces) Pile Type «smart» au lithium-ion, 12 cellules (96 WHr) Dimensions : Profondeur 122,5 mm (4,8 pouces) Hauteur 19,2 mm (0,76 pouce) Largeur 147,5 mm (5,8 pouces) Poids 0,615 kg (1,35 livre) (12 cellules) Tension 14,8 VDC Durée de fonctionnement peut être considérablement réduite en cas d'utilisation intensive Pour plus d'informations sur les alarmes de niveau de batterie faible, consultez la page 42. Durée de vie (approximative) 500 cycles de décharge/charge 0Annexe 119 Plage de températures : Fonctionnement 0° à 35°C (32° à 95°F) Stockage –40° à 65°C (–40° à 149°F) Adaptateur CA/CC Tension d'entrée 100 à 240 VAC Courant d'entrée (maximal) 1,5 A (90 W, Inspiron 5100 et Inspiron 5150) 2,5 A (130 W, Insprion 5150) Fréquence d'entrée 50 à 60 Hz Courant de sortie 5,5 A (maximum à impulsion 4 secondes), 4,5 A (continu) (90 W, Inspiron 5100) ; 5,62 A (maximum à impulsion 4 secondes), 4,62 A (continu) (90 W, Inspiron 5150) ; 7,7 A (maximum à impulsion 4 secondes), 6,7 A (continu) (130 W, Inspiron 5150) Puissance de sortie : 90 W (Inspiron 5100 et 5150) 130 W (Inspiron 5150) Tension de sortie nominale 20 VDC (Inspiron 5100) 19,5 VDC (Inspiron 5150) Dimensions : Hauteur 29,5 mm (1,16 pouces) (90 W, Inspiron 5100) 34 mm (1,34 pouces) (90 W, Inspiron 5150) 36 mm (1,42 pouces) (130 W, Inspiron 5150) Largeur 58,0 mm (2,28 pouces) (90 W, Inspiron 5100) 62 mm (2,44 pouces) (90 W, Inspiron 5150) 65 mm (2,56 pouces) (130 W, Inspiron 5150) Longueur 133 mm (5,24 pouces) (90 W, Inspiron 5100) 153,5 mm (6,04 pouces) (90 W, Inspiron 5150) 169,5 mm (6,67 pouces) (130 W, Inspiron 5150) Pile (Suite)120 Annexe w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Poids (avec les câbles) 0,46 kg (1,0 livre) (90 W, Inspiron 5150; 90 W, Insprion 5100) 0,75 kg (1,65 livre) (1 livre et 10,6 oz) (130 W, Inspiron 5150) Plage de températures : Fonctionnement 0° à 35°C (32° à 95°F) Stockage –40° à 65°C (–40° à 149°F) Caractéristiques physiques Hauteur écran de 14,1 pouces 43,7 mm (1,72 pouces) écran de 15 pouces 46,5 mm (1,83 pouces) Largeur 274 mm (10,8 pouces) Profondeur 328 mm (12,9 pouces) Poids : Avec lecteur de CD, batterie 12 cellules et écran de 14,1 pouces 3334 g (7,35 livres) Avec lecteur de CD, batterie 12 cellules et écran de 15 pouces 3583 g (7,90 livres) Environnement de fonctionnement Plage de températures : Fonctionnement 0° à 35°C (32° à 95°F) Stockage –40° à 65°C (–40° à 149°F) Humidité relative (maximale) : Fonctionnement 10% à 90% (sans condensation) Stockage 5% à 95% (sans condensation) Vibrations maximales : Fonctionnement 0,9 GRMS Stockage 1,3 GRMS Adaptateur CA/CCAnnexe 121 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système Présentation REMARQUE : Il se peut que votre système d'exploitation configure automatiquement la plupart des options disposnibles dans le programme de configuration ; les options que vous avez configurées à l'aide de ce programme sont alors ignorées. Reportez-vous au Centre d'aide et de support pour des informations sur les options de configuration du système d'exploitation. Pour accéder à l'aide, reportez-vous à la page 80. Les écrans d'installation du système affichent les informations sur la configuration courante et les paramètres de votre ordinateur, par exemple : • Configuration du système • Boot order (séquence d'initialisation) • Paramètres de configuration de l'initialisation (démarrage) et de l'amarrage • Paramètres de base de configuration du périphérique • Réglages de sécurité du système et mot de passe de disque dur AVIS : Si vous n'êtes pas un utilisateur expérimenté en informatique ou si vous n'avez pas été invité à le faire par le support technique de Dell, ne modifiez pas les valeurs de paramètre définies pour ce programme. Certaines modifications risquent de provoquer un mauvais fonctionnement de votre ordinateur. Résistance maximale aux chocs (mesurée avec la tête de l'unité de disque dur en position de repos et une demi-impulsion sinusoïdale de 2 ms) : Fonctionnement 122 G Stockage 163 G Altitude (maximale): Fonctionnement –15,2 à 3048 m (–50 à 10 000 pieds) Stockage –15,2 à 10 668 m (–50 à 35 000 pieds) Environnement de fonctionnement (Suite)122 Annexe w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Consultation des écrans d'installation du système 1 Allumez (ou redémarrez) l'ordinateur. 2 Lorsque le logo DELL™ apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo Windows apparaît, attendez encore jusqu'à ce que le bureau Windows s'affiche. Éteignez alors votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 40 et faites une nouvelle tentative. Écrans de configuration du système REMARQUE : Pour afficher des informations relatives à un élément spécifique sur un écran de configuration du système, mettez l'élément en surbrillance et reportez-vous à la zone Aide sur l'écran. Les options de configuration du système sont répertoriées dans la partie gauche de l'écran. À droite de chaque option figure la valeur ou le paramètre sélectionné pour cette option. Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres qui apparaissent en blanc à l'écran. Les options ou valeurs que vous ne pouvez pas modifier (parce qu'elles sont déterminées par l'ordinateur) apparaissent en plus sombre. L'angle supérieur droit de l'écran affiche des informations d'aide pour l'option actuellement sélectionnée ; l'angle inférieur droit affiche des informations relatives à l'ordinateur. La liste des fonctions clés du programmes de configuration du système s'affiche en bas de l'écran. Options les plus communément utilisées Certaines options exigent le redémarrage de l'ordinateur pour que les nouveaux paramètres soient pris en compte. Modification de la séquence d'initialisation La séquence d'initialisation, ou ordre de démarrage, indique à l'ordinateur où trouver le logiciel requis pour démarrer le système d'exploitation. Vous pouvez contrôler la séquence d'initialisation à l'aide de la page Séquence d'initialisation/Ordre de démarrage du programme de configuration du système. REMARQUE : Pour ne modifier la séquence d'amorçage qu'une seule fois, voir la page 123. La page Séquence d'initialisation affiche la liste des périphériques amorçables possibles pour l'ordinateur, par exemple : • Lecteur de disquette • Disque dur de la baie modulaireAnnexe 123 • Unité de disque dur interne • Lecteur CD/DVD/CD-RW Pendant la procédure d'initialisation, l'ordinateur commence par le début de la liste, puis analyse chacun des périphériques activés à la recherche des fichiers de démarrage du système d'exploitation. Lorsque l'ordinateur trouve les fichiers, il arrête la recherche et démarre le système d'exploitation. Pour définir les périphériques d'amorçage, sélectionnez (mettez en surbrillance) un périphérique en appuyant sur la touche ou , puis activez ou désactivez le périphérique ou modifiez son ordre dans la liste. • Pour activer ou désactiver un périphérique, sélectionnez-le. Les éléments activés sont affichés en blanc avec un petit triangle à leur gauche ; les éléments désactivés sont affichés en bleu ou estompés et sans triangle. • Appuyez sur ou pour modifier l'option. • Pour modifier la position d'un périphérique dans la liste, mettez-le en surbrillance et appuyez sur ou (pas de distinction entre majuscules et minuscules) pour le déplacer vers le haut ou vers le bas. Les modifications apportées à la séquence d'initialisation sont effectives dès que vous les enregistrez et que vous quittez le programme d'installation du système. Exécution d'une initialisation ponctuelle Vous pouvez définir une séquence d'initialisation sans passer par le programme d'installation du système. (Vous pouvez également utiliser cette procédure pour initialiser Dell Diagnostics sur la partition de l'utilitaire de diagnostics de votre unité de disque dur.) 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur. 2 Si l'ordinateur est installé dans une station d'accueil, retirez-le. Pour obtenir des instructions, consultez la documentation qui accompagne celle-ci. 3 Connectez l'ordinateur à une prise électrique. 4 Allumez l'ordinateur. Lorsque le logo DELL s'affiche, appuyez immédiatement sur . Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo Windows apparaît, attendez encore jusqu'à ce que le bureau Windows s'affiche. Éteignez alors votre ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative.124 Annexe w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 5 Lorsque la liste des dispositifs d'initialisation apparaît, sélectionnez celui que vous voulez utiliser pour l'initialisation puis appuyez sur . L'ordinateur démarre à partir du périphérique sélectionné. Lors du prochain redémarrage de l'ordinateur, la séquence d'initialisation précédente est rétablie. Optimiser les performances du système et de la batterie Présentation des performances du système Pour prévenir la fermeture automatique dy système et une éventuelle perte de données, les performances du système peuvent être réduites dans des conditions particulières. Ces conditions comprennent les cas suivants : LEPROCE S SE UR DEV IE N T TRO P C HA UD — Les performances sont réduites lorsque la température du ssytème excède les paramètres thermiques établis. Cette réduction des performances régule la température du système et de la surface, ce qui previent la fermeture de l'ordinateur qu'entraîneraient des températures de processeur excessives. CAPAC I TÉ DE L'ADAP TA TE UR SEC TE UR — Les performances sont réduites lorsque l'ordinateur fonctionne à l'aide de courant alternatif et que la consommation d'énergie excède les paramètres établis de l'adaptateur secteur. Grâce à cette réduction des performances, le système ne tente pas de consommer plus d'énergie que l'adaptateur secteur ne peut fournir. CAPAC I TÉ DE LA BA T TER IE — Les performances sont réduites lorsque l'ordinateur fonctionne à l'aide de la batterie et que la consommation d'énergie excède la capacité nominale de la batterie ou les niveaux de décharge permis, ou encore lorsque la température de la surface de la batterie excède 60° C. Optimiser la consommation d'énergie et la durée de charge de la batterie L'adaptateur secteur charge une batterie complètement déchargée en 3 heures environ, si l'ordinateur est éteint. Le temps nécessaire pour charger la batterie est sensiblement accru lorsque l'ordinateur est sous tension et fonctionne à des vitesses de processeur et des niveaux d'activité élevés. Si vous utilisez votre ordinateur dans de telles conditions et que la batterie ne se charge pas, faites fonctionner votre ordinateur en mode de faible consommation. L'activation de ce mode peut entraîner une réduction du temps de chargement de la batterie et peut également améliorer la durée de vie de celle-ci En fonction des niveaux d'activité du système, il se peut que les performances du système soient réduites Pour définir le mode de faible consommation : REMARQUE : Vous pouvez également cliquer sur l'icône du wattmètre de la barre des tâches.Annexe 125 1 Cliquez sur Démarrer → Panneau de configuration→ Performances et maintenance→ Options d'alimentation. 2 Cliquez sur l'onglet Modes de gestion de l'alimentation. 3 Dans le menu déroulant Modes de gestion de l'alimentation, cliquez sur Low Power Mode (Mode faible consommation). Pour davantage d'informations sur la gestion de l'alimentation, reportez-vous au fichier d'aide Procédure. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 80. Ventilateur à vitesse variable Un ventilateur interne permet d'aérer l'ordinateur, prévenant ainsi la surchauffe des composants. Le ventilateur fonctionne en permanence et sa vitesse varie selon l'utilisation. Le bruit généré est tout à fait normal et n'indique en aucun cas un défaut du ventilateur ou de l'ordinateur. Règle de support technique de Dell (États-Unis uniquement) Le support technique fourni par les techniciens de Dell nécessite la coopération et la participation du client dans le processus de dépannage et permet de restaurer le système d'exploitation, les logiciels et les pilotes matériels à leur état d'origine, c'est-à-dire, à la configuration par défaut livrée par Dell ; il permet en outre de vérifier le fonctionnement approprié de l'ordinateur et du matériel installé par Dell. En plus du support technique par nos techniciens, vous disposez d'une aide en ligne à l'adresse support.dell.com. Des options payantes de support technique complémentaire sont également disponibles. Dell offre un support technique limité pour l'ordinateur et tous les logiciels et périphériques installés par Dell 1 . Le support technique pour les logiciels et les périphériques tiers est assuré par le fabricant lui-même, y compris le support pour tout logiciel ou périphérique acheté et/ou installé par le biais de Dell Software & Peripherals (DellWare), Readyware, et Custom Factory Integration (DellPlus) 2 . 1 Les services de réparation sont fournis selon les termes et les conditions stipulés par votre garantie limitée et par tout contrat de service de support optionnel acheté avec l'ordinateur. 2 Tous les composants Dell standard inclus dans un projet d'intégration personnalisée en usine (Custom Factory Integration - CFI) sont couverts par la garantie limitée standard de Dell applicable à votre ordinateur. Toutefois, Dell propose un programme de remplacement des pièces pour couvrir tous les composants non standard ou de sociétés tierces intégrées via CFI pendant la durée du contrat de service de l’ordinateur.126 Annexe w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Définition des logiciels et périphériques installés par Dell Les logiciels installés par Dell englobent le système d'exploitation et certains logiciels installés sur l'ordinateur pendant le processus de fabrication (Microsoft Office, Norton Antivirus, et ainsi de suite). Les périphériques installés par Dell incluent les cartes d'extension, la baie modulaire de marque Dell ou les accessoires de carte PC. Sont inclus également les produits de marque Dell suivants : moniteurs, claviers, souris, haut-parleurs, microphones pour modems à fonction téléphonique, stations d'accueil et réplicateurs de port, produits réseau et le câblage associé. Définition des logiciels et périphériques de sociétés tierces Les logiciels et périphériques tiers incluent tout périphérique, accessoire ou logiciel vendu par Dell mais qui ne porte pas la marque Dell (imprimantes, scanners et appareils photo, jeux, et ainsi de suite). Le support technique pour tout logiciel ou périphérique tiers est fourni par le fabricant du produit en question. Contacter Dell Vous pouvez contacter Dell par des moyens électroniques via les sites Web suivants : • www.dell.com • support.dell.com (support technique) • premiersupport.dell.com (support technique pour l'enseignement, le gouvernement, les services de santé et les moyennes et grosses entreprises, notamment les clients Premier, Platinum, et Gold) Pour les adresses Internet de votre pays, recherchez la section appropriée dans le tableau cidessous. REMARQUE : Les numéros verts sont valables dans le pays pour lequel ils sont indiqués. Si vous devez contacter Dell, utilisez les adresses électroniques, les numéros de téléphone et les indicatifs fournis dans le tableau ci-dessous. Si vous avez besoin d'assistance pour connaître les indicatifs à utiliser, contactez un opérateur local ou international.Annexe 127 Pays (Ville) Indicatif d'accès international Indicatif du pays Indicatif de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, Numéros locaux et Numéros d'appel gratuits Afrique du Sud (Johannesburg) Indicatif international : 09/091 Indicatif national : 27 Indicatif de la ville : 11 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Messagerie électronique : dell_za_support@dell.com Support technique 011 709 7710 Service clients 011 709 7707 Ventes 011 709 7700 Télécopie 011 706 0495 Standard 011 709 7700 Allemagne (Langen) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 49 Indicatif de la ville : 6103 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Messagerie électronique : tech_support_central_europe@dell.com Support technique 06103 766-7200 Service clients pour le grand public et les PME 0180-5-224400 Service clients segment International 06103 766-9570 Service clients comptes privilégiés 06103 766-9420 Service clients grands comptes 06103 766-9560 Service clients comptes publics 06103 766-9555 Standard 06103 766-7000 Amérique Latine Support technique clients (Austin, Texas, ÉtatsUnis) 512 728-4093 Service clients (Austin, Texas, États-Unis) 512 728-3619 Télécopie (Support technique et service clients) (Austin, Texas, États-Unis) 512 728-3883 Ventes (Austin, Texas, États-Unis) 512 728-4397 Ventes (Austin, Texas, États Unis) 512 728-4600 ou 512 728-3772 Anguilla Support technique général numéro vert : 800-335-0031 Antigua et Barbude Support technique général 1-800-805-5924 Antilles néerlandaises Support technique général 001-800-882-1519128 Annexe w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Argentine (Buenos Aires) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 54 Indicatif de la ville : 11 Site Web : www.dell.com.ar Support technique et Service clients numéro vert : 0-800-444-0733 Ventes 0-810-444-3355 Télécopie support technique 11 4515 7139 Télécopieur pour service clients 11 4515 7138 Aruba Support technique général numéro vert : 800-1578 Australie (Sydney) Indicatif international : 0011 Indicatif national : 61 Indicatif de la ville : 2 Adresse électronique (Australie) : au_tech_support@dell.com Adresse électronique (Nouvelle-Zélande): nz_tech_support@dell.com Grand public et PME 1-300-65-55-33 Gouvernement et entreprises numéro vert : 1-800-633-559 Division des comptes privilégiés numéro vert : 1-800-060-889 Service clients numéro vert : 1-800-819-339 Ventes aux grandes entreprises numéro vert : 1-800-808-385 Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 1-800-808-312 Télécopie numéro vert : 1-800-818-341 Autriche (Vienne) Indicatif international : 900 Indicatif national : 43 Indicatif de la ville : 1 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Messagerie électronique : tech_support_central_europe@dell.com Ventes aux grand public et PME 0820 240 530 00 Télécopie pour le grand public et les PME 0820 240 530 49 Service clients pour le grand public et les PME 0820 240 530 14 Service clientèle Comptes privilégiés/Entreprises 0820 240 530 16 Support technique pour le grand public et les PME 0820 240 530 14 Support technique Comptes privilégiés/Entreprises 0660 8779 Standard 0820 240 530 00 Bahamas Support technique général numéro vert : 1-866-278-6818 Pays (Ville) Indicatif d'accès international Indicatif du pays Indicatif de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, Numéros locaux et Numéros d'appel gratuitsAnnexe 129 Belgique (Bruxelles) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 32 Indicatif de la ville : 2 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Messagerie électronique : tech_be@dell.com Messagerie électronique pour les clients francophones : support.euro.dell.com/be/fr/emaildell/ Support technique 02 481 92 88 Service clients 02 481 91 19 Ventes aux grandes entreprises 02 481 91 00 Télécopie 02 481 92 99 Standard 02 481 91 00 Bermudes Support technique général 1-800-342-0671 Bolivie Support technique général numéro vert : 800-10-0238 Brésil Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 55 Indicatif de la ville : 51 Site Web : www.dell.com/br Service clients, Support technique 0800 90 3355 Télécopie support technique 51 481 5470 Télécopieur pour service clients 51 481 5480 Ventes 0800 90 3390 Brunei Indicatif national : 673 Support technique clients (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4966 Service clients (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4949 Ventes aux particuliers (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4955 Canada (North York, Ontario) Indicatif international : 011 État des commandes en ligne : www.dell.ca/ostatus AutoTech (support technique automatisé) numéro vert : 1-800-247-9362 TechFax numéro vert : 1-800-950-1329 Service clients (Ventes au grand public/PME) numéro vert : 1-800-847-4096 Service clients (grands comptes et gouvernement) numéro vert : 1-800-326-9463 Support technique (Ventes au grand public/PME) numéro vert : 1-800-847-4096 Support technique (grands comptes et gouvernement) numéro vert : 1-800-387-5757 Ventes (Ventes au grand public/PME) numéro vert : 1-800-387-5752 Ventes (moyennes et grosses entreprises, gouvernement) numéro vert : 1-800-387-5755 Vente de pièces et Vente de service étendu 1866 440 3355 Pays (Ville) Indicatif d'accès international Indicatif du pays Indicatif de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, Numéros locaux et Numéros d'appel gratuits130 Annexe w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Chili (Santiago) Indicatif national : 56 Indicatif de la ville : 2 Ventes, Service clients, Support technique numéro vert : 1230-020-4823 Chine (Xiamen) Indicatif national : 86 Indicatif de la ville : 592 Site Web pour support technique : support.ap.dell.com/china Adresse électronique du support technique : cn_support@dell.com Télécopie support technique 818 1350 Support technique pour le grand public et les PME numéro vert : 800 858 2437 Support technique pour les entreprises numéro vert : 800 858 2333 Commentaires clients numéro vert : 800 858 2060 Grand public et PME numéro vert : 800 858 2222 Division des comptes privilégiés numéro vert : 800 858 2062 Comptes grandes entreprises - GCP numéro vert : 800 858 2055 Comptes clés des grandes entreprises numéro vert : 800 858 2628 Comptes grandes entreprises - Nord numéro vert : 800 858 2999 Comptes grandes entreprises - gouvernement et éducation Nord numéro vert : 800 858 2955 Comptes grandes entreprises - Est numéro vert : 800 858 2020 Comptes grandes entreprises - gouvernement et éducation Est numéro vert : 800 858 2669 Comptes grandes entreprises - Queue Team numéro vert : 800 858 2572 Comptes grandes entreprises - Sud numéro vert : 800 858 2355 Comptes grandes entreprises - Ouest numéro vert : 800 858 2811 Comptes grandes entreprises - Pièces détachées numéro vert : 800 858 2621 Colombie Support technique général 980-9-15-3978 Corée (Séoul) Indicatif international : 001 Indicatif national : 82 Indicatif de la ville : 2 Support technique numéro vert : 080-200-3800 Ventes numéro vert : 080-200-3600 Service clients (Séoul, Corée) numéro vert : 080-200-3800 Service clients (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4949 Télécopie 2194-6202 Standard 2194-6000 Costa Rica Support technique général 0800-012-0435 Pays (Ville) Indicatif d'accès international Indicatif du pays Indicatif de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, Numéros locaux et Numéros d'appel gratuitsAnnexe 131 Danemark (Copenhague) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 45 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support messagerie électronique (ordinateurs portables) : den_nbk_support@dell.com Support messagerie électronique (ordinateurs de bureau) : den_support@dell.com Support messagerie électronique (serveurs): Nordic_server_support@dell.com Support technique 7023 0182 Suivi clientèle 7023 0184 Service clients pour le grand public et les PME 3287 5505 Standard (relations) 3287 1200 Standard télécopieur (relations) 3287 1201 Standard (Grand public et PME) 3287 5000 Télécopieur (grand public et PME) 3287 5001 Dominique Support technique général numéro vert : 1-866-278-6821 Équateur Support technique général numéro vert : 999-119 Espagne (Madrid) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 34 Indicatif de la ville : 91 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Messagerie électronique : support.euro.dell.com/es/es/emaildell/ Grand public et PME Support technique 902 100 130 Service clients 902 118 540 Ventes 902 118 541 Standard 902 118 541 Télécopie 902 118 539 Grandes entreprises Support technique 902 100 130 Service clients 902 118 546 Standard 91 722 92 00 Télécopie 91 722 95 83 Pays (Ville) Indicatif d'accès international Indicatif du pays Indicatif de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, Numéros locaux et Numéros d'appel gratuits132 Annexe w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m États-Unis (Austin, Texas) Indicatif international : 011 Indicatif national : 1 Service d'état des commandes automatisé numéro vert : 1-800-433-9014 AutoTech (ordinateurs portables et de bureau) numéro vert : 1-800-247-9362 Client (Grand public et activités professionnelles à domicile) Support technique numéro vert : 1-800-624-9896 Service clients numéro vert : 1-800-624-9897 Service et support technique Dellnet™ numéro vert : 1-877-Dellnet (1-877-335-5638) Clients du Programme d'achat par les employés numéro vert : 1-800-695-8133 Site Web des services financiers : www.dellfinancialservices.com Services financiers (leasing/prêts) numéro vert : 1-877-577-3355 Services financiers (Comptes privilégiés Dell [DPA]) numéro vert : 1-800-283-2210 Secteur privé Service clients et support technique numéro vert : 1-800-822-8965 Clients du Programme d'achat par les employés numéro vert : 1-800-695-8133 Support technique pour les projecteurs numéro vert : 1-877-459-7298 Public (gouvernement, enseignement et services de santé) Service clients et support technique numéro vert : 1-800-456-3355 Clients du Programme d'achat par les employés numéro vert : 1-800-234-1490 Ventes Dell numéro vert : 1-800-289-3355 ou numéro d'appel gratuit : 1- 800-879-3355 Points de vente Dell (ordinateurs Dell recyclés) numéro vert : 1-888-798-7561 Ventes de logiciels et de périphériques numéro vert : 1-800-671-3355 Ventes de pièces au détail numéro vert : 1-800-357-3355 Service étendu et ventes sous garantie numéro vert : 1-800-247-4618 Télécopie numéro vert : 1-800-727-8320 Services Dell pour les sourds, les malentendants ou les personnes ayant des problèmes d'élocution numéro vert : 1-877-DELLTTY (1-877-335-5889) Pays (Ville) Indicatif d'accès international Indicatif du pays Indicatif de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, Numéros locaux et Numéros d'appel gratuitsAnnexe 133 Finlande (Helsinki) Indicatif international : 990 Indicatif national : 358 Indicatif de la ville : 9 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Messagerie électronique : fin_support@dell.com Support messagerie électronique (serveurs): Nordic_support@dell.com Support technique 09 253 313 60 Télécopie pour support technique 09 253 313 81 Service relations clientèle 09 253 313 38 Service clients pour le grand public et les PME 09 693 791 94 Télécopie 09 253 313 99 Standard 09 253 313 00 France (Paris) (Montpellier) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 33 Indicatifs de la ville : (1)(4) Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Messagerie électronique : support.euro.dell.com/fr/fr/emaildell/ Grand public et PME Support technique 0825 387 270 Service clients 0825 823 833 Standard 0825 004 700 Standard (appels passés depuis l'étranger) 04 99 75 40 00 Ventes 0825 004 700 Télécopie 0825 004 701 Télécopieur (appels passés depuis l'étranger) 04 99 75 40 01 Grandes entreprises Support technique 0825 004 719 Service clients 0825 338 339 Standard 01 55 94 71 00 Ventes 01 55 94 71 00 Télécopie 01 55 94 71 01 Pays (Ville) Indicatif d'accès international Indicatif du pays Indicatif de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, Numéros locaux et Numéros d'appel gratuits134 Annexe w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Grèce Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 30 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Messagerie électronique : support.euro.dell.com/gr/en/emaildell/ Support technique 080044149518 Support technique Gold 08844140083 Standard 2108129800 Ventes 2108129800 Télécopie 2108129812 Grenade Support technique général numéro vert : 1-866-540-3355 Guatemala Support technique général 1-800-999-0136 Guyane Support technique général numéro vert : 1-877-270-4609 Hong Kong Indicatif international : 001 Indicatif national : 852 Site Web : support.ap.dell.com Messagerie électronique : ap_support@dell.com Support technique (Dimension™ et Inspiron™) 296 93188 Support technique (OptiPlex™, Latitude™ et Dell Precision™) 296 93191 Service clients (problèmes après vente, non techniques) 800 93 8291 Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 800 96 4109 Comptes grandes entreprises - Hong Kong numéro vert : 800 96 4108 Comptes grandes entreprises - GCP Hong Kong numéro vert : 800 90 3708 Inde Support technique 1600 33 8045 Ventes 1600 33 8044 Pays (Ville) Indicatif d'accès international Indicatif du pays Indicatif de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, Numéros locaux et Numéros d'appel gratuitsAnnexe 135 Irlande (Cherrywood) Indicatif international : 16 Indicatif national : 353 Indicatif de la ville : 1 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Messagerie électronique : dell_direct_support@dell.com Support technique pour l'Irlande 1850 543 543 U.K. Support technique (composez ce numéro uniquement à partir du Royaume-Uni) 0870 908 0800 Service clients pour les particuliers 01 204 4014 Service clients pour les petites entreprises 01 204 4014 Service clients pour le Royaume-Uni (composez ce numéro uniquement à partir du Royaume-Uni) 0870 906 0010 Service clients pour les grandes entreprises 1850 200 982 Service clients pour les grandes entreprises (appel depuis le R-U uniquement) 0870 907 4499 Ventes pour l'Irlande 01 204 4444 Ventes au Royaume-Uni (composez ce numéro uniquement à partir du Royaume-Uni) 0870 907 4000 Fax/FaxVentes 01 204 0103 Standard 01 204 4444 Îles Turques et Caicos Support technique général numéro vert : 1-866-540-3355 Îles Vierges Britanniques Support technique général numéro vert : 1-866-278-6820 Îles Vierges (É-U) Support technique général 1-877-673-3355 Italie (Milan) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 39 Indicatif de la ville : 02 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Messagerie électronique : support.euro.dell.com/it/it/emaildell/ Grand public et PME Support technique 02 577 826 90 Service clients 02 696 821 14 Télécopie 02 696 821 13 Standard 02 696 821 12 Grandes entreprises Support technique 02 577 826 90 Service clients 02 577 825 55 Télécopie 02 575 035 30 Standard 02 577 821 Pays (Ville) Indicatif d'accès international Indicatif du pays Indicatif de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, Numéros locaux et Numéros d'appel gratuits136 Annexe w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Jamaïque Support technique général (appel à partir de la Jamaïque uniquement) 1-800-682-3639 Japon (Kawasaki) Indicatif international : 001 Indicatif national : 81 Indicatif de la ville : 44 Site Web : support.jp.dell.com Support technique (serveurs) numéro vert : 0120-198-498 Support technique à l'extérieur du Japon (serveurs) 81-44-556-4162 Support technique (Dimension™ et Inspiron™) numéro vert : 0120-198-226 Support technique à l'extérieur du Japon (Dimension™ et Inspiron™) 81-44-520-1435 Support technique (Dell Precision™, OptiPlex™ et Latitude™) numéro vert: 0120-198-433 Support technique à l'extérieur du Japon (Dell Precision™, OptiPlex™ et Latitude™) 81-44-556-3894 Service Faxbox 044-556-3490 Service de commandes automatisé 24 heures sur 24 044-556-3801 Service clients 044-556-4240 Division Ventes aux entreprises (jusqu'à 400 salariés) 044-556-1465 Division Ventes aux comptes privilégiés (plus de 400 employés) 044-556-3433 Ventes aux Comptes grandes entreprises (plus de 3 500 salariés) 044-556-3430 Ventes aux organismes publics (gouvernement, éducation, institutions médicales) 044-556-1469 Segment International - Japon 044-556-3469 Utilisateur individuel 044-556-1760 Standard 044-556-4300 La Barbade Support technique général 1-800-534-3066 Les Îles Caïman Support technique général 1-800-805-7541 Pays (Ville) Indicatif d'accès international Indicatif du pays Indicatif de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, Numéros locaux et Numéros d'appel gratuitsAnnexe 137 Luxembourg Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 352 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Messagerie électronique : tech_be@dell.com Support technique (Bruxelles, Belgique) 3420808075 Ventes aux grand public et PME (Bruxelles, Belgique) numéro vert : 080016884 Ventes aux grandes entreprises (Bruxelles, Belgique) 02 481 91 00 Service clients (Bruxelles, Belgique) 02 481 91 19 Télécopie (Bruxelles, Belgique) 02 481 92 99 Standard (Bruxelles, Belgique) 02 481 91 00 Macao Indicatif national : 853 Support technique numéro vert : 0800 582 Service clients (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4949 Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 0800 581 Malaisie (Penang) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 60 Indicatif de la ville : 4 Support technique numéro vert : 1 800 888 298 Service clients 04 633 4949 Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 1 800 888 202 Ventes aux grandes entreprises numéro vert : 1 800 888 213 Mexique Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 52 Support technique clients 001-877-384-8979 ou 001-877-269-3383 Ventes 50-81-8800 ou 01-800-888-3355 Service clients 001-877-384-8979 ou 001-877-269-3383 Groupe principal 50-81-8800 ou 01-800-888-3355 Montserrat Support technique général numéro vert : 1-866-278-6822 Nicaragua Support technique général 001-800-220-1006 Pays (Ville) Indicatif d'accès international Indicatif du pays Indicatif de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, Numéros locaux et Numéros d'appel gratuits138 Annexe w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Nouvelle-Zélande Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 64 Adresse électronique (Nouvelle-Zélande): nz_tech_support@dell.com Adresse électronique (Australie) : au_tech_support@dell.com Grand public et PME 0800 446 255 Gouvernement et entreprises 0800 444 617 Ventes 0800 441 567 Télécopie 0800 441 566 Norvège (Lysaker) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 47 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support messagerie électronique (ordinateurs portables) : nor_nbk_support@dell.com Support messagerie électronique (ordinateurs de bureau) : nor_support@dell.com Support messagerie électronique (serveurs): nordic_server_support@dell.com Support technique 671 16882 Service relations clientèle 671 17514 Service clients pour le grand public et les PME 23162298 Standard 671 16800 Standard télécopieur 671 16865 Pays (Ville) Indicatif d'accès international Indicatif du pays Indicatif de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, Numéros locaux et Numéros d'appel gratuitsAnnexe 139 Pays-Bas (Amsterdam) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 31 Indicatif de la ville : 20 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Adresse électronique (Support technique) : (Entreprise) : nl_server_support@dell.com (Latitude) : nl_latitude_support@dell.com (Inspiron) : nl_inspiron_support@dell.com (Dimension) : nl_dimension_support@dell.com (OptiPlex) : nl_optiplex_support@dell.com (Dell Precision) : nl_workstation_support@dell.com Support technique 020 674 45 00 Télécopie pour support technique 020 674 47 66 Service clients pour le grand public et les PME 020 674 42 00 Service relations clientèle 020 674 4325 Ventes aux grand public et PME 020 674 55 00 Relations ventes 020 674 50 00 Télécopie des ventes aux grand public et PME 020 674 47 75 Télécopie pour les relations ventes 020 674 47 50 Standard 020 674 50 00 Télécopieur du standard 020 674 47 50 Pays du Pacifique et du Sud-est Asiatique Support technique clients, service clients et ventes (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4810 Panama Support technique général 001-800-507-0962 Pérou Support technique général 0800-50-669 Pologne (Varsovie) Indicatif international : 011 Indicatif national : 48 Indicatif de la ville : 22 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Messagerie électronique : pl_support@dell.com Service clients (téléphone) 57 95 700 Service clients 57 95 999 Ventes 57 95 999 Service clients (télécopie) 57 95 806 Réception (télécopieur) 57 95 998 Standard 57 95 999 Pays (Ville) Indicatif d'accès international Indicatif du pays Indicatif de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, Numéros locaux et Numéros d'appel gratuits140 Annexe w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Portugal Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 351 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Messagerie électronique : support.euro.dell.com/pt/en/emaildell/ Support technique 707200149 Service clients 800 300413 Ventes 800 300 410 ou 800 300 411 ou 800 300 412 ou 21 422 07 10 Télécopie 21 424 01 12 Porto Rico Support technique général 1-800-805-7545 République Dominicaine Support technique général 1-800-148-0530 République Tchèque (Prague) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 420 Indicatif de la ville : 2 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Messagerie électronique : czech_dell@dell.com Support technique 02 2186 27 27 Service clients 02 2186 27 11 Télécopie 02 2186 27 14 TechFax 02 2186 27 28 Standard 02 2186 27 11 Pays (Ville) Indicatif d'accès international Indicatif du pays Indicatif de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, Numéros locaux et Numéros d'appel gratuitsAnnexe 141 Royaume-Uni (Bracknell) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 44 Indicatif de la ville : 1344 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Site Web Service clients : support.euro.dell.com/uk/en/ECare/Form/Home.asp Messagerie électronique : dell_direct_support@dell.com Support technique (Entreprises/Comptes privilégiés/Division Comptes privilégiés [plus de 1 000 salariés]) 0870 908 0500 Support technique (Direct/Division des comptes privilégiés et général) 0870 908 0800 Service clients comptes internationaux 01344 373 186 Service clients pour le grand public et les PME 0870 906 0010 Service clients pour les grandes entreprises 01344 373 185 Service clients pour les comptes privilégiés (500–5000 employés) 0870 906 0010 Service clients pour le gouvernement central 01344 373 193 Service clients pour le gouvernement local et l'éducation 01344 373 199 Service clients (santé) 01344 373 194 Ventes aux grand public et PME 0870 907 4000 Ventes aux entreprises/secteur public 01344 860 456 Salvador Support technique général 01-899-753-0777 Singapour (Singapour) Indicatif international : 005 Indicatif national : 65 Support technique numéro vert : 800 6011 051 Service clients (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4949 Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 800 6011 054 Ventes aux grandes entreprises numéro vert : 800 6011 053 St. Kitts et Nevis Support technique général numéro vert : 1-877-441-4731 St. Lucia Support technique général 1-800-882-1521 St. Vincent et les Grenadines Support technique général numéro vert : 1-877-270-4609 Pays (Ville) Indicatif d'accès international Indicatif du pays Indicatif de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, Numéros locaux et Numéros d'appel gratuits142 Annexe w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Suède (Upplands Vasby) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 46 Indicatif de la ville : 8 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Messagerie électronique : swe_support@dell.com Support messagerie électronique pour Latitude et Inspiron : Swe-nbk_kats@dell.com Support messagerie électronique pour OptiPlex : Swe_kats@dell.com Support messagerie électronique pour les serveurs : Nordic_server_support@dell.com Support technique 08 590 05 199 Service relations clientèle 08 590 05 642 Service clients pour le grand public et les PME 08 587 70 527 Support du programme d'achats par les employés (EPP, Employee Purchase Program) 20 140 14 44 Support technique télécopie 08 590 05 594 Ventes 08 590 05 185 Suisse (Genève) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 41 Indicatif de la ville : 22 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Messagerie électronique : swisstech@dell.com Adresse électronique pour les clients francophones (grand public et PME et entreprises) : support.euro.dell.com/ch/fr/emaildell/ Support technique (grand public et PME) 0844 811 411 Support technique (grandes entreprises) 0844 822 844 Service clients (grand public et PME) 0848 802 202 Service clients (grandes entreprises) 0848 821 721 Télécopie 022 799 01 90 Standard 022 799 01 01 Taïwan Indicatif international : 002 Indicatif national : 886 Support technique (ordinateurs portables et de bureau) numéro vert : 00801 86 1011 Support technique (serveurs) numéro vert : 0080 60 1256 Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 0080 651 228 ou 0800 33 556 Ventes aux grandes entreprises numéro vert : 0080 651 227 ou 0800 33 555 Pays (Ville) Indicatif d'accès international Indicatif du pays Indicatif de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, Numéros locaux et Numéros d'appel gratuitsAnnexe 143 Thaïlande Indicatif international : 001 Indicatif national : 66 Support technique numéro vert : 0880 060 07 Service clients (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4949 Ventes numéro vert : 0880 060 09 Trinité/Tobago Support technique général 1-800-805-8035 Uruguay Support technique général numéro vert : 000-413-598- 2521 Venezuela Support technique général 8001-3605 Pays (Ville) Indicatif d'accès international Indicatif du pays Indicatif de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, Numéros locaux et Numéros d'appel gratuits144 Annexe w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Réglementations Les interférences électromagnétiques constituent des signaux ou émissions, dans un espace libre ou conduit par les câbles d'alimentation ou de signal, qui menacent le fonctionnement de la radionavigation, des services de sécurité ou qui dégradent sérieusement, obstruent ou interrompent régulièrement les services autorisés de communications radio. Les services de communications radio incluent notamment les services de radiodiffusion commerciale AM/FM, la télévision, les services de téléphonie cellulaire, la radiodétection, le contrôle de la circulation aérienne, les récepteurs de radiomessagerie et les systèmes GSM. Ces services autorisés, tout comme des perturbateurs involontaires tels que les matériels numériques, y compris les systèmes informatiques, contribuent à l'environnement électromagnétique. La compatibilité électromagnétique (CEM) est la capacité des éléments d'un équipement électronique à interagir correctement dans l'environnement électronique. Bien que cet ordinateur ait été conçu pour être conforme aux limites de l'instance réglementaire des EMI, il n'y a aucune garantie concernant les interférences pouvant survenir dans une installation particulière. Si l'équipement crée effectivement des interférences avec des services de communications radio (ce qui peut être déterminé en l'éteignant et en l'allumant), l'utilisateur est encouragé à essayer de corriger ce phénomène en prenant l'une ou l'ensemble des mesures suivantes : • Changer l'orientation de l'antenne de réception. • Changer la position de l'ordinateur par rapport au récepteur. • Éloigner l'ordinateur du récepteur. • Brancher l'ordinateur à une source d'alimentation différente de manière à ce que l'ordinateur et le récepteur soient sur des circuits d'alimentation différents. Si nécessaire, consulter un membre de l'équipe du support technique de Dell ou un technicien radio/télévision expérimenté pour des suggestions supplémentaires. Pour obtenir des informations supplémentaires sur les réglementations, reportez-vous au fichier d'aide Procédure qui accompagne votre ordinateur. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 80.Garantie 145 Garantie limitée et règle de retour Les produits matériels de marque Dell achetés au Canada sont couverts par une garantie limitée de 90 jours (ampoules pour projecteurs Dell uniquement), d'un an, de deux ans, de trois ans ou de quatre ans. Pour savoir quelle garantie s'applique aux produits que vous avez achetés, consultez la facture qui les accompagne. Les sections suivantes décrivent la garantie limitée et la règle de retour en vigueur au Canada. Conditions de garantie limitée pour les matériels de marque Dell (Canada uniquement) Que couvre cette garantie limitée ? Cette garantie limitée couvre les vices de matériel et de fabrication éventuels pouvant affecter les produits matériels de marque Dell de — tout utilisateur final —, notamment les produits périphériques de marque Dell. Quelles situations ne sont pas couvertes par cette garantie limitée ? Les cas suivants ne sont pas couverts : • Les logiciels, notamment le système d'exploitation et les logiciels ajoutés aux matériels par le système d'intégration en usine Dell ou la réinstallation des logiciels • Produits et accessoires autres que Dell et Solution Provider Direct • Problèmes provenant de : – Causes externes : accident, utilisation abusive ou impropre, problèmes liés à l'alimentation électrique ; – Entretien courant non autorisé par Dell – Utilisation non conforme aux instructions du produit – Non-respect des instructions du produit et de la maintenance préventive – Problèmes provoqués par l'utilisation d'accessoires, de pièces ou de composants non fournis par Dell • Produits sur lesquels le numéro de service ou le numéro de série est manquant ou altéré ; • Produits dont Dell n'a pas reçu le paiement. CETTE GARANTIE VOUS DONNE DES DROITS LÉGAUX SPÉCIFIQUES, AUXQUELS PEUVENT S'AJOUTER D'AUTRES DROITS, QUI VARIENT SELON LA PROVINCE. LA RESPONSABILITÉ DE DELL POUR LE FONCTIONNEMENT DÉFECTUEUX ET LES DÉFAUTS DU PRODUIT EST LIMITÉE À LA RÉPARATION ET AU REMPLACEMENT COMME INDIQUÉ DANS LE PRÉSENT CONTRAT DE GARANTIE LIMITÉE, POUR LA PÉRIODE MENTIONNÉE SUR VOTRE FACTURE OU BORDEREAU D'EMBALLAGE. À L'EXCLUSION DES GARANTIES EXPRESSES MENTIONNÉES DANS CE CONTRAT, DELL DÉCLINE TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE OU CONDITION EXPRESSE OU IMPLICITE, INCLUANT SANS RESTRICTION LES GARANTIES ET CONDITIONS IMPLICITES DE QUALITÉ OU D'ADAPTABILITÉ À UN USAGE PARTICULIER, LÉGAL OU AUTRE. CERTAINES PROVINCES NE RECONNAISSENT PAS L'EXCLUSION DE CERTAINES GARANTIES OU CONDITIONS, OU DE RESTRICTION DE LA DURÉE D'UNE CONDITION OU GARANTIE IMPLICITE. AUQUEL CAS LES EXCLUSIONS ET RESTRICTIONS PRÉCÉDENTES PEUVENT NE PAS S'APPLIQUER. 146 Garantie w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m DELL DÉCLINE TOUTE RESPONSABILITÉ AU-DELÀ DES RECOURS INDIQUÉS DANS LE PRÉSENT CONTRAT DE GARANTIE, POUR LES DOMMAGES ACCIDENTELS, INDUITS, INDIRECTS OU SPÉCIAUX, Y COMPRIS CONCERNANT LES PLAINTES DE TIERS CONTRE VOUS POUR LA NONDISPONIBILITÉ D'UN PRODUIT OU LA PERTE DE DONNÉES OU DE LOGICIEL, ET CE SANS RESTRICTION. EN CAS DE RÉCLAMATION, NOTRE RESPONSABILITÉ SE LIMITE AU MONTANT DU PRODUIT CONCERNÉ. AU-DELÀ DUQUEL NOTRE PRISE EN CHARGE N'EST PLUS VALABLE. CERTAINES PROVINCES NE RECONNAISSENT PAS D'EXCLUSION OU DE RESTRICTION SUR LES DOMMAGES ACCIDENTELS, INDIRECTS, SPÉCIAUX, OU INDUITS, AUQUEL CAS L'EXCLUSION OU LES RESTRICTIONS PRÉCÉDENTES PEUVENT NE PAS S'APPLIQUER. Quelle est la durée de validité de cette garantie limitée ? Cette garantie limitée est valable pour la période indiquée sur votre facture ou bordereau d'emballage, à l'exception des batteries de marque Dell dont la garantie limitée n'est que d'un an et des lampes des projecteurs de marque Dell dont la garantie limitée n'est que de 90 jours. La garantie limitée prend effet à la date figurant sur la facture ou le bordereau d'emballage. Aucune extension de la période de garantie n'est accordée en cas de réparation ou de remplacement d'un produit ou de pièces sous garantie. Dell peut modifier les conditions et la disponibilité de certaines garanties limitées, comme bon lui semble, mais aucune modification ne sera rétroactive (les conditions en vigueur au moment de l'achat s'appliqueront à votre achat). Que dois-je faire pour bénéficier d'un service de garantie ? Avant l'expiration de la garantie, veuillez nous contacter au numéro approprié inscrit dans le tableau suivant. Ayez également votre numéro de service Dell ou votre numéro de commande à portée de main. Particuliers ; grand public et PME : Canada uniquement Support technique et service clients 1-800-847-4096 Moyennes et grandes entreprises, clients du domaine de l'administration, de l'éducation, de la santé et revendeurs à valeur ajoutée : Support technique 1-800-387-5757 Service clients 1-800-326-9463 Établissements gouvernementaux ou scolaires, ou particuliers ayant effectué un achat par l'intermédiaire d'un programme d'achat par les employés : Support technique 1-800-387-5757 Service clients 18003269463 (Extension 8221 pour les particuliers) Mémoire de marque Dell 1-888-363-5150Garantie 147 Que fera Dell ? Au cours des 90 premiers jours de la garantie limitée de 90 jours et la première année de toutes les autres garanties limitées : Pour les 90 jours de la garantie limitée de 90 jours et la première année de toutes les autres garanties limitées, Dell effectuera la réparation de tous les produits de marque Dell présentant des défauts matériels ou de fabrication, qui lui seront renvoyés. Si Dell n'est pas en mesure de réparer le produit, il sera remplacé par un produit similaire, neuf ou reconditionné. Lorsque vous contacterez Dell, un numéro d'autorisation de retour matériel vous sera attribué et vous devrez l'inclure lors du retour. Vous devez renvoyer les produits à Dell dans leur emballage d'origine ou un équivalent, payer les frais d'expédition et assurer l'envoi ou accepter les risques de perte ou de dommage pendant l'acheminement. Dell vous renverra le produit réparé ou le remplacera, à ses frais, si vous utilisez une adresse au Canada. Dans le cas contraire, vous devrez payer le port à la réception du produit. Sil s'avérait que le problème n'est pas couvert par la garantie, Dell vous en informera et vous indiquera les services payants à votre disposition. REMARQUE : Avant d'expédier le ou les produits à Dell, sauvegardez les données du ou des disques durs et de tout autre dispositif de stockage dans l'appareil concerné. Retirez toutes les données confidentielles, propriétaires ou personnelles ainsi que tous les supports amovibles, tels que les disquettes, CD ou cartes PC. Dell décline toute responsabilité concernant vos informations personnelles ou confidentielles, la perte ou la corruption de vos données, ainsi que la perte ou l'endommagement des supports amovibles. Au cours des années non écoulées suivant la première année de toutes les garanties limitées : nous remplacerons toute pièce défectueuse par une pièce neuve ou réusinée, si nous estimons qu'elle a besoin d'être remplacée. Lorsque vous nous contactez, munissez-vous d'un numéro de carte de crédit valide au moment de votre demande de remplacement de pièce, mais vous n'aurez rien à payer si vous renvoyez la pièce originale à Dell dans les 30 jours suivants l'envoi de la pièce de remplacement. Si Dell ne reçoit pas la pièce originale dans les 30 jours, le prix standard courant de la pièce remplacée sera prélevé sur votre carte de crédit. Dell prend les frais à sa charge pour les envois de pièces sur le Canada. Hors Canada, vous devrez payer le port à la réception du produit. Dell inclut un emballage d'expédition prépayé avec chaque pièce de rechange, afin que vous renvoyiez la pièce remplacée à Dell. REMARQUE : Avant de procéder au remplacement des pièces, assurez-vous de sauvegarder les données du ou des disques durs et de tout autre dispositif de stockage présent dans le(s) produit(s). Dell décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte ou de corruption des données. Que se passe-t-il si j'ai souscrit un contrat d'entretien ? Si vous avez passé un contrat de service avec Dell, ce service vous sera délivré conformément aux termes du contrat. Veuillez vous reporter à ce contrat pour plus de détails sur la façon d'obtenir ce service. Vous trouverez les contrats de service Dell en ligne à l'adresse suivante www.dell.ca or ou en appelant le service clients au 1-800-847- 4096. Si vous passez par Dell pour souscrire un contrat de service auprès d;un de ses fournisseurs tiers, veuillez vous reporter à ce contrat (joint à la facture ou au bordereau d'emballage) pour plus de détails sur la façon de bénéficier de ce service. Comment allez-vous réparer mon produit ? Dell utilise des pièces neuves ou reconditionnées provenant de différents fabricants pour les réparations sous garantie et pour la fabrication de systèmes et pièces de remplacement. Les systèmes et pièces remis en état ont été renvoyés à Dell, certains d'entre eux n'ayant jamais été utilisés. Tous les systèmes et pièces sont inspectés et testés pour en vérifier la qualité. Les systèmes et pièces de remplacement sont couverts par la garantie limitée du produit pour la période restante. Dell est propriétaire de toutes les pièces retirées des produits réparés. 148 Garantie w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Puis-je transférer ma garantie limitée ? Les garanties limitées des systèmes peuvent être transférées si le propriétaire courant transfère les droits de propriété du système et enregistre le transfert auprès de Dell. La garantie limitée de la mémoire de marque Dell ne peut pas être transférée. Vous pouvez enregistrer votre transfert depuis le site Web de Dell : • Dans le cas d'ordinateurs achetés au Canada (transferts à l'intérieur du pays) et pour effectuer un transfert d'un client à un autre, allez à l'adresse www.dell.ca/ca/en/gen/topics/segtopic_ccare_nav_013_ccare.htm • Pour les transferts à l'étranger (en dehors du pays d'achat d'origine), allez à l'adressewww.dell.com/us/en/biz/topics/sbtopic_ccare_nav_016_ccare.htm Si vous n'avez pas d'accès à Internet, appelez Dell au 1-800-847-4096 (particuliers) ou au 1-800-326-9463 (entreprises et service public). Politique de retour «Satisfait ou remboursé» (Canada uniquement) En qualité de client et utilisateur final ayant acheté de nouveaux produits directement à Dell, vous êtes en droit de les retourner à Dell dans un délai de 30 jours à compter de la date de réception pour un remboursement ou un avoir équivalent au prix d'achat. En qualité de client et utilisateur final ayant acheté des produits recyclés à Dell, vous êtes en droit de les retourner dans un délai de 14 jours à compter de la date figurant sur la facture ou le bordereau d'emballage pour un remboursement ou un avoir équivalent au prix d'achat. Dans l'un comme l'autre de ces cas, le remboursement ou l'avoir n'inclut pas les frais de livraison et d'emballage indiqués sur votre facture ou bordereau d'emballage et 15% de frais de retour seront déduits, sauf stipulation contraire par la loi. Si vous avez acheté nos produits en tant que société liée à Dell par un contrat écrit, les termes stipulés dans ce contrat au sujet du retour des produits peuvent différer de ceux spécifiés par la règle de retour. Pour retourner les produits, vous devez appeler le Service clients de Dell au 1-800--847-4096 qui vous fournira un numéro d'autorisation de retour pour crédit. Afin d'accélérer la procédure de remboursement ou d'avoir, Dell attend que vous lui renvoyiez les produits dans leur emballage d'origine dans les cinq jours suivant l'attribution d'un numéro d'autorisation de renvoi pour crédit. Vous devez également payer d'avance les frais d'expédition et assurer l'envoi, ou accepter les risques de perte ou de dommage pendant l'acheminement. Vous ne pouvez renvoyer le logiciel pour un remboursement ou un avoir que si l'emballage scellé contenant la ou les disquettes ou le ou les CD n'a pas été ouvert. Les produits renvoyés doivent être comme neufs, et tous les guides, disquettes, CD, cordons d'alimentation et autres accessoires livrés avec le produit doivent être renvoyés avec celui-ci. Les clients désirant renvoyer pour remboursement ou avoir, des logiciels ou un système d'exploitation installé par Dell, doivent retourner le système dans son intégralité, avec tous les supports et la documentation inclus dans la livraison d'origine. La règle de retour «Satisfait ou remboursé» ne s'applique pas aux produits de stockage EMC de Dell . Elle ne s'applique pas non plus aux produits achetés auprès du service Software & Peripherals de Dell. Pour ces produits, veuillez plutôt vous référer à la règle de renvoi de Dell Software and Peripherals actuellement en vigueur (voir la section Dell Software & Peripherals (Canada seulement)). Logiciels et périphériques Dell (Canada uniquement) Périphériques et logiciels tiers Comme tous les autres revendeurs de logiciels et de périphériques, Dell ne garantit pas les produits des autres constructeurs. Pour tous ces logiciels et périphériques de sociétés tierces, la garantie est fournie par le fabricant ou l'éditeur du produit uniquement. Les garanties du fabricant peuvent varier selon les produits. Pour des informations spécifiques sur la garantie, consultez la documentation de votre produit. Vous pouvez également demander des informations complémentaires au fabricant ou à l'éditeur.Garantie 149 Proposant un vaste choix de logiciels et de périphériques, Dell ne peut pas tester ni garantir que tous ses produits sont compatibles avec tous les modèles différents d'ordinateurs Dell, ni avec les centaines de marques disponibles aujourd'hui. En cas de question concernant la compatibilité, nous vous conseillons de contacter directement le fabricant ou l'éditeur de logiciel et de périphérique. Périphériques de marque Dell Dell propose une garantie limitée pour les nouveaux périphériques Dell (pour lesquels Dell est répertorié en tant que fabricant) tels que les moniteurs, piles et batteries, mémoire, stations d'accueil et projecteurs. Pour connaître la garantie qui s'applique à votre achat, consultez la facture ou le bordereau d'emballage Dell et/ou la documentation fournie avec votre produit. La description des garanties limitées de Dell est détaillée dans les sections précédentes. Règle de retour En qualité de client et utilisateur final ayant acheté de nouveaux produits au service Software & Peripherals de Dell, vous êtes en droit de les retourner à Dell, s'ils sont comme neufs, dans un délai de 30 jours à compter de la date figurant sur la facture ou le bordereau d'emballage pour un remboursement ou un avoir équivalent au prix d'achat si le règlement a déjà été effectué. Ce remboursement n'inclut pas les frais de livraison et d'emballage indiqués sur votre facture ou bordereau d'emballage; ils sont à votre charge. Pour retourner les produits, vous devez appeler le Service clients de Dell au 18003475759 qui vous fournira un numéro d'autorisation de retour pour crédit. Vous devez renvoyer les produits à Dell dans leur emballage d'origine ou un équivalent (comme neuf), payer d'avance les frais d'expédition et assurer l'envoi ou accepter les risques de perte ou de dommage pendant l'acheminement. Les produits renvoyés ne seront remboursés ou remplacés que sils sont comme neufs, si les logiciels n'ont pas été ouverts et si tous les guides, disquettes, CD, cordons d'alimentation et autres accessoires sont retournés avec le produit. 150 Garantie w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Déclaration de garantie Intel® réservée aux processeurs Pentium® et Celeron® (États-Unis et Canada uniquement) Intel’s Three Year Limited Warranty Limited Warranty Intel warrants that its family of Pentium® and Celeron® processors, if properly used and installed, will be free from defects in materials and workmanship and will substantially conform to Intel’s publicly available specifications for a period of three (3) years after the date the Pentium or Celeron processor was purchased (whether purchased separately or as part of a computer system). If the Pentium or Celeron processor, which is the subject of this Limited Warranty, fails during the warranty period for reasons covered by this Limited Warranty, Intel, at its option, will: • REPAIR the Pentium or Celeron processor by means of hardware and/or software; OR • REPLACE the Pentium or Celeron processor with another Pentium or Celeron processor; OR if Intel is unable to repair or replace the particular Pentium or Celeron processor, • REFUND the then-current value of the Pentium or Celeron processor. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT MAY EXIST UNDER STATE LAW, APPLY ONLY TO THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THE PENTIUM OR CELERON PROCESSOR, OR PENTIUM OR CELERON PROCESSOR-BASED COMPUTER AND LAST ONLY FOR AS LONG AS SUCH PURCHASER CONTINUES TO OWN THE PROCESSOR. Extent of Limited Warranty Intel does not warrant that your Pentium or Celeron processor will be free from design defects or errors known as "errata." Current characterized errata are available upon request. This limited warranty is for purchasers in the United States and Canada only. The limited warranty does not cover any costs relating to removal or replacement of any Pentium or Celeron processors that are soldered or otherwise permanently affixed to your system’s motherboard. This limited warranty does not cover damages due to external causes, including accident, problems with electrical power, usage not in accordance with product instructions, misuse, neglect, alteration, repair, improper installation, or improper testing. How to Obtain Warranty Service To obtain warranty service for your Pentium or Celeron processor, you may contact your computer system manufacturer in accordance with its instructions, or you may contact Intel. To request warranty service from Intel, you should call Intel at 1-800-628-8686 during the warranty period during normal business hours (Pacific Time), excluding holidays. Please be prepared to provide: (1) your name, address, and telephone numbers; (2) proof of purchase; (3) this Intel warranty card; (4) a description of the computer system including the brand and model; and (5) an explanation of the problem. [Note: The Customer Service Representative may need additional information from you depending on the nature of the problem.] The replacement processor is warranted under this written warranty and is subject to the same limitations and exclusions for the remainder of the original warranty period or one (1) year, whichever is longer. WARRANTY LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS THESE WARRANTIES REPLACE ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. INTEL MAKES NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES BEYOND THOSE STATED HERE. INTEL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SOME LAWS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IF THESE LAWS APPLY, THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. SOME LAWS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY INTEL’S RESPONSIBILITY UNDER THIS, OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, IMPLIED OR EXPRESS, IS LIMITED TO REPAIR, REPLACEMENT OR REFUND, AS SET FORTH ABOVE. THESE REMEDIES ARE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY. INTEL IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, DOWNTIME, GOODWILL, DAMAGE TO OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND PROPERTY, AND ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING, REPROGRAMMING, OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH A SYSTEM CONTAINING YOUR PENTIUM PROCESSOR. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THE LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY FROM JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION.Garantie 151 Intel Pentium® and Celeron® Processors are backed by a three-year limited warranty. Please refer to the reverse side of this card for complete warranty details. Intel’s Commitment to Quality Intel is committed to producing the highest quality processors available. That’s why we have hundreds of people dedicated to continuously improve our design, manufacturing, and testing technology. We put every one of our Pentium® and Celeron® processors through a rigorous battery of tests during the design and manufacturing processes. To verify that the new chip will correctly run the software written for Intel Architecture processors, a team of Intel engineers is dedicated to compatibility testing. In a state-of-art lab, this group runs an extensive set of operating systems, applications, network tests and stress tests repeatedly to ensure that the processor is compatible with representative software. Just as importantly, we work with hardware and software companies in the computer industry to ensure that our processors are compatible with their products. Additionally, a sampling of Intel processors are subjected to a rigorous "burn-in" test whereby the chip is operated at higher-than-normal temperatures and voltages. During this burn-in period, the processor experiences the equivalent of weeks of normal usage. These units are monitored for failures as part of our ongoing quality assurance process. As a result, today’s microprocessors from Intel are among the most reliable components in computers. What are "Errata"? Exhaustive product testing can highlight differences between the actual behavior of the microprocessor and its specifications. Sometimes the discrepancies are caused by a design defect or error, which we call errata. Rigorous validation identifies most errata during the development of the processor, but we do detect additional errata during the life cycle of a microprocessor. When an erratum is identified, our engineers work to characterize it and find a solution. We work with system designers and software developers to ensure that the discrepancy does not affect their products. If necessary, special software or hardware solutions (sometimes known as "work arounds") are implemented in the system design to prevent computer users from encountering the problem. Errata may then be corrected in future revisions of the microprocessor. No microprocessor is perfect, and Intel recognizes that some consumers want to know about any errata, whether or not the errata affect them. Intel makes documentation of all characterized Pentium and Celeron processor errata publicly available through our Technical Documentation Service. At Intel, our goal is to make every computer user satisfied with his or her Pentium or Celeron processor. Should you have any questions, comments or concerns about your Intel microprocessor, please call us at 1-800-628-8686. ©1997, 1998 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved.152 Garantie w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o mIndex 153 Index A alimentation dispositifs de protection, 39 mise hors tension de l'ordinateur, 40 résolution des problèmes, 45 arrêt de l'ordinateur, 40 B barre de tâches icône QuickSet, 32 barres d'outils réglage de la taille, 32 batterie alerte de batterie faible, 43 chargement, 43 description, 24, 29 installation, 45 performances, 42 retrait, 44 stockage, 45 vérification de la charge, 43 vue du système, 24, 29 wattmètre, 43 blocages, 86 bouton AccessDirect description, 23 vue du système, 23 bouton d'alimentation description, 22 vue du système, 22 boutons de la tablette tactile description, 22 vue du système, 22 C cache de la carte modem/Mini PCI description, 29 vue du système, 29 cache du module de mémoire description, 30 vue du système, 30 caractères inattendus, 53 caractéristiques, 114 cartes PC résolution des problèmes, 85 clavier caractères inattendus, 53 description, 21 raccourcis, 49 remplacement, 109 résolution des problèmes, 53 vue du système, 21 conflits résolution des incompatibilités logicielles et matérielles, 92 conflits d'IRQ, 92 connecteur de sortie TV Svidéo description, 27 vue du système, 27 connecteur IEEE 1394 description, 28 vue du système, 28 connecteur modem description, 25 vue du système, 25 connecteur réseau description, 28 vue du système, 28 connecteur USB description, 28 vue du système, 28 connecteur vidéo description, 28 vue du système, 28 connecteurs audio description, 24 vue du système, 24154 Index 154 Index connexion Internet à propos de, 33 configuration, 34 options, 33 consignes de sécurité, 11 D dépannage à propos de, 78 blocage de programme, 86 caractères inattendus, 53 conflits, 92 impossible d'enregistrer sur la disquette, 84 impossible d'enregistrer sur une disquette, 84 ordinateur endommagé, 88 ordinateur mouillé, 87 problèmes d'alimentation, 45 problèmes de carte PC, 85 problèmes de messagerie électronique, 36 problèmes de réseau, 67 réinstallation de Windows XP, 95 restauration du système, 93 un programme ne répond plus, 86 utilitaire de résolution des problèmes matériels, 92 dispositif d'extraction de la baie de batterie description, 30 vue du système, 30 dispositif de blocage de l'écran description, 20 vue du système, 20 disque dur description, 30 remplacement lecteurs Voir disque dur retour à Dell, 108 vue du système, 30 disquette résolution des problèmes, 84 E écran description, 20 réglage de la taille des barres d'outils, 32 réglage de la taille des icônes, 32 vue du système, 20 e-mail résolution des problèmes, 36 emplacement pour câble de sécurité description, 25 vue du système, 25 emplacement pour carte PC description, 23 vue du système, 23 entrées d'air description, 25-26, 29 vue du système, 25-26, 29 F fichier d'aide accès, 80 fichier d'aide Procédure accès, 80 filtres de ligne, 40 G garantie, 145 gestion de l'alimentation QuickSet, 32 réglage des paramètres, 32 H haut-parleurs description, 21 vue du système, 21 I icônes réglage de la taille, 32 imprimante câble, 38 connexion, 37 installation, 37 USB, 38Index 155 L lecteur de CD ou DVD description, 24 remplacement, 108 vue du système, 24 lecteur de disquette résolution des problèmes, 84 lecteur de DVD Voir lecteur de CD ou DVD lecteurs résolution des problèmes, 84 logiciel réinstallation du logiciel, 90 résolution des problèmes, 86 M mémoire retrait, 101 mise hors tension de l'ordinateur, 40 modem ajout, 103 O ordinateur blocages, 86 caractéristiques, 114 ordinateur endommagé test, 88 ordinateur mouillé, 87 P pavé numérique, 48 Personnalisation, 52 pilotes réinstallation, 90 programme d'installation du système consultation, 122 écrans, 122 programme de configuration du système écrans, 122 objectif, 121 programme de configuraton du système options les plus communément utilisées, 122 programmes blocages, 86 pas de réponse, 86 protecteurs de sautes de tension, 39 Q QuickSet, 32 R réinstallation pilotes, 90 réinstallation du système d'exploitation Windows XP, 95 réseau résolution des problèmes, 67 résolution des problèmes scanner, 83 résolutions de problèmes, 78 restauration du système, 93 S sans fil activer et désactiver, 32 scanner résolution des problèmes, 83 systèmes d'alimentation sans interruption Voir UPS T tablette tactile description, 22 personnalisation, 52 touch pad, 51 vue du système, 22 U UPS, 40 utilitaire de résolution des problèmes matériels, 92156 Index 156 Index V voyants d'état du clavier description, 21 vue du système, 21 voyants d'état du périphérique description, 22 vue du système avant, 20 vues du système arrière, 26 côté droit, 24 côté gauche, 23 dessous, 26, 29 W Windows XP aide, 80 imprimante, 39 réinstallation, 95 restauration des pilotes de périphériques, 90 restauration du système, 93 utilitaire de résolution des problèmes matériels, 92 Dell Vostro 3360 Manuel du propriétaire Modèle réglementaire: P32G Type réglementaire: P32G001Remarques, précautions et avertissements REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent vous aider à mieux utiliser l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème. AVERTISSEMENT : Un AVERTISSEMENT indique un risque d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. © 2012 Dell Inc. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell™, le logo Dell, Dell Boomi™, Dell Precision™ , OptiPlex™, Latitude™, PowerEdge™, PowerVault™, PowerConnect™, OpenManage™, EqualLogic™, Compellent™, KACE™, FlexAddress™, Force10™ et Vostro™ sont des marques de Dell Inc. Intel®, Pentium®, Xeon®, Core® et Celeron® sont des marques déposées d'Intel Corporation aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. AMD® est une marque déposée et AMD Opteron™, AMD Phenom™ et AMD Sempron™ sont des marques d'Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows Server®, Internet Explorer®, MS-DOS®, Windows Vista® et Active Directory® sont des marques ou des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Red Hat® et Red Hat® Enterprise Linux® sont des marques déposées de Red Hat, Inc. aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Novell® et SUSE® sont des marques déposées de Novell Inc. aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. Oracle® est une marque déposée d'Oracle Corporation et/ou de ses filiales. Citrix®, Xen®, XenServer® et XenMotion® sont des marques ou des marques déposées de Citrix Systems, Inc. aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. VMware®, Virtual SMP®, vMotion®, vCenter® et vSphere® sont des marques ou des marques déposées de VMware, Inc. aux États-Unis ou dans d'autres pays. IBM® est une marque déposée d'International Business Machines Corporation. 2012 - 06 Rev. A00Table des matières Remarques, précautions et avertissements..............................................................................2 Chapitre 1: Intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur........................................................5 Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur.........................................................................................................................5 Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur.............................................................................................................................6 Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.................................................................................................6 Chapitre 2: Retrait et installation des composants...................................................................9 Outils recommandés.................................................................................................................................................9 Retrait de la carte SIM (Subscriber Identity Module)..............................................................................................9 Installation de la carte SIM....................................................................................................................................10 Retrait de la carte SD (Security Digital)..................................................................................................................10 Installation de la carte SD (Secure Digital)............................................................................................................10 Retrait du panneau d'accès....................................................................................................................................10 Installation du panneau d'accès............................................................................................................................11 Retrait de la carte WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network).....................................................................................11 Installation de la carte WLAN.................................................................................................................................11 Retrait de la pile bouton..........................................................................................................................................11 Installation de la pile bouton...................................................................................................................................12 Retrait de la mémoire..............................................................................................................................................12 Installation de la mémoire......................................................................................................................................12 Retrait du clavier.....................................................................................................................................................12 Installation du clavier.............................................................................................................................................14 Retrait du repose-mains.........................................................................................................................................14 Installation du repose-mains..................................................................................................................................17 Retrait de la batterie...............................................................................................................................................18 Installation de la batterie........................................................................................................................................19 Retrait du disque dur..............................................................................................................................................19 Installation du disque dur.......................................................................................................................................20 Retrait du capot à charnières de l'écran................................................................................................................21 Installation du capot à charnières de l'écran.........................................................................................................21 Retrait de l'ensemble écran....................................................................................................................................22 Installation de l'ensemble écran............................................................................................................................22 Retrait du cache de l'écran....................................................................................................................................23 Installation du cache de l'écran.............................................................................................................................23 Retrait du panneau de l'écran................................................................................................................................24 Installation du panneau d'écran.............................................................................................................................27Retrait du module de caméra.................................................................................................................................27 Installation du module caméra...............................................................................................................................28 Retrait du ventilateur..............................................................................................................................................28 Installation du ventilateur.......................................................................................................................................29 Retrait de la carte système.....................................................................................................................................29 Installation de la carte système..............................................................................................................................31 Retrait du dissipateur de chaleur...........................................................................................................................31 Installation du dissipateur de chaleur....................................................................................................................32 Retrait des haut-parleurs........................................................................................................................................32 Installation des haut-parleurs.................................................................................................................................33 Retrait du connecteur d'alimentation.....................................................................................................................34 Installation du connecteur d'alimentation..............................................................................................................34 Retrait de la carte d'entrées/sorties (E/S)..............................................................................................................34 Installation de la carte d'E/S...................................................................................................................................35 Chapitre 3: Configuration du système.......................................................................................37 Séquence de démarrage........................................................................................................................................37 Touches de navigation............................................................................................................................................37 Options du programme de configuration du système............................................................................................38 Mise à jour du BIOS ...............................................................................................................................................42 Mots de passe du système et de configuration.....................................................................................................43 Définition d'un mot de passe système et d'un mot de passe de configuration...............................................43 Suppression ou modification d'un mot de passe système et/ou de configuration..........................................44 Chapitre 4: Diagnostics...............................................................................................................45 Diagnostisc ePSA (Enhanced Pre-Boot System Assessment)...............................................................................45 Voyants d'état de l'appareil....................................................................................................................................46 Voyants d'état de la batterie...................................................................................................................................46 Séquences de bips de diagnostic...........................................................................................................................46 Chapitre 5: Caractéristiques.......................................................................................................49 Chapitre 6: Contacter Dell...........................................................................................................551 Intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur Suivez les recommandations de sécurité ci-dessous pour protéger votre ordinateur et vos données personnelles de toute détérioration. Sauf indication contraire, chaque procédure mentionnée dans ce document suppose que les conditions suivantes sont réunies : • Vous avez exécuté les étapes de la section Intervention sur votre ordinateur. • Vous avez pris connaissance des informations de sécurité fournies avec votre ordinateur. • Un composant peut être remplacé ou, si acheté séparément, installé en exécutant la procédure de retrait dans l'ordre inverse. AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur, lisez les informations de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur. D'autres informations sur les meilleures pratiques de sécurité sont disponibles sur la page d'accueil Regulatory Compliance (Conformité réglementaire) accessible à l'adresse www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter une décharge électrostatique, raccordez-vous à la terre à l'aide d'un bracelet antistatique ou en touchant une surface métallique non peinte, par exemple un connecteur sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Manipulez avec précaution les composants et les cartes. Ne touchez pas les composants ni les contacts des cartes. Saisissez les cartes par les bords ou par le support de montage métallique. Saisissez les composants, processeur par exemple, par les bords et non par les broches. PRÉCAUTION : Lorsque vous déconnectez un câble, tirez sur le connecteur ou sa languette, mais pas sur le câble lui-même. Certains câbles sont dotés de connecteurs avec dispositif de verrouillage. Si vous déconnectez un câble de ce type, appuyez d'abord sur le verrou. Lorsque vous démontez les connecteurs, maintenez-les alignés uniformément pour éviter de tordre les broches. Enfin, avant de connecter un câble, vérifiez que les deux connecteurs sont correctement orientés et alignés. REMARQUE : La couleur de votre ordinateur et de certains composants peut différer de celle de l'ordinateur et des composants illustrés dans ce document. Pour ne pas endommager l'ordinateur, procédez comme suit avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur. 1. Assurez-vous que la surface de travail est plane et propre afin d'éviter de rayer le capot de l'ordinateur. 2. Mettez l'ordinateur hors tension (voir la section Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur). 3. Si l'ordinateur est connecté à une station d'accueil, telle qu'un périphérique d'accueil ou une extension de batterie en option, déconnectez-le. 5PRÉCAUTION : Pour retirer un câble réseau, déconnectez-le d'abord de l'ordinateur, puis du périphérique réseau. 4. Déconnectez tous les câbles externes du système. 5. Débranchez du secteur l'ordinateur et tous les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 6. Fermez l'écran et retournez l'ordinateur sur une surface plane. REMARQUE : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte système, vous devez retirer la batterie principale avant de dépanner l'ordinateur. 7. Retirez la batterie principale. 8. Remettez l'ordinateur à l'endroit. 9. Ouvrez l'écran. 10. Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour raccorder la carte système à la terre. PRÉCAUTION : Pour prévenir tout risque de choc électrique, débranchez toujours l'ordinateur de la prise électrique avant d'ouvrir l'écran. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de toucher un élément dans l'ordinateur, raccordez-vous à la terre en touchant une surface métallique non peinte, telle que le métal à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Pendant l'intervention, touchez régulièrement une surface métallique non peinte pour éliminer l'électricité statique qui pourrait endommager les composants. 11. Retirez les ExpressCard ou cartes à puce installées des logements appropriés. Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur PRÉCAUTION : Pour ne pas perdre des données, enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts et quittez tous les programmes ouverts avant de mettre hors tension l'ordinateur. 1. Arrêtez le système d'exploitation : – Dans Windows 7: Cliquez sur Démarrer , puis cliquez sur Arrêter. – Dans Windows Vista : Cliquez sur Démarrer , puis sur la flèche dans l'angle inférieur gauche du menu Démarrer, comme indiqué ci-dessous, puis sur Arrêter. – Dans Windows XP: Cliquez sur Démarrer → Arrêter l'ordinateur → Éteindre . L'ordinateur s'éteint à la fin de la procédure d'arrêt du système d'exploitation. 2. Vérifiez que l'ordinateur et tous les périphériques connectés sont hors tension. Si l'ordinateur et les périphériques connectés n'ont pas été mis hors tension automatiquement lorsque vous avez arrêté le système d'exploitation, appuyez sur le bouton Marche/Arrêt et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant quatre secondes environ pour les mettre hors tension. Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur Une fois les procédures de réinstallation terminées, n'oubliez pas de brancher les périphériques externes, cartes, câbles, etc. avant de mettre l'ordinateur sous tension. 6PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter d'endommager l'ordinateur, utilisez uniquement la batterie conçue pour cet ordinateur Dell spécifique. N'employez pas de batteries conçues pour d'autres ordinateurs Dell. 1. Branchez les périphériques externes, par exemple réplicateur de port, extension de batterie ou périphérique d'accueil, et remettez en place les cartes comme l'ExpressCard, le cas échéant. 2. Branchez les câbles téléphoniques ou de réseau sur l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Pour connecter un câble réseau, branchez-le d'abord le périphérique du réseau et sur l'ordinateur. 3. Réinstallez la batterie. 4. Branchez l'ordinateur et tous ses périphériques sur leur prise secteur. 5. Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension. 782 Retrait et installation des composants Cette section fournit des informations détaillées sur le retrait ou l'installation des composants de l'ordinateur. Outils recommandés Les procédures dans ce document peuvent nécessiter les outils suivants : • petit tournevis à tête plate • tournevis cruciforme • petite pointe en plastique Retrait de la carte SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) 1. Suivez les procédures dans Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur. 2. Insérez un trombone dans le petit orifice du support de la carte SIM pour le libérer. 3. Retirez le support de la carte SIM de l'ordinateur. 94. Retirez la carte SIM de son support. Installation de la carte SIM 1. Placez la carte SIM dans son support. 2. Faites glisser le support de la carte SIM avec la carte SIM dans son logement. 3. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait de la carte SD (Security Digital) 1. Suivez les procédures dans Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur. 2. Appuyez sur la carte SD pour la retirer de l'ordinateur en la faisant glisser hors de l'ordinateur. Installation de la carte SD (Secure Digital) 1. Poussez la carte SD dans son emplacement jusqu’à ce que vous l'entendiez s'enclencher. 2. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait du panneau d'accès 1. Suivez les procédures dans Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur. 2. Retirez la vis de fixation du panneau d'accès à l'ordinateur. 3. Retirez le panneau d'accès de l'ordinateur. 10Installation du panneau d'accès 1. Placez le panneau d'accès dans sa position d'origine dans l'ordinateur. 2. Serrez la vis de fixation du panneau d'accès à l'ordinateur. 3. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait de la carte WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network) 1. Suivez les procédures dans Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur. 2. Retirez le panneau d'accès. 3. Déconnectez les câbles d'antenne de la carte WLAN et retirez la vis de fixation de la carte WLAN à l'ordinateur. Retirez la carte WLAN de l'ordinateur. Installation de la carte WLAN 1. Faites glisser la carte WLAN dans son logement. 2. Connectez les câbles d'antenne en fonction des codes de couleur sur la carte WLAN. 3. Installez le panneau d'accès. 4. Suivez les procédures dans Après une interventation dans l'ordinateur. Retrait de la pile bouton 1. Suivez les procédures dans Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur. 2. Retirez le panneau d'accès. 3. Utilisez une pointe en plastique pour soulever la pile bouton dans le connecteur et la retirer. 11Installation de la pile bouton 1. Enfoncez la pile bouton dans son logement sur la carte système. 2. Installez le panneau d'accès. 3. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait de la mémoire 1. Suivez les procédures dans Avant intervenir dans l'ordinateur. 2. Retirez le panneau d'accès. 3. Ecartez avec les doigts les clips de fixation à chaque extrémité du connecteur du module de mémoire jusqu'à ce que le module ressorte de son connecteur. Retirez le module du connecteur sur la carte système en tirant le module de la carte système à 45 degrés. Installation de la mémoire 1. Insérez et fixez le module de mémoire sur la carte système. 2. Installez le panneau d'accès. 3. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait du clavier 1. Suivez les procédures dans Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur. 2. Retirez la vis de fixation du clavier au châssis. 123. A partir du côté droit du système, utilisez une pointe en plastique pour soulevez le clavier. 4. Retournez le clavier et posez-le sur le repose-mains. 5. Soulevez le clip pour libérer le câble du clavier et déconnectez-le de l'ordinateur. 13Installation du clavier 1. Connectez le câble du clavier à la carte système. 2. Replacez le clavier dans sa position d'origine. 3. Serrez la vis de fixation du clavier à l'ordinateur. 4. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait du repose-mains 1. Suivez les procédures dans Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) le panneau d'accès b) le clavier c) le capot à charnières de l'écran 3. En utilisant une pointe en plastique, retirez les caches en caoutchouc qui recouvrent les vis frontales sur le cache de la base. 144. Retirez les vis de fixation du repose-mains à l'ordinateur. 5. Déconnectez le câble de la carte de lancement rapide, le câble du lecteur d'empreintes digitales et le câble du repose-mains de la carte système. 6. Déconnectez le câble du voyant d'alimentation et le câble de la carte de voyants de la carte système 157. Retirez les vis qui fixent le repose-mains à l'avant de l'ordinateur. 8. Dégagez les bords du repose-mains pour le libérer. 169. Soulevez le repose-mains à la verticale et retirez-le de l'ordinateur. Installation du repose-mains 1. Appuyez sur les bords du repose-mains pour engager s languette sur l'ordinateur. 2. Serrez les vis de fixation du repose-mains à l'avant de l'ordinateur. 3. Connectez le câble du voyant d'alimentation et le câble de carte de voyants à la carte système. 4. Connectez le câble de la carte de lancement rapide, le câble du lecteur d'empreintes optiques et le câble du repose-mains à la carte système. 5. Serrez les vis de fixation du repose-mains à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. 6. Poussez les caches en caoutchouc pour couvrir les vis de l'ordinateur. 7. Installez le clavier. 8. Installez le panneau d'accès. 9. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. 17Retrait de la batterie 1. Suivez les procédures dans Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) le panneau d'accès b) le clavier c) le repose-mains 3. Déconnectez le câble de la batterie de la carte système. 4. Retirez les vis de fixation de la batterie à la carte système. 5. Retirez la batterie de l'ordinateur. 18Installation de la batterie 1. Placez la batterie dans le bâti de batterie. 2. Remplacez les vis et serrez-le pour fixer la batterie à l'ordinateur. 3. Connectez le câble de la batterie à la carte système. 4. Installez : a) le repose-mains b) le clavier c) le panneau d'accès 5. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait du disque dur 1. Suivez les procédures dans Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) le panneau d'accès b) le clavier c) le repose-mains d) la batterie 3. Retirez les vis de fixation du disque dur à l'ordinateur. 194. Soulevez le disque dur pour déconnecter son câble. 5. Déconnectez le câble du disque et retirez le disque dur de l'ordinateur. 6. Retirez les vis de fixation du support au disque sur et retirez le support. Installation du disque dur 1. Serrez les vis de fixation du support de disque dur au disque dur. 2. Connectez le câble au disque dur et replacez le disque dur dans sa position d'origine dans l'ordinateur. 3. Serrez les vis de fixation du disque dur à l'ordinateur. 4. Installez : a) la batterie b) le repose-mains c) le clavier d) le panneau d'accès 5. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. 20Retrait du capot à charnières de l'écran 1. Suivez les procédures dans Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur. 2. Retirez le panneau d'accès. 3. Retirez les vis de fixation du capot à charnières de l'écran à l'ordinateur. 4. Retirez le capot à charnières de l'écran de l'ordinateur. Installation du capot à charnières de l'écran 1. Alignez le capot à charnières de l'écran sur sa position d'origine dans l'ordinateur. 2. Serrez les vis de fixation du capot à charnières de l'écran à l'ordinateur. 3. Installez le panneau d'accès. 4. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. 21Retrait de l'ensemble écran 1. Suivez les procédures dans Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) le panneau d'accès b) le clavier c) le repose-mains d) la batterie e) le capot à charnière de l'écran 3. Libérez les câbles de leur chemin. 4. Déconnectez le câble de l'écran de la carte système et retirez les vis de fixation de l'ensemble écran à l'ordinateur. Installation de l'ensemble écran 1. Connectez le câble de l'écran à la carte système et serrez les vis de fixation de l'ensemble écran à l'ordinateur. 2. Faites passer le câble du disque dur par les languettes de routage. 3. Faites passer les câbles d'antenne par leurs languettes. 4. Installez : a) le capot à charnière de l'écran b) la batterie c) le repose-mains d) le clavier e) le panneau d'accès 5. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. 22Retrait du cache de l'écran 1. Suivez les procédures dans Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) le panneau d'accès b) le clavier c) le repose-mains d) la batterie e) l'ensemble écran 3. En utilisant une pointe en plastique, soulevez le cache de l'écran pour le libérer de l'ensemble écran. 4. Soulevez le cache de l'écran et retirez-le de l'ensemble écran. Installation du cache de l'écran 1. Alignez le cache de l'écran sur le bloc écran et mettez-le doucement en place. 2. Installez : 23a) le capot à charnières de l'écran b) la batterie c) le repose-mains d) le clavier e) le panneau d'accès 3. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait du panneau de l'écran 1. Suivez les procédures dans Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) le panneau d'accès b) le clavier c) le repose-mains d) la batterie e) le capot à charnières de l'écran f) l'ensemble écran g) le cache de l'écran 3. Déconnectez le câble de la caméra sur le module caméra. 4. Retirez les vis de fixation du panneau de l'écran au panneau arrière de ce dernier. 245. Retirez le panneau de l'écran du bloc écran. 6. Placez le panneau de l'écran face avant tourné vers le bas pour accéder aux câbles de l'écran et de la caméra qui y sont connectés. 257. Tirez la languette en plastiques pour débrancher le câble de l'écran du panneau de l'écran. 8. Retirez le câble de la caméra du panneau de l'écran. 26Installation du panneau d'écran 1. Placez le câble de la caméra à l'arrière du panneau d'écran. 2. Connectez le câble de l'écran à son connecteur sur le panneau d'écran. 3. Alignez le panneau d'écran dans sa position d'origine sur l'ensemble écran. 4. Serrez les vis pour fixer le panneau d'écran à l'ensemble de l'écran. 5. Connectez le câble de la caméra au module caméra. 6. Installez : a) le cache de l'écran b) l'ensemble écran c) le capot à charnières de l'écran d) la batterie e) le repose-mains f) le clavier g) le panneau d'accès 7. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait du module de caméra 1. Suivez les procédures dans Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) le panneau d'accès b) le clavier c) le repose-mains d) la batterie e) le capot à charnière de l'écran f) l'ensemble écran g) le cache de l'écran 3. Déconnectez le câble du module caméra et retirez ce dernier de l'ensemble écran. 27Installation du module caméra 1. Connectez le câble au module caméra et placez ce dernier dans sa position d'origine sur l'ensemble écran. 2. Installez : a) le cache de l'écran b) l'ensemble écran c) le capot à charnières de l'écran d) la batterie e) le repose-mains f) le clavier g) le panneau d'accès 3. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait du ventilateur 1. Suivez les procédures dans Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) le panneau d'accès b) le clavier c) le repose-mains d) la batterie e) le capot à charnières de l'écran f) l'ensemble écran 3. Retirez la vis de fixation du ventilateur à l'ordinateur, puis soulevez le ventilateur et déconnectez le câble du ventilateur de la carte système. 28Installation du ventilateur 1. Connectez le câble du ventilateur à la carte système. 2. Serrez les vis de fixation du ventilateur à l'ordinateur. 3. Installez : a) l'ensemble écran b) le capot à charnières de l'écran c) la batterie d) le repose-mains e) le clavier f) le panneau d'accès 4. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait de la carte système 1. Suivez les procédures dan Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) le panneau d'accès b) le clavier c) le repose-mains d) le capot à charnières de l'écran e) l'ensemble écran f) le ventilateur 3. Déconnectez le câble E/S de la carte fille E/S. 294. Retirez les vis de fixation de la carte système à l'ordinateur. 5. Retirez le câble du disque dur de son chemin et retournez la carte système pour accéder au câble du connecteur d'alimentation. 6. Déconnectez le câble du connecteur d'alimentation de la carte système. 30Installation de la carte système 1. Connectez le câble du connecteur d'alimentation à la carte système. 2. Faites passer le câble du disque dur par ses languettes de routage. 3. Serrez les vis de fixation de la carte système à l'ordinateur. 4. Connectez le câble de la carte d'E/S à la carte E/S. 5. Installez : a) le ventilateur b) l'ensemble écran c) le capot à charnières de l'écran d) la batterie e) le repose-mains f) le clavier g) le panneau d'accès 6. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait du dissipateur de chaleur 1. Suivez les procédures dans Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) le panneau d'accès b) le clavier c) le repose-mains d) le capot à charnières de l'écran e) l'ensemble écran f) le ventilateur g) la carte système 3. Retirez les vis de fixation du dissipateur de chaleur sur la carte système. 314. Retirez le dissipateur de chaleur de la carte système. Installation du dissipateur de chaleur 1. Serrez les vis de fixation du dissipateur de chaleur à la carte système. 2. Installez : a) la carte système b) le ventilateur c) l'ensemble écran d) le capot à charnières de l'écran e) la batterie f) le repose-mains g) le clavier h) le panneau d'accès 3. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait des haut-parleurs 1. Suivez les procédures dans Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) le panneau d'accès b) le clavier c) le repose-mains d) la batterie e) le disque dur 3. Débranchez de la carte d'E/S le câble des haut-parleurs. 324. Retirez les câbles du haut-parleur de leur chemin et retirez les haut-parleurs de l'ordinateur. Installation des haut-parleurs 1. Placez les haut-parleurs sur l'ordinateur et faites passer le câble des haut-parleurs par les languettes de routage. 2. Branchez le câble des haut-parleurs sur la carte d'E/S. 3. Installez : a) le disque dur b) la batterie c) le repose-mains d) le clavier e) le panneau d'accès 4. Suivez les procédures dans Après une interventation dans l'ordinateur. 33Retrait du connecteur d'alimentation 1. Suivez les procédures dans Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) le panneau d'accès b) le clavier c) le repose-mains d) la batterie e) le capot à charnières de l'écran f) l'ensemble écran g) le ventilateur h) la carte système 3. Retirez la vis de fixation du connecteur d'alimentation à l'ordinateur, puis le connecteur d'alimentation de l'ordinateur. Installation du connecteur d'alimentation 1. Serrez la vis de fixation du connecteur d'alimentation à l'ordinateur. 2. Installez : a) la carte système b) le ventilateur c) l'ensemble écran d) le capot à charnières de l'écran e) la batterie f) le repose-mains g) le clavier h) le panneau d'accès 3. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention de l'ordinateur. Retrait de la carte d'entrées/sorties (E/S) 1. Suivez les procédures dans Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) le panneau d'accès b) le clavier c) le repose-mains d) la batterie 3. Déconnectez le câble du haut-parleur et celui de la carte E/S. 344. Retirez les vis de fixation de la carte E/S à l'ordinateur et retirez cette dernière de l'ordinateur. Installation de la carte d'E/S 1. Connectez le câble du haut-parleur et celui de la carte E/S. 2. Serrez les vis de fixation de la carte E/S à l'ordinateur. 3. Installez : a) la batterie b) le repose-mains c) le clavier d) le panneau d'accès 4. Suivez les procédures dans Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. 35363 Configuration du système La configuration du système permet de gérer le matériel de l'ordinateur et de définir les options du BIOS. Dans la configuration du système, vous pouvez : • Changer les paramètres NVRAM après avoir ajouté ou supprimé des matériels. • Afficher la configuration matérielle du système • Activer ou désactiver les périphériques intégrés • Définir les seuils de performance et de gestion de l'alimentation • Gérer la sécurité de l'ordinateur Séquence de démarrage La séquence de démarrage permet d'ignorer l'ordre des périphériques d'amorçage définis par la configuration du système et de démarrer directement depuis un périphérique donné (lecteur optique ou disque dur, par exemple). Lors du test à la mise sous tension (POST), lorsque le logo Dell s'affiche, vous pouvez : • Accéder à la configuration du système en appuyant sur la touche • Afficher le menu de démarrage à affichage unique en appuyant sur la touche Ce menu contient les périphériques depuis lesquels vous pouvez démarrer, y compris l'option des diagnostics. Les options du menu de démarrage sont les suivantes : • Removable Drive (Unité amovible (si disponible)) • STXXXX Drive (Unité STXXXX) REMARQUE : XXX correspond au numéro d'unité SATA. • Optical Drive (Lecteur optique) • Diagnostics REMARQUE : Si vous choisissez Diagnostics, l'écran ePSA diagnostics (Diagnostics ePSA) s'affiche. L'écran de séquence de démarrage affiche également l'option d'accès à l'écran System Setup (Configuration du système). Touches de navigation Le tableau suivant répertorie les touches de navigation dans la configuration du système. REMARQUE : Pour la plupart des options de configuration du système, les modifications que vous apportées sont enregistrées, mais elles ne sont appliquées qu'au redémarrage de l'ordinateur. 37Tableau 1. Touches de navigation Touches Navigation Touche Haut Passe au champ précédent. Touche Bas Passe au champ suivant. Permet de sélectionner une valeur dans le champ sélectionné (si applicable) ou de suivre le lien dans le champ. Barre d'espacement Développe ou réduit une liste déroulante, si applicable. Passe à la zone suivante active. REMARQUE : Pour la navigateur graphique standard uniquement. Passe à la page précédente tant que vous affichez l'écran principal. Si vous appuyez sur dans l'écran principal, un message demande d'enregistrer les modifications non enregistrées et le système redémarre. Affiche le fichier d'aide de la configuration du système. Options du programme de configuration du système REMARQUE : Les options du programme de configuration peuvent varier en fonction du modèle d'ordinateur. L'onglet Main (Principal) énumère les principales caractéristiques matérielles de l'ordinateur. Le tableau ci-dessous définit la fonction de chacune des options. Tableau 2. Main Options (Options principales) Main (Groupe principal) System Information Affiche le numéro de modèle de l'ordinateur. System Time Permet de réinitialiser l'heure de l'horloge interne de l'ordinateur. System Date Permet de réinitialiser la date du calendrier inerne de l'ordinateur. BIOS Version Affiche la révision du BIOS. Product Name Affiche le nom du produit et le numéro de modèle. Service Tag Affiche le numéro de service de l'ordinateur. Asset Tag Affiche le numéro d'inventaire de l'ordinateur (si disponible). CPU Type Affiche le type du processeur. 38Main (Groupe principal) CPU Speed Affiche la vitesse du processus. CPU ID Affiche l'ID du processeur. CPU Cache L1 Cache Affiche la taille de la cache L1 du processeur. L2 Cache Affiche la taille de la cache L2 du processeur. L3 Cache Affiche la taille de la cache L3 du processeur. Fixed HDD Affiche le numéro de modèle et la capacité du disque dur. SATA ODD Affiche le numéro de modèle et la capacité du lecteur optique. mSata Device Affiche le numér de modèle et la capacité du mini périphérique Sata. AC Adapter Type Affiche le type d'adaptateur secteur. Extended Memory Affiche la mémoire installée sur l'ordinateur. System Memory Affiche la mémoire intégrée de l'ordinateur. Memory Speed Affiche la vitesse de la mémoire. Keyboard Type Affiche le type du clavier. L'onglet Advanced permet de définir différentes fonctions qui affectent la performance de l'ordinateur. Le tableau cidessous définit la fonction et leur valeur par défaut. Tableau 3. Advanced Options (Options avancées) Advanced (Avancé) Intel SpeedStep Active ou désactive la fonction Intel SpeedStep. Default: Enable (Valeur par défaut : Activé) Virtualization Active ou désactive la fonction Intel Virtualization. Default: Enable (Valeur par défaut : Activé) Integrated NIC Active ou désactive le bloc d'alimentation vers la carte réseau intégrée. Default: Enable (Valeur par défaut : Activé) 39Advanced (Avancé) USB Emulation Active ou désactive la fonction d'émulation USB. Default: Enable (Valeur par défaut : Activé) USB Wake Support Permet aux périphériques USB de faire sortir l'ordinateur du mode Veille. Cette fonction est activée uniquement lorsque l'adaptateur CA est connecté. Default: Disabled (Valeur par défaut : désactivé) SATA Operation Modifie le mode du contrôleur SATA : ATA ou AHCI. Default: AHCI (Valeur par défaut : AHCI) Adapter Warnings Active ou désactive les avertissements de l'adaptateur. Default: Enable (Valeur par défaut : Activé) Function Key Behavior Spécifie le comportement de la touche de fonction . Default: Function key first (Valeur par défaut : touche de fonction en premier) Charger Behavior Indique si la batterie de l'ordinateur est chargée lorsqu'elle est connectée à une source d'alimentation CA. Default: Enable (Valeur par défaut : Activé) Battery Health Vérification de l'état de la batterie Intel Rapid Start Technology Permet de configurer la technologie Intel rapid start Miscellaneous Devices Ces champs permettent d'activer ou désactiver les divers périphériques intégrés. External USB Ports Active ou désactive les ports USB externes Default: Enable (Valeur par défaut : Activé) Microphone Active ou désactive le microphone. Default: Enable (Valeur par défaut : Activé) Camera Active ou désactive la caméra. Default: Enable (Valeur par défaut : Activé) Media Card Reader Active ou désactive le lecteur de cartes. Default: Enable (Valeur par défaut : Activé) Optical Drive Active ou désactive le lecteur optique. Default: Enable (Valeur par défaut : Activé) 40Advanced (Avancé) Fingerprint Reader Active ou désactive le lecteur d'empreintes digitales. Default: Enable (Valeur par défaut : Activé) Boot Disable Active ou désactive l'amorçage. Default: Disabled (Valeur par défaut : désactivé) USB debug Active ou désactive le débogage USB. Default: Disabled (Valeur par défaut : désactivé) Internal Bluetooth Active ou désactive Bluetooth interne. Default: Enable (Valeur par défaut : Activé) Internal WLAN Active ou désactive WLAN. Default: Enable (Valeur par défaut : Activé) Internal WWAN Active ou désactive WWAN. Default: Enable (Valeur par défaut : Activé) Cet onglet affiche l'état de sécurité et permet de gérer les fonctions de sécurité de l'ordinateur. Tableau 4. Security Options (Optons de sécurité) Security (Sécurité) Set Service Tag Ce champ affiche le numéro de service de votre système. Si ce numéro n'est pas déjà défini, ce champ permet d'entrer ce numéro. Admin Password Ce champ s'affiche si un mot de passe admin est défini pour l'ordinateur (Default: Cleared/Not installed) (Valeur par défaut : Effacé/No installé) System Password Ce champ s'affiche si un mot de passe system est défini pour l'ordinateur (Default: Cleared/Not installed) (Valeur par défaut : Effacé/No installé) Hdd Password State Ce champ s'affiche si un mot de passe HDD est défini pour l'ordinateur (Default: Cleared) (Valeur par défaut : Effacé) Set Supervisor Password Permet de changer ou de supprimer le mot de passe de l'administrateur. Set HDD Password Permet de définir un mot de passe pour l'accès au disque dur interne de l'ordinateur (HDD). Password Change Permet d'ajouter/supprimer l'autorisation de changement des mots de passe. Password Bypass Permet d'éviter d'entrer le mot de passe du système et celui du disque dur interne HDD pendant un redémarrage ou une sortie de veille prolongée (désactive par défaut). Computrace Active ou désactive la fonction Computrace sur l'ordinateur. Cet onglet permet de changer la séquence d'amorçage. 41Tableau 5. Boot Options (Options d'amorçage) Boot (Démarrage) Boot Priority Order Spécifie dans quel ordre l'ordinateur essaiera de s'amorcer au démarrage sur les différents périphériques. Removable Drive Indique que le lecteur amovible de l'ordinateur est amorçable. Hard Disk Drives Spécifie le disque dur par lequel l'ordinateur est amorcé. USB Storage Device Spécifie le périphérique de stockage USB par lequel l'ordinateur est amorcé. CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive Spécifie le CD/DVD depuis lequel l'ordinateur peut s'amorcer. Network Spécifie le périphérique réseau depuis lequel l'ordinateur peut s'amorcer. Exit (Quitter) : cette section permet d'enregistrer, supprimer ou de charger les paramètres par défaut avant de quitter le programme de configuration. Mise à jour du BIOS Il est recommandé de mettre à jour le BIOS (configuration du système) lors du remplacement de la carte système ou lorsqu'une mise à jour est disponible. Pour les ordinateurs portables, vérifiez que la batterie est complètement chargée et que l'ordinateur est connecté au secteur. 1. Redémarrez l'ordinateur. 2. Accédez au site support.dell.com/support/downloads. 3. Si vous disposez du numéro de service ou du numéro de service express de l'ordinateur : REMARQUE : Pour les ordinateurs de bureau, le numéro de service se trouve sur l'étiquette sur la face avant de l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Pour les ordinateurs portables, le numéro de service se trouve sur le fond de l'ordinateur. a) Entrez le numéro de service ou le numéro de service express et cliquez sur Submit (Envoyer). b) Cliquez sur Submit et passez à l'étape 5. 4. Si vous ne disposez pas de ces numéros, sélectionnez l'unr des options suivantrs : a) Automatically detect my Service Tag for me (Détecter automatiquement le numéro de service) b) Choose from My Products and Services List (Choisir dans la liste Mes produits et services) c) Choose from a list of all Dell products (Choisir dans la liste de tous les produits Dell) 5. Dans l'écran de l'application et des pilotes, sous la liste déroulante Operating System (Système d'exploiration), sélectionnez BIOS. 6. Identifiez le dernier fichier BIOS et cliquez sur Download File (Télécharger le fichier). 7. Sélectionnez le mode de téléchargement préférentiel dans Please select your download method below window (Sélectionner le mode de téléchargement dans la fenêtre ci-dessous) et cliquez sur Download Now (Télécharger maintenant). La fenêtre File Download (Téléchargement de fichier) s'affiche. 8. Cliquez sur Save (Enregistrer) pour enregistrer le fichier sur l'ordinateur. 9. Cliquez sur Run (Exécuter) pour installer les paramètres BIOS actualisés sur l'ordinateur. 42Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent. Mots de passe du système et de configuration Vous pouvez définir un mot de passe système et un mot de passe de configuration pour protéger l'ordinateur. Type de mot de passe Description Mot de passe système Mot de passe que vous entrer pour ouvrir un session sur le système. Mot de passe de configuration Mot de passe que vous devez entrer pour accéder aux paramètres du BIOS de l'ordinateur et les changer. PRÉCAUTION : Les fonctions de mot de passe fournissent un niveau de sécurité de base pour les données de l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : N'importe quel utilisateur peut accéder aux données de l'ordinateur s'il n'est pas verrouillé et qu'il est laissé sans surveillance. REMARQUE : L'ordinateur est fourni avec la fonction de mot de passe système et de configuration désactivée. Définition d'un mot de passe système et d'un mot de passe de configuration Vous pouvez définir un nouveau mot de passe système et/ou mot de passe de configuration ou changer un mot de passe système et/ou mot de passe de configuration uniquement lorsque l'état de mot de passe est Déverrouillé. Si l'état de mot de passe est Verrouillé, vous ne pouvez pas changer le mot de passe système. REMARQUE : Si le cavalier des mots de passe est désactivé, le mot de passe système et le mot de passe de configuration sont supprimés et vous n'avez pas à fournir de mot de passe système pour ouvrir une session. Pour entrer dans une configuration système, appuyez sur immédiatement après la mise sous tension ou un redémarrage. 1. Dans l'écran System BIOS (BIOS du système) ou System Setup (Configuration du système) sélectionnez System Security (Sécurité du système) et appuyez sur . L'écran System Security s'affiche. 2. Dans l'écran System Security, vérifiez que Password Status est Unlocked. 3. Sélectionnez System Password, entrez le mot de passe du système et appuyez sur ou la touche . Suivez les instructions pour définir le mot de passe système : – Un mot de passe peut contenir jusqu'à 32 caractères. – Le mot de passe peut contenir des nombres de 0 à 9. – Seules les minuscules sont acceptées. – Seuls les caractères spéciaux suivants sont valides : espace, (”), (+), (,), (-), (.), (/), (;), ([), (\), (]), (`). Entrez de nouveau le mot de passe lorsqu'un message le demande. 4. Tapez le mot de passe système que vous avez entré précédemment et cliquez sur OK. 5. Sélectionnez Setup Password, tapez le mot de passe système et appuyez sur ou la touche . Un message demande de retaper le mot de passe de configuration. 6. Tapez le mot de passe de configuration que vous avez entré précédemment et cliquez sur OK. 7. Appuyez sur ; un message demande d'enregistrer les modifications. 8. Appuyez sur pour les enregistrer. 43L'ordinateur redémarrage. Suppression ou modification d'un mot de passe système et/ou de configuration Vérifiez que l'état de mot de passe est Déverrouillé (dans la configuration du système) avant de supprimer ou de changer un mot de passe système et/ou de configuration. Vous ne pouvez pas supprimer ou changer un mot de passe système et/ou de configuration si l'état de mot de passe est Déverrouillé. Pour entrer dans la configuration du système, appuyez sur immédiatement après la mise sous tension ou un redémarrage. 1. Dans l'écran System BIOS (BIOS du système) ou System Setup (Configuration du système), sélectionnez System Security (Sécurité du système) et appuyez sur . L'écran System Security s'affiche. 2. Dans l'écran System Security, vérifiez que l'état de mot de passe est Déverrouillé. 3. Sélectionnez System Password, modifiez ou supprimez le mot de passe système existant et appuyez sur ou la touche . 4. Sélectionnez Setup Password, modifiez ou supprimez le mot de passe de configuration existant et appuyez sur ou la touche . REMARQUE : Si vous changez le mot de passe système et/ou le mot de passe de configuration, entrez de nouveau le nouveau mot de passe lorsqu'un message le demande. Si vous supprimez l'un ou l'autre des mots de passe ou les deux, confirmez la suppression quand un message le demande. 5. Appuyez sur ; un message demande d'enregistrer les modifications. 6. Appuyez sur pour les enregistrer et quitter la configuration du système. L'ordinateur redémarrage. 444 Diagnostics En cas de problème avec l'ordinateur, exécutez les diagnostics ePSA avant de contacter l'assistance technique de Dell. Les diagnostics visent à tester le matériel de l'ordinateur sans équipement supplémentaire ou risque de perte de données. Si vous ne parvenez pas à résoudre le problème vous-même, le personnel de maintenance et d'assistance peut utiliser les résultats des diagnostics pour vous aider à le résoudre. Diagnostisc ePSA (Enhanced Pre-Boot System Assessment) Les diagnostics ePSA (également appelés diagnostics système) vérifient complètement le matériel. ePSA est intégré au BIOS et il est démarré par le BIOS en interne. Les diagnostics système intégrés fournissent des options pour des périphériques ou des groupes de périphériques spécifiques pour : • Exécuter des tests automatiquement ou dans un mode interactif • Répéter les tests • Afficher ou enregistrer les résultats des tests • Exécuter des tests rigoureux pour présentent des options de tests supplémentaires pour fournir des informations complémentaires sur un ou des périphériques défaillants • Afficher des messages d'état qui indiquent si les tests ont abouti • Afficher des messages d'erreur qui indiquent les problèmes détectés au cours des tests PRÉCAUTION : Utilisez les diagnostics système pour tester l'ordinateur. L'utilisation de ce programme avec d'autres ordinateurs peut générer des résultats non valides ou des messages d'erreur. REMARQUE : Certains tests de périphériques nécessitent l'interaction de l'utilsateur. Veillez à toujours être à côté de l'ordinateur lorsque vous exécutez les tests de diagnostic. 1. Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension. 2. Lorsque l'ordinateur démarre, appuyez sur la touche lorsque le logo Dell apparaît. 3. Dans l'écran du menu de démarrage, sélectionnez l'option Diagnostics. La fenêtre Enhanced Pre-boot System Assessment s'affiche avec la liste de tous les périphériques détectés sur l'ordinateur. Le programme de diagnostics lance les tests sur tous les périphériques détectés. 4. Si vous voulez lancer un test de diagnostic sur un périphérique donné, appuyez sur ; cliquez sur Yes (Oui) pour arrêter le test de diagnostic. 5. Sélectionnez le périphérique dans le panneau de gauche et cliquez sur Run Tests (Exécuter les tests). 6. En cas de problèmes, des codes d'erreur s'affichent. Notez les codes d'erreur et contactez Dell. 45Voyants d'état de l'appareil Tableau 6. Voyants d'état de l'appareil S'allume lorsque vous allumez l'ordinateur et clignote lorsque l'ordinateur est en mode d'économie d'énergie. S'allume lorsque l'ordinateur lit ou écrit des données. S'allume ou clignote pour indiquer l'état de charge de la batterie. S'allume lorsque le réseau sans fil est activé. Voyants d'état de la batterie Si l'ordinateur est branché à une prise secteur, le voyant d'état de la batterie fonctionne de la manière suivante : Alternativement un voyant ambre clignotant et un voyant blanc Un adaptateur secteur non pris en charge par Dell est fixé sur votre portable. Alternativement un voyant ambre clignotant avec voyant blanc fixe . Défaillance de batterie temporaire lorsqu'il existe un adaptateur secteur. Voyant ambre clignotant constamment Défaillance de batterie irrémédiable avec adaptateur CA présent. Voyant éteint La batterie est en mode de chargement complet lorsqu'il existe un adaptateur secteur. Voyant blanc allumé La batterie est charge avec adaptateur secteur CA. Séquences de bips de diagnostic Le tableau suivant indique les codes sonores susceptibles d'être émis par l'ordinateur lorsque ce dernier ne parvient pas à effectuer un auto-test de démarrage. Tableau 7. Séquences de bips de diagnostic Bip Description Cause possible/Etapes de dépannage 1 Somme de contrôle de la ROM BIOS en cours d'échec. La défaillance de la carte système. Couvre l'endommagement du BIOS ou une erreur ROM 2 Aucune RAM détectée Si aucune mémoire n'est définie, procédez comme suit : 46Bip Description Cause possible/Etapes de dépannage • Réinstallez la mémoire si de la mémoire supplémentaire est disponible. • Installez la mémoire si le problème persiste. • Problème avec le connecteur de mémoire 3 • Erreur du jeu de puces (erreur du jeu de puces northbridge et southbridge, erreur DMA/IMR/horloge) • Échec du test de l'horloge machine • Echec porte A20 • Défaillance de la puce super E/S. • Échec du test du contrôleur clavier Défaillance de la carte système 4 Défaillance de lecture/écriture en RAM Si aucune mémoire n'est définie, procédez comme suit : • Réinstallez la mémoire si de la mémoire supplémentaire est disponible. • Installez la mémoire si le problème persiste. • Problème avec le connecteur de mémoire 5 Défaillance de l'alimentation de l'horloge temps réel Erreur de pile CMOS. Réinstallez la pile. Si l'incident persiste, il se peut que la pile batterie ou le connecteur soient défaillants (cela implique de remplacer la carte système) 6 Échec du test du BIOS vidéo Défaillance de la carte vidéo 7 Défaillance du processeur Défaillance du processeur 8 Écran Écran défaillant 47485 Caractéristiques REMARQUE : Les offres peuvent varier en fonction de la région. Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration de l'ordinateur, cliquez sur Démarrer. (icône Démarrer) → Aide et support, puis sélectionnez l'option permettant d'afficher les informations sur l'ordinateur. Tableau 8. Informations sur le système Fonctionnalité Description Jeu de puces Jeu de puces Express Intel HM77 Largeur de bus DRAM 64 bits Flash EPROM : Vostro 3360/Vostro 3460 SPI 8 Mo Vostro 3560 SPI 6 Mo Tableau 9. Processeur Fonctionnalité Description Types • Intel Core i3 • Intel Core i5 • Intel Core i7 Cache L3 jusqu'à 6 Mo Tableau 10. Mémoire Fonctionnalité Description Connecteur mémoire deux emplacements SODIMM Capacité mémoire 2 Go, 4 Go, 6 Go ou 8 Go Type de mémoire SDRAM DDR3 (1333 MHz et 1600 MHz) Mémoire minimale 2 Go Mémoire maximale 8 Go Tableau 11. Audio Fonctionnalité Description Type Son haute définition bicanal Contrôleur 49Fonctionnalité Description Vostro 3360 Cirrus Logic CS4213D Vostro 3460/Vostro 3560 Conexant CX20672-21Z Conversion stéréo 24 bits (analogique-numérique et numérique-analogique) Interface : Interne audio haute définition Externe connecteur entrée microphone/casque stéréo/haut-parleurs externes Haut-parleurs 2 W Réglages du volume touches de fonction du clavier et menus de programme Tableau 12. Vidéo Fonctionnalité Description Type de vidéo • intégrée sur la carte système • séparée Bus de données : UMA vidéo intégrée Séparée : Vostro 3460 • PCI-E x16 Gen1 • PCI-E x16 Gen2 Vostro 3560 PCI-E x8 Gen 2 Contrôleur vidéo : UMA • Intel HD Graphics 3000 • Intel HD Graphics 4000 Séparée : Vostro 3460 nVidia GeForce GT 630M Vostro 3560 AMD Radeon HD7670M Tableau 13. Caméra Fonctionnalité Description Résolution de la caméra HD 720P Résolution vidéo (maximum) 1280 x 720 pixels à 30 FPS 50Tableau 14. Communication Fonctionnalité Description Carte réseau LAN Ethernet 10/100/1000 Mbits/s Sans fil • WLAN interne • Bluetooth • WWAN (en option) Tableau 15. Ports et connecteurs Fonctionnalité Description Audio : Vostro 3360 connecteur casque stéréo/écouteur/sortie audio Vostro 3460 / 3560 connecteur microphone et connecteur casque Vidéo • un connecteur VGA 15 broches • un connecteur HDMI 19 broches Carte réseau un connecteur RJ-45 USB 3.0 : Vostro 3360 trois Vostro 3460 / Vostro 3560 quatre REMARQUE : Le connecteur USB 3.0 alimenté prend en charge le débogage de noyau Microsoft. Les ports sont identifiés dans la documentation fournie avec le produit. Lecteur de cartes multimédia 8 en 1 Tableau 16. Écran Fonctionnalité Description Type HD WLED AG Taille : Vostro 3360 13” Vostro 3460 14” Vostro 3530 15” Dimensions : Vostro 3360 Vostro 3460 Vostro 3560 Hauteur 240 mm (9,44”) 245 mm (9,64”) 259 mm (10,19”) Largeur 330 mm (12,99”) 340 mm (13,38”) 375 mm (14,76”) Diagonale 330 mm (13”) 355,60 mm (14”) 381 mm (15”) Zone active (X/Y) 330 mm x 240 mm 340 mm x 245 mm 375 mm x 259 mm Résolution maximale : 51Fonctionnalité Description Vostro 3360/3460 1366 x 768 pixels en 262 K couleurs Vostro 3560 1920 x 1080 FHD Luminosité maximale 200 nits Angle de fonctionnement de 0° (fermé) à 140° Fréquence de rafraîchissement 60 Hz Angles minimum de visualisation : Horizontal 40°/40° Vertical 15°/30° (H/L) Pas de pixel 0,23 mm x 0,23 mm Tableau 17. Clavier Fonctionnalité Description Nombre de touches : Vostro 3360 États-Unis et Canada : 80 touches, Europe et Brésil : 81 touches, Japon : 84 touches Vostro 3460/3560 États-Unis et Canada : 86 touches, Europe et Brésil : 87 touches, Japon : 90 touches Tableau 18. Pavé tactile Fonctionnalité Description Zone active : Vostro 3360 Vostro 3460/3560 Axe des X 82,00 mm (3,22”) 90,00 mm (3,54”) Axe des Y 45,00 mm (1,77”) 49,00 mm (1,93”) Tableau 19. Batterie Fonctionnalité Description Type : Vostro 3360 4 cellules/8 cellules lithium-ion (3,4 Ah/cellule ou 49 Wh) Vostro 3460/3560 Lithium ion 6 cellules (2,2 Ah/cellule ou 48 Wh) Dimensions : Vostro 3360 Vostro 3460 Vostro 3560 Hauteur 20,20 mm (0,80”) 20 mm (0,79”) 20 mm (0,79”) Largeur 208,36 mm (8,20”) 208 mm (8,19”) 208 mm (8,19”) Profondeur 56,52 mm (2,22”) 51 mm (2”) 51 mm (2”) Poids 4 cellules : 0,28 kg (0,61 lb) 0,33 kg (0,73 lb) 0,33 kg (0,73 lb) 52Fonctionnalité Description 8 cellules : 0,30 kg (0,66 lb) Durée de la charge environ 4 heures (lorsque l'ordinateur est hors tension) Tension : Vostro 3360 14,8 VCC Vostro 3460/Vostro 3560 11,1 VCC Plage de températures : En fonctionnement De 0° C à 35° C (de 32° F à 95° F) À l'arrêt De –40° C à 65° C (de –40° F à 149° F) Pile bouton Pile bouton au lithium 3 V CR2032 Tableau 20. Adaptateur secteur Fonctionnalité Description Type : Vostro 3360/Vostro 3460/Vostro 3560 avec carte vidéo intégrée 65 W Vostro 3460 avec carte vidéo séparée 90 W Vostro 3560 avec quatre cœurs 90 W Tension d’entrée de 100 VCA à 240 VCA Courant d'entrée (maximal) 1,50 A/1,60 A/1,70 A Fréquence d'entrée de 50 Hz à 60 Hz Puissance de sortie 65 W et 90 W Courant de sortie : 65 W 3,34 A (continu) 90 W 4,62 A Tension de sortie nominale 19,50 VDC (+/-1 VDC) Dimensions : Hauteur 28,20 mm (1,11”) Largeur 57,90 mm (2,28”) Profondeur 137,16 mm (5,40”) Plage de températures : En fonctionnement De 0° C à 35° C (de 32° F à 95° F) À l'arrêt De –40° C à 70° C (de –40° F à 158° F) 53Tableau 21. Caractéristiques physiques Fonctionnalité Description Vostro 3360 Vostro 3460 Vostro 3560 Hauteur 19,20 mm (0,75”) 30,10 mm (1,18”) 32,50 mm (1,27”) Largeur 332,00 mm (13,07”) 345,50 mm (13,60”) 375,00 mm (14,76”) Profondeur 232,50 mm (9,15”) 244,00 mm (9,60”) 259,00 mm (10,19”) Poids (avec batterie) 1,66 kg (3,65 lb) 2,23 kg (4,91 lb) 2,57 kg (5,66 lb) Tableau 22. Conditions environnementales Fonctionnalité Description Température : En fonctionnement De 0° C à 35° C (de 32° F à 95° F) Stockage De –40° C à 65° C (de –40° F à 149° F) Humidité relative (maximale) : En fonctionnement De 10 % à 90 % (sans condensation) Stockage De 5 % à 95 % (sans condensation) Altitude (maximale) : En fonctionnement de –16 m à 3048 m (de –50 à 10 000 pieds) REMARQUE : Pour les altitudes supérieures à 900 mètres (2950 pieds), la température maximale de fonctionnement est réduite de 0,55 °C (1 °F) tous les 168 mètres (550 pieds). À l'arrêt De –15,2 m à 10 668 m (de –50 pieds à 35 000 pieds) Niveau de contaminants atmosphériques G1 selon la norme ISA-S71.04-1985 546 Contacter Dell REMARQUE : Si vous ne disposez pas d'une connexion Internet, les informations de contact figurent sur la facture d'achat, le borderau de colisage, la facture le catalogue des produits Dell. Dell propose diverses options d'assistance et de maintenance en ligne et téléphonique. Ces options varient en fonction du pays et du produit et certains services peuvent ne pas être disponibles dans votre région Pour contacter le service commercial, technique ou client de Dell : 1. Visitez le site support.dell.com. 2. Sélectionnez la catégorie d'assistance. 3. Si vous ne résidez pas aux Etats-Unis, sélectionnez le code pays au bas de la page support.dell.com ou sélectionnez Tout pour afficher d'autres choix. 4. Sélectionnez le lien de service ou d'assistance approprié. 55 Systèmes Dell™ PowerVault™ DL2200 Manuel du propriétaire Modèle réglementaire de série E13S Type réglementaire E13S001Remarques, précautions et avertissements REMARQUE : une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent vous aider à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque de d'endommagement du matériel ou de perte de données en cas de non-respect des instructions. AVERTISSEMENT : un AVERTISSEMENT indique un risque d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. ____________________ Les informations que contient ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. © 2010 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction de ce document, de quelque manière que ce soit, sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques mentionnées dans ce document : Dell, le logo DELL et PowerEdge sont des marques de Dell Inc. ; Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server et MS-DOS sont des marques ou des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. D'autres marques commerciales et noms de marque peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence aux entités se réclamant de ces marques et de ces noms ou de leurs produits. Dell Inc. rejette tout intérêt propriétaire dans les marques et les noms commerciaux autres que les siens. Modèle réglementaire de série E13S Type réglementaire E13S001 Juin 2010 Rév. A00 Table des matières 3 Table des matières 1 À propos du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Accès aux fonctions du système au démarrage . . . . 11 Voyants et fonctions du panneau avant . . . . . . . . . 12 Codes des voyants des disques durs . . . . . . . . . . 14 Voyants et caractéristiques du panneau arrière . . . . 15 Consignes pour connecter des périphériques externes en option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Codes des voyants de carte réseau . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Codes du voyant d'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Voyants de diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Messages système. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Messages d'avertissement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Messages de diagnostic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Messages d'alerte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Autres informations utiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Table des matières 2 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI . . . . . . . . 41 Choix du mode d'amorçage du système . . . . . . . . . 41 Accès au programme de configuration du système. . . 42 Réponse aux messages d'erreur . . . . . . . . . . 42 Utilisation des touches de navigation du programme de configuration du système. . . . . . 43 Options de configuration du système . . . . . . . . . . 44 Écran principal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Écran Memory Settings (Paramètres de la mémoire) . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Écran Processor Settings (Paramètres du processeur) . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Écran Boot Settings (Paramètres d'amorçage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Écran Integrated Devices (Périphériques intégrés) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Écran PCI IRQ Assignments (Affectations des IRQ PCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Écran Serial Communication (Communications série). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Écran Power Management (Gestion de l'alimentation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Écran System Security (Sécurité du système) . . . 55 Écran Exit (Quitter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Accès au Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI . . . . . . . . 58 Utilisation des touches de navigation du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Écran UEFI Boot Manager (Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI) . . . . . . . . . . 59 Écran UEFI Boot settings (Paramètres d'amorçage UEFI). . . . . . . . . . . 60Table des matières 5 Écran System Utilities (Utilitaires du système) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Fonctionnalités de mot de passe du système et de mot de passe de configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Utilisation du mot de passe du système . . . . . . 61 Utilisation du mot de passe de configuration . . . 64 Gestion intégrée du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Configuration du contrôleur BMC . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Accès au module de configuration BMC. . . . . . 67 Utilitaire de configuration iDRAC . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Accès à l'utilitaire de configuration iDRAC . . . . 68 3 Installation des composants du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Outils recommandés . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 À l'intérieur du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Cadre avant (en option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Retrait du cadre avant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Installation du cadre avant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Ouverture et fermeture du système . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Ouverture du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Fermeture du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Carénage de refroidissement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Retrait du carénage de refroidissement . . . . . . 74 Installation du carénage de refroidissement. . . . 75 Disques durs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Retrait d'un cache de disque dur. . . . . . . . . . 756 Table des matières Installation d'un cache de disque dur . . . . . . . 76 Retrait d'un disque dur remplaçable à chaud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Installation d'un disque dur remplaçable à chaud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Retrait d'un disque dur installé dans un support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Installation d'un disque dur dans un support de disque dur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Disques durs internes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Retrait d'une baie de disque dur interne . . . . . . 79 Installation d'une baie de disque dur interne. . . . 81 Retrait d'un disque dur interne d'une baie de disque dur interne. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Installation d'un disque dur dans une baie . . . . . 82 Ventilateurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Retrait d'un ventilateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Réinstallation d'un ventilateur . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Blocs d'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Retrait d'un bloc d'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . 86 Installation d'un bloc d'alimentation . . . . . . . . 87 Retrait d'un cache de bloc d'alimentation . . . . . 88 Installation d'un cache de bloc d'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Mémoire système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Consignes générales pour l'installation des barrettes de mémoire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Recommandations spécifiques à chaque mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Installation de barrettes de mémoire . . . . . . . . 94 Retrait de barrettes de mémoire . . . . . . . . . . 96Table des matières 7 Cartes d'extension et cartes de montage pour cartes d'extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Consignes d'installation des cartes d'extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Installation d'une carte d'extension . . . . . . . . 98 Retrait d'une carte d'extension . . . . . . . . . . 100 Retrait d'une carte de montage pour carte d'extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Installation d'une carte de montage pour carte d'extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Carte contrôleur de stockage intégrée . . . . . . . . . 103 Retrait de la carte contrôleur de stockage. . . . . 103 Installation de la carte contrôleur de stockage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Carte iDRAC6 Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Installation d'une carte iDRAC6 Express . . . . . . 107 Retrait d'une carte iDRAC6 Express . . . . . . . . 108 Carte iDRAC6 Enterprise (en option) . . . . . . . . . . 109 Installation d'une carte iDRAC6 Enterprise . . . . 109 Retrait d'une carte iDRAC6 Enterprise . . . . . . . 111 Carte VFlash (en option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Installation d'une carte VFlash . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Retrait d'une carte de support VFlash . . . . . . . 112 Processeurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Retrait d'un processeur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Installation d'un processeur . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Pile du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Remplacement de la pile du système. . . . . . . . 117 Batterie RAID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Retrait de la batterie RAID . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Installation de la batterie RAID. . . . . . . . . . . 1218 Table des matières Assemblage du panneau de commande : voyant . . . 121 Retrait du panneau de commande . . . . . . . . 121 Installation du voyant du module de panneau de commande-Voyant . . . . . . . . . 123 Module d'E/S du panneau avant . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Retrait du module d'E/S du panneau avant. . . . 123 Installation du module d'E/S du panneau avant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Fond de panier SAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Retrait du fond de panier SAS . . . . . . . . . . 125 Installation du fond de panier SAS . . . . . . . . 128 Carte de distribution de l'alimentation . . . . . . . . 129 Retrait de la carte de distribution de l'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Réinstallation de la carte de distribution de l'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Carte système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Retrait de la carte système . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Installation de la carte système. . . . . . . . . . 134 4 Dépannage du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 La sécurité en priorité, pour vous et votre système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Dépannage des échecs de démarrage du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Dépannage des connexions externes . . . . . . . . . 138 Dépannage du sous-système vidéo . . . . . . . . . . 138 Dépannage d'un périphérique USB . . . . . . . . . . 138Table des matières 9 Dépannage d'un périphérique d'E/S série . . . . . . . 139 Dépannage d'une carte réseau . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Dépannage d'un système mouillé . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Dépannage d'un système endommagé . . . . . . . . . 142 Dépannage de la pile du système . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Dépannage des blocs d'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . 144 Dépannage des problèmes de refroidissement du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Dépannage d'un ventilateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Dépannage de la mémoire système . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Dépannage d'un disque dur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Dépannage d'un disque dur interne . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Dépannage d'un contrôleur de stockage . . . . . . . . 150 Dépannage des cartes d'extension . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Dépannage des processeurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 5 Exécution des diagnostics du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Utilisation des diagnostics en ligne. . . . . . . . . . . 155 Fonctionnalités de diagnostic intégrées du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Quand utiliser les diagnostics intégrés du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15610 Table des matières Exécution des diagnostics intégrés du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Options de test des diagnostics intégrés du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Utilisation des options de test personnalisé . . . . . 157 Sélection de périphériques à tester . . . . . . . 157 Sélection d'options de diagnostic . . . . . . . . 158 Visualisation des informations et des résultats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 6 Cavaliers et connecteurs . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Cavaliers de la carte système . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Connecteurs de la carte système . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Désactivation d'un mot de passe oublié . . . . . . . 162 7 Obtention d'aide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Contacter Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167À propos du système 11 À propos du système Accès aux fonctions du système au démarrage Les touches suivantes permettent d'accéder aux fonctions du système au démarrage. Touche Description Permet d'accéder au programme de configuration du système. Voir « Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI » à la page 41. Permet d'accéder aux services système qui donne accès à Lifecycle Controller. Ce contrôleur permet d'accéder à d'autres utilitaires tels que l'utilitaire de diagnostics intégrés du système. Pour en savoir plus sur Lifecycle Controller ou l'un de ses composants logiciels, voir la documentation relative à cet outil sur le site Web du support Dell, à l'adresse support.dell.com/manuals. Permet d'accéder au gestionnaire d'amorçage du BIOS ou UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) selon la configuration de démarrage de votre système. Voir « Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI » à la page 41. Lance l'amorçage PXE (Preboot eXecution Environment). Permet d'ouvrir le contrôleur de gestion de la carte mère (Baseboard Management Controller, BMC) ou l'utilitaire de configuration iDRAC et d'accéder ainsi au journal d'événements du système (System Event Log, SEL) et de procéder à la configuration de l'accès à distance au système. Pour en savoir plus, voir la documentation du contrôleur BMC ou de l'utilitaire iDRAC. Permet d'accéder à l'utilitaire de configuration SAS. Pour en savoir plus, voir la documentation de la carte SAS. Permet d'accéder à l'utilitaire de configuration RAID. Pour en savoir plus, voir la documentation de la carte RAID SAS. Permet d'accéder à l'utilitaire de configuration des paramètres de la carte réseau pour l'amorçage PXE. Pour en savoir plus, voir la documentation de la carte réseau intégrée.12 À propos du système Voyants et fonctions du panneau avant Figure 1-1. Voyants et fonctions du panneau avant Élément Voyant, bouton ou connecteur Icône Description 1 Panneau à voyants Ce panneau comporte quatre voyants de diagnostic qui affichent des codes d'erreur lors du démarrage du système. Voir « Voyants de diagnostic » à la page 19. 2 Voyant de mise sous tension/ bouton d'alimentation Le voyant de mise sous tension s'allume lorsque le système est allumé. Le bouton d'alimentation contrôle la sortie du bloc d'alimentation en CC qui alimente le système. Lorsque le cadre du système (en option) est installé, le bouton d'alimentation n'est pas accessible. REMARQUE : le délai nécessaire à l'affichage d'une image sur le moniteur à la mise sous tension du système peut aller jusqu'à 2 minutes. Il varie en fonction de l'espace mémoire installé. REMARQUE : si vous éteignez un ordinateur utilisant un système d'exploitation compatible avec ACPI en appuyant sur le bouton d'alimentation, le système peut effectuer un arrêt normal avant la mise hors tension de l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : pour procéder à l'arrêt forcé du système, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant cinq secondes. 2 3 4 5 7 8 1 6À propos du système 13 3 Bouton NMI Ce bouton permet de résoudre les erreurs liées aux logiciels ou aux pilotes de périphériques rencontrées avec certains systèmes d'exploitation. Appuyez sur ce bouton à l'aide de la pointe d'un trombone. Appuyez sur ce bouton uniquement si un technicien de support qualifié vous indique de le faire ou si cela est indiqué dans la documentation du système d'exploitation. 4 Bouton d'identification du système Les boutons d'identification des panneaux avant et arrière peuvent servir à identifier un système spécifique au sein d'un rack. Si l'un de ces boutons est activé, les voyants d'état du système (bleus) situés sur le panneau arrière clignotent jusqu'à ce que l'utilisateur appuie de nouveau sur l'un des boutons. 5 Disque dur Jusqu'à douze lecteurs SAS ou SATA de 3,5 po. remplaçables à chaud 6 Panneau d'identification du système Panneau amovible comportant des informations système, notamment le code de service express, l'adresse MAC de la carte réseau intégrée ainsi que l'adresse MAC de la carte iDRAC6 Enterprise. 7 Connecteur USB Permet de connecter des périphériques USB au système. Les ports sont compatibles avec la norme USB 2.0. 8 Connecteur vidéo Permet de connecter un moniteur au système. Élément Voyant, bouton ou connecteur Icône Description14 À propos du système Codes des voyants des disques durs Figure 1-2. Voyants de disque dur 1 voyant d'activité du disque dur (vert) 2 voyant d'état du disque dur (vert et orange) Code du voyant d'état du disque État Voyant vert clignotant deux fois par seconde Identification du disque/préparation au retrait Éteint Disque prêt pour insertion ou retrait REMARQUE : à la mise sous tension du système, le voyant d'état ne s'allume qu'une fois tous les disques durs initialisés. Pendant le démarrage, il n'est pas possible d'insérer ou de retirer des disques. Vert clignotant, puis orange, puis éteint Panne de disque prévue 1 2À propos du système 15 Voyants et caractéristiques du panneau arrière La Figure 1-3 présente les boutons, les voyants et les connecteurs situés sur le panneau arrière du système. Figure 1-3. Voyants et caractéristiques du panneau arrière Orange clignotant quatre fois par seconde Disque en panne Vert clignotant lentement Disque en cours de restauration Vert fixe Disque en ligne Vert clignotant pendant trois secondes, éteint pendant trois secondes, orange pendant trois secondes et éteint pendant trois secondes. Reconstruction annulée Élément Voyant, bouton ou connecteur Icône Description 1 Connecteur série Permet de connecter un périphérique série au système. 2 Connecteur vidéo Permet de connecter un écran VGA au système. 3 Port iDRAC6 Enterprise (en option) Port de gestion dédié pour la carte iDRAC6 Enterprise en option. 4 Logement de carte VFlash (en option) Permet de connecter une carte mémoire SD externe pour la carte iDRAC6 Enterprise en option. Code du voyant d'état du disque État ST 1 3 2 1 2 Gb 2 Gb 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1216 À propos du système 5 Connecteurs USB (2) Permet de connecter des périphériques USB au système. Les ports sont compatibles avec la norme USB 2.0. 6 Connecteurs Ethernet (2) Connecteurs de cartes réseau 10/100/1000 intégrées. 7 Logements de carte d'extension PCIe avec carte de montage Connecte une carte d'extension interne et trois cartes d'extension externes PCI Express Generation 2. Logement 1 : PCIe x4, demi-longueur, pleine hauteur Logement 2 : PCIe x4, pleine longueur, pleine hauteur Logement 1 : PCIe x8, demi-longueur, pleine hauteur Logement 4 : PCIe x4, logement interne pour carte intégrée REMARQUE : les quatre logements sont dotés de connecteurs de type x8. 8 Connecteur d'identification du système Permet de connecter l'assemblage des voyants d'état du système en option au moyen du passe-câbles en option. 9 Voyant d'état du système Est bleu lorsque le système fonctionne normalement. Le logiciel Systems Management Software et les boutons d'identification situés à l'avant et à l'arrière du système peuvent faire clignoter le voyant en bleu pour identifier un système spécifique. S'allume en orange lorsque le système requiert une intervention de l'utilisateur à la suite d'un problème. Élément Voyant, bouton ou connecteur Icône DescriptionÀ propos du système 17 Consignes pour connecter des périphériques externes en option • Mettez le système et les périphériques externes hors tension avant de connecter un nouveau périphérique. Mettez ensuite les périphériques externes sous tension avant le système, à moins que la documentation du périphérique ne stipule le contraire. • Assurez-vous que le pilote du nouveau périphérique connecté a été installé sur le système. • Si nécessaire, utilisez le programme de configuration du système pour activer les ports sur le système. Voir « Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI » à la page 41. 10 Bouton d'identification du système Les boutons d'identification des panneaux avant et arrière peuvent servir à identifier un système spécifique au sein d'un rack. Si l'un de ces boutons est activé, les voyants d'état du système (bleus) situés sur le panneau arrière clignotent jusqu'à ce que l'utilisateur appuie de nouveau sur l'un des boutons. 11 Bloc d'alimentation 2 (PS2) Bloc d'alimentation redondant de 750 W/1100 W 12 Bloc d'alimentation 1 (PS1) Bloc d'alimentation redondant de 750 W/1100 W Élément Voyant, bouton ou connecteur Icône Description18 À propos du système Codes des voyants de carte réseau Figure 1-4. Voyants de la carte réseau Codes du voyant d'alimentation Les blocs d'alimentation sont dotés d'un voyant qui indique si le système est alimenté ou si une panne d'alimentation s'est produite. • Éteint : l'alimentation secteur n'est pas connectée. • Vert : en veille, indique que le bloc d'alimentation est alimenté en courant alternatif et que celui-ci est opérationnel. Lorsque le système est sous tension, indique également que le bloc d'alimentation alimente le système en courant continu. • Orange : indique qu'un problème lié au bloc d'alimentation s'est produit. • Vert et orange en alternance : lorsque vous ajoutez un bloc d'alimentation à chaud, indique une non-correspondance entre le bloc d'alimentation ajouté et celui déjà installé. Remplacez le bloc d'alimentation dont le voyant clignote par un bloc dont la capacité correspond à celle de l'autre bloc installé. 1 voyant de liaison 2 voyant d'activité voyant code du voyant Les voyants de liaison et d'activité sont éteints. La carte réseau n'est pas connectée au réseau. Le voyant de liaison est vert. La carte réseau est connectée à une liaison réseau valide à 1 000 Mbits/s. Le voyant de liaison est orange. La carte réseau est connectée à une liaison réseau valide à 10/100 Mbits/s. Le voyant d'activité est vert. Des données réseau sont en cours d'envoi ou de réception. 1 2À propos du système 19 Figure 1-5. Voyant d'état du bloc d'alimentation Voyants de diagnostic Les quatre voyants de diagnostic du panneau avant affichent des codes d'erreur au démarrage du système. Le Tableau 1 indique les causes et les mesures correctives possibles associées à ces codes. Un cercle en vert représente un voyant allumé et un cercle vide représente un voyant éteint. 1 état du bloc d'alimentation Tableau 1. Codes des voyants de diagnostic Code Causes Mesure corrective Le système est éteint ou un échec éventuel pré-BIOS s'est produit. Les voyants de diagnostic ne sont pas allumés alors que le système d'exploitation a démarré. Raccordez le système à une prise secteur en état de marche et appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation. Le système fonctionne normalement après l'auto-test de démarrage. Pour information uniquement. 120 À propos du système Échec de la somme de contrôle du BIOS ; le système est en mode de restauration. Voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165. Panne possible du processeur. Voir « Dépannage des processeurs » à la page 153. Panne de mémoire. Voir « Dépannage de la mémoire système » à la page 145. Panne possible d'une carte d'extension. Voir « Dépannage des cartes d'extension » à la page 151. Panne possible des fonctions vidéo. Voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165. Panne du disque dur. Assurez-vous que les câbles des disques durs sont correctement branchés. Pour plus d'informations sur les lecteurs installés sur le système, voir « Disques durs » à la page 75. Panne possible de périphérique USB. Voir « Dépannage d'un périphérique USB » à la page 138. Aucune barrette de mémoire détectée. Voir « Dépannage de la mémoire système » à la page 145. Panne de la carte système. Voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165. Erreur de configuration de la mémoire. Voir « Dépannage de la mémoire système » à la page 145. Tableau 1. Codes des voyants de diagnostic (suite) Code Causes Mesure correctiveÀ propos du système 21 Panne possible de la carte système et/ou d'une ressource de la carte système. Voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165. Erreur possible liée à la configuration d'une ressource système. Voir « Contacter Dell » à la page 165. Autre type de panne. Assurez-vous que les câbles des disques durs sont correctement branchés. Pour vérifier que les lecteurs appropriés sont installés sur votre système, voir « Dépannage d'un disque dur » à la page 147. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165. Tableau 1. Codes des voyants de diagnostic (suite) Code Causes Mesure corrective22 À propos du système Messages système Les messages système vous informe à l'écran qu'un incident s'est produit. REMARQUE : si vous recevez un message système qui n'est pas répertorié dans le tableau, vérifiez la documentation de l'application exécutée. Vous pouvez aussi vous référer à la documentation du système d'exploitation pour obtenir une explication du message et l'action conseillée. Message Causes Actions correctives 128-bit Advanced ECC mode disabled. For 128-bit Advanced ECC, DIMMs must be installed in pairs. Pairs must be matched in size and geometry. L'option Fonctions ECC avancées a été activée dans le BIOS, mais n'est plus valable en raison d'une configuration de mémoire non prise en charge pouvant être due à une défaillance ou au retrait d'une barrette de mémoire. Le paramètre des Fonctions ECC avancées a été désactivé. Recherchez les autres messages concernant la défaillance d'une barrette de mémoire. Reconfigurez les barrettes de mémoire pour les besoins du mode Fonctions ECC avancées. Voir « Mémoire système » à la page 88. Alert! Advanced ECC Memory Mode disabled! Memory configuration does not support Advanced ECC Memory Mode. Le mode Mémoire ECC avancé a été activé dans le programme de configuration du système, mais la configuration actuelle ne prend pas en charge ce mode. Une barrette de mémoire est peut-être défectueuse. Assurez-vous que les barrettes de mémoire sont installées dans une configuration qui prend en charge le mode Mémoire ECC avancé. Consultez les autres messages du système afin d'obtenir des informations supplémentaires sur les causes éventuelles. Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration de la mémoire, voir « Consignes générales pour l'installation des barrettes de mémoire » à la page 89. Si le problème persiste, voir « Dépannage de la mémoire système » à la page 145.À propos du système 23 Alert! iDRAC6 not responding. Rebooting. La carte iDRAC6 ne répond à aucune communication du BIOS, soit parce qu'elle est défectueuse, soit parce que l'initialisation n'est pas arrivée à son terme. Le système se réinitialise. Attendez que le système redémarre. Alert! iDRAC6 not responding. Power required may exceed PSU wattage. Alert! Continuing system boot accepts the risk that system may power down without warning. La carte iDRAC6 optionnelle ne répond plus. La carte iDRAC6 a été réinitialisée à distance alors que le système était en cours de démarrage. Le délai nécessaire à l'initialisation de la carte iDRAC6 à la suite d'une reprise de l'alimentation secteur est plus long qu'en temps normal. Coupez l'alimentation secteur du système pendant 10 secondes, puis redémarrez ce dernier. Alert! Node Interleaving disabled! Memory configuration does not support Node Interleaving. La configuration de la mémoire ne prend pas en charge l'entrelacement des nœuds, ou bien celui-ci n'est plus pris en charge en raison d'un changement intervenu dans la configuration (défaillance d'une barrette de mémoire, par exemple). Le système fonctionne, mais sans entrelacement des nœuds. Les barrettes de mémoire doivent être installées dans une configuration prenant en charge l'entrelacement de nœuds. Voir les autres messages du système pour des informations supplémentaires sur les causes probables. Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration de la mémoire, voir « Consignes générales pour l'installation des barrettes de mémoire » à la page 89. Si le problème persiste, voir « Dépannage de la mémoire système » à la page 145. Message Causes Actions correctives24 À propos du système Alert! Power required exceeds PSU wattage. Check PSU and system configuration. Alert! Continuing system boot accepts the risk that system may power down without warning. Il se peut que la configuration système des processeurs, des barrettes de mémoire et des cartes d'extension ne soit pas prise en charge par les blocs d'alimentation. Si la mise à niveau d'un composant du système vient d'être effectuée, rétablissez la configuration antérieure. Si l'amorçage du système s'effectue sans émettre cet avertissement, cela indique que les composants ayant été remplacés ne sont pas pris en charge par ce bloc d'alimentation. Si des blocs d'alimentation à consommation intelligente (Energy Smart) sont installés, remplacez-les par des blocs d'alimentation haute performance (High Output) afin de pouvoir utiliser les composants. Voir « Blocs d'alimentation » à la page 85. Alert! Redundant memory disabled! Memory configuration does not support redundant memory. La mise en réserve ou en miroir de la mémoire a été activée dans le programme de configuration du système, mais la configuration actuelle ne prend pas en charge la redondance de la mémoire. Une barrette de mémoire est peut-être défectueuse. Assurez-vous que les barrettes de mémoire ne sont pas défectueuses. Voir « Dépannage de la mémoire système » à la page 145. Modifiez la configuration de la mémoire, si besoin. Voir « Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI » à la page 41. Alert! System fatal error during previous boot. Une erreur a provoqué le redémarrage du système. Consultez les autres messages du système afin d'obtenir des informations supplémentaires sur les causes éventuelles. Message Causes Actions correctivesÀ propos du système 25 BIOS MANUFACTURING MODE detected. MANUFACTURING MODE will be cleared before the next boot. System reboot required for normal operation. Le système est en mode usine. Redémarrez le système pour désactiver le mode usine. BIOS Update Attempt Failed! La tentative de mise à jour à distance du BIOS a échoué. Faites une nouvelle tentative de mise à jour du BIOS. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165. Caution! NVRAM_CLR jumper is installed on system board. Please run SETUP Le cavalier NVRAM_CLR est installé en position de réinitialisation. Le CMOS a été réinitialisé. Placez le cavalier NVRAM_CLR sur la position par défaut (broches 3 et 5). Pour identifier son emplacement, voir Figure 6-1. Redémarrez le système et entrez de nouveau les paramètres du BIOS. Voir « Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI » à la page 41. CPU set to minimum frequency. La vitesse du processeur peut être définie intentionnellement sur une valeur plus faible afin de réduire la consommation. Si ce paramètre n'a pas été défini intentionnellement, recherchez la présence éventuelle d'autres messages système pouvant indiquer les causes du problème. Message Causes Actions correctives26 À propos du système CPU x installed with no memory. Des barrettes de mémoire sont requises, mais aucune barrette n'est installée dans les logements de mémoire correspondant au processeur indiqué. Installez des barrettes de mémoire pour le processeur. Voir « Mémoire système » à la page 88. CPUs with different cache sizes detected. CPUs with different core sizes detected! System halted. Des processeurs non compatibles entre eux ont été installés sur le système. Assurez-vous que tous les processeurs présentent des caractéristiques identiques en termes de capacité de mémoire cache, de nombre de cœurs et de processeurs logiques, mais aussi de fréquence d'alimentation. Assurez-vous que les processeurs sont correctement installés. Voir « Processeurs » à la page 112. CPUs with different logical processors detected! System halted. CPUs with different power rating detected! System halted. Current boot mode is set to UEFI. Please ensure compatible bootable media is available. Use the system setup program to change the boot mode as needed. L'amorçage du système a échoué, car le mode d'amorçage UEFI est activé dans le BIOS alors que le paramètre défini dans le système d'exploitation est autre que le mode UEFI. Assurez-vous que le mode d'amorçage est correctement défini et que le support d'amorçage approprié est disponible. Voir « Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI » à la page 41. Decreasing available memory. Barrettes de mémoire défectueuses ou mal installées. Réinstallez les barrettes de mémoire. Voir « Dépannage de la mémoire système » à la page 145. Message Causes Actions correctivesÀ propos du système 27 DIMM configuration on each CPU should match. Configuration de mémoire non valide sur un système biprocesseur. La configuration des barrettes de mémoire doit être identique pour chaque processeur. Assurez-vous que la configuration des barrettes de mémoire est valide. Voir « Consignes générales pour l'installation des barrettes de mémoire » à la page 89. Embedded NICx and NICy: OS NIC=, Management Shared NIC= L'interface de carte réseau du système d'exploitation est définie dans le BIOS. L'interface d'administration réseau partagée est définie via les outils de gestion. Vérifiez les paramètres de la carte réseau dans le logiciel de gestion du système ou dans le programme de configuration du système. Si un problème est indiqué, voir « Dépannage d'une carte réseau » à la page 140. Error 8602 - Auxiliary Device Failure. Verify that mouse and keyboard are securely attached to correct connectors. Le câble de la souris ou du clavier n'est pas connecté correctement. Rebranchez le câble de la souris ou du clavier. Clavier ou souris défectueux. Assurez-vous que la souris ou le clavier fonctionne. Voir « Dépannage d'un périphérique USB » à la page 138. Gate A20 failure. Contrôleur du clavier défectueux ; carte système défectueuse. Voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165. Invalid configuration information - please run SETUP program. Une configuration système non valide a provoqué l'arrêt du système. Exécutez le programme de configuration du système et vérifiez les paramètres en cours. Voir « Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI » à la page 41. Message Causes Actions correctives28 À propos du système Invalid PCIe card found in the Internal_Storage slot! Le système s'est arrêté, car une carte d'extension PCIe non valide est installée dans le logement dédié au contrôleur de stockage. Retirez la carte d'extension PCIe installée dans le logement dédié et remplacez-la par le contrôleur de stockage intégré. Voir « Batterie RAID » à la page 120. Keyboard fuse has failed. Surtension détectée au niveau du connecteur de clavier. Voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165. Local keyboard may not work because all user accessible USB ports are disabled. If operating locally, power cycle the system and enter system setup program to change settings. Les ports USB sont désactivés dans le BIOS du système. Éteignez et redémarrez le système au moyen du bouton d'alimentation, puis accédez au programme de configuration du système pour activer le ou les ports USB. Voir « Accès au programme de configuration du système » à la page 42. Manufacturing mode detected. Le système est en mode usine. Redémarrez le système pour désactiver le mode usine. Maximum rank count exceeded. The following DIMM has been disabled: x Configuration de mémoire non valide. Le système fonctionne mais la barrette de mémoire spécifiée a été désactivée. Assurez-vous que la configuration des barrettes de mémoire est valide. Voir « Consignes générales pour l'installation des barrettes de mémoire » à la page 89. Memory Initialization Warning: Memory size may be reduced. Configuration de mémoire non valide. Le système fonctionne, mais avec une capacité de mémoire inférieure à la capacité physiquement disponible. Assurez-vous que la configuration des barrettes de mémoire est valide. Voir « Consignes générales pour l'installation des barrettes de mémoire » à la page 89. Message Causes Actions correctivesÀ propos du système 29 Memory set to minimum frequency. La fréquence de la mémoire peut être définie intentionnellement sur une valeur plus faible afin de réduire la consommation. Si ce paramètre n'a pas été défini intentionnellement, recherchez la présence éventuelle d'autres messages système pouvant indiquer les causes du problème. Il se peut que la configuration actuelle de la mémoire prenne en charge uniquement la fréquence minimale. Assurez-vous que la configuration de la mémoire prend en charge les fréquences plus élevées. Voir « Consignes générales pour l'installation des barrettes de mémoire » à la page 89. Memory tests terminated by keystroke. Test de la mémoire de l'autotest de démarrage interrompu à l'aide de la touche espace. Pour information uniquement. MEMTEST lane failure detected on x. Configuration de mémoire non valide. Des barrettes de mémoire incompatibles sont installées. Assurez-vous que la configuration des barrettes de mémoire est valide. Voir « Consignes générales pour l'installation des barrettes de mémoire » à la page 89. Mirror mode disabled. For mirror mode, DIMMs must be installed in pairs. Pairs must be matched in size and geometry. La configuration de la mémoire n'est pas conforme au paramètre du BIOS. Le paramètre du BIOS a été désactivé. Configurez de nouveau les barrettes de mémoire pour les besoins du mode de mise en miroir. Voir « Mémoire système » à la page 88. Message Causes Actions correctives30 À propos du système No boot device available. Disque dur défectueux ou inexistant, ou sous-système du disque dur défectueux ou inexistant, ou bien aucune clé USB amorçable installée. Utilisez une clé USB ou un disque dur amorçable. Si l'incident persiste, voir « Dépannage d'un périphérique USB » à la page 138 et « Dépannage d'un disque dur » à la page 147. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition de la séquence d'amorçage, voir « Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI » à la page 41. No boot sector on hard drive. Paramètres de configuration incorrects dans le programme de configuration du système ou aucun système d'exploitation sur le disque dur. Vérifiez les paramètres de configuration des disques durs dans le programme de configuration du système. Voir « Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI » à la page 41. Si nécessaire, installez le système d'exploitation sur le disque dur. Voir la documentation du système d'exploitation. No timer tick interrupt. Carte système défectueuse. Voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165. PCIe Training Error: Expected Link Width is x, Actual Link Width is y. Carte PCIe défectueuse ou mal installée dans le logement indiqué. Réinstallez la carte PCIe dans le logement indiqué. Voir « Dépannage des cartes d'extension » à la page 151. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165. Message Causes Actions correctivesÀ propos du système 31 Plug & Play Configuration Error. Une erreur s'est produite lors de l'initialisation d'un périphérique PCIe ; la carte système est défectueuse. Installez le cavalier NVRAM_CLR dans la position de réinitialisation (broches 1 et 3) et redémarrez le système. Pour identifier l'emplacement du cavalier, voir Figure 6-1. Si le problème persiste, voir « Dépannage des cartes d'extension » à la page 151. Quad rank DIMM detected after single rank or dual rank DIMM in socket. Configuration de mémoire non valide. Assurez-vous que la configuration des barrettes de mémoire est valide. Voir « Consignes générales pour l'installation des barrettes de mémoire » à la page 89. Read fault Requested sector not found. Le système d'exploitation ne peut pas lire le disque dur ou le périphérique USB, l'ordinateur n'a pas trouvé un secteur spécifique sur le disque ou le secteur demandé est défectueux. Remplacez le support USB et le périphérique. Assurezvous que les câbles USB et les câbles de fond de panier SAS/SATA sont correctement connectés. Voir « Dépannage d'un périphérique USB » à la page 138 ou « Dépannage d'un disque dur » à la page 147 selon le(s) lecteur(s) installé(s) dans votre système. SATA Port x device not found. Aucun périphérique n'est connecté au port SATA spécifié. Pour information uniquement. Message Causes Actions correctives32 À propos du système Sector not found. Seek error. Seek operation failed. Disque dur, périphérique USB ou support USB défectueux. Remplacez le support USB ou le périphérique. Assurezvous que les câbles USB ou du fond de panier SAS sont correctement connectés. Voir « Dépannage d'un périphérique USB » à la page 138 ou « Dépannage d'un disque dur » à la page 147 selon le ou les lecteurs installés sur votre système. Shutdown failure. Erreur système générale. Voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165. Sparing mode disabled. For sparing mode, matched sets of three must be populated across slots. La configuration de la mémoire n'est pas conforme au paramètre défini dans le BIOS. Le paramètre du BIOS a été désactivé. Configurez à nouveau les barrettes de mémoire pour les besoins du mode de mise en réserve. Voir « Mémoire système » à la page 88. The amount of system memory has changed. De la mémoire a été ajoutée ou supprimée, ou une barrette de mémoire est défectueuse. Si vous venez d'ajouter ou de supprimer de la mémoire, ce message s'affiche uniquement pour information. Vous pouvez ne pas en tenir compte. Dans le cas contraire, consultez le journal d'événements du système pour identifier les erreurs détectées (un bit ou plusieurs bits) et remplacez la barrette de mémoire défectueuse. Voir « Dépannage de la mémoire système » à la page 145. Message Causes Actions correctivesÀ propos du système 33 The following DIMMs should match in geometry: x,x,... Configuration de mémoire non valide. Les barrettes de mémoire spécifiées ne correspondent pas du point de vue de la taille, du nombre de rangées ou du nombre de canaux de données. Assurez-vous que la configuration des barrettes de mémoire est valide. Voir « Consignes générales pour l'installation des barrettes de mémoire » à la page 89. The following DIMMs should match in rank count: x,x,... The following DIMMs should match in size: x,x,... The following DIMMs should match in size and geometry: x,x,... The following DIMMs should match in size and rank count: x,x,... Thermal sensor not detected on x. Une barrette de mémoire sans capteur thermique est installée dans le logement indiqué. Remplacez la barrette de mémoire. Voir « Mémoire système » à la page 88. Time-of-day clock stopped. Batterie ou puce défectueuse. Voir « Dépannage de la pile du système » à la page 143. Message Causes Actions correctives34 À propos du système Time-of-day not set - please run SETUP program. Paramètres d'heure ou de date incorrects ; batterie du système défectueuse. Vérifiez les paramètres d'heure et de date. Voir « Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI » à la page 41. Si le problème persiste, remplacez la batterie du système. Voir « Pile du système » à la page 117. Timer chip counter 2 failed. Carte système défectueuse. Voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165. TPM configuration operation honored. System will now reset. Une commande de configuration TPM a été saisie. Le système redémarre et exécute la commande. Pour information uniquement. TPM configuration operation is pending. Press (I) to Ignore OR (M) to Modify to allow this change and reset the system. WARNING: Modifying could prevent security. Ce message s'affiche lors du redémarrage du système après la saisie d'une commande de configuration TPM. Une intervention de l'utilisateur est nécessaire pour poursuivre. Entrez l'option I ou M pour poursuivre. TPM failure Une fonction TPM (Trusted Platform Module) a échoué. Voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165. Message Causes Actions correctivesÀ propos du système 35 Unable to launch System Services image. System halted! L'arrêt du système s'est produit après une pression sur la touche F10, car l'image System Services (Services système) est endommagée dans le micrologiciel du système ou elle a été perdue à la suite du remplacement de la carte système. La mémoire Flash de la carte iDRAC6 Enterprise en option ou la mémoire Flash SPI du contrôleur BMC est endommagée. Redémarrez le système et mettez à jour la logithèque de Lifecycle Controller afin de restaurer toutes les fonctionnalités. Pour plus d'informations, voir le document Lifecycle Controller User Guide (Guide d'utilisation de Lifecycle Controller). Restaurez la mémoire Flash en téléchargeant la version la plus récente depuis le site support.dell.com. Voir le guide d'utilisation du contrôleur d'accès distant Dell™ (iDRAC6) intégré pour savoir comment effectuer un remplacement de champ de la mémoire Flash. Unexpected interrupt in protected mode. Barrettes de mémoire mal installées ou puce du contrôleur de clavier/souris défectueuse. Réinstallez les barrettes de mémoire. Voir « Dépannage de la mémoire système » à la page 145. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165. Unsupported CPU combination Unsupported CPU stepping detected. Le ou les processeurs ne sont pas pris en charge par le système. Installez un processeur ou une combinaison de processeurs pris en charge. Voir « Processeurs » à la page 112. Unsupported DIMM detected. The following DIMM has been disabled: x Configuration de mémoire non valide. Le système fonctionne mais la barrette de mémoire spécifiée a été désactivée. Assurez-vous que la configuration des barrettes de mémoire est valide. Voir « Consignes générales pour l'installation des barrettes de mémoire » à la page 89. Message Causes Actions correctives36 À propos du système Unsupported memory configuration. DIMM mismatch across slots detected: x,x,... Configuration de mémoire non valide. Les barrettes de mémoire installées dans les logements spécifiés ne correspondent pas. Assurez-vous que la configuration des barrettes de mémoire est valide. Voir « Consignes générales pour l'installation des barrettes de mémoire » à la page 89. Unused memory detected. DIMM’s installed in the following slot are not available when in mirror mode: x,x,x. La configuration de la mémoire n'est pas optimale pour le mode de mise en miroir. Les barrettes installées dans les logements spécifiés sont inutilisées. Configurez de nouveau la mémoire pour les besoins de la mise en miroir ou changez le mode de mémoire en sélectionnant l'option Optimized (Optimisé) ou Sparing (Réserve) dans l'écran de configuration du BIOS. Voir « Mémoire système » à la page 88. Unused memory detected. DIMM’s installed in the following slot are not available when in 128-bit advanced ECC mode: x,x,x. La configuration de la mémoire n'est pas optimale pour le mode de mémoire ECC avancé. Les barrettes installées dans les logements spécifiés sont inutilisées. Configurez de nouveau la mémoire pour les besoins du mode de mémoire ECC avancé ou changez le mode de mémoire en sélectionnant l'option Optimized (Optimisé) ou Sparing (Réserve) dans l'écran de configuration du BIOS. Voir « Mémoire système » à la page 88. Warning: A fatal error has caused system reset! Please check the system event log! Une erreur fatale s'est produite et a provoqué le redémarrage du système. Consultez les informations qui ont été consignées dans le journal des événements du système lorsque cette erreur s'est produite. Si le journal signale que des composants sont défectueux, voir la section correspondante du chapitre « Dépannage du système » à la page 137. Message Causes Actions correctivesÀ propos du système 37 Warning! No micro code update loaded for processor n. La mise à jour du microcode a échoué. Mettez le micrologiciel du BIOS à jour. Voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165. Warning! Power required exceeds PSU wattage. Check PSU and system configuration. Warning! Performance degraded. CPU and memory set to minimum frequencies to meet PSU wattage. System will reboot. Il se peut que la configuration système des processeurs, des barrettes de mémoire et des cartes d'extension ne soit pas prise en charge par les blocs d'alimentation. Si la mise à niveau d'un composant du système vient d'être effectuée, rétablissez la configuration antérieure. Si l'amorçage du système s'effectue sans émettre cet avertissement, cela indique que les composants ayant été remplacés ne sont pas pris en charge par ce bloc d'alimentation. Si des blocs d'alimentation à consommation intelligente (Energy Smart) sont installés, remplacez-les par des blocs d'alimentation haute performance (High Output) afin de pouvoir utiliser les composants. Voir « Blocs d'alimentation » à la page 85. Message Causes Actions correctives38 À propos du système Warning! PSU mismatch. PSU redundancy lost. Check PSU. Un bloc d'alimentation haute performance et un bloc à consommation intelligente (Energy Smart) sont installés simultanément sur le même système. Installez au choix deux blocs d'alimentation haute performance ou à consommation intelligente (Energy Smart) sur le système. Vous pouvez également n'activer qu'un seul bloc d'alimentation sur le système jusqu'à ce que vous disposiez de deux blocs d'alimentation de type identique. Voir « Dépannage des blocs d'alimentation » à la page 144. Warning! Unsupported memory configuration detected. The memory configuration is not optimal. The recommended memory configuration is: Configuration de mémoire non valide. Le système fonctionne, mais de façon restreinte. Assurez-vous que la configuration des barrettes de mémoire est valide. Voir « Consignes générales pour l'installation des barrettes de mémoire » à la page 89. Si le problème persiste, voir « Dépannage de la mémoire système » à la page 145. Write fault. Write fault on selected drive. Périphérique USB, support USB, disque dur ou soussystème de disque dur défectueux. Remplacez le support USB ou le périphérique. Assurezvous que les câbles USB, du fond de panier SAS ou SATA sont correctement branchés. Voir « Dépannage d'un périphérique USB » à la page 138 et « Dépannage d'un disque dur » à la page 147. REMARQUE : pour obtenir le nom complet d'une abréviation ou connaître la signification d'un sigle utilisé dans ce tableau, voir le Glossaire à l'adresse : support.dell.com/manuals. Message Causes Actions correctivesÀ propos du système 39 Messages d'avertissement Un message d'avertissement vous prévient d'un problème possible et vous invite à réagir avant que le système ne poursuive une tâche. Par exemple, lorsque vous lancez le formatage d'un disque dur, un message vous avertit que vous risquez de perdre toutes les données qu'il contient. Les messages d'avertissement interrompent la tâche en cours et vous demandent de répondre en tapant y (yes [oui]) ou n (no [non]). REMARQUE : les messages d'avertissement sont générés par une application ou par le système d'exploitation. Pour en savoir plus, voir la documentation fournie avec l'application ou le système d'exploitation. Messages de diagnostic Les utilitaires de diagnostic du système peuvent générer des messages si vous exécutez des tests de diagnostic sur votre système. Pour en savoir plus sur les diagnostics du système, voir « Exécution des diagnostics intégrés du système » à la page 156. Messages d'alerte Le logiciel de gestion des systèmes génère des messages d'alerte pour votre système. Ce sont des messages d'information, d'état, d'avertissement ou de signalisation de panne relatifs aux lecteurs, à la température, aux ventilateurs et à l'alimentation. Pour en savoir plus, voir la documentation du logiciel Systems Management Software.40 À propos du système Autres informations utiles AVERTISSEMENT : voir les informations sur la sécurité et les réglementations fournies avec votre système. Les informations sur la garantie se trouvent dans ce document ou dans un document distinct. • La documentation fournie avec le rack indique comment installer le système dans un rack. • Le Guide de mise en route présente les caractéristiques du système, les procédures de configuration et les spécifications techniques. • Tous les supports fournis avec le système contiennent de la documentation et des outils de configuration et de gestion de votre système d'exploitation, notamment du système même et du logiciel de gestion, des mises à jour et des composants système que vous avez achetés avec le système. • Le document Lifecycle Controller User Guide (Guide d'utilisation de Lifecycle Controller) fournit des informations sur la configuration du contrôleur, du matériel et du micrologiciel, mais aussi sur le déploiement du système d'exploitation. REMARQUE : vérifiez toujours si des mises à jour sont disponibles sur le site support.dell.com/manuals et lisez-les en premier, car elles remplacent souvent les informations que contiennent les autres documents.Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du 41 Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Le programme de configuration du système est le programme BIOS qui vous permet de gérer le matériel et de spécifier les options au niveau du BIOS. À partir du programme de configuration du système, vous pouvez effectuer les tâches suivantes : • modifier les paramètres NVRAM après l'ajout ou la suppression de matériel • afficher la configuration matérielle du système • activer ou désactiver les périphériques intégrés • définir les seuils de gestion de l'alimentation et des performances • gérer la sécurité du système Choix du mode d'amorçage du système Le programme de configuration du système vous permet de spécifier le mode d'amorçage pour l'installation du système d'exploitation : • Le mode d'amorçage du BIOS (par défaut) est l'interface standard d'amorçage au niveau du BIOS. • Le mode d'amorçage UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) est une interface d'amorçage 64 bits améliorée, basée sur les spécifications UEFI et superposée au BIOS du système. Pour plus d'informations concernant cette interface, voir « Accès au Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI » à la page 58.42 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Sélectionnez le mode d'amorçage dans le champ Boot Mode (Mode d'amorçage) de l'écran Boot Settings (Paramètres d'amorçage) du programme de configuration du système. Voir « Écran Boot Settings (Paramètres d'amorçage) » à la page 49. Lorsque le système a démarré dans le mode spécifié, installez votre système d'exploitation dans ce mode. Par la suite, démarrez le système dans le même mode d'amorçage (BIOS ou UEFI) pour accéder au système d'exploitation installé. Toute tentative de démarrage du système d'exploitation à partir de l'autre mode d'amorçage provoque son arrêt immédiat. Accès au programme de configuration du système 1 Allumez ou redémarrez votre système. 2 Appuyez sur dès l'apparition du message suivant : = System Setup (Configuration du système) REMARQUE : le système ne répond pas tant que le clavier USB n'est pas actif. Si le système d'exploitation commence à se charger alors que vous n'avez pas encore appuyé sur , attendez qu'il finisse de démarrer, puis redémarrez-le et réessayez. Réponse aux messages d'erreur Si un message d'erreur s'affiche lors du démarrage du système, notez-en le contenu. Voir « Messages système » à la page 22 pour obtenir une explication du message, ainsi que des suggestions pour corriger les erreurs. REMARQUE : après l'installation d'une mise à niveau de mémoire, il est normal que votre système affiche, lors de son premier démarrage, un message signalant que la taille de la mémoire système a changé.Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du 43 Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Utilisation des touches de navigation du programme de configuration du système REMARQUE : pour la plupart des options, les modifications effectuées sont enregistrées mais ne prennent effet qu'au redémarrage du système. Touches Action Flèche vers le haut ou Permet de revenir au champ précédent. Flèche vers le bas ou Permet de passer au champ suivant. , , <+>, <–>, flèche vers la gauche ou vers la droite Fait passer le curseur d'un paramètre à un autre dans un champ. Dans certains champs, vous pouvez également saisir la valeur appropriée. <Échap> Permet de quitter le programme de configuration du système et de redémarrer le système si des modifications ont été apportées. Permet d'afficher le fichier d'aide du programme de configuration du système.44 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Options de configuration du système Écran principal Figure 2-1. Écran principal du programme de configuration du système REMARQUE : les options du programme de configuration du système varient en fonction de la configuration en cours. REMARQUE : les valeurs par défaut sont répertoriées sous l'option correspondante dans les sections suivantes, le cas échéant. Option Description System Time (Heure système) Permet de régler l'heure de l'horloge interne du système. System Date (Date système) Permet de régler la date du calendrier interne du système. Memory Settings (Paramètres de la mémoire) Permet d'afficher des informations relatives à la mémoire installée. Voir « Écran Memory Settings (Paramètres de la mémoire) » à la page 46.Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du 45 Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Processor settings (Paramètres du processeur) Permet d'afficher des informations relatives aux processeurs (vitesse, mémoire cache, etc.). Voir « Écran Processor Settings (Paramètres du processeur) » à la page 47. Boot Settings (Paramètres d'amorçage) Voir « Écran Boot Settings (Paramètres d'amorçage) » à la page 49. Integrated Devices (Périphériques intégrés) Voir « Écran Integrated Devices (Périphériques intégrés) » à la page 50. PCI IRQ Assignment (Affectation des IRQ PCI) Permet d'afficher un écran permettant de modifier l'IRQ affectée à chaque périphérique intégré du bus PCI, ainsi qu'à toutes les cartes d'extension nécessitant une IRQ. Serial Communication (Communications série) (Option par défaut : Off [Désactivé]) Voir « Écran Serial Communication (Communications série) » à la page 52. Power Management (Gestion de l'alimentation) Permet de gérer la consommation d'énergie du processeur, des ventilateurs et des barrettes de mémoire au moyen de paramètres prédéfinis ou personnalisés. Voir « Écran Power Management (Gestion de l'alimentation) » à la page 54. System Security (Sécurité du système) Affiche un écran permettant de configurer les fonctions de mot de passe du système et de mot de passe de configuration. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Écran System Security (Sécurité du système) » à la page 55, « Utilisation du mot de passe du système » à la page 61 et « Utilisation du mot de passe de configuration » à la page 64. Keyboard NumLock (Verr Num clavier) (Option par défaut : On [Activé]) Détermine si le système démarre avec le mode Verr Num sur des claviers à 101 ou 102 touches (cette option ne s'applique pas aux claviers à 84 touches). Option Description46 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Écran Memory Settings (Paramètres de la mémoire) Report Keyboard Errors (Signaler les erreurs de clavier) (Option par défaut : Report [Signaler]) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver la signalisation des erreurs de clavier au cours de l'auto-test de démarrage. Sélectionnez Report (Signaler) pour les systèmes hôtes équipés de claviers. Sélectionnez Do Not Report (Ne pas signaler) pour supprimer tous les messages d'erreur liés au clavier ou à son contrôleur pendant l'auto-test de démarrage. Ce paramètre n'a aucune incidence sur le fonctionnement du clavier lui-même si un clavier est connecté au système. F1/F2 Prompt on Error (Invite F1/F2 en cas d'erreur) (Option par défaut : Enabled [Activé]) Permet au système de s'arrêter sur les erreurs pendant l'auto-test de démarrage, ce qui permet à l'utilisateur d'observer les événements qui peuvent passer inaperçus pendant un auto-test normal. Appuyez sur pour poursuivre, ou sur pour accéder au programme de configuration du système. PRÉCAUTION : si vous désactivez cette option (Disabled), le système ne s'arrêtera pas en cas d'erreur lors de l'auto-test de démarrage. Toutes les erreurs critiques sont affichées et enregistrées dans le journal des événements du système. Option Description System Memory Size (Taille de la mémoire système) Affiche la taille de la mémoire système. System Memory Type (Type de mémoire système) Indique le type de la mémoire système. System Memory Speed (Vitesse de la mémoire système) Affiche la vitesse de la mémoire système. Video Memory (Mémoire vidéo) Affiche la taille de la mémoire vidéo. Option DescriptionUtilisation du programme de configuration du système et du 47 Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Écran Processor Settings (Paramètres du processeur) System Memory Testing (Test de la mémoire système) (Option par défaut : Enabled [Activé]) Indique si la mémoire système est testée à chaque amorçage du système. Les options disponibles sont Enabled (Activé) et Disabled (Désactivé). Memory Operating Mode (Mode de fonctionnement de la mémoire) Si une configuration de mémoire valide est installée, ce champ affiche le type de fonctionnement de la mémoire. Lorsque l'option Optimizer Mode (Mode Optimiseur) est sélectionnée, les contrôleurs de mémoire s'exécutent de façon indépendante afin d'optimiser les performances de la mémoire. Lorsque l'option Mirror Mode (Mode miroir) est sélectionnée, la mise en miroir de la mémoire est activée. Lorsque l'option Advanced ECC Mode (Fonctions ECC avancées) est sélectionnée, deux contrôleurs sont fusionnés en mode 128 bits pour former une configuration ECC multi-bits avancée. Pour plus d'informations sur les modes de fonctionnement de la mémoire, voir « Mémoire système » à la page 88. REMARQUE : l'option Spare Mode (Mode réserve) n'est pas disponible sur certains systèmes. Node Interleaving (Entrelacement de nœuds) (Option par défaut : Disabled [Désactivé]) Lorsque ce champ est défini sur Enabled (Activé), l'entrelacement de la mémoire est pris en charge si une configuration de mémoire symétrique est installée. Si le champ est désactivé (Disabled), le système prend en charge les configurations de mémoire asymétriques NUMA (Non-Uniform Memory Architecture). REMARQUE : le champ Node Interleaving (Entrelacement de nœuds) doit être défini sur Disabled (Désactivé) lors de l'utilisation du mode en miroir. Option Description 64 bits Indique si le ou les processeurs prennent en charge les extensions 64 bits. Core Speed (Vitesse du cœur) Affiche la vitesse d'horloge du processeur. Option Description48 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Bus Speed (Vitesse du bus) Affiche la vitesse de bus du processeur. Logical Processor (Processeur logique) (Option par défaut : Enabled [Activé]) Chaque noyau de processeur peut prendre en charge jusqu'à deux processeurs logiques. Si ce champ est activé (Enabled), le BIOS signale la présence des deux processeurs logiques. Si le champ est désactivé (Disabled), la surveillance du BIOS ne s'applique qu'à un seul processeur logique. Virtualization Technology (Technologie de virtualisation) (Option par défaut : Disabled [Désactivé]) Permet aux logiciels de virtualisation d'utiliser la technologie de virtualisation intégrée au processeur ou les empêche de le faire. REMARQUE : désactivez cette fonction si vous ne souhaitez pas que le système exécute un logiciel de virtualisation. Adjacent Cache Line Prefetch (Prérécupération de la ligne de mémoire cache adjacente) (Option par défaut : Enabled [Activé]) Active ou désactive l'utilisation optimale de l'accès séquentiel à la mémoire. REMARQUE : désactivez cette option pour les applications utilisant majoritairement un accès aléatoire à la mémoire. Hardware Prefetcher (Prérécupération de matériel) (Option par défaut : Enabled [Activé]) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver le service de prérécupération du matériel. Execute Disable (Désactivation de l'exécution) (Option par défaut : Enabled [Activé]) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver la fonction Execute Disable Memory Protection Technology (Désactivation de l'exécution de technologie de protection de mémoire). Number of Cores per Processor (Nombre de cœurs par processeur) (Option par défaut : All [Tout]) Si la valeur All (Tout) est sélectionnée, le nombre maximal de cœurs de chaque processeur est activé. Option DescriptionUtilisation du programme de configuration du système et du 49 Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Écran Boot Settings (Paramètres d'amorçage) Turbo Mode (Mode Turbo) (Option par défaut : Enabled [Activé]) Si la technologie Turbo Boost est prise en charge par les processeurs, cette option permet d'activer ou de désactiver le mode Turbo. C States (États C) (Option par défaut : Enabled [Activé]) Lorsque l'option Enabled (Activé) est sélectionnée, les processeurs peuvent fonctionner dans tous les états d'alimentation disponibles. Processor 1 Family -ModelStepping (Famille, modèle et numéro de série du processeur 1) Affiche la famille, le modèle et numéro de série du processeur sélectionné. Processor 2 Family -ModelStepping (Famille, modèle et numéro de série du processeur 2) Affiche la famille, le modèle et le numéro de série du processeur sélectionné. Option Description Boot Mode (Mode d'amorçage) (Option par défaut : BIOS) PRÉCAUTION : changer le mode d'amorçage peut empêcher le démarrage du système si le système d'exploitation n'a pas été installé selon le même mode d'amorçage. Si le système d'exploitation prend en charge le mode d'amorçage UEFI, vous pouvez définir cette option sur UEFI. La configuration du champ sur BIOS permet de prendre en charge les systèmes d'exploitation non UEFI. REMARQUE : la configuration du champ sur UEFI désactive les champs Boot Sequence (Séquence d'amorçage), Hard-Disk Drive Sequence (Séquence des disques durs) et USB Flash Drive Emulation Type (Type d'émulation lecteur flash USB). Option Description50 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Écran Integrated Devices (Périphériques intégrés) Boot Sequence (Séquence d'amorçage) Si l'option Boot Mode (Mode d'amorçage) est définie sur BIOS, ce champ indique l'emplacement des fichiers du système d'exploitation requis pour le démarrage du système. Si l'option Boot Mode (Mode d'amorçage) est définie sur UEFI, vous pouvez accéder à l'utilitaire de gestion d'amorçage UEFI en redémarrant le système et en appuyant sur lorsque vous y êtes invité. Hard-Disk Drive Sequence (Séquence des lecteurs de disque dur) Détermine l'ordre dans lequel le BIOS essaie de démarrer à partir des disques durs installés sur le système au cours de l'amorçage. USB Flash Drive Emulation Type (Type d'émulation du lecteur flash USB) (option par défaut : Auto) Détermine le type d'émulation pour un lecteur flash USB. L'option Hard disk (Disque dur) permet au lecteur flash USB de fonctionner comme un disque dur. L'option Auto entraîne le choix automatique du type d'émulation. Boot Sequence Retry (Réexécution de la séquence d'amorçage) (Option par défaut : Disabled [Désactivé]) Si le système ne démarre pas correctement alors que ce champ est activé, il effectue une nouvelle tentative 30 secondes plus tard. Option Description Integrated SAS Controller (Contrôleur SAS intégré) (Option par défaut : Enabled [Activé]) Active ou désactive le contrôleur de stockage intégré. User Accessible USB Ports (Ports USB accessibles à l'utilisateur) (Option par défaut : All Ports On [Tous les ports activés]) Active ou désactive les ports USB auxquels l'utilisateur peut accéder. Les options disponibles sont All Ports On (Tous les ports activés), Only Back Ports On (Ports arrière activés) et All Ports Off (Tous les ports désactivés). Option DescriptionUtilisation du programme de configuration du système et du 51 Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Internal USB Port 1 (Port USB interne 1) (Option par défaut : On [Activé]) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver le port USB interne. Internal USB Port 2 (Port USB interne 2) (Option par défaut : On [Activé]) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver le port USB interne. Embedded NIC1 and NIC2 (Cartes réseau intégrées NIC1 et NIC2) (Option par défaut : Enabled [Activé]) Active ou désactive l'interface du système d'exploitation des deux cartes réseau intégrées. (Il est également possible d'accéder aux cartes réseau via le contrôleur de gestion du système). Embedded Gb NICx (Carte réseau intégrée NICx)(Option par défaut pour la carte réseau 1 : Enabled with PXE [Activé avec PXE], Autres cartes réseau : Enabled [Activé]) Active ou désactive les cartes réseau intégrées. Les options disponibles sont Enabled (Activé), Enabled with PXE (Activé avec PXE), Enabled with iSCSI Boot (Activé avec amorçage iSCSI). La prise en charge PXE permet au système de démarrer à partir du réseau. MAC Address (Adresse Mac) Affiche l'adresse MAC de la carte réseau. OS Watchdog Timer (Temporisateur de surveillance du système d'exploitation) (Option par défaut : Disabled [Désactivé]) Définit une horloge qui surveille l'activité du système d'exploitation et aide à le restaurer s'il cesse de répondre. Lorsque l'option Enabled (Activé) est sélectionnée, le système d'exploitation est autorisé à initialiser l'horloge. Si l'option Disabled (Désactivé) est sélectionnée, l'horloge n'est pas initialisée. REMARQUE : cette fonction ne peut être utilisée qu'avec les systèmes d'exploitation prenant en charge les implémentations WDAT de la spécification ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) 3.0b. I/OAT DMA Engine (Moteur DMA I/OAT) (Option par défaut : Disabled [Désactivé]) Active ou désactive la technologie d'accélération des E/S (I/OAT). Cette fonctionnalité doit être activée uniquement si cette technologie est prise en charge à la fois par le matériel et par les logiciels. Option Description52 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Écran PCI IRQ Assignments (Affectations des IRQ PCI) Écran Serial Communication (Communications série) Embedded Video Controller (Contrôleur vidéo intégré) (Option par défaut : Enabled [Activé]) Indique la quantité totale de mémoire vidéo disponible dans le contrôleur vidéo intégré. Option Description Embedded X-treme PCI Adapter (Adaptateur PCI X-treme intégré) Utilisez les touches <+> et <-> pour associer manuellement une valeur d'IRQ à un périphérique donné, ou sélectionnez Default (Par défaut) pour permettre au BIOS de sélectionner une valeur d'IRQ au démarrage du système. Option Description Serial Communication (Communications série) (Option par défaut : On without Console Redirection [Activé sans redirection de console]) Permet d'indiquer si les périphériques de communication série (Serial Device 1 [Périphérique série 1] et Serial Device 2 [Périphérique série 2]) sont activés dans le BIOS. La redirection via la console du BIOS peut également être activée et l'adresse de port utilisée peut être spécifiée. Les options disponibles sont : On without Console Redirection (Activé sans redirection de console), On with Console Redirection via COM1 (Activé avec redirection de console via COM1), On with Console Redirection via COM2 (Activé avec redirection de console via COM2) et Off (Désactivé). Option DescriptionUtilisation du programme de configuration du système et du 53 Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Serial Port Address (Adresse de port série) (Option par défaut : Serial Device 1=COM1, Serial Device2=COM2 [Périphérique série 1= COM1, Périphérique série 2=COM2]) Permet de définir les adresses de port série correspondant aux deux périphériques série. REMARQUE : seul le périphérique série 2 peut être utilisé pour les communications Série sur LAN (SOL). Pour utiliser la redirection de console via les connectivités SOL, attribuez la même adresse de port à la redirection de console et au périphérique série. External Serial Connector (Connecteur série externe) (Option par défaut : Serial Device1 [Périphérique série 1]) Indique si le périphérique série 1 (Serial Device 1), le périphérique série 2 (Serial Device 2) ou le périphérique d'accès à distance (Remote Access Device) a accès au connecteur série externe. REMARQUE : seul le périphérique série 2 peut être utilisé pour les communications Série sur LAN (SOL). Pour utiliser la redirection de console via les connectivités SOL, attribuez la même adresse de port à la redirection de console et au périphérique série. Failsafe Baud Rate (Débit en bauds de la ligne de secours) (Option par défaut : 115200) Indique si le débit en bauds de la ligne de secours est utilisé pour la redirection de console. Le BIOS tente de déterminer automatiquement le débit en bauds. Le débit en bauds de la ligne de secours est appliqué uniquement en cas d'échec de cette tentative. Ce débit ne doit pas être modifié. Remote Terminal Type (Type du terminal distant) (Option par défaut : VT100/VT220) Permet de définir le type de terminal de la console distante, tel que VT100/VT220 ou ANSI. Redirection After Boot (Redirection après démarrage) (Option par défaut : Enabled [Activé]) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver la redirection de console du BIOS lorsque le système d'exploitation est chargé. Option Description54 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Écran Power Management (Gestion de l'alimentation) Option Description Power Management (Gestion de l'alimentation) (Option par défaut : Active Power Controller [Contrôleur de l'alimentation actif]) Les options disponibles sont : OS Control (Contrôle du système d'exploitation), Active Power Controller (Contrôleur de l'alimentation actif), Custom (Personnalisé) ou Maximum Performance (Performances maximales). Pour toutes les options autres que Custom (Personnalisé), le BIOS préconfigure les paramètres d'alimentation de cet écran comme suit : • Le paramètre OS Control (Contrôle du système d'exploitation) définit l'alimentation de l'unité centrale sur la valeur OS DBPM (Modulation biphasée différentielle du système d'exploitation), l'alimentation du ventilateur sur Minimum Power (Puissance minimale) et celle de la mémoire sur Maximum Performance (Performances maximales). Lorsque ce paramètre est actif, toutes les informations relatives aux performances des processeurs sont transmises par le BIOS du système au système d'exploitation pour les besoins du contrôle. Le système d'exploitation définit les performances des processeurs selon l'utilisation de ces derniers. • Le paramètre Active Power Controller (Contrôleur d'alimentation actif) définit l'alimentation de l'unité centrale sur la valeur System DBPM (Modulation biphasée différentielle du système), l'alimentation du ventilateur sur Minimum Power (Puissance minimale) et celle de la mémoire sur Maximum Performance (Performances maximales). Le BIOS définit les performances des processeurs selon l'utilisation de ces derniers. • Le paramètre Maximum Performance (Performances maximales) définit tous les champs sur la valeur Maximum Performance (Performances maximales). CPU Power and Performance Management (Gestion de l'alimentation et des performances de l'UC) Les options disponibles sont : OS DBPM (Modulation biphasée différentielle du système d'exploitation), System DBPM (Modulation biphasée différentielle du système), Maximum Performance (Performances maximales) ou Minimum Power (Puissance minimale).Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du 55 Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Écran System Security (Sécurité du système) Fan Power and Performance Management (Gestion de l'alimentation et des performances du ventilateur) Les options disponibles sont : Maximum Performance (Performances maximales) ou Minimum Power (Puissance minimale). Memory Power and Performance Management (Gestion de l'alimentation et des performances de la mémoire) Les options disponibles sont : Maximum Performance (Performances maximales), une fréquence spécifique ou Minimum Power (Puissance minimale). Option Description System Password (Mot de passe du système) Permet d'afficher l'état actuel de la fonction de sécurité du mot de passe et permet d'affecter et de vérifier un nouveau mot de passe du système. REMARQUE : pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation du mot de passe du système » à la page 61. Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration) Permet de limiter l'accès au programme de configuration du système à l'aide d'un mot de passe de configuration. REMARQUE : pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation du mot de passe du système » à la page 61. Password Status (État du mot de passe) (Option par défaut : Unlocked [Déverrouillé]) Lorsque Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration) est affecté et ce champ défini sur Locked (Verrouillé), le mot de passe système ne peut être ni modifié ni désactivé au démarrage du système. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation du mot de passe du système » à la page 61. Option Description56 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI TPM Security (Sécurité TPM) (Option par défaut : Off [Désactivé]) Définit les modalités de déclaration de la puce TPM (Trusted Platform Module) dans le système. Si l'option Off (Désactivé) est sélectionnée, la présence de la puce TPM n'est pas signalée au système d'exploitation. Si l'option On with Pre-boot Measurements (Activé avec les mesures de pré-amorçage) est sélectionnée, le système signale la présence de la puce TPM au système d'exploitation et conserve les mesures de pré-amorçage dans la puce pendant l'auto-test de démarrage. Si l'option On without Pre-boot Measurements (Activé sans les mesures de pré-amorçage) est sélectionnée, le système signale la présence de la puce TPM au système d'exploitation et ignore les mesures de pré-amorçage. TPM Activation (Activation de la puce TPM) (Option par défaut : No Change [Pas de changement]) Lorsque l'option Activate (Activer) est sélectionnée, la puce TPM est activée par défaut. Lorsque l'option Deactivate (Désactiver) est sélectionnée, la puce TPM est désactivée. L'état No Change (Pas de changement) ne lance aucune action. L'état de fonctionnement de la puce TPM reste inchangé (tous les paramètres utilisateur correspondants sont conservés). REMARQUE : Lorsque l'option TPM Security (Sécurité TPM) est définie sur Off (Désactivé), ce champ est accessible en lecture seule. TPM Clear (Effacement TPM) (Option par défaut : No [Non]) PRÉCAUTION : l'effacement de TPM entraîne la perte de toutes les clés de cryptage qu'il contient. Cette option empêche le démarrage du système d'exploitation et entraîne la perte de données si les clés de cryptage ne peuvent pas être restaurées. Vous devez donc impérativement créer une copie de sauvegarde des clés TPM avant d'activer cette option. Si l'option Yes (Oui) est sélectionnée, le contenu intégral des clés TPM est effacé. REMARQUE : lorsque l'option TPM Security (Sécurité TPM) est définie sur Off (Désactivé), ce champ est uniquement accessible en lecture seule. Option DescriptionUtilisation du programme de configuration du système et du 57 Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Power Button (Bouton d'alimentation) (Option par défaut : Enabled [Activé]) Si l'option Enabled (Activé) est sélectionnée, le bouton d'alimentation peut mettre le système sous tension et hors tension. Sur un système d'exploitation compatible ACPI, le système effectue un arrêt normal avant que l'alimentation soit coupée. Si vous sélectionnez Disabled (Désactivé), le bouton sert uniquement à mettre le système sous tension. NMI Button (Bouton NMI) (Option par défaut : Disabled [Désactivé]) PRÉCAUTION : appuyez sur ce bouton uniquement si un technicien de support qualifié vous demande de le faire, ou si cela est préconisé dans la documentation du système d'exploitation. Lorsque vous appuyez sur ce bouton, le système d'exploitation s'arrête et affiche un écran de diagnostic. Permet d'activer ou de désactiver la fonction NMI. AC Power Recovery (Restauration de l'alimentation secteur) (Option par défaut : Last [Dernier]) Détermine le comportement du système lors du rétablissement de l'alimentation secteur. L'option Last (Dernier) indique que le système doit revenir au même état qu'avant la coupure d'alimentation. Avec l'option On (Marche), le système démarre dès que l'alimentation est rétablie. Avec l'option Off (Éteint), le système s'arrête dès que l'alimentation est rétablie. AC Power Recovery Delay (Délai de restauration de l'alimentation secteur) Option par défaut : Immediate (Immédiat) Détermine le délai au bout duquel le redémarrage du système a lieu après restauration de l'alimentation. Les options disponibles sont : Immediate (Immédiat), Random (Aléatoire), de 30 à 240 secondes pour iDRAC ou de 45 à 240 secondes pour BMC, ou User Defined (Défini par l'utilisateur). User Defined Delay (Délai défini par l'utilisateur) Détermine le délai de restauration de l'alimentation secteur défini par l'utilisateur. Option Description58 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Écran Exit (Quitter) Appuyez sur <Échap> pour quitter le programme de configuration du système. L'écran Exit (Quitter) affiche les options suivantes : • Save Changes and Exit (Enregistrer les modifications et quitter) • Discard Changes and Exit (Annuler les modifications et quitter) • Return to Setup (Retourner au programme de configuration) Accès au Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI REMARQUE : les systèmes d'exploitation doivent être compatibles avec une version UEFI 64 bits (par exemple, Microsoft ® Windows Server ® 2008 version x64) pour pouvoir être installés à partir du mode d'amorçage UEFI. L'installation des systèmes d'exploitation DOS et 32 bits est possible uniquement à partir du mode d'amorçage BIOS. REMARQUE : l'option Boot Mode (Mode d'amorçage) doit être définie sur UEFI dans le programme de configuration du système pour permettre l'accès au Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI. Le Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI permet d'effectuer les opérations suivantes : • ajouter, supprimer et organiser les options d'amorçage • accéder au programme de configuration du système et aux options d'amorçage BIOS sans avoir à redémarrer 1 Allumez ou redémarrez votre système. 2 Appuyez sur dès l'apparition du message suivant : = UEFI Boot Manager (Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI) REMARQUE : le système ne répond pas tant que le clavier USB n'est pas actif. Si le système d'exploitation commence à se charger alors que vous n'avez pas encore appuyé sur , attendez que le système finisse de démarrer, puis redémarrez-le et réessayez.Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du 59 Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Utilisation des touches de navigation du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Écran UEFI Boot Manager (Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI) Touches Action Flèche vers le haut Permet de revenir au champ précédent et de le sélectionner. Flèche vers le bas Permet d'accéder au champ suivant et de le sélectionner. Espace, , <+>, <–> Fait passer le curseur d'un paramètre à un autre dans un champ. <Échap> Actualise l'écran du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI (s'il s'agit de la première page) ou revient à l'écran précédent. Affiche l'aide sur le Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI. Option Description Continue (Continuer) Le système tente d'effectuer successivement l'amorçage sur différents périphériques en commençant par le premier dans l'ordre d'amorçage. En cas d'échec de l'amorçage, le système passe au périphérique suivant dans l'ordre d'amorçage jusqu'à ce que le démarrage réussisse ou qu'aucune autre option ne soit disponible. (Options d'amorçage) Affiche la liste des options d'amorçage disponibles (marquées par des astérisques). Choisissez l'option d'amorçage à utiliser, puis appuyez sur . REMARQUE : en cas de remplacement à chaud d'un périphérique d'amorçage, appuyez sur <Échap> pour actualiser la liste des options d'amorçage. UEFI Boot Settings (Paramètres d'amorçage UEFI) Permet d'ajouter, de supprimer, d'activer ou de désactiver les options d'amorçage, de modifier la séquence d'amorçage ou de lancer une option d'amorçage à exécution ponctuelle. System Utilities (Utilitaires du système) Permet d'accéder au programme de configuration du système, aux services système (USC), aux diagnostics et aux options d'amorçage au niveau du BIOS.60 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Écran UEFI Boot settings (Paramètres d'amorçage UEFI) Écran System Utilities (Utilitaires du système) Option Description Add Boot Option (Ajouter une option d'amorçage) Permet d'ajouter une nouvelle option d'amorçage. Delete Boot Option (Supprimer une option d'amorçage) Permet de supprimer une option d'amorçage existante. Enable/Disable Boot Option (Activer/désactiver l'option d'amorçage) Active ou désactive une option dans la liste des options d'amorçage. Change Boot Order (Modifier la séquence d'amorçage) Modifie l'ordre de la liste des options d'amorçage. One-Time Boot from File (Amorçage ponctuel à partir d'un fichier) Permet de définir une option d'amorçage utilisable une seule fois qui ne figure pas dans la liste des options d'amorçage. Option Description System Setup (Configuration du système) Permet d'accéder au programme de configuration du système sans redémarrage. System Services (Services système) Permet de redémarrer le système et d'accéder au contrôleur pour exécuter des utilitaires tels que les diagnostics du système. BIOS Boot Manager (Gestionnaire d'amorçage du BIOS) Donne accès à la liste des options d'amorçage au niveau du BIOS sans redémarrage. Cette option vous permet de basculer aisément en mode d'amorçage BIOS lorsque vous devez effectuer le démarrage à partir d'un périphérique contenant un système d'exploitation non compatible avec UEFI, tel qu'un support DOS amorçable contenant un logiciel de diagnostics. Reboot System (Redémarrer le système) Redémarre le système.Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du 61 Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Fonctionnalités de mot de passe du système et de mot de passe de configuration REMARQUE : en cas d'oubli d'un mot de passe, voir la section « Désactivation d'un mot de passe oublié » à la page 162. À la livraison de l'ordinateur, la fonction de protection du système par mot de passe n'est pas activée dans le BIOS. PRÉCAUTION : les fonctionnalités de mot de passe assurent la sécurité de base des données de votre système. N'importe qui peut accéder aux données enregistrées sur votre système si celui-ci est en cours de fonctionnement et sans surveillance. Utilisation du mot de passe du système Lorsqu'un mot de passe du système est défini, vous devez l'entrer après le démarrage du système. Seules les personnes disposant de ce mot de passe peuvent accéder à toutes les fonctions du système. Attribution d'un mot de passe du système Avant d'attribuer un mot de passe à un système, accédez au programme de configuration du système et vérifiez l'option System Password (Mot de passe du système). Si un mot de passe est attribué, l'option System Password (Mot de passe du système) est définie sur Enabled (Activé). Si l'option Password Status (État du mot de passe) est définie sur Unlocked (Déverrouillé), vous pouvez modifier le mot de passe du système. Si l'option Locked (Verrouillé) est sélectionnée, vous ne pouvez pas modifier le mot de passe du système. La désactivation du cavalier de mot de passe, situé sur la carte système, définit l'option System Password (Mot de passe du système) sur Disabled (Désactivé), ce qui vous empêche de modifier ou de saisir un nouveau mot de passe du système.62 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Si aucun mot de passe du système n'est attribué et si le cavalier de mot de passe de la carte système est en position d'activation, l'option System Password (Mot de passe du système) est définie sur Not Enabled (Non activé) et le Password Status (État du mot de passe) est Unlocked (Déverrouillé). Pour attribuer un mot de passe du système : 1 Vérifiez que l'option Password Status (État du mot de passe) est Unlocked (Déverrouillé). 2 Sélectionnez l'option System Password (Mot de passe du système), puis appuyez sur . 3 Saisissez votre nouveau mot de passe du système. Votre mot de passe peut contenir jusqu'à 32 caractères. Lorsque vous tapez le mot de passe, des espaces réservés apparaissent dans le champ. L'attribution de mot de passe n'est pas sensible à la casse. Pour supprimer un caractère, appuyez sur la touche ou sur la touche fléchée vers la gauche. REMARQUE : pour quitter le champ sans attribuer de mot de passe, appuyez sur pour passer à un autre champ ou sur <Échap> à tout moment avant d'effectuer l'étape 5. 4 Appuyez sur . 5 Pour confirmer le mot de passe, saisissez-le une seconde fois, puis appuyez sur . L'option System Password (Mot de passe du système) indique alors Enabled (Activé). Quittez le programme de configuration du système et commencez à utiliser votre système. 6 Vous pouvez redémarrer le système immédiatement pour activer la protection par mot de passe ou continuer à travailler. REMARQUE : la protection par mot de passe ne prend effet que lorsque vous redémarrez le système.Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du 63 Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Protection du système à l'aide d'un mot de passe REMARQUE : si vous avez attribué un mot de passe de configuration (voir « Utilisation du mot de passe de configuration » à la page 64), le système l'accepte également comme mot de passe du système. Lorsque l'option Password Status (État du mot de passe) indique Unlocked (Déverrouillé), vous avez la possibilité de laisser la protection par mot de passe activée ou de la désactiver. Pour laisser la protection par mot de passe activée : 1 Démarrez le système ou redémarrez-le en appuyant sur . 2 Saisissez le mot de passe, puis appuyez sur . Pour désactiver la protection par mot de passe : 1 Démarrez le système ou redémarrez-le en appuyant sur . 2 Saisissez le mot de passe, puis appuyez sur . Si l'option Password Status (État du mot de passe) indique Locked (Verrouillé), vous devez saisir le mot de passe, puis appuyer sur lorsque le système vous y invite pour redémarrer l'ordinateur. Si vous entrez un mot de passe erroné, le système affiche un message et vous invite à l'entrer de nouveau. Vous disposez de trois tentatives pour entrer le mot de passe correct. Après une troisième tentative infructueuse, le système affiche un message d'erreur indiquant qu'il est arrêté et qu'il doit être éteint manuellement à l'aide du bouton d'alimentation. Même une fois le système arrêté et redémarré, le message d'erreur continue à s'afficher tant que vous n'avez pas entré le mot de passe approprié. REMARQUE : vous pouvez utiliser l'option Password Status (État du mot de passe) conjointement avec les options System Password (Mot de passe du système) et Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration) pour mieux protéger le système contre toute modification non autorisée.64 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Désactivation du mot de passe du système Si le mot de passe du système est déjà défini, vous pouvez le désactiver soit en le tapant au cours de l'auto-test de démarrage après avoir appuyé sur , soit en accédant au programme de configuration du système et en appuyant à deux reprises sur la touche , une fois dans le menu du mot de passe du système. Modification d'un mot de passe du système 1 Pour accéder au programme de configuration du système, appuyez sur pendant l'auto-test de démarrage. 2 Sélectionnez l'écran System Security (Sécurité du système). 3 Vérifiez que l'option Password Status (État du mot de passe) est définie sur Unlocked (Non verrouillé). 4 Tapez le nouveau mot de passe du système dans les deux champs du mot de passe. Le champ System Password (Mot de passe du système) indique Not Enabled (Non activé) si le mot de passe est supprimé. Utilisation du mot de passe de configuration Attribution d'un mot de passe de configuration Vous ne pouvez attribuer un mot de passe de configuration que si l'option Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration) indique Not Enabled (Non activé). Pour attribuer un mot de passe de configuration, sélectionnez l'option Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration), puis appuyez sur la touche <+> ou <–>. Le système vous invite à entrer et à confirmer le mot de passe. REMARQUE : le mot de passe de configuration peut être identique au mot de passe du système. Si les deux mots de passe sont différents, le mot de passe de configuration peut également être utilisé à la place du mot de passe du système. En revanche, le mot de passe du système ne peut pas être utilisé à la place du mot de passe de configuration. Votre mot de passe peut contenir jusqu'à 32 caractères. Lorsque vous tapez le mot de passe, des espaces réservés apparaissent dans le champ.Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du 65 Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI L'attribution de mot de passe n'est pas sensible à la casse. Pour supprimer un caractère, appuyez sur la touche ou sur la touche fléchée vers la gauche. Une fois le mot de passe confirmé, l'option Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration) indique Enabled (Activé). La prochaine fois que vous entrerez dans le programme de configuration du système, le système vous demandera d'entrer le mot de passe de configuration. La modification de l'option Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration) prend effet immédiatement (il n'est pas nécessaire de redémarrer le système). Utilisation du système avec un mot de passe de configuration activé Si l'option Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration) indique Enabled (Activé), vous devez entrer ce mot de passe avant de modifier la plupart des options de configuration du système. Si vous n'entrez pas le bon mot de passe après trois tentatives, vous pourrez afficher les écrans de configuration du système, mais vous ne pourrez y apporter aucune modification. La seule exception est la suivante : si l'option System Password (Mot de passe du système) n'est ni définie sur Enabled (Activé) ni verrouillée via l'option Password Status (État du mot de passe), vous pouvez attribuer un mot de passe du système. Vous ne pouvez ni désactiver ni modifier un mot de passe du système existant. REMARQUE : il est possible d'utiliser conjointement les options Password Status (État du mot de passe) et Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration) pour empêcher toute modification du mot de passe du système non autorisée. Suppression ou modification d'un mot de passe de configuration 1 Accédez au programme de configuration du système, puis sélectionnez l'option System Security (Sécurité du système). 2 Sélectionnez l'option Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration), puis appuyez sur pour accéder à la fenêtre du mot de passe de configuration. Appuyez sur deux fois pour effacer le mot de passe de configuration existant. Le paramètre prend la valeur Not Enabled (Non activé). 3 Si vous souhaitez attribuer un nouveau mot de passe de configuration, suivez les étapes décrites à la section « Attribution d'un mot de passe de configuration » à la page 64.66 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Gestion intégrée du système L'utilitaire intégré Lifecycle Controller permet d'effectuer les tâches de gestion des systèmes depuis un environnement intégré tout au long du cycle de vie du serveur. Ce contrôleur peut être lancé au cours de la séquence d'amorçage. Il peut fonctionner indépendamment du système d'exploitation. REMARQUE : certaines configurations de plate-forme ne prennent pas en charge l'ensemble des fonctionnalités du contrôleur. Les fonctions suivantes de l'utilitaire Lifecycle Controller sont prises en charge sur les systèmes dotés du contrôleur BMC (Baseboard Management Controller) : • Installation d'un système d'exploitation • Exécution de diagnostics de validation de la mémoire, des périphériques d'E/S, des processeurs, des disques physiques et d'autres périphériques Lorsqu'une carte iDRAC6 Express (en option) est installée, le contrôleur offre les fonctionnalités supplémentaires suivantes : • Téléchargement et application de mises à jour du micrologiciel • Configuration du matériel et du micrologiciel Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration du contrôleur, la configuration du matériel et du micrologiciel et le déploiement du système d'exploitation, voir le document Lifecycle Controller User Guide (Guide d'utilisation de Lifecycle Controller), disponible sur le site Web du support de Dell à l'adresse suivante : support.dell.com/manuals. Configuration du contrôleur BMC REMARQUE : si une carte iDRAC6 Express est installée sur le système, l'utilitaire BMC (Baseboard Management Controller) est remplacé par l'utilitaire iDRAC6. Le contrôleur BMC permet de configurer, de surveiller et de restaurer les systèmes à distance. Il offre les fonctionnalités suivantes : • Utilise la carte réseau intégrée du système • Consigne les incidents et alertes SNMP • Donne accès au journal d'événements du système et à l'état des capteursUtilisation du programme de configuration du système et du 67 Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI • Permet de contrôler les fonctions du système, y compris la mise sous tension et hors tension • Fonctionne indépendamment de l'état d'alimentation du système ou du système d'exploitation • Redirige la console de texte pour la configuration du système, les utilitaires à interface texte et les consoles du système d'exploitation REMARQUE : pour accéder à distance au contrôleur BMC à l'aide de la carte réseau intégrée, vous devez connecter le réseau à la carte réseau intégrée NIC1. Pour en savoir plus sur l'utilisation du contrôleur BMC, voir la documentation de ce périphérique et celle des applications de gestion de systèmes. Accès au module de configuration BMC 1 Allumez ou redémarrez votre système. 2 Appuyez sur lorsque vous y êtes invité après l'auto-test de démarrage. Si le système d'exploitation commence à se charger alors que vous n'avez pas encore appuyé sur , laissez-le terminer, puis redémarrez et réessayez. Utilitaire de configuration iDRAC L'utilitaire de configuration iDRAC est un environnement de configuration de pré-amorçage vous permettant d'afficher et de définir les paramètres de la carte iDRAC6 (en option) et du serveur géré. L'utilitaire de configuration iDRAC permet de : • configurer, activer ou désactiver le réseau local iDRAC6 via le port de carte iDRAC6 Enterprise dédié ou les cartes réseau intégrées • activer ou désactiver l'interface IPMI sur le réseau LAN • activer une destination d'interruption d'événements sur plate-forme (PET) du réseau local • connecter ou déconnecter les périphériques de média virtuel • modifier le nom d'utilisateur et le mot de passe administrateur et gérer les privilèges des utilisateurs • afficher ou effacer les messages du journal des événements système (SEL)68 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Pour des informations supplémentaires sur l'utilisation de la carte iDRAC6, voir la documentation de ce périphérique et celle des applications de gestion de systèmes. Accès à l'utilitaire de configuration iDRAC 1 Allumez ou redémarrez votre système. 2 Appuyez sur lorsque vous y êtes invité pendant l'auto-test de démarrage. Si le système d'exploitation commence à se charger alors que vous n'avez pas encore appuyé sur , attendez qu'il finisse de démarrer, puis redémarrez-le et réessayez.Installation des composants du système 69 Installation des composants du système Outils recommandés • Clé du verrouillage à clé du système • Tournevis cruciformes n° 1 et n° 2 • Tournevis Torx T10 • Bracelet antistatique À l'intérieur du système PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit.70 Installation des composants du système Figure 3-1. À l'intérieur du système 1 ventilateur 2 disques durs internes (2) 3 carte de montage pour carte d'extension 4 baies d'alimentation (2) 5 carénage de refroidissement 6 dissipateur de chaleur/processeur (2) 7 barrettes de mémoire (8) 8 ventilateurs du système (4) 9 Fond de panier SAS 10 disques durs (12) 5 4 8 9 10 7 1 3 6 2Installation des composants du système 71 Cadre avant (en option) Retrait du cadre avant 1 Déverrouillez le cadre à l'aide de la clé du système. 2 Soulevez le loquet d'éjection situé près du verrou. 3 Faites pivoter l'extrémité gauche du cadre pour écarter celui-ci du panneau avant. 4 Décrochez l'extrémité droite du cadre, puis retirez le cadre du système. Figure 3-2. Retrait et installation du cadre avant Installation du cadre avant 1 Accrochez l'extrémité droite du cadre au châssis. 2 Fixez l'extrémité libre du cadre sur le système. 3 Fixez le cadre à l'aide du verrouillage à clé. Voir Figure 3-2. 1 loquet de dégagement 2 verrou 3 cadre 4 languette de la charnière 3 2 1 472 Installation des composants du système Ouverture et fermeture du système AVERTISSEMENT : demandez toujours de l'aide avant de soulever le système. N'essayez pas de le soulever seul, car vous risqueriez de vous blesser. PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. Ouverture du système 1 Mettez le système et les périphériques connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur et des périphériques. 2 Tournez le verrou du loquet de dégagement, situé sur le capot du système, dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre pour le déverrouiller. Voir Figure 3-3. 3 Soulevez le loquet situé sur la partie supérieure du système, puis faites glisser le capot vers l'arrière. 4 Saisissez le capot de chaque côté et soulevez-le pour le retirer du système. Voir Figure 3-3.Installation des composants du système 73 Figure 3-3. Ouverture et fermeture du système Fermeture du système 1 Soulevez le loquet du capot du système. 2 Placez le capot sur le châssis en le décalant légèrement vers l'arrière du système de façon à aligner les deux crochets du bord arrière du capot sur les languettes du bord arrière du châssis. Voir Figure 3-3. 3 Faites glisser le capot vers l'avant du châssis, puis appuyez sur le loquet. 4 Tournez le verrou du loquet de dégagement dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre pour fermer le capot. 5 Rebranchez le système et les périphériques sur leurs prises secteur, puis allumez le système. 1 loquet du capot du système 2 verrou du loquet de dégagement 1 274 Installation des composants du système Carénage de refroidissement Le carénage de refroidissement dirige le flux d'air généré par les ventilateurs vers les processeurs et les barrettes de mémoire du système. Retrait du carénage de refroidissement PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. 2 Saisissez et soulevez délicatement le carénage pour le retirer de la carte système. Voir Figure 3-4. Figure 3-4. Installation et retrait du carénage de ventilation 1 baies de ventilateur numérotées 2 carénage de refroidissement 2 1Installation des composants du système 75 Installation du carénage de refroidissement PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Alignez le carénage en prenant comme repère le centre des baies de ventilateur numérotées. 2 Appuyez sur le carénage de refroidissement pour l'insérer dans le châssis. 3 Fermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. 4 Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. Disques durs Votre système prend en charge jusqu'à douze disques durs de 3,5 pouces (SAS ou SATA) dans des supports de lecteurs enfichables à chaud de 3,5 pouces. Les disques durs sont montés par l'avant et connectés au fond de panier SAS par les supports de lecteur. Voir Figure 3-1. Retrait d'un cache de disque dur PRÉCAUTION : Pour assurer un refroidissement correct du système, vous devez installer un cache dans toutes les baies de disque dur vacantes. 1 Le cas échéant, retirez le cadre avant. Voir « Retrait du cadre avant » à la page 71. 2 Saisissez l'avant du cache de disque dur, appuyez sur le levier de dégagement situé sur le côté droit, puis extrayez le cache de la baie de lecteur. Voir Figure 3-5. 76 Installation des composants du système Figure 3-5. Retrait ou installation d'un cache de disque dur Installation d'un cache de disque dur Alignez le cache de disque dur sur la baie de lecteur, puis insérez-le dans la baie jusqu'à ce que le levier de dégagement s'enclenche. Voir Figure 3-5. Retrait d'un disque dur remplaçable à chaud 1 Le cas échéant, retirez le cadre avant. Voir « Retrait du cadre avant » à la page 71. 2 À l'aide du logiciel de gestion RAID, préparez le disque dur en vue de son retrait. Attendez que les voyants de disque dur situés sur le support de lecteur indiquent que le lecteur peut être retiré en toute sécurité. Voir « Codes des voyants des disques durs » à la page 14. Si le lecteur était en ligne, le voyant d'activité/panne vert clignote pendant sa mise hors tension. Une fois les deux voyants éteints, vous pouvez retirer le lecteur. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton de dégagement, puis activez la poignée pour déverrouiller le lecteur. Voir Figure 3-6. 4 Extrayez le disque dur de la baie de lecteur. 5 Insérez un cache de disque dur dans la baie vacante. Voir « Installation d'un cache de disque dur » à la page 76. PRÉCAUTION : pour assurer un refroidissement correct du système, vous devez installer un cache de disque dur dans toutes les baies de disque dur vacantes. 1 cache de disque dur 2 levier de dégagement 1 2Installation des composants du système 77 Figure 3-6. Retrait et installation d'un disque dur remplaçable à chaud Installation d'un disque dur remplaçable à chaud PRÉCAUTION : utilisez uniquement des disques durs testés et homologués pour l'utilisation avec le fond de panier SAS/SATA. PRÉCAUTION : lorsque vous installez un disque dur, assurez-vous que les disques adjacents sont complètement installés. Si vous insérez un support de disque dur et tentez d'en verrouiller la poignée alors qu'un support de disque dur voisin n'est que partiellement installé, vous risquez d'endommager le ressort de protection de ce dernier et de le rendre inutilisable. PRÉCAUTION : pour éviter toute perte de données, assurez-vous que votre système d'exploitation prend en charge l'installation de lecteurs remplaçables à chaud. Voir la documentation fournie avec le système d'exploitation. PRÉCAUTION : certaines configurations système ne prennent pas en charge l'association de disques durs SATA et SAS. 1 Le cas échéant, retirez le cadre avant. Voir « Retrait du cadre avant » à la page 71. 2 Si un cache de disque est présent dans la baie, retirez-le. Voir « Retrait d'un cache de disque dur » à la page 75. 1 bouton de dégagement 2 poignée du support de disque dur 1 278 Installation des composants du système 3 Appuyez sur le bouton de dégagement qui se trouve à l'avant du support de disque. 4 Le levier du support étant ouvert, insérez le disque dur dans la baie de lecteur jusqu'à ce qu'il touche le fond de panier. Voir Figure 3-6. 5 Refermez la poignée afin de verrouiller le lecteur. Retrait d'un disque dur installé dans un support Retirez les vis situées sur les rails coulissants du support de disque dur, puis retirez le disque dur du support. Voir Figure 3-7. Figure 3-7. Installation d'un disque dur remplaçable à chaud dans un support de disque dur 1 disque dur 2 voyant SAS/SATA 3 support de disque 4 vis (4) 2 1 3 4Installation des composants du système 79 Installation d'un disque dur dans un support de disque dur 1 Insérez le disque dur dans le support, connecteur vers l'arrière. Voir Figure 3-7. 2 Alignez les trous du disque dur sur ceux du support de disque dur. Si la position est correcte, l'arrière du disque dur s'aligne sur l'arrière du support. 3 Fixez le disque dur sur le support à l'aide des quatre vis. Disques durs internes Votre système prend en charge deux disques durs internes (SAS ou SATA) câblés de 2,5 pouces. Les disques durs internes sont connectés au fond de panier SAS. Le système d'exploitation est installé sur les disques durs internes en configuration RAID 1. Pour obtenir des informations sur la configuration RAID, voir la documentation RAID, à l'adresse : support.dell.com/manuals. Retrait d'une baie de disque dur interne PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Mettez le système et les périphériques connectés hors tension, débranchez le système de la prise secteur, puis déconnectez-le de tous les périphériques. 2 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. 3 Soulevez le loquet situé sur la baie de disque dur interne et soulevez-la pour l'extraire du système. Voir Figure 3-8.80 Installation des composants du système Figure 3-8. Retrait et installation d'une baie de disque dur interne 1 disques durs internes (2) 2 loquet de dégagement 3 baie de disque dur interne 4 support 2 3 1 4Installation des composants du système 81 Installation d'une baie de disque dur interne PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Mettez le système et les périphériques connectés hors tension, débranchez le système de la prise secteur, puis déconnectez-le de tous les périphériques. 2 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. 3 Soulevez le loquet situé sur la baie de disque dur interne et alignez la baie sur le support. 4 Faites pivoter le loquet pour verrouiller la baie. Retrait d'un disque dur interne d'une baie de disque dur interne Retirez les vis situées sur les côtés de la baie de disque dur interne et faites glisser le disque dur hors de la baie. Voir Figure 3-9.82 Installation des composants du système Figure 3-9. Retrait et installation d'un disque dur interne d'une baie de disque dur interne *Les vis sont fournies avec les disques durs commandés auprès de Dell. Installation d'un disque dur dans une baie 1 Insérez le disque dur dans la baie de disque dur interne, connecteur vers l'arrière jusqu'à ce qu'il s'aligne sur l'arrière de la baie. Voir Figure 3-9. 2 Fixez le disque dur sur le support du disque dur à l'aide des quatre vis. 1 baie de disque dur interne 2 loquet de dégagement 3 vis (4) * 4 disque dur interne 3 1 2 4Installation des composants du système 83 Ventilateurs Votre système contient quatre ventilateurs de refroidissement bimoteurs. Ils assurent le refroidissement du processeur, des cartes PCI et des barrettes de mémoire. Votre système contient également un ventilateur à moteur unique pour refroidir les blocs d'alimentation. REMARQUE : le retrait et l'installation à chaud des ventilateurs ne sont pas pris en charge. REMARQUE : en cas de problème dû à un ventilateur spécifique, vous pourrez facilement identifier et remplacer l'élément défectueux en recherchant le numéro indiqué par le logiciel de gestion du système dans l'ensemble ventilateur. Retrait d'un ventilateur AVERTISSEMENT : le ventilateur peut continuer à tourner pendant un certain temps après l'arrêt du système. Attendez que le ventilateur arrête de tourner avant de le retirer du système. AVERTISSEMENT : n'utilisez pas le système sans les ventilateurs. PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez le système de la prise de courant. 2 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. 3 Le cas échéant, retirez le carénage de refroidissement. Voir « Retrait du carénage de refroidissement » à la page 74. 4 Débranchez le câble d'alimentation du ventilateur connecté à la carte système. Voir Figure 3-10. REMARQUE : pour retirer les ventilateurs 3 et 4, retirez d'abord la carte contrôleur de stockage. Voir « Retrait de la carte contrôleur de stockage » à la page 103.84 Installation des composants du système REMARQUE : pour retirer le ventilateur 5, retirez la baie et le support de disque dur interne. Voir « Retrait d'une baie de disque dur interne » à la page 79. 5 Appuyez sur la patte de dégagement tout en maintenant les bords du ventilateur, puis soulevez celui-ci dans un mouvement rectiligne pour l'extraire de son support. Voir Figure 3-10. Figure 3-10. Retrait et installation d'un ventilateur 1 ventilateurs (5) 2 patte de dégagement 3 cordon d'alimentation du ventilateur 1 2 3Installation des composants du système 85 Réinstallation d'un ventilateur PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Alignez le ventilateur en tournant le côté muni du câble d'alimentation vers l'arrière du système. 2 Insérez le ventilateur dans l'ensemble ventilateur jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche à fond. Voir Figure 3-10. 3 Branchez le câble d'alimentation du ventilateur au connecteur correspondant de la carte système. 4 Remplacez d'abord le support et la baie du disque dur interne. Voir « Installation d'une baie de disque dur interne » à la page 81. 5 Faites passer le câble d'alimentation par les guides du châssis. 6 Réinstallez le carénage de refroidissement. Voir « Installation du carénage de refroidissement » à la page 75. 7 Fermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. 8 Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. Blocs d'alimentation Le système prend en charge deux blocs d'alimentation redondants de 750 W. REMARQUE : la puissance maximale (en watts) est indiquée sur l'étiquette du bloc d'alimentation. Si deux blocs sont installés, le second est utilisé comme bloc d'alimentation redondant remplaçable à chaud. En mode redondant, le système répartit la charge de la puissance disponible entre les deux blocs d'alimentation pour une plus grande efficacité. Si vous retirez un bloc d'alimentation alors que le système est sous tension, la totalité de la puissance disponible est utilisée par le bloc d'alimentation restant.86 Installation des composants du système PRÉCAUTION : pour assurer un refroidissement correct du système vous devez installer un cache de bloc d'alimentation sur la baie PS2. Voir « Installation d'un cache de bloc d'alimentation » à la page 88. REMARQUE : si le système est doté d'un seul bloc d'alimentation, celui-ci doit être installé dans la baie PS1. Retrait d'un bloc d'alimentation PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. PRÉCAUTION : le système ne peut fonctionner normalement que si au moins un bloc d'alimentation est installé. Ne retirez et n'installez qu'un seul bloc d'alimentation à la fois dans un système sous tension. 1 Débranchez le câble d'alimentation de la source d'alimentation électrique. 2 Débranchez le câble d'alimentation du bloc d'alimentation, puis retirez les câbles du système des bandes Velcro. REMARQUE : vous devrez peut-être débloquer et relever le bras de gestion des câbles en option, s'il gêne le retrait du bloc d'alimentation. Pour plus d'informations sur le bras de gestion des câbles, voir la documentation du système relative au rack. 3 Appuyez sur le loquet de dégagement de la batterie, puis retirez le bloc d'alimentation du châssis. Voir Figure 3-11. REMARQUE : installez un cache à la place du bloc d'alimentation si vous ne réinstallez pas celui-ci. Voir « Installation d'un cache de bloc d'alimentation » à la page 88.Installation des composants du système 87 Figure 3-11. Retrait et installation d'un bloc d'alimentation Installation d'un bloc d'alimentation 1 Vérifiez que les deux blocs d'alimentation sont de même type et qu'ils ont la même puissance maximale de sortie. REMARQUE : la puissance maximale de sortie (en watts) est indiquée sur l'étiquette du bloc d'alimentation. 2 Insérez le nouveau bloc d'alimentation dans le châssis jusqu'à ce qu'il s'emboîte complètement et que le loquet de dégagement s'enclenche. Voir Figure 3-11. REMARQUE : si vous avez débloqué le bras de gestion des câbles à l'étape 2 de la procédure précédente, verrouillez-le à nouveau. Pour plus d'informations sur le bras de gestion des câbles, voir la documentation du système relative au rack. 3 Branchez le câble d'alimentation sur le bloc d'alimentation et branchez son autre extrémité sur une prise électrique. 1 bloc d'alimentation 2 poignée du bloc d'alimentation 3 bande Velcro 4 loquet de dégagement 1 3 2 488 Installation des composants du système PRÉCAUTION : lorsque vous branchez le câble d'alimentation, fixez-le à l'aide de la bande Velcro. REMARQUE : après avoir installé, remplacé ou ajouté à chaud un nouveau bloc d'alimentation dans un système à deux blocs d'alimentation, patientez quelques secondes pour que le système reconnaisse le bloc d'alimentation et détermine son état. Le voyant du bloc d'alimentation s'allume en vert si ce dernier fonctionne normalement (voir Figure 1-5). Retrait d'un cache de bloc d'alimentation Si vous installez un second bloc d'alimentation, tirez le cache installé dans la baie PS2 pour l'extraire. PRÉCAUTION : dans le cas d'une configuration redondante, vous devez installer un cache dans la baie de bloc d'alimentation PS2 pour assurer un refroidissement correct du système. Retirez le cache uniquement si vous installez un second bloc d'alimentation. Installation d'un cache de bloc d'alimentation REMARQUE : le cache de bloc d'alimentation ne doit être installé que dans la baie d'alimentation PS2. Pour installer le cache de bloc d'alimentation, alignez-le avec la baie d'alimentation et insérez-le dans le châssis jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche. Mémoire système Le système prend en charge des barrettes de mémoire DIMM DDR3 à registres (RDIMM) ou des barrettes de mémoire DIMM ECC sans tampon (UDIMM). Les barrettes de mémoire DIMM à simple ou double rangée de connexions peuvent être cadencées à 1 067 ou 1 333 MHz, et les barrettes à quadruple rangée à 1 067 MHz. Le système comporte huit supports de mémoire, répartis en deux jeux de quatre (un jeu pour chaque processeur). Chaque jeu de quatre supports est organisé en trois canaux. Deux barrettes de mémoire DIMM pour le canal 0 et une pour les canaux 1 et 2. Le premier support de chaque canal est identifié par des leviers de dégagement de couleur blanche.Installation des composants du système 89 La capacité de mémoire maximale prise en charge par votre système varie en fonction du type et de la taille des barrettes de mémoire utilisées : • Les barrettes de mémoire RDIMM à simple, double et quadruple rangée de connexions de 1, 2, 4, 8 et 16 Go sont prises en charge jusqu'à concurrence de 128 Go. • Les barrettes de mémoire UDIMM de 1 Go et 2 Go sont prises en charge jusqu'à concurrence de 16 Go. Consignes générales pour l'installation des barrettes de mémoire Pour optimiser les performances du système, observez les consignes générales suivantes lorsque vous configurez la mémoire système. REMARQUE : le non-respect de ces consignes peut empêcher le système de démarrer ou de générer une sortie vidéo. • Les barrettes de mémoire RDIMM et UDIMM ne peuvent pas être associées. • À l'exception des canaux vacants, tous les canaux comportant des barrettes de mémoire doivent avoir la même configuration. • La configuration des barrettes de mémoire doit être identique pour chaque processeur. • Des barrettes de mémoire de tailles différentes peuvent être associées dans une configuration A1-A4 ou B1-B4 (par exemple, 2 Go et 4 Go), mais tous les canaux utilisés doivent avoir une configuration identique. • En mode Optimiseur, les barrettes de mémoire sont installées dans l'ordre numérique des logements, en commençant par A1 ou B1. • Pour la mise en miroir de la mémoire ou le mode Fonctions ECC avancées, le canal le plus éloigné du processeur n'est pas utilisé et les barrettes de mémoire sont installées à partir du canal A1 ou B1, suivi du canal A2 ou B2. • Le mode Fonctions ECC avancées nécessite des barrettes de mémoire utilisant des largeurs de périphérique DRAM x4 ou x8.90 Installation des composants du système • Pour chaque canal, la vitesse de la mémoire dépend de la configuration de la mémoire : – Pour les barrettes de mémoire à simple ou double rangée de connexions : • Une configuration à une barrette de mémoire par canal prend en charge jusqu'à 1 333 MHz. • Une configuration à deux barrettes de mémoire par canal prend en charge jusqu'à 1 067 MHz. – Pour les barrettes de mémoire à quadruple rangée de connexions : • Une configuration à une barrette de mémoire par canal prend en charge jusqu'à 1 067 MHz. • Les configurations à deux barrettes de mémoire par canal sont limitées à 800 MHz, indépendamment de la vitesse des barrettes. • Si des barrettes de mémoire à quadruple rangée de connexions sont associées à des barrettes à simple ou double rangée, elles doivent être installées dans les supports munis de leviers de dégagement blancs. • Si les vitesses des barrettes de mémoire installées sont différentes, elles fonctionnent à la vitesse de la ou des barrettes de mémoire les plus lentes. Recommandations spécifiques à chaque mode Trois canaux de mémoire sont alloués à chaque processeur. Le nombre de canaux utilisés et les configurations autorisées dépendent du mode sélectionné pour la mémoire. Prise en charge du mode Fonctions ECC avancées (Lockstep) Dans cette configuration, les deux canaux situés le plus près du processeur sont associés en un canal unique de 128 bits. Ce mode prend en charge la fonction de correction d'erreurs par périphérique SDDC (Single Device Data Correction) pour les barrettes de mémoire x4 et x8. Les barrettes de mémoire doivent être de mêmes taille, vitesse et technologie dans les logements correspondants.Installation des composants du système 91 Prise en charge de la mise en miroir de la mémoire Le système prend en charge la mise en miroir de la mémoire si des barrettes de mémoire identiques sont installées dans les deux canaux les plus proches du processeur (les barrettes ne doivent pas être installées dans le canal le plus éloigné). La mise en miroir doit être activée dans le programme de configuration du système. Dans une configuration en miroir, la mémoire système totale disponible équivaut à la moitié de la mémoire physique totale installée. Mode Optimiseur (canal indépendant) Lorsque ce mode est activé, les trois canaux contiennent des barrettes de mémoire identiques. Ce mode permet d'exploiter une capacité mémoire totale plus élevée, mais ne prend pas en charge les configurations SDDC comprenant des barrettes de mémoire x8. Il prend également en charge une configuration minimale à canal unique d'une barrette de mémoire de 1 Go par processeur. Le Tableau 1 et le Tableau 2 présentent des exemples de configuration de mémoire conformes aux consignes énoncées dans cette section. Ces exemples illustrent des configurations de barrette de mémoire identiques, ainsi que leur capacité totale de mémoire physique et disponible. Ces tableaux ne présentent pas les configurations à barrettes de mémoire mixtes ou à quadruple rangée de connexions et ne tiennent pas compte de la vitesse de chaque configuration.92 Installation des composants du système Tableau 1. Exemples de configuration de barrettes de mémoire RDIMM à simple et double rangée de connexions (par processeur) Mode de mémoire Taille de la barrette de mémoire Supports de barrettes de mémoire Monoprocesseur Biprocesseur 4 1 2 3 Mémoire physique (Go) Mémoire disponible (Go) Mémoire physique (Go) Mémoire disponible (Go) Optimiseur 1 Go X X X X X X X X X X 1 2 3 4 toute 2 4 6 8 toute 2 Go X X X X X X X X X X 2 4 6 8 toute 4 8 12 16 toute 4 Go X X X X X X X X X X 4 8 12 16 toute 8 16 24 32 toute 8 Go X X X X X X X X X X 8 16 24 32 toute 16 32 48 64 toute 16 Go X X X X X X X X X X 16 32 48 64 toute 32 64 96 128 toute Fonctions ECC avancées 1 2 Go X X 4 toute 8 toute 4 Go X X 8 toute 16 toute 8 Go X X 16 toute 32 tout 16 Go X X 32 toute 64 touteInstallation des composants du système 93 1.Requiert des barrettes de mémoire x4 ou x8. Mise en miroir 2 Go X X 4 2 8 4 4 Go X X 8 4 16 8 8 Go X X 16 8 32 16 16 Go X X 32 16 64 32 Tableau 2. Exemples de configuration de barrettes de mémoire UDIMM (par processeur) Mode de mémoire Taille de barrette de mémoire Supports de barrettes de mémoire Monoprocesseur Biprocesseur 4 1 2 3 Mémoire physique (Go) Mémoire disponible (Go) Mémoire physique (Go) Mémoire disponible (Go) Optimiseur 1 Go X X X X X X X X X X 1 2 3 4 toute 2 4 6 8 toute 2 Go X X X X X X X X X X 2 4 6 8 toute 4 8 12 16 toute Fonctions ECC avancées 1 1 Go X X 2 toute 4 toute 2 Go X X 4 toute 8 toute Mise en miroir 1 Go X X 2 1 4 2 2 Go X X 4 2 8 4 Tableau 1. Exemples de configuration de barrettes de mémoire RDIMM à simple et double rangée de connexions (par processeur) Mode de mémoire Taille de la barrette de mémoire Supports de barrettes de mémoire Monoprocesseur Biprocesseur 4 1 2 3 Mémoire physique (Go) Mémoire disponible (Go) Mémoire physique (Go) Mémoire disponible (Go)94 Installation des composants du système Installation de barrettes de mémoire AVERTISSEMENT : les barrettes de mémoire restent chaudes un certain temps après la mise hors tension du système. Attendez qu'elles refroidissent avant de les manipuler. Tenez-les par les bords en évitant de toucher leurs composants. PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 2 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. 3 Retirez le carénage de refroidissement. Voir « Retrait du carénage de refroidissement » à la page 74. 4 Identifiez les supports de barrettes de mémoire. Voir Figure 6-1. 5 Appuyez sur les pattes de dégagement du support de barrette de mémoire, puis écartez-les (voir Figure 3-12) afin d'insérer la barrette dans le support. 6 Tenez chaque barrette par les bords, sans toucher la partie centrale.Installation des composants du système 95 Figure 3-12. Retrait et installation d'une barrette de mémoire 7 Alignez le connecteur de bord de la barrette de mémoire sur le détrompeur du support, puis insérez la barrette dans le support. REMARQUE : le support de barrette de mémoire est doté d'un repère qui permet d'insérer la barrette dans le bon sens. 8 Appuyez sur la barrette de mémoire avec les pouces afin de l'enclencher dans le support. Lorsque la barrette de mémoire est correctement enclenchée dans le support, les pattes de dégagement s'enclenchent en place. 9 Répétez la procédure de l'étape 5 à l'étape 8 afin d'installer les barrettes restantes. Voir Tableau 2. 10 Réinstallez le carénage de refroidissement. Voir « Installation du carénage de refroidissement » à la page 75. 11 Fermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. 1 barrette de mémoire 2 pattes de dégagement du support de barrette de mémoire (2) 3 repère 2 1 396 Installation des composants du système 12 Démarrez le système, appuyez sur pour accéder au programme de configuration du système et vérifiez les paramètres System Memory (Mémoire système) de l'écran System Setup (Configuration du système). Le système doit normalement avoir déjà modifié la valeur pour prendre en compte la mémoire qui vient d'être installée. 13 Si la valeur est incorrecte, il se peut qu'une ou plusieurs des barrettes de mémoire ne soient pas installées correctement. Recommencez la procédure de l'étape 2 à l'étape 12 en vérifiant que les barrettes de mémoire sont correctement emboîtées dans leurs supports. 14 Exécutez le test de mémoire des diagnostics du système. Voir « Exécution des diagnostics intégrés du système » à la page 156. Retrait de barrettes de mémoire AVERTISSEMENT : les barrettes de mémoire restent chaudes un certain temps après la mise hors tension du système. Attendez qu'elles refroidissent avant de les manipuler. Tenez-les par les bords en évitant de toucher leurs composants. PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit, et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 2 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. 3 Retirez le carénage de refroidissement. Voir « Retrait du carénage de refroidissement » à la page 74. 4 Identifiez les supports de barrettes de mémoire. Voir Figure 6-1. 5 Appuyez sur les pattes de dégagement situées de part et d'autre du support pour éjecter la barrette de mémoire. Voir Figure 3-12. Tenez chaque barrette par les bords, sans toucher la partie centrale. 6 Réinstallez le carénage de refroidissement. Voir « Installation du carénage de refroidissement » à la page 75.Installation des composants du système 97 7 Fermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. 8 Rebranchez le système et les périphériques à leur source d'alimentation, puis mettez-les sous tension. Cartes d'extension et cartes de montage pour cartes d'extension Votre système prend en charge jusqu'à quatre cartes d'extension PCI Express (PCIe) installées sur les connecteurs d'une carte de montage pour carte d'extension. Votre système comprend une carte de montage pour carte d'extension 1 qui fournit trois logements de carte d'extension x4 Gen2 PCIe et un logement de carte d'extension x8 Gen2 PCIe. PRÉCAUTION : vous ne pouvez installer les cartes d'extension que dans les logements de la carte de montage pour carte d'extension. N'essayez pas d'installer les cartes d'extension directement sur le connecteur de carte de montage de la carte système. Consignes d'installation des cartes d'extension • Les logements de carte d'extension peuvent accueillir des cartes pleine hauteur, de mi-longueur. • Les logements de carte d'extension sont remplaçables à chaud. • Les cartes d'extension PCIe de génération 2 sont compatibles avec tous les logements. • Tous les logements sont dotés de connecteurs de type x8. PRÉCAUTION : pour assurer un refroidissement correct du système, seule une des deux cartes d'extension peut avoir une consommation électrique supérieure à 15 W (jusqu'à 25 W au maximum), contrôleur de stockage intégré exclu. • Le Tableau 3 propose un guide d'installation des cartes d'extension afin d'assurer une installation et un refroidissement correct. Il convient d'installer d'abord, dans le logement indiqué, les cartes d'extension dont le niveau de priorité est le plus élevé. Toutes les autres cartes d'extension doivent être installées selon leur ordre de priorité en suivant celui des logements.98 Installation des composants du système Installation d'une carte d'extension PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Déballez la carte d'extension et préparez-la en vue de son installation. Pour connaître la marche à suivre, consultez la documentation fournie avec la carte. 2 Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 3 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. Tableau 3. Ordre de priorité pour l'installation de cartes d'extension (carte de montage 1) 25 W Priorité Type de carte Logement Priorité Maximum autorisé Carte de 25 W 1 PERC S300/S100 1, 2 2 O 2 PERC H800 3, 2 2 O 3 Contrôleur PERC 6/E 3, 2 2 O 4 SAS 5/E 3, 2 2 O 5 Contrôleurs SCSI 3, 2 2 O 6 HPCC 2, 1 2 O 7 Fibre Channel 2, 1 2 O 8 Carte réseau 10 Go 2, 1 2 O 9 Toutes les autres cartes réseau 1, 2 2 N 10 Toutes les autres cartes de stockage interne Dell 4 1 O 11 Cartes de stockage autres que Dell 1, 2 2 N* * Selon disponibilitéInstallation des composants du système 99 4 Retirez le carénage de refroidissement. Voir « Retrait du carénage de refroidissement » à la page 74. 5 Ouvrez le loquet de la carte d'extension et retirez la plaque de recouvrement. Voir Figure 3-13. REMARQUE : conservez cette plaque au cas où il serait nécessaire de retirer la carte d'extension. L'installation de plaques de recouvrement sur les connecteurs vacants est obligatoire pour la validité de l'homologation FCC du système. Ces plaques empêchent la poussière et les saletés de pénétrer dans le système, et facilitent le refroidissement et la ventilation de ce dernier. 6 Tenez la carte par les bords, puis positionnez-la en alignant son connecteur de bord de carte avec le connecteur de carte d'extension correspondant de la carte de montage. 7 Insérez le connecteur de bord de carte dans le connecteur de carte d'extension et enclenchez la carte à fond. 8 Fermez le loquet de la carte d'extension. Voir Figure 3-13. Figure 3-13. Retrait et installation d'une carte d'extension 1 carte de montage pour carte d'extension 2 loquet de la carte d'extension 3 carte d'extension 3 2 1100 Installation des composants du système 9 Connectez tous les câbles requis sur la carte d'extension. 10 Fermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. 11 Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. Retrait d'une carte d'extension PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit, et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 2 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. 3 Retirez le carénage de refroidissement. Voir « Retrait du carénage de refroidissement » à la page 74. 4 Débranchez tous les câbles de la carte. 5 Ouvrez le loquet de la carte d'extension. Voir Figure 3-13. 6 Tenez la carte d'extension par les bords et retirez-la doucement de son connecteur. 7 Si vous retirez définitivement la carte, installez une plaque de recouvrement métallique sur le logement vacant, puis remettez le loquet en place. REMARQUE : l'installation de plaques de recouvrement sur les logements d'extension vacants est obligatoire pour la conformité du système à l'homologation FCC (Federal Communications Commission). Ces plaques empêchent la poussière et les saletés de pénétrer dans le système, et facilitent le refroidissement et la ventilation de ce dernier. 8 Fermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. 9 Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés.Installation des composants du système 101 Retrait d'une carte de montage pour carte d'extension PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 2 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. 3 Retirez le carénage de refroidissement. Voir « Retrait du carénage de refroidissement » à la page 74. 4 Si une carte d'extension est installée, retirez-la de son logement. Voir « Retrait d'une carte d'extension » à la page 100. 5 Si une carte contrôleur de stockage est installée, retirez-la. Voir « Retrait de la carte contrôleur de stockage » à la page 103. 6 Débranchez les câbles connectés à la carte de montage. 7 Pour retirer la carte de montage pour carte d'extension, appuyez simultanément sur ses deux languettes bleues, puis extrayez-la du châssis. Voir Figure 3-14.102 Installation des composants du système Figure 3-14. Retrait et installation d'une carte de montage pour carte d'extension 1 logement de la carte contrôleur de stockage intégrée 2 guides de la carte de montage (2) 3 carte de montage pour carte d'extension 4 logement de carte d'extension 5 plots de guidage de carte de montage (2) 6 logements de carte de montage pour carte d'extension (2) 6 1 2 3 5 4Installation des composants du système 103 Installation d'une carte de montage pour carte d'extension PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Pour installer une carte de montage pour carte d'extension, alignez ses guides sur plots de guidage situés sur la carte système. Voir Figure 3-14. 2 Abaissez la carte de montage pour cartes d'extension jusqu'à ce que son connecteur soit complètement enclenché. 3 Le cas échéant, réinstallez la carte d'extension. Voir « Installation d'une carte d'extension » à la page 98. 4 Réinstallez la carte contrôleur de stockage. Voir « Installation de la carte contrôleur de stockage » à la page 106. 5 Reconnectez tous les câbles. 6 Fermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. 7 Rebranchez le système et les périphériques sur leur source d'alimentation électrique. Carte contrôleur de stockage intégrée Le système comporte un logement de carte d'extension dédié, situé sur la carte de montage, destiné à une carte contrôleur RAID qui sert de sous-système de stockage intégré aux disques durs du système. Le contrôleur prend en charge les disques durs SAS et SATA et permet en outre de les inclure dans les configurations RAID prises en charge par la version du contrôleur de stockage installée sur votre système. Retrait de la carte contrôleur de stockage PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit, et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit.104 Installation des composants du système 1 Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 2 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. 3 Si une carte d'extension est installée, retirez-la. Voir « Retrait d'une carte d'extension » à la page 100. 4 Débranchez les câbles SAS connectés à la carte contrôleur. 5 Débranchez le câble reliant la carte contrôleur à la carte de montage pour carte d'extension. 6 Pour un contrôleur RAID alimenté par batterie, déconnectez le câble reliant la carte à la batterie RAID. 7 Écartez les deux guides situés aux l'extrémités de la carte contrôleur de stockage, puis tirez celle-ci pour l'extraire du connecteur.Installation des composants du système 105 Figure 3-15. Installation et retrait d'une carte contrôleur de stockage 1 connecteur de stockage 2 carte de montage pour carte d'extension 3 carte contrôleur de stockage 4 câble de la carte contrôleur de stockage 5 connecteur de câble de données SAS 6 levier de dégagement (bleu) 1 2 3 6 5 4106 Installation des composants du système Installation de la carte contrôleur de stockage PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 2 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. 3 Si une carte d'extension est installée, retirez-la. Voir « Retrait d'une carte d'extension » à la page 100. 4 Passez les câbles par le passe-câbles situé sur la carte de montage pour carte d'extension, en dessous du logement de la carte contrôleur de stockage. 5 Le bord de la carte contrôleur de stockage étant orienté face à la carte de montage, insérez une extrémité de la carte dans le guide de bord de carte de couleur noire. REMARQUE : pour la carte de montage pour carte d'extension 1, l'ordre d'installation doit être : logements 3, 2, 1 et 4. La carte contrôleur de stockage doit être installée dans le logement 4 une fois les autres cartes d'extension installées. 6 Écartez le guide de bord de carte de couleur bleue, introduisez la carte, puis relâchez le guide. Voir Figure 3-15. 7 Insérez le connecteur de bord de la carte du contrôleur de stockage dans le logement situé sur la carte de montage, jusqu'à ce que la carte contrôleur s'enclenche. 8 Branchez les deux connecteurs de câble de données SAS, CNTRL 0 et CNTRL 1, sur la carte contrôleur de stockage. Voir Figure 3-15. REMARQUE : branchez les câbles en respectant le nom de connecteur marqué sur chaque câble. S'il est inversé, le câble ne fonctionnera pas correctement. 9 Pour un contrôleur RAID alimenté par batterie, branchez le câble de la batterie RAID à la carte contrôleur.Installation des composants du système 107 10 Réinstallez la carte d'extension. Voir « Installation d'une carte d'extension » à la page 98. 11 Fermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. 12 Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. Carte iDRAC6 Express Installation d'une carte iDRAC6 Express PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit, et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 2 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. 3 Si elles sont installées, retirez toutes les cartes d'extension de la carte de montage pour carte d'extension. « Retrait d'une carte d'extension » à la page 100. 4 Insérez l'encoche de la carte iDRAC6 Express dans le clip de fixation de la carte système. 5 Alignez le bord avant de la carte sur le connecteur de la carte système. Pour identifier l'emplacement du connecteur, voir Figure 6-1. 6 Appuyez sur la carte jusqu'à ce qu'elle se mette correctement en place. Voir Figure 3-16. Lorsque l'avant de la carte est en place, le picot de fixation en plastique s'emboîte sur le rebord du support.108 Installation des composants du système Figure 3-16. Retrait et installation d'une carte Express iDRAC6 7 Réinstallez toutes les cartes d'extension dans la carte de montage pour carte d'extension. Voir « Installation d'une carte d'extension » à la page 98. 8 Fermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. 9 Rebranchez le système et les périphériques à leur source d'alimentation, puis mettez-les sous tension. Retrait d'une carte iDRAC6 Express PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit, et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 2 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. 1 carte iDRAC6 Express 2 picot de fixation en plastique 3 encoche 4 clip 4 2 1 3Installation des composants du système 109 3 Tirez légèrement le picot de fixation situé à l'avant de la carte et soulevez cette dernière avec précaution pour la dégager du picot. Voir Figure 3-16. Lorsque la carte se dégage du picot, le connecteur situé sous la carte se désengage du connecteur de la carte système. 4 Inclinez la carte de façon à dégager son encoche du clip de la carte système. 5 Réinstallez les cartes d'extension. Voir « Installation d'une carte d'extension » à la page 98. 6 Fermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. 7 Rebranchez le système et les périphériques à leur source d'alimentation, puis mettez-les sous tension. Carte iDRAC6 Enterprise (en option) Installation d'une carte iDRAC6 Enterprise PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit, et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 2 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. 3 Retirez le carénage de refroidissement. Voir « Retrait du carénage de refroidissement » à la page 74. 4 Retirez l'obturateur de prise en plastique qui protège le port iDRAC6 Enterprise du panneau arrière du système. 5 Orientez la carte de sorte que le connecteur RJ-45 s'insère dans l'ouverture appropriée du panneau arrière. Voir Figure 3-17. 6 Alignez le bord avant de la carte avec les deux picots de fixation avant en plastique situés à côté du connecteur iDRAC6 de la carte système, puis insérez la carte. Voir Figure 3-17. Lorsque l'avant de la carte est en place, les picots en plastique s'emboîtent sur le rebord de la carte.110 Installation des composants du système Figure 3-17. Retrait et installation d'une carte iDRAC6 Enterprise 7 S'il y a lieu, installez la carte de support VFlash. Voir « Installation d'une carte VFlash » à la page 112. 8 Fermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. 9 Rebranchez le système et les périphériques à leur source d'alimentation, puis mettez-les sous tension. 1 carte SD VFlash 2 logement de carte de support VFlash 3 carte iDRAC6 Enterprise 4 picots de fixation (2) 5 pattes des picots de fixation (2) 6 connecteur de la carte iDRAC6 Enterprise 3 2 1 4 5 6Installation des composants du système 111 Retrait d'une carte iDRAC6 Enterprise PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit, et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 2 S'il est installé, débranchez le câble Ethernet du connecteur de carte iDRAC6 Enterprise situé sur le panneau arrière du système. Voir Figure 1-3. 3 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. 4 Retirez le carénage de refroidissement. Voir « Retrait du carénage de refroidissement » à la page 74. 5 Retirez la carte de support VFlash (le cas échéant) de la carte iDRAC6 Enterprise. Voir « Retrait d'une carte de support VFlash » à la page 112. 6 Tirez doucement les deux pattes situées à l'avant de la carte et soulevez doucement le bord avant de la carte pour la dégager des picots de fixation. Lorsque la carte est dégagée des picots de fixation, le connecteur situé sous la carte se désengage du connecteur de la carte système. 7 Faites glisser la carte hors de l'arrière du système jusqu'à ce que le connecteur RJ-45 soit dégagé du panneau arrière, puis soulevez la carte pour la sortir du système. 8 Réinstallez l'obturateur en plastique sur le port du panneau arrière du système. Pour identifier l'emplacement du port, voir « Voyants et caractéristiques du panneau arrière » à la page 15. 9 Réinstallez le carénage de refroidissement. Voir « Installation du carénage de refroidissement » à la page 75. 10 Fermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. 11 Rebranchez le système et les périphériques à leur source d'alimentation, puis mettez-les sous tension.112 Installation des composants du système Carte VFlash (en option) La carte VFlash est une carte SD qui se connecte dans la carte iDRAC6 Enterprise dans le coin arrière du système. Installation d'une carte VFlash 1 Identifiez le logement de la carte VFlash à l'arrière du système. 2 L'étiquette étant orientée vers le haut, insérez les broches de contact de la carte SD dans le logement correspondant du module. REMARQUE : le logement est muni d'un repère qui permet d'insérer la carte dans le bon sens. 3 Appuyez sur la carte pour qu'elle s'enclenche dans son logement. Retrait d'une carte de support VFlash Pour retirer la carte de support VFlash, appuyez dessus pour la libérer, puis retirez-la de son logement. Processeurs Retrait d'un processeur PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit, et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Avant de mettre le système à niveau, téléchargez la dernière version du BIOS du système, disponible sur le site support.dell.com. 2 Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 3 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. 4 Retirez le carénage de refroidissement. Voir « Retrait du carénage de refroidissement » à la page 74.Installation des composants du système 113 AVERTISSEMENT : le dissipateur de chaleur et le processeur restent chauds un certain temps après la mise hors tension du système. Laissez-les refroidir avant de les manipuler. PRÉCAUTION : ne retirez jamais le dissipateur de chaleur d'un processeur, sauf si vous comptez retirer ce dernier. Le dissipateur de chaleur est nécessaire pour préserver des conditions thermiques idéales. 5 À l'aide d'un tournevis cruciforme n° 2, desserrez l'une des deux vis de fixation du dissipateur de chaleur. Voir Figure 3-18. 6 Attendez 30 secondes que le dissipateur de chaleur se détache du processeur. 7 Desserrez les trois autres vis de fixation du dissipateur de chaleur. 8 Soulevez délicatement le dissipateur de chaleur pour le séparer du processeur, puis déposez-le de côté, face enduite de pâte thermique tournée vers le haut. PRÉCAUTION : la pression exercée pour maintenir le processeur dans son support est très forte. Si vous ne maintenez pas fermement le levier de dégagement, il risque de se redresser brusquement. 9 Placez votre pouce fermement sur le levier de dégagement du support de processeur en le déverrouillant. Faites pivoter le levier de dégagement de 90 degrés jusqu'à ce que le processeur sorte de son support. Voir Figure 3-19.114 Installation des composants du système Figure 3-18. Installation et retrait du dissipateur de chaleur 10 Relevez le cadre de protection pour dégager le processeur. Voir Figure 3-19. 11 Extrayez le processeur de son support et laissez le levier relevé afin de pouvoir installer le nouveau processeur. PRÉCAUTION : veillez à ne pas tordre les broches du support ZIF lors du retrait du processeur. Vous risqueriez d'endommager de façon irréversible la carte système. REMARQUE : pour les systèmes monoprocesseur, vous devez installer le processeur dans le support CPU1. Installez le cache uniquement dans le support CPU2. 1 dissipateur de chaleur 2 vis de fixation (4) 2 1Installation des composants du système 115 Figure 3-19. Installation et retrait d'un processeur 1 processeur 2 cadre de protection du processeur 3 encoche du processeur 4 repère du support 5 support ZIF 6 levier de dégagement du support 2 1 6 3 4 5116 Installation des composants du système Installation d'un processeur PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit, et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 S'il s'agit d'une mise à niveau des processeurs, avant de procéder à celle-ci, téléchargez la dernière version du BIOS système depuis le site support.dell.com. Pour installer la mise à jour, suivez les instructions indiquées dans le fichier téléchargé. REMARQUE : pour les systèmes monoprocesseur, vous devez installer le processeur dans le support CPU1. 2 Déballez le processeur, s'il n'a jamais été utilisé. S'il a déjà été utilisé, ôtez la pâte thermique de sa partie supérieure à l'aide d'un chiffon non pelucheux. 3 Alignez le processeur sur les repères du support ZIF. Voir Figure 3-19. PRÉCAUTION : un positionnement incorrect du processeur peut endommager de façon irréversible la carte système ou le processeur. Prenez garde à ne pas tordre les broches du support ZIF. 4 Le levier de dégagement du support de processeur étant placé en position ouverte, alignez le processeur sur les repères du support, puis placez délicatement le processeur dans le support. PRÉCAUTION : ne forcez pas lorsque vous installez le processeur. S'il est positionné correctement, il s'insère très facilement dans le support. 5 Fermez le cadre de protection du processeur. 6 Appuyez sur le levier de dégagement et faites le pivoter jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche. 7 À l'aide d'un chiffon propre et non pelucheux, retirez la pâte thermique qui recouvre le dissipateur de chaleur. 8 Ouvrez le paquet de pâte thermique fourni avec le kit du processeur et appliquez-en une couche uniforme sur le dessus du nouveau processeur.Installation des composants du système 117 PRÉCAUTION : si vous appliquez trop de pâte thermique, celle-ci risque de s'infiltrer jusqu'au cadre de protection du processeur et souiller le support du processeur. 9 Placez le dissipateur de chaleur sur le processeur. Voir Figure 3-18. 10 À l'aide d'un tournevis cruciforme n° 2, serrez les vis de fixation du dissipateur de chaleur. Voir Figure 3-18. 11 Réinstallez le carénage de refroidissement. Voir « Installation du carénage de refroidissement » à la page 75. 12 Fermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. 13 Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 14 Appuyez sur pour accéder au programme de configuration du système et vérifier que les informations relatives au processeur correspondent bien à la nouvelle configuration. Voir « Accès au programme de configuration du système » à la page 42. 15 Lancez les diagnostics du système pour vérifier que le nouveau processeur fonctionne correctement. Pour plus d'informations sur l'exécution des diagnostics, voir « Exécution des diagnostics intégrés du système » à la page 156. Pile du système Remplacement de la pile du système AVERTISSEMENT : une nouvelle pile peut exploser si elle n'est pas installée correctement. Ne remplacez la pile que par une pile identique ou d'un type équivalent recommandé par le fabricant. Pour des informations supplémentaires, voir les consignes de sécurité. PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit, et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit.118 Installation des composants du système 1 Mettez le système et les périphériques connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 2 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. 3 Retirez le carénage de refroidissement. Voir « Retrait du carénage de refroidissement » à la page 74. Figure 3-20. Réinstallation de la pile du système 4 Si une carte d'extension est installée, retirez-la de son logement. Voir « Retrait d'une carte d'extension » à la page 100. 5 Si une carte contrôleur de stockage est installée, retirez-la. Voir « Retrait de la carte contrôleur de stockage » à la page 103. 6 Pour retirer la carte de montage pour carte d'extension, appuyez sur ses languettes bleues, puis extrayez-la du châssis. Voir « Retrait d'une carte de montage pour carte d'extension » à la page 101. 1 pile du système 2 pôle négatif du connecteur de la pile 3 pôle positif du connecteur de la pile 2 1 3Installation des composants du système 119 7 Repérez le support de la pile. Voir « Cavaliers et connecteurs » à la page 159. PRÉCAUTION : pour ne pas endommager le connecteur de la pile, maintenez-le fermement en place lorsque vous installez ou retirez la pile. 8 Maintenez le connecteur de pile en place en appuyant fermement sur le côté positif du connecteur. 9 Écartez la pile vers le côté négatif, puis extrayez-la de la languette de fixation située sur le côté négatif du connecteur. 10 Maintenez le connecteur de pile en place en appuyant fermement sur le côté positif du connecteur. 11 Tenez la pile de façon à tourner son côté « + » vers le connecteur en plastique de la carte système, puis insérez-la sous les languettes de fixation. 12 Appuyez sur la pile pour l'emboîter dans le connecteur. 13 Réinstallez la carte de montage pour carte d'extension. Voir « Installation d'une carte de montage pour carte d'extension » à la page 103. 14 Réinstallez la carte contrôleur de stockage. Voir « Installation de la carte contrôleur de stockage » à la page 106. 15 Réinstallez la carte d'extension dans son logement à ce stade. Voir « Installation d'une carte d'extension » à la page 98. 16 Réinstallez le carénage de refroidissement. Voir « Installation du carénage de refroidissement » à la page 75. 17 Fermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. 18 Rebranchez le système sur la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 19 Accédez au programme de configuration du système et vérifiez que la pile fonctionne normalement. Voir « Accès au programme de configuration du système » à la page 42. 20 Entrez l'heure et la date exactes dans les champs Time (Heure) et Date du programme de configuration du système. 21 Quittez le programme de configuration du système.120 Installation des composants du système Batterie RAID Retrait de la batterie RAID PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit, et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 2 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. 3 Débranchez le câble de la batterie RAID en retirant délicatement le connecteur du câble. Voir Figure 3-21. 4 Tirez légèrement en arrière les deux pattes maintenant en place la batterie RAID et soulevez celle-ci de son support. Voir Figure 3-21. Figure 3-21. Retrait et installation de la batterie RAID 1 support de la batterie 2 connecteur du câble de la batterie 3 batterie RAID 4 pattes du support de la batterie (2) 3 2 4 1Installation des composants du système 121 Installation de la batterie RAID PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Insérez la batterie RAID dans son support jusqu'à ce qu'elle s'enclenche. Voir Figure 3-21. 2 Connectez le câble à la batterie. Voir Figure 6-1. 3 Fermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. 4 Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés sous tension. Assemblage du panneau de commande : voyant Retrait du panneau de commande PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit, et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Retirez le cadre avant s'il est installé. Voir « Retrait du cadre avant » à la page 71. 2 Mettez le système et les périphériques connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur et des périphériques. 3 Retirez la vis qui maintient le support sur le module, puis retirez le support. 4 Débranchez le câble du panneau de commande à l'arrière du module en vous aidant de la languette. Voir Figure 3-22. PRÉCAUTION : ne tirez pas sur le câble pour le dégager de son connecteur. Vous risqueriez de l'endommager. 5 Retirez la vis qui maintient la carte de bouton d'alimentation au module du panneau de commande. Voir Figure 3-22.122 Installation des composants du système 6 Retirez la carte de bouton d'alimentation ainsi que le bouton d'alimentation du module du panneau de commande. Figure 3-22. Retrait et installation du panneau de commande : DEL 1 support 2 câble du panneau de commande 3 carte de bouton d'alimentation 4 bouton d'alimentation 5 module du panneau de commande 1 2 4 3 5Installation des composants du système 123 Installation du voyant du module de panneau de commande-Voyant PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Assemblez le bouton d'alimentation ainsi que la carte de bouton d'alimentation dans le module du panneau de commande. 2 Serrez la vis fixant la carte de bouton d'alimentation au module du panneau de commande. Voir Figure 3-22. 3 Branchez le câble du panneau de commande au module du panneau. 4 Réinstallez le support et serrez la vis de manière à fixer le support à l'arrière du module du panneau de commande. 5 Fermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. 6 Rebranchez le système sur la prise secteur et allumez-le, ainsi que les périphériques connectés. 7 Le cas échéant, replacez le cadre avant. Voir « Installation du cadre avant » à la page 71. Module d'E/S du panneau avant Retrait du module d'E/S du panneau avant PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit, et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Retirez le cadre avant s'il est installé. Voir « Retrait du cadre avant » à la page 71. 2 Mettez le système et les périphériques connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur et des périphériques.124 Installation des composants du système 3 À l'aide d'un tournevis Torx, retirez les trois vis qui fixent le module d'E/S du panneau avant au châssis, puis retirez le module. 4 Retirez la vis qui maintient le support au module, puis retirez le support. 5 Débloquez et débranchez le câble d'E/S du panneau avant à l'arrière du module. Voir Figure 3-23. PRÉCAUTION : ne tirez pas sur le câble pour le dégager de son connecteur. Vous risqueriez de l'endommager. Figure 3-23. Retrait et installation du module d'E/S du panneau avant 1 câble d'E/S du panneau avant 2 support 3 module d'E/S du panneau avant 4 vis de montage (3) 4 2 3 1Installation des composants du système 125 Installation du module d'E/S du panneau avant 1 Branchez et enclenchez le câble d'E/S du panneau avant à l'arrière du module. 2 Serrez la vis qui maintient le support à l'arrière du module. 3 Alignez le module sur les trous situés sur le côté droit du châssis du système et fixez-le avec trois vis Torx. Voir Figure 3-23. 4 Branchez le câble d'E/S du panneau avant au connecteur à l'arrière du fond de panier SAS. 5 Fermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. 6 Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 7 Le cas échéant, replacez le cadre avant. Voir « Installation du cadre avant » à la page 71. Fond de panier SAS Retrait du fond de panier SAS PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit, et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Retirez le cadre en option, le cas échéant. Voir « Retrait du cadre avant » à la page 71. 2 Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 3 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. PRÉCAUTION : pour éviter d'endommager les disques durs et le fond de panier, retirez du système les disques durs avant d'enlever le fond de panier. PRÉCAUTION : avant de retirer chaque disque dur, notez son numéro d'emplacement et étiquetez-le temporairement afin de pouvoir ensuite le réinstaller au même endroit. 126 Installation des composants du système 4 Retirez tous les disques durs. Voir « Retrait d'un disque dur remplaçable à chaud » à la page 76. 5 Débranchez le câble d'alimentation du fond de panier SAS. 6 Débranchez les câbles de données SAS du fond de panier. 7 Débranchez le câble USB et le câble du panneau de commande. PRÉCAUTION : manipulez les câbles délicatement pour ne pas les endommager. 8 Débranchez les câbles des disques durs internes : 9 En serrant les deux loquets bleus ensemble, soulevez le fond de panier. Voir Figure 3-24. 10 Lorsqu'il n'est plus possible de soulever le fond de panier, tirez-le vers l'arrière du système pour le dégager des crochets de fixation. 11 Retirez la carte du système, en prenant garde de ne pas endommager les composants situés sur sa face. 12 Posez le fond de panier SAS sur un plan de travail, face vers le bas.Installation des composants du système 127 Figure 3-24. Retrait et installation d'un fond de panier SAS 1 fond de panier SAS 2 loquets de fixation du fond de panier (2) 3 câbles SAS 4 câble du module du panneau de commande 5 connecteur de clé de mémoire USB 6 câble d'alimentation du fond de panier SAS 7 câble du panneau de commande 8 câbles de disque dur interne (2) 9 câble USB 10 câble de fond de panier SAS 1 3 7 2 8 9 6 4 10 5128 Installation des composants du système Installation du fond de panier SAS PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Placez le fond de panier dans le système en prenant garde de ne pas endommager les composants situés sur la face de sa carte. 2 Alignez les encoches du fond de panier sur les crochets situés à l'arrière des baies de lecteur, puis déplacez le fond de panier vers l'avant jusqu'à ce que les crochets entrent dans les encoches. Voir Figure 3-24. 3 Faites glisser le fond de panier jusqu'à ce que les deux loquets de fixation bleus s'enclenchent. 4 Connectez le câble de données SAS et les câbles d'alimentation au fond de panier SAS. 5 Installez les disques durs à leur emplacement d'origine. 6 Branchez le câble USB et le câble du panneau de commande sur la carte système. PRÉCAUTION : manipulez les câbles délicatement pour ne pas les endommager. 7 Connectez les câbles des disques durs internes. 8 Fermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. 9 Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés.Installation des composants du système 129 Carte de distribution de l'alimentation La carte de distribution de l'alimentation se trouve juste derrière le module du ventilateur du bloc d'alimentation. Voir Figure 3-25. Retrait de la carte de distribution de l'alimentation PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit, et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Le cas échéant, retirez la baie de disque dur interne et le support. Voir « Retrait d'une baie de disque dur interne » à la page 79. 2 Le cas échéant, retirez la vis du support et soulevez-le pour l'extraire du système. 3 Retirez les blocs d'alimentation du système. Voir « Retrait d'un bloc d'alimentation » à la page 86. 4 Retirez les cartes d'extension. Voir « Retrait d'une carte d'extension » à la page 100. 5 Retirez la carte de montage pour carte d'extension. Voir « Retrait d'une carte de montage pour carte d'extension » à la page 101. 6 Débranchez les câbles de distribution de l'alimentation connectés à la carte système (voir « Carte système » à la page 132). 7 Débranchez le câble du ventilateur. 8 Retirez les trois vis qui fixent la carte de distribution de l'alimentation au châssis à l'aide d'un tournevis cruciforme no. 2. Voir Figure 3-25. 9 Tirez la languette bleue, soulevez la carte de distribution de l'alimentation, puis déplacez-la vers l'avant du système afin de la dégager des languettes de la baie du bloc d'alimentation. Voir Figure 3-25.130 Installation des composants du système Figure 3-25. Retrait et installation de la carte de distribution de l'alimentation 1 vis (3) 2 connecteur de bloc d'alimentation 3 carte de l'interposeur d'alimentation 4 patte bleue 5 carte de distribution de l'alimentation 6 connecteur du câble du module de ventilation 6 2 1 5 4 3Installation des composants du système 131 Réinstallation de la carte de distribution de l'alimentation PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit, et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Déballez la nouvelle carte de distribution de l'alimentation. 2 Alignez la carte de distribution de l'alimentation sur les languettes du châssis, puis insérez-la jusqu'à ce que la languette bleue s'enclenche sur son rebord. Voir Figure 3-25. 3 Insérez les trois vis qui fixent la carte de distribution de l'alimentation au châssis. Voir Figure 3-25. 4 Branchez les câbles de distribution de l'alimentation sur la carte système (voir « Carte système » à la page 132), et le câble du ventilateur sur la carte de distribution de l'alimentation (voir Figure 3-25). 5 Alignez le support sur la carte de distribution de l'alimentation et fixez-le à l'aide de la vis. 6 Installez la baie de disque dur interne. Voir « Installation d'une baie de disque dur interne » à la page 81. 7 Installez les blocs d'alimentation dans le système. Voir « Installation d'un bloc d'alimentation » à la page 87. 8 Réinstallez la carte de montage pour carte d'extension. Voir « Installation d'une carte de montage pour carte d'extension » à la page 103. 9 Réinstallez les cartes d'extension. Voir « Installation d'une carte d'extension » à la page 98. 10 Fermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. 11 Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés.132 Installation des composants du système Carte système Retrait de la carte système PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit, et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. PRÉCAUTION : si vous utilisez la puce de module de plate-forme sécurisée (TPM) avec une clé de cryptage, il est possible que vous soyez invité à créer une clé de restauration lors de la configuration du système ou d'un programme. Vous devez créer cette clé et la conserver en lieu sûr. Si vous êtes un jour amené à remplacer la carte système, vous devrez fournir cette clé lors du redémarrage du système ou du programme afin de pouvoir accéder aux données cryptées qui se trouvent sur les disques durs. 1 Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 2 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. 3 Retirez le carénage de refroidissement. Voir « Retrait du carénage de refroidissement » à la page 74. 4 Retirez les blocs d'alimentation. Voir « Retrait d'un bloc d'alimentation » à la page 86. 5 Retirez toutes les cartes d'extension, ainsi que la carte contrôleur de stockage si elle est installée. Voir « Retrait d'une carte d'extension » à la page 100 et « Retrait de la carte contrôleur de stockage » à la page 103. 6 Retirez la carte de montage pour carte d'extension. Voir « Retrait d'une carte de montage pour carte d'extension » à la page 101. 7 Retirez tout dissipateur de chaleur, processeur ou cache de dissipateur de chaleur. Voir « Retrait d'un processeur » à la page 112. 8 Retirez la carte iDRAC6 Enterprise, si elle est installée. Voir « Retrait d'une carte iDRAC6 Enterprise » à la page 111. 9 Retirez la carte iDRAC6 Express, si elle est installée. Voir « Retrait d'une carte iDRAC6 Express » à la page 108.Installation des composants du système 133 10 Débranchez tous les câbles de la carte système. 11 Retirez les neuf vis fixant la carte système au châssis et faites glisser l'assemblage de la carte système vers l'extrémité avant du châssis. PRÉCAUTION : ne vous servez pas d'une barrette de mémoire, d'un processeur ou de tout autre composant pour soulever le module de carte système. 12 Saisissez l'assemblage de la carte système par les bords, puis soulevez-le pour l'extraire du châssis. Voir Figure 3-26. Figure 3-26. Retrait et installation de la carte système 1 vis (9) 2 module de carte système 1 2134 Installation des composants du système Installation de la carte système PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Déballez la nouvelle carte système. 2 Retirez les étiquettes du cadre de protection des processeurs et apposez-les sur le panneau d'informations, situé à l'avant du système. Voir Figure 1-1. 3 En la tenant la carte système par les bords, insérez-la dans le châssis. PRÉCAUTION : ne vous servez pas d'une barrette de mémoire, d'un processeur ou de tout autre composant pour soulever le module de carte système. 4 Relevez légèrement l'avant de la carte système et posez-la de façon à ce qu'elle repose totalement sur le fond du châssis. 5 Poussez la carte système vers l'arrière du châssis jusqu'à ce qu'elle soit en place. 6 Serrez les neuf vis qui fixent la carte système au châssis du système. Voir Figure 3-26. 7 Installez les processeurs sur la nouvelle carte système. Voir « Retrait d'un processeur » à la page 112 et « Installation d'un processeur » à la page 116. 8 Retirez les barrettes de mémoire de l'ancienne carte et installez-les sur la nouvelle, aux mêmes emplacements. Voir « Retrait de barrettes de mémoire » à la page 96 et « Installation de barrettes de mémoire » à la page 94. 9 Branchez les câbles sur la carte système. Voir Figure 6-1 pour identifier l'emplacement des connecteurs sur la carte système. 10 Réinstallez la carte de montage pour carte d'extension. Voir « Installation d'une carte de montage pour carte d'extension » à la page 103. 11 Installez toutes les cartes d'extension. Voir « Installation d'une carte d'extension » à la page 98.Installation des composants du système 135 12 Le cas échéant, réinstallez la carte contrôleur de stockage. Voir « Installation de la carte contrôleur de stockage » à la page 106. Une fois les câbles SAS connectés au contrôleur, veillez à les placer sous le guide, à l'extrémité de la carte de montage 1. 13 Le cas échéant, installez la carte iDRAC6 Enterprise. Voir « Installation d'une carte iDRAC6 Enterprise » à la page 109. 14 Le cas échéant, installez la carte iDRAC6 Express. Voir « Installation d'une carte iDRAC6 Express » à la page 107. 15 Réinstallez le carénage de refroidissement. Voir « Installation du carénage de refroidissement » à la page 75. 16 Fermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. 17 Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 18 Le cas échéant, replacez le cadre avant. Voir « Retrait du cadre avant » à la page 71.136 Installation des composants du systèmeDépannage du système 137 Dépannage du système La sécurité en priorité, pour vous et votre système PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. Dépannage des échecs de démarrage du système En cas de blocage du système au démarrage avant un visionnage vidéo, notamment après l'installation d'un système d'exploitation ou une reconfiguration matérielle, procédez aux vérifications suivantes : • Si vous démarrez le système en mode d'amorçage BIOS après avoir installé un système d'exploitation à partir du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI, le système se bloque. La situation inverse produit les mêmes effets. L'amorçage doit être effectué dans le même mode que celui de l'installation du système d'exploitation. Voir « Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI » à la page 41. • Une configuration incorrecte de la mémoire peut provoquer un arrêt du démarrage du système et l'absence de sortie vidéo. Voir « Cartes d'extension et cartes de montage pour cartes d'extension » à la page 97. Pour tous les autres problèmes de démarrage, notez les messages du système qui apparaissent à l'écran. Pour en savoir plus, voir « Messages système » à la page 22.138 Dépannage du système Dépannage des connexions externes Avant de procéder au dépannage de tout périphérique externe, assurez-vous que tous les câbles externes sont correctement fixés aux connecteurs externes de votre système. Pour identifier les connecteurs des panneaux avant et arrière du système, voir Figure 1-1 et Figure 1-3. Dépannage du sous-système vidéo 1 Vérifiez les branchements du moniteur (prise secteur et raccordement au système). 2 Vérifiez le câblage de l'interface vidéo entre le système et le moniteur. 3 Exécutez le test de diagnostic en ligne approprié. Voir « Utilisation des diagnostics en ligne » à la page 155. Si les tests aboutissent, le problème n'est pas lié au matériel vidéo. Si les tests échouent, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165. Dépannage d'un périphérique USB Pour dépanner un clavier et/ou une souris USB, effectuez la procédure ci-dessous. Pour tous les autres périphériques USB, passez à l'étape 5. 1 Débranchez brièvement du système les câbles du clavier ou de la souris, puis reconnectez-les. 2 Connectez le clavier ou la souris aux ports USB situés sur le côté opposé du système. 3 Si le problème est résolu, redémarrez le système, accédez au programme de configuration du système et vérifiez que les ports USB défectueux sont activés. 4 Remplacez le clavier ou la souris par un périphérique équivalent en état de marche. Si le problème est résolu, remplacez le périphérique (clavier ou souris) défectueux. Si le problème persiste, passez à l'étape suivante pour dépanner les autres périphériques USB reliés au système.Dépannage du système 139 5 Mettez hors tension tous les périphériques USB et déconnectez-les du système. 6 Redémarrez le système puis, si le clavier fonctionne, accédez au programme de configuration du système. Vérifiez que tous les ports USB sont activés. Voir « Écran Integrated Devices (Périphériques intégrés) » à la page 50. Si votre clavier ne fonctionne pas, vous pouvez également utiliser l'accès à distance. Si le système n'est pas accessible, voir « Cavaliers de la carte système » à la page 159 pour savoir comment configurer le cavalier NVRAM_CLR dans le système et restaurer les paramètres par défaut du BIOS. 7 Reconnectez et remettez sous tension les périphériques USB un par un. 8 Si un périphérique est à nouveau à l'origine du même problème, mettez-le hors tension, remplacez le câble USB, puis remettez le périphérique sous tension. Si le problème persiste, remplacez le périphérique. Si toutes les mesures de dépannage restent sans effets, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165. Dépannage d'un périphérique d'E/S série 1 Mettez le système et tout périphérique connecté au port série hors tension. 2 Remplacez le câble d'interface série par un câble en état de marche, puis mettez le système et le périphérique série sous tension. Si l'incident est résolu, remplacez le câble d'interface. 3 Mettez le système et le périphérique série hors tension, puis remplacez ce dernier par un périphérique similaire. 4 Mettez le système et le périphérique série sous tension. Si le problème est résolu, remplacez le périphérique série. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165.140 Dépannage du système Dépannage d'une carte réseau 1 Exécutez le test de diagnostic en ligne approprié. Voir « Utilisation des diagnostics en ligne » à la page 155. 2 Redémarrez le système et consultez les messages éventuels concernant le contrôleur de carte réseau. 3 Observez le voyant approprié du connecteur de carte réseau. Voir « Codes des voyants de carte réseau » à la page 18. • Si le voyant de liaison ne s'allume pas, vérifiez tous les branchements. • Si le voyant d'activité ne s'allume pas, les fichiers des pilotes réseau sont peut-être endommagés ou manquants. Retirez et réinstallez les pilotes le cas échéant. Voir la documentation de la carte réseau. • Si possible, modifiez la configuration de la négociation automatique. • Utilisez un autre connecteur sur le commutateur ou le concentrateur. Si vous utilisez une carte réseau au lieu d'une carte intégrée, voir la documentation fournie avec celle-ci. 4 Vérifiez que les pilotes appropriés sont installés et que les protocoles sont liés. Voir la documentation de la carte réseau. 5 Accédez au programme de configuration du système et vérifiez que les ports de carte réseau sont activés. Voir « Écran Integrated Devices (Périphériques intégrés) » à la page 50. 6 Vérifiez que les cartes, les concentrateurs et les commutateurs du réseau sont tous réglés sur la même vitesse de transmission des données. Voir la documentation de chaque périphérique réseau. 7 Vérifiez que tous les câbles réseau sont du type approprié et qu'ils ne dépassent pas la longueur maximale. Si toutes les mesures de dépannage restent sans effets, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165.Dépannage du système 141 Dépannage d'un système mouillé PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 2 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. 3 Désassemblez les composants du système. Voir « Installation des composants du système » à la page 69. • Carénage de refroidissement • Disques durs • Fond de panier SAS • Cartes du support Vflash • Clés de mémoire USB • Clé matérielle de la carte réseau • Carte de montage pour carte d'extension • Carte contrôleur de stockage intégrée • Carte iDRAC6 Express • Carte iDRAC6 Enterprise • Blocs d'alimentation • Ventilateurs • Processeurs et dissipateurs de chaleur • Barrettes de mémoire 4 Laissez sécher le système pendant au moins 24 heures. 5 Réinstallez les composants que vous avez retirés à l'étape 3. 6 Refermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73.142 Dépannage du système 7 Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. Si le système ne démarre pas normalement, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165. 8 Si le système démarre normalement, arrêtez-le et réinstallez les cartes d'extension que vous avez retirées. Voir « Installation d'une carte d'extension » à la page 98. 9 Exécutez le test de diagnostic en ligne approprié. Voir « Utilisation des diagnostics en ligne » à la page 155. Si les tests échouent, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165. Dépannage d'un système endommagé PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 2 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. 3 Assurez-vous que les composants suivants sont correctement installés : • Carte de montage pour carte d'extension • Blocs d'alimentation • Ventilateurs • Processeurs et dissipateurs de chaleur • Barrettes de mémoire • Supports de disque dur • Carénage de refroidissement 4 Vérifiez que tous les câbles sont connectés correctement.Dépannage du système 143 5 Refermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. 6 Exécutez les tests de la carte système qui se trouvent dans les diagnostics du système. Voir « Exécution des diagnostics du système » à la page 155. Si les tests échouent, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165. Dépannage de la pile du système REMARQUE : si le système reste hors tension longtemps (pendant des semaines ou des mois), la NVRAM peut perdre ses informations de configuration système. Ce problème est dû à une pile défectueuse. 1 Entrez de nouveau l'heure et la date dans le programme de configuration du système. Voir « Options de configuration du système » à la page 44. 2 Mettez le système hors tension et débranchez-le de la prise secteur pendant au moins une heure. 3 Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension. 4 Accédez au programme de configuration du système. Si la date et l'heure sont incorrectes dans le programme de configuration du système, remplacez la pile. Voir « Remplacement de la pile du système » à la page 117. PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. Si le problème persiste après le remplacement de la pile, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165. REMARQUE : certains logiciels peuvent provoquer une accélération ou un ralentissement de l'heure système. Si le système semble fonctionner normalement à l'exception de l'heure qui est indiquée dans le programme de configuration du système, le problème peut être lié à un logiciel plutôt qu'à une pile défectueuse.144 Dépannage du système Dépannage des blocs d'alimentation 1 Identifiez le bloc d'alimentation défectueux en observant le voyant d'état correspondant. Voir « Codes du voyant d'alimentation » à la page 18. PRÉCAUTION : le système ne peut fonctionner que si au moins un bloc d'alimentation est installé. Le système risque de surchauffer si vous l'utilisez pendant une période prolongée avec un seul bloc d'alimentation. 2 Réinstallez le bloc d'alimentation en procédant d'abord à son retrait, puis à sa réinstallation. Voir « Blocs d'alimentation » à la page 85. REMARQUE : après avoir installé un bloc d'alimentation, patientez quelques secondes pour laisser au système le temps de le reconnaître et de déterminer s'il fonctionne correctement. Le voyant d'alimentation s'allume en vert si le bloc d'alimentation fonctionne normalement. Si le problème persiste, remplacez le bloc d'alimentation défectueux. 3 Si toutes les mesures de dépannage restent sans effets, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165. Dépannage des problèmes de refroidissement du système PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. Assurez-vous qu'aucune des conditions suivantes n'existe : • Le capot du système, le carénage de refroidissement, un cache de lecteur, un cache de bloc d'alimentation ou un cache avant ou arrière a été retiré. • La température ambiante est trop élevée. • La circulation de l'air extérieur est bloquée. • Les câbles à l'intérieur du système gênent la ventilation. • Un des ventilateurs a été retiré ou est en panne. Voir « Dépannage d'un ventilateur » à la page 145. • Les consignes d'installation de la carte d'extension n'ont pas été respectées. Voir « Consignes d'installation des cartes d'extension » à la page 97.Dépannage du système 145 Dépannage d'un ventilateur PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Mettez le système et tous les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension. 2 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. 3 Repositionnez le câble d'alimentation du ventilateur. 4 Redémarrez le système. Si le ventilateur fonctionne correctement, fermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. 5 Si le ventilateur ne fonctionne pas, mettez le système hors tension et installez un nouveau ventilateur. Voir « Réinstallation d'un ventilateur » à la page 85. 6 Redémarrez le système. Si le problème est résolu, refermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. Si le nouveau ventilateur ne fonctionne pas, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165. Dépannage de la mémoire système PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. REMARQUE : une configuration incorrecte de la mémoire peut provoquer un blocage au démarrage du système et l'absence de sortie vidéo. Voir « Consignes générales pour l'installation des barrettes de mémoire » à la page 89 et vérifier que la configuration de la mémoire est conforme aux consignes.146 Dépannage du système 1 Si le système fonctionne, exécutez le test des diagnostics en ligne approprié. Voir « Utilisation des diagnostics en ligne » à la page 155. Si les diagnostics indiquent une panne, appliquez les mesures correctives fournies par le programme de diagnostic. 2 Si le système n'est pas opérationnel, mettez-le hors tension, ainsi que les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la source d'alimentation électrique. Patientez au moins 10 secondes, puis rebranchez le système sur la source d'alimentation. 3 Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés sous tension, puis notez les messages qui s'affichent à l'écran. Si un message d'erreur indique qu'une barrette de mémoire est défectueuse, passez à l'étape 14. 4 Accédez au programme de configuration du système et vérifiez le paramètre de la mémoire système. Voir « Écran Memory Settings (Paramètres de la mémoire) » à la page 46. Modifiez les paramètres de la mémoire, le cas échéant. Si un problème persiste, bien que les paramètres de la mémoire correspondent à la mémoire installée, passez à l'étape 14. 5 Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 6 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. 7 Retirez le carénage de refroidissement. Voir « Retrait du carénage de refroidissement » à la page 74. 8 Vérifiez les canaux de mémoire et assurez-vous que l'installation des barrettes est correcte. Voir « Consignes générales pour l'installation des barrettes de mémoire » à la page 89. 9 Remboîtez les barrettes de mémoire dans leurs supports. Voir « Installation de barrettes de mémoire » à la page 94. 10 Réinstallez le carénage de refroidissement. Voir « Installation du carénage de refroidissement » à la page 75. 11 Refermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. 12 Rebranchez le système sur la prise secteur, puis mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés.Dépannage du système 147 13 Accédez au programme de configuration du système et vérifiez le paramètre de la mémoire système. Voir « Écran Memory Settings (Paramètres de la mémoire) » à la page 46. Si le problème persiste, passez à l'étape suivante. 14 Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la source d'alimentation électrique. 15 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. 16 Si un test de diagnostic ou un message d'erreur indique qu'une barrette de mémoire est défectueuse, repositionnez-la en l'é changeant avec une autre, ou bien remplacez-la. 17 Pour dépanner une barrette de mémoire défectueuse non identifiée, remplacez la barrette du premier logement de barrette de mémoire par une autre de même type et de même capacité. Voir « Installation de barrettes de mémoire » à la page 94. 18 Refermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. 19 Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 20 Pendant l'amorçage du système, observez les voyants de diagnostic du panneau avant et les messages d'erreur qui s'affichent. 21 Si le problème persiste, recommencez la procédure décrite de l'étape 14 à l'étape 20 pour chaque barrette de mémoire installée. Si le problème persiste alors que vous avez vérifié toutes les barrettes de mémoire, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165. Dépannage d'un disque dur PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. PRÉCAUTION : cette procédure de dépannage peut détruire les données stockées sur le disque dur. Avant de continuer, sauvegardez tous les fichiers se trouvant sur le disque dur. 148 Dépannage du système 1 Exécutez le test de diagnostic en ligne approprié. Voir « Utilisation des diagnostics en ligne » à la page 155. Selon les résultats du test de diagnostic, effectuez les étapes appropriées de la procédure ci-dessous. 2 Retirez le cadre avant s'il est installé. Voir « Retrait du cadre avant » à la page 71. 3 Si le système est doté d'un contrôleur RAID et si les disques durs sont configurés dans une matrice RAID, procédez comme suit : a Redémarrez le système et lancez l'utilitaire de configuration de l'adaptateur hôte en appuyant sur dans le cas d'un contrôleur PERC, ou sur dans le cas d'un contrôleur SAS. Pour en savoir plus sur l'utilitaire de configuration, voir la documentation fournie avec l'adaptateur hôte. b Assurez-vous que les disques durs ont été correctement configurés pour la matrice RAID. c Mettez le disque dur hors ligne, puis réinsérez-le. Voir « Retrait d'un disque dur remplaçable à chaud » à la page 76. d Quittez l'utilitaire de configuration et laissez le système d'exploitation démarrer. 4 Assurez-vous que les pilotes de périphérique requis pour la carte contrôleur sont installés et configurés correctement. Pour en savoir plus, voir la documentation du système d'exploitation. 5 Redémarrez le système, accédez au programme de configuration du système et vérifiez que le contrôleur est activé et que les lecteurs sont visibles dans ce programme. Voir « Accès au programme de configuration du système » à la page 42. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165. 6 Réinstallez le cadre avant. Voir « Installation du cadre avant » à la page 71.Dépannage du système 149 Dépannage d'un disque dur interne PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. PRÉCAUTION : cette procédure de dépannage peut détruire les données stockées sur le disque dur. Avant de continuer, sauvegardez tous les fichiers se trouvant sur le disque dur. 1 Exécutez le test de diagnostic en ligne approprié. Voir « Utilisation des diagnostics en ligne » à la page 155. Selon les résultats du test de diagnostic, effectuez les étapes appropriées de la procédure ci-dessous. 2 Si le système est doté d'un contrôleur RAID et si les disques durs sont configurés dans une matrice RAID, procédez comme suit : a Redémarrez le système et lancez l'utilitaire de configuration de l'adaptateur hôte en appuyant sur dans le cas d'un contrôleur PERC, ou sur dans le cas d'un contrôleur SAS. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilitaire de configuration, voir la documentation fournie avec l'adaptateur hôte. b Assurez-vous que les disques durs ont été correctement configurés pour la matrice RAID. c Mettez le disque dur hors ligne, puis réinsérez-le. Voir « Retrait d'une baie de disque dur interne » à la page 79. d Quittez l'utilitaire de configuration et laissez le système d'exploitation démarrer. 3 Assurez-vous que les pilotes de périphérique requis pour la carte contrôleur sont installés et configurés correctement. Pour en savoir plus, voir la documentation du système d'exploitation.150 Dépannage du système 4 Redémarrez le système, accédez au programme de configuration du système et vérifiez que le contrôleur est activé et que les lecteurs sont visibles dans ce programme. Voir « Accès au programme de configuration du système » à la page 42. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165. 5 Réinstallez le cadre avant. Voir « Installation du cadre avant » à la page 71. Dépannage d'un contrôleur de stockage REMARQUE : pour dépanner un contrôleur SAS ou RAID SAS, voir également sa documentation et celle du système d'exploitation. 1 Exécutez le test de diagnostic en ligne approprié. Voir « Utilisation des diagnostics en ligne » à la page 155. 2 Accédez au programme de configuration du système et vérifiez que le contrôleur SAS ou PERC est activé. Voir « Accès au programme de configuration du système » à la page 42. 3 Redémarrez le système et appuyez sur la combinaison de touches permettant d'ouvrir l'utilitaire de configuration approprié : • pour un contrôleur SAS • pour un contrôleur PERC Pour plus d'informations sur les paramètres de configuration, voir la documentation du contrôleur. 4 Vérifiez les paramètres de configuration, corrigez-les au besoin et redémarrez le système. PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 5 Retirez le cadre avant s'il est installé. Voir « Retrait du cadre avant » à la page 71. 6 Mettez le système et les périphériques connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur.Dépannage du système 151 7 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. 8 Vérifiez que la carte contrôleur est correctement emboîtée dans le connecteur de la carte système. Voir « Installation d'une carte d'extension » à la page 98. 9 Si vous disposez d'un contrôleur PERC à mémoire cache alimentée par batterie, assurez-vous que la batterie RAID est correctement connectée et, le cas échéant, que la barrette de mémoire est en place sur la carte PERC. 10 Vérifiez que le câblage entre le(s) fond(s) de panier SAS et le contrôleur de stockage intégré est correct. Voir « Installation de la carte contrôleur de stockage » à la page 106 et Figure 3-15. Vérifiez que les câbles sont correctement connectés au contrôleur de stockage et au fond de panier SAS. 11 Refermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. 12 Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165. 13 Réinstallez le cadre avant. Voir « Installation du cadre avant » à la page 71. Dépannage des cartes d'extension PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit, et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. REMARQUE : pour dépanner une carte d'extension, voir sa documentation et celle du système d'exploitation. 1 Exécutez le test de diagnostic en ligne approprié. Voir « Utilisation des diagnostics en ligne » à la page 155. 2 Retirez le cadre avant s'il est installé. Voir « Retrait du cadre avant » à la page 71. 3 Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur.152 Dépannage du système 4 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. 5 Vérifiez que chaque carte d'extension est correctement insérée dans son connecteur. Voir « Installation d'une carte d'extension » à la page 98. 6 Vérifiez que chaque carte de montage pour carte d'extension est correctement insérée dans son connecteur. Voir « Installation d'une carte de montage pour carte d'extension » à la page 103. 7 Refermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. 8 Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 9 Si le problème persiste, éteignez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 10 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. 11 Retirez toutes les cartes d'extension du système. Voir « Retrait d'une carte d'extension » à la page 100. 12 Refermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. 13 Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 14 Exécutez le test de diagnostic en ligne approprié. Voir « Exécution des diagnostics du système » à la page 155. Si les tests échouent, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165. 15 Pour chaque carte d'extension retirée à l'étape 11, effectuez les opérations suivantes : a Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. b Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. c Réinstallez une des cartes d'extension. d Refermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. e Exécutez le test de diagnostic approprié. Si les tests échouent, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165.Dépannage du système 153 Dépannage des processeurs PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit, et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Exécutez le test de diagnostic en ligne approprié. Voir « Utilisation des diagnostics en ligne » à la page 155. 2 Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 3 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. 4 Vérifiez que chaque processeur et chaque dissipateur de chaleur est installé correctement. Voir « Installation d'un processeur » à la page 116. 5 Refermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. 6 Rebranchez le système à la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 7 Exécutez le test de diagnostic en ligne approprié. Voir « Exécution des diagnostics du système » à la page 155. 8 Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 9 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. 10 Retirez le processeur 2. Voir « Retrait d'un processeur » à la page 112. 11 Refermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. 12 Rebranchez le système sur la prise secteur et mettez-le sous tension, ainsi que les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 13 Exécutez le test de diagnostic en ligne approprié. Voir « Exécution des diagnostics du système » à la page 155. En cas d'échec du test, le processeur est défectueux. Voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165. 14 Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur.154 Dépannage du système 15 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. 16 Remplacez le processeur 1 par le processeur 2. Voir « Installation d'un processeur » à la page 116. 17 Recommencez la procédure de l'étape 11 à l'étape 13. Si l'incident persiste alors que vous avez testé les deux processeurs, cela veut dire que la carte système est défectueuse. Voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 165.Exécution des diagnostics du système 155 Exécution des diagnostics du système Si vous rencontrez des problèmes lorsque vous utilisez le système, lancez les diagnostics avant de demander une assistance technique. Le but des diagnostics est de tester le matériel du système sans équipement supplémentaire et sans risque de perte de données. Si vous ne réussissez pas à corriger l'incident, l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique peut s'aider des résultats de ces tests. Utilisation des diagnostics en ligne Pour évaluer un problème du système, utilisez d'abord Online Diagnostics. Dell™ Online Diagnostics est une suite de programmes de diagnostic, ou de modules de test, qui inclut des tests de diagnostic pour le châssis et les composants de stockage (disques durs, mémoire physique, ports de communication et d'imprimante, cartes réseau, CMOS, etc.). Si vous n'arrivez pas à identifier un problème à l'aide d'Online Diagnostics, utilisez les diagnostics intégrés du système. Les fichiers requis pour exécuter Online Diagnostics sur les systèmes d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® et Linux sont disponibles sur le site Web support.dell.com, ainsi que sur les DVD fournis avec le système. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation des diagnostics, voir le document Dell Online Diagnostics User's Guide (Guide d'utilisation de Dell Online Diagnostics). Les diagnostics intégrés du système peuvent être lancés à l'aide de Lifecycle Controller (Contrôleur de cycle de vie).. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation de ce contrôleur, voir la documentation de Lifecycle Controller sur le site Web du support Dell, à l'adresse support.dell.com/manuals.156 Exécution des diagnostics du système Fonctionnalités de diagnostic intégrées du système Les diagnostics intégrés du système comportent des menus et des options permettant de tester des groupes de périphériques ou des périphériques particuliers. Les menus et les options des diagnostics du système vous permettent d'effectuer les tâches suivantes : • Effectuer des tests individuellement ou collectivement • Contrôler la séquence des tests • Répéter des tests • Afficher, imprimer ou enregistrer les résultats des tests • Interrompre un test momentanément si une erreur est détectée ou mettre fin à un test lorsqu'une limite définie par l'utilisateur a été atteinte • Afficher les messages d'aide qui décrivent brièvement chaque test ainsi que ses paramètres • Afficher des messages d'état vous indiquant si les tests ont réussi • Visualiser les messages d'erreur qui vous informent des problèmes rencontrés au cours des tests Quand utiliser les diagnostics intégrés du système Le dysfonctionnement d'un composant ou d'un périphérique important du système peut provenir de la défaillance d'un composant. Tant que le processeur et les périphériques d'entrée/sortie du système fonctionnent, vous pouvez utiliser les diagnostics pour faciliter l'identification de l'incident. Exécution des diagnostics intégrés du système Vous pouvez exécuter le programme de diagnostic intégré du système à partir de l'écran principal de l'utilitaire USC. PRÉCAUTION : n'utilisez les diagnostics que sur ce système. Leur utilisation sur d'autres systèmes peut entraîner des résultats erronés ou générer des messages d'erreur. Exécution des diagnostics du système 157 1 Au cours du démarrage du système, appuyez sur pour lancer le contrôleur. 2 Cliquez sur Diagnostics dans le volet de gauche, puis sur Launch Diagnostics (Lancer les diagnostics) dans le volet de droite. Le menu Diagnostics vous permet d'exécuter tous les tests ou uniquement certains, ou encore de quitter le programme. Options de test des diagnostics intégrés du système Cliquez sur l'option de test voulue dans l'écran Main Menu (Menu principal). Utilisation des options de test personnalisé Lorsque vous sélectionnez l'option Custom Test (Test personnalisé) dans l'écran Main Menu (Menu principal), la fenêtre Customize (Personnaliser) s'affiche. Elle permet de sélectionner les périphériques à tester, de choisir des options de test spécifiques et de visualiser les résultats obtenus. Sélection de périphériques à tester La partie gauche de la fenêtre Customize répertorie les périphériques qui peuvent être testés. Cliquez sur le signe (+) en regard d'un périphérique ou d'un module pour visualiser ses composants. Cliquez sur le signe (+) en regard d'un composant pour visualiser les tests disponibles. Si vous cliquez sur un périphérique et non sur ses composants, tous les composants de ce périphérique sont sélectionnés pour le test. Option de test Fonction Express Test (Test rapide) Effectue une vérification rapide du système. Cette option exécute des tests de périphérique qui ne nécessitent pas d'intervention de l'utilisateur. Extended Test (Test approfondi) Effectue une vérification plus complète du système. Ce test peut prendre plus d'une heure. Custom Test (Test personnalisé) Teste un périphérique donné. Informations Affiche les résultats du test.158 Exécution des diagnostics du système REMARQUE : après avoir sélectionné tous les périphériques et composants à tester, sélectionnez All Devices (Tous les périphériques) et cliquez sur Run Tests (Exécuter les tests). Sélection d'options de diagnostic Dans la zone Diagnostics Options (Options de diagnostic), sélectionnez le ou les tests à appliquer à un périphérique : • Non-Interactive Tests Only (Tests non interactifs uniquement) : cette option permet d'exécuter uniquement les tests ne nécessitant aucune intervention de la part de l'utilisateur. • Quick Tests Only (Tests rapides uniquement) : cette option permet d'exécuter uniquement les tests rapides sur le périphérique sélectionné. • Show Ending Timestamp (Afficher l'heure de fin) : cette option permet d'ajouter un horodatage au journal de test. • Test Iterations (Nombre d'itérations) : cette option permet de sélectionner le nombre d'exécutions du test. • Log output file pathname (Chemin du journal de sortie) : cette option permet de définir la clé de mémoire USB où le journal de test est sauvegardé. Ce fichier ne peut pas être enregistré sur le disque dur. Visualisation des informations et des résultats Les onglets suivants de la fenêtre Customize (Personnaliser) contiennent des informations sur les tests et les résultats : • Results (Résultats) : indique le test exécuté et son résultat. • Errors (Erreurs) : affiche les erreurs qui se sont produites pendant le test. • Help (Aide) : affiche des informations sur le périphérique, le composant ou le test sélectionné. • Configuration : affiche des informations de base concernant la configuration du périphérique sélectionné. • Parameters (Paramètres) : affiche les paramètres que vous pouvez définir pour le test à exécuter.Cavaliers et connecteurs 159 Cavaliers et connecteurs Cette section contient des informations spécifiques sur les cavaliers du système. Elle contient également des informations générales sur les cavaliers et les commutateurs et décrit les connecteurs des différentes cartes du système. Cavaliers de la carte système La Figure 6-1 présente l'emplacement des cavaliers de configuration sur la carte système. Le Tableau 6-1 répertorie les paramètres des cavaliers. Tableau 6-1. Paramètres des cavaliers de la carte système Cavalier Paramètre Description PWRD_EN (par défaut) La fonction de mot de passe est activée (broches 2 à 4). La fonction de mot de passe est désactivée et l'accès local à la carte iDRAC6 est déverrouillé lors du prochain cycle d'alimentation secteur (broches 4 à 6). NVRAM_CLR (par défaut) Les paramètres de configuration sont conservés au démarrage du système (broches 3 à 5). Les paramètres de configuration sont effacés au prochain démarrage du système (broches 1 à 3).160 Cavaliers et connecteurs Connecteurs de la carte système Pour la description et l'emplacement des connecteurs de la carte système, voir la Figure 6-1 et le Tableau 6-2. Figure 6-1. Connecteurs de la carte système 3 4 14 16 15 1 2 13 12 11 10 8 7 6 5 17 18 19 20 21 9Cavaliers et connecteurs 161 Tableau 6-2. Connecteurs de la carte système Élément Connecteur Description 1 CPU2 Processeur 2 2 iDRAC6 Enterprise Connecteur de la carte iDRAC6 Enterprise 3 B4 B1 B2 B3 Logement de barrette de mémoire B4 Logement de barrette de mémoire B1 (levier d'éjection blanc) Logement de barrette de mémoire B2 (levier d'éjection blanc) Logement de barrette de mémoire B3 (levier d'éjection blanc) 4 CPU1 Processeur 1 5 FAN1 Connecteur de ventilateur 1 6 FAN2 Connecteur de ventilateur 2 7 A3 A2 A1 A4 Logement de barrette de mémoire A3 (levier d'éjection blanc) Logement de barrette de mémoire A2 (levier d'éjection blanc) Logement de barrette de mémoire A1 (levier d'éjection blanc) Logement de barrette de mémoire A4 8 FAN3 Connecteur de ventilateur 3 9 BATTERY Pile du système 10 FAN4 Connecteur de ventilateur 4 11 12V Connecteur d'alimentation à 8 broches 12 FP_CONN Connecteur du panneau de commande 13 BP_CONN Connecteur d'alimentation du fond de panier 14 PWR_CONN connecteur d'alimentation à 24 broches 15 PDB_I2C Connecteur de la carte de distribution de l'alimentation 16 FP_USB_CONN Connecteur USB du fond de panier162 Cavaliers et connecteurs Désactivation d'un mot de passe oublié Les fonctionnalités logicielles de protection du système comprennent un mot de passe système et un mot de passe de configuration, qui sont décrits à la section « Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI » à la page 41. Le cavalier de mot de passe active ces fonctionnalités ou les désactive, et efface le(s) mot(s) de passe utilisé(s). PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 2 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. 17 SATA_A SATA_B SATA_C SATA_D SATA_E Connecteur SATA A Connecteur SATA B Connecteur SATA C Connecteur SATA D Connecteur SATA E 18 RISER Connecteur de carte de montage pour carte d'extension 19 RISER Connecteur de carte de montage pour carte d'extension 20 iDRAC6 Express Connecteur de la carte iDRAC6 Express 21 PSWD_EN NVRM_CLR Cavalier d'activation du mot de passe Cavalier d'effacement NVRAM Tableau 6-2. Connecteurs de la carte système (suite) Élément Connecteur DescriptionCavaliers et connecteurs 163 3 Placez le cavalier de mot de passe en position « désactivé » pour effacer le mot de passe. Voir Tableau 6-1. Pour identifier le cavalier de mot de passe sur la carte système, voir Figure 6-1. 4 Fermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. 5 Rebranchez le système et les périphériques aux prises secteur, puis mettez le système sous tension. Les mots de passe existants ne sont désactivés (effacés) que lorsque le système démarre avec la fiche de cavalier de mot de passe sur la position « désactivé ». Toutefois, avant d'attribuer un nouveau mot de passe système et/ou de configuration, vous devez placer la fiche de cavalier sur la position d'activation. REMARQUE : si vous attribuez un nouveau mot de passe système et/ou de configuration alors que la fiche de cavalier est encore sur la position « désactivé », le système désactivera les nouveaux mots de passe lors de son prochain démarrage. 6 Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 7 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 72. 8 Placez le cavalier de mot de passe en position d'activation pour rétablir la fonction de mot de passe. Voir Tableau 6-1. 9 Fermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 73. 10 Rebranchez le système et les périphériques aux prises secteur, puis mettez le système sous tension. 11 Attribuez un nouveau mot de passe système et/ou de configuration. Pour attribuer un nouveau mot de passe à l'aide du programme de configuration du système, voir « Fonctionnalités de mot de passe du système et de mot de passe de configuration » à la page 61.164 Cavaliers et connecteursObtention d'aide 165 Obtention d'aide Contacter Dell Aux États-Unis, appelez le 800-WWW-DELL (800-999-3355). REMARQUE : si vous ne disposez pas d'une connexion Internet active, vous pouvez utiliser les coordonnées figurant sur votre preuve d'achat, votre bordereau de marchandises, votre facture ou encore sur le catalogue des produits Dell. Dell propose plusieurs options de maintenance et d'assistance technique en ligne et par téléphone. Leur disponibilité variant d'un pays à l'autre, il est possible que certains services ne soient pas proposés dans votre région. Pour contacter Dell pour des questions ayant trait aux ventes, au support technique ou au service client : 1 Rendez-vous sur le site support.dell.com. 2 Sélectionnez l'option appropriée dans le menu déroulant Choose A Country/Region (Choisissez un pays ou une région) situé au bas de la page. 3 Cliquez sur Contact Us (Contactez-nous) dans la partie gauche de la page. 4 Sélectionnez le lien de service ou de support approprié en fonction de vos besoins. 5 Pour contacter Dell, sélectionnez la méthode qui vous convient le mieux. 166 Obtention d'aideIndex 167 Index A assemblage du panneau de commande fonctionnalités, 12 installation, 123 retrait, 121 assistance contacter Dell, 165 auto-test de démarrage accès aux fonctions du système, 11 B barrettes de mémoire (DIMM) configuration, 89 configurations UDIMM, 98 installation, 94 retrait, 96 batterie dépannage de la batterie de la carte RAID, 150 batterie du système remplacement, 117 batteries dépannage, 143 blocs d'alimentation réinstallation, 87 retrait, 86 voyants, 18 BMC configuration, 66 C cache bloc d'alimentation, 88 disque dur, 75 cache de bloc d'alimentation, 88 cache de lecteur installation, 76 retrait, 75 cadre, 71 capot fermeture, 73 ouverture, 72 carénage de refroidissement installation, 75 retrait, 74 carte contrôleur fille RAID SAS dépannage, 150 carte contrôleur fille SAS dépannage, 150 carte contrôleur SAS installation, 106 retrait, 103 carte d'extension contrôleur SAS, 103 dépannage, 151168 Index carte de fond de panier SAS installation, 128 retrait, 125 carte iDRAC installation, 107, 109 port système, 15 carte réseau connecteurs du panneau arrière, 15 voyants, 18 carte système cavaliers, 159 connecteurs, 160 installation, 134 retrait, 132 cartes d'extension installation, 98 retrait, 100 cartes réseau dépannage, 140 cavaliers (carte système), 159 clavier dépannage, 138 connecteurs carte système, 160 USB, 12 vidéo, 12 consignes connexion de périphériques externes, 17 installation de cartes d'extension, 97 installation de mémoire, 89 contacter Dell, 165 contrôleur d'accès distant Voir carte iDRAC. coordonnées téléphoniques, 165 D Dell contacter, 165 Dell PowerEdge Diagnostics utilisation, 155 démarrage accès aux fonctions du système, 11 dépannage batterie, 143 carte contrôleur fille RAID SAS, 150 carte d'extension, 151 carte réseau, 140 clavier, 138 connexions externes, 138 disque dur, 147, 149 disque dur interne, 149 mémoire, 145 processeurs, 153 refroidissement du système, 144 système endommagé, 142 système mouillé, 141 ventilateurs, 145 vidéo, 138Index 169 diagnostics contexte d'utilisation, 156 options de test, 157 options de tests avancés, 157 utilisation de Dell PowerEdge Diagnostics, 155 DIMM Voir barrettes de mémoire (DIMM). disque dur dépannage, 147, 149 disque dur SAS. Voir disque dur. disque dur SATA. Voir disque dur. disques durs (remplaçables à chaud) installation, 77 Dissipateur de chaleur, 114 E écrans du programme de configuration du système écran principal, 44 F fonctionnalités du panneau arrière, 15 fonctionnalités du panneau avant, 12 fonctions du système accès, 11 G garantie, 40 Gestion intégrée du système, 66 Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI accès, 58 écran des paramètres d'amorçage UEFI, 60 écran des utilitaires système, 60 écran principal, 59 I installation assemblage du panneau de commande, 123 barrettes de mémoire, 94 cache de bloc d'alimentation, 88 cache de disque dur, 76 carénage de refroidissement, 75 carte d'extension, 98 carte de fond de panier SAS, 128 carte iDRAC, 107, 109 contrôleur SAS, 106 disque dur (remplaçable à chaud), 77 Module d'E/S du panneau avant, 125 processeur, 116 L logements Voir logements d'extension.170 Index logements d'extension, 97 M mémoire dépannage, 145 messages avertissement, 39 messages d'erreur, 42 système, 22 messages d'avertissement, 39 messages d'erreur, 42 messages système, 22 mises à niveau processeur, 112 mode de mémoire mise en miroir, 91 mode de mise en miroir de la mémoire, 91 mode mémoire ECC avancé, 90 optimiseur, 91 mode mémoire ECC avancé, 90 mode optimiseur de la mémoire, 91 Module d'E/S du panneau avant, 123 installation, 125 retrait, 123 mot de passe configuration, 64 système, 61 mot de passe de configuration, 64 mot de passe du système, 61 mots de passe désactivation, 162 N numéros de téléphone, 165 P périphérique USB connecteurs du panneau arrière, 15 processeur installation, 116 mises à niveau, 112 retrait, 112 Voir processeur. processeurs dépannage, 153 programme de configuration du système affectation des IRQ PCI, 52 options de gestion de l'alimentation, 54 options de sécurité du système, 55 options des communications série, 52 options des périphériques intégrés, 50 paramètres d'amorçage, 49 paramètres de la mémoire, 46Index 171 paramètres de processeur, 47 touches, 42 R refroidissement du système dépannage, 144 réinstallation bloc d'alimentation, 87 ventilateur, 85 remplacement batterie du système, 117 retrait assemblage du panneau de commande, 121 barrettes de mémoire, 96 bloc d'alimentation, 86 cache de bloc d'alimentation, 88 cache de disque dur, 75 cadre, 71 capot, 72 carénage de refroidissement, 74 carte d'extension, 100 carte de fond de panier SAS, 125 carte système, 132 contrôleur SAS, 103 Module d'E/S du panneau avant, 123 processeur, 112 S sécurité, 137 sécurité du système, 55, 63 sécurité TPM, 55 système fermeture, 73 ouverture, 72 système mouillé dépannage, 141 systèmes endommagés dépannage, 142 U Unified Server Configurator Lifecyle Controller, 66 USB connecteurs du panneau avant, 12 Utilitaire de configuration iDRAC, 67 V ventilateur réinstallation, 85 ventilateurs dépannage, 145 vidéo connecteur du panneau arrière, 15172 Index connecteurs du panneau avant, 12 dépannage, 138 voyants alimentation, 12, 18 carte réseau, 18 panneau arrière, 15 panneau avant, 12 voyants d'alimentation, 12, 18 Station de travail mobile Dell Precision M4700 Manuel du propriétaire Modèle réglementaire: P21F Type réglementaire: P21F001Remarques, précautions et avertissements REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent vous aider à mieux utiliser l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème. AVERTISSEMENT : Un AVERTISSEMENT indique un risque d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. © 2012 Dell Inc. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell™, le logo DELL logo, Dell Precision™, Precision ON™, ExpressCharge™, Latitude™, Latitude ON™, OptiPlex™, Vostro™ et Wi-Fi Catcher™ sont des marques de Dell Inc. Intel®, Pentium®, Xeon®, Core™, Atom™, Centrino® et Celeron® sont des marques ou des marques déposées d'Intel Corporation aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. AMD® est une marque déposée et AMD Opteron™, AMD Phenom™, AMD Sempron™, AMD Athlon™, ATI Radeon™ et ATI FirePro™ sont des marques d'Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Microsoft®, Windows®, MS-DOS®, Windows Vista®, le bouton Démarrer Windows Vista et Office Outlook® sont des marques ou des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Blu-ray Disc™ est une marque de la Blu-ray Disc Association (BDA) et est sous licence pour une utilisation sur des disques et des lecteurs. La marque Bluetooth® est une marque déposée et appartient à Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. et toute utilisation d'une telle marque par Dell Inc. se fait dans le cadre d'une licence. Wi-Fi® est une marque déposée de Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance, Inc. 2012 - 07 Rev. A00Table des matières Remarques, précautions et avertissements..............................................................................2 Chapitre 1: Intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur........................................................7 Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur.........................................................................................................................7 Outils recommandés.................................................................................................................................................8 Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur.............................................................................................................................8 Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.................................................................................................9 Chapitre 2: Retrait et installation des composants.................................................................11 Retrait de la carte SD (Secure Digital)...................................................................................................................11 Installation de la carte SD......................................................................................................................................11 Retrait de la carte ExpressCard..............................................................................................................................11 Installation de la carte ExpressCard.......................................................................................................................11 Retrait de la batterie...............................................................................................................................................11 Installation de la batterie........................................................................................................................................12 Retrait de la carte SIM (Subscriber Identity Module)............................................................................................12 Installation de la carte SIM (Subscriber Identity Module).....................................................................................13 Retrait du capot de la base.....................................................................................................................................13 Installation du capot de la base..............................................................................................................................15 Retrait de l'habillage du clavier..............................................................................................................................15 Installation de l'habillage du clavier.......................................................................................................................16 Retrait du clavier.....................................................................................................................................................17 Installation du clavier.............................................................................................................................................19 Retrait de la mémoire principale............................................................................................................................20 Installation de la mémoire principale.....................................................................................................................20 Retrait de la mémoire secondaire..........................................................................................................................21 Installation de la mémoire secondaire...................................................................................................................21 Retrait du lecteur optique.......................................................................................................................................21 Installation du lecteur optique................................................................................................................................23 Retrait du Dur disque..............................................................................................................................................23 Installation du Dur disque.......................................................................................................................................24 Retrait de la carte réseau LAN sans fil...................................................................................................................24 Installation de la carte réseau LAN sans fil............................................................................................................25 Retrait de la carte réseau LAN sans fil (en option).................................................................................................25 Installation de la carte réseau LAN sans fil (en option).........................................................................................25 Retrait du module Bluetooth...................................................................................................................................25 Installation du module Bluetooth............................................................................................................................26Retrait du ventilateur du processeur......................................................................................................................27 Installation du ventilateur du processeur...............................................................................................................27 Retrait du ventilateur de la carte vidéo..................................................................................................................28 Installation du ventilateur de la carte vidéo...........................................................................................................28 Retrait de la pile bouton..........................................................................................................................................28 Installation de la pile bouton...................................................................................................................................29 Retrait du repose-mains.........................................................................................................................................29 Installation du repose-mains..................................................................................................................................32 Retrait du module ExpressCard..............................................................................................................................33 Installation du module ExpressCard.......................................................................................................................34 Retrait du dissipateur de chaleur...........................................................................................................................35 Installation du dissipateur de chaleur....................................................................................................................35 Retrait du processeur.............................................................................................................................................36 Installation du processeur......................................................................................................................................36 Retrait du dissipateur de chaleur de la carte vidéo...............................................................................................36 Installation du dissipateur de chaleur de la carte vidéo........................................................................................38 Retrait de la carte vidéo..........................................................................................................................................39 Installation de la carte vidéo..................................................................................................................................39 Retrait de la carte d'entrées/sorties (E/S)..............................................................................................................40 Installation de la carte d'E/S...................................................................................................................................41 Retrait de la carte de commutateur........................................................................................................................41 Installation de la carte de commutateur.................................................................................................................42 Retrait de la carte USH (Unified Security Hub).......................................................................................................42 Installation de la carte USH....................................................................................................................................43 Retrait de l'ensemble écran....................................................................................................................................43 Installation de l'ensemble écran............................................................................................................................46 Retrait du cache de charnière................................................................................................................................46 Installation du cache de charnière.........................................................................................................................47 Retrait de la carte système.....................................................................................................................................47 Installation de la carte système..............................................................................................................................50 Retrait du port du connecteur d'alimentation.........................................................................................................51 Installation du port du connecteur d'alimentation.................................................................................................52 Retrait du cadre de l'écran.....................................................................................................................................52 Installation du cadre de l'écran..............................................................................................................................53 Retrait du panneau d'écran....................................................................................................................................54 Installation du panneau d'écran.............................................................................................................................57 Retrait de la webcam..............................................................................................................................................57 Installation de la webcam.......................................................................................................................................57 Chapitre 3: Configuration du système.......................................................................................59 Séquence de démarrage........................................................................................................................................59 Touches de navigation............................................................................................................................................59Options de configuration du système.....................................................................................................................60 Mise à jour du BIOS ...............................................................................................................................................68 Mots de passe du système et de configuration.....................................................................................................69 Définition d'un mot de passe système et d'un mot de passe de configuration...............................................69 Suppression ou modification d'un mot de passe système et/ou de configuration..........................................70 Chapitre 4: Diagnostics...............................................................................................................71 Diagnostisc ePSA (Enhanced Pre-Boot System Assessment)...............................................................................71 Chapitre 5: Dépannage de l'ordinateur....................................................................................73 Voyants d'état de l'appareil....................................................................................................................................73 Voyants d'état de la batterie...................................................................................................................................74 Caractéristiques techniques...................................................................................................................................74 Chapitre 6: Caractéristiques.......................................................................................................81 Caractéristiques techniques...................................................................................................................................81 Chapitre 7: Contacter Dell...........................................................................................................89 Contacter Dell.........................................................................................................................................................8961 Intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur Suivez les recommandations de sécurité ci-dessous pour protéger votre ordinateur et vos données personnelles de toute détérioration. Sauf indication contraire, chaque procédure mentionnée dans ce document suppose que les conditions suivantes sont réunies : • Vous avez exécuté les étapes de la section Intervention sur votre ordinateur. • Vous avez pris connaissance des informations de sécurité fournies avec votre ordinateur. • Un composant peut être remplacé ou, si acheté séparément, installé en exécutant la procédure de retrait dans l'ordre inverse. AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur, lisez les informations de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur. D'autres informations sur les meilleures pratiques de sécurité sont disponibles sur la page d'accueil Regulatory Compliance (Conformité réglementaire) accessible à l'adresse www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter une décharge électrostatique, raccordez-vous à la terre à l'aide d'un bracelet antistatique ou en touchant une surface métallique non peinte, par exemple un connecteur sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Manipulez avec précaution les composants et les cartes. Ne touchez pas les composants ni les contacts des cartes. Saisissez les cartes par les bords ou par le support de montage métallique. Saisissez les composants, processeur par exemple, par les bords et non par les broches. PRÉCAUTION : Lorsque vous déconnectez un câble, tirez sur le connecteur ou sa languette, mais pas sur le câble lui-même. Certains câbles sont dotés de connecteurs avec dispositif de verrouillage. Si vous déconnectez un câble de ce type, appuyez d'abord sur le verrou. Lorsque vous démontez les connecteurs, maintenez-les alignés uniformément pour éviter de tordre les broches. Enfin, avant de connecter un câble, vérifiez que les deux connecteurs sont correctement orientés et alignés. REMARQUE : La couleur de votre ordinateur et de certains composants peut différer de celle de l'ordinateur et des composants illustrés dans ce document. Pour ne pas endommager l'ordinateur, procédez comme suit avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur. 1. Assurez-vous que la surface de travail est plane et propre afin d'éviter de rayer le capot de l'ordinateur. 2. Mettez l'ordinateur hors tension (voir la section Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur). 3. Si l'ordinateur est connecté à une station d'accueil, telle qu'un périphérique d'accueil ou une extension de batterie en option, déconnectez-le. 7PRÉCAUTION : Pour retirer un câble réseau, déconnectez-le d'abord de l'ordinateur, puis du périphérique réseau. 4. Déconnectez tous les câbles externes du système. 5. Débranchez du secteur l'ordinateur et tous les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 6. Fermez l'écran et retournez l'ordinateur sur une surface plane. REMARQUE : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte système, vous devez retirer la batterie principale avant de dépanner l'ordinateur. 7. Retirez la batterie principale. 8. Remettez l'ordinateur à l'endroit. 9. Ouvrez l'écran. 10. Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour raccorder la carte système à la terre. PRÉCAUTION : Pour prévenir tout risque de choc électrique, débranchez toujours l'ordinateur de la prise électrique avant d'ouvrir l'écran. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de toucher un élément dans l'ordinateur, raccordez-vous à la terre en touchant une surface métallique non peinte, telle que le métal à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Pendant l'intervention, touchez régulièrement une surface métallique non peinte pour éliminer l'électricité statique qui pourrait endommager les composants. 11. Retirez les ExpressCard ou cartes à puce installées des logements appropriés. Outils recommandés Les procédures mentionnées dans ce document nécessitent les outils suivants : • un petit tournevis à tête plate • un tournevis cruciforme n°0 • un tournevis cruciforme n°1 • une petite pointe en plastique • le CD du programme de mise à jour flash du BIOS Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur PRÉCAUTION : Pour ne pas perdre des données, enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts et quittez tous les programmes ouverts avant de mettre hors tension l'ordinateur. 1. Arrêtez le système d'exploitation : – Dans Windows 7: Cliquez sur Démarrer , puis cliquez sur Arrêter. – Dans Windows Vista : Cliquez sur Démarrer , puis sur la flèche dans l'angle inférieur gauche du menu Démarrer, comme indiqué ci-dessous, puis sur Arrêter. – Dans Windows XP: 8Cliquez sur Démarrer → Arrêter l'ordinateur → Éteindre . L'ordinateur s'éteint à la fin de la procédure d'arrêt du système d'exploitation. 2. Vérifiez que l'ordinateur et tous les périphériques connectés sont hors tension. Si l'ordinateur et les périphériques connectés n'ont pas été mis hors tension automatiquement lorsque vous avez arrêté le système d'exploitation, appuyez sur le bouton Marche/Arrêt et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant quatre secondes environ pour les mettre hors tension. Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur Une fois les procédures de réinstallation terminées, n'oubliez pas de brancher les périphériques externes, cartes, câbles, etc. avant de mettre l'ordinateur sous tension. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter d'endommager l'ordinateur, utilisez uniquement la batterie conçue pour cet ordinateur Dell spécifique. N'employez pas de batteries conçues pour d'autres ordinateurs Dell. 1. Branchez les périphériques externes, par exemple réplicateur de port, extension de batterie ou périphérique d'accueil, et remettez en place les cartes comme l'ExpressCard, le cas échéant. 2. Branchez les câbles téléphoniques ou de réseau sur l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Pour connecter un câble réseau, branchez-le d'abord le périphérique du réseau et sur l'ordinateur. 3. Réinstallez la batterie. 4. Branchez l'ordinateur et tous ses périphériques sur leur prise secteur. 5. Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension. 9102 Retrait et installation des composants Cette section fournit des informations détaillées sur le retrait ou l'installation des composants de l'ordinateur. Retrait de la carte SD (Secure Digital) 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Appuyez sur la carte SD pour la libérer et faites-la glisser pour la retirer de l'ordinateur. Installation de la carte SD 1. Faites glisser la carte SD dans son emplacement jusqu'à ce qu'elle s'enclenche. 2. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. Retrait de la carte ExpressCard 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Appuyez sur la carte ExpressCard pour la libérer et faites-la glisser pour la retirer de l'ordinateur. Installation de la carte ExpressCard 1. Faites glisser la carte ExpressCard dans son emplacement jusqu'à ce que vous l'entendiez s'enclencher. 2. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. Retrait de la batterie 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Faites glisser le loquet de déverrouillage pour déverrouiller la batterie. 113. Retournez la batterie et retirez-la de l'ordinateur. Installation de la batterie 1. Faites glisser la batterie dans son emplacement jusqu'à ce que vous l'entendiez s'enclencher. 2. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. Retrait de la carte SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez la batterie. 123. Faites glisser la carte SIM hors de son emplacement. Installation de la carte SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) 1. Poussez la carte SIM dans son emplacement. 2. Installez la batterie. 3. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. Retrait du capot de la base 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez la batterie. 3. Retirez les vis fixant le capot de la base à l'ordinateur. Appuyez sur les languettes en caoutchouc à l'arrière de l'ordinateur pour dégager le capot de la base. 134. Retournez le capot de la base et retirez-le de l'ordinateur. 14Installation du capot de la base 1. Faites glisser le capot de la base et placez-le correctement sur les trous de vis situés sur l'ordinateur. 2. Serrez les vis pour fixer le capot de la base à l'ordinateur. 3. Installez la batterie. 4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. Retrait de l'habillage du clavier 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez la batterie. 3. Écartez l'habillage du clavier en commençant par le bord intérieur supérieur. 4. Écartez le bord inférieur de l'habillage du clavier du bord intérieur supérieur. 15Installation de l'habillage du clavier 1. Saisissez l'habillage du clavier à l'avant et placez-le dans sa position d'origine sur l'ordinateur. Assurez-vous que la languette rigide située dans le coin gauche s'enclenche. 162. Appuyez sur les côtés de l'habillage du clavier jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche. 3. Installez la batterie. 4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. Retrait du clavier 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) l'habillage du clavier 3. Retirez les vis qui fixent le clavier à l'ordinateur. 174. En commençant par le bas du clavier, séparez le clavier de l'ordinateur et retournez le clavier. 5. Déconnectez le câble de données du clavier de la carte système et retirez le clavier. 18Installation du clavier 1. Connectez le câble de données du clavier à la carte système. REMARQUE : Assurez-vous de plier le câble de données du clavier de façon à ce qu'il soit parfaitement aligné. 2. Appuyez sur le clavier pour l'installer dans son compartiment. 3. Serrez les vis qui fixent le clavier à l'ordinateur. 4. Appuyez sur la section transversale des touches suivantes pour fixer le clavier à l'ordinateur : a) Touches , , et b) sur la touche <9> c) Touche VERR NUM <9> 195. Installez : a) l'habillage du clavier b) la batterie 6. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. Retrait de la mémoire principale 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) le capot de la base 3. Écartez les clips de fixation du module de mémoire principale jusqu'à ce qu'il sorte. Soulevez le module de mémoire principale et retirez-le de l'ordinateur. Installation de la mémoire principale 1. Insérez le module de mémoire principale dans le socket de mémoire. 2. Appuyez sur les clips permettant de fixer le module de mémoire principale à la carte système. 3. Installez : 20a) le capot de la base b) la batterie 4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. Retrait de la mémoire secondaire 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) l'habillage du clavier c) le clavier REMARQUE : La mémoire secondaire est située sous le clavier. 3. Écartez les clips de fixation du module de mémoire jusqu'à ce qu'il sorte. Soulevez le module de mémoire et retirezle de l'ordinateur. Installation de la mémoire secondaire 1. Insérez le module de mémoire secondaire dans le socket de mémoire. 2. Appuyez sur les clips permettant de fixer le module de mémoire à la carte système. 3. Installez : a) le clavier b) l'habillage du clavier c) la batterie 4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. Retrait du lecteur optique 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) le capot de la base 3. Retirez la vis fixant le lecteur optique à l'ordinateur. 214. Dégagez et faites glisser le lecteur optique pour le retirer de l'ordinateur. 5. Retirez les vis fixant le support du loquet du disque sur le lecteur optique et retirez le support. 22Installation du lecteur optique 1. Serrez les vis pour fixer le support du loquet du disque au lecteur optique. 2. Faites glisser le lecteur optique dans son emplacement et serrez la vis pour le fixer à l'ordinateur. 3. Installez : a) la batterie b) le capot de la base 4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. Retrait du Dur disque 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) le capot de la base 3. Retirez les vis fixant le dur disque à l'ordinateur. Faites glisser le dur loquet du disque en position de déverrouillage et sortez le disque dur de l'ordinateur. 234. Courbez le support du disque dur vers l'extérieur et sortez le disque dur du support. REMARQUE : Une plaque en caoutchouc est installée dans le support du disque dur pour les disques durs de 7 mm. Elle permet d'éviter les vibrations et d'installer correctement les disques durs de 7 mm. L'installation des disques durs de 9 mm dans le support ne nécessite pas le recours à cette plaque. Installation du Dur disque 1. Engagez le dur support de lecteur dans le dur disque. 2. Insérez le dur disque dans son emplacement sur l'ordinateur jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche. 3. Serrez les vis pour fixer le dur disque à l'ordinateur. 4. Installez : a) le capot de la base b) la batterie 5. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. Retrait de la carte réseau LAN sans fil 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) le capot de la base 3. Déconnectez et enlevez les câbles d'antenne connectés à la carte réseau LAN sans fil. Retirez la vis fixant la carte réseau LAN sans fil à l'ordinateur. Retirez la carte réseau LAN sans fil de l'ordinateur. 24Installation de la carte réseau LAN sans fil 1. Insérez la carte réseau LAN sans fil dans son emplacement sur l'ordinateur. 2. Serrez la vis pour fixer la carte réseau LAN sans fil à l'ordinateur. 3. Acheminez les câbles via la voie d'acheminement et connectez-les à la carte réseau LAN sans fil. 4. Installez : a) le capot de la base b) la batterie 5. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. Retrait de la carte réseau LAN sans fil (en option) 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) le capot de la base 3. Déconnectez et enlevez les câbles d'antenne connectés à la carte réseau LAN sans fil. Retirez la vis fixant la carte réseau LAN sans fil à l'ordinateur. Retirez la carte réseau LAN sans fil de l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : L'emplacement de la carte réseau LAN sans fil peut varier de celui indiqué sur les illustrations. Installation de la carte réseau LAN sans fil (en option) 1. Faites glisser la carte réseau LAN sans fil dans son emplacement. 2. Serrez la vis fixant la carte réseau LAN sans fil à l'ordinateur. 3. Acheminez les câbles via les voies d'acheminement et connectez-les à la carte réseau LAN sans fil. 4. Installez : a) le capot de la base b) la batterie 5. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. Retrait du module Bluetooth 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) le capot de la base 3. Déconnectez et enlevez le câble Bluetooth. Faites glisser le cache Bluetooth vers le haut pour le libérer. 254. Retirez le module Bluetooth de l'ordinateur. Retirez la vis fixant le module Bluetooth. 5. Retirez le module Bluetooth. Déconnectez et retirez le câble Bluetooth du module. Installation du module Bluetooth 1. Connectez le câble Bluetooth au module Bluetooth. 2. Serrez la vis pour fixer le module Bluetooth. 3. Insérez le module Bluetooth dans son emplacement et appuyez sur le cache Bluetooth. 4. Acheminez et branchez le câble Bluetooth. 5. Installez : a) le capot de la base b) la batterie 6. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 26Retrait du ventilateur du processeur 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) le capot de la base 3. Retirez les vis fixant le ventilateur du processeur à l'ordinateur. Retirez le ventilateur du processeur de l'ordinateur. 4. Déconnectez le câble du ventilateur du processeur. Installation du ventilateur du processeur 1. Connectez le câble du ventilateur du processeur. 2. Insérez le ventilateur du processeur dans son emplacement dans l'ordinateur. 3. Serrez les vis qui fixent le ventilateur du processeur à l'ordinateur. 4. Installez : a) le capot de la base b) la batterie 5. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 27Retrait du ventilateur de la carte vidéo 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) le capot de la base 3. Retirez les vis fixant le ventilateur de la carte vidéo à l'ordinateur. Retirez le ventilateur de la carte vidéo de l'ordinateur. Déconnectez le câble du ventilateur de la carte vidéo. Installation du ventilateur de la carte vidéo 1. Connectez le câble du ventilateur de la carte vidéo. 2. Insérez le ventilateur de la carte vidéo dans son emplacement et serrez les vis pour le fixer à l'ordinateur. 3. Installez : a) le capot de la base b) la batterie 4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. Retrait de la pile bouton 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) le capot de la base 3. Déconnectez le câble de la pile bouton. Dégagez la pile bouton vers le haut et retirez-la de l'ordinateur. 28Installation de la pile bouton 1. Replacez la pile bouton dans son emplacement sur l'ordinateur. 2. Connectez le câble de la pile bouton. 3. Installez : a) le capot de la base b) la batterie 4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. Retrait du repose-mains 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) le capot de la base c) l'habillage du clavier d) le clavier e) le lecteur optique f) le lecteur disque dur 3. Déconnectez les câbles RFID et du lecteur d'empreintes digitales. 294. Retirez les vis qui fixent le repose-mains à la base de l'ordinateur. 5. Retournez l'ordinateur et déconnectez les câbles suivants de la carte système : a) carte média b) haut-parleur 30c) pavé tactile d) bouton d'alimentation 6. Retirez les vis fixant le repose-mains à l'ordinateur et retournez-le en le tenant par le bord. 7. Retournez le repose-mains et retirez-le de l'ordinateur. 31Installation du repose-mains 1. Saisissez le repose-mains à l'avant et placez-le dans sa position d'origine sur l'ordinateur. 322. Appuyez sur les positions indiquées jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche. 3. Connectez les câbles suivants à la carte système : a) bouton d'alimentation b) pavé tactile c) haut-parleur d) carte média e) lecteur d'empreintes digitales f) RFID 4. Serrez les vis fixant le repose-mains à l'avant de l'ordinateur. 5. Serrez les vis fixant le repose-mains à la base de l'ordinateur. 6. Installez : a) disque dur b) le lecteur optique c) le clavier d) l'habillage du clavier e) le capot de la base f) la batterie 7. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. Retrait du module ExpressCard 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la carte ExpressCard b) la batterie c) le capot de la base 33d) l'habillage du clavier e) le clavier f) le lecteur optique g) disque dur h) le repose-mains 3. Déconnectez les éléments suivants : a) le câble ExpressCard de la carte système b) la câble de la carte USH de la carte USH (modèle M4700 uniquement) 4. Retirez les vis fixant le module ExpressCard à l'ordinateur et retirez le module ExpressCard. Installation du module ExpressCard 1. Insérez le module ExpressCard dans son compartiment. 2. Serrez les vis pour fixer le module ExpressCard à l'ordinateur. 3. Connectez : a) le câble ExpressCard à la carte système b) le câble de la carte USH à la carte USH (pour le modèle M4700 uniquement) 4. Installez : a) le repose-mains 34b) disque dur c) le lecteur optique d) le clavier e) l'habillage du clavier f) le capot de la base g) la batterie h) la carte ExpressCard 5. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. Retrait du dissipateur de chaleur 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) le capot de la base c) l'habillage du clavier d) le clavier e) le lecteur optique f) disque dur g) le repose-mains h) le ventilateur du processeur 3. Desserrez les vis imperdables qui fixent le dissipateur de chaleur à l'ordinateur, puis soulevez et sortez le dissipateur de chaleur de l'ordinateur. Installation du dissipateur de chaleur 1. Réinstallez le dissipateur de chaleur dans son emplacement. Serrez les vis imperdables pour fixer le dissipateur de chaleur à l'ordinateur. 2. Installez : a) le ventilateur du processeur b) le repose-mains c) disque dur d) le lecteur optique e) le clavier f) l'habillage du clavier g) le capot de la base 35h) la batterie 3. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. Retrait du processeur 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) le capot de la base c) l'habillage du clavier d) le clavier e) le lecteur optique f) disque dur g) le repose-mains h) le ventilateur du processeur i) le dissipateur de chaleur 3. Faites tourner le verrou à came du processeur dans le sens contraire des aiguilles d'une montre. Retirez le processeur de l'ordinateur. Installation du processeur 1. Alignez les encoches du processeur et du socket puis insérez le processeur dans le support. 2. Tournez le verrou à came du processeur dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre. 3. Installez : a) le dissipateur de chaleur b) le ventilateur du processeur c) le repose-mains d) disque dur e) le lecteur optique f) le clavier g) l'habillage du clavier h) le capot de la base i) la batterie 4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. Retrait du dissipateur de chaleur de la carte vidéo 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) le cache inférieur c) l'habillage du clavier 36d) le clavier e) le lecteur optique f) le disque dur g) le repose-mains h) le ventilateur de la carte vidéo 3. Déconnectez et retirez tout câble d'antenne connecté aux cartes sans fil installées. 4. Retirez les câbles d'antenne de leurs voies d'acheminement. 5. Desserrez les vis imperdables situées sur le dissipateur de chaleur. 376. Retirez le dissipateur de chaleur de la carte vidéo de l'ordinateur. Installation du dissipateur de chaleur de la carte vidéo 1. Faites glisser le dissipateur de chaleur dans sa position d'origine sur l'ordinateur. 2. Serrez les vis imperdables pour fixer le dissipateur de chaleur. 3. Acheminez et connectez les câbles d'antenne aux cartes sans fil installées. 4. Installez : a) le ventilateur de la carte vidéo b) le repose-mains c) le disque dur d) le lecteur optique e) le clavier f) l'habillage du clavier g) le cache inférieur 38h) la batterie 5. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. Retrait de la carte vidéo 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) le capot de la base c) l'habillage du clavier d) le clavier e) le lecteur optique f) disque dur g) le repose-mains h) le ventilateur de la carte vidéo i) le dissipateur de chaleur de la carte vidéo j) le dissipateur de chaleur 3. Retirez les vis fixant la carte vidéo à l'ordinateur. Retirez la carte vidéo de l'ordinateur. Installation de la carte vidéo 1. Insérez la carte vidéo dans son emplacement sur l'ordinateur. 2. Serrez les vis pour la fixer à l'ordinateur. 3. Installez : a) le dissipateur de chaleur b) le dissipateur de chaleur de la carte vidéo c) le ventilateur de la carte vidéo d) le repose-mains e) disque dur f) le lecteur optique g) le clavier h) l'habillage du clavier i) le capot de la base j) la batterie 4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 39Retrait de la carte d'entrées/sorties (E/S) 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la carte SD b) la batterie c) le capot de la base d) l'habillage du clavier e) le clavier f) le lecteur optique g) disque dur h) le repose-mains 3. Déconnectez le connecteur du module ExpressCard de la carte d'E/S. 4. Retirez la vis fixant la carte d'E/S à l'ordinateur. Soulevez le bord droit de la carte d'E/S pour dégager le connecteur et retirez-la de l'ordinateur. 40Installation de la carte d'E/S 1. Connectez le connecteur de la carte d'E/S et faites glisser cette dernière dans son emplacement sur l'ordinateur. 2. Serrez les vis pour fixer la carte d'E/S à l'ordinateur. 3. Connectez le connecteur du module ExpressCard à la carte d'E/S. 4. Installez : a) le repose-mains b) disque dur c) le lecteur optique d) le clavier e) l'habillage du clavier f) le capot de la base g) la batterie h) la carte SD 5. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. Retrait de la carte de commutateur 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) le capot de la base c) l'habillage du clavier d) le clavier e) le lecteur optique f) disque dur g) le repose-mains 413. Déconnectez le câble de la carte de commutateur de la carte système et dégagez-la des loquets. Retirez les vis fixant la carte de commutateur à l'ordinateur et retirez-la de l'ordinateur. Installation de la carte de commutateur 1. Placez la carte de commutateur dans sa position d'origine sur l'ordinateur. 2. Serrez les vis pour fixer la carte de commutateur à l'ordinateur. 3. Connectez le câble de la carte de commutateur à la carte système et fixez-le via la voie d'acheminement. 4. Installez : a) le repose-mains b) disque dur c) le lecteur optique d) le clavier e) l'habillage du clavier f) le capot de la base g) la batterie 5. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. Retrait de la carte USH (Unified Security Hub) 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) le capot de la base c) l'habillage du clavier d) le clavier e) le lecteur optique f) disque dur g) le repose-mains 3. Déconnectez le câble de la carte à puce et le câble USH de la carte système. Retirez les vis fixant la carte USH à l'ordinateur et retirez-la de l'ordinateur. 42Installation de la carte USH 1. Placez la carte USH dans sa position d'origine sur l'ordinateur. 2. Serrez les vis pour fixer la carte USH à l'ordinateur. 3. Connectez les câbles de la carte USH et de la carte à puce à la carte système. 4. Installez : a) le repose-mains b) disque dur c) le lecteur optique d) le clavier e) l'habillage du clavier f) le capot de la base g) la batterie 5. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. Retrait de l'ensemble écran 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) le capot de la base c) l'habillage du clavier d) le clavier e) le lecteur optique f) disque dur g) le repose-mains 3. Déconnectez les câbles d'antenne des cartes sans fil et placez-les dans le trou de guidage. 434. Retournez l'ordinateur et tirez les câbles d'antenne par le trou de guidage. 5. Retournez l'ordinateur et retirez les vis situées au-dessous et à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. 446. Retirez les vis fixant le support du câble LVDS. Retirez le support du câble LVDS et déconnectez le câble LVDS et le câble de la webcam de la carte système. REMARQUE : Le câble LVDS est disponible sans support pour le modèle M4700. Le support du câble LVDS est uniquement disponible pour le modèle M6700. 7. Retirez les vis fixant l'ensemble écran à l'ordinateur. Retirez l'ensemble écran de l'ordinateur. 45Installation de l'ensemble écran 1. Serrez les vis pour fixer l'ensemble écran. 2. Connectez les câbles LVDS et de la webcam aux connecteurs appropriés sur la carte système. 3. Placez le support du câble LVDS sur l'ordinateur et serrez les vis pour le fixer à l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Le câble LVDS est disponible sans support pour le modèle M4700. Le support du câble LVDS est uniquement disponible pour le modèle M6700. 4. Acheminez les câbles via leurs voies d'acheminement. 5. Insérez les câbles d'antenne sans fil par le trou de guidage sur le châssis. 6. Serrez les vis situées au-dessous et à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. 7. Acheminez et connectez les câbles d'antenne aux connecteurs respectifs. 8. Installez : a) le repose-mains b) disque dur c) le lecteur optique d) le clavier e) l'habillage du clavier f) le capot de la base g) la batterie 9. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. Retrait du cache de charnière 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez : 46a) la batterie b) le capot de la base c) l'habillage du clavier d) le clavier e) le lecteur optique f) disque dur g) le repose-mains h) l'ensemble écran 3. Retirez les vis fixant le cache de charnière à l'ordinateur. Retirez le cache de charnière de l'ordinateur. Installation du cache de charnière 1. Placez le cache de charnière dans sa position d'origine sur l'ordinateur. 2. Serrez les vis pour fixer le cache de charnière à l'ordinateur. 3. Installez : a) l'ensemble écran b) le repose-mains c) disque dur d) le lecteur optique e) le clavier f) l'habillage du clavier g) le capot de la base h) la batterie 4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. Retrait de la carte système 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la carte SD b) la carte ExpressCard c) la batterie d) le capot de la base e) l'habillage du clavier f) le clavier 47g) le lecteur optique h) disque dur i) la mémoire principale j) la mémoire secondaire k) le ventilateur du processeur l) le ventilateur de la carte vidéo m) le repose-mains n) le dissipateur de chaleur o) le processeur p) le dissipateur de chaleur de la carte vidéo q) la carte vidéo r) la carte d'E/S s) l'ensemble écran 3. Déconnectez le câble de la pile bouton. 4. Déconnectez le câble Bluetooth. 5. Déconnectez le câble du connecteur USH. 486. Déconnectez le câble USH. 7. Déconnectez le câble de carte sans fil. 8. Retirez toutes les mini-cartes (le cas échéant). 9. Retirez les vis fixant la carte système et soulevez le bord supérieur de la carte système en l'inclinant de 20 degrés. 4910. Déconnectez le câble du connecteur d'alimentation et retirez la carte système. Installation de la carte système 1. Connectez le câble du connecteur d'alimentation à la carte système. 2. Placez la carte système dans son compartiment. 3. Serrez les vis pour fixer la carte système à l'ordinateur. 4. Connectez les câbles suivants : a) connecteur USH b) Bluetooth c) connecteurs de la carte sans fil d) pile bouton 5. Installez les cartes sans fil (le cas échéant). 6. Installez : a) l'ensemble écran b) la carte d'E/S c) la carte vidéo d) le dissipateur de chaleur de la carte vidéo e) le processeur f) le dissipateur de chaleur g) le repose-mains h) le ventilateur de la carte vidéo i) le ventilateur du processeur j) la mémoire secondaire k) la mémoire principale l) disque dur m) le lecteur optique n) le clavier o) l'habillage du clavier 50p) le capot de la base q) la batterie r) la carte ExpressCard s) la carte SD 7. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. Retrait du port du connecteur d'alimentation 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la carte SD b) la carte ExpressCard c) la batterie d) le capot de la base e) l'habillage du clavier f) le clavier g) le lecteur optique h) disque dur i) la mémoire principale j) la mémoire secondaire k) le ventilateur du processeur l) le ventilateur de la carte vidéo m) le repose-mains n) le dissipateur de chaleur du processeur o) le processeur p) le dissipateur de chaleur de la carte vidéo q) la carte vidéo r) la carte d'E/S s) l'ensemble écran t) la carte système 3. Enlevez et soulevez le câble du connecteur d'alimentation du châssis pour retirer le port du connecteur d'alimentation. 51Installation du port du connecteur d'alimentation 1. Insérez le port du connecteur d'alimentation dans son emplacement et acheminez le câble du connecteur d'alimentation vers le châssis. 2. Installez : a) la carte système b) l'ensemble écran c) la carte d'E/S d) la carte vidéo e) le dissipateur de la carte vidéo f) le processeur g) le dissipateur de chaleur du processeur h) le repose-mains i) le ventilateur de la carte vidéo j) le ventilateur du processeur k) la mémoire secondaire l) la mémoire principale m) disque dur n) le lecteur optique o) le clavier p) l'habillage du clavier q) le capot de la base r) la batterie s) la carte ExpressCard t) la carte SD 3. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. Retrait du cadre de l'écran 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez la batterie. 3. Écartez le bord inférieur du cadre de l'écran. 524. Faites la même chose tout autour du cadre de l'écran et retirez ce dernier de l'ordinateur. Installation du cadre de l'écran 1. Saisissez le cadre de l'écran par le dessous et appuyez dessus. 532. Appuyez tout autour du cadre jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche sur l'ensemble écran. 3. Installez la batterie. 4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. Retrait du panneau d'écran 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) le cadre de l'écran 3. Retirez la vis fixant le panneau d'écran à l'ensemble écran. Retournez le panneau d'écran. 544. Remettez en place la bande adhésive qui fixe le câble LVDS au panneau d'écran. 5. Déconnectez le câble LVDS. 556. Retirez les vis fixant les supports de l'écran au panneau d'écran. Retirez les supports de l'écran. 7. 56Installation du panneau d'écran 1. Placez les supports de l'écran sur le panneau d'écran. 2. Serrez les vis fixant des supports de l'écran au panneau d'écran. 3. Connectez le câble LVDS et fixez la bande adhésive. 4. Placez le panneau d'écran dans sa position d'origine sur l'ordinateur. 5. Serrez les vis pour fixer le panneau d'écran à l'ensemble écran. 6. Installez : a) le cadre de l'écran b) la batterie 7. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. Retrait de la webcam 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) le cadre de l'écran 3. Déconnectez le câble de la webcam. Retirez la vis fixant le module de webcam à l'ordinateur. Retirez le module de webcam de l'ordinateur. Installation de la webcam 1. Placez le module de webcam dans son emplacement sur l'ordinateur. 2. Serrez la vis pour fixer du module de webcam à l'ordinateur. 3. Branchez le câble de la webcam. 4. Installez : a) le cadre de l'écran b) la batterie 5. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 57583 Configuration du système La configuration du système permet de gérer le matériel de l'ordinateur et de définir les options du BIOS. Dans la configuration du système, vous pouvez : • Changer les paramètres NVRAM après avoir ajouté ou supprimé des matériels. • Afficher la configuration matérielle du système • Activer ou désactiver les périphériques intégrés • Définir les seuils de performance et de gestion de l'alimentation • Gérer la sécurité de l'ordinateur Séquence de démarrage La séquence de démarrage permet d'ignorer l'ordre des périphériques d'amorçage définis par la configuration du système et de démarrer directement depuis un périphérique donné (lecteur optique ou disque dur, par exemple). Lors du test à la mise sous tension (POST), lorsque le logo Dell s'affiche, vous pouvez : • Accéder à la configuration du système en appuyant sur la touche • Afficher le menu de démarrage à affichage unique en appuyant sur la touche Ce menu contient les périphériques depuis lesquels vous pouvez démarrer, y compris l'option des diagnostics. Les options du menu de démarrage sont les suivantes : • Removable Drive (Unité amovible (si disponible)) • STXXXX Drive (Unité STXXXX) REMARQUE : XXX correspond au numéro d'unité SATA. • Optical Drive (Lecteur optique) • Diagnostics REMARQUE : Si vous choisissez Diagnostics, l'écran ePSA diagnostics (Diagnostics ePSA) s'affiche. L'écran de séquence de démarrage affiche également l'option d'accès à l'écran System Setup (Configuration du système). Touches de navigation Le tableau suivant répertorie les touches de navigation dans la configuration du système. REMARQUE : Pour la plupart des options de configuration du système, les modifications que vous apportées sont enregistrées, mais elles ne sont appliquées qu'au redémarrage de l'ordinateur. 59Tableau 1. Touches de navigation Touches Navigation Touche Haut Passe au champ précédent. Touche Bas Passe au champ suivant. Permet de sélectionner une valeur dans le champ sélectionné (si applicable) ou de suivre le lien dans le champ. Barre d'espacement Développe ou réduit une liste déroulante, si applicable. Passe à la zone suivante active. REMARQUE : Pour la navigateur graphique standard uniquement. Passe à la page précédente tant que vous affichez l'écran principal. Si vous appuyez sur dans l'écran principal, un message demande d'enregistrer les modifications non enregistrées et le système redémarre. Affiche le fichier d'aide de la configuration du système. Options de configuration du système REMARQUE : Selon l'ordinateur et les appareils installés, les éléments énumérés dans cette section peuvent ne pas apparaître. Tableau 2. Généralités Option Description System Information (Informations sur le système) Cette section énumère les principaux éléments matériels de l'ordinateur. • System Information (Informations sur le système) • Memory Information (Informations sur la mémoire) • Processor Information (Informations sur les processeurs) • Device Information (Informations sur les appareils) Battery Information (Informations sur la batterie) Affiche l'état de charge de la batterie. Boot Sequence (Séquence d'amorçage) Vous permet de modifier l'ordre dans lequel l'ordinateur tente de trouver un système d'exploitation. Toutes les options ci-dessous sont sélectionnées. • Diskette Drive (Lecteur de disquette) • Internal HDD (Disque dur interne) • USB Storage Device (Périphérique de stockage USB) • CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive (Lecteur de CD/DVD/CD-RW) • Onboard NIC (Carte réseau intégrée) Vous pouvez également choisir l'option Boot List (Liste d'amorçage). Les options sont : 60Option Description • Legacy (Mode hérité) (Paramètre par défaut) • UEFI Date/Time (Date/Heure) Vous permet de définir la date et l'heure. Tableau 3. System Configuration (Configuration du système) Option Description Integrated NIC (Carte réseau intégrée) Permet de configurer le contrôleur réseau intégré. Les options sont : • Disabled (Désactivé) • Enabled (Activé) • Enabled w/PXE (Activé avec PXE) (Paramètre par défaut) Parallel Port (Port parallèle) Vous permet de définir et de régler le port parallèle sur la station d'accueil en fonctionnement. Vous pouvez définir le port parallèle sur : • Disabled (Désactivé) • AT • PS2 • ECP Serial Port (Port série) Identifie et définit les paramètres de port série. Vous pouvez définir le port série comme suit : • Disabled (Désactivé) • COM1 (Paramètre par défaut) • COM 2 • COM3 • COM4 REMARQUE : Le système d'exploitation peut allouer des ressources, même si le paramètre est désactivé. SATA Operation (Fonctionnement SATA) Vous permet de configurer le contrôleur de disque dur SATA interne. Les options sont : • Disabled (Désactivé) • ATA • AHCI • RAID On (RAID activé) (Paramètre par défaut) REMARQUE : SATA est configuré pour prendre en charge le mode RAID. 61Option Description Drives (Disques) Permet de configurer les disques SATA intégrés. Les options sont : • SATA-0 • SATA-1 • SATA-3 • SATA-4 • SATA-5 Paramètre par défaut : tous les disques sont activés. SMART Reporting (Création de rapports SMART) Ce champ indique si les erreurs de disques durs intégrés sont signalées lors du démarrage du système. Cette technologie s'intègre dans la spécification SMART (Self Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology). • Enable SMART Reporting (Activer la création de rapports SMART). Cette option est désactivée par défaut. USB Configuration (Configuration USB) Vous permet de définir la configuration USB. Les options sont : • Enable Boot Support (Activer le support d'amorçage) • Enable External USB Port (Activer le port USB externe) Paramètre par défaut : les deux options sont activées. USB PowerShare Vous permet de configurer le comportement de la fonction USB PowerShare. L'option est, par défaut, désactivée. • Enable USB PowerShare (Activer USB PowerShare) Miscellaneous Devices (Autres appareils) Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver les différents appareils installés. Les options sont : • Enable Fixed Bay (Activer la baie fixe) • Enable Microphone (Activer le microphone) • Enable ExpressCard (Activer ExpressCard) • Enable eSATA Ports (Activer les ports eSATA) • Enable Camera (Activer la webcam) • Enable Hard Drive Free Fall Protection (Activer la protection contre la chute libre du disque dur) 62Option Description • Enable Media Card and 1394 (Désactiver la carte média et 1394) • Enable Media Card Only (Activer la carte média uniquement) • Disable MC, 1394 (Désactiver la carte média, 1394) Paramètre par défaut : les appareils en surbrillance sont activés. Tableau 4. Vidéo Option Description LCD Brightness (Luminosité de l'écran LCD) Vous permet de régler la luminosité du panneau lorsque le capteur ambiant est défini sur Off (Arrêt). Optimus Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver la technologie NVIDIA Optimus. • Enable Optimus (Activer Optimus) : paramètre par défaut. Tableau 5. Security (Sécurité) Option Description Admin Password (Mot de passe administrateur) Permet de définir, modifier ou supprimer le mot de passe administrateur (admin). REMARQUE : Vous devez définir le mot de passe administrateur avant le mot de passe système ou le mot de passe du disque dur. REMARQUE : Les modifications de mots de passe sont appliquées immédiatement. REMARQUE : La suppression du mot de passe administrateur supprime automatiquement le mot de passe système et le mot de passe du disque dur. REMARQUE : Les modifications de mots de passe sont appliquées immédiatement. Paramètre par défaut : Not set (Non défini) System Password (Mot de passe système) Vous permet de définir, modifier ou supprimer le mot de passe système. REMARQUE : Les modifications de mots de passe sont appliquées immédiatement. Paramètre par défaut : Not set (Non défini) Internal HDD-0 Password (Mot de passe du disque dur-0 interne) Vous permet de définir, modifier ou supprimer le mot de passe administrateur. Paramètre par défaut : Not set (Non défini) Strong Password (Mot de passe sécurisé) Permet d'appliquer l'option de toujours définir des mots de passe sécurisés. Paramètre par défaut : Enable Strong Password (Activer les mots de passe sécurisés) n'est pas sélectionné. Password Configuration (Configuration du mot de passe) Vous pouvez définir la longueur du mot de passe. Min = 4 , Max = 32 Password Bypass (Ignorer les mots de passe) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver l'autorisation d'ignorer les mots de passe système et de disque dur interne lorsqu'ils sont définis. Les options sont : 63Option Description • Disabled (Désactivé) (Paramètre par défaut) • Reboot bypass (Ignorer le redémarrage) Password Change (Modifier les mots de passe) Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver l'autorisation de définir un mot de passe système et un mot de passe du disque dur lorsque le mot de passe administrateur est défini. Paramètre par défaut : Allow Non-Admin Password Changes (Autoriser les modifications de mot de passe non administrateur) n'est pas sélectionné Non-Admin Setup Changes (Modifications de configuration non administrateur) Vous permet de déterminer si les modifications des options de configuration sont autorisées lorsqu'un mot de passe administrateur est défini. L'option est désactivée. • Permet de modifier le commutateur sans fil Computrace Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver le logiciel Computrace en option. Les options sont : • Deactivate (Désactiver) (Paramètre par défaut) • Disable (Désactiver) • Activate (Activer) REMARQUE : Les options Activate (Activer) et Disable (Désactiver) activent ou désactivent la fonction de façon permanente et aucune modification ultérieure n'est autorisée. CPU XD Support (Prise en charge du mode d'exécution désactivée du processeur) Permet d'activer le mode Execute Disable (Exécution désactivée) du processeur. Paramètre par défaut : Enable CPU XD Support (Activer la prise en charge de l'exécution désactivée du processeur) OROM Keyboard Access (Accès au clavier OROM) Vous permet de définir l'accès pour entrer dans les écrans de configuration de l'option ROM en utilisant des raccourcis lors du démarrage. Les options sont : • Enable (Activer) (Paramètre par défaut) • One Time Enable (Activation unique) • Disable (Désactiver) Admin Setup Lockout (Blocage de la configuration administrateur) Permet d'empêcher les utilisateurs d'accéder à la configuration lorsqu'un mot de passe administrateur est défini. Paramètre par défaut : Disabled (Désactivé) Tableau 6. Performances Option Description Multi Core Support (Prise en charge du traitement multicœur) Ce champ indique si le processus aura un ou plusieurs cœurs activés. Certaines applications seront plus performantes avec des cœurs supplémentaires. Cette option est activée par défaut. Permet d'activer ou de désactiver le support multicœur pour le processeur. Les options sont : • All (Tout) (Paramètre par défaut) • 1 64Option Description • 2 Intel SpeedStep Permet d'activer ou de désactiver la fonction Intel SpeedStep. Paramètre par défaut : Enable Intel SpeedStep (Activer Intel SpeedStep) C States Control (Contrôle des états C) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver les états supplémentaires de veille du processeur. Paramètre par défaut : les options C states, C3, C6, Enhanced C-states et C7 (États C, C3, C6, états C améliorés et C7) sont activées. Intel TurboBoost Permet d'activer ou de désactiver le mode Intel TurboBoost du processeur. Paramètre par défaut : Enable Intel TurboBoost (Activer Intel TurboBoost) Hyper-Thread Control (Contrôle d'Hyper-Thread) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver la fonction HyperThreading dans le processeur. Paramètre par défaut : Enabled (Activé) Rapid Start Technology (Technologie Rapid Start) Vous permet de définir la fonction de la technologie Rapid Start. Cette fonction est activée par défaut. Vous pouvez définir la valeur de l'horloge Rapid Start. Tableau 7. Power Management (Gestion de l'alimentation) Option Description AC Behavior (Comportement au cours de l'auto-test de démarrage) Permet à l'ordinateur de se mettre sous tension automatiquement lorsque l'adaptateur CA est branché. L'option est désactivée. • Wake on AC (Activation réseau LAN/WLAN) Auto On Time (Heure de mise sous tension automatique) Permet de définir l'heure de mise sous tension automatique de l'ordinateur. Les options sont : • Disabled (Désactivé) (Paramètre par défaut) • Every Day (Tous les jours) • Weekdays (Jours de la semaine) USB Wake Support (Prise en charge du réveil USB) Vous permet d'activer les périphériques USB pour sortir l'ordinateur du mode veille. L'option est désactivée. • Enable USB Wake Support (Activer la prise en charge du réveil USB) Wireless Radio Control (Commande radio sans fil) Vous permet de contrôler la radio WLAN et WWAN. Les options sont : • Control WLAN radio (Contrôler la radio WLAN) • Control WWAN radio (Contrôler la radio WWAN) Paramètre par défaut : les deux options sont désactivées. Wake on LAN/WLAN (Activation réseau LAN/WLAN) Cette option permet d'activer l'ordinateur hors tension avec un signal LAN spécial. L'activation à partir de la veille n'est pas affectée par ce paramètre et elle doit être 65Option Description activée sur le système d'exploitation. Cette fonction fonctionne uniquement lorsque l'ordinateur est connecté à une alimentation CA. • Disabled (Désactivé) : empêche le système d'être mis sous tension par des signaux spéciaux LAN lorsqu'il reçoit un signal d'activation du LAN ou d'un LAN sans fil. (Paramètre par défaut) • LAN Only (LAN uniquement) : permet au système d'être mis sous tension par des signaux LAN spéciaux. • WLAN Only (WLAN uniquement) • LAN or WLAN (LAN ou WLAN) Block Sleep (Bloquer la mise en veille) Vous permet d'empêcher l'ordinateur de passer en veille. L'option est désactivée par défaut. • Block Sleep (S3) (Bloquer la mise en veille [S3]) Primary Battery Configuration (Configuration de la batterie principale) Vous permet de définir comment utiliser la charge de la batterie, lorsque le cordon d'alimentation CA est branché. Les options sont : • Standard Charge (Charge standard) • Express Charge (Charge rapide) • Predominantly AC use (Utilisation prédominante du CA) • Auto Charge (Charge automatique) (Paramètre par défaut) • Custom Charge (Charge personnalisée) : vous pouvez définir le pourcentage auquel la batterie doit se charger. Battery Slice Configuration (Configuration de batterie slice) Vous permet de définir le type de charge de la batterie. Les options sont : • Standard Charge (Charge standard) • Express Charge (Charge rapide) (Paramètre par défaut) Tableau 8. POST Behavior (Comportement au cours de l'auto-test de démarrage) Option Description Adapter Warnings (Avertissements relatifs à l'adaptateur) Vous permet d'activer les messages d'avertissement de l'adaptateur lorsque certains adaptateurs secteur sont utilisés. L'option est activée par défaut. • Enable Adapter Warnings (Activer les avertissements relatifs à l'adaptateur) Mouse/Touchpad (Souris/Pavé tactile) Vous permet de définir la façon dont le système gère la souris et le pavé tactile. Les options sont : • Serial Mouse (Souris série) • PS2 Mouse (Souris PS2) • Touchpad/PS-2 Mouse (Pavé tactile/Souris PS-2) (Paramètre par défaut) Numlock Enable (Activer le verrouillage numérique VerrNum) Indique s'il est possible d'activer la fonctionnalité VerrNum lors de l'amorçage du système. Cette option est activée par défaut. • Enable Numlock (Activer VerrNum) 66Option Description Fn Key Emulation (Émulation touche Fn) Vous permet de faire correspondre la fonction de la touche du clavier PS-2 avec la fonction de la touche d'un clavier interne. L'option est activée par défaut. • Enable Fn Key Emulation (Activer l'émulation de la touche Fn) Keyboard Errors (Erreurs liées au clavier) Indique si les erreurs liées au clavier sont signalées à l'amorçage. Cette option est activée par défaut. • Enable Keyboard Error Detection (Activer la détection des erreurs liées au clavier) POST Hotkeys (Raccourcis POST) Indique si l'écran d'ouverture affiche un message indiquant la séquence de touches requise pour entrer dans le menu d'option d'amorçage du BIOS. • Enable F12 Boot Option menu (Activer le menu d'option d'amorçage F12). Cette option activée par défaut. Tableau 9. Virtualization Support (Prise en charge de la virtualisation) Option Description Virtualization (Virtualisation) Cette option indique si un moniteur de machine virtuelle (VMM) peut utiliser les capacités matérielles supplémentaires offertes par la technologie de virtualisation Intel. • Enable Intel Virtualization Technology (Activer la technologie de virtualisation Intel) : paramètre par défaut. VT for Direct I/O (Technologie de virtualisation pour les E/S directes) Autorise ou empêche le moniteur de machine virtuelle (VMM) d'utiliser les capacités matérielles supplémentaires offertes par la technologie de virtualisation Intel pour les E/S directes. • Enable Intel Virtualization Technology for Direct I/O (Activer la technologie de virtualisation Intel pour les E/S directes) : paramètre par défaut. Tableau 10. Wireless (Sans fil) Option Description Wireless Switch (Commutateur sans fil) Vous permet de déterminer les appareils sans fil qui peuvent être commandés par le commutateur sans fil. Les options sont : • WWAN • Bluetooth • WLAN Toutes les options sont activées par défaut. Wireless Device Enable (Activer les périphériques sans fil) Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver les périphériques sans fil. Les options sont : • WWAN • Bluetooth • WLAN 67Option Description Toutes les options sont activées par défaut. Tableau 11. Maintenance Option Description Service Tag (Numéro de service) Affiche le numéro de service de l'ordinateur. Asset Tag (Numéro d'inventaire) Permet de créer un numéro d'inventaire système si un tel numéro n'est pas déjà défini. Cette option n'est pas définie par défaut. Tableau 12. System Logs (Journaux système) Option Description BIOS events (Événements BIOS) Affiche le journal des événements du système et permet de l'effacer. Thermal Events (Événements thermiques) Affiche les journaux d'événements thermiques et permet de les effacer. Power Events (Événements d'alimentation) Affiche les journaux d'événements d'alimentation et permet de les effacer. Mise à jour du BIOS Il est recommandé de mettre à jour le BIOS (configuration du système) lors du remplacement de la carte système ou lorsqu'une mise à jour est disponible. Pour les ordinateurs portables, vérifiez que la batterie est complètement chargée et que l'ordinateur est connecté au secteur. 1. Redémarrez l'ordinateur. 2. Accédez au site support.dell.com/support/downloads. 3. Si vous disposez du numéro de service ou du numéro de service express de l'ordinateur : REMARQUE : Pour les ordinateurs de bureau, le numéro de service se trouve sur l'étiquette sur la face avant de l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Pour les ordinateurs portables, le numéro de service se trouve sur le fond de l'ordinateur. a) Entrez le numéro de service ou le numéro de service express et cliquez sur Submit (Envoyer). b) Cliquez sur Submit et passez à l'étape 5. 4. Si vous ne disposez pas de ces numéros, sélectionnez l'unr des options suivantrs : a) Automatically detect my Service Tag for me (Détecter automatiquement le numéro de service) b) Choose from My Products and Services List (Choisir dans la liste Mes produits et services) c) Choose from a list of all Dell products (Choisir dans la liste de tous les produits Dell) 5. Dans l'écran de l'application et des pilotes, sous la liste déroulante Operating System (Système d'exploiration), sélectionnez BIOS. 6. Identifiez le dernier fichier BIOS et cliquez sur Download File (Télécharger le fichier). 7. Sélectionnez le mode de téléchargement préférentiel dans Please select your download method below window (Sélectionner le mode de téléchargement dans la fenêtre ci-dessous) et cliquez sur Download Now (Télécharger maintenant). La fenêtre File Download (Téléchargement de fichier) s'affiche. 8. Cliquez sur Save (Enregistrer) pour enregistrer le fichier sur l'ordinateur. 9. Cliquez sur Run (Exécuter) pour installer les paramètres BIOS actualisés sur l'ordinateur. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent. 68Mots de passe du système et de configuration Vous pouvez définir un mot de passe système et un mot de passe de configuration pour protéger l'ordinateur. Type de mot de passe Description Mot de passe système Mot de passe que vous entrer pour ouvrir un session sur le système. Mot de passe de configuration Mot de passe que vous devez entrer pour accéder aux paramètres du BIOS de l'ordinateur et les changer. PRÉCAUTION : Les fonctions de mot de passe fournissent un niveau de sécurité de base pour les données de l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : N'importe quel utilisateur peut accéder aux données de l'ordinateur s'il n'est pas verrouillé et qu'il est laissé sans surveillance. REMARQUE : L'ordinateur est fourni avec la fonction de mot de passe système et de configuration désactivée. Définition d'un mot de passe système et d'un mot de passe de configuration Vous pouvez définir un nouveau mot de passe système et/ou mot de passe de configuration ou changer un mot de passe système et/ou mot de passe de configuration uniquement lorsque l'état de mot de passe est Déverrouillé. Si l'état de mot de passe est Verrouillé, vous ne pouvez pas changer le mot de passe système. REMARQUE : Si le cavalier des mots de passe est désactivé, le mot de passe système et le mot de passe de configuration sont supprimés et vous n'avez pas à fournir de mot de passe système pour ouvrir une session. Pour entrer dans une configuration système, appuyez sur immédiatement après la mise sous tension ou un redémarrage. 1. Dans l'écran System BIOS (BIOS du système) ou System Setup (Configuration du système) sélectionnez System Security (Sécurité du système) et appuyez sur . L'écran System Security s'affiche. 2. Dans l'écran System Security, vérifiez que Password Status est Unlocked. 3. Sélectionnez System Password, entrez le mot de passe du système et appuyez sur ou la touche . Suivez les instructions pour définir le mot de passe système : – Un mot de passe peut contenir jusqu'à 32 caractères. – Le mot de passe peut contenir des nombres de 0 à 9. – Seules les minuscules sont acceptées. – Seuls les caractères spéciaux suivants sont valides : espace, (”), (+), (,), (-), (.), (/), (;), ([), (\), (]), (`). Entrez de nouveau le mot de passe lorsqu'un message le demande. 4. Tapez le mot de passe système que vous avez entré précédemment et cliquez sur OK. 5. Sélectionnez Setup Password, tapez le mot de passe système et appuyez sur ou la touche . Un message demande de retaper le mot de passe de configuration. 6. Tapez le mot de passe de configuration que vous avez entré précédemment et cliquez sur OK. 7. Appuyez sur ; un message demande d'enregistrer les modifications. 8. Appuyez sur pour les enregistrer. 69L'ordinateur redémarrage. Suppression ou modification d'un mot de passe système et/ou de configuration Vérifiez que l'état de mot de passe est Déverrouillé (dans la configuration du système) avant de supprimer ou de changer un mot de passe système et/ou de configuration. Vous ne pouvez pas supprimer ou changer un mot de passe système et/ou de configuration si l'état de mot de passe est Déverrouillé. Pour entrer dans la configuration du système, appuyez sur immédiatement après la mise sous tension ou un redémarrage. 1. Dans l'écran System BIOS (BIOS du système) ou System Setup (Configuration du système), sélectionnez System Security (Sécurité du système) et appuyez sur . L'écran System Security s'affiche. 2. Dans l'écran System Security, vérifiez que l'état de mot de passe est Déverrouillé. 3. Sélectionnez System Password, modifiez ou supprimez le mot de passe système existant et appuyez sur ou la touche . 4. Sélectionnez Setup Password, modifiez ou supprimez le mot de passe de configuration existant et appuyez sur ou la touche . REMARQUE : Si vous changez le mot de passe système et/ou le mot de passe de configuration, entrez de nouveau le nouveau mot de passe lorsqu'un message le demande. Si vous supprimez l'un ou l'autre des mots de passe ou les deux, confirmez la suppression quand un message le demande. 5. Appuyez sur ; un message demande d'enregistrer les modifications. 6. Appuyez sur pour les enregistrer et quitter la configuration du système. L'ordinateur redémarrage. 704 Diagnostics En cas de problème avec l'ordinateur, exécutez les diagnostics ePSA avant de contacter l'assistance technique de Dell. Les diagnostics visent à tester le matériel de l'ordinateur sans équipement supplémentaire ou risque de perte de données. Si vous ne parvenez pas à résoudre le problème vous-même, le personnel de maintenance et d'assistance peut utiliser les résultats des diagnostics pour vous aider à le résoudre. Diagnostisc ePSA (Enhanced Pre-Boot System Assessment) Les diagnostics ePSA (également appelés diagnostics système) vérifient complètement le matériel. ePSA est intégré au BIOS et il est démarré par le BIOS en interne. Les diagnostics système intégrés fournissent des options pour des périphériques ou des groupes de périphériques spécifiques pour : • Exécuter des tests automatiquement ou dans un mode interactif • Répéter les tests • Afficher ou enregistrer les résultats des tests • Exécuter des tests rigoureux pour présentent des options de tests supplémentaires pour fournir des informations complémentaires sur un ou des périphériques défaillants • Afficher des messages d'état qui indiquent si les tests ont abouti • Afficher des messages d'erreur qui indiquent les problèmes détectés au cours des tests PRÉCAUTION : Utilisez les diagnostics système pour tester l'ordinateur. L'utilisation de ce programme avec d'autres ordinateurs peut générer des résultats non valides ou des messages d'erreur. REMARQUE : Certains tests de périphériques nécessitent l'interaction de l'utilsateur. Veillez à toujours être à côté de l'ordinateur lorsque vous exécutez les tests de diagnostic. 1. Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension. 2. Lorsque l'ordinateur démarre, appuyez sur la touche lorsque le logo Dell apparaît. 3. Dans l'écran du menu de démarrage, sélectionnez l'option Diagnostics. La fenêtre Enhanced Pre-boot System Assessment s'affiche avec la liste de tous les périphériques détectés sur l'ordinateur. Le programme de diagnostics lance les tests sur tous les périphériques détectés. 4. Si vous voulez lancer un test de diagnostic sur un périphérique donné, appuyez sur ; cliquez sur Yes (Oui) pour arrêter le test de diagnostic. 5. Sélectionnez le périphérique dans le panneau de gauche et cliquez sur Run Tests (Exécuter les tests). 6. En cas de problèmes, des codes d'erreur s'affichent. Notez les codes d'erreur et contactez Dell. 71725 Dépannage de l'ordinateur Vous pouvez dépanner l'ordinateur en utilisant les indicateurs, tels que les voyants de diagnostic, les bips et les messages d'erreur lors de l'utilisation de l'ordinateur. Voyants d'état de l'appareil Tableau 13. Voyants d'état de l'appareil S'allume lorsque vous allumez l'ordinateur et clignote lorsque l'ordinateur est en mode d'économie d'énergie. S'allume lorsque l'ordinateur lit ou écrit des données. S'allume ou clignote pour indiquer l'état de charge de la batterie. S'allume lorsque le réseau sans fil est activé. Les voyants d'état du périphérique se trouvent généralement sur le dessus ou le côté gauche du clavier. Ils sont utilisés pour afficher la connectivité et l'activité du stockage, de la batterie et des périphériques sans fil. En dehors de cette utilité, ils peuvent servir d'outil de diagnostic lorsqu'il existe une panne dans le système. Le tableau suivant explique comment comprendre les codes des voyants lorsqu'une erreur survient. Tableau 14. Lumière des voyants Voyant de stockage Voyant d'alimentation Voyant sans fil Description de l'erreur Clignotant Uni Uni Possible défaillance du processeur. Uni Clignotant Uni Les modules de mémoire sont détectés mais ont rencontrés une erreur. Clignotant Clignotant Clignotant Défaillance de la carte système. Clignotant Clignotant Uni Défaillance probable de la carte graphique/vidéo. Clignotant Clignotant Éteint Défaillance système de l'initialisation du disque dur OU défaillance du système lors de l'initialisation ROM en option. Clignotant Éteint Clignotant Le contrôleur USB a rencontré un problème pendant l'initialisation. Uni Clignotant Clignotant Aucun module de mémoire n'est installé/détecté. Clignotant Uni Clignotant L'écran a rencontré un problème pendant l'initialisation. Éteint Clignotant Clignotant Le modem empêche le système d'achever l'auto-test de démarrage. 73Voyant de stockage Voyant d'alimentation Voyant sans fil Description de l'erreur Éteint Clignotant Éteint L'initialisation de la mémoire a échoué ou la mémoire n'est pas prise en charge. Voyants d'état de la batterie Si l'ordinateur est branché à une prise secteur, le voyant d'état de la batterie fonctionne de la manière suivante : Alternativement un voyant ambre clignotant et un voyant blanc Un adaptateur secteur non pris en charge par Dell est fixé sur votre portable. Alternativement un voyant ambre clignotant avec voyant blanc fixe . Défaillance de batterie temporaire lorsqu'il existe un adaptateur secteur. Voyant ambre clignotant constamment Défaillance de batterie irrémédiable avec adaptateur CA présent. Voyant éteint La batterie est en mode de chargement complet lorsqu'il existe un adaptateur secteur. Voyant blanc allumé La batterie est charge avec adaptateur secteur CA. Caractéristiques techniques REMARQUE : Les offres peuvent varier en fonction de la région. Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration de l'ordinateur, cliquez sur Démarrer. (Icône Démarrer) → Aide et support, puis sélectionnez l'option permettant d'afficher les informations sur l'ordinateur. Tableau 15. Informations système Fonctionnalité Spécification Jeu de puces du système Jeu de puces Mobile Intel QM77 Express Canaux DMA Deux contrôleurs DMA 82C37 avec sept canaux programmables indépendamment Niveaux d'interruption Fonction APIC E/S intégrée avec 24 interruptions Puce BIOS (NVRAM) 96 Mo (12 Mo) Tableau 16. Processeur Fonctionnalité Spécification Type de processeur • Intel Core i5 et i7 double cœur • Intel Core i7 quatre cœurs Extreme 74Fonctionnalité Spécification • Intel Core i7 quatre cœurs Mémoire cache L1 Jusqu'à 32 Ko de mémoire cache en fonction du type de processeur Mémoire cache L2 Jusqu'à 256 Ko de mémoire cache en fonction du type de processeur Mémoire cache L3 Jusqu'à 8 Mo de mémoire cache en fonction du type de processeur Tableau 17. Mémoire Fonctionnalité Spécification Type DDR3 Vitesse 1 600 MHz et 1 866 MHz Connecteurs • Processeurs Intel Core i5 et i7 double cœur — deux emplacements DIMM • Processeurs Intel Core i7 quatre cœurs et i7 quatre cœurs Extreme — quatre emplacements DIMM Capacité 1 Go, 2 Go, 4 Go et 8 Go Mémoire minimale 2 Go Mémoire maximale • Processeurs Intel Core i5 et i7 double cœurs — 16 Go • Processeurs Intel Core i7 quatre cœurs et i7 quatre cœurs Extreme — 32 Go Tableau 18. Vidéo Fonctionnalité Spécification Type Séparée Bus de données PCIE X16 Contrôleur vidéo et mémoire : M4700 • AMD FirePro M4000 avec 1 Go de mémoire GDDR5 • NVIDIA Quadro K1000M avec 2 Go de mémoire GDDR3 • NVIDIA Quadro K2000M avec 2 Go de mémoire GDDR3 M6700 • AMD FirePro M6000 avec 2 Go de mémoire GDDR5 • NVIDIA Quadro K3000M avec 2 Go de mémoire GDDR5 • NVIDIA Quadro K4000M avec 4 Go de mémoire GDDR5 • NVIDIA Quadro K5000M avec 4 Go de mémoire GDDR5 Tableau 19. Audio Fonctionnalité Spécification Integrée Son haute définition bicanal 75Tableau 20. Communication Fonctionnalité Spécification Carte réseau Carte d'interface réseau pour communication 10/100/1 000 Mbit/s Sans fil • Réseau local sans fil (WLAN) interne • Réseau étendu sans fil (WWAN) interne • Prise en charge de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth Tableau 21. Bus d'extension Fonctionnalité Spécification Type de bus : PCI 2.3, PCI Express 1.0 et 2.0, SATA 1.0A, 2.0 et 3.0, USB 2.0 et 3.0 Largeur du bus PCIE X16 Puce BIOS (NVRAM) 96 Mo (12 Mo) Tableau 22. Ports et connecteurs Fonctionnalité Spécification Audio Deux connecteurs pour sortie de ligne et entrée de ligne/microphone Carte réseau Un connecteur RJ45 USB 2.0 Deux USB 3.0 Deux eSATA\USB 2.0 Un IEEE1394 : M4700 Un connecteur IEEE 1394 4 broches M6700 Un connecteur IEEE 1394 6 broches Vidéo Connecteur VGA 15 broches, connecteur HDMI 19 broches, connecteur DisplayPort 20 broches Lecteur de carte mémoire Un lecteur de carte mémoire 8 en 1 Port d'accueil Un Port SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) Un Carte ExpressCard Une Carte à puce (en option) Une 76Tableau 23. Écran Fonctionnalité M4700 M6700 Type • HD (1 366 X 768) • Full HD (1 920 x 1 080) • HD+ (1 600 x 900) • Full HD (1 920 x 1 080) Taille 15,6 pouces 17,3 pouces Dimensions : Hauteur 256 mm (10,07 pouces) 270,60 mm (10,65 pouces) Largeur 376 mm (14,80 pouces) 416,70 mm (16,40 pouces) Diagonale 396,24 mm (15,60 pouces) 439,42 mm (17,3 pouces) Zone active (X/Y) 344,23 mm x 193,54 mm • 382,08 mm x 214,92 mm (HD +) • 381,89 mm x 214,81 mm (Full HD) Résolution maximale 1 920 x 1 080 pixels 1 920 x 1 080 pixels Luminosité maximale • 220 cd/m² (HD) • 300 cd/m² (Full HD) • 220 cd/m² (HD+) • 300 cd/m² (Full HD) Angle de fonctionnement De 0° (fermé) à 135° Fréquence d'actualisation 60 Hz Angles minimums de visualisation : Horizontal +/-40°, +/-60° (Full HD) Vertical +10°/-30°, +/-50° (Full HD) Tableau 24. Clavier Fonctionnalité Spécification Nombre de touches • États-Unis : 86 touches • Royaume-Uni : 87 touches • Brésil : 87 touches • Japon : 90 touches Configuration QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji Tableau 25. Pavé tactile Fonctionnalité Spécification Zone active : Axe des X 80,00 mm Axe des Y 40,50 mm 77Tableau 26. Webcam Fonctionnalité Spécification Type HD 720P avec double microphone Solution : HD (1 280 X 720 pixels) 30 images par seconde Tableau 27. Stockage Fonctionnalité Spécification Stockage : Interface de stockage • SATA1 (1,5 Gbit/s) • SATA2 (3 Gbit/s) • SATA3 (6 Gbit/s) Configurations des disques : M4700 Un disque dur/SSD SATA interne de 2,5 pouces (SATA3) + un disque SSD mSATA (SATA2) M6700 Deux disques durs/SSD SATA internes de 2,5 pouces (SATA3) + un lecteur SSD mSATA (SATA2) Taille 1 To à 5 400 tr/min, 320/500/750 Go à 7 200 tr/min, disque dur chiffré (SED) avec certification FIPS de 320 Go à 7 200 tr/min ; disque SSD SATA3 de 128/256/512 Go, disque SSD SATA3 de 256 Go REMARQUE : La taille des disques durs peut être modifiée. Pour plus d'informations, consultez le site dell.com. Lecteur optique : Interface • SATA1 (1,5 Gbit/s) • SATA2 (3 Gbit/s) Configuration Prise en charge des modules ODD et d'un module de voyage avec l'option de disque dur SATA Tableau 28. Batterie Fonctionnalité Spécification Type Lithium-Ion Dimensions (6 cellules/9 cellules/9 cellules LCL) : Profondeur 82,60 mm (3,25 pouces) Hauteur 190,65 mm (7,50 pouces) Largeur 20 mm (0,78 pouce) Poids • 6 cellules : 345 g (0,76 livre) • 9 cellules/9 cellules LCL : 535 g (1,18 livre) 78Fonctionnalité Spécification Tension 11,10 V Plage de températures : En fonctionnement De 0 à 35 °C (de 32 à 95 °F) Hors fonctionnement De –40 à 65 °C (de –40 à 149 °F) Pile bouton Pile bouton 3 V CR2032 lithium-ion Tableau 29. Adaptateur CA Fonctionnalité M4700 M6700 Tension d'entrée De 90 V CA à 264 V CA De 90 V CA à 264 V CA Courant d'entrée (maximal) 2,50 A 3,50 A Fréquence d'entrée De 50 Hz à 60 Hz De 50 Hz à 60 Hz Puissance de sortie 180 W 240 W Courant de sortie 9,23 A 12,30 A Tension de sortie nominale 19,50 V CC 19,50 V CC Dimensions : 180 W 240 W Hauteur 30 mm (1,18 pouce) 25,40 mm (1 pouce) Largeur 155 mm (6,10 pouces) 200 mm (7,87 pouces) Profondeur 76 mm (2,99 pouces) 100 mm (3,93 pouces) Plage de températures : En fonctionnement De 0 à 40 °C (de 32 à 104 °F) Hors fonctionnement De –40 à 65 °C (de –40 à 149 °F) Tableau 30. Carte à puce sans contact Fonctionnalité Spécification Cartes à puce et technologies prises en charge • ISO14443A : 160 Kbits/s, 212 Kbits/s, 424 Kbits/s et 848 Kbits/s • ISO14443B : 160 Kbits/s, 212 Kbits/s, 424 Kbits/s et 848 Kbits/s • ISO15693 • HID iClass • FIPS201 • NXP Desfire Tableau 31. Dimensions physiques Caractéristiques physiques M4700 M6700 Hauteur 32,70 mm (1,28 pouce) 33,10 mm (1,30 pouce) Largeur 376 mm (14,80 pouces) 416,70 mm (16,40 pouces) 79Caractéristiques physiques M4700 M6700 Profondeur 256 mm (10,07 pouces) 270,60 mm (10,65 pouces) Poids (minimum) 2,79 kg (6,15 livres) 3,52 kg (7,77 livres) Tableau 32. Conditions environnementales Fonctionnalité Spécification Plage de températures : En fonctionnement De 0 à 40 °C (de 32 à 104 °F) Stockage De –40 à 65 °C (de –40 à 149 °F) Humidité relative (maximale) : En fonctionnement de 10 % à 90 % (sans condensation) Stockage de 5 % à 95 % (sans condensation) Vibration maximale : En fonctionnement 0,66 Grms, de 2 Hz à 600 Hz Stockage 1,3 Grms, de 2 Hz à 600 Hz Choc maximum : En fonctionnement 140 G, 2 ms Hors fonctionnement 163 G, 2 ms Altitude : Stockage De 0 à 10 668 m (de 0 à 35 000 pieds) Niveau de polluants atmosphériques G1 ou inférieur, tel que défini par la norme ANSI/ISA-S71.04-1985 806 Caractéristiques Caractéristiques techniques REMARQUE : Les offres peuvent varier en fonction de la région. Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration de l'ordinateur, cliquez sur Démarrer. (Icône Démarrer) → Aide et support, puis sélectionnez l'option permettant d'afficher les informations sur l'ordinateur. Tableau 33. Informations système Fonctionnalité Spécification Jeu de puces du système Jeu de puces Mobile Intel QM77 Express Canaux DMA Deux contrôleurs DMA 82C37 avec sept canaux programmables indépendamment Niveaux d'interruption Fonction APIC E/S intégrée avec 24 interruptions Puce BIOS (NVRAM) 96 Mo (12 Mo) Tableau 34. Processeur Fonctionnalité Spécification Type de processeur • Intel Core i5 et i7 double cœur • Intel Core i7 quatre cœurs Extreme • Intel Core i7 quatre cœurs Mémoire cache L1 Jusqu'à 32 Ko de mémoire cache en fonction du type de processeur Mémoire cache L2 Jusqu'à 256 Ko de mémoire cache en fonction du type de processeur Mémoire cache L3 Jusqu'à 8 Mo de mémoire cache en fonction du type de processeur Tableau 35. Mémoire Fonctionnalité Spécification Type DDR3 Vitesse 1 600 MHz et 1 866 MHz Connecteurs • Processeurs Intel Core i5 et i7 double cœur — deux emplacements DIMM • Processeurs Intel Core i7 quatre cœurs et i7 quatre cœurs Extreme — quatre emplacements DIMM Capacité 1 Go, 2 Go, 4 Go et 8 Go 81Fonctionnalité Spécification Mémoire minimale 2 Go Mémoire maximale • Processeurs Intel Core i5 et i7 double cœurs — 16 Go • Processeurs Intel Core i7 quatre cœurs et i7 quatre cœurs Extreme — 32 Go Tableau 36. Vidéo Fonctionnalité Spécification Type Séparée Bus de données PCIE X16 Contrôleur vidéo et mémoire : M4700 • AMD FirePro M4000 avec 1 Go de mémoire GDDR5 • NVIDIA Quadro K1000M avec 2 Go de mémoire GDDR3 • NVIDIA Quadro K2000M avec 2 Go de mémoire GDDR3 M6700 • AMD FirePro M6000 avec 2 Go de mémoire GDDR5 • NVIDIA Quadro K3000M avec 2 Go de mémoire GDDR5 • NVIDIA Quadro K4000M avec 4 Go de mémoire GDDR5 • NVIDIA Quadro K5000M avec 4 Go de mémoire GDDR5 Tableau 37. Audio Fonctionnalité Spécification Integrée Son haute définition bicanal Tableau 38. Communication Fonctionnalité Spécification Carte réseau Carte d'interface réseau pour communication 10/100/1 000 Mbit/s Sans fil • Réseau local sans fil (WLAN) interne • Réseau étendu sans fil (WWAN) interne • Prise en charge de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth Tableau 39. Bus d'extension Fonctionnalité Spécification Type de bus : PCI 2.3, PCI Express 1.0 et 2.0, SATA 1.0A, 2.0 et 3.0, USB 2.0 et 3.0 Largeur du bus PCIE X16 Puce BIOS (NVRAM) 96 Mo (12 Mo) 82Tableau 40. Ports et connecteurs Fonctionnalité Spécification Audio Deux connecteurs pour sortie de ligne et entrée de ligne/microphone Carte réseau Un connecteur RJ45 USB 2.0 Deux USB 3.0 Deux eSATA\USB 2.0 Un IEEE1394 : M4700 Un connecteur IEEE 1394 4 broches M6700 Un connecteur IEEE 1394 6 broches Vidéo Connecteur VGA 15 broches, connecteur HDMI 19 broches, connecteur DisplayPort 20 broches Lecteur de carte mémoire Un lecteur de carte mémoire 8 en 1 Port d'accueil Un Port SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) Un Carte ExpressCard Une Carte à puce (en option) Une Tableau 41. Écran Fonctionnalité M4700 M6700 Type • HD (1 366 X 768) • Full HD (1 920 x 1 080) • HD+ (1 600 x 900) • Full HD (1 920 x 1 080) Taille 15,6 pouces 17,3 pouces Dimensions : Hauteur 256 mm (10,07 pouces) 270,60 mm (10,65 pouces) Largeur 376 mm (14,80 pouces) 416,70 mm (16,40 pouces) Diagonale 396,24 mm (15,60 pouces) 439,42 mm (17,3 pouces) Zone active (X/Y) 344,23 mm x 193,54 mm • 382,08 mm x 214,92 mm (HD +) • 381,89 mm x 214,81 mm (Full HD) Résolution maximale 1 920 x 1 080 pixels 1 920 x 1 080 pixels Luminosité maximale • 220 cd/m² (HD) • 300 cd/m² (Full HD) • 220 cd/m² (HD+) • 300 cd/m² (Full HD) Angle de fonctionnement De 0° (fermé) à 135° 83Fonctionnalité M4700 M6700 Fréquence d'actualisation 60 Hz Angles minimums de visualisation : Horizontal +/-40°, +/-60° (Full HD) Vertical +10°/-30°, +/-50° (Full HD) Tableau 42. Clavier Fonctionnalité Spécification Nombre de touches • États-Unis : 86 touches • Royaume-Uni : 87 touches • Brésil : 87 touches • Japon : 90 touches Configuration QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji Tableau 43. Pavé tactile Fonctionnalité Spécification Zone active : Axe des X 80,00 mm Axe des Y 40,50 mm Tableau 44. Webcam Fonctionnalité Spécification Type HD 720P avec double microphone Solution : HD (1 280 X 720 pixels) 30 images par seconde Tableau 45. Stockage Fonctionnalité Spécification Stockage : Interface de stockage • SATA1 (1,5 Gbit/s) • SATA2 (3 Gbit/s) • SATA3 (6 Gbit/s) Configurations des disques : M4700 Un disque dur/SSD SATA interne de 2,5 pouces (SATA3) + un disque SSD mSATA (SATA2) M6700 Deux disques durs/SSD SATA internes de 2,5 pouces (SATA3) + un lecteur SSD mSATA (SATA2) 84Fonctionnalité Spécification Taille 1 To à 5 400 tr/min, 320/500/750 Go à 7 200 tr/min, disque dur chiffré (SED) avec certification FIPS de 320 Go à 7 200 tr/min ; disque SSD SATA3 de 128/256/512 Go, disque SSD SATA3 de 256 Go REMARQUE : La taille des disques durs peut être modifiée. Pour plus d'informations, consultez le site dell.com. Lecteur optique : Interface • SATA1 (1,5 Gbit/s) • SATA2 (3 Gbit/s) Configuration Prise en charge des modules ODD et d'un module de voyage avec l'option de disque dur SATA Tableau 46. Batterie Fonctionnalité Spécification Type Lithium-Ion Dimensions (6 cellules/9 cellules/9 cellules LCL) : Profondeur 82,60 mm (3,25 pouces) Hauteur 190,65 mm (7,50 pouces) Largeur 20 mm (0,78 pouce) Poids • 6 cellules : 345 g (0,76 livre) • 9 cellules/9 cellules LCL : 535 g (1,18 livre) Tension 11,10 V Plage de températures : En fonctionnement De 0 à 35 °C (de 32 à 95 °F) Hors fonctionnement De –40 à 65 °C (de –40 à 149 °F) Pile bouton Pile bouton 3 V CR2032 lithium-ion Tableau 47. Adaptateur CA Fonctionnalité M4700 M6700 Tension d'entrée De 90 V CA à 264 V CA De 90 V CA à 264 V CA Courant d'entrée (maximal) 2,50 A 3,50 A Fréquence d'entrée De 50 Hz à 60 Hz De 50 Hz à 60 Hz Puissance de sortie 180 W 240 W Courant de sortie 9,23 A 12,30 A Tension de sortie nominale 19,50 V CC 19,50 V CC 85Fonctionnalité M4700 M6700 Dimensions : 180 W 240 W Hauteur 30 mm (1,18 pouce) 25,40 mm (1 pouce) Largeur 155 mm (6,10 pouces) 200 mm (7,87 pouces) Profondeur 76 mm (2,99 pouces) 100 mm (3,93 pouces) Plage de températures : En fonctionnement De 0 à 40 °C (de 32 à 104 °F) Hors fonctionnement De –40 à 65 °C (de –40 à 149 °F) Tableau 48. Carte à puce sans contact Fonctionnalité Spécification Cartes à puce et technologies prises en charge • ISO14443A : 160 Kbits/s, 212 Kbits/s, 424 Kbits/s et 848 Kbits/s • ISO14443B : 160 Kbits/s, 212 Kbits/s, 424 Kbits/s et 848 Kbits/s • ISO15693 • HID iClass • FIPS201 • NXP Desfire Tableau 49. Dimensions physiques Caractéristiques physiques M4700 M6700 Hauteur 32,70 mm (1,28 pouce) 33,10 mm (1,30 pouce) Largeur 376 mm (14,80 pouces) 416,70 mm (16,40 pouces) Profondeur 256 mm (10,07 pouces) 270,60 mm (10,65 pouces) Poids (minimum) 2,79 kg (6,15 livres) 3,52 kg (7,77 livres) Tableau 50. Conditions environnementales Fonctionnalité Spécification Plage de températures : En fonctionnement De 0 à 40 °C (de 32 à 104 °F) Stockage De –40 à 65 °C (de –40 à 149 °F) Humidité relative (maximale) : En fonctionnement de 10 % à 90 % (sans condensation) Stockage de 5 % à 95 % (sans condensation) Vibration maximale : En fonctionnement 0,66 Grms, de 2 Hz à 600 Hz Stockage 1,3 Grms, de 2 Hz à 600 Hz 86Fonctionnalité Spécification Choc maximum : En fonctionnement 140 G, 2 ms Hors fonctionnement 163 G, 2 ms Altitude : Stockage De 0 à 10 668 m (de 0 à 35 000 pieds) Niveau de polluants atmosphériques G1 ou inférieur, tel que défini par la norme ANSI/ISA-S71.04-1985 87887 Contacter Dell Contacter Dell REMARQUE : Si vous ne disposez pas d'une connexion Internet, les informations de contact figurent sur la facture d'achat, le borderau de colisage, la facture le catalogue des produits Dell. Dell propose diverses options d'assistance et de maintenance en ligne et téléphonique. Ces options varient en fonction du pays et du produit et certains services peuvent ne pas être disponibles dans votre région Pour contacter le service commercial, technique ou client de Dell : 1. Visitez le site support.dell.com. 2. Sélectionnez la catégorie d'assistance. 3. Si vous ne résidez pas aux Etats-Unis, sélectionnez le code pays au bas de la page support.dell.com ou sélectionnez Tout pour afficher d'autres choix. 4. Sélectionnez le lien de service ou d'assistance approprié. 89 w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Console de gestion multi-onduleurs ® Dell™ Manuel de l'utilisateur pour l'installation et la configurationRemarques REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui vous aident à mieux utiliser votre produit. ____________________ Les informations contenues dans ce document sont susceptibles d'être modifiées sans préavis. © 2012 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. Toute reproduction du présent document de quelque manière que ce soit est strictement interdite sans l'autorisation écrite deDell Inc.. Marques commerciales utilisées dans le présent document : Dell et le Dell logo sont des marques commerciales de Dell Inc.; Hyper-V, Microsoft, Windows, Internet Explorer, System Center Virtual Machine Manager, Windows Server, Windows 7, Windows XP et Windows Vista sont des marques commerciales ou des marques commerciales déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays ; Eaton et ePDU sont des marques commerciales déposées d'Eaton Corporation ; Intel et Xeon sont des marques commerciales déposées et Core est une marque commerciale d'Intel Corp. ; Mozilla et Firefox sont des marques commerciales déposées de Mozilla Foundation ; Linux est une marque commerciale déposée de Linus Torvalds ; Red Hat est une marque commerciale déposée de Red Hat, Inc. ; VMware, vSphere, vMotion, vCenter, ESX et ESXi sont des marques commerciales ou des marques commerciales déposées de VMware, Inc. ; Citrix, Xen, XenServer, XenClient, XenCenter et XenMotion sont des marques commerciales ou des marques commerciales déposées de Citrix Inc. ; Google et Chrome sont des marques commerciales ou des marques commerciales déposées de Google, Inc. D'autres marques et appellations commerciales peuvent être utilisées dans le présent document en référence à des entités qui revendiquent ces marques et appellations, ou leurs produits. Dell Inc.Dell Inc. dément tout intérêt de propriété industrielle pour les marques déposées et les appellations commerciales autres que celles dont elle est propriétaire. Septembre 2012 • P-164000167 1Table des matières 3 Table des Matières 1 Introduction Pages HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 2 Installation Conditions préalables à l'installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Sur le système hébergeant MUMC Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Sur le système affichant la GUI Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Installation du démarrage rapide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Installation graphique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Fonctionnement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Résultat de l'installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Désinstallation de l' MUMC Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Mise à niveau du produit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 3 Configuration Configuration des nœuds et réglages de la console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Recherche des nœuds branchés au réseau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Configurer les actions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Configurer les comptes de l'utilisateur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Paramètres du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Table des matières 4 4 Surveillance Accès à l'interface de surveillance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Accès local. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Accès distant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Aperçu de la liste de nœuds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Aperçu des panneaux flexibles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Liste des panneaux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Panneau relatif aux informations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Panneau relatif à l'état. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Panneau relatif aux prises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Panneau relatif aux mesures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Panneau relatif à l'environnement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Panneau graphique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Panneau synoptique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Panneau relatif aux événements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Panneau relatif aux statistiques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Composantes de l'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Surveillance du dispositif. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Aperçu de la liste des applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Aperçu de la carte. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Créer un aperçu de la carte personnalisé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Exemples de cartes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Evénements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Liste des événements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Calendrier des événements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Liste des événements relatifs aux nœuds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Lancement de l'interface Web du dispositif . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Définition des sous-aperçus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Partage des sous-aperçus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Table des matières 5 5 Arrêt Configuration de l'arrêt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Arrêt par hibernation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Aperçu de la source d'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Séquence d'arrêt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 6 Gestion avancée Réglages des nœuds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Affichage de la configuration à nœud unique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Réglages de la carte unique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Synchronisation des configurations à cartes multiples . . . . . . . . . . 61 Mise à niveau des nœuds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Téléchargement du micrologiciel du dispositif . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Applications de mise à niveau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 7 Virtualisation Les solutions de virtualisation de la console de gestion multi-onduleurs Dell pour VMware, Microsoft, Citrix, OpenSource Xen et KVM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Solutions Dell pour VMware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Solutions Dell pour Microsoft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Solutions Dell pour Citrix Xen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Solutions Dell pour OpenSource Xen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Solutions Dell pour Red Hat KVM ou OpenSource KVM . . . . . . . . . 72 Solutions Dell pour Citrix XenClient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Environnements testés . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 VMware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Microsoft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Citrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Activation du module de virtulisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Table des matières 6 Conditions préalables des superviseurs VMware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Conditions préalables des superviseurs Microsoft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Conditions préalables des superviseurs Citrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Ajout d'une liste de gestionnaires ou d'hyperviseurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Ajout d'un gestionnaire de serveurs vCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Ajout d'un gestionnaire SCVMM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Ajout d'une liste d'hyperviseurs VMware ESX/ESXi. . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Ajout d'une liste d'hyperviseurs Citrix XenServer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Ajout d'un XenCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Configuration des hyperviseurs (serveur ESX/ESXi, XenServer). . . . . . . . 80 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Configuration des droits pour les hyperviseurs (ESX/ESXi, XenServer). . 80 Configuration de l'entretien et de l'arrêt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Options de configuration pour les installations vCenter et SCVMM . . . 81 Deuxième type de nœuds (DELL MUMC détecte que ULMN Dell est exécuté sur l'hôte VMHost) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 8 Redondance Configuration de la redondance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Aperçus de la redondance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Aperçu de la redondance dans la liste de nœuds . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Aperçu du dispositif composite dans la source d'alimentation . . . . . . 89 Sous-aperçu des composantes de l'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Cas d'utilisation relatifs à la redondance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Table des matières 7 9 Application de la fonctionnalité étendue Configuration de la prise vCenter de MUMC Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Vérification de l'inscription de la prise vCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Événements et alarmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Utilisation de Dell MUMC via vCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Configuration de la prise XenCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Vérification de l'installation de la prise XenCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Utilisation de Dell MUMC via XenCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Configuration du mode d'entretien et de vMotion à partir de vCenter. . . . . 99 Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Compréhension du mode d'entretien . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Configuration du comportement du mode d'entretien dans vCenter . . . 101 Test de configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Haute disponibilité du vCenter VMware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Configuration du mode d'entretien et migration à chaud avec SCVMM. . . . 102 Mode d'entretien. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Compréhension de la migration à chaud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Test de configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Références de VMware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Dell et virtualisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Configuration d'ESX de VMware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Serveur vCenter (superviseur VMware) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 SDK vSphere pour Perl. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Références Hyper-V Microsoft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Dell et virtualisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Bibliothèque TechNet de Microsoft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 À propos du mode d'entretien . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Exigences d'usage de la migration à chaud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Introduction 1 1 Introduction Dell™ Console de gestion multi-onduleurs® (MUMC) est idéal pour surveiller et gérer plusieurs dispositifs d'alimentation et environnementaux. MUMC Dell fournit un aperçu global à travers le réseau depuis tout PC disposant d'un navigateur Internet. Exceptionnellement versatile, le logiciel est compatible à tout dispositif prenant en charge une interface réseau, incluant les onduleurs d'autres constructeurs, les capteurs environnementaux, les unités de distribution d'alimentation (PDU), applications et autres. MUMC Dell est également en mesure d'organiser un tableau de gestion par groupes, de centraliser des alarmes et de tenir des journaux des événements en vue d'un entretien préventif de la totalité des équipements installés. MUMC Dell permet d'exécuter les tâches suivantes : • Rechercher et surveiller les onduleurs Dell et les PDU Dell connectés au réseau au moyen d'une carte ou d'un serveur mandataire. Pour une liste détaillée des solutions compatibles, voir “Compatibilité” à la page 2. • Surveiller les serveurs distants hébergeant l'application MUMC Dell. • Fournir des fonctions de gestion avancées (configuration de masse et téléchargement de masse) avec la Carte de gestion du réseau Dell™ (H910P, également appelée NMC). • Permettre un arrêt progressif de l'ordinateur local via la Carte de gestion réseau Dell. • Permettre de directement gérer et contrôler les hyperviseurs VMware® via la plateforme de gestion vCenter™ de VMware® sans agent • Permettre de centraliser la gestion des applications du Gestionnaire de nœuds local de l'onduleur® Dell™ (ULNM Dell) exécutées sur les serveurs virtualisés autres que le vCenter de VMware (tels que l'hyperviseur Hyper-V™ de Microsoft® ou Citrix® Xen®). Schéma 1 montre la page principale MUMC Dell.Introduction 2 Schéma 1. MUMC DellPage principale Compatibilité Dispositifs sur ligne série Le MUMC Dell est compatible avec les dispositifs sur ligne série suivants (voir Tableau 1). Tableau 1. Dispositifs sur ligne série Dénomination des équipements Dell Type de connectivité Rack/Tour de 500 W, 1000 W, 1920 W, 2300 W, 2700 W Port USB ou RS-232 Faible profondeur, haut rendement en ligne 2700 W Port USB ou RS-232 Haut rendement en ligne 3750 W, 4200 W, 5600 W Port USB ou RS-232 Rack LI 5600 W Port USB ou RS-232 Rack en ligne 10 kW Port USB ou RS-232Introduction 3 Dispositifs réseau MUMC Dell est compatible avec le dispositif réseau suivant (voir Tableau 2). Applications Dell MUMC Dell est compatible avec les applications suivantes (voir Tableau 3). Tableau 2. Dispositif réseau Dénomination des équipements Dell Type de dispositif réseau Carte de gestion réseau Dell SNMP/Web H910P Carte optionnelle de l'onduleur Tableau 3. Applications Désignation de l'équipement Type d'application Ordinateurs (Microsoft® Windows® - Linux®) hébergeant la commande d'arrêt ULMN Dell Caractéristiques : • Exploration rapide • Surveillance • Gestion • Arrêt Serveur mandataire de l'onduleur (Commande d'arrêt) Ordinateurs (Windows - Linux) hébergeant l'application ULMN Dell Caractéristiques : • Exploration rapide • Surveillance • Gestion PDU Dell Caractéristiques : • Exploration rapide • SurveillanceIntroduction 4 ULMN DellGestion ULMN Dell peut être géré, configuré et mis à jour à distance à l'aide d'un logiciel de surveillance MUMC Dell . MUMC Dell permet de procéder à des configurations et des mises à jour massives d'applications ULMN Dell. MUMC Dell permet également d'effectuer les opérations suivantes à distance : • Afficher une configuration de relâchement 2 ULMN Dell • Configurer un relâchement 2 simple ULMN Dell • Synchroniser plusieurs configurations de relâchement 2 ULMN Dell • Activer une mise à niveau des phases de relâchement 2 ULMN Dell Évaluations des performances Afin de fournir une évaluation des performances, Dell a testé les configurations suivantes : Test avec la machine 1 (serveur Dell PowerEdge 2900) • Unité centrale : Intel® Xeon® 5130 dual-core @2 GHz • Mémoire : 2 Go DDR2 @666 MHz • Lecteur de disque dur : 2 lecteurs de disque dur 67 GB 7200 t/min RAID 0 (écriture miroir) • Système d'exploitation : Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 64 bits Surveillé & surveillé de manière avancée par ePDU® d'Eaton® Fonctions : • Surveillance Géré par ePDU d'Eaton Fonctions : • Surveillance Commuté par ePDU d'Eaton Fonctions : • Surveillance Tableau 3. Applications (Suite) Désignation de l'équipement Type d'applicationIntroduction 5 Conditions de test pendant 40 heures : – 1300 nœuds (dont ~50 réels), principalement des MUMC Dell et quelques NSM et Carte de gestion réseau Dell. – Charge moyenne de l'unité centrale : 20~30 % – Charge du processeur : 200~300 MB Test avec la machine 2 (PC type) • Unité centrale : Intel Core™ 2 Duo 6600 @2,4 GHz • Mémoire : 2 Go DDR2 • Lecteur de disque dur : 1 lecteur de disque dur 220 GB 7200 t/min • Système d'exploitation : Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise 32 bits Conditions de test pendant 40 heures : – 1000 nœuds (dont ~50 réels), principalement des MUMC Dell et quelques NSM et Carte de gestion réseau Dell. – Charge moyenne de l'unité centrale : ~ 60 % – Charge du processeur : 200~300 MB REMARQUE : Ces tests ont été effectués sous le système d'exploitation Windows Server. Les systèmes d'exploitation Windows 2003 ou 2008 ne sont pas limités à 10 connexions simultanées. Ports réseau Tableau 4 énumère les ports réseau utilisés par MUMC Dell.Introduction 6 Tableau 4. Ports réseau Dépannage Pages HTML Impossible d'afficher la page contenant les propriétés de l'onduleur. Erreur HTTP 404 avec IE. Solution : • Vérifier l'URL qui a été saisi. https://:4680/ ou https://:4679/ Protocole Port mode ULMN Dell et MUMC Dell Carte de gestion des onduleurs Dell SMTP TCP/25 OUT OUT DHCP/BOOTP UDP/67 X OUT TFTP UDP/69 OUT IN HTTP TCP/80 OUT IN NTP UDP/123 X OUT SNMP UDP/161 OUT IN Traps SNMP UDP/162 X OUT UNMP UDP/200 IN/OUT X HTTPS TCP/443 OUT IN DellSurveillance TCP/4679 IN/OUT X Dell Émission de notifications UDP/4679 IN/OUT IN/OUT Dell Surveillance SSL TCP/4680 IN/OUT X Dell Émission d'alarmes UDP/4680 IN OUT Dell Alarmes connectés TCP/5000 OUT IN Dell Alarmes connectés TCP/5001 OUT XIntroduction 7 Terminologie Cette section contient la terminologie et les définitions spécifiques. Adresse IP Lorsque le protocole de contrôle de transmission/le protocole Internet (TCP/IP) est installé sur un ordinateur, une adresse IP est attribuée au système. Chaque adresse, unique, est composée de quatre chiffres compris entre 0 et 256, comme 168.8.156.210. Serveur mandataire de gestion du réseau Le serveur mandataire de gestion du réseau permet de contrôler un onduleur et de le connecter à un réseau TCP/IP. Système de gestion du réseau Le système de gestion du réseau (NMS) surveille les dispositifs SNMP connectés au réseau TCP/IP. Module d'arrêt du réseau Le module d'arrêt du réseau est un module logiciel qui utilise les informations transférées par le Carte de gestion réseau Dell/serveur mandataire pour informer les utilisateurs de l'ordinateur de l'état actuel de l'alimentation électrique de l'ordinateur. Si l'alimentation électrique de l'onduleur est dans une situation de risque, le module d'arrêt du réseau procède à un arrêt méthodique de l'ordinateur dans les meilleures conditions de sécurité possibles. Algorithme RSA Algorithme pour protocole de cryptage de système cryptographique à clé publique. Une clé RSA est le résultat d'opérations qui comprennent des nombres premiers. Le terme RSA fait référence à Ron Rivest, Adi Shamir et Leonard Adleman, responsable de la description des systèmes de cryptage à clé publique en 1978. Protocole de sécurité SSL (Secure Socket Layer) Le protocole de sécurité SSL est une solution qui permet de sécuriser les transactions réalisées sur Internet. Le SSL est un protocole de communication qui authentifie les données qui ont été échangées tout en garantissant leur confidentialité et leur intégrité. Le protocole fait appel à une méthode de cryptage reconnue : l'algorithme RSA à clé publique. Le SSL est intégré aux navigateurs Internet. Le cadenas situé en bas de l'écran de votre navigateur s'affiche automatiquement si le serveur qui envoie des informations utilise le SSL. Introduction 8 Protocole de contrôle de transmission/Protocole Internet TCP/IP est une famille de protocoles de réseau et de communication utilisés pour le transfert et les couches réseau. Il est également appelé suite de protocoles Internet des protocoles de communication réseau. Remerciements L'équipe de développement de logiciels Dell tient à exprimer sa reconnaissance aux projets suivants : • Spider Monkey • Ext JS • SQLite – Le projet SQLite (http://www.sqlite.org/) a généreusement fait don d'un code source au domaine public qui nous a aidés dans le cadre du présent projet. • Ouvrez le SSL – Ce produit MUMC Dell comprend un logiciel mis au point dans le cadre du projet OpenSSL en vue d'être utilisé dans la boîte à outils d'OpenSSL (http://www.openssl.org/). – Ce produit MUMC Dell comprend un logiciel cryptographique conçu par Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). – Ce produit MUMC Dell comprend un logiciel conçu par Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). • USB Lib • Net SNMP La licence complète de chacun de ces projets est disponible dans MUMC Dell via le chemin de sélection Paramètres >Système > A propos de.Installation 9 2 Installation Ce chapitre contient les conditions préalables à l'installation pour le Console de gestion multi-onduleurs Dell (MUMC) ainsi que les procédures d'installation pour un démarrage rapide. Les procédures de désinstallation et de mise à niveau du produit sont également comprises. Conditions préalables à l'installation Cette section contient les conditions préalables à l'installation relatives aux éléments suivants : • Systèmes d'hébergement de MUMC Dell • Systèmes qui affichent l'interface utilisateur graphique sur le Web (GUI) Sur le système hébergeant MUMC Dell MUMC Dell peut être installé sous Microsoft® Windows XP®, Microsoft® Windows Vista® 7 et sous Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 et 2008 (révision R2 comprise). • Pour de meilleures performances avec plusieurs nœuds, Dell recommande le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows Server® (non limité à 10 connexions simultanées) • Pour éviter les conflits d'accès au réseau ou au port série, vous ne pouvez pas installer le MUMC Dell sur une machine qui héberge également : – Un logiciel de gestion d'onduleur Dell REMARQUE : Il s'agit du modèle précédent du logiciel de gestion des onduleurs Dell. Si vous l'avez utilisé auparavant, il faut l'éliminer avant d'installer le nouveau logiciel MUMC Dell) – MUMC Dell Sur le système affichant la GUI Web Il est possible d'accéder à l'interface graphique MUMC Dell à distance à l'aide d'un simple navigateur Web. L'accès à cette interface peut être sécurisé à l'aide d'une connexion SSL en plus du nom d'utilisateur et du mot de passe. L'interface graphique MUMC Dell a été testée avec : • Google® Chrome™ • Mozilla Firefox® 3,0, 3,5 • Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 6(*), 7, 8, 9 (*) IE6 doit fonctionner, mais les performances ne sont pas optimales.Installation 10 Installation du démarrage rapide Cette section contient les instructions relatives à l'installation et la configuration du démarrage rapide. Installation graphique Pour installer l' MUMC Dell : 1 Sous Windows XP, Vista 7 Windows Server 2003 et 2008, exécutez le pack Console de gestion multionduleurs Dell sur un compte d'administrateur. Un navigateur Web affiche l'écran d'accueil de l'installateur Console de gestion multi-onduleurs Dell . 2 Observez l'invite et vérifiez que le dispositif de communication est branché. Cliquez sur Suivant (voir Schéma 2). L'écran de connexion apparaît. Schéma 2. Écran de bienvenue 3 Lisez la description de l'application. Saisissez le nom de l'utilisateur, puis cliquez sur Connexion (voir Schéma 3). REMARQUE : Le nom de l'utilisateur et le mot de passe par défaut est admin.Installation 11 Schéma 3. Écran de connexion Configuration Une fois lancée, l'application effectue automatiquement une recherche à l'aide de l'option Exploration rapide : • L'opération Exploration rapide vous permettra de détecter toutes les cartes de gestion d'onduleur DelI, PDU Dell et Gestionnaire de nœuds local de l'onduleur Dell (ULNM)(ou ULMN Dell) sur le sous-réseau local en quelques secondes. • Les nœuds trouvés s'affichent à l'aide de Paramètres > Recherche automatique (voir Schéma 4). • Pour les autres nœuds, effectuez une recherche basée sur les plages d'adresses IP à l'aide de l'option Exploration des plages. L'option Élargir l'exploration permet de trouver les nœuds qui sont à l'extérieur du réseau et les noeuds non compatibles avec la fonction Exploration rapide. • Consultez la liste de compatibilité pour déterminer si votre nœud prend la fonction Exploration rapide en charge. (Facultatif) Si vous souhaitez que l'ordinateur exécutant MUMC Dell s'arrête en cas de panne de courant : Activez le module d'arrêt avec Paramètres > Arrêt > Réglages du module. Dans la page Paramètres > Arrêt, définissez : • L'adresse IP de l'onduleur alimentant l'ordinateur local • L'accès est paramétré en fonction de la saisie du nom d'utilisateur et du mot de passe.Installation 12 Code de la licence MUMC Dell peut surveiller jusqu'à 32 dispositifs comprenant des onduleurs Dell, des PDU Dell et Carte de gestion réseau Dell) sans clé de licence. Si plus de dispositifs doivent être surveillés, une licence appropriée est requise. La licence peut également être mise à niveau ultérieurement sans requérir une réinstallation. Pour les versions payantes « Silver » ou « Gold » : • Dans Paramètres > Système > Modifier les informations du système, saisissez la clé de la licence du produit fournie : – MUMC Dell Licence Silver (de 33 à 100 nœuds de dispositif) – MUMC Dell Licence Gold (de 101 à un nombre illimité de nœuds de dispositif) REMARQUE : Les nœuds qui ne sont pas gérés en raison d'une limitation de la licence seront représentés par l'icône suivante : Schéma 4. Démarrage rapide - Page de recherche automatique Fonctionnement L'élément de menu Aperçus > Nœud vous permet de surveiller l'état actuel des dispositifs d'alimentation et application compatibles : sélectionnez une ligne dans la liste et les panneaux seront mis à niveau avec les informations du dispositif sélectionné. (voir Schéma 5).Installation 13 Schéma 5. Démarrage rapide - Page principale de la liste des nœuds [Facultatif] Si vous avez activé le module d'arrêt : • L'élément de menu Aperçus > Source d'alimentation vous permet de surveiller l'état actuel de l'onduleur nommé comme source d'alimentation dans le module d'arrêt facultatif. • L'aperçu Événements > Liste des événements vous permet de visualiser les événements liés au dispositif. Résultat de l'installation Si vous installez une nouvelle version de l' MUMC Dell sans désinstaller la version précédente, vous conserverez les paramètres de votre base de données et de votre produit. • En fin d'installation les raccourcis suivants sont créés dans le groupe Démarrer > Programmes > Dell > Console de gestion multi-onduleurs : – Ouvrir Console de gestion multi-onduleurs Dell: lance la principale interface graphique de MUMC Dell – Démarrer Console de gestion multi-onduleurs Dell : démarre le service – Arrêter Console de gestion multi-onduleurs Dell : arrête le service – Désinstaller Console de gestion multi-onduleurs Dell : désinstalle le programmeInstallation 14 • Un service appelé « Console de gestion multi-onduleurs Dell » a également été créé pour le moteur d'acquisition de la base de données. – Le service démarre automatiquement lors du démarrage de la machine. – Ce service fournit l'interface Web. • Une boîte de notification d'alarme, accessible depuis l'icône de la zone de notification, affiche les alarmes sur l'ordinateur local. Désinstallation de l' MUMC Dell Il existe deux modes de désinstallation de l' MUMC Dell : • Sur l'élément Ajouter/Supprimer des programmes du panneau de configuration, sélectionnez le pack Console de gestion multi-onduleurs Dell Vx.xx et supprimez-le. • Vous pouvez également le désinstaller à partir des raccourcis pour supprimer le produit et les fichiers personnalisés (si vous confirmez l'action) : Démarrer > Programmes > Dell > Console de gestion multi-onduleurs > Console de gestion multionduleurs Ceci vous permet de supprimer la base de données et les fichiers personnalisés si vous le souhaitez. Mise à niveau du produit Voir “Mise à niveau des nœuds” à la page 62.Configuration 15 3 Configuration Ce chapitre décrit comment configurer Console de gestion multi-onduleurs Dell (MUMC). Configuration des nœuds et réglages de la console Chaque nœud [Carte de gestion d'onduleur Dell, PDU Dell ou Gestionnaire de nœuds local de l'onduleur Dell (ULNM)] doit disposer d'une adresse IP valide (ou d'un nom DNS) compris dans la fourchette saisie pour la recherche automatique. (Voir “Compatibilité” à la page 2.) MUMC Dell reçoit automatiquement les alarmes (via notification ou interrogation) sans configuration spécifique de la carte réseau, des mandataires ou des applications. Pour une acquisition SNMP, vérifiez le nom de la communauté. • Le nom de la communauté par défaut est configuré dans Paramètres > Système > Nom de la communauté par défaut. • Un nome de communauté par défaut peut être défini pour chaque plage IP dans Paramètres > Recherche automatique > Recherche de plage > Mot de passe. Recherche des nœuds branchés au réseau 1 Lancer l'interface graphique principale « Console de gestion multi-onduleurs Dell » à l'aide du raccourci précédemment créé. 2 Sélectionnez l'élément de menu Paramètres > Recherche automatique. Dans paramètres > Recherche automatique, les méthodes de recherche suivantes sont disponibles (voir Schéma 6) : • Exploration rapide (exécution automatique lors du démarrage de l'application) • Exploration des plages • Exploration des adressesConfiguration 16 Schéma 6. Page de recherche automatique Les notes de fonctionnement suivantes s'appliquent lors de la détection de nœuds : • La demande Exploration rapide est un cadre de diffusion du port réservé 4679 IANA et du port TFTP standard 69. L'opération Exploration rapide vous permettra de détecter les cartes Web/SNMP suivantes en quelques secondes. • Pour les données étrangères au segment du réseau, exécutez la recherche sur la base des plages d'adresses IP à l'aide de l'option Exploration des plages. L'opération Recherche de plage vous permet de rechercher les nœuds en-dehors du segment réseau et les nœuds qui ne sont pas compatibles avec la fonction Exploration rapide. • L'option Exploration des adresses exécute une simple recherche d'adresses.(ou de diverses adresses IP séparées par le caractère « ; ») Configurer les actions Vous pouvez définir comment les utilisateurs seront avisés en cas d'événements liés aux nœuds. L'élément de menu Paramètres > Actions vous permet de configurer les actions suivantes (voir Schéma 7) : • E-mail • Exécuter le script/programme • Notification à la boîte de notification des alarmes locale, disponible depuis l'icône Plateau du systèmeConfiguration 17 Schéma 7. Page relative aux actions Créer une nouvelle action Le bouton de création d'une nouvelle action affiche l'interface suivante :Configuration 18 Schéma 8. Boîte de dialogue Créer une nouvelle action REMARQUE : Les champs « * » sont obligatoires. Filtre des événements Vous pouvez filtrer les actions en fonction des éléments suivants : • Types d'événements : Critique, Avertissement, Normal, Communication perdue REMARQUE : Ce paramètre permet de filtrer la notification en fonction du niveau d'événement. Consultez la liste d'événements fournie ultérieurement dans le présent document. Si vous sélectionnez « Critique » en tant que filtre, vous ne recevrez pas l'événement associé « Normal » vous informant que l'état du dispositif passe de « Critique » à « Normal ». • Catégorie d'événements : Tous les événements, Alarmes, Événements relatifs à l'arrêt, Événements relatifs à l'alimentation, Mesures REMARQUE : L'icône du stylo vous permet de modifier et de sélectionner la catégorie d'événement. • Aperçu : aperçu qui déclenche l'événementConfiguration 19 E-mail Pour recevoir un e-mail relatif aux événements de l'onduleur : • Vous devez indiquer l'adresse du serveur SMTP et celle de l'e-mail du destinataire. Le nom de l'utilisateur et le mot de passe s'utilisent lorsque le serveur SMTP requiert une authentification. Pour une utilisation avancée : • Vous pouvez personnaliser le sujet, comme lorsque vous utilisez un prestataire de service tiers pour envoyer un e-mail sous forme de SMS. • Vous pouvez spécifier que vous souhaitez recevoir une consolidation des alarmes qui s'est déclenchée pendant la durée du délai que vous choisissez. Par exemple, si vous n'en spécifiez aucune, chaque alarme générera un e-mail. Avec ce réglage, vous recevrez plus d'e-mails pour le même nombre d'événements. Exécuter le script/programme Le chemin de programme sera requis pour exécuter un programme relatif aux événements de l'onduleur. REMARQUE : Le programme s'exécute sur le compte SYSTEM. • Si une action (script ou programme) ne peut être exécutée sur le compte SYSTEM, il faut modifier le contexte d'exécution pour y parvenir. • Pour permettre à un utilisateur d'exécuter des outils et programmes spécifiques avec des autorisations différentes de celles qui ont été accordées au compte de l'utilisateur, utilisez la commande Windows « Exécuter en tant que ». Cela vous permet d'enregistrer le mot de passe (Windows XP Service Pack 2 et versions plus récentes). • Utilisez la commande de Microsoft suivante : > runas /profile /user: /savecred • Lors de la première exécution, un mot de passe vous sera demandé. Celui-ci sera enregistré pour les exécutions ultérieures. Boîte de notification des alarmes Les alarmes s'affichent dans la boîte des alarmes de l'ordinateur local (voir Schéma 9). La partie de l'état de la boîte des alarmes est optionnelle. Elle n'apparaît que si une source d'alimentation a été indiquée lors de la configuration d'arrêt.Configuration 20 Schéma 9. Boîte de notification des alarmes Le plateau du système fournit un accès à la boîte des alarmes. Cliquez sur l'icône du plateau du système avec le bouton droit de la souris pour accéder rapidement aux fonctions illustrées dans le Schéma 10: Schéma 10. Menu contextuel du plateau du système Si aucune source d'alimentation n'a été indiquée, l'icône Plateau du système peuvent être décrits dans Tableau 5. Tableau 5. Icônes d'état du plateau du système (aucune source d'alimentation indiquée) Icône Description de l'état L'icône du plateau du système reçoit correctement les alarmes de MUMC Dell. La communication entre le plateau du système et le MUMC Dell est perdue.Configuration 21 Si une source d'alimentation a été indiquée, les états de l'icône Plateau du système peuvent être décrits dans Tableau 6. Tableau 6. Icônes d'état du plateau du système (source d'alimentation indiquée) Icône Description de l'état L'icône du plateau du système reçoit correctement les alarmes de MUMC Dell. AC est présent sur la source d'alimentation. L'icône du plateau du système reçoit correctement les alarmes de MUMC Dell. La source d'alimentation fonctionne en mode batterie. L'icône du plateau du système reçoit correctement les alarmes de MUMC Dell. Un événement d'avertissement est survenu au niveau de la Source d'alimentation. L'icône du plateau du système reçoit correctement les alarmes de MUMC Dell. Un événement critique est survenu au niveau de la source d'alimentation. Erreur de communication avec la source d'alimentation.Configuration 22 Personnalisation avancée des alarmes sonores Pour configurer les alarmes sonores en cas d'événements : 1 Dans le fichier {INSTALL DIRECTORY}\Dell\MultiUPSManagementConsole\configs\config.js, modifier la configuration comme suit : 'systray' : { 'soundAlarm' : false, 'notificationIcon' : true, 'notificationBox' : true } 2 Modifiez 'soundAlarm': false, par 'soundAlarm': true, tel qu'indiqué ci-dessous : 'systray' : { 'soundAlarm': true, 'notificationIcon' : true, 'notificationBox' : true } 3 Fermez et redémarrez la session d'utilisateur Windows de sorte que cette configuration soit prise en compte REMARQUE : Vous pouvez changer le son de l'alarme en réglant les préférences sonores dans le Panneau de configuration (voir Schéma 11). REMARQUE : Les alarmes MUMC Dell sont liées au son de l'alarme « Batterie faible » que vous pouvez changer en sélectionnant un autre fichier wav.Configuration 23 Schéma 11. Choix de l'alarme sonore Configurer les comptes de l'utilisateur Pour configurer plusieurs comptes d'utilisateur : 1 Connectez-vous avec un profil d'utilisateur d'administrateur. 2 Sélectionnez Paramètres > Liste des utilisateurs. La page Liste des utilisateurs s'affiche (voir Schéma 12). 3 Cliquez sur Ajouter un utilisateur. La boîte de dialogue Ajouter un utilisateur s'affiche. 4 Saisissez le nom d'utilisateur et le mot de passe (voir Schéma 13). 5 Sélectionnez le niveau du profil de l'utilisateur. Les niveaux disponibles sont les suivants : • Admin (l'utilisateur sera capable d'accéder à toutes les fonctions) • Utilisateur (l'utilisateur ne pourra accéder qu'à la visualisation sans pouvoir modifier le système ni les nœuds). 6 Cliquez sur Créer un nouvel utilisateur.Configuration 24 Schéma 12. Page Liste des utilisateurs Schéma 13. Boîte de dialogue Ajouter un utilisateur Veuillez remarquer que MUMC Dell contient un profil d'administrateur par défaut avec : • « admin » en tant que nom de l'utilisateur • « admin » en tant que mot de passe AVERTISSEMENT : Pour des raisons de sécurité, il est vivement recommandé de changer le mot de passe donné par défaut immédiatement après l'installation. Une fenêtre intempestive donne un avertissement de sécurité si le mot de passe contient moins de huit caractères.Configuration 25 Paramètres du système Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres du système. Avec l'élément de menu Paramètres > Système, vous pouvez modifier les informations du système, la langue, les paramètres de recherche et les paramètres du module (voir Schéma 14). Schéma 14. Page Paramètres du système Sélectionnez l'un des éléments puis double-cliquez sur l'élément ou cliquez une fois sur le bouton correspondant dans le menu situé à droite : • Modifier les informations du système permet de modifier les informations de contact et d'emplacement. • Modification de la langue vous permet de changer la langue d'utilisation. • Modifier les paramètres de recherche permet de changer le nom par défaut de la communauté SNMP pour la recherche. • Modifier les paramètres des modules vous permet d'activer/de désactiver les modules optionnels de MUMC Dell : – Gestion permet de configurer massivement le réglage des nœuds et d'exécuter les fonctions de mise à niveau des nœuds – Arrêt permet d'arrêter l'ordinateur exécutant Dell MUMC en cas de panne de courant – Système virtuel permet de gérer les systèmes informatiques virtualisés – Redondance permet de gérer >1 onduleur en configuration redondante N+1Surveillance 26 4 Surveillance Ce chapitre décrit les fonctions de surveillance dans Console de gestion multi-onduleurs Dell (MUMC). Accès à l'interface de surveillance Pour surveiller la source d'alimentation, démarrez l'interface MUMC Dell principale. L'interface est accessible localement ou à distance. Accès local Dans le système sur lequel l' MUMC Dell est installé, vous pouvez utiliser le raccourci suivant : • Démarrer > Programmes > Dell > Console de gestion multi-onduleurs > Ouvrir la Console de gestion multi-onduleurs Accès distant 1 Depuis une machine locale, vous pouvez saisir l'une des URL suivantes dans un navigateur Web : http://:4680/ ou https://:4679/ 2 En mode SSL, acceptez le certificat en cliquant sur Oui (voir Schéma 15). Schéma 15. Acceptation du certificat SSLSurveillance 27 3 Pour installer le certificat sur IE7 pour Vista, effectuez les étapes suivantes : A Exécutez l'IE en tant qu'administrateur en cliquant avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône du bureau et en sélectionnant Exécuter en tant qu'administrateur. B Ouvrez l' MUMC Dell. C Cliquez sur l'erreur de certificat. D Cliquez sur le bouton Erreur de certificat sur la barre des adresses. E Cliquez sur Voir le certificat. F Cliquez sur Installer le certificat. 4 Cliquez sur le bouton radio Placer tous les certificats dans la mémoire suivante, puis choisissez la mémoire Autorités de certification racines sûres. Si vous ne le faites pas, le certificat ira dans votre mémoire personnelle et ne sera pas sécurisé par IE. 5 Saisissez le nom de l'utilisateur et le mot de passe. Aperçu de la liste de nœuds Les colonnes par défaut suivantes s'affichent dans cette page (voir Schéma 16) : • Type : icône graphique permettant de différencier onduleur/PDU et les applications • État : cet icône représente la gravité de l'événement actif le plus critique du dispositif surveillé • Nom : l'adresse IP, le nom DNS ou le nom défini par l'utilisateur • Description : nom ou description du produit • Emplacement : emplacement du nœud • Contact : contact du nœud • Lien : lien vers le site Web du dispositif (si disponible)Surveillance 28 Schéma 16. Aperçu de la liste de nœuds Vous pouvez trier votre liste de dispositifs (en ordre ascendant ou descendant) en cliquant sur les titres des colonnes (État / Nom / Description / Emplacement / Niveau de charge…). Vous pouvez également ajouter des colonnes, tel qu'indiqué dans la Schéma 17.Surveillance 29 Schéma 17. Ajouter des colonnes dans l'aperçu de la liste de nœuds Aperçu des panneaux flexibles Pour sélectionner les panneaux qui doivent être affichés dans l'aperçu, sélectionnez l'un des dispositifs/applications de la liste et Panneaux détaillés apparaîtra à la droite de la fenêtre. • Cliquez sur le titre de la barre pour réduire/élargir le panneau. • Vous pouvez également montrer ou masquer tout le menu des aperçus ou le menu de la sélection des aperçus. • Cliquez sur le bouton de sélection pour choisir les panneaux que vous souhaitez ajouter dans la sélection des aperçus (voir Schéma 18).Surveillance 30 Schéma 18. Boîte de dialogue Sélection du panneau REMARQUE : Certains panneaux ne sont disponibles que pour certains types de nœuds. Liste des panneaux Panneau relatif aux informations Les informations de nœud suivantes s'affichent dans ce panneau (voir Schéma 19) : • 166,99.xx.yy : le nom DNS (ou adresse IP) s'affiche à côté de l'icône d'état • Description : nom commercial du produit • Puissance apparente nominale : capacité de charge du dispositif dans VA • Adresse IP : adresse IP dispositif • Adresse MAC : adresse MAC du dispositif • Numéro de série : numéro de série du dispositif (si disponible) • Classe :. Type de carte • Emplacement : emplacement du dispositif (la valeur de l'objet de l'emplacement du système peut également être configurée dans la page Dispositif) • Contact : contact du dispositif (la valeur de l'objet de l'emplacement du système peut également être configurée dans la page Dispositif) • Lien : lien vers le site Web du dispositif (si disponible)Surveillance 31 REMARQUE : Les informations affichées dans le panneau dépendent des types de nœud visualisés. Schéma 19. Panneau relatif aux informations Panneau relatif à l'état L'état de nœud suivant s'affiche dans ce panneau (voir Schéma 20) : • Source d'alimentation : Courant AC/Batterie • État de la batterie : En charge / Déchargée / Par défaut / Flottante / Repos • Niveau de charge : niveau de charge de sortie du dispositif • Capacité de la batterie : Capacité de la batterie du dispositif • Autonomie de la batterie : temps de fonctionnement restant du dispositif • Sortie principale : état de la sortie principale (ON/OFF/Erreur interne/En mode Dérivation automatique/Dérivation manuelle/Surcharge) • Outlet #x : état de la prise de sortie (ON/OFF) REMARQUE : Les informations affichées sur ce panneau dépendent des capacités de l'onduleur.Surveillance 32 Schéma 20. Panneau relatif à l'état Panneau relatif aux prises Les informations d'état des prises suivantes s'affichent pour le PDU sélectionné dans le panneau (voir Schéma 21) : • Des informations contextuelles sont fournies lorsque la souris passe sur la prise • Lorsque vous sélectionnez une prise dans ce panneau, le panneau graphique affiche les informations portant sur cette prise. • Vous devez également sélectionner Informations sur les prises dans la boîte de dialogue Paramètres du graphique (accessible via le bouton des paramètres du graphique dans le panneau du graphique) Schéma 21. Panneau relatif aux prisesSurveillance 33 Un code de couleur indique l'état de la prise dans l'affichage (voir Tableau 7). Panneau relatif aux mesures Ce panneau affiche les paramètres électriques du dispositif sélectionnés pour les dispositifs monophasés ou triphasés, en fonction des nœuds (voir Schéma 22 et Schéma 23). Schéma 22. Panneau relatif aux mesures (monophasé) Tableau 7. Codes de couleurs des prises Icône Couleur Description Vert Alimenté (ON) Rouge Non alimenté (OFF)Surveillance 34 Schéma 23. Panneau relatif aux mesures (triphasé) Panneau relatif à l'environnement Ce panneau affiche les informations relatives au capteur du dispositif sélectionné (voir Schéma 24) : • Température : Température (en °C) • Humidité : niveau d'humidité • Entrée #1 : état du premier contact (ouvert/fermé) • Entrée #2 : état du deuxième contact (ouvert/fermé) REMARQUE : Pour de plus amples informations concernant les connexions d'entrées de remorquage en option, veuillez consulter le guide de l'utilisateur de la sonde de surveillance environnementale (EMP) Dell. Schéma 24. Panneau relatif à l'environnementSurveillance 35 Panneau graphique Ce panneau affiche le graphique des mesures principales du dispositif sélectionné (voir Schéma 25) : • Le bouton vous permet de zoomer sur le graphique. • Le bouton vous permet de sélectionner les données que vous voulez afficher sur le graphique. Schéma 25. Panneau graphiqueSurveillance 36 Panneau synoptique Ce panneau affiche les données synoptiques du dispositif sélectionné (voir Schéma 26) : Dans le coin supérieur gauche, sous la bannière, figure le type d'onduleur électrique : onduleurs en ligne/ onduleurs interactifs en ligne, etc.. Un conseil s'affiche lorsque vous déplacez le curseur sur l'un des blocs fonctionnels. Schéma 26. Panneau synoptique Les icônes à code couleur synoptique colorés pour les éléments suivants : (voir Tableau 8) : • Modules de l'onduleur • Modules de la batterie • Flux électriques • Sources d'alimentation électrique à l'entrée de l'onduleur • Charge à la sortie de l'onduleur, dont l'état est lié à celui de la sortie de l'onduleur • Codes à plusieurs couleurs Tableau 8. Icônes du panneau synoptique Symbole Couleur Description Modules de l'onduleur Dérivation AC/DC DC/AC Vert État OK et Actif Dérivation AC/DC DC/AC Rouge Erreur interne ou inactifSurveillance 37 Dérivation AC/DC DC/AC Gris État OK et inactif ou inconnu Modules de la batterie Vert État OK Orange La charge de la batterie est inférieure à 50 % Rouge Erreur de batterie ou fin de l'autonomie Gris État de la batterie inconnu Flux électriques Jaune Flux actuel dans le câble REMARQUE : L'animation de l'objet indique le sens du flux actuel. Gris Pas de flux électrique dans le câble AVERTISSEMENT : Il se peut que le câble soit sous tension. Source d'alimentation électrique à l'entrée de l'onduleur Vert Source activée. État OK Gris Source non activée ou état inconnu Charge à la sortie de l'onduleur Vert Charge activée et protégée. État OK Rouge Charge non alimentée Tableau 8. Icônes du panneau synoptique (Suite) Symbole Couleur DescriptionSurveillance 38 Source d'alimentation Le panneau Source d'alimentation affiches des informations relatives au dispositif qui alimente l'application sélectionnée exécutée sur le serveur (voir Schéma 27). Schéma 27. Source d'alimentation Gris État de la charge inconnu Code à plusieurs couleurs : état du flux et de la source d'alimentation Vert/Jaune La source d'alimentation électrique est activée et fournit un flux électrique Vert/Gris La source d'alimentation électrique est activée et ne fournit pas de flux électrique Code à plusieurs couleurs : état du flux et de la charge Jaune/Vert Charge activée et protégée. Gris/Rouge Charge non alimentée Tableau 8. Icônes du panneau synoptique (Suite) Symbole Couleur DescriptionSurveillance 39 Applications actives Le panneau Applications actives affiche les informations sur les applications, telles que Gestionnaire de nœuds local de l'onduleur Dell (ULNM), alimentées par le dispositif sélectionné (autre ULNM Dell) et leur profil de temporisation d'arrêt en cas de panne de courant (voir Schéma 28). Schéma 28. Applications actives Panneau relatif aux événements Ce panneau affiche la liste des événements du nœud sélectionné (voir Schéma 29). Vous pouvez classer les événements en fonction de l'état, de la date et du message en cliquant sur l'en-tête de la colonne. Schéma 29. Panneau relatif aux événementsSurveillance 40 Panneau relatif aux statistiques Ce panneau affiche la liste des événements du nœud sélectionné (voir Schéma 30). Le bouton permet de sélectionner l'intervalle de temps relatif aux statistiques. Pour déterminer l'intervalle de temps, cliquez sur les deux boutons De et A des dates. Les données relatives aux statistiques sont les suivantes : • Consommation apparente (ou consommation active lors du prochain communiqué, en W) • Puissance apparente moyenne (ou puissance active moyenne lors du prochain communiqué, en W) • Compte relatif aux erreurs d'alimentation • Durée cumulée des erreurs d'alimentation • Compte relatif aux erreurs de batterie • Compte relatif aux erreurs internes • Compte relatif à la surcharge • Compte relatif aux alarmes et avertissements • Compte relatif aux alarmes critiques • Compte relatif à l'arrêt de la prise • Compte relatif à la Communication perdue REMARQUE : Ces données dépendent des capacités du dispositif. Schéma 30. Panneau relatif aux statistiquesSurveillance 41 Composantes de l'alimentation Schéma 31 illustre l'Aperçu des composantes de l'alimentation. Ce panneau affiche les composantes de votre système d'onduleurs redondant si la fonction de redondance est activée (voir Chapitre 8, “Redondance” à la page 86). Schéma 31. Aperçu de la source d'alimentation (sous-aperçu de la source d'alimentation) Surveillance du dispositif La barre située en bas de page fournit l'état des nœuds surveillés. Veuillez noter dans la Schéma 32: • 14 nœuds sont OK • 4 nœuds sont en état d'avertissement • 2 nœuds sont en état critique • 0 nœuds sont dans un état inconnu Schéma 32. Barre inférieure de surveillance du dispositif Aperçu de la liste des applications Pour créer un sous-aperçu filtrant des applications, faites un clic droit sur la liste des nœuds, créez un sous-aperçu, puis sélectionnez la catégorie comme critère pour filtrer les nœuds (voir Schéma 33 et Schéma 34). Vous pouvez créer des sous-aperçus à partir des informations suivantes : catégorie, contact, description, adresse IP, emplacement, nom, état, type, remarque de l'utilisateur, type d'utilisateur. ULMN Dell exécuté sur d'autres ordinateurs dans le réseau peut être surveillé dans cet aperçu.Surveillance 42 Schéma 33. Sélections des sous-aperçus Schéma 34. Exemple de sous-aperçusSurveillance 43 Les informations suivantes s'affichent par défaut sur cette page: • Type : application • État : cet icône représente l'état du serveur. • Nom : valeur configurée dans l'écran Applications (celle-ci est par défaut une adresse IP ou un nom DNS). • Description : système d'exploitation de la machine. • Source d'alimentation : l'onduleur alimentant l'application/l'ordinateur de l'ULNM Dell • Temps d'exécution : temps de fonctionnement en cas de perte d'alimentation secteur. • Durée d'arrêt : durée en secondes nécessaire au système pour réaliser sa procédure d'arrêt. • Lien : lien vers l'interface de surveillance du Web de l'ULNM Dell Aperçu de la carte Cette carte de surveillance vous permet de représenter de manière spatiale vos nœuds de réseau et utilise la fonctionnalité « déplacer et déposer ». REMARQUE : Un clic sur l'icône du nœud affichera les informations relatives aux nœuds sur le panneau situé à droite. Créer un aperçu de la carte personnalisé Il est possible d'accéder à l'aperçu de la carte personnalisée grâce au menu situé à gauche en sélectionnant Aperçus > Carte des nœuds. La carte est automatiquement générée. (les icônes sont automatiquement placées sur la carte et les adresses IP attribuées.) Le bouton d'outils contextuel situé sur la barre de titre de la carte de nœuds fournit des outils pour modifier la carte (voir Schéma 35) : • Changer de thème offre trois types de représentations d'icônes (icônes en petite tour, icônes en grande tour et icônes en grand rack). • Gérer les fonds vous permet d'importer une nouvelle image de fond dans l'outil de surveillance (types d'images png, jpeg et gif pris en charge). Vous pouvez déjà sélectionner un fond dans l'outil de surveillance pour la carte ou supprimer les images de fond. • Regrouper les nœuds vous permettra de réorganiser la position des icônes sur la carte. • Ajouter une étiquette permet de créer un texte rédigé par l'utilisateur et de le placer sur la carte via la technique déplacer et déposer. REMARQUE : Pour supprimer une étiquette, cliquez sur cette dernière avec le bouton droit puis cliquez sur Supprimer.Surveillance 44 Schéma 35. Menu contextuel des outils Exemples de cartes Schéma 36. Aperçu de la carte du mondeSurveillance 45 Schéma 37. Gestion du menu contextuel des fondsSurveillance 46 Schéma 38. Aperçu de la carte du paysSurveillance 47 Schéma 39. Aperçu de la carte des salles de serveursSurveillance 48 Evénements Liste des événements Sélectionnez Evénements > Liste des événements à afficher sur la page Liste des événements (voir Schéma 40). Toutes les nouvelles alarmes sont stockées dans ce journal. Les alarmes peuvent être classées en fonction des champs État, Date, Nom, Message et Ack. Schéma 40. Page Liste des événements Les fonctions disponibles sont les suivantes : • Réceptionner les événements sélectionnés : ajoute une case dans la colonne Ack pour les événements sélectionnés. • Réceptionner tous les événements :ajoute une case dans la colonne Ack pour tous les événements. REMARQUE : Lorsqu'une alarme est réceptionnée, elle est marquée à l'aide d'une case, mais figure toujours dans la Liste des événements. Les alarmes réceptionnées disparaissent du panneau du portail Source d'alimentation > Evénement. • Exportation de journaux : crée un fichier de journaux .csv comprenant la syntaxe suivante : Date,Nœud,Type,Niveau,Objet,Valeur,Message, « 2009/01/27- 18:35:20,840 »,« 166,99.250,83 »,« Mesure »,« 0 »,« Onduleur. Convertisseur d'alimentation. Fréquence »,« 49 »,« »,Surveillance 49 REMARQUE : La commande d'exportation peut prendre plusieurs secondes avant de permettre le téléchargement pour créer les fichiers journaux. • Sélectionner tout : sélectionne tous les événements affichés • Désélectionner tout : désélectionne tous les événements sélectionnés Calendrier des événements Sélectionnez Evénements > Calendrier des événements à afficher sur la page Calendrier des événements (voir Schéma 41). Sur cette matrice, chaque ligne est une semaine et chaque colonne est un jour de la semaine. En sélectionnant un jour ou un intervalle (avec l'agenda ou à l'aide de la commande Maj+clic), les panneaux relatifs aux événements et aux statistiques fournissent toutes les informations relatives à cette sélection et se mettent automatiquement à jour lorsque de nouvelles statistiques sont encodées. Schéma 41. Page Calendrier des événementsSurveillance 50 Liste des événements relatifs aux nœuds Les icônes des différents aperçus représentent la gravité de l'événement. NORMAL Lorsque cet événement se produit, l'onduleur retrouve son état normal. Liste des événements normaux (onduleurs, PDU, applications, dispositifs génériques) : • La communication avec le dispositif est rétablie • La communication avec l'onduleur est rétablie • Le système est alimenté par le secteur • La sortie de l'onduleur est active • La communication avec l'onduleur est rétablie • Batterie OK • L'onduleur reprend la charge normale • Onduleur OK • Dérivation : retour sur l'onduleur • Fin de l'alarme de batterie faible • Le groupe de prises 1 est activé • Le groupe de prises 2 est activé • Erreur de communication avec le capteur de l'environnement • La communication avec le capteur de l'environnement est rétablie • Le taux d'humidité est normal • La température est normale • Entrée #x on • Entrée #x off • Fin de l'alarme d'avertissement • Fin de l'alarme critique • La redondance est restaurée • La protection est restaurée Liste des événements normaux du PDU (spécifique aux PDU) : • La fréquence d'entrée est normale • La température d'entrée est normale • La tension d'entrée est normale • La charge de l'entrée {x} est normale • Le courant de section {x} est normalSurveillance 51 • La tension de section {x} est normale • Le courant du groupe de prises {x} est normal • La charge du groupe de prises {x} est normale • Le groupe de prises {x} est activé • La charge de sortie de la phase {x} est normale • La fréquence de sortie est normale • La charge de sortie est normale • La tension de sortie est normale AVERTISSEMENT Un problème est survenu sur l'onduleur. Votre application est encore protégée. Liste des événements d'avertissement (onduleurs, PDU, applications, dispositifs génériques) : • Le système est alimenté par la batterie de l'onduleur • Sortie en mode Dérivation automatique • Sortie en mode Dérivation manuelle • Le taux d'humidité est en deçà du seuil minimal • Le taux d'humidité est au-dessus du seuil maximal • La température est en deçà du seuil minimal • La température est au-dessus du seuil maximal • Alarme d'avertissement (une alarme d'avertissement générique s'est déclenchée sur le dispositif) • Le dispositif se trouve en dessous du seuil de l'alarme de charge • Le dispositif se trouve en dessous du seuil de l'alarme de charge • Protection perdue • Redondance perdue • Arrêt en • Erreur de communication distante (un problème de communication distante ou de configuration a été détecté)Surveillance 52 CRITIQUE Un problème grave est survenu sur l'onduleur. Ce problème requiert une intervention urgente. Il se peut que votre application NE SOIT PAS active. Liste des événements critiques (onduleurs, PDU, applications, dispositifs génériques) : • La sortie de l'onduleur est inactive • Le groupe de prises 1 est inactif • Le groupe de prises 2 est inactif • Batterie défectueuse • Surcharge de l'onduleur • Erreur au niveau de l'onduleur • Alarme de batterie faible • Les applications doivent être interrompues immédiatement ... • Arrêt du système en cours ... • Alarme critique (une alarme critique générique s'est déclenchée sur le dispositif) Liste des événements critiques du PDU (spécifique aux PDU) : • La fréquence d'entrée est en dehors de la plage • La température d'entrée est au-dessus du seuil maximal • La température d'entrée est en deçà du seuil minimal • La tension d'entrée est en deçà du seuil maximal • La tension d'entrée est en deçà du seuil minimal • L'entrée {x} est en surcharge • Le courant de la section {x} est trop élevé • Le courant de la section {x} est trop faible • La tension de la section {x} est trop élevée • La tension de la section {x} est trop faible • Le courant du groupe de prises {x} est trop élevé • Le courant du groupe de prises {x} est trop faible • Le groupe de prises {x} est en surcharge • Le groupe de prises {x} est éteint • La sortie de phase {x} est en surcharge • La fréquence de sortie est en dehors de la plage • La sortie est en surcharge • La tension de sortie est en deçà du seuil maximal • La tension de sortie est en deçà du seuil minimalSurveillance 53 COMMUNICATION PERDUE La communication est perdue. Communication perdue avec la liste d'événements : • Erreur de communication avec le dispositif ou avec l'application DISPOSITIF NON GÉRÉ Le dispositif n'est pas géré • Votre dispositif n'est pas géré en raison d'une limitation de la licence. Sélectionnez Paramètres > Système pour saisir un code de licence Silver ou Gold. Lancement de l'interface Web du dispositif Avec le panneau État, vous pouvez accéder à la page Web des cartes Dell ainsi qu'au serveur Web intégré. Cliquez sur le lien Web associé pour accéder au http (icône bleue ) ou au https (icône jaune ). Définition des sous-aperçus Lorsque vous devez surveiller de grandes configurations, il peut s'avérer utile de définir divers sousaperçus puis de filtrer les nœuds ou événements dans ces catégories. Pour organiser votre arborescence, vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs critères géographiques, organisationnels, par état, etc. Pour définir un sous-aperçu : 1 Sélectionnez un aperçu dans la liste Aperçus > Nœud, comme par exemple « Catégorie : dispositifs » (voir Schéma 42). 2 Cliquez sur cette sélection avec le bouton droit de la souris. Les sous-aperçus du menu contextuel s'affichent (voir Schéma 43). 3 Cliquez sur Créer un sous-aperçu à partir de… et suivez les instructions. Pour filtrer les nœuds dans ce sous-aperçu, 1 Sélectionnez un aperçu dans la liste Aperçus > Nœud, comme par exemple « Emplacement : salle des ordinateurs » (voir Schéma 42). 2 Cliquez sur cette sélection avec le bouton droit de la souris. Les sous-aperçus du menu contextuel s'affichent (voir Schéma 43). 3 Cliquez sur Modifier un aperçu de filtrage. La boîte de dialogue des règles de filtrage des aperçus s'affiche (voir Schéma 44). 4 Cliquez sur Ajouter une règle, puis saisissez l'objet, l'opération et les valeurs. REMARQUE : Avec la configuration indiquée dans Schéma 44, cet aperçu filtré vous permettra de visualiser les dispositifs dont le champ d'emplacement contient la valeur « Salle des ordinateurs ».Surveillance 54 Schéma 42. Aperçus > Hiérarchie des exemples de listes de nœuds Schéma 43. Menu contextuel des sous-aperçus Surveillance 55 Schéma 44. Boîte de dialogue des règles de filtrage des aperçus Partage des sous-aperçus Un sous-aperçu personnalisé est « rattaché » à l'utilisateur qui l'a créé. Il est privé. Le sous-aperçu personnalisé est signalé par un petit personnage sur l'icône du sous-aperçu (voir Schéma 45). Schéma 45. Aperçu partagé avec marqueur (gauche) et Aperçu public sans marqueur (droite) Si le propriétaire du sous-aperçu veut permettre aux autres utilisateurs d'utiliser le sous-aperçu, il doit partager l'aperçu. Pour partager l'aperçu : 1 Cliquez sur l'aperçu avec le bouton droit de la souris pour ouvrir le menu contextuel (voir Schéma 46).Surveillance 56 Schéma 46. Menu contextuel des sous-aperçus 2 Cliquez sur Partager cet aperçu (voir Schéma 47). Schéma 47. Partager la sélection de l'aperçu REMARQUE : La personnalisation d'un aperçu annule le partage de cette dernière. Pour que tous les utilisateurs puissent utiliser cet aperçu, le propriétaire de l'aperçu doit à nouveau la partager.Arrêt 57 5 Arrêt La Console de gestion multi-onduleurs Dell (MUMC) procède à un arrêt progressif de l'ordinateur local (lorsqu'il est connecté à un onduleur via Carte de gestion réseau Dell, USB ou RS-232) Cette fonction d'arrêt peut être activée ou désactivée à travers le chemin de sélection Paramètres > Système > Paramètres des modules. Configuration de l'arrêt Pour accéder aux options de configuration de l'arrêt : 1 Connectez-vous avec un profil d'utilisateur d'administrateur. 2 Sélectionnez Paramètres > Arrêt. La page d'arrêt est affichée (voir Schéma 48). Schéma 48. Source d'alimentation USB/série sur la page d'arrêt Les options de configuration suivantes apparaissent sur le panneau de droite de la page Arrêt : • Modifier la source d'alimentation • Modifier la configuration de l'arrêt • Modifier les critères d'arrêt avancés • Tester l'accès • Tester l'arrêt REMARQUE : Consultez le Gestionnaire de nœuds local de l'onduleur® Dell™ Manuel de l'utilisateur d'installation et de configuration pour une description détaillée de la fonction d'arrêt.Arrêt 58 Arrêt par hibernation Si elle est disponible sur votre système d'exploitation, il vaut mieux utiliser la fonction d'hibernation (disponible à partir de Microsoft® Windows® 2000 et versions ultérieures) car elle a de nombreux avantages. Si le système est arrêté, tous les travaux en cours et les informations du système sont automatiquement sauvegardées sur le disque. L'ordinateur lui-même est mis hors tension. Lors du retour de l'alimentation principale, toutes les applications s'ouvrent de nouveau exactement au même point et l'utilisateur retrouve son environnement de travail. La fonction Hibernation doit d'abord être activée au sein du système d'exploitation, dans les options d'alimentation de l'onglet Windows du même nom du panneau de configuration. REMARQUE : Si vous sélectionnez Hibernation mais que votre ordinateur ne dispose pas de cette fonction, MUMC Dell protégera tout de même le système en exécutant la procédure d'arrêt normal (par défaut). Aperçu de la source d'alimentation Lorsque la fonction d'arrêt est configurée dans l'élément de menu Aperçus, sélectionnez l'élément de la source d'alimentation. Vous pourrez ainsi : • Surveiller les informations de l'onduleur alimentant l'ordinateur du MUMC Dell. • Déplacer et déposer les panneaux de cette fenêtre dans d'autres emplacements pour satisfaire vos préférences d'aperçu. Séquence d'arrêt Vous ne pouvez pas activer la commande d'arrêt dans MUMC Dell. Néanmoins, MUMC Dell peut acquérir des alarmes d'arrêt du Gestionnaire de nœuds local de l'onduleur Dell (ULNM) avec le module de la commande d'arrêt activé. Vous trouverez de plus amples informations sur la séquence d'arrêt et les cas d'utilisation de l'arrêt dans le Gestionnaire de nœuds local de l'onduleur® Dell™ Manuel de l'utilisateur d'installation et de configuration.Gestion avancée 59 6 Gestion avancée Réglages des nœuds Affichage de la configuration à nœud unique Console de gestion multi-onduleurs Dell (MUMC) peut afficher la configuration de la carte/application pour d'autres nœuds du réseau. Procédez comme suit : 1 Dans Gestion > Réglages des nœuds, sélectionnez un nœud sur la page Liste des nœuds (voir Schéma 49). 2 Après quelques secondes, sur la droite, le panneau de configuration des nœuds est mis à jour. 3 Si vous souhaitez sauvegarder une configuration des nœuds standard (par exemple pour l'étendre à des nœuds similaires), utilisez le fichier Configurations > Exporter configuration pour exporter cette configuration dans un fichier. Schéma 49. Aperçu des réglages des nœuds Gestion avancée 60 Réglages de la carte unique MUMC Dell peut configurer une Carte de gestion réseau Dell distant. Procédez comme suit : 1 Connectez-vous avec un profil d'administrateur. 2 Sélectionnez une carte dans la liste. 3 À l'aide du bouton Liste de nœuds , sélectionnez Configurer les paramètres d'identification, saisissez l'identifiant et le mot de passe de la carte. L'état d'accès passe d'Accès refusé ( ) à Accès OK ( ). Après quelques secondes, le panneau Configuration des nœuds est mis à jour. 4 Cliquez sur le bouton Modifier , ou chargez une configuration sauvegardée auparavant. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Configuration des paramètres du réseau, vérifiez les que vous souhaitez changer et remplissez les nouvelles valeurs (voir Schéma 50). Schéma 50. Section du réseau 6 Appliquez les changements. REMARQUE : Les paramètres dont les valeurs diffèrent sur les cartes et dans la configuration à appliquer sont signalés par . 7 Sélectionnez les paramètres que vous souhaitez synchroniser (à l'aide de la case à cocher). 8 Cliquez sur Synchroniser.Gestion avancée 61 Certains détails de paramètres avancés ne sont pas affichés dans la Boîte de dialogue Configuration des paramètres du réseau. Vous devez changer les détails de paramètres avancés directement sur un dispositif puis synchroniser la configuration de ce dispositif sur les autres dispositifs. Schéma 51 fournit un exemple type de configuration de la programmation de l'alimentation du PDU. Les détails de la Programmation de l'alimentation 1 à la Programmation de l'alimentation 8 sont disponibles sur l'interface Web du dispositif. Vérifiez que tous les paramètres avancés « n » de la Programmation de l'alimentation synchronisent bien tous les détails des paramètres avancés de la catégorie. Schéma 51. Paramètres avancés non affichés Synchronisation des configurations à cartes multiples MUMC Dell permet de changer simultanément plusieurs configurations Carte de gestion réseau Dell. Procédez comme suit : 1 Dans Gestion > Réglages des nœuds, sélectionnez plusieurs cartes dans la page Liste de nœuds en cliquant dessus tout en appuyant sur la touche Crtl (voir Schéma 52). 2 À l'aide du bouton Liste de nœuds , sélectionnez Configurer les paramètres d'identification et saisissez l'identifiant et le mot de passe de la carte. L'état d'accès passe d'Accès refusé ( ) à Accès OK ( ). Après quelques secondes, le panneau Configuration des nœuds est mis à jour.Gestion avancée 62 3 Dans la liste déroulante, sélectionnez la configuration qui servira de modèle ou cliquez sur Modifier . Les paramètres dont les valeurs diffèrent sur les cartes sont signalées par . 4 Sélectionnez les paramètres que vous souhaitez synchroniser (à l'aide de la case à cocher). 5 Cliquez sur Synchroniser. Schéma 52. Configuration de masse NMC Mise à niveau des nœuds Téléchargement du micrologiciel du dispositif Procédez comme suit pour télécharger le micrologiciel d'un dispositif : REMARQUE : Consultez les notes de mise à jour des cartes réseau pour déterminer la dernière version du micrologiciel compatible avec la révision matérielle. 1 Dans Gestion > Mise à niveau des nœuds, sélectionnez les cartes dans la page Liste des nœuds. 2 À l'aide du bouton Liste de nœuds , sélectionnez Configurer les paramètres d'identification et saisissez l'identifiant et le mot de passe de la carte.Gestion avancée 63 L'état d'accès passe d'Accès refusé ( ) à Accès OK ( ). 3 La fenêtre de téléchargement s'affiche dans la liste Micrologiciel > Importer fichier du micrologiciel… 4 Cliquez sur Parcourir pour sélectionner le micrologiciel dans un disque accessible à partir de l'ordinateur. 5 Cliquez sur b. 6 Cliquez sur Micrologiciel > Télécharger micrologiciel pour mettre les nœuds à jour. Les cartes seront mises à jour avec le micrologiciel sélectionné. REMARQUE : La mise à niveau du micrologiciel du PDU Dell n'est pas prise en charge à ce jour. Schéma 53. Gestion / Aperçu de la mise à niveau des nœuds Applications de mise à niveau Suivez cette procédure pour mettre les applications à jour: 1 Dans Gestion > Mise à niveau des nœuds, sélectionnez les applications dans la Liste des nœuds (voir Schéma 54). 2 À l'aide du bouton Liste de nœuds , sélectionnez Configurer les paramètres d'identification et saisissez l'identifiant et le mot de passe de la carte. L'état d'accès passe d'Accès refusé ( ) à Accès OK ( ).Gestion avancée 64 Schéma 54. Gestion / Aperçu de la mise à niveau des nœuds 2 3 Dans le panneau Applications de mise à niveau, cliquez sur Mise à niveau (voir Schéma 55). L'état des applications (eu égard à la version) est mis à jour. Schéma 55. Message de mise à jour des applicationsVirtualisation 65 7 Virtualisation Le module de virtulisation Console de gestion multi-onduleurs Dell (MUMC) pour VMware et Hyper-V requiert la Carte de gestion réseau Dell. Pour les environnements VMware gérés par vCenter, seule l'application MUMC Dell est requise. Pour les environnements VMware sans vCenter et toutes les autres plateformes de virtualisation, Gestionnaire de nœuds local de l'onduleur Dell (ULNM)doit être installé sur tous les hôtes et configuré pour communiquer avec la Carte de gestion réseau Dell de l'onduleur. REMARQUE : Les protocoles de communication USB/RS-232 ne sont pas pris en charge pour les applications de virtualisation. Le module de virtualisation MUMC Dell récupérera des informations de l'hyperviseur (par exemple, VMware® ESX™, VMware® ESXi™ et Citrix® XenServer™) ou du gestionnaire (par exemple, VMware® vSphere™ et Microsoft® System Center Virtual Machine Manager® [SCVMM]). MUMC Dell peut exécuter des fonctions de virtualisation avancées sur les événements relatifs à l'alimentation de l'onduleur : • Déclenchement du déplacement des machines virtuelles vers d'autres hôtes en réglant l'hôte de la VM sur le mode d'entretien. Le centre de données bénéficie désormais de cette fonction à temps d'immobilisation nul. • Déclenchement de l'arrêt de l'hôte de la VM via vCenter. Le centre de données bénéficie désormais d'un arrêt progressif des hôtes. Avec d'autres plateformes, cette fonction est réalisée par l'application ULMN Dell.Virtualisation 66 Les solutions de virtualisation de la console de gestion multionduleurs Dell pour VMware, Microsoft, Citrix, OpenSource Xen et KVM Solutions Dell pour VMware Dell propose trois solutions VMware illustrées à la Schéma 56. Schéma 56. ULMN Dell et configuration MUMC Dell pour VMware Réseau Dell de l'onduleur Le serveur a été arrêté par le ULMN Dell Le serveur et la MV sont gérés par le client vCenter ou vSphere ESX et ULMN Dell PUISSANCE ESXi et ULMN Dell sur vMA vCenter et serveur MUMC Dell Dell de l'onduleur Le serveur et la MV sont gérés par le client vCenter ou vSphere Le serveur et la MV sont gérés par vCenter Le serveur et la MV sont gérés par vCenter Le serveur a été arrêté par le ULMN Dell Le serveur a été arrêté par le MUMC Dell Gestion de l'alimentation, arrêt distant et maintenance distante DELL ESXi ou ESXVirtualisation 67 Solution 1 Ici, les hôtes ESX et ESXi sont surveillés par vCenter (version payante uniquement), qui propose les éléments suivants : • Gestion de l'hôte sans agent (ULMN Dell ne doit pas être installé sur chaque hôte) • Pas de programmation CLI ni besoin d'assistant de gestion vSphere (vMA) • Arrêt progressif distant des serveurs ESX/ESXi multiples et des MV hébergées • Possibilité de définir des hôtes en mode maintenance (pour utiliser VMware® vMotion™) • Une prise est créée dans vCenter pour l'informatique centralisée et la gestion de l'alimentation • Les événements de l'onduleur sont accessibles et configurables via vCenter Solution 2 Ici, les hôtes ESX et ESXi sont surveillés par vCenter (version payante uniquement), qui propose les éléments suivants : • ULMN Dell L'application est installée sur VMware Infrastructure Management Agent (VIMA) / vMA pour chaque hôte • ULMN Dell Les configurations et actions peuvent être gérées de manière centralisée depuis la MUMC Dell du client • Certains programmes de la ligne de commande sont requis • Arrêt progressif distant des serveurs ESX/ESXi multiples et des MV hébergées REMARQUE : Pour les versions payantes, VMware supprime la possibilité de contrôler les profils d'arrêt de la MV au sein des installations qui n'ont pas la licence ESXi. Les autres méthodes qui permettent d'éviter cette restriction ne sont pas mentionnées dans ce guide de l'utilisateur. Solution 3 Cette solution s'adresse aux hôtes uniques d'ESX (versions payantes ou gratuites), qui disposent des éléments suivants : • ULMN Dell L'application est installée sur chaque hôte (MV Windows ou Linux) • Arrêt progressif distant des serveurs ESX multiples et des MV hébergées • ULMN Dell Les configurations et actions peuvent être centralisées depuis la MUMC Dell du clientVirtualisation 68 Solutions Dell pour Microsoft Pour Microsoft, MUMC Dell propose deux solutions représentées dans la Schéma 57. Schéma 57. ULMN Dell et configuration MUMC Dell pour HyperV Solution 1 La première solution permet de réaliser un arrêt progressif pour Microsoft® Hyper-V ou Hyper-V Server® 2008. ULMN Dell est installé sur chaque système d'exploitation Microsoft. REMARQUE : Cette solution ne requiert pas de logiciel de gestion SCVMM Réseau Dell de l'onduleur Le serveur a été arrêté par le ULMN Dell Le serveur et la VM sont gérés par SCVMM ou par le gestionnaire Hyper-V HyperV Server et ULMN Dell PUISSANCE HyperV sous W2008 et ULMN Dell SCVMM et serveur MUMC Dell Dell de l'onduleur Le serveur et la VM sont gérés par SCVMM ou par le gestionnaire Hyper-V SCVMM Microsoft et migration à chaud Le serveur a été arrêté par le ULMN Dell Gestion de l'alimentation et maintenance distante DELLVirtualisation 69 Solution 2 La seconde solution s'applique pour plusieurs Hyper-V et serveurs Hyper-V. Elle propose les éléments suivants : • Entretien à distance de l'Hyper-V / du serveur Hyper-V pour déclencher la migration à chaud de la VM. • Cette solution est idéale pour les grandes infrastructures qui travaillent via serveur SCVMM REMARQUE : Voir Chapitre 6, « ULNM avec Microsoft Hyper-V ou Hyper Server » dans le Gestionnaire de nœuds local de l'onduleur® Dell™ Manuel de l'utilisateur d'installation et de configuration. Solutions Dell pour Citrix Xen Pour Microsoft, MUMC Dell propose deux solutions représentées dans la Schéma 58. Schéma 58. ULMN Dell et configuration MUMC Dell pour XenServer Réseau Dell de l'onduleur Le serveur a été arrêté par le ULMN Dell Le serveur et la MV sont gérés par vCenter Citrix Xen et ULMN Dell PUISSANCE Citrix Xen et ULMN Dell Citrix XenCenter MUMC Dell et prise Xen MUMC Dell Dell de l'onduleur Le serveur et la MV sont gérés par vCenter Citrix : XenCenter et Xen Motion Le serveur a été arrêté par le ULMN Dell Gestion de l'alimentation et maintenance distante DELLVirtualisation 70 Solution 1 La première solution permet de : • Procéder à un arrêt progressif de Citrix Xen. • ULMN Dell est installé sur chaque système Citrix Xen. • Cette solution ne requiert pas le logiciel de gestion Citrix® XenCenter® Solution 2 La seconde solution s'applique pour plusieurs serveurs for multiple Xen. Elle propose les éléments suivants : • Entretien distant du serveur Xen pour déclencher VM Citrix® XenMotion®. • Arrêt du serveur distant Xen • Cette solution est idéale pour les grandes infrastructures qui travaillent via Citrix XenCenter Cette solution est désormais intégrée dans MUMC Dell. REMARQUE : Voir Chapitre 9, « ULNM avec architecture virtualisée Xen » dans le Gestionnaire de nœuds local de l'onduleur® Dell™ Manuel de l'utilisateur d'installation et de configuration. .Virtualisation 71 Solutions Dell pour OpenSource Xen Schéma 59. ULMN Dell Configurations pour OpenSource Xen MUMC Dell propose une solution pour OpenSource Xen représentée dans Schéma 59 : Solution • Procéder à un arrêt progressif de Citrix Xen. ULMN Dell est installé sur chaque système Citrix Xen. REMARQUE : Voir Chapitre 9, « ULNM avec architecture virtualisée Xen » dans le Gestionnaire de nœuds local de l'onduleur® Dell™ Manuel de l'utilisateur d'installation et de configuration. Réseau Dell de l'onduleur Le serveur a été arrêté par le ULMN Dell Le serveur et la MV sont gérés par la console Xen Xen et ULMN Dell PUISSANCE Xen et ULMN Dell Xen et ULMN Dell Le serveur et la MV sont gérés par la console Xen Le serveur et la MV sont gérés par la console Xen Le serveur a été arrêté par le ULMN Dell Le serveur a été arrêté par le ULMN Dell Dell de l'onduleurVirtualisation 72 Solutions Dell pour Red Hat KVM ou OpenSource KVM Schéma 60. ULMN DellConfigurations pour Red Hat KVM ou OpenSource KVM MUMC Dell propose une solution pour Red Hat® KVM et OpenSource KVM représentée dans Schéma 60. Solution • Procéder à un arrêt progressif de KVM. ULMN Dell est installé sur chaque système KVM. REMARQUE : Voir Chapitre 10, « ULNM avec architecture virtualisée KVM » dans le Gestionnaire de nœuds local de l'onduleur® Dell™ Manuel de l'utilisateur d'installation et de configuration. Réseau Dell de l'onduleur Dell de l'onduleur Le serveur a été arrêté par le ULMN Dell Le serveur et la MV sont gérés par la console KVM KVM et ULMN Dell PUISSANCE KVM et ULMN Dell KVM et ULMN Dell Le serveur et la MV sont gérés par la console KVM Le serveur et la MV sont gérés par la console KVM Le serveur a été arrêté par le ULMN Dell Le serveur a été arrêté par le ULMN DellVirtualisation 73 Solutions Dell pour Citrix XenClient Schéma 61. ULMN Dell Configuration pour XenClient MUMC Dell propose la solution suivante pour Citrix® XenClient® représentée dans Schéma 61. Solution • Procéder à un arrêt progressif de Citrix XenClient. ULMN Dell est installé sur chaque système Citrix XenClient ou sur chaque machine virtuelle. REMARQUE : Voir Chapitre 9, « ULNM avec architecture virtualisée Xen » dans le Gestionnaire de nœuds local de l'onduleur® Dell™ Manuel de l'utilisateur d'installation et de configuration. Réseau Dell de l'onduleur L'arrêt est provoqué par l'hyperviseur ULMN Dell est hébergé sur l'hyperviseur Citrix XenClient et ULMN Dell PUISSANCE Citrix XenClient VM ULMN DellWindows Dell de l'onduleur ULMN Dell est installé sur chaque machine virtuelle hébergée par XenClient L'arrêt est provoqué par la VM puis XenClient s'éteint VM ULMN Dell-LinuxVirtualisation 74 Environnements testés Dell a validé le module de virtualisation dans les environnements suivants. D'autres environnements peuvent également être compatibles avec le module de virtualisation mais n'ont pas été officiellement testés. VMware • VMware vCenter 5,0 sous Windows Server 2008 x64 et Windows Server 2008 R2 x64, Windows Server 2003 x64, Windows Server 2003 R2 x64, • VMware vCenter Server 4,1/4,0 sous Windows Server 2008 R2, 2008 Enterprise 64 bits, 2008 Standard 32 bits et 2003 64bits • VMware ESXi 5,0/4,1/4,0 (arrêt à distance de MUMC Dell ou avec ULMN Dell sur vMA) • VMware ESX 4,1/4,0 (arrêt avec ULMN Dell sur le système d'exploitation noyau) Microsoft • SCVMM sous Windows Server 2008 R2 • Windows Server 2008 R2 avec Gestionnaire de nœuds local de l'onduleur Dell (ULNM) Citrix • Citrix XenServer 5.6 et 6.0.0 • Citrix XenCenter 5.6 et 6.0.0 Activation du module de virtulisation Pour activer le module de virtulisation vous devez accéder au panneau Système > Paramètres du module et l'activer (voir Schéma 62). Schéma 62. Activation de la virtualisationVirtualisation 75 Conditions préalables des superviseurs VMware Le module de virtualisation requiert les conditions préalables suivantes : • VMware vCenter et VMware vSphere Client doivent être installés. REMARQUE : vCenter et Dell MUMC peuvent être installés sur le même serveur (ou sur une VM/des serveurs sur le réseau) • Pour permettre un arrêt progressif de la VM vous devez installer les outils VMware sur chaque VM. • Vous devez connaître / être expérimenté avec le logiciel MUMC Dell et l'infrastructure VMware. REMARQUE : Depuis la version 2 de MUMC Dell (version 01.04), le kit de développement du logiciel vSphere VMware (SDK) pour Perl n'est plus requis. Conditions préalables des superviseurs Microsoft Le module de virtualisation requiert les conditions préalables suivantes : • Powershell Snapin pour Microsoft SCVMM. Installez la console VMM sur la machine hébergeant MUMC Dell, ou installez MUMC Dell sur la machine hébergeant SCVMM. • Le serveur hébergeant MUMC Dell doit se trouver sur le même domaine Windows que le serveur SCVMM • Le serveur hébergeant MUMC Dell doit activer l'exécution des scripts tiers sur la machine locale (accès minimum « Distant signé », par exemple : Set-ExecutionPolicy RemoteSigned). Schéma 63 affiche les paramètres d'après l'exemple de configuration :Virtualisation 76 Schéma 63. Windows PowerShell - Virtual Machine Manager Conditions préalables des superviseurs Citrix Le module de virtualisation requiert les conditions préalables suivantes : • XenCenter doit être installé pour gérer les XenServers. • Pour permettre un arrêt progressif de la VM vous devez installer les outils Xen sur chaque VM. Ajout d'une liste de gestionnaires ou d'hyperviseurs Introduction Pour ajouter une liste de gestionnaires ou d'hyperviseurs : 1 Activez le module de virtualisation. Une nouvelle entrée du menu Virtualisation s'affiche dans le menu Paramétrage. 2 Cliquez sur cette nouvelle entrée du menu Virtualisation. 3 Sélectionnez Ajouter une liste de gestionnaires ou d'hyperviseurs sur le panneau de droite (voir Schéma 64). REMARQUE : Pour modifier ou supprimer des gestionnaires ou des hyperviseurs, vous devez d'abord sélectionner une ligne dans le panneau central.Virtualisation 77 Schéma 64. Aperçu du module de virtualisation Les sections suivantes expliquent comment ajouter divers types de gestionnaires ou hyperviseurs. Ajout d'un gestionnaire de serveurs vCenter Pour ajouter un nouveau vCenter VMware, complétez les champs suivants (voir Schéma 65) : • Produit : type (vCenter VMware) • Nom d'hôte ou adresse IP : nom d'hôte ou adresse IP du vCenter VMware • Nom d'utilisateur : nom d'utilisateur de l'administrateur du vCenter VMware • Mot de passe : mot de passe de l'administrateur du vCenter VMware. • Prise du vCenter : installe et configure la prise MUMC Dell dans le vCenter REMARQUE : Voir “Configuration de la prise vCenter de MUMC Dell” à la page 94 lorsque vous utilisez cette fonction. Cliquez sur Enregistrer après que les champs ont été mis à jour. Votre hôte ESXi VMware sera automatiquement ajouté aux nœuds gérés. REMARQUE : Lors de la configuration de l'identifiant et du mot de passe, il est recommandé d'utiliser l'interface Web MUMC Dell via https. Il est également possible d'utiliser http mais dans ce cas, le mot de passe est envoyé en clair sur le serveur local ou distant. Dans les deux cas, le mot de passe est stocké crypté dans MUMC Dell et n'est en aucun cas renvoyé côté client. Le mot de passe crypté est stocké dans le fichier de configuration suivant ({DELL MUMC INSTALL DIRECTORY}\configs\vmconfig.js).Virtualisation 78 Schéma 65. Ajout d'un vCenter VMware Ajout d'un gestionnaire SCVMM Pour ajouter un nouveau SCVMM Microsoft, complétez les champs ci-dessous (voir Schéma 66) : • Produit : type (SCVMM Microsoft) • Nom d'hôte ou adresse IP : nom d'hôte ou adresse IP de SCVMM Microsoft Cliquez sur Enregistrer après que les champs ont été mis à jour. Schéma 66. Ajout d'un SCVMM Microsoft Ajout d'une liste d'hyperviseurs VMware ESX/ESXi Si vous ne disposez pas d'un gestionnaire de serveurs vCenter, ajoutez les nouveaux hôtes ESX/ESXi VMware individuellement. Complétez les champs suivants (voir Schéma 67) : • Produit : type (ESX/ESXi VMware) • Nom d'hôte ou adresse IP : liste des noms d'hôte ou adresses IP ESX/ESXi VMware Cliquez sur Enregistrer après que les champs ont été mis à jour. REMARQUE : L'application ULMN Dell doit déjà être installée sur chaque VIMA ou vMA d'hôteVirtualisation 79 Schéma 67. Ajout de ESX/ESX VMware Ajout d'une liste d'hyperviseurs Citrix XenServer Pour ajouter une nouvelle liste Citrix XenServer, complétez les champs ci-dessous (voir Schéma 68) : • Produit : type (Citrix XenServer) • Nom d'hôte ou adresse IP : liste des noms d'hôte ou adresses IP Citrix XenServer Cliquez sur Enregistrer après que les champs ont été mis à jour. Schéma 68. Ajout de Citrix XenServer Ajout d'un XenCenter Étant donné que Citrix XenCenter est un client et non un gestionnaire, vous pouvez installer une prise sur le système où XenCenter est installé (voir Schéma 69). Cette prise permet à l'utilisateur de se servir de MUMC Dell dans XenCenter. Cliquez sur Enregistrer après que les champs ont été mis à jour. Schéma 69. Ajout de Citrix XenCenterVirtualisation 80 Configuration des hyperviseurs (serveur ESX/ESXi, XenServer) Introduction Pour l'installation de vCenter VMware ou SCVMM Microsoft dans MUMC Dell : • Après avoir saisi les informations correctes pour le gestionnaire, MUMC Dell se connecte au gestionnaire (vCenter ou SCVMM). • MUMC Dell récupère automatiquement les informations de l'hôte VMHost et crée de nouveaux nœuds dans MUMC Dell pour chaque hôte VMhost • MUMC Dell crée automatiquement deux différents types de nœuds qui seront décrits par la suite (vous pouvez visualiser le nouveau nœud dans la liste de nœuds) • Il n'est pas nécessaire de saisir les droits pour les hôtes dans le menu Réglages des nœuds. Seuls les droits du vCenter VMware sont requis pour gérer le système. • Poursuivez ensuite avec “Configuration de l'entretien et de l'arrêt” à la page 81. Pour une installation d'hôte individuelle (ni vCenter, ni SCVMM) dans MUMC Dell : • Après avoir « ajouté une nouvelle liste d'hyperviseurs », MUMC Dell crée de nouveaux nœuds et attends les droits. • Poursuivez ensuite avec la section « Configuration des droits pour les hyperviseurs (ESX/ESXi, XenServer) ». Configuration des droits pour les hyperviseurs (ESX/ESXi, XenServer) • Vous devez configurer les droits du nœud dans le panneau Configuration des nœuds (voir Schéma 70). • Après avoir saisi les informations correctes, MUMC Dell récupère les informations des hyperviseurs. • Poursuivez ensuite avec “Configuration de l'entretien et de l'arrêt” à la page 81. Schéma 70. Panneau Configuration des nœudsVirtualisation 81 Configuration de l'entretien et de l'arrêt Introduction Après avoir saisi les informations des droits correctes pour vos gestionnaires et hyperviseurs, vous devez configurer les séquences d'entretien et d'arrêt en fonction des besoins de disponibilité de votre infrastructure informatique en cas de coupure de l'alimentation. Options de configuration pour les installations vCenter et SCVMM Cliquez sur chaque hôte dans l'élément de menu Réglages des nœuds et configurez les paramètres requis : • Entretien à distance : activé ou désactivé. Lorsqu'il est activé, le client MUMC définit l'hôte sur le Mode d'entretien. En fonction de votre configuration d'hôte/de grappe, ceci peut déclencher vMotion/une migration à chaud vers un autre hôte. Cet événement est déclenché au moment défini dans le paramètre Minuterie d'entretien. • Minuterie d'entretien : temps écoulé « Sur batterie » avant que le script MUMC Dell ne fasse passer l'état de l'hôte en mode d'entretien • Arrêt à distance : activé ou désactivé (lorsqu'il est activé, il permet MUMC Dell d'arrêter progressivement ce serveur si les critères « Onduleur sur batterie » et d'arrêt sont atteints) • Arrêt à distance des machines virtuelles : permet MUMC Dell d'arrêter les machines virtuelles • Source d'alimentation : onduleur alimentant ce serveur (ce nœud doit déjà exister sur MUMC Dell) • Segment de charge : segment de charge de l'onduleur alimentant ce serveur • Durée d'arrêt du maître : critère d'arrêt du serveur (temps nécessaire pour un arrêt progressif de l'hôte) • Arrêt d'après la valeur du maître : critère d'arrêt du serveur correspondant au temps écoulé « Sur batterie » avant l'arrêt progressif. (Cette minuterie doit être supérieure à la minuterie d'entretien) REMARQUE : La valeur -1 signifie que la minuterie est désactivée. Schéma 71 représente les réglages d'arrêt du vCenter VMware et SCVMM Microsoft avant la configuration. Schéma 72 représente les paramètres d'arrêt du vCenter VMware et SCVMM Microsoft après la configuration.Virtualisation 82 Schéma 71. Paramètres d'arrêt de vCenter et SCVMM - Avant la configuration Schéma 72. Paramètres d'arrêt de vCenter et SCVMM - Après la configurationVirtualisation 83 Schéma 73 montre les paramètres ci-dessus dans le contexte d'une panne de courant prolongée. Schéma 73. Capacité de la batterie de l'onduleur à long terme REMARQUE : La fonctionnalité d'arrêt à distance au sein de MUMC Dell est réservée aux nœuds VMware ESX/ESXi et Citrix XenServer. (Hyper-V Microsoft utilise ULMN Dell sur l'hôte pour procéder à l'arrêt). REMARQUE : L'arrêt à distance des machines virtuelles ne s'applique que pour les hôtes ESX/ESXi VMware. ATTENTION : Vous devez configurer « Arrêt d'après la valeur » sur un moment où le mode d'entretien et les migrations de la VM sont achevés. Si les migrations de la VM ne sont pas achevées au moment où la commande Arrêt est transmise à l'hôte, celle-ci annule la demande de migration et cette dernière échouera. Aucune donnée ne sera perdue étant donné que la synchronisation image aura échoué, mais que la VM cessera de fonctionner.Virtualisation 84 Deuxième type de nœuds (DELL MUMC détecte que ULMN Dell est exécuté sur l'hôte VMHost) Si ULMN Dell est installé sur le serveur hébergeant l'hyperviseur (hôte VMHost), l'arrêt est exécuté par ULMN Dell. Dans ce cas, le nœud contient les deux types de paramètres : • Les paramètres de fonction du mode d'entretien à distance. • Les paramètres d'arrêt ULMN Dell (tel que ULMN Dell réalisera l'arrêt localement). REMARQUE : Tous les paramètres sont récupérés par ULMN Dell et vous configurerez ULMN Dell à partir de MUMC Dell dans le panneau Configuration des nœuds. Voir « Réglages des nœuds » page 64 pour de plus amples informations sur l'usage de l'interface de configuration. Les Paramètres d'arrêt sont (voir Schéma 74) : • Entretien à distance : activé ou désactivé. Lorsqu'il est activé, le client MUMC définit l'hôte sur le Mode d'entretien. En fonction de votre configuration d'hôte/de grappe, ceci peut déclencher vMotion/une migration à chaud vers un autre hôte. Cet événement est déclenché au moment défini dans l'option Minuterie d'entretien (ci-dessous). • Minuterie d'entretien : temps écoulé « Sur batterie » avant que le script MUMC Dell ne fasse passer l'état de l'hôte en mode d'entretien REMARQUE : La valeur -1 signifie que la minuterie est désactivée. Voir “Configuration du mode d'entretien et de vMotion à partir de vCenter” à la page 99 et “Configuration du mode d'entretien et migration à chaud avec SCVMM” à la page 102 pour de plus amples informations. • Arrêt à distance : activé ou désactivé (lorsqu'il est activé, il permet MUMC Dell d'arrêter progressivement ce serveur si les critères « Onduleur sur batterie » et d'arrêt sont atteints) • Arrêt à distance des machines virtuelles : permet MUMC Dell d'arrêter les machines virtuelles • Source d'alimentation : onduleur alimentant ce serveur (ce nœud doit déjà exister sur MUMC Dell) • Segment de charge : segment de charge de l'onduleur alimentant ce serveur • (Accès NMC) Identifiant/mot de passe : Identifiant/mot de passe de la carte de gestion réseau permettant au logiciel ULMN Dell de contrôler la séquence d'arrêt NMC. • Durée d'arrêt du maître : critère d'arrêt du serveur (temps nécessaire pour un arrêt progressif de l'hôte) • Arrêt d'après la valeur du maître : critère d'arrêt du serveur correspondant au temps écoulé « Sur batterie » avant l'arrêt progressif. (Cette minuterie doit être supérieure à la minuterie d'entretien) REMARQUE : La valeur -1 signifie que la minuterie est désactivée. • Arrêt de la source d'alimentation : désactivé. Il n'est activé que pour les serveurs connectés à un onduleur via RS-232 ou USB. Le comportement de virtualisation requiert la possibilité de connexion Ethernet (Carte de gestion réseau Dell).Virtualisation 85 Schéma 74. Configuration des réglages de l'arrêt (seconds types de nœuds) Si vous installez ULMN Dell sur l'hôte VMHost après que le nœud de MUMC Dell a été crée : • Supprimez le nœud dans MUMC Dell. • Ré-explorez le nœud avec l'Exploration des adresses dans le panneau Recherche automatique. • MUMC Dell créera le type de nœud adapté et récupérera à la fois les informations sur l'hôte VMHost et sur ULMN Dell.Redondance 86 8 Redondance Ce chapitre décrit les fonctions de redondance de Console de gestion multi-onduleurs Dell (MUMC). MUMC Dell est en mesure de surveiller des dispositifs composites. Les dispositifs composites sont des nœuds virtuels composés au minimum de 2 onduleurs en configuration redondante (alimentations redondantes). Cette fonction de redondance est activée via Paramètres > Système > Paramètres des modules (voir Schéma 75). MUMC Dell pourra alors : • Surveiller les dispositifs composites (si la fonction de redondance est activée) • Fermez l'ordinateur MUMC Dell lorsqu'il est alimenté par plusieurs onduleurs (si la fonction d'arrêt est également activée). Schéma 75. Boîte de dialogue Modifier les paramètres des modules Schéma 76 illustre la redondance électrique de la topologie des alimentations redondantes. Dans ce cas, les deux onduleurs alimentent un ou plusieurs serveurs à alimentation multiple. Schéma 76. Schéma de la redondance des alimentations redondantesRedondance 87 Configuration de la redondance Pour configurer la redondance : 1 Connectez-vous avec un profil d'utilisateur d'administrateur. 2 Sélectionnez au moins deux nœuds. 3 Cliquez sur Configurer le dispositif composite (voir Schéma 77). Schéma 77. Sélection de l'option Définir le dispositif composite pour les nœuds 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue, spécifiez un nom pour le dispositif, un mode de redondance et un niveau de redondance (voir Schéma 78) : • Nom du dispositif : nom d'utilisateur du dispositif composite • Niveau de redondance : le nombre minimal d'onduleurs redondants qui alimentent votre système. La valeur par défaut est de 0. REMARQUE : Si vous définissez ce paramètre à un niveau supérieur, l'alarme Redondance perdue se déclenchera. Schéma 78. Boîte de dialogue Définir le dispositif compositeRedondance 88 Un nouveau nœud sera ensuite créé : • Il apparaîtra dans la liste de nœuds Recherche automatique. • Vous pouvez le sélectionner en tant que source d'alimentation. • Pour modifier les propriétés du dispositif composite, sélectionnez-le dans l' aperçu de la recherche, puis cliquez de nouveau sur l'élément de menu Définir le dispositif composite. • Si vous sélectionnez les composantes d'un dispositif composite et que vous cliquez de nouveau sur l'élément de menu Définir le dispositif composite, les propriétés du dispositif composite existant apparaissent. Aucun nouveau dispositif composite n'est créé. Aucune reproduction du dispositif composite n'est donc possible. • La source d'alimentation virtuelle créée est considérée comme un nœud pour la limitation de nœuds de la licence. Aperçus de la redondance Aperçu de la redondance dans la liste de nœuds Lorsqu'un dispositif composite est sélectionné dans la liste de nœuds, l'utilisateur peut le visualiser dans l'aperçu de sélection, avec les informations suivantes : • États dédiés dans les panneaux relatifs aux informations et à l'état • Le panneau relatif aux événements indique les événements des dispositifs composites et tous ses souscomposants Un panneau relatif aux composantes de l'alimentation affiche les états des composants, incluant le niveau de charge et l'autonomie de la batterie. Schéma 79. Source d'alimentation virtuelle dans l'aperçu de la liste de nœudsRedondance 89 Aperçu du dispositif composite dans la source d'alimentation Lorsqu'un module de redondance et d'arrêt est activé, il est possible de sélectionner un dispositif composite en tant que source d'alimentation. L'utilisateur peut le montrer dans l'aperçu de la source d'alimentation. Dans ce cas, les panneaux relatifs aux informations, à l'état, aux événements et aux composantes de l'alimentation sont affichés avec des données spécifiques (voir Schéma 80). Schéma 80. Aperçu de la source d'alimentation du dispositif composite Sous-aperçu des composantes de l'alimentation Lorsqu'un module de redondance et d'arrêt est activé, un nouvel aperçu des composantes d'alimentation est disponible en tant que sous-aperçu de la source d'alimentation. Cet aperçu propose une liste des nœuds assortis de leurs propriétés (voir Schéma 81). REMARQUE : Cet aperçu ne montre les composantes de la source d'alimentation sélectionnée que s'il s'agit d'un dispositif composite. Redondance 90 Schéma 81. Sous-aperçu des composantes de l'alimentation Cas d'utilisation relatifs à la redondance Cette section décrit quelques cas d'utilisation typiques afin de vous aider à configurer correctement la séquence d'arrêt redondant en fonction de vos besoins. Cas d'utilisation #1 Vous souhaitez obtenir une autonomie maximale avec la configuration redondante. • Schéma 82 illustre la configuration par défaut de MUMC Dell disponible via Paramètres > Arrêt > Modifier la configuration de l'arrêt. • Schéma 83 illustre la configuration de l'arrêt par défaut de la Carte de gestion réseau Dell disponible via Onduleur > Paramètres d'arrêt. Schéma 82. Boîte de dialogue Modifier la configuration de l'arrêtRedondance 91 Schéma 83. Carte de gestion réseau DellInterface Web Cas d'utilisation #2 Vous souhaitez que la machine s'arrête après une période prédéfinie de 10 min. L'arrêt doit avoir lieu, même si un seul onduleur fonctionne sur batterie. • Dans ce cas, chaque serveur peut avoir son propre chronomètre d'arrêt (10 min, 8 min, 6 min…). Pour définir une période de 10 min, configurez le chronomètre d'arrêt sur 10 min dans la boîte de dialogue Modifier la configuration de l'arrêt. – Schéma 84 illustre la configuration par défaut de l' MUMC Dell disponible via Paramètres > Arrêt > Modifier la configuration de l'arrêt. REMARQUE : Ceci est la configuration par défaut de la Carte de gestion réseau Dell (voir cas d'utilisation précédent).Redondance 92 Schéma 84. Boîte de dialogue Modifier la configuration de l'arrêt Cas d'utilisation #3 Vous souhaitez lancer l'arrêt 10 min après le dernier événement de type Problème de secteur qui a été détecté. Dans ce cas, il y a deux onduleurs, dont un est redondant. Par ailleurs, tous les serveurs seront mis à l'arrêt en même temps. • Ceci est la configuration par défaut de MUMC Dell.Pour configurer cet arrêt, vous devez définir un chronomètre d'arrêt de 10 min sur toutes les Carte de gestion réseau Dell. Dans ce cas, le dernier onduleur enverra l'ordre d'arrêt au bout de 10 min s'il fonctionne sur batterie. Si le dernier onduleur ne travaille jamais sur batterie, le premier onduleur s'arrêtera à la fin de l'autonomie et le dernier onduleur assumera la charge, si possible. S'il ne peut pas l'assumer, l'arrêt aura lieu plus tôt. – Schéma 85 illustre la configuration d'arrêt de la Carte de gestion réseau Dell disponible via Onduleur > Paramètres d'arrêt.Redondance 93 Schéma 85. Carte de gestion réseau DellParamètres d'arrêt Cas d'utilisation #4 Vous souhaitez procéder à l'arrêt quand le temps restant du dernier onduleur est de 10 min. Dans ce cas, chaque serveur peut avoir sa propre durée d'arrêt (10 min, 8 min, 3 min…). • Vous devez configurer une durée d'arrêt de 10 min dans l' MUMC Dell. – Schéma 86 illustre la configuration par défaut de la MUMC Dell disponible via Paramètres > Arrêt > Modifier la configuration de l'arrêt. REMARQUE : Ceci est la configuration par défaut de la Carte de gestion réseau Dell (voir cas d'utilisation précédent). Schéma 86. Boîte de dialogue Modifier la configuration de l'arrêtApplication de la fonctionnalité étendue 94 9 Application de la fonctionnalité étendue Configuration de la prise vCenter de MUMC Dell La plateforme du serveur vCenter de VMware constitue la base de la gestion de la virtualisation. Elle permet de gérer les hôtes et les machines virtuelles d'une unique console. Pour déverrouiller l'alimentation du système de gestion de VMware, VMware dispose d'un outil permettant d'étendre la fonctionnalité du vCenter de VMware. Plusieurs applications utiles peuvent être rattachées à vCenter pour le rendre plus utile. La prise vCenter Console de gestion multi-onduleurs Dell (MUMC) est également appelée prise vCenter MUMC Dell. Elle est très facile à utiliser et à déployer pour gérer MUMC Dell depuis le vCenter. Cette prise intègre MUMC Dell avec l'environnement vCenter. Après que la prise a été déployée, un onglet dans vCenter ouvre MUMC Dell et permet aux utilisateurs de configurer et de gérer ce dernier sous l'environnement vCenter. La prise VMware permet également de créer un nouveau type d'événements pouvant être du type à déclencher des alarmes. Vérification de l'inscription de la prise vCenter Pour vérifier si la prise MUMC Dell est enregistrée dans vCenter : 1 Dans le client vSphere de VMware, sélectionnez Prises > Gérer les prises (voir Schéma 87). 2 MUMC Dell La prise pour vCenter s'affiche dans le gestionnaire des prises (voir Schéma 88). Schéma 87. Menu du gestionnaire des prises du client vSphereApplication de la fonctionnalité étendue 95 Schéma 88. Gestionnaire des prises vCenter Événements et alarmes Dès lors que la prise de la Console de gestion multi-onduleurs Dell de vCenter est enregistrée, MUMC Dell crée une nouvelle alarme « Panne de courant de l'onduleur de l'hôte (sur batterie) » qui se déclenche en cas d'événement lié à l'alimentation (voir Schéma 89). Schéma 89. Nouvelle alarme de vCenter du MUMC DellApplication de la fonctionnalité étendue 96 Utilisation de Dell MUMC via vCenter L'onglet MUMC Dell sera désormais visible dans la Console du serveur vCenter et dans le dossier racine (voir Schéma 90). Schéma 90. Console du serveur vCenterApplication de la fonctionnalité étendue 97 MUMC Dell est désormais disponible et totalement fonctionnel avec le Client vSphere. L'écran MUMC Dell est représenté dans la Schéma 91. Veuillez remarquer que l'onglet « Console de gestion multionduleurs Dell » situé en haut est sélectionné. Schéma 91. Client vSphere avec onglet Console de gestion multi-onduleurs Dell Configuration de la prise XenCenter Conditions L'installation de MUMC Dell sur la même machine que Citrix® XenCenter™ est la seule condition préalable. Vérification de l'installation de la prise XenCenter • Dans le panneau relatif à la virtualisation, vous devez vérifier la case Prise XenCenter pour installer la prise XenCenter. • Prise XenCenter > Outils > Prises s'affiche alors. • Si tel n'est pas le cas, cliquez sur le Répertoire de la prise de ré-exploration (voir Schéma 92).Application de la fonctionnalité étendue 98 Schéma 92. Répertoire des prises (ré-exploration)Application de la fonctionnalité étendue 99 Utilisation de Dell MUMC via XenCenter Dès lors que la prise est installée, un onglet nommé « Console de gestion multi-onduleurs Dell » s'affiche au niveau de XenCenter (voir Schéma 93). Schéma 93. Onglet MUMC Dell de XenCenter Configuration du mode d'entretien et de vMotion à partir de vCenter Conditions Toutes les images des machines virtuelles doivent être installées et configurées sur un serveur de fichiers. REMARQUE : Pour plus d'informations, voir “Références de VMware” à la page 103. Introduction L'application Planificateur de ressources dynamiques (DRS) de VMware permet d'équilibrer la charge au sein du réseau informatique. DRS s'utilise notamment pour garantir que les capacités de ressource sont disponibles pour la charge du centre de données. Une seconde application appelée VMware vMotion, associée à DRS permettra d'habiliter le déplacement des machines virtuelles d'un serveur physique à un autre pour fournir le meilleur équilibrage de la charge. Application de la fonctionnalité étendue 100 L'application Gestionnaire de l'énergie distribuée (DPM) permettra d'optimiser l'efficacité de l'alimentation électrique du centre de données en vérifiant que DRS utilise bien le serveur physique puis avec vMotion, elle déplacera les machines virtuelles sur les serveurs afin de totalement décharger les serveurs puis les mettra en veille ou hors tension pour une économie maximale de l'énergie. Dell utilise la même capacité que vMotion lorsqu'un onduleur se trouve en situation d'alimentation critique pour faire déplacer les machines virtuelles d'un serveur en situation d'alimentation critique. MUMC Dell écrit ensuite des alarmes/alertes dans vCenter, qui, à leur tour, déclencheront vMotion. VMware utilise le terme « mettre un serveur en mode d'entretien » pour déclencher vMotion. Il en est ainsi car avant de réaliser l'entretien du serveur, le gestionnaire du centre de données doit effacer les machines virtuelles du serveur. Compréhension du mode d'entretien Les hôtes autonomes comme les hôtes au sein d'une grappe prennent le mode d'entretien en charge. Seul le serveur 3,0 de VMware ESX/ESXi et les versions ultérieures prennent le mode d'entretien pour les hôtes autonomes en charge. Un hôte passe en mode d'entretien ou quitte ce dernier uniquement sur la demande d'un utilisateur. Si l'hôte se trouve dans une grappe alors qu'il passe en mode d'entretien, l'utilisateur a la possibilité d'évacuer les machines virtuelles hors tension. Si cette option est sélectionnée, chaque machine virtuelle hors tension migre vers un autre hôte, à moins qu'aucun hôte compatible ne soit disponible pour la machine virtuelle dans la grappe. Alors qu'il est en mode d'entretien, l'hôte ne permet pas le déploiement ni la « mise sous tension » d'une machine virtuelle. Les machines virtuelles exécutées sur un hôte passant en mode d'entretien doivent soit migrer vers un autre hôte, soit être mises à l'arrêt (manuellement ou automatiquement par DRS). Lorsque plus aucune machine virtuelle n'est exécutée sur l'hôte, l'icône de ce dernier change pour inclure la mention « entretien en cours » et le panneau de résumé indique l'état le plus récent. Le mode d'automatisation par défaut d'une machine virtuelle détermine le comportement de cette dernière lorsque l'hôte (dans une grappe DRS) sur lequel elle est exécutée passe en mode d'entretien : Toute machine virtuelle totalement automatisée migre automatiquement. Pour une machine virtuelle partiellement automatisée ou manuelle, l'action à entreprendre recommandée s'affiche. Application de la fonctionnalité étendue 101 Configuration du comportement du mode d'entretien dans vCenter Pour configurer le comportement de la fonction de mode d'entretien, voici un exemple simple de configuration : Activez le niveau d'automatisation « Totalement automatisé » du DRS en procédant comme suit : 1 Ouvrez le serveur vCenter dans un client vSphere. 2 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Grappe > Modifier les paramètres > Activer DRS VMware. Cliquez sur Suivant avec toutes les valeurs par défaut. REMARQUE : Dans cet exemple, vous choisissez de déplacer toutes les machines virtuelles de ce serveur à un autre serveur de la même grappe. Vous pouvez également définir d'autres comportements en fonction de vos besoins Test de configuration Pour tester l'installation, veuillez provoquer une panne de courant sur l'onduleur et vérifiez sur le client vSphere que l'hôte ESX/ESXi correspondant passe en mode d'entretien une fois la minuterie du mode d'entretien écoulée. Haute disponibilité du vCenter VMware Dès lors que la fonction Haute disponibilité (HA) de la grappe est activée, VMware désactive la fonctionnalité de démarrage et arrêt automatique lorsqu'un hyperviseur est mis à l'arrêt. MUMC Dell Fonctions pour le mode HA : • MUMC Dell continuera à déplacer le VM d'un serveur vers les autres dans la mesure où tous les serveurs sont alimentés par divers onduleurs avec différentes sources d'alimentation (voir Schéma 94). Schéma 94. Mode HA avec MUMC Dell MUMC Dell continue à protéger l'hyperviseur même en cas de panne de courant.Application de la fonctionnalité étendue 102 En raison de la désactivation du démarrage et arrêt automatique, à la fin de la séquence de la panne de secteur, toutes les machines virtuelles seront mises hors tension. Afin d'empêcher que ce VM ne s'éteigne, vous avez deux solutions : • Configurez les nœuds ESX/ESXi du VMware dans MUMC Dell de sorte que les VM soient mis à l'arrêt (réglage de l'arrêt à distance de la machine virtuelle). • Installez MUMC Dell sur chaque VM même s'il ne s'agit pas d'une solution optimale. Vous devez tenir compte du fait que lors du déplacement des VM, MUMC Dell reste lié à la source d'alimentation du même onduleur. REMARQUE : Pour de plus amples informations concernant la désactivation du démarrage / de l'arrêt automatique pendant la création d'une grappe HA VMware, reportez-vous à Création d'une grappe HA vSphere grâce aux liens fournis par “SDK vSphere pour Perl” à la page 103. Configuration du mode d'entretien et migration à chaud avec SCVMM Mode d'entretien Avec le Gestionnaire de machines virtuelles (VMM) 2008 R2, vous pouvez activer le mode d'entretien pour un hôte de machine virtuelle dès lors que vous devez exécuter des tâches d'entretien sur l'hôte physique, telles que l'application de mises à jour de sécurité ou le remplacement de matériel sur l'ordinateur hôte physique. Lorsque vous activez le mode d'entretien sur un hôte sous Windows, VMM procède automatiquement comme suit : • Sur un hôte autonome, il met toutes les machines virtuelles exécutées dans un état sûr. • Sur une grappe d'hôtes sous Windows capable de migrer à chaud, vous avez les possibilités suivantes : – Migrer à chaud toutes les machines virtuelles à haute disponibilité exécutées vers d'autres hôtes de la grappe et mettre toutes les machines virtuelles exécutées qui ne sont pas hautement disponibles dans un état sûr. – Mettre toutes les machines virtuelles exécutées dans un état sûr. REMARQUE : Reportez-vous aux références Microsoft® Hyper-V™ page 104. Compréhension de la migration à chaud La migration à chaud est une fonction Hyper-V sous Windows Server 2008 R2 requérant l'ajout et la configuration de la fonction de regroupement par grappe du basculement sur les serveurs exécutant Hyper-V. La migration à chaud vous permet de déplacer en toute transparence les machines virtuelles exécutées d'un nœud de la grappe de basculement à un autre nœud sur la même grappe sans engendrer l'interruption de la connexion réseau ni même un temps d'arrêt perceptible. Application de la fonctionnalité étendue 103 En outre, le regroupement par grappe du basculement requiert un stockage partagé pour les nœuds des grappes. Cela peut inclure un réseau de stockage (SAN) iSCSI ou Fiber-Channel. Toutes les machines virtuelles sont stockées dans la zone de stockage partagée et l'état de la machine virtuelle exécutée est géré par l'un des nœuds. REMARQUE : Reportez-vous aux liens de référence de Hyper-V page 104. Test de configuration Pour tester l'installation, veuillez provoquer une panne de courant sur l'onduleur et vérifiez sur la console System Center Virtual Machine Manager (SCVMM) de Microsoft que l'hôte Hyper-V correspondant passe en mode d'entretien une fois la minuterie du mode d'entretien écoulée. Les machines Hyper-V doivent être démarrées avant la machine hébergeant le SCVMM. Le service SCVMM a besoin d'un peu de temps pour rafraîchir son état. Si la séquence de démarrage n'est pas correcte, Hyper-V restera en mode d'entretien Références de VMware Dell et virtualisation • http://content.dell.com/us/en/enterprise/virtualization Configuration d'ESX de VMware • http://www.vmware.com/support/ Serveur vCenter (superviseur VMware) • Consultez http://www.vmware.com/products/vcenter/ pour obtenir de plus amples informations concernant le téléchargement et l'installation du serveur vCenter. • Consultez également http://www.vmware.com/products/drs/ pour obtenir de plus amples informations concernant Planificateur de ressources distribuées. SDK vSphere pour Perl • Consultez http://www.vmware.com/support/developer/viperltoolkit/ pour obtenir de plus amples informations concernant le téléchargement et l'installation de SDK vSphere pour Perl. • Consultez http://pubs.vmware.com/vsphere-50/index.jsp?topic= %2Fcom.vmware.vsphere.avail.doc_50%2FGUID-E90B8A4A-BAE1-4094-8D92- 8C5570FE5D8C.html pour obtenir de plus amples informations concernant la création d'une grappe HA vSphere.Application de la fonctionnalité étendue 104 Références Hyper-V Microsoft Dell et virtualisation • Consultez http://content.dell.com/us/en/enterprise/virtualization Bibliothèque TechNet de Microsoft • Voir la bibliothèque TechNet de Microsoft pour de plus amples informations : http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/default.aspx À propos du mode d'entretien • Consultez http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ee236481.aspx Exigences d'usage de la migration à chaud • Consultez « FAQ sur la migration à chaud Hyper-V » : http://technet.microsoft.com/enus/library/ff715313%28WS.10%29.aspx Systèmes Dell™ DX6000 Manuel du propriétaireRemarques, précautions et avertissements REMARQUE : une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui vous aident à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque d'endommagement du matériel ou de perte de données si les consignes ne sont pas respectées. AVERTISSEMENT : un AVERTISSEMENT indique un risque d'endommagement du matériel, de blessures corporelles ou même de mort. ____________________ Les informations que contient ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. © 2010 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction de ce document, sous quelque forme que ce soit, sans permission écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell et le logo DELL sont des marques de Dell Inc. Microsoft et Windows Server sont des marques ou des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux ÉtatsUnis et/ou dans d'autres pays. D'autres marques et noms de marque peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence aux entités se réclamant de ces marques et de ces noms ou de leurs produits. Dell Inc. rejette tout intérêt exclusif dans les marques et noms commerciaux autres que les siens. Février 2010 Rév. A00Table des matières 3 Table des matières 1 À propos du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Fonctions du système accessibles au démarrage . . . 11 Voyants et fonctions du panneau avant . . . . . . . . . 12 Fonctionnalités de l'écran LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Écran d'accueil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Menu Setup (Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Menu View (Affichage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Codes des voyants de disque dur RAID . . . . . . . . . 19 Fonctionnalités et voyants du panneau arrière . . . . 20 Codes du voyant d'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Codes des voyants de carte réseau (NIC) . . . . . . . . 23 Messages d'état affichés sur l'écran LCD . . . . . . . 24 Affichage des messages d'état . . . . . . . . . . 24 Suppression des messages d'état affichés sur l'écran LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Messages système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Messages d'avertissement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Messages de diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Messages d'alerte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Autres informations utiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634 Table des matières 2 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Choix du mode d'amorçage du système . . . . . . . . 65 Accès au programme de configuration du système . . . . 66 Réponse aux messages d'erreur . . . . . . . . . . 66 Utilisation des touches de navigation du programme de configuration du système . . . . . 66 Options de configuration du système . . . . . . . . . . 67 Écran principal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Écran Memory Settings (Paramètres de la mémoire) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Écran Processor Settings (Paramètres du processeur) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Écran SATA Settings (Paramètres SATA) . . . . . 72 Écran Boot Settings (Paramètres d'amorçage) . . . 73 Écran Integrated Devices (Périphériques intégrés) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Écran PCI IRQ Assignments (Affectations des IRQ PCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Écran Serial Communication (Communications série) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Écran Embedded Server Management (Gestion de serveur intégrée) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Écran Power Management (Gestion de l'alimentation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Écran System Security (Sécurité du système) . . . 80 Écran Exit (Quitter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Accès au Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI . . . . . . . . 83 Utilisation des touches de navigation du gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Écran UEFI Boot Manager (Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Écran UEFI Boot settings (Paramètres d'amorçage UEFI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Écran System Utilities (Utilitaires du système) . . . 85Table des matières 5 Fonctionnalités de mot de passe du système et de mot de passe de configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Utilisation du mot de passe du système . . . . . . 86 Utilisation du mot de passe de configuration . . . 89 Utilitaire de configuration iDRAC . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Accès à l'utilitaire de configuration iDRAC . . . . 91 3 Installation des composants du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Outils recommandés . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 À l'intérieur du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Cadre avant (en option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Retrait du cadre avant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Installation du cadre avant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Plaquette d'informations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Retrait de la plaquette d'informations . . . . . . . 96 Réinstallation de la plaquette d'informations . . . 96 Ouverture et fermeture du système . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Ouverture du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Fermeture du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Disques durs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Retrait d'un cache de disque dur . . . . . . . . . 99 Installation d'un cache de disque dur . . . . . . . 100 Retrait d'un disque dur remplaçable à chaud . . . 100 Installation d'un disque dur remplaçable à chaud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Retrait d'un disque dur de son support . . . . . . 102 Installation d'un disque dur dans un support . . . 102 Blocs d'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Retrait d'un bloc d'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . 104 Réinstallation d'un bloc d'alimentation . . . . . . 1056 Table des matières Retrait du cache de bloc d'alimentation . . . . . . 106 Installation d'un cache de bloc d'alimentation . . 106 Module SD interne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Installation du module SD interne . . . . . . . . . 106 Retrait du module SD interne . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Carte flash SD interne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Installation de la carte flash SD interne . . . . . . 108 Retrait de la carte flash SD interne . . . . . . . . 109 Clé de mémoire USB interne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Câble USB interne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Retrait du module USB interne . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Installation du câble USB interne . . . . . . . . . 111 Carte iDRAC6 (Integrated Dell Remote Access Controller 6) Enterprise (en option) . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Installation d'une carte iDRAC6 Enterprise . . . . 112 Retrait d'une carte iDRAC6 Enterprise . . . . . . . 114 Support VFlash (en option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Clé matérielle de carte NIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Carénage de refroidissement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Retrait du carénage de refroidissement . . . . . . 117 Installation du carénage de refroidissement . . . 118 Ventilateurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Retrait d'un ventilateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Réinstallation d'un ventilateur de refroidissement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Retrait du support de ventilateur . . . . . . . . . . 121 Réinstallation du support de ventilateur . . . . . . 122 Lecteur optique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Retrait du lecteur optique . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Installation du lecteur optique . . . . . . . . . . . 123Table des matières 7 Carte contrôleur de stockage intégrée . . . . . . . . . 126 Retrait de la carte contrôleur de stockage intégrée . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Installation de la carte contrôleur de stockage intégrée . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Batterie RAID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Retrait d'une batterie RAID . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Installation d'une batterie RAID . . . . . . . . . . 131 Acheminement des câbles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Retrait du support de fixation des câbles . . . . . 133 Installation du support de fixation des câbles . . . 134 Cartes d'extension et cartes de montage pour cartes d'extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Consignes d'installation des cartes d'extension . . 135 Installation d'une carte d'extension . . . . . . . . 137 Retrait d'une carte d'extension . . . . . . . . . . 138 Retrait de la carte de montage pour carte d'extension 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Réinstallation de la carte de montage pour carte d'extension 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Retrait de la carte de montage pour carte d'extension 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Réinstallation de la carte de montage 2 . . . . . . 142 Retrait de la carte de montage pour cartes d'extension 2 hors du support de carte d'extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Réinstallation de la plaque de la carte de montage 2 sur le support des cartes d'extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Mémoire système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Consignes générales pour l'installation des barrettes de mémoire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Consignes spécifiques à chaque mode . . . . . . 147 Installation de barrettes de mémoire . . . . . . . 151 Retrait de barrettes de mémoire . . . . . . . . . . 1548 Table des matières Processeurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Retrait d'un processeur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Installation d'un processeur . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Batterie du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Remplacement de la batterie du système . . . . . 160 Assemblage du panneau de commande . . . . . . . . 162 Retrait du module d'affichage du panneau de commande . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Installation du module d'affichage sur le panneau de commande . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Retrait de la carte du panneau de commande . . . 165 Installation de la carte du panneau de commande . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Fond de panier SAS (procédure réservée au service de maintenance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Retrait du fond de panier SAS . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Installation d'un fond de panier SAS . . . . . . . . 168 Carte système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Retrait de la carte système . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Installation de la carte système . . . . . . . . . . 170 4 Dépannage du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 La sécurité d'abord, pour vous et votre système . . . . 173 Dépannage des échecs de démarrage du système . . . 173 Dépannage des connexions externes . . . . . . . . . 174 Dépannage du sous-système vidéo . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Dépannage d'un périphérique USB . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Dépannage d'un périphérique série d'E/S . . . . . . . 175 Dépannage d'une carte réseau . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Table des matières 9 Dépannage d'un système mouillé . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Dépannage d'un système endommagé . . . . . . . . . 178 Dépannage de la pile du système . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Dépannage des blocs d'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . 180 Dépannage des problèmes de refroidissement du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Dépannage d'un ventilateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Dépannage de la mémoire système . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Dépannage d'une carte SD interne . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Dépannage d'une clé de mémoire USB interne . . . . 185 Dépannage d'un lecteur optique . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Dépannage d'un disque dur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Dépannage d'un contrôleur de stockage . . . . . . . . 188 Dépannage des cartes d'extension . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Dépannage du processeur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 5 Exécution des diagnostics du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Utilisation des diagnostics en ligne . . . . . . . . . . 193 Fonctionnalités de diagnostic intégrées du système . . . 193 Quand utiliser les diagnostics intégrés du système . . . 194 Exécution des diagnostics intégrés du système . . . . 194 Options de test des diagnostics du système . . . . . . 195 Utilisation des options de test personnalisé . . . . . . 195 Sélection de périphériques à tester . . . . . . . . 19510 Table des matières Sélection d'options de diagnostic . . . . . . . . . 196 Visualisation des informations et des résultats . . . 196 6 Cavaliers et connecteurs . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Cavaliers de la carte système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Connecteurs de la carte système . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Connecteurs de la carte de fond de panier SAS . . . . 203 Composants et bus PCIe des cartes de montage pour cartes d'extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Désactivation d'un mot de passe oublié . . . . . . . . 206 7 Obtention d'aide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Contacter Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211À propos du système 11 À propos du système Fonctions du système accessibles au démarrage Les touches suivantes permettent d'accéder aux fonctions du système au démarrage. Touche Description Permet d'accéder au programme de configuration du système. Voir « Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI » à la page 65. Permet d'accéder au programme des services système (System Services), qui ouvre le programme Unified Server Configurator à partir duquel vous pouvez accéder à des utilitaires tels que les diagnostics du système. Voir la documentation utilisateur relative à l'utilitaire Unified Server Configurator pour plus d'informations. REMARQUE : certains traitements exécutés par Unified Server Configurator, tels que les mises à jour de logiciels, peuvent engendrer la création de périphériques virtuels qui, par moments, sont identifiés comme des périphériques USB reliés à votre système. Ces connexions temporaires sont sécurisées et peuvent être ignorées. Permet d'accéder au Gestionnaire d'amorçage BIOS Boot Manager ou UEFI Boot Manager, selon la configuration de démarrage de votre système. Voir « Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI » à la page 65. Permet d'accéder au Gestionnaire d'amorçage PXE, si celui-ci est activé. Permet d'accéder à l'utilitaire de configuration iDRAC, qui donne accès au journal d'événements du système SEL (System Event Log), ainsi qu'à la configuration de l'accès distant au système. Pour plus d'informations, voir la documentation de l'utilitaire iDRAC. Permet d'accéder à l'utilitaire de configuration PERC. Voir la documentation relative à la carte PERC pour plus d'informations. Permet d'accéder à l'utilitaire de configuration des paramètres de la carte réseau pour l'amorçage PXE. Pour plus d'informations, reportezvous à la documentation de la carte NIC intégrée.12 À propos du système Voyants et fonctions du panneau avant Figure 1-1. Voyants et fonctions du panneau avant Élément Voyant, bouton ou connecteur Icône Description 1 Plaquette d'information Plaquette amovible mentionnant des informations sur le système, telles que le code de Service Express, l'adresse MAC de la carte NIC1 intégrée ou celle de la carte iDRAC6 Enterprise. 1 3 4 5 7 9 8 10 2 6À propos du système 13 2 Voyant et bouton d'alimentation Le voyant d'alimentation s'allume lorsque le système est sous tension. Le bouton d'alimentation contrôle la sortie du bloc d'alimentation en courant continu qui alimente le système. Lorsque le cadre du système est installé, le bouton d'alimentation n'est pas accessible. REMARQUE : le délai nécessaire à l'affichage d'une image sur le moniteur lors de la mise sous tension du système peut aller jusqu'à 25 secondes. Ce délai varie en fonction de la quantité de mémoire installée. REMARQUE : si vous éteignez un ordinateur utilisant un système d'exploitation compatible avec ACPI en appuyant sur le bouton d'alimentation, le système peut effectuer un arrêt progressif avant la mise hors tension de l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : pour procéder à l'arrêt progressif du système, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant 5 secondes. 3 Bouton NMI Ce bouton permet de résoudre les erreurs liées aux logiciels ou aux pilotes de périphériques rencontrées avec certains systèmes d'exploitation. Appuyez sur ce bouton à l'aide de la pointe d'un trombone. Appuyez sur ce bouton uniquement si un technicien de support qualifié vous indique de le faire ou si cela est indiqué dans la documentation du système d'exploitation. Élément Voyant, bouton ou connecteur Icône Description14 À propos du système 4 Connecteurs USB (2) Permettent de connecter des périphériques USB au système. Les ports sont compatibles USB 2.0. 5 Connecteur vidéo Permet de connecter un moniteur au système. 6 Boutons de menu LCD Permettent de naviguer dans le menu LCD du panneau de commande. 7 Écran LCD Affiche l'ID du système, les informations d'état et les messages d'erreur. L'écran LCD est bleu lorsque le système fonctionne normalement. Il est orange lorsque le système nécessite une intervention. Il affiche alors un code d'erreur suivi d'un texte descriptif. REMARQUE : si le système est connecté à l'alimentation secteur et si une erreur a été détectée, l'écran LCD s'allume en orange, que le système soit allumé ou non. 8 Bouton d'identification du système Les boutons d'identification des panneaux avant et arrière peuvent servir à identifier un système spécifique au sein d'un rack. Si l'un de ces boutons est activé, l'écran LCD du panneau avant et le voyant d'état du système (bleu) situé sur le panneau arrière clignotent jusqu'à ce que l'utilisateur appuie de nouveau sur l'un des boutons. 9 Lecteur optique Un lecteur DVD-ROM ou DVD+RW SATA mi-hauteur optionnel. REMARQUE : les périphériques DVD sont prévus uniquement pour l'enregistrement de données. 10 Disques durs Jusqu'à 6 unités 3,5 pouces remplaçables à chaud sans baie modulaire Élément Voyant, bouton ou connecteur Icône DescriptionÀ propos du système 15 Fonctionnalités de l'écran LCD L'écran LCD du système affiche des informations et messages d'état indiquant si le système fonctionne correctement ou s'il requiert une intervention. Pour plus d'informations sur un code d'état spécifique, voir « Messages d'état affichés sur l'écran LCD » à la page 24. Le rétro-éclairage de l'écran LCD est de couleur bleue en fonctionnement normal, et orange en cas d'erreur. Lorsque le système est en mode Veille, l'écran LCD n'est pas rétro-éclairé. Pour activer le rétroéclairage, appuyez sur le bouton Sélectionner de l'écran LCD. Le rétro-éclairage de l'écran LCD reste inactif si l'affichage de messages a été désactivé via l'utilitaire iDRAC, l'écran LCD ou d'autres outils. Figure 1-2. Fonctionnalités de l'écran LCD Élément Boutons Description 1 Gauche Fait revenir le curseur à l'étape précédente, étape par étape. 2 Sélectionner Permet de sélectionner l'élément de menu mis en surbrillance à l'aide du curseur. 3 Droite Fait avancer le curseur à l'étape suivante, étape par étape. Durant le défilement des messages : • Appuyez une fois pour augmenter la vitesse de défilement. • Appuyez de nouveau pour arrêter le défilement. • Appuyez une nouvelle fois pour rétablir la vitesse de défilement par défaut. • Appuyez encore une fois pour répéter le cycle. 1 2 3 416 À propos du système Écran d'accueil L'écran d'accueil affiche les informations sur le système que l'utilisateur peut configurer. L'affichage de cet écran a lieu durant le fonctionnement normal du système, lorsqu’aucun message d'état ou d'erreur n'est affiché. Lorsque le système est en mode Veille, le rétro-éclairage de l'écran LCD se désactive au bout de 5 minutes d'inactivité, en l'absence de message d'erreur. Appuyez sur l'un des trois boutons de navigation (Sélectionner, Gauche ou Droite) pour afficher l'écran d'accueil. Pour accéder à l'écran d'accueil à partir d'un autre menu, sélectionnez la flèche vers le haut jusqu'à ce que l'icône Accueil s'affiche, puis sélectionnez l'icône Accueil. Sur l'écran d'accueil, appuyez sur le bouton Sélectionner pour accéder au menu principal. Reportez-vous aux tableaux ci-dessous pour plus d'informations sur les sous-menus Setup (Configuration) et View (Affichage). 4 ID du système Permet d'activer ou de désactiver le mode ID du système. Appuyez rapidement pour activer ou désactiver l'ID du système. En cas de blocage du système durant l'exécution de l'auto-test de démarrage, appuyez sur le bouton de l'ID du système et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant plus de cinq secondes pour accéder au mode d'avancement du BIOS. Élément Boutons DescriptionÀ propos du système 17 Menu Setup (Configuration) REMARQUE : lorsque vous sélectionnez une option dans le menu Configuration, vous êtes invité à valider votre choix avant de poursuivre. Option Description DRAC Sélectionnez DHCP ou Static IP (Adresse IP statique) pour configurer le mode du réseau. Si l'option Static IP (Adresse IP statique) est sélectionnée, les champs disponibles sont IP, Sous-réseau (Sub) et Passerelle (Gtw). Sélectionnez Setup DNS (Configuration DNS) pour activer la fonction DNS et afficher les adresses de domaine. Deux entrées DNS distinctes sont disponibles. Set Error (Définition du mode d'erreur) Sélectionnez l'option SEL pour afficher les messages d'erreur sur l'écran LCD dans un format conforme à la description IPMI dans le journal d'événements du système (SEL). Cette fonction est notamment utile pour rechercher une correspondance entre un message LCD et une entrée du journal SEL. Sélectionnez l'option Simple pour afficher les messages d'erreur sur l'écran LCD sous forme de descriptions simplifiées, faciles à comprendre pour l'utilisateur. Pour la liste des messages disponibles dans ce format, voir « Messages d'état affichés sur l'écran LCD » à la page 24. Set Home (Définition de l'écran d'accueil) Sélectionnez les informations par défaut à afficher sur l'écran d'accueil LCD. Pour découvrir les options et éléments d'option affichables par défaut sur l'écran d'accueil, voir « Menu View (Affichage) » à la page 18.18 À propos du système Menu View (Affichage) Option Description DRAC IP (Adresse IP DRAC) Affiche les adresses IPv4 ou IPv6 des périphériques iDRAC6. Les adresses comprennent les éléments suivants : DNS (Primary [Principal] et Secondary [Secondaire]), Gateway (Passerelle), IP (Adresse IP) et Subnet (Sous-réseau) ; l'adresse IPv6 ne comporte pas de valeur de sous-réseau. MAC Affiche les adresses MAC pour DRAC, iSCSIn ou NETn. Name (Nom) Affiche le nom d'hôte, le modèle ou une chaîne définie par l'utilisateur pour le système. Number (Numéro) Affiche le Asset tag (Numéro d'inventaire) ou le Service tag (Numéro de service) du système. Power (Alimentation) Affiche la puissance de sortie du système, exprimée en BTU/h ou en Watt. Le format d'affichage peut être configuré dans le sous-menu « Set Home » (Définition de l'écran d'accueil) du menu Setup (Configuration) ; voir « Menu Setup (Configuration) » à la page 17. Temperature (Température) Affiche la température du système en degrés Celsius ou Fahrenheit. Le format d'affichage peut être configuré dans le sous-menu « Set Home » (Définition de l'écran d'accueil) du menu Setup (Configuration) ; voir « Menu Setup (Configuration) » à la page 17.À propos du système 19 Codes des voyants de disque dur RAID Figure 1-3. Voyants de disque dur 1 voyant d'activité des disques (vert) 2 voyant d'état des disques (vert et orange) Codes des voyants d'état des disques (RAID uniquement) État Voyant vert clignotant deux fois par seconde Identification du disque/préparation au retrait Désactivé Disque prêt pour insertion ou retrait REMARQUE : À la mise sous tension du système, le voyant d'état ne s'allume qu'une fois tous les disques durs initialisés. Lorsqu'il est éteint, l'état des disques ne permet par leur insertion ni leur retrait. Vert clignotant, puis orange, puis éteint Panne de disque prévue 1 220 À propos du système Fonctionnalités et voyants du panneau arrière Figure 1-4. Fonctionnalités du panneau arrière Orange clignotant quatre fois par seconde Disque en panne Vert clignotant lentement Disque en cours de restauration Vert fixe Disque en ligne Élément Voyant, bouton ou connecteur Icône Description 1 Logement PCIe 1 Logement d'extension PCI Express (Génération 2) x4 (pleine hauteur, longueur 30,99 cm [12,2 po]) 2 Logement PCIe 2 Logement d'extension PCIe x4 Gén 2 (mi-hauteur, longueur 24,13 cm [9,5 po]) Codes des voyants d'état des disques (RAID uniquement) État 15 13 4 12 11 9 8 7 1 2 3 5 6 14 10À propos du système 21 3 Logement PCIe 3 Logement d'extension PCIe x8 Gén 2 (pleine hauteur, longueur 24,13 cm [9,5 po]) ou Logement d'extension optionnel PCIe x16 Gén 2 (pleine hauteur, longueur 24,13 cm [9,5 po) (emplacement 4 non disponible avec cette option) 4 Logement PCIe 4 Logement d'extension PCIe x8 Gén 2 (pleine hauteur, longueur 24,13 cm [9,5 po]) 5 Bloc d'alimentation 1 (PS1) Bloc d'alimentation 870 W ou 570 W 6 Bloc d'alimentation 2 (PS2) Bloc d'alimentation 870 W ou 570 W 7 Bouton d'identification du système Les boutons d'identification des panneaux avant et arrière peuvent servir à identifier un système spécifique au sein d'un rack. Si l'un de ces boutons est activé, l'écran LCD du panneau avant et le voyant d'état du système (bleu) situé sur le panneau arrière clignotent jusqu'à ce que l'utilisateur appuie de nouveau sur l'un des boutons. 8 voyant d'état du système Fournit un indicateur de mise sous tension à l'arrière du système 9 connecteur du voyant d'état du système Connecteur pour câble d'extension de voyant système utilisé sur un passecâbles. 10 Connecteurs Ethernet (4) Connecteurs de cartes NIC 10/100/1000 intégrées 11 Connecteurs USB (2) Permettent de connecter des périphériques USB au système. Les ports sont compatibles USB 2.0. Élément Voyant, bouton ou connecteur Icône Description22 À propos du système Codes du voyant d'alimentation Un voyant sur le bouton d'alimentation indique si le système est alimenté et opérationnel. Les blocs d'alimentation redondants sont munis d'un voyant indiquant si l'alimentation est active ou si elle a subi une défaillance. • Éteint : l'alimentation CA n'est pas connectée. • Vert : en mode Veille, indique qu'une source d'alimentation secteur valide est connectée et que le bloc d'alimentation fonctionne normalement. Lorsque le système est sous tension, ce voyant indique également que le bloc d'alimentation fournit au système un courant continu. • Orange : indique qu'un problème lié au bloc d'alimentation s'est produit. • Vert/orange alternatif : lors de l'ajout à chaud d'un bloc d'alimentation, indique que les blocs d'alimentation ont été inversés (un bloc d'alimentation High Output 870 W et un bloc Energy Smart 570 W sont installés sur le même système). Remplacez le bloc d'alimentation dont le voyant clignote par un bloc dont la capacité correspond à celle de l'autre bloc installé. PRÉCAUTION : lors du dépannage d'une erreur due à une non-conformité de l'alimentation électrique, remplacez uniquement l'alimentation signalée par un indicateur clignotant. L'inversion des blocs d'alimentation pour obtenir une paire prise en charge peut générer une erreur et entraîner l'arrêt imprévu du système. Pour passer d'une configuration haute performance (High Output) à une configuration économe (Energy Smart) ou vice versa, vous devez mettre le système hors tension. 12 connecteur vidéo Permet de connecter un écran VGA au système. 13 Connecteur série Permet de connecter un périphérique série au système. 14 Port iDRAC6 Entreprise (en option) Port de gestion dédié pour la carte iDRAC6 Enterprise en option. 15 Logement de carte VFlash (en option) Permet de connecter une carte mémoire SD externe pour la carte iDRAC6 Entreprise en option. Élément Voyant, bouton ou connecteur Icône DescriptionÀ propos du système 23 Figure 1-5. Voyant d'état du bloc d'alimentation Codes des voyants de carte réseau (NIC) Figure 1-6. Voyants de la carte réseau 1 État du bloc d'alimentation 1 Voyant de liaison 2 Voyant d'activité 1 1 224 À propos du système Messages d'état affichés sur l'écran LCD Les messages de l'écran LCD consistent en une série de brefs messages textuels vous informant des événements consignés dans le journal des événements du système (SEL). Pour plus d'informations sur ce journal et sur la configuration des paramètres de gestion du système, voir la documentation du logiciel de gestion des systèmes. REMARQUE : si votre système ne démarre pas, maintenez le bouton de l'ID système enfoncé pendant au moins cinq secondes jusqu'à ce que le code d'erreur s'affiche sur l'écran LCD. Notez ce code, puis consultez la section « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. Affichage des messages d'état En cas d'erreur sur le système, l'écran LCD adopte une couleur orange. Appuyez sur le bouton Sélectionner pour afficher la liste des messages d'erreur ou d'état. Utilisez les touches fléchées vers la gauche et vers la droite pour sélectionner un numéro d'erreur, puis appuyez sur Sélectionner pour afficher l'erreur. Suppression des messages d'état affichés sur l'écran LCD Pour les pannes liées aux capteurs de température, de tension, de ventilateurs, etc., le message affiché sur l'écran LCD est automatiquement supprimé lorsque le capteur revient à son état normal. Pour les autres types de pannes, une intervention de l'utilisateur est requise : • Clear the SEL (Effacer le journal d'événements système) : vous pouvez effectuer cette tâche à distance, mais vous perdrez alors la totalité de l'historique des événements système. Voyant Description Les voyants de liaison et d'activité sont éteints La carte réseau n'est pas connectée au réseau. Le voyant de liaison est vert La carte NIC est connectée à une liaison réseau valide à 1 000 Mbits/s. Le voyant de liaison est orange La carte NIC est connectée à une liaison réseau valide à 10/100 Mbits/s. Le voyant d'activité clignote en vert Des données sont en cours d'envoi ou de réception sur le réseau.À propos du système 25 • Power cycle (Mettre le système hors tension) : mettez le système hors tension et débranchez-le de la prise de courant. Attendez environ 10 secondes, puis rebranchez le câble d'alimentation et redémarrez le système. REMARQUE : les messages d'état LCD suivants s'affichent dans le format simple. Voir « Menu Setup (Configuration) » à la page 17 pour sélectionner le format dans lequel vous voulez afficher les messages. Tableau 1-1. Messages d'état affichés sur l'écran LCD Code Texte Cause Actions correctives E1000 Failsafe voltage error. Contact support. Vérifiez si des événements critiques sont consignés dans le journal des événements du système. Coupez l'alimentation secteur du système pendant 10 secondes, puis redémarrez ce dernier. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. E1114 Ambient Temp exceeds allowed range. Ambient temperature has a reached a point outside of the allowed range. Voir « Dépannage des problèmes de refroidissement du système » à la page 180. E1116 Memory disabled, temp above range. Power cycle AC. La température de la mémoire dépasse les limites autorisées. La mémoire a été désactivée pour éviter toute détérioration des composants. Coupez l'alimentation secteur du système pendant 10 secondes, puis redémarrez ce dernier. Voir « Dépannage des problèmes de refroidissement du système » à la page 180. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. E1210 Motherboard battery failure. Check battery. La batterie CMOS est inexistante ou sa tension dépasse les limites autorisées. Voir « Dépannage de la pile du système » à la page 179.26 À propos du système E1211 RAID Controller battery failure. Check battery. La batterie RAID est inexistante ou endommagée, ou bien elle ne peut pas se recharger à la suite de problèmes liés aux conditions thermiques. Réinstallez le connecteur de la batterie RAID. Voir « Installation d'une batterie RAID » à la page 131 et « Dépannage des problèmes de refroidissement du système » à la page 180. E1216 3.3V Regulator failure. Reseat PCIe cards. Panne du régulateur de tension 3,3 V. Retirez les cartes d'extension PCIe et réinstallez-les. Si le problème persiste, voir « Dépannage des cartes d'extension » à la page 189. E1229 CPU # VCORE Regulator failure. Reseat CPU. Panne du régulateur de tension VCORE du processeur spécifié. Réinstallez le(s) processeur(s). Voir « Dépannage du processeur » à la page 191. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. E122A CPU # VTT Regulator failure. Reseat CPU. Panne du régulateur de tension VTT du processeur indiqué. Réinstallez le(s) processeur(s). Voir « Dépannage du processeur » à la page 191. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. E122C CPU Power Fault. Power cycle AC. Une panne d'alimentation a été détectée à la mise sous tension du ou des processeurs. Coupez l'alimentation secteur du système pendant 10 secondes, puis redémarrez ce dernier. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. Tableau 1-1. Messages d'état affichés sur l'écran LCD (suite) Code Texte Cause Actions correctivesÀ propos du système 27 E122D Memory Regulator # Failed. Reseat DIMMs. Panne de l'un des régulateurs de mémoire. Réinstallez les barrettes de mémoire. Voir « Dépannage de la mémoire système » à la page 182. E122E On-board regulator failed. Call support. Panne de l'un des régulateurs de tension intégrés. Coupez l'alimentation secteur du système pendant 10 secondes, puis redémarrez ce dernier. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. E1310 Fan ## RPM exceeding range. Check fan. Le RPM du ventilateur indiqué dépasse les limites autorisées. Voir « Dépannage des problèmes de refroidissement du système » à la page 180. E1311 Fan module ## RPM exceeding range. Check fan. Le RPM du ventilateur indiqué dans le module spécifié est en dehors des limites autorisées. Voir« Dépannage des problèmes de refroidissement du système » à la page 180. E1313 Fan redundancy lost. Check fans. Les ventilateurs du système ne sont plus redondants. Une autre panne de ventilateur pourrait provoquer une surchauffe du système. Faites défiler l'écran LCD pour obtenir d'autres messages. Voir « Dépannage d'un ventilateur » à la page 181. E1410 System Fatal Error detected. Une erreur fatale du système a été détectée. Faites défiler l'écran LCD pour obtenir d'autres messages. Coupez l'alimentation en CA du système pendant 10 secondes, puis redémarrez ce dernier. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. Tableau 1-1. Messages d'état affichés sur l'écran LCD (suite) Code Texte Cause Actions correctives28 À propos du système E1414 CPU # temp exceeding range. Check CPU heatsink. La température du processeur spécifié dépasse les limites thermiques autorisées. Assurez-vous que les dissipateurs de chaleur du processeur sont bien installés. Voir « Dépannage du processeur » à la page 191 et « Dépannage des problèmes de refroidissement du système » à la page 180. E1418 CPU # not detected. Check CPU is seated properly. Le processeur spécifié est inexistant ou défectueux, et la configuration actuelle du système n'est pas prise en charge. Assurez-vous que le processeur indiqué est correctement installé. Voir « Dépannage du processeur » à la page 191. E141C Unsupported CPU configuration. Check CPU or BIOS revision. La configuration des processeurs n'est pas prise en charge. Vérifiez que les processeurs sont de même type et conformes aux caractéristiques décrites dans le Guide de mise en route du système. E141F CPU # protocol error. Power cycle AC. Le BIOS du système a renvoyé une erreur de protocole du processeur. Coupez l'alimentation secteur du système pendant 10 secondes, puis redémarrez ce dernier. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. E1420 CPU Bus parity error. Power cycle AC. Le BIOS du système a renvoyé une erreur de parité liée au bus du processeur. Coupez l'alimentation secteur du système pendant 10 secondes, puis redémarrez ce dernier. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. Tableau 1-1. Messages d'état affichés sur l'écran LCD (suite) Code Texte Cause Actions correctivesÀ propos du système 29 E1422 CPU # machine check error. Power cycle AC. Le BIOS du système a renvoyé une erreur de vérification de la machine. Coupez l'alimentation secteur du système pendant 10 secondes, puis redémarrez ce dernier. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. E1610 Power Supply # (### W) missing. Check power supply. Le bloc d'alimentation indiqué a été retiré ou est inexistant sur le système. Voir « Dépannage des blocs d'alimentation » à la page 180. E1614 Power Supply # (### W) error. Check power supply. Panne du bloc d'alimentation indiqué. Voir « Dépannage des blocs d'alimentation » à la page 180. E1618 Predictive failure on Power Supply # (### W). Check PSU. Une défaillance d'alimentation d'un ventilateur, une surchauffe ou une erreur de communication avec le bloc d'alimentation a provoqué l'émission anticipée d'un avertissement concernant une défaillance imminente de l'alimentation électrique. Voir « Dépannage des blocs d'alimentation » à la page 180. E161C Power Supply # (### W) lost AC power. Check PSU cables. Le bloc d'alimentation indiqué est connecté au système, mais l'alimentation secteur n'est plus assurée. Vérifiez la source d'alimentation secteur du bloc d'alimentation indiqué. Si le problème persiste, voir « Dépannage des blocs d'alimentation » à la page 180. Tableau 1-1. Messages d'état affichés sur l'écran LCD (suite) Code Texte Cause Actions correctives30 À propos du système E1620 Power Supply # (### W) AC power error. Check PSU cables. L'alimentation secteur du bloc d'alimentation indiqué dépasse les limites autorisées. Vérifiez la source d'alimentation secteur du bloc d'alimentation indiqué. Si le problème persiste, voir « Dépannage des blocs d'alimentation » à la page 180. E1624 Lost power supply redundancy. Check PSU cables. Le sous-système d'alimentation n'est plus redondant. Si le bloc d'alimentation restant tombe en panne, le système s'arrête. Voir « Dépannage des blocs d'alimentation » à la page 180. E1626 Power Supply Mismatch. PSU1 = ### W, PSU2 = ### W. Les blocs d'alimentation du système n'ont pas la même puissance. Vérifiez que les blocs d'alimentation installés sont de même puissance. Consultez les caractéristiques techniques décrites dans le Guide de mise en route du système. E1629 Power required > PSU wattage. Check PSU and config. La configuration du système requiert plus de puissance que peuvent en produire les blocs d'alimentation, même avec la réduction des performances. Mettez le système hors tension, réduisez les paramètres de la configuration matérielle ou installez des blocs d'alimentation plus puissants, puis redémarrez le système. Tableau 1-1. Messages d'état affichés sur l'écran LCD (suite) Code Texte Cause Actions correctivesÀ propos du système 31 E1710 I/O channel check error. Review & clear SEL. Le BIOS du système a signalé une vérification de canal d'E/S. Recherchez des informations complémentaires dans le journal des événements du système, puis effacez le contenu de celui-ci. Coupez l'alimentation secteur du système pendant 10 secondes, puis redémarrez ce dernier. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. E1711 PCI parity error on Bus ## Device ## Function ## Le BIOS du système a renvoyé une erreur de parité PCI liée à un composant résidant dans l'espace de configuration PCI du bus ##, périphérique ##, fonction ##. Retirez les cartes d'extension PCIe et réinstallez-les. Si le problème persiste, voir « Dépannage des cartes d'extension » à la page 189. PCI parity error on Slot #. Review & clear SEL. Le BIOS du système a renvoyé une erreur de parité PCI liée à un composant installé dans le logement indiqué. Retirez les cartes d'extension PCIe et réinstallez-les. Si le problème persiste, voir « Dépannage des cartes d'extension » à la page 189. Tableau 1-1. Messages d'état affichés sur l'écran LCD (suite) Code Texte Cause Actions correctives32 À propos du système E1712 PCI system error on Bus ## Device ## Function ## Le BIOS du système a renvoyé une erreur système PCI liée à un composant résidant dans l'espace de configuration PCI du bus ##, périphérique ##, fonction ##. Retirez les cartes d'extension PCIe et réinstallez-les. Si le problème persiste, voir « Dépannage des cartes d'extension » à la page 189. PCI system error on Slot #. Review & clear SEL. Le BIOS du système a renvoyé une erreur système PCI liée à un composant installé dans le logement indiqué. Réinstallez la carte de montage pour carte d'extension. Voir « Cartes d'extension et cartes de montage pour cartes d'extension » à la page 135. Si le problème persiste, la carte de montage ou la carte système est défectueuse. Voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. E1714 Unknown error. Review & clear SEL. Le BIOS du système a détecté une erreur système non identifiée. Recherchez des informations complémentaires dans le journal des événements du système (SEL), puis effacez le contenu de celui-ci. Coupez l'alimentation secteur du système pendant 10 secondes, puis redémarrez ce dernier. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. Tableau 1-1. Messages d'état affichés sur l'écran LCD (suite) Code Texte Cause Actions correctivesÀ propos du système 33 E1715 Fatal I/O error. Review & clear SEL. Le BIOS système a détecté une erreur fatale dans le système. Recherchez des informations complémentaires dans le journal des événements du système (SEL), puis effacez le contenu de celui-ci. Coupez l'alimentation secteur du système pendant 10 secondes, puis redémarrez celui-ci. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. E1716 Chipset IERR Bus ## Dev ## Function #. Review & clear SEL. Le BIOS système a consigné une erreur interne du système sur le bus ##, périphérique ##, fonction ##. Recherchez des informations complémentaires dans le journal des événements du système (SEL), puis effacez le contenu de celui-ci. Coupez l'alimentation secteur du système pendant 10 secondes, puis redémarrez celui-ci. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. Tableau 1-1. Messages d'état affichés sur l'écran LCD (suite) Code Texte Cause Actions correctives34 À propos du système E1717 CPU # internal error Review & clear SEL. Le BIOS du système a détecté que le processeur indiqué présentait une erreur interne. Recherchez des informations complémentaires dans le journal des événements du système (SEL), puis effacez le contenu de celui-ci. Coupez l'alimentation secteur du système pendant 10 secondes, puis redémarrez celui-ci. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. E171F PCIe fatal error on Bus ## Device ## Function ## Le BIOS du système a renvoyé une erreur fatale PCIe liée à un composant résidant dans l'espace de configuration PCI du bus ##, périphérique ##, fonction ##. Retirez les cartes d'extension PCIe et réinstallez-les. Si le problème persiste, voir « Dépannage des cartes d'extension » à la page 189. PCIe fatal error on Slot #. Review & clear SEL. Le BIOS du système a renvoyé une erreur PCIe fatale liée à un composant installé dans le logement indiqué. Réinstallez la carte de montage pour carte d'extension. Voir « Cartes d'extension et cartes de montage pour cartes d'extension » à la page 135. Si le problème persiste, la carte de montage ou la carte système est défectueuse. Voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. E1810 Hard drive ## fault. Review & clear SEL. Une panne du disque dur indiqué s'est produite. Voir « Dépannage d'un disque dur » à la page 187. Tableau 1-1. Messages d'état affichés sur l'écran LCD (suite) Code Texte Cause Actions correctivesÀ propos du système 35 E1812 Hard drive ## removed. Check drive. Le disque dur indiqué a été retiré du système. Pour information uniquement. E1A11 PCI Riser hardware & configuration mismatch. Reconfigure. Les cartes de montage PCIe ne sont pas correctement configurées. Certaines configurations non valides peuvent empêcher la mise sous tension du système. Réinstallez la carte de montage pour carte d'extension. Voir « Cartes d'extension et cartes de montage pour cartes d'extension » à la page 135. Si le problème persiste, la carte de montage ou la carte système est défectueuse. Voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. E1A12 PCI Riser not detected. Check Riser. L'une ou les deux cartes de montage PCIe sont manquantes. Ceci empêche la mise sous tension du système. Réinstallez la ou les cartes de montage manquantes. Voir « Réinstallation de la carte de montage pour carte d'extension 1 » à la page 140 et « Réinstallation de la carte de montage 2 » à la page 142. E1A14 SAS cable A failure. Check connection. Le câble SAS A est manquant ou endommagé. Rebranchez le câble dans le connecteur. Si le problème persiste, remplacez le câble. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. Tableau 1-1. Messages d'état affichés sur l'écran LCD (suite) Code Texte Cause Actions correctives36 À propos du système E1A15 SAS cable B failure. Check connection. Le câble SAS B est manquant ou endommagé. Rebranchez le câble dans le connecteur. Si le problème persiste, remplacez le câble. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. E1A1D Control panel USB cable not detected. Check cable. Le câble USB du panneau de commande est manquant ou endommagé. Rebranchez le câble dans le connecteur. Si le problème persiste, remplacez le câble. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. E2010 Memory not detected. Inspect DIMMs. Aucune mémoire n'a été détectée dans le système. Installez ou remettez en place les barrettes de mémoire. Voir « Installation de barrettes de mémoire » à la page 151 ou « Dépannage de la mémoire système » à la page 182. E2011 Memory configuration failure. Check DIMMs. Mémoire détectée, mais non configurable. Erreur détectée au cours de la configuration de la mémoire. Voir « Dépannage de la mémoire système » à la page 182. E2012 Memory configured but unusable. Check DIMMs. Mémoire configurée mais inutilisable. Voir « Dépannage de la mémoire système » à la page 182. E2013 BIOS unable to shadow memory. Check DIMMs. Le BIOS du système ne peut pas copier son image flash en mémoire. Voir « Dépannage de la mémoire système » à la page 182. Tableau 1-1. Messages d'état affichés sur l'écran LCD (suite) Code Texte Cause Actions correctivesÀ propos du système 37 E2014 CMOS RAM failure. Power cycle AC. Panne CMOS. La RAM CMOS ne fonctionne pas correctement. Coupez l'alimentation secteur du système pendant 10 secondes, puis redémarrez ce dernier. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. E2015 DMA Controller failure. Power cycle AC. Panne du contrôleur DMA. Coupez l'alimentation secteur du système pendant 10 secondes, puis redémarrez ce dernier. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. E2016 Interrupt Controller failure. Power cycle AC. Panne du contrôleur d'interruptions. Coupez l'alimentation secteur du système pendant 10 secondes, puis redémarrez ce dernier. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. E2017 Timer refresh failure. Power cycle AC. Échec de l'actualisation de l'horloge. Coupez l'alimentation secteur du système pendant 10 secondes, puis redémarrez ce dernier. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. E2018 Programmable Timer error. Power cycle AC. Échec du temporisateur d'intervalle programmable. Coupez l'alimentation secteur du système pendant 10 secondes, puis redémarrez ce dernier. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. Tableau 1-1. Messages d'état affichés sur l'écran LCD (suite) Code Texte Cause Actions correctives38 À propos du système E2019 Parity error. Power cycle AC. Erreur de parité. Coupez l'alimentation secteur du système pendant 10 secondes, puis redémarrez ce dernier. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. E201A SuperIO failure. Power cycle AC. Panne du SIO. Coupez l'alimentation secteur du système pendant 10 secondes, puis redémarrez ce dernier. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. E201B Keyboard Controller error. Power cycle AC. Panne du contrôleur du clavier. Coupez l'alimentation secteur du système pendant 10 secondes, puis redémarrez ce dernier. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. E201C SMI initialization failure. Power cycle AC. Échec d'initialisation SMI. Coupez l'alimentation secteur du système pendant 10 secondes, puis redémarrez ce dernier. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. E201D Shutdown test failure. Power cycle AC. Échec du test d'arrêt du BIOS. Coupez l'alimentation secteur du système pendant 10 secondes, puis redémarrez ce dernier. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. Tableau 1-1. Messages d'état affichés sur l'écran LCD (suite) Code Texte Cause Actions correctivesÀ propos du système 39 E201E POST memory test failure. Check DIMMs. Échec du test mémoire pendant l'autotest de démarrage du BIOS. Voir « Dépannage de la mémoire système » à la page 182. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. E2020 CPU configuration failure. Check screen message. Échec de configuration du processeur. Voir les messages d'erreur affichés sur l'écran. Voir « Dépannage du processeur » à la page 191. E2021 Incorrect memory configuration. Review User Guide. Configuration de la mémoire incorrecte. Vérifiez les messages d'erreur spécifiques affichés sur l'écran. Voir « Dépannage de la mémoire système » à la page 182. E2022 General failure during POST. Check screen message. Panne générale après l'affichage vidéo. Voir les messages d'erreur affichés sur l'écran. E2023 BIOS unable to mirror memory. Check DIMMs. Le BIOS du système n'est pas parvenu à activer la mise en miroir de la mémoire en raison d'une barrette de mémoire défectueuse ou d'une configuration incorrecte de la mémoire. Voir « Dépannage de la mémoire système » à la page 182. E2110 Multibit Error on DIMM ##. Reseat DIMM. Une erreur multi-bits (MBE) liée à la barrette de mémoire située dans le logement « ## » s'est produite. Voir « Dépannage de la mémoire système » à la page 182. Tableau 1-1. Messages d'état affichés sur l'écran LCD (suite) Code Texte Cause Actions correctives40 À propos du système E2111 SBE log disabled on DIMM ##. Reseat DIMM. Le BIOS du système a désactivé la consignation des erreurs de mémoire portant sur un seul bit (SBE) jusqu'au prochain redémarrage du système. « ## » représente la barrette de mémoire indiquée par le BIOS. Coupez l'alimentation secteur du système pendant 10 secondes, puis redémarrez ce dernier. Si le problème persiste, voir « Dépannage de la mémoire système » à la page 182. E2113 Mem mirror OFF on DIMM ## & ##. Power cycle AC. Le BIOS du système a désactivé la mise en miroir de la mémoire, car il a détecté qu'une moitié du miroir contenait un nombre d'erreurs trop important. « ## & ## » représente la paire de barrettes de mémoire indiquée par le BIOS. Coupez l'alimentation secteur du système pendant 10 secondes, puis redémarrez ce dernier. Si le problème persiste, voir « Dépannage de la mémoire système » à la page 182. I1910 Intrusion detected. Check chassis cover. Le capot du système a été retiré. Pour information uniquement. I1911 LCD Log Full. Check SEL to review all Errors. Message de surcharge de l'écran LCD. L'écran LCD ne peut afficher que dix messages d'erreur à la suite. Le onzième message indique à l'utilisateur de consulter le journal d'événements du système (SEL) pour plus de détails sur ces derniers. Reportez-vous au journal des événements du système pour plus de détails sur les événements. Coupez l'alimentation secteur du système pendant 10 secondes ou effacez le contenu du journal des événements du système. Tableau 1-1. Messages d'état affichés sur l'écran LCD (suite) Code Texte Cause Actions correctivesÀ propos du système 41 I1912 SEL full. Review & clear log. Le journal d'événements du système (SEL) est plein et n'est plus en mesure d'enregistrer d'autres événements. Recherchez des informations complémentaires dans le journal des événements du système, puis effacez le contenu de celui-ci. W1228 RAID Controller battery capacity < 24hr. Prévient que la batterie RAID dispose de moins de 24 heures de charge. Chargez complètement la batterie RAID de sorte que son autonomie dépasse 24 heures. Si le problème persiste, remplacez la batterie RAID. Voir « Installation d'une batterie RAID » à la page 131. W1627 Power required > PSU wattage. Check PSU and config. La configuration du système requiert plus de puissance que ne peut en produire le bloc d'alimentation. Mettez le système hors tension, réduisez les paramètres de la configuration matérielle ou installez des blocs d'alimentation plus puissants, puis redémarrez le système. W1628 Performance degraded. Check PSU and system configuration. La configuration du système requiert plus de puissance que peut en produire le bloc d'alimentation, mais le système peut démarrer en mode de performances réduites. Mettez le système hors tension, réduisez les paramètres de la configuration matérielle ou installez des blocs d'alimentation plus puissants, puis redémarrez le système. REMARQUE : pour obtenir le nom complet d'une abréviation ou connaître la signification d'un sigle utilisé dans ce tableau, reportez-vous au Glossaire à l'adresse : support.dell.com/manuals. Tableau 1-1. Messages d'état affichés sur l'écran LCD (suite) Code Texte Cause Actions correctives42 À propos du système Messages système Le système affiche des messages d'erreur pour vous informer qu'un incident s'est produit. REMARQUE : si vous recevez un message système qui n'est pas répertorié dans le tableau, reportez-vous à la documentation de l'application que vous utilisiez au moment où le message est apparu. Vous pouvez aussi vous référer à la documentation du système d'exploitation pour obtenir une explication du message et l'action conseillée. Tableau 1-2. Messages système Message Causes Actions correctives 128-bit Advanced ECC mode disabled. For 128-bit Advanced ECC, DIMMs must be installed in pairs. Pairs must be matched in size and geometry. L'option ECC avancée a été activée dans le BIOS, mais n'est plus valable en raison d'une configuration de mémoire non prise en charge pouvant être due à une défaillance ou au retrait d'un module de mémoire. Le paramètre de configuration ECC avancée a été désactivé. Recherchez les autres messages concernant la défaillance d'une barrette de mémoire. Reconfigurez les barrettes de mémoire pour les besoins du mode ECC avancé. Voir « Mémoire système » à la page 145.À propos du système 43 Alert! Advanced ECC Memory Mode disabled! Memory configuration does not support Advanced ECC Memory Mode. Le mode Mémoire ECC avancé a été activé dans le programme de configuration du système, mais la configuration actuelle ne prend pas en charge ce mode. Une barrette de mémoire est peut-être défectueuse. Assurez-vous que les barrettes de mémoire sont installées dans une configuration qui prend en charge le mode Mémoire ECC avancé. Consultez les autres messages du système afin d'obtenir des informations supplémentaires sur les causes éventuelles. Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration de la mémoire, voir « Consignes générales pour l'installation des barrettes de mémoire » à la page 146. Si le problème persiste, voir « Dépannage de la mémoire système » à la page 182. Alert! iDRAC6 not responding. Rebooting. La carte iDRAC6 ne répond à aucune communication du BIOS, soit en raison d'un fonctionnement défaillant, soit parce que l'initialisation n'est pas arrivée à son terme. Le système va redémarrer. Attendez que le système redémarre. Alert! iDRAC6 not responding. Power required may exceed PSU wattage. Alert! Continuing system boot accepts the risk that system may power down without warning. La carte iDRAC6 ne répond pas. La carte iDRAC6 a été réinitialisée à distance alors que le système était en cours de démarrage. Le délai nécessaire à l'initialisation de la carte iDRAC6 à la suite d'une reprise de l'alimentation secteur est plus long qu'en temps normal. Coupez l'alimentation secteur du système pendant 10 secondes, puis redémarrez ce dernier. Tableau 1-2. Messages système (suite) Message Causes Actions correctives44 À propos du système Alert! Node Interleaving disabled! Memory configuration does not support Node Interleaving. La configuration de la mémoire ne prend pas en charge l'entrelacement des nœuds, ou bien celui-ci n'est plus pris en charge en raison d'un changement intervenu dans la configuration. L'exécution du système est possible, mais sans entrelacement des nœuds. Les barrettes de mémoire doivent être installées dans une configuration prenant en charge l'entrelacement des nœuds. Consultez les autres messages du système afin d'obtenir des informations supplémentaires sur les causes éventuelles. Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration de la mémoire, voir « Consignes générales pour l'installation des barrettes de mémoire » à la page 146. Si le problème persiste, voir « Dépannage de la mémoire système » à la page 182. Alert! Power required exceeds PSU wattage. Check PSU and system configuration. Alert! Continuing system boot accepts the risk that system may power down without warning. Il se peut que la configuration système du ou des processeur(s), des barrettes de mémoire et des cartes d'extension ne soit pas prise en charge par les blocs d'alimentation. Si la mise à niveau d'un composant du système vient d'être effectuée, rétablissez la configuration antérieure. Si l'amorçage du système s'effectue sans émettre cet avertissement, cela indique que les composants ayant été remplacés ne sont pas pris en charge par ce bloc d'alimentation. Si des blocs d'alimentation à consommation intelligente (Energy Smart) sont installés, remplacez-les par des blocs d'alimentation haute performance (High Output) afin de pouvoir utiliser les composants. Voir « Blocs d'alimentation » à la page 104. Tableau 1-2. Messages système (suite) Message Causes Actions correctivesÀ propos du système 45 Alert! Redundant memory disabled! Memory configuration does not support redundant memory. La mise en miroir de la mémoire a été activée dans le programme de configuration du système, mais la configuration actuelle ne prend pas en charge la redondance de la mémoire. Une barrette de mémoire est peut-être défectueuse. Assurez-vous que les barrettes de mémoire ne sont pas défectueuses. Voir « Dépannage de la mémoire système » à la page 182. Réinitialisez le paramètre de la mémoire, le cas échéant. Voir « Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI » à la page 65. Alert! System fatal error during previous boot. Une erreur a provoqué le redémarrage du système. Consultez les autres messages du système afin d'obtenir des informations supplémentaires sur les causes éventuelles. BIOS MANUFACTURING MODE detected. MANUFACTURING MODE will be cleared before the next boot. System reboot required for normal operation. Le système est en mode usine. Redémarrez le système pour désactiver le mode usine. BIOS Update Attempt Failed! La tentative de mise à jour à distance du BIOS a échoué. Faites une nouvelle tentative de mise à jour du BIOS. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. Tableau 1-2. Messages système (suite) Message Causes Actions correctives46 À propos du système Caution! NVRAM_CLR jumper is installed on system board. Le cavalier NVRAM_CLR est installé en position de réinitialisation. Le CMOS a été réinitialisé. Placez le cavalier NVRAM_CLR sur la position par défaut (broches 3 et 5). Pour identifier l'emplacement du cavalier, voir Figure 6-1. Redémarrez le système et entrez de nouveau les paramètres du BIOS. Voir « Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI » à la page 65. CPU set to minimum frequency. La vitesse du processeur peut être définie intentionnellement sur une valeur plus faible afin de réduire la consommation. Si ce paramètre n'a pas été défini intentionnellement, recherchez la présence éventuelle d'autres messages du système pouvant indiquer les causes du problème. CPU x installed with no memory. Des barrettes de mémoire sont requises, mais aucune barrette n'est installée dans les logements de mémoire correspondant au processeur indiqué. Installez des barrettes de mémoire pour le processeur. Voir « Mémoire système » à la page 145. Tableau 1-2. Messages système (suite) Message Causes Actions correctivesÀ propos du système 47 CPUs with different cache sizes detected. Des processeurs non compatibles entre eux ont été installés sur le système. Assurez-vous que tous les processeurs présentent des caractéristiques identiques en termes de capacité de mémoire cache, de nombre de cœurs et de processeurs logiques, mais aussi de fréquence d'alimentation. Assurez-vous que les processeurs sont correctement installés. Voir « Processeurs » à la page 154. CPUs with different core sizes detected! System halted. CPUs with different logical processors detected! System halted. CPUs with different power rating detected! System halted. Current boot mode is set to UEFI. Please ensure compatible bootable media is available. Use the system setup program to change the boot mode as needed. L'amorçage du système a échoué, car le mode d'amorçage UEFI est activé dans le BIOS alors que le paramètre défini dans le système d'exploitation est autre que le mode UEFI. Assurez-vous que le mode d'amorçage est correctement défini et que le support d'amorçage approprié est disponible. Voir « Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI » à la page 65. Decreasing available memory Barrettes de mémoire défectueuses ou mal installées. Réinstallez les barrettes de mémoire. Voir « Dépannage de la mémoire système » à la page 182. Tableau 1-2. Messages système (suite) Message Causes Actions correctives48 À propos du système DIMM configuration on each CPU should match. Configuration de mémoire non valide sur un système biprocesseur. La configuration des modules de mémoire doit être identique entre les processeurs. Assurez-vous que la configuration des barrettes de mémoire est valide. Voir « Consignes générales pour l'installation des barrettes de mémoire » à la page 146. Embedded NICx and NICy : OS NIC=, Management Shared NIC= L'interface de carte réseau du système d'exploitation est définie dans le BIOS. La configuration de l'interface de la carte réseau partagée de gestion s'effectue à l'aide des outils de gestion. Vérifiez les paramètres de la carte réseau dans le logiciel de gestion du système ou dans le programme de configuration du système. Si un problème est indiqué, voir « Dépannage d'une carte réseau » à la page 176. Error 8602 - Auxiliary Device Failure Verify that mouse and keyboard are securely attached to correct connectors Le câble de la souris ou du clavier n'est pas correctement connecté. Rebranchez le câble de la souris ou du clavier. Clavier ou souris défectueux. Vérifiez que la souris ou le clavier fonctionne. Voir « Dépannage d'un périphérique USB » à la page 174. Gate A20 failure. Contrôleur du clavier défectueux ; carte système défectueuse. Voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. General failure. Le système d'exploitation ne peut pas exécuter la commande. Ce message est habituellement suivi d'informations spécifiques. Notez ces informations et prenez les mesures adéquates pour résoudre le problème. Tableau 1-2. Messages système (suite) Message Causes Actions correctivesÀ propos du système 49 Invalid configuration information - please run SETUP program. Une configuration système non valide a provoqué un arrêt du système. Exécutez le programme de configuration du système et vérifiez les paramètres en cours. Voir « Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI » à la page 65. Invalid PCIe card found in the Internal_Storage slot! Le système s'est arrêté, car une carte d'extension PCIe non valide est installée dans le logement dédié au contrôleur de stockage. Retirez la carte d'extension PCIe installée dans le logement dédié et remplacez-la par le contrôleur de stockage intégré. Voir « Carte contrôleur de stockage intégrée » à la page 126. Keyboard controller failure. Contrôleur du clavier défectueux ; carte système défectueuse. Voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. Keyboard data line failure. Keyboard stuck key failure. Le connecteur du câble du clavier n'est pas branché correctement ou le clavier est défectueux. Rebranchez le câble du clavier. Si le problème persiste, voir « Dépannage d'un périphérique USB » à la page 174. Keyboard fuse has failed. Surtension détectée au niveau du connecteur de clavier. Voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. Tableau 1-2. Messages système (suite) Message Causes Actions correctives50 À propos du système Local keyboard may not work because all user accessible USB ports are disabled. If operating locally, power cycle the system and enter system setup program to change settings Les ports USB sont désactivés dans le BIOS du système. Éteignez et redémarrez le système au moyen du bouton d'alimentation, puis accédez au programme de configuration du système pour activer le ou les ports USB. Voir « Accès au programme de configuration du système » à la page 66. Manufacturing mode detected. Le système est en mode usine. Redémarrez le système pour désactiver le mode usine. Maximum rank count exceeded. The following DIMM has been disabled: x Configuration de mémoire non valide. Le système fonctionne, mais la barrette de mémoire spécifiée a été désactivée. Assurez-vous que la configuration des barrettes de mémoire est valide. Voir « Consignes générales pour l'installation des barrettes de mémoire » à la page 146. Memory address line failure at address, read value expecting value. Barrettes de mémoire défectueuses ou mal installées. Voir « Dépannage de la mémoire système » à la page 182. Memory double word logic failure at address, read value expecting value. Barrettes de mémoire défectueuses ou mal installées. Voir « Dépannage de la mémoire système » à la page 182. Tableau 1-2. Messages système (suite) Message Causes Actions correctivesÀ propos du système 51 Memory Initialization Warning: Memory size may be reduced. Configuration de mémoire non valide. Le système fonctionne, mais avec une capacité de mémoire inférieure à la capacité physiquement disponible. Assurez-vous que la configuration des barrettes de mémoire est valide. Voir « Consignes générales pour l'installation des barrettes de mémoire » à la page 146. Memory odd/even logic failure at address, read value expecting value. Barrettes de mémoire défectueuses ou mal installées. Voir « Dépannage de la mémoire système » à la page 182. Memory write/read failure at address, read value expecting value. Barrettes de mémoire défectueuses ou mal installées. Voir « Dépannage de la mémoire système » à la page 182. Memory set to minimum frequency. La fréquence de la mémoire peut être définie intentionnellement sur une valeur plus faible afin de réduire la consommation. Si ce paramètre n'a pas été défini intentionnellement, recherchez la présence éventuelle d'autres messages du système pouvant indiquer les causes du problème. Il se peut que la configuration actuelle de la mémoire prenne en charge uniquement la fréquence minimale. Assurez-vous que la configuration de la mémoire prend en charge les fréquences plus élevées. Voir « Consignes générales pour l'installation des barrettes de mémoire » à la page 146. Memory tests terminated by keystroke. Test de la mémoire interrompu à l'aide de la touche Espace lors de l'autotest de démarrage (POST). Pour information uniquement. Tableau 1-2. Messages système (suite) Message Causes Actions correctives52 À propos du système MEMTEST lane failure detected on x. Configuration de mémoire non valide. Une barrette de mémoire incompatible a été installée. Assurez-vous que la configuration des barrettes de mémoire est valide. Voir « Consignes générales pour l'installation des barrettes de mémoire » à la page 146. Mirror mode disabled. For mirror mode, DIMMs must be installed in pairs. Pairs must be matched in size and geometry. La configuration de la mémoire n'est pas conforme au paramètre du BIOS. Le paramètre du BIOS a été désactivé. Configurez de nouveau les barrettes de mémoire pour les besoins du mode de mise en miroir. Voir « Mémoire système » à la page 145. No boot device available. Sous-système du lecteur optique ou du disque dur défectueux ou manquant ; disque dur défectueux ou manquant ; aucune clé USB amorçable installée. Utilisez une clé USB, un CD ou un disque dur amorçable. Si le problème persiste, voir « Dépannage d'une carte SD interne » à la page 184, « Dépannage d'un périphérique USB » à la page 174, « Dépannage d'un lecteur optique » à la page 186 et « Dépannage d'un disque dur » à la page 187. Voir la section « Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI » à la page 65 pour plus d'informations sur la définition de la séquence d'amorçage. Tableau 1-2. Messages système (suite) Message Causes Actions correctivesÀ propos du système 53 No boot sector on hard drive. Paramètres incorrects dans le programme de configuration du système ou aucun système d'exploitation sur le disque dur. Vérifiez les paramètres de configuration des disques durs dans le programme de configuration du système. Voir « Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI » à la page 65. Si nécessaire, installez le système d'exploitation sur le disque dur. Voir la documentation du système d'exploitation. No timer tick interrupt. Carte système défectueuse. Voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. PCI BIOS failed to install. Un échec de la somme de contrôle du BIOS du périphérique PCIe (Option ROM) a été détecté lors de la duplication miroir. Connexion incorrecte des câbles d'une ou de plusieurs cartes d'extension ; une ou plusieurs cartes d'extension défectueuses ou mal installées. Réinstallez la ou les cartes d'extension. Vérifiez que tous les câbles sont correctement branchés sur la ou les carte(s) d'extension. Si le problème persiste, voir « Dépannage des cartes d'extension » à la page 189. PCIe Training Error : Expected Link Width is x, Actual Link Width is y Carte PCIe défectueuse ou mal installée dans le logement spécifié. Réinstallez la carte PCIe dans le logement indiqué. Voir « Dépannage des cartes d'extension » à la page 189. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. Tableau 1-2. Messages système (suite) Message Causes Actions correctives54 À propos du système Plug & Play Configuration Error Une erreur s'est produite lors de l'initialisation d'un périphérique PCIe ; la carte système est défectueuse. Installez le cavalier NVRAM_CLR dans la position de réinitialisation (broches 1 et 3) et redémarrez le système. Pour identifier l'emplacement du cavalier, voir Figure 6-1. Si le problème persiste, voir « Dépannage des cartes d'extension » à la page 189. Quad rank DIMM detected after single rank or dual rank DIMM in socket. Configuration de mémoire non valide. Assurez-vous que la configuration des barrettes de mémoire est valide. Voir « Consignes générales pour l'installation des barrettes de mémoire » à la page 146. Read fault. Requested sector not found. Le système d'exploitation ne peut pas lire le disque dur, le lecteur optique ou le périphérique USB, le système n'a pas pu trouver un secteur spécifique sur le disque ou le secteur demandé est défectueux. Remplacez le support optique ou le support/périphérique USB. Assurez-vous que les câbles du fond de panier SAS, USB ou SATA sont correctement branchés. Voir « Dépannage d'un périphérique USB » à la page 174, « Dépannage d'un lecteur optique » à la page 186 ou « Dépannage d'un disque dur » à la page 187 pour vérifier si les lecteurs installés dans votre système sont adaptés. SATA Portx device not found. Aucun périphérique n'est connecté au port SATA spécifié. Pour information uniquement. Tableau 1-2. Messages système (suite) Message Causes Actions correctivesÀ propos du système 55 SATA port x device autosensing error. SATA port x device configuration error. SATA port x device error. Le périphérique connecté au port SATA spécifié est défectueux. Remplacez le périphérique défectueux. Sector not found. Seek error. Seek operation failed. Disque dur, périphérique USB ou support USB défectueux. Remplacez le support USB ou le périphérique. Assurezvous que les câbles USB ou du fond de panier SAS sont correctement connectés. Voir « Dépannage d'un périphérique USB » à la page 174 ou « Dépannage d'un disque dur » à la page 187 selon le ou les lecteurs installés sur votre système. Shutdown failure. Erreur système générale. Voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. The amount of system memory has changed. De la mémoire a été ajoutée ou supprimée, ou une barrette de mémoire est défectueuse. Si vous venez d'ajouter ou de supprimer de la mémoire, ce message s'affiche uniquement pour information. Vous pouvez ne pas en tenir compte. Dans le cas contraire, consultez le journal d'événements du système pour identifier les erreurs détectées (un bit ou plusieurs bits) et remplacez la barrette de mémoire défectueuse. Voir « Dépannage de la mémoire système » à la page 182. Tableau 1-2. Messages système (suite) Message Causes Actions correctives56 À propos du système The following DIMMs should match in geometry: x,x,... Configuration de mémoire non valide. Les modules de mémoire spécifiés ne correspondent pas du point de vue de la taille, du nombre de rangées ou du nombre de canaux de données. Assurez-vous que la configuration des barrettes de mémoire est valide. Voir « Consignes générales pour l'installation des barrettes de mémoire » à la page 146. The following DIMMs should match in rank count: x,x,... The following DIMMs should match in size: x x,... The following DIMMs should match in size and geometry: x,x,... The following DIMMs should match in size and rank count: x,x,... Thermal sensor not detected on x. Une barrette de mémoire non équipée d'un capteur thermique est installée dans le logement de mémoire spécifié Remplacez la barrette de mémoire. Voir « Mémoire système » à la page 145. Time-of-day clock stopped. Batterie ou puce défectueuse. Voir « Dépannage de la pile du système » à la page 179. Tableau 1-2. Messages système (suite) Message Causes Actions correctivesÀ propos du système 57 Time-of-day not set - please run SETUP program. Paramètres d'heure ou de date incorrects ; batterie du système défectueuse. Vérifiez les paramètres d'heure et de date. Voir « Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI » à la page 65. Si le problème persiste, remplacez la batterie du système. Voir « Batterie du système » à la page 160. Timer chip counter 2 failed. Carte système défectueuse. Voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. TPM configuration operation honored. System will now reset. Une commande de configuration TPM a été saisie. Le système va redémarrer et exécuter la commande. Pour information uniquement. TPM configuration operation is pending. Press (I) to Ignore OR (M) to Modify to allow this change and reset the system. WARNING: Modifying could prevent security. Ce message s'affiche lors du redémarrage du système après la saisie d'une commande de configuration TPM. Une intervention de l'utilisateur est nécessaire pour poursuivre. Entrez l'option I ou M pour poursuivre. TPM failure. Une fonction TPM (Trusted Platform Module) a échoué. Voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. Tableau 1-2. Messages système (suite) Message Causes Actions correctives58 À propos du système Unable to launch System Services image. System halted! L'arrêt du système s'est produit après une pression sur la touche F10, car l'image System Services est endommagée dans le micrologiciel du système ou elle a été perdue suite au remplacement de la carte système. Redémarrez le système et mettez à jour le référentiel Unified Server Configurator au niveau le plus récent afin de restaurer toutes les fonctionnalités. Voir la documentation Unified Server Configurator pour plus d'informations. Il se peut que la mémoire flash de la carte iDRAC6 Enterprise soit altérée. Restaurez la mémoire Flash en téléchargeant la version la plus récente depuis le site support.dell.com. Reportezvous au guide d'utilisation de la carte iDRAC6 pour obtenir des instructions concernant le remplacement sur site de la mémoire Flash. Unexpected interrupt in protected mode. Barrettes de mémoire mal installées ou contrôleur de clavier/souris défectueux. Réinstallez les barrettes de mémoire. Voir « Dépannage de la mémoire système » à la page 182. Si le problème persiste, voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. Unsupported CPU combination. Unsupported CPU stepping detected. Le ou les processeurs ne sont pas pris en charge par le système. Installez un processeur ou une combinaison de processeurs prise en charge. Voir « Processeurs » à la page 154. Unsupported DIMM detected. The following DIMM has been disabled: x Configuration de mémoire non valide. Le système fonctionne, mais la barrette de mémoire spécifiée a été désactivée. Assurez-vous que la configuration des barrettes de mémoire est valide. Voir « Consignes générales pour l'installation des barrettes de mémoire » à la page 146. Tableau 1-2. Messages système (suite) Message Causes Actions correctivesÀ propos du système 59 Unsupported memory configuration. DIMM mismatch across slots detected : x,x,... Configuration de mémoire non valide. Les barrettes de mémoire installées dans les logements spécifiés ne correspondent pas. Assurez-vous que la configuration des barrettes de mémoire est valide. Voir « Consignes générales pour l'installation des barrettes de mémoire » à la page 146. Unused memory detected. DIMM’s installed in the following slot are not available when in mirror or 128-bit advanced ECC modes: x,x,x La configuration de la mémoire n'est pas optimale pour la mise en miroir ou le mode de mémoire ECC avancé. Les barrettes installées dans les logements spécifiés sont inutilisées. Configurez à nouveau la mémoire pour les besoins de la mise en miroir ou du mode ECC avancé, ou changez le mode de mémoire en sélectionnant l'option Optimized (Optimisé) dans l'écran de configuration du BIOS. Voir « Mémoire système » à la page 145. Warning: A fatal error has caused system reset! Please check the system event log! Une erreur fatale a provoqué le redémarrage du système. Consultez les informations qui ont été consignées dans le journal des événements du système (SEL) lorsque cette erreur s'est produite. Si le journal signale que des composants sont défectueux, voir la section correspondante du chapitre « Dépannage du système » à la page 173. Warning: Control Panel is not installed. Le panneau de configuration n'est pas installé ou son câble n'est pas correctement connecté. Installez le panneau de commande, ou vérifiez le câblage entre le module d'affichage, la carte du panneau de commande et la carte système. Voir « Assemblage du panneau de commande » à la page 162. Tableau 1-2. Messages système (suite) Message Causes Actions correctives60 À propos du système Warning! No micro code update loaded for processor n. La mise à jour du microcode a échoué. Mettez le micrologiciel du BIOS à jour. Voir « Obtention d'aide » à la page 209. Warning! Power required exceeds PSU wattage. Check PSU and system configuration. Warning! Performance degraded. CPU and memory set to minimum frequencies to meet PSU wattage. System will reboot. Il se peut que la configuration système des processeurs, des barrettes de mémoire et des cartes d'extension ne soit pas prise en charge par les blocs d'alimentation. Si la mise à niveau d'un composant du système vient d'être effectuée, rétablissez la configuration antérieure. Si l'amorçage du système s'effectue sans émettre cet avertissement, cela indique que les composants ayant été remplacés ne sont pas pris en charge par ce bloc d'alimentation. Si des blocs d'alimentation à consommation intelligente (Energy Smart) sont installés, remplacez-les par des blocs d'alimentation haute performance (High Output) afin de pouvoir utiliser les composants. Voir « Blocs d'alimentation » à la page 104. Tableau 1-2. Messages système (suite) Message Causes Actions correctivesÀ propos du système 61 Warning! PSU mismatch. PSU redundancy lost. Check PSU Un bloc d'alimentation haute performance et un bloc à consommation intelligente (Energy Smart) sont installés simultanément sur le même système. Installez au choix deux blocs d'alimentation haute performance ou à faible consommation (Energy Smart) sur le système. Vous pouvez également n'activer qu'un seul bloc d'alimentation sur le système jusqu'à ce que vous disposiez de deux blocs d'alimentation de type identique. Voir « Dépannage des blocs d'alimentation » à la page 180. Warning! Unsupported memory configuration detected. The memory configuration is not optimal. The recommended memory configuration is: Configuration de mémoire non valide. Le système fonctionne, mais à performances réduites. Assurez-vous que la configuration des barrettes de mémoire est valide. Voir « Consignes générales pour l'installation des barrettes de mémoire » à la page 146. Si le problème persiste, voir « Dépannage de la mémoire système » à la page 182. Tableau 1-2. Messages système (suite) Message Causes Actions correctives62 À propos du système Messages d'avertissement Un message d'avertissement vous prévient d'un problème possible et vous invite à réagir avant que le système ne poursuive une tâche. Par exemple, lorsque vous lancez le formatage d'une unité, un message vous avertit que vous risquez de perdre toutes les données qu'elle contient. Les messages d'avertissement interrompent la tâche en cours et vous demandent de répondre en tapant y (yes [oui]) ou n (no [non]). REMARQUE : les messages d'avertissement sont générés par une application ou par le système d'exploitation. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la documentation fournie avec le système d'exploitation ou l'application. Messages de diagnostic Les utilitaires de diagnostic du système peuvent générer des messages si vous exécutez des tests de diagnostic sur votre système. Pour plus d'informations sur les diagnostics du système, voir « Exécution des diagnostics du système » à la page 193. Write fault. Write fault on selected drive. Périphérique USB, support USB, assemblage du lecteur optique, disque dur ou sous-système de disque dur défectueux. Remplacez le support USB ou le périphérique. Assurezvous que les câbles USB, du fond de panier SAS ou SATA sont correctement branchés. Voir « Dépannage d'un périphérique USB » à la page 174, « Dépannage d'une carte SD interne » à la page 184 et « Dépannage d'un disque dur » à la page 187. REMARQUE : pour obtenir le nom complet d'une abréviation ou connaître la signification d'un sigle utilisé dans ce tableau, reportez-vous au Glossaire à l'adresse : support.dell.com/manuals. Tableau 1-2. Messages système (suite) Message Causes Actions correctivesÀ propos du système 63 Messages d'alerte Le logiciel de gestion des systèmes génère des messages d'alerte pour votre système. Ce sont des messages d'information, d'état, d'avertissement ou de signalisation de panne relatifs aux lecteurs, à la température, aux ventilateurs et à l'alimentation. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la documentation du logiciel Systems Management Software. Autres informations utiles AVERTISSEMENT : voir les informations sur la sécurité et les réglementations fournies avec votre système. Les informations sur la garantie se trouvent soit dans ce document, soit dans un document distinct. • La documentation fournie avec le rack indique comment installer le système dans un rack. • Le Guide de mise en route présente les fonctionnalités du système, les procédures de configuration et les spécifications techniques. • Tous les supports fournis avec le système contenant de la documentation et des outils permettant de configurer et de gérer le système, y compris les supports du système d'exploitation, du logiciel de gestion du système, des mises à jour système et des composants système que vous avez achetés avec le système. REMARQUE : vérifiez toujours si des mises à jour sont disponibles sur le site support.dell.com et lisez-les en premier, car elles remplacent souvent les informations contenues dans les autres documents.64 À propos du systèmeUtilisation du programme de configuration du système 65 et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Le programme de configuration du système est le programme du BIOS qui vous permet de gérer le matériel et de spécifier les options au niveau du BIOS. À partir du programme de configuration du système, vous pouvez effectuer les tâches suivantes : • modifier les paramètres NVRAM après l'ajout ou la suppression de matériel • afficher la configuration matérielle du système • activer ou désactiver les périphériques intégrés • définir les seuils de gestion de l'alimentation et des performances • gérer la sécurité du système Choix du mode d'amorçage du système Le programme de configuration du système vous permet de spécifier le mode d'amorçage pour l'installation du système d'exploitation : • Le mode d'amorçage du BIOS (par défaut) est l'interface standard d'amorçage au niveau du BIOS. • Le mode d'amorçage UEFI est une interface d'amorçage 64 bits améliorée, basée sur les spécifications UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) et superposée au BIOS du système. Pour plus d'informations sur cette interface, voir « Accès au Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI » à la page 83. La sélection du mode d'amorçage s'effectue dans le champ Boot Mode (Mode d'amorçage) de l'écran Boot Settings (Paramètres d'amorçage) du programme de configuration du système. Voir « Écran Boot Settings (Paramètres d'amorçage) » à la page 73. Une fois que vous avez spécifié le mode d'amorçage, le système démarre selon le mode d'amorçage choisi et l'installation du système d'exploitation s'effectue à partir de ce mode. Par la suite, vous devez démarrer le système dans le même mode d'amorçage (BIOS ou UEFI) pour accéder au système d'exploitation installé. Toute tentative de démarrage du système d'exploitation à partir de l'autre mode d'amorçage provoque son arrêt immédiat.66 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI REMARQUE : les systèmes d'exploitation doivent être compatibles avec le mode UEFI (par exemple, Microsoft ® Windows Server ® 2008 version 64 bits) pour être installés en utilisant ce mode d'amorçage. Les systèmes d'exploitation 32 bits et DOS ne prennent pas en charge le mode d'amorçage UEFI et ne peuvent être installés qu'avec le mode d'amorçage du BIOS. Accès au programme de configuration du système 1 Allumez ou redémarrez votre système. 2 Appuyez sur dès l'apparition du message suivant : = System Setup (Configuration du système) REMARQUE : le système ne répond pas tant que le clavier USB n'est pas actif. Si le système d'exploitation commence à se charger alors que vous n'avez pas encore appuyé sur , attendez qu'il finisse de démarrer, puis redémarrez-le et réessayez. Réponse aux messages d'erreur Si un message d'erreur s'affiche lors du démarrage du système, notez-en le contenu. Voir « Messages système » à la page 42 pour obtenir une explication du message, ainsi que des suggestions pour corriger les erreurs. REMARQUE : après l'installation d'une mise à niveau de mémoire, il est normal que votre système affiche, lors de son premier démarrage, un message signalant que la taille de la mémoire système a changé. Utilisation des touches de navigation du programme de configuration du système Touches Action Flèche vers le haut ou Permet de revenir au champ précédent. Flèche vers le bas ou Permet de passer au champ suivant. Barre d'espacement, <+>, <–>, flèche vers la gauche ou vers la droite Fait passer le curseur d'un paramètre à un autre dans un champ. Dans certains champs, vous pouvez également saisir la valeur appropriée.Utilisation du programme de configuration du système 67 et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI REMARQUE : dans le cas de la plupart des options, les modifications effectuées sont enregistrées mais ne prennent effet qu'au redémarrage du système. Options de configuration du système Écran principal Figure 2-1. Écran principal du programme de configuration du système REMARQUE : les options du programme de configuration du système varient en fonction de la configuration du système. <Échap> Permet de quitter le programme de configuration du système et de redémarrer le système si des modifications ont été apportées. Permet d'afficher le fichier d'aide du programme de configuration du système. Touches Action68 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI REMARQUE : les valeurs par défaut du programme de configuration du système sont répertoriées sous l'option correspondante dans les sections suivantes, le cas échéant. Option Description System Time (Heure système) Permet de régler l'heure de l'horloge interne du système. System Date (Date système) Permet de régler la date du calendrier interne du système. Memory Settings (Paramètres de la mémoire) Permet d'afficher des informations relatives à la mémoire installée. Voir « Écran Memory Settings (Paramètres de la mémoire) » à la page 70. Processor Settings (Paramètres du processeur) Permet d'afficher des informations relatives aux processeurs (vitesse, taille de la mémoire cache, etc.). Voir « Écran Processor Settings (Paramètres du processeur) » à la page 71. SATA Settings (Paramètres SATA) Affiche un écran permettant d'activer ou de désactiver le contrôleur et les ports SATA intégrés. Voir « Écran SATA Settings (Paramètres SATA) » à la page 72. Boot Settings (Paramètres d'amorçage) Affiche un écran permettant de spécifier le mode d'amorçage (BIOS ou UEFI). Dans le cas du mode d'amorçage BIOS, vous pouvez également spécifier les périphériques d'amorçage. Voir « Écran Boot Settings (Paramètres d'amorçage) » à la page 73. Integrated Devices (Périphériques intégrés) Affiche un écran permettant d'activer ou de désactiver les contrôleurs de périphérique et les ports intégrés, et de spécifier les fonctionnalités et options associées. Voir « Écran Integrated Devices (Périphériques intégrés) » à la page 74. PCI IRQ Assignment (Affectation des IRQ PCI) Affiche un écran permettant de modifier l'IRQ affectée à chaque périphérique intégré du bus PCI, ainsi qu'à toutes les cartes d'extension nécessitant une IRQ. Voir « Écran PCI IRQ Assignments (Affectations des IRQ PCI) » à la page 76.Utilisation du programme de configuration du système 69 et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Serial Communication (Communications série) Affiche un écran permettant d'activer ou de désactiver les ports série et de spécifier les fonctionnalités et options associées. Voir « Écran Serial Communication (Communications série) » à la page 76. Embedded Server Management (Gestion de serveur intégrée) Affiche un écran permettant de configurer les options de l'écran LCD du panneau avant et de définir une chaîne personnalisée affichée sur cet écran. Voir « Écran Embedded Server Management (Gestion de serveur intégrée) » à la page 78. Power Management (Gestion de l'alimentation) Permet de gérer la consommation d'énergie du ou des processeur(s), des ventilateurs et des barrettes de mémoire au moyen de paramètres prédéfinis ou personnalisés. Voir « Écran Power Management (Gestion de l'alimentation) » à la page 79. System Security (Sécurité du système) Affiche un écran permettant de configurer les fonctions de mot de passe du système et de mot de passe de configuration. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Écran System Security (Sécurité du système) » à la page 80, « Utilisation du mot de passe du système » à la page 86 et « Utilisation du mot de passe de configuration » à la page 89. Keyboard NumLock (Verr Num clavier) (Option par défaut : On [Activé]) Détermine si le système démarre en mode Verr Num, s'il est équipé d'un clavier à 101 ou 102 touches (cette option ne s'applique pas aux claviers à 84 touches). Report Keyboard Errors (Signaler les erreurs de clavier) (Option par défaut : Report [Signaler]) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver la signalisation des erreurs de clavier au cours de l'auto-test de démarrage. Sélectionnez Report (Signaler) pour les systèmes hôtes équipés de claviers. Sélectionnez Do Not Report (Ne pas signaler) pour supprimer tous les messages d'erreur liés au clavier ou à son contrôleur pendant l'auto-test de démarrage. Ce paramètre n'a aucune incidence sur le fonctionnement du clavier lui-même si un clavier est connecté au système. Option Description70 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Écran Memory Settings (Paramètres de la mémoire) F1/F2 Prompt on Error (Invite F1/F2 en cas d'erreur) (Option par défaut : Enabled [Activé]) Permet au système d'arrêter les erreurs pendant l'autotest de démarrage, ce qui permet à l'utilisateur d'observer les événements qui peuvent passer inaperçus pendant l'auto-test. L'utilisateur peut appuyer sur pour poursuivre, ou sur pour accéder au programme de configuration du système. PRÉCAUTION : si vous désactivez cette option (Disabled), le système ne s'arrêtera pas en cas d'erreur lors de l'auto-test de démarrage. Toutes les erreurs critiques sont affichées et enregistrées dans le journal des événements du système. Option Description System Memory Size (Taille de la mémoire système) Affiche la taille de la mémoire système. System Memory Type (Type de mémoire système) Affiche le type de mémoire système. System Memory Speed (Vitesse de la mémoire système) Affiche la vitesse de la mémoire système. Video Memory (Mémoire vidéo) Affiche la quantité de mémoire vidéo disponible. System Memory Testing (Test de la mémoire système) (Option par défaut : Enabled [Activé]) Indique si la mémoire système doit être testée à chaque amorçage. Les options disponibles sont Enabled (Activé) et Disabled (Désactivé). Option DescriptionUtilisation du programme de configuration du système 71 et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Écran Processor Settings (Paramètres du processeur) Memory Operating Mode (Mode de fonctionnement de la mémoire) Si la configuration de la mémoire le permet, ce champ affiche le type de fonctionnement de la mémoire. Lorsque l'option Optimizer Mode (Mode Optimiseur) est sélectionnée, les contrôleurs de mémoire s'exécutent de façon indépendante afin d'optimiser les performances de la mémoire. Lorsque l'option Mirror Mode (Mode miroir) est sélectionnée, la mise en miroir de la mémoire est activée. Lorsque l'option Advanced ECC Mode (Fonctions ECC avancées) est sélectionnée, deux contrôleurs sont fusionnés en mode 128 bits pour former une configuration ECC multi-bits avancée. Pour plus d'informations sur les modes de fonctionnement de la mémoire, voir « Mémoire système » à la page 145. Node Interleaving (Entrelacement de nœuds) (Option par défaut : Disabled [Désactivé]) Lorsque ce champ est activé (Enabled), l'entrelacement de la mémoire est pris en charge si une configuration de mémoire symétrique est installée. Si le champ est désactivé (Disabled), le système prend en charge les configurations de mémoire asymétriques NUMA (NonUniform Memory Architecture). Option Description 64-bit (64 bits) Indique si le ou les processeurs prennent en charge les extensions 64 bits. Core Speed (Vitesse du cœur) Affiche la vitesse d'horloge du processeur. Bus Speed (Vitesse du bus) Affiche la vitesse de bus du processeur. Logical Processor (Processeur logique) (Option par défaut : Enabled [Activé]) Sur les processeurs prenant en charge la technologie SMT (Simultaneous Multi-Threading), chaque cœur de processeur prend en charge jusqu'à deux processeurs logiques. Si ce champ est activé (Enabled), le BIOS signale la présence des deux processeurs logiques. Si le champ est désactivé (Disabled), la surveillance du BIOS ne s'applique qu'à un seul processeur logique. Option Description72 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Écran SATA Settings (Paramètres SATA) Virtualization Technology (Technologie de virtualisation) (Option par défaut : Disabled [Désactivé]) L'option Enabled (Activé) permet aux logiciels de virtualisation d'utiliser cette technologie intégrée au processeur. REMARQUE : désactivez cette fonction si vous ne souhaitez pas que le système exécute un logiciel de virtualisation. Execute Disable (Désactivation de l'exécution) (Option par défaut : Enabled [Activé]) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver la technologie de protection de la mémoire (Execute Disable Memory Protection Technology). Number of Cores per Processor (Nombre de cœurs par processeur) (Option par défaut : All [Tout]) Si la valeur All (Tout) est sélectionnée, le nombre maximal de cœurs de chaque processeur est activé. Turbo Mode (Mode Turbo) Si la technologie Turbo Boost est prise en charge par les processeurs, cette option permet d'activer ou de désactiver le mode Turbo. C States (États C) (Option par défaut : Enabled [Activé]) Lorsque l'option Enabled (Activé) est sélectionnée, les processeurs peuvent fonctionner dans tous les états d'alimentation disponibles. Processor X ID (ID processeur X) Affiche la série, le modèle, la taille du cache de niveau 2 et de niveau 3, ainsi que le nombre de cœurs de chaque processeur. Option Description Embedded SATA (SATA intégré) (Option par défaut : ATA Mode [Mode ATA]) L'option ATA Mode (Mode ATA) active le contrôleur SATA intégré. L'option Off (Désactivé) désactive le contrôleur. Port A (Option par défaut : Auto) L'option Auto active la prise en charge du périphérique connecté au port SATA A par le BIOS. L'option Off (Désactivé) désactive la prise en charge du périphérique par le BIOS. Option DescriptionUtilisation du programme de configuration du système 73 et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Écran Boot Settings (Paramètres d'amorçage) Port B (Option par défaut : Off [Désactivé]) L'option Auto active la prise en charge du périphérique connecté au port SATA B par le BIOS. L'option Off (Désactivé) désactive la prise en charge du périphérique par le BIOS. Option Description Boot Mode (Mode d'amorçage) (Option par défaut : BIOS) PRÉCAUTION : le changement de mode d'amorçage peut empêcher le démarrage du système si le système d'exploitation n'a pas été installé selon le même mode d'amorçage. Si le système d'exploitation prend en charge l'interface UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface), vous pouvez définir cette option sur UEFI. La configuration du champ sur BIOS permet de prendre en charge les systèmes d'exploitation non UEFI. REMARQUE : la configuration du champ sur UEFI désactive les champs Boot Sequence (Séquence d'amorçage), Hard-Disk Drive Sequence (Séquence des disques durs) et USB Flash Drive Emulation Type (Type d'émulation lecteur flash USB). Boot Sequence (Séquence d'amorçage) Si le Boot Mode (Mode d'amorçage) est défini sur BIOS, ce champ indique au système l'emplacement des fichiers du système d'exploitation requis pour le démarrage. Si l'option Boot Mode (Mode d'amorçage) est définie sur UEFI, vous pouvez accéder à l'utilitaire de gestion d'amorçage UEFI en redémarrant le système et en appuyant sur lorsque vous y êtes invité. Hard-Disk Drive Sequence (Séquence des lecteurs de disque dur) Détermine l'ordre de démarrage du BIOS à partir des disques durs installés sur le système au cours de l'amorçage. Option Description74 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Écran Integrated Devices (Périphériques intégrés) USB Flash Drive Emulation Type (Type d'émulation du lecteur flash USB) (Option par défaut : Auto) Détermine le type d'émulation pour un lecteur flash USB. L'option Hard disk (Disque dur) permet au lecteur flash USB de fonctionner comme un disque dur. L'option Floppy (Lecteur de disquette) permet au lecteur flash USB de se comporter comme un lecteur de disquette amovible. L'option Auto permet de choisir automatiquement le type d'émulation. L'option Auto permet de choisir automatiquement le type d'émulation approprié pour le périphérique, à l'exception de ceux installés dans le logement de carte SD. Tout périphérique installé dans le logement de carte SD émule automatiquement un disque dur. Si vous installez dans ce logement un périphérique configuré en tant que lecteur de disquette amovible, vous devez sélectionner manuellement l'option Floppy (Lecteur de disquettes) pour définir le type d'émulation. Boot Sequence Retry (Réexécution de la séquence d'amorçage) (Option par défaut : Disabled [Désactivé]) Si ce champ est activé et si le système n'a pas démarré correctement, ce dernier effectue une nouvelle tentative 30 secondes plus tard. Option Description Integrated SAS/RAID Controller (Contrôleur SAS/RAID intégré) (Option par défaut : Enabled [Activé]) Active ou désactive le contrôleur de stockage intégré. User Accessible USB Ports (Ports USB accessibles à l'utilisateur) (Option par défaut : All Ports On [Tous les ports activés]) Active ou désactive les ports USB auxquels l'utilisateur peut accéder. Les options disponibles sont All Ports On (Tous les ports activés), Only Back Ports On (Ports arrière activés) et All Ports Off (Tous les ports désactivés). Option DescriptionUtilisation du programme de configuration du système 75 et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Internal USB Port (Port USB interne) (Option par défaut : On [Activé]) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver le port USB interne. Internal SD Card Port (Port de carte SD interne) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver le port de carte SD interne. Embedded NIC1 and NIC2 (Cartes réseau intégrées NIC1 et NIC2) Embedded NIC3 and NIC4 (Cartes réseau intégrées NIC3 et NIC4) Active ou désactive l'interface du système d'exploitation pour les quatre cartes NIC intégrées. (Il est également possible d'accéder aux cartes réseau via le contrôleur de gestion du système). Embedded Gb NICx (Carte réseau intégrée NICx)(Option par défaut pour la carte réseau 1 : Enabled with PXE [Activé avec PXE], Autres cartes réseau : Enabled [Activé]) Active ou désactive les cartes réseau intégrées. Les options disponibles sont Enabled (Activé), Enabled with PXE (Activé avec PXE), Enabled with iSCSI Boot (Activé avec amorçage iSCSI) et Disabled (Désactivé). La prise en charge PXE permet au système de démarrer à partir du réseau. MAC Address (Adresse Mac) Affiche l'adresse MAC de la carte réseau. Capability Detected (Capacité détectée) Affiche les fonctionnalités de la clé matérielle NIC, si elle est installée. REMARQUE : certaines fonctionnalités de cartes NIC peuvent nécessiter l'installation d'un pilote supplémentaire. OS Watchdog Timer (Temporisateur de surveillance du système d'exploitation) (Option par défaut : Disabled [Désactivé]) Définit une horloge qui surveille l'activité du système d'exploitation et aide à le restaurer s'il cesse de répondre. Lorsque l'option Enabled (Activé) est sélectionnée, le système d'exploitation est autorisé à initialiser l'horloge. Si l'option Disabled (Désactivé) est sélectionnée, l'horloge n'est pas initialisée. REMARQUE : cette fonction ne peut être utilisée qu'avec les systèmes d'exploitation prenant en charge les implémentations WDAT de la spécification ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) 3.0b. Option Description76 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Écran PCI IRQ Assignments (Affectations des IRQ PCI) Écran Serial Communication (Communications série) I/OAT DMA Engine (Moteur DMA I/OAT) (Option par défaut : Disabled [Désactivé]) Active ou désactive la technologie d'accélération des E/S (I/OAT). Embedded Video Controller (Contrôleur vidéo intégré) (Option par défaut : Enabled [Activé]) Active ou désactive la prise en charge du BIOS pour le contrôleur vidéo intégré. REMARQUE : Ce champ ne peut être désactivé que si une carte graphique supplémentaire est installée. Si ce champ est désactivé, certaines fonctionnalités d'accès distant, telles que la gestion virtuelle KVM, sont indisponibles. Option Description (Périphérique PCIe) Utilisez les touches <+> et <-> pour associer manuellement une valeur d'IRQ à un périphérique donné, ou sélectionnez Default (Par défaut) pour permettre au BIOS de sélectionner une valeur d'IRQ au démarrage du système. Option Description Serial Communication (Communications série) (Option par défaut : On without Console Redirection [Activé sans redirection de console]) Indique si les périphériques de communication série (Serial Device 1 [Périphérique série 1] et Serial Device 2 [Périphérique série 2]) sont activés dans le BIOS. La redirection via la console du BIOS peut également être activée et l'adresse de port utilisée peut être spécifiée. Les options disponibles sont : On without Console Redirection (Activé sans redirection de console), On with Console Redirection via COM1 (Activé avec redirection de console via COM1), On with Console Redirection via COM2 (Activé avec redirection de console via COM2) et Off (Désactivé). Option DescriptionUtilisation du programme de configuration du système 77 et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Serial Port Address (Adresse de port série) (Options par défaut : Serial Device 1=COM1, Serial Device2=COM2 [Périphérique série 1= COM1, Périphérique série 2=COM2]) Permet de définir les adresses de port série correspondant aux deux périphériques série. REMARQUE : seul le périphérique série 2 (Serial Device 2) peut être utilisé pour les communications SOL (Serial Over LAN). Pour utiliser la redirection de console via le mode SOL, configurez la même adresse de port pour la redirection de console et le périphérique série. External Serial Connector (Connecteur série externe) Indique si le périphérique série 1 (Serial Device 1), le périphérique série 2 (Serial Device 2) ou le périphérique d'accès à distance (Remote Access Device) a accès au connecteur série externe. REMARQUE : seul le périphérique série 2 (Serial Device 2) peut être utilisé pour les communications SOL (Serial Over LAN). Pour utiliser la redirection de console via le mode SOL, configurez la même adresse de port pour la redirection de console et le périphérique série. Failsafe Baud Rate (Débit (en bauds) de la ligne de secours) (Option par défaut : 115200) Indique si le débit (en bauds) de la ligne de secours est utilisé pour la redirection de console. Le BIOS tente de déterminer automatiquement le débit (en bauds). Le débit (en bauds) de la ligne de secours est appliqué uniquement en cas d'échec de cette tentative. Ce débit ne doit pas être modifié. Remote Terminal Type (Type du terminal distant) (Option par défaut : VT100/VT220) Définit le type de terminal de la console distante, tel que VT100/VT220 ou ANSI. Redirection After Boot (Redirection après démarrage) (Option par défaut : Enabled [Activé]) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver la redirection de console du BIOS lorsque le système d'exploitation est chargé. Option Description78 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Écran Embedded Server Management (Gestion de serveur intégrée) Option Description Front Panel LCD Options (Options de l'écran LCD avant) Les options disponibles sont : User Defined String (Chaîne définie par l'utilisateur), Model Number (Numéro de modèle) ou None (Aucune). Si l'écran d'accueil LCD est configuré sur une option autre que ces trois options, le BIOS indique la valeur « Advanced » (« Avancé ») Dans ce cas, il n'est pas possible de modifier l'option dans le BIOS, sauf si la valeur User Defined String (Chaîne définie par l'utilisateur), Model Number (Numéro de modèle) ou None (Aucun) est restaurée par le biais d'un autre utilitaire de configuration LCD (tel que l'utilitaire de configuration iDRAC ou le menu de l'écran LCD). User-Defined LCD String (Chaîne LCD définie par l'utilisateur) Vous pouvez entrer le nom du système ou un autre identificateur pour qu'il s'affiche sur l'écran du module LCD.Utilisation du programme de configuration du système 79 et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Écran Power Management (Gestion de l'alimentation) Option Description Power Management (Gestion de l'alimentation) Les options possibles sont OS Control (Contrôle du système d'exploitation), Active Power Controller (Contrôleur de l'alimentation actif), Custom (Personnalisé) ou Maximum Performance (Performances maximales). Pour toutes les options autres que Custom (Personnalisé), le BIOS préconfigure les paramètres d'alimentation de cet écran comme suit : • Le paramètre OS Control (Contrôle du système d'exploitation) définit l'alimentation de l'unité centrale sur la valeur OS DBPM (Modulation biphasée différentielle du système d'exploitation), l'alimentation du ventilateur sur Minimum Power (Puissance minimale) et celle de la mémoire sur Maximum Performance (Performances maximales). Lorsque ce paramètre est actif, toutes les informations relatives aux performances des processeurs sont transmises par le BIOS du système au système d'exploitation pour contrôle. Le système d'exploitation définit les performances des processeurs selon l'utilisation de ces derniers. • Le paramètre Active Power Controller (Contrôleur d'alimentation actif) définit l'alimentation de l'unité centrale sur la valeur System DBPM (Modulation biphasée différentielle du système), l'alimentation du ventilateur sur Minimum Power (Puissance minimale) et celle de la mémoire sur Maximum Performance (Performances maximales). Le BIOS définit les performances du processeur sur la base de l'utilisation de celui-ci. • Le paramètre Maximum Performance (Performances maximales) définit tous les champs sur la valeur Maximum Performance. Si vous sélectionnez Custom (Personnalisé), vous pouvez configurer chaque option indépendamment.80 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Écran System Security (Sécurité du système) CPU Power and Performance Management (Gestion de l'alimentation et des performances de l'UC) Les options disponibles sont : OS DBPM (Modulation biphasée différentielle du système d'exploitation), System DBPM (Modulation biphasée différentielle du système), Maximum Performance (Performances maximales) ou Minimum Power (Puissance minimale). Fan Power and Performance Management (Gestion de l'alimentation et des performances du ventilateur) Les options possibles sont : Maximum Performance (Performances maximales) ou Minimum Power (Puissance minimale). Memory Power and Performance Management (Gestion de l'alimentation et des performances de la mémoire) Les options disponibles sont : Maximum Performance (Performances maximales), une fréquence spécifique ou Minimum Power (Puissance minimale). Option Description System Password (Mot de passe du système) Affiche l'état actuel de la fonction de sécurité du mot de passe et permet d'assigner un nouveau mot de passe du système et de le vérifier. REMARQUE : voir « Utilisation du mot de passe du système » à la page 86 pour plus d'informations. Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration) Permet de limiter l'accès au programme de configuration du système à l'aide d'un mot de passe de configuration. REMARQUE : voir « Utilisation du mot de passe du système » à la page 86 pour plus d'informations. Password Status (État du mot de passe) (Option par défaut : Unlocked ([Déverrouillé]) Lorsque Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration) est affecté et ce champ défini sur Locked (Verrouillé), le mot de passe système ne peut être ni modifié ni désactivé au démarrage du système. Voir « Utilisation du mot de passe du système » à la page 86 pour plus d'informations. Option DescriptionUtilisation du programme de configuration du système 81 et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI TPM Security (Sécurité TPM) (Option par défaut : Off [Désactivé]) Définit les modalités de déclaration de la puce TPM (Trusted Platform Module) dans le système. Si l'option Off (Désactivé) est sélectionnée, la présence de la puce TPM n'est pas signalée au système d'exploitation. Si l'option On with Pre-boot Measurements (Activé avec les mesures de pré-amorçage) est sélectionnée, le système signale la présence de la puce TPM au système d'exploitation et conserve les mesures de pré-amorçage dans la puce pendant l'auto-test de démarrage. Si l'option On without Pre-boot Measurements (Activé sans les mesures de pré-amorçage) est sélectionnée, le système signale la présence de la puce TPM au système d'exploitation et ignore les mesures de pré-amorçage. TPM Activation (Activation de la puce TPM) (Option par défaut : No Change [Pas de changement]) Lorsque l'option Activate (Activer) est sélectionnée, la puce TPM est activée par défaut. Lorsque l'option Deactivate (Désactiver) est sélectionnée, la puce TPM est désactivée. L'état No Change (Pas de changement) ne lance aucune action. L'état de fonctionnement de la puce TPM reste inchangé (tous les paramètres utilisateur correspondants sont conservés). REMARQUE : lorsque l'option TPM Security (Sécurité TPM) est définie sur Off (Désactivé), ce champ est accessible en lecture seule. TPM Clear (Effacement TPM) (Option par défaut : No [Non]) PRÉCAUTION : l'effacement de la puce TPM entraîne la perte de toutes les clés de cryptage qu'elle contient. Cette option empêche le démarrage du système d'exploitation. Si les clés de cryptage ne peuvent pas être restaurées, des données risquent d'être perdues. Vous devez donc impérativement créer une copie de sauvegarde des clés TPM avant d'activer cette option. Si l'option Yes (Oui) est sélectionnée, le contenu intégral des clés TPM est effacé. REMARQUE : lorsque l'option TPM Security (Sécurité TPM) est définie sur Off (Désactivé), ce champ est accessible en lecture seule. Option Description82 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Écran Exit (Quitter) Appuyez sur <Échap> pour quitter le programme de configuration du système. L'écran Exit (Quitter) affiche les options suivantes : • Save Changes and Exit (Enregistrer les modifications et quitter) • Discard Changes and Exit (Annuler les modifications et quitter) • Return to Setup (Retourner au programme de configuration) Power Button (Bouton d'alimentation) (Option par défaut : Enabled [Activé]) Si l'option Enabled (Activé) est sélectionnée, le bouton d'alimentation peut mettre le système sous tension et hors tension. Sur un système d'exploitation compatible ACPI, le système effectue un arrêt normal avant que l'alimentation ne soit coupée. Si vous sélectionnez Disabled (Désactivé), le bouton sert uniquement à mettre le système sous tension. NMI Button (Bouton NMI) (Option par défaut : Disabled [Désactivé]) PRÉCAUTION : appuyez sur ce bouton uniquement si un technicien de support qualifié vous indique de le faire, ou si cela est préconisé dans la documentation du système d'exploitation. Lorsque vous appuyez sur ce bouton, le système d'exploitation s'arrête et affiche un écran de diagnostic. Permet d'activer ou de désactiver la fonction NMI. Restauration de l'alimentation secteur (Option par défaut : Last [Dernier]) Détermine le comportement du système au rétablissement de l'alimentation secteur. L'option Last (Dernier) indique que le système doit revenir au même état qu'avant la coupure d'alimentation. Avec l'option On (Marche), le système démarre dès que l'alimentation est rétablie. Avec l'option Off (Éteint), le système s'arrête dès que l'alimentation est rétablie. AC Power Recovery Delay (Délai de restauration de l'alimentation secteur) Détermine le délai au bout duquel le redémarrage du système a lieu après restauration de l'alimentation. Les options disponibles sont Immediate (Immédiat), Random (Aléatoire) (valeur aléatoire comprise entre 30 et 240 secondes) ou une valeur définie par l'utilisateur comprise entre 30 et 240 secondes. Option DescriptionUtilisation du programme de configuration du système 83 et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Accès au Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI REMARQUE : les systèmes d'exploitation doivent être compatibles avec une version UEFI 64 bits (par exemple, Microsoft ® Windows Server ® 2008 version x64) pour pouvoir être installés à partir du mode d'amorçage UEFI. L'installation des systèmes d'exploitation DOS et 32 bits est possible uniquement en utilisant le mode d'amorçage BIOS. REMARQUE : l'option Boot Mode (Mode d'amorçage) doit être définie sur UEFI dans le programme de configuration du système pour permettre l'accès au gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI. Le gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI permet d'effectuer les opérations suivantes : • Ajouter, supprimer et organiser les options d'amorçage • Accéder au programme de configuration du système et aux options d'amorçage BIOS sans avoir à redémarrer 1 Allumez ou redémarrez votre système. 2 Appuyez sur dès l'apparition du message suivant : = UEFI Boot Manager (Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI) REMARQUE : le système ne répond pas tant que le clavier USB n'est pas actif. Si le système d'exploitation commence à se charger alors que vous n'avez pas encore appuyé sur , attendez que le système finisse de démarrer, puis redémarrez-le et réessayez. Utilisation des touches de navigation du gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Touches Action Flèche vers le haut Permet de revenir au champ précédent et de le sélectionner. Flèche vers le bas Permet d'accéder au champ suivant et de le sélectionner. Barre d'espacement, , <+>, <–>, Fait passer le curseur d'un paramètre à un autre dans un champ. 84 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Écran UEFI Boot Manager (Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI) Écran UEFI Boot settings (Paramètres d'amorçage UEFI) <Échap> Actualise l'écran du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI, ou retourne à cet écran à partir des autres écrans de programme. Affiche l'aide sur le Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI. Option Description Continue (Continuer) Le système tente d'effectuer successivement l'amorçage sur différents périphériques en commençant par le premier dans l'ordre d'amorçage. En cas d'échec de l'amorçage, le système poursuit l'opération en sélectionnant le périphérique suivant de la séquence d'amorçage, jusqu'à ce que le démarrage aboutisse ou qu'aucune autre option ne soit disponible. (Options d'amorçage) Affiche la liste des options d'amorçage disponibles (marquées par des astérisques). Sélectionnez l'option d'amorçage à utiliser, puis appuyez sur Entrée. REMARQUE : Si vous procédez à l'ajout à chaud d'un périphérique d'amorçage, appuyez sur <Échap> pour actualiser la liste des options d'amorçage. UEFI Boot Settings (Paramètres d'amorçage UEFI) Permet d'ajouter, de supprimer, d'activer ou de désactiver les options d'amorçage, de modifier la séquence d'amorçage ou de lancer une option d'amorçage à exécution ponctuelle. System Utilities (Utilitaires du système) Permet d'accéder au programme de configuration du système, aux services système et aux options d'amorçage au niveau du BIOS. Option Description Add Boot Option (Ajouter une option d'amorçage) Permet d'ajouter une nouvelle option d'amorçage. Touches ActionUtilisation du programme de configuration du système 85 et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Écran System Utilities (Utilitaires du système) Delete Boot Option (Supprimer une option d'amorçage) Permet de supprimer une option d'amorçage existante. Enable/Disable Boot Option (Activer/désactiver l'option d'amorçage) Permet de désactiver et d'activer une option d'amorçage dans la liste des options d'amorçage. Change Boot Order (Modifier la séquence d'amorçage) Modifie l'ordre de la liste des options d'amorçage. One-Time Boot From File (Amorçage ponctuel à partir d'un fichier) Permet de définir une option d'amorçage utilisable une seule fois qui ne figure pas dans la liste des options d'amorçage. Option Description System Setup (Configuration du système) Permet d'accéder au programme de configuration du système sans redémarrage. System Services (Services système) Permet de redémarrer le système et d'accéder au programme Unified Server Configurator, via lequel vous pouvez exécuter des utilitaires tels que les diagnostics du système. BIOS Boot Manager (Gestionnaire d'amorçage du BIOS) Donne accès à la liste des options d'amorçage au niveau du BIOS sans redémarrage. Cette option vous permet de basculer aisément en mode d'amorçage BIOS lorsque vous devez effectuer le démarrage à partir d'un périphérique contenant un système d'exploitation non compatible avec UEFI, tel qu'un support DOS amorçable contenant un logiciel de diagnostics. Reboot System (Redémarrer le système) Redémarre le système. Option Description86 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Fonctionnalités de mot de passe du système et de mot de passe de configuration REMARQUE : en cas d'oubli d'un mot de passe, voir « Désactivation d'un mot de passe oublié » à la page 206. À la livraison de l'ordinateur, la fonction de protection du système par mot de passe n'est pas activée dans le BIOS. PRÉCAUTION : n'importe qui peut accéder aux données enregistrées sur votre système si celui-ci est en cours de fonctionnement et sans surveillance. Utilisation du mot de passe du système Lorsqu'un mot de passe du système est défini, vous devez l'entrer après le démarrage du système. Seules les personnes disposant de ce mot de passe peuvent accéder à toutes les fonctions du système. Attribution d'un mot de passe du système Avant d'attribuer un mot de passe à un système, accédez au programme de configuration du système et vérifiez l'option System Password (Mot de passe du système). Si un mot de passe est attribué, l'option System Password (Mot de passe du système) est définie sur Enabled (Activé). Si l'option Password Status (État du mot de passe) indique Unlocked (Déverrouillé), vous pouvez changer le mot de passe du système. Si l'option Locked (Verrouillé) est sélectionnée, vous ne pouvez pas changer le mot de passe du système. La désactivation du cavalier de mot de passe, situé sur la carte système, définit l'option System Password (Mot de passe du système) sur Disabled (Désactivé), ce qui vous empêche de modifier ou de saisir un nouveau mot de passe du système. Lorsque aucun mot de passe du système n'est défini et que le cavalier de protection du mot de passe est en position activée sur la carte système, les options System Password (Mot de passe du système) sont respectivement définies sur Not Enabled (Désactivée) et Password Status (État du mot de passe) sur Unlocked (Déverrouillé). Pour attribuer un mot de passe du système : 1 Vérifiez que l'option Password Status (État du mot de passe) est Unlocked (Déverrouillé). 2 Sélectionnez System Password (Mot de passe du système), puis appuyez sur . Utilisation du programme de configuration du système 87 et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI 3 Saisissez votre nouveau mot de passe du système. Votre mot de passe peut contenir jusqu'à 32 caractères. Lorsque vous tapez le mot de passe, des espaces réservés apparaissent dans le champ. L'attribution de mot de passe n'est pas sensible à la casse. Pour supprimer un caractère, appuyez sur la touche ou sur la touche fléchée vers la gauche. REMARQUE : pour quitter le champ sans attribuer de mot de passe, appuyez sur pour passer à un autre champ ou sur <Échap> à tout moment avant d'effectuer l’étape 5. 4 Appuyez sur . 5 Pour confirmer le mot de passe, saisissez-le une seconde fois, puis appuyez sur . L'option System Password (Mot de passe du système) indique alors Enabled (Activé). Quittez le programme de configuration du système et commencez à utiliser votre système. 6 Vous pouvez redémarrer le système immédiatement pour activer la protection par mot de passe ou continuer à travailler. REMARQUE : la protection par mot de passe ne prend effet que lorsque vous redémarrez le système. Protection du système à l'aide d'un mot de passe REMARQUE : si vous avez attribué un mot de passe de configuration (voir « Utilisation du mot de passe de configuration » à la page 89), le système l'accepte également comme mot de passe système alternatif. Lorsque l'option Password Status (État du mot de passe) indique Unlocked (Déverrouillé), vous avez la possibilité de laisser la protection par mot de passe activée ou de la désactiver. Pour laisser la protection par mot de passe activée : 1 Démarrez le système ou redémarrez-le en appuyant sur . 2 Saisissez le mot de passe, puis appuyez sur .88 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Pour désactiver la protection par mot de passe : 1 Démarrez le système ou redémarrez-le en appuyant sur . 2 Saisissez le mot de passe, puis appuyez sur . Si l'option Password Status (État du mot de passe) indique Locked (Verrouillé), vous devez taper le mot de passe, puis appuyer sur lorsque le système vous y invite pour redémarrer l'ordinateur. Si vous entrez un mot de passe erroné, le système affiche un message et vous invite à l'entrer de nouveau. Vous disposez de trois tentatives pour entrer le mot de passe correct. Au bout de trois tentatives infructueuses, le système affiche un message d'erreur signalant qu'un blocage du système s'est produit et que l'arrêt de celui-ci doit être effectué manuellement au moyen du bouton d'alimentation. Même une fois le système arrêté et redémarré, le message d'erreur continue à s'afficher tant que vous n'avez pas entré le mot de passe approprié. REMARQUE : vous pouvez combiner l'utilisation des options Password Status (État du mot de passe), System Password (Mot de passe système) et Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration) pour protéger le système contre toute modification non autorisée. Modification d'un mot de passe du système 1 Pour accéder au programme de configuration du système, appuyez sur pendant l'auto-test de démarrage. 2 Sélectionnez l'écran System Security (Sécurité du système). 3 Vérifiez que l'option Password Status (État du mot de passe) est définie sur Unlocked (Non verrouillé). 4 Tapez le nouveau mot de passe du système dans les deux champs du mot de passe. Le champ System Password (Mot de passe du système) indique Not Enabled (Non activé) si le mot de passe est supprimé. Utilisation du programme de configuration du système 89 et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Désactivation du mot de passe du système Si le mot de passe du système est déjà défini, vous pouvez le désactiver en saisissant le mot de passe durant l'exécution du POST et en appuyant sur . Vous pouvez également, en variante, ouvrir le programme de configuration du système et appuyer sur à deux reprises dans le menu du mot de passe système. Utilisation du mot de passe de configuration Attribution d'un mot de passe de configuration Vous ne pouvez attribuer un mot de passe de configuration que si l'option Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration) indique Not Enabled (Non activé). Pour attribuer un mot de passe de configuration, sélectionnez l'option Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration), puis appuyez sur la touche <+> ou <–>. Le système vous invite à entrer et à confirmer le mot de passe. REMARQUE : le mot de passe de configuration peut être identique au mot de passe du système. Si les deux mots de passe sont différents, le mot de passe de configuration peut également être utilisé à la place du mot de passe du système. En revanche, le mot de passe du système ne peut pas être utilisé à la place du mot de passe de configuration. Votre mot de passe peut contenir jusqu'à 32 caractères. Lorsque vous tapez le mot de passe, des espaces réservés apparaissent dans le champ. L'attribution de mot de passe n'est pas sensible à la casse. Pour supprimer un caractère, appuyez sur la touche ou sur la touche fléchée vers la gauche. Une fois le mot de passe confirmé, l'option Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration) indique Enabled (Activé). La prochaine fois que vous entrerez dans le programme de configuration du système, le système vous demandera d'entrer le mot de passe de configuration. La modification de l'option Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration) prend effet immédiatement (il n'est pas nécessaire de redémarrer le système).90 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI Utilisation du système avec un mot de passe de configuration activé Si l'option Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration) indique Enabled (Activé), vous devez entrer ce mot de passe avant de modifier la plupart des options de configuration du système. Si vous n'entrez pas le bon mot de passe après trois tentatives, vous pourrez afficher les écrans de configuration du système, mais vous ne pourrez y apporter aucune modification. La seule exception est la suivante : si l'option System Password (Mot de passe du système) n'est ni définie sur Enabled (Activé) ni verrouillée via l'option Password Status (État du mot de passe), vous pouvez attribuer un mot de passe du système. Vous ne pouvez ni désactiver ni modifier un mot de passe du système existant. REMARQUE : Il est possible d'utiliser conjointement les options Password Status (État du mot de passe) et Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration) pour empêcher toute modification du mot de passe du système. Suppression ou modification d'un mot de passe de configuration 1 Accédez au programme de configuration du système, puis sélectionnez l'option System Security (Sécurité du système). 2 Mettez en surbrillance l'option Setup Password (Mot de passe de configuration), puis appuyez sur pour accéder à la fenêtre du mot de passe de configuration. Appuyez sur deux fois pour effacer le mot de passe de configuration existant. Le paramètre prend la valeur Not Enabled (Non activé). 3 Si vous souhaitez attribuer un nouveau mot de passe de configuration, suivez les étapes décrites dans la section « Attribution d'un mot de passe de configuration » à la page 89. Utilitaire de configuration iDRAC L'utilitaire de configuration iDRAC est un environnement de configuration de pré-amorçage vous permettant d'afficher et de définir les paramètres de la carte iDRAC6 et du serveur géré. L'utilitaire de configuration iDRAC permet de : • Configurer, activer ou désactiver le réseau local iDRAC6 via le port dédié de la carte iDRAC6 Enterprise ou les cartes NIC intégrées. • Activer ou désactiver l'interface IPMI sur le réseau LAN.Utilisation du programme de configuration du système 91 et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI • Activer une destination d'interruption d'événements sur plate-forme (PET) du réseau local. • Connecter ou déconnecter les périphériques de média virtuel. • Changer le nom d'utilisateur et le mot de passe d'administration et gérer les privilèges des utilisateurs. • Afficher ou effacer les messages du journal des événements système (SEL). Pour des informations supplémentaires sur l'utilisation de la carte iDRAC6, voir la documentation de ce périphérique et celle des applications de gestion de systèmes. Accès à l'utilitaire de configuration iDRAC 1 Allumez ou redémarrez votre système. 2 Appuyez sur lorsque vous y êtes invité pendant le POST. Si le système d'exploitation commence à se charger alors que vous n'avez pas encore appuyé sur , laissez le démarrage s'exécuter jusqu'à son terme, puis redémarrez-le et réessayez.92 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFIInstallation des composants du système 93 Installation des composants du système Outils recommandés • Clé du verrouillage à clé du système • Tournevis cruciformes n° 1 et n° 2 • Bracelet antistatique • Tournevis Torx T8, T10 et T15 À l'intérieur du système PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit, et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Lisez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit.94 Installation des composants du système Figure 3-1. À l'intérieur du système 1 connecteur USB pour clé USB interne en option 2 module SD interne 3 ventilateurs de refroidissement remplaçables à chaud (4 ou 5) 4 barrettes de mémoire (jusqu'à 18 au plus) 5 processeur 6 baies de bloc d'alimentation (2) 7 carte de montage 2 (logements PCIe 3 et 4) 8 carte de montage 1 (logements PCIe 1 et 2) 9 carte iDRAC6 Enterprise (en option) 10 carte contrôleur de stockage intégrée 11 fond de panier SAS 12 disques durs SAS ou SATA (jusqu'à 6) 13 batterie RAID (PERC uniquement) 14 panneau de commande 15 lecteur optique extra-plat 11 7 10 1 9 5 8 6 3 4 14 12 15 13 2Installation des composants du système 95 Cadre avant (en option) Le cadre est doté d'un verrou qui permet de restreindre l'accès au bouton d'alimentation, au lecteur optique et au(x) disque(s) dur(s). L'écran LCD et les boutons de navigation sont accessibles via le cadre avant. Voir Figure 3-2. Retrait du cadre avant 1 Déverrouillez le cadre à l'aide de la clé du système. 2 Tirez sur le loquet de dégagement situé près du dispositif de verrouillage. 3 Faites pivoter la partie gauche du cadre en l'éloignant du système pour dégager le côté droit dudit cadre. 4 Retirez le cadre du système. Voir Figure 3-2. Figure 3-2. Retrait du cadre avant 1 loquet de dégagement 2 cadre 3 pattes des charnières 4 verrouillage à clé 4 1 3 296 Installation des composants du système Installation du cadre avant 1 Insérez la patte de charnière située à droite du cadre dans le logement situé sur la partie droite du panneau avant du système. 2 Faites pivoter la partie gauche du cadre vers le système. 3 Exercez une pression sur le cadre pour insérer le loquet dans le système. Plaquette d'informations Plaquette amovible mentionnant des informations sur le système, telles que le code de Service Express, l'adresse MAC de la carte NIC1 intégrée ou celle de la carte iDRAC6 Enterprise. Retrait de la plaquette d'informations 1 Retirez le cadre avant. Voir « Retrait du cadre avant » à la page 95. 2 Tirez la plaquette d'information hors de son logement dans le châssis, afin de la mettre en position verrouillée. Pour localiser ce logement, voir Figure 1-1. 3 Tirez vers le bas sur la plaquette pour dégager sa partie supérieure afin de retirer la plaquette de son logement dans le châssis. 4 Tirez vers le haut sur la plaquette pour dégager sa partie inférieure afin de retirer la plaquette de son logement dans le châssis. 5 Retirez la plaquette. Réinstallation de la plaquette d'informations 1 Retirez le cadre avant. Voir « Retrait du cadre avant » à la page 95. 2 Localisez le logement de la plaquette d'informations sur l'avant du châssis du système. Pour localiser ce logement, voir Figure 1-1. 3 Faites glisser la plaquette d'informations verticalement dans son logement jusqu'à ce que celle-ci s'enclenche correctement.Installation des composants du système 97 Ouverture et fermeture du système PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit, et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Lisez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. AVERTISSEMENT : demandez toujours de l'aide avant de soulever le système. N'essayez pas de le soulever seul, car vous risqueriez de vous blesser. Ouverture du système 1 À moins que vous n'installiez un composant remplaçable à chaud tel qu'un ventilateur ou un bloc d'alimentation, vous devez arrêter le système et les périphériques connectés, puis le débrancher de la prise secteur et des périphériques. 2 Faites pivoter le verrou du loquet de fermeture dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre afin de le mettre en position déverrouillée. Voir Figure 3-3. 3 Soulevez le loquet situé sur la partie supérieure du système, puis faites glisser le capot vers l'arrière. Voir Figure 3-3. 4 Saisissez le capot de chaque côté et soulevez-le pour le retirer du système. Fermeture du système 1 Soulevez le loquet du capot. 2 Placez le capot sur le châssis et décalez-le légèrement vers l'arrière pour le dégager des crochets du châssis, de sorte qu'il repose totalement à plat sur ce dernier. Voir Figure 3-3. 3 Rabattez le loquet pour faire pivoter le capot en position fermée. 4 Tournez le verrou du loquet de dégagement dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre pour fermer le capot.98 Installation des composants du système Figure 3-3. Retrait ou installation du capot Disques durs Votre système prend en charge les éléments suivants : • six baies de lecteur de 3,5 pouces sans baie modulaire • disques durs SAS et SATA remplaçable à chaud Toutes les unités sont installées à l'avant du système et connectées à la carte système par l'intermédiaire du fond de panier SAS. Les disques durs sont fournis dans des supports de lecteur spéciaux remplaçables à chaud, qui s'encastrent dans les baies de disques durs. 1 loquet 2 verrou du loquet de dégagement 3 crochets du châssis 1 3 2Installation des composants du système 99 PRÉCAUTION : avant de retirer ou d'installer un lecteur pendant que le système est en cours de fonctionnement, voir la documentation relative à la carte contrôleur de stockage pour vérifier que la configuration de l'adaptateur hôte lui permet de prendre en charge le retrait et l'insertion de lecteurs à chaud. PRÉCAUTION : vous ne devez pas éteindre ni redémarrer le système pendant le formatage du disque Cela risquerait d'endommager le disque. REMARQUE : utilisez uniquement des unités testées et approuvées pour une utilisation avec la carte de fond de panier SAS. Lorsque vous formatez un disque dur, prévoyez suffisamment de temps pour que le formatage s'exécute entièrement. N'oubliez pas que le formatage d'un disque dur haute capacité peut prendre plusieurs heures. Retrait d'un cache de disque dur PRÉCAUTION : pour assurer un refroidissement correct du système, vous devez installer un cache dans toutes les baies de disque dur vacantes. 1 Retirez le cadre avant. Voir « Retrait du cadre avant » à la page 95. 2 Saisissez la partie avant du cache de disque dur, exercez une pression sur le levier d'éjection situé sur le côté droit, puis faites glisser le cache hors de la baie. Voir Figure 3-4. Figure 3-4. Retrait et installation d'un cache de disque dur 1 cache de disque dur 3,5 pouces 2 loquet de dégagement 1 2100 Installation des composants du système Installation d'un cache de disque dur Alignez le cache de disque dur sur la baie de lecteur et insérez-le dans la baie jusqu'à ce que le levier de dégagement s'enclenche. Retrait d'un disque dur remplaçable à chaud PRÉCAUTION : assurez-vous que votre système d'exploitation prend en charge le retrait et l'installation de lecteurs remplaçables à chaud. Consultez la documentation de votre système d'exploitation pour plus d'informations. 1 Si le cadre avant est présent, retirez-le. Voir « Retrait du cadre avant » à la page 95. 2 Préparez le retrait du disque à l'aide du logiciel de gestion RAID. Attendez que les voyants de disque dur situés sur le support signalent que l'unité peut être retirée en toute sécurité. Consultez la documentation du contrôleur RAID SAS pour plus d'informations sur le retrait d'une unité remplaçable à chaud. Si le disque dur était en ligne, le voyant d'activité/panne vert clignote pendant sa mise hors tension. Une fois les deux voyants éteints, vous pouvez retirer le disque. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton situé à l'avant du support d'unité et mettez la poignée du support en position ouverte afin de débloquer le lecteur. Voir Figure 3-5. 4 Extrayez le disque dur en le faisant glisser hors de la baie. PRÉCAUTION : pour assurer un refroidissement correct du système, vous devez installer un cache dans toutes les baies de disque dur vacantes. 5 Insérez un cache de disque dur dans la baie vacante. Voir « Installation d'un cache de disque dur » à la page 100. 6 Installez le cadre, le cas échéant. Voir « Installation du cadre avant » à la page 96. Installation d'un disque dur remplaçable à chaud PRÉCAUTION : lorsque vous installez un disque dur, assurez-vous que les disques adjacents sont complètement installés. Si vous insérez un support de disque dur et tentez d'en verrouiller la poignée alors qu'un support de disque dur voisin n'est que partiellement installé, vous risquez d'endommager le ressort de protection de ce dernier et de le rendre inutilisable. Installation des composants du système 101 PRÉCAUTION : pour éviter toute perte de données, assurez-vous que votre système d'exploitation prend en charge l'installation d'unités remplaçables à chaud. Consultez la documentation fournie avec votre système d'exploitation. 1 Si le cadre avant est présent, retirez-le. Voir « Retrait du cadre avant » à la page 95. 2 Si la baie est fermée par un cache, retirez-le. Voir « Retrait d'un cache de disque dur » à la page 99. Figure 3-5. Installation d'un disque dur remplaçable à chaud 3 Installez le disque dur remplaçable à chaud. a Appuyez sur le bouton situé à l'avant du support de lecteur et mettez la poignée en position ouverte. b Insérez le support de disque dans la baie jusqu'à ce qu'il touche le fond de panier. c Refermez la poignée afin de verrouiller le lecteur. 4 Installez le cadre, le cas échéant. Voir « Installation du cadre avant » à la page 96. 1 bouton de dégagement 2 poignée du support de disque dur 2 1102 Installation des composants du système Retrait d'un disque dur de son support Retirez les vis situées sur les rails coulissants du support, puis retirez le disque dur. Voir Figure 3-6. Installation d'un disque dur dans un support 1 Insérez le disque dur dans le support, connecteur vers l'arrière. Voir Figure 3-6. 2 Alignez les trous de vis du disque dur sur ceux situés à l'arrière du support. Si la position est correcte, l'arrière du disque dur s'aligne sur l'arrière du support. 3 Fixez le disque dur sur le support à l'aide des quatre vis. Installation des composants du système 103 Figure 3-6. Installation d'un disque dur dans un support 1 support du disque dur 2 vis (4) 3 disque dur 4 trou de vis SAS 1 3 2 4104 Installation des composants du système Blocs d'alimentation Votre système prend en charge les modules de blocs d'alimentation suivants : • Alimentation 570 W à consommation d'énergie intelligente (Energy Smart) • Alimentation 870 W à haute performance REMARQUE : la puissance maximale est indiquée sur l'étiquette du bloc d'alimentation. REMARQUE : les installations mixtes comprenant une alimentation haute performance et une alimentation à consommation intelligente ne sont pas en prises charge par le système. Si le système est doté d'un seul bloc d'alimentation, celui-ci doit être installé dans la baie PS1. PRÉCAUTION : pour assurer un refroidissement correct du système, vous devez, dans le cas d'une configuration non redondante, installer un cache de bloc d'alimentation sur la baie PS2. Voir « Installation d'un cache de bloc d'alimentation » à la page 106. Retrait d'un bloc d'alimentation PRÉCAUTION : si le dépannage concerne une erreur liée à la non-conformité de l'alimentation, remplacez uniquement le bloc d'alimentation signalé par un indicateur clignotant. L'inversion des blocs d'alimentation pour obtenir une paire prise en charge peut générer une erreur et entraîner l'arrêt imprévu du système. Pour passer d'une configuration haute performance (High Output) à une configuration économe (Energy Smart) ou vice versa, vous devez mettre le système hors tension. REMARQUE : vous devrez peut-être débloquer et relever le bras de gestion des câbles, s'il gêne le retrait du bloc d'alimentation. Pour plus d'informations sur le bras de gestion des câbles, voir la documentation du système relative au rack. 1 Débranchez le câble branché sur la source d'alimentation et sur le bloc à retirer, puis retirez les câbles de la bande Velcro. 2 Appuyez sur le levier du loquet de dégagement, puis faites glisser le bloc d'alimentation hors du châssis. Voir Figure 3-7.Installation des composants du système 105 Figure 3-7. Retrait et installation d'un bloc d'alimentation Réinstallation d'un bloc d'alimentation 1 Sur un système équipé de blocs d'alimentation redondants, vérifiez que les deux blocs d'alimentation sont de même type et délivrent une puissance maximale identique. REMARQUE : la puissance maximale (en watts) est indiquée sur l'étiquette du bloc d'alimentation. 2 Faites glisser le bloc d'alimentation dans le châssis jusqu'à ce qu'il s'emboîte complètement et que le loquet de dégagement s'enclenche. Voir Figure 3-7. REMARQUE : si vous avez débloqué le bras de gestion des câbles dans étape 2 de la procédure précédente, ré-enclenchez-le. Pour plus d'informations sur le bras de gestion des câbles, voir la documentation du système relative au rack. 1 poignée du bloc d'alimentation 2 bande Velcro 3 loquet de dégagement 1 2 3106 Installation des composants du système 3 Branchez le câble d'alimentation sur le bloc d'alimentation et branchez son autre extrémité sur une prise secteur. PRÉCAUTION : lors du branchement du câble d'alimentation, fixez celui-ci à l'aide de la bande Velcro. REMARQUE : lors de l'installation, du remplacement à chaud ou de l'ajout à chaud d'un nouveau bloc d'alimentation, patientez quelques secondes le temps que le système identifie le bloc d'alimentation et détermine son état. Le voyant du bloc d'alimentation s'allume en vert si ce dernier fonctionne normalement (voir Figure 1-5). Retrait du cache de bloc d'alimentation Si vous installez un bloc d'alimentation secondaire, tirez sur le cache placé sur la baie pour l'extraire. PRÉCAUTION : le cache de bloc d'alimentation doit être installé sur la seconde baie d'alimentation pour assurer un refroidissement correct du système dans le cadre d'une figuration non-redondante. Retirez le cache uniquement si vous installez un second bloc d'alimentation. Installation d'un cache de bloc d'alimentation REMARQUE : le cache de bloc d'alimentation ne doit être installé que sur la seconde baie d'alimentation. Pour installer le cache de bloc d'alimentation, alignez-le sur la baie d'alimentation, puis insérez-le dans le châssis jusqu'à ce qu'il se mette en place en émettant un déclic. Module SD interne Installation du module SD interne PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit, et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Lisez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 2 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 97.Installation des composants du système 107 3 Positionnez le module de sorte que les pattes situées sous le plateau se mettent en place sur les crochets du châssis, puis abaissez le bord opposé de la carte afin de mettre celle-ci en place. Voir Figure 3-8. Figure 3-8. Retrait ou installation du module SD interne 4 Reliez le câble du module SD interne au connecteur situé sur la carte du panneau de commande. Voir Figure 3-8. 5 Refermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 97. 6 Rebranchez le système et les périphériques à leur source d'alimentation, puis mettez-les sous tension. 1 loquet 2 module SD interne 3 carte flash SD 4 logement de la carte SD (connecteur SD) 5 patte de dégagement 6 câble du module SD interne 7 connecteur de module SD interne 8 carte du panneau de commande 5 2 4 8 3 6 1 7108 Installation des composants du système Retrait du module SD interne PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit, et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Lisez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 2 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 97. 3 Débranchez le câble du module SD interne et de la carte du panneau de commande. Voir Figure 3-8. 4 Relevez le loquet maintenant le module SD interne fixé au châssis, puis soulevez le plateau hors du châssis. Voir Figure 3-8. 5 Refermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 97. 6 Rebranchez le système et les périphériques à leur source d'alimentation, puis mettez-les sous tension. Carte flash SD interne Installation de la carte flash SD interne PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit, et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Lisez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. REMARQUE : pour utiliser une carte SD avec le système, assurez-vous que le port correspondant est activé dans le programme de configuration du système. Voir « Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI » à la page 65. 1 Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 2 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 97.Installation des composants du système 109 3 Localisez le connecteur de carte SD sur le module SD interne puis, l'étiquette étant orientée vers le haut, insérez l'extrémité de la carte munie de contacts dans le logement. Voir Figure 3-8. REMARQUE : le logement est muni d'un repère qui permet d'insérer la carte dans le bon sens. 4 Exercez une pression sur la carte jusqu'à ce qu'elle se mette en place. 5 Refermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 97. 6 Rebranchez le système sur l'alimentation, puis redémarrez-le. Retrait de la carte flash SD interne PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit, et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Lisez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. 1 Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 2 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 97. 3 Repérez l'emplacement de carte SD sur le module SD interne, puis exercez une pression vers l'intérieur afin de libérer la carte de son logement, puis l'extraire. 4 Refermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 97. 5 Rebranchez le système sur l'alimentation, puis redémarrez-le. Clé de mémoire USB interne Une clé de mémoire USB en option installée à l'intérieur du système peut servir de périphérique d'amorçage, de clé de sécurité ou de périphérique de stockage de masse. Le connecteur USB doit être activé à l'aide de l'option Internal USB Port (Port USB interne) de l'écran Integrated Devices (Périphériques intégrés) du programme de configuration du système. Voir « Utilisation du programme de configuration du système et du Gestionnaire d'amorçage UEFI » à la page 65.110 Installation des composants du système Pour pouvoir démarrer le système à partir de la clé de mémoire USB, configurez cette dernière avec une image d'amorçage, puis ajoutez la clé à la séquence d'amorçage définie dans le programme de configuration du système. PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit, et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Lisez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. REMARQUE : les dimensions maximales prises en charge pour la clé de mémoire USB sont les suivantes : largeur 24 mm (0,94 po), longueur 79 mm (3,11 po), hauteur 8,6 mm (0,33 po). 1 Mettez le système et les périphériques qui y sont connectés hors tension, puis débranchez le système de la prise secteur. 2 Ouvrez le système. Voir « Ouverture du système » à la page 97. 3 Identifiez le connecteur USB sur le panneau de commande. Voir Figure 3-9. 4 Insérez la clé de mémoire USB dans le connecteur USB. Voir Figure 3-9. Figure 3-9. Retrait ou installation d'une clé de mémoire USB 5 Refermez le système. Voir « Fermeture du système » à la page 97. 6 Rebranchez le système sur l'alimentation, puis redémarrez-le. 1 carte du panneau de commande 2 connecteur de clé de mémoire USB 3 clé de mémoire USB 2

Adresses complètes sur CD ROM,  téléphone, Fax, emails, nom du dirigeant, etc. Exports illimités ! CLIQUEZ ICI